Manual Venue Profile Completo Portugues PDF

VENUE Profile
e software VENUE verso 2.9
VENUE Profile Guide

and VENUE Software 2.9
9322-62809-00 REV A 08/10
Notas Legais
Este manual tem todos os direitos reservados para Avid Technology, Inc., (denominada
Avid), e no pode ser duplicado ou copiado, inteiramente ou em partes sem o
consentimento por escrito da Avid. Copyright 2011.
003, 96 I/O, 96i I/O, 192 Digital I/O, 192 I/O, 888|24 I/O, 882|20 I/O, 1622 I/O, 24Bit ADAT Bridge I/O, AudioSuite, Avid, Avid DNA, Avid Mojo, Avid Unity, Avid Unity ISIS,
Avid Xpress, AVoption, Axiom, Beat Detective, Bomb Factory, Bruno, C|24, Command|8,
Control|24, D-Command, D-Control, D-Fi, D-fx, D-Show, D-Verb, DAE, Digi 002, DigiBase,
DigiDelivery, Intelligent Noise Reduction, TDM Bus, DigiDrive, DigiRack, DigiTest,
DigiTranslator, DINR, DV Toolkit, EditPack, Eleven, HD Core, HD Process, Hybrid, Impact,
Interplay, LoFi, M-Audio, MachineControl, Maxim, Mbox, MediaComposer, MIDI I/O, MIX,
MultiShell, Nitris, OMF, OMF Interchange, PRE, ProControl, Pro Tools M-Powered, Pro
Tools, Pro Tools|HD, Pro Tools LE, QuickPunch, Recti-Fi, Reel Tape, Reso, Reverb One,
ReVibe, RTAS, Sibelius, Smack!, SoundReplacer, Sound Designer II, Strike, Structure,
SYNC HD, SYNC I/O, Synchronic, TL Aggro, TL AutoPan, TL Drum Rehab, TL Everyphase,
TL Fauxlder, TL In Tune, TL MasterMeter, TL Metro, TL Space, TL Utilities, Transfuser,
Trillium Lane Labs, Vari-Fi Velvet, X-Form e XMON so marcas e marcas registradas
da Avid Technology, Inc. Xpand! est registrada no Escritrio de Patentes dos Estados
Unidos.
Todas as outras marcas so propriedade de seus respectivos donos.
Recursos, especificaes, requerimentos de sistema e disponibilidade dos produtos
esto sujeitos alterao sem prvio aviso.
Guide Part Number 9322-62809-00 REV A 08/10
Feedback da documentao
Na Avid, sempre estamos buscando o aperfeioamento da documentao de nossos

produtos. Se voc tem comentrios, correes ou sugestes a respeito de nossa
documentao, envie um e-mail para techpubs@avid.com.
Parte I: Viso Geral e Instalao
Stage Rack Features
Additional Required Components
Chapter
Introduction
toProfile
VENUE
Profile
Captulo
Introduo
VENUE
Stage Racks are 1:
used1:
with an
FOH Rack, and
provide
all stage
The following components
must be purchased separately:
audio I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
can be used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs.
Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display

recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
DVI supported.
Audio I/O
USB keyboard
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
Bem-vindo VENUE Profile, parte integrante do ambiente modular de sonorizao
ao vivo and
VENUE,
da Avid. O sistema
VENUE
Profile oferece
Welcome
to VENUE
partcontrollable
of Avids modular
VENUE
live sound environment. VENUE Profile systems offer an intuitive
48 inputs
withProfile,
remotely
mic preamps
and
layout intuitivo, esquemas de entradas e sadas flexveis e processamento digital poderoso, alm de opes de expanso para gravao
console
layout, a flexible
I/O scheme,
powerful
digital processing, and expansion options for integrated Pro Tools recording and
individually
phantom
power. controlada
integrada
em
Pro Toolsselectable
e mixagem
de monitorao
pelo artista.
Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
artist-controlled
monitor
mixing.expandable up to 48 analog or
8 analog output
channels;
digital outputs per Stage Rack.
Recursos e Sistema VENUE Profile
The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires

a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
from Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Synchronization
andpode
Control
I/O juntamente
A console
VENUE
Profile
ser usada
com unidades Mix Rack, FOH Rack e Stage Rack.
VENUE
Profile
Systems
and Features
Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if

The VENUE Profile console can be used with one Mix Rack, or with Optional
FOH Rack and
Stage Rack units.
Components
applicable) connection to a VENUE FOH Rack.
System Components
Included Components
All VENUE Profile systems include the following:
VENUE Profile console
Two (2) IEC power cables
Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen not included)
Trackball mount (trackball not included)
The following components are optional, and must be

purchased separately:
USB flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
transfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
Headphones with 1/4-inch jack
Dynamic or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
(for Talkback)
Footswitches (up to 2)
MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
VENUE Mouse Pad
BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the

VENUE system and external digital devices)
VENUE Profile Guide
25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
Two (2) console lights
Figure
Profile
console
Figura1.1 -VENUE
Console
VENUE
Profile
Protective Dust Cover
Rack(s) (see next)

Recursos
Controle
do Console
Profile
Profile de
Console
Control
Features
2424canais
de entrada, cada um com um fader sensvel ao
bankable input channel strips, each with a touch-sen-
Racks,
iLoks,
and Cables
toque e Software
um controleCDs,
rotativo
multifuno,
alm de controles
sitive fader, one multi-purpose assignable rotary encoder,
de Solo, Mute e seleo.

solo,
and
select
controls
Each
Mixmute
Rack
or FOH
Rack
includes:
Filtros
passa-alta,
processadores
dinmicos
e
EQ
incorporados
Built-In
High-Pass
Filter,
Dynamics
System Restore
CD
em cada
canal de entrada.and EQ processors on
Medidores
de nvel
em cada
canal de entrada.
channel
stripSoftware
each
ECxinput
Ethernet
Control
Installer CD
Seo
de
endereamento
de
canal
comstrip
controle de Bus, Aux
Level
meters
on
each
input
channel
Standalone Software Installer CD
Send, Direct Output, EQ e Dynamics.
8 Assignable
Channel
with
dedicated
Bus Assign,
iLok USB
Smart Keysection
(forsada,
storing
plug-in
rguas
multifuno
de
cada
uma authorizations)
com
um fader
Aux
Send,
Direct
Output,
EQ
and
Dynamics
controls.
sensvel
ao
toque,
um
controle
rotativo
multifuno
Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok e
de Solo, Mute
e seleo.
controles
8 multi-purpose
Output
faders strips, each with a
1 fader
principal. fader, one multi-purpose encoder, solo,
touch-sensitive
One
FOH Link cable
for connection
to a disponveis
VENUE console
At
24 equalizadores
grficos
de 31 bandas
para
mute
and select controls
as sadas.
1 Mains
faderincludes:
Each
Stage
Rack
Busses
principais
configurveis como LeftCenterRight ou
LeftRight+Mono.
to 24
Graphic
Up
Two
(2) 31-band
IEC power
cables EQs available for Outputs
Main Busses configurable as LeftCenterRight or
LeftRight+Mono
VENUEI/O
Profile Expansion Options
Console
Console
I/O
The
Entrada para microfone Talkback com controle de ganho e
Talkback
mic
input,can
with
gain and
phantom
power
following
options
be added
to VENUE
Profile
systems.
phantom power.
details
on all
VENUE
systems and options, visit the Avid
Headphone
output
For
Sada para
fones
de ouvido.
website
(www.avid.com).
USB
Entrada
USBfor
para
teclado, mouse
ou trackball,iLok
chave
iLok
inputs
keyboard,
mouse/trackball,
USB
USB e Keys,
dispositivos
de armazenamento
Smart
and USB
storage devices USB.
Mix
Sada de vdeo VGA para visualizao das telas do software.
VGA
monitor
output for software screen display
Rack
Options
Portas
GPI (DB-25) que oferecem 8 entradas e 8 sadas.
GPI ports (DB-25) providing 8 GPI inputs and 8 GPI out-
I/Oputs
Options
AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
mic/line level inputs
AO16 Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
outputs
XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
line level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 channels of A-Net
output compatible with Aviom Personal Mixers and other
Pro16 Series devices.
IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an additional 8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels of AES/EBU
Chapter 1: Introduction to VENUE Profile 3
digital I/O.
Captulo 1: Introduo VENUE Profile 3
VENUEVENUE
Mix Rack
System
Sistema
Mix Rack

Console
com
MixMix
Rack
VENUEVENUE
ProfileProfile
Console
with
Rack
Mix RackMix
Features
Recursos
Rack
The Mix Rack provides all stage and mix position I/O for
O VENUE
Mix RackMix
oferece
as entradas e sadas de palco e mix para
Rack todas
systems.
sistemas VENUE Mix Rack.
Stage
Stage
I/OI/O
48 inputs with mic preamps. Each fully recallable input

48provides
entradas
com pr-amplificadores
de microfone. Cada
phantom
power and input gain.
entrada oferece phantom power e controle de ganho.

1616
line level
analognvel
outputs
(expandable
up to
32)32)
to para
sadas
analgicas
de linha
(expandveis
para
connect
to
mains
and
monitors.
conectar PA e monitores.
FOH
I/OI/O
FOH
8 8pares
pairs of
I/O eforsadas
hardware
inserts, para
or forinserts
input ou
de analog
entradas
analgicas
andentrada
outputeofsada
line-level
material
from
mix
para
de material
nvel
de the
linha
da position.
posio de
mixagem.
Analog and digital (AES or S/PDIF) 2-Track inputs and
Entradas
e sadas analgicas e digitais 2-Track (AES or S/PDIF).
outputs.
FOH
FOHRack
RackFeatures
Features
The FOH Rack is used with one or more Stage Racks, and proO FOH
utilizado
um ou
maissystems.
Stage Racks e oferece
vides
mixRack
position
I/O forcom
VENUE
Profile
entradas e sadas da posio de mixagem para o sistema VENUE

Profile.
Audio
I/O
8 pairs
Audio
I/O of analog I/O for hardware inserts, or for input
and output of line-level material from the mix position.
Entradasoutputs
e sadas
e digitais
demonitors.
2-Track (AES ou
Monitor
for analgicas
mix position
near field
8 pares de entradas e sadas analgicas para inserts ou
Analog and digital (AES or S/PDIF) 2-Track inputs and

para entrada e sada de material nvel de linha da posio de
outputs.
mixagem.
S/PDIF). mic input

Intercom
Entrada para microfone de comunicao com controle de

ganho e phantom power.
Synchronization and Control I/O
Sadas de monitorao para monitores near-field na posio de
MIDI
In and Out ports, providing 16 channels of MIDI
mixagem.
input and 16 channels of MIDI output.
Entradas e sadas de sincronizao e controle
Sadas
Monitor
outputs for para
mix position
field monitors.
de monitorao
monitoresnear
near-field
na posio de
Portas
e USB
MIDI disks,
Out oferecendo
canais
entradas e
USB
2.0 MIDI
portsInfor
iLoks, and16
other
USBde
devices.
Porta USB 2.0 para dispositivos de armazenamento, iLoks e
MIDI In and Out ports, providing 16 channels of MIDI

Portas
MIDI Out oferecendo
16 canais de entradas e
inputMIDI
andIn
16e channels
of MIDI output.
16 de sada.
Entrada e sada Word clock para sincronizao.
Porta
USBUSB
2.0 ports
for USB
disks, iLoks,
and other USB devices.
2.0 para
dispositivos
de armazenamento,
iLoks e
outros.
100 BaseT Ethernet (ECx) port for remote control.
Porta Ethernet Base 100 (ECx) para controle remoto.
CPU, DSP, and System Drives
CPU, DSP e Drives de sistema
VENUE
Profile
Console
Stage
Console
VENUE
Profile with
com FOH
FOH Rack
Rack eand
Stage
RackRack
Entrada para microfone de comunicao com controle de
ganho
Comemic
input,power.
with gain control and phantom power.
phantom
mixagem.
Entradas e sadas de sincronizao e controle
VENUE
SistemaProfile
VENUE System
Profile
Word clock I/O for digital clock synchronization.
Mix Rack houses the CPU, DSP, hard drive and CD-ROM drive
O Mix Rack abriga CPU, DSP, hard disk e drive de CD-ROM que
that run the VENUE software on your VENUE system. System
executam o software VENUE no sistema VENUE. O Software
software is installed at the factory. The CD-ROM drive lets you
VENUE instalado na fbrica. O drive de CD-ROM permite atualizar
or restore
your system
software,
and install
compatible
ouupdate
restaurar
o software
de sistema
VENUE
e instalar
plug-ins
plug-ins
from
their
installer
discs.
A
standard
Mix
compatveis de seus respectivos discos de instalao. Rack includes
two Mix
Engine
cards
DSP
for plug-ins.
You
Um
Mix Rack
padro
inclui
duasproviding
placas Mix
Engine,
que oferecem
can add one additional
Mixe Engine
card,
forpode
a maximum
processamento
para plug-ins
mixagem.
Voc
adicionarofuma
placa
Mix Engine opcional perfazendo o total de trs.
three.
Unidades Redundantes de Alimentao (PSUs)
Redundant Power Supply Units (PSUs)
Cada Mix Rack fornecido com duas PSUs universais (100V a 240V
Each Mix Rack comes with two universal (100V to 240V nomnominal, 5060 Hz) com redundncia automtica contra falhas e
inal, 5060 Hz) PSUs with auto redundant failover and LED
indicao por LED.
status indication.
4 VENUE Profile Guide
4 Guia VENUE Profile
Word clock I/O for digital clock synchronization.
16 de
sada.
100
BaseT
Ethernet (ECx) port for Ethernet-based remote
Entrada e sada Word clock para sincronizao.
control.
Snake
connectors to enable primary and redundant (if
outros.
connection
to(ECx)
the VENUE
Stage Rack.
applicable)
Porta Ethernet
Base 100
para controle
remoto.
Conectores multicabo para permitir conexo principal e

redundante
(se aplicvel)
CPU, DSP,
and System
Drives com a VENUE Stage Rack.
FOH
the CPU,
DSP, hard drive and CD-ROM drive
CPU,Rack
DSP,houses
and System
Drives
that run the VENUE software on your VENUE system. System
O Mix Rack abriga CPU, DSP, hard disk e drive de CD-ROM que
software is installed at the factory. The CD-ROM drive lets you
executam o software VENUE no sistema VENUE. O Software
update or restore your system software, and install compatible
VENUE instalado na fbrica. O drive de CD-ROM permite atualizar
plug-ins
from their
installerde
discs.
A standard
Rack in-plug-ins
ou restaurar
o software
sistema
VENUEFOH
e instalar
cludes
three
Mix
Engine
cards,
which
provide
DSP
for
compatveis de seus respectivos discos de instalao.plug-ins
and
You
can add
up trs
to two
additional
Mix Engine
Ummixing.
FOH Rack
padro
inclui
placas
Mix Engine,
que oferecem
cards,
up to a maximum
of five.
processamento
para plug-ins
e mixagem. Voc pode adicionar mais
duas placas Mix Engine opcionais perfazendo o total de cinco.

Redundant Power Supply Units (PSUs)
Unidades Redundantes de Alimentao (PSUs)
Each FOH Rack comes with two universal (100V to 240V nomCada FOH Rack fornecido com duas PSUs universais (100V a 240V
inal, 5060 Hz) PSUs with auto redundant failover and LED
nominal, 5060 Hz) com redundncia automtica contra falhas e
status indication.
indicao por LED.
Stage Rack Features
Recursos Stage Rack
Stage Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage
audio
I/Oso
for VENUE
Up etooferecem
two Stagetodas
Racksas
Stage
Racks
utilizadosProfile
com osystems.
FOH Rack
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96
total
inputs.
entradas e sadas de udio do palco para o sistema VENUE Profile.
Dois Stage Racks podem ser usados simultaneamente, suportando

um Audio
total deI/O
96 entradas.
48 inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps and
individually selectable phantom power.
Audio I/O
48
pr-amplificadores
controlveis
entradas
8 analogcom
output
channels; expandable
up toremotamente
48 analog or
e phantom
power selecionvel
individualmente.
digital outputs
per Stage Rack.
8 sadas analgicas (expandvel para at 48 sadas analgicas
ou digitais por Stage Rack).
Entradas
e sadas
de sincronizao
e controle
Snake
connectors
to enable
primary and redundant (if
Conectores de cabo para conexo principal e redundante (se

aplicvel) com a VENUE FOH Rack.
System Components
Componentes
do Sistema
Included Components
Componentes Includos
Todos osTwo
sistemas
VENUE
Profile
incluem:
(2) IEC
power
cables
Console
VENUE Profile
2cabos
de fora IEC
Trackball
mount (trackball
notno
included)
Suporte
para monitor
VGA (monitor
includo)
Suporte
paraMouse
trackball
VENUE
Pad(trackball no includo)
Mouse
pad VENUE
VENUE
Profile Guide
Guia VENUE Profile
Twode
(2)console
console lights
2luzes
Protective
Dust Cover
Capa
de proteo
Rack(s)
(veja
adiante)
Rack(s) (see next)
Racks, CDs de Software, iLoks e Cabos
Racks, Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables
Cada Mix Rack ou FOH Rack inclui:

Mix
Rack or FOH
Rack includes:
Each
CD de
Restaurao
do Sistema
System
Restore
CD de
Instalao
do CD
Software ECx Ethernet Control
CD de
Instalao
Standalone
Software
ECx
Ethernetdo
Control
Software
Installer CD
Chave
iLok USB (para armazenar autorizaes e registros de
plug-ins)
iLok
Smart Key
(for storing
plug-in
authorizations)
Discos
deUSB
instalao
de plug-ins
com iLok
pr-autorizado
2cabos
de
fora
IEC
Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok
Um
cabo de conexo FOH Link para conexo com a console
VENUE Profile
One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console
Cada Stage Rack inclui:

Stage Rack includes:
Each
2 cabos de fora IEC

Componentes adicionais necessrios
The following components must be purchased separately:
Os
seguintes
componentes
devem
ser flat-panel
adquiridosVGA
separadamente:
Video
Display
(15-inch or
greater
display
1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
recommended;
Monitor de vdeo ( recomendvel o uso de monitores LCD, de
DVI supported.
plasma ou LED de 15 polegadas ou maiores com resoluo
mnima
de 1024x768).
Conexes VGA
e DVI so
suportadas.
USB
keyboard
and trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
Teclado e mouse/trackball USB compatveis com Windows.

Multicabo Digital (para sistema VENUE Profile apenas)
a Digital
A conexo
entre
o This
FOH cable
Rack can
e obeStage
Rack directly
requer um
Snake
cable.
purchased
multicabo
Este cabo
devepreferred
ser adquirido
diretamente da
from
Avid ordigital.
assembled
by your
vendor.
Avid ou montado pelo seu fornecedor de preferncia.
Componentes
Opcionais
Optional Components
Theseguintes
following
componentsso
are opcionais
optional, eand
mustser
be adquiridos
Os
componentes
podem
separadamente:
Dispositivo
de armazenamento
(para
transferncia e
transfer of Show
data; 512 MB orUSB
larger
recommended)
armazenamento de dados Show. recomendvel o uso de
dispositivos
Near-field monitor
speakersigual
for mix
position
monitoring
com capacidade
ou maior
a 512
MB.
Monitores
Headphones
1/4-inch
jack para uso na posio de
de with
udio
near-field
mixagem.
Fones
de ouvido com jaques de 1/4 de polegada.
(for Talkback)
Microfone dinmico ou condensador e cabo de microfone XLR
(para
Footswitches
Talkback)(up to 2)
Footswitches
MIDI cables (2)
(for connecting external MIDI devices)
MIDI (para
conexo de dispositivos
externos)
Cabos
BNC cables
(for connecting
Word clock MIDI
between
the
Cabos
BNC
(para and
conexo
de Word
clock
entre o sistema VENUE
VENUE
system
external
digital
devices)
e dispositivos externos).
Cabos
25-pin25-pin
D-SubD-Sub
cables(para
(for conexo
connecting
to GPI devices)
de dispositivos
GPI).
VENUE Profile Expansion Options
Opcionais de Expanso VENUE Profile
The following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.

Forseguintes
details on
all VENUE
systems
and options,
visit
the Avid
Os
opcionais
podem
ser adicionados
aos
sistemas
VENUE
Profile.
detalhes de todos os sistemas VENUE e opcionais,
websitePara
(www.avid.com).
visite o website da Avid (www.avid.com).
Mix Rack
Opcionais
para Options
Mix Rack
I/O
I/OOptions
Options
AI16 Analog
analog
AI16
Analog Mic/Line
Mic/Line Input
InputCard
Cardthat
queprovides
oferece16 16
entradas
mic/line level
inputs
analgicas
mic/line.
AO16 Analog Output Card que oferece 16 sadas analgicas de
AO16deAnalog
nvel
linha. Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
outputs
XO16
Analog and Digital Output Card que oferece 8 sadas de
udio analgico em nvel de linha e oito sadas digitais AES
XO16A-Net
Analog
and Digital
Output
Card16
thatcanais
provides
analog
AT16
Output
Card que
oferece
de 8sada
A-Net
line level outputs,
and 8Aviom
AES digital
outputs.
compatveis
com mixers
Personal
e outros dispositivos da
srie Pro16.
AT16
Output
Card that
providese16
channels
of AES
A-Net
IOx
queA-Net
oferece
oito canais
de entradas
sadas
digitais
e oito
output
Aviom
Personal
Mixers
other
pares
decompatible
entradas e with
sadas
analgicas
TRS
para and
insert.
digital I/O.
or
come-
ole onlow-
menu choices and key commands:

:
Convention
Action
File > Save
Choose Save from the

File menu
Opcionais de Expanso DSP
Opcionais Stage Rack
Uma placa adicional Mix Engine pode ser adicionada ao Mix Rack
Control+N um total de Hold
theMix
Control
key para aumentar a
(perfazendo
trs down
placas
Engine)
and press
N key
quantidade de processamento
DSPthe
disponvel
para mixagem e uso
de plug-ins.
Opcionais I/O
Control-click
Hold down the Control key

and click the mouse button
Record and Playback Options

Right-click
Click with the right

buttonFireWire permite gravar ou
Placa FWx Firewire Estemouse
opcional
Cada Stage Rack suporta at 6 placas de entradas e 6 placas de

sadas, para um total de 48 entradas e 48 sadas (analgicas ou
digitais). Os opcionais I/O para o Stage Rack I/O incluem:
SRI Analog Mic/Line Input Card que oferece 8 entradas analogicas
mic/line level.
reproduzir at 18 canais de udio diretamente do Mix Rack com um

The names
of Commands,
Options, and Settings that appear
sistema
Pro Tools
LE.
SRO Analog Output Card que oferece 8 sadas analgicas nvel de

linha.
Placa HDx TDM Este opcional permite gravar ou reproduzir at

following
symbols
are used
highlight
64The
canais
de udio
diretamente
dotoMix
Rack com um sistema Pro
Tools|HD.
important
information:
System
Requirements and
DSI Digital Output Card que oferece 8 sadas digitais (AES ou

ADAT)
on-screen are in a different font.
Compatibility
Apenas
umaare
placa
HDx pode
ser instalada
em um
User
Tips
helpful
hints
for getting
theMix Rack.
Apenas um opcional de gravao e reproduo pode ser instalado por vez.
most
from
your
system.
Avid
can
only
assure
compatibility and provide support for
Placahardware
VENUE MADI
Este
permite
enviar ou receber
and softwareopcional
it has tested
and approved.
at 64 canais de udio digital MADI. A placa VENUE MADI pode

Important Notices include information that
For complete
system requirements
and acompatvel,
list of qualified
ser conectada
a qualquer
dispositivo MADI
comocomas
could
affect
data orpara
the performance
of
interfaces
deoperating
udioyour
HD systems,
MADI
Pro drives,
Tools. and
puters,
hard
third-party deyour system.
vices, visit:
Opcionais
FOH Rack
www.avid.com/compatibility
Shortcuts show you useful keyboard or
Opcionais
I/O
mouse shortcuts.
Uma placa FOH Input/Output (IOx) pode ser adicionada ao FOH

Registration
Rack, oferecendo 8 canais adicionais de entradas e sadas
Cross References point to related sections in
analgicas
ethe
8 canais
adicionais de entradas
e sadas
digitais
Review
enclosed
Information
Card and
folthis guide
and otherRegistration
VENUE guides.
AES/EBU.
low the instructions on it to quickly register your purchase on-
Conventions Used in This Guide
DSO Digital Output Card que oferece 8 sadas digitais (AES ou

ADAT)
All of our guides use the following conventions to indicate
Personal Q O sistema de monitorao pessoal Q (PQ) permite ao

usurio ajustar a mix de monitorao enviada a partir da VENUE
Convention
Action
utilizando uma unidade PQ Controller. O Stage rack pode acomodar
umFile
PQ >Rack
Savee 8 PQ Controllers.
:
File menu
A-Net Output ANO A-Net Output Card que oferece 16 canais de

sadas
A-Net compatveis Hold
com down
dispositivos
da srie
Control+N
the Control
key Aviom Pro16
and press the N key
Series para monitorao pessoal.
Control-click
Stage
Rack Adicional

Um segundo Stage Rack pode ser adicionado para um total de at

Click
withsegundo
the right Stage Rack requer uma
96 Right-click
entradas e 96 sadas.
(Um
mouse button
placa Snake adicional instalada no FOH Rack.)
line. By
you become eligible to receive the followOpcionais
de registering,
Expanso DSP
The names
of Commands, Options, and Settings that appear
Digital
Snake Redundante
Placas adicionais
Mixsupport
Engineinformation
podem ser adicionadas ao FOH Rack
Technical
(perfazendo um total de 5 placas Mix Engine) para aumentar a
Software update and upgrade notices
capacidade
disponvel para mixagem e processamento de plug-ins.
Um cabo opcional Digital Snake redundante pode ser instalado

entre
o FOH Rack
e cada
Esse cabo redundante
The following
symbols
are Stage
used toRack.
highlight
automaticamente
assume a comunicao se o primeira falhar.
important information:
ing:
Hardware warranty information
Placa de Expanso Snake Card
Adicionar uma segunda placa Snake Card ao FOH Rack permite

adicionar um segundo Stage Rack ao sistema VENUE, oferecendo
um total de 96 canais de entradas e sadas Stage.
Opcionais de gravao e reproduo
Placa FWx Firewire Este opcional FireWire permite gravar ou
reproduzir at 18 canais de udio diretamente do Mix Rack com um
sistema Pro Tools LE.
Placa HDx TDM Este opcional permite gravar ou reproduzir at
128 canais de udio diretamente do Mix Rack com um sistema Pro
Tools|HD.
Placa VENUE MADI Este opcional permite enviar ou receber
at 64 canais de udio digital MADI. A placa VENUE MADI pode
ser conectada a qualquer dispositivo MADI compatvel, como as
interfaces de udio HD MADI para Pro Tools.
User
Tips
are no
helpful
hints
for getting
the D-Show Sidecar.
A VENUE
Profile
suporta
expanso
via unidades
most from your system.
could affect your data or the performance of
your system.
mouse shortcuts.
this guide and other VENUE guides.
ole onlow-
Control-click
Avid can only assureand

compatibility
andbutton
provide support for
click the mouse
hardware
and
software
it
has
tested
and
approved.
Stage
Rack
Features
Registration
Right-click

button
For complete
requirements
and aand
list provide
of qualified
comStage
Racks
aresystem
used mouse
with
an
FOH Rack,
all stage
Requisitos
Operacionais
Review the enclosed Registration Information Card and folputers,

operating
systems,
drives,
and
de-onaudio
I/O
for VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to third-party
two Stage
Racks
low
the
instructions
on
it tohard
quickly
register
your
purchase
The
names
of simultaneously,
Commands, Options,
and Settings
that
appear
vices,
visit:
can
beBy
used
supporting
96 total
line.
registering,
you become
eligibleup
to to
receive
theinputs.
followTemperatura
e Ventilao
ing:
Audio I/OVENUE devem operar afastadas de fontes de calor e

AsThe
unidades
following
symbols
areinformation
used to highlight
Technical
support
com ventilao
adequada.
important
information:
Software
update and upgrade notices
individually
selectable
phantom
power. so oferecidos para
Monitorao
do
hardware
e alertas
automticos
Registration
Hardware warranty
information
Tips are
helpful
hints for
gettingPara
the mais
temperatura,
energia
e outros
elementos.
User
8 analog
output
channels;
expandable
up toinformaes,
48 analogveja
or
Janelafrom
de Monitorao
de Hardware, na pgina 240.
most
your
system.
Review
the outputs
enclosedper
Registration
Information Card and foldigital
Stage Rack.
low the instructions on it to quickly register your purchase onArmazenamento

line.
By registering,
become
to receive the followSynchronization
andyou
Control
I/O eligiblethat
Important
Notices
include
information
ing:
A VENUE
Profile
deve
ser
armazenada
e
transportada
somente a
affect
your datato
or enable
the performance
of redundant
could
Snake
connectors
primary and
(if
temperaturas
entre support
-18 grausinformation
Celsius (O graus F) a 60 graus Celsius
your
Technical
system. connection to a VENUE FOH Rack.
applicable)
(140 graus F).
Shortcuts
Hardware
warranty
information
Operao
show
you useful
keyboard or
mouse shortcuts.
System
Components
A VENUE Profile deve ser operada somente em temperaturas ente 4
graus Celsius (40 graus F) e 40 graus Celsius (104 graus F).
Cross References
point to related sections in
Included
Components
Durante
a operao,
os painis
frontal
e traseiro da VENUE Profile
this
guide and other
VENUE
guides.
All estar
VENUE
Profilesystems
include
the following:
devem
expostos
ventilao.
No feche
as sadas de ventilao
de nenhum
componente
do
sistema
VENUE.
No opere sob sol direto ou em ambientes com temperaturas

extremas.
gua eUmidade
VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE
Profile
Guide
As unidades
VENUE
devem
operar afastadas de fontes de umidade
menu
choices and key Hold
commands:
Control-click
down the Control key
Convention
Action
Right-click
The followingde
components
Requisitos
Conexo
mouse
File > Save
Choosebutton
Save from the
Video Display (15-inch
greater flat-panel VGA display
Fileor
menu
Conexes
de of
Energia
The
names
Commands,
Options,
and resolution).
Settings thatVGA
appear
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
and
Control+N
Hold down
on-screen
are in a different
font.the Control key
DVI supported.
andnecessita
press the Nde
keysua prpria conexo de
Cada componente VENUE
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
The following
symbols
are eused
to highlight
fora
para energia
primria
redundante
(se aplicvel).
CertifiqueControl-click
se
de
que
sua
fonte
de
energia
est
corretamente
dimensionada
important information:and click the mouse button
:
Digital
Snake Cable
(VENUEque
Profile
Only)Uma fonte de
para
o nmero
de unidades
estoSystems
conectadas.
Right-click
Click
with
thegetting
right
alimentao
protegida
contra
surtos
de
energia
(no includa)
User
Tips
are
helpful
hints
for
the
mouse button
altamente
recomendada.
most
from
your
system.
from
Avid
orCommands,
assembled
yourso
preferred
vendor.
The
names
of
Options,
andcapazes
Settings
that
appear
As
fontes
de alimentao
daby
VENUE
de
operar
em 50 a
Important
Notices
include
information
that
60
Hz
em
uma
faixa
de
tenso
de
100
a
240
V.
could affect
your data or the performance of
Optional
Components
The following
symbols are used to highlight
Conexo
FOH
Link
your
system.
important
information:
The
following
components are optional, and must be
Apurchased
conexo entre
a console VENUE Profile e o Mix Rack ou o FOH
separately:
you useful
keyboard
orthe
User
Tips show
are
hints
forFOH
getting
Rack Shortcuts
realizada
porhelpful
meio
de
cabo
Link
fornecido. Para cabos
mouse
shortcuts.
reserva,
entre
emyour
contato
com a assistncia tcnica AVID ou seu
most
from
system.
transfer
of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
revendedor
VENUE.
Cross
References
point
related
sections
in
Para mais
informaes,
vejato
o Guia
VENUE
FOH that
Rack.
Important
Notices
information
Headphones
with include
1/4-inch
jack
this
and
other
guides.
couldguide
affect
your
dataVENUE
or the performance
of
Dynamic
or condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
Todas
as entradas
your
system. e sadas de udio analgicas do sistema VENUE
Talkback)
Profile(for
(exceto
as de fones de ouvido) so balanceadas XLR ou 1/4
de polegada.
Todas mouse
as entradas
e sadas digitais de udio so AES/EBU (XLR),
shortcuts.
(Lightpipe)
BNC cablesou
(for
connecting
ADAT
S/PDIF
(RCA) . Word clock between the
Para mais informaes sobre conectores de udio e especificaes, veja o
Cross
References
point(for
to related
sections
25-pin
cables
to in
GPI devices)
CaptuloD-Sub
26, Especificaes
deconnecting
udio.
Two
(2) console
lights derramar. Se houver condensao
e a salvo
de lquidos
que possam
na unidade,
ela deve
ser Cover
deixada para secar em um ambiente com
Protective
Dust
ventilao por no mnimo uma hora antes de ser ligada.
Conexes Multicanal
Nveis de umidade para armazenamento e operao
Sistemas VENUE Mix Rack
Rack(s) (see next)
Nvel
de umidade
de armazenamento
Each
Mix Rack
or FOH Rack
Nvel de unidade de operao
System Restore CD
5% a 95%, no condensada
includes:
20% a 80%, no condensada
ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD
Limpeza e manuteno
Key (for
storing plug-in
authorizations)
Utilize umiLok
panoUSB
secoSmart
para limpar
a superfcie
da VENUE
Profile quando
necessrio.
No
aplique
qualquer
tipo
de
soluo,
limpadores
em
spray ou abrasivos superfcie.

Each Stage Rack includes:


For details on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
Para
o Mix Rack, um multicabo analgico (no includo)
website (www.avid.com).
recomendado
para transportar as entradas do palco para a posio
de mix e retornar as sadas para a monitorao e amplificao

principal.
Mix Rack Options
Sistemas VENUE Profile
I/O Options
A conexo entre o FOH Rack e o Stage Rack realizada por meio de

um cabo Digital Snake (no includo). Cabos podem ser adquiridos
mic/line level
diretamente
dainputs
AVID ou do fornecedor de sua confiana. Veja as
especificaes e requisitos dos cabos no Guia VENUE Stage Rack.
outputs

digital I/O.
Compatibility
Avid can only assure compatibility and provide support for
System
and
hardware
andRequirements
software
it has testedand
andprovide
approved.
System
Avid
can only
Requirements
assure compatibility
and
support for
Compatibility
hardware
and
software
it
has
tested
and
approved.
Compatibility
For complete system
requirements
and a list of qualified comRequerimentos
do Sistema
e Compatibilidade
Avid
can
only assure
compatibility
andand
provide
supportdefor
puters,
operating
systems,
hard drives,
For
listthird-party
of qualified
comAvidcomplete
can onlysystem
assure requirements
compatibility and
and aprovide
support for
hardware
and
software
it
has
tested
and
approved.
vices,
visit:
A Avid
apenas
assegura
a compatibilidade
eand
oferece
suportedepara
puters,
operating
systems,
hard
drives,
third-party
hardware
and
software
it has
tested
and
approved.
softwares
evisit:
dispositivos
testados e aprovados.
vices,
For
complete
system requirements and a list of qualified comParaFor
verificar
os requisitos
do sistema eand
a lista
complete
system requirements
a listde
of computadores
qualified comwww.avid.com/compatibility
puters,
operating systems, hard drives, and third-party dee sistemas
discoshard
rgidos
e dispositivos
de terceiros
puters, operacionais,
operating systems,
drives,
and third-party
devices, visit:
qualificados,
visite:
vices, visit:
Registration
Registration
Review the enclosed Registration Information Card and follow
the the
instructions
it to quickly
register your
purchase
onReview
enclosedon
Registration
Information
Card
and folRegistration
line.
By
registering,
you
become
eligible
to
receive
the
followlow the instructions on it to quickly register your purchase onRegistration
ing:
Registro
line. By the
registering,
become eligible
to receive
followReview
enclosedyou
Registration
Information
Cardthe
and
folReview
the enclosed
Registration Information Card and fol the
Technical
support
ing:
low
instructions
on information
it to quickly register your purchase onlow
on
it to
quicklyde
register
your (Registration
purchase on the
Software
and
upgrade
notices
Verifique
o instructions
Cartoupdate
de you
Informaes
Registro
line.
By
registering,
become
eligible
to receive
the follow
Technical
support
information
line. By Card)
registering,
you
become
eligible
to para
receive
the followInformation
incluso
e
siga
as
intrues
rapidamente
ing:
Hardware
warranty
information
ing: sua compra online. Com o registro, voc se torna apto a
registrar
Technical
Hardware support
warrantyinformation
information
receber:
Technical support information
Softwarede
update
and
upgrade notices
Informaes
Suporte
Tcnico
Avisos
de
atualizaes
de
software
Hardware
information
Informaes
dewarranty
garantia de
hardware
menu
choices
and
key
commands:
All of our
guides
use
the
following conventions to indicate
Conventions
Used
in This Guide
menu
choices
and
key
commands:
Conventions
Used
in This Guide
Convention
Action
Convenes
utilizadas
neste
Guia
All
of our
guides
use the
following
conventions to indicate
Convention
Action
File > choices
Save
Save from the
menu
and key Choose
commands:
menu choices and key File
commands:
menu
:
File os
> Save
Chooseas
Save
from theconvenes para
Todos
nossos guias utilizam
seguintes
Convention
Action
File
indicar
escolhas em menus
emenu
comandos
de teclas:
Control+N
Hold
down
the Control
key
Convention
Action
:
and
press
thefrom
N keythe
Choose
Save
Hold
down
the Control
key
Choose
Save
from
the
File menu
press
key key
Aoand
Holdmenu
down the
the NControl
File
and click
the
mouse
button
File
> Save
Escolha
Control+N
Hold
down
the
Control
key
Control-click
Hold Save
down no
themenu
ControlFile
key
Control+N
Hold
down
the
Control
key
and a
press
the
N key ebutton
and
click
the
mouse
Control+N
Segure
tecla
Control
pressione
a tecla N
Right-click
Clickpress
with the
and
the right
N key
mouse
button
Control-click
Segure
tecla
Control
e clique
o boto do
Control-click
Hold
the
Control
key
Right-click
Clickadown
with
the
right
Control-click
Holdclick
downthe
the Control key
and
mouse
mouse
buttonmouse button
and Options,
click the mouse
button that appear
The names of Commands,
and Settings
Right-click
Clique
com
o the
boto
direito do mouse
Right-click
Click
with
right
on-screen
a differentOptions,
font. and Settings that appear
The
namesare
of in
Commands,
Right-click
Click with
the right
mouse
button
mouse
button
File
> Save
Control+N
File > Save
Conveno
Control-click
The
following
symbols are
usedeto
highlight que aparecem na
Os
nomes
dos comandos,
opes
configuraes
The
namesinformation:
of Commands, Options, and Settings that appear
important
tela
esto
em
fontes
diferentes.
The following
symbols areOptions,
used to and
highlight
names of Commands,
Settings that appear

important
information:
on-screen
are
in
different
font.
User Tips
area helpful
hints
for getting the
The following
symbols
are
used
to highlight
most
from
your
system.
Os
seguintes
smbolos
so
utilizados
parathe
destacar informaes
The following
arehints
usedfor
togetting
highlight
User Tips symbols
are helpful
important
information:
importantes:
important
information:
most from
your system.
Important
Notices include
information
that
User
hintsauxili-lo
for getting
the
UserTips
Tips are
sohelpful
dicas para
a extrair
User
Tips
are
helpful
hints for getting
the o mximo de seu
could
affect
your
data
or
the
performance
of
most
from
your
system.
sistema.
Important
include information that
most
from Notices
your system.
your
system.
Important
Notices incluem informaes que podem afetar
your
system.
Important
Notices include information that
seus dados
ou a performance
de seuthat
sistema.
Important
Notices
include information
Shortcuts
show
useful
or of
could affect
youryou
data
or thekeyboard
performance
mouse
shortcuts.
your
system.
Shortcuts
apresentam
atalhos
teisorde teclado ou mouse.
Shortcuts
show
you useful
keyboard
your
system.
mouse shortcuts.
CrossReferences
Referencespoint
apontam
sees
relacionadas neste Guia
Cross
to related
sections
Shortcuts
show you useful
keyboard
or in
ou em outros
VENUE.
Shortcuts
showGuias
you useful
keyboard or
this
guide
and other VENUE guides.
mouse
shortcuts.
Cross
mouseReferences
shortcuts.point to related sections in

Stage Rack Features

Stagewww.avid.com
Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage
Sobre
can beda
used
to 96
inputs.
O website
Avidsimultaneously,
(www.avid.com) supporting
sua melhorup
fonte
detotal
informaes
online para auxili-lo a extrair o mximo de seu sistema. Os seguintes

so Audio
algunsI/O
dos servios e recursos disponveis:
Product Registration: Registre seu produto online.
8and
analog
output channels;
up to 48 analog
or
Support
Downloads
Contact expandable
Customer Success
(technical
outputs per de
Stage
Rack. e as mais recentes verses
support):digital
Baixe atualizaes
software
dos manuais; navegue pelos documentos de compatibilidade
(Compatibility)
para requisitos
do I/O
sistema ou pesquise a Base de
Synchronization
and Control
Conhecimento online (Knowledgebase).
connection
a VENUE
FOH Rack.
Training applicable)
and Education:
Estude to
por
conta prpria
utilizando os
cursos disponveis online ou encontre como estudar em uma classe

em um centro certificado de treinamento Avid.
System Components
Products and Developers: Aprenda sobre os produtos Avid; baixe

verses demo de softwares ou saiba sobre nosso parceiros e seus
aplicativos
plug-inComponents
ou dispositivos de hardware.
Included
Alland
VENUE
Profile
include
the following:
News
Events:
Veja systems
as ltimas
novidades
da Avid ou registre-se
para um
demo
de
produto.
Pro Tools Accelerated Videos: Assista a vdeos tutoriais gratuitos.

Monitor
for VGA screen
notaincluded)
Accelerated
Videosmount
so desenvolvidos
para(screen
auxili-lo
configurar e
rodar seus
Pro Tools
e os plug-ins
rapidamente.
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not included)
VENUE Mouse Pad
Live Sound Webinars: Assista vdeos tutoriais gratuitos e webnars

VENUE
especficos
para aProfile
VENUEGuide
e aprenda com especialistas.

DVI supported.
USB keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)

Optional Components
(for Talkback)
Para saber
mais sobre
esses
e outros recursos disponveis, visite o
Protective
Dust
Cover
website Avid (www.avid.com).
Rack(s) (see next)

Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes:

System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

iLok USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations)
I/O Options



outputs
digital I/O.
10
Chapter 2: Configuring and

Connecting
Profile
Additional
Required Components
Captulo
e allConexo
da VENUE
Profile
Stage Racks are 2:
usedConfigurao
with an FOH Rack, and provide
stage
The following
components must
be purchased separately:
Stage Rack Features

The chapter
chapter shows
shows how
how to
to connect
connect the
the components
components of
of a
a
The
I/O
EsteAudio
captulo
apresenta como
conectar
os componentes
do VENUE
VENUE Mix
Mix Rack
Rack and
and VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile system.
system.
VENUE
Mix Rack
e do
sistema
Profile.
48
inputs
withVENUE
remotely
controllable mic preamps and
8 analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or
Unpacking
Assembling
digital outputs and
per Stage
Rack.
Desembalando
e Montando a VENUE Profile
VENUE Profile
VENUE Profile

DVI
supported.
To assemble
assemble
the Video
Video Monitor
Monitor Mount:
Mount:
the
ParaTomontar
o suporte
de monitor de
vdeo:
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
1 Remove
Remove the
the Video
Video Monitor
Monitor Mount
Mount
components
from their
their
1
components
from
1 Remova
os
componentes
do
suporte
de
monitor
de
vdeo da
packaging.
packaging.

embalagem.
The connection between

FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
(top)
(topo)
(top)
a Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased
directly
U
bracket
USuporte
bracketem U
from
AvidArm
or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Mounting
Arm
Mounting
Brao
and
Control I/O
Synchronization
Remova
todosall
componentes
da embalagem.
Remove
Remove
alloscomponents
components
from
the shipping
shipping packaging.
packaging.
from
the
Coloque
a console
Profile
sobre uma
mesaand
ou redundant
outra superfcie
Snake
connectors
to enable
(if
Place the
the
Profile console
console
on primary
a table
table or
or other
other stable
stable surface
surface
Place
Profile
a
T-bolt
(2)(2)
estvelque
permita
acesso totaltoon
aos
conectores
e suportes
dos
Optional Components
Borboleta
T-bolt
(2)
applicable)
connection
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
that
leaves
full access
access to
to the
the front
front and
and back
back panel
panel connectors
connectors
leaves
full
painisthat
frontal
e traseiro.
Locking
Nut (2)
Porca (2) Nut
Locking
and mounts.
mounts.
The following components are optional, and
must be (2)
and
Certifique-se
de que todos os componentes esto livres de
Components
of
the
Video
Monitor
Mount
separately:
Components
of the Video Monitor Mount
sacos plsticos,
protees
estofadas are
ou outros
Make
Make sure
sure
all components
components
are
free of
of materiais.
any bags,
bags, padding
padding or
or purchased
all
free
any
Componentes do suporte de monitor de vdeo
System
Mantenha
cabos
e
outros
tens
includos
organizados,
tendo
a
USB
flash
other
portable
storage
for
Components
2 Make
Make sure
suredisk
your(or
video
monitor
is USB
powered
off device
and discondisconother materials.
materials.
2
your
video
monitor
is
powered
off
and
other
certeza de mant-los junto a seus componentes associados quando
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
nected, and
and lay
lay it
it face
face down
down on
on a
a padded
padded table.
table.
nected,
da
Keep
cables and
and other
other included
included items
items organized,
organized, making
making
Keep
cables
tir-los
embalagem.
2 Certifique-se
de
que o speakers
monitor est
desligado
e monitoring
desconectado.
Near-field
monitor
for
mix
position
Included
Components
sure to
to keep
keep
them with
with their
their associated
associated component
component after
after unun3
your
monitor
the
Monitor
Mount
sure
them
3 Attach
Attach
yourpara
monitor
to
the Video
Video
Monitor acolchoada.
Mount by
by doing
doing
Vire-o
com a tela
baixoto
sobre
uma superfcie
either
Headphones
with 1/4-inch
jack
either of
of the
the following,
following, as
as appropriate
appropriate for
for your
your video
video monitor:
monitor:
Dynamic
or ao
condenser
microphone
and XLRprocedimentos
mic cable
3 Fixe
seu monitor
suporte com
um dos seguintes
100mm
(MIS-D100)
Attach
the
100mm
(MIS-D100)
Attach
the U
U bracket
bracket to
to the
the included
included
(for Talkback)
de acordo
com
seu monitor
de vdeo:
mounting
plate
using
the
provided
hardware.
Two
(2)
IEC
power
cables
mounting
plate (up
using
the
provided hardware. To
To complete
complete the
the
Montagem do suporte de monitor de vdeo e
Footswitches
to
2)
Assembling
the
Video
Monitor
Mount
assembly,
remove
the
4
mounting
screws
from
the
of
100mm
(MIS-D100)
suporte em
U from
placathe
deback
montagem
assembly,
removeFixe
the 4o mounting
screws
back
of the
the
Monitor
mount
for VGA screen (screen not included)
do suporte
para
trackball
utilizando
o hardware
fornecido.
Para completar
a montagem,
video
line
up
of
plate,
and
Trackball
Mount
video monitor,
monitor,
line
up the
the holes
holes
of the
the mounting
mounting
plate, retire
and
and
Trackball
mount (trackball
not included)
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
the
os 4
parafusos
da
parte
traseira
do
monitor
de
vdeo,
alinhe
os
use
the
screws
you
removed
to
secure
the
plate
to
the
back
of
use
the
screws
you
removed
to
secure
the
plate
to
the
back
of
Profile
includes
Video
Monitor
Mount
for your
your
VGApara
moni- furos VENUE
A VENUE
Profile
incluiaa um
suporte
para
monitor
de vdeo
Profile
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
includes
Video
Monitor
Mount
for
VGA
monisystemdeand
external edigital
aosmonitor.
da placa
montagem
utilizedevices)
os parafusos retirados
your
your monitor.
monitores
VGA
tela fina
emount
um suporte
paramouse
mouseor
trackball.
tor,
and de
a Profile
Trackball
mount
for your
your
mouse
orou
trackball.
and
a
Trackball
for
trackball.
anteriormente
para prender
a placa
traseira
tor,
VENUE
Guide
25-pin D-Sub
cables (for
connecting
to do
GPImonitor.
devices)
screws
packing.
Allpacking.
VENUE Profile systems include the following:
Video
Monitor
Assembling
Protective
Dust
Cover
Montagem
do suporte
dethe
monitor
de vdeo
Mount
Rack(s) (see next)
Parafusos
screws
back
back
Traseira
Mounting
arm (top)
(top)
Mounting
arm
Brao (topo)
screws
U
bracket
screws
Parafusos
U
bracketem U
Suporte
VENUE Profile
Expansion Options
The Video
Video Monitor
Monitor Mount
Mount is
is assembled
assembled by
by attaching
attaching a
a flat
flat
The
Mounting
plate
O suporte
do
monitor
de vdeo
montado
fixando
um monitor
de
Mounting
plate
Placa de montagem
panel
VGA
monitor
to
the
mounting
arm.
Both
100mm
and
panel
VGA
monitor
to
the
mounting
arm.
Both
100mm
and
tela fina (LCD, plasma ou LED) ao brao de monitor. Suportes de
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and standards
Cables are
Video
monitor
75mm
VESA
(FDMI)
video
mounting
standards
are supported.
supported.
Video
monitor
Monitor
vdeo
75mm
VESA
(FDMI)
video
mounting
100mm
e 75mm
VESA
(FDMI)
so
suportados.
front
ForFrente
details on all VENUE systems and options,
visitdethe
Avid
front
Assembling
the Video
Video
Monitor
Mount
requires
the
following
Assembling
the
Mount
the
following
A montagem
do suporte
para Monitor
monitor de
vdeo requires
requer os
seguintes
System Restore CD
items:
tens: items:
monitor
ECx
Software
Um
VGA
deControl
tela fina
com compatibilidade
suportes
VGA
flat
panel
display
with
100mm
or
75mm
mount A
A Ethernet
VGA
flat
panel
display
withInstaller
100mmCD
orpara
75mm
mountde 100mm
ou
75mm
ing
compatibility
Standalone
Software Installer CD
ing compatibility
Um chave
Phillips de tamanho mdio
A
A medium
medium
sized
Phillips
screwdriver
iLok
USB Smart
KeyPhillips
(for storing
plug-in authorizations)
Uma
mesa
ou reasized
similar,
livrescrewdriver
e plana, com uma toalha ou
A
table
or
similar
clear,
flat
area
a
or
pad Plug-in
installer
discs
(if any)
with
pre-authorized
iLok
superfcie
A table
or acolchoada
similar
clear,
flat area
with
a towel
towelpara
or other
other
padoutra
(grande
owith
suficiente
deitar
ded
surface
(big
enough
to
safely
lay
your
video
monitor
seu
monitor
com
a (big
tela para
baixo).
ded
enough
to safely lay your video monitor
Two
(2)surface
IEC power
cables
face
down)
face
down)
One
FOH
Link cable for connection to a VENUE console

website
(www.avid.com).
Attaching
a
Attaching
a 100mm
100mm VGA
VGA monitor
monitor to
to the
the mounting
mounting plate,
plate, U
U bracket
bracket and
and
Fixao
de um monitor
VGA 100mm
placa
montagem,
em U e brao, vista
mounting
arm, viewed
viewed
fromthe
the
topdeedge
edge
of the
thesuporte
monitor
mounting
arm,
from
top
of
monitor
a partir da borda superior do monitor.
75mm
(MIS-D
75)
75mm
(MIS-D
75) Use
Use the
the included
included U
U bracket.
bracket. Remove
Remove the
the apapMix
Rack
Options
75mm (MIS-D 75) Utilize o suporte em U incluso. Remova os

propriate
screws from
the back
your
and
them
propriate
from
backeof
ofutilize-os
your monitor
monitor
and use
use
them
parafusos
da screws
traseira
do the
monitor
para fixar
o suporte
to
secure
the
U
bracket
to
the
back
of
the
monitor.
to
secure the U bracket to the back of the monitor.
I/O
em
U.Options
Traseira
back
AI16
Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
back
screws
Parafusos
screws
screws
Parafusos
screws
Brao (topo)
Mounting
arm
Mounting
arm
AO16 Analog Output Card that providesUUSuporte

16
analog line level
bracket
bracket em U
outputs
Video
monitor
Monitor
de vdeo
Video monitor
front
front
Frente
Attaching
a 75
75
VGA
monitor
to suporte
the U
UCard
bracket
and
mounting
arm,
viewed
XO16
Analog
and
Digital
Output
provides
analog
Attaching
a
VGA
monitor
to
the
bracket
mounting
arm,
viewed
Fixao
de
um monitor
VGA75mm
ao
em Uthat
e and
brao,
vista a 8
partir
da
borda
from
the
top edge
edge and
of the
the
monitor
superior
dothe
monitor.
top
of
linefrom
level
outputs,
8 monitor
AES digital outputs.
4AT16
Segure
o brao
de fixao
virado
para baixo
que aof
extremidade
A-Net
Output
Card that
provides
16 para
channels
A-Net
(superior)
esteja
posicionada
contra
a
traseira
do
suporte
em U.
Certifique-se
de
que
o
brao
est
posicionado
da
maneira
correta
e fixe-o ao suporte em U utilizando os quatro parafusos fornecidos.
Certifique-se
deoutput
que os parafusos
estejam
apertados
IOx Input and
expansionConfiguring
card that
providesde
anforma
addi-firme11
Chapter
Chapter 2:
2: Configuring and
and Connecting
Connecting Profile
Profile 11
etional
segura.
8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels of AES/EBU
digital I/O.
Captulo 2: Configurao e Conexo da VENUE Profile 11
ing the four screws provided. Make sure all screws are tightened securely.
Fixando o Suporte de Monitor de Vdeo pela

Attaching
Primeira
Vezthe Video Monitor Mount the First Time
attach
the Video
Monitorde
Mount
the console:
ParaTofixar
o suporte
de monitor
vdeoto console:
1 From the back of the console, locate the Video Mount slot
1 Localize
o slot
paraofothe
suporte
de monitor
vdeoextrusion.
na parte traseira
below the
edge
outermost
backde
panel
da console, abaixo da borda saliente do painel externo.
2 Take one of the T-bolts included with the Video Mount and
2 Insira
dasthe
borboletas
includas
no kit
insertuma
it into
wider opening
at the
farde
leftsuporte
end of de
themonitor
Video
de vdeo
naslot.
maior
abertura
na estremidade
ranhura
Mount
Slide
the T-bolt
to the rightesquerda
along thedaslot
until de
it
montagem
stays in de
themonitor
track. de vdeo. Deslize a borboleta para a direita,
ao longo do slot, at que fique alinhada.
1 Stand at the back of the console.

2 Holding the
screen in
hand, loosen
the lock nuts
Utilizao
doVGA
Suporte
deone
Monitor
de Vdeo
that secure the Video Monitor Mount to the console.
Para
remover
o suporte
de monitor
de vdeo:back off the T-bolts.
3 Slide
the Video
Monitor
Mount straight
Tighten the atrs
lock nuts
to secure the T-bolts.
14 Posicione-se
da console.
2ToSegure
monitor
com uma
afrouxe
as to
porcas
que fixam o
attach othe
assembled
Videomo,
Monitor
Mount
the console:
suporte de monitor de vdeo console.
1 Loosen the two lock nuts securing the T-bolts in place, along
the
extrusion
at thedeback
of the
3 Deslize
o suporte
monitor
deconsole.
vdeo para fora das borboletas.
2 Position the Video Monitor Mount so that its base slots line
up with the T-bolts, slide the Video Monitor Mount into position,fixar
andotighten
nutsde
to vdeo
secure the
mount into place.
Para
suportethe
delock
monitor
console:
4 Aperte as porcas para fixar as borboletas.
1Assembling
Afrouxe as porcas
que Attaching
fixam as borboletas
salincia da traseira
and
the na
Trackball
da console.
Mount
Video Mount slot

Localizao
doof
slot
de Video
suporteMount
de monitor
Location
the
slot de vdeo
3 Take the second T-bolt, insert it into the opening at the left
3 Insira a segunda borboleta na abertura esquerda e deslize-a at

slide
it to becentmetros
a few inches
fromdathe
first T-bolt.
queand
fique
a poucos
de away
distncia
primeira
borboleta.
4 Take the two silver lock nuts (thumb nuts) and thread them
4 Pegue as duas porcas e atarrache-as livremente sobre as

loosely onto the T-bolts (do not tighten them).
borboletas (no apert-las).
5 Pick up the assembled Video Monitor Mount and hold it at
5 Pegue
o suporte
de monitor
de vdeo
segure-o
the bottom
of the
VGA monitor,
somontado
you can e
balance
theabaixo
unit
do monitor,
de
modo
que
possa
balanar
a
unidade
com
uma
mo.
with one hand.
6 Posicione
a the
base
doofsuporte
de mount
monitorunder
de vdeo
abaixo
da
6 Position
base
the video
the back
panel
salincia
do painel
traseiro
e passethrough
as borboletas
atravs
dasthe
duas
extrusion
and feed
the T-bolts
the two
slots on
ranhuras
na parte
frontal
do brao montado.
Afrouxe
as porcas
de
front edge
of the
arm assembly.
Loosen the
lock nuts
if necesbloqueio
de
necessrio.
sary.
System Requirements and

7 Aperte
as porcas
para
fixar
o suporte
monitor
de vdeo
na
7
Tighten
the lock
nuts
thumb
nuts tode
secure
the Video
MonCompatibility
posio.
itor Mount in position.
and software
it lados:
has tested and approved.
Parahardware
mover o monitor
para os
To move the monitor left or right:
complete
system
requirements
andslide
a list
ofVideo
qualified
comLoosen
the
thumb
nuts
slightly
For
Afrouxe
as
porcas
ligeiramente
e and
deslize
o the
suporte
deMonitor
monitor
puters,
operating
hard
drives,
and
third-party
de Mount
vdeo para
a esquerda
ou abeing
direita,
tomando
cuidado
to the
left systems,
or right,
carefully
not
to twistpara
itdeoffno
eidesloc-lo
das T-bolts.
borboletas.
(Semount
isso ocorrer,
recoloque
vices,ofvisit:
ther
the
(If the
comessimplesmente
off the T-bolts,
simply
e continue).
Quando
estiver When
na posio
desejada,
aperte astighten
porcas.
reattach
it
and resume).
in the
desired position,
the lock nuts.
Para ajustar a altura do monitor:

adjustos
theparafusos
height of que
the monitor:
To
Afrouxe
seguram o monitor ou suporte em U
Registration
ao brao
e deslize-o
paraholding
baixo e the
paramonitor
cima, at
desejada.
Loosen
the screws
oraUaltura
bracket
to the
Aperte
todos
os
parafusos
para
fixar
o monitor
em and
sua
nova
Review
thearm,
enclosed
Registration
Information
Card
folmounting
and slide
it
down
or up
to the desired
height.
posio.
low the instructions on it to quickly register your purchase onTighten all screws to secure the monitor in its new position.
line. By registering, you become eligible to receive the following:
Technical support information
2The
Posicione
o suporte
monitorade
vdeo
modo
que asorranhuras
Trackball
Mountde
provides
tray
for de
your
trackball
a
na
sua
base
se
alinhem
s
borboletas,
deslize
o
suporte para a
mouse. It can be placed anywhere along the front of the conposio e aperte as porcas para fix-lo no lugar.
sole, and accommodates left- or right-handed operation. A
small hook underneath the Trackball mount lets you hang a
Montagem
e Fixao do Suporte para
pair of headphones.
Trackball
Assembling the Trackball Mount
O suporte para trackball oferece um local para utilizao de seu

trackball ou mouse. Ela pode ser colocada em qualquer lugar ao
To attach
the Trackball
Mount
longo
da frente
da console
e permite a utilizao com a mo direita
ou
esquerda.
pequeno
gancho
abaixo
do suporte
paratheir
trackball
1 Unpack
theUm
Trackball
Mount
and
components
from
permite
que voc pendure um par de fones de ouvido.
packaging.
2 Make sure
unplugde
any
USB or headphone connections at
Montagem
dotoSuporte
Trackball
the front of the console.
Para fixar o suporte de trackball
3
From the front of the
console,
slot for the TrackConventions
Used
in locate
Thisthe
Guide
ball
mount
(located
below
the
extrusion).
1 Tire o suporte de trackball e seus componentes da embalagem.
4 Take one of the T-bolts included with the Trackball Mount
choices and
key commands:
2menu
Certifique-se
de remover
qualquer dispositivo USB ou fones de
and insert
into the da
opening
right end of the Trackball
ouvido
das itconexes
frente at
dathe
console.
Mount
slot.
Slide
the
T-bolt
to
the
left
along the slot until it is
Convention
Action
to the left
of the frontexistente
panel USB
headphone
ports.
3just
Localize
a reentrncia
na and
frente
da console
para a
:
File > Savedo suporte de

Choose
Save(localizado
from the abaixo da salincia).
montagem
trackball
5 Take the second T-bolt,

Fileinsert
menuit into the opening at the right
and
slide
it
into
place
a
few
away from
the first T-bolt.
4 Insira uma das borboletasinches
na abertura
da extremidade
direita
Control+N
da
reentrncia
suporte
de
trackball.
Deslize
a borboleta
para a
andnuts
press
the N key
6 Take
the two do
silver
lock
(thumb
nuts)
and
thread them
esquerda
pela
reentrncia
at
que
fique
esquerda
das
conexes
loosely onto the T-bolts (do not tighten them).
Control-click
Hold
thefrontal
Controldakey
USB
e de fones de ouvido
dodown
painel
console.
and click
mouse so
button
7 Place the Trackball Mount
inthe
position
that you can feed
5the
Insira
a segunda
na abertura
e deslize-a at
T-bolts
throughborboleta
theClick
twowith
slots
the da
lip direita
of the Mount.
Right-click
theon
right
poucos centmetros da primeira.
mouse button
If mounting on the right, be sure to line up the opening in
6 Pegue
as duas
e panel
atarrache-as
livremente ports
sobre as
the mount
withporcas
the front
USBSettings
and Headphone
The names
of Commands,
Options,
and
that appear
borboletas
(no
apert-las).
so they
accessible.
on-screen
areremain
in a different
font.
78 Posicione
o suporte
de trackball
dethe
modo
que possa
passar as duas
Tighten
the
lock
nuts
to used
secure
assembled
Trackball
The
following
symbols
are
to highlight
borboletas
atravs
das
aberturas
existentes
na
aba
do
suporte.
Mount to the console.
Se o suporte for montado do lado direito, certifique-se de alinhar a abertura
User
Tips are
hints
fore de
getting
theouvido do painel frontal para
do suporte
comhelpful
as conexes
USB
fones de
que fiquem
acessveis.
most
from your
system.
8 Aperte bem as porcas para que fixem o suporte de trackball

console.
your system.

The
following
symbols
are used to highlight
Stage
Rack
Features
Utilizao
do Suporte de Trackball
UserI/O
Tips
helpfulProfile
hints
getting
theto twoeStage
audio
forare
VENUE
systems.
Up
Racks
O suporte
de
trackball
podefor
ser
removido
recolocado
most
from
your
system.
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96
total
inputs.
rapidamente.
Audio
I/O desconcte dispositivos USB ou fones de ouvido do
Sempre
painel
frontal
da remotely
console antes
de remover
ou recolocar o
could
48 inputs
with
controllable
affect your
data or the performance
ofmic preamps and
suporte de trackball.
individually
your
system. selectable phantom power.
8 analog
output
Para remover
o suporte
dechannels;
trackball: expandable up to 48 analog or

1 Segure o suporte de trackball com uma mo e solte as porcas que
mouse shortcuts.
o seguram
em frente and
console.
Synchronization
Control I/O

DVI supported.

2 BaixeCross
o suporte
para remov-lo
inteiramente
da console.
References
point to related
sections in
Optional Components
3 Recoloque as porcas nas borboletas e aperte-as para baixo para

segur-las na posio.

System Components
Para recolocar o suporte de trackball:
1 Afrouxe
as duasComponents
porcas segurando as borboletas no lugar.
Included
All VENUE
Profilede
systems
include
the que
following:
2 Posicione
o suporte
trackball
de modo
sua base se alinhe
s borboletas
e
deslize-o
para
sua
posio.
3 Aperte as porcas para fixar o suporte em sua posio.


(for Talkback)
VENUE Mouse Pad

VENUE Profile Guide

Rack(s) (see next)


System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options



outputs
digital I/O.
Connections
for VENUE
Mix
Rack Systems
Conexes
para sistemas
VENUE Mix
Rack
This section describes system and audio connections for VENUE Mix Rack systems. (For VENUE Profile systems, see Connections
Esta
descreve
conexeson
depage
udio
e de sistema para sistemas VENUE Mix Rack. (Para sistemas VENUE Profile, veja Conexes para
forseo
VENUE
ProfileasSystems
17).
sistemas VENUE Profile na pgina 17).
To connect the Profile console to a Mix Rack:
Para conectar a console Profile ao Mix Rack:
Connect one end of the FOH Link cable to the FOH Link port on the back panel of the Profile console. Connect the other end
ofConecte
uma
extremidade
do FOH
cabo Link
FOH port
Link onporta
FOH Link
no of
painel
traseiro
da On
console
outrathe
extremidade
porta
the FOH
Link
cable to the
the front
panel
the Mix
Rack.
each Profile.
end, beConecte
sure to aalign
notch in the
FOHconnector
Link existente
no
painel
frontal
do
Mix
Rack.
Em
cada
extremidade,
certifique-se
de
alinhar
o
entalhe
do
conector
e
a
ranhura
do
plugue
e
housing with the slot in the plug, and to rotate the collar until the connector is fully latched.
gire o anel de fixao at que o conector esteja firmemente preso.
Figura 2. Conexo FOH Link entre Profile (esquerda) e Mix Rack (direita)
Figure 2. FOH Link connection between Profile (left) and Mix Rack (right)
Conexes de udio
Audio Connections
O Mix Rack oferece 48 entradas analgicas mic/line, at 32 sadas analgicas nvel de linha e uma variedade de entradas e sadas analgicas
e digitais.
Voc
pode utilizar
um multicabo
includo)
fazer trafegar
canais
deand
entrada
e sada
o palco
Mix Rack
provides
48 analog
mic/line analgico
inputs, up(no
to 32
analog para
line outputs,
and amltiplos
variety of
analog
digital
audioentre
inputs
and e o
Mixoutputs.
Rack, ouYou
podecan
conectar
microfones,
instrumentos
e
outras
fontes
diretamente
s
entradas
Mix
Rack
Stage
e
conectar
as
sadas
Mix
use an analog multicore snake cable (not included) to carry multiple stage inputs and outputs to and from theRack
Stage
diretamente
s
entradas
demics,
seu sistema
de amplificao
principaldirectly
ou ao sistema
de monitorao.
Mix Rack, or you can
connect
instruments
and other sources
to Mix Rack
Stage inputs, and connect Mix Rack Stage
outputs directly to the inputs on your house/mains systems, or monitor systems.
Stage I/O
Stage I/O
Utilize essa seo para identificar onde conectar as entradas e sadas de palco ao Mix Rack.
Use the following sections to identify where to connect stage I/O to Mix Rack.
FOH I/O
116
Entradas
Multicabo
analog snake
analgico
Stage
do palco
Inputs
1732
A
B
3348
C
D
E
Figure 3. Mix Rack audio connectors and I/O slots (AE) for stage inputs and outputs
Figura 3. Conectores de udio do Mix Rack e slots de entradas e sadas (AE) para entradas e sadas de palco.
to PA,
Para
house/
amplificao
mains,
principal,
monitors
monitorao
etc
zones
Sadas para
Stage
Outputs
o palco
116
1-16
or
om-
olonow-
Stage Rack Features
Entradas
de Palco
Stage Inputs
1481 a 48
(Analog
Mic/Line
XLRMic/Line)
Inputs)
audioanalgicas
I/O for VENUE
Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
(Entradas
XLR

1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGAanand
The Stage Input section provides 48 channels of analog mic/line inputsrecommended;
(XLR), to connect
stage input
sources.
Use a standard
A seo Stage Input oferece 48 canais de entrada mic/line (XLR), para conectar fontes sonoras vindas do palco. Utilize um multicabo
DVIcable
supported.
alog
snake
cable
to
run
lines
from
the
stage
to
the
Mix
Rack
(analog
snake
not
included).
Then
connect
the
snake
to
Stage
analgico
Audio padro
I/O (no includo) para transmitir as linhas do palco para o Mix Rack. Conecte o multicabo s entradas 1 a 48.
inputs 148. (For instructions on applying phantom power and other settings,
see theand
guide
that came with
your console.)
USB keyboard
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
Sadas individually
de palco 1selectable
a 16 phantom power.
Stage Outputs 116
analgicas
8 analog XLR
output
channels; expandable up to 48 analog or
(Sadas
Line)
(Analog
Line XLR Outputs)

AThe
seo
Stage
OutputSection
ofereceprovides
at 32 canais
(XLR),ofpara
conexo
PA, amplificao
principal,
monitorao,
zonas adicionais
ou envio
Stage
Output
up to de
32sada
channels
stage
outputa(XLR),
to connect
to house/mains,
monitors,
additional
from Avid
or assembled
by your preferred
vendor.
de
material
sonoro
a
outros
dispositivos.
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O
zones, or feeds to other devices.
FOH I/Oapplicable) connection to a VENUE FOH Rack.
Optional Components
FOH I/O

AsThe
seguintes
sees
descrevem
a seo
FOHI/O
I/Osection
do Mix Rack
e como
suas
e portas. and ports for mix position audio.
following
sections
describe
the FOH
of Mix
Rack, utilizar
and how
to conexes
use its connectors
System Components
Com Mic Phantom Power
Included Components
Com Mic Gain
2-Track
AES/EBU I/O
Monitor
Outputs
Conventions
Comin
Mic This
All VENUE ProfileUsed
systems
include
theGuide
following:
MIDI I/O
Input
2-Track Digital
Format selector
2-Track Analog I/O
VENUE
console
All ofour
guidesProfile
use the
menu choices
commands:
Two (2)and
IECkey
power
cables
:

Convention
Action
File > Save

VENUE Mouse Choose
Pad Save from the
File menu
4.VENUE
Profile
Guide
Figure
FOH I/O
on Mix Rack
Figura
4. Conexes
FOHconnectors
I/O no Mix Rack
Control+N
Hold
down the Control key
and press the N key
2-Track
S/PDIF
I/O
Dynamic
Analog I/O
18
or condenser
microphone
and XLR mic cable
(for Talkback)
MIDI I/O
Ports Dust Cover
Protective
2-Track Analog Inputs and Outputs

Rack(s) (see next)
The MIDI In and Out Ports
provide
16 channels
and click
the mouse
button of MIDI input
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
The
2-Track analog
connections
are used forOptions
input and output
conexes
de 2-Track
so utilizadas
para
entrada e
ofAs
analog
audioanalgicas
material. These
are balanced
1/4-inch
TRS
sada
de material de udio analgico. Os conectores so balanceados
connectors.
For1/4
details
on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
de
de polegada.
Portas
MIDI I/O
Control-click
Asand
portas
MIDI In of
e Out
oferecem
aothe
sistema
16The
canais
MIDI
16 channels
MIDI
output to
system.
MIDI
I/O de
entrada
e 16
canais
MIDIClick
deand
sada.
Asright
portas
MIDI
I/OMIDI
so utilizadas
Right-click
with
the
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
Cables
ports
are
used
in sending
receiving
Snapshot
mesmouse button
para
enviar einreceber
mensagens
MIDI
e receber
MIDI Time
Code de
sages,
receiving
MIDI
Time
Code
from external
devices.
Eachand
Mix
Rack
or FOH
Rack
includes:
dispositivos
externos.
The names
of Commands,
System
Restore CDOptions, and Settings that appear
Com
Mic,
Control,
and
Phantom Power
Com
Mic,
Gain
Control
eControl
Phantom
Power
on-screen
areGain
in a different
font.
ECx
Ethernet
Software
Installer CD
The Com
Mic connector
andInstaller
controlsCD
allow connection of a
Standalone
following
are used
to highlight
OThe
conector
Comsymbols
Mic Software
permite
a conexo
de um microfone ou uma
mic,
or
a
line
level
source.
The
Com
Mic
input
is
a female
iLok
USB
SmartOKey
(for storing
authorizations)
fonte
de
nvel
de linha.
conector
Com plug-in
Mic
XLR/TRS
fmea e
important
information:
XLR/TRS
connector
that
accepts
XLR
or
TRS
jacks.
Theopera
Gain em
aceita plugues
XLR
ou
TRS.
O
controle
de
ganho
(Gain)
control
in
stepspower
of 3 dB.
Phantom
ap-por
passos
deoperates
3
dB.are
Phantom
pode
ser aplicado
CombeMic
User
Tips
helpful
hints
for
getting
thepoweraomay
plieddo
to
the
Com
mic
with
the
Mic
Power
switch.
meio
switch
Mic
Power.
Do
not
connectum
ansistema
intercom
directly to the
Com
No
conecte
desystem
intercomunicao
diretamente
Each
Stage
includes:
Important
Notices
include
information
that
entrada
Com,
pois
alguns
sistemas
uma
sinalizao
input,
as Rack
some
intercom
systems
use autilizam
signalling
voltage
por
voltagem
pode
danificar
a placa
which
Two
(2) damage
IEC
power
could
affect
yourque
data
orcables
the
performance
of FOH I/O.
can
the
FOH
IO card.
your system.
Sadas
de Monitorao
Monitor
Outputs
Shortcuts
show youare
useful
or para
AsThe
sadas
de monitorao
so keyboard
utilizadas
enviar o material
Monitor
Outputs
used
for output
to a near-field
monmouse
shortcuts.
para
near-field
um included).
sistema deThese
mixagem
auxiliar (no
itorsmonitores
or a cue
mix
systemou(not
are 1/4-inch
includos).
so balanceados de 1/4 de polegada.
balanced Os
TRSconectores
connectors.
Entradas e sadas analgicas de 2-Track
2-Track
and
Outputs
EntradasDigital
e sadasInputs
digitais de
2-Track
The
2-Track
digital
connections are used for input and output
Mix
Rack
Options
As
conexes
digitais
2-Track so utilizadas para entrada e sada de
of digital audio material. Stereo AES/EBU or S/PDIF I/O conmaterial digital de udio. Conectores estreo AES/EBU ou S/PDIF
nectors
are selectable
AESSPDIF
switch. Esses
These conectores
conI/Oselecionados
Options
so
porwith
meiothe
do switch
AESS/PDIF.
nectors
support
24-bit,
48
kHz
digital
signals.
Input
signals
suportam sinais digitais de 24-bit, 48 kHz. Sinais de entradas com
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
thatconverted
provides
analog
with
other
sample
rates are
sample-rate
to
kHz.
outras
taxas
de
amostragem
so
convertidos
para 16
4848
kHz.
EntradasI/O
e Sadas
Analgicas (1 a 8)
Analog
(18)
AO16 Analog
Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
outputs
Os
pares
de entradas
e sadas
analgicas
nvelfor
dehardlinha so
The
88pairs
of analog
line inputs
and outputs
are used
utilizadas
para
inserts
de
perifricos
ou
para
entrada
e
sada de
ware
inserts,
or for
input
andOutput
outputCard
of program
material8 from
XO16
Analog
and
Digital
that provides
analog
material
da
posio
de
mixagem.
Os
conectores
so
balanceados
theline
mixlevel
position.
These
balanced,
outputs,
andare
8 AES
digital 1/4-inch
outputs. TRS connecde 1/4
de polegada.
tors.
digital I/O.
Chapter 2: Configuring and Connecting Profile 15
olonlow-
Right-click

mouse button
Outras Conexes do Mix Rack
The names of Commands, Options, and Settings that appear

(AC, Sincronizao e Conexes Opcionais)
The following symbols are used to highlight
Conectores
AC
User Tipsdeare
hints
for AC
getting
the para cada uma das
Os conectores
AChelpful
aceitam
cabos
padro,
most from
system. (redundantes) internas.
duas unidades
deyour
alimentao
As unidades de alimentao possuem seleo automtica de
voltagem (100V a 240V, 5060 Hz) e trabalham automaticamente
include information
quandoImportant
um caboNotices
de alimentao
modular that
padro conectado a
could
affect
your
data
or
the
performance
of
uma tomada AC, em qualquer pas.
your system.
Porta ECx
A portamouse
ECx permite
conectar um cabo Ethernet RJ-45 para controle
shortcuts.
remoto do sistema desde um laptop ou tablet.
Cross
point to related
sections in
Para References
mais informaes,
veja o Captulo
30,ECx.
Portas USB
As portas USB no painel frontal do Mix Rack so USB 2.0, permitindo
conexo de iLoks, unidades de armazenamento e outros dispositivos
USB. (Uma porta USB adicional est localizada no interior do chassi
do Mix Rack. Utilize-a para conectar e proteger um iLok pr-carregado
para que esteja sempre disponvel para o sistema Mix Rack.)
Conector FOH Link

A porta FOH Link conecta a console Profile ao rack do sistema (Mix
Rack ou FOH Rack em conjuno com um ou mais Stage Racks).
Word Clock I/O

As portas Word Clock In e Word Clock Out permitem integrar
dispositivos digitais externos com o Mix Rack.
Stage Rack Features
Connections
for
VENUE
Profile
Systems
Stage Racks
are Sistemas
used
with
an
FOH Rack,
and provide
all stage
Conexes
para
VENUE
Profile

audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Stage
Racks
This section describes system and audio connections for FOH Rack and
StageDisplay
Rack systems.
(For
Mix Rack systems,
see
Video
(15-inch
or VENUE
greater flat-panel
VGA display
can
be used
simultaneously,
supporting
to
total
inputs. FOH Rack e Stage Rack. (Para sistemas VENUE Mix Rack, veja Conexes
Esta
seo
descreve
as conexes
udio
e deup
sistema
para
sistemas
Connections
for VENUE
Mix de
Rack
Systems
on96
page
14).
para Sistemas Mix Rack Systems na pgina 14).
DVI supported.
Audio I/O
VENUE
Profile mic preamps and
48 inputs with remotely
controllable

FOH Link Cable

Optional Components
System Components
Included Components

(for Talkback)
VENUE Mouse Pad

VENUE Profile Guide

Rack(s) (see next)
FOH Rack (Front)


FOH Rack (Back)

Digital Snake Cables
System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options


Stage Rack (Front)
Primary Snake
Redundant Snake
Figure 5. VENUE Profile system component connections

outputs
digital I/O.
or
om-
or
om-
olonlow-
olonlow-
Connecting
Profile
theRack
FOH Rack
Conectando
a Profile
aoto
FOH
Connecting
Profile
to the
FOH
Rack
The Profile console
is connected
to the
FOH
Rack with the provided FOH Link cable.
A console Profile se conecta ao FOH Rack com o cabo FOH Link fornecido.
The Profile console is connected to the FOH Rack with the provided FOH Link cable.
To connect the control surface and the FOH Rack:
Para conectar a superfcie de controle e o FOH Rack:
ToConnect
connect the
surface
the FOH
FOH Rack:
the control
FOH Link
cableand
to the
Link port on the back of the Profile console, and to the FOH Link port on the front
panel
Conecte
o cabo
Link
portaend,
FOH be
Link
na to
parte
traseira
da console
e porta
FOH with
Link no
frontal
do FOH
Em cada
of the
FOHFOH
Rack.
On each
sure
align
the notch
in theProfile
connector
housing
thepainel
slot in
the plug,
andRack.
to rotate
Connect the FOH Link cable to the FOH Link port on the back of the Profile console, and to the FOH Link port on the front
extremidade,
certifique-se
de alinharisofully
entalhe
do conector e a ranhura do plugue e gire o anel de fixao at que o conector esteja firmemente
the
collar
until
the
connector
latched.
panel of the FOH Rack. On each end, be sure to align the notch in the connector housing with the slot in the plug, and to rotate
preso.
the collar until theUsed
connector
fully latched.
Conventions
inisThis
Guide

:
Convention
Action
Conventions
Used
in This Guide
File > Save
Control+N
All of our guides use the

File menu
:
Figura 6. Conexo FOH Link entre

(esquerda)
e FOH Rack (direita)
andProfile
press
the N key
Convention
Action between Profile (left) and FOH Rack (right)
Figure 6. FOH Link connection
Control-click
Hold down
thefrom
Control
Figure
6. FOH Link connection
between
Profile
(left) and FOH Rack (right)
File
> Save
Choose
Save
the key
and
click the
mouse
button
Conectando
o Stage
Rack
ao
FOHto
Rack
Connecting
theFile
Stage
Rack
the FOH Rack
menu
Right-click
Click
withtothe
right
Connecting
Stage
Rack
the
FOH
Control+N
Hold
down
the
Control
key
The Stage Rack isthe
connected
the
FOHto
Rack
with
the Rack
Digital Snake cable (purchased separately).
O Stage Rack se conectamouse

ao FOHbutton
Rack por meio de um cabo digital (Digital Snake - vendido separadamente).
and press the N key
The Stage Rack is connected to the FOH Rack with the Digital Snake cable (purchased separately).
Toconectar
connectum
a Stage
to
the
FOH
Rack:key
Para
StageRack
Rack
ao
FOH
Rack:
Control-click
HoldOptions,
down
the
Control
The
names of
Commands,
and
Settings that appear
and
click
the
mouse
button
To Connect
connect
Stage
Rack
tofont.
the
FOH
Rack:
on-screen
areathe
in
asend
different
1
snake
to
the
Stage
1 Out port of the Stage Rack, and to the Stage 1 In port on the FOH Rack.
1 Conecte o cabo vermelho (send) porta Stage 1 Out do Stage Rack e porta Stage 1 In do FOH Rack.
Right-click
1
the
send snake
totothe
Stage
thethe
Stage
Rack.
2 Connect
Connect
return
snake
the
Stage1 1Out
Outport
portofon
FOHRack,
Rack,and
andtotothe
theStage
Stage1 1InInport
portononthe
theFOH
Stage
Rack.
The
followingthe
symbols
are
used
to
highlight
2important
Conecte o cabo
brancomouse
(return)button
porta Stage 1 Out do FOH Rack e porta Stage 1 In do Stage Rack.
information:
2 Connect
the return snake to the Stage 1 Out port on the FOH Rack, and to the Stage 1 In port on the Stage Rack.
The connectors on Avids Digital Snake cable are color coded, so that the white cable connects to the white-outlined ports.
The names
of Commands,
Options, and
Settings
thatso
appear
Os conectores
dos cabos
Snake
Avid
codificados por cores, ento os cabos brancos conectam as portas com contorno
User
are helpful
hints Digital
for
getting
theda
TheTips
connectors
on Avids
Digital
Snake
cable are color coded, so that the white cable connects to the white-outlined ports.
on-screen
are
in a different
font.
When
the
system
is powered
up, the primary snake connection is indicated by a solid Active LED. If the Snake Signal LEDs flash,
branco.
a
Snakethe
connection
could notup,
bethe
established.
When
system is powered
primary snake connection is indicated by a solid Active LED. If the Snake Signal LEDs flash,
The following
symbols
are
used to highlight
Quando
o sistema
ligado,
a primeira
conexo indicada por um LED aceso (Active). Se os LED Snake Signal piscarem, a conexo no pde
a Snake connection
could not be established.
important
information:
If
there
are
problems
with
the Snake connection,
double check that all the BNC connectors are fully secured.
ser estabelecida.
Important Notices include information
that
could
affect your
data orwith
the performance
of
If there
thegetting
Snake the
connection,
double check that all the BNC connectors are fully secured.
User
Tips are
are problems
helpful hints
for
Se houver
your
system.problemas com a conexo Snake, cheque se todos os conectores BNC esto plugados de modo firme.

mouse shortcuts.
Signal LED
your system.
Signal
Cross References
pointLED
to related sections in
mouse shortcuts.
Signal LED
Signal LED

Redundant Snake
connects here
Redundant Snake
connects here
Connectors with white sleeves

attach to terminals with white labels
Connectors
white
sleeves
(Avid Digital with
Snake
Cable
only)
attach to terminals with white labels
(Avid Digital Snake Cable only)
Figure 7. Detail of Digital Snake cable connection between Stage Rack (left) and FOH Rack (right)
Figure 7. Detail of Digital Snake cable connection between Stage Rack (left) and FOH Rack (right)
Figura 7. Detalhe da conexo do cabo Digital Snake entre o Stage Rack (esquerda) e o FOH Rack (direita)
18
VENUE
Profile
18 Guia
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Redundant Snake
connects here
Redundant Snake
connects here
Connecting a Second Stage Rack

Stage Rack Features
Conectando
um
Segundo
Stage
Rack
Connecting
a
Second
Stage
Rack
If a second Stage Rack is used, an additional Snake Card must be installed in the FOH Rack. See the Snake Card Guide for more
information.
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Stage
Racks
Se umIfsegundo
placa adicional
Snake
deve
serininstalada
no
FOHSee
Rack.
Veja flat-panel
o Card
Guia Guide
Snake
Card
para mais
Video
Display
(15-inch
orthe
greater
VGA
display
a secondStage
StageRack
Rackisutilizado,
used, an uma
additional
Snake Card
mustCard
be installed
the FOH
Rack.
Snake
for
more
informaes.
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA
and
To connect
a
second
Stage
Rack:
information.
DVI supported.
1 Using
aI/O
BNC
cable
(included
with the additional Snake card), connect the Word Clock Out port on the first Snake card to the
Audio
Para
conectar
segundo
Stage
Rack:
To connect
aum
second
Stage
Rack:
Word Clock In port on the second Snake card.
Using a BNC
cable
(included
with
the additional
card), connect
Word
Clocka Out
onClock
the first
Snake
card to
theSnake
11Utilizando
um cabo
BNC
(fornecido
juntamente
com aSnake
placa adicional
Snakethe
Card),
conecte
portaport
Word
Out da
primeira
placa
Word
ClockWord
In port
onIn
the
Snake
Card
porta
Clock
dasecond
segunda
placacard.
Snake Card.
Word Clock BNC cable

Word Clock
BNC cable
Optional
Components

Word Clock connection between Snake cards
System Components
2 Connect the second Stage Rack to the FOH Rack with a Digital Snake cable. See Connecting the Stage Rack to the FOH Rack
Word Clock connection between Snake cards
page 18.
2on
Conecte
o segundo Stage Rack ao FOH Rack com um cabo Digital Snake. Veja Conectando o Stage Rack ao FOH Rack na pgina 18.
Near-field
monitor speakers
forRack
mix to
position
monitoring
2 Connect
the second
Stage Rack to the FOH Rack with a Digital Snake cable.
See Connecting
the Stage
the FOH
Rack
Included
Components
The
primary
and redundant
snake cables
must ter
be the
same length.
on page
18.
O cabo
principal
e o cabo redundante
devem
o mesmo
comprimento.
The
VENUE
Profile
console snake cables must be the same length.
primary
and redundant
(for Talkback)
VENUE Mouse Pad
Snake 1
VENUE Profile Guide
Rack(s) (see next)
Snake 1
Snake 2
Snake 2

Snake Card 1

Each Mix Rack
FOH
Stageor
Rack
1 Rack includes:
Snake Card 2
Snake Card 1
System Restore CD
Stage Rack 1
Mix Rack Options

Snake Card 2
I/O Options
Plug-in installer discs (if any) withSnake

pre-authorized
iLok
1


Snake
One FOH Link cable for connection
to a1VENUE console

Stage Rack 2
Snake 2
AO16 Analog
Card that provides 16 analog line level
FOH Output
Rack
outputs
Snake 2
FOH Rack
XO16Snake
Analog and Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
Primary
line level
Redundant
Snakeoutputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
Primary Snake
Redundant Snake
outputwith
compatible
with Aviom Personal Mixers and other
Stage
Rack
2 and word clock connections for fully redundant system
Figure 8. Digital
Snake
cable
2 Stage Racks

Figure 8. Digital Snake cable and word clock connections for fully redundant system with 2 Stage Racks
Figura 8. Cabo Digital Snake e conexes Word Clock para sistema redundante com 2 Stage Racks
IOx Input
and output expansion card that provides an additional 8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels of AES/EBU
digital I/O.
Conexes
de udio
Audio Connections
Stage
Rack Rack
Stage
Stage Rack Input Cards
Stage Rack Output Card
Figure 9. Audio connectors on Stage Rack

Figura
9. Conectores
udio no Stage Rack
Analog
Audio de
Inputs
(Balanced Female XLR Connectors)

Entradas
de udio
analgicas
(conectores
fmea
XLRsources
balanceados)
Connect
analog
mic-level
or line-level
input
to any
of the input connectors on any SRI Card.
Conecte fontes analgicas nvel de microfone ou nvel de linha a qualquer conector de entrada de qualquer placa SRI.
Analog Audio Outputs

Sadas de udio analgicas (conectores macho XLR balanceados)
(Balanced Male XLR Connectors)
Conecte
analgicosoutput
nvel de
linha (como(such
amplificadores
de potncia, crossovers ou caixas acsticas) a qualquer conector de
Connectdestinos
analog line-level
destinations
as
sada
da
placa
SRO.
power amplifiers, crossovers, or speakers) to any of the output
connectors on any SRO Card.
Entradas e sadas digitais
I/ORack inclui um opcional de entradas e sadas digitias, veja Entradas Digitais e Taxas de Converso na pgina 24.
Se Digital
seu Stage
If your Stage Rack includes a digital I/O option, see Digital Inputs and Sample Rate Conversion on page 24.
FOH Rack
Stage Rack Features
FOH Rack
Stage Racks are used with an FOH

Rack, and provide all 2-Track
stage
Com Mic Phantom Power
AES/EBU I/O
Monitor
2-TrackDigital
Outputs
can be used simultaneously,
supporting
up
to 96 total inputs.Format selector
Com Mic
Gain
Com Mic
2-Track
DVI
supported.
Input
S/PDIF I/O
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Analog I/O 18
2-Track Analog I/O

IO 8 analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or

section

IOx
section
Snake
(Optional)

System Components
Optional Components
Digital I/O 18
Analog I/O 916
Figura
10.10.
Conectores
de udio no FOH
Rack,
apresentando
(alto) e opcionais
Figure
Audio connectors
on FOH
Rack,
showingconectores
standard padro
IO connectors
(top) and
optionalof
IOx
connectors
(bottom)
transfer
Show
data; 512
MB or larger recommended)
Included
Components
Analog
Inputs
Outputs
Entradas
e sadasand
analgicas
(Conectores
balanceados
1/4
TRS)
All VENUE
Profile TRS
systems
include the following:
(Balanced
1/4-inch
Connectors)
VENUE
Profile console
Connect
the analog
inputs and outputs of external proces
Conecte as entradas e sadas analgicas de processadores
Two
(2)
IEC
power
sors
to
any
of
these
8
analog
output
input epairs.
(16analgicas
inputs
externos a qualquer um dos 8cables
pares
deand
entradas
sadas
and
output
pairs
are
available
if
the
IOx
option
is
installed.)
Monitor
mount
for VGA
screen
(screen not
(16 pares
de entradas
e sadas
ento
disponveis
se oincluded)
opcional IOx
est
insatalado).
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not included)
Connect
any analog
output
destination
(such as a recording
device
broadcast
feed)
to any of the outputs in this section.
or
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
Conecte qualquer destino analgico (como gravadores ou

VENUE
Profile
Connect
any
analog Guide
sound
sources
as a
CD player)
equipamentos
broadcast)
a qualquer
das(such
sadas
dessa
seo. to
any of
in thislights
section.
the
Twoinputs
(2) console
Conecte qualquer fonte sonora analgica (como um CD player)

aDigital
qualquer
uma and
das Outputs
entradas -desta
seo.only
Inputs
IOx Option
Rack(s) (see next)
(AES/EBU
Connectors)
Entradas
e Sadas
Digitais - Apenas com o opcional IOx
(Conectores
Connect
the
two-channel
outputs of exRacks, AES/EBU)
Software
CDs,digital
iLoks,inputs
and and
Cables
ternal processors to any of the 4 AES/EBU digital output and
Each
MixasRack
or this
FOH
Rack includes:
Conecte
entradas
e sadas
de dois canais de processadores
input
connectors
in
section.
externos
a
qualquer
um
dos
4
conectores de entrada e sada
System Restore CD
These connectors
support 24-bit, 48 kHz digital signals. InAES/EBU
nesta seo.
ECxwith
Ethernet
Installer CDconverted
put signals
otherControl
sample Software
rates are sample-rate
kHz.
Standalone
Software
Installer
to 48Estes
conectores
suportam
sinaisCD
digitais de 24-bit, 48 kHz.
Sinais deiLok
entradas
outras
taxasstoring
de amostragem
so convertidos
USB com
Smart
Key (for
para
48
kHz.
2-Track
Analog
Inputs
and
Outputs
(Balanced
1/4-inch
TRS Connectors)
Two
(2) IEC
power
cables
Entradas
e Sadas
2-Track
Onebalanceados
Link
cable
for connection
VENUE
console
(Conectores
TRS 1/4)
Connect
aFOH
2-track
analog
playback
source to
to athe
2-Track
analog inputs.
Stageuma
Rackfonte
includes:
Each
Conecte
sonora analgica de 2 canais s entradas
Connect a 2-track analog recording device to the 2-Track
analgicas
2-Track.
Two
(2) IEC power cables
analog outputs.
Conecte um gravador analgico de 2 canais s sadas analgicas

2-Track Digital Inputs and Outputs
2-Track.
(AES/EBU and S/PDIF Connectors)
Entradas e Sadas Digitais 2-Track
Switch the
2-Tracke digital
(Conectores
AES/EBU
S/PDIF)I/O between AES/EBU and S/PDIF
by moving the 2-Track Digital Format selector switch to the
Escolha entradas
e sadas
digitais
como formats
AES/EBUmay
e S/
corresponding
position. Only
one of
these digital
PDIF
movendo
o
seletor
2-Track
Digital
Format
para
a
posio
be active at a time.
correspondente. Apenas um desses formatos digitias pode estar

ativo por vez.

Connect a 2-channel digital playback source to the 2-Track
Headphones
Conecte umawith
fonte
sonora jack
de 2 canais entrada 2-Track
1/4-inch
AES/EBU
or ou
S/PDIF
input.
AES/EBU
S/PDIF
input.

Connect a 2-channel digital recording device to the 2-Track
(for Talkback)
Conecte
umoutput.
gravador digital de 2 canais sada 2-Track
AES/EBU
or S/PDIF
AES/EBU
ou S/PDIF
output.
Footswitches
(up
to 2)
These connectors support 24-bit, 48 kHz digital signals. In MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
put
other suportam
sample rates
are digitais
sample-rate
converted
signals
Estaswith
conexes
sinais
24-bit,
48 kHz. Sinais
BNC cables
(for connecting
Word clockso
between
the para
tode
48entrada
kHz.
com outras
taxas de amostragem
convertidos
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
48 kHz.
25-pin
D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
Monitor
Outputs
Sadas de Monitorao
(Balanced
1/4-inch
TRS Connectors)
(Conectores
balanceados
TRS 1/4)
Connect a monitor amplifier or powered monitors to the
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Conecte
umconnectors.
amplificador
de potncia ouOptions
monitores amplificados
Monitor
Output
aos conectores Monitor Output.
The
Headphone
Output
onsystems.
the
The Monitor
followingOutputs
optionsand
can the
be added
to VENUE
Profile
front
of
the
console
are
fed
by
the
Solo/Monitor
bus
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit
the
Avid do
As conexes Monitor Outputs e Headphone Output na frente
websiteso
(www.avid.com).
console
alimentados pelo bus Solo/Monitor bus.
Com Mic Connector

Conector Com Mic
Plug a dynamic or condenser microphone, or any compati-
Mix Rack Options
ble intercom system microphone into this connector.
Plugue um microfone dinmico ou condensador ou qualquer

I/O Options
sistema
de intercomunicao compatvel neste conector.
Com Mic Gain
AI16 the
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card overall
that provides
16 analog
Controle
de
Ganho
Mic
Turn
Com
MicCom
knob
to adjust
Com Mic
gain.
Gire o knob Com Mic para ajustar o ganho
AO16Input
Analogand
Output
MIDI
Output
outputs
Entrada
MIDI MIDI device to the MIDI In and MIDI
Connecte aSada
compatible
Out
ports.
Snapshots
receiveOutput
and send
MIDI
and
XO16
Analog
anddispositivo
Digital
thatcommands,
provides
8 analog
Conecte
um
MIDI Card
compatvel
s portas
MIDI In e
generate
and
respond
to
MIDI
Time
Code.
MIDI Out. Envia e recebe comandos MIDI e gera e responde a MIDI

Time Code.
Word
Clock
Word Clock
Pro16
Series devices.
If you
are integrating
digital devices with your VENUE system,
Se voc
est integrando
digitaisand
a seu
sistema
VENUE,
make
the necessary
Word dispositivos
clock connections
settings.
For
IOx Input
and output
expansion de
card
thatClock
provides an addi-Para
faa
as
conexes
e configuraes
Word
details,
see
Synchronizing
External Digital
Sourcenecessrias.
Devices
tional 8 channels
of analog I/O and 8 channels of AES/EBU
ondetalhes,
page 25. veja Sincronizando Dispositivos Digitais Externos, na
digital 25.
I/O.
pgina
om-
lonow-
Conexes da Console Profile
Talkback
Talkback
Profile Console Connections
Esta seo descreve as portas e os conectores da console VENUE

This section describes the ports and connectors on the VENUE
Profile. A maioria dos conectores esto no painel traseiro.
Profile console. Most connectors are on the Profile back panel.
Console Lights
Power
FOH Link
VGA
Footswitch
A entrada
(XLR)isest
superior.
A
TalkbackTalkback
input (XLR)
on no
thepainel
top panel.
Conector para microfone Talkback
Talkback Mic Connector

Plug
Plugue
um
a dynamic
Console Lights
System Requirements and

Compatibility
All of our guides use the following conventions

to indicate
USB
GPI
menu
choices
and
key
commands:
VENUE Profile back panel and connectors
hardware and software it has tested and approved.
conector.

Talkback Mic
menu
choices and key commands:
connector
:
Painel traseiro e conectores da VENUE Profile
Convention
Action
For complete
system requirements and a list of qualified comVGA
Display
puters,
systems,
hard
andconnector.
third-party deDisplay
VGA
File
> Save
Choose
Save drives,
from
the
Plug
aoperating
compatible
VGA display
into
this
File menu
vices, visit:
Plugue um monitor de vdeo VGA compatvel neste conector.
Control+N
the Control key
USB Keyboard Hold
anddown
Trackball
and press the N key
Teclado
e Trackball USB
Plug a compatible USB keyboard and Trackball (or mouse)
Control-click
Hold
down
the Controlon
keythe front the coninto the two available
USB
connectors
Registration
Plugue um teclado USB
e um
trackball
click
mouse
button ou mouse USB
sole (just below the and
faders
forthe
inputs
1724).
compatveis nestes dois conectores USB disponveis na frente da
Right-click
Click
withentrada
the right
Review
the enclosed
Registration
Information
console
(embaixo
dos fades
de
17 a 24). Card and folmouse
button
Other
Devices
low theUSB
instructions
on it to
quickly register your purchase on-
Outros
USB you become eligible to receive the followline.dispositivos
By registering,
VENUE
providesOptions,
USB ports
onSettings
the topthat
panel
(near the
The
namesProfile
of Commands,
and
appear
ing:
meters)
andoferece
onathe
back
panel.
these ports
to connect
on-screen
are
in
different
font.
VENUE
Profile
portas
USB Use
no painel
superior
(prximoiLok
aos
Technical
information
Smart
USBsupport
flash
disks
or other
compatible
USB devices.
meters)
eKeys,
no painel
traseiro.
Utilize
essas
portas para
conectar
The following
symbols
used
to highlight
iLok,
Software
updateare
and
upgrade
notices
chaves
dispositivos
de
armazenamento
USB ou outros.
The
Profile
console
provides
USB 1.1 ports. For best perforimportant
information:
useProfile
the faster
USB 2.0
ports USB
on the1.1.
MixPara
Rack mlehor
or
Amance,
console
oferece
portas
User
Tips
are to
helpful
forflash
getting
the
performance,
utilizehints
as
portas
USB
2.0
existentes
no Mix
FOH
Rack
connect
USB
disks
for data
transfer.
Rack
ou your
no FOH
Rack para conectar dispositivos USB para
most
from
system.
transferncia de dados.
FOH Link

FOH
Link
FOH
Link connects Profile to the Mix Rack or FOH Rack. One
FOH Link cable is included with each Mix Rack and FOH Rack.
yourconecta
system. a Profile ao Mix Rack ou FOH Rack. Um cabo FOH
FOH Link
Link fornecido com cada Mix Rack e FOH Rack.
Power

Alimentao
mouse
shortcuts.
Two
male,
3-pin IEC power sockets with cable retaining clips
aresoquetes
provided,macho
one for
each
internal
powerde
supplies.
Two
Dois
IEC
de of
3 the
pinos
com clipes
reteno
de
cabos
esto IEC
disponveis,
um para
cada unidade
de alimentao
standard
power cables
are provided
with each
console.
interna.
Dois cabos padro IEC so fornecidos com cada console.
Footswitch
1 and 2
Footswitch
1e2
Dois jaques fmea 1/4 TS esto disponveis para entrada de
Two female 1/4-inch TS footswitch jacks are provided for
switches. Os footswitches podem ser normalmente abertos ou
switch travados
input. Footswitches
can be As
normally
normally
fechados,
ou momentneos.
funesopen
para or
esses
jaques
latching
or momentary.
Functions are assigned to
soclosed,
definidas
na pgina
Options > Events.
these jacks on-screen in the Options > Events page.
Luzes da Console
Console
Lights
Dois
jaques XLR3-F
para conectar as luzes de console fornecidas.
Two XLR3-F jacks to connect to the included console lights.
microfone
dinmico
neste
or
condenser
mic into ou
this condensador
connector.
Convention
Talkback switch
Action
File
> Save
2-Track
switch
Choose Save from the Talkback level

File menu
Oscillator switch
Control+N
On/Talk switch

Route to
and press the N key
Selected
Control-click
Talkback microphone connector and controls
and Talkback
click the mouse button
Controles e conector de microfone
Talkback
Right-click Level
Thede
talkback
Nvel
Talkbackgain

button
formouse
this connector
is fixed at 20 dB.
Adjust
talkback
send level
by pressing
the Talkback
switch
The
names
of Commands,
Options,
and Settings
that appear
the
O Talkback/Osc
ganho para este
conector
turning
fixado em
20
dB. knob.
in
section
and
the
level
Ajuste o nvel de envio de talkback pressionando o switch

Talkback
Talkback naSwitch
seo Talkback/Osc e girando o knob de nvel.
Activate talkback by pressing the Talkback switch.
Switch Talkback
User Tips are helpful hints for getting the
most
your system.
CAN
Bus
Ative
ofrom
Talkback
pressionando o switch Talkback.
This
XLR3-M connector is not functional.
CAN Bus
Este conector XLR3-M no funcional.
GPI
Connections
your
system.
Conexes
GPI provides 8 channels of GPI input and output
VENUE
Profile
through
separate
25-pin
D-Subkeyboard
connectors
Shortcuts
show
you useful
or on the back panel.
A VENUE Profile oferece 8 canais de entrada e sada GPI atravs de
mouse shortcuts.
conectores
D-Sub de 25wiring
pinos diagrams
no painel and
traseiro.
For specifications,
pinouts, see
Chapter 29, Control Surface Reference.
ParaReferences
especificaes,
de fiao
Cross
point todiagramas
related sections
in e pinagem, veja o
Captulo
29, other
Referncias
da
Superfcie de Controle.
this
guide
and
VENUE
guides.
GPI Applications
Aplicaes
GPI
inputs GPI
are connected to the outputs of a variety of switching devices such as footswitches, momentary or latching
Entradas GPI so conectadas a sadas GPI de uma variedade de
push-button switches, or logic outputs of a larger show condispositivos seletores como footswitches, push-button momentneos
trol system. Example applications of GPI inputs include reou travados, ou sada de um sistema de controle maior.
mote
toggling
of a console
function
such
as Talkback,
muting
Exemplos
de aplicaes
de GPI
incluem
a alterao
remota
de uma
afuno
channel,
or
recalling
a
specific
snapshot.
da console como Talkback, Mute de canal e a chamada de
uma cena (snapshot) especfica.
GPI outputs connect to compatible inputs found on a variety

of
external
such as LEDs,
small relays,
sequenc- de
Sadas
GPIdevices
so conectadas
a entradas
de power
uma variedade
ers,
and
logic
inputs
on
show
control
systems.
dispositivos compatveis externos, como LEDs, rels de pequeno
porte, seqencers de energia e sistemas de controle de entradas.
m-
lonow-

System
Requirements and
Hardware
information
Stage
Rack warranty
Features
Compatibility
Exemplos
de
aplicaes
de
sadas
incluem:
Conventions Used in GPI
This
Guide
Stagecan
Racks
are
used compatibility
with an FOH Rack,
and provide
all for
stage
Avid
only
assure
and provide
support

uma
mquina
playback
deUp
efeitos
audio
for software
VENUE
Profile
systems.
to two
Stage quando
Racks
and
itde
has
tested
and
approved.
Allhardware
ofDisparar
our I/O
guides
use
the following
conventions
tosonoros
indicate

Conventions
Used in This Guide
Additional
Required
Components
All
ofUser
our Tips
guides
the following
conventions
to indicate
areuse
helpful
hints for getting
the
menu
choices
and
key
commands:
from
your system. must be purchased separately:
The most
following
components
Ligando
o Sistema
:

Convention
Actionquando o sistema ligado. Antes de
Os faders se movem
recommended;
1024x768
resolution). VGA and
Important
Notices
includeminimum
information
ligar o sistema,
certifique-se
de que that
todos os faders estejam
File
>
Save
Choose
Save
from the of
DVI
supported.
could
affect
your
data
or
the
performance
com seus cursos livres de obstrues.
uma
(snapshot)
especfica
chamada.
can
becena
usedand
simultaneously,
supporting
up to 96 total inputs.
menu
choices
key commands:
For complete system requirements and a list of qualified com puters,
Acender
uma luzsystems,
quandohard
um drives,
fader and
elevado
acima dede um
operating
third-party
Convention
Action
Audio
limiarI/O
mnimo.
vices, visit:
48 inputs withChoose
remotely
mic preamps and
File >Save
Savecontrollable
from the
Acender
ou piscar um LED ouphantom
sinal luminoso
como lembrete de
individually selectable
power.
File menu
:
File menu
your
system. and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
USB
keyboard
Control+N
Control+N
Ligardigital
e desligar
amplificadores
e key
outros sistemas adjacentes
outputs
perpress
Stagethe
Rack.
and
N
quando a VENUE Profile ligada ou desligada.
Registration
Control-click
Hold
down the
Synchronization and
Control
I/OControl key
andThis
clickcable
the mouse
a Digital Snake cable.
can bebutton
purchased directly
from Avid or assembled
by
your
preferred
vendor.
2Right-click
Racks:
Clicktowith
the right
Cross References point
related
sections in

Mix Rack
mouse button
ou this
guide and other VENUE guides.
Review the enclosedand

Registration
Information
click the mouse
button Card and fol-
the
Snake
totoenable
primary
As low
funes
GPI,connectors
assim on
como
as
configuraes
deredundant
footswitch
so
instructions
it
quickly
registerand
your
purchase (if
onRight-click
Click
with
the
right
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
realizadas
utilizando
as
Events
List
na
janela
Options
>
Events.
Para
line. By registering, you
become
eligible to receive the followbutton
mais
informaes, veja mouse
o captulo
22, Eventos.
ing:
Technical
supportGPI
information
The names
ofdispositivos
Commands,
Options,
Settings
that appear
Para
conectar
como and
gatilhos
da Profile:
on-screen
are in Components
aupdate
different
System
Software
andfont.
upgrade notices
1 Conecte
uma extremidade
do cabo D-Sub de 25 pinos (no
Hardware
warranty information
The following
arepainel
used traseiro
to highlight
includo)
portasymbols
GPI IN no
da Profile.
Optional Components
names
Stage
Rack e depois
FOH Rack
The
of Commands,
Options,
and Settings that appear
on-screen
are incomponents
a different font.
The following
are optional, and must be
3 Computadores conectados para gravao e/ou reproduo
USB de
flash
disk (or other
portable USB storage device for
4 Sistema
monitorao
de udio
Cada
de speakers
alimentao
temthe
seu prprio
interruptor
User
Near-field
monitor
mix
position
monitoring
Tipsunidade
are
helpful
hints for for
getting
que deve ser colocado na posio On para ser ligado.
from yourwith
system.
most
Headphones
1/4-inch jack
Included
Components
important
information:
2 Conecte
a outra
extremidade
sada GPI
All VENUE
Profile
systemsinclude
theapropriada
following:no dispositivo
User Tips are helpful hints for getting the
externo.
VENUE
Profile
console
most
from your
system.
Two
(2)
IEC
power
Para conectar dispositivos cables
GPI para serem disparados pela
Profile: Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen not included)
System
Requirements
Trackball
mount
notand
included)
could
affect
data (trackball
or the
of de 25 pinos (no
1 Conecte
uma your
extremidade
doperformance
cabo D-Sub
Compatibility
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
your
system.
includo) porta GPI OUT no painel traseiro da Profile.
can
VENUE
Avid
onlyProfile
assure Guide
compatibility and provide support for
2 Conecte
outra
extremidade
entrada
GPI apropriada no
Twoaand
(2)
console
lights
hardware
software
it has
tested
and
Shortcuts
show
you useful
keyboard
or approved.
dispositivo externo.
Protective
Dust Cover
mouse
shortcuts.
For complete system requirements and a list of qualified com Rack(s)

(see systems,
next)
puters,
operating
hard drives, and third-party dePara
especificaes,
diagramas de fiao e pinagem, veja o
vices,
visit:
Cross
References point to related sections in
Captulo
29, Referncias
da Superfcie
de Controle.
Racks,
Software
iLoks,
this guide
and other CDs,
VENUE
guides.and Cables
System Restore CD
Registration
Review the enclosed Registration Information Card and foliLok
USB Smarton
Key
(for
storing
plug-in
authorizations)
lowthe
instructions
it to
quickly
register
your
purchase on By
Plug-in
installer
discs
(if any)
with to
pre-authorized
iLok
line.
registering,
you
become
eligible
receive the following: Two (2) IEC power cables
Technical
information
One FOHsupport
Link cable
for connection to a VENUE console
Ligue
o sistema
na seguinte
sequncia:
and press
the N Systems
key
Digital
Snake show
Cable
(VENUE
Only)
Shortcuts
you
useful Profile
keyboard
or
Hold down
Control
The
connection
between
FOHthe
Rack
and key
Stage Rack requires
mouse
shortcuts.
1Control-click
Console
VENUE
Profile
um modo vital da console, como Solo in Place.

(for Talkback)
Important
Notices
include information that
Desligando
o Sistema
could
Footswitches
(up
to or
2) the performance of
affect your
data
your
MIDI
cables (for
connecting
external MIDI devices)
Desligue
osystem.
sistema
na seguinte
sequncia:

1 Sistema
de monitorao
de udio digital
All
ofShortcuts
our guides
useyou
the
following
conventions
to indicate
VENUE
system
anduseful
external
show
keyboard
ordevices)
menu
choices
and
key
commands:
mouse
25-pinshortcuts.
:
2 Computadores conectados para gravao e/ou reproduo

Convention
Action
Control+N
3 Racks:
File > Save
FOH Rack e depois
Stage
Rack
Choose
Save
from theOptions
this guide
and other
VENUE
guides.
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
ou
File menu

Mix Rack
The following
options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
4 Console VENUE Profileand press the N key

Control-click

Mix Rack Options

Configurando
o Relgio do Sistema
Right-click

mouse button
I/O Options
Quando
voc trabalha com um sistema Venue pela primeira vez,
certifique-se
que a hora,
a dataand
e a zona dethat
fusoappear
horrio do
The
ofde
Commands,
Options,
AI16names
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
thatSettings
provides
16 analog
relgio
do sistema
esto
ajustados
apropriadamente.
Essa
on-screen
are ininputs
a different font.
mic/line level
configurao
pode afetar a sincronizao de dados com dispositivos
de armazenamento
portties.
Vejahighlight
Transferindo Configuraes,
The
following
symbols
are used
AO16
Analog Output
Card
that to
provides 16 analog line level
Shows
e
Presets
na
pgina
175.
outputs
A hora
relgio
pode ser
apresentada
na barra de Status
Tips do
aresistema
helpful
for Card
getting
the provides
XO16User
Analog
and
Digitalhints
Output
that
8 analog
constantemente. Para mais informaes, veja Relgio do Sistema
most
from
yourand
system.
line
level 63.
outputs,
8 AES digital outputs.
na
pgina
Alterar oNotices
relgio include
do sistema
enquantothat
utiliza uma licena iLok
Important
information
output(para
compatible
with
Aviom
Personal
Mixers and
other de
um your
plug-in
em
de demonstrao
ou aluguel
could affect
data
orperodo
the performance
of
Pro16
Series
devices.
um
plug-in)
pode fazer expirar a autorizao do plug-in.
your system.
digital I/O.
mouse shortcuts.

Captulo
2: Configurao
e Conexo da VENUE Profile 23
this guide
and other
VENUE guides.
Enabling
SecondStage
Stage
Rack
Habilitando
um
Segundo
Stage
Rack
Enabling
a aSecond
Rack
DigitalInputs
Inputs
and
Sample
Rate
Entradas
Digitais
eSample
Converso
de Taxa de
Digital
and
Rate
Enabling a Second Stage Rack
Digital
Inputs
and
Sample
Rate
Conversion
Amostragem
Enabling
aconfirm
Second
Stagewith
Rack
Digital
Inputs and Sample Rate
Conversion
Tohabilitar
enable and
communication
the
Conversion
Para
e confirmar
a comunicao
com
o second
segundoStage
Stage
ToEnabling
enable and confirm
communication
with Rack
the second Stage
a
Second
Stage
Digital
Inputs
Sample
Rate
This section
describesand
how to
connect and
clock external digRack:
Conversion
To enable and confirm communication with the second Stage
Rack:
This
section
describes
how
to connect
and
clock
external
digEsta
seo
descreve
como
conectar
eand
sincronizar
dispositivos
Rack:
To Rack:
enable and confirm communication with the second Stage
This
section
describes
how
to
connect
clock external digConversion
ital devices to VENUE systems.
digitais
externos
ao sistema
VENUE
1 Put the system in Config mode.
ital
devices
to VENUE
systems.
Rack:
To
enable
and confirm
communication
with the second Stage
Put
theo system
in
mode.
1 1Coloque
sistema
noConfig
modo
Config.
Rack:
Gothe
to system
the Options
page and
click the System tab.
1 2Put
in Config
mode.
2 Go to the Options page and click the System tab.
2 V
para
a
pgina
Options
e
clique
aclick
abathe
System.
2
Go
to
the
Options
page
and
System tab.
Click
Edit.
2 3Go
to the
Options page and click the System tab.
3 Click Edit.
Click
Edit.
2 3Go
to the
Options page and click the System tab.
3 Clique
em
Edit.
Select
Enable Stage 2, and click Apply. The system restarts.
3 4Click
Edit.
4 Select Enable Stage 2, and click Apply. The system restarts.
Select
Enable Stage 2, and click Apply. The system restarts.
3 4Click
Edit.
4 Selecione
EnableStage
Stage2,2 and
e clique
sistema
reiniciar.
4 Select Enable
clickApply.
Apply.OThe
system
restarts.
4 Select Enable Stage 2, and click Apply. The system restarts.
Enabling the second Stage Rack

5 Go to
> Devices
to view hardware status. The contheOptions
second
Stage
Rack
5Enabling
Go to Options
> Devices
to view hardware status. The con5
Go
to
Options
>
Devices
toRack
viewshould
hardware
status. The
nection
to
the
second
Stage
be displayed
in conthe
Enabling
the second
Stagepara
Rackver
5 V
em Options
> Devices
o status do hardware. A conexo
nection
the second
StagetoRack
should
be displayed
in conthe
5 Go
totoOptions
Devices
view
hardware
status.
The
nection
to the>second
Stage
Rack
should be
displayed
in the
FOH Rack graphic.
nection
the second Stage Rack should be displayed in the
FOH
Racktographic.
FOH Rack graphic.
FOH
Rack graphic.
para
segundo
Rack
deve
ser exibida
no
FOH
Rack
graphic.
5 o
Go
totoOptions
> Devices
toRack
view
hardware
status.FOH
The
connection
theStage
second
Stage
should
be grfico
displayed
inRack.
the
Detail of Devices page showing connection to second Stage Rack

Detalhe
da pgina
Devicespage
mostrando
a conexo
do segundo
Stage Rack
Detail
of Devices
showing
connection
to second
Stage Rack

The
second
StageRack
Rackprecisa
must be
for the
Devices
tab
Oof
segundo
Stage
serenabled
habilitado
na
aba
Devices
Detail
DevicesStage
page showing
connection
to second
Rack
The
second
Rack must
be enabled
for theStage
Devices
tab
second
Rack
must
be
foroutput
the
Devices
toThe
display
theStage
correct
number
of enabled
inputplacas
and
cards tab
in
apresentar
o nmero
correto
de cards
entradas
topara
display
theStage
correct
number
of enabled
inputdeand
output
in e
The
second
Rack
must
be
for
the
Devices
tab
to
display
the
correct
number
of
input
and
output
cards
in
that unit.
sadas
na unidade.
that
unit.
second
Rack
must be
foroutput
the Devices
toThe
display
theStage
correct
number
of enabled
input and
cards tab
in
that
unit.
to display
that
unit. the correct number of input and output cards in
that unit.

Guide
24 24
GuiaVENUE
VENUEProfile
Profile
This
how
to connect and clock external digitalsection
devicesdescribes
to VENUE
systems.
This
section
how tothe
connect
clock
external
digital
devices
todescribes
VENUEincludes
systems.
If your
system
VENUEand
MADI
option,
see the
Se seu
sistema
inclui
opcionalMADI
VENUE
MADI,see
veja
your
system
includes
theoVENUE
option,
theo Guia
ital If
devices
to
VENUE
systems.
If your system
includes
thefor
VENUE
MADI option, see the
VENUE
MADI Card
guide
more information.
VENUE
MADI
para
maisfor
informaes.
VENUE
MADI
Card
guide
more information.
If your
system
includes
VENUE
MADI
option, see the
VENUE
MADI
Card the
guide
for more
information.
If your system
includes
thefor
VENUE
MADI option, see the
VENUE
MADI Card
guide
more information.
Viso
Geral
Overview
VENUE MADI Card guide for more information.
Overview
Overview
The
types
of
digital I/O
and connectivity
available varies
deOverview
Os
tipos
de
entradas
sadas
digitais e aavailable
conectividade
The types
of digital
I/Oe and
connectivity
varies disponvel
deThe variar
types
digital
I/O components
and componenetes
connectivity
available
varies
de-e a
pending
onof
your
system
and their
configuration:
Overview
pode
dependendo
dos
de
seu
sistema
pending on your system components and their configuration:
The
types ofon
digital
I/O andcomponents
connectivityand
available
varies depending
your system
their configuration:
configurao
deles:
The
digital
I/OMix
andRack
connectivity
available
varies (AES)
deMixtypes
Rack
The
VENUE
provides
a pairconfiguration:
of digital
pending
onof
your
system
components
and their
Mix Rack The VENUE Mix Rack provides a pair of digital (AES)
Mix
Rack
The
VENUE
Mix
Rack
provides
a
pair
of
digital
pending
on
your
system
components
and
their
configuration:
2-Track
inputs
and
outputs.
The
Mix
Rack
can
also
be
exMix Rack
O Mix
Rack
VENUEThe
oferece
um par
de
entradas
e(AES)
sadas
2-Track
inputs
and
outputs.
Mix Rack
also
be ex-(AES)
Mix
Rack
The
VENUE
Mix RackThe
provides
a can
pair
ofas
digital
2-Track
inputs
andadditional
outputs.
MixI/O
Rack
can
ex- para
panded
to
include
digital
(such
an be
XO16
digitais
2-Track
(AES).
O Mix Rack
tambm
pode
seralso
expandido
panded
to
include
additional
digital
I/O
(such
asalso
XO16
Mix
Rack
The
VENUE
Mix Rack
provides
a can
pair
ofan
digital
(AES)
2-Track
inputs
outputs.
The
Mix
Rack
be
expanded
to
include
additional
digital
I/O
(such
anplaca
XO16
incluir
entradas
e sadas
digitais
adicionais
(como
uma
XO16,
card,
to
add
8and
channels
of analog
output
and
8 as
channels
of
card,
to add
8 channels
of analog
output
and
8 as
channels
of
2-Track
inputs
and
outputs.
The
Mix
Rack
can
also
be
expanded
to
include
additional
digital
I/O
(such
an
XO16
para
adicionar
canaisMix
deofsadas
analgicas
e Word
88canais
de I/O.
sadas
card,
to
add output).
88channels
analog
output
and
channels
of
digital
(AES)
Rack
also
provides
clock
digital
(AES)
output).
Mix
Rack
alsooutput
provides
Word
clock
I/O.
panded
to
include
digital
I/O
(such
an
card,
to
add
8 channels
of
analog
and
8 as
channels
of I/O.
digitais
AES).
Ooutput).
Mixadditional
Rack
tambm
possui
entrada
eXO16
sada
Word
digital
(AES)
Mix
Rack
also
provides
Word
clock
card,
addVENUE
8 channels
analog
andWord
8 channels
ofand
FOH to
Rack
FOH
Racks
provide
many
digital
inputs
digital
(AES)
output).
Mixof
Rack
alsooutput
provides
clock
I/O.
Clock.
FOH Rack VENUE FOH Racks provide many digital inputs and
FOH Rack
VENUE
Racks
many
digitalclock
inputs
and
digital
(AES)
output).
Mix
Rack provide
also
provides
Word
I/O.
outputs,
which
canFOH
be
expanded
further
by adding
an IOx
or
outputs,
which
canFOH
be
expanded
further
by
adding
an IOxand
FOH
Rack
VENUE
Racks
provide
many
digital
inputs
FOH
Rack
O FOH
Rack
VENUE
oferece
muitas
entradas
eor
sadas
outputs,
which
can
be
expanded
by
adding
an IOx
or
VENUE
MADI
card.
FOH
Rack
alsofurther
provides
Word
clock
I/O.
VENUE
MADI
card.
FOH
Rack also
provides
Word
clock
I/O.
FOH
Rack
VENUE
FOH
Racks
provide
many
digital
inputs
and
outputs,
which
can
be
expanded
further
adding
an
IOx
or
digitais,
que
podem
serFOH
expandidas
com
aby
adio
de
uma
placa
VENUE
MADI
card.
Rack
also
provides
Word
clock
I/O.IOx
outputs,
which
can
be
expanded
further
by Word
adding
an
IOx
ou
VENUE
MADI.
O FOH
Rack
tambm
oferece
entrada
eadding
sada
VENUE
MADI
card.
FOH
Rack
alsocan
provides
clock
I/O.orWord
Stage
Rack
VENUE
Stage
Racks
be expanded
by
a
Stage
Rack VENUE Stage Racks can be expanded by adding a
Clock.
VENUE
MADI
card.card
FOH
also
provides
I/O.
Stage
RackInput
VENUE
Stage
Racks
can
be expanded
by
adding
DSI
Digital
toRack
add
8
channels
of Word
digitalclock
(AES
or a
DSI
Digital Input
card to add
8 channels
of digitalby
(AES or a
Stage
VENUE
Racks
beDigital
expanded
DSI Rack
Digital
Input
card
to
addacan
8DSO
channels
ofOutput
digitaladding
(AES for
or 8
ADAT)
input,
and Stage
by adding
card
ADAT)
input,
and card
byRacks
adding
a 8DSO
Digital
Output
card
for
8com
Stage
Rack
VENUE
Stage
Racks
can
be
expanded
by
adding
a a
Rack
Stage
VENUE
podem
ser
expandidos
DSI
Digital
Input
to
add
channels
of
digital
(AES
or for
ADAT) input,
and (AES
by adding
a DSO
DigitalDSI
Output
card
channels
of digital
or ADAT)
output.
cards
also
pro-8
channels
of uma
digital
(AES
or add
ADAT)
output.
DSI
cards card
also
proadio
de
placa
DSI
Digital
Input
para
adicionar
8 for
canais
de
DSI
Digital
Input
card
to
8
channels
of
digital
(AES
or
ADAT)
input,
and
by
adding
a
DSO
Digital
Output
8
channels
digital
vide
Wordof
clock
I/O.(AES or ADAT) output. DSI cards also proentradas
digitais
(AES
ou
ADAT)
eoutput.
uma
placa
DSO card
Digital
Output
vide
Word
clock
I/O.
ADAT)
input,
and
by
adding
a
DSO
Digital
Output
for
8
channels
of
digital
(AES
or
ADAT)
DSI
cards
also
provide Word clock I/O.
para
8 canais
deI/O
sadas
digitais
ou
ADAT).
placa
DSi
channels
of
digital
(AES
orasADAT)
output.
DSIAcards
proVENUE
digital
(such
the(AES
DSI
card)
operates
atalso
thetambm
vide
Word
clock
I/O.
VENUE
digital
I/Oe (such
as
theClock.
DSI card) operates at the
oferece
entrada
sada
Word
VENUE
digital
I/O
asof
the
card)
the
vide
Word
clock sample
I/O.(such
VENUE
system
rate
48DSI
kHz.
Theoperates
DSI cardatprovides
VENUE
system
sample
rate
of
48DSI
kHz.
Theoperates
DSI cardatprovides
VENUE
digital
I/O
(such
as
the
card)
the
VENUE
system
sample
rate
of 48
kHz. The
DSIinput,
card
provides
auto-detection
and
sample
rate
conversion
on
letting
As
entradas
eand
sadas
digitais
da
VENUE
(como
asatprovides
da
placa DSI)
auto-detection
sample
rate
conversion
on
input,
letting
VENUE
digital
I/O
(such
as
the
DSI
card)
operates
the
VENUE
system
sample
rate
of
48
kHz.
The
DSI
card
auto-detection
and variety
sample of
rate
conversion
on
input,
letting
you
connect
a
wide
digital
sources
without
having
operam
na
taxa
de
amostragem
de
48
kHz
do
sistema
VENUE. A
you
connect
a wide
variety
sources
without
having
VENUE
system
sample
rateof
ofdigital
48
kHz.
The
DSI
card provides
auto-detection
and
sample
rate
conversion
on
input,
letting
you
connect
a
wide
variety
of
digital
sources
without
having
to
be
concerned
with
synchronization
and
clock
connections.
placa
DSI
oferece
auto-deteco
e
converso
de
taxa
de
amostragem
to
be connect
concerned
with
synchronization
and clock
connections.
auto-detection
andwith
sample
rate
conversion
input,
letting
you
a wide
variety
of
digital
sources
without
having
be concerned
synchronization
andon
clock
connections.
natoentrada,
permitindo
a conexo de uma
grande
variedade de
you
connect
a wide
variety
of digital sources
without
having
to
be
concerned
with
synchronization
and
clock
connections.
Sample
Ratesem
Conversion
fontes
digitais
que sejaLatency
necessrio se preocupar com conexes
Sample
Rate Conversion
Latency
to
be
concerned
with
synchronization
and
clock
connections.
Rate Conversion
e Sample
sincronizao
do relgio. Latency
When Rate
sample
rate conversion
is enabled on DSI or other
Sample
Conversion
Latency
When sample rate conversion is enabled on DSI or other
When Rate
sample
rate conversion
is
enabled
on DSI
oraother
VENUE
digital
inputs,
input
signal
paths will
incur
small
Sample
Conversion
Latency
Latncia
da
Converso
de
Taxa
de
Amostragem
VENUE
digital inputs,
input signal
paths will
incur
aother
small
When
sample
rate
conversion
is
enabled
on
DSI
or
VENUE
digital
inputs,
input
signal
paths
will
incur
small
amount of latency. The following table illustrates thea sample
amount
of
latency.
following
table
illustrates
the
sample
When
sample
rateThe
conversion
is enabled
on
DSI
oraother
VENUE
digital
inputs,
input
signal
paths
will
incur
small
amount
of
latency.
The
following
table
illustrates
the
sample
Quando
a
converso
de
taxa
de
amostragem
est
habilitada
na DSI
rate conversion processing delay at various sample rates.
rate
conversion
processing
at various
sample
rates.
VENUE
digital
inputs,
signal
paths
will
incur
a rates.
small uma
amount
of
latency.
Theinput
following
illustrates
the
sample
ourate
outra
entrada
digital
dadelay
VENUE,
oat
sinal
de
entrada
sofrer
conversion
processing
delaytable
various
sample
Minimum
Additional
Latency
due to at
Sample
Rate
Conversion
amount
of
latency.
following
table
illustrates
the
sample
rate
conversion
processing
delay
various
sample
rates.
pequena
latncia.
A The
tabela
seguinte
apresenta
o delay
do
processo
Minimum
Additional
Latency
due
to Sample
Rate
Conversion
Minimum
Additional
Latency delay
due to at
Sample
Rate
Conversion
rate
conversion
processing
various
sample
rates.
deExternal
converso
para diferentes
taxasSRC
de amostragem.
Sample
Rate
Process
Delay
Minimum
Latency due to SRC
Sample
Rate Conversion
External Additional
Sample Rate
Process
Delay
External
SampleLatency
Rate due to Sample
SRC Process
Delay
Minimum
Additional
Rate Conversion
32
kHz
1.50
ms
External Sample Rate
SRC Process Delay
32 kHz
1.50 ms
32 kHz Sample Rate
1.50
ms
External
SRC
Process
Delay
1.09
ms
3244.1
kHz kHz
1.50
ms
44.1 kHz
1.09 ms
1.09
ms
3244.1
kHz kHz
1.50
ms
48 kHz
1.00
ms
44.1
1.09
ms
48 kHz
1.00 ms
48 kHz
1.00
ms
44.1
1.09
ms
0.848
4888.2
kHz kHz
1.00
ms ms
88.2 kHz
0.848 ms
0.848
4888.2
kHz kHz
1.00
ms ms
96 kHz
0.833
ms
88.2
0.848
ms
96 kHz
0.833 ms
96 kHz
0.833
ms
88.2
0.848
ms
96
kHz rate conversion (SRC) can
0.833
msbe disabled (DSI card
Sample
also
Sample
rate conversion (SRC) can0.833
also be
(DSI card
96
kHz
msdisabled
Sample
rateprovides
conversion
(SRC) can
also
be
disabled
card
only).
This
the lowest
possible
input
path (DSI
latency,
only).
This
provides
the lowest
possible
input
path (DSI
latency,
Sample
rate
conversion
(SRC)
can
also
be
disabled
cardand
only).
This
provides
the
lowest
possible
input
path
latency,
but
requires
that
care
be
taken
to
synchronize
the
source
A converso
de taxa
(Sample rate
conversion
but
requires
that
care de
be amostragem
taken
to
synchronize
the
source
and- SRC)
Sample
rateprovides
conversion
(SRC)
can
be
disabled
card
only).
This
the
lowest
possible
input
path
latency,
but ser
requires
that
care
be
taken
toalso
synchronize
the(DSI
source
and
other
devices
accordingly
(see(apenas
Synchronizing
pode
tambm
desabilitada
na placa External
DSI).
IssoDigioferece
other
devices
accordingly
(see Synchronizing
Digionly).
This
provides
lowest
inputExternal
path
latency,
but
requires
that
care the
bede
taken
topossible
synchronize
the
source
and
other
devices
accordingly
(see
Synchronizing
External
Digimenores
possibilidades
latncia
no sinal de entrada,
mas
requer
tal
Source
Devices
on
page
25).
tal
Devices
on page
25).Synchronizing
but
requires
that
care
be taken
to synchronize
the
source
and(veja
other
devices
accordingly
(see
External
Digia Source
sincronizao
adequada
da 25).
fonte
e de outros
dispositivos
tal
Source
Devices
on
page
other
devices
accordingly
(see
Synchronizing
External
Digital
Source
Devices
on
page
25).
Sincronizando Dispositivos Digitais Externos na pgina 25).
tal Source Devices on page 25).
Even
whenRack
SRC isFeatures
disabled, connecting an unsynchronized
Stage
Mesmo
quando
est desabilitado,
conectar
um
dispositivo
devicewhen
to a DSI
causes
SRC to automatically
be re-enEven
SRCoinput
isSRC
disabled,
connecting
an
unsynchronized
Even
when
SRC
is
disabled,
connecting
an
unsynchronized
no
sincronizado
a
uma
entrada
da
DSI
faz
que
seja
habilitado
Stage
Racks
are
used
with
an
FOH
Rack,
and
provide
all stage
abled. This
lets input
audio causes
continue
passing
without interruption.
device
to a DSI
SRC
to automatically
be re-ennovamente
forma
automtica.
Isso
o udio
continue
device
ade
DSI
input
causes
SRC
to permite
automatically
be
re-enaudiotoI/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up que
to two
Stage
Racks
abled. This lets audio continue passing without interruption.
aabled.
trafegar
sem
interrupo.
This
lets
audio continue supporting
passing without
can be
used
simultaneously,
up to interruption.
96 total inputs.
To manually disable Sample Rate Conversion:
Para
desabilitar
a Converso de Taxa de
To
manually
disablemanualmente
Sample
Rate Conversion:
1 Click
the
tab
and navigate
to the input channel being
I/OInputs
To Audio
manually
disable Sample Rate Conversion:
Amostragem:
fed
from
a digital
1 Click
the
Inputs input.
tab and navigate to the input channel being
na
48
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic
preamps
and
1Clique
Click
theaba
Inputs
tabeand
navigate
the input
channel
being
1fed
Inputs
navegue
at
otocanal
de entrada
alimentado
from
a
digital
input.
2 Click
the
channels
SRC OFF phantom
button until
it turns off.
individually
selectable
power.
fed
from
a digital
input.
pela
entrada
digital.
2 Click
channels
OFF button
until it up
turns
off.analog or
8the
analog
outputSRC
channels;
expandable
to 48
22Clique
boto
SRC
OFF
canal
at que
seitdesligue
.
Clickno
the
channels
SRCdoOFF
button
until
turns off.
Auto-Detecting
Auto-Detecting
Auto-deteco
The
DSI card (or other VENUE digital card) automatically deAuto-Detecting
tects
whether
an other
external
device
connected
to automaticamente
a DSI inputdeis
AThe
placa
DSI
outra VENUE
placa
digital
VENUE)
DSI
card (ou
(or
digital
card)
automatically
The
DSI
card
other
VENUE
digital
card)
automatically
de se
Snake
connectors
to enable
primary
and redundant
(if
detecta
um (or
dispositivo
digital
externo
conectado
entrada
synchronized
to
VENUE
system.
Here,
synchronized
tects
whether
an the
external
device
connected
to a DSI
input isest
tects
whether
an
external
device
connected
to
a
DSI
input
is
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
sincronizado
com
o
sistema
VENUE.
Aqui,
sincronizado
significa
means the device
is running
at 48 kHz,
andsynchronized
is clocked to the
synchronized
to the
VENUE system.
Here,
que
o dispositivo
est
rodandosystem.
a 48 kHz
sincronizado
ao sistema
synchronized
to(see
theSynchronizing
VENUE
Here,
synchronized
VENUE
system
External
Source
means
the
device
is running at 48 kHz,
and isDigital
clocked
to the
VENUE
(veja
Sincronizando
Dispositivos
Digitais
Externos
means
the
device
is
running
at
48
kHz,
and
is
clocked
to the na
Devicessystem
on page
25).
In this case, no
sample Digital
rate conversion
VENUE
(see
Synchronizing
External
Source
pgina
25).
Nesse
caso,
nenhuma
taxa
de
converso
requerida
VENUE
system
(see Synchronizing External Digital Source
is required
input.
Devices
onon
page
25). In this case, no sample rate conversion
System
Components
na
entrada.
Devices
on page 25). In this case, no sample rate conversion
Using
Word Clock
Out from
the Stage Rack
Additional
Required
Components
Utilizando
Word
ClockOut
Out from
do Stage
Using
Word
Clock
theRack
Stage Rack
(Stage
Rack
with placa
DSI Card)
(Stage
Rack com
DSI)from
Using
Word
Clock
Out
the
Rack
The following
components
must
be Stage
purchased
separately:
(Stage
Rack
with
DSIClock
Card)Out provided on the DSI card to
Connect
the
Word
Video
Display
(15-inch
(Stage
Rack
with DSI
Card)or greater flat-panel VGA display
Conecte
o
Word
Clock
Out
existente
placa
DSI
ao dispositivo
the
corresponding
digital
device.
Set thena
external
device
to
Connect
the Word
Clock
Outminimum
provided
on
the DSI
card
recommended;
1024x768
resolution).
VGAto
and
digital
correspondente.
Configure
o
dispositivo
externo
como
escravo
Connect
the
Word
Clock
Out
provided
on
the
DSI
card
to
slavecorresponding
to the incoming
word
clock Set
signal.
the
digital
device.
the
external
device
to
DVI
supported.
(slave)
do sinal Word
Clock
de entrada.
the
corresponding
digital
device.
Set the external device to
slave to the incoming word clock signal.
slave
to the
incoming
clock signal.(Windows compatible)
USB
keyboard
andword
trackball/mouse
Stage Rack
External digital device
External Snake
digital device
Rack
Digital
Cable (VENUE Profile Systems
DSI Stage
card Only)
Stage
Rack
AES (or ADAT)
DSI card
The connection between FOH Rack and
Stage Rack requires
DSI card
AES (or ADAT)
a Digital Snake cable.
This
cable
can
be
purchased
directly
AES (or ADAT)
BNC
Set device to slave to
BNC
BNC
incoming Word Clock
Optional
Components
incoming
Clockto
Set deviceWord
to slave
Using
word
clock
from
the DSI cardare
to
incoming
Word Clock
The
following
components
DSI Word Clock Out

DSI Word Clock Out
clock anDSI
external
device
optional,
and
be
Wordmust
Clock
Out
Utilizando
Clock
dathe
placa
DSI
paratosincronizar
dispositivo
externo
Using
word Word
clock
from
DSI
card
clock anum
external
device
purchased
separately:
Using
Word
from
Rackdevice
Using word
clockClock
from theOut
DSI card
to the
clockFOH
an external
Word
Clock
from the FOH Rack
Using
(Stage transfer
Rack with
DSIOut
Card)
is required on input.
ofClock
Show
data;
MB
or
larger
recommended)
Using
Word
Clock
Out
from
FOH
Rack
Utilizando
Word
Out
do512
FOHthe
Rack
If
external
device
not synchronized,
the VENUE
system
is the
required
on input.
Se
o dispositivo
externois no
est sincronizado,
o sistema
VENUE (Stage
Rack with DSI Card)
automatically
rate
conversion
on
those
inputs
automaticamente
se encarrega
da
converso
de
taxa
de
amostragem
Included
Components
If
the
external engages
device
issample
not synchronized,
the
VENUE
system
If
theifexternal
device
is not
the
VENUE
system
dessas
entradas,
mesmo
quesynchronized,
awas
converso
dedefeated.
taxa
amostragem
even
sample rate
conversion
manually
The
SRC
automatically
engages
sample
rate
conversion
onde
those
inputs
Allsido
VENUE
Profile
systems include
the
following:
automatically
engages
rateO
on those
inputs
tenha
anulada
manualmente.
LED
SRC
pisca
naon-screen
placa
DSI e
LED flashes
onrate
theconversion
DSIsample
card, was
and
a conversion
message
appears
even
if sample
manually
defeated.
The SRC
uma
mensagem
surge
na
tela
para
indicar
essa
condio.
even
if
sample
rate
conversion
was
manually
defeated.
The
SRC
VENUE
Profile
console
to indicate this condition.
LED flashes on the DSI card, and a message appears on-screen

LED flashes
on
the
DSI
card, and a message appears on-screen
OTwo
(2)de
IEC
power
status
SRC
no cables
afetado quando um canal de entrada
this
condition.
to indicate
to indicate
this
condition.
SRC
status
is
not
affected
an input
channel
is reset
resetadomount
por meio
dowhen
comando
Reset
Strip
do boto
Monitor
for VGA
screen
(screen
not
included)
via
right-click
Reset
Stripwhen
commands.
SRC
status
is
not
affected
an
input
channel
is reset
direito
do
mouse.
SRC
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
status is not affected when an input channel is reset
via right-click Reset Strip commands.
ASample
converso
da Mouse
taxa
de
amostragem
pode
ser habilitada
viaVENUE
Pad
rate
conversion
can
be enabled
or disabled
manually ou
right-click
Reset
Strip
commands.
desabilitada
manualmente
para entradas digitais:
for digital
inputs,
as follows:
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Sample
rate
conversion
can be enabled or disabled manually
Sample rate conversion can be enabled or disabled manually
digital
inputs,
asinputs
follows:
for
utilizando
entradas
placas
DSI,rate
a converso
Two
(2) AES
console
lights
Quando
When
using
on AES
DSI em
cards,
sample
converde
for digital
inputs, aspode
follows:
taxa
de
amostragem
ser
habilitada
ou
desabilitada
para cada
sion
be enabled
or Cover
disabled
forcards,
each sample
pair of inputs.
can
Protective
When
using
AESDust
inputs
on DSI
rate converpar
de entradas.
When
using AES inputs on DSI cards, sample rate conversion
be enabled
or(Optical)
disabledinputs
for each
inputs.
can
Rack(s)
(see
next)
When
using
ADAT
on pair
DSI of
cards,
sample
can beutilizando
enabled orentradas
disabled for
each
pair of em
inputs.
sion
Quando
ADAT
(Optical)
placas DSI,
rate
conversion
can be(Optical)
enabledinputs
or disabled
forcards,
all 8 channels.
When
using ADAT
on DSI
sample
aconverso
deADAT
taxa (Optical)
de amostragem
pode
ser habilitada
ou
When
using
inputs
on
DSI
cards,
sample
Enabling
orSoftware
disabling
on iLoks,
any
or
Racks,
CDs,
andchannel
Cables
rate
conversion
beSRC
enabled
or ADAT
disabled
for all enables
8 channels.
desabilitada
para can
todos
os
8 canais.
rate
conversion
can
be
enabled
or
disabled
for
all
8
channels.
disables all
ADAT
channels
thatchannel
DSI card.
Enabling
orother
disabling
SRC
on anyon
ADAT
enables or
Each Mix
Rack or FOH
includes:
Enabling
or disabling
SRCRack
on
ADAT channel
enables
or ou
Habilitar
emany
qualquer
ADAT
habilita
disables ou
all desabilitar
other ADATSRC
channels
on thatcanal
DSI card.
Switching
input
Source
between
AES
and
ADAT
(Optical)
disables
all
other
ADAT
channels
on
that
DSI
card.
desabilita
todos
os
outros
canais
ADAT
na
placa
DSI.
System Restore CD
ports retains
the Source
last sample
rate AES
conversion
setting
for that
Switching
input
between
and
ADAT
a
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Software
Installer
Alternar
fonte
deSource
entrada
entre
as
AES CD
e(Optical)
ADAT (Optical)
Switching
between
AESportas
and
ADAT
(Optical)
input retains
type input
and
channel
(AESrate
channel
pairs
only).
ports
the
last
sample
conversion
setting
for that
mantm
a ltima
converso
de amostragem
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD de taxa
portsretains
theconfigurao
last
sample de
rate
conversion
setting
for that
input
type
and
channel
(AES
channel
pairs
only).
para aquela entrada e canal (pares de canais AES apenas).
iLokand
USBchannel
Smart Key
storing
plug-in
authorizations)
inputAutomatic
type
(AES
channel
pairs
only).
detection
and(for
enabling
of
sample
rate converDeteco
automtica
e habilitao
converso
de
taxa
is always
in effect
and
sample
rate
conversion
Plug-in
installer
discs
(ifwill
any)engage
with
pre-authorized
iLokde
Automatic
detection
and
enabling
of da
sample
rate
converAutomatic
detection
and enabling
of e
sample
rate
converamostragem
esto
sempre
efetivas
acionaro
a
converso
sion
whenever
a
mismatch
is
detected
at
a
DSI
input,
even
is always
effect cables
and will engage sample rate conversion
Two
(2) IECin
power
sion
issample
always
in effect
andsempre
will
engage
ratefor
converde taxa
de amostragem
que sample
fordefeated
detectada
alguma
when
rate
conversion
is
manually
that
sion
whenever
a
mismatch
detected
at a
DSI
input,
even
sion
One
FOHnaLink
cableDSI,
foris
connection
to
a VENUE
console
diferena
entrada
mesmo
que
a
converso
de taxa
whenever
a
mismatch
is
detected
at
a
DSI
input,
even
input.
when sample rate conversion is manually defeated for that
de amostragem
sido desabilitada
manualmente
when
sample rate tenha
conversion
is manually defeated
for thatpara
Each
Stage entrada.
Rack includes:
input.
aquela
input.
Synchronizing
External
Two (2) IEC power
cables Digital Source
(Stage
Rack
with
DSIClock
Card)
Connect
the
Word
Out on the
Near-field
monitor
for
(Stage
Rack
com
placa
DSI)speakers
FOH
Rack to the
corremix position
monitoring
sponding
digital
device.
Set
the
external
device
to
slave
to
the
Connect
the Wordwith
Clock
Out on jack
the FOH Rack to the corre Headphones
1/4-inch
Connect
the
Word
Clock
Out
on
the
FOH
Rack
to
the
correincoming
word
clock
signal.
Conecte
o Word
Clock
Out external
do FOH device
Rack ao
dispositivo
sponding
digital
device.
Set the
slave
to cable
thedigital
Dynamic
or condenser
microphone
andto
mic
sponding
digital device.
Set the
device
toXLR
slave
to the
correspondente.
Configure
o external
dispositivo
externo
como
escravo
incoming
word
clock
signal.
Talkback)
incoming
(slave)(for
doword
sinalclock
Word signal.
Clock de entrada.
Stage Rack
External
digital device(up to 2)
Footswitches
(Stage Rack with DSI Card)
Stage Rack
External
digital
device
DSI card
MIDI
cables
(for connecting external
MIDIRack
devices)
Stage
External
digital
device
AES (or ADAT)
card between the

BNC cables (for connecting WordDSI
clock
DSI card
AES (or
ADAT)
VENUE system and
external
digital
devices)
AES (or ADAT)

incoming Word Clock
incoming
Clockto
Set deviceWord
to slave
incoming Word Clock
FOH Rack

FOH Rack
FOH Rack

BNC and options, visit the Avid
For details on all VENUE systems
BNC
BNC
Word Clock Out
Using word clock from the FOH Rack to clock an external

Worddevice
Clock Out
Mix Rack Options
Word Clock Out
Using word clock from the FOH Rack to clock an external device
Using
word Word
clockClock
from
FOH
Rack
clock anum
external
device
Utilizando
dothe
FOH
Rack
para to
sincronizar
dispositivo
externo
I/O Options

outputs
Devices Dispositivos
Sincronizando
Digitais Externos
Synchronizing
External
Digital

VENUE,
disabling
conversion
onamostragem
those
digitalnessas
inexternal sample
device
israte
running
at 48dekHz
and clocked
to
When
Venue,andesabilitar
a converso
de taxa
When
an
external
device is running
at 48
kHz
and clocked
to
puts provides
the
lowest
input
path
latency.
entradas
digitais
proporciona
a menor
latncia
no sinal
VENUE,
disabling
samplepossible
rate
conversion
onpossvel
those digital
in-de
VENUE,
disabling
sample
rate
conversion
on
those
digital
inentrada.
puts provides the lowest possible input path latency.

nected
toconverso
a digital
device
must
be synchroAntes
dasample
de taxathat
de source
amostragem
desabilitada
Before
ratesource,
conversion
is
defeated
onser
any
input
con- em
Before
sample
rate
conversion
is defeated
on anyesse
input
connized (clocked)
atconectada
48
kHz that
inaone
offonte
the
following
qualquer
uma
digital,
dispositivo
nected
toentrada
a digital
source,
source
device
must ways:
be synchronected
to
a digital source,
thatem
source
device
must bemaneiras:
synchrodeve
ser
sincronizado
a
48
kHz
uma
das
seguintes
nized (clocked) at 48 kHz in one of the following ways:
digital I/O.
Source
Synchronizing
External
Digital
Source
Devices
When
an
device
is running
at 48akHz
andeclocked
to
Devices
Quando
umexternal
dispositivo
externo
est rodando
48 kHz
sincronizado
Before
samplethe
ratelowest
conversion
is defeated
on latency.
any input conputs provides
possible
input path
nized (clocked) at 48 kHz in one of the following ways:
Chapter Chapter
2: Configuring
and Connecting
Profile
1: Introduction
to VENUE
Profile255
Chapter
2: Configuring
and Connecting
Profile
25 25
Captulo
2: Configurao
e Conexo
da VENUE
Profile
Utilizando
deAudio
udio Digital
do Sistema
Using Sadas
Digital
Outputs
from VENUE
the VENUE
System
Conecte qualquer sada digital entrada digital de um dispositivo

externo:
utilizeany
as sadas
doaMix
Rack
(se o
inclui
Connect
digital digitais
output to
digital
input
ofsistema
the external
uma
placa Use
XO16),
Stage
Rack on
(se the
o sistema
inclui
umasystem
placa DSO)
device:
digital
outputs
Mix Rack
(if the
also
ou includes
qualqueransada
FOH
Rack.
Configure
o dispositivo
XO16digital
card), do
Stage
Rack
(if the
system also
includes
externo
como
entrada
digital.
a DSO
card)escravo
or any (slave)
digitalda
output
on the
FOH Rack. Set the external device to slave to its digital input.
Stage Rack
DSI card
DSO card
AES (or ADAT)
AES (or ADAT)

from DSO card
incoming digital signal
-orany FOH Rack

digital audio output
FOH Rack
Utilizando
sada output
digital para
prover oclock
clock para
dispositivos
Using uma
a digital
to provide
to an
external externos
device
Utilizando
Using House
HouseClock
Clock
Connect a house or other external master clock signal to
Conecte um house ou outro sinal de clock master em Word

theInWord
Clock
In Distribua
on the FOH
Rack. clock
Distribute
thedispositivos
same
Clock
do FOH
Rack.
o mesmo
para os
house
clock
to
the
external
digital
device,
and
set
it
to
externos e configure-os como escravos (slave) desse slave
sinal to
de
the
incoming
house
word
clock
signal.
entrada.
Stage Rack
DSI card
AES (or ADAT)

incoming Word Clock
FOH Rack
BNC
BNC
House clock source

Word Clock In
Utilizando um clock master (house) distribudo para sincronizar o sistema VENUE e os
Using aexternos
distributed house (master) to clock a VENUE system and an
dispositivos
external device
Parte II: Descrio do Sistema
28
Captulo
3: 3:
Viso
Geral da
Superfcie
de Controle
Profile
Chapter
VENUE
Profile
Control
Overview
Stage Rack Features
Painel
Superior
da VENUE
Profile
VENUE
Profile
Top Panel
Audio I/O

DVI supported.

The following
figure
identifies
the
main
sections
ofconsole
the Profile
console:
48ilustrao
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic da
preamps
and
A seguinte
identifica
as sees
principais
Profile:

System Components
Included Components


VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE Profile Guide
Rack(s) (see next)


Meters

Bus Output
Mains
Optional Components
(for Talkback)


System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

iLok
Global
Modifiers
USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations)
I/O Options
AI16
A Input Channels 116 and
1724
B Assignable Channel Sections
(ACS)
mic/line
level inputs
C Output Masters Section
One FOH Link cable for connection to D
a VENUE
console
Master and Global Controls
Figure
VENUE
console
Each11.
Stage
RackProfile
includes:
Figura 11. Console VENUE Profile

outputs

Profile provides 24 bankable input channel strips in Input Channel sections,
an Assignable
Channel
Section
eight bankable
XO16 Analog
and Digital
Output
Card(ACS),
that provides
8 analog
A Profile oferece 24 rguas de canais de entrada agrupveis em bancos na seo Input Channel, uma Assignable Channel Section (ACS), 8
output channel strips plus a Mains fader in the Output Masters section, aslevel
welloutputs,
as globaland
controls
comprehensive
metering.
AES and
digital
outputs.
rguas de canais de sada agrupveis em bancos e um fader principal naline
seo Output
Masters, 8assim
como controle
globais e medidores.
Chapter 3: VENUE Profile Control Overview 29
digital I/O.
Captulo 3: Viso Geral da Superfcie de Controle Profile 29

Canais de Entrada e Faders

As sees de entrada oferecem 24 faders e outros controles para canais de entrada e FX Returns. Os canais de entrada esto organizados
Input
InputChannels
Channelsand
andFaders
Faders
em duas sees:
Input
Input
sections
sections
provide
provide
2424
faders
faders
and
and
other
other
controls
controls
for
for
Input
Input
Channel
Channel
and
and
FXFX
Returns.
Returns.
Input
Input
channels
channels
are
are
arranged
arranged
inin
two
two
secsec-
As rguas dos canais de entrada 1 a 16 esto esquerda da seo de sada master (Output Master Section), e as rguas dos canais de
tions:
tions:
Input
Input
channel
channel
strips
strips
116
116
are
are
toto
the
the
left
left
ofof
the
the
Output
Output
Master
Master
Section,
Section,
while
while
Input
Input
strips
strips
1724
1724
are
are
toto
the
the
right.
right.
Additional
Additional
entrada 17 a 24 esto direita. Canais adicionais podem ser agrupados aos 24 faders utilizando os switches Bank A, B, C e D. Todos os 24
channels
channels
are
are
banked
banked
toto
the
the
2424
faders
faders
using
using
the
the
Bank
Bank
A,A,
B,B,
CC
and
and
DD
switches.
switches.
AllAll
2424
input
input
channels
channels
bank
bank
together.
together.
canais de entrada podem ser agrupados.
Input
Input
faders
faders
116
116
can
can
also
also
bebe
assigned
assigned
toto
control
control
FXFX
Returns
Returns
18
18
oror
916,
916,
oror
the
the
output
output
EQ
EQ
(graphic
(graphic
EQ).
EQ).
Os faders 1 a 16 podem ser assinalados para controlar os FX Returns 1 a 8 ou 9 a 16, ou a equalizao da sada (EQ grfico).
Each
Each
input
input
channel
channel
strip
strip
includes
includes
a channel
a channel
fader,
fader,
channel
channel
Select,
Select,
Mute
Mute
and
and
Solo
Solo
switches,
switches,
a rotary
a rotary
encoder,
encoder,
LCD
LCD
display
display
area
area
and
and
Cada canal de entrada inclui um fader de canal, switches Select, Mute e Solo, um controle rotativo, rea no display LCD e Meter para nvel do
meters
meters
for
for
channel
channel
level
level
and
and
gain
gain
reduction.
reduction.
The
The
encoders
encoders
and
and
associated
associated
assignment
assignment
switches
switches
access
access
Gain,
Gain,
Pan,
Pan,
HPF,
HPF,
Compressor
Compressor
canal e reduo de ganho. Os codificadores e os switches associados a eles do acesso a Gain, Pan, HPF, thresholds de Compressor e Gate
and
and
Gate
Gate
thresholds
thresholds
and
and
Aux
Aux
sends.
sends.
Each
Each
bank
bank
of
of
eight
eight
input
input
channels
channels
provides
provides
a
two-row
a
two-row
LCD
LCD
display
display
that
that
shows
shows
channel
channel
e Aux. Cada banco de oito canais de entrada oferece um display LCD de duas linhas que mostra o nome do canal, o nome dos
parmetros,
name,
name,
parameter
parameter
names,
names,
values
values
and
and
other
other
data
data
as
as
appropriate
appropriate
for
for
the
the
current
current
action.
action.
valores ou outros dados referentes a ao em curso.
Additional
Additional
input
input
parameters
parameters
are
are
controlled
controlled
byby
selecting
selecting
one
one
oror
more
more
channels
channels
to
make
make
them
them
the
target
target
ofof
the
the
ACS.
ACS.
Parmetros
adicionais
de entrada
so
controlados
selecionando
um
ou mais
canaistocomo
alvo
do the
ACS.
Clip
Clip
and
and
Safe
Safe
LEDs
LEDs
Bus
Bus
Assign
Assign
LEDs
LEDs
Meters
Meters
Encoders
Encoders
and
and
LEDs
LEDs
Encoder
Encoder
Switches
Switches
LCD
LCD
Display
Display
Select
Select
Solo
Solo
Mute
Mute
Bank
Bank
A/B/C/D
A/B/C/D
Faders
Faders
18
18
FXFX
Returns/GEQ
Returns/GEQ
Figura
12.12.
Controles
de
entrada(Input
(Canais
de
entrada18
118
a shown)
8) shown)
Figure
Figure
12.Input
Input
controls
controls
(Input
Channels
Channels
LED
ClipLED
Clip
Clip
LED
LED Safe
Safe
Safe
LED
LED
OThe
LED
Bank
Clip
Indicator
selights
acende
para indicar
umclip
clip
de
sinal
The
Bank
Bank
Clip
Clip
Indicator
Indicator
lights
toto
indicate
indicate
a meter
a meter
clip
on
on
an
an
em
um Channel
canal
de or
entrada
ou FXatReturn
na posio correspondente
Input
Input
Channel
or
FXFX
Return
Return
at
the
the
corresponding
corresponding
position
position
inin
no
banco
de canais.
indicador
obedece
s obeys
mesmas
regras
de
anan
alternate
alternate
bank
bank
ofEsse
of
channels.
channels.
This
This
indicator
indicator
obeys
the
the
same
same
apresentao
de
clip
dos
medidores
dos
canais
de
entrada
(como
clipping
clipping
threshold
threshold
display
display
rules
rules
asas
the
the
Input
Input
Channel
Channel
meters
meters
configuradas na pgina Options > Interaction). E oferece indicao
(as(as
setset
inin
the
the
Options
Options
>>
Interaction
Interaction
page).
page).
It It
gives
gives
you
you
anan
indiindido nvel de sinal extremo de um layer atualmente oculto (offcation
cation
of
of
extreme
extreme
signal
signal
level
level
in
in
a
currently
a
currently
hidden
hidden
bank).
The
The
Safe
Safe
LED
LED
indicates
indicates
either
either
anan
input
input
strips
strips
Automation
Automation
safe
safe
Safe, Solo Safe ou Bank Safe, dependendo da configurao do
status,
status,
Solo
Solo
safe
safe
status,
status,
or
or
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
status,
status,
depending
depending
on
on
the
switch Input Safe. Veja Switches Input Safe na pgina 65. the
current
current
Input
Input
Safe
Safe
Switch
Switch
setting.
setting.
See
See
Input
Input
Safe
Safe
Switches
Switches
onon
page
page
65
65
Modo Auto Safe Se o LED Safe est aceso, o canal no responder
(off-bank)
(off-bank)
layer.
layer.

3030 VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
Automation Safe, Solo Safe, ou Bank Safe

Automation
AutomationSafe,
Safe,Solo
SoloSafe,
Safe,ororBank
BankSafe
Safe
O LED Safe indica o status da rgua de entrada entre Automation
a mudanas de cena (snapshots). Se o LED est apagado, o canal
Auto
Auto
Safe
Safe
Mode
Mode
If
the
the
Safe
Safe
LED
LED
is is
lit,lit,
the
the
channel
channel
will
will
not
not
re-re-pelas
responder
a If
todas
as
alteraes
aplicveis
comandadas
spond
spond
to
to
Snapshot-driven
Snapshot-driven
changes.
changes.
If
If
the
the
LED
LED
is
is
off,
off,
that
that
mudanas de cena (sujeitas s atuais configuraes Recall Safe, se
channel
channel
will
will
respond
respond
to
any
any
applicable
applicable
changes
changes
driven
driven
byby
a funo
Recall
Safe to
est
habilitada).
Snapshots
Snapshots
(subject
(subject
toto
the
the
current
current
Recall
Recall
Safe
Safe
settings,
settings,
if if
Recall
Recall
Safe
Safe
is is
enabled).
enabled).
SoloSafe
SafeMode
ModeSe
If othe
Safe
LED
is flashing,
the channel
will
Input
Channel
Metering
Solo
LED
Safe
est
aceso, o canal
no responder
Medidores
de Canal
de Entrada
respondde
to Solo
solo commands
(it mutado
will not be
another
anot
comandos
(ele no ser
se muted
o botoif de
Solo de
SoloSolo
SafeSafe
Mode
If the
SafeSafe
LEDLED
is flashing,
thethe
channel
willwill
Mode
If the
is flashing,
channel
Channel
Each
Input
ChannelMetering
provides
a gain reduction meter, input
Input
Channel
Metering
channels
button is pressed).
the LED
is off, that
chanoutro
canal solo
for acionado).
Se o LEDIfestiver
apagado,
o canal
ser Input
Cada
canaland
de LEDs
entrada
oferece
medidores
de stereo
reduo
de ganho
not
respond
to
solo
(it will
notnot
be muted
if another
not
respond
tooutro
solo
commands
(it
will
be
muted
if another
level
meter,
toMetering
indicate
EQ,
Gate, and
status.
Rack
Features
Solo
Safe
Mode
Ifcommands
the
Safe
LED
isem
flashing,
the
channel
will
Additional
Required
Components
Input
Channel
silenciado
quando
for
colocado
Solo.
nelStage
will
be
silenced
when
soloing
another
channel.
Each
Input
Channel
provides
aLEDs
gain
reduction
meter,
input
Solo
Safe
Mode
If the
Safe
LED Ifisthe
flashing,
the
channel
will
Each
Input
Channel
provides
a gain
reduction
meter,
input
e
nvel
de
entrada,
alm
de
para
indicar
EQ,
Gate
e status
Input
Channel
Metering
channels
solo
button
is
pressed).
LED
is
off,
that
chanchannels
solo
button
is
pressed).
If
the
LED
is
off,
that
channot
to solo
commands
(it
will not be
muted
if another
Solorespond
Safe
Mode
If the
Safean
LED
is flashing,
the
channel
will
Input
Channel
Metering
level
meter,
and
LEDs
to
indicate
EQ,
Gate,
and
stereo
status.
not
respond
to
solo
commands
(it
will
not
be
muted
if
another
estreo.
level
meter,
and
LEDs
to
indicate
EQ,
Gate,
and
stereo
status.
Stage
Racks
are
used
with
FOH
Rack,
and
provide
all
stage
The
following
components
must
be
purchased
separately:
Each
Input
Channel
provides
a
gain
reduction
meter,
input
nel
will
be
silenced
when
soloing
another
channel.
nel
will
be
silenced
when
soloing
another
channel.
Bank
Safe
Mode
Ifobutton
the
is piscando
flashing
rapidly,
thethat
chanBank
Safe
Mode
Se
LEDSafe
Safe
est
rapidamente,
o canal
channels
solo
isLED
pressed).
If the
LED
is off,
chan- Comp
Metera gain reduction meter, input
EachGain
InputReduction
Channel provides
not
respond
to
solo
commands
(it will
not
betwo
muted
if
another
channels
solo
button
is pressed).
If the
LED
is off,
that
chanaudio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
tobanco
Stage
Racks
level
meter,
and(15-inch
LEDsprovides
to indicate
EQ,
Gate, and
stereo
status.
permanece
no
topo
do
layer
do
fader
quando
um
diferente
(A a
nelnel
remains
in
place
on
the
top
fader
layer
when
a
different
Video
Display
or greater
flat-panel
VGA
display
Each
Input
Channel
a gain
reduction
meter,
input
will
be
silenced
when
soloing
another
channel.
level
meter,
and
LEDs
to
indicate
EQ,
Gate, and
stereo
status.
channels
is
pressed).
If
theup
LED
is
that
chanMedidor
de
Reduo
de Ganho
ereduction
Compresso
Safe
Mode
If button
the
Safe
LED
is flashing
rapidly,
the
channel
will
besolo
silenced
when
soloing
another
channel.
Bank
Safe
Mode
If the
Safe
LED
is do
flashing
rapidly,
the
chancan
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
to
96off,
total
inputs.
Comp
Gain
Reduction
Meter
A
3-segment
meter
displays
gain
for
the
channel
Comp
Gain
Reduction
Meter
D)Bank
selecionado
(ele
ser
desvinculado
agrupamento
em
bancos
Bank
(AD)
is
selected
(it
will
be
unlinked
from
console
bankrecommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA
and
level
meter,
and
LEDs
to
indicate
EQ,
Gate,
and
stereo
status.
nel
will be
silenced
when
soloing
another
channel.
nel
remains
inMode
on
the
top
fader
layer
when
different
nel
remains
in
place
on
the
top
fader
layer
when
a the
different
Bank
Safe
Ifest
the
Safe
LED
flashing
rapidly,
chan- compressor/limiter.
da
console).
Se
oplace
LED
ois
canal
segue
oa agrupamento
Green LEDs
are used for all segments.
Comp
Gain
Reduction
Meter
ing).
If the
LED
is
off,
theapagado,
channel
follows
banking.
DVI
supported.
Um
display
de
3
segmentos
apresenta
a
reduo
de
ganho
para o
Bank
Safe
Mode
If
the
Safe
LED
is
flashing
rapidly,
the
chanA
3-segment
meter
displays
gain
reduction
for
the
channel
A 3-segment
displaysMeter
gain reduction for the channel
Comp
Gainmeter
Reduction
Bank
(AD)
is selected
(it will
betop
unlinked
from
console
bankAudio
I/O
Bank
(AD)
is
(itthe
will
be fader
unlinked
from
console
bankpor
bancos.
nel
remains
inselected
place
layer
when
a the
different
Bank
Safe Mode
If theon
Safe
LED
is
flashing
rapidly,
chan- compressor/limiter.
compressor/limiter
do
canal.
LEDs
verdes
so
utilizados
para
todos
Comp
Gain
Reduction
Meter
nel
remains
in
place
on
the
top
fader
layer
when
a
different
Green
LEDs
are
used
for
all
segments.
A
USB
keyboard
anddisplays
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
compressor/limiter.
Green
LEDs
used
forfor
allthe
segments.
ing).
If the
LEDLED
is off,
the
channel
follows
banking.
3-segment
meter
gain are
reduction
channel
ing).
If
the
is off,
the
channel
follows
banking.
Pressing
a(AD)
channel
Safe
switch
for
Selected
Channel
togBank
is
will
bethe
unlinked
from
console
bank remains
48
inputs
with
controllable
preamps
and
nel
inselected
placeremotely
on(it
the
top
fader
layermic
when
a different
osComp/Lim
Asegmentos.
3-segment meter displays gain reduction for the channel
Bank
(AD)
is
selected
(it
will
be
unlinked
from
console
bankPressionar
othe
switch
Safe
umchannel.
canal para
os canais
selecionados
compressor/limiter.
Green LEDs
used forfor
allthe
segments.
glesing).
theindividually
current
state
ofde
that
Gain
Reductionmeter displays
If
LED
isselectable
off,
the
channel
follows
banking.
A
3-segment
gain are
reduction
channel
phantom
power.
Bank
is selected
(itswitch
will
unlinked
from
console
bankcompressor/limiter.
Green LEDs
are
used for all
segments.
Pressing
a(AD)
channel
Safe
switch
forbefor
the
Selected
Channel
toging).
If
the
LED
is
the
channel
follows
banking.
Pressing
a channel
Safe
the
Selected
Channel
togDigital
Snake Cable (VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
altera
o estado
atual
dooff,
canal.
Comp/Lim
Comp/Lim
compressor/limiter. Green LEDs are used for all segments.
ing).
Ifanalog
the
LED
is
off,
the
channel
follows up
banking.
8the
output
channels;
expandable
to 48 analog or
glesgles
the
current
state
ofSafe
that
channel.
Reduction
current
state
of
that
channel.
Gain
Reduction between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
Pressing
a channel
switch
for the Selected Channel togGain
The
connection
Comp/Lim
Pressing
a
channel
Safe
switch
for
the
Selected
Channel
togdigital outputs per
Stage Rack.
Bus
Assignment
Indicators
Input
Level
Comp/Lim
gles
the current
state
of switch
that channel.
Indicadores
de Bus
Gain Reduction
a Digital
Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
Pressing
a channel
Safe
for the Selected Channel toggles
the current
state
of that channel.
Gain
Reduction
Comp/Lim
from
Avid
Bus
glesAssignment
the
current
stateIndicators
ofIndicators
that I/O
channel.
These
green
LEDs indicate
Group
bus assignments, and can
Bus
Assignment
Gain
Reduction
Input
Level
Input
Level
Synchronization
and
Control
Estes
LEDs verdes indicam
os endereamentos
de bus, e tambm
Gate LED
EQInput
In/Out
alsoBus
showAssignment
VCA or Mute Group
membership for each channel.
Indicators
Level
podem
VCA
ou Mute
Group
para
cada
canal.
These
green
LEDs
indicate
Group
bus
assignments,
andand
cancan
These
green
LEDs
indicate
Group
bus
assignments,
apresentar
Snake
connectors
toIndicators
enable
primary
and
redundant
(if
Bus
Assignment
Input Level
By
default,
Group
bus
assignment
is
displayed.
Por
padro,
o endereamento
de membership
busamembership
VENUE
apresentado.
Optional
Components
Bus
Assignment
Indicators
GateGate
LEDLED
EQInput
In/Out
also
show
VCA
or
Mute
Group
for for
each
channel.
EQ In/Out
also
show
VCA
or
Mute
Group
each
channel.
applicable)
connection
to
FOH
Rack.
Level
These
green
LEDs
indicate
Group
bus assignments,
and
can
Stereo
These
green
LEDs
indicate
Group
bus
assignments, and can
By default,
Group
bus
assignment
is
displayed.
By
default,
Group
bus
assignment
is
displayed.
Gate and
LED
EQ
In/Out
also
show
VCA
or Mute
Group
membership
for eachand
channel.
Input
channel
meters
and LEDs are optional,
The
following
components
These
green
LEDs
indicate
Group
bus assignments,
can
EQ
In/Out
Gate LED must be
also
show
VCA
or Mute
Group
membership
for each channel.
Stereo
Stereo
By
default,
Group
bus
assignment
is
displayed.
LR
C/M
purchased
separately:
EQ In/Out
Gate LED
alsodefault,
show VCA
or Mute
Group membership
for each channel.
By
Group
bus assignment
is displayed.
Medidores
e LEDs
dos canais
deLEDs
entrada
Input
channel
meters
andand
LEDs
Input
channel
meters
Stereo
Input
Level
Meter
By default, Group
bus
assignment
is
displayed.
Stereo
USB
flash
disk
(or
other
portable
USB storage device for
System
Components
LR LR
C/MC/M
Input channel meters and LEDs
18
Stereo
transfer
of
Show
data;
512level
MB or
larger
recommended)
Medidor
dometer
Canal
de Entrada
Input
Level
Meter
Input
channel
meters
and
LEDs
A
6-segment
displays
input
and
indicates
clipping.
Input
Level
Meter
LR
LR
Stereo 18
Pan 18
Included
Components
LR
C/M
C/M
C/M
18
Stereo
Pan 18
All VENUE
Profile
Stereo
Pansystems include the following:
Busde
Assign
indicator
an Input
Channel
LEDs
indicao
de BusLEDs
em umon
canal
de entrada
18
VENUE
Profile
Stereo
Pan console
Stereo LEDs
Pan LEDs
Group
Bus
Assignment
Bus
Assign
indicator
on an
Channel
Bus
Assign
indicator
on Input
an Input
Channel
Endereamento
de
Bus
Two (2)
IEC
power cables
Stereo
Pan
Assign
indicator
on an channel
Input Channel
IfBus
theBus
LRBus
LED
is lit, LEDs
the input
feeds the Left and
Group
Assignment
Group
Assignment
Assign
Monitor
mount
foron
VGA
screen
(screen not included)
Bus
indicator
LEDs
an Input
Channel
Right
SeBus
o Main
LED
vermelho
LR
est
aceso,
o
canal
de
entradamode
alimenta
busses
in
either
LR
or
LCR
panning
(re- os
Assign
indicator
on an channel
Input Channel
Assignment
IfGroup
LRBus
LED
ismount
lit,
the
input
feeds
theLR
LeftLeft
andandno
Ifprincipais
Trackball
(trackball
included)
the
the
LR
LED
iseLEDs
lit,
the
input
channel
the
busses
Left
Right
tanto
nonot
modo
defeeds
pan
quando
Group
gardless
ofBus
theAssignment
Stereo
Pan
LED
status).
Right
Main
busses
in
or LCR
mode
(reRight
Main
busses
in
either
LR
or
panning
mode
(reGroup
Bus
Assignment
LCR
doLR
status
doLCR
LEDpanning
Stereo
Pan).
If(independentemente
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
the
LR
LED
is either
lit,
the
input
channel
feeds
the
Left
and
If the
LR
LED
islit,lit,
the
input
channel
feeds
the
Left and
If
the
C/M
is
the
input
channel
feeds
the
C (center)
gardless
of
the
Stereo
Pan
LED
status).
gardless
ofLED
the
Stereo
Pan
LED
Right
Main
busses
in
either
LRstatus).
or LCRfeeds
panning
mode
(reIf VENUE
Profile
Guide
the
LR LED
is lit,
the input
the Left
and
Right
Main
busses
in
either
LR channel
or LCR panning
mode
(re-
bus
from
the
panest
in LCR
mode,
orde
theentrada
M (mono)
bus before
Se
o LED
C/M
aceso,
o LED
canal
alimenta
o bus C
gardless
of
the
Stereo
Pan
status).
If
the
C/M
LED
is
lit,
the
input
channel
feeds
thethe
C (center)
the
C/M
LED
isinlit,
the
input
channel
feeds
C (center)
Main
busses
either
LR
or
LCR
panning
mode
(reIf do
Two
(2)
console
lights
gardless
of
the
Pan
LED
status).
theRight
pan.
Stereo
channels
are summed
toM
the
mono
bus.
(centro)
modo
deStereo
pan LCR
ou o
bus
(mono)
antes
do pan.
bus
from
the
pan
in
LCR
mode,
or
the
M (mono)
busbus
before
bus
from
the
pan
in
LCR
mode,
or
the
M
(mono)
before
gardless
of
the
Stereo
Pan
LED
status).
If
the
C/M
LED
is
lit,
the
input
channel
feeds
the
C
(center)
estreo
Protective
Dust
Cover
Canais
so
somados
ao channel
bus
mono.
theLED
C/M
LED
is lit,
lit,
the
input
channel
feedsthe
thecorreC (center)
IfaIf
bus
(18)
is
the
is feeding
thebus
pan.
Stereo
channels
are are
summed
the
mono
bus.
the
pan.
Stereo
channels
summed
toM
the
mono
bus.before
the(see
pan
in
LCR
ortothe
(mono)
bus
theGroup(s).
C/M
isan
lit,
theismode,
input
channel
thefeeding
C (center)
If from
Rack(s)
bus
from
the LED
pannext)
LCR
mode,
orchannel
the Mfeeds
(mono)
bus
before
sponding
Ifin
LED
off, the
is not
the
pan.
Stereo
channels
summed
to
the
mono
bus.
Se
um
LED
de
bus
(1
8)are
est
aceso,
canal
alimenta
o(s)
If
aIf
bus
LED
(18)
is
lit,
the
channel
feeding
the
correa bus
LED
(18)
isalit,
the
channel
isoM
feeding
the
correfrom
the
pan
in
LCR
mode,
oristhe
(mono)
before
the
pan.
Stereo
channels
are
summed
to
the
mono
bus.
thatbus
Group.
The
Bus
Indicators
can
also
show
VCA
andbus
Mute
grupo(s)
correspondente(s).
Se
o
LED
est
apagado,
o
canal
no
sponding
Group(s).
If an
is off,
thethe
channel
is
not
feeding
sponding
Group(s).
If
an
ischannel
off,
channel
isthe
not
feeding
the
pan.
Stereo
channels
are
summed
the
mono
bus.
If membership.
a bus
LED (18)
isLED
lit,LED
the
is
feeding
correRacks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
andto
Group
alimentando
If aGroup.
bus
LED
(18)
is
lit, the
channel
isCables
feeding
theand
correest
aquele
grupo.
Os
indicadores
deVCA
bus
tambm
thatsponding
Group.
The
Bus
Indicators
can
also
show
VCA
and
Mute
that
The
Bus
Indicators
can
also
show
Mute
Group(s).
If
an
LED
is
off,
the
channel
is
not
feeding
If a bus
LED
(18)
lit,LED
the
is
feedingisthe
apresentam
VCA
ouor
Mute
Group
para
cada
canal.
sponding
Group(s).
Ifis
an
ischannel
off,
the
channel
notcorrefeeding
Each
Mix
Rack
FOH
Rack
includes:
Group
membership.
Group
membership.
that
Group.
The
Bus
Indicators
can
also
show
VCA
and
Mute
Use
the
Bus
Assign
switches
to
route
and
assign
the
cursponding
Group(s).
an LED is off,
is not
feeding
that Group.
The BusIfIndicators
can the
alsochannel
show VCA
and
Mute
System
Restore
CD
Group
membership.
rently
selected
channels
to
busses
(see
Assignable
Channel
Utilize
os
de Bus Assign
para
rotear
ethe
assinalar
os
that
Group.
The
Bus
Indicators
can
also
show
VCA
and
Mute
Group
membership.
Use
the
Busswitches
Assign
switches
to route
andand
assign
cur-curUse
the
Bus
Assign
switches
to route
assign
the
on page Control
34).
Section
ECx
Ethernet
Software
Installer
CD (veja Seo
canais
atualmente
selecionados
para
os busses
Group
membership.
rently
selected
to busses
Assignable
Channel
rently
channels
to busses
(see
Assignable
Channel
Use
theselected
Buschannels
Assign
to(see
route
and
the
curde
Atribuio
de
Canalswitches
-Installer
ACS na
pgina
34).assign
Section
Standalone
Software
Use
the
Bus
Assign
switches
toCD
route and
assign the curon
page
34).
Section
on
page
34).
VCA Membership
rently
selected
channels
to busses
(see and
Assignable
Channel
Use
the
Bus
Assign
switches
to
route
assign
the
currently
selected
channels
tostoring
busses (see
Assignable
Channel
iLok
USB
Smart
Key
plug-in
authorizations)
Section
on
page
34).(for
Adeso
VCA
rently
selected
channels
to
busses
(see
Assignable
Channel
When
VCA
Show
Members
mode
is
enabled,
Group
indicaVCAVCA
Sectioninstaller
on pagediscs
34). (if any) with pre-authorized iLok
Membership
Membership
Plug-in
on page
34).
tors flashSection
to indicate
VCA
membership.
VCA
Membership
VCA
Show
Members
mode
is enabled,
indica When
Quando
o(2)
modo
VCA
Show
Members
estGroup
habilitado,
os
VCA
Show
Members
mode
is enabled,
Group
indicaWhen
Two
IEC
power
cables
VCA
Membership
indicadores
de
grupo
piscam
indicando
adeso
ao
VCA.
tors
flash
to
indicate
VCA
membership.
tors
flash
to
indicate
VCA
membership.
VCA
Membership
VCA Link
Showcable
Members
mode is enabled,
Group
indicaWhen
One
FOH
for connection
to a VENUE
console
Mute
Groups
When VCA Show Members mode is enabled, Group indicators flash to indicate VCA membership.
When
VCA
Show
Members
mode is enabled,
indicators
flash
to
indicate
VCA
membership.
When
the
Mute
Groups
Show
Members
switch isGroup
pressed,
Mute
Groups
Mute
Groups
Each
Stage
Rack
includes:
Mute
Groups
flash
to indicate
VCA
thetors
Group
indicators
flash
to membership.
indicate Mute Group assign-
Two
(2)
IEC
power
cables
Mute
Groups
When
the
Mute
Groups
Show
Members
switch
is pressed,
When
the
Mute
Groups
Show
Members
switch
is pressed,
Quando
o switch
Mute
Groups
Show
pressionado,
MuteA Groups
ments.
flashing
LED
indicates
that Members
the channel
is assigned os
the
Group
indicators
flash
to
indicate
Mute
Group
assignthe
Group
indicators
flash
to indicate
Mute
Group
indicadores
de
grupo
piscam
indicando
o
endereamento
de Mute
Mute
Groups
When
the
Mute
Groups
Show
Members
switch
isassignpressed,
to the
corresponding
Mute
Group
(18).
When
Mute
Groups
Show
Members
switch
is
pressed,
ments.
A flashing
LEDLED
indicates
that
thethe
channel
is assigned
ments.
A the
flashing
indicates
channel
isassignassigned
Group.
Um
LED
piscando
indica
que
othat
canal
est
atribudo
para o
the
Group
indicators
flash
to
indicate
Mute
Group
When
the
Mute Groups
Show
Members
pressed,
the
Group
indicators
flash
Muteswitch
Groupisassignto the
corresponding
Mute
(18).
Mute
correspondente
(1Group
ato
8).indicate
toGroup
the
corresponding
Mute
Group
(18).
ments.
A
flashing
LED
indicates
that
the
channel
is
assigned
Stereo
PanALED
the
Group
indicators
to indicate
Mute
Groupisassignments.
flashing
LEDflash
indicates
that the
channel
assigned
to the corresponding Mute Group (18).
ments.
A flashing LEDMute
indicates
that
the channel is assigned
toLED
the
corresponding
Group
(18).
LED
Stereo
Pan
Stereo
Pan
LEDLED when the channel
This
indicates
is assigned to a stereo
Stereo
Pan
to the corresponding Mute Group (18).
Groups
bus.
Stereo
Pan LED when the channel is assigned to a stereo
This
LEDLED
indicates
This
indicates
the
channel
is assigned
Este Stereo
LED
indica
quando
o canal
est
endereado
para to
uma stereo
bus de
Pan
LED when
Stereo
Pan
LED
Groups
bus.
grupo
estreo.
Groups
bus.
This LED indicates when the channel is assigned to a stereo
This LED indicates when the channel is assigned to a stereo
Groups
bus.
This LED
indicates when the channel is assigned to a stereo
Groups
bus.
Groups bus.
Input
channel
meters
and
Bi-color
LEDs
are
used
for LEDs
all
segments,
as shown
in monitoring
the fol Near-field
monitor
speakers
for mix
position
Input
Level
Meter
A Um
6-segment
meter
displays
input
level
and
indicates
clipping.
A 6-segment
meter
displays
input
level
and
indicates
clipping.
Input
Level
Meter
display
de
6
segmentos
apresenta
oall
nvel
de light
entrada
e indica
lowing
table.
Clipping
is
indicated
when
LEDs
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack as shown in thered.
Level
Meter
Bi-color
LEDs
are
used
for
all segments,
folBi-color
LEDs
are
used
for
all
segments,
asusados
shown
in clipping.
the
folos
a Input
ocorrncia
de
clips.
LEDs
bicolores
para
todos
A
6-segment
meter
displays
input
levelso
and
indicates
A
meter
displays
input
level
and
indicates
clipping.
6-segment
Dynamic
or
condenser
microphone
and
XLR
mic
cable
lowing
table.
Clipping
isapresentado
indicated
when
all
LEDs
light
red.
segmentos,
conforme
na
tabela
seguinte.
O
clip
lowing
table.
Clipping
is indicated
when
all
LEDs
light
red.
Bi-color
LEDs
are
used
for
all
segments,
as
shown
in
the
folFor
meter
scales,
see
Channel
Meters
on
page
115.
A
6-segment
displays
input
level and
indicates
Bi-color
LEDsmeter
are
used
all
segments,
shown
in clipping.
the fol(forquando
Talkback)
indicado
todos
osfor
LED
acendem
emasall
vermelho.
lowing
table.
Clipping
is
indicated
when
LEDs
light
red.
Bi-color
LEDs
are
used
forChannel
all segments,
asall
shown
in
thered.
foltable.
Clipping
indicated
when
light
meter
scales,
see see
Channel
Meters
on
page
115.
For
meter
scales,
Meters
onLEDs
page
115.
ForFootswitches
(up
tois2)
EQlowing
Status
LED
lowingPara
table.
Clipping
is
indicated
when
all
LEDs
light
red.
graduao
medidores,
veja
Medidores
de
For meter
scales,
seedesses
Channel
MetersMIDI
on
page
115.
MIDI
cables
(for connecting
external
devices)
For
meter
scales,
Channel
Metersason
page
115.
Canal
na
pginasee
115.
EQsingle
Status
LED
A
red
LED
indicates
EQ
In/Out status
shown
in the
EQ
Status
LED
For meter
see Channel
Meters
page 115.
BNC
cablesscales,
(for connecting
Word
clockonbetween
the
following
table.
EQ Status
LED
A LED
single
red
LED
indicates
In/Out
status
as shown
in the
A single
red
LED
indicates
EQ
In/Out
status
as shown
in the
EQ
Status
LED
VENUE
system
andEQ
external
digital
devices)
EQ
Status
EQ
Status
LEDindicates
following
table.
following
table.
A
single
red
LED
EQ
In/Out
status
as
shown
in the
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
to
GPI
devices)
Color
EQ Status
A single
red vermelho
LED
indicates
In/Out status
as shown in
the
Um
nico LED
indicaEQ
a existncia
de equalizao
conforme
following
table.
single red
LED indicates EQ In/Out status as shown in the
following
table.
aA
tabela
Color
EQ EQ
Status
(none)
Not
in circuit
Color a seguir.
Status
following table.
Color
EQ
Status
(none)
Notcircuit
in circuit
Red
In
(none)
Not
in Expansion
circuit
Color
EQ
Status
VENUE
Profile
Options
Color
EQ Status
(none)
Not
in
circuit
Red(none)
In
circuit
Red
In circuit
Not
incan
circuit
The following
options
be added to VENUE Profile systems.
Stereo
Channel
LED
(none)
Not
in circuit
Red
In
circuit
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and options, visit the Avid
Red Channel LED
In circuit
Stereo
A single
yellow
LED indicates
Stereo
Channel
LED a stereo input channel. The stewebsite
Red (www.avid.com).
In circuit
reoStereo
channel Channel
LED flashes
if a 10 dB or greater offset is detected
LED
A single
yellow
LEDLED
indicates
a stereo
input
channel.
TheThe
ste-steA
single
yellow
indicates
a stereo
input
channel.
Stereo
between
leftChannel
and right LED
inputs.
LED
Stereo
Channel
LED
Stereo
Channel
LED
reo
channel
LED
flashes
if
a
10
dB
or
greater
offset
is
detected
reo
channel
LED
flashes
if
a
10
dB
or
greater
offset
is
detected
A single
yellow
LED indicates a stereo input channel. The steMix
Rack
Options
A
single
LED
indicates
a stereo input channel. The stebetween
leftyellow
and
right
inputs.
between
left
and
right
inputs.
reo
channel
LED
flashes
if a 10adB
or greater
offset
is detected
Color
Channel
Status
A single
yellow
LED
indicates
stereo
input
channel.
The ste- O
Um
nico
LEDLED
amarelo
indica
canal
de offset
entrada
estreo.
reo
channel
flashes
if a 10um
dB
or
greater
is detected
between
left
and
right
inputs.
I/O
Options
reodo
channel
LED
flashes
ifse
a 10
dBdiferena
or greaterde
offset
is detected
LED
canal
estreo
pisca
uma
10
dB
ou
maior
between
left
and
right
inputs.
Color
Channel
Status
(none)
Mono
Color
Channel
Status
detectada
as right
entradas
esquerda e direita.
between entre
left and
inputs.
AI16
Analog Mic/Line
Input
Card that provides 16 analog
Color
Channel
Status
(none)
Mono
Yellow
Stereo
(none)
Mono Status
Color
Channel
mic/line
level inputs
Color
Channel
(none)
Mono Status
Yellow
Stereo
Yellow
Stereo
(none)
Mono
Gate
Status
AO16
AnalogLED
Output
(none)
MonoCard that provides 16 analog line level
Yellow
Stereo
outputs
Yellow
Stereo
Gate
Status
LED
A
single
bi-color
LED
shows the current Expander or Gate staGate
Status
LED
Yellow
Stereo
tus.
For
LED
scales,
see
Gate
StatusCard
LEDthat
on page
115.8 analog
GateAnalog
Status
LED
XO16
and
Digital
Output
provides
A single
bi-color
LED
shows
thethe
current
Expander
or Gate
sta-staA single
bi-color
LED
shows
current
Expander
or Gate
Gate
Status
LED
line
level
outputs,
and
8 AES
digital
outputs.
Gate
Status
LED
tus.
For
LED
scales,
see
Gate
Status
LED
on
page
115.
tus.
For
LED
scales,
see
Gate
Status
LED
on
page
115.
A single
bi-color LED shows the current Expander or Gate staLED
Gate Status
A single bi-color LED shows the current Expander or Gate status.
For
LED
scales,
see
Gate
Status
LED
on page or
115.
AT16
A-Net
Output
Card
that provides
16Expander
channels
ofGate
A-Net
A single
bi-color
LED
shows
current
status.
For LED
scales,
see
Gatethe
Status
LED
on page 115.
Um
LED compatible
bicolor apresenta
o status atual
de Expander
ou Gate.
Para
output
with
Aviom
Personal
Mixers
and
other
tus. For LED scales, see Gate Status LED on page 115.
graduao
desse
medidor,
veja
Led
de
status
de
Gate
na
pgina
115.
IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an additional 8 channels ofChapter
analog3:I/O
and Profile
8 channels
AES/EBU31
VENUE
ControlofOverview
digital I/O.
Captulo 3: Chapter
Viso
Geral
daVENUE
Superfcie
deControl
Controle
Profile
31
3: VENUE
Profile
Control
Overview
31 31
Chapter
3:
Profile
Overview
Chapter3:1:VENUE
Introduction
VENUEOverview
Profile 531
Chapter
Profile to
Control
Input Encoders and Assignment Controls

Codificadores
e Controles
de Atribuio
Input
Encoders
and Assignment
Controls
Each input
channel features
one assignable input
encoder that
Pan
Pan assigns the encoders to control channel Pan if the chan-
caninput
be assigned tofeatures
control one
a variety
of channel
such
Each
inputfunctions
encoder
that
Cada
canal de channel
entrada apresenta
umassignable
controle rotativo
que pode
ser
as
input
gain,
HPF
corner
frequency,
pan/balance/width,
and
can bepara
assigned
to control
a variety of
atribudo
controlar
uma variedade
dechannel
funesfunctions
do canal such
como
parameters
ofdo
built-in
Dynamics
processes.
asspecific
input
gain,
HPF
corner
frequency,
pan/balance/width,
and
ganho,
freqncia
de corte
HPF,
pan/balance/widht
e parmetros
nelassigns
is mono,
stereo channel
balance
if a Pan
stereo.
ThechanPan
habilita
osor
codificadores
para
controlar
o Pan
se
oindicacanal
Pan
the
encoders
to control
channel
if the
tor
LED
lights
when
the
pan
is
at
center.
mono,
ou
o
balano
estreo
do
canal,
se
ele
estreo.
O
indicador
nel is mono, or stereo channel balance if a stereo. The indicaLED pisca quando o Pan est no centro
tor LED lights when the pan is at center.
The Encoder Assignment switches, located to the left of the

row
of encoders,
determine
the function
the
on
Encoder
Assignment
switches,
locatedof
toesquerda
the encoders
left of
Os The
switches
Encoder
Assignment,
localizados
dathe
linha
Input
Channels.
The
LCD
displays
the
current
function
(see
de row
codificadores,
determinam
a funo
dessesofcontroles
nos canais
of encoders,
determine
the function
the encoders
on
Input
Channel
LCD
Display
on
page
33).
de Input
entrada.
O displayThe
LCD
apresenta
a the
funo
atualfunction
(veja Display
Channels.
LCD
displays
current
(see
Comp Thrsh
especficos
para os processadores
de dinmica
embutidos.
specific parameters
of built-in Dynamics
processes.
LCDInput
de Canal
de Entrada,
na pgina
Channel
LCD Display
on33)
page 33).
Pan
Pan
Comp Thrsh
Comp
CompThrsh
Thrsh assigns the encoders to control the Threshold for
Comp
Thrsh habilita
os codificadores
para controlar
o toggles
limiar do
the built-in
Compressor/Limiter.
encoder
Comp
Thrsh assigns
the encodersPressionar
toPressing
control the
the
Threshold
for
compressor/limiter
incorporado.
o
codificador
alterna
the
effect in
and out of circuit. If
the LED is encoder
lit the effect
is in
the
built-in
Compressor/Limiter.
Pressing
toggles
entre
adicionar
ou retirar o efeito do
circuito.the
Se o LED est
aceso, o
circuit.
the
effect
out of circuit. If the LED is lit the effect is in
efeito
estin
noand
circuito.
circuit.
Gate
Thrsh
Gate
Thrsh
Gate
GateThrsh
Thrsh assigns the encoders to control the Threshold for
Gate Thrsh habilita os codificadores para controlar o limiar do
Encoders
Encoders
LCD
LCD
Encoder Assignment Switches

Encoder
Assignment
Switches
Input
encoders,
assignment
switches, and LCD
Codificadores
de entrada,
switches de
atribuioand
e LCD
Input encoders,
assignment
switches,
LCD
Rotary and Switch Functionality

Funcionalidade
de Switches
e Controles Rotativos
Rotary and Switch
Functionality
The rotary encoders on VENUE consoles are dual-function

controls
provide
and
switch
functions.
Indeaddition
rotarythat
encoders
onrotary
VENUE
consoles
dual-function
Os The
codificadores
nas consoles
VENUE
soare
controles
dupla
to
adjusting
parameters
by
turning
the
encoder,
you
can
togfuno
que that
funcionam
como
switches
ou controles
rotativos.
Alm
controls
provide
rotary
and switch
functions.
In addition
gle
parameters
(such
as
taking
the
high-pass
filter
in
or
out
de to
ajustar
parmetros
girando
o
controle,
voc
pode
alternar
entre
adjusting parameters by turning the encoder, you can tog-of
circuit)
by pressing
the
encoder
parmetros
(como
adicionar
ou
retirar
filtro passa-altas
gle parameters
(such
as
taking
theoknob.
high-pass
filter indo
orcircuito)
out of
pressionando o knob.
circuit) by pressing the encoder knob.
Encoder LEDs
LEDs dos Codificadores
Encoder
LEDs
Two types
of LEDs surround each encoder:
Dois
tipos
de
LEDs
cercam
cada
The
LED
around
thecodificador:
encoder
displays the relative posiTwo
types
of ring
LEDs
surround
each
encoder:
tion of its currently assigned parameter.
LED
The que
LEDcircunda
ring around
the encoder
displays
the relative
posiO
o codificador
apresenta
a posio
relativa
do
tion
of
its
currently
assigned
parameter.
Below
each
encoder
is
an
indicator
LED,
which
indicates
paparmetro atualmente atribudo a ele.
rameter
status
(in/out),
default
setting,
other indicates
conditions
Below each
encoder
is an
indicator
LED,orwhich
pa-re-
Abaixo
de the
cada codificador
existe um LED indicativo de status
lated to
encoder
rameter
statuscurrent
(in/out),
defaultfunction.
setting, or other conditions rede parmetros (in/out), configuraes padro ou outras condies
lated
to
the
current
encoder
function.
Switchesin
the Encoder
assign each of the following
relacionadas
funo
atual dosection
codificador.
parameters
to Encoder
the Inputsection
encoders:
Switches
in the
assign each of the following
Os switches na seo Encoder habilitam os seguintes parmetros
parameters to the Input encoders:
para os codificadores de entrada:
Gain
Gain
Gain
Gain assigns the encoders to control input gain according to
the range available for this input (head amp gain for analog
Gain
assigns
the encoders para
to control
input
gain according
Gain
habilita
os codificadores
controlar
o ganho
de entradato
do
inputs,
digital
gain for
digital
or(head
line inputs).
Pressing
and
the
range
available
this
input
amp
gain
for analog
canal
de
acordo
com afor
gama
disponvel
para
essa
entrada
(ganho
holding
the encoder
initiates
inPressing
which the
digital
gain for
digital analgicas
orGain
line Guess,
inputs).
andpara
de inputs,
amplificao
para
entradas
e ganho
digital
VENUE
system
automatically
sets
a
nominal
inputthe
gain level
entradas
digitais
ou
nvel
de
linha).
holding the encoder initiates Gain Guess, in which
based on
the incoming
signal.
VENUE
system
automatically
sets a nominal input gain level
Pressionar
e
segurar
o
codificador
based on the incoming signal. inicia o Gain Guess, em que o
sistema VENUE automaticamente configura um ganho de nvel de

entrada
nominal
baseado
32 VENUE
Profile
Guide no sinal recebido.
the Thrsh
built-in
Expander/Gate.
Pressing
the
encoder
toggles
the
Expander/Gate
incporporado.
Pressionar
o codificador
alterna
entre
Gate
assigns
the encoders
to control
the Threshold
for
effect
in
and
out
of
circuit.
If
the
LED
is
lit
the
effect
is
in
ciradicionar
ou
retirar
o
efeito
do
circuito.
Se
o
LED
est
aceso,
o
efeito
the built-in Expander/Gate. Pressing the encoder toggles the
cuit.
est
no
effect
incircuito.
and out of circuit. If the LED is lit the effect is in circuit.
HPF
HPF
HPF
HPF assigns the encoders to control the HPF corner frequency.

HPF
habilita os codificadores para controlar a freqncia de corte
the
toggles
the
built-in
HPF
in and
out
of cir- o
doPressing
HPF.
Pressionar
o codificador
alterna
entre
adicionar
ou retirar
HPF
assigns
theencoder
encoders
to control
the HPF
corner
frequency.
cuit.
If
the
LED
is
lit,
the
filter
is
in
circuit.
HPF do circuito.
Se o LED
estthe
aceso,
o efeito
no out
circuito.
Pressing
the encoder
toggles
built-in
HPFest
in and
of circuit. If the LED is lit, the filter is in circuit.
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
switch
assigns
the encoders
to control
amount
O The
switch
Delay
habilita
os codificadores
para
controlarthe
a quantidade
deofdelay
no canal.
Pressionar
o codificador
alterna
entre
delay
the channel.
Pressing
the encoder
toggles
theadicionar
Delay
The
Delayin
switch
assigns the
encoders
to control
the amount
ouinretirar
o delay
do circuito.
Se
o LED
est
aceso,
o in
efeito
est no
and
out
of
circuit.
If
the
LED
is
lit,
the
delay
is
circuit.
of delay in the channel. Pressing the encoder toggles the Delay
circuito.
in and out of circuit. If the LED is lit, the delay is in circuit.
Send
to1516
Send 1516
Send
1212
a Send
Send
to Send
1516
These12
switches
let you
select one of two Aux sends in
Estes switches permitem selecionar uma de duas mandadas
odd/even
pairs
12 through
SendAux
1516)
orin
Variable
These
switches
let(Send
you
select
two
sends
auxiliares
em pares
(Send
12one
atof
Send
1516)
ou Variable
Group
Group
sends
in
odd/even
pairs
(Send
12
through
Send 78
odd/even
pairs
(Send
1212
through
Send78
1516)
or Variable
enviados em
pares
(Send
at Send
apenas).
only).sends in odd/even pairs (Send 12 through Send 78
Group
mono,
o primeiro
dothe
switch
Com
Withmandadas
mono sends,
the first
press ofpressionamento
the switch selects
only).
seleciona
as
mandadas
mpares
(1,
3,
5
ou
7)
e
o
segundo,
odd numbered send (1, 3, 5, or 7) and the second press selectsas
With mono sends, the first press of the switch selects the
mandadas
pares (2, 4,send
6 ou(2,
8).4,O6,switch
se acende
em
verde
para
thenumbered
even numbered
or 8).
The
switch
lights
green
odd
send
(1, 3, 5,
or 7)
the
second
press
selects
as mpares
ou em
amarelo
para
asand
pares.
foreven
the numbered
odd-numbered
for the
even-numthe
send selection,
(2, 4, 6, or or
8).yellow
The switch
lights
green
bered
selection.
for
the odd-numbered
selection,
or yellow
for the even-num Com
mandadas stereo,
o primeiro
pressionamento
do switch
controla
ostereo-linked
nvel para o par
de busses,
o segundo
controlacono pan
bered
selection.
With
sends,
the first epress
of the switch
para
o
par
de
busses.
O
switch
se
acende
em
verde
para
controle
trols level for the bus pair, and the second press controls pan
With stereo-linked sends, the first press of the switch condefor
nvel
em pair.
amarelo
para
controle de
pan.for level control, or
theebus
Thepair,
switch
green
trols level
for the bus
andlights
the second
press controls pan
yellow
forpair.
pan The
control.
for
the bus
switch lights green for level control, or
Pressionar um codificador alterna entre habilitar ou desabilitar a
yellow
for an
pan
control.
mandada.
Quando
o nvel
de envio
est on
sendo
apresentado
anel
Pressing
encoder
toggles
the send
or off.
When the no
send
delevel
LEDsiseshown
a mandada
est
desabilitada,
um
LED
se
acende.
Quando
on the
LED ring
and the
send
off, a single
LED
Pressing
an encoder
toggles
theLEDs
send
or
off.isWhen
the send
a mandada
est habilitada,
os
seonacendem
no sentido
horrio
lights.
When
the
send
is
on,
all
LEDs
light
in
a
clockwise
selevel
the LED
ring and
send
off, a single LED
desdeisoshown
canto on
inferior
esquerdo
at the
o nvel
daismandada.
quence
from
the
lower
left
to
the
send
level.
lights. When the send is on, all LEDs light in a clockwise sequence from the lower left to the send level.
the channel faders. It can still be controlled from the encoder

row, so the channel fader mirrors the setting. When Flip is engaged,
all channel name display backlights turn yellow, the
Flip to
Faders
same
color as the flip switch. Channel name is displayed in
Flip
to Faders
the upper
row of
LCD, with
thedoflipped
parameter
disQuando
habilitado,
o the
parmetro
atual
codificador
mapeado
Stage
Rack
Features
When
the
current
encoder
parameter
mapped
to
para
os enabled,
faders
canal.
continua
podendo
played
in
thedo
lower
rowEle
(mirroring
the
effect is
ofser
Flipcontrolado
to Faders).
the channel
faders.portanto
It can still
controlled
from
the encoder
pelos
codificadores,
os be
faders
de canal
espelham
o ajuste.
Quando
habilitado,
todos
osthe
fundos
dos
nomes
dosiscanais
row, soFlip
the
channel
fader
mirrors
setting.
When
Flip
enFlipest
to Faders
provides
a special
mode
when
working
with
audio I/O
for VENUE
Profile
UpFlip.
to two
Stagedo
Racks
segaged,
tornam
amarelos,
a mesma
corsystems.
do
switch
Oyellow,
nome
canal
all
channel
name
display
backlights
stereo
Aux sends.
For
information,
seeturn
Chapter
10, the
Aux
can be usedna
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to 96 totalacionado
inputs.
same
apresentado
linha
superior
do
LCD,
com
o
parmetro
color
as and
the flip
switch.
Channel name is displayed in
Sends
Variable
Groups.
sendo
apresentado
na LCD,
linha inferior
(espelhando
o efeito disde Flip to
the upper
row of the
with the
flipped parameter
Audio I/O
Faders).
played
in the
lower rowLCD
(mirroring
the effect of Flip to Faders).
Input
Channel
Display
Flip to Faders oferece um modo especial quando trabalhando
Flip
to Faders
special
modepower.
when
with
There
are
a totalprovides
of
threeaInput
Channel
LCDworking
displays,
one
individually
selectable
phantom
com mandadas auxiliares estreo. Para mais informaes,
stereo
Aux
sends.
For
information,
see
Chapter
10,
Aux
each
for
Inputs
18,
916
and
1724.
veja
8 analog
output
expandable
to 48 analog or
o Captulo
10,channels;
Aux Sends
e Variable up
Groups.
Sends
andoutputs
Variableper
Groups.
digital
Stage Rack.
Each LCD provides two rows of data with six characters per
Display LCD de Canais de Entrada
row, per input channel. The upper and lower rows let you see
Input
Channeland
LCD
Display
Synchronization
Control
I/O
more
of channel
simultaneously,
Existe
um than
total one
de 3type
displays
LCD dedata
canais
de entrada, such
para as
os
are
Snake
connectors
to enable
primary
and
redundant
(if
channel
name
in
the
lower
row
and
fader
dB
level
in
the
upper
There
a
total
of
three
Input
Channel
LCD
displays,
one
canais 1 a 8, 9 a 16 e 17 a 24, respectivamente.
applicable)
connection
to aData
VENUE
FOHdepends
Rack. on the
row
you
adjust
fader.
display
each
forwhile
Inputs
18,
916the
and
1724.
encoder
assignment.
Cadacurrent
LCD oferece
duas
linhas de dados com seis caracteres por
Eachpor
LCD
provides
two rows
of data
with six
characters
per a
linha,
canal
de entrada.
As linhas
superior
e inferior
permitem
row,
per
input
channel.
The
upper
and
lower
rows
let
you
see
visualizao
de maisAssignments
de um tipo deand
dado
de canal simultaneamente,
Input Encoder
Values
System
Components
como
nomeone
do type
canalof
nachannel
linha inferior
e o nvel do fadersuch
em dB
moreothan
data simultaneously,
as na
The current
encoder
assignment,
parameter
orin
value
is dados
dissuperior
enquanto
voc
ajusta
fader.
A apresentao
channel
name in
the
lower
rowo and
fader
dB level
thede
upper
played
theadjust
top row
the
input
displays.
There are
depende
dain
atribuio
atual
do
codificador.
Included
Components
row
while
you
the of
fader.
Data display
depends
on two
the
statesencoder
the top assignment.
row can be in: Parameter Value mode and Pacurrent
All
VENUE
Profile
systems include
the following:
Atribuies
eName
Valor
dos
Codificadores
de Entrada
rameter
mode.
VENUE
Profile
console
Input Encoder Assignments and Values
A atribuio,
o parmetro
ou oabbreviates
valor atual
do codificador
When necessary,
the display
displayed
functions
apresentado
na
linha
superior
do
display
de
canais
de
entrada.
shown encoder
in the following
table.
Theascurrent
assignment,
parameter or value is dis estados
Monitor para
mount
for VGA
screenmodos
(screen
not included)
H
dois
a
linha
superior:
Parameter
Value e
played
the
top Assignment
row of the Displays
input displays. There are two
Tablein
4.Name.
Encoder
Parameter
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
states the top row can be in: Parameter Value mode and PaSwitch
Display
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
rameter
Name mode.
Quando necessrio, o display abrevia as funes apresentadas

VENUEna
Profile
Guide
Gain
Input
como
mostrado
aGain
seguir.
When
necessary, tabela
the display
abbreviates displayed functions
When necessary, the display abbreviates displayed functions
as shown in the following table.
TableComp
4. Encoder
Assignment
Displays
Thresh
Threshold
Rack(s)
(see Compressor
next)
as shown
in the
following
table.
Pan
Inputdo
Pan
Tabela
4. Exibies
de Atribuio
Codificador
Display
Switch
Gate Thresh
Gate Threshold
Racks, Software
CDs, iLoks, and Cables
Gain
Input Gain
HPF Frequency
Each Mix RackInput
or FOH
Pan
Pan Rack includes:
System Restore
Delay
InputCD
Delay
Comp Thresh Compressor Threshold
Send (n)
Aux (n) Level
Gate Thresh
Gate
Standalone
Software
CD sends only)
AuxThreshold
(n) PanInstaller
(stereo-linked
Variable
Group
(n)
Level
iLok USB HPF
Smart
Key (for storing plug-in authorizations)
Frequency
Variable Group (n) Pan (stereo-linked sends only
Flip
to Faders
Aux
(n) Level
Delay
Input
Delay
Two
(2) IEC
power
cablesand Pan (stereo-linked sends
only)
(n)
One FOHAux
Link
Send
(n)cable
Levelfor connection to a VENUE console
Aux (n) Pan (stereo-linked sends only)
Each Stage Rack
includes:
Variable
Group (n) Level
Variable
Group
(n) Pan (stereo-linked sends only
Two (2) IEC power
cables
Flip to Faders
Aux (n) Level and Pan (stereo-linked sends

only)
Name display to show the source input which is feeding each

channel. For example, S1 17 indicates the channel source is
Stage Rack
1, Input 17.
Switch
Source
Source Switch
O switch Source, na seo Display, altera o nome do canal para
Select
Switch
The
Sourcea switch
in entrada
the Display
section
changes
the Channel
Additional
Components
mostrar
fonte Required
de
que
alimenta
cada canal.
Por exemplo,
Name
display
to
show
the
source
input
which
is
feeding
each
S1
17
indica
que
a
fonte
do
canal
Stage
Rack
1,
Input
17.
The following
Select switch
on each channel
used to target
the
chanThe
components
must beispurchased
separately:
channel.
For
example,
S1
17
indicates
the
channel
source
is
nel in the Selected Channel sections, and to include the chanSwitch
Select
Video
Display
(15-inch
or greater flat-panel VGA display
Stage
Rack
1,
Input
17.
nel in Multi-Select and Multi-Assign functions. A lit Select
indicates the channel is selected. The name of the curOswitch
switch
Select de cada canal utilizado para marcar o canal nas
DVI supported.
rently Selected
selected
channel
inothe
Channel
Name disSelect
Switch
sees
Channel ise displayed
para incluir
canal
nas funes
Multiplay
USBand
andOtrackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
in the Selected
Channel
Whenque
multiple
Select
ekeyboard
Multi-Assign.
switch
Selectdisplay.
aceso
indica
o canal est
The
Select switch
on each
channel
is used
to display
target the
chanchannels
are
selected,
the
Channel
Name
indicates
selecionado.
O nome
do canal
atualmente
selecionado
apresentado
nel
in
the
Selected
Channel
sections,
and
to
include
the
chanDigital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
no
display
Channel
Name
no display Selected Channel.
Quando
which
channel
is the
ACSe target.
nel
in Multi-Select
and Multi-Assign
functions.
A lit Select
mltiplos
canais
esto
selecionados,
o
display
Channel
Name
indica
switch
indicates
the do
channel
qual deles
o alvo
ACS. is selected. The name of the cura Digital
Solo
Switch
rently
selected
channel is displayed in the Channel Name disfrom Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Switch
Solo
play
and
in
the
Selected
Channel
multipleWhen
The Solo switch
toggles
the solodisplay.
state ofWhen
that channel.
channels
are
selected,
the
Channel
Name
display
indicates
enabled,
the Solo
switch
LEDSolo
is lit.doWhen
channel
is in
OOptional
switch Solo
alterna
o modo
canal.the
Quando
habilitado,
o
Components
which
channel
is
the
ACS
target.
Solo Safe
the Solo switch LED flashes. Channel Solo
switch
Solomode,
se acende.
latches
on a momentary
press,
and automatically
if
The
following
components
are optional,
and mustreleases
be
heldSwitch
foro2canal
seconds
or no
more
andSolo
released.
Quando
est
modo
Safe, o LED do switch Solo
purchased
separately:
Solo
pisca. Channel Solo ativado com um toque momentneo e
The
Solo switch toggles
the solo state
of that
channel. When
automaticamente
desativado
quando
pressionado
por dois
transfer
Mute
Switch
segundos
ouSolo
mais
e depois
enabled,
the
switch
LEDliberado.
is lit. When the channel is in
Safe
Near-field
monitor
speakers
mix position
monitoring
Solo
mode,
the
Solo switch
LEDfor
flashes.
Solo
The
Mute
switch
mutes
the channel
at theChannel
(pre-fader)
mute
Switch
Mute
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
latches
on
a
momentary
press,
and
automatically
releases
if
point. Channel pre-fader pickoff is post-mute.
held forDynamic
2 seconds
more andmicrophone
released.
oror
condenser
and XLR mic cable
O switch Mute silencia o canal pr-fader.

(for Talkback)
Input Faders and Banking

Footswitches
to 2)
Faders
de Entrada e (up
Bancos
Mute
Switch
Each
channel
fader
a 100mm motorized,
touch-sensitive
MIDI
cables
(forisconnecting
external MIDI
devices)
The
Mute
switch
mutesdethe
channel
at motorizados
the (pre-fader)
Os
faders
de canal
100mm
so
e mute
sensveis ao
fader.
point.
Channel pre-fader pickoff is post-mute.
toque.
The Options > Interaction screen lets you enable touch-sensi
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
to GPI
devices)
Ative
telachannel
Options
> Interaction
permite
habilitar
a seleo
de canais
selection.
When
enabled,
touching
a channel
Input
Faders
and
Banking
sensvel
ao
toque.
Quando
habilitada,
tocar
um
fader
de Secanal
fader automatically selects that channel and makes
it the
automaticamente
seleciona
esse
canal.
lected
Channel
Each
channel
fader is a 100mm motorized, touch-sensitive
fader.
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Os fader
Profile
podem
ser
mesmo
The
fadersda
onconsole
the Profile
console
can
bemovimentados
moved even when
quando
no
sentem
um
toque.
Isso
permite
o
uso
dos
faders
The
Options
> Interaction
screen
lets you
enable
they do
not
sense can
a touch.
This
allows
use Profile
oftouch-sensithe faders
The
following
options
be added
to
VENUE
systems.
quando estiver usando luvas, por exemplo. Tambm permite
tive
channel
When
touching
avisit
channel
whileselection.
wearing
gloves.
Itenabled,
also lets
you
throw
a faderAvid
and
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
options,
que um
fader
seja jogado
eand
permanea
onde the
parou, e no
fader
automatically
selects
that
channel
and
makes
it
the
Sehave
it
stay
where
it
lands,
and
not
snap
back
to
the
point
websitevolte
(www.avid.com).
ao ponto em que foi tocado pela ltima vez.
lected Channel
it was last touched.
Controle de Bancos de Fader

Mix
Options
TheRack
faders
on
theControls
Profile console can be moved even when
Fader
Banking
they
do
not
sense
a
touch. This
allows use
the faders
Bank AD Agrupa as rguas
de entrada
emof bancos.
At quatro
Bank
AD
Banks
the
Input
strips.
Up
to
four
banks
(A through
I/O
Options
while
wearing
gloves.
It
also
lets
you
throw
fader
and
bancos (A a D) podem ser usados para acessar aat
96
entradas a
D)have
can
be
used
to access
up to
96not
inputs
the
Input
it 24
stay
where
it lands,
and
snapfrom
back
to the
point
partir
dos
faders
de
canais
de
entrada.
O Bank
A24corresponde
AI16
Analog
Input
Card that
provides
16isanalog
Channel
faders.
A
is
B
channels
aos
1 aMic/Line
24,Bank
o bank
B channels
aos
canais124,
25
a Bank
48 e assim
por diante.
itcanais
was last
touched.
mic/line
level
2548, and
soinputs
on.
FX Returns
Habilita
os canais de retorno de efeitos (FX Return) 1 a 8
Fader
Controls
AO16Banking
Analog Output
FX Returns
Banks
FX Return
18 tode
Input
faders
para
os faders
de entrada
1 a channels
8, ou os canais
retorno
de 18,
efeitos
or
Returns
916
to
916.
9outputs
a FX
16
os faders
deInput
entrada
9 ato16.
Bank
ADpara
Banks
the
Input
strips.faders
Up
four banks (A through
D) can be used to access up to 96 inputs from the 24 Input
Channel faders. Bank A is channels 124, Bank B is channels
2548, and so on.
AT16 A-Net Output Card
that3:
provides
16 channels
of A-Net 33
Chapter
VENUE Profile
Control Overview
FX Returns Banks FX Return channels 18 to Input faders 18,
or FX Returns 916 to Input faders 916.
digital I/O.

Graphic
EQEQ
Habilita
bandas
equalizador
grfico
aos
faders.
Graphic
Graphic
EQ
Banks
Banks
bands
bands
of do
of
graphic
graphic
EQEQ
to to
the
the
faders.
faders.
Graphic
Graphic
Equalizadores
grficos
podem
ser
utilizados
somente
nas
sadas.
EQs
EQs
can
can
bebe
used
used
onon
outputs
outputs
only.
only.
ForFor
more
more
information,
information,
seesee
Para mais informaes, veja o Captulo 17, EQ.
Chapter
Chapter
17,17,
EQ.
EQ.
FX FX
Returns
Returns
18/916
18/916
Seo
de Atribuio
de Canal
- ACS
Assignable
Assignable
Channel
Channel
Section
Section
The
The
Assignable
Assignable
Channel
Channel
Section
Section
provides
provides
dedicated
dedicated
routing,
routing,
A seo de atribuio de canal (Assignable Channel Section - ACS)
EQ,
EQ,
Dynamics,
Dynamics,
and
and
insert
insert
controls
controls
for
for
the
the
currently
currently
selected
selected
oferece controles de roteamento dedicado, EQ, Dynamics e inserts
channel.
channel.
ACS
ACS
sections
sections
include
include
thethe
Input,
Input,
Bus
Bus
Assign,
Assign,
Direct
Direct
para
o canal
selecionado
atualmente.
A seo
ACS
inclui
as
sees
Out,
Out,
Aux
Aux
Sends
Sends
and
and
Inserts
Inserts
sections,
sections,
the
the
Selected
Selected
Channel
Channel
MeMe-e
Input, Bus Assign, Direct Out, Aux Sends e Inserts, os medidores
ters
ters
and
and
display,
display,
and
and
thethe
Dynamics
Dynamics
and
EQEQ
sections.
sections.
display
Selected
Channel,
e as
seesand
Dynamics
e EQ.
The
The
ACS
ACS
sections
sections
feature
feature
a light
adelight
colored
colored
background
background
color,
color,
A seo
ACS
apresenta
cor
fundo
clara
e cada seo
um LED
and
and
each
each
section
section
features
features
aindica
blue
a blue
LED
LED
which,
when
lit,lit,
indiindiazul
que,
quando
aceso,
que
a which,
seowhen
aplica-se
ao
canal
selecionado.
cates
cates
that
that
section
section
applies
applies
to to
thethe
selected
selected
channel.
channel.
Input
Input
Input
Esta seo oferece LED de Clip, e controles para phantom power,
This
This
section
section
provides
provides
a Clip
a Clip
LED,
LED,
and
and
controls
controls
forfor
phantom
phantom
pad de entrada, polaridade (fase), ganho e modo Safe.
power,
power,
input
input
pad,
pad,
polarity
polarity
(phase),
(phase),
gain
gain
and
and
safe
safe
status.
status.
Bank
Bank
AD
AD
GEQ
GEQ
20630
20630
Hz Hz
80020kHz
80020kHz
Input
Input
fader
fader
banking
banking
andand
assignment
assignment
switches
Switches
de
atribuio
e habilitao
de faders.switches
Switches
de Modificaes
Globais
Global
Global
Modifier
Modifier
Switches
Switches
ClipClip
LEDLED
+48+48
V V
20 20
dB dB
PadPad
Input
Input
Polarity
Polarity
Input
Input
Gain
Gain
ToTo
thethe
left
left
of of
thethe
Bank
Bank
AD
AD
switches
switches
the
the
global
global
modifier
modifier
esquerda
dos
switches
dos
bancos
A aare
Dare
esto
os switches
de
switches.
switches.
See
See
Global
Global
Modifier
Modifier
Switches
Switches
on
on
page
page
41.
41.
modificaes globais. Veja Switches de Modificaes Globais na
pgina 41.
Multi-Select
Multi-Select
(Shift)
(Shift)
Lets
Lets
you
you
select
select
multiple
multiple
input
input
channels,
channels,
and
and
lets
lets
you
you
select
select
multiple
multiple
items
items
in
in
lists.
lists.
Multi-Select (Shift) permite a voc selecionar mltiplos canais de
entrada e mltiplos itens em uma lista.
Default
Default
(Alt)
(Alt)
Lets
Lets
you
you
reset
reset
a parameter,
a parameter,
section,
section,
or or
channel
channel
to to
default
default
values.
values.
This
This
switch
switch
also
also
enables
enables
certain
certain
modes
modes
such
such
as as
Default (Alt) Permite recompor um parmetro, seo ou canal para
Show
Show
VCA
VCA
Members
Members
mode.
mode.
os valores padro. Este switch tambm habilita certos modos como
o Show VCA Members.
Fine
Fine
(Ctrl)
(Ctrl)
Lets
Lets
you
you
select
select
non-adjacent
non-adjacent
items
items
in in
lists,
lists,
or or
adjust
adjust
rotary
rotary
encoders
encoders
with
with
greater
greater
resolution
resolution
for
for
finer
finer
control.
control.
Fine (Ctrl) Permite selecionar itens no adjacentes em uma lista, ou
Safe
Safe
Input
Input
controls
controls
Controles
de Input
Direct
Output
Direct
Direct
Output
Output
The
The
Direct
Direct
Output
Output
section
section
provides
provides
level
level
and
and
in/out
in/out
control
control
A seo
Direct
Output
oferece
controle
de
nvel
e incluso/excluso
for
thethe
channel
channel
direct
direct
output.
output.
dofor
sinal
para
a sada
direta
do canal.
ajustar os codificadores rotativos com maior resoluo para controle

User
User
This
This
switch
switch
is currently
is currently
not
not
implemented.
implemented.
fino.
User Este switch no est atualmente implementado.
Direct
Output
Direct
Direct
Output
Output
Bus Assigns
Bus
BusAssigns
Assigns
OsThe
switches
Bus switches
Assigns
so
os
controles
primrios
de
roteamento
The
Bus
Bus
Assigns
Assigns
switches
areare
thethe
primary
primary
routing
routing
controls
controls
forfor
para
ocurrently
canalselected
atualmente
selecionado,
permitindo
endere-lo
the
the
currently
selected
channel,
channel,
letting
letting
you
you
bus
bus
it directly
it directly
to to
diretamente
para
o bus
bus
principal
(LR)
oumono
para
qualquer
outro
grupo
thethe
Mains
Mains
(LR)
(LR)
bus
or or
to to
any
any
other
other
mono
or or
stereo
stereo
group.
group.
mono ou estreo.
LRLR
Group
1818
Group
Stereo
PanPan
Stereo
BusBus
assign
assign
switches
switches
Switches Bus Assign
3434VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
C/Mono
C/Mono
Aux
Sends
Aux
Aux Sends
Sends
The
Aux
Sends
The
Aux
Sends section
section provides
provides in/out
in/out and
and level
level control
control to
to
Aux Sends
Aux
Sends
The
Aux
Sends
section
provides
in/out
andavailable
level control
toor
Aux
Sends
route
the
currently
selected
channel
to
any
mono
route
the
currently
selected
channel
to
any
available
mono
or
Aux
Sends
route
the
currently
selected
channel
to
any
available
mono
The Aux Sends
section
provides
in/outsection
and level
controlusing
toor
stereo-linked
Aux
bus. The
Aux Sends
is banked
AThe
seo
Sends
oferece
controle
de nvel
e incluso/excluso
stereo-linked
Aux
bus.
The
Aux
Sends
section
is
banked
AuxAux
Sends
section
provides
in/out
and
level
control
tousing
stereo-linked
Aux
bus.
Theswitches.
Aux
Sends
is banked
using
Stage
Rack
Features
route
the
currently
selected
channel
tosection
any
available
mono
do
roteamento
do
selecionado
para
qualquer
bus
auxiliar
the
Aux
18
or
Aux
916
The
Aux
Sends
section
provides
in/out
and
level
control
toor or
the
Aux
18
or canal
Aux
916
switches.
route
the
currently
selected
channel
to
any
available
mono
the
Aux
18
or
Aux
916
switches.
mono
ou
estreo.
AAux
seo
Aux
Sends
pode
ser
agrupada
em bancos
stereo-linked
bus.
The
Aux
Sends
section
is banked
using
route
the
currently
selected
channel
to
any
available
mono
or
stereo-linked
Aux
bus.
The
Aux
Sends
section
isprovide
banked
using
Stage
Racks
areGroups
used
with
an accesses
FOH
Rack,
and
all
stage
The
Variable
switch
Variable
Groups
mode.
utilizando
os
switches
Aux
18
ou
Aux
916.
The
Variable
Groups
switch
accesses
Variable
Groups
mode.
the
Aux
18
or
Aux
916
switches.
stereo-linked Aux bus. The Aux Sends section is banked using
theaudio
AuxVariable
18
or Aux
916Profile
switches.
The
Groups
switch
accesses
Variable
Groups
mode.
I/O
for
VENUE
systems.
Up to two
Stage Racks
When
D-Show
is
in
Groups
When
D-Show
is 916
in Variable
Variable
Groups mode,
mode, the
the controls
controls for
for
thecan
Aux
18
orsimultaneously,
Aux
switches.
When
D-Show
is
in
Variable
Groups
mode,
the
controls
for
be
used
supporting
up
to
96
total
inputs.
Os
switches
Variable
Groups
doroute
acesso
aoVariable
modoGroups
Variable
Groups.
The
Variable
Groups
switch
accesses
Groups
mode.
12
Aux
78
to
Variable
Groups
12
Aux
12 through
through
Aux
78accesses
route
toVariable
Variable
Groups
12
TheAux
Variable
Groups
switch
mode.
Aux
12
through
Aux
78
route
to
Variable
Groups
12
Quando
a D-Show
est
noVariable
modo
Variable
Groups,
os controles
para
When
D-Show
is Variable
in
Groups
mode,
the
controls
forau78
The
Variable
Groups
switch
also
Thethrough
Variable
Groups
switch
accesses
Variable
Groups
mode.
through
respectively.
The
Variable
Groups
switch
also
auWhen
D-Show
isrespectively.
in
Groups
mode,
the
controls
for
Audio
I/O78
through
78
respectively.
The
Variable
Groups
switch
also18
auos auxiliares
Auxtoggles
12 Aux
at
Aux
78
so
roteados
para
os12
Variable
Aux
12
through
78
route
to
Variable
Groups
tomatically
the
input
encoders
to
Variable
Groups
When
D-Show
is in
Variable
Groups
mode,
the
controls
for 18
tomatically
toggles
the
input
encoders
to
Variable
Groups
Aux
12
through
Aux
78
route
to
Variable
Groups
12
Groups
12
a
78
respectivamente.
Os
switches
Variable
Groups
tomatically
toggles
the
input
encoders
to
Variable
Groups
18
through
78
respectively.
The
Variable
Groups
switch
also
4878
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic
preamps
and
of
Auxes
Aux(instead
12
through
Aux18).
78
route
to
Variable
Groups
12
(instead
of
Auxes
18).
through
respectively.
The
Variable
Groups
switch
au-auautomaticamente
tambm
alternam
os codificadores
dealso
entrada
(instead
of Auxes
18).
tomatically
toggles
the
input
encoders
to
Variable
Groups
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
through
78toggles
respectively.
The
Variable
Groups
switch
also18
au-18
tomatically
the18
input
encoders
to
Variable
Groups
para
os Variable
Groups
(em
vez de Auxes
18).
(instead
of
Auxes
18).
8of
analog
output
channels;
expandable
up toGroups
48 analog
tomatically
toggles
the input
encoders
to Variable
18 or
(instead
Auxes
18).
outputs
(insteaddigital
of Auxes
18).per Stage Rack.

Send 116
116
Send
Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant
(if
encoders
and
Send
116
encoders
and
LEDs
encoders
and
LEDs
LEDs 116
Send
Sendencoders
116 and
encoders
and
LEDs
Send
116
LEDs
encoders and
LEDs
System Components
Aux
Aux 18/Aux
18/Aux 916
916
Aux 18/Aux 916
Variable
Variable Groups
Groups
Variable Groups
Aux Aux
send
controls
18/Aux
916
Variable Groups
Variable Groups

Included
Components
Aux
Aux send
send controls
controls
Aux 18/Aux 916
Variable Groups
Aux 18/Aux
916
Aux
send controls
Insert
Processing
AuxInsert
send controls
Processing
VENUE
Profile console
Insert
Processing
Aux send
Controles
Auxcontrols
Send
The
Insert
Processing
section
Two
IEC power
cablesprovides
The
Insert(2)
Processing
section
provides controls
controls to
to bypass
bypass and
and
Insert
Processing
The
Insert
Processing
section
provides
controls
to bypass and
Insert
Processing
select
plug-ins
on
the
currently
selected
channel.
select
plug-ins
on
the
currently
selected
channel.
Insert
Processing
Monitor
mount
for
VGA
screen
(screen
not
included)
Insert
Processing
select
plug-ins
on the section
currently
selected
channel.
The Insert
Processing
provides
controls
to bypass and
The Insert
Processing
section
provides
controls to bypass and
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not included)
select
plug-ins
currently
selected
channel.
Insert
Processing
section
provides
controls
to bypass
and
AThe
seo
Insert
Processing
oferece
controle
para
inserir
ou no
plugselect
plug-ins
on on
thethe
currently
selected
channel.
VENUE
Mouse Pad
ins
no canal
selecionado.
select
plug-ins
on the currently selected channel.
VENUE Profile Guide

Plug-Ins
Protective
Plug-Ins 14
14Dust Cover
Plug-Ins 14
Rack(s) (see next)

Plug-Ins 14
Plug-Ins 14
Plug-Ins 14
Racks,
Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables
In/Out
In/Out LED
The
The 6-character
6-character Selected
Selected Channel
Channel display
display shows
shows the
the name
name of
of
The
6-character
Selected
Channel
display
shows
the name
of
the
currently
selected
channel.
The
Selected
Channel
the currently selected channel. The Selected Channel display
display
the
currently
selected
channel.
The
Selected
Channel
display
The
6-character
Selected
Channel
display
shows
of do
Otemporarily
display
Selected
Channel
de 6display
caracteres
mostra
oname
nome
reverts
to
a
display
mode
any
time
temporarily
reverts
to Channel
a parameter
parameter
display
mode
any
time
an
The
6-character
Selected
shows
thethe
name
of an
temporarily
reverts
to
athe
parameter
display
mode
any
time
an de
canal
selecionado
e,
temporariamente,
transforma-se
em
display
the
currently
selected
channel.
The
Selected
Channel
display
encoder
is
adjusted
on
selected
channel.
Theencoder
6-character
Selected
shows
the name
of
is selected
adjusted
onChannel
the selected
channel.
the
currently
channel.
Thedisplay
Selected
Channel
display
encoder
is aadjusted
on
selected
channel.
parmetros
qualquer
momento
em
que
umChannel
codificador
ajustado
temporarily
reverts
to
athe
parameter
display
mode
any
time
an
the
currentlyreverts
selected
channel.
The
Selected
display
temporarily
to
a
parameter
display
mode
any
time
an
Additional
Required
Components
The
Stereo
LED
lights
solid
when
a
stereo
input
or
output
is
no
canal
selecionado.
encoder
is
adjusted
on
the
selected
channel.
The
Stereo
LED
lights
solid
when
a
stereo
input
or
output
is
temporarily
reverts
to
parameter
display
mode
any
an is
encoder
is adjusted
onathe
selected
channel.
The
Stereo
LED lights
when
a time
stereo
input
ortime
output
targeted.
The
LEDsolid
flashes
any
a
is
targeted.
The Solo
Solo
any
a channel
channel
is in
in PFL,
PFL,
The
following
components
must
be time
purchased
separately:
encoder
is adjusted
onLED
the flashes
selected
channel.
targeted.
The
Solo
LED
flashes
any
time
a
channel
is
in
PFL,
OThe
LEDStereo
StereoLED
acende-se
quando
uma
entrada
ou or
sada
estreo
lights
solid
when
a stereo
input
output
or
Place
mode.
AFL
or Solo
Solo
in
Place
mode.
TheAFL
Stereo
LEDin
lights
solid
when
a stereo
input
or output
is is
AFL
or
Solo
in
Place
mode.
endereada.
O
LED
Solo
pisca
quando
um
canal
est
nos
modos
targeted.
Video Display
(15-inch
or greater
flat-panel
VGA
display
The
Solo
LED
flashes
time
a channel
is
in is
PFL,
The
Stereo
LED
lights
solid
when
stereo
or
output
targeted.
The
Solo
LED
flashes
anyaany
time
a input
channel
is
in
PFL,
PFL,
AFL
ou
Solo
in
Place.
The
dual,
10-segment,
bi-color
LED
meters
indicate
input
level
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
VGA
The
dual,
10-segment,
bi-color
LED
meters
indicate
input
level
AFL
orThe
Solo
in Place
mode.
targeted.
Solo
LED
flashes
any
time
a resolution).
channel
is in
PFL,and
AFL
or Solo
in
Place
mode.
The
dual,
10-segment,
bi-color
LED
meters
indicate
input
level
and
clip
status
for
the
currently
targeted
or
Soloed
channel.
DVI
supported.
and
clip
status
for
the
currently
targeted
or
Soloed
channel.
AFL
or Solo
in Place
mode.
clip
status
for
the
currently
targeted
or
Soloed
channel.
Oand
display
duplo
de
10
segmentos
e
LEDs
bicolores
indica
nvel
The dual,
10-segment,
bi-color
LED
meters
indicate
input
level de
The
10-segment,
bi-color
LED
meters
indicate
input
level
dual,
USBFor
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
entrada
e
status
de
clip
para
o
canal
roteado
ou
em
Solo.
Selected
Channel
metering
scale,indicate
see
Selected
Channel
status
the
currently
targeted
orSelected
Soloed
channel.
For
Selected
Channel
metering
scale,
Channel
Theand
dual,
10-segment,
bi-color
LED
meters
input
level
and
clipclip
status
for for
the
currently
targeted
orsee
Soloed
channel.
For
Selected
Channel
metering
scale,
see
Selected
Channel
Level
Meters
on
page
116.
Level
Meters
on
page
116.
and
clipLevel
status
for
the
currently
targeted
or
Soloed
channel.
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
Meters
on page
116.
Para
graduao
do
medidor
Selected
Channel,
Selected
Channel
metering
scale,
Selected
Channelveja
ForFor
Selected
Channel
metering
scale,
see see
Selected
Channel
Medidores
de
Nvel
do
Canal
Selecionado
na
pgina
116.
Dynamics
The
connection
between
FOH
Rack
and
Stage
Rack
requires
Level
Meters
on
page
116.
For Selected
Channel
Level
Meters
on pagemetering
116. scale, see Selected Channel
Dynamics
Dynamics
aLevel
Digital
Snakeoncable.
Meters
page This
116. cable can be purchased directly
Dynamics
The
Dynamics
section
provides
dedicated
controls
from
Avid
or
assembled
by your
preferred
vendor.and
The Dynamics section provides
dedicated
controls
and metermeterDynamics
The
Dynamics
section
provides
dedicated
controlsincluding
and meterDynamics
ing
for
built-in
and
plug-in
dynamics
processors,
a
for built-in
and
plug-in
dynamics
processors,
including para
a
Aing
seo
Dynamics
oferece
controle
dedicado
e
mensurao
Dynamics
ing
for
built-in section
and
plug-in
dynamics
processors,
including
a
The
Dynamics
provides
dedicated
controls
and
metercomprehensive
set
of
Compressor/Limiter
and
Expander/Gate
comprehensive
set
of
Compressor/Limiter
and
Expander/Gate
The
Dynamics section
provides
dedicated controls
and meterprocessadores
de
dinmica
incorporados
ou
em
plug-ins,
incluindo
Optional
Components
comprehensive
set
of
Compressor/Limiter
and
Expander/Gate
ing
for
built-in
plug-in
dynamics
processors,
including
controls.
The
Dynamics
section
provides
dedicated
controls
and
meterabrangentes
controles
de Compressor/Limiter
e Expander/Gate.
controls.
ing
for
built-in
andand
plug-in
dynamics
processors,
including
a a
controls.
comprehensive
set
of
Compressor/Limiter
and
Expander/Gate
ing
for
built-in
and
plug-in
dynamics
processors,
including
a
The
following
components
are
optional,
and
must
be
comprehensive set of Compressor/Limiter and Expander/Gate
controls.
comprehensive
set
of
Compressor/Limiter
and
Expander/Gate
purchased
separately:
controls.
controls.
Select
Select
Select
Each Mix Rack or FOHIn/Out
RackLED
includes:
LED
Insert
Insert Processing
Processing controls
controls
In/Out
Select
System
Restore
CD
Insert
Processing
controls
LED Select
In/Out
LED
Select
In/Out
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Software Display
Installer CD
Insert
Processing
controls
Selected
Channel
Meter,
and
LED
Insert
Processing controls
Selected
Channel
Meter,
Display
Selected
Channel
Meter,CD
Display and
and
Processing
Standalone
Software Installer
Insert
controls
Controles Insert Processing
LEDs
LEDs
LEDs
The
Selected
Channel
display
section
include
two
10-segment
The
Selected
Channel
display
section
includeauthorizations)
two
10-segment
Selected
Channel
Meter,
Display
and
LEDs
iLok
USB
Smart Key
(for
storing
plug-in
The
Selected
Channel
display
section
include
two
10-segment
Selected
Channel
Meter,
Display
and
LEDs
Selected
Channel
meters,
a
6-character
LCD
display
and
LEDS
Selected
Channel
meters,
a
6-character
LCD
display
and
LEDS
Selected
Channel
Meter,
Display
and
LEDs
Selected
Channel
Meter
Display
e6-character
LEDs
Selected
Channel
a(if
LCD
display
andiLok
LEDS
Status
Plug-in
installer
discs
any)
with
pre-authorized
The
Selected
Channel
display
section
include
two 10-segment
for
and
Solometers,
state.

Dynamics
section
Dynamics
section and
and controls
controls
(for Talkback)
Dynamics
section and controls
Controles da seo Dynamics
Footswitches
(up to 2)
Dynamics
section and
See
Chapter
16,controls
Dynamics.
DynamicsSee
section
and controls
Chapter
16,
Dynamics.
Veja
Captulo
Dynamics.
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
Chapter
16,16,
Dynamics.
DynamicsSee
section
and controls
BNC
cables (for
connecting
Chapter
Dynamics.Word clock between the
EQ
See See
Chapter
16,16,
Dynamics.
EQ
VENUE
system
and
external digital devices)
EQ
EQ See Chapter 16, Dynamics.
The
EQ
section
provides
controls
built-in
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for connecting
tofor
GPIall
EQ section provides dedicated
dedicated
controls
for
alldevices)
built-in and
and
EQ
The
EQ section
provides
dedicated controls
forband
all built-in
and
EQThe
compatible
plug-in
EQ
parameters
including
freA
seo
EQ
oferece
controle
dedicado
para
todos
parmetros
plug-in EQ parameters including bandosin/out,
in/out,
freEQcompatible
compatible
plug-in
EQ
parameters
including
band
in/out,
freThe EQ section
quency,
Q, andprovides
mode. dedicated controls for all built-in and
dos
embutidos
oucontrols
em plug-in,
incluso/
quency,
Q, and
mode.
The
EQequalizadores
section
provides
dedicated
for allincluindo
built-in and
quency,
Q, and
mode.
compatible
plug-in
EQ
parameters
including
band
in/out,
excluso,
freqncia,
Q
e
modo.
The
EQ
section
provides
dedicated
controls
for
all
built-in
and
compatible plug-in EQ parameters including band in/out, fre-freVENUE
Profile
Expansion Options
quency,
Q,
and
mode.
compatible
plug-in
EQ parameters including band in/out, frequency,
Q, and
mode.
quency,
Q, and mode.
The following
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options

Status Channel
and Solo display
state. section include two 10-segment
Thefor
Selected
EQ section
section and
and controls
controls
for
and
Solo
state.
EQ
Status
Two Channel
(2)
IEC
power
cables
Selected
meters,
a
6-character
LCD
display
and
LEDS
mic/line
inputs
The
Selected
Channel
display
section
include
two
10-segment
ChannelChannel
meters,inclui
a 6-character
LCD display
LEDS
EQ section
and EQ
controls
Controles
da level
seo
ASelected
seo Selected
dois medidores
de 10and
segmentos,
Status
and
Solo
state.
LCD
One
Link
cable
for connection
a VENUE
console
Selected
Channel
meters,
ae6-character
LCD to
display
LEDS
for for
Status
and
state.
display
deFOH
6Solo
caracteres
LED
para estados
de
Soloand
e Status.
EQ
section
and
controls
Analog
Output
See
Chapter
17,
EQ.
EQAO16
section
and
controls
See
Chapter
17,17,
EQ.
Veja
Captulo
EQ.
for Status and Solo state.
See
Chapter
17, EQ.
EQ
section
and
controls
LCD
Display
outputs
LCD Display
LCD Display
Meters
Chapter
EQ.
TwoMeters
See See
Chapter
17,17,
EQ.
LEDs
Meters
LEDs
XO16
Analog
and
Digital
Output Card that provides 8 analog
LCD Display
LEDs
See Chapter 17, EQ.
LCD Display
Meters
Meters
Selected
Channel
Meters
Selected
Channel meters,
meters, displays
displays and
and LEDs
LEDs
Selected Channel meters, displays and LEDs
Selected Channel meters, displays e LEDs
LCD LEDs
Display
LEDs
LEDs

Chapter
Profile
Control
Overview
35
Chapter 3:
3: VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Control an
Overview
IOx Input and output expansion
card that
provides
addi- 35
Chapter 3: VENUE
Profile
Control Overview
35
tional 8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels of AES/EBU
digital I/O.
Captulo 3: Chapter
Viso Geral
da Superfcie
de Controle
Profile
3: VENUE
Profile Control
Overview
35 35
Output
Masters
Output
Masters
The Output Masters section includes eight bankable output channel strips, each with a fader, encoder and channel switches. The
A seo Output Masters inclui oito rguas de sadas de canal agrupveis, cada uma com fader, codificador e switches de canal. Os fader
Mains
fader provides
level control
over
the Mains
(house) output.
Mains
oferecem
controle master
master sobre
as sadas
principais
(house).
Output Encoders
and switches
LCD Display
Insert mode
Select
Multi-Assign/Show VCA Members
AFL
Select Mains
Mute
Mute Mains
Output Fader
bank switches
Figura 13. Controles de sada
Mains fader
Faders
Figure 13. Output controls
Faders Mains
Switches Mute, AFL e Select

Mute,
AFL and Select Switches
O fader
Mainsfader
oferece
controle
de nvel
nico
parafor
a the
sada
Mains
The Mains
provides
a single
level
control
current
atual.
Mains output.
Sobre the
os faders
faders,areesto
os switches
AFL e Select,
Above
the Mute,
AFL and Mute,
Select switches,
which que
silenciam,
solam
ou
selecionam
auxiliares
ou
Groups
atribudos
mute, solo, and select Auxes or Groups assigned to the Output
seo Output.
section.
Mains Fader
Faders Output
Output Faders
Os oito faders Output controlam o nvel para Aux 18, Aux 916,
The eight
Output
Faders
controle level
busses
Personal
Q, Matrix
e Group,
VCAs.for Aux 18, Aux 916,
Personal Q, Matrix and Group busses, and VCAs.
Switches de Agrupamento Output Fader
Output Fader Bank Switches
Os faders e codificadores Output podem ser agrupados em bancos

para
o bus
desejado
os switches
Output
The
Output
fadersutilizando
and encoders
are banked
to Faders.
the desired bus
using the Output Faders switches.
Aux 18 Atribui os Output Faders para os nveis de Aux 18.

Aux 18 Assigns the Output Faders to Aux 18 levels.
Aux 916 Atribui os Output Faders para os nveis de Aux 916.

Aux 916 Assigns the Output Faders to Aux 916 levels.
Personal Qs Atribui os Output Faders para os nveis de sada do

PQ Personal
mixer. Qs Assigns the Output Faders to PQ mixer output
levels.
Matrixes Atribui os Output Faders para os nveis de sada do Matrix

Matrixes Assigns the Output Faders to Matrix mixer output
mixer.
levels.
Groups Atribui os Output Faders para os nveis dos Group. Quando

AssignsGroups,
the Output
to Group
levels. Faders
When in
no Groups
modo Variable
este Faders
switch atribui
os Output
para
Variable
Groups
mode,
this
switch
assigns
the
Output
Faders
controlar os Variable Groups.
to control Variable Groups.
VCAs Atribui os Output Faders para os VCAs.
VCAs Assigns the Output Faders to VCAs.
Output Encoders e Display
Output Encoders and Display
Os oito Output Encoders ajustam controles adicionais de bus de
The
eight
Output
adjust
additional
bus
consada,
como
GroupEncoders
pan, fonte
de matriz
e nvelOutput
da fonte
PQ,
assim
comosuch
parmetros
depan,
plug-ins
(quando
modo
trols
as Group
Matrix
sourcenoand
PQ Inserts).
source level, as
well as plug-in parameters (when in Inserts mode).
O display LCD Output Masters possui duas linhas e capaz de
The
Output
Masters LCD
is a two-row
display
is
mostrar
6 caracteres
em display
cada uma,
por bus de
sada.that
O display
apresenta
parmetro
ou valor
que row,
estoper
sendo
controlados
capable
of nome,
showing
6 characters
in each
output
bus.
na seo
Output
Masters.
The
display
shows
the name, parameter or value currently being controlled in the Output Masters section.
Os switches Prev Page e Next Page acendem para indicar funes
adicionais
dependendo
parmetro
do plug-in
The
Prev Page
and Nextdo
Page
switchesselecionado
light to indicate
addi-ou da
sada. functions depending on the selected output or plug-in
tional
parameter. When lit, pressing either switch scrolls the Output
Quando acesos, pression-los permite a rolagem dos Output
Encoders to the previous or next output or plug-in parameters.
Encoders para a anterior ou a prxima sada ou para o anterior ou
The
Inserts
Mode switch
puts the
in Inserts
in os
prximo
parmetro
do plug-in.
Os encoders
switch Inserts
Modemode,
colocam
which
the
Output
encoders
select
and
adjust
plug-ins.
codificadores no modo Inserts, em que selecionam e ajustam plugins.
Master
Master
and
andGlobal
Global
Controls
Controls
Controles
Master
Globais
Master
and eGlobal
Controls
Master and Global Controls
Global
Global
and
and
master
master
controls
controls
areare
located
located
in in
sections
sections
with
with
a dark
a dark
Stage
Rack
Features
Global
and
master
controls
are
located
in
sections
with
a
dark
Controles
e include
globais
esto
localizados
nas
sees
com
background,
background,
and
include
thethe
Snapshot,
Snapshot,
View
Modes,
Modes,
Console
Console
Globalmaster
andand
master
controls
are
locatedView
in
sections
with
afundo
dark
escuro,
e
incluem
as
sees
Snapshot,
View
Modes,
Console
Config,
background,
and
include
the
Snapshot,
View
Modes,
Console
Stage
Racks
are
used
with
an
FOH
Rack,
and
provide
all
stage
Config,
Config,
Mute
Mute
Groups/Function,
Groups/Function,
Monitoring
Monitoring
and
and
TalkTalkbackground,
and
include the Snapshot,
View
Modes,
Console
Mute
Groups/Function,
Monitoring
eMonitoring
Talkback/Osc
no
quadrante
Config,
Mute
Groups/Function,
and
Talkaudio
I/O
for VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up to two
Stage
Racks
back/Osc
back/Osc
sections
sections
in in
thethe
upper
upper
right
right
quadrant
quadrant
of
of
the
the
control
control
Config,
Mute
Groups/Function,
Monitoring
and
Talksuperior
direito
da
superfcie
de supporting
controle.
Alm
disso,
os switches
back/Osc
sections
in
the
upper
right
quadrant
of
the
control
can
be
used
simultaneously,
up
to
96
total
inputs.
surface.
surface.
In In
addition,
addition,
the
global
global
Modifier
Modifier
switches
switches
forfor
Multi-SeMulti-Seback/Osc
sections
inthe
the
upper
right quadrant
of
the
control
de surface.
modificaes
globaisthe
para
Multi-Select,
Default efor
Fine
esto
In
addition,
global
Modifier
switches
Multi-Select,
lect,
Default
Default
and
and
Fine
Fine
are
are
located
located
next
next
to
to
input
input
faders
faders
116.
116.
surface.
In
addition,
the
global
Modifier
switches
for
Multi-Selocalizados prximos aos fader de entrada 1 a 16.
Audio
I/O and
lect,
lect, Default
Default
and Fine
Fine are
are located
located next
next to
to input
input faders
faders 116.
116.
GlobalModifiers
Global
GlobalModifiers
Modifiers
individually
selectable phantom power.
Global
Modifiers
Global
Modifiers
AThe
seo
Modifiers
est
localizada
toesquerda
dos
faders
de
entrada
The
Modifiers
Modifiers
section
section
ischannels;
located
is located
to
thethe
leftleft
of
of
Input
Input
18,
18,
8 analog output
expandable
up
tofaders
48faders
analog
or
1and
a The
8,provides
e provides
oferecethe
os
switches
Multi-Select,
Default,
Fine
eswitches.
User.
Modifiers
section
is
located
to
the
left
of
Input
faders
18,
and
the
Multi-Select,
Multi-Select,
Default,
Default,
Fine
Fine
and
and
User
User
switches.
The
Modifiers
section
is
located
to
the
left
of
Input
faders
18,
and
and provides
provides the
the Multi-Select,
Multi-Select, Default,
Default, Fine
Fine and
and User
User switches.
switches.
Snapshots
Snapshots
Snapshots
Snapshots
A seo
oferece os
Store, Recall,
Previous, Next
Snapshots
Snake connectors
to switches
enable primary
and redundant
(if
Snapshots
The
Snapshots
Snapshots
section
section
provides
provides
Recall,
Recall,
Previous,
Next,
Next,
eThe
Preview,
juntamente
com
um codificador
Select
ePrevious,
um display
LCD
applicable)
connection
toStore,
aStore,
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
Snapshots
section
provides
Store,
Previous,
Next,
and
and
Preview
Preview
mode
mode
switches,
switches,
along
along
with
with
a Recall,
Select
a Select
encoder
encoder
and
and
a a
The
Snapshots
section
provides
Store,
Recall,
Previous,
Next,
de
6The
caracteres.
and Preview
Preview
mode
along
6-character
6-character
Snapshot
Snapshot
LCD
LCD
display.
display.
and
mode switches,
switches,
along with
with a
a Select
Select encoder
encoder and
and a
a
6-character
6-character Snapshot
Snapshot LCD
LCD display.
display.
System Components
Included Components

Snapshots
Snapshots
Snapshots
Two
Snapshots
Snapshots

For
For
more
more
information,
information,
seesee
Chapter
Chapter
21,21,
Snapshots.
Snapshots.
Para
mais
informaes,
veja
o Captulo
21,
Snapshots.
Trackball
mount (trackball
not included)
For
For more
more information,
information, see
see Chapter
Chapter 21,
21, Snapshots.
Snapshots.
VENUE Mouse Pad
View
ViewModes
Modes
View Modes
ViewView
Modes
VENUE
Profile Guide
Modes
The
The
View
Mode
Mode
switches
switches
(Inputs,
(Inputs,
Outputs,
Outputs,
Filing,
Filing,
Snapshots,
Snapshots,
View
Two
(2)
console
lights
The
View
Mode
(Inputs,
Outputs,
Filing,
Snapshots,
Os
switches
View switches
Mode
(Inputs,
Outputs,
Snapshots,
Patchbay,
Patchbay,
Plug-ins)
Plug-ins)
display
display
the
the
corresponding
corresponding
pages
pages
The
View
Mode
switches
(Inputs,
Outputs, Filing,
Filing,
Snapshots,
Protective
Dust
Cover the
Patchbay,
Plug-ins)
display
corresponding
pages
Patchbay,
Plug-ins)
apresentam
as
pginas
correspondentes
on-screen.
on-screen.
Pressing
Pressing
a View
adisplay
View
Mode
Mode
switch
repeatedly
repeatedly
cycles
cycles na
Patchbay,
Plug-ins)
the switch
corresponding
pages
Rack(s)Pressing
(see
next)
tela.
Pressionar
o
switch
View
Mode
repetidamente
percorre
aspressabas
on-screen.
a
View
Mode
switch
repeatedly
cycles
through
through
thethe
individual
individual
tabs
ofMode
of
that
that
page.
page.
For
For
example,
example,
presson-screen.
Pressing
a tabs
View
switch
repeatedly
cycles
individuais
das
pginas.
Por
exemplo,
pressionar
o
switch
Patchbay
the
tabs
of
that
For
example,
pressingthrough
ing
thethe
Patchbay
Patchbay
switch
switch
once
once
displays
thethe
Patchbay
Patchbay
page.
page.
through
the individual
individual
tabs
ofdisplays
that page.
page.
For
example,
pressumaRacks,
vezthe
mostra
a pgina
Patchbay.
Pressionar
Patchbay
novamente
ing
Patchbay
switch
once
displays
the
Patchbay
page.
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
Cables
Pressing
Pressing
Patchbay
again
again
cycles
cycles
through
various
various
tabs
tabs
within
within
ing thePatchbay
Patchbay
switch
oncethrough
displays
the
Patchbay
page.
percorre as vrias abas existents na pgina Patchbay.
Pressing
Patchbay
again
cycles
through
theEach
the
Patchbay
Patchbay
page.
page.
Pressing
againRack
cycles
through various
various tabs
tabs within
within
MixPatchbay
Rack
or FOH
includes:
the
Patchbay
page.
the Patchbay page.
System Restore CD
View
View
Modes
Modes
View View
Modes
View Modes
Modes
Each
StageMode
Rack
includes:
Console
Console
Mode
Mode
Console
Mode
Console
Mode
Console
The
The
Config
Config
Mode
Mode
switch
switch
toggles
toggles
thethe
system
system
between
between
Config
Config
Oand
switch
Config
Mode
osthe
modos
Config
e Show.
The
Config
Mode
switch
toggles
system
between
Config
and
Show
Show
modes.
modes.
The
Config
Mode alterna
switch entre
toggles
the
system
between
Config
and
and Show
Show modes.
modes.
Console
Console
Mode
Mode
Console Mode
Console
Console
Mode Mode
Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
The
The
controls
controls
innesta
in
this
this
section
section
provide
provide
comprehensive
comprehensive
and
and
flexiOs
controles
seo
proporcionam
controle amplo
eflexiflexvel
The
controls
this
section
provide
comprehensive
flexiAdditional
Components
ble
ble
communication
communication
control,
control,
including
including
a top-mounted
a top-mounted
TalkTalkThe
controls in
inRequired
this
section
provide
comprehensive
and
flexi- de
da
comunicao,
incluindo
entrada
Talkback
(XLR), and
switches
ble
communication
control,
including
a
top-mounted
roteamento
e(XLR),
controle
deswitches,
nvel.
back
back
input
(XLR),
Assign
Assign
switches,
and
and
level
control.
control. Talkbleinput
communication
control,
including
alevel
top-mounted
TalkThe
following
components
must beand
purchased
separately:
back
input
(XLR),
Assign
switches,
level
back input (XLR), Assign switches, and level control.
control.
DVI supported.

Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
Mute
Mute
Groups/Function
Groups/Function
Mute
Groups/Function
Optional
Components
Mute
Mute Groups/Function
Groups/Function
Provides
Provides
Mute
Mute
Group
Group
assignment
assignment
and
and
selection
selection
in in
default
default
The
following
components
are optional,
must
bemodo Mute
Oferece
endereamento
e seleo
Mute and
Group
nodefault
Provides
Mute
Group
assignment
and
in
Mute
Mute
Groups
Groups
mode,
mode,
or or
can
can
bebe
switched
switched
to
provide
provide
eight
FuncFuncProvides
Mute
Group
assignment
andtoselection
selection
in eight
default
Groups,
ou
pode
ser
comutada
para
oferecer
oito
switches
de
purchased
separately:
Mute
Groups
or
can
be
to
provide
eight
Function
tion
switches
switches
(F mode,
(F
keys)
keys)
in
Function
Function
mode.
mode.
The
global
global
Cancel
Cancel
Mute
Groups
mode,
orin
can
be switched
switched
toThe
provide
eight
Funcfuno
(F
keys)
no
modo
Function.
O
switch
global
Cancel
tambm
switches
USB
flash
disk
(orin
other
portable
USBThe
storage
device
for
tion
(F
keys)
in
Function
mode.
global
Cancel
switch
switch
is
also
is also
located
located
in
this
this
section.
section.
tion
switches
(F
keys)
in
Function
mode.
The
global
Cancel
est
localizado
nessa
seo.
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
switch
is
also
located
in
this
section.
switch is also located in this section.
(for Talkback)
Mute
Mute
Groups/Function
Groups/Function
section
section
25-pin
D-Sub cables
(for connecting to GPI devices)
Seo
Groups/Function
Mute
Groups/Function
section
Mute Mute
Groups/Function
section
Mute
Mute
Groups
Groups
Mute
Groups
Mute
Groups
Mute
Groups
Mute
Mute
Groups
Groups
letlet
you
you
quickly
quickly
mute
mute
multiple
multiple
channels
channels
at at
thethe
Mute
Groups
let
you
quickly
mute
multiple
channels
at
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
same
same
time.
time.
You
You
can
create
create
and
and
recall
recall
up
up
tomltiplos
to
eight
eight
Mute
Mute
Groups
Groups
Mute
Groups
letcan
you
quickly
mute
multiple
channels
at
the
Mute
Groups
permite
facilmente
silenciar
canais
aothe
mesmo
same
time.
You
can
create
and
recall
up
to
eight
Mute
Groups
tempo.
Voc
pode
criar
e
utilizar
at
oito
Mute
Groups
constitudos
comprising
comprising
one
one
orcan
or
more
more
channels.
channels.
same time.
You
create
and recall up to eight Mute Groups
comprising
one
or
de
um ou mais
canais.
comprising
one
or more
more channels.
channels.
SeeSee
Chapter
Chapter
15,15,
Muting
Muting
and
and
Mute
Mute
Groups.
Groups.
website
(www.avid.com).
See
Chapter
15,
and
Veja
o Captulo
15, Muting
MuteGroups.
Groups.
See
Chapter
15, Muting
Muting
and eMute
Mute
Groups.
Function
Function
Switches
Switches
Function
Switches
Switches
Function
Function
Switches
Mix
Rack
Options
In In
Function
Function
mode,
mode,
this
this
section
section
provides
provides
eight
eight
Main
Main
Function
Function
In
mode,
this
section
provides
eight
Main
Function
switches.
switches.
The
default
default
assignments
assignments
forfor
thethe
first
four
four
Function
Function
In Function
Function
mode,
this
section
provides
eight
Main
Function
No
modoThe
Function,
esta
seo oferece
8first
switches
Main
Function.
I/O
Options
switches.
The
default
assignments
for
the
first
four
Function
As
atribuies
para
os on/off
primeiros
quarto
switches
Function
switches
switches
include
include
Preview
Preview
mode
mode
on/off
(F1),
Variable
Variable
Groups
Groups
switches.
The padro
default
assignments
for(F1),
the
first
four
Function
switches
include
Preview
mode
on/off
(F1),
Variable
Groups
incluem
Preview
mode
on/off
(F1),
Variable
Groups
(F2),
Copy (F3)
(F2),
(F2),
Copy
Copy
(F3)
(F3)
and
and
Paste
Paste
(F4).
(F4).
switches
include
Preview
mode
on/off
(F1),
Variable
Groups
e(F2),
Paste
(F4).(F3)
Copy
and
(F2),
Copy
(F3)inputs
and Paste
Paste (F4).
(F4).
mic/line
level
Function
Function
switches
switches
cancan
be be
assigned
assigned
to to
perform
perform
any
any
number
number
Os
switches
Function
podem
ser
assinalados
executar
switches
can
be
assigned
to
perform
any
number
of Function
of
actions
actions
using
using
the
the
Events
Events
window.
window.
For
For
more
information,
information,
Function
switches
can
be
assigned
to
perform
anypara
number
AO16
Analog
Output
Card
that
provides
16more
analog
line
level
qualquer
nmero
de
aes
utilizando
a
janela
Events.
of
actions
using
the
Events
window.
For
more
information,
seesee
Chapter
22,
22,
Events.
Events.
ofChapter
actions
using
the
Events window. For more information,Para
outputs
mais
informaes,
veja o Captulo 22, Eventos.
see
Chapter
22,
Events.
see Chapter 22, Events.
XO16
Analog and Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
Cancel
Cancel
Cancel
Cancel
line
level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
Cancel
This
This
switch
switch
cancels
cancels
thethe
current
current
operation,
operation,
such
such
as as
Multi-Select
Multi-Select
switch
a operao
corrente,
como
modos
MultiThis
switch
cancels
the
current
operation,
as
Multi-Select
orEste
or
Multi-Assign
Multi-Assign
modes.
modes.
This
switch
cancels
the
current
operation,
such
asos
Multi-Select
AT16
A-Net cancela
Output
Card
that provides
16such
channels
of A-Net
Select
ou Multi-Assign
or
Multi-Assign
modes.
or Multi-Assign
modes.
output
compatible
with Aviom Personal Mixers and other
IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an additional 8 channels ofChapter
analog
and Profile
8 Profile
channels
ofOverview
AES/EBU
Chapter
3:I/O
3:
VENUE
VENUE
Control
Control
Overview3737
digital I/O.
Chapter
3:
VENUE
Profile
Control
Chapter 3: VENUE Profile Control Overview
Overview 37
37

Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Monitoring
Meters
Meters
Meters
Meters
The
Monitoring
section
provides
level
encoders
for
MoniMonitoring
section
provides
level
encoders
thethe
MoniAThe
seo
Monitoring
oferece
codificadores
de
nvelfor
para
as
sadas
The Monitoring section provides level encoders for the Moni- The
The
Meter
section
includes
following:
Meter
section
includes
thethe
following:
(near
field
monitors)
and
Headphone
outputs.
Monitor
(monitores
near-field)
eHeadphone
Headphone.
tortor
(near
field
monitors)
and
outputs.
Meter
section
includes the following:
AThe
seo
Meter
inclui:
tor (near field monitors) and Headphone outputs.
Monitoring
controls
Controles
Monitoring
Monitoring
controls
Monitoring controls
Monitor bus delay can be set on-screen in the Options > Bus-
delay can pode

be set on-screen
in the
Optionsna
> BusOMonitor
delay
dobus
bus
configurado
pgina
Monitor
busMonitor
delay can be ser
set on-screen
inon-screen
the Options
>
Busses
page.
ses
page.
Options
>
Busses.
ses page.
Porta USB e LEDs System Status
USB
Port
and
System
Status
LEDs
USB
Port
and
System
Status
LEDs
USB Port and System Status LEDs
Estes
LEDs
indicam
status
deand
energia
e dostatus.
sistema.
Esses
controles
These
LEDs
indicate
power
and
system
status.
These
controls
These
LEDs
indicate
power
system
These
controls
These
LEDs indicate
power
and system
status.daThese
controls
esto
localizados
no
canto
superior
superfcie
located
upper
corner
of
control
surface. de
areare
located
in in
thethe
upper
leftleft
corner
ofesquerdo
thethe
control
surface.
are located in the upper left corner of the control surface.
controle.
Meters
Meters
Meters
Medidores
Masters
BusBus
Masters
Bus Masters
Mains
Mains
Mains
Bus
Output
Meters
Bus
Output
Meters
Bus
Output
Meters
Bus
Output
Meters
Eight
Output
meters
provide
selectable
metering
OutEight
BusBus
Output
meters
provide
selectable
metering
of of
OutEight Bus
Output meters
provide selectable
metering
of OutOito
medidores
Bus Output
proporcionam
mensurao
put
busses.
put busses.
selecionvel
put busses. dos busses Output.
Mains
Mains
Mains
Mains
The
Mains
meters
provide
constant
level
indication
thenvel
Os
medidores
Mains
proporcionam
indicao
constante
do
The
Mains
meters
provide
constant
level
indication
of of
the
The Mains meters provide constant level indication of the
da
sada
Mains
(house).
house
(Mains)
output.
house
(Mains)
output.
house (Mains) output.
more
information,
Chapter
13,
Metering.
Para
mais
informaes,
veja o13,
Captulo
13, Metering.
ForFor
more
information,
seesee
Chapter
Metering.
For more information, see Chapter 13, Metering.
panel
USB
port
status
LEDs
TopTop
panel
USB
port
andand
status
LEDs
Painel
LEDs de
status
Topsuperior
panel com
USBporta
port USB
andestatus
LEDs
For
more
information,
Chapter
Troubleshooting.
For
more
information,
seesee
Chapter
28,28,
Troubleshooting.
Para
mais
informaes,
veja
o Captulo 28,
For more information, see Chapter 28, Troubleshooting.
Troubleshooting.
VENUE
Profile
Guide
38 38VENUE
Profile
Guide
Captulo
4: Comandos
Bsicos e Modos
Chapter
4: Basic Commands
and Modes
Chapter
4:
Basic
Commands
and Modes
Stage Rack Features
Control
Overview
Viso
geral dos
Controles
Audio
I/O
Control
Most featuresOverview
and controls that are used during a performance
available
48
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic
preamps
and
A maioria
dos
recursos
eboth
controles
usados
durante
uma
performance
are
from
thethat
console
andduring
on-screen.
Changes
Most
features tanto
and controls
are used
esto
disponveis
na console
quando
na tela. a performance
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
made
on onefrom
are immediately
reflected
the other,Changes
letting
are available
both
the
andin
on-screen.
Alteraes
realizadas
em
um
so console
imediatamente
refletidas
no outro,
use
8 analog
output
upand
to 48
analog
or
you
almost
any
combination
of
console
screen
conmade on
one usar
are immediately
reflected
in the de
other,
letting
permitindo
a voc
quase qualquer
combinao
controles
de
digital
outputs per Stage Rack.
trols
to
mix.
you euse
almost
any combination of console and screen conconsole
tela
para mixar.
trols to mix.
The software screen
is
not required
order to mix a perforSynchronization
and
Control
I/Oparainmixar
A tela
do software no
necessria
uma performance,
mance,
as
all
essential
mixing
controls
are esto
provided
the
screenessenciais
is not
required
in order
mix
aon
perforpoisThe
todos
os controles
deprimary
mixagem
disposio
software
Snake
connectors
to enable
andtoredundant
(if
console.
However,
the
screen
is
essential
when
setting
up
and
na console.
Entratano,
a telamixing
essencial
para are
configurao
ajustes
mance,
as all essential
provided
on
the
applicable)
connection
to controls
a VENUE
FOH
Rack. e
configuring
the
system
before
a
performance.
do sistema
antes
de
uma
performance.
console. However, the screen is essential when setting up and
configuring the system before a performance.
Controles
e Visualizaes
Exclusivasand
no Software
Software-Only
Controls
Displays
System Components
Software-Only
Controls
and
Displays
Muitos
ajustes
e opes
de
configurao
estoare
disponveis
apenas
Many
configuration
settings
and options
only available
na tela,
incluindo
a
configurao
de
hardware,
busses,
instalao
on-screen,
including
hardware
configuration
settings,
busses,
Many configuration settings and options are only available
Included
Components
de plug-ins
einstallation,
diagnstico
de sistema.
Para mais informaes,
veja
plug-in
and
system
diagnostics.
For
more
inforon-screen, including hardware configuration settings, busses,
System
na see
pgina
57.
mation,
System
on page 57.
All
VENUE
Profile systems
include
the following:
plug-in
installation,
and system
diagnostics.
For more information,
see
System
on
page
57.
VENUE
Profile
console
Banner na Tela do Software
Software
Banner
Two (2)Screen
IEC power
cables Display
A tela
do software
ofereceBanner
um banner
no canto inferior esquerdo,
Software
Display
software
MonitorScreen
mountprovides
for VGAascreen
included)
The
screen
banner(screen
displaynot
in the
lower left
para manter na linha de viso da mixagem a visualizao do
corner.
This
display
is
provided
to
maintain
line-of-sight
mix
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
The
software
screen
provides
a
banner
display
in
the
lowerou
left
parmetro que est sendo ajustado (como o nvel dos faders
o
ing
showing
theOPad
currently
adjusted
parameter
limiar
compresso).
tambm
oferece
textos(such
com as
dicas
corner.
This display
isbanner
provided
to maintain
line-of-sight
mixdeby
VENUE
Mouse
fader
level
orstatus.
compression
threshold)
you make(such
changes
e mensagens
de
ing
showing
the Guide
currently
adjustedasparameter
as to
by
VENUE
Profile
the
parameter.
The banner threshold)
display also
Tool
Tip text
fader
level(2)
orconsole
compression
asprovides
you make
changes
to
Two
lights
andparameter.
status messages.
the
The banner display also provides Tool Tip text
and status messages.
Rack(s) (see next)

System Restore CD

Dicas
Tool
Tips
recommended;
DVITips
supported.
Tool
With
mouse
trackball,posicione
place theo cursor
Com
o the
mouse
ou oortrackball,
cursosover
sobrea screen
um item na
item
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
compatible)
to
see
auma
brief
insobre
the
banner
tela
para
ver
breve
explicao
ele
no display.
banner.
With
the
mouse
orexplanation
trackball,
place
the(Windows
cursor
over
a screen
item to see a brief explanation in the banner display.

Cursor
Cursor
from
Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Tool Tip
Optional
Components
Tool Tip
Barra
de status
apresentando
uma dica
Status
bar showing
Tool Tip

Status bar
showing
Tool Tip
Status
Messages
purchased
separately:
Mensagens
de Status
USB
flash
disk (or other portable USB storage device for
Status
Messages
The banner
display alerts you to certain operating conditions
such as Multi-Select and Multi-Assign modes.
banner
display
to condies
certain operating
conditions
OThe
banner
alerta
voc alerts
sobre you
certas
de operao,
como os
such asMulti-Select
Multi-Select
and Multi-Assign modes.
modos
e Multi-Assign.

(for Talkback)

Banner display
Mode display
Banner
display
showing current state of the system Mode display
Banner
display
Mix Rack Options
Banner
display showing
current
state
of the system
Banner
apresentando
o estado
atual do
sistema
Console
and Software
Screen
Linking
Console
and
Software
Linking
I/O
Options
The software
screen
is linkedScreen
to console
actions by default. For

Link
entre aselecting
Console ean
a Tela
dochannel
Softwareon the console changes
example,
input
The software
screen is linked
to console
actions by
AI16
Analog Mic/Line
Input Card
that provides
16default.
analog For
the
screen
to the
Inputs
page,
and selecting
output
bus
example,
selecting
an input
channel
on the an
console
changes
mic/line
level
inputs
Achanges
tela do software
acoplada
s aes
do You
console
por
padro. Por
the
screen
to
the
Outputs
page.
can
customize
the screen
to the Inputs
page,de
and
selecting
an output
bus a tela
exemplo,
selecionar
um canal
entrada
na console
altera
AO16
Analog
Output
that provides
16
analog
line
level
how
the
system
targets
channels
to best match
your
working
changes
the
screen
toCard
the
You
customize
para
a pgina
de entradas
doOutputs
softwarepage.
(Inputs),
ecan
selecionar
um bus
outputs
style.
For
more
information,
see
Interaction
on
page
64.
how
the para
system
targetsdechannels
to best match
yourpersonalizar
working
de
sada,
a pgina
sadas (Outputs).
Voc pode
astyle.
formaFor
como
o sistema
interage
canais paraon
melhor
more
information,
seecom
Interaction
page combinar
64.
com seu estilo de trabalho. Para mais informaes, veja Interaction
na pgina 64.

Chapter 4: Basic Commands and Modes 39

provides
anModes
addi- 39
Chapter 4:card
Basicthat
Commands
and
digital I/O.
Captulo 4: Comandos Bsicos e Modos 39
Config Mode and Show Mode

There are two main operating modes, Config Mode and Show
Mode. Use Config mode to set up your system and options;
Modo
Config
Show
use Show
mode e
toModo
mix your
performance.
Config Mode and Show Mode
Existem
modos de operao principais: Config e Show. Use o
Configdois
Mode
modo
Config
para
configurar
e ajustar
seu sistema
e opcionais;
use
There
are two
main operating
modes,
Config Mode
and Show
Config
Mode
and
Show
Mode
mode
provides
access
to
the
configuration
settings
Config
Mode
and
Show
Mode
o Config
modo
Show
para
mixar
uma
performance.
Mode. Use Config mode to set up your system and options;
that
are
typically
performed
as part
of system
(before
There
are two
main
operating
modes,
Configsetup
Mode
and Show
use
Show
mode
to mix
your
performance.
There
are
two main operating
modes,
Config
Mode
Show
Modo
Config
mixing).
For
you must
Config
mode
to and
do any
Mode.
Useexample,
Config mode
to setbe
upinyour
system
and
options;
Use Config mode to set up your system and options;
of Mode.
the Show
following:
use
mode to mix your performance.
Config
Mode
use Show
mode
to mix
youraos
performance.
O modo
Config
oferece
acesso
ajustes que so normalmente
Choose a Main mix format (LR+M, or LCR)
realizados como parte das configuraes do sistema (antes da
mode
provides
access to
the configuration
settings
Config
Mode
Config
Designate
the
number
format
of
availmixagem).
Por
exemplo,
voc and
devemono/stereo
estar no modo
Config
para as
Config
Mode
that
are
typically
performed
as
part
of
system
setup
(before
ableaes:
auxes and groups, combine two mono channels
into
seguintes
Config
mode
provides you
access
to the
configuration
settings
mixing).
For example,
must
be in
Configinput
modechannel
to do any
one stereo
input
channel,
ortosplit
aconfiguration
stereo
Config
mode
provides
access
the
settings
that
are
typically
performed
as
part
of
system
setup
(before
the
following:
of
Escolher
um
formato
para
a
mix
principal
(LR+M
ou
into
mono performed
channels. as part of system setup LCR).
that
aretwo
typically
(before
mixing).
For
example,
you
must
be
in
Config
mode
to
do
any
mixing).
Indicar
mono/estreo
eformat
omust
nmero
de or
auxiliares
grupo
Choose
a Main mix
(LR+M,
LCR)
For
example,
you
be
in Config
mode toe do
any
Install
plug-ins
of
the
following:
disponveis, combinar dois canais mono em um canal de
of
the
following:
Designate
the
number
and
mono/stereo
format
of
availentrada
Assignestreo
plug-insouindividir
the software
racks
um canal
estreoorem
dois mono.
Choose
a Main
mix format
(LR+M,
LCR)
able auxes
and groups,
combine
two mono
channels into
Choose
a Main
mix format
(LR+M,
or LCR)
Instalar
plug-ins.
Route
side-chain
inputs
to plug-ins
one
Designate
the
number
andormono/stereo
format
of availstereo
input
channel,
split
a
stereo
input
Atribuir
plug-ins
aosnumber
racks
doand
software.
Designate
the
mono/stereo
format channel
of availInitialize
(or reset)
hardware
devices
and
options
able
auxes
and
groups,
combine
two
mono
channels
into
two paralelos
mono
channels.
Rotear
sinais
para combine
plug-ins. two mono channels into
able
auxes
and groups,
into
Change
Matrix
andchannel,
PQ Source
pointsinput
stereo
input
orpickoff
split
a stereo
channel
Inicializar
ou
reiniciar
hardware
opcionais.
one
Install
plug-ins
one
stereo
input dispositivos
channel, or de
split
a stereoeinput
channel
into
mono
channels.
Change
Master
Insert
points
Alterar
ostwo
pontos
de
insero
de Matrix
e PQ.
into
Assign
plug-ins
in the software
racks
two
mono
channels.
Alterar
os
pontos
de
insero
master.interaction
Install plug-ins
Customize
console and software
Install
plug-ins
Route side-chain
inputs
plug-ins
Personalizar
a interao
entreto
console
e software.
Assign
plug-ins
the software
racks
Move
channels
to in
different
fader strips
Initialize
Assign
plug-ins
in the
software
racks and options
(or reset)
hardware
devices
Mover
canais
para
diferentes
rguas.
Route
side-chain
to
Perform
system
testsinputs
and diagnostics
Realizar
testes
e diagnsticos
doplug-ins
sistema.
Change
Matrix
and
PQ Source
pickoff points
Route
side-chain
inputs
to
plug-ins
Initialize (or reset) hardware devices and options
Some
Initialize
(or
reset)
hardware
devicesaudio
and options
Change
Master
Insert
points
Config
mode
operations
interrupt
throughput.
noPQ
modo
Config
interrompem
Algumas
Changeoperaes
Matrix and
Source
pickoff
points o udio
Change
Matrix
andand
PQ Source
pickoff
points
Customize
console
software
interaction
Mode
Change Master Insert points
Show
Modo
Show
Change
Master Insert
pointsfader strips
Move channels
to different
Customize console and software interaction
Customize
console
and
software
Perform
system
tests
and
diagnostics
mode is the main operating
mode interaction
for the system softOShow
modo
Show channels
o modotoprincipal
operao
Move
differentde
fader
strips para o software
mixing
and
routing
features
arestrips
available,
based on
All
Move
channels
to different
fader
doware.
sistema.
Todos
os
recursos
de
mixagem
roteamento
esto
Some Config
mode
operations
interrupte audio
throughput.
Perform
system
tests
and
diagnostics
your
made
in
Config
mode.
disponveis,
baseados
nas
configuraes
feitas no modo Config.
settings
Perform
system
tests
and
diagnostics
Some
Config mode operations interrupt audio throughput.
Show
Mode
Some
Config
mode
operations
interrupt
Alternando
entre
o Modo
Config
e o Modo
Show audio throughput.
Toggling Between Config Mode and

Show
mode
is the main operating mode for the system softShowMode
Mode
Show
Para
colocarMode
o sistema no modo Config ou no modo Show, realize
Show
ware. All mixing and routing features are available, based on

your settings
in Config mode.
ismade
the
modemode,
for the
softTo Show
put themode
system
intomain
Configoperating
mode or Show
dosystem
one of the
ware. All mixing and routing features are available, based on
ware.oAll
mixing
andMode
routing
featuresna
areparte
available,
on
following:
Acione
switch
Console
(localizado
centralbased
superior,
your settings made in Config mode.
abaixo
da
seo
Insert
Processing).
Quando
o
LED
do
switchest
your
settings
made
in
Config
mode.
Toggling
Between
Config
Mode
and
Press the Console Mode switch (located near the top center
aceso,
o sistema
est no modo Config.
Show
Mode
of the
console,
above the Insert Processing section). When the
Toggling
Between
Mode
the systemConfig
is in Config
mode.and
Between
Config
Mode
and
switch
ouToggling
LED is lit,
Show
To put theMode
system into Config mode or Show mode, do one of the
Show
or Mode
following:
Clique duas vezes no display Mode da barra de status, localizada
To put the system
into Config
mode
or Show
mode,
do one of
Double-click
the Mode
display
in the
Statusnear
Bar,the
located
in the
no canto
direito
da
tela
do
software.
thesystem
Console
Mode
switch
(located
ToPress
putinferior
the
into
Config
mode
or Show
mode,
dotop
onecenter
of
the
following:hand corner of the screen.
lower-right
following:
of the console, above the Insert Processing section). When the
PressLED
the Console
switch
near the top center
switch
is lit, theMode
system
is in (located
Config mode.
Press the Console Mode switch (located near the top center
of the console, above the Insert Processing section). When the
orconsole,
of the
above the Insert Processing section). When the
switch LED is lit, the system is in Config mode.
switch LED is lit, the system is in Config mode.
Double-click the Mode display in the Status Bar, located in
or
or
lower-right
hand corner of the screen.
lower-right hand corner of the screen.
lower-right hand corner of the screen.
um dos
seguintes
Show
mode isprocedimentos
the main operating mode for the system soft-
System Lock
System Lock locks out all manual changes (console and screen
actions), allowing the operator to safely step away from the
System
Lock
system.
Audio
continues to pass but is not affected by console
controls until the operator disables System Lock.
System
Lock
System
Lock trava
todas as alteraes manuais (aes no console
(System
Lock permitindo
is not available
in the Standalone
e na tela),
ao operador
se afastarsoftware.)
do sistema com
System Lock Lock
locks out all manual changes (console and screen
System
segurana.
O
udio
continua
a
trafegar
mas
no
afetado pelos
System
Lock
actions), allowing
the operator to safely step away from the
controles da console at que o operador desabilite a funo System
System
Lock
locks
out all to
manual
changes
screen
system.
Audio
continues
pass but
is not (console
affected and
by console
Lock.
System Lock
locks
out all manual
changes
(console
and
screen
actions),
allowing
the
operator
to
safely
step
away
from
the
controls
the operator
disables
System
Lock.
actions), until
allowing
the operator
to safely
step
away from the
system.
Audio
continues
to
pass
but
is
not
affected
by
console
(System
Lock no
est to
disponvel
nanotverso
Standalone
system.
Audio
continues
pass
but
is
affected
by console do
(System
not
available
the System
Standalone
System
LockLock
buttonis
on
the
Optionsdisables
>in
System
page Lock.software.)
controls
until
the
operator
software).
controls until the operator disables System Lock.
(System Lock is not available in the Standalone software.)
Locking
andisUnlocking
the
(System Lock
not available in
theSystem
Standalone software.)
To engage System Lock:
System
Lock
button
the
Options
> System page
1 Boto
Go
to
the
Option
>on
Systems
page.
System
Lock
na pgina
Options
> System
2 Click
Lock
button
in Options
the System
section.
Systemthe
Lock
button
on the
>the
System
page
Locking
and
Unlocking
System
Travando
e destravando
sistema> System page
System Lock
button on theo Options
3 In the dialog that appears, click Lock.
Locking
Unlocking
the System
Para
habilitar and
o System
Lock:
To engage
Lock:
LockingSystem
and Unlocking
the System
On the console, the LCDs for each 8-channel fader bank dis1 Go to the Option > Systems page.
1To
VSystem
pgina
OptionLock:
> Systems.
engage
System
play
Locked.
To engage System Lock:
2 Click the Lock button in the System section.
Go tono
the
Option
> Systems
page.
211Clique
Lock
na seo
System.
On-screen,
anboto
Unlock
button
appears
in the lower right corner
Go to the
Option
> Systems
page.
3
In
the
dialog
that
appears,
click
Lock.section.
in 2front
of the
a dimmed
background
image.
Click
Lock button
in the System
Click
button
in the clique
Systemem
section.
32Na
caixathe
deLock
dilogo
que surgir,
Lock.
On
the
console,
theown
LCDs
forclick
each
8-channel
fader
bank
3 In
the
dialog
that
appears,
Lock.
You
can
add
your
custom
images
to
display
in place
ofdis3 In the dialog that appears, click Lock.
play
System
Locked.
Na
console,
os
LCDs
dos
bancos
de
faders
mostram
the default VENUE logo. See Customizing the System System
On the console, the LCDs for each 8-channel fader bank disLocked.
On
the Display
console,
the
LCDs
each
8-channel
fader
bank
disLock
on page
41for
for
information.
On-screen,
Unlock
button
appears
in the lower
right
corner
play Systeman
Locked.
play
System
Locked.
in tela,
front of boto
a dimmed
background
image.
Unlock
surge no
canto
inferior direito, em frente a
ToNa
unlock um
the system
(disengage
System
Lock):
On-screen,
an
Unlock
button
appears in the lower right corner
uma
imagem
de
fundo
esmaecida.
On-screen, an Unlock button appears in the lower right corner
Youofcan
addfollowing:
your background
own custom images
Do
either
ofa the
in front
dimmed
image.to display in place of
in front of a dimmed background image.
the
default
logo.suas
See Customizing
the System
Voc
pode
adicionar
prprias
para
Press
and
holdVENUE
the
Cancel
button
on the imagens
console
for
twoserem
You
can
add your
own
custom
images
display
in place of a
mostradas
noonlugar
do
logo
VENUE.toVeja
Customizando
Lock
Display
page
41
for
information.
seconds.
You can add your own custom images to display in place of
the
default
VENUE
logo.na
See
Customizing
the System
Tela
de System
Lock,
pgina
41 para mais
informaes.
default VENUE logo. See Customizing the System
Toorunlock
the
system
Lock):
Lock the
Display
on(disengage
page 41 forSystem
information.
Lock Display
on page
41 for o
information.
Para
destravar
o sistema
(desabilitar
System
Click
Unlock
in the lower
right corner
of Lock):
the screen.
Do either of the following:
To unlock the system (disengage System Lock):
unlock
the
system
(disengage
System
Lock):
The
Press
and
hold
the
Cancel
button
the console
ToExecute
um
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
Unlock
button
is hidden
after
a fewon
seconds.
Touchfor
thetwo
Do either of the following:
seconds.
Do
either
of the following:
mouse
or keyboard
to bring it back.
Press
and hold
the Cancel
on the
for two
Aperte
e segure
o boto
Cancelbutton
da console
porconsole
dois segundos
or
and hold the Cancel button on the console for two
Press
seconds.
seconds.
System
Status
Locked
Unlock inwhile
the lower
right corner of the screen.
ou Click
or
or
GPI All console

GPIbutton
inputsisand
outputs
are
disabled
while
the
Theem
Unlock
hidden
aftercorner
a few
seconds.
Touch
the
Click
Unlock
in
lower
right
of the screen.
Clique
Unlock
nothe
canto
inferior
is
Click
Unlock
in
the
lower
rightdireito
cornerdaoftela.
the screen.
system
locked.
mouse or keyboard to bring it back.
The
Unlock
button
is hiddendepois
after a de
few seconds.
Touch the
O boto
ocultado
segundos.
Toque
The
Unlock
button
is hidden
a fewalguns
seconds.
Touch
the
Footswitches
AllUnlock
Footswitch
inputsafter
are disabled
while
the sysmouse
or keyboard
to bring
it back.
o
mouse
ou
o
trackball
para
traz-lo
de
volta.
System
while
Locked
mouse Status
or keyboard
to bring
it back.
tem
is locked.
GPI
All
GPI
inputs
and
outputs
are disabled
while
Status
doconsole
Sistema
Quando
Travado
Events
All
Event
triggers
and
actions
that include
console
orthe
System
Status
while
Locked
System
Status
while
Locked
system
is
locked.
GPI/Footswitch functions are disabled while the system is
GPITodas
All console
GPI inputs
andGPI
outputs
disabled while
the o
GPI
as entradas
e sadas
esto are
desabilitadas
enquanto
locked.
GPI
All consoleAll
GPI
inputs and
outputs
disabled
while
Footswitches
Footswitch
inputs
are are
disabled
while
the the
syssistema
travado.
system est
is locked.
system
is locked.
tem
is locked.
FootswitchesTodas
All Footswitch
inputs
are disabled while
the sysFootswitches
as entradas
de footswitchesto
desabilitadas
Footswitches
Alltriggers
Footswitch
disabled
while
the sysEvents
All
Event
and inputs
actionsare
that
include
console
or
enquanto
o sistema
est travado.
tem is locked.
tem
is
locked.
EventsTodos
All Event
triggers
actions
thatque
include
console
or do
Events
os triggers
de and
aes
e eventos
incluem
funes
locked.
Events All Event triggers and actions that include console or
console
ou GPI/Footswitchesto
desabilitadas
o is
sistema
GPI/Footswitch
functions are disabled
while enquanto
the system
est
travado.
locked.
locked.
MIDIMIDI
e MTC
and MTC
While
system
is locked:
Enquanto
sistema
est
travado:
MIDI
andothe
MTC
Stage Rack Features
Snapshots continue to be recalled via MTC, either inter-
the system
is locked:
While
As cenas
(Snapshots)
geradas
internamente ou externamente
externally
generated.
Stagenally
Racksorare
used with
an FOH Rack, and provide all stage
continuam
a ser chamadas
viabe
MTC.
Snapshots
continue to
recalled via MTC, either inter-
Switches
de Modificaes
Globais
Global Modifier
Switches
Additional
VENUE Profile Required
provides a setComponents
of global modifier switches:
Global
A VENUE Modifier
Profile ofereceSwitches
uma srie de switches de modificaes
Multi-Select (Shift), Default (Alt), Fine (Ctrl) and User. These
globais:
Multi-Select
(Shift),
Default
Fine switches:
(Ctrl)
e User. Esto
The following
components
must
be(Alt),
purchased
separately:
VENUE
Profiletoprovides
set of
global
modifier
are located
the left aof
input
localizados
esquerda
dosthe
faders
defaders
entrada.
Multi-Select
(Shift),(15-inch
Default (Alt),
Fine flat-panel
(Ctrl) and VGA
User.display
These
Video Display
or greater
are located
to
the
left
of
the
input
faders
audio
I/Osystem
for VENUE
Profile
Upsnapshot
to two Stage
Racks
The
continues
to systems.
respond to
changes
via
nally or externally generated.
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96
total
inputs.
MIDI respondendo
program change
commandsde
if the
Snapincoming
O sistema
continua
a mudanas
cena
via
The
system
continues
to respond
to snapshot
changes
comandos
MIDIRespond
program
change
sethe
a opo
Snapshots
shots
option
is recebidos
selected
on
Options
> via
SnapDVI supported.
incoming
MIDI program
change
commands
if the SnapMulti-Select
Audio
I/O selecionada
Respond
est
na pgina
Options
> Snapshots.
shots
page.
shots Respond option is selected on the Options > SnapTheinputs
system
continues
to controllable
send MIDI program
changes
48
with
remotely
mic preamps
and
Default
Multi-Select
shots page.
O sistema
continua a enviar commandos MIDI program changes
when a snapshot
is recalled
if the power.
Snapshots Send option
individually
selectable
phantom
Digital
Snake
quando
uma
cenacontinues
chamada
se a MIDI
opoprogram
Snapshots
Send est
Fine Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
The
system
to send
changes
Default
is analog
selected
on thechannels;
Options
> Snapshots
page.
8
output
expandable
up
to 48 analog or
selecionada
na
pgina
Options
>
Snapshots.
when a snapshot is recalled if the Snapshots Send option
digital
The system
continues
to Rack.
send MIDI messages stored
outputs
per Stage
User
Fine
is selected on the Options > Snapshots page.
a Digital
within
snapshots,
provided
the MIDI
type is scoped.
O sistema
continua
a enviar
mensagens
MIDIdata
armazenadas
com
from
Avid
Synchronization
Theesystem
continues
to
send
MIDI
messages stored
as cenas,
os tipos
de
dados
MIDI
so
delimitados.
User
and
Control
I/O
within
provided
data
type
is scoped.
MTCsnapshots,
can be disabled
usingthe
theMIDI
CHASE
MTC
button
on the
MTC
pode ser
desabilitado
usando and
o boto
CHASE
MTC na
Snapshots
page.
Also, the sending
receiving
of MIDI
Modificadores
globais
Optional
Components
Global modifiers
applicable)
connection
to aCHASE
FOHbutton
Rack. on the
MTC
can
bebe
disabled
MTC
pgina
Snapshots.
envio
e oVENUE
recebimento
de options
dados MIDI
data
can
turnedOusing
off
bythe
deselecting
the MIDI
on
Snapshots
page.> Also,
the sending
and receiving of
MIDI MIDI Global
These
switchescomponents
provide
used shortcuts
tambm
podem
ser desligados,
a opo
The
following
are optional,
andfrequentemente
mustthat
be can beque
Esses
switches
oferecemfrequently
atalhos
utilizados
modifiers
the Options
Snapshots
page. desmarcando
na pgina
> Snapshots.
data
can be Options
turned off
by deselecting the MIDI options on
appliedser
to aplicados
console
actions
and
screen
interactions.
purchased
separately:
podem
a aes
nasoftware
console ou
interaes
com a tela
These
switches provide frequently used shortcuts that can be
the
Options
>
Snapshots
page.
do
software.
Customizing
the
System
Lock
Display
System Components
Customizando a Tela de System Lock
applied to console actions and software screen interactions.
transfer of Show
data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
Multi-Select
You can manually
add one or
moreDisplay
custom images to display
Multi-Select
Switch Switch
Customizing
the System
Lock
Near-field
monitor
speakers for mix position monitoring
VocIncluded
podeSystem
manualmente
adicionar
mais logo
imagens
Components
during
Lock, rather
than the uma
defaultouVENUE
backThe Multi-Select
(Shift) switch lets you select multiple Input
Multi-Select
Switch
personalizadas
ao
display
durante
o
System
Lock,
em
vez
do
You
can
manually
add
one
or
more
custom
images
to
display
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
O switch
Multi-Select
(Shift)
permite
selecionar mltiplos canais de
ground.
Channels and then apply an action to all selected channels.
All VENUE
systems
include
the following:
background
comProfile
o logorather
VENUE.
during
System
Lock,
than
the default
VENUE logo backentrada
para
depois
realizar
uma
ao
emand
todos
os mic
selecionados.
Dynamic
or
condenser
microphone
XLR
cable
The
Multi-Select
letsrouting
you select
Input
Multi-Select
is (Shift)
useful switch
for batch
and multiple
assignment
of inMultiple
images
are console
displayed one after the other for 20 sec VENUE
Profile
Multi-Select
til
para
roteamento
e
sinalizao
em
bloco
de
canais
ground.
(for
Talkback)
Channels
and then apply an action to all selected channels.
put
channels.
Mltiplas
imagens
so
apresentadas,
uma
aps
a
outra,
em
de
entrada.
onds
in
a
random
order.
(Pressing
the
Spacebar
advances
to
is useful (up
for batch
Footswitches
to 2) routing and assignment of inintervalos
de
20 segundos,
em ordem
aleatria.
(Pressionar
a barra Multi-Select
Multiple
images
are
displayed
one after
the other
for 20 secthe next
image
immediately.)
Most
channel functions support Multi-Select (or Multi-Assign)
Monitor
for VGA para
screen
(screen not
included)
put
channels.
de
espaos
avanamount
mediatamente
prxima
imagem).
MIDI
cables (for
external
MIDI devices)
onds
in a random
order. (Pressing
theaSpacebar
advances to
Muitas
funes
de connecting
canal suportam
Multi-Select
(ou Multias noted
throughout
thisao
guide.
For
details,
seePara
Selecting
and
Trackball
mount (trackball not included)
Assign)
como
observado
longo
deste
guia.
detalhes,
theTonext
image
immediately.)
channel
BNC cables
(for connecting
Word clock
the veja
installimagens
custom personalizadas
System Lock images:
Most
functions
support
Multi-Select
(or between
Multi-Assign)
Para instalar
ao
System
Lock:
Targeting
Channels
on
page
48.
Selecionandosystem
Canaisand
na external
pgina 48.
VENUE Mouse Pad
digital devices)
as notedVENUE
throughout this
guide. For details,
see Selecting and
1 Copy a .bmp or .jpg image file to a USB key disk or CD-ROM.
To install
customProfile
System
Lock images:
VENUE
Guide
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
to GPI devices)
Targeting
Channels
on
page
48.
1 Copie
arquivo
de imagem.bmp
ou .jpgshould
para um
USB
Switch Default
(For um
optimal
results
image resolution
be pen
1024drive
x 768;
Default
Switch
Two
(2)
console
lights
ou
CD-ROM.
Para
melhores
resultados,
a
imagem
deve
ter
1024
x
1 Copy
a .bmp
or .jpg
imagecan
filebe
to used,
a USBbut
keywill
diskbe
or centered
CD-ROM.or
smaller
or larger
images
768
pixels;
imagens
menores
ou maioresshould
podembe
ser1024
utilizadas,
(For
optimal
results
image
resolution
x 768;mas
OThe
switch
Default
oferece
um modo
rpido
dereset
restabelecer
Protective
Dust
Cover
Default
(Alt)(Alt)
switch
provides
a quick
way to
a controlum
scaled,
respectively.)
Default
Switch
sero
centralizadas
ou
redimensionadas
respectivamente.
controle
a seusetting
valor padro
(outhe
zerar
o ajuste).
equivalent
o equivalente
smaller
or larger
images
Rack(s)
(see
next)can be used, but will be centered or
to
its
default
(or
zero
setting).
It
is
to, e
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
2
Put
the
system
into
Config
mode.
pode
substituir
a
tecla
Alt
no
teclado.
The
Default
(Alt) switch with,
provides
quick
to reset
a control
scaled, respectively.)
and
interchangeable
the aAlt
keyway
on the
keyboard.
2 Coloque o sistema no modo Config.
to The
its default
setting
(or zero
setting).
It is equivalent
to,
following
options
can bethe
added
to VENUE
Profile systems.
3
Go
to
the
Options
>
System
page.
Racks,
Software
CDs, iLoks,
2 Put
the system
into Config
mode. and Cables
Exemplos de utilizao do Default
and
interchangeable
with,
the
Alt
key
on
the
keyboard.
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit
the
Avid
3 V pgina Options > System.
Examples of Using Default
4 Ctrl-click
theor
Shutdown
button.
Each
Rack
Rack
includes:
3 Go
toMix
the Options
>FOH
System
page.
Para restabelecer um fader para 0 dB:

4 Ctrl-click
no
boto
Shutdown.
System
Restore
CD your USB key disk to the following lo- Examples
Using
Default
5 Copy
the
from
To reset a of
to 0 dB:
fader
4 Ctrl-click
theimage
Shutdown
button.
1
Aperte
e
segure
o
switch
Default.
cation
on
the
system
drive:
Mix
Rack
Options
Press
and hold
the Default switch.
55Copie
imagem
penyour
driveUSB
ou key
disco
para
o seguinte
local
Copyathe
imagedo
from
disk
to the
following
lo-no To 1reset
a
fader
to
0
dB:
Data\D-Show\Images
User
Standalone
Installer CD
drive
do
sistema:
UserSoftware
Data\D-Show\Images
cation
on
the system
drive:
22Pressione
switchswitch
Selecton
dothe
canal
que deseja
resetar.
Press the oSelect
channel
you want
to reset.
1 Press
and hold the Default switch.
I/O Options
iLok USB Smart
Key (for
storingicon
plug-in
authorizations)
6 Double-click
the Return
to D-Show
on the
Desktop to reUser
Data\D-Show\Images
restabelecer
um nico
parmetro
de you
EQ: want 16
2 Para
Press
the
switch
on
theCard
channel
to analog
reset.
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
that
provides
To reset
aSelect
single
EQ parameter:
Segure
switch switch
Defaultand
e pressione
o codificador
ou for
switch
theo Default
press the encoder
or switch
start VENUE software.
Hold
One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console To reset a single EQ parameter:
daquele
parmetro.
that parameter.
AO16
Analog Output Card that provides 16 analog line level
Hold the Default switch and press the encoder or switch for
outputs
um parmetro
apenas
o teclado e o
that parameter.
ToPara
resetresetar
a parameter
using onlyutilizando
the keyboard
and trackball,
trackball
ouon-screen
mouse,Output
Alt-click
o controle
ne tela. 8 analog
the
control.Card
XO16Alt-click
Analog
and
Digital
that provides
Tolevel
resetoutputs,
a parameter
the keyboard
line
andusing
8 AESonly
digital
outputs. and trackball,
Alt-click the on-screen control.
6 Clique
duas vezes
no cone
D-Show
no desktopiLok
para
Plug-in
installer
discs Return
(if any)to
with
pre-authorized
start
VENUE
software.
reinicializar
o
software
VENUE
.
6 Double-click the Return to D-Show icon on the Desktop to re-
digital I/O.

Switch Fine
Fine Switch
O switch Fine (Ctrl) permite ajustar controles (exceto os faders) na

The Fine
(Ctrl)
lets you adjust
controls
(except for
console
ou na
telaswitch
com resoluo
mxima.
Por exemplo,
sefadpor
ers)
on
the
console
or
on-screen
with
maximum
resolution.
padro um controle ajusta um parmetro em unidades de 1dB, o
For Fine
example,
if by
default
control adjusts
parameter in
switch
permite
ajustes
ema unidades
de 0.1 adB.
units of 1 dB, the Fine switch allows adjustment in units of
Para
ajustar
0.1
dB. um controle com resoluo mxima:
Pginas e abas do Software

Software
Screen Pages and Tabs
Visualizando Pginas
Viewing Pages
Para visualizar uma pgina, siga

procedimentos:
To view a page, do one of the following:
um
dos
seguintes
a View
Press
Pressione
umMode
switchswitch.
View Mode.
Aperte
e segure
o switch
enquanto move o controle. O display
To adjust
a control
with Fine
fine resolution:
associado ao controle apresentar as alteraes de valores na
Press correspondente
and hold the Fine
resoluo
. switch while moving a control. The
display associated with the adjusted control will show the valModos
Momentary
e Latching
ues change
at the
corresponding resolution.
O switch Fine suporta o funcionamento momentneo e o

Momentary and Latching Modes
travamento.
The Fine switch supports momentary and latching operation.
Momentary No modo momentneo, o switch Fine permanece

acionado
enquanto
voc o segura.
Momentary
In momentary
mode, the Fine switch stays in ef-
or
ou
Click the page name at the top of the screen.
Clique no nome da pgina no topo da tela.
When additional tabs are available for a page, go to those tabs

Quando
abas
esto View
disponveis
para uma
v
by
pressing
theadicionais
corresponding
Mode switch
againpgina,
to
a essas
abas the
pressionando
switch
Mode their
correspondente
cycle
through
tabs on thato page,
or View
by clicking
names
novamente para navegar por elas, ou clique no nome delas na tela.
on-screen.
Click page name to display
fect for as long as you hold down that modifier switch.
Latching No modo de travamento, o switch Fine permanece

acionado
atInque
voc explicitamente
seu estado
ativo.
Latching
latching
mode, the Finedesligue
switch stays
in effect
until
you explicitly clear its active state.
Para usar o switch Fine no modo Momentary:

To use the Fine switch in Momentary mode:
1 Aperte e segure o switch Fine.
1 Press and hold the Fine switch.
2 Ajuste um canal, parmetro ou processador.
2 Adjust a channel, parameter, or processor.
3 Solte
o switch Fine.
3 Release the Fine switch.
Para usar o switch Fine no modo Latching:
To use the Fine switch in latching mode:
1 Pressione
duas vezes
o switch
Fine.The
O LED
do switch
se acende.
1 Double-press
the Fine
switch.
switch
LED lights.
Select or ou
adjust
one or
parameters,
or pro-ou
2 2Selecione
ajuste
ummore
ou channels,
mais canais,
parmetros
cessors.
processadores.
3 Press the Fine switch again to exit latching mode.
3 Pressione
o switch Fine novamente para sair do modo Latching.
User
User
O switch
Userswitch
est reservado
para
futuro.
The User
is reserved
for uso
future
use.
Viewing
pages
Visualizando
pginas
Overview
of
Software
Pages
Viso
Geral de
Pginas
do Pages
Software
Overview
Overview
ofof
Software
Software
Pages
The software screen provides the following pages and tabs.
The
software
screen
screen
provides
provides
thethe
following
following
andand
tabs.
tabs.
AThe
tela
do software
software
as seguintes
pginaspages
e pages
abas.
Stage
Rack oferece
Features
Inputs
Inputs
Stage
Inputs
Inputs
Select,I/O
name,
configure,
and systems.
adjust parameters
input
chanaudio
for VENUE
Profile
Up to twofor
Stage
Racks
Select,
Select,
name,
name,
configure,
configure,
and
adjust
adjust
parameters
parameters
for
for
input
input
chanchanSelecione
nome,
configure
e and
ajuste
parmetros
para
os
canais
de
nelsbe
and
FX
Returns.
can
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up to
96
total
inputs.
entrada
eand
retornos
de efeitos (FX Returns).
nels
nels
and
FX FX
Returns.
Returns.
Audio I/O

AllInputs
VENUE
Profile systems
include the
Pgina
(apresentando
entradas analgicas))
Load, save, and transfer shows and presets, and access the conCarregue,
salve
etransfer
transfira
shows
epresets,
presets,
e acesse
o arquivo
Load,
Load,
save,
and
and
transfer
shows
shows
andand
presets,
andand
access
access
thethe
conconsolesave,
History.
Additional
Required Components
History
da console.
sole
sole
History.
History.
DVI supported.

Optional Components
purchased
Filing (Load separately:
tab)
Filing
(aba
Load)
Filing
Filing
(Load
tab)
tab) disk (or other portable USB storage device for
(Load
USB
flash
System Components
Included
Components
Inputs page (analog
input shown)
Inputs
Inputs
page
page
(analog
(analog
input
input
shown)
shown)
Filing
Filing
Filing
Filing
transfer
of Show
data;
512
larger
recommended)
Veja
o Captulo
20,
Gerenciamento
de Arquivos
e Shows.
See
Chapter
20, Shows
andMB
FileorManagement.
See
Chapter
Chapter
20,
20,
Shows
Shows
andand
FileFile
Management.
Management.
SeeNear-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position monitoring
following:
See Chapter
7, Inputs
VENUE
Profile
consoleand Input Routing.
See
See
Chapter
Chapter
7,
Inputs
7,
Inputs
andand
Input
Input
Routing.
Routing.
Captulo
7, Entradas
Veja
Twoo (2)
IEC power
cables e Roteamento de Entradas.
Outputs

Outputs
Outputs
Outputs
Select,
name, configure,
and adjust
parameters for outputs.
Trackball
mount (trackball
not included)
Select,
Select,
name,
name,
configure,
configure,
andand
adjust
adjust
parameters
parameters
forfor
outputs.
outputs.
Selecione
nome, Mouse
configure
e ajuste parmetros para as sadas.
VENUE
Pad
VENUE Profile Guide
Snapshots
Snapshots
Snapshots
Snapshots
Dynamic
orsnapshots,
condenser
microphone
XLR
cable
Store
anderecall
access the
Recall
Safe
window.
Armazene
carregue
cenas and
(snapshots)
e and
acesse
amic
janela
Recall
Store
Store
and
and
recall
recall
snapshots,
snapshots,
and
and
access
access
the
the
Recall
Recall
Safe
Safe
window.
window.
(for
Talkback)
Safe.

Rack(s) (see next)


System Restore CD
Two
Outputs
page
Outputs
Outputs
page
page
One
FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console
Pgina Outputs
See Chapter 8, Outputs and Output Routing.

Each
Stage
Rack
See
See
Chapter
8, includes:
Outputs
8,8,Outputs
andeand
Output
Output
Routing.
Routing.
Veja
oChapter
Captulo
Sadas
Roteamento
de Sadas.
Mix Rack Options
Snapshots page
Snapshots
Snapshots
page
page
Pgina
Snapshots
I/O Options
See Chapter 21, Snapshots.

SeeAnalog
See
Chapter
Chapter
21,21,
Snapshots.
Snapshots.
Veja
o Mic/Line
Captulo
21,
Snapshots.
AI16
Input
outputs
IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addiChapter

Basic
Commands
Modes 43
tional 8 channels of analog
I/O 4:
and
8 channels
ofand
AES/EBU
Chapter
Chapter
4: Basic
4: Basic
Commands
Commands
andand
Modes
Modes
43 43
digital I/O.
Patchbay
Patchbay
Patchbay
Patchbay
Patchbay
Label your
your channels
channels and
and assign
assign input
input and
and output
output patching.
patching.
Label
Rotule
seus
canais
e faa
o assign
roteamento
de
entradas
epatching.
sadas.
Label
Label
your
your
channels
channels
and
and
assign
input
input
and
and
output
output
patching.
Options
Options
Options
Options
Options
Configure system,
system, routing
routing and
and metering
metering options,
options, set
set interacinteracConfigure
Configure
assystem,
opes
de sistema,
roteamento
eplug-ins,
medio,
ajuste as
Configure
Configure
system,
routing
and
and
metering
metering
options,
options,
setset
interacinteraction,
hardware
androuting
general
preferences,
install
and
tion,
hardware
and
general
preferences,
install
plug-ins,
and
preferncias
de
interao,
de preferences,
hardware install
e gerais,
instale and
plug-ins
tion,
tion,
hardware
hardware
and
and
general
general
preferences,
install
plug-ins,
plug-ins,
and e
access the
the Events window.
window.
access
acesse a Events
janela Events.
access
access
thethe
Events
Events
window.
window.
Patchbay (Outputs
(Outputs tab)
tab)
Patchbay
Patchbay
Patchbay
(Outputs
tab)tab)
Patchbay
(Aba(Outputs
Outputs)
See
Chapter
12,
See
Chapter
12, Patchbay.
Patchbay.
Veja
o Captulo
12, Patchbay.
SeeSee
Chapter
Chapter
12,12,
Patchbay.
Patchbay.
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Configure and
and arrange
arrange plug-in
plug-in racks
racks by
by assigning
assigning plug-ins;
plug-ins;
Configure
Configure
Configure
and
and
arrange
arrange
plug-in
plug-in
racks
racks
by by
assigning
assigning
plug-ins;
plug-ins;
patch/route
and
manage
plug-ins.
patch/route
and
manage
plug-ins.
Configure e organize os racks de plug-ins; roteie e gerencie os plug-ins.
patch/route
patch/route
and
and
manage
manage
plug-ins.
plug-ins.
Plug-In
Plug-In page
page
Pgina
Plug-In
Plug-In
Plug-In
page
page
See
Chapter
18, Plug-Ins.
Plug-Ins.
See
Chapter
18,
Veja
o Captulo
18, Plug-Ins.
SeeSee
Chapter
Chapter
18,18,
Plug-Ins.
Plug-Ins.
44 VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Guide
44
44 44VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
Options page
page (System
(System tab
tab for
for VENUE
VENUE Mix
Mix Rack
Rack system
system shown)
shown)
Options
Options
Options
page
page
(System
(System
tabtab
for for
VENUE
VENUE
MixMix
Rack
Rack
system
system
shown)
shown)
Pgina Options (Aba System para a VENUE Mix Rack)
See
See Chapter
Chapter 6,
6, Options.
Options.
SeeSee
Chapter
Chapter
6, Options.
6, Options.
Veja
o Captulo
6, Options.
Chapter
Navigating
and Selecting
Captulo
5: 5:
Navegao
e Seleo
de Canais Channels
Chapter
5:
Navigating
and
Selecting Channels
Stage Rack Features

can be used simultaneously,
supporting
up to
96 total inputs.
Banking
Input Channels
and
FX
Designando
Returns Canais de Entrada e FX Returns
I/O
emAudio
Bancos
Many
configurations
utilize
more physical
inputsand
VENUE
48 inputs
with remotely
controllable
micFX
preamps
Banking
Input
Channels
and
than input
faders.
To
navigate
to
channels
beyond
the numindividually
selectable
power.
Muitas
das
configuraes
VENUEphantom
utilizam mais
entradas fsicas do
Returns
ber
of physical faders, the system provides channel banking
que faders
de entrada.
Para
navegarexpandable
pelos canais
nmero
8 analog
output
channels;
upalm
to 48do
analog
or
decontrols.
faders,
o sistema
oferece
controles
de
agrupamento
de
canais
Manydigital
VENUE
configurations
utilize
more
physical
inputs
em bancos.
than
input
faders.navigate
To navigate
to channels
beyond
the numThe
Bank
switches
the display
of input
channels
on
ber
of
physical
faders,
the
system
provides
channel
banking
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O
the
console.
Os switches
controls.Bank gerenciam a apresentao dos canais de entrada
Snake
connectors
enable
primary
Input
channel
bankstoare
accessed
usingand
theredundant
Bank A, B, (if
C,
na console:
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
The
Bancos
canaisnavigate
de entradas
so of
acessados
usando
os
and
Dde
switches,
located
to
the
left
the
input
faders. on
Bank
switches
the
display
of
input
channels
Bankare
A, B,
C e D, using
localizados
Returns
esquerda18
dosand
faders
the
console.
switches
FX
Returns
accessed
the FX
de entrada.
switches,
located are
between
input
faders
18 and
916
Input
channel
accessed
using
the
A, B, FX
C,
Retornos
de
efeitosbanks
so acessados
usando
osBank
switches
916.
and 18
D switches,
to theentre
left of
input
System
Components
Returns
e 916,located
localizados
osthe
faders
defaders.
entrada
18
Channels
FX Returns
canFX
be Returns
put in Bank
Safe
e 916.
Input
FX
Returns
are and
accessed
using the
18 and
mode,
accessible
regardless
ofser
the
currently
Canais
deleaving
entradathem
e located
retornos
de efeitos
podem
colocados
no
916
switches,
between
input
faders
18
and
Included
Components
modo
Bankbank.
Safe, deixando-os acessveis independentemente
selected
916.
doVENUE
banco selecionado
atualmente.
All
Profile systems
Input Channels and FX Returns can be put in Bank Safe
VENUE
ProfileBanking
console
them
accessible regardless of the currently
Input
Channel
Bancos
demode,
Canaisleaving
de Entrada
selected
bank.
Two
(2) IEC
power cables
The Bank A, B, C and D switches affect all input faders.
Os switches
Bank mount
A, B, C efor
D afetam
todos(screen
os faders
entrada.
Monitor
VGA screen
notdeincluded)
Trackball
mountBanking
(trackball not included)FX Returns
Input
Channel
18/916
VENUE Mouse Pad
The Bank A, B, C and D switches affect all input faders.
VENUE Profile Guide

FX Returns
18/916

System Restore CD
GEQ
Bank
iLokAD
USB Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations)
20630 Hz
Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized
iLok
80020kHz
Bancos de faders de entrada e switches de atribuio
GEQ
Bank
One FOH
Link cable for connection to a VENUE
console
AD
20630
Hz
To bank
Input
Channels to the input faders:
80020kHz
ParaEach
designar Rack
canais
de entradas nos bancos dos
faders de
includes:
PressStage
the appropriate
Bank switch (A, B, C, or D).
Input
fader
banking
and
assignment
switches
entradas
bank Input
Channels
to theapropriado
input faders:
To
Pressione
o switch
do banco
(A, B, C ou D).
Bancos
FX Returns 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
recommended;
TheDVI
FX Returns
switches bank FX Return channels 18 or 916
supported.
to
faders
or 916,
respectively.
Osinput
switches
FX 18
Returns
designam
o retorno de efeitos 18 ou 916
FX
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
compatible)
Returns
para
os
faders de Banking
entrada
18 ou 916,(Windows
respectivamente.
When only one FX Return bank is selected, other input faders
The FXbanked
Returns
switches
bankProfile
FX Return
channels
18
or 916
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Systems
Only)
remain
their
current
channels.
The
Input
Quando
apenason
um
banco
FX input
Returns
selecionado,
os outros
to
input
faders
18
or
916,
respectively.
bank
button
flashescontinuam
to indicate
which
is currently
as-entrada
faders
de
entradas
designados
a seus
canais
de
The
connection
between
FOH
Rackbank
and
Stage
Rack requires
atuais.
signed
toonly
these
channels.
a Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable
can be purchased
directly
When
one
FX
Return
bank
is selected,
other input
faders
from Avid
or assembled
by your
preferred
vendor.
remain
banked
on their current
input
channels.
The Input
O bank
botoFX
Input
bank pisca para indicar qual banco est atribudo a
To
Returns:
bank canais.
button flashes to indicate which bank is currently asesses
to these
channels.
signed
Press the
FX Returns
18 or FX Returns 916 switch.
Optional Components
Para designar os FX Returns nos bancos:
The
Returns
are
banked to are
theoptional,
input faders.
A,
The
following
components
andBank
mustswitch
be
To FX
bank
FX Returns:
B,
CPressione
or D flashes
in order
to indicate
current
bank
assigno switch
FX Returns
18 the
ou FX
Returns
916.
purchased
separately:
Press the FX Returns 18 or FX Returns 916 switch.
ment
of other input faders.
Os FX Returns so designados para os faders de entrada. Os
The FX
Returns
banked
the
input
faders.
Bank switch A,
transfer
of are
Show
data; to
512
MB
or larger
recommended)
switches
Bank
A, B, C ou
D piscam
para
indicar
achannels
designao
correta
To
Input
Channels
while
keeping
FX the
Return
on
the
B,bank
C or
D flashes
in order
to
indicate
current
bank
assign
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
dos
outros
faders
de
entrada.
input faders:
ment of other input faders.
Press any unlit Bank switch (A, B, C, D).
Para designar
de entradas
enquantoand
mantm
os cable
canais FX
Dynamiccanais
or condenser
microphone
XLR mic
To bank
Input
Channels
while keeping FX Return channels on the
Return
nos
faders
de entrada
(for Talkback)
faders:
Toinput
return
input faders to Input Channel banking, do one of the
Footswitches
(upswitch
to 2) Bank (A, B, C, D) apagado.
following:
Pressione
qualquer
Press any unlit Bank switch (A, B, C, D).
Press the lit FX Returns switch (18 or 916).
Para BNC
retornar
aos(for
canais
de entrada,
siga between
um dos the
seguintes
cables
connecting
Word clock
To
return
or
input faders to Input Channel banking, do one of the
procedimentos:
following:
the flashing
Bank
switch
(A, B, (18
C, D).
25-pin
cables
(for connecting
toouGPI
devices)
Press
Pressione
oD-Sub
switch
FX Returns
aceso
916)
Press the lit
FX Returns
switch
(18 or 916).
or
ou
Graphic EQ Frequency Bands
Banking
Press the flashing Bank switch (A, B, C, D).
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
When
a built-in
Graphic
EQ
is inserted
on aOptions
currently
targeted
Pressione
o switch
Bank
(A,
B, C, D) que
est
piscando
output or bus, its frequency bands can be selected using the
The
following
options
can
be added to Bands
VENUE Profile systems.
Banking
EQ
Frequency
Designando
Bandas deThis
Frequencia
EQ Grfico
Graphic
EQ Graphic
switches.
replacesdo
Inputs
116 with either
bank
of
EQ
bands
shown
for
each
Graphic
bank switch
When a (www.avid.com).
built-in Graphic EQ is inserted on EQ
a currently
targeted
website
Quando
um 800-20
equalizador
grfico embutido inserido em uma sada ou
(20-630
Hz,
kHz).
output or bus, its frequency bands can be selected using the
Rack(s) (see next)
Inputfader
assignment
Twobanking
(2) IECand
power
cables switches
Video
Display
(15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
FX
Returns
Banking
Press the appropriate Bank switch (A, B, C, or D).
bus designado, suas bandas de frequncia podem ser selecionadas

Graphic EQ
switches.Graphic
This replaces
Inputs Isso
116coloca
with either
utilizando
os switches
EQ switches.
nos faders
SeeRack
Chapter
17, EQ.
Mix
Options
bank
of
EQ
bands
shown
for
each
Graphic
EQ
bank
switch
de entrada cada grupo de bandas de EQ apresentadas nos
switches
(20-630EQ
Hz,(20-630
800-20Hz,
kHz).
Graphic
800-20 kHz).
I/O Options
See
Chapter
17, EQ.
Veja
o Captulo
17, EQ.
outputs
Chapter 5: Navigating and Selecting Channels 45
digital I/O.
Captulo 5: Navegao e Seleo de Canais 45

Modo
Bank
Safe
Parafor
Switches
Input
Safe
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
Mode
Mode
for
Input
Input
Safe
Safe
Switches
Switches
Bank Safe Mode for Input Safe Switches
Bank
Safe
Safe
mode
mode
isMode
auma
isglobal
a global
Input
Input
Safe
Safe
switch
switch
option
option
available
available
Bank
Safe
for
Input
Safe
Switches
O Bank
modo
Bank
Safe
opo
global
de
Input
Safe
disponvel
na
Safe
is a globalpage.
Input
in Bank
in
thethe
Option
Option
> Interaction
> Interaction
page.Safe switch option available
pgina
Option
>mode
Interaction.
Bank
mode
is a global Input
in theSafe
Option
> Interaction
page.Safe switch option available
When
When
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
mode
mode
is
enabled,
is
enabled,
input
input
channels
channels
and
FXFX
ReRein
the
Option
>
Interaction
page.
Quando o modo Bank Safe est habilitado,
canais
de and
entrada
e FX
When
Bank
Safe
mode
is
enabled,
input
channels
and
FX
Returns
turns
can
can
be
be
Bank
Bank
Safed
Safed
using
using
their
their
Input
Input
Safe
Safe
switches
switches
on
on
the
the
Returns podem ser designados seguramente utilizando os switches
When
Bank
Safe
mode
isusing
enabled,
input
channels
and
FX
Returns
beon-screen.
Bank
Safed
their
Input
Safe
switches
on
the
console,
console,
or
or
on-screen.
Bank
Bank
Safed
Safed
channels
channels
remain
remain
on
on
the
the
toptop
Input
Safe can
na
console
ou
na
tela.
Canais
com
Bank
Safed
se
mantm
turns
can
be
Bank
Safed
using
their
Input
Safe
switches
on
the
console,
orthe
on-screen.
Bank
Safed
channels
remain
onbank,
the
top
nofader
topo
das
camadas
de faders
na console,
independentemente
fader
layer
layer
of
of
the
console
console
regardless
regardless
of
the
of the
current
current
active
active
bank,
console,
or
on-screen.
Bank
Safed
channels
remain
on
the
top
doletting
banco
ativo,
permitindo
alock
voc
travar
localizao
dechancanais
faderyou
layer
of
the console
regardless
of a
the
current
active
bank,
letting
you
temporarily
temporarily
lock
the
the
location
location
of
of
keykey
input
input
chanfader
layer
of
the
console
regardless
of
the
current
active
bank,
denels
entrada
chave
vocal
principal,
microfones
deinput
plpito
e
letting
you
lock
themics
location
of keyor
channels
(such
(such
as as
atemporarily
lead
a(como
lead
vocal,
vocal,
pulpit
pulpit
mics
and
and
similar)
similar)
or
similares)
ou
FXto
Returns
para
manter
acesso
imediato
enquanto
you
temporarily
lock
the
location
ofworking
key
input
channels
(such
amaintain
lead vocal,
pulpit
mics
and
similar)
or
FXletting
FX
returns
returns
toas
maintain
immediate
immediate
access
access
while
while
working
with
with
trabalha
com
canais
em diferentes
camadas.
nels
(such
lead
vocal,
pulpit
mics
andwhile
similar)
or
FX returns
todifferent
immediate
access
working
with
channels
channels
onon
aas
aamaintain
different
layer.
layer.
FX
returns
to
maintain
immediate
access
while
working
with
channels on a different layer.
Por
exemplo,
imagine
um16
total
deinput
16input
canais
de entrada
designados
channels
on
aimagine
different
layer.
For
For
example,
example,
imagine
16
total
total
channels
channels
assigned
assigned
to to
four
four
paraFor
4 bancos
(A aimagine
D) de uma
console
imaginria
deassigned
4 faders .
example,
16an
total
input
channels
banks
banks
(A (A
through
through
D)D)
of of
an
imaginary
imaginary
4-fader
4-fader
console.
console. to four
For
example,
imagine
16an
total
input channels
assigned to four
banks
(A padro
through
D)
of
imaginary
4-fader console.
Layout
de canais
para
ofor
exemplo
de
4 faders
Default
Default
channel
channel
layout
layout
for
a 4-fader
a 4-fader
example
example
banks
(A
through
D)
of
an
imaginary
4-fader console.
Default channel layout for a 4-fader example
Bank
Fader
1 1 forFader
2 2 example
Fader
3 3 Fader
4 4
Bank channel
Fader
Fader
Fader
Default
layout
a Fader
4-fader
Bank
Fader 1
Fader 2
Fader 3
Fader 4
A A
ChCh
1 1 1 ChCh
2 2 2 ChCh
3 3 3 ChCh
4 4 4
Bank
Fader
Fader
Fader
Fader
A
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 4
B B
ChCh
5 5
ChCh
6 2
6
ChCh
7 3
7
ChCh
8 4
8
A
1
B
Ch 5
Ch 6
Ch 7
Ch 8
C C
ChCh
9 5
9
ChCh
106
10
ChCh
117
11
ChCh
1212
B
8
C
Ch 9
Ch 10
Ch 11
Ch 12
D D
ChCh
139
13
ChCh
1410
14
ChCh
1511
15
ChCh
1612
16
C
D
Ch 13
Ch 14
Ch 15
Ch 16
Ch
13
Ch
14com
ChSelecting
15
Ch
16
O Channel
canal
6D
do
Bank
B est
habilitado
Bank
Safe. Selecionar
os
Channel
6 on
6 on
Bank
Bank
B isBthen
is then
Bank
Bank
Safed.
Safed.
Selecting
thethe
various
various
vrios
bancos
resultam
no
seguinte:
Channel
6
on
Bank
B
is
then
Bank
Safed.
Selecting
the
various
banks
banks
gives
gives
thethe
following
following
results:
results:
Channel
6 on
Bank
B is then
Bank Safed. Selecting the various
banks
gives
the
following
results:
Layout
de canais
comwith
o canal
6Bank
habilitado
com
Bank
Channel
Channel
layout
layout
with
Bank
Safe
Safe
enabled
enabled
onSafe
on
channel
channel
6 6
banks
gives
the
following
results:
Channel layout with Bank Safe enabled on channel 6
Bank
Bank layout
Fader
Fader
1 Fader
Fader
2 2 Fader
3 3 6Fader
Fader
4 4
Channel
with1 Bank
Safe
enabled
onFader
channel
Bank
Fader 1
Fader 2
Fader 3
Fader 4
A A
ChFader
Ch
1 1 1 ChCh
6 6 2 ChCh
3 3 3 ChCh
4 4 4
Bank
Fader
Fader
Fader
A
Ch 1
Ch 6
Ch 3
Ch 4
B B
ChCh
5 5
ChCh
6 6
ChCh
7 7
ChCh
8 8
A
1
3
4
B
Ch 5
Ch 6
Ch 7
Ch 8
C C
ChCh
9 9
ChCh
6 6
ChCh
117
11
ChCh
1212
B
5
8
C
Ch 9
Ch 6
Ch 11
Ch 12
D D
ChCh
139
13
ChCh
6 6
ChCh
1515
ChCh
1616
C
11
12
D
Ch 13
Ch 6
Ch 15
Ch 16
D channels
Ch 13
Ch
Chappear
15appear
Ch
16
Perceba
que
oschannels
canais
eand
14
aparecem
mais
Note
Note
that
that
2,2,
10,
2,10
10,
and
146no
14
nono
longer
longer
onna
on
theconsole
the
concon(embora
continuem
acessveis
na
tela).
Note
that channels
2, 10,
and
14 no
longer
appear on the console
sole
(though
(though
they
they
remain
remain
accessible
accessible
on-screen).
on-screen).
Note
that channels
2, 10, and
14 no longer
appear on the console (though
they remain
accessible
on-screen).
Quando
canal
de channel
entrada
ou
FX
Return
is desabilitado
do
Bank
soleum
(though
they
remain
accessible
When
When
an
an
input
input
channel
or or
FX
FX
Return
Return
ison-screen).
removed
removed
from
from
Bank
Bank
Safe,
o the
canal
entrada
que
normalmente
deveria
constar
naquele
When
ande
input
channel
orwould
FX
Return
is removed
from
Bank
Safe,
Safe,
the
input
input
channel
channel
that
that
would
normally
normally
appear
appear
in in
that
that
fader
nolocation
banco
selecionado
automaticamente
reaparece.
When
aninput
input
channel
or FX
Return
is bank
removed
from
Safe,
the
channel
that
would
normally
appear
in Bank
that
fader
fader
location
onon
the
the
currently
currently
selected
selected
bank
automatically
automatically
Safe,
the
input
channel
that
would
normally
appear
in that
fader location on the currently selected bank automatically
re-appears.
re-appears.
O recurso
Bank
Safeon
est
para
canais
de entrada
fader
location
thedisponvel
currentlyapenas
selected
bank
automatically
re-appears.
(canais
de
sada
no
podem
ser
protegidos
pelo
Bank
Safe).
O status
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
is only
is only
available
available
forfor
Input
Input
channels
channels
(Output
(Output
chanchanre-appears.
de Bank
Safe
para
todos
os
canais
armazenado
com
o
arquivo
Bank
Safebe
is be
only
available
for
Input
channels
channels
nels
cannot
cannot
Bank
Bank
Safed).
Safed).
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
status
status
forfor
all(Output
all
channels
channels
is is
Show.
Bank
Safe
is the
only
available
Input
channels
cannot
be
Bank
Safed).
Bank
Safechannels
status for(Output
all channels
is
stored
stored
with
with
the
Show
Show
file.
file. for
nels
cannot
be Bank
Safed).
Bank Safe status for all channels is
stored
with
the
Show
file.
Habilitando e Usando o Modo Bank Safe
stored with the Show file.
Enabling
Enabling
and
and
Using
Using
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
Mode
Mode
Enabling
and
Using
Bank Safe
Mode
O modo
Bank Safe
pode
ser habilitado
na tela,
na pgina Options >
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
mode
mode
cancan
be be
enabled
enabled
on-screen
from
from
thethe
Options
Options
> >
Enabling
and
Using
Bankon-screen
Safe
Mode
Interaction.
Bank Safepage.
mode
Interaction
Interaction
page.can be enabled on-screen from the Options >
Bank
Safe mode
Interaction
page.can be enabled on-screen from the Options >
Para Interaction
habilitar o modo
Bank Safe na tela:
page.
To To
enable
enable
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
mode
mode
on-screen:
on-screen:
To
enable
Bank
Safe
mode
on-screen:
1 V
pgina
Options
>>Interaction.
1 Go
1
to to
thethe
Options
Options
Interaction
>
Interaction
page.
page.
To Go
enable
Bank
Safe
mode
on-screen:
1 Go to the Options > Interaction page.
1 Go to the Options > Interaction page.
46 46VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
4646
GuiaVENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
2 Na seo Input Safe Switches, clique para habilitar Act as Bank
2 In
2 In
thethe
Input
Input
Safe
Safe
Switches
Switches
section,
section,
click
click
to to
enable
enable
ActAct
as as
Safes.
2 In
the
Input Safe Switches section, click to enable Act as
Bank
Bank
Safes.
Safes.
2 In the
Input Safe Switches section, click to enable Act as
Bank
Safes.
Bank Safes.
Choices
Choices
for for
Input
Safe
Safe
Switches
Switches
in
the
Options
Options
> >Interaction
>Interaction
Interaction
page
page
Opes
para
os Input
switches
Input
Safe in
na the
pgina
Options
Choices for Input Safe Switches in the Options > Interaction page
On-screen,
On-screen,
the
Safe
Safe
switches
switches
atinat
the
the
toptop
of of
each
fader
fader
display
display
Choices
forthe
Input
Safe
Switches
the
>each
Interaction
page
Na
tela, os
switches
Safe
no topo
deOptions
cada fader
apresenta
a letra
On-screen,
Safe switches
atmode.
the
top(See
of
each
fader display
the
letter
letter
B to
B the
to
indicate
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
mode.
(See
On-Screen
On-Screen
DisDis- do
Bthe
para
indicar
oindicate
modo
Bank
Safe.
(Veja
Apresentao
na
Tela
On-screen,
the
Safe
switches
atpage
the
top
of
each
fader display
the
letter
B
to
indicate
Bank
Safe
mode.
(See
On-Screen
Display
play
of
of
Safe
Safe
Switch
Switch
Status
Status
on
on
page
47.)
47.)
Status do Switch Safe na pgina 47.)
the
B to
indicate
Bankon
Safe
mode.
playletter
of Safe
Switch
Status
page
47.) (See On-Screen Display
of
Safe
Switch
Status
on
page
You
You
can
can
also
also
useuse
the
the
Event
Event
List
List
to
configure
to47.)
configure
the
Safe
Safe
mode.
mode.
Voc
tambm
pode
utilizar
uma
Event the
List
para
configurar
You
can
also
use
the
Event
List
to22,
configure
the o
Safe
mode. 22
ForFor
more
information,
information,
see
Chapter
Chapter
22,
Events.
Events.
omore
modo
Safe. Paraseemais
informaes,
veja
captulo
Youmore
can also
use the Event
List to configure
the Safe mode.
For
information,
see
Chapter
22,
Events.
Eventos.
ForBank
more
information,
see Chapter 22, Events.
Using
Using
Bank
Safe
Safe
Using Bank
Safe
Utilizando
Bank Safe
Bank
Safe
To Using
To
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
channels:
channels:
Para
habilitar
Bank
Safe a canais:
To Bank
Safe
channels:
1 Make
1
sure
sure
you
you
have
have
enabled
enabled
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
mode
mode
forfor
thethe
Input
Input
To Make
Bank
Safe
channels:
1 switches.
Make
sure you have enabled Bank Safe mode for the Input
Safe
Safe
switches.
1 Certifique-se de que voc habilitou o modo Bank Safe para os
1 Make
Safe
switches.
switches
Input
Safe.
2 Select
2 Select
one
one
or or
more
more
input
input
channels.
channels.
Safe
switches.
2 Select one or more input channels.
um
ouswitch
mais
canais
de entrada.
32Press
3
Press
thethe
Safe
Safe
switch
ininput
in
thethe
Inputs
Inputs
area
area
of of
thethe
Selected
Selected
ChanChan2Selecione
Select
one
or
more
channels.
Press
the Safe switch in the Inputs area of the Selected Channel3
nel
section.
section.
Press
the Safe
switchSafe
in thenaInputs
of the
Chan3 3nel
Pressione
o switch
rea area
Inputs
daSelected
seo Selected
section.
nel section.
Channel.
Safe
Safe
switch
switch
Safe switch
Selected
Selected
Channel,
Channel,
Input
Input
Safe
Safe
switch
switch
Safe
switch
Selected Channel, Input Safe switch
4 Press
4
Press
a Bank
a Bank
switch
switch
(A,
(A,
B, B,
C
or
C or
D)D)
to to
navigate
navigate
to to
a different
a different
Selected
Input
Safe
switch
Switch
Input Channel,
Safe na seo
Selected
Channel
4 Press
a Bank
switch
(A, B, you
C or
D)Bank
toSafed
navigate
to a different
bank.
bank.
Notice
Notice
that
that
thethe
channel
channel
you
Bank
Safed
remains;
remains;
correcorre4 PressNotice
a Bank
switch
(A,
B,
C
or though
D)though
to navigate
to a on
different
the
channel
Safed
remains;
corresponding
sponding
channels
channels
on
on
other
other
banks,
banks,
not
not
present
present
on
the
theum
4 bank.
Pressione
umthat
switch
de
back
(A,you
B, CBank
ou D)
para
navegar
para
bank.
Notice
that
the
you Bank
Safed
corresponding
channels
onchannel
other
though
not remains;
present
on
console,
console,
areare
still
still
accessible
accessible
on-screen.
on-screen.
banco
diferente.
Observe
que
obanks,
canal em
que voc
habilitou
othe
Bank
sponding
channels
otheron-screen.
banks, though notdepresent
the
console,
are
still accessible
Safe
permanence;
osoncanais
correspondentes
outroson
bancos,
console,
are still
accessible
on-screen.
apesar
de no
presentes
na console,
continuam acessveis na tela.
Toggling
Toggling
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
On-Screen
On-Screen
Toggling Bank Safe On-Screen
Alternando Bank
Safe
na Tela
Bank
Safe
On-Screen
To Toggling
To
Bank
Bank
Safe
Safe
channels
channels
on-screen:
on-screen:
To Bank Safe channels on-screen:
habilitar
canais
para
Bank
Safe
naSafe
tela:
1Para
Make
1
sure
sure
you
you
have
have
enabled
enabled
Bank
Bank
Safe
mode
mode
forfor
thethe
Input
Input
To Make
Bank
Safe
channels
on-screen:
1 switches.
Make
Safe
Safe
switches.
1Certifique-se
Make
sure you
havevoc
enabled
BankoSafe
mode
forSafe
the Input
1 Safe
de que
habilitou
modo
Bank
para os
switches.
Safe switches.
switches
Input Safe.
22Clique
Safe
canaison-screen,
na tela, localizados
Click nos
the botes
channel
Safedos
buttons
located atno
thetopo
topde
cada rgua de canal de entrada.
of each input channel strip.
Stage Rack Features

Safe buttons
Audio I/O
Stage Rack.
outputs
Alternando
Bank Safe
naon-screen
Tela per
Toggling digital
Bank
Safe
Safe
LEDand
and
Indication
Synchronization
Control
I/O
LED
e Switch
Indicaes
Safe
Snake
connectors
enable
primary
and redundant
The Safe
LED at
the top oftoeach
input
strip flashes
rapidly to(if
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
Oindicate
LED Safe
no topo
deenabled
cada rgua
de entrada
Bank
Safe is
on that
channel.pisca rapidamente
para indicar que o Bank Safe est habilitado naquele canal.
When a Bank Safed channel is targeted, the Safe switch in the

Quando
um canal
designado
para Bank Safe, o switch Safe na
Input section
alsoflashes
rapidly.
System
Components
seo
Input tambm
pisca rapidamente.
On-Screen Display of Safe Switch Status
Apresentao na Tela do Status do Switch Safe
Included Components
The channel Safe switches at the top of each strip of the

Os
switches
Safe
no topo
de include
cadathe
rgua
dos Safe
faders
na of
tela se
on-screen
faders
light
to indicate
current
status
All
VENUE
Profile
systems
the following:
acendem
para indicar
o status
correnteis de
Safe for
de cada
canal.
each channel.
When
lit,
that
channel
enabled
the
curVENUE Profile console
Quando
acesos,
o canalmode
est (Automation,
habilitado para
o modo
Input
Safe
rent Input
Safe Switch
Solo,
or Bank
Safe).
Two Solo
(2) IEC
cablesCada switch Safe na tela indica
(Automation,
ou power
Bank Safe).
Each on-screen Safe switch indicates the current Input Safe
o modo
de Input
Safe
do uso(screen
de uma
letra
no switch
atual
Monitor
mount
foratravs
VGA screen
not
included)
Switch mode through use of a letter in the lit switch. For exaceso. Por
exemplo,
os
switches
Safe
apresentados
na tela
Trackball mount
(trackball
notthe
included)
ample, on-screen
show
letter
B if Banke Safe
apresentam
a letra Safe
B se switches
o modo Bank
Safe est
habilitado
o canal
isVENUE
Mouse
Padchannel is Bank Safed.
mode
enabled
and
est
habilitado
para
ele.the
VENUE Profile Guide

Bank Safe (two channels enabled)
Bank Safe (dois canais habilitados)
Rack(s) (see next)
Special Cases Affecting Bank Safe
Casos Especiais que Afetam o Bank Safe
Racks,
CDs,are
iLoks,
and Cables
Special
rulesSoftware
and conditions
automatically
applied to Bank
Condies
e regras especiais
so following:
automaticamente aplicadas ao
Safe
status
you do
the
Each
Mixwhenever
Rack or FOH
Rack
includes:
status
Bank
Safe
sempres que
voc:
Bank
to GEQ
faders
System
Restore
CD
Utilizar
Move
channels
or
shuffleSoftware
channelInstaller
layout CD
o
modo
GEQ
ECx Ethernet Control
canais
embaralhar
o layout dos canais
Mover
Change
the ou
system
configuration
Standalone
Software
Installer CD
Alterar a configurao do sistema
GEQ Fader Mode

Modo GEQ
Selecionar
modo
depower
associao
de faders
o Bank
Selecting
ao GEQ
fader
bankcables
overrides
Bank GEQ
Safe. substitui
Returning
to
Two
(2) IEC
Safe.
Retornar
a qualquer
banco
de Fader
fadersmode)
(saindorestores
assim do
any fader
bank
(thus exiting
GEQ
themodo
One FOH
Linkde
cable
for connection
to a VENUE
console
GEQ)
restaura
layout
entradas
anterior,
incluindo
status
de
previous
inputo layout,
including
Bank
Safe status.
Thiso applies
Bank
Safe.
Isto
aplica-se
aos
canais
116
na
VENUE
Profile.
to channels 116 on VENUE Profile.
Two
(2) IEC power
cables
Movendo
ou Realocando
Canais
Moving or Shuffling Channels
Os
canais
Bank shuffle
Safed realocam-se-se
quando
realizada
Bank
Safedcom
channels
accordingly when
any operation
qualquer
operao
que
resulte
em
reordenao
dos
canais de
is performed that results in a re-ordering of input channels, inentrada, incluindo as seguintes:
cluding the following:
Inserir
Inserting
or Removing
a Blank
Strip
ou remover
uma rgua
vazia
umaa rgua
Mover
Moving
strip
Dividir uma
rgua
estreo
Splitting
a stereo
strip(s)
Abrir um arquivo Show salvo em um sistema VENUE que utilize
Opening
a Show
file that was saved on a VENUE system
uma console
diferente.
that used a different
console.
Additional
Required
Components
Prioridade para Substituio de Designaes Bank Safe

The following
components
must
Priority
for Replacing
Bank Safe
Assignments
As
seguintes
regras
so
aplicadas
para
resolverVGA
qualquer
conflito
Video Display (15-inch or greater
flat-panel
display
The
following
rules
apply to resolve
any
potential
collisions
potencial
entre
as
designaes
Bank
Safe
de
canais:
between Bank Safed channel assignments:
DVI supported.
Input
Canais
de entrada
sempres
substituem
FX Returns
channels
always
replace
any FX Returns
that habilitados
are
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
para
Bank
Safe
no
fader
correspondente.
Bank Safed in that corresponding fader position.
Um canal de entrada de nmero mais baixo sempre

A lower numbered input channel always replaces a
Digital
Snakeum
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
substitui
canal
de entrada
deSystems
nmero Only)
mais alto no fader
higher numbered input channel in that corresponding
correspondente.
fader position.
Alm disso:
In addition:
MakeStereo
StereoThe
O status
do canal
herdadois pelo
recmMake
Bank Safe
status esquerdo
of the leftchannel
inhercriado
canal
estreo.
Optional
Components
ited
by the newly
created stereo channel.
Split
StereoThe
O status
do canal
aplicado
a be
cada
The
following
components
areestreo
optional,
and
must
Split
Stereo
Bank
Safe
status
of
the stereo
channel
is ap-um dos
canais
monoseparately:
recm-criados.
purchased
plied to each of the newly created mono channels.
Bank Safe e Backup Personality
transfer
of Show
data;
512 MB or larger recommended)
Bank Safe
and
Backup
Personality
Near-field
monitor
speakers
mix position
O canal
habilitado
para Bank
Safefor
continua
ativo emonitoring
disponvel se
Channel Bank Safe remains in effect and available if Bank Safe
o modo
Bank
Safe
est
habilitado.
Isso
garante
controle de fader
mode
is engaged.
This ensures
andde
uninterrupted
constante
e ininterrupto,
para consistent
os raros casos
uma reinicializao
control
Dynamic
or condenser
microphone
and
XLR mic cable
fader
during
the
rare
case
of
a
system
reset.
do sistema.
(for Talkback)
Modified
Bank Safe functionality
is available
the Backup
Footswitches
(up to 2)Bank
A funcionalidade
Modified
Safe estwhile
disponvel
quando o
Personality
is
active.
Specifically:
Backup
Personality
estconnecting
ativo. Especificamente:
MIDI
cables (for
Input Channel layout does not unexpectedly change
when
O layout
canais
de entradaisno
alterado
inesperadamente
the dos
backup
personality
activated
or de-activated.
quando
o Backup Personality ativado ou desativado.
Channel Safe LEDs automatically revert to display Os
25-pin
(for connecting
GPI devices)
Input
LEDsD-Sub
Safe cables
dos canais
de entradatoautomaticamente
so
ing Bank Safe status.
revertidos para mostrar o status do Bank Safe.
The
switch
the seo
Selected
ChannelChannel
Inputs section
O Safe
switch
Safein na
Selected
Inputs pisca
rapidamente
um ou
esto
em Bank
flashes
rapidly se
if one
or mais
morecanais
channels
arehabilitados
Bank Safed.
Safe. the flashing Inputs Safe switch clears the Bank

Pressing
Pressionar
o all
switch
Inputs
Safe que
est
piscandoislimpa
o status
Safe
status of
safed
channels.
Bank
Safe status
reThe
following
options
can
be added
to VENUE
Profilenot
systems.
de Bank Safe de todos os canais salvos. O status de Bank Safe
upon
resuming
normal
operation,
norvisit
can the
it beAvid
Forstored
details
on all
VENUE
systems
and options,
no restaurado
quando
se retoma
a operao
normal,
nem
re-enabled
for
any
channel
while
the
Backup
Personality
website
pode(www.avid.com).
ser re-habilitado para nenhum canal enquanto o Backup
is Personality
active.
est ativo.
Mix
Rack
Options
You
cannot
change
the current Input Safe Switch mode while
Voc
no pode
alterar
o modo Input Safe atual enquanto o Backup
the
Backup
Personality
Personality est ativo. is active.
I/O Options
After
Resuming
Operation
Aps
Retomar aNormal
Operao
Normal

Any
changes
to Bank
Safe status made while the Backup Permic/line
level
inputs
Quaisquer
alteraes
no status de Bank Safe realizadas enquanto o
sonality
is
active
will
persist
when
operation
resumes.
Backup Personality est ativo
ironormal
permanecer
quando
a operao
AO16
Output
Card
that providesknowing
16 analog
lineSafe
level
You
can Analog
continue
working
uninterrupted
Bank
normal
retomada.
outputs
status will not be reset to its state prior to when the Backup
Voc podewas
continuar
trabalhando initerruptamente sabendo que o
Personality
activated.
status do Bank Safe no ser resetado ao estado anterior ao Backup
line level outputs,
and 8 AES digital outputs.
Personality
ter sido ativado.
digital I/O.

Agrupando
a Seo
Output Section
Banking
theOutput
Output
Banking
the
Section
Banking the Output Section
Outputs are controlled using the Output faders and Encoders.
Outputs
arecontrolled
controlledusing
using
theOutput
Output
fadersand
Encoders.
As Outputs
sadas
so
controladas
utilizando
os faders
deand
sada
e os
are
the
faders
Encoders.
Banking
the Output
Section
Outputs
are controlled
using the Output
faders and Encoders.
decodificadores.
The Mains fader provides constant access to the house output

The
Mainsare
fader
providesusing
constant
access to
the house
output
Outputs
controlled
the Output
faders
and Encoders.
The
Mainsbus,
fader
provides
constant
the house
output
(Mains)
and
does not
follow access
Outputtofader
banking.
(Mains)
bus,
and does
not follow
Output
fader
banking.
O fader
Mains
oferecem
acesso
constante
ao bus
para
PA (Mains) e
(Mains)
bus,
and
does
not
follow
Output
fader
banking.
The Mains fader provides constant access to the house output
no segue a designao dos faders de sada.
To bank the
Output
faders
tofollow
controlOutput
Auxes,fader
PQs, Matrix
mixers,
bus,
and faders
does
not
banking.
To(Mains)
bank the
Output
to control
Auxes, PQs,
Matrix
mixers,
To
bank
the
Output
faders
to
control
Auxes,
PQs,
Matrix
mixers,
Groups
(or
Var
Groups),
or
VCAs:
Para
designar
os Groups),
faders de
Groups
(or Var
or sada
VCAs:para controlar auxiliaries, PQs,
Groups
(or Var
Groups),
or VCAs:
mixers
Matrix,
grupos
(oufaders
grupos
Var)
ouin
VCAs:
ToPress
bank the
the
Output
toswitch
control
Auxes,
PQs, Matrix
corresponding
the Output
Fadersmixers,
sec Press the corresponding switch in the Output Faders sec(orcorresponding
Var Groups), orswitch
VCAs: in the Output Faders sec Groups
Press the
tion.
tion.
Pressione
o switch correspondente na seo Output Faders.
tion.
Press the corresponding switch in the Output Faders section.
Select
Select
Select
Select
Output
Output
banks
Output
banks
banks
Output
banks
Bank switches for Output channels
Bank switches for
Output channels
Selecionando
Canais
Selecting andTargeting
Targeting Channels
Selecting
Selecting and
and Targeting Channels
Channels
CadaEach
rgua
de canal
da Venue
possui
um switch
deswitch.
seleo
de
VENUE
channel
striphas
has
achannel
channel
Select
The
Each
VENUE
channel
strip
a
Select
switch. The
Selecting
and
Targeting
Channels
Each
channel
strip
has a channel
Select
switch.
Theou
canal.
O VENUE
switch
Select
torna-o
objeto
das
deorroteamento
Select
switch
targets
that
channel
fortarefas
routing
processing
asSelect switch targets that channel for routing or processing asprocessamento.
Quando
um nico
canal is
routing
selecionado,
ele se torna
Select
targets
that
channel
or processing
assignment.
When
single
channel
selected
becomes
the
Eachswitch
VENUE
channel
strip
has afor
channel
Select
switch.the
The
When
a asingle
channel
is
selected
ititbecomes
umsignment.
canal-alvo,
que
pode
ser
ajustado
desde
a
console
ou
pelathe
tela.
signment.
When
a
single
channel
is
selected
it
becomes
targeted
channel,
which
can
be
adjusted
from
the
console
Select switch
targets
that
channel
for routing
or processing
astargeted
channel,
which
can
be adjusted
from em
the
console
oror
Canais
tambm
podem
ser selecionados
clicando
suas
rguas
targeted
channel,
which
can
be
adjusted
from
the
console
or
on-screen.
Channels
can
also
be
selected
by
clicking
their
signment.
When
a
single
channel
is
selected
it
becomes
the
on-screen.
Channels
can
also
be
selected
by
clicking
their
na on-screen.
tela.
Channels can also be selected by clicking their
fader
strips
on-screen.
targeted
channel,
which can be adjusted from the console or
fader
strips
on-screen.
fader
strips
on-screen.
Channels
canum
also
beseguintes
selected by
clicking their
Para on-screen.
selecionar um
canal, siga
dos
procedimentos:
select
channel,
oneofofthe
thefollowing:
following:
fader
strips
on-screen.
ToTo
select
a achannel,
dodoone
To select a
channel,
do one
the following:
Pressione
o switch
Select
na of
rgua
do canal na console
Press the Select switch on the console channel strip.

Press the Select switch on the console channel strip.
select
channel,
do one
of the
following:
To
Press
theaSelect
switch
on the
console
channel strip.
ou oror
Press
or the Select switch on the console channel strip.
Click anywhere in the on-screen channel fader strip, except
Click
anywhere
the on-screen
channel
strip,
except
Clique
em
lugar
da rgua de
canal fader
na tela,
exceto
nos
or
qualquerin
Click
anywhere
in the
on-screen
channel fader strip, except
onthe
thefader,
fader,
mute,
solo
orsafe
safe
buttons.
botes
Mute,
Solo
ou Safe
ouorno
fader.
on
mute,
solo
buttons.
on
the fader, mute, solo or safe buttons.
Click anywhere in the on-screen channel fader strip, except
on the fader, mute, solo or safe buttons.
Click to select channel

Clicking on-screen to select a channel
Clicando na tela para selecionar um canal.

48
VENUE
Profile
48 Guia
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Multi-Select (Shift)
Multi-Select
(Shift)
Multi-Select
permite
selecionar
mltiplos
canaisinpara
aplicar
uma
Multi-Select
lets
you
select
multiple
channels
order
apply
Multi-Select
lets
you
select
multiple
channels
in order
toto
apply
Multi-Select
(Shift)
ao
a todoslets
elesyou
em
uma nica
etapa.
Multi-Select
select
channels in order to apply
an action to
them in
onemultiple
step.
an action to them in one step.

anMulti-Select
action to themyou
in one
step.
select
multiple
Para selecionarlets
mltiplos
canais
desde channels
a console:in order to apply
To
select
multiple
channels
from the console:
an
action
to
them
in
one
step.
To select multiple channels from the console:
To select multiple channels from the console:
1 1Aperte
e segure
o boto
Multi-Select
prximo
Press and
hold the
Multi-Select
switch(localizado
(located next
to theaos
1 Press and hold the Multi-Select switch (located next to the
switches
Bank).
O the
switch
pisca
parathe
indicar
otomodo
MultiSelect.
To
select
multiple
channels
from
console:
1
Press
and
hold
Multi-Select
switch
(located
next
to the
input
Bank
switches).
The
switch
flashes
indicate
MultiSeinput Bank switches). The switch flashes to indicate MultiSeinput
Bank
switches).
switch flashes
to(located
indicatenext
MultiSelect
mode.
1 Press
and
hold theThe
Multi-Select
switch
to the
lect
mode.
2 Pressione
Select em cada canal que voc deseja incluir na
lect
mode.
input
Bank
switches).
The
switch
flashes
to
indicate
MultiSeseleo
2 Press Select on each channel you want to include in the se2 lect
Press
Select on each channel you want to include in the semode.
2 lection.
Press
Select on each channel you want to include in the selection.
3 Solte o boto Multi-Select.
lection.
2 Press Select on each channel you want to include in the se3 Release the Multi-Select switch.
3 lection.
Release the Multi-Select switch.
3
Releaseathe
Multi-Select
switch. ou outra funo (por exemplo,
4 Realize
designao
de roteamento
4 Perform a routing assignment or other function (for exam4
Perform
a
routing
assignment
or um
other
(for exampressione
um
switch
Bus
Assign
em
dosfunction
canais includos).
3Perform
Releaseathe
Multi-Select
switch.
4 ple,
routing
assignment
orone
other
function
(for exampressa a
Bus
Assign
switch
on
the
included
chanA operao
realizada
em
todos
os
canais
selecionados.
ple,
press
Bus
Assign
switch
on
one
ofofthe
included
chanple,
press
a
Bus
Assign
switch
on
one
of
the
included
channels).
The
operation
is
applied
to
all
selected
channels.
4
Perform
a
routing
assignment
or
other
function
(for
nels). The operation is applied to all selected channels. examnels).
The operation
is applied
all
selected
ple, press
Bus Assign
switch
on
one
the channels.
included
chanVoca pode
utilizar
a teclato
Shift
noofteclado
ou o switch
MultiYou
can
use
the
Shift
key
on
the
keyboard
orthe
theMulti-SeMulti-SeSelect
(Shift)
selecionar
mltiplos
nels).
The
is applied
selectedcanais.
You
canoperation
use
the para
Shift
key on to
theall
keyboard
orchannels.
You
can
use switch
the Shift key
onmultiple
the keyboard
or the Multi-Select(Shift)
(Shift)
select
channels.
lect
switch totoselect
multiple channels.
lect
(Shift)
switch
to
select
multiple
channels.
You can use the Shift key on the keyboard or the Multi-SeTo exit
Multi-Select
mode, do one of the following:
Para
sair
do
modoswitch
Multi-Select:
lect
(Shift)
to do
select
channels.
To
exit
Multi-Select
mode,
onemultiple
of the following:
To exit Multi-Select mode, do one of the following:
Press Cancel.
Press Cancel.
To
Pressione
Cancel. mode, do one of the following:
exitCancel.
Multi-Select
Press
oror
Press
or
ou
Cancel.
Press the Select switch on a channel that is currently not se Press the Select switch on a channel that is currently not se or
Press
lected.the Select switch on a channel that is currently not selected.
Pressione
o boto Select em um canal que no est selecionado.
lected.
Press the Select switch on a channel that is currently not seTo
select
multiple
channels
on-screen:
lected.
Para
selecionar
mltiplos
canais
na tela:
To
select
multiple
channels
on-screen:
To select multiple channels on-screen:
Press
and
hold
the
Multi-Select
switch (or hold Shift on the
Press and hold the Multi-Select switch (or hold Shift on the
keyboard)
Aperte
e multiple
segure
ochannels
boto
Multi-Select
switch
(ouShift
segure
To
select
on-screen:
Press
and
hold
the
Multi-Select
switch
(or hold
on Shift
the no
and click
the fader
strips
on-screen.
keyboard)
and click
the
fader
strips
on-screen.
teclado)
e
clique
nas
rguas
na
tela.
keyboard)
and click the fader strips on-screen.
Press and hold the Multi-Select switch (or hold Shift on the
To
select
an 8-channel
bank
keyboard)
click
the
fader
stripsnaon-screen.
Para
selecionar
um
banco
de
8 on-screen:
canais
tela:
To
select
an and
8-channel
bank
on-screen:
To select an 8-channel bank on-screen:
Click the bank name below the on-screen fader strips.

To
Clique
noan
nome
do additional
banco
abaixo
das or
rguas
de faders
select
8-channel
bank
on-screen:
Click
the
bank
name
below
the
on-screen
fader
strips.na tela.
Shift-click
select
banks
channels.
Shift-click
totoselect
additional
banks
or channels.
Shift-click para
selecionar
bancos
ou canais
adicionais.
Shift-click
to
select
additional
banks
or
channels.
Shift-click to select additional banks or channels.
Click to select
Click
to select
banks
of 8
Click
bankstoofselect
8
banks
of 8
Clicking
a
bank
display
to
select
multiple
channels
on-screen
Clicando em
um banco
paratoselecionar
mltiploschannels
canais na on-screen
tela
Clicking
a bank
display
select multiple
Click
to
Clicking a bank display to select multiple channels on-screen select
banks of 8
Toselect
selectallallinput
inputchannels
channelsororallalloutput
outputchannels
channelson-screen:
on-screen:
To
Para
selecionar
todos
os
canais
de
entrada
ou on-screen
todos
os canais de
Clicking
aall
bank
display
to select
multiple
channels
To
select
input
channels
or all
output
channels
on-screen:
Double-click
sada
na tela:
any bank name below the on-screen fader

Double-click any bank name below the on-screen fader
select
all input
or all
output
on-screen:
To
Double-click
any channels
bank
name
below
thechannels
on-screen
fader
strips
the
Input
Outputs
screen.
strips
ininthe
Input
ororOutputs
screen.
strips
in
the
Input
or
Outputs
screen.
Clique
duas
vezes
em
qualquer
nome
de
banco
abaixo
das rguas
Double-click any bank name below the on-screen fader
deTofader
nasatelas
Inputfrom
ou Output.
remove
channel
a selection:
in the
Input or
Outputs
screen.
Tostrips
remove
a channel
from
a selection:
To remove a channel from a selection:
Control-click
(or
Fine-click)
a highlighted channel.
Para
remover um canal de uma seleo:
Control-click (or Fine-click) a highlighted channel.
remove a channel
from a selection:
To
Control-click
(or Fine-click)
a highlighted channel.
SeeScreen
Screen
Controls
page
foradditional
additional
on-screen
Control-click
(ou
Fine-click)
um
selecionado.
Control-click
(or
Fine-click)
acanal
highlighted
channel.
See
Controls
onon
page
5050for
on-screen
See
Screen Controls on page 50 for additional on-screen
features.
features.
features.
Veja
Controles
de on
Tela
50 para
recursos
See
Screen
Controls
pagena
50 pgina
for additional
on-screen
adicionais na tela.
features.
Multi-Assign
Multi-Assign
Multi-Assign
The Multi-Assign switch in the Output section is used to route
The Multi-Assign
switch
inOutput
the Output
section
is usedmltiplos
to route
O switch
Multi-Assign na
seo
usado
para rotear
multipleRack
channels
to the selected output bus.
Stage
multiple
channels
theselecionado
selected output bus.
canais
para um
busFeatures
de to
sada
Multi-Assign
Toenderear
assign oneum
or more
channels
to para
an Aux,
or VCA:
Para
ou mais
canais
umGroup,
auxiliar,
grupo
ToMulti-Assign
assign one orswitch
more
channels
to ansection
Aux,
Group,
or to
VCA:
The
in the
Output
is used
route ou
VCA:
1 Presschannels
one of the
switches
the Output Fader asmultiple
to following
the selected
outputin
bus.
1 Press
one simultaneously,
of the following supporting
switches inup
thetoOutput
ascan
be used
96 totalFader
inputs.
signment section:
signment
section:
1 Pressione um dos seguintes switches na seo Output Fader:
To Audio
assign
one
or more channels to an Aux, Group, or VCA:
Aux
18
I/O
Aux
18
Aux
916
1 Press
Aux
18
one
of thewith
following
switches
in the Output
Fader and
as 48
inputs
remotely
controllable
mic preamps
Aux
916
signment
Aux
916
section:
individually
Groups
Groups
Groups
Aux
18
VCAs
8VCAs
analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or
VCAs
Aux
916outputs per Stage Rack.
digital
2 Press the Multi-Assign switch near the Output encoders. The
2 Press the
Multi-Assign
switch near the
Output
encoders. The
2 Pressione
oMulti-Assign
switch
Multi-Assign
codificadores
flashing
Groups
switchprximo
and thedos
banner
display atOutput.
the
flashing
Multi-Assign
switch
and theno
banner
displayesquerdo
at the
O piscar
do switch
e o and
banner
apresentado
canto inferior
Synchronization
Control
I/O
lower
VCAs
left of the screen indicate Multi-Assign mode is enabled.
lower
left ofque
the oscreen
Multi-Assign
mode is enabled.
da tela
indicam
modoindicate
Multi-Assign
est ativado.
2 Press
thethe
Multi-Assign
switch
the Output
encoders.
3 Press
Select switches
onnear
the channels
you
want to The
assign
3 Press
the Selectconnection
switches ontothe
channels
youRack.
want to assign
applicable)
a VENUE
FOH
3flashing
Pressione
os switches
dos
canais
que voc
deseja
switch
and
the banner
display
atdirecionar
the
to the Multi-Assign
Aux,
Group, Select
or VCA.
toAux,
theGroup
Aux, Group,
VCA.
para
VCA.or
lower
left of theou
screen
indicate Multi-Assign mode is enabled.
4 Select any other output to confirm the previous assignment
4 Select any other output to confirm the previous assignment
Press
thequalquer
Select
onchannels
the
channels
want
to assign
43Selecione
outra sada
para
confirmar
o endereamento
and proceed
toswitches
assigning
to theyou
new
selection.
To e
and proceed Components
to assigning channels to the new selection. To
System
proceda
comthe
o
direcionamento
deexit
canais
para a nova
seleo.
to confirm
the Aux,
Group,
or VCA.and
assignment
Multi-Assign
mode,
pressPara
the
confirm the assignment and exit Multi-Assign mode, press the
confirmar
o endereamento
e sair do modo Multi-Assign, pressione
flashing
Multi-Assign switch.
flashing
switch.
Select
anyMulti-Assign
other output
to confirm
o4switch
Multi-Assign
que est
piscando.the previous assignment
Included
Components
and
tothe
assigning
channels
to theofnew
5 proceed
To cancel
assignment
do either
the selection.
following:To
5 To cancel the assignment do either of the following:
AllVENUE
Profile
systems
include
the
following:
the
assignment
and
exit
Multi-Assign
mode,
the
5confirm
Para
cancelar
o
direcionamento,
siga
um
dospress
seguintes
Press the Cancel switch (in the Mute Groups/Function
Press the Cancel switch (in the Mute Groups/Function
procedimentos:
flashing
Multi-Assign
switch.
VENUE
Profile
console
section), or press the ESC key on your keyboard.
section), or press the ESC key on your keyboard.
Two
power cables
To cancel
theIEC
assignment
do either of the following:
or o(2)
5Pressione
or switch Cancel (na seo Mute Groups/Function), ou
Monitor
mount
for VGA
screen
(screen
not dialog
included)
a tecla
no
teclado.
Press
theCancel
Cancelinswitch
(in the
Mute
Groups/Function
ESC
Click
the
on-screen
Multi-Assign
box.
Click Cancel in the on-screen Multi-Assign dialog box.
section),
Trackball
mount
(trackball
included)
or press
the
ESC key not
on your
keyboard.
ou VENUE
See Chapter
8, Outputs
and Output Routing.
Mouse
Pad
8, Outputs
and Output Routing.
or See Chapter
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Click
Cancel
in thedeon-screen
Multi-Assign
Clique
Cancel
na caixa
dilogo Multi-Assign
nadialog
tela. box.

Chapter
8,Dust
Outputs
ande Output
Routing.
Veja
o Captulo
8, Cover
Sadas
Roteamento
de Sadas.
See
Protective
Rack(s) (see next)

System Restore CD
Type
Search
Busca
Digitao
de Texto
TypeporText
Text
Search
Type Text search lets you use the keyboard for fast navigation
TextType
search
you use
the okeyboard
for fast
navigation
OType
recurso
Textlets
permite
utilizar
teclado para
rpida
navegao
to a channel, orRequired
to quickly go
to a specific snapshot or event.
Additional
Components
to a channel,
to irquickly
go
to a a
specific
snapshot
event.
para
um canalorou
rapidamente
uma cena
ou aorum
evento
Type
Text
Search
You can
enter
first characters of a channel name or the abespecfico.
Vocthe
pode
os primeiros
caracteres
do the
nome
You can enter
the
firstdigitar
characters
of a channel
name or
ab- de
The
following
components
mustthat
be purchased
solute
channel
number
to target
channel
onseparately:
theesse
ACS. (See no
um
canal
ou o nmero
absoluto
canal
para
solute
channel
number
to target
that
channel
onnavigation
the ACS.canal
(See
Type
Text
search
lets
you
use
thedo
keyboard
for marcar
fast
Selecting
and
Targeting
Channels
onpgina
page
48.)
(Veja
tambm
Selecionando
Canais
na
48).
also
Video
Display
(15-inch
orto
greater
flat-panel
VGA
display
also
Selecting
Targeting
Channels
on page
48.)
toACS
a channel,
or toand
quickly
go
a specific
snapshot
or
event.
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
and
You can
enter the first
characters
of a channel
name orVGA
the abPara
buscar
e selecionar
canal pelo
ToDVI
search
for
and selectum
a channel
by nome:
name:
supported.
To search
fornumber
and select
a channel
name:on the ACS. (See
solute
channel
to target
that by
channel
Go
the Inputs,
Outputs,
or
page.48.)
also
Selecting
and
Targeting
Channels
on page
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
111V
sto
pginas
Inputs,
Outputs
ouPatchbay
Patchbay.
Go
to
the Inputs,
Outputs,
or
Patchbay
page. compatible)
2 Type the first few letters, channel number, or full name of

2search
Type Snake
the
first
few letters,
channel
number,
full
name
of
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
To2Digital
for
select
a channel
by name:
Digite
as and
primeiras
letras,
nmero
de
canal or
ou
nome
completo
the channel. For example, type s to go to the first channel
thecanal.
channel.
For example,
type
s toir go
to othe
first channel
do
Por
exemplo,
digite
s
para
para
primeiro
canal
beginning
The
connection
between
FOH
Rack
and
Stage Rack requirescom
1 Go
to the
Inputs,
Outputs,
Patchbay
page.
with the
letter s or
(such
as Snare).
beginning
with
letter
s (such
Snare).
nome
iniciado
porthe
essa
letra,
(comoasSnare).
2 Type
thethe
first
few
letters,
channel
number,
or full
name
of
3 Press
Tab
key
to cycle
through
and select
any
other
assembled
bythrough
your preferred
vendor.
3 from
Press Avid
the Tab
key Tab
to cycle
and
select
anyoutros
other canais
3channels
Pressione
aortecla
para
etoselecionar
the
channel.
For
example,
type
s
to go
the
first channel
beginning
with
thatnavegar
letter
(such
as Snare
Top, Snare
channels com
beginning
with
that
letter
(suchTop,
as Snare
Top,
Snare ou
iniciados
essa
letra
(como
Snare
Snare
Bottom
beginning
with
the
letter
s (such
as Snare).
Bottom, or
Strings).
Bottom,
or
Strings).
Strings).
Optional Components
3 Press the Tab key to cycle through and select any other
To search
for
and selectuma
a list
item
by
name(ou
(ornmero):
number):
Para
buscar
e selecionar
lista
por(such
nome
The
following
components
are
optional,
channels
beginning
with that
letter
asand
Snare
Top,beSnare
To search
for
and
select
a list
item
by
name
(ormust
number):
1 Go or
to the
Snapshots, Events or Filing page. Or, click to open
purchased
separately:
Bottom,
Strings).
Gos
topginas
the Snapshots,
Events
or Filing
page. Ou,
Or, click
openabir
11any
V
Snapshots,
Events
ou Filing.
cliqueto
para
window
(built-in
Dynamics
or storage
EQ presets,
Input
Presets
USB flash
disk (or
other portable
USB
device
for
any
Presets
window
(built-in
Dynamics
or
EQ presets,
Input
qualquer
janela
Presets
(Dynamics
ou
EQ
embutido,
Input
Channel
presets,
or Scope
Sets).
To Channel
search
for
and
select
a
list
item
by
name
(or
number):
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
Channel
presets, or Scope Sets).
ou
Scope Sets).
toNear-field
speakers
for page.
mix
position
1 Go
the
Snapshots,
Events
ornumber
Filing
Or,desired
clickmonitoring
toitem.
open
2 Type
the
firstmonitor
few letters
or
of the
2 Type the first few letters or number of the desired item.
2
Digite
as
primeiras
letras
ou
nmeros
do
item
desejado.
any Presets
window (built-in
Dynamics
Headphones
with 1/4-inch
jack or EQ presets, Input
3 Press the Tab key to cycle through and select any other items
3 Press
the Tabor
key
to cycle
through
and select
any other
items
Channel
presets,
or
Scope
Sets).
begin
Dynamic
condenser
microphone
and XLR
mic cable
that
with
the
same
letters.
3that
Pressione
a tecla
para
navegar e selecionar outros canais
begin
with
the Tab
same
letters.
(for
Talkback)
2 iniciados
Type thecom
first afew
letters
or number of the desired item.
mesma
letra.
Footswitches
(up
to
2) Names
Channel
Numbers
and
3 Press
the Tab
key to cycle
through
and select any other items
Channel
Numbers
and
Names
Nomes
e Nmeros
de Canais
MIDI
cables (for
connecting external MIDI devices)
that
begin
with
the
same
letters.
VENUE SC48 channel numbers are absolute channel numVENUE
SC48
channel
numbers are
absolute
channelthe
num BNC
cables
(for connecting
Word
clock between
Os
nmeros
dos canais
dathe
VENUE
SC48name
so absolutos.
bers.
Renaming
changes
displayed
associatedRenomewith
bers. VENUE
Renaming
changes
the displayed
associated with
system
and external
digitalname
devices)
los
altera
o nome
a cada
canal,number
mas o nmero
Channel
Numbers
and
Names
each
channel,
butassociado
the
absolute
channel
remainsabsoluto
each
channel,
but the
absolute
channel number
remains
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for connecting
to GPI devices)
do
canal
permanece.
fixed.
fixed.SC48 channel numbers are absolute channel numVENUE
bers.
changes the
displayed
name
associated
with
ParaRenaming
buscar e selecionar
um canal
por seu
nmero
absolute:
To search for and select a channel by absolute number:
To channel,
search forbut
andthe
select
a channel
by absolute
each
absolute
channel
numbernumber:
remains
VENUE
Profile
Options
Digitea number
um
nmero
no teclado
para
selecionar
o canal
Type
on theExpansion
keyboard
to select
the
corresponding
fixed.
Type a number on the keyboard to select the corresponding
correspondente.
channel.
The
following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
channel.
To For
search
for and
select
a channel
by and
absolute
number:
details
on all
VENUE
systems
options,
visit
theselecionar
Avid
A busca
Text
tambm
utilizada
para
Type
TextType
search
can
also bepode
usedser
to select
snapshots
and
Type
Text
search
can
also
be
used
to
select
snapshots and
website
(www.avid.com).
Type
aevents.
number
on the keyboard
to select
the corresponding
cenas
(snapshots)
e eventos
(events).
events.
channel.
Mix
Rack Options
Type Text search can also be used to select snapshots and
Targeting
Plug-In
Inserts
events.
Direcionando
Inserts de
Plug-Ins
Targeting
I/O
Options Plug-In Inserts
Selecting a single channel targets that channel in the ACS.
Selecting aum
single
channel
targets that
the ACS.
Selecionar
nico
canal
direciona
essechannel
canal aoin
ACS.
AI16
Analog
Input
Card to
that
16
analog
This lets
you Mic/Line
enable Inserts
Mode
useprovides
the Output
encoders
Thispermite
lets youhabilitar
enable Inserts
Mode
to para
use the
Output
encoders
Isso
o
modo
Inserts
utilizar
os
codificadores
mic/line
level
inputs
Targeting
Plug-In
Inserts
to adjust plug-ins inserted on that channel.
Output
a fim
de ajustar
os plug-ins
desse
canal.
to adjust
plug-ins
inserted
on that
channel.
Selecting
a single
channel
targets
that
channel
inPlug-Ins.
the line
ACS.level
AO16For
Analog
Card
thatSee
provides
16
analog
moreOutput
information,
see
Chapter
18,
more
information,
see veja
See
18,18,
Plug-Ins.
Para
mais
informaes,
o Captulo
Plug-Ins.
This
letsFor
you
enable
Inserts Mode
to Chapter
use
the Output
encoders
outputs
to adjust plug-ins inserted on that channel.
lineFor
level
outputs,
and 8 see
AESSee
digital
outputs.
more
information,
Chapter
18, Plug-Ins.
IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addiNavigating
and Selecting
Channels 49
tional 8 channels ofChapter
analog5:I/O
and 8 channels
of AES/EBU
digital I/O.

Controles
na
Tela
Screen
Controls
Screen
Controls
Ajustando Os Faders Na Tela
Adjusting
On-Screen
Faders
Adjusting
On-Screen
Faders
Voc
pode
mover
os faders
naindependently
tela
independentemente
ou
YouYou
cancan
move
on-screen
faders
or in
move
on-screen
faders
independently
or ganged
in ganged
agrupados.
fashion.
fashion.
Para ajustar um nico fader na tela:
To adjust
a single
fader
on-screen,
do one
of the
following:
To adjust
a single
fader
on-screen,
do one
of the
following:
Arraste
fader
de canal
localizado
na
parte
Drag
aofader
indathe
on-screen
channel
strip
section
atde
the
Drag
a fader
inrgua
the
on-screen
channel
strip
section
atbaixo
the
dabottom
tela.
of the
screen.
bottom
of the
screen.
Ajustando Codificadores na Tela

Adjusting
On-Screen
Encoders
Adjusting
On-Screen
Encoders
Voc
pode
ajustar
os codificadores
rotativos
teladirectly
arrastando
You
can
adjust
on-screen
rotary
encoders
by dragging
You
can
adjust
on-screen
rotary
encoders
by na
dragging
directly
diretamente
sobre knob.
o knob.
over
thethe
on-screen
over
on-screen
knob.
Para ajustar um codificador rotativo na tela:
To adjust
an on-screen
rotary
encoder:
To adjust
an on-screen
rotary
encoder:
Clique
noon
knob
para
fique
11Click
on
the
knob
soque
that
it isitdestacado.
highlighted.
1 Click
the
knob
so that
is highlighted.
22Drag
up up
to
turn
thegira
encoder
clockwise;
down
to turn
2 Drag
to cima
turn
the
encoder
clockwise;
drag
down
toarrastar
turn
Arrastar
para
o codificador
emdrag
sentido
horrio;
the
encoder
counter-clockwise.
the
encoder
counter-clockwise.
para
baixo
gira
o codificador no sentido anti-horrio.
ouor or
Select
a channel
andand
move
its fader
in the
on-screen
selected
Select
a channel
move
its fader
in the
on-screen
selected
Selecione um canal e mova o fader nos controles do canal

channel
controls.
channel
controls.
selecionado na tela.
Dragging
overover
an encoder
on-screen
Dragging
an encoder
on-screen
Arrastando sobre um codificador na tela
Adjusting
Values
Adjusting
Values
On-Screen
Ajustando
Valores
Na TelaOn-Screen
Fader
in in
Fader
selected
channel
selected
channel
section
section
Fader
in in
Fader
channel
stripstrip
section
channel
section
In addition
to typing
numeric
values
in text
boxes,
youyou
cancan
In addition
to typing
numeric
values
in text
boxes,
Alm de digitar valores numricos nas caixas de texto, voc pode
adjust
parameter
values
andand
numeric
option
settings
adjust
parameter
values
numeric
option
settings
ajustar valores e opes numricas na tela arrastando diretamente
on-screen
by by
dragging
directly
over
thethe
corresponding
texttext
on-screen
dragging
directly
over
corresponding
sobre
a correspondente
caixa
de texto.
box.
box.
Para ajustar um valor na tela arrastando:

To adjust
a value
on-screen
by dragging:
To adjust
a value
on-screen
by dragging:
1 Clique na caixa de texto para selecionar o valor.
Arrastando um fader na tela
Dragging
a fader
on-screen
Dragging
a fader
on-screen
Para
nafaders
tela
mltiplos
faders
agrupados:
To movimentar
move
multiple
on-screen
in ganged
fashion:
To move
multiple
faders
on-screen
in ganged
fashion:
1 Click
in the
texttext
boxbox
to select
thethe
value.
1 Click
in the
to select
value.
Arrastar
para
aumenta
o drag
valor,
arrastar
para
baixo,
diminui
22Drag
up up
to
increase
thethe
value;
down
to decrease
thethe
2
Drag
to cima
increase
value;
drag
down
to
decrease
o valor.
value.
value.
1 Select
multiple
channels
on-screen
by by
Shift-clicking.
1 Select
multiple
channels
on-screen
Shift-clicking.
1 Selecione
mltiplos
canais
na
tela
(Shift-click).
2 Move the fader on one of the selected channels.
2 Move the fader on one of the selected channels.

2 Mova
o fader de um desses canais.
TheThe
faders
on on
thethe
selected
channels
willwill
move
in ganged
fashfaders
selected
channels
move
in ganged
fash-
Os faders dos canais selecionados se movimentaro de forma

ion.ion.
AnyAny
offset
between
thethe
faders
is maintained
until
at least
offset
between
faders
is maintained
until
at least
agrupada. Qualquer diferena entre os faders mantida at que,
oneone
of the
faders
is minimized
(moved
to INF)
or maximized
of
the
faders
is
minimized
(moved
to
INF)
or
maximized
finalmente, um dos faders seja minimizado (movido paraINF) ou
(set(set
to +12
dB).dB). para +12 dB).
to +12
maximizado
(ajustado
Adjusting
a parameter
value
by dragging
overover
its text
boxbox
Adjusting
a parameter
value
by dragging
its text
Ajuste de um parmetro arrastando sobre a caixa de texto.
Selected
Selected
channels
channels
Arrastando
mltiplos
faders
na tela
Dragging
multiple
faders
on-screen
Dragging
multiple
faders
on-screen
50 50
VENUE
Profile
Guide
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Screen Shortcuts
Atalhos
deShortcuts
Tela
Screen
The on-screen Fader display provides the following right-click
Screen
Shortcuts
Stage
Rack
Features
shortcuts.
The
on-screen
Fader
display provides the following right-click
Os faders na tela oferecem os seguintes atalhos quando clicados

shortcuts.
The
on-screen
display
theand
following
com
o boto
direito
do mouse:
Stage
Racks
are Fader
used
with
an provides
FOH Rack,
provideright-click
all stage
shortcuts.
audio
I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
Audio I/O
Right-clicking
a fader and
on-screen
Synchronization
Control I/O
Right-clicking
a connectors
fader on-screen
Snake
to enable
Clicandocom
o boto
direito sobre um
fader
Seeapplicable)
also Fader
and
Encoder
page
54.
Right-clicking
a fader
on-screen
connection
toShortcuts
a VENUE on
FOH
Rack.
Veja
tambm
de Faders
e Codificadores
See
also
FaderAtalhos
and Encoder
Shortcuts
on page 54.na pgina
54.
ResetSee
Fader
to 0and Encoder Shortcuts on page 54.
also Fader
Reset
Fader
to 0
Reset
Fader
0 Components
Resets
the to
fader
position to zero.
System
Reset Fader to 0
Resets the fader position to zero.
Restabelece a posio do fader para zero.
Resets Selected
the fader
position
to Strips
zero.
Included
Components
Reset
Input
Reset
Selected
Input
Strips
Reset
Selected
Input
Strips
All VENUE
Profile systems
the
following:
Resets
every parameter
on theinclude
selected
channel(s)
to default
Reset
Selected
Input
Strips
settings.
every
VENUE
Profile console
Resets
parameter
on the selected channel(s) to default
Restabelece todos os parmetros do canal selecionado para os

valores
settings.
Resets
every
parameter
the selected channel(s) to default
padro.
Two
(2) IEC
power on
cables
settings.
Monitor
mountChannel
Copy
and Paste
Copy and Paste Channel
Trackball
mountChannel
(trackball not included)
Copy
and Paste
Channel settings can be copied in their entirety from one
Copy
and
Paste
Channel
Os
ajustes
de
canal
podem
ser
copiados
em sua
totalidade
de um
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
channel
pasted
tobe
one
or more
channels
from
the console
Channeland
settings
can
copied
in their
entirety
from
one
canal para
um ouProfile
mais canais
VENUE
Guidepela console ou pela tela.
or
on-screen.
channel
andsettings
pasted to
one
more in
channels
from the
console
Channel
can
beor
copied
their entirety
from
one
Two and
(2) console
lights
or on-screen.
channel
pasted
to
one or more
channels
from the
console
Voc
tambm
pode
armazenar
e
carregar
ajustes
como
Input
You can also store and load settings as Input Channel PreProtective
Dust Para
Cover
oron-screen.
Channel
Presets.
informaes, veja o Captulo Presets
sets.
For also
information,
Input
Channel
Presets
on PreYouCanais
can
andsee
load
settings
as Input
Channel
destore
Entrada
na pgina
54.
de
Rack(s) (see
next)
page
54.
sets.
Forcan
information,
see Input
Channel
on
You
also store and
load settings
as Presets
Input Channel
Pre-
page
54.
sets.
information,
Presets
on
Por padro,
os For
botes
de funcosee
3 eInput
4 (F3 Channel
e F4) esto
programados
By default, Software
Function switches
3 and 4and
(F3 and
F4) are proCDs, iLoks,
Cables
paraRacks,
Copypage
e Paste,
54. respectivamente.
grammed
Copy and
Paste, 3respectively.
By default,for
Function
switches
and 4 (F3 and F4) are proEach Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes:
grammed
for Copy
andList,
Paste,
respectively.
Events
Copy
e and
Paste4 podem
By Utilizando
default,
Function
switches
3
(F3 andser
F4)atribudos
are pro- a
the Events
and Paste can be assigned to
Using
System
RestoreList,
CD Copymais
qualquer
informaes, veja o Captulo
grammed
foracionador.
Copy andPara
Paste, respectively.
trigger.
For more
see
Chapter
22,
Using
the
Events
List,information,
Copy
and Paste
can beCD
assigned
to
any
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Software
Installer
22,Eventos.
Events.
any
trigger.
For
more
information,
see
Chapter
22,
Using the Events
List,Installer
Copy and
Paste can be assigned to
Standalone
Software
CD
Para copiar
e colar
ajustes
de canal
pela console:
Events.
any
trigger.
For
more
information,
see Chapter
22,
iLok
USB Smart
Keysettings
(for storing
authorizations)
To copy
and paste
channel
from plug-in
the console:
Events.
Plug-in
installer
discs
(if any)
with
pre-authorized
iLok
1 1To
Pressione
switch
Select
do
canal
de
onde
voc
quertocopiar.
copy
andoSelect
paste
channel
settings
from
the
console:
Press
the
switch
on
the channel
you
want
copy.
Twoand
(2) paste
IEC power
cables
Tocopy
channel
settings
fromyou
thewant
console:
1 Press
theto
Select
switch
on the
channel
to copy.
Press F3
2 2Pressione
F3 copy.
para copiar.
One
FOH
Link
cable
for
connection
to
a
1 Press the Select switch on the channel you VENUE
want toconsole
copy.
2 Press F3 to copy.
Press the Select switch on one or more destination channels
3 3Pressione
o
switch
Select
de
um
ou
mais
canais
de
destino
(o
Each
Stage
Rack
includes:
2 channel
Press
F3 or
to copy.
(the
toone
which
you want
to paste
the cop3
Press
Selectchannels
switch
or more
destination
channels
canal
ou the
os canais
em
queon
voc
quer
colar
os ajustes
copiados).
ied
(the
channel
channels
toon
which
you
want
to paste the
cop3settings).
Press theor
Select
switch
one or
more
destination
channels
4 ied
Pressione
F4 paraorcolar.
O display
de status
mostra
uma
mensagem
settings).
(the
channel
channels
to
which
you
want
to
paste
the
4 Press F4 to paste. The status displays shows a message con-cop-
confirmando
a operao.
ied settings).
firming
thetoPaste
operation.
4 Press F4
paste.
The status displays shows a message confirming
theF4Paste
operation.
4 Press
to paste.
The status displays shows a message confirming the Paste operation.
To copy and paste channel settings on-screen:
Para
copiar
e colarchannel
ajustes de canal pela tela:
To
copy
and
1 Do
one
ofpaste
the following:settings on-screen:
copy
and
paste
channel settings
1 1Do
one
the
following:
To
Right-click
on
a channel
fader in on-screen:
the fader display across
Siga
umofdos
seguintes
procedimentos:
Additional
Required
Components
the
lower
the screen
and
Copy.
Do one
ofhalf
the
following:
1 Right-click
on
aof
channel
fader
inchoose
the fader
display across
Clique
com half
o boto
emfader
um choose
fader
parte
inferior
da tela
the
lower
of the
screen
and
Copy.
following
on
adireito
channel
theda
fader
display
across
or
Right-click
The
components
must
be in
purchased
separately:
e escolha Copy.
lower
half ofthe
the screen
and choose
Copy.
or
theDisplay
Right-click
within
channel
display
and display
choose
Video
(15-inchupper
or greater
flat-panel
VGA
Copy.
or
ou
Right-click
within
the
upper
channel
display
and
choose
recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA
and
Copy.
Right-click
within
the
upper
channel
display
and
choose
DVI supported.
Clique
com o boto direito na area superior do canal e escolha
Copy.
Copy.
Copying channel settings
Copying channel settings
You do
not need
to select the channel before copying its setCopying
channel
settings
Copiando ajustes de canal
Optional
tings
on-screen.
You do
notComponents
need to select the channel before copying its set-
on-screen.
Voc
precisa
selecionar
o canal
antes
debecopiar
seus
You
dono
not
need to select
the
channel
before
copying
its setThetings
following
components
are
optional,
and
must
2 Select
one or more
destination
channels.
You
can
only
paste
ajustes
na tela.
tings
on-screen.
purchased
separately:
toSelect
selected
2
onechannels.
or more destination channels. You can only paste
to2selected
channels.
um
ou
mais
canais
de channels.
destino.
Voc
s
pode
2Selecione
Select one
more
destination
Youor
can
only
pasteem
3 Right-click
onorthe
lower
fader strip
on-screen,
on
anycolar
transfer
canais
selecionados.
to selected
channels.
non-control
of the
destination
channel,
and choose
Paste
3 Right-clickarea
on the
lower
fader strip
on-screen,
or on any
to Selected
Strip(s).
The
status fader
displays
shows
a message
connon-control
area
of
the
destination
channel,
and
choose
Paste
3
Right-click
on
the
lower
strip
on-screen,
or
on
any
3 Clique com o boto direito em um fader da parte inferior
da tela
Headphones
with 1/4-inch jack
firming
Paste
operation.
to
Selected
Strip(s).
The
status
displays
showsdo
a and
message
non-control
area
of sem
the
destination
channel,
choose
Paste e
ou
em the
alguma
rea
controle
definido
canal
decondestino
Dynamic
condenser
microphone
and
mic
cable
firming
the
Paste
operation.
escolha
Paste
toor
Selected
Strip(s).
O display
de XLR
status
mostra
uma
toSelected
Strip(s).
The status
displays
shows
a message
con(for
Talkback)
mensagem
confirmando
a operao.
Parameters
and
Types
firming the
PasteChannel
operation.
Footswitches
(up to 2) Types
Parameters
and
Channel
Input
channels
can only
be copied or pasted to other Input
Parametros
e Tipos
de Canais
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
Parameters
Channel
Types
channels.
Output and
channels
can only
be copied or pasted to
Input channels can only be copied or pasted to other Input

channels
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
the para
Canais
de
entrada
podem
sercopied
copiados
ou colados
apenas
other
of channels
the
same
type
(such
ascopied
Aux,
Group,
PQ,
channels.
Output
only
be
or
to
Input
channels
can
only can
be
or
pasted
topasted
other
Input
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
outros
canais
de
entrada.
Canais
de
sada
podem
ser
copiados
ou
Matrix).
When
pasting
channel
settings:
other
channels
of
the
same
type
(such
as
Aux,
Group,
PQ,
channels. Output channels can only be copied or pasted to
colados
paraD-Sub
outroscables
canais(for
do connecting
mesmo tipoto
(como
Aux, Group, PQ,
25-pin
GPI
devices)
Matrix).
When
pasting
channel
settings:
other
Settings
common
to
the source
and destination
channel
channels
of the
same
type
(such
Aux, Group,
PQ,
Matrix).
Quando colando
configuraes
deascanal:
are
always
pasted.
When
pasting
channel
Matrix).
Settings
common
to the
sourcesettings:
and destination channel
Copied
settings
with
nothe
corresponding
parameter
in
the so
are
always
pasted.
comuns
aossource
canais
e de destino
Configuraes
Settings
common
to
andfonte
destination
channel
sempre
coladas.
destination
channel
are
VENUE
Profile
are always
pasted.
Copied
settings
withExpansion
no ignored.
correspondingOptions
parameter in the
Ajutes
copiados
sem
parmetros
correspondentes
no in
canal
de
destination
channel
are
ignored.
Settings
in settings
the
destination
channel
with no correspondCopied
with
no
corresponding
the
Thedestino
following
options
can be
added
to VENUEparameter
Profile systems.
sero
ignorados.
ing
parameters
are
left
unchanged.
destination
channel
are channel
ignored.
Settings
in
destination
with no visit
corresponddetails
all
VENUE
systems
andparmetros
options,
the Avid
For
Ajusteson
nothe
canal
de destino
sem
correpondentes
ing
parameters
are
left
unchanged.
Settings
in
the
destination
channel
with
no
correspondpermanecem
inalterados.
website
(www.avid.com).
Copying
Pasting
and Stereo Channel
ingand
parameters
areMono
left unchanged.
Settings
Copiandoand
e Colando
Ajustes
de Canais
Mono e Estreo
Copying
Pasting
Mono
and Stereo
Channel
Mix Rack Options
Settings
Copying
and
Pasting
Mono
and Stereo
Channel
You
canpode
copycopiar
a mono
and paste
settings
to one or para
Voc
umchannel
canal mono
e colaritssuas
configuraes
Settings
more
stereo
channels.
Mono settings
are its
applied
equally
toor
um
ou
mais
canais
estreo.
You
can
copy
a mono
channel
and paste
settings
to one
I/O
Options
the
left
andcopy
right
ofsettings
theigualmente
stereo
destination.
The
steOs
ajustes
mono
so Mono
aplicados
aossettings
canais
esquerdo
more
stereo
channels.
are
applied
equally
to
You
can
achannels
mono
channel
and
paste
its
to
one or e
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
provides
16
analog
direito
do
destino
estreo.
O
dethat
destino
estreo
mantm
reo
destination
channel
retains
its
current
and
width
the
left and
right
channels
ofcanal
the
stereo
destination.
The
ste-toseus
more
stereo
channels.
Mono
settings
arebalance
applied
equally
mic/line
level inputs
ajustes
balance
e width.retains its current balance and width
settings.
reo
destination
channel
the
left and right
channels of the stereo destination. The stesettings.
reo destination
channel
retainsprovides
its current
balance
and level
width
AO16
Analog
Output
Card
16
analog
Voc
tambm
pode
copiar
umthat
canaland
estreo
e its
colar
osline
ajustes
You
can
also copy
a stereo
channel
paste
settings
to a um
settings.
outputs
ou
mais
canais
mono.
As configuraes
do
canal
esquerdo
do canal
one
or
more
mono
The left
channel
settings
of to
the
You
can
also
copy
achannels.
stereo
channel
and
paste
its
settings
de
origem
estreo
so
aplicadas
aos
canais
mono
de
destino.
O
stereo
arecopy
applied
to the
mono
channel(s).
mono
one
orsource
more
mono
channels.
The
left
channel
settings
theto
You
can
also
a stereo
channel
and
paste
itsThe
settings
XO16
Analog
and
Digital
Output
Card
that
provides
8ofanalog
Canal
mono
de
destino
mantm
seu
ajuste
de
pan.
destination
channel
retains
its current
pan
setting.
stereo
aremono
applied
to
the
mono
channel(s).
The mono
onesource
or more
channels.
The left
channel
settings
of the
line
level
outputs,
and
8 AES
digital
outputs.
destination
channel
retains to
its the
current
pan
setting. The mono
stereo source
are applied
mono
channel(s).
AT16
A-Net Output
thatitsprovides
channels
destination
channelCard
retains
current 16
pan
setting. of A-Net
IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addiChapter 5: Navigating and Selecting Channels 51
digital I/O.
Captulo
Navegao
Seleo Channels
de Canais 51
51
Chapter
5: 5:
Navigating
and eSelecting
Settings Excluded from Copy and Paste

Settings
from
Copy
and Paste
Input
ChannelsExcluded
The following
Input
channel
parameters are
Settings
Excluded
from
Copy
and
Paste
notInput
copied
or pasted
current
settings
of theparameters
destinationare
Ajustes
NoChannels
Includos
Em(the
Copiar
e Colar
The
following
Input
channel
channels
are retained):
not
copied
or
pasted
(the
current
settings
of
the
destination
Input Channels The following Input channel parameters
are
Canais
de Entrada
Os seguintesincluding
parmetros
de Outs
canais de entrada
Patchbay
assignments,
Direct
channels
are
retained):
not copied or pasted (the current settings of the destination
no so copiados ou colados (os ajustes do canal de destino so
Channel
Name
Patchbay
assignments, including Direct Outs
channels
are retained):
Insert Blank Strip

Blank
TheInsert
Insert Blank
StripStrip
command lets you insert one or more
Insert
Blank
Strip
blank
spacer)
input
Insert
Blank
Strip
The(or
Insert
Blankstrips
Strip anywhere
command among
lets youyour
insert
one chanor more
nels.
In addition,
blankstrips
stripsanywhere
are automatically
inserted
when
spacer)
among
chanTheblank
Insert(or
Blank
Strip command
lets you
insertyour
one input
or more
O nels.
comando
InsertStereo
Blank
Strip
permite
inserir uma
ou
mais
rguas
you
use In
theaddition,
Make
command
to
convert
twoinserted
mono
inblank
strips
are
automatically
when
blank (or spacer) strips anywhere among your input chanem
branco
(ou
espaadoras)
emchannel,
qualquer
lugar two
entre
os canais
put
channels
into
a single
stereo
preserving
the
you
use
the
Make
Stereo
command
to
convert
mono
nels. In addition, blank strips are automatically inserted wheninmantidos):
de entrada.
Alm disso, rguas em branco so automaticamente
channel
layout.
put
a single
stereo to
channel,
preserving
the
you
usechannels
thequando
Makeinto
Stereo
command
convert
two mono
inHardware
and
software including
insert (plug-ins)
and
Channel
Name
Patchbay
assignments,
Directassignments
Outs
inseridas
voc utiliza
o comando
Make Stereo
para converter
channel
layout.
put
channels
into
a
single
stereo
channel,
preserving
the
in/out
state.
Atribuio
de
Patchbay,
incluindo
Direct
Outs
dois
canais
de
entrada
mono
em
um
canal
estreo,
preservando
o
Channel
Name
Hardware
and software insert (plug-ins) assignments and Blank strips are strictly placeholders (no audio or any type or
channel
layout.
Nome
do
canal
layout
dos
canais.
processing
take are
place),
andplaceholders
therefore consume
no or
additional
in/out state.
Hardware
and software
insert
(plug-ins)
assignments
and
Blank strips
strictly
(no audio
any type or
Channels
following
Output
channel
parameters
Output
Atribuies
deThe
inserts
de hardware
e software
(plug-ins) e processing overhead or DSP resources.
in/out
state.
processing
take
place),
and
therefore
consume
no
Blank
strips
strictly
(no audio
or anyadditional
type
orudio
arestatus
not copied
or pasted
(the current
settings
of theparameters
destinahabilitado/desabilitado.
Rguas
emare
branco
soplaceholders
unicamente espaos
reservados
(sem
Output
Channels
The following
Output
channel
processing
overhead
or
DSP
resources.
processing
take
place),
and
therefore
consume
no
additional
tionare
channels
are
retained):
ou
qualquer
tipo
de
processamento)
e,
portanto,
no
consome
copiedThe
or pasted
(theOutput
currentchannel
settingsparameters
of the destina- Use blank strips to create obvious divisions between groups of
Output not
Channels
following
Canais
dechannels
sada Osareseguintes
parmetros
de Outs
canais de sada processing
processamento
adicional
ouresources.
recursos
DSP.
overhead
or DSP
Patchbay
Direct
instruments,
to
optimize
bankdivisions
placement
of inputs
on of
retained):
aretion
not
copied assignments,
or pasted
(theincluding
current settings
of the destinaUse blank or
strips
to create the
obvious
between
groups
no so copiados ou colados (os ajustes do canal de destino so the console.
channels
Channel
Name
Patchbay
assignments,
including
Direct
Outs
tion
are
retained):
instruments,
or
to
optimize
the
bank
placement
of
inputs
Use
blank
stripsem
to branco
create obvious
divisions
groups
of onde
mantidos):
Utilize
rguas
para criar
divisesbetween
bvias entre
grupos
the
console.
Hardware
and
software including
insert (plug-in)
and
Patchbay
assignments,
Directassignments
Outs
Channel
Name
instruments,
orou
to para
optimize
the bank
placement
of em
inputs
on das
instrumentos
otimizar
o as
posicionamento
bancos
Blank
strips are
saved
and
loaded
part
of the Show
file.
in/out
status
Atribuio
de
Patchbay,
incluindo
Direct
Outs assignments and the
entradas
da
console.
console.
Hardware
and software
insert
(plug-in)
Channel
Name
Blank
strips
remain
available
Personality
Blank
strips
are saved
and during
loaded Backup
as part of
the Show file.
Nome
do
canal
GEQ
settings
in/out
status
mode.
Hardware
and software insert (plug-in) assignments and
Blank
strips
remain
available
during
Backup
Personality
strips
savedso
and salvas
loadedeascarregadas
part of the como
Show
file. de um
Rguas
emare
branco
parte
Atribuies
de inserts de hardware e software (plug-ins) e Blank
Output
membership
(the assignment of channels to an
GEQ
settings
in/out
status
mode.
status habilitado/desabilitado.
arquivo
Show.
Rguas
em branco
permanecem
disponveis durante
Blank
strips
remain
available
during
Backup Personality
Aux,
Group,
VCA, Matrix
or assignment
PQ).
the Console
GEQ
settings
Output
(the
of channels to an Blank
Ajustes
GEQ membership
o modoStrips
Backupon
Personality.
mode.
Endereamento
de
canais
para
Aux,
Group,
VCA,
Matrix
ou
Aux,
Group,
VCA,
Matrix
or
PQ).
Output
assignment
ofGEQ
channels
to an
Blank
Strips
onLCD
thechannel
Console
To copy membership
GEQ settings,(the
use the
copy/paste
shortcut
or
ARguas
blank
strip
has no
name display, and all of its
em Branco
na Console
PQ).
Aux,
Group,
VCA,
Matrix
or
PQ).
Blank
Strips
on
the
Console
useTo
GEQ
Presets.
Use
the
Replace
with
Mix
(members)
From
physical
controls
and
indicators
are
Blank and
stripall
fadcopy GEQ settings, use the copy/paste GEQ shortcut or
A blank strip has no LCD channelinactive.
name display,
of its
command
to
replace
output
membership
for
an
Aux,
Group,
ers
are
set
to
the
bottom
(inf)
position
and
always
revert
tofadUma
rgua
vazia
no
tem
nome
de
canal
e
todos
os
seus
Para
copiar
ajustes
GEQ
settings,
use
o
atalho
copy/paste
Useuse
thethe
Replace
with Mix
From A blank
physical
and indicators
are inactive.
To use
copyGEQ
GEQPresets.
settings,
copy/paste
GEQ(members)
shortcut or
stripcontrols
has no LCD
channel name
display, Blank
and allstrip
ofcontroles
its
VCA,
Matrix
or replace
PQ.
position
de command
GEQ
GEQ
Presets.
Utilize
owith
comando
Replace
with
Mix this
e ers
indicadores
so
inativos.
Os faders
das and
rguas
em revert
branco so
to
membership
for
an Aux,
Group,
arecontrols
set if
tomoved.
the
bottom
(inf)
position
always
use
GEQ ou
Presets.
Use theoutput
Replace
Mix (members)
From
physical
and
indicators
are
inactive.
Blank
strip fad- to
ajustados
na
posio
-inf
e
sempre
voltam
a
ela
se
movimentados.
(members)
From
para
substituir
endereamentos
de
sada
VCA, Matrix
or PQ.
position
moved.(inf) position and always revert to
command
to replace
output membership for an Aux, Group,
ers this
are set
to the ifbottom
para
Aux, Group,VCA,
Matrix
ou PQ. Stereo/Make
Blank
Strips
On-Screen
Make
Selected
Mono
Strips
VCA,
Matrix or PQ.
this
position
if
moved.
Rguas em Branco na Tela
Selected Stereo Strip Mono
Selected
MonoStereo/Make
Strips Stereo/Make
MakeMake
Selected
Mono Strips
Selected Stereo
Selected
Stereo
Strip
Mono
Strip
Mono
Make
Selected
Mono
Strips
Stereo/Make
Combines
two selected
mono channels
into a single stereo
Blank
Blank
stripsStrips
appearOn-Screen
as a simple gray strip with no fader, butRguas
em
branco
aparecem
como
uma rgua em
cinza sem
fader,
Blank
Strips
On-Screen
tons
or
meter.
A
blank
strip
can
begray
right-clicked
Blank strips appear as
a simple
strip withto
noreveal
fader,itsbutbotes
ou
medidores.
Ela
pode
ser
clicada
com
o
boto
direito
para
Selected
Stereo
Strip
Mono
context
menu.
channel,
or splits
selected
stereo
channel into
into atwo
mono
tons
or
meter.
A as
blank
strip gray
can be
right-clicked
to reveal
Combines
two aselected
mono
channels
single
stereo
strips
appear
a simple
strip
with no fader,
but- its
apresentar
seu menu.
Combina
dois canais
mono selecionados
em um canal
stereo
ou Blank
channels.
VENUE
must
be in Config
mode
to change
the
stecontext
menu.
channel,
orestreo
splits
aselecionado
selected
stereo
channel
into
two
or meter.
A blank strip can be right-clicked to reveal its
Combines
two
selected
mono channels
into
a single
stereo
divide
um canal
em dois
canais
mono.
Amono
VENUE tons
reochannels.
status of aVENUE
channel.
must para
be
inalterar
Config
change
theum
stecontext menu.
deve
estar or
nosplits
modoa selected
Config
omode
status
estreo
de
channel,
stereo
channel
intototwo
mono
reo status
of a channel.
canal.
channels.
VENUE
must be in Config mode to change the stereo
status
of
a
channel.
Move Selected Strip
Move Selected Strip
Move
Selected
Strip
Moves
a selected
strip from
its current position to a new locaMove
uma
rgua
selecionada
de sua posio
para
outra.are
Quando
Move
Selected
Strip
tion.
When
you
move
a
channel
other
channels
Moves a selected strip from itsstrip,
current
position
to a new locauma
rgua
derenumbered)
canal movida,
outros
canais
so movidos (e
moved
(and
lower
or
higher
to
accommodate
tion.a When
you
move
a channel
strip,
other to
channels
are
Moves
selected
strip
from
itsbaixo
current
position
ao new
renumerados)
para
cima
e para
para
acomodar
novolocacanal.
themoved
moved(and
channel.
renumbered)
lower
or
higher
to
accommodate
When
a channel
other channels
A tion.
VENUE
deve you
estarmove
no modo
Config strip,
para mover
rguas deare
canais.
the moved
channel.
moved
(and
to accommodate
VENUE
mustrenumbered)
be in Configlower
modeor
tohigher
move channel
strips.
Para
uma
rgua de canal:
themover
moved
channel.
VENUE must be in Config mode to move channel strips.
To move a fader strip:
be inno
Config
1 VENUE
Coloquemust
o sistema
modomode
Config.to move channel strips.
To move
a faderinstrip:
1 Put
the system
Config mode.
Blank Strip
2 To
Selecione
ofader
canal
que voc desja mover.
move
athe
strip:
1
Put
system
in
Config
mode.
Blank Strip
2 Select the channel you want to move.
Blank strip in position 16, Right-click menu shown
the
system
in
Config
mode.
Rgua vazia na posio 16, apresentando Blank
o menuStrip
do boto direito
3 13NaPut
tela,
clique
com
o
boto
direito
da
rgua
de
destino
(para
onde
2 Select the
channel you
want
to move. strip (where you
On-screen,
right-click
on the
destination
Blank strip in position 16, Right-click menu shown
voc quer mover o canal selecionado).
2 Select
the channel
you want
to move.
want
to move
theright-click
selected
channel).
3 On-screen,
on the
destination strip (where you Blank strip in position 16, Right-click menu shown
want
to
move
the
selected
channel).
4 34Escolha
Move
Selected
Strip
Here
nofrom
menuthe
pop-up.
On-screen,
right-click
on
the
destination
strip
(where
you
Choose
Move
Selected
Strip
Here
pop-up
menu.
want
to move the selected channel).
4 Choose Move Selected Strip Here from the pop-up menu.
As cenas cannot
(Snapshots)
norecall
podem
armazenar
e carregar
Snapshots
store and
custom
console channel
4 Choose
Move Selected
Strip Here from
the pop-up menu.
posicionamentos
customizados
da console.
position.
Snapshots cannot store and recall custom console channel
position.cannot store and recall custom console channel

Snapshots
position.

Adicionando Rguas em Branco

Rguas
em branco
ser inseridas manualmente, mas tambm
Stage
Rack podem
Features
Adding
podem
serBlank
criadasStrips
automaticamente quando voc utiliza o comando
Make
Stereo.
Stage
Blank strips can be inserted manually, and are also created auaudio I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
tomatically when you use the Make Stereo command.
Inserindo
em Branco Manualmente
can beRguas
used simultaneously,
supporting up to 96 total inputs.
Manually
Inserting Blank Strips
Para
adicionar
Audio
I/O manualmente uma rgiua vazia:
48
inputs
with
manually
add aConfig.
blankremotely
strip:
1To
Habilite
o modo
1 Enable Config mode.
2 Clique
o boto
direito
em uma
rgua deup
canal
entrada
8com
analog
output
channels;
expandable
to 48de
analog
or
onde
voc
deseja
inserir
a
rgua
vazia
e
escolha
Insert
Blank
Strip.
2 Right-click
an
input
channel
strip
at
the
location
where
you
Por
exemplo,
seavoc
quer
uma
vazia
na Blank
posio
16,For
clique
want
to insert
blank
strip
andrgua
choose
Insert
Strip.
com
o
boto
direito
no
canal
16.
example,
if you want
to Control
have a blank
Synchronization
and
I/O strip at channel strip 16,
right-click on channel 16.
Snake pode
connectors
to enable
primary
redundant
(if
Voc tambm
selecionar
uma rgua
emand
branco
e escolher
Insert
Blank
Strip
para
adicionar
vrias
rguas
em
branco.
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
You can also select a blank strip and choose Insert Blank Strip
to insert multiple blank strips.
Todos os canais direita do ponto de insero (incluindo o canal

clicado
com o to
boto
direito)
movimentadas
posiothe
para
All channels
the right
of so
the insertion
pointuma
(including
Systemchannel)
Components
aright-clicked
direita.
are shuffled one position to the right.
Este commando estar indisponvel se a combinao do
This command will be unavailable if the combined number

Included
Components
nmero de
rguas de entrada e das rguas em branco for
of input channel strips plus blank strips equals or exceeds
igual ou Profile
superiorsystems
a 96. Para
maisthe
informaes.
Veja Limites
All96.
VENUE
include
following:
see Limits
and Guidelines for
e Guias para Rguas Em branco, na pgina 53.
Strips
on page
53.
Blank
VENUE
Profile
console
Two
(2) IEC
power
cables
Para inserir
vrias
rguas
em branco:
To insert multiple blank strips:

11Coloque
sistemainto
no modo
Config.
Put theosystem
Config
mode.
Create
aseleo
multi-selection
channels.
uma
VENUE
Mouse
Pad of
22Crie
de vrios
canais.
VENUE
3 Right-click
onProfile
one ofGuide
the selected channels and choose In-
3 Clique com o boto direito em um dos canai selecionados e

Two
(2) console
lights
sert Blank
Strips
at Selection.
escolha Insert Blank Strips at Selection.

A blank strip is inserted in place of each selected channel strip,
Uma rgua
vazia(see
inserida
no lugar de cada uma das rguas
Rack(s)
next)
shifting all channels accordingly and maintaining the
selecionadas, deslocando todos os canais de acordo e mantendo
multi-selection.
a multiseleo.
Automatically
Inserting Blank
Strips
Make
Stereo Make
Inserindo
Automaticamente
Rguas
Emusing
Branco
Utilizando
Each Mix
Rack or FOH Rack
includes:
Stereo
VENUE
automatically
blank strips when you use the
System
Restorecreates
CD
MakeStereo
command
in
order
to preserve the current
chanEthernet Control
CDquando
A VENUEECx
automaticamente
criaSoftware
rguas Installer
em branco
voc
nel
layout.
Similarly,
blank
strips
may
be
automatically
utiliza o comando
Make
StereoInstaller
para preserver
o layout dosrecanais.
Standalone
Software
CD
moved
when
you
use the
Stereo
command to revert
a steDe
modo
similar,
rguas
em Split
branco
so automaticamente
removidas
reo strip
to its
contributing
quando
voc
usatwo
o comando
Splitmono
Stereochannels.
para reverter uma rgua
para
Plug-in
discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok
estreo
doisinstaller
canais mono.
MakeStereo
A
blank
strip
automatically inserted at the loTwo (2) IEC power is
cables
cation
previously
occupied
by theright-side
channel inserida
of the no
Make
Stereo
Uma
rgua
em
branco
automaticamente
One FOH Link cable for connection
to a VENUE
console
newly-formed
stereo
pair.pelo
There
is no
shuffling
of the remain-par
local
previamente
ocupado
canal
direito
no recm-formado
estreo.
No
hRack
deslocamento
dos
de entrada remanescentes
ingEach
input
channels
as a result
ofcanais
this operation.
Stage
includes:
resultante dessa operao
Split Stereo O comportamento ao dividir uma faixa estreo em duas

faixas mono o seguinte:
Se uma rgua em branco est localizada imediatamente aps
Additional
Required
o canal
estreo,
o canal
direito
do apar
estreo
essa
Split
Stereo
The
behavior
whenComponents
splitting
stereo
stripocupar
into
posio
e
a
rgua
em
branco
automaticamente
removida.
two
mono
strips is
as follows: must be purchased separately:
The
following
components
Nenhum outro canal deslocado.
If a blank strip is located immediately adjacent to the
Video
Se no
h rgua
em branco
localizada
imediatamente
Display
(15-inch
or greater
flat-panel
VGA displayaps o
(previously)
stereo
channel,
the
right
channel
of the
canal
estreo,
todos
os
canais
direita
do
ponto
de steinsero
recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution).
VGA
and
reo
pair
occupies
this
position
and
the
blank
strip
is auso
deslocados
uma
posio
para
a
direita
e
o
canal
direito
do
DVI supported.
tomatically
No other channels shuffle.
par estreoremoved.
inserido.
and
(Windows
compatible)
USB
If nokeyboard
blank strip
is trackball/mouse
located immediately
adjacent
to the
Removendo
Rguas
emchannel,
Branco all channels to the right of
(previously)
stereo
the split point shuffle one position to the right and the
Rguas
em branco podem
serFOH
removidas
manualmente.
The connection
between
Rack and
Stage Rack requires
right channel of the stereo pair is inserted.

Removendo Manualmente Rguas em Branco
from Avid
or assembled
Removing
Blank
Strips by your preferred vendor.
Para remover uma rgua em branco:
Blank strips can be removed manually.
Optional Components
Clique com o boto direito na rgua em branco que voc deseja

Manually
Removing
Blank Strips
remover
e escolha
Remove
Blank
Strip.
The following
components
are optional,
and must be
ToPara
remove
a blank
strip:
remover
todas
as rguas em branco:
Right-click
the blank
to larger
remove
and choose
transfer
Showstrip
data;you
512wish
MB or
recommended)
Clique
com oof
boto
direito
em
qualquer
rgua em
branco e escolha
Remove
Blank Strip.
Near-field
monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
Remove All Blank Strips.

ToAs
remove
blank
strips:
rguasallem
branco
so removidas e todos os canais direita so
deslocados
uma
posio
para
a esquerda.
Right-click
any blank strip
and
choose Remove All Blank
(for Talkback)
Strips.
Footswitches
to 2)em Branco
Limites
e Guias para (up
Rguas
MIDIare
cables
(for connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
Blank strips
removed
and all channels
to the
right
are shufO nmero mximo de rguas de faders 96. Essas 96 posies
fled one
position
theconnecting
left.
BNC
cablesto(for
Word clock between the
podem ser de qualquer combinao de canais de entrada mono
ou estreo, assim como de rguas em branco (FX Returns so
Limits
and Guidelines
Blank
Strips
25-pin
D-Sub
cablesfor
(fore
connecting
to GPInessa
devices)
considerados
separadamente
no so
includos
conta).
The
number
fader strips
is 96. These
96 positions
O maximum
nmero mximo
deofrguas
em branco
que podem
ser usadas
can
be
comprised
of
any
combination
of
mono
or
stereoeinput
varia dependendo da configurao corrente do sistema
do nmero
VENUE
Profile
Options
channels,
well
asutilizados
blankExpansion
strips.
(FX Returns
are
de
canaisasestreo
na configurao.
Esseconsidered
nmero pode ser
separate
andcomo:
are not included in this count.)
calculado
(96 nmero de canais de entrada no System Configuration) +
For
details
onnumber
all VENUE
systems
and
options,
Avid
The
maximum
of blank
strips
that
can bevisit
usedthe
varies
nmero
de canais
estreo
depending
on the current system configuration and the num-
Por
ber
ofexemplo:
stereo channels used in the configuration. This number
beUma
configurao
de 96 canais com 96 canais mono no pode
can
calculated
as:
MixterRack
Options
rguas em branco.
(96
number
of input
incom
System
Configuration)
the
Uma
configurao
dechannels
48 canais
48 canais
mono pode ter
I/O48
Options
rguas
emchannels
branco.
+ Number
of stereo
Uma configurao de 48 canais com 4 canais estreo pode ter

ForAI16
example:
52
rguas em branco (52 = 96 48 + 4)
A 96 channel configuration with 96 mono channels can
have
0 blank
strips.Card that provides 16 analog line level
AO16
Analog
Output
outputs
A 48 channel configuration with 48 mono channels can
have 48 blank strips
A 48 channel configuration with 4 stereo channels can
have 52 blank strips (52 = 96 48 + 4)
digital I/O.

Atalhos de Faders e Codificadores
Para salvar um canal como Input Channel Preset:
Fader
Fader
and
and
Encoder
Encoder
Shortcuts
Shortcuts
OsThe
faders
e codificadores
nafaders
tela
oferecem
atalhos
com
ofolboto
The
on-screen
on-screen
channel
channel
faders
and
and
encoders
encoders
provide
provide
thethe
foldireito
para
restabelecer
parmetros
individuais
e parameters
de rguas
de
lowing
lowing
right-click
right-click
shortcuts
shortcuts
to reset
to reset
individual
individual
parameters
and
and
canal.
channel
channel
strips.
strips.
Fader and Encoder Shortcuts

The on-screen channel faders and encoders provide the following right-click shortcuts to reset individual parameters and
channel strips.
To To
store
store
a channel
a channel
as as
an an
Input
Input
Channel
Channel
Preset:
Preset:
11 Configure
1
Configure
anan
Input
Input
Channel
Channel
ascomo
as
desired.
desired.
Configure
um
canal
de
entrada
desejado.
2 Click
Click
thethe
Channel
Presets
Presets
icon
icon
(the
folder
folder
icon
icon
located
located
to to
2 2Clique
o Channel
cone
Channel
Presets
(o(the
cone
de
pasta
localizado
the
the
right
right
of
of
the
the
Channel
Channel
Routing
Routing
indicator
indicator
and
and
+/
+/
buttons).
buttons).
direita do indicador Channel Routing e dos botes +/).
To store a channel as an Input Channel Preset:
1 Configure an Input Channel as desired.
2 Click the Channel Presets icon (the folder icon located to
the right of the Channel Routing indicator
and
+/
buttons).
Channel
Channel
Presets
Presets
Right-clicking
Right-clicking
channel
channel
strip
strip
controls
controls
on-screen
on-screen
cone
Channel
Presets
na
Inputs
Channel
Channel
Presets
Presets
icon
icon
inpgina
the
in the
Inputs
Inputs
page
page
Controles do Boto Direito na Tela
Reset
Reset
Parameter
Parameter
3 Specify
3 Specify
a folder
aa
folder
in in
which
which
to
save
save
the
the
preset,
preset,
if the
if se
the
currently
3 Especifique
pasta
em
quetodeseja
salvar
o preset,
acurrently
atualmente
selected
selected
folder
folder
is
not
is
not
appropriate,
appropriate,
by
by
clicking
clicking
the
the
Folder
Folder
selecselecionada no apropriada, clicando no seletor Folder eselecselecione
Channel
Presets
tor
tor
and
and
selecting
selecting
a
different
a
different
folder.
folder.
uma pasta diferente.
Reset Parameter
To To
reset
reset
an an
on-screen
on-screen
fader
fader
or encoder
or
encoder
to its
tona
its
default
default
value,
value,
do do
one
one
Para
restabelecer
um fader
ou
codificador
tela
para
seu
valor
of the
of the
following:
following:
padro:
Right-clicking channel strip controls on-screen
Right-click
Right-click
thethe
control
control
and
and
choose
choose
Reset.
Reset.
Channel
Presets
icon in the Inputs page
4 Click
4 Click
New.
New.
4 Clique New.
Reset
Clique com
o boto direito sobre o controle e escolha Reset.
Parameter
3 Specify a folder in which to save the preset, if the currently
To
ou
an on-screen
fader or encoder to its default value, do one
reset
Alt-click
Alt-click
thethe
control.
control.
selected folder is not appropriate, by clicking the Folder selecFolders

Folders
tor and selecting a different folder.
Alt-click no controle.
4 Click New.
or
or

of the following:
Right-click
the control and choose Reset.
Reset
Reset
Channel
Channel
Reset
Channel
or
To To
reset
reset
an an
entire
entire
channel
channel
strip
strip
to to
itsits
default
default
settings:
settings:
Folders
Alt-click
the control.
Para
restabelecer
completamente uma rgua para seus valores
Right-click
Right-click
thethe
on-screen
on-screen
channel
channel
fader
fader
and
and
choose
choose
Reset
Reset
padro:
Strip.
Strip.
Reset Channel
Clique com o boto direito sobre o fader do canal na tela e escolha

Reset Strip.
To reset an entire channel strip to its default settings:
Input
Input
Channel
Channel
Presets
Presets
window
window
Janela
Input
Channel
Presets
Input
InputChannel
ChannelPresets
Presets
Right-click the on-screen channel fader and choose Reset
Strip.
Input
Input
channel
channel
configuration
configuration
(input
(input
name,
name,
gain,
gain,
fader
fader
levels,
levels,
Input
Channel
Presets
send
send
levels
levels
and
and
bus
bus
routing)
routing)
can
can
be be
stored
stored
and
and
recalled
recalled
as as
In-Inputput
Channel
Channel
Presets.
Presets.
Input
Input
Channel
Channel
Presets
Presets
cancan
be be
previewed,
previewed,
recalled
recalled
and
and
transferred
transferred
just
like
like
other
other
VENUE
VENUE
preset
files,
files,
let-letAs
configuraes
de
canais
dejust
entradas
(nome
dapreset
entrada,
ganho,
Input
Channel
Presets
nvel
doyou
fader,
nvel configure
daconfigure
mandada
e roteamento
de
bus)
podem
ser
ting
ting
you
quickly
quickly
channels
channels
from
from
among
among
a library
a library
of
of
armazenadas
e carregadas
como
Input
Channel
Os Input
Input
channel
configuration
(input
name,
gain,Presets.
fader levels,
favorite
favorite
setups.
setups.
Channel
Presets
ser verificados,
carregados
e transferidos
send levels
and podem
bus routing)
can be stored
and recalled
as InWhen
When
an
an
Input
Input
Channel
Channel
is
stored
is
stored
or
or
recalled
recalled
as
a
as
preset,
a preset,
all all
pa-pado
mesmo
modo
como
outros
arquivos
de
preset
VENUE,
permitindo
put Channel Presets. Input Channel Presets can be previewed,
arecalled
voc
rapidamente
configurar
canais
de
uma
biblioteca
de
ajustes
rameters
rameters
are
are
affected
affected
except
except
the
the
following:
following:
and transferred just like other VENUE preset files, letfavoritos.
Patchbay
Patchbay
assignments,
including
including
Direct
Direct
Outs
Outs
ting you
quicklyassignments,
configure
channels
from
among
a library of
favorite
setups.
Hardware
Hardware
and
and
software
software
insert
insert
(plug-in)
(plug-in)
assignments
assignments
and
and
Quando um canal de entrada (Input Channel) armazenado
ou
in/out
in/out
state.
state.
recarregado
como
preset, todos os parmetros so afetados,
When an Input Channel is stored or recalled as a preset, all paexceto:
rameters
are affected
except
theautomatically
following:
Selecting
Selecting
a channel
a channel
preset
preset
automatically
loads
loads
thethe
saved
saved
Patchbay
assignments,
including
Direct
Outs
settings
settings
into
into
the
the
selected
selected
channel.
channel.
Depending
Depending
on
on
the
the
stored
stored
Atribuies de Patchbay, incluindo Direct Outs
settings
settings
this
this
may
may
dramatically
dramatically
change
change
channel
channel
level
level
and
and
Atribuies
de
inserts
de
hardware
e
software
(plug-in)
e
status
Hardware and software insert (plug-in) assignments and
dein/out
habilitado/desabilitado.
signal
signal
routing.
routing.
Use
Use
caution
caution
when
when
previewing
previewing
Input
Input
Channel
Channel
state.
Presets
Presets
with
with
a live
a live
source.
source.
Selecionar
um preset
canal automaticamente
carrega
Selecting
a channel
presetdeautomatically
loads the saved
os
ajustes
salvos
para
o
canal
selecionado.
Dependendo
settings into the selected channel. Depending on the stored
dos ajustes salvos, isso pode alterar dramaticamente o
settings this may dramatically change channel level and
roteamento e o nvel do sinal. Seja cauteloso quando verificar
signal routing. Use caution when previewing Input Channel
presets de canais de entrada com uma fonte ao vivo.
Presets with a live source.
54 54VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
To To
preview
preview
andand
recall
recall
a saved
a saved
Channel
Channel
Preset:
Preset:
Para verificar e carregar um Channel Preset salvo:
1 Navigate
1 Navigate
to to
thethe
Inputs
Inputs
page
page
forfor
thethe
desired
desired
channel.
channel.
ChanChan-
1 nel
Navegue
at
aonly
pgina
Inputs
para
canal
desejado.
nel
Presets
Presets
can
can
only
be be
loaded
loaded
into
into
a single
a osingle
channel
channel
at aattime.
aChannel
time.
Presets
apenas
podem
ser carregados em um canal por vez.
Input
Channel
Presets
window
2 Click
2 Click
thethe
Channel
Channel
Presets
Presets
icon.
icon.
To2preview
and
recall
a savedPresets.
Channel Preset:
Clique no
cone
Channel
3 If
3 necessary,
If necessary,
click
click
thethe
Folders
Folders
icon
icon
and
and
select
select
thethe
appropriate
appropriate
1Channel
Navigate
toPresets
thefolder
Inputs
page
for
the
desired
channel. ChanChannel
Presets
folder
from
from
the
the
pop-up
pop-up
menu.
menu.
3 Se necessrio, clique no cone Folders e selecione a pasta de
nel Presets can only be loaded into a single channel at a time.
Presets
apropriada
np menu pop-up.
4Channel
Do
4 Do
any
any
of of
thethe
following:
following:
2 Click
the
Channel
Presets
icon.
To
To
preview
preview
anan
existing
existing
Channel
Channel
Preset,
Preset,
click
click
its its
name
name
in in
4 Siga um dos seguintes procedimentos:
the
the
Channel
Channel
window.
window.
3 If necessary,
click Presets
thePresets
Folders
icon
and
select the
appropriate
Para
verificar
um
Channel
Preset
existente,
clique
no nome dele
To
naTo
load
load
theChannel
the
currently
currently
selected
selected
Channel
Channel
Preset,
Preset,
press
press
Enter
Enter
janela
Presets.
Channel
Presets
folder
from
the
pop-up
menu.
or
Para
carregar
o Channel
Preset
selecionado,
pressione
Enter
or
click
click
thethe
Close
Close
box
box
(X)(X)
in
in
thethe
Channel
Channel
Presets
Presets
window
window
4 Do any
of thena
following:
outitle
clique
title
bar.
bar. caixa Close (X) na barra de ttulo da janela Channel
ToPresets.
preview an existing Channel Preset, click its name in
To
To
cancel
cancel
without
without
changing
changing
settings,
settings,
click
click
Cancel.
Cancel.
the
Para
cancelar
sem alteraes
Channel
Presets
window. de ajuste, clique Cancel.
To
Torename,
load duplicate,
the
currently
selected
Preset,
press
Enter
To
rename,
duplicate,
overwrite
overwrite
or Channel
or
delete
delete
aou
Channel
a Channel
Preset:
Para
renomear,
duplicar,
sobrescrever
apagarPreset:
um Channel
or click the Close box (X) in the Channel Presets window
Preset:
Right-click
Right-click
preset
preset
name
name
in in
thethe
Channel
Channel
Preset
Preset
window
window
title bar. thethe
and
and
choose
choose
Rename,
Rename,
Duplicate,
Duplicate,
Delete,
Delete,
or or
Overwrite.
Overwrite.
Clique
To cancel
settings,
comwithout
o boto changing
direito no nome
do click
presetCancel.
na janela Channel
Preset e escolha Rename, Duplicate, Delete ou Overwrite.
To rename, duplicate, overwrite or delete a Channel Preset:

Right-click the preset name in the Channel Preset window
and choose Rename, Duplicate, Delete, or Overwrite.
The following describe how different types of channel data is

handled when storing or loading Input Channel Presets.
Input Channel Presets e Compatibilidade
Channel Names and Presets

A seguinte seo descreve como diferentes tipos de dados de
Stage
Rack Features
canais
so manuseados
quando
armazenando
carregando
Input
New presets
automatically
inherit
the currentouInput
Channel
Channel
Presets.
Name, or you can give them a custom name in the Presets
window.
Thefor
default
channel number (such as Ch 16") is
audio
I/O
VENUE
Presets
e Nomes
de
Canais Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
used
preset
name if the supporting
channel hasup
antoempty
(null)
canfor
bethe
used
simultaneously,
96 total
inputs.
name.
Os novos presets automaticamente herdam o nome atual do canal
Audio I/O
de entrada,
ou voc pode dar-lhes um nome personalizado na janela
LoadingOMono
and Stereo
Channel
Presets
Presets.
nmero
canal
padro
(como
Ch 16)
utilizadoand
para
48 inputs de
with
remotely
controllable
mic preamps
o nome do preset se o canal tem o nome vazio.
selectablePresets
phantom
You canindividually
load mono Channel
into power.
stereo channels, and
stereo Channel
Presets
into
monoeexpandable
channels.
8 analog
output
channels;
up to 48 analog or
Carregando
Presets
de Canais
Mono
Estreo
Loading Mono to Stereo Mono settings are applied equally to
Voc pode carregar Channel Presets mono em canais estreo e
theSynchronization
left Presets
and right
channels
of the
stereo destination. The steChannel
estreo
canais
mono.
and em
Control
I/O
reo destination channel retains its current balance and width
settings. Mono para Estreo Os ajustes mono so aplicados
Carregando
igualmente
aos canais direito e esquerdo do destino estreo. O
Loading
Stereo to
Mono mantm
When loading
a stereo
preseteinto
a
canal
de destino
estreo
seus ajustes
balance
width.
mono Input Channel, the left channel settings in the stereo
preset are applied
to the
mono
destination
channel.
Theestreo
Carregando
Stereo para
Mono
Quando
carregar
um preset
System
Components
para
umdestination
canal mono,channel
os ajustes
do canal
esquerdo
do setting.
preset estreo
mono
retains
its current
pan
so aplicados ao canal de destino mono. O canal de destino mono

mantm
seus
ajustes
de pan atuais.
Included
Components
Channel
Compatibility
All VENUE
systems
include
the following:
When
storing Profile
and
loading
Input
Channel
presets, remember
Compatibilidade
de canais
the following:
Quando armazenar e carregar Input Channel Presets, lembre-se do

Two
IEC powerare
cables
Group
bus(2)
assignments
not applied if the settings in the
seguinte:
preset do
not match
thefor
current
console(screen
Bus Configuration
Monitor
mount
VGA screen
not included)
demount
so aplicados
se as aux
configuraes
send
Trackball
(trackball
not
included)
Roteamentos
Aux
level
orbus
panno
settings
for
individual
pairs are do
preset
concidirem
com
a atuallink/unlink
configurao
de does
bus da
console
not applied
if the
stored
stereo
state
not
no
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
match the current link/unlink state. For example, assume the
VENUE
Os ajustes
deProfile
pan ouGuide
nvel de mandada para pares auxiliares
stored preset has Aux 12 linked, but the current console con Two
(2) console
lights stero link/unlink no coincidir com
no so
aplicados
se o status
has these
Auxes Por
unlinked.
When
the preset
ofiguration
atual
status
link/unlink.
exemplo,
suponha
que iso represet
Protective
Dust Cover
called
Aux
1
and
Aux
2
will
retain
their
current
settings
armazenado possui Aux 1-2 linkados, mas a configurao (they
atual da
Rack(s)
(see next) all other Auxes are updated to the
will not
be updated),
console
no.
Quando owhile
preset carregado, Aux 1 e Aux 2 mantm
preset
settings. atuais (no so atualizados) enquanto os outros
suas
configuraes
Racks,
iLoks,
and
auxiliares
soSoftware
atualizadosCDs,
para os
ajustes
dosCables
presets.
Transferring Input Channel Presets
Each MixInput
RackChannel
or FOH Presets
Rack includes:
Transferidno

DVI supported.

Optional Components
(for Talkback)

System Restore
CD available as Built-In Presets in the
Input Channel
Presets are
Input
Channel
esto
disponveis
como
Built-In
Presets na
Transfer
tab Ethernet
ofPresets
the Filing
page.
This letsInstaller
you transfer
ECx
Control
Software
CD your
aba
Transfer
da pgina
Filing
page.
Isso
permite
a voc
transferir
Channel
Presets
to
a
USB
key
disk
or
other
storage
device
for
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD ou outro dispositivo
seus Channel
Presets
para um
pen drive
de
backup and transfer to other systems.
USB Smart
(for sistemas.
storing plug-in authorizations)
backup eiLok
transferi-los
paraKey
outros
Plug-in installer
discs
(if any) on
with
iLok
Input Channel
Presets are
supported
allpre-authorized
systems running
Input
Channel
Presets
so
suportados
em todos os sistemas rodando
VENUE
software
2.5power
or later,
including the Standalone soft Two
(2) IEC
cables
o sofwtares VENUE 2.5 ou superior, incluindo a verso Standalone.
ware. One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console
Para mais informaes, veja o Captulo 20, Gerenciamento
ForStage
more Rack
information,
see Chapter 20, Shows and File
Each
de Arquivos
eincludes:
Shows.
Management.
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options
outputs
digital I/O.

Chapter 6: Options
Captulo
6: Options
Chapter
Chapter
6:
6: Options
Options
Stage Rack Features
The Options page provides several tabs. Of these, the System

and Devices tabs are where most system configuration settings
and options are enabled and customized:
can beOptions
supporting
upnas
to 96
total
inputs.e
A pgina
oferece vrias abas.
Dessas,
abas
System
The
Options
Options
page
pageprovides
provides
several
several
tabs.
tabs.Of
Of
these,
these,
the
the
System
System
The
The
System
screen
provides
the
tools
by
which
Devices
que
a maioria
dos
ajustes
e primary
opes
de
configurao
do
and
and
Devices
Devices
tabs
tabs
are
are
where
where
most
most
system
system
configuration
configuration
settings
settings
you
configure
mixing,
routing,
and
processing
options.
sistema
e customizada:
Audio habilitada
I/O
options
options
are
are
enabled
enabled
andcustomized:
customized:
and
Aand
tela
System
oferece
asand
ferramentas
bsicas paraand
configurar
The
Devices
screen
provides
status, diagnostics,
op 48 inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps and
astions
opes
de
mixagem,
roteamento
e primary
processamento.
The
The
System
System
screen
screen
provides
providesthe
the
primarytools
toolsby
bywhich
which
for
hardware
components.
individually
selectable
phantom
power. e opes para
A tela
Devices
oferece
status,
diagnsticos
you
you
configure
configure
mixing,
mixing,
routing,
routing,
and
andprocessing
processingoptions.
options.
chapter
8 analog
output
expandable
up toimportant
48 analog or
de
hardware.
Thiscomponents
shows
youchannels;
how to manage
the most
The
TheDevices
Devicesscreen
screenprovides
providesstatus,
status,diagnostics,
diagnostics,and
andopopoutputs
per Stage
System digital
and Devices
settings,
andRack.
describes the settings availtions
tions
for
for
hardware
hardware
components.
components.
Este
como
gerenciar os ajustes mais importantes
ablecaptulo
in othermostra
Options
screens.

System
System
DVI supported.
System
System
The
System
page lets you allocate DSP resources used for rout-
(System Configuration)
(System Config)
ing and
configure
Mains and(Windows
Aux/Group
busses,
USBprocessing,
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
compatible)
(System
(System
Configuration)
Configuration)
reset
the
system
(clear
console),
and
quit
(shut
down
VENUE).
A pgina System page permite alocar os recursos de DSP utilizados
The
TheSystem
System
page
page
lets
you
youallocate
allocate
DSP
DSP
resources
resources
used
usedfor
for
routrout-e
para
roteamento
elets
processamento,
configurar
busses
Mains
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
ToAux/Group,
access
the
SystemoConfig
page:
ing
ingand
and
processing,
processing,
configure
configure
Mains
Mains
and
Aux/Group
Aux/Group
busses, a
resetar
sistema
(limpar
aand
console)
e sair busses,
(desligar
VENUE).
reset
reset
the
thesystem
system(clear
(clear
console),
and
andquit
quit(shut
(shut
down
downVENUE).
VENUE).
Go
the
Options
pageconsole),
and
tab.
a to
Digital
Snake cable.
This click
cablethe
canSystem
be purchased
directly
from
Avida or
assembled
by
your preferred vendor.
de System
e Devicesand
e descreve
os ajustes disponveis nas outras
Para
acessar
pgina
System
Config:
Synchronization
Control
ToToaccess
accessthe
the
System
System
Config
Config
page:
page:
This
Thischapter
chaptershows
showsyou
youhow
howI/O
totomanage
managethe
themost
mostimportant
important
Basics
of
Editing
System
Settings
telas da pgina Options.
System
System
and
and
Devices
Devicessettings,
settings,
and
and
describes
describes
the
the
settings
settingsavailavail Snake
connectors
to enable
primary
and
redundant
(if
Go
Go
tothe
theOptions
Optionspage
and
and
click
theSystem
Systemtab.
tab.
Overview of Options
V
to
pgina
Options
epage
clique
naclick
aba the
System.
Optional
Components
able
ableapplicable)
ininother
otherOptions
Options
screens.
screens.
Settings
available
in the System screen can only be edited
connection
to a VENUE FOH Rack.
Viso
geral de Options
The Options page provides the following tabs:
while
in Config
mode.
Noes
Bsicas
dos
Ajustes
deare
Configurao
de Sistema
The
following
components
optional,
and
must be
Basics
Basics
ofofEditing
Editing
System
System
Settings
Settings
System on page 57
purchased
separately:
Overview
Overview
of
ofOptions
Options
A pgina
Options oferece
as seguintes abas:
Changing
the system
configuration
will
restart
the
system
Os
ajustes
disponveis
na
tela
System
podem
ser
editados
apenas
Settings
Settings
available
available
ininthe
the
System
System
screen
screen
can
can
only
only
bebe
edited
edited
Busses
page
6057
System
Systemon
na
pgina
software
USB flash
(or
other portable
Components
anddisk
may
interrupt
audio. USB storage device for
no
modo
Config.
The
TheOptions
Optionspage
pageprovides
providesthe
thefollowing
followingtabs:
tabs:
while
while
in
in
Config
Config
mode.
mode.
Pickoffs
Busses na
60
onpgina
page 61
Pickoffs
System
System
onpage
page57
57
Snapshots
naon
pgina
In Config
mode,asthe
Edit button
becomes
available
to let
you
on
page61
62
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for mix
position
Alterar
configuraes
do
sistema
irrestart
reiniciar
osystem
software
Changing
Changing
the
thesystem
system
configuration
configuration
will
will
restartmonitoring
the
the
system e
Components
Included
Snapshots
napage
pgina
Busses
Busseson
on
page60
6062
change
settings.
When
a
System
Config
setting
is
changed,
the
pode
interromper
o
udio.
Misc
on pgina
page 6363
software
softwareand
andwith
may
mayinterrupt
interruptaudio.
audio.
Headphones
1/4-inch
jack
All
Misc na
Apply button becomes available at the right of the screen to
Profile
systems
VENUE
Pickoffs
Pickoffs
on
on
page
page61
61
onpgina
page 64
Interaction
Interaction na
64
Config,
o the
boto
Edit
fica disponvel
para
pemritir
que
voc
letNo
you
confirm
and
apply
changes.
In
Inmodo
Config
Config
mode,
mode,
theEdit
Edit
button
button
becomes
becomesavailable
available
totolet
letyou
you
Profile
console
Devices
VENUE
Snapshots
Snapshots
on
on
page
page
62
62
Devices
na
pgina
59
(for
Talkback)
on page 59
altere
ajustes.
Quando
um
ajuste
System
Config
isalterado,
othe
boto
change
change
settings.
settings.
When
When
a
a
System
System
Config
Config
setting
setting
is
changed,
changed,
the
Chapter
Eventos
(2)22,
IEC
power
Captulo
Two
Misc
Misc
on
on
page
page
63
63cables
Footswitches
(up
toavailable
2) da tela
Apply
fica
disponvel
direita
permitir
athe
voc
confirmar
22, Events
Apply
Apply
button
button
becomes
becomes
available
atatpara
the
theright
rightofofthe
screen
screen
toto
Plug-Ins
(veja
Instalando
e64
Autorizando
Plug-Ins
na pgina
Edit
mount
for
VGA
screen
(screen
not included)
Monitor
Interaction
Interaction
on
on
page
page
64
a
aplicar
as
mudanas.
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
151)
Plug-Ins (see Installing and Authorizing Plug-Ins on
let
letyou
youconfirm
confirmand
andapply
applychanges.
changes.
page
(trackball
not included)
Trackball
Devices
Devices
on
onpage
page
59
59
151) mount
Configuration
BNC cables (for
connecting
System
tab of
the Options Word
page clock between the
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
Chapter
Chapter
22,
22,
Events
Events
Para visualizar a pgina Options:
Edit
Edit mode, the Edit button is unavailable. This protects
In Show
To display
the Options
page,
ofAuthorizing
the
following:
VENUE
Profile
Guidedo one
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
(see
(seeInstalling
Installing
and
and
Authorizing
Plug-Ins
Plug-Inson
on
these settings from being changed during a performance
Pressione
o 151)
switch Options na seo View Mode.
page
page
Two
(2)151)
console
lights
System
SystemConfiguration
Configurationtab
tabofofthe
theOptions
Optionspage
page
Press
the
Options
switch
in the View Mode section.
(since
changes
to these
can interrupt audio).
Aba System
Configuration
na settings
pgina Options
ou or
InInShow
Showmode,
mode,the
theEdit
Editbutton
buttonisisunavailable.
unavailable.This
Thisprotects
protects
ToTodisplay
displaythe
theOptions
Optionspage,
page,dodoone
oneofofthe
thefollowing:
following:
Rack(s) (see next)
modo
o Config
boto
Edit
fica indisponvel.
Isso protege essas
ToNo
change
aShow,
System
option:
these
these
settings
settings
from
from
being
being
changed
changed
during
during
a aperformance
performance
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Click
thethe
Options
tabna
on-screen.
Clique
na
aba
Options
tela. ininthe
Press
Press
the
Options
Options
switch
switch
theView
ViewMode
Modesection.
section.
configuraes
detoserem
alteradas
durante
uma audio).
performance
(pois
(since
(sincechanges
changes
these
these
settings
settings
can
caninterrupt
interrupt
audio).
1 Put
system
intoConfig
mode.
The the
following
options
canpodem
be added
to VENUE
Profile systems.
alteraes
nesses
ajustes
interromper
o
udio).
Racks,
oror Software
Para
visualizar
diferentes
na Options
pgina Options:
To display
different
tabsabas
of the
page, do one of the
For to
details
on all VENUE
systems
options,tab.
visit the Avid
2 Go
the Options
page
and
click and
the System
ToTochange
change
a aSystem
System
Config
Config
option:
option:
following:
Para
alterar
uma opo System Config:
Each
Mix
Rack
or FOH
Rack
includes:
Click
Click
the
the
Options
Options
tab
tab
on-screen.
on-screen.
website
(www.avid.com).
Pressione o switch Options repetidamente para navegar pelas 3 Click
Edit.
1 1Put
Put
the
thesystem
systemininConfig
Configmode.
mode.
System
Restore
CD repeatedly to cycle through avail Press
the Options
switch
abas
disponveis
1
Coloque
o
sistema
no
modo
Config.
ToTo
display
different
differentControl
tabs
tabsofofthe
theOptions
Options
page,
page,do
doone
oneofofthe
the
able
tabs.
4 Change
athe
System
Config,
Main
Bus,
Inputs
or Bus
Configudisplay
ECx Ethernet
Software
Installer
CD
2 2Go
GoRack
toto
theOptions
Options
page
page
and
andclick
clickthe
theSystem
System
tab.
tab.
Mix
Options
following:
following:
ration
option.
ou or
23V
pgina
3Click
Click
Edit.
Edit.Options e clique na aba System.
Press
Pressthe
theOptions
Optionsswitch
switchrepeatedly
repeatedlytotocycle
cyclethrough
throughavailavailI/O
Options
5 Click Apply to confirm and apply your new settings.
Click
Clique
na
aba desejada
da Options
pgina Options
(System,
the
desired
tab at the no
topalto
of the
page (System,
able
able
tabs.
tabs.
4Change
Change
SystemConfig,
Config,Main
MainBus,
Bus,Inputs
InputsororBus
BusConfiguConfigu34Clique
Edit.a aSystem
Plug-in
installer
discs
(if
any)
with
pre-authorized
iLok
Busses,
Devices,
Events
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
Busses,Pickoffs,
Pickoffs,Snapshots,
Snapshots,Misc,
Misc,Interaction,
Interaction,
Devices,
Events
ration
ration
option.
option.
or
or
ou
4mic/line
Altere as
levelopes
inputs System Config, Main Bus, Inputs ou Bus
orPlug-Ins).
Plug-Ins).
5 5Click
ClickApply
Applytotoconfirm
confirmand
andapply
applyyour
yournew
newsettings.
settings.
Configuration.
One
Link
cable
fortop
connection
to a VENUE
console
Click
Click
the
theFOH
desired
desired
tab
tab
atatthe
the
top
ofofthe
theOptions
Options
page
page(System,
(System,
A aba
Plug-Ins
no
est
disponvel
na verso
Standalone do
The
Plug-Ins
tab
is
not
available
in
the
Standalone
Busses,
Busses,
Pickoffs,
Pickoffs,Snapshots,
Snapshots,Misc,
Misc,Interaction,
Interaction,Devices,
Devices,Events
Events
software.
Each
5outputs
Clique Apply para confirmar e aplicar os novos ajustes.
ororsoftware.
Plug-Ins).
Plug-Ins).
The
ThePlug-Ins
Plug-Instab
tabisisnot
notavailable
availableininthe
theStandalone
Standalone
software.
software.
Chapter
6: Options
57
AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16
channels
of A-Net
Chapter
Chapter6:6:Options
Options 57
57
digital I/O.
Captulo 6: Options 57
FX Returns
System Configuration Settings
Returns
Settings
FXFX
Returns
Choose the number of FX Return channels you need (8 or 16).
The System Configuration section shows the current allocaFX Returns
System
Configuration
Settings
the number of FX Return channels you need (8 or 16).
tion
of system
resources. section
The System
Configuration
shows the current alloca- FX Choose
Returns
Configuration
Settings
ASystem
seo System
Configuration mostra
a distribuio atual dos
Escolha
o nmero de canais FX Return de que voc precisa (8 ou 16).
System
Configuration
Ajustes
System Configuration
tion
of sistema.
system
resources. section shows the current allocaThe
System
Configuration
recursos
do
In Show mode, the System Config area is display-only. In
The
System
Configuration
tion
of system
resources. section shows the current allocaConfig
mode,
you
edit Config
the system
to In
alloInofShow
mode,
thecan
System
areaconfiguration
is display-only.
tion
system
resources.
No modo Show, a area System Config de exibio somente. No
cate
resources
for
mixing
and
processing.
Config
mode,
you
can
edit
the
system
configuration
to
In Show
mode,
System
area is display-only.
modo
Config,
vocthe
pode
editarConfig
a configurao
de sistemaInallopara
InConfig
Show
mode,
the
System
Config
area
is
display-only.
Inallocate
resources
for
mixing
and
processing.
mode, you
edit the
system configuration to
distribuir recursos
paracan
mixagem
e processamento.
Config
mode, ayou
edit
the
configuration to alloTo change
System
Configuration
setting:
cate
resources
forcan
mixing
and system
processing.
cateTo
resources
for
mixing
and
processing.
Para
alterar
um
ajuste
System
Configuration:
change a System Configuration setting:
To1 change
Systemin
Configuration
setting:
Put thea system
Config mode.
1To
Coloque
o asistema
modoon-screen.
Config.setting:
change
System
Configuration
2 Click
the
Editno
button
2 Click the Edit button on-screen.
1 Put
the system
in Config for
mode.
3 Choose
a new
Input Channels or Graphic EQs.
2 Clique
no boto
Edit setting
na tela.
2 Click the Edit button on-screen.
3 Choose a new setting for Input Channels or Graphic EQs.
2 Click
the Apply
Edit button
on-screen.
4 Click
to confirm
the settings.
3 Escolha
um anovo
para
ouorGraphic
EQs.
3 Choose
newajuste
setting
forInput
InputChannels
Channels
Graphic
EQs.
4 Click Apply to confirm the settings.
3 Choose a new setting for Input Channels or Graphic EQs.
4 Click
Apply
to confirmar
confirm the
settings.
4 Clique
Apply
para
o ajuste.
4 Click Apply to confirm the settings.
Main Bus Settings

The Main Bus Settings let you configure the Main mix bus. See
Main
BusMain
Settings
OsConfiguring
ajustes
Bus
permitem
configurar
o Busses
bus
Veja
Aux,
Group,
and
Variable
Group
onSee
The
Main Bus
Settings
let
you
configure
the
Main
mixMain.
bus.
Main
Bus
Settings
Designating the number of Input Channels

Mix Engines

Mix Engines
Designating
the number of Input Channels
Designando
o nmero
de Input
Channels
The Mix
Engine
setting
is determined
Choose
the EQs
number of FX Return channels you need (8 or 16).
Graphic
Choose
the number
of FX Return channels you need (8 or 16).
Graphic
Graphic
EQsEQs
Choose the number of Graphic EQs needed for output proGraphic EQs
cessing.
You
can choose
to haveEQs
0, 8,de
16,que
or 24
Graphic
EQs.
ChooseEQs
number
Graphic
EQs
needed
for
output
proGraphic
Escolha
othe
nmero
deofGraphic
voc
precisa
para
Choosing
anumber
lower
number
more
DSP
for
plug-ins.
cessing.
You
can
toleaves
have
0,
8, 16,
orfor
24output
Graphic
Choose
the
of Graphic
EQs
needed
processamento
de choose
sada.
Voc
pode
escolher
entre
0, 8,pro16EQs.
ou 24
Choose
the
number
ofnumber
Graphic
EQs
output
proChoosing
acan
lower
leaves
more
DSP
for
plug-ins.
cessing.
You
choose
to have
0,needed
8, 16,deixa
orfor
24
Graphic
EQs.
Graphic
EQs.
Escolher
nmeros
menores
mais
DSP
disponvel
cessing.
You
can
choose
to
have
0,
8,
16,
or
24
Graphic
EQs.
para
plug-ins.
Choosing
a lower number
leaves more DSP for plug-ins.
DSPs Available
for Plug-Ins
Choosing
lower number
more DSP for plug-ins.
DSPs aAvailable
for leaves
Plug-Ins
TheDisponveis
amount of para
DSP Plug-Ins
available for plug-ins depends on the
DSPs
DSPs Available for Plug-Ins
number
of Mix
Engine
cards installed
in your
FOHon
or Mix
TheAvailable
amount
of DSP
available
for plug-ins
depends
the
DSPs
for
Plug-Ins
A Rack,
quantidade
deDSP
DSP
disponvel
para
plug-ins
depende
doMix
nmero
and
current
system
settings
for
Input
Channels,
FX
number
ofthe
Mix
Engine
cardsfor
installed
independs
your
FOH
The
amount
of
available
plug-ins
onorthe
de
placas
Mix
Engine
instaladas
no
FOH
Rack
ou
no
Mix
Rack
dos
The
amount
of
DSP
available
for
plug-ins
depends
on
the
Returns,
Tocards
increase
the amount
of
DSP
Rack, and
theGEQs.
current
system
settings
Input
Channels,
FX
number
ofand
Mix
Engine
installed
infor
your
FOH
oravailable
Mix e
ajustes
de
sistema
para
Input
Channels,
FX
Returns
e
GEQs.
Para
number
of
Mix
Engine
cards
installed
in
your
FOH
or
Mix
for
plug-ins,
number
of
Channels
Graphic
Returns,
andreduce
GEQs. the
To
increase
theInput
amount
ofChannels,
DSPoravailable
Rack,
and the
current
system
settings
for Input
FX
aumentar
a quantidade
de DSP
disponvel
para
plug-ins, reduza
o
Rack,
system
settings
for
Input
Channels,
FX
EQs,
orthe
addcurrent
additional
Mix
Engine
cards.
forand
plug-ins,
reduceTo
the
number
of amount
Input
Channels
or Graphic
Returns,
and
GEQs.
increase
the
of
DSP
available
nmero de Input Channels ou Graphic EQs, ou adicione placas Mix
Returns,
and
GEQs.
To
increase
the
of DSP available
EQs,
or
add
additional
Mix Engine
cards.
for
plug-ins,
reduce
the
number
of amount
Input
Channels
or Graphic
Engine
adicionais.
for
plug-ins,
reduce
the
number
of
Input
Channels
or Graphic
EQs, or add additional Mix Engine cards.
Main
Bus
Settings
EQs,
or add
additional
Mix Engine cards.
Ajustes
Main
Bus
by the number of DSP
Mix Engines
detected
system rack
(Mix
Rack, or
The
MixCards
Engine
settinginis the
determined
by the
number
of DSP
MixEngine
Engines
Configurando
Busses
Aux,
Group
e Variable
Group
na pgina
page
80.Bus Settings
Configuring
Aux, Group,
and
Variable
The
Main
let you
configure
theGroup
Main Busses
mix
bus.on
See80.
The
Main
Bus
Settings
let
you
configure
the
Main
mix
bus.
See
page 80.
Configuring
Aux, Group, and Variable Group Busses on
Configuring
page 80.
page 80.
MixThe
Engines
FOH
Rack).
Mix
Rack comes
with
two
Mix Engines
Engine
Cards
detected
thesupplied
system by
rack
(Mix
Rack,
orDSP
Mix
Engine
setting
isindetermined
the
number
of
The
Mixcan
Engine
setting
determined
by
the
number
DSP
and
be expanded
with
additional
Mix
Engine
(total of
FOH
Rack).
Mix
Rackisin
comes
supplied
with
two
Mixofor
Engines
Engine
Cards
detected
theone
system
rack
(Mix
Rack,
OEngine
ajuste Cards
Mix Engine
determinado
pelo
nmero
de placas
DSP
Main Busses options in the System page
detected
thecomes
system
rack
(Mix
Rack,
or
3,
maximum).
FOH in
Rack
with
three
and
can
be(total
ex- of
and
can beMix
expanded
with
one
additional
Mix
Engine
FOH
Rack).
Rack
comes
supplied
with
two
Engines
Opes Main Busses na pgina System
Engine
Cards
detectadas
no rack
do sistema
(MixMix
Rack
ou FOH
Main Busses options in the System page
FOH
Rack).
Mix
Rack
comes
supplied
with
two
Mix
Engines
panded
to
include
up
to
5
Mix
Engine
cards.
3,
maximum).
FOH
Rack
comes
with
three
and
can
be
exandOcan
expanded
with onecom
additional
Mix
Enginee (total
of
Rack).
MixbeRack
vem equipado
duas Mix
Engines
pode ser
LRBusses
plusoptions
Monoin the System page
and
can
be
expanded
with
one
additional
Mix
Engine
(total
of
Main
panded
to
include
up
to
5
Mix
Engine
cards.
3, maximum).
FOH
comes
with three
andtrs,
canmximo).
be ex- O
LR
plus
Mono
expandido
com uma
MixRack
Engine
adicional
(total de
LR
plus
Mono
Main
Busses
options
in the System page
3,panded
maximum).
FOH Rack
and can be
ex-incluir
This default setting provides a stereo bus, plus one mono bus.
to include
upcom
tocomes
5trs
Mixewith
Engine
cards.
FOH
Rack vem
equipado
podethree
ser
expandido
para
Channels
LR
plus
Mono
panded
to
include
to 5 Mix Engine cards.
Este
valor
padro
oferece
um bus
estreo
mais
um
bus
mono.
at
cinco
placas
Mix up
Engine.
This
default
setting
provides
a stereo
bus,
plus
one
mono
bus.
Channels
LR
plus
Mono
Choose the total number of Input Channels you need. This
Channels
number
represents
mono of
input
processing
(not
Choose the
total number
Input
Channelschannels
you need.
This
Channels
Channels
hardware
input
jacks);
each
stereo
channel channels
usesneed.
two mono
number
represents
mono
processing
(not
Choose
the
total number
ofinput
Input
Channels
you
This
Choose
total
number
of
Input
Channels
you
need.
This
Escolha
othe
nmero
total
de canais
deprocessing
entrada
de
que
voc
precisa.
channels.
hardware
input
jacks);
each
stereo
channel
uses
two(not
mono
number
represents
mono
input
channels
Este
nmero
representa
os
canais
de
processamento
de
entrada
number
represents
mono
input
processing
channels
(not
channels.
hardware
jacks); each
stereo channel
two to
mono
Youinput
can configure
a VENUE
Mix Rackuses
system
use 16,
mono
(no input
jaques
de entrada
no hardware).
Cada
canal
estro
hardware
jacks);
each
stereo
channel
uses
two
mono
channels.
24, 32,
or 64 input
processing
channels.
You
can48,
configure
a VENUE
Mix Rack
system to use 16,
utiliza
dois canais mono.
channels.
This
default setting provides a stereo bus, plus one mono bus.
LCR
LCR
This
default setting provides a stereo bus, plus one mono bus.
LCR
This setting enables LCR mode, which lets you mix in
LCR
Este
habilita
o LCR
modo LCR,
que permite
no modo
3-across-the-front
mode.
Thisajuste
setting
enables
mode, which
lets youmixer
mix in
LCR
3-across-the-front.
3-across-the-front
mode.
This
setting enables LCR
mode, which lets you mix in
Changing
theLCR
Main
Bus mode
willlets
restart
system
This
setting
enables
mode,
which
youthe
mix
in soft3-across-the-front
mode.
Alterar
o modo
Main
Bus
reiniciar o software do sistema e
ware
and may
interrupt
Changing
themode.
Main
Bus audio.
mode will restart the system soft3-across-the-front
pode causar interrupo do udio.
ware andthe
may
interrupt
audio.
Changing
Main
Bus mode
will restart the system softToChanging
change
the
Main
Bus
the
Main
Busconfiguration:
mode
will restart the system software
and
may
interrupt
audio.
Para alterar as configuraes Main Bus:
Toware
change
the
Bus configuration:
andsystem
mayMain
interrupt
audio.
1 Put the
in Config
mode.
To
change
the
Main
Bus
configuration:
Put theo system
mode.
1 1Coloque
sistemainnoConfig
modo Config.
To change
Bus configuration:
2 Go tothe
theMain
Options
page and click the System tab.
2VGo
to
the Options
and
the System tab.
pgina
epage
clique
naclick
aba System.
1 2Put
the
system
in Config
mode.
3 Click
Edit.Options
3 Click Edit.
2 3Go
to the
Options
andBus
click
the System tab.
4Clique
Click
to
choosepage
a Main
mode.
Edit.
3 Click Edit.
4 Click to choose a Main Bus mode.
3 Click
Edit.Apply; the system restarts.
5 Click
4 Clique
para
escolher
um modo
Main Bus.
4
Click to
choose
a Main
Bus mode.
5 Click Apply; the system restarts.
4 Click to choose a Main Bus mode.
24,can
32,
48,
or 64 input
processing
channels.
You
a aVENUE
Mix
Rack
systemtotouse
use16,
16,24,
You
canconfigure
configure
VENUE
Profile
system
You
can
configure
a
VENUE
Mix
Rack
system
to
use
16,
24,
32,
48,
or
64
input
processing
channels.
32,
48,
64,
80, orum
96
input processing
channels
(higher
You
can
configure
asistema
VENUE
ProfileMix
system
use
16, 24,
Voc
pode
configurar
VENUE
Racktopara
utilizar
24,24,
32,32,
48,48
or
64
input
processing
channels.
16,
ou
64
de processamento
de
entrada.
settings
require
two
Stage
Racks).
32,
48,
64,
80,
orcanais
input
processing
channels
(higher
You
can
configure
a96
VENUE
Profile
system
to use
16, 24,
You
can
VENUE
system
topara
useutilizar
16,
24,16,
Voc
pode
configurar
sistema
VENUE
Profile
settings
two
StageProfile
Racks).
32,
48,configure
64,require
80, oraum
96
input
processing
channels
(higher
Choosing
a 64,
lower
number
of processing
Input
Channels
leaves
more
DSP
24,
32,
48,
80
ou
96
canais
de
processamento
de
entrada
32,
48,
64,
80,
or
96
input
channels
(higher
settings require two Stage Racks).
(configuraes
maiores
exigem
dois Channels
Stage
Racks).
for
plug-ins,
while
choosing
aInput
higher
number
reduces
theDSP
Choosing
a lower
number
ofRacks).
leaves
more
settings
require
two
Stage
amount
of
DSP
available
forInput
for plug-ins,
while
choosing
aplug-ins.
higher
number
reduces
Choosing
a lower
number
of
Channels
leaves
morethe
DSP
Escolher
uma nmero
menor
defor
canais
denumber
entrada
deixa
mais
DSP
Choosing
lower
number
of
Input
Channels
leaves
more
DSP
amount
of DSP
available
for
plug-ins,
while
choosing
a plug-ins.
higher
reduces
the
disponvel
para
plug-ins,
enquanto
escolher
um nmero
maior
reduz
On
VENUE
Mix
Rack
systems,
choosing
the
highest
foramount
plug-ins,
while
choosing
a
higher
number
reduces
the
of DSP available for plug-ins.
aamount
quantidade
de DSP
disponvel
parachannels
plug-ins.
number
of input
(64)the
letshighest
you use
On
VENUE
Mix processing
Rack
systems,
choosing
of DSP
available
for plug-ins.
extra
input
processing
channels
for(64)
advanced
number
of Mix
input
processing
channels
youmonuse
On
VENUE
Rack
systems,
choosing
thelets
highest
EmVENUE
sistemas
VENUE
Mix Rack,choosing
escolherthe
o maior
nmero de
On
Mix
Rack
systems,
highest
itor
mixing
workflows.
For
more information,
extra
processing
channels
for
advanced
monnumber
ofinput
input
processing
channels
(64)
lets
yousee
use
5
Click Apply;
systemreinicia.
restarts.
5 Clique
Apply;the
o sistema
canais of
deinput
processamento
de entrada
(64)
permite
utilizar
number
processing
channels
(64)
lets you
use
Multiple
Input
and Output
Assignments
in the
itor mixing
workflows.
For
more
information,
see
5 Click Apply; the system restarts.
extra
processing
channels
for
advanced
moncanais
deinput
processamento
de entrada
extra para
mixagem
extra
input workflows.
processing
channels
for
advanced
Patchbay
onmonitorao.
page
Multiple
and112.
Output
Assignments
in monthe
itor
mixing
For more
information,
see
avanada
deInput
Para
mais informaes,
veja
itor
mixing workflows.
For more
information,
see
Patchbay
on
page
112.
Multiple
Input
and
Output
Assignments
in
the
Mltiplos Roteamentos de Entrada e Sada no Patchbay
Multiple
and Output
Patchbay
on page
112. Assignments in the
na
pginaInput
112.
Patchbay on page 112.
58 Guia
VENUE
Profile
Guide
58
VENUE
Profile
Bus Configuration
Bus Configuration Settings

Os
ajustes
Bus
Configuration
permitem
as configuraes
Bus
Configuration
Settings
The
Bus Configuration
Settings
let youescolher
choose the
Aux and
StageAux
Rack
Features
de
busses
e Group/Var
Group. Veja Configurando
Busses Aux,
Group/Var
busses configuration.
See Configuring
BusGroup
Configuration
Settings
GroupThe
e Variable
Group na pgina
80. let you choose the Aux and
Aux,
Group,
Variable
Group
Busses
page
80. all stage
Stage
Racksand
are
used busses
with
an
FOH
Rack,on
and
provide
Group/Var
Group
configuration.
See
Configuring
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Stage
Aux, Group, and Variable Group Busses on page
80.Racks
Para alterar a configurao de bus Aux/Group:
To change the Aux/Group Bus Configuration:
Tothe
change
thein
Aux/Group
Bus
Configuration:
1 1Put
system
Config
mode.
Coloque
o sistema
no modo
Config.
1 Put
system
inon-screen.
Config mode.
2 Click
thethe
Edit
button
2 Clique no boto Edit na tela.
2 Click
the Edit
button
on-screen.option.
3 Click
to select
a Bus
Configuration
3 Clique
selecionar
uma
Configuration.
Videopara
Display
(15-inch
or opo
greaterBus
flat-panel
VGA display
3 Click
tothe
select
a Busrestarts.
Configuration option.
4 Click
Apply;
system
recommended;
1024x768
minimum resolution). VGA and
4 Clique
Apply;
o sistema reiniciar.
supported.
4DVI
Click
Apply; the system restarts.
Audio I/O
Bus configuration settings in the System page
configurao
8 analog output
channels;
expandable up to 48 analog or
Ajustes de
de bus na
pgina System
Busdigital
configuration
settings
in theRack.
System page
outputs
per Stage

System Components
Included Components
VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE Profile Guide
Rack(s) (see next)
Devices
Digital
Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
Devices
Devices
The
Devices page lets you view system connections, trouble-
The
connection
between
FOHsystem
Rack and
Stage Rack requires
shoot
hardware
and
components.
The
Devices
pagereset
lets VENUE
you view
system
connections,
troubleA pgina
Devices
do sistema,
solucionar
a Digital
Snakepermite
cable. visualizar
This cableconexes
can be purchased
directly
shoot
hardware
and
reset
VENUE
system
components.
problemas
de or
hardware
e resetar componentes do sistema.
from Avid
assembled
To display
the Devices
tab: by your preferred vendor.
Para
aDevices
aba Devices:
To apresentar
display
tab:
Click
Optionsthe
> Devices.
Optional Components
Click Options > Devices.

Clique
Options > Devices.

(for Talkback)

ofpage
the Options
page
You Devices
can
usetab
this
to view
component
status
after
diagnos 25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
to GPI
devices)
Aba
Devices
na
pgina
Options
tics or
troubleshooting.
You can use this page to view component status after diagnosDevices tab of the Options page
ticspode
or troubleshooting.
Voc
utilizar essa pgina para verificar o status de components
To reset VENUE system hardware components:
depois
de umProfile
diagnsticoExpansion
ou resoluo de Options
problemas.
VENUE
Tothe
reset
VENUE
1 Put
system
in system
Config hardware
mode. components:
Para
os components
hardware
do sistema
VENUE:
The resetar
following
options can de
be added
to VENUE
Profile
systems.
1 to
Put
the
systempage
in Config
mode.
2 Go
the
Options
and click
the Devices tab.
1website
Coloque
othe
sistema
no following
modo
Config.
2 Go to
Options
page and
click the Devices
tab.
(www.avid.com).
3 Right-click
any
of the
hardware
components:
System Restore CD
sections
3Console
Right-click
any ofe the
following
hardware components:
2V
pgina
Options
clique
na aba Devices.
Racks
(Mix Options
Rack,
FOH Rack or Stage Rack)
Mix
Rack
Console
sections
3 Clique com o boto direito em qualquer um dos seguintes

Racks
(Mix Rack, FOH Rack or Stage Rack)
4 Choose
Reset.
components
de hardware:
I/O Options
4 Sees
console
Chooseda
Reset.

Racks
(Mix
FOH
Rack
ou Stage
Rack) with
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
that provides
16 analog
Simulating aRack,
VENUE
Configuration
the
Standalone
Software
Simulating
4 Escolha
Reset. a VENUE Configuration with the
Standalone
Software
AO16
Card that
provides
line
With
theAnalog
VENUEOutput
Standalone
software,
you 16
cananalog
use the
De-level
Simular
uma
configurao
VENUE
com foropur-Software
outputs
vices
pagethe
to simulate
a VENUE system
of any
With
VENUE Standalone
software,
yousize
can use the DeStandalone
poses
of preparing
shows and
training.
See Simulating
a purvices
page toand
simulate
VENUE
system
any size 8for
XO16
Analog
DigitalaOutput
Card
thatofprovides
analog
VENUE
Configuration
on
page
224.
poses
ofoutputs,
preparing
shows
training.
Simulating
a
Com
o software
VENUE
voc See
pode
utilizar a pgina
line
level
and
8Standalone,
AESand
digital
outputs.
Devices
para
simular um sistema
VENUE
VENUE
Configuration
on page
224. de qualquer tamanho com
oAT16
objetivo
deOutput
prepararCard
shows
treinamento.
Veja Simulando
A-Net
thate provides
16 channels
of A-Netuma
Configurao
VENUEwith
na pgina
224.
output compatible
Aviom
Personal Mixers and other
Chapter 6: Options 59
digital I/O.
Other
Options
and Settings
Outras
Opes
e Ajustes
Other
Options
and Settings
Busses
Busses
Busses
The Busses
page
lets you
customize
characteristics
foros
thebusses
Aux,
A pgina
Busses
permite
customizar
caractersticas
para
The Busses page lets you customize characteristics for the Aux,
Aux,Solo,
Solo,Matrix,
Matrix and
e Main.
Main busses.
Solo, Matrix, and Main busses.
5
Click Apply to
reconfigure
the osystem,
or click
Cancel
tosair
exitsem
5 Clique
reconfigurar
para
5 ClickApply
Applypara
to reconfigure
thesistema
system, ou
or Cancel
click Cancel
to exit
without
settings.
alterar
oschanging
ajustes dosystem
sistema.
without changing system settings.
ForPara
moremais
information,
see Chapter
Aux 10,
Sends
andSends e
informaes,
o 10,
Captulo
Aux
For more
information,
see veja
Chapter
10, Aux
Sends
and
Variable
Groups.
Variable
Groups.
Variable Groups.
Solo
and Solo
Monitor
Operations
Operaes
e Monitor
Solo and Monitor Operations
These
settings customize
Solo andoperao
Monitor (cue)
bus
modeSolo e
Esses
busses
Theseajustes
settingspersonalizam
customize Soloa and
Monitordos
(cue)
bus mode
and
operation.
Monitor
(cue).
and operation.
Solo controls in the Options > Busses page

Solo controls in the Options > Busses page
Busses tab of the Options page
Aba Busses
na pgina
Busses
tab of Options
the Options page
Auxiliaries and Variable Groups
Auxiliaries
Variable Groups
Auxiliaries
e Variableand
Groups
These options let you designate bus link status, pick off source,
These options
let you
designate
busdo
link
status,
pick
off source,
Essas
permitem
indicar
status
bus,
fonte
escolhida
e
andopes
stereo pan
behavior
for Auxiliaries
(Aux
Send busses).
and
stereo
pan
behavior
for
Auxiliaries
(Aux
Send
busses).
comportamento de pan estreo de busses auxiliares (Aux Send).
Links When enabled, this option links the corresponding bus-
Links
When habilitado,
enabled, thisessa
option
links the
corresponding
busLinks
Quando
opo
vincula
osAux
busses
ses into
bus pairs. Control changes
affect both
mono
busses
into
bus
pairs.
Control
changes
affect
both
mono
Aux
buscorrespondents
em pares
de Pan
busses.
de controle
ses, and the Follows
Channel
optionAlteraes
becomes available.
ses,
and
the
Follows
Channel
Pan
option
becomes
available.
afetam ambos os busses Aux, e a opo Follows Channel Pan fica
disponvel.
Pickoff These options let you designate the pre-fader pickoff
Pickoff These options let you designate the pre-fader pickoff
point feeding each bus. Choices include pre-EQ, pre-mute,
point
feeding
each
bus. Choices
include
pre-EQ,
pre-mute,
Pickoff
Estas
opes
permitem
designar
o ponto
de alimentao
and pre-fader
(post-mute).
and
pre-fader
(post-mute).
(pickoff) pr-fader para cada bus. As opes incluem pr-EQ, pr-
Mute
e pr-fader
(ps-Mute).
Follows
Channel
Pan Each channel can be panned indepen-
Follows Channel Pan Each channel can be panned independently within each linked bus pair, or configured to follow the
dently
within each
bus
pair, or
configured
to follow the
Follows
Channel
Pan linked
Cada
canal
pode
ser
posicionado
channel
pan by enabling
the Follows
Channel
Pan option.
channel pan by no
enabling
the Follows
Channel
Panbusses,
option. ou
independentemente
pan dentro
de cada
par de
configurado para seguir o posicionamento habilitando a opo

To change
the Pan.
Aux bus configuration:
Follows
Channel
To change
the Aux bus configuration:
1 Put a
the
system in Config
mode.
Para alterar
configurao
do bus Aux:
2 Go to the Options page and click the Busses tab.


3 Click Edit.
3 Click Edit.
2 V
pgina Options
e clique na
aba Busses.
4 Configure
the following
settings:
4 Configure the following settings:
To link two mono Aux busses into a bus pair, select the
Link option for the corresponding pair.
Link option for the corresponding pair.
Specify
the panning
for channels routed to Aux bus pairs
4 Configure
os seguintes
ajustes:
Specify the panning for channels routed to Aux bus pairs
the Follows
Channel
Pan
option.
Parawith
vincular
dois busses
Aux
mono
em um par, selecione a
with the Follows Channel Pan option.
opo
Link
para
o
par
correspondente.
Click to select the pickoff point for each bus (Pre-EQ,
Click to
thecanais
pickoffroteados
point for
each
(Pre-EQ,
Especifique
o select
pan dos
para
osbus
pares
de bus
Pre-Mute, or Pre-Fader).
Aux com
a opoorFollows
Channel Pan.
Pre-Mute,
Pre-Fader).
3 CliqueEdit.
To link two mono Aux busses into a bus pair, select the
Clique para selecionar o ponto de alimentao de cada bus

(pr-EQ, pr-Mute ou pr-fader).

Type Solo mode choices include PFL (Pre-Fader Listen), Stereo

Type Solo
mode
choices
PFL (Pre-Fader Listen), Stereo
Controles
Solo na
pgina
Optionsand
>include
Busses
AFL
(After-Fader
Listen),
Solo-In-Place.
AFL (After-Fader Listen), and Solo-In-Place.
Type As
opes
do modo
Solo incluemof
PFL
(Pr-Fader
Stereo
Level
Trim
Mirrors
the functionality
the
Solo/PFLListen),
level conLevel
Trim Mirrors
thee functionality
AFL
(After-Fader
Listen)
Solo-In-Place. of the Solo/PFL level control
on
the control
surface.
trol on the control surface.
Level Trim Sets
Espelha
a funo
controle de
Solo/PFL
Monitoring
the level
of thedo
Headphone
andnvel
Monitor
out- na
Monitoring
the level of the Headphone and Monitor outsuperfcie
de Sets
controle.
puts.
puts.
Delay
Sets a Ajusta
delay for
time-aligning
and
near-field
Monitoring
o nvel
das sadasheadphones
Headphone e
Monitor.
Delay Sets a delay for time-aligning headphones and near-field
monitors to the house system.
monitors
house
system.
Delay
Defineto
umthe
atraso
para
alinhamento do tempo dos headphones
Auxes/Var
Follow
Putsao
the
controls
e monitoresGroups
near-field
em AFL
relao
sistema
de for
PA. an Aux
Auxes/Var Groups Follow AFL Puts the controls for an Aux
Send or Variable Group Send on the input channel encoders
Send or Variable
Group AFL
SendColoca
on the os
input channel
Auxes/Var
Groups
Follow
deencoders
Aux Send
whenever
the
AFL switch
is pressed
on thatcontroles
Aux or Var
Group
whenever
the AFL
switch
iscodificadores
pressed on that
Aux
or Var
ou
Variable
Group
Send
nos
dos
canais
de Group
entrada
bus.
bus. que o switch AFL pressionado naquele bus Aux ou Var
sempre
Group.
AFL
Follows Auxes/Var Groups Soloes the Aux (or Variable
AFL Follows Auxes/Var Groups Soloes the Aux (or Variable
Group) bus that is currently assigned to input encoders.
Group)
bus
that is currently
assigned
to Aux
input
AFL
Follows
Auxes/Var
Groups Coloca
o bus
(ouencoders.
Variable Group)
atualmente
codificadores
de entrada em
Solo.
Auto
Cancelassociado
Soloing a aos
channel
strip automatically
takes
any
Auto Cancel Soloing a channel strip automatically takes any
currently soloed channels out of solo.
currently
out
solo.em Solo automaticamente
Auto
Cancel soloed
Colocarchannels
uma rgua
deofcanal
desabilita
o Solo
de outros
Input
Priority
Makes
soloedcanais.
inputs temporarily replace soloed
Input Priority Makes soloed inputs temporarily replace soloed
output busses on the AFL/PFL bus.
output
busses
AFL/PFL
bus. em Solo temporariamente
Input
Priority
Fazon
osthe
canais
de entrada
substituir
os busses
de sada
em Solo no bus
Mix
to Monitors
Mirrors
the functionality
of AFL/PFL.
the Mix to MoniMix to Monitors Mirrors the functionality of the Mix to Monitors switch on the control surface.
tors
on Espelha
the control
surface.do switch Mix to Monitors na
Mix
toswitch
Monitors
a funo
Cue
on Mains
Fader Puts control of the Monitor bus level to
superfcie
de controle.
Cue on Mains Fader Puts control of the Monitor bus level to
the Mains fader.
theon
Mains
Cue
Mainsfader.
Fader Enderea o controle de nvel do bus Monitor
para o fader Mains.
Para configurar
ajustes de Solo na tela:
To configure Solo settings on-screen:
settings
on-screen:
Go to Solo
the Options
page
the Busses tab.
1To
Vconfigure
1 pgina
Options
e clique
naand
abaclick
Busses.
Stage Rack Features
2 Configure settings as needed:

2 Configure
os ajustes como necessrio:
2 Configure settings as needed:
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
Up
tofollowing:
two Stage Racks
To adjust
Monitor
Delay,systems.
do one of
the
Paraaudio
ajustar
Monitor
BusBus
Delay:
To adjust
Monitor
Bus Delay,
do one
of the following:
Adjust
the Delay
encoder
on-screen.
Ajuste o codificador Delay na tela.

Adjust
thethe
Delay
encoder
Audio
I/O
Click
Delay
value on-screen.
shown on-screen, and manually enter
Clique
o
valor
de
Delay
apresentado
na tela e manualmente
insira
a
new
value.
48
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
preamps
and
Click the Delay value shown on-screen,
andmic
manually
enter
o novo valor.
a new value.
To
toggle
Delay on or
off:
8 analog
channels;
Para alternar
entreoutput
Delay ligado
e desligado:
digital
perDelay
StageInRack.
To toggle
Delay
on or off:
Click
to outputs
toggle
the
switch on-screen.
Clique o switch Delay In na tela.

Click to toggle the Delay In switch on-screen.
Delay settings
retained
Synchronization
and are
Control
I/Owhen toggled off or on.
Os ajustes de Delay so mantidos quando ligado ou
settings
are retained
whenprimary
toggled off
on.
Delay
Snake
connectors
to enable
andorredundant
(if
desligado.
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
For more information, see Solo and Monitor Busses on
page
119onformaes,
Para
mais
veja and
Busses
SoloBusses
e Monitor
For more
information,
see Solo
Monitor
on na
pgina
119.
page 119
Matrixes
System Components
Pickoffs
Pickoffs
Pickoffs
The Pickoffs
page
lets you
control
bus
point on
A pgina
Pickoffs
permite
controlar
o the
ponto
depickoff
alimentao
do inbus
nas rguas de entrada, assim como uma fonte especfica e pontos
strips,
as well
specify
source
andpickoff
insert points
The put
Pickoffs
page
lets as
you
control
the bus
point for
on output
inde
insero
para
busses
de
sada.
A
pgina
Pickoffs
tambm
oferece
busses.
The
Pickoffs
page
also
provides
master
control
for
Defollowing
must
beinsert
purchased
putThe
strips,
as well components
as specify source
and
pointsseparately:
for output
o controle
Delay Compensation.
lay
Compensation.
busses.
TheDisplay
Pickoffs(15-inch
page alsoorprovides
master control
for De Video
greater flat-panel
VGA display
lay Compensation.
DVI supported.

Optional Components
tab of
Options page
transfer
ofthe
Show
The Matrixes section lets you link and unlink Matrix to form AbaPickoffs
Pickoffs
da pgina
Optionsdata; 512 MB or larger recommended)
stereo
Matrix
busses.
tab ofoptions
the Options
page
Pickoff
are explained
throughout
this guide
where rel Near-field
monitor
speakers
for mix position
monitoring
AThe
seo
Matrixes
permite
associar
e desassociar
a Matrix
para Pickoffs
Matrixes
section
lets you
link and
unlink Matrix
to form
Included
Components
As
opes
Pickoff
so
explicadas
ao
longo
deste
guia
onde
evant.
formar
busses
Matrix
estreo.
options
Headphones
with 1/4-inch
jack this guide where rel-forem
stereo
Matrix
busses.
are explained
throughout
When
enabled,
these
options
corresponding mono Pickoff
relevantes.
AllLinks
VENUE
Profile
systems
include
thelink
following:
busses
into stereo-linked
pairs.
Control
then evant.
Links
Quando
habilitada,
essaoptions
opo link
associa
busses changes
Matrix
mono
LinksMatrix
enabled,
corresponding
mono
When
VENUE
Profilethese
console
Settings
for Delay Compensation
(for
Talkback)
affect
bothem
mono
Ajustes
Delay
Compensation
correspondents
paresMatrix
estreobusses.
associados. Alteraes no controle
Matrix
busses
Two (2)into
IECstereo-linked
power cablespairs. Control changes then
Settings
for Delay
Compensation
Footswitches
(up
to page
2) provides three settings for Delay
afgetam
ambos
os busses
The
Options
> Pickoffs
affect both
mono
MatrixMatrix
busses.Mono.
For more
information
onscreen
these features
11,
Monitor
mount
for VGA
(screen see
notChapter
included)
A pgina
Options
>
Pickoffs
oferece
trs
ajustes
deInserts.
compensao
de
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
Compensation:
Off,page
Mixprovides
Only, and
Mixsettings
and
The
Options
>
Pickoffs
three
for
Delay
delay
(Delay
Compensation):
Off,
Mix
Only
e
Mix
and
Inserts.
Matrix
and
Personal
Q
Mixers.
Para
mais
informaes
recursos,
veja 11,
o Captulo
For
Trackball
mount (trackball
not included)
more
information
on sobre
these esses
features
see Chapter
BNC cables (for
Word
clock
between the
Compensation:
Mixconnecting
Only, and
Mix and
Inserts.
11,Mixers
Matrix
e Personal
Q.
Off No DelayOff,
Compensation
is applied.
and
Personal
Q Mixers.
Matrix
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
Off Nenhum delay de compensao aplicado.
Panning/Center Divergence
Off No
is applied.
VENUEDivergence
Profile Guide
Delay
25-pin
D-Sub cables
(for
connecting
to GPI
Mix
Only Compensation
VENUE
automatically
compensates
fordevices)
delays inPanning/Center
Panning/Center
Divergence
The
Panning
section
provides control over center channel di- Mix
Only
A
VENUE
automaticamente
compensa
delays
ocorridos
Two
(2) console
lights
curred
by
the
use
of
Groups
routed
to
the
Mains
busses.
Mix Only VENUE automatically compensates for delays
invergence
when
the
Main
Bus
is
set
to
LCR
mode.
See
Main
pelo
uso
de
Groups
roteados
para
os
busses
Mains.
AThe
seo
Panning
oferece
controle
sobre
a
divergncia
do
canal
Panning
section
provides
Protective
Dust
Cover control over center channel dicurred
theInserts
use of VENUE
Groups automatically
routed to the Mains
busses.for delays
Mixbyand
compensates
Bus
Center
Divergence
Options
onpara
page
central
quando
Main
Bus est
ajustado
o 85.
modo LCR. Veja
vergence
wheno(see
the
Main
Rack(s)
next) Bus is set to LCR mode. See Main
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Mix
and
Inserts
A
VENUE
automaticamente
Opes de Divergncia do Bus Central na pgina 85.
incurred
by VENUE
the use of
plug-ins as well
as thosecompensa
incurred
bydelays
the
Mix and
Inserts
automatically
compensates
for delays
Bus Center Divergence Options on page 85.
ocorridos
pelo
uso
de
plug-ins,
assim
como
aqueles
ocorridos
pelo
use
of
Groups
routed
to
the
Mains
busses.
To set Center Divergence:
incurred
by
the use
of plug-ins
asadded
well
as
incurred
the
Thede
following
options
can
tothose
VENUE
Profileby
systems.
uso
Groups
roteados
parabeos
busses
Mains.
Software
ParaRacks,
ajustar Center
Divergence:
of details
Groupson
routed
to the systems
Mains busses.
all VENUE
To set
Centera Divergence:
Enter
value or drag in the Center Divergence text box and useFor
Each
Mix
Rackou
or arraste
FOH Rack
includes:
press
Enter.
Insira
um
valor
a
caixa
de
texto
Center
Divergence
e
Enter a value or drag in the Center Divergence text box and
pressione
Enter. Restore CD
System
pressEnter.
Stereo
Group Panning
Operation
ECx Ethernet
Control Software
Installer CD
Mix Rack Options
Matrixes
Matrixes
Stereo Group Panning Operation
Standalone
SoftwareOperation
Installer CD
Stereo
GroupGroup
Panning
The Stereo
Panning Operation options provide differ-
iLok
USB
Smart
Keyfor
(for
storing
plug-in
A opo
Stereo
Group
Panning
Operation
oferece authorizations)
diferentes
nveis
levels
of
flexibility
how
channels
be routed
The ent
Stereo
Group
Panning Operation
optionscan
provide
differ-to
de flexibilidade
a forma
os canais
podem ser roteados
Plug-inpara
installer
discscomo
(if any)
with pre-authorized
iLok
Groups.
entgrupos.
levels of flexibility for how channels can be routed to
em

Groups.
To
Stereo
Panning
Operation:
change
One
FOH
LinkGroup
cable
for Operation:
connection
to a VENUE console
Para alterar
Stereo
Group
Panning
To change
Group
1 Put Stereo
the system
inPanning
Config Operation:
mode.
Each Stage
Rack no
includes:
1 Coloque
o sistema
modo Config.
1 Put
system
in Config
mode.
2 the
Click
to select
Simplecables
or Expert mode.
Two (2)
IEC power
22Clique
selecionar
Clickpara
to select
Simpleosormodos
Expert Simple
mode. ou Expert.
For more information on these options, see Simple and Expert
Operational
Modes
page opes,
93.
Para
mais
informaes
sobreon
essas
veja and
Modos
For
more
information
on these
options,
see Simple
Ex- de
Operao
Simple
e
Expert
na
pgina
pert Operational Modes on page 93. 93.
I/O Options
outputs
digital I/O.
Snapshots
Aux Mon and Aux FX
These
settings
let you
The Snapshots page provides several snapshot preference set- Aux
Mon
and Aux
FXclassify individual Aux Sends (including
Snapshots
Aux
Monbus
e Aux
FX as monitor sends (Mon) or as effects sends
linked
pairs)
Aux Mon and Aux FX
Snapshots
Aux
and
FX
TheseMon
settings
letAux
you classify
individual Aux Sends (including
The Snapshots page provides several snapshot preference setSnapshots
Snapshots
tings to optimize Snapshot operation.
A tings
pgina
Snapshots
oferece
vrios
ajustes
de preferncias
de
to optimize
Snapshot
operation.
The Snapshots
page
provides
several
snapshot
preference setThe Snapshots
page provides
several
Snapshots
para otimizar
a operao
comsnapshot
cenas. preference settings to optimize Snapshot operation.
tings to optimize Snapshot operation.
Snapshots tab of the Options page

Snapshots
tab ofGeneral
the OptionsPreferences
page
Snapshot
Snapshots tab of the Options page
Snapshots
tab
of the
Options
page
The following
settings
are
available
Aba
Snapshots
da General
pgina
Options
Snapshot
Preferences
in the Snapshots page.
Snapshot General Preferences

Snapshot
General
Preferences
The
following
settings
are
available
in the the
Snapshots
Center
Last
Recalled
Snapshot
Manages
displaypage.
of the
Snapshot
General
Preferences
Snapshots
listsettings
so that are
theavailable
last recalled
snapshot
is always
The
following
in the
Snapshots
page. cenThe following settings are available in the Snapshots page.
Recalled
Snapshot
Manages
the display
of the snapOsCenter
seguintes
ajustes
esto
disponveis
na pgina
Snapshots.
teredLast
vertically,
letting
you maintain
display
of adjacent
Snapshots
so
that the
last recalled
snapshot
is always
cenCenter
Last
Recalled
Snapshot
Manages
the display
of the
shotsLast
in list
the
list.
Center
Recalled
Snapshot Manages the display of the
tered
vertically,
letting
youlast
maintain
display
of adjacent
snapCenter
Last
Recalled
Snapshot
Gerencia
asnapshot
apresentao
da
lista
Snapshots
list so
that
the
recalled
is always
cenSnapshots list so that the last recalled snapshot is always cenin
theforma
list. letting
deshots
cenas
de
que ayou
ltima
cena display
carregada
esteja sempre
tered
vertically,
maintain
of adjacent
snapCrossfade
tered vertically,
letting you
maintain manter
display of
adjacent snapcentralizada
verticalmente,
permitindo
a visualizao
das
shots in the
list.
shots
in
the
list.
cenas
lista. a Crossfade setting that determines how
Alladjacentes
snapshotsna
provide
Crossfade
long scoped faders will crossfade to the stored values in that
Crossfade
All
snapshots
provide
Crossfade
setting
that> determines
how
Crossfade
Crossfade
snapshot
when
it isarecalled.
The
Options
Snapshots page
long
scopedSnapshot
faders
will
tosetting
the stored
values
in that
All
snapshots
provide
acrossfade
Crossfade
that determines
how
provides
General
Preference
settings
for optimizing
All snapshots
provide
a Crossfade
setting
that determines
how
Todas
asscoped
cenas
oferecem
um
ajuste
dethe
Crossfade
que determina
snapshot
when
it is will
recalled.
The Options
> Snapshots
page
long
faders
crossfade
to
stored
values
in that
crossfades
between
snapshots.
long
scoped
faders
will
crossfade
to
the
stored
values
in
that
como
faders
com ao
de grandes
distncias
se
provides
Snapshot
Preference
settings
formovimentaro
optimizing
snapshot
when
it General
is recalled.
The Options
> Snapshots
page
snapshot
when
it is recalled.na
The
Options
> Snapshots
page
para
os valores
armazenados
cena
que est
sendo
carregada.
Default
Time
Defines
a
(fader)
Crossfade
time
to
apply
to all
crossfades
between
snapshots.
provides Snapshot General Preference settings for optimizing
provides
Snapshot
General Preference
settingsSnapshot
for optimizing
A pgina
Options
> Snapshots
oferece os ajustes
General
new
snapshots.
crossfades between snapshots.
Preference
para
otimizar
entre cenas.
crossfades
between
snapshots.
Default Time
Defines
a crossfades
(fader) Crossfade
time to apply to all
Pan,
Balance
& Widtha Enables
pan, balance
widthto
onall
new
snapshots.
Default
Time Defines
(fader) Crossfade
timeand
to apply
Default
Time
Defines
a (fader)
apply to
all
Default
Time
Define
em
deCrossfade
crossfade time
a serto
aplicado
a todas
scoped
channels
totempo
crossfade.
new
snapshots.
asnew
novas
cenas.& Width Enables pan, balance and width on
snapshots.
Pan,
Balance
scoped
channels
to crossfade.
For more
seepan,
Chapter
21, and
Snapshots.
Pan, Balance
& information,
Width
Enables
balance
width on
Pan,
Balance
WidthHabilita
Enablespan,
pan,balance
balance e
and
width
oncanais
Pan,
Balance
& &Width
width
nos
scoped channels to crossfade.
scoped
to crossfade.
para
crossfade.
Forchannels
more information,
see Chapter 21, Snapshots.
PRE
For more information, see Chapter 21, Snapshots.
more
seeveja
Chapter
21,specify
Snapshots.
Para
maisinformation,
informaes,
olet
Captulo
21, Snapshots.
TheFor
options
in
the PRE section
you
which paramePRE
ters
are
recalled
with
Snapshots
whose
scope
includes
Pre setPRE
PRE
The
options
PRE whether
section let
you specify
paramePRE
tings.
Clickintothe
toggle
recalled
Input which
snapshot
data inters
are
recalled
Snapshots
includes
setThe
options
in with
the PRE
section whose
let youscope
specify
which Pre
paramecludes
the following:
options
in the
PRE
section especificar
let you specify
which
parameAsThe
opes
na seo
PRE
permitem
quais
parmetros
so
tings.
Click
to toggle
whether
recalled
Input
snapshot
ters are
recalled
with
Snapshots
whose
scope
includesdata
Pre insetGain,
Pad,
andSnapshots
Phase
ters are
recalled
with
whose
scope
includes
Pre setcarregados
com
as
cenas
cujo
mbito
inclui
ajustes
Pre.
cludes
following:
tings. the
Click
to toggle whether recalled Input snapshot data inClique
alternar
se os
dados
entrada
de cena
incluem:
tings.para
to(phantom
toggle
whether
recalled
Input
snapshot
data in Click
+48V
power)de
cludes
the
following:
Gain,
Pad,
and Phase
cludes
Gain,
Pad
e
Phase
the
following:
HPF
(phantom
power)
+48V
Gain,
Pad, and
Phase
+48V
(phantom
power)
Gain, Pad, and Phase
HPF
HPF
+48V
(phantom
power)
Delay is stored as
a unique (discrete) data type for each
+48V (phantom power)
channel.
HPF
O Delay
armazenado
como
um nico
HPF
Delay
is stored
as a unique
(discrete)
data tipo
type de
for dado
each para
cada
canal.
channel.
Delay is stored as a unique (discrete) data type for each
Delay is stored as a unique (discrete) data type for each
channel.
channel.
62 VENUE
Profile Guide

62
VENUE
Profile
Guide
62 Guia
VENUE
Profile
(FX), which lets you scope each type separately from the
Estes bus
ajustes
permitem
classificar
individualmente
Aux
linked
pairs)
asyou
monitor
sends
(Mon)
orSends
as effects
sendsSends
These
settings
let
classify
individual
Aux
(including
Snapshots
page.
These
settings
let you
classify individual
Auxmandadas
Sends (including
(incluindo
de bus)
como
monitor
(FX),
which
letsassociados
you
scope each
type
separately
from de
the
linked
bus pares
pairs)
as
monitor
sends
(Mon)
or as effects
sends
linked
busoupairs)
as monitor
sends
(Mon)
orvoc
as effects
sends
(Mon)
de
efeitos
(FX),
permitindo
que
acesse
cada
This option
islets
for you
organizing
Auxtype
Sends
and Var Group
Sendstipo
Snapshots
page.
(FX),
which
scope each
separately
from the
(FX),
which letsnayou
scope
each type separately from the
separadamente
pgina
Snapshots.
for snapshot
control only, and does not directly affect Aux bus
Snapshots
page.
Snapshots
This
optionpage.
is for organizing Aux Sends and Var Group Sends
operation.
Essa
opo serve para
organizar
Auxnot
Sends e Varaffect
Group
Sends
for
snapshot
only,
andAux
does
Aux
bus para
This
option control
is for organizing
Sendsdirectly
and Var Group
Sends
This
optionde
is for
organizing
Aux
Sends
and
Var GroupaSends
controles
cenas
apenas,
e
no
afeta
diretamente
opo
de
operation.
for
snapshot
control
only,
and does not directly affect Aux bus
MTC
(MIDI
Timeonly,
Code)
busses
auxiliares.
for
snapshot
control
and does not directly affect Aux bus
operation.
operation.
The(MIDI
MIDITime
Time
Code
options let you control MTC operational
MTC
(MIDI
Time
Code)
MTC
Code)
modes,
frame
rate,
and
Start Time.
MTC (MIDI Time Code)
MTC
(MIDI
Time
The MIDI
Time
CodeCode)
options let you control MTC operational
A opo MIDI Time Code permite controlar modos operacionais,
Modes
Available
MTC
modes
MTC
Off, MTC
MTC operational
Read (slave),
modes,
frame
rate,
and
Start
Time.
The
MIDI
Time
Code
options
letare
you
control
frame
rate
e Star
Time
do
MTC.
The
MIDI
Time
Code
options
let you control MTC operational
and
MTC
Generate
(master).
modes, frame rate, and Start Time.
modes,
frame rate,
andmodes
Start Time.
Modes Available
MTC
are MTC Off, MTC Read (slave),
Modes Os modos MTC disponveis so MTC Off, MTC Read (slave) e
and
MTC
Generate
(master).
Frame
Rate
This
option
sets
the MTC
frameOff,
rateMTC
that Read
is used
when
Modes
Available MTC modes are
(slave),
MTC Generate
Modes
Available(master).
MTC modes are MTC Off, MTC Read (slave),
generating
MTC.
and MTC Generate (master).
and
MTC
(master).
Frame
RateGenerate
This option
sets the frame rate that is used when
Frame Rate Esta opo ajusta o frame rate utilizado quando
Start
Time
This
option
setsthe
the frame
start time
generating
MTC.
Frame
Rate
This option sets
rate that
that is
is used
used when
when
gerando
o MTC.
Frame
Rate
This option sets the frame rate that is used when
generating
MTC.
generating MTC.
generating
MTC.option sets the start time that is used when
Start Time This
Start Time Esta opo ajusta o time inicial utilizado quando gerando
generating
Start
TimeMTC.
This option sets the start time that is used when
oMIDI
MTC.
Start
Time This option sets the start time that is used when
generating MTC.
generating MTC.
Designates
channel
on which
snapshotsassend
or receiveMIDI
MIDI
MIDI
Define othe
canal
pelo qual
so recebidas
informaes
MIDI
Bank
Select
and
Program
Change
information.
Bank
Select
e
Program
Change
de
snapshots.
MIDI
MIDI
Designates the channel on which snapshots send or receive
MIDI
Bank
Select
and
Change
information.
See
Chapter
23,Program
Synchronization.
Designates
the
channel
onSincronizao.
which
snapshots
send or receive
Veja
o Captulo
23,
Designates the channel on which snapshots send or receive
MIDI Bank Select and Program Change information.
MIDI
Bank
Select
and
ProgramThis
Change
information.
See
Chapter
Snapshots
Send23,
onSynchronization.
Channel
option
sets snapshots to send
Snapshots Send on Channel Esta opo ajusta o snapshot para

Bank
and23,
Program
Change
commands
on apor
selected
enviar
comandos
Bank
Select
e Program
Change
um canal
SeeSelect
Chapter
Synchronization.
See Chapter
23,Channel
Synchronization.
Snapshots
Send on
Thisauma
option
sets
snapshots
to send
send
MIDI
selecionado.
Issoprovides
oferece
forma
e fcil
de enviar
MIDI
channel.
This
quick
andrpida
easy way
to
a
Bank
Select
and
Program
Change
commands
on
a selected
Snapshots
Send
on cada
Channel
This
option
sets
snapshots
tohaving
send
um
comando
MIDI
vez
que
um
snapshot
without
acionado,
sem ser
MIDI
command
time
a snapshot
is
fired,
Snapshots
Send on every
Channel
This
option sets
snapshots
to send
MIDI
channel.
This
provides
a quick
and
easy
way
send
a
necessrio
um MIDI
Program
Change
em
snapshot.
Bank
Selectembutir
Program
Change
commands
oncada
a to
selected
to embed
aand
MIDI
program
change
within
each
snapshot.
Bank Select and Program Change commands on a selected

MIDI
everyprovides
time a snapshot
fired,
without
MIDIcommand
channel. This
a quick is
and
easy
way tohaving
send a
MIDI
channel.Send
This on
provides
a quick
and easyestar
way habilitado
to send a para
OSnapshot
Snapshot
Channel
no
precisa
Send every
on Channel
does
not
need
towithout
be turned
on in
toMIDI
embed
a MIDI
program
change
within
each
snapshot.
command
time
a snapshot
is
fired,
having
MIDI
command
every
a snapshot
isesto
fired,embutidos
without having
enviar
outros
tipos
detime
dados
que
nas cenas,
to send
other
types
ofMIDI
MIDI
data
that
aresnapshot.
embedded
in
toorder
embed
a MIDI
program
change
within
each
to
embed
a MIDI
change
within
Snapshot
Send
onprogram
Channel
does not
needeach
to besnapshot.
turned on in
como
note
on/off
ou
MMC.on/off
snapshots,
such
as note
or MMC.
order
to send
other
types of MIDI
dataneed
that to
arebe
embedded
Snapshot
Send
on Channel
does not
turned oninin
Snapshot
Send
on Channel
does Esta
not need
to be turned
on in para
Snapshots
Respond
totoChannel
opo
as cenas
Snapshots
Respond
Channel
option
setsembedded
snapshots
to
snapshots,
such
as note
on/off
orThis
MMC.
order
to send
other
types
of MIDI
data
that ajusta
are
in
order
to
send
other
types
of
MIDI
data
that
are
embedded
in
responder
a incoming
comandos BankSelect
Selectand
e Program
respond to
ProgramChange
Changerecebidos
comsnapshots,
such as noteBank
on/off or MMC.
snapshots,
such
as
note
on/off This
or MMC.
pelo
canalRespond
MIDI
selecionado
Snapshots
to Channel
option sets snapshots to
mands on
the selected
MIDI channel.
respond
to incoming
Select
andoption
Program
comSnapshots
Respond toBank
Channel
This
setsChange
snapshots
to
Snapshots
Respond
to Channel
This option
sets snapshots
to MIDI
MIDI
Output
Safe channel.
Resguarda
(desliga)
as MIDI
sadas
MIDISnapshot
Snapshot
Output
Safe
Safes
(shuts
off) VENUE
outmands
on
the
selected
MIDI
respond
to
incoming
Bank
Select
and
Program
Change
comrespond
to incoming
Bankso
Select
and Program
Change
comda
VENUE
quando
cenas
chamadas.
Isso not
no
afeta sending
o envio de
put
when
snapshots
recalled.
This does
affect
mands
on the
selectedare
MIDI
channel.
comandos
Bank
Select
e Program
Change
a opo
Snapshots
mands
on the
selected
MIDI
channel.
MIDI
Snapshot
Output
Safe
Safes
(shuts
off)com
VENUE
MIDI
of Bank
Select
and Program
Change
commands
with
theoutSnapSend
on
Channel.
put
when
snapshots
areSafe
recalled.
does
affectMIDI
sending
MIDI
Snapshot
Output
Safes This
(shuts
off)not
VENUE
outshots
Send
on
Channel
MIDI
Snapshot
Output
Safeoption.
Safes (shuts off) VENUE MIDI outofput
Bank
Select
and Program
ChangeThis
commands
the
Snapwhen
snapshots
are recalled.
does notwith
affect
sending
put when snapshots are recalled. This does not affect sending
shots
Send
on Channel
option.
of Bank
Select
and Program
Change commands with the Snapof Bank Select and Program Change commands with the Snapshots Send on Channel option.
shots Send on Channel option.
Misc
Misc
kcabklaT dna kcarT-2 ,csO gnituoR
AThe
pgina
Miscellaneous
ro ,Miscellaneous
stup
ni kcarT-2 page
,rooferece
talprovides
licsOvrias
ehtutility
ngoutras
issaand
otconfiguraes.
yother
abhctsettings.
aP eht esU
Stage Rack Features
.redaf nrut eR XF ro tup nI na ot tupni kcabklaT

,rotallicso etuor ot snottub etuoR neercs-no eht esu nac uoY
.stuptuo ot slangis kcabklat dna kcart-2
:neAudio
ercs-nI/O
o stuptuo kcabklaT ro ,kcarT-2 ,rotallicsO eht etuor oT
rehtie n48
i ninputs
ottub ewith
tuoR remotely
eht kcilc ,controllable
egap csiM > smic
noitpreamps
pO eht nIand
1
.snselectable
oitces kcabphantom
klaT ro ,kpower.
carT-2 ,rotallicsO eht
individually
8 analog output channels;:gexpandable
niwollof ehtup
foto
re48
htianalog
e oD 2 or
digital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
ot kcilc ,tuptuo derised eht detceles ydaerla dah uoy fI
eht ni( edom oT etuoR deyalpsid yltnerruc eht mrifnoc
Synchronization and Control
.)neercI/O
s eht fo renroc tfel rewol
ti( tuptSnake
uo na connectors
tceles ot kcito
lc enable
dna egaprimary
p stuptuand
O ehredundant
t ot oG (if
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
-of sniamer egap stuptuO eht esiwrehto ,ylfeirb sehsalf
.)lenna hc tuptuO detceles ylt nerruc eht no dessuc
Misc tab of the Options page
-noMisc
c otdaepgina
tuoR kOptions
cilc ,sraeppa
Aba
taht golaid noitamrifnoc eht nI 3

-Oscillator
gnSystem
ahc tuohtiw Components
lecnac ot lecnaC kcilc ro tnem ngissa ruoy mrif
Oscillator
. gnituor tnerruc eht gni
Lets you choose the tone, frequency, and level for the built-in
Included
Components
oscillator,
Permite
escolher
a
frequncia
nvel
and
.yabroute
hcataonda,
Pit
,to
21an
retavailable
pahC eesoutput.
,neoitoam
rofnido
erooscilador
m roF
embutido,
e rote-lo
para
a sada
disponvel.
All VENUE
Profile
systems
include
the following:
Signal Lets you choose the type of oscillator tone to use.

kcolC metsyS
Choices
include
sine, variable
noise.
Signal
Permite
escolher
o tipo desine,
ondaand
a ser
usada pelo oscilador.
Two
(2) IEC
power
cables
As opes
incluem
senides,
senides
variveis
.metsys eht rof emit de
narudo.
et a d eht steS
Routing Osc, 2-Track e Talkback
Routing Osc, 2-Track and Talkback
csiM
Utilize
para
Use
the
.sgthe
nittPatchbay
eos rPatchbay
ehto dto
naassign
ytilituatribuir
sedOscillator,
ivorOscillator,
p egap 2-Track
suoentradas
enalinputs,
lecsiM2-Track
eor
hT ou
Additional
Required
Components
Talkback
para to
um
fader
de or
entrada
ou FXfader.
Return.
Talkback
input
an
Input
FX Return
Voc
pode
os botes
Route
na telatopara
direcionar
os sinais
You
can
use utilizar
the on-screen
Route
buttons
route
oscillator,
Oscillator,
2-Track
e signals
Talkback
sadas.
Video
(15-inch
or
greater
flat-panel VGA display
2-track
andDisplay
talkback
topara
outputs.
Para
direcionar
as sadas Oscillator, 2-Track ou Talkback na tela:
DVI
supported.
To route
the
Oscillator, 2-Track, or Talkback outputs on-screen:
Misc,
clique
no boto
Route
das sees
1 1InNa
thepgina
OptionsOptions
> Misc >
page,
click
the Route
button
in either
Oscillator,
2-Track
ou Talkback.
the
Oscillator,
2-Track,
or Talkback sections.
2 2Do
either dos
of the
following:
seguintes
procedimentos:
Siga
Theum
connection
between
aIfDigital
Se
voc
j
selecionou
a sada
clique para
confirmar
o
you had
already
selected
thedesejada,
desired
click
to
Snake
cable.
This cable
can be output,
purchased
directly
modo
de
roteamento
apresentado
(no
canto
inferior
esquerdo
confirm
the
Route To vendor.
mode (in the
from
Avid
or currently
assembleddisplayed
by your preferred
da tela).
lower left corner of the screen).
V pgina Outputs e clique para selecionar uma sada (ela
Go
to the
Outputs page
click
to select
an outputfocada
(it
pisca
brevemente,
e a and
pgina
Outputs
permanece
na
Optional
Components
flashes
briefly,
Outputs page remains foseleo
atual otherwise
de canal dethe
sada).
cussed
on the
currently selected
Output
channel).
The
following
components
are optional,
and
must be
egaque
p snosurge,
itpO ehclique
t fo batRoute
csiM para
3purchased
Na caixa de
dilogo de confirmao
separately:
3 In the confirmation dialog that appears, click Route to conconfirmar o endereamento ou Cancel para cancelar sem alteraes
USB
flash disk or
(or other portable USB storage
for
rotdevice
alchanglicsO
firm
assignment
no your
roteamento
atual click Cancel to cancel without
Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)

ing the transfer
current of
routing.
ni-tliub eht rof level dna ,ycneuqerf ,enot eht esoohc uoy steL
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for mix
monitoring
Para mais informaes. Veja
o Captulo
12, position
Patchbay.
.tuptuosee
elbaChapter
liava na12,
ot tPatchbay.
i etuor dna ,rotallicso
System
u Clock
ot enot or
rotcondenser
allicso fo emicrophone
pyt eht esoohand
c uoXLR
y stemic
L lancable
giS
.esDynamic
System Clock
.esion d na ,enis elbairav ,enis edulcni s eciohC
(for Talkback)
Ajuste a data e a hora de seu sistema
Sets the
date and time
for the
system.
Footswitches
(up
Frequency Lets you set the oscillator frequency.
.ycneu q
erf to
rot2)
allicso eht tes uoy steL ycneuqerF
Hora
Dia cables
no Display
Status external MIDI devices)
do
MIDI
(for de
connecting
Frequency Permite ajustar a frequncia
dososcilador.
yalpnot
smode,
iD
utato
tSassign
ni yaDthe
fo eoscilmiT
in
Trackball
mount
included)
Route Enables
Route
Osc(trackball
to Selected
-Time
licsoeof
hBNC
tDay
ngiscables
saStatus
ot ,e(for
doDisplay
m
detceleS otWord
csO eclock
tuoR sbetween
elbanE ethe
tuoR
connecting
Voc.)pode
para
que
as yhora
do
dia
seja
apresentada
lator signal
to the
currently
selected output channel(s).
sVENUE
(lennescolher
ahsystem
c tuptu
o
d
e
t
c
e
l
e
l
t
n
e
r
r
u
c
e
h
t
o
t
l
a
n
g
i
s
r
otal no
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
and
external
digital
devices)
Route
modo
Selecte,
oosinal
renroHabilita
c thgir roew
ol ehRoute
t ni yaOsc
d foto
em
it wohspara
ot esdirecionar
oohc nac u
Y
You
can inferior
choose direito
to show
ofna
dayrea
in the
right
canto
datime
tela,
de lower
display
de corner
status. Essa
doyaoscilador
o(s)
canal(is)
Profile
lpsidVENUE
lanpara
oitpo
sihT
.Guide
aera yade
lpssada
id sutselecionado(s).
atS eht ni neercs eht fo
ofapresentao
the
the Status
display
area.
Thisto
optional
displayde 12
screen
25-pininD-Sub
cables
(forser
connecting
GPI
opcional
pode
configurada
paradevices)
formato
kcarTfor-2
-2-Track
rof ru
42 (2)
ro )console
MP/MA(lights
ruoh 21 rehtie rof derugifnoc eb nac
can
be configured
oh
Two
horas
(AM/PM) oufor
24either
horas:12 hour (AM/PM) or 24 hour
2-Track
swollof analog
sa tam
mat
asa follows:
Protective
Dust
Cover
Lets you
set the level
and
input source for the :2-Track
golan
kcarT -2 eht rof ecruos t u p n i d n a l e v e l e h t t e s u o y s t e L
Para apresentar a hora na rea de Status:
and digital
inputs,
and
themdeto entrada
the desired
.
s
t
u
p
tuo deProfile
rised eht otExpansion
meht etuor dna ,Options
st upni latig i d dna
Rack(s)
(see
next)
Permite
ajustar
o nvel
eroute
a fonte
paraoutputs.
as entradas
VENUE
:aera
sutatS ehpara
t ni yas
ad sadas
fo emitdesejadas.
wohs oT
To show time of day in the Status area:
analgicas e digitais 2-Track,
e rote-las
2-Track Level Lets you activate 2-Track input and set 2-Track
k1cThe
aV
rT-
2pgina
tes dnaOptions
tupni k>ccan
aMisc.
rT-be
2 eadded
tavitcatouVENUE
oy steL Profile
leveL ksystems.
carT-2
following
options
gap csiM
> sCables
noitpO eht ot oG 1
1 Go
to
the Options
> Misc page.
Racks, Software CDs,.eiLoks,
and
input
level.
.
l
e
v
e
l
tupAvid
ni
2-Track Level Permite ativar a entrada 2-Track e ajustar o nvel de
all VENUE
options,
visit
the
2For
Nadetails
seoon
System
Clock,systems
habiliteand
a opo
Show
Time
in Status
suEach
tatS nMix
i emiRack
T wohor
S eFOH
ht elb
a
n
e
,
n
o
i
t
c
e
s
k
c
o
l
C
m
e
t
s
y
S
e
h
t
n
I
2
2
In
the
System
Clock
section,
enable
the
Show
Time
in
Status
entrada.
Rack includes:
2-Track Input Selects which 2-Track input (analog,.or
si Area.
)latoption.
igid ro ,golana( tupni kcarT-2 hcihw stceleS tupnI kcarT-2
nodigital)
itpo aeris
A
Area
System Restore CD
fed
to
the
monitors
and
output
busses.
.sessub tuptuo dna srotinom eht ot def
2-Track Input Seleciona qual entrada 2-Track (analgica ou digital)
Selecione
umfor
format
para o horrio
12 or
hour
42 ro)MECx
P/M
A( ruoh 21eControl
:ebusses
mit deSoftware
y
a lp
sid eh
t rof tamCD
rof a tceleS 3
33
Select
aRack
format
the displayed
time: apresentado:
12 hour (AM/PM)
24 (AM/
Ethernet
Installer
Mix
Options
alimenta
os
monitores
de
sada.
PM)
ou
24
hour.
Route Enables
Route
2-Track
to
Selected
mode,
to
assign
the
e
h
t
n
g
i
s
s
a
o
t
,
e
d
o
m
d
e
t
c
e
l
e
S
o
t
k
c
a
r
T
2
e
t
u
o
R
s
e
l
b
a
n
E
e
t
u
oR
.ruoh
hour.
2-Track
signal
to
the
currently
selected
output
channel(s).
.
)
s
(
l
e
n
n
a
h
c
t
u
p
t
u
o
d
e
t
c
e
l
e
s
y
l
t
n
e
r
r
u
c
e
h
t
o
t
l
a
n
g
i
s
k
c
a
r
T
-2
Route Habilita
o modo
2-Track(for
to Selected,
para direcionar o sinal
Options
AI/O
hora
do isdia
apresentada
sempre
que
o status
dosracks
racks de
skcar npara
iiLok
-gulo(s)
pUSB
ehcanal(is)
t Smart
fo sutaKey
tde
s eh
t revstoring
enehwplug-in
nwohs sauthorizations)
i yad fo emiT
Time
of day
shown
whenever the
status
of the
plug-in
2-Track
sada
selecionado(s).
est OK;status
mensagens de(ifstatus
de racks dereplace
plug-ins (se
iLok
ecalper Plug-in
yliraropinstaller
met )ynadiscs
fi( se(if
gasany)
sem swith
utatspre-authorized
kcar ni-gulp ;KO
si
is plug-ins
OK;
any) temporarily
AI16plug-in
Analograck
Mic/Line messages
Input Card that
analog
Talkback
k
ca
balert-lo
klaT do
existentes)
temporariamente
substituem provides
o horrio 16
para
.suta(2)
ts kIEC
car npower
i-gulpcables
ot u o y t rela o t yal p sid yad fo e mit
time
of daylevel
display
to alert you to plug-in rack status.
Two
Talkback
mic/line
inputs
status
do rack de
plug-ins.
Talkback
Level
Lets
youcable
activate
Talkback and
Talkback
in-ni kcabklaT tes dna kcabklaT etavitca uoy steL leveL kcabklaT
One
FOH
Link
for connection
to set
a VENUE
console
AO16 Analog
Talkback
Level Permite ativar o Talkback e yajustar
o
nvel
de
put level.
vel tlevel
up
aleD lennahC
Channel
DelayOutput Card that provides 16 analog.leline
Channel Delay
entrada.
outputs
which
the
fo tnyou
uoma eh
t sidisplay
hcihw ,units
level midall
ehapplicable
t steS leveLinput
miD kcabkoutlaT
-Talkback
tuo dnaTwo
tDim
up(2)
niLevel
eIEC
lbacSets
ilppthe
a llcables
adim
no level,
stinu y
alpsidiseh
t teamount
s uoy steofL
Lets
the
power
Permiteset
definir
as unidadeson
de exibio
em todosand
os controles
XO16
Analog
and
Digital
Output
Card
that
provides
8
analog
Talkback
Dim
Level
Ajusta
o
nvel
de
atenuao
aplicada
mix
no
attenuation
applied
to
the
mix
on
the
output
bus
when
Talkk
l
a
T
n
e
h
w
s
u
b
t
u
p
t
u
o
e
h
t
n
o
x
i
m
e
h
t
o
t
d
e
i
l
p
p
a
n
o
i
t
a
u
n
e
a
yaled eht tes ot elbissop ti sekam sihT .slortnoc yaled tup
put
delay controls.
makes itepossible
to set
the possvel
delay ttajustar
aplicveis
de delayThis
de entradas
sadas. Isso
torna
line
level
outputs,
and
8
AES
digital
outputs.
bus
deissada
quando o Talkback est
ativo.
back
activated.
.
d
e
t
a
v
i
t
c
a
s
i
k
c
a
b
:gniwollof eht fo yna no desab
based
on baseado
any of the
following:
o daley
em:
)sdnocesillim ni( emit yaled
RouteHabilita
Enableso Route
to Selected,
Selected mode,
to assign othe
Route
modo Talkback
Talkback to
para direcionar
sinal
scanal(is)
rethe
temcurrently
rode
teesada
f nselected
i( eselecionado(s).
cruos output
eht ot echannel(s).
cnatsid
Talkback
o(s))to
Talkbackpara
signal
y a l e d f o s e l p m a s f o r e b m un
36 snoitpO :6 retpahC
AT16
tempo
de delay
(en milissegundos)
delay
time
(in milliseconds)
eh
t ngdistncia
isA-Net
sa ot ,eOutput
dda
omfonte
deCard
tc(em
eleSthat
ot kprovides
cabmetros)
klaT e16
tuochannels
R selbanEofetA-Net
uoR
ps
ou
s(ldistance
the
source
(in
feet
or
meters)
with
Aviom
Personal
Mixers
and
other
.
)output
enmero
nnacompatible
hc tto
u
p
t
u
o
d
e
t
c
e
l
e
s
y
l
t
n
e
r
r
u
c
e
h
t
o
t
l
a
n
g
i
s
k
c
a
b
k
laT
de amostras
Pro16
Series
devices.of delay
number
of samples
digital I/O.
Tap
Tempo
Tap
Tempo
Interaction
Interaction
Interaction
Interaction
Lets you
set the
globalesystem
tempo,
toggleglobal
system
Permite
definir,
habilitar
desabilitar
o tempo
dotempo
sistema,
Lets
Letsyou
youset
setthe
theglobal
global
system
systemtempo,
tempo,
toggle
togglesystem
system
tempo
tempo e
on/off, por
andapresent-lo
choose to display
tempo
in BPM or ms.
escolher
em
BPM
ou
milissegundos.
on/off,
on/off,and
andchoose
choosetotodisplay
displaytempo
tempoininBPM
BPMororms.
ms.
The
Interaction
page permite
lets youconfigurar
configureobehaviors
for thede
SeA The
pgina
Interaction
comportamento
sees
The
Interaction
Interaction
page
pagelets
letsyou
youconfigure
configure
behaviors
behaviorsfor
forthe
theSeSelected
Channel
(ACS)
sections,
Input
Safe
Switches,
Lights,Ethernet
Selected
Channel
(ACS),
switches
Input
Safe,
Lights,
Meter,
lected
lectedChannel
Channel(ACS)
(ACS)sections,
sections,Input
InputSafe
SafeSwitches,
Switches,Lights,
Lights,
e LCDEthernet,
Display. and LCD Display.
Meter,
Meter,
Meter,Ethernet,
Ethernet,and
andLCD
LCDDisplay.
Display.
Tap
TapTempo
Tempo
OnLiga
Turna on
the global tempo
sync
by clicking
the no
Onswitch
switchON
On
sincronizao
global
de
tempo,
clicando
OnOnTurn
Turn
on
onthe
theglobal
global
tempo
tempo
sync
sync
bybyclicking
clicking
the
theOn
Onswitch
switch
directly belowabaixo
the encoder
so that para
it is lit
(on).
imediatamente
do
codificador
que
se
acenda
(on).
directly
directlybelow
belowthe
theencoder
encodersosothat
thatit itisislitlit(on).
(on).
TempoDefine
Sets aum
system
tempo
value
using the
encoderoor
by typ-ou
Tempo
valor
de
tempo
de
sistema
utilizando
encoder
Tempo
TempoSets
Sets
aa
system
system
tempo
tempo
value
value
using
using
the
the
encoder
encoder
oror
byby
typtyping a value
directly
into the Tempo
field.
digitando
um
valor
diretamente
no
campo
Tempo.
ing
inga avalue
valuedirectly
directlyinto
intothe
theTempo
Tempofield.
field.
UnitsPermite
Lets you
choose Beats
Beats Per
Minute
(BPM)
orou
Milliseconds
Units
escolher
Per
Minute
(BPM)
Milliseconds
Units
UnitsLets
Lets
you
you
choose
choose
Beats
Beats
Per
Per
Minute
Minute
(BPM)
(BPM)
oror
Milliseconds
Milliseconds
as
the
units
for
displayed
values.
como
unidade
para
os
valoresvalues.
apresentados.
asasthe
theunits
units
for
fordisplayed
displayed
values.
Units
On/Off
Units
Units
On/Off
On/Off
Tap Tempo
controls
in the Options
Options> >
Misc page
Controles
Tap
Tempo
na pgina
Misc
Tap
Tap
Tempo
Tempo
controls
controls
inin
the
the
Options
Options
>>
Misc
Misc
page
page
Para
mais
informaes,
Tempo
para Plug-ins
For
more
information,
seeveja
TapTap
Tempo
for Plug-ins
on na
For
Formore
more
information,
information,see
seeTap
TapTempo
TempoforforPlug-ins
Plug-insonon
pgina
213.
page 213.
page
page213.
213.
Mouse
Mouse
Mouse
Mouse
Interaction tab of the Options page

Interaction
Interaction
tab
tab
ofthe
the
Options
Optionspage
page
Aba
Interaction
naofpgina
Options
Assignable Channel Selection

Assignable
Assignable
Channel
Channel
Selection
Selection
Assignable
Channel
Selection
Options in this section set the mechanism by which channels
Options
Options
inin
this
this
section
section
set
set
the
the
mechanism
mechanism
byby
which
which
channels
channels
Velocidade e Ajustes do Mouse

Astargeted
opes nesta
definem
mecanismo
qualasos
canais
are
on theseo
Selected
Chanosections
(alsopelo
known
the
Pointer Speed and Mouse L/R Settings
are
aretargeted
targetedon
onthe
the
Selected
Selected
Chan
Chan
sections
sections
(also
(alsoknown
knownasasthe
the
Pointer
PointerSpeed
Speedand
andMouse
MouseL/R
L/RSettings
Settings
so
definidos
nas
sees
Selected
Chan
(tambm
conhecidas
como
ACS, or Assignable Channel Section).
ACS,
ACS,
or
or
Assignable
Assignable
Channel
Channel
Section).
Section).
Voc
personalizar
velocidade
de resposta
do trackball
ACS ou Assignable Channel Section).
Youpode
can customize
thearesponse
speed
for the trackball
(or (ou
You
Youcan
can
customize
theresponse
speed
speed
for
for
the
thetrackball
trackball(or
(or
mouse)
docustomize
cursor
na the
tela,
eresponse
reverter
a ao
esquerda/direita
dos
mouse)e and
on-screen
cursor,
and reverse
the
left/right assigncustomize console and screen interaction:
mouse)
mouse)
and
and
on-screen
on-screen
cursor,
cursor,
and
and
reverse
reverse
the
the
left/right
left/right
assignassign- ToTo
botes
do
trackball
na
pgina
Options
>
Misc.
Para
personalizar
a interao
entreinteraction:
console
e tela:
Tocustomize
customize
console
console
and
andscreen
screen
interaction:
ment of the Trackball buttons, from the Options > Misc page.
ment
mentofofthe
theTrackball
Trackballbuttons,
buttons,from
fromthe
theOptions
Options> >Misc
Miscpage.
page.
Para personalizar a velocidade (Pointer Speed):

To customize Pointer Speed:
ToTocustomize
customizePointer
PointerSpeed:
Speed:
1 1VGo
pgina
to the Options
Options >> Misc.
Misc page.
1 1Go
Gototothe
theOptions
Options> >Misc
Miscpage.
page.
Doum
anydos
of the following:
2 2Siga
procedimentos:
2 2Do
Doany
anyofseguintes
ofthe
thefollowing:
following:
Para
ajustar
a
velocidade
do cursor,
clique
no menu
pop-up
To adjust cursor speed, click
the Pointer
Speed
pop-up
ToToadjust
adjust
cursor
cursor
speed,
speed,
click
click
the
thePointer
Pointer
Speed
Speed
pop-up
pop-up
Pointer
Speed
e
escolha
um
valor
alto
para
resposta
menu and choose a higher value for faster response, ormais
a
menu
menuand
and
choose
choosea ahigher
higher
value
valuefor
for
faster
faster
response,
response,orora a
rpida
um
valor
para
resposta
mais
lenta.
lowerouvalue
for abaixo
slower
response.
lower
value
value
fora aslower
slower
response.
response. dos dois botes do
Paralower
reverter
afor
ao
esquerda/direita
trackball,
To reverse
theSwitch
left/right
assignment of the two Trackball
clique
Buttons.
ToToreverse
reverse
the
theleft/right
left/right
assignment
assignmentofofthe
thetwo
twoTrackball
Trackball
buttons, click to enable Switch Buttons.
buttons,
buttons,click
clicktotoenable
enableSwitch
SwitchButtons.
Buttons.
1 Go to the Options page and click the Interaction tab.

1 1Go
Gototothe
theOptions
Optionspage
pageand
andclick
clickthe
theInteraction
Interactiontab.
tab.
1 V pgina Options e clique na aba Interaction.
2 Set the following Assignable Channel Selection options:

2 2Set
Setthe
thefollowing
followingAssignable
AssignableChannel
ChannelSelection
Selectionoptions:
options:
2 Defina as seguintes opes Assignable Channel Selection:

Change Target By
Change
ChangeTarget
TargetByBy
Change Target By
The Change Target By options let you specify whether the folThe
TheChange
ChangeTarget
TargetByByoptions
optionsletletyou
youspecify
specifywhether
whetherthe
thefolfollowing
actions
target
a channel
on the
ACS. More
than
A lowing
opo
Change
Target
By
permite
especificar
como
asone
seguintes
lowing
actions
actionstarget
target
a achannel
channel
on
on
the
theACS.
ACS.More
More
than
than
one
one
option
can
be selected
simultaneously.
aes
atingem
um
canal
no ACS. Mais de uma opo pode ser
option
option
can
canbebeselected
selected
simultaneously.
simultaneously.
selecionada
simultaneamente:
Touching Input Faders
Touching
Touching
Input
Input
Faders
Faders
Engaging
Tocar
os Input
Faders
Input Solos
Engaging
Engaging
Input
Input
Solos
Solos
Habilitar
Input
Solos
Output
Faders
Touching
Tocar
os Output
Faders
Touching
Touching
Output
Output
Faders
Faders
Engaging
Habilitar Output
OutputSolos
Solos
Engaging
EngagingOutput
OutputSolos
Solos
TargetingChanges
Changes View
Targeting
ViewMode
Mode
Targeting
TargetingChanges
ChangesView
ViewMode
Mode
The
Targeting
Changes
ViewView
Mode
option
updates
the
A opo
Targeting
Changes
Mode
atualiza
a apresentao
na
The
TheTargeting
TargetingChanges
ChangesView
ViewMode
Modeoption
optionupdates
updatesthe
the
tela para display
mostrarto
a show
pginathe
dospage
canais
Quando essa
on-screen
for especificados.
the channel targeted.
on-screen
on-screendisplay
displaytotoshow
showthe
thepage
pagefor
forthe
thechannel
channeltargeted.
targeted.
opothis
desmarcada,
a apresentao
na tela
nodoes
atualizada
When
option is deselected,
the on-screen
display
not
When
When
this
this
option
option
is
is
deselected,
deselected,
the
the
on-screen
on-screen
display
display
does
does
not
not
quando
um canal
especificado.
update
when
a channel
is targeted.
update
updatewhen
whena achannel
channelisistargeted.
targeted.

6464 VENUE
VENUEProfile
ProfileGuide
Guide
Meter
Meter
Ethernet
Control
Ethernet
Control
As configuraes
de medio
disponibilizam
opesfor
de meter
indicao
Metering settings
provide
the followingasoptions
balStagepeak
Rack
Features
ballistics,
e clip.
listics, peak,
and clip indication.
Os
ajustes Control
Ethernetsettings
Control permitem
configurar:
Ethernet
let you configure
the following:
Ballistics
Esta This
opo
permite
entre
RMS
Peak
para os
Ballistics
option
letsescolher
you choose
RMS
or ePeak
ballistics
audio I/O
for
VENUEdeProfile
systems.
Up to two Stage Racks
medidores
superfcie
e da tela.
for theda
control
surface controle
and on-screen
meters.
InputInput
ClipClip
Margin
or and
Output
ClipClip
Margin
Estas
opes
definem
Margin
Output
Margin
These
options
set the
Audio
I/O
o nvel,
emrelative
relaotoao
mximo(full
(fullscale)
scale),
em at
que
um clip
level,
thenvel
maximum
level,
which
a clip
reportado
em
um
canal.
Quando
um
clip
detectado,
todo
o
medidor
is reported
on with
a channel.
When
a clip is detected,
the entire
48 inputs
remotely
controllable
mic preamps
and
do canal torna-se vermelho.
channel
meter turns
red. phantom power.
individually
selectable
8 analog
output
channels;
expandable
Para definir
a margem
de clip
de entrada
ou sada:up to 48 analog or
To set
Inputoutputs
or Output
margin:
digital
perclip
Stage
Rack.
1 Clique
na caixa
Maxfor
emInput
Input Clip
Clip Margin
1 Click
in thededBdilogo
Below dB
MaxBelow
edit box
Marginou
or
Output
Clip Margin.
Synchronization
and Control I/O
Output
Clip Margin.
2 Insira
um valor
ou arraste
alterarthe
o valor
e pressione
2 Enter
a value
or dragpara
to change
value
and pressEnter.
Enter.
Network
ajustes
configuram
o ECx Ethernet
Control
NetworkSettings
SettingsEstes
These
settings
let you configure
ECx EtherThe following components must be purchased separately:
para
remotamente
a VENUE
sobreover
umaarede
Ethernet
sem
net controlar
Control to
remotely control
VENUE
wireless
Etherfio.
net
Video
Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
network.
Control
Settings
o VENUE
Link
para
Control
Settings Estes
These ajustes
settings configuram
let you configure
VENUE
Link
DVI supported.
integr-la
a um
Pro
Tools. with VENUE.
to integrate
a sistema
Pro Tools
system
Para
mais
informaes
ECx Ethernet
Control,
For
more
information
aboutsobre
ECx Ethernet
Control,
see veja
DigitalChapter
Cable
Profile
Systems
oSnake
Captulo
30,(VENUE
ECx.
Para informaes
sobre Link,
o VENUE
30,
ECx.
For information
aboutOnly)
VENUE
Link,veja
guia
Live Recording.
Thesee
connection
between
FOH .Rack and Stage Rack requires
the Liveo Recording
Guide
Lights
Lights
Configuraes
e LED/Display
permitem
ajustar
brilho dos
Console and Console
LED/Display
settings let
you adjust
the obrightseguintes
itens:
ness of the following
items:
Optional
Components
Theinserido
enteredvalue
is interpreted
as avalor
relative
dBrelativo
value from
the
O valor
interpretado
como um
em dB
a partir
maximum
Max
is considered
+20
dBVU).
examdo mximo
(em (where
que Max
considerado
+20
dBVU).
PorFor
exemplo,
comple,
a margem
clipeClip
de Margin
entradaset
(Input
Clipbelow
Margin)
with thedo
Input
to 6 dB
maxajustada
(the deSystem
Components
parafault),
6 dB abaixo
do mximo
picos level
com 6will
dB trigger
de nvela
peak levels
within(valor
6 dB padro),
of maximum
mximo
disparar uma indicao de clip.
clip vo
indication
Console
Lights
brilhoare
das
lmpadas
The
following
components
optional,
andexternas
must connected
beligadas aos
Console
LightsAjusta
Adjusto brightness
of
external
lights
conectores
Console
Lights
do
painel
traseiro.
purchased
separately:
to the Console Lights connectors on the back panel.
Clip Clip
HoldHold
TimeTime
e Peak
especificam
quanto
andHold
PeakTime
HoldEstas
Time opes
These options
specify
how
VENUE
Profile
systems
include
the
following:
clipsAll
e
picos
extensos
so
mantidos.
O
padro
de
2
segundos
para
long clips and peaks are held. Default is 2 seconds for both
clipsClip
epicos.
VENUE
Profile
and Peak
hold.console
Displays
Included Components
Switches Input Safe
Input
Safe mount
Switches
Monitor
Os switches
Input Safe
permitem
controlar
funes independents
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not trs
included)
The Input Safe Switches let you control three independent
de Safe:
Automation
Safe,
Solo Safe e Bank Safe. Apenas uma
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
Safetrs
functions:
Safe, and Bank
Safe.
dessas
funes Automation
Safe pode serSafe,
vistaSolo
ou controlada
por vez.
VENUE
ProfileSafe
Guide
Only
one of these
functions can be viewed and controlled
ataAutomation
time.
Two (2) console
Act as
Safes lights
Quando selecionada, essa opo ajusta
os switches
Safe
da
console
e os botes Safe dos canais da tela
as Automation
When selected,
this option
sets the
paraAct
alternar
o status deSafes
Automation
Safe do canal
correspondente.
Rack(s)
next) and on-screen channel Safe buttons to
Safe(see
switches
Paraconsole
mais informaes,
veja o Captulo 21, Snapshots.
toggle the Automation Safe status of the corresponding chan-
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and Cables
Act Racks,
as
Solo
Solo
Safe
aplicado
apenas
aos
Input Channels
nel.
ForSafes
more
information,
see Chapter
21,
Snapshots.
e FX Returns. Quando selecionada, essa opo ajusta os switches
Mix
Rack
FOH
Rack
includes:
Act
as
Solo
Safes
Solo Safe
applies
to Input
Channels
SafeEach
para
alternar
oorstatus
de Solo
Safeonly
do canal
correspondente.
Vejaand
Operao
de
Bus
Solo
na pginathis
121.
FX Returns.
When
option sets the Safe
System
Restore
CD selected,
switches
to toggle Control
the Solo Software
Safe status
of the CD
corresponding
ECx Ethernet
Installer
Act channel.
as Bank Safes
Quando
selecionada,
opo ajusta os
See Solo
Bus Operation
on essa
page 121.
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
switches
Safe de Input
Channels
e FX Returns
para alternar o status
as
iLok
USB
Smart
Key
storing
plug-in
authorizations)
BankAct
Safe
dos
canais.
(OWhen
Bank(for
Safe
mantm
os canais
topo
das
Bank
Safes
selected,
this
option
setsnothe
Safe
camadas
dos of
faders,
imune
ao agrupamento
em
bancos).
Para
mais
switches
Input
Channels
Returns
to toggle
that
Plug-in
installer
discs
(ifand
any)FX
with
pre-authorized
iLok
informaes,
veja
Modo Status.
Bank Safe
Para
Input Safe
na
channels
Bank
(Bank
SafeSwitches
keeps channels
at the
Two (2)
IECSafe
power cables
pgina 46.
top
layer,Link
immune
banking.)
more informa fader
One FOH
cableto
forinput
connection
to For
a VENUE
console
tion, see Bank Safe Mode for Input Safe Switches on page 46.
LEDs
brilho dos
displays
LED displays
e LCD da
LEDsand
and Displays
Displays Ajusta
Adjust obrightness
of LED
and LCD
superfcie
de
controle.
on the control surface.
Displays
Estas opes permitem personalizar o comportamente dos LCDs da

These
options
let you customize the behavior of the control
(for
Talkback)
superfcie
de controle.
surface
LCDs.
Footswitches
(up to 2)
Viewing
Angle
Esta
opo
permite
configurar
osSelected
displays LCD
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
Viewing
Angle
This
option
lets you
configure
thedevices)
Selected
Channel
e
Snapshots
para
visualizao
otimizada.
Channel and Snapshots LCD displays for optimum viewing.

Show
Fader This
Estaoption
opo dedefine
ShowChannel
Channel Strip
Strip Value
Value While
While Moving Fader
D-Sub
cables
(for
to Name
GPI
devices)
otermines
que25-pin
apresentado
no display
Channel
Name
quando
um fader
what
is displayed
inconnecting
the
Channel
display
ajustado.
Quando
selecionado
(padro),
o display
Channel
Name se
when a fader
is adjusted.
When
selected
(default),
the Chanaltera do nome do canal para o valor (nvel). Quando desmarcado,
nel Name display switches from showing channel name to
o display Channel Name no mostra os valores quando um fader
showing the
value (level)
when a fader isOptions
adjusted. When deVENUE
Profile
Expansion
ajustado.
selected, the Channel Name displays do not show values
The
following
options
can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
when
a fader
is
adjusted.
Show
VCA
Contribution
Esta opo permite apresentar na tela um
For
details
on
all
VENUE
and
options,
visit
the
Avid
segundo boto transparentesystems
em cada
rgua
de fader
que
representa
Show VCA
Contribution This option lets you display a secondwebsite
(www.avid.com).
um
ganho
efetivo
no canal (ganho do canal mais ganho associado
ary,
transparent
faderPara
cap mais
on each
on-screen fader
strip that e
de
VCA,
se houver).
informaes,
veja Atribuindo
represents
the
effective
gain
of
the
channel
(channel
gain plus
Utilizando VCAs na pgina 86.
Mix
Rack
Options
associated
VCA
gain, if any). For more information, see Assigning and Using VCAs on page 86.
I/O Options

outputs
digital I/O.
Events
Events
The Events tab of the Options page lets you use the Event List
A aba Events na pgina Options permite utilizar uma Event List para
to customize
the function
of switches,
footswitches
and Genpersonalizar
as funes
dos switches,
footswitches
e dispositivos
eral
Purpose
Interface
(GPI)-connected
devices.
For
informaGPI (General Purpose Interface) conectados. Para informaes, veja
tion, see22,
Chapter
22, Events.
o Captulo
Eventos.
Options > Events page
Pgina Options > Events
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
The Plug-Ins tab of the Options page is used to install plug-ins
A aba Plug-Ins da pgina Options utilizada para instalar plug-ins no

on the
VENUE
system.
Theest
Plug-Ins
tab is apenas
available
comsistema
VENUE.
A aba
Plug-Ins
disponvel
emon
sistemas
pletecompletos.
VENUE systems
only.disponvel
It is not available
the Stand- do
VENUE
No est
na versoinStandalone
alone software.
software.
Roteamento de Sinal
67
Chapter 7: Inputs and Input Routing

Captulo7:
e Roteamento
Entradas
ChapterEntradas
7: Inputs
and Inputde
Routing
Stage Rack Features

This chapter shows how to do the following:
Configure inputs (system settings for input channels),
name channels, Make Stereo and Split to Mono)
bechapter
used
simultaneously,
supporting
Estecan
captulo
mostra
como:
This
shows
how to do
the following:
Assignentradas
input sources
to Input
Channelspara
in the
Patchbay
Configurar
(ajustes
do sistema
canais
de
Configure inputs (system settings for input channels),
entrada)
I/O
Route input channels to Mains, Groups, and Aux Sends,
Audio
name
channels,
Make Stereo
and
Split tode
Mono)
Atribuir
fontes
de entrada
paraoutput
os canais
entrada
no
Matrix
mixers
and other
and
to plug-ins
48toinputs
with
remotely
controllablebusses,
mic preamps
and
Assign input sources to Input Channels in the Patchbay
Patchbay
individually
Adjust input
channel phantom
parameters
power.
Rotear
canais
deselectable
entrada para
Mains,
Groupsand
e Aux
Route
input
channels
to Mains,
Groups,
Aux Sends,
Sends,
8 analog
output
channels;
expandable
upde
toplug-ins
48 analog or
mixers
Matrix
e
outros
busses
de
sada,
alm
to Matrix mixers and other output busses, and to plug-ins
Ajustar
parmetros
de entrada
digital
outputs dos
per canais
Stage Rack.
Adjust input channel parameters
Configuring Inputs
Two types of Entradas

inputs are available: Input Channels and FX ReConfigurando
turns.
Configuring
Inputsto a VENUE FOH Rack.
applicable) connection
Dois tipos de entradas esto disponveis: Input Channels e FX

Two
types
of inputs are available: Input Channels and FX ReReturns.
Input
Channels
turns.
Input
Channels
are used to control inputs from stage and mix
Input
Channels
System
Components
position
(local)
audio inputs, from Pro Tools, or from bus-fed
Input Channels
Input plug-ins.
Channels so utilizados para controle das entradas de udio
Included
Components
Input e
Channels
are used
to controldo
inputs
from ou
stage
mix
do palco
da posio
de mixagem,
Pro Tools
de and
plug-ins
Input
channels
can be
monofrom
or stereo.
Each or
mono
channel
alimentados
por
bus.audio
position
(local)
inputs,
Pro
Tools,
from
bus-fed
controls one input, and each stereo channel controls two inplug-ins.
VENUE
Profile
console
Os Input
channels
podem
serchannels
mono oucan
estreo.
canal
mono
puts
in tandem.
Input
appearCada
on any
of the
incontrola
entrada,
e cada
canal
estreo
controla
duasmaximum,
entradas.
Input
channels
can
be mono
or
stereo.
Each
mono
channel
uma
Two
(2) IEC
power
cables
put
channel
strips.
Up
to
96 mono
input
channels,
Canais
entradas
podem
serVGA
configurados
paraand
qualquer
rgua
de
controls
one input,
and
each
stereo
channel
controls
two inare
available,
depending
on your
system
rack
configuradeMonitor
mount
for
screen
(screen
not
included)
canal
de
entrada.
At
um
mximo
de
96
canais
de
entrada
mono
puts
inInput
tandem.
Inputare
channels
canin
appear
intion.
channels
displayed
bankson
onany
the of
16the
control
disponveis,
Trackball
mount
(trackball
included)
esto
dependendo
das not
configuraes
de racks
e do
put
channel
strips.
Up tostrips.
96 mono
input channels,
maximum,
surface
input
channel
VENUE
Mouse
Pad so apresentados em bancos nas 16
sistema.
Canais de
entrada
are available, depending on your system and rack configurarguas deVENUE
canais Profile
de entrada
da superfcie de controle.
tion.
Input channelsGuide
are displayed in banks on the 16 control
FX Returns
Twoinput
(2) console
surface
channellights
strips.
FX Returns
Effects
Return
channels
(or FX Returns) are used to control sig Protective Dust
Cover
nals
from
bus-fed
plug-ins,
fromso
external
hardware,
or from
Canais
(ou FX Returns)
utilizados
para controlar
FX Effects
Returns
Rack(s)Return
(see next)
Pro
Tools.
sinais dos plug-ins alimentados por bus, de dispositivos externos ou
Effects
do Pro
Tools.Return channels (or FX Returns) are used to control sigRacks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
Cables
FX Returns
are always
stereo,
and
appear
on input channel
nals
from bus-fed
plug-ins,
from
external
hardware,
or from
strips
18
and
916.
Up
to
16
stereo
FX
Returns
arecanais
available.
FX Returns
so
sempre
estreo,
e
aparecem
nas
rguas
de
de
Pro
Tools.
entrada 18 e 916. At 16 FX Returns estreo esto dispoinveis.
System are
Restore
CDstereo, and appear on input channel
FX Returns
always
Configuring
Input
ECx
Control
Software
CDare available.
Configurando
Input
Channels
strips
18Ethernet
and 916.
Up toChannels
16
stereo Installer
FX Returns
To set othe
number
available
Input Channels:
Para definir
nmero
deofInput
Channels:
iLok USB Smart
Key (for
Configuring
Input
Channels
1 Put the system into Config mode.
Plug-in
installer
discsConfig.
(if any) with pre-authorized iLok
1 Coloque
o sistema
no modo
To
the
number
of available
Input
Channels:
2set
Go
to (2)
the
Options
page
and
click
the System tab.
Two
IEC
power
cables
2 V pgina
Options
e clique
na aba
System. to a VENUE console
One FOH
Link
cable for
connection
13 Put
theEdit.
system into Config mode.
Click
3 Clique
Edit.
24 Go
to the
Options
page
click the
tab.Channels
Each
Stage
Rack
includes:
Choose
the
number
of and
channels
fromSystem
the Input
pop-up menu.
TwoEdit.
3 Click
4 Escolha
o nmero de canais no menu
pop-up Input Channels.
4 Choose the number of channels from the Input Channels

pop-up menu.
5 Click Apply. The system restarts with the new Input Channel
configuration.
55Clique
Apply.
OThe
sistema
reinicia
com
athis
nova
configurao
deand
canais
be
interrupted
when
configuration
change
ClickAudio
Apply.will
system
restarts
with
the
new
InputVGA
Channel
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
de
entrada.
is
applied.
configuration.
DVI supported.
Configuring
USBAudio
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
O
audio
interrupted
interrompido
essacompatible)
alterao
FXbe
Returns
will
whenquando
this
configuration
change de
configurao realizada.
is applied.
VENUE
Mix Rack
ProfileProfile
systems
provideOnly)
up to 16 stereo
Digital
Snake
Cableand
(VENUE
Systems
Configurando
FX
Returns
FX
returns.
You
can
choose
to
use
either
8
or
16;
choosing
FX Returns
Configuring
The connection
between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
fewer FX Returns leaves more DSP available for plug-ins. For
a Digital
SnakeMix
cable.
This
cable can
be purchased
directly
Sistemas
VENUE
Rack
e Profile
oferecem
at
1616
FXstereo
Returns
VENUE
Rack and
Profile
systems
provide
up
to
details,Mix
see
Configuring
FX
Returns
on page
69.
from
Avid
or
assembled
by
your
preferred
vendor.
estreo.
VocYou
pode
optar
por to
utilizar
8 ou 8
16;
menos FX
FX returns.
can
choose
use either
orescolher
16; choosing
Returns
deixa
mais leaves
DSP disponvel
para
plug-ins.
fewer FX
Returns
more DSP
available
for plug-ins. For
Combining
Input Channels
(Make
Stereo)
details,
see Configuring
FX Returns on
page 69.
Optional
Components
Combinando Input Channels (Make Stereo)
Pairs of mono input channels can be combined to make stereo

channels,
whose
and
right
sides
are then
Pares
de canais
deleft
entrada
mono
podem
ser controlled
combinados
Combining
Input
Channels
(Make
Stereo)bypara
purchased
separately:
one input
channel
strip.
formar
canais
estreo,
em que os lados direito e esquerdo so
USB
flash
disk (or
other
portable
USB
device
for
Pairs
of mono
channels
can
combined
to make
stereo
controlados
por input
uma
nica
rgua
debe
canal
destorage
entrada.
transfer
of Show
data;right
512 sides
MB orare
larger
recommended)
channels,
whose
left and
then
controlled
To combine
two mono
input channels
into
a single
stereo by
Para
dois
canais
mono emfor
ummix
nico
canal estreo:
combinar
Near-field
monitor
position
monitoring
one
input
channel
strip.speakers
channel:
1 Put the
system into
Config
mode.
1To
Coloque
o sistema
no modo
Config.
combine two mono input channels into a single stereo

channel:
2 Select two mono channels by doing either of the following:
(for Talkback)
2 Selecione
dois canais mono seguindo um dos seguintes
On
console,
press
hold the Multi-Select switch,
1
Put
the the
system
into
Config
mode.
procedimentos:
Footswitches
(up to
2) and
then
press Select
on each
of
the two
channel
strips e
Na
console,
pressione
e
segure
o mono
switchdevices)
Multi-Select
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
2 Select
two
mono
channels
by doing
either
of the following:
you
want
to combine.
pressione
Select
em cada uma das rguas de canais mono que
voc
BNC
cables
(for connecting
Word
clock
between switch,
the
On deseja
the
console,
press and hold
the
Multi-Select
combinar.
or
system
and
digital
then press
Select
onexternal
each of the
twodevices)
mono channel strips
ou VENUE
On-screen,
go
to the
Inputs
pageuma
and
click
faderselecionar
strip to
Na
tela,
v
topgina
Inputs
e clique
para
you
want
combine.
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
torgua
GPI adevices)
select
the
first
mono
channel,
then
hold
Shift
and
click o
o primeiro canal mono, segure Shift e clique para selecionar
orto
select the second mono channel you want to combine.
segundo canal mono que voc deseja combinar.
On-screen, go to the Inputs page and click a fader strip to
3 Right-click either of the selected mono channels on-screen
select
the
mono
channel,
hold
Shift
andna
click
3VENUE
Clique
com
o first
boto
direito
em umthen
dosOptions
canais
cono
tela e
Profile
Expansion
and to
choose
Make
Selected
Mono
Strips
Stereo.
escolha
Make
Mono
Strips
Stereo.
selectSelected
the second
mono
channel
you
want to combine.
3 Right-click
of the
selected
mono
channels
For
details on either
all VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit on-screen
the Avid
and
choose
Make
Selected
Mono
Strips
Stereo.
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options
mic/line
level
inputs
Two mono
inputs
about to be combined into one stereo channel
Duas entradas mono sendo combinadas em um canal estreo

outputs
Two mono inputs about to be combined into one stereo channel

7: Inputs
and Input
AT16 A-Net Output Card thatChapter
provides
16 channels
of Routing
A-Net 69
Chapter 7: Inputs and Input Routing 69
digital I/O.
Captulo7: Entradas e Roteamento de Entradas 69

Each selected channel is combined with the next-highest se-
Each
selected
channeliscombinado
combinedcom
withothe
next-highest
seCada
canal
selecionado
selecionado
Assigning
Input
Sources
to
Channels
lected
channel,
even is
if combined
the selected
channels
are not
contiguEach
selected
channel
with
theprximo
next-highest
seAssigning
InputSources
Sources
to
Channels
Each
selected
channel
is
combined
with
the
next-highest
selected
channel,
even
if
the
selected
channels
are
not
contigu(superior),
mesmo
que
os
canais
selecionados
no
sejam
contguos.
Designando
Fontes
de
Entrada
a
Canais
Assigning
Input
to
Channels
ous. Blank
strips
areifcreated
and inserted
where
necessary
to
lected
channel,
even
the selected
channels
are not
contiguAssigning
Input
Sources
to
Channels
lected
channel,
even
if
the
selected
channels
are
not
contiguInputs
sources
are
assigned
to
Input
Channels
or FX Returns
ous.
Blank
strips
are
created
and
inserted
where
necessary
to
Rguas em branco so criadas e inseridas onde necessrio para
Inputs sources are assigned to Input Channels or FX Returns
maintain
channel
thatinserted
bank. Parameter
values from
ous.
Blank strips
are layout
createdinand
where necessary
to
ous.
Blank
strips
are created
and
inserted
where
necessary
in thesources
Patchbay.
input
sources
for Input
Channels
are Available
assigned to
Input
Channels
or FX
Returns or
manter
o layuot
dos
canais
daquele
banco.
Os
valores
devalues
parmetros
maintain
channel
layout
in that
bank.
Parameter
fromto Inputs
Inputs
sources
are so
assigned
to sources
Inputpara
Channels
FX Returns
Fontes
de
entrada
designadas
Channels
ou
in
the Patchbay.
Available
input
for Input
Inputor
Channels
or FX
the
leftmost
channel
ofin
each
pair
are Parameter
applied
bothos
chanmaintain
channel
layout
bank.
values
from
do
canal
esquerdo
de
cada
parthat
so
aplicados
em to
ambos
canais
maintain
channel
layout
in
that
bank.
Parameter
values
from inFX
Returns
include:
the
Patchbay.
Available
input
sources
for
Input
Channels
or Input
the
leftmost
channel
of each
pair
are
applied
to
both
chanReturns
no
Patchbay.
Fontes
de
entrada
disponveis
para
in
the
Patchbay.
Available
input
sources
for
Input
Channels
or
FX Returns include:
andpan
the
pan control
Balance/Width
control.
leftmost
channel
ofcontrole
eachbecomes
pair
are aapplied
to both chanethe
onels,
controle
Balance/Width.
the and
leftmost
channel
of each
pairaare
applied to both
chan- FXChannels
Returns
include:
nels,
the torna-se
pan
control
becomes
Balance/Width
control.
Stage
inputs
(Mix Rack
stage I/O, or Stage Rack)
ou
FX
Returns
incluem:
FX
Returns
include:
nels, and the pan control becomes a Balance/Width control.
Stage inputs (Mix Rack stage I/O, or Stage Rack)
nels, and channels
the pan control
becomes
Balance/Width
Stage
Entradas
de(Mix
palcoRack
(entradas
e sadas
Mix Rack
ou Stage Rack)
inputs
stage sources,
I/O,
or Stage
Rack)Oscillator)
Combined
shown
in thea patchbay
left control.
and
Local
FOH
inputs
(2-Track
Stage
inputs
(Mix
Rack stage
I/O, Talkback,
or Stage Rack)
Canais
combinados
soare
apresentados
patchbayas
lados
Combined
channels
are
shown in thenopatchbay
as como
left and
Entradas
Local
FOH
inputs
(2-Track
sources,
Talkback,
Oscillator)

locais
(fontes
2-Track,
Talkback,
Oscillator)
right
sides
of
the
Input
Channel
name.
FX
Returns
are
always
Combined
channels
are
shown
in
the
patchbay
as
left
and
Local
FOH
inputs
(2-Track
sources,
Talkback,
Oscillator)
Pro
Tools
outputs
(HDx
or FWx)
esquerdo
e direito
nome
do Input
Channel.
FX Returns
so
Combined
are
shown
in the
patchbay
as
left
and
Local
FOH
(2-Track
sources, Talkback, Oscillator)
right
sides
of channels
the do
Input
Channel
name.
FX
Returns
are
always
Sadas
do
Proinputs
Tools(HDx
(HDx
ou FWx)
FWx)
Pro
Tools
outputs
or
stereo,
soofthey
cannot
be combined
or
split.
right
sides
the
Input Channel
name.
FX
Returns are
always
sempre
estreo,
portanto
no
podem
ser
combinados
ou divididos.
Pro
Tools
outputs
(HDx
or
FWx)
right
sides
of
the Input
name.
FX Returns
are always
Plug-In
outputs
stereo,
so
they
cannot
be Channel
combined
or
split.
Sadas
de
Plug-Ins
Pro Tools
outputs (HDx or FWx)
Plug-In
outputs
stereo, so they cannot be combined or split.
stereo, so they cannot be combined or split.
Plug-In outputs
Plug-In outputs
Para
designar
umasource
fonte de
entrada
um canal
Input
Channel ou
To
assign
an input
to an
Input aChannel
or FX
Return:
To assign
an input source to an Input Channel or FX Return:
Return:
ToFX
assign
an input source to an Input Channel or FX Return:
input source
anclick
Inputthe
Channel
FX Return:
1 To
Goassign
to thean
Patchbay
page to
and
Inputsor
tab.
1 Go to the Patchbay page and click the Inputs tab.
1 1Go
to
the
Patchbay
page
and
click
the
Inputs
tab.
V
the
pgina
Patchbay
epage
clique
naclick
aba the
Inputs.
toleft
theof
Patchbay
and
click
theChannels
Inputs tab.
21
ToGo
the channel
grid,
tab or the
2 To the left of the channel grid, click the Channels tab or the
Stereo
Input
Channel
in
the
Patchbay
Input
page
Stereo Input Channel na pgina Patchbay Input
Returns
tab.
2 FX
To
the
left
of
the
channel
grid,
click
the
Channels
tab
or the
Stereo Input Channel in the Patchbay Input page
To the tab.
leftdo
ofgrid
the de
channel
grid,
click
tab
FX
2 2Returns
esquerda
canais,
clique
nathe
abaChannels
Channels
ouornathe
aba
Stereo Input Channel in the Patchbay Input page
FX
Returns
tab.
Stereo
Input Channel
in the Patchbay
Input LED
page lights to indicate
On
the console,
the channel
St (Stereo)
FX
Returns
tab. FOH, or Pro Tools tab to display the desired
FX
Returns.
3
Click
the
Stage,
Na On
console,
o LED the
St (stereo)
se LED
acende
indicando
que
the console,
channeldoSt canal
(Stereo)
lights
to indicate
3 Click the Stage, FOH, or Pro Tools tab to display the desired
that
channelthe
is achannel
stereo channel.
On
theaconsole,
St (Stereo) LED lights to indicate
input
sources.
Clickofthe
Stage,
FOH, or Pro Tools tab to display the desired
On
console,
channel
St (Stereo) LED lights to indicate 3 type
esse
um
canal
stereo.
that
athe
channel
is athe
stereo
channel.
3 Click
Stage,
display the desired
type
of input
sources.
3 Clique
nathe
aba
Stage,FOH,
FOHor
ouPro
ProTools
Tools tab
paratomostrar
o tipo desejado
that a channel is a stereo channel.
type
of
input
sources.
that a channel is a stereo channel.
type
ofin
input
sources.grid to assign an input source to an In4
Click
the
channel
de
fonte
de
entrada.
Todividir
split aum
stereo
two canais
mono channels:
Para
canalchannel
estreointo
em dois
mono:
4
Click
in
the
channel
grid
to
assign
an
input
source
to an InTo split a stereo channel into two mono channels:
Channel
or FX Return.
4 put
Click
in the channel
grid to assign an input source to an InTo split a stereo channel into two mono channels:
4
Click
in
the
channel
grid
to
assign
an
input
source
to an Input
Channel
or
FX
Return.
stereo into
channel
intomode.
two mono channels:
1 To
Putsplit
theasystem
Config
4 Clique
no grid
deReturn.
canais para designar uma fonte de entrada para
put
Channel
or FX
1 Put the
system no
into
Config
mode.
1 Coloque
o sistema
modo
Config.
put
Channel
or
FX
Return.
um Input Channel ou FX Return
Put the
into Config
2 1Select
the system
stereo channel
you mode.
want to split.
2 Select the stereo channel you want to split.
22Selecione
o canal
que
deseja
Select the
stereoestreo
channel
you
wantdividir.
to split.
Select thethe
stereo
channel
you want
to split.Split Selected
3 2Right-click
selected
channel
and choose
3 Right-click the selected channel and choose Split Selected
Stereo
Stripothe
toboto
Mono.
Right-click
selected
channel
and
choose Split
SelectedSplit
33Clique
com
direito
no
canal
selecionado
escolha
3 Right-click
the selected channel and chooseeSplit
Selected
Stereo
Strip to Mono.
Stereo Strip
to Mono.
Selected
Stereo
Strip
to
Mono.
Stereo
Strip
to
Mono.
Each selected stereo channel is split, placing the channels next
Each selected stereo channel is split, placing the channels next
to each
other
on selecionado
the
console
and
in
the Patchbay.
Blank
strips
Each
selected
stereo
channel
is split,
placing
thecanais
channels
next
Cada
canal
estreo
isdividido,
e os
resultantes
selected
channel
split,
placing
the channels
next
toEach
each
other
onstereo
the console
and
in the
Patchbay.
Blank
strips
deleted
to
channel
layout.
toare
each
other
onmaintain
the
console
and
in
the Patchbay.
Blank strips
colocados
prximos
um
ao
outro
na
console
e
no
patchbay.
Rguas
to
each
other
on
the
console
and
in
the
Patchbay.
Blank
strips
are deleted to maintain channel layout.
em
so
manter
o layout de canais.
arebranco
deleted
to excludas
maintainpara
channel
layout.
are deleted to maintain channel layout.
Naming
Channels
Nomeando
Canais
Naming
Channels
Naming
Channels
Naming
Channels
Assigning input sources in the Patchbay Inputs page

Assigning input sources in the Patchbay Inputs page
Assigning
input
sources
in the
Patchbay
InputsInputs
page
Designando
fontes
entrada
nathe
pgina
Patchbay
Assigning
input
sources
in
Patchbay
page source and
The
Inputs
tabde
of
the Patchbay
showsInputs
the input
Naming
Channels
Input
Channel
and FX Return channel names can be changed
destination
grid. Input
source
is alsosource
shownand
below
Inputs tababove
of thethe
Patchbay
shows
the input
and
FX Return
names
can ser
be changed
Os Input
nomesChannel
dos Input
Channel
e doschannel
FX Return
podem
alterados The
Inputs
tab
ofthe
thegrid.
Patchbay
the
input
source
destination
above
Input shows
source
isde
also
shown
below
A The
aba
Inputs
do the
Patchbay
mostra
a fonte
entrada
epage.
o and
destino
fromChannel
the Inputs
or fromchannel
the Patchbay.
Input
andpage
FX Return
names can be changed
the
channel
name
in
the
Inputs
and
Patchbay
Inputs
destination
above
grid.
Input
source
is
also
shown
below
Input
Channel
and
FX
Return
channel
names
can
be
changed
na from
aba
Inputs
da
pgina
Patchbay.
the Inputs page or from the Patchbay.
destination
above
the
grid.
Input
source
is
also
shown
belowdo
the
channel
name
in
the
Inputs
and
Patchbay
Inputs
page.
sobre o grid. A fonte de entrada tambm apresentada abaixo
from the Inputs page or from the Patchbay.
the channel name in the Inputs and Patchbay Inputs page.
from the Inputs page or from the Patchbay.
the channel
in the Inputs
Inputseand
Patchbay
Inputs page.
nome
do canal name
nas pginas
Patchbay
Inputs.
Toalterar
change
the name
of an
Input
Channel
or ou
FX FX
Return
channel:
Para
o
nome
de
um
canal
Input
Channel
Return:
To change the name of an Input Channel or FX Return channel:
The Inputs tab of the Patchbay shows the input source and
To change the name of an Input Channel or FX Return channel:

the name
of an
Input
or FX
Return channel:
1 To
Gochange
the Patchbay
page
and
clickChannel
the Inputs
tab.
1 Go the Patchbay page and click the Inputs tab.
Go the
and
clickyou
thewant
Inputs
2 1Target
thePatchbay
channel page
whose
name
totab.
change by
Input source assignment shown in the Inputs page
2 Target the channel whose name you want to change by
Input source assignment shown in the Inputs page
22Selecione
o canal
qual deseja
alterar
oon-screen.
nome
pressionando
o Input
pressing
its
Selectdo
switch
orname
selecting
Target the
channel
whose
you it
want
to change
by
source assignment shown in the Inputs page
2 Target
the
channel
whose
name you
want to change by
pressing
its
Select
switch
or
selecting
it
on-screen.
Input
assignment
shown
in the Inputs
page
A
singlesource
input
source
can
be assigned
to multiple
Input Chanswitch
Select
ou
selecionando-o
na
tela.
pressing its Select switch or selecting it on-screen.
Designao
de fonte
de entrada
na pgina
Inputs Input ChanA
single input
source
canapresentada
be assigned
to multiple
its Select
switch orname.
selecting it on-screen.
3 pressing
Double-click
the channel
nels
or
FX
Returns
(you
can
fan
out
a
source
to
multiple
chanA
single
input
source
can
be
assigned
to
multiple
Input
Chan3 Double-click the channel name.
A single
source
to multiple
InputchanChannels
or FX input
Returns
(you can
can be
fanassigned
out a source
to multiple
Double-click
theno
channeldo
name.
33Clique
duas vezes
nels).
Gain
control,
phantom
power
andpara
pad
settings
are
nels
orfonte
FX
Returns
(you
can ser
fandesignada
out
a source
tovrios
multiple
chanUma
de
entrada
pode
Input
Channels
3 Double-click
thenome
channelcanal.
name.
nels Gain
or FXcontrol,
Returns phantom
(you can fan
outand
a source
to multiple
nels).
power
pad settings
are chanlinked
across
the
channels.
Each
Input
or FX
nels).
Gain
control,
phantom
power
and
pad
settings
areReturn
ounels).
FX
Returns
(voc
pode
distribuir
umaChannel
fonte
vrios
canais).
Gain control,
phantom
padpara
settings
are
linked
across
the channels.
Eachpower
Input and
Channel
or FX Return
Controle
deby
ganho,
phantom
power
e (multiple
ajuste
de sources
pad
so
vinculados
may
be
fed
only
one input
source
cannot
linked
across
the
channels.
Each
Input
Channel
or FX
Return
linked
across
the channels.
Input
Channel
or FX
Return
may
be fed
by only
oneChannel
input Each
source
sources
cannot
aosrouted
canais.
Input
ou (multiple
FX(multiple
Return sources
pode
ser
alimentado
be
toCada
a single
may
be
fed by
only
onechannel).
input source
cannot
may
be fed
bysingle
only channel).
one input source (multiple sources cannot
be
routed
to
a
fonte
(vrias fontes no podem ser roteadas para
beapenas
routed por
to auma
single
channel).
benico
routed
to a single channel).
um
canal).
1 Go
the Patchbay
andna
click
Inputs tab.
1 V
pgina
Patchbaypage
e clique
abathe
Inputs.
Changing the name of an Input Channel in the Inputs page
Alterando
o nome
um Input
Channel
pgina Inputs
Changing
thedename
of an
Inputna
Channel
in the Inputs page
Changing the name of an Input Channel in the Inputs page

the name
an Input
in the
page key4 Changing
Type a new
nameofand
pressChannel
Enter on
theInputs
computer
4 Type a new name and press Enter on the computer key44 board.
Digite
e pressione
Enter
no teclado
do
Type a um
new novo
name nome
and press
Enter on the
computer
key4 Type a new name and press Enter on the computer keyboard.
computador.
board.
board.
When naming channels in the Patchbay, you can douWhen naming
channels
in the
Patchbay,
you
canclicar
dou- duas
Quando
nomerar
canais
Patchbay,
voc
pode
ble-click
the channel
name
shown
in the
columns
of douthe
When
naming
channels
inno
the
Patchbay,
you
can can
douWhen
naming
channels
in
the Patchbay,
you
ble-click
the
channel
nameapresentado
shown
in thenas
columns
of the
vezes
no
nome
do
canal
colunas
dothe
grid
grid
and
type
a
name;
press
Tab
on
the
keyboard
to
go
to
ble-click
the
channel
name
shown
in
the
columns
of
the
ble-click
the
name
shown
the columns
the
and um
type
a channel
name;
press
Tab
on the
keyboard
to goirof
topara
the o
egrid
digitar
nome.
Pressione
Tab
nointeclado
para
next
channel
and
Shift+Tab
tokeyboard
thekeyboard
previous
grid
and
typetype
a name;
presspress
Tabto
ongothe
to gochannel.
togothe
grid
and
name;
Tab
on
to the
prximo
canal and
eaShift+Tab
para
ir para
o anterior.
next
channel
Shift+Tab
to
go
to the
the
previous to
channel.
nextnext
channel
and
Shift+Tab
to
go
to
the
previous
channel.
channel and Shift+Tab to go to the previous channel.

Assigning Bus-Fed Plug-Ins, Osc/Talkback/2-Track

Assigning Bus-Fed Plug-Ins, Osc/Talkback/2-Track
Assigning
Bus-Fed
Plug-Ins,
Osc/Talkback/2-Track
Assigning
Bus-Fed
Plug-Ins,
Atribuindo
Plug-Ins,
Bus-fed
plug-ins
canOsc/Talkback/2-Track
be
patchedOsc/Talkback/2-Track
to Input Channels and FX Re-
Bus-fed plug-ins can be patched to Input Channels and FX Returns from

the can
Plug-In
Rack (see
UsingChannels
Plug-Ins and
as a FX
BusReProBus-fed
plug-ins
be patched
to Input
Bus-fed
plug-ins
can be
patched
to Input
Channels
Returns
from
the Plug-In
Rack
(see Using
Plug-Ins
as aand
BusFX
ProPlug-ins
alimentados
por
bus
designados
cessor
on
page
160).Rack
turns
from
the
Plug-In
(see podem
Using ser
Plug-Ins
as a Buspara
Pro- Input
turns on
from
the
Plug-In aRack
(see
Using
Plug-Ins
as aUtilizando
Bus Processor
page
160).
Channels
ou
FX
Returns
partir
do
Plug-In
Rack
(veja
cessor on page 160).
cessor
on page
Plug-Ins
um 160).
Processador
Bus na pgina
160).input, and
You
can Como
also
route
the built-in Oscillator,
Talkback
You can also route the built-in Oscillator, Talkback input, and
2-Track
sources
input
channels
(see Routing
OscillaYou
can also
routetothe
built-in
Oscillator,
Talkbackthe
input,
and
Youtambm
can
alsopode
route
the built-in
Oscillator,
Talkback
input,
and
2-Track
sources
to input
channels
(seeaRouting
the OscillaVoc
rotear
o
Oscillator,
entrada
Talkback
e fontes
2-Track
sources
to
input
channels
(see
Routing
the
Oscillator on page 128).
2-Track
sources
to input
channels
Routingothe
Oscilla- na
tor
on page
128).
2-Track
para
canais
de entrada
(veja(see
Roteando
Oscillator
tor on page 128).
tor on
page 128).
pgina
128).
Routing Input Channels

Input
channels
and
FXChannels
Returns
can be routed to the Mains,
Routing
Routing
Input
Input
Channels
Roteando
Entrada
Groups/Var Canais
Groups, de
Auxes,
Matrix mixers and PQ busses.
Input
Input
channels
channels
and
FX FX
Returns
Returns
cancan
be routed
be routed
to the
to the
Mains,
Mains,
Stage
Rackand
Features
Input
channelsGroups,
e FX
Returns
podem
sermixers
endereados
os busses
Groups/Var
Groups/Var
Groups,
Auxes,
Auxes,
Matrix
Matrix
mixers
andand
PQpara
PQ
busses.
busses.
Routing
Channels
toanthe
Mains
and
Mains,
Groups/Var
Auxes,
mixers
Matrix
e provide
PQ.
Stage
Racks
are Groups,
used with
FOH
Rack,
and
all stage
Groups
Busses
audio I/O
for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
Routing
Routing
Channels
Channels
to
the
the
Mains
Mains
and
andtotal inputs.
Roteando
para Bussesto
Mains
e Groups
can channels
beCanais
up to
Input
and FX Returnssupporting
can be routed
to96
the Mains
Routing Channels to Aux Sends

Input channels and FX Returns can be routed to Aux sends usRouting
Routing
Channels
Channels
to
Aux
Aux
Sends
Sends
Roteando
Canais
para Auxto
Sends
ing the input encoders, using the ACS, or on-screen.
Input
Input
channels
channels
and
and
FX
FX
Returns
Returns
cancan
be routed
be
routed
to Aux
to Aux
sends
sends
us- usInput
channels
e FX
Returns
podem
ser
endereados
para
mandadas
ing
ing
the
the
input
input
encoders,
using
the
ACS,
ACS,
orinput
on-screen.
or
on-screen.
Additional
Required
Components
To
route
channels
to
Auxusing
sends
using
the
encoders:
Aux
utilizando
osencoders,
codificadores
dethe
entrada,
ACS
ou na tela.
1 The
Pressfollowing
an Encoder
assign Send
switch
12 through
1516.
components
must
be purchased
separately:
rotear
canais
mandadas
Aux
utilizando
os codificadores
ToPara
route
To route
channels
channels
to para
Aux
to Aux
sends
sends
using
using
thethe
input
input
encoders:
encoders:
The first
press (15-inch
of an Auxor
Send
switch
assigns VGA
level control
de
entrada:
Video
Display
greater
flat-panel
display
1 Press
1 of
Press
an an
Encoder
Encoder
assign
assign
Send
Send
switch
switch
1212
through
through
1516.
the
odd-numbered
send
to the
encoders.
The1516.
switch
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA and
Groups
Groups
Busses
Busses
The
The
first
first
press
press
of
an
of
Aux
an
Aux
Send
Send
switch
switch
assigns
assigns
level
level
control
control
lights
green
indicate
an de
odd-numbered
1 Pressione
um to
dos
switches
atribuio deselection.
codificadores
12
and channels
Groups busses
using the
Bus ser
Assigns
section of
theosACS.
DVI
supported.
Input
e FX Returns
podem
endereados
para
busses
Audio
I/O
of
the
of
the
odd-numbered
odd-numbered
send
send
to
the
to
the
encoders.
encoders.
The
The
switch
switch
a
1516.
Input
Input
channels
channels
and
and
FX
FX
Returns
Returns
can
can
be
routed
be
routed
to
the
to
the
Mains
Mains
The
second
press
of
an
Aux
Send
switch
assigns
level
conMains e Groups utilizando a seo Bus Assigns do ACS.
keyboard
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
USB
A lights
primeira
vez
que
o switch
pressionado
atribui
o controle
lights
toand
indicate
to
indicate
an an
odd-numbered
odd-numbered
selection.
selection.
and
and
Groups
Groups
busses
busses
using
using
thethe
Buscontrollable
Bus
Assigns
section
section
of the
of busses
the
ACS.
ACS.
trol
ofgreen
thegreen
even-numbered
send
to the encoders.
The
48
inputs
with
remotely
mic
preamps
and
To
route
one
or
more
input
channels
to Assigns
Mains
and
Groups
de
nvel
dos
nmeros
mpares
para
o
codificador.
O
switch
switch
The
The
second
second
press
press
of an
of
an
Aux
Send
Send
switch
switch
assigns
assigns
level
level
concon-se
on the
console:
Para
rotear
um ou mais
canaisphantom
para busses
Mains e Groups na
lights
yellow
to Aux
indicate
an
even-numbered
selecindividually
selectable
power.
Digital
Snake
Profile
Systems
acende
emCable
verde (VENUE
para indicar
a seleo
do Only)
nmero mpar.
console:
troltrol
of the
of the
even-numbered
even-numbered
send
send
to the
to the
encoders.
encoders.
TheThe
tion.
To
route
To route
one
or
or
more
input
input
channels
channels
to Mains
to Mains
and
and
Groups
busses
busses
8one
analog
output
channels;
expandable
up
toGroups
48 analog
or
1 Do either
of more
the
following:
The
A segunda
vez que
o switch
Rack
pressionado
atribui
controle de
connection
between
FOH
andeven-numbered
Stage
Racko requires
on the
on the
console:
console:
switch
switch
lights
lights
yellow
yellow
to
indicate
to
indicate
an
an
even-numbered
selecdigital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
nvel
dos
nmeros
pares
para
o
codificador.
O
switch
se selecacende
To
a single channel,
press its Select switch.
1 Siga
umselect
dos seguintes
procedimentos:
ation.
Digital
tion.
em amarelo para indicar a seleo do nmero par.
1 Do
1 Do
either
either
of
the
of
the
following:
following:
Para
selecionar
um nico
canal,press
pressione
seuthe
switch
To select
multiple
channels,
Select on
firstSelect.
chanfrom Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
and
Control
I/O
Para
To
To
select
select
athe
single
a Multi-Select
single
channel,
channel,
press
press
its
Select
its Select
switch.
switch.
Synchronization
selecionar
vrios
canais,
pressione
Select
noleftprimeiro
nel,
hold
switch
(located
to the
of
Encoders
segure
o switch
Multi-Select
(localizado
esquerda
dos
To
connectors
to
enable
primary
and
redundant
(if
canal,
Snake
select
To
select
multiple
multiple
channels,
channels,
press
Select
Select
on on
the
the
first
first
chanthe
input
faders),
then
presspress
the
Select
switches
on
thechanOptional
Components
faders
de
entrada),
e
pressione
os
switches
Select
os
outros
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
nel,nel,
hold
hold
thethe
Multi-Select
Multi-Select
switch
switch
(located
(located
to the
to the
leftleft
of of
other
channels.
canais.
Encoders
Encoders
thethe
input
input
faders),
faders),
then
then
press
press
thethe
Select
Select
switches
switches
on on
thethe
2 To route to Mains, press the LR (left and right) and/or
Aux
other
other
channels.
channels.
2 C/Mono
Para rotear
para Mains, pressione
switch
(left/right)
e/ou
Sends
(center/mono)
switch inothe
BusLR
Assigns
section
so C/
Mono
napress
seo
Bus
Assigns
para
que
fique
aceso.
Components
2 System
To
2 (center/mono)
route
route
to Mains,
to
Mains,
press
the
the
LR
LR
(left(left
and
and
right)
right)
and/or
and/or
that
isTo
lit.
AuxAux
Sends
Sends
C/Mono
C/Mono
(center/mono)
(center/mono)
switch
switch
in the
in the
BusBus
Assigns
Assigns
section
section
so so
ouor

that
that
is
lit.
is
lit.
Included Components
To route to a Group bus, press a Groups 18 switch.
orrotear
or para um bus Group, pressione um switch Groups 18.
Para
The
LR,
C/M
and
Busbus,
Assign
on each
channel
To
To
route
route
to ato
Group
a 18
Group
bus,
press
press
aLEDs
Groups
a Groups
1818
switch.
switch.light
VENUE
Profile
console
OLED
Bus
Assign
LR,
C/M
ou
18
Bus
se acende
em
cada canal Encoder (for
assignment
switches for input channels
Talkback)
to indicate routing to the corresponding busses.
para indicar
roteamento
aocables
bus correspondente.
Twoo(2)
IEC power
Footswitches
(up want
to 2) to assign to the selected Aux
TheThe
LR,
LR,
C/M
C/M
andand
1818
BusBus
Assign
Assign
LEDs
LEDs
on on
each
each
channel
channel
light
light 2 For each
channel you
Encoder
Encoder
assignment
for input
forpara
input
channels
channels
Switches
deassignment
atribuioswitches
de switches
codificadores
canais
de entrada
Monitor
mount
VGA
screen (screen
not included)
to indicate
toindicate
routing
routing
to the
tofor
the
corresponding
corresponding
busses.
busses.
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
Send bus, press its channel encoder so
that itsMIDI
Ondevices)
indicator
2
For
2
For
each
each
channel
channel
you
you
want
want
to
assign
to
assign
to
the
to
the
selected
selected
AuxAux
LED lights.
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
2 Para cada canal que voc deseja enderear ao bus the
Aux Send,
Mains
Send
Send
bus,
bus,
press
press
its
channel
its
channel
encoder
encoder
so
that
so
that
its
On
its
On
indicator
VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE system
and at
external
devices)On indicator
odigital
LED
se acenda.
3 pressione
To set theseu
Auxcodificador
Send level,
doque
either
of indicador
the following:
LED
LED
lights.
lights.
Mains
VENUE Profile Guide
Mains
Turn the encoder on each channel.
3 3 Para
ajustar
o Send
nvel
dodoAux
Send,
um
dos seguintes
3 To
To
set set
the
the
AuxAux
Send
level,
level,
do
either
either
of the
ofsiga
the
following:
following:
Press the Flip to Faders switch, then adjust the channel
procedimentos:
Turn
Gire
Turn
the
the
encoder
encoder
on
each
each
channel.
channel.
fader.
o codificador
deon
cada
canal.
Groups
Rack(s) (see next)
Press
Pressione
Press
thethe
Flip
to Faders
to Faders
switch,
switch,
then
adjust
adjust
the
channel
channel
VENUE
oFlip
switch
Flip
to Faders
ethen
ajuste
o the
fader
do
canal.
Profile
Expansion
Options
fader.
fader.
To route
channels to Aux Sends busses using the ACS:
Groups
Groups
The rotear
following
options
can be added
VENUE Profile
Para
canais
para mandadas
Auxto
utilizando
o ACS: systems.
1 For
Do either
detailsof
onthe
allfollowing:
VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
To route
To route
channels
channels
to Aux
to Aux
Sends
Sends
busses
busses
using
using
thethe
ACS:
ACS:
1website
um(www.avid.com).
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
Siga
To select
a single
channel,
press its Select switch.
1
Do
1 Do
either
either
of the
of the
following:
following:
Para
selecionar
nico canal,
switch
Select.
Stereo Pan
System Restore CD
To
select
multipleum
channels,
presspressione
Select on seu
the first
chan
Para
selecionar
vrios
canais,
pressione
Select
no
primeiro
nel,
To
To
select
select
athe
single
a Multi-Select
single
channel,
channel,
press
press
its
Select
its Select
switch.
switch.
hold
switch
(located
to the
left of
Mix
Rack
Options
canal,
segure
o switch Multi-Select (localizado esquerda dos
Bus
Assign
switches
Stereo
Stereo
Pan
Pan
Switches Bus Assign
the
To
select
To
select
multiple
multiple
channels,
channels,
Select
Select
on on
thethe
first
first
chaninput
faders),
then
presspress
thepress
Select
switches
on
thechan Standalone Software Installer CD
faders de entrada), e pressione os switches Select os outros
nel,
nel,
hold
hold
the
the
Multi-Select
Multi-Select
switch
switch
(located
(located
to
the
to
the
left
left
of of
other
channels.
To route
channels
to Mains
or
Groups
on-screen:
I/Ocanais.
Options
Assign
iLok
USB
Smart
Keyou
(for
storing
BusBus
Assign
switches
switches
Para
rotear
canais
para
Mains
Groups
naplug-in
tela: authorizations)
thethe
input
input
faders),
faders),
then
then
press
press
thethe
Select
Select
switches
switches
on on
thethe
2 In the Aux Sends section, press the Aux 18 or 916 switch
Plug-in
1 Select
one orinstaller
more channels.
other
other
channels.
channels.
Analog
Mic/Line
Cardo that
provides
16 ou
analog
2AI16
Na
seo
Aux
Sends, Input
pressione
switch
Aux 18
916 para
route
To route
channels
channels
to Mains
tocanais.
Mains
or Groups
or Groups
on-screen:
on-screen:
to
bank it to the corresponding pairs of Aux Sends.
1 To
Selecione
um
ou
mais
mic/line
level
inputs
design-lo
para
o
par
correspondente
de
Aux
Sends.
2 Go to the Inputs page.
2 In
2 the
In the
AuxAux
Sends
Sends
section,
section,
press
press
thethe
AuxAux
1818
or 916
or 916
switch
switch
1 Select
1 Select
oneone
or more
or more
channels.
channels.
One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console 3 Press an Aux Sends encoder to enable that send.
2 3VClick
pgina
Inputs.
to AO16
bank
to bank
it to
it the
to Output
the
corresponding
corresponding
pairs
pairs
of Aux
of 16
Aux
Sends.
Sends.line level
Analog
Card
that
provides
analog
the Bus
Assign buttons to route to those busses.
3 Pressione um codificador Aux Sends para habilitar essa
2 Go
2 Go
to the
to the
Inputs
Inputs
page.
page.
4 mandada.
Rotate the encoder to adjust that send level.
outputs
3
Press
3 Press
an an
AuxAux
Sends
Sends
encoder
encoder
to enable
to enable
thatthat
send.
send.
3 Clique
nos
bottes Bus
para rotear
para Mains
esses busses.
information
onAssign
configuring
theroute
system
as LR
3 Click
3 For
Click
the
the
Bus
Bus
Assign
Assign
buttons
buttons
to
route
to
to
those
to
those
busses.
busses.
and
Digital
Output
Card
that
provides 8 analog
plus Mono, or as LCR, see Configuring Aux, Group, and
4 4XO16
Rotate
4Gire
Rotate
the
the
encoder
encoder
to adjust
to
adjust
that
send
send
level.
level.
oAnalog
codificador
para
ajustar
othat
nvel
da
mandada.
Para informaes sobre configuraes dos Mains como LR
ForFor
information
information
on configuring
on configuring
the
system
system
Mains
Mains
as LR
as LR
Variable
Group Busses
on pagethe
80.
For
more
information
plus Mono, ou como LCR, veja Configurando Busses Aux,
plusconfiguring
plus
Mono,
Mono,
or as
orLCR,
as LCR,
see see
Configuring
Aux,
Aux,
Group,
Group,
andand
on
Group
seeConfiguring
Configuring
Aux,
Group,
Group e Variable
na busses,
pgina 80.
Para mais informaes
sobre
Variable
Variable
Group
Group
Busses
Busses
on
page
on
page
80.
80.
For
For
more
more
information
information
and
Variable
Group
Busses
on
page
80.
configurao de busses Group, veja Configurando Busses
on
configuring
onGrou
configuring
Group
Group
busses,
busses,
seepgina
see
Configuring
Configuring
Aux,
Group,
Group,
Aux,
e Variable
Group
na
80. Aux,
andand
Variable
Variable
Group
Group
Busses
Busses
on page
on page
80.80.
Chapter 7: Inputs and Input Routing 71
IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an additional 8 channels of analog
I/O
and
channels
of
AES/EBU
Chapter
Chapter
7: Inputs
7:8 Inputs
andand
Input
Input
Routing
Routing
71 71
digital I/O.

Configurando Busses Aux (Aux Sends)

Configuring Aux Busses (Aux Sends)
5 Pressione o switch Multi-Assign novamente para confirmar a ao.
O sistema
VENUE
pode
serbeconfigurado
ter 88ou
Aux
VENUE
systems
can
configuredpara
to have
or16
16busses
Aux busses
comoasparte
dathe
configurao
de bus Aux/Group.
Busses Mono
auxiliares
part of
overall Aux/Group
bus configuration.
Aux
mono podem ser vinculados em pares (par e mpar) para funcionar
buses can be linked in odd/even pairs to function in stereo (see
em estreo (veja Configurando Busses Aux e Variable Group na
Configuring Aux and Variable Group Busses on page 95).
pgina
95).
ouor
5 Press the Multi Assign switch again to confirm the action.
Select another
VCApara
to confirm
thea current
assignment
but reSelecione
outro VCA
confirmar
atribuio
atual de VCA
mas
main in
MultiMulti-Assign
Assign mode
for outro
the newly
manter
o modo
para
VCA. targeted VCA.
Roteando
Canais
para Variable
Routing
Channels
toGroups
Variable Groups
For more
VCAs,
including
using VCAespill,
see
Para
mais information
informaes on
sobre
VCAs,
veja Atribuindo
Utilizando
Assigning
and86.
Using VCAs on page 86.
VCAs
na pgina
Para To
acessar
as mandadas
Variable
Group:
access
Variable Group
sends:
Roteando Entradas para Direct Outputs
Routing Inputs to Direct Outputs
1 Make sure
is configured
for Variable
Groups
Certifique-se
dethe
quesystem
o sistema
est configurado
para
o modo
1
mode.
(See Configuring
Aux, Group,
Variable
Groups.
(Veja Configurando
Bussesand
Aux,Variable
Group eGroup
Variable
Busses
on page
Group
na pgina
80.)80.)
2 Select one or more input channels.
2 Selecione
um ou mais canais de entrada.
3 Press the Variable Groups switch in the Aux Sends section of
3 Pressione
switch
seoinAux
do ACS.
the ACS.o Or,
clickVariable
the VarGroups
Groupsna
button
theSends
on-screen
Bus
Ou, clique o boto Var Groups na seo BusAssign na tela (na pgina
Assign section (on the Inputs page for the selected channel).
Inputs do canal selecionado). Os Variable Groups 18 esto agora
Variable Groups 18 are now mapped to the ACS Aux Send
mapeados
para a seo Aux Send do ACS, e para os codificadores
section, and
configurveis
18.from the assignable input encoders 18.
4 Press an encoder to enable the selected (Var Group) Aux
4 Pressione um codificador para habilitar a mandada auxiliar (Var

Send.
Group) selecionada .
Todos
os Input Channels e FX Returns possuem sadas diretas
All Input channels and FX Returns have Direct Outputs,
(Direct Outputs), que podem ser atribudas para sadas de hardware,
which can be assigned to hardware outputs, used as inputs to
utilizadas como entradas para os plug-ins e enviadas para o Pro Tools.
plug-ins,
to Prono
Tools.
DirecteOuts
areser
assigned
in thedo
Direct
Outsand
so sent
atribudas
Patchbay,
podem
controladas
Patchbay,
and can be controlled from the ACS or on-screen.
ACS
ou na tela.
Para
habilitarand
e ajustar
To enable
adjustDirect
DirectOutputs:
Outputs:
1 Select the input or FX return channel.
1 Selecione o Input Channel ou FX Return.
2 Press the Direct Output encoder to toggle it in and out on
2 the
Pressione
o encoder
selected
channel.Direct Output para alternar entre habilit-la/
desabilit-la no canal selecionado.
3 Rotate the Direct Output encoder to adjust the output level.
3 Gire o codificador Direct Output para ajustar o nvel de sada.
5 Rotate the encoder to adjust send level.
5 Gire o codificadors para ajustar o nvel da mandada.
6 For more information, see Chapter 10, Aux Sends and Vari-
able
Groups.
6 Para
mais
informaes, veja o Captulo 10, Aux Sends e Variable
Groups.
Routing
to Matrix
Roteando
Canais Channels
para Busses Matrix
e PQ
and PQ Busses
Matrix and PQ source assignments determine input signal
Designaes de fonte Matrix e PQ determinam roteamento do sinal

routing to each of the Matrix and PQ mixers. Matrix and PQ
de entrada para cada um dos mixer Matrix e PQ. Cada mixer Matrix
inputs12
can
include up to 12 inputs per mixer.
e PQsource
pode incluir
entradas.
Matrix and PQ signal routing is performed from the Matrix
O roteamento de sinal de Matrix e PQ realizado nas abas Matrix e
and
PQ tabs
of the
Outputs
page 11,
(seeMixers
Chapter
11, Matrix
and
PQ da
pgina
Outputs
(veja
o Captulo
Matrix
e Personal
Personal
Q
Mixers).
Q).
Atribuindo Canais a VCAs
Assigning Channels to VCAs
Canais
podem can
ser be
atribuidos
controle conjunto
Channels
assigned a
to VCAs
VCAspara
for consolidated
controlde
of
vrios
deles.
multiple channels.
Para atribuir um ou mais canais a um VCA:
To assign one or more channels to a VCA:
1 Pressione
switch
para to
agrupar
de Faders
sada aos
VCAs.
1 Pressothe
VCAVCA
switch
bank os
thefaders
Output
to VCAs.
2 Selectothe
to assign
by pressing its
Se2 Selecione
VCAVCA
(1-8)(1-8)
queyou
vocwish
deseja
atribuirtopressionando
seu
lect
switch.
switch Select.
3 Press the Multi Assign switch near the Output encoders.
3 Pressione o switch Multi-Assign prximo aos codificadores Output.

While
engaged, the
Multidos
Assign
and output
Select switch
Quando
habilitados,
os LED
switches
Multi-Assign
e Select
LEDs flash.
piscam.
4 Press the Select switch on the inputs or outputs you want as-
4 Pressione o switch Select nas entradas ou sadas que voc deseja

signed to the currently targeted VCA. Use the Input and Outatribuir ao VCA selecionado. Utilize os switches de bancos de faders
put Fader
bankpara
switches
to as
access
thede
desired
strips.
de entrada
e sada
acessar
rguas
canaischannel
desejadas.
Codificador
Direct encoder
Output
Direct Output
For more
routing
and assigning
Direct OutPara
mais information
informaes on
sobre
roteamentos
e atribuies
Direct
Outputs,
veja
Direct
Outputson
napage
pgina
puts, see
Direct
Outputs
85.85.
Utilizando Dynamics e EQ Embutidos
Using Built-In Dynamics and EQ
Cada
entrada has
possui
um processor
dinmica, aum filtro
Eachcanal
InputdeChannel
built-in
Dynamicsdeprocessors,
passa-altas
um equalizador
deEQ;
4 bandas;
FX Return
High-Pass eFilter
and a 4-band
each FXcada
Return
has a possui
em
equalizador
2 bandas.
Se o canal
estreo,
os controles
built-in
2-banddeEQ.
If the channel
is a stereo
channel,
the pro-do
processador
so
associados
e
tm
efeito
sobre
ambos
lados
cessor controls are linked and apply to both the left andosright
(direito e esquerdo) do canal.
sides of the channel.
Utilizando Dynamics em Canais
Using Dynamics on Channels
Em cada canal, um Compressor/Limiter e um Expander/Gate esto

A built-in Compressor/Limiter
availdisponveis.
Controles para todosand
os Expander/Gate
processadores are
de dinmica
embutidos
esto
disponveis
naControls
seo Dynamics
e a curva
able on each
Input
Channel.
for all of do
theACS,
built-in
dydenamics
entrada
e sada are
apresentada
nathe
tela.ACS Dynamics section,
processors
provided in
and an input/output curve appears on-screen.
Compressor/Limiter
Para ajustar os controles Expander/Gate pelo ACS:
Para habilitar o Compressor/Limiter embutido no canal

Stage Rack Features
selecionado:
To engage the built-in Compressor/Limiter on the selected
1 Selecione um canal pressionando o switch Select.
Compressor/Limiter
channel:
Stage
audio
I/O
forComp/Lim
VENUE Profile
systems.
UpACS
to two
Stage Racks
Press
the
In switch
in the
Dynamics
seccan
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96
total inputs.
Para tion.
habilitar o Compressor/Limiter embutido em qualquer
canal
Pressione o switch Comp/Lim In na seo Dynamics do ACS.
de entrada:
Audio
I/O the built-in Compressor/Limiter on any input channel:
To engage
1 V ao
banco
dos canais
desejados.
48 inputs
with remotely
1 Bank to the desired channels.
2 Pressione
o switch
Thrs para
atribuirthe
osinput
codificadores
2 Press the
CompComp
Thrs switch
to assign
encodersde
to
para
8 analog
output channels; embutido.
entrada
o Compressor/Limiter
the built-in Compressor/Limiter.
3 Aperte
o codificador
configurvel
deeach
cadachannel
canal em
voc
3 Push
the assignable
encoder on
youque
want
the
deseja
aplicarCompressor/Limiter
o Compressor/Limiter
embutido.
Synchronization
and Control I/O
built-in
engaged.
To adjust
the Compressor/Limiter
threshold
from
a channel:
applicable)
connection to a VENUE
FOH
Rack.
Para ajustar o threshold do Compressor/Limiter para um canal:
In the
Encoder
Assignment
section,opress
the
Comp
Thrsh
1 Na1seo
Encoder
Assignment,
pressione
switch
Comp
Thrsh.
switch.
2 Gire o codificador configurado para ajustar o valor do threshold do

System
Components
2 Turn the assigned
rotary encoder to set the CompresCompressor/Limiter
embutido.
sor/Limiter threshold value.
ParaIncluded
ajustar os controles
Compressor/Limiter pelo ACS:
Components
To adjust Expander/Gate controls from the ACS:

1 Target a channel by pressing its Select switch.
Additional
Required Components
2 2Pressione
o switch
Select
do switch
do medidor
Press the Select
switch
nextprximo
to the Exp/Gate
In eswitch
and
Exp/Gate
seo
Dynamics
do ACS.
O switch
switch lights
se acende
para
meter in In
thenaACS
Dynamics
section.
The
to indiindicar
controle
sobre
o Expander/Gate,
e os VGA
LEDs
indicadores
cate
Video
Display
(15-inch
or greater and
flat-panel
display
control
of the
Expander/Gate,
indicator
LEDs
below
abaixo
de cada codificador
seminimum
acendemresolution).
para mostrar
queand
esses
recommended;
1024x768
VGA
each
encoder light
red to show
that these controls are
mapped
controles
esto
mapeados
para
funes
Exp/Gate.
DVI supported.
to Exp/Gate functions.
USB keyboard
and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
Utilizando
EQ em Canais
Using EQ on Channels
Digital
Cablee um
(VENUE
Profilede
Systems
Only)
Um
filtroSnake
passa-altas
equalizador
4 bandas
esto disponveis
A built-in
High-Pass
Filter
and
4-band EQ are
available
on each
em
cada
Input
Channel
e
um
equalizador
de
duas
The connection between FOH Rack and Stage
Rackbandas
requiresest
Input Channel
and aFX
2-band
EQ Controles
is availablemodulares
on each FXdeRe-cada
disponvel
em cada
Return.
turn. Modular
all of
built-in
EQACS,
processors
arede
processador
EQ controls
embutidofor
esto
nathe
seo
EQ do
e a curva
resposta
da equalizao
apresentada
na tela.curve appears
in the ACS
EQ section,and
an EQ response
on-screen.
Um
de dois tipos
de EQ pode ser selecionado para o EQ embutido,
Optional
Components
em
uma
por types
canal:can
um be
equalizador
digital
One
of base
two EQ
selected for
the paramtrico
built-in EQ,de
onlargo
a
espectro
ou
um
equalizador
analgico
modelado.
The
following
components
are
optional,
and
must
be
per-channel basis: a full-spectrum parametric digital EQ or an
purchased
separately:
analog-modeled
EQ.
Para utilizar o EQ embutido em um canal EQ:
To use
the built-in
EQ on
a channel,
of recommended)
the following:
transfer
of Show
data;
512 MB do
or one
larger
1 Selecione o canal pressionando seu switch Select.
Near-field
monitor
position
1 Target
the channel
byspeakers
pressingfor
itsmix
Select
switch.monitoring
To adjust Compressor/Limiter controls from the ACS:
2 Siga
um dos seguintes
procedimentos:
Headphones
with 1/4-inch
jack
1 Target a channel by pressing its Select switch.
All VENUE
systems include
the following:
1 Selecione
um Profile
canal pressionando
o switch
Select.

2 Pressione
o switch
Select
prximo
dothe
switch
e do medidor
Comp/
2 Press
switch
next to
Comp/Lim
In switch
in
Twothe
(2)Select
IEC power
cables
Lim In na seo Dynamics do ACS. O switch se acende para indicar
the
ACS
Dynamics
section.
The
switch
lights
to
indicate
con sobre
Monitor
mount for VGA screen (screen not included)
controle
o Compressor/Limiter.
trol of the Compressor/Limiter.
Expander/Gate
VENUE Mouse Pad
Expander/Gate
VENUE
Profile Guideembutido no canal selecionado:
Para habilitar
o Expander/Gate
Two (2)
console
To engage
the
built-inlights
Expander/Gate on the selected channel:
Pressione
o switchDust
Exp/Gate
Protective
CoverIn na seo Dynamics do ACS
Press the Exp/Gate In switch in the ACS Dynamics section.

Rack(s) (see next)
Para habilitar o Expander/Gate embutido em qualquer canal de

To engage the built-in Expander/Gate on any input channel:
entrada:

1 Bank to the desired channels.
2 Do any of the following:

habilitarthe
o filtro
passa-altas
(High-Pass
Filter),
Para
To engage
channel
High-Pass
Filter, press
the pressione
HPF
Talkback)
o(for
switch
HPF
naEncoder
seo Encoder
Assignment.
ou HPF
desligue
switch
in the
Assignment
section.Ligue
Toggle
oFootswitches
(up
to
2)
efeito
em
cada
canal
pressionando
seu
codificador.
Ajuste a
in/out on each channel by pressing its encoder; adjust
do
filtro
girando
o
codificador.
frequncia
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
HPF frequency by rotating its encoder.
Para habilitar os equalizadores de 4 bandas ou 2 bandas,
BNC
cables the
(forbuilt-in
connecting
Word
clock between
the
To
engage
or inferior
2-band
EQ,seo
press
the
pressione
o switch
EQ In4-band
na parte
da
Equalizer
VENUE
systematand
digital
devices)
EQ In switch
theexternal
bottom of
the ACS
Equalizer section.
no ACS.

For
more
information,
seeveja
Chapter
17, EQ.
Para
mais
informaes,
o Captulo
17, EQ.
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Utilizando
Inserts em
Canais
Using Inserts
on
Channels
You can use software plug-in inserts or hardware inserts on
1 V ao banco dos canais desejados.
Voc
pode usar
desystems
softwares
ouvisit
de hardware
For details
on allinserts
VENUE
andplug-ins
options,
the Avid em
any Input Channel or FX Return.
qualquer
Input Channel ou FX Return.
2 Pressione
o switch
Gate
built-in
System
Restore
CDThrs para atribuir os codificadores de
the
Expander/Gate.
entrada
para
o
Expander/Gate
ECx Ethernet Controlembutido.
Utilizando
Inserts de Plug-In
em Canais
Using Plug-In
Inserts
on Channels

2 Press the Gate Thrs switch to assign the input encoders to
3 Push the assignable encoder on each channel you want the
Standalone
Software
Installer CD
3 Empurre
codificador
configurvel
built-ino Expander/Gate
engaged. de cada canal em que voc
iLok USB
Smart Key (for
desejaaplicar
o Expander/Gate
embutido.
Plug-in
discs (if threshold
any) withfrom
pre-authorized
To adjust
theinstaller
Expander/Gate
a channel: iLok
Para ajustar o threshold do Expander/Gate para um canal:
(2) IEC power

cables section, press the Gate Thrsh
1 InTwo
the Encoder
Assignment
One
FOH
Link
cable
forpressione
connection
to a VENUE
console
switch.
1 Na seo Encoder Assignment,
o switch
Gate Thrsh.
2 Turn
theRack
assigned
rotarypara
encoder
to oset
thedo
Expander/Gate
Each
Stage
includes:
2 Gire
o codificador
configurado
ajustar
valor
threshold do
threshold
value.
Two (2)embutido.
IEC power cables
Expander/Gate
Mix Rack Options
Os
plug-insare
esto
organizados
em racks
virtuais,
permitem
Plug-Ins
arranged
in virtual
racks,
whichque
allow
signalsenviar
to
os
deand
e para
sewere
fossem
processadores
besinais
sent
to
fromcada
eachplug-in
plug-incomo
as if it
an external
proI/O
Options
externos.
Os plug-ins
utilizados
duas formas:
como
cessor. Plug-Ins
can podem
be usedser
in two
ways: de
as inserts,
or as efAI16 Analog
Mic/Line
Card
that provides
16 analog
inserts,
efeitos Input
em
uma
disposio
Send/Return.
fects inoua como
Send/Return
arrangement.
Insert
O The
plug-in
inserido
no ponto
dethe
insero
umon
Input
Channel
Insert
plug-in
is patched
in at
insert em
point
an Input
AO16
AnalogCada
Output
Card
that provides
line
level
ou
FX Return.
Input
Channel
pode
ter 16
atanalog
quatro
plug-ins.
Channel
or FX Return.
Each Input
Channel
may have
up to
outputs
four plug-in inserts.
Send/Return O sinal enviado ao plug-in por um dos busses do

XO16 Analog
and Digital
Output
Card
thatde
providespara
8 analog
sistema
(geralmente
Aux
Send)
roteado
umsysInput
Send/Return
Signalum
is sent
to theeplug-in
overvolta
any of the
line level
outputs,
and 8 AES digital outputs.
Channel
ou
FX
Return.
tem busses (usually an Aux Send) and routed back to an Input
Channel or FX Return.
AT16mais
A-Net
Output Card
thatutilizao
provides de
16 channels
of disposio
A-Net
Para
informaes
sobre
plug-ins na
output compatible
with Aviom
Personal
Mixers
and other em
Send/Return,
veja
Utilizando
Plug-Ins
Como
um
Processador
For more information on using plug-ins in a Send/Return arBus
na pgina
Pro16
Series 160.
devices.
rangement, see Using Plug-Ins as a Bus Processor on
page
160.and output expansion card that provides an addiIOx
Input

digital I/O.
Chapter 7:
Inputs and Input
Routing 73
Captulo7: Entradas
e Roteamento
de Entradas
73
Inserting
InsertingPlug-Ins
Plug-InsononChannels
Channels
Plug-Insonon
Channels
YouInserting
can insert plug-ins
Input
Channels and FX Returns diYou
can
insert
plug-ins
onon
Input
Channels
and
FXFX
Returns
di-diYou
can
insert
plug-ins
Input
Channels
and
Returns
rectly
from
the
Inputs
page
or
from
the Plug-In
Rack.
You from
can
insert
plug-ins
onor
Input
Channels
andRack.
FX Returns directly
the
Inputs
page
from
the
Plug-In
Inserindo
Plug-Ins
em
Canais
Inserting
Plug-Ins
on
Channels
rectly from the Inputs page or from the Plug-In Rack.
rectly
from the18,
Inputs
page or from the Plug-In Rack.
See Chapter
Plug-Ins.
See
Chapter
18,
Plug-Ins.
You
can
insert
plug-ins
on
Input
Channels
and FXeReturns
diVoc podeSeeinserir
plug-ins
em Input
Channels
FX Returns
Chapter
18, Plug-Ins.
See
Chapter
Plug-Ins.
rectly
from
the
Inputs
orou
from
Plug-In
Rack.
diretamente
pgina
Inputs
pelothe
Plug-In
Rack.
To insert
a pela
plug-in
on 18,
a page
channel:
ToTo
insert
a plug-in
onon
a channel:
insert
a plug-in
a channel:
1 Go
to
the aInputs
page
and
target the channel where you
ToSee
insert
plug-in
on
aPlug-Ins.
channel:
Chapter
18,
Plug-Ins.
Veja
o Captulo
18,
1 1Go
to
the
Inputs
page
and
target
the
channel
where
you
to thethe
Inputs
page
and
target
the
channel
where
you
want Go
to insert
plug-in.
1 Go
to
the Inputs
page and target the channel where you
want
to
insert
the
plug-in.
want
to
insert
the
plug-in.
To insert
aum
plug-in
on em
a channel:
Para
inserir
plug-in
um
canal:
want
insert
the plug-in.
2 In
the to
Inserts
section
of the
Inputs page, do one of the fol2
In
the
Inserts
section
of
the
Inputs
dodo
one
ofof
the
fol1lowing:
Go
andof
target
the page,
channel
where
you
2 to
In the Inputs
Inserts page
section
the
Inputs
page,
one
the
fol1 V
pgina
selecione
o canal
em page,
que voc
deseja
inserir
2
In the Inputs
Insertsesection
of the
Inputs
do one
of the
following:
want
to insert
the
plug-in.
lowing:
Click
one
of
the
four
Plug-In
Insert
pop-up
menus
and
um plug-in.
lowing:
choose
one
ofof
the
four
Plug-In
menus
and
Click
Click
the
Insert
pop-up
and
a one
plug-in
directly
from Insert
one
ofpop-up
the
Plug-In
Rack
2 In the
Inserts
section
offour
the Plug-In
Inputs
page,
do
one
ofmenus
the
folchoose
Click
one
of thedirectly
four
Plug-In
Insert
pop-up
menus
and
a
plug-in
from
one
of
the
Plug-In
Rack
choose
a
plug-in
directly
from
one
of
the
Plug-In
Rack
submenus.
2lowing:
Na seo Inserts da pgina Inputs:
choose a plug-in directly from one of the Plug-In Rack
submenus.
submenus.
Clique
em um dos quatro menus pop-up Plug-In Insert e escolha
or
submenus.
Click
one of the four Plug-In Insert pop-up menus and
um
plug-in
diretamente de um dos submenus Plug-In Rack.
or
or one
choose
fromInsert
one ofbuttons
the Plug-In
Click
of the directly
four Plug-In
to goRack
to the
ou or a plug-in
submenus.
one
ofof
the
four
Plug-In
Insert
toto
go
toto
the
Click
Click
one
the
four
Plug-In
Insert
buttons
go
the
Plug-In
Rack,
and
route
the
signal
to buttons
the
plug-in
using
Clique
em
um
dos
quatro
botes
Plug-In
Insert
para
irtopara
Plug-In
Click one
ofand
the route
four Plug-In
Insert
buttons
to go
the
Rack,
the
signal
to
the
plug-in
using
Plug-In
Rack,
and
route
the
signal
to
the
plug-in
using
Plug-In
Rack
controls.
o
Plug-In
Rack,
e
roteie
o
sinal
para
o
plug-in
utilizando
os
or Plug-In Rack, and route the signal to the plug-in using
Plug-In
controls.
Plug-In
Rack
controls.
controles
doRack
Plug-In
Rack.
Click
one ofRack
the four
Plug-In Insert buttons to go to the
Plug-In
controls.
Plug-In Rack, and route the signal to the plug-in using
Plug-In Rack controls.
Click to
ToTo
assign
a hardware
insert
toto
anan
input:
assign
a hardware
insert
input:
1 Go
the Inputs
pageinsert
and target
channel where you
To to
assign
a hardware
to an the
input:
1 1Go
the
Inputs
page
and
target
the
channel
where
you
Go
to
the
Inputs
page
and
target
the
channel
where
you
want
totoassign
the
hardware
insert.
1 Go
the Inputs
page and
want
toto
assign
the hardware
insert.
want
to
assign
theinsert
hardware
ToPara
assign
a hardware
to an insert.
input:
atribuir
um insert
de hardware
a uma entrada:
want
assign
the hardware
insert.page, do one of the fol2 In
the to
Inserts
section
of the Inputs
2
In
the
Inserts
section
of
the
Inputs
dodo
one
ofof
the
fol1lowing:
Go
2 to
In the Inputs
Inserts page
section
andoftarget
the Inputs
the page,
channel
page,
where
one
you
the
fol1 2VIn
pgina
Inputs
e selecione
o canal
em do
queone
voc
the Inserts
section
of the o
Inputs
page,
ofdeseja
the fol-um
lowing:
want
lowing:
to
assign
the
hardware
insert.
lowing:
Click
the Hardware Insert pop-up menu and choose an ininsert
de hardware.
sert
Click
the
Hardware
Insert
pop-up
menu
and
choose
anan
in-in
Click
the
Hardware
Insert
pop-up
menu
and
choose
destination
directly
from
thepage,
menu.
2 In the
Inserts
section
of the
Inputs
do one
the folsert
Click
the
Hardware
Insert
pop-up
menu
andof
choose
an indestination
directly
from
the
menu.
2 Na seo
Inserts da pgina
Inputs:
sert destination
directly
from the menu.
lowing:
sert destination directly from the menu.
oror
Clique
no menu pop-up Hardware Insert e escolha um destino
or the
Click
Hardware
Insert
and
inClick
Hardware
Insert
button
to go to
thechoose
Insertsan
page
diretamente
dopop-up
menu. menu
de
orinsert
the
sert
Click
the
Hardware
Insert
button
toto
gofrom
toto
the
Inserts
page
destination
directly
from
the
menu.
Click
the
Hardware
Insert
button
go
the
Inserts
page
of
the
Patchbay,
and
assign
the
insert
the
Patchbay.
ou
Click
the Hardware
Insert
button
to go
to the
Inserts
page
ofof
the
Patchbay,
and
assign
the
insert
from
the
Patchbay.
the
Patchbay,
and
assign
the
insert
from
the
Patchbay.
orClique
no
boto
Hardware
Insert
para
ir
para
a
pgina
Inserts
of the Patchbay, and assign the insert from the Patchbay.
do Patchbay, e atribua o insert pelo Patchbay.
Click the Hardware Insert button to go to the Inserts page
Click to
Click to
of the Patchbay, and
assign
assign
Click
to the insert from the Patchbay.
goClick
to the
to
Click to
assign
Click
assignto
assign
Click to
assign
Click to
Patchbay
goClick
to to
the
to
go
the
Patchbay
go
to the
Patchbay
Patchbay
Click to
go to the
Patchbay
Assigning a hardware insert in the Inputs page

Assigning
a hardware
insert
in in
thethe
Inputs
page
Assigning
a hardware
insert
Inputs
page
TheAssigning
name ofa the
hardware
hardware
insertinsert
in the destination
Inputs page appears in the
The
name
of
the
destination
appears
inin
the
Atribuindo
um
insert
dehardware
hardware
nainsert
pgina
Inputs
The
name
of
the
hardware
insert
destination
appears
the
on-screen
Hardware
Insert button.
The name
of the hardware
insert destination appears in the
on-screen
Hardware
Insert
button.
on-screen
Hardware
button.
Assigning
a hardware
insertInsert
in the Inputs
page
Click to
Hardware
Insertde
button.
O on-screen
nome de destino
do insert
hardware surge no boto Hardware
to to
goClick
to
the
Click
to to
assign
Click
Click
Setting
Hardware
Locationappears in the
Plug-In
goClick
to to
the
assign
name
of
the
hardware Insert
insert destination
to
Insert
nathe
tela.
Click
go
the The
assignto
Setting
the
Hardware
Insert
Location
Rack
Plug-In
Setting
the
Hardware
Insert
Location
go
to the on-screen
assign
Plug-In
Hardware
Insert
button.
Rack
thethe
Hardware
Insert
Location
YouSetting
can choose
location
of
the hardware
insert in the sigPlug-In
Rack
Ajustando
a
Localizao
do
Insert
de
Hardware
Click
to
Click to
You
can
choose
the
location
of
the
hardware
insert
inin
the
sigRack
You
can
choose
the
location
of
the
hardware
insert
the
signal
path,
relative
to
the
four
plug-in
inserts,
for
each
channel.
go
to
the
assign
Assigning a plug-in insert
in the Inputs page
You
can
choose
the
location
ofLocation
theinserts,
hardware
insertchannel.
in the signal
path,
relative
to
the
four
plug-in
for
each
Setting
the
Hardware
Insert
nal
path,
relative
to
the
four
plug-in
inserts,
for
each
channel.
Plug-In
AVoc
hardware
insert does
need to do
be currently
assigned to
Assigning
a plug-in
insert
thethe
Inputs
page
Atribuindo
um insert
de plug-in
nain
pgina
Inputs
pode
a not
localizao
insert
de hardware
nado
cadeia
Assigning
a plug-in
insert
in
Inputs
page
path, escolher
relative
to
the
four
plug-in
inserts,
for
each channel.
Rack
A nal
hardware
insert
does
not
need
toto
bebe
currently
assigned
toto
dodo
TheAssigning
name ofa the
plug-in
appears
in the on-screen
A
hardware
insert
does
not
need
currently
assigned
plug-in
insertinsert
in the Inputs
page
this.
de
sinal,
em
relao
aos
quatro
inserts
de
plug-ins,
para
cada
You
chooseinsert
the location
the hardware
insertassigned
in the sigAcan
hardware
does notofneed
to be currently
tocanal.
do
The
name
ofof
the
plug-in
insert
appears
inin
the
on-screen
this.
The
name
the
plug-in
insert
appears
the
on-screen
Insert
display.
this.
O Plug-In
nome
do
plug-in
aparece
no
display
Plug-In
Insert
na
tela.
Um
insert
de
hardware
no
precisa
estar
atribudo
para
isso.
The name
ofdisplay.
the plug-in insert appears in the on-screen
nal this.
path, relative to the four plug-in inserts, for each channel.
Plug-In
Insert
Plug-In
Insertinsert
display.
Assigning
a plug-in
in the Inputs page
To set the hardware insert location:
Plug-In Insert display.
A To
hardware
insert
doesinsert
not need
to be currently assigned to do
set
the
hardware
Utilizando Inserts de Hardware Em Canais
Para
ajustar
ahardware
localizao
dolocation:
insert
de hardware:
To
set
the
insert
location:
The
name
of
the
plug-in
insert
appears
in
the
on-screen
Using Hardware Inserts on Channels
this.
1 Go
page
and location:
To to
setthe
theInputs
hardware
insert
Using
Hardware
on
Channels
1 1Go
toset
the
Inputs
page
and
target
the channel
where you
Plug-In
Insert
display. Inserts
Using
Hardware
Inserts
on
Channels
Go
to
the
Inputs
and
target
to
hardware
insert
location.
Voc
pode
inserir
procesadores
externos
na signal
cadeia
de sinal
Input want
1 V
pgina
Inputs
e page
selecione
o canalthe
emchannel
que vocwhere
desejayou
ajustar
Hardware
Inserts
Channels
YouUsing
can insert
external
processors
in on
the
chain
of de
Input
1 Go
to
the
Inputs
page
and target
the
channel
where
you
want
to
set
the
hardware
insert
location.
want
set do
theinsert
hardware
insert location.
Toaset
thetohardware
insert
location:
You
can
insert
external
processors
in
the
signal
chain
of
Input
Channels
e
FX
Returns.
localizao
de
hardware.
You can
insert
external processors in the signal chain of Input 2 In
channels
and
FX Returns.
want
to set the
hardware
location.
the Inserts
section
of theinsert
Inputs
page, click the hardware
You canand
insert
external
processors in the signal chain of Input
channels
FXFX
Returns.
2Go
the
Inserts
of
the
Inputs
click
the
hardware
Using
Hardware
Inserts
on Channels
channels
and
Returns.
1insert
2InIn
to
the
Inserts
Inputs
section
pageitand
of
target
the
Inputs
thepage,
channel
page,
click
where
the
you
hardware
indicator
sosection
that
lights
red.
Sadas
tambm
permitem
inserts
de
hardware.
Para
mais
2
Na
seo
Inserts
da
pgina
Inputs,
clique
o
indicador
do
insert de
channels
and
FX
Returns.
2
In
the
Inserts
section
of
the
Inputs
page,
click
the
hardware
insert
indicator
so
that
it
lights
red.
Outputs also provide hardware inserts. For more informawant
insert
to set
indicator
the hardware
so thatinsert
it lights
location.
red.
informaes,
veja
Utilizando
Inserts
em
Busses
de
Sada
hardware,
que
se
acende
em
vermelho.
You can
insert
external
processors
in
the
signal
chain
of
Input
Outputs
also
provide
hardware
inserts.
For
more
informainsert
indicator
so
that
it
lights
red.
Outputs
also
provide
hardware
inserts.
For
more
information, see Using Inserts on Output Busses on page 82.
Outputs
also
provide
hardware
inserts.
For
more
informana
pgina
82.
channels
and
FX
Returns.
tion,
seesee
Using
Inserts
onon
Output
Busses
onon
page
82.
2 In the Inserts section of the Inputs page, click the hardware
tion,
Using
Inserts
Output
Busses
page
82.
tion, see Using Inserts on Output Busses on page 82.
insert indicator so that it lights red.
Assigning Hardware Inserts to Inputs
Atribuindo
Inserts
de
Hardware
a Entradas
Outputs
also
provide
hardware
inserts.
For more informaAssigning
Hardware
Inserts
totoInputs
Assigning
Hardware
Inserts
Inputs
Hardware
Inserts
to
Inputs
tion,assign
see Using
Inserts
on
Output
Busses
on page
82.
YouAssigning
can
hardware
inserts
to Input
channels
and
FX ReVoc
pode
atribuir
inserts
hardware
Input
Channels
eand
FX
Returns
You
can
assign
hardware
inserts
toato
Input
channels
FXFX
ReYou
can
assign
hardware
inserts
Input
channels
and
Returns
directly
from
thede
Inputs
page
or
from
the
Patchbay.
Youdirectly
canpela
assign
hardware
inserts
toPatchbay.
Input
channels
and FX Rediretamente
pgina
Inputs
ou
pelo
turns
from
the
Inputs
page
or
from
the
Patchbay.
Assigning
Hardware
Inserts
to
Inputs
turns directly from the Inputs page or from the Patchbay.
You can assign hardware inserts to Input channels and FX ReClick to set
HW
Insert
Click
to set
Click to set
location
HW
Insert
Click
to set
HW
Insert
location
HW
Insert
location
location
Click to set
HW Insert
location
Setting a hardware insert location in the Inputs page
Setting
a ahardware
insert
location
in in
thethe
Inputs
page
Setting
alocalizao
hardware
insert
location
Inputs
page
Ajustando
do
insert
de hardware
na
pgina
Inputs

7474 VENUE
Profile
Guide
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Activating and Bypassing Inserts

Inserts
Activating
and Bypassing
Ativao
e Bypass de Inserts
After hardware and plug-in inserts are assigned, they can be

After hardware and plug-in inserts are assigned, they can be
Aps inserts
de and
hardware
e de from
plug-in
serem
eles podem
activated
bypassed
the
fromatrubdos,
the ACS section
or the
activated
andFeatures
bypassed
from the
from
the ACS
section
or the
Stage
Rack
ser ativados
ou deixados
empage
bypass
desde
a seo
ou dos
controles
corresponding
Input
controls.
corresponding
Input
page
controls.
da pgina Input correspondente.
To activate
or
bypassProfile
plug-in
insert Up
from
section:
I/Oou
fordeixar
VENUE
systems.
tothe
two
Stage
Racks
Paraaudio
ativar
ema
um insert
deACS
plug-in
pela
To activate
or bypass
a bypass
plug-in insert
from the
ACS
section:
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96
total
inputs.
seo1ACS:
Target the channel by pressing its Select switch.
1 Target the channel by pressing its Select switch.
2 Press
any
of the
Plug-In switches
in theSelect.
Insert Processing secAudio
I/O
1 Selecione
um
canal
pressionando
seu switch
2 Press
any
of the
Plug-In switches
in the Insert Processing sec-
tion to activate or bypass the corresponding Insert. The switch

tion
activate
or bypass
thecontrollable
corresponding
Theand
switch
48toinputs
with
remotely
micInsert.
preamps
2 Pressione
qualquer
um dos
switches Plug-In na seo Insert
lights when
the insert
is activated.
lights
when theselectable
insert is activated.
individually
phantom power.
Processing para ativar ou deixar em bypass o Insert correspondente.

8seanalog
output channels;
up to 48 analog or
O switch
acende
insert expandable
est
ativado.
To activate
or quando
bypass aohardware
insert
from an input channel or
To activate
or bypass a hardware insert from an input channel or
FX digital
Return:outputs per Stage Rack.
FX
Return:
Para ativar ou deixar em bypass um insert de hardware:
1 Go to the Inputs
page and
target the channel.
Synchronization
and Control
I/O
1 Go to the Inputs
page and
target the channel.
Setting Input Gain
Setting
Input de
Gain
Ajustando
o Ganho
Entrada
Gain can be controlled from individual channel strips or from
Gain can be controlled from individual channel strips or from
O ganho
pode
ser controlado pelas rguas individuais de canal ou
the ACS
section.
the
ACS ACS.
section.
Additional
Required Components
pela
seo
recommended;
1024x768 minimum resolution).
VGA and
Gain
Pan
Gain
Pan
DVI supported.
Compressor
Gate Threshold
Threshold
HPF
Delay
Compressor
Gate Threshold
USB
keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows
compatible)
Threshold
Delay Only)
HPF Cable (VENUE Profile Systems
Digital Snake

Encoders (124)
Encodersdirectly
(124)
1 V pgina Inputs e selecione o canal.
2 Click
In/Out switch
for the
HW insert
(at the top (if
of the
Snakethe
connectors
to enable
primary
and redundant
2 Click the In/Out switch for the HW insert (at the top of the
Inserts
section)connection
on the channel.
The switch
applicable)
to a VENUE
FOHlights
Rack.when the in2 Clique
no switch
In/Out
dochannel.
insert deThe
hardware
altowhen
da seo
Inserts
section)
on the
switch(no
lights
the insertnois canal.
in-circuit.
Inserts)
O
switch
se
acende
quando
o
insert
est no
sert is in-circuit.
circuito.
System Components
Adjusting
Input
Controls
Adjusting
Input
Controls
Ajustando
Controles
de Entrada
Included Components
Input
Gain
Input
Gain
AllInput
VENUEGain
Profile systems include the following:
Input
GainProfile
is adjustable
VENUE
consolefrom the rotary encoders on each In-
Input
is adjustable
the rotary
onrotativo
each InO Input
GainGain
(ganho
de entrada)from
ajustado
pelo encoders
codificador
put channel and FX Return. Mic inputs have a gain range from
Input
Two
(2)
IEC
cablesMic
put
channel
andpower
inputsde
have
a gain range
from
de cada
Channel
eFX
FXReturn.
Return.
Entradas
microfone
possuem
+10 dB to +60 dB. Analog line inputs and digital inputs have a
dB to
dB.dB.
Analog
line
inputs
and
digital
inputs
have a
ganho+10
+10
dB+60
amount
+60
Entradas
de linha
analgicas
e entradas
deMonitor
for
VGA
screen
(screen
not included)
gain
range from
dB todB
+18
dB. dB.
digitais
possuem
ganho20
de 20
a +18
gain
range from
20
dB to +18
dB.
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
Gain Guess
Gain
Guess
Feature
Gain Guess Feature
VENUE Profile Guide
Optional Components
Name display
Name display
USB flash
disk (or
portable
Assignment
switches
forother
input channel
encoders
Assignment switches for input channel encoders
transfer
of Show
data; 512
ordelarger
Switches
de atribuio
de codificadores
de MB
canais
entradarecommended)
Near-field monitor
Clip LED speakers for mix position monitoring
Clip LED
Headphones
with 1/4-inch jack
+48 V
+48 V
20 dB Pad
20 dB Pad

Input Polarity
Input Polarity
(for Talkback)
MIDI cables Gain
Gain

Safe
25-pin D-Sub
cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
Safe
Theautomatizada
automated Gain
Guess
function
canpara
be used
to um
set a nomA funo
Gain
pode ser
utilizada
ajustar
The
automated
Gain
Guess
function
can be used
to set anvel
nom Two
(2) console
lights
Input de
controls
Controles
entradainnothe
ACSACS
inalpara
levelum
forcanal
a channel
based
on
its incoming
signal. When
nominal
baseado
no
sinal
recebido.
Quando
voc
Input controls
in the
ACS
inal
level
for
a
channel
based
on
its
incoming
signal.
When
Protective
Dust
Cover rotativo para aumentar o ganho, o
pressiona
segura
codificador
you epress
andum
hold
a rotary encoder assigned to input gain,
you press and hold a rotary encoder assigned to input gain,
To
adjust
input
gain
a channel:
Para
ganho
defor
entrada
de um canal:
analisa
Rack(s)
next)
Toajustar
adjustoinput
gain
for
a channel:
sistema
sinal
recebido
e automaticamente
ajusta o ganho
the
systemo(see
samples
incoming
signals and automatically
sets
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
the system samples incoming signals and automatically sets
e o pad
para
a
referncia
de
0dB
quando
o
codificador
solto.
O
1
Do
one
of
the
following:
the channel gain and pad for a 0 dB reference when the en1 Do one of the following:
the channel
and
padde
formedio
a 0 dB reference
the en1The
Siga
um dos seguintes
procedimentos:
following
options can
GainRacks,
Guess
ogain
modo
atual
(Peak
ou when
RMS).
CDs,
iLoks,
andthe
Cables
coder segue
isSoftware
released.
Gain
Guess
follows
current
Meter mode
In the Encoder Assignment section, press the Gain switch
coder is released. Gain Guess follows the current Meter mode
In
the
Assignment
section,
press
the Gain
switch
Na
seo
Encoder
Assignment,
pressione
o visit
switch
para
For details
onEncoder
all VENUE
systems and
options,
theGain
Avid
(Peak or RMS).
to assign gain control to the rotary encoders.
atribuir
o
controle
de
ganho
aos
codificadores
rotativos.
(Peak
or
RMS).
to
assign
gain
control
to
the
rotary
encoders.
Indicadores
de
Ganho
ou or
System Restore CD
or
Gain
Selecione
o canal
pressionando
seu
controle
Quando
GainIndicators
mostrado nos codificadores de entrada, os LEDs se
Target the
channel
by pressing
itsswitch
Select Select.
switch.OGain
Gain
Indicators
ECx
Software
Rack
Target
pressing its
Select
switch. Gain
ganho the
parachannel
o canalby
atribudo
para
o codificador
rotativo
Mixde
Options
acendem
paraEthernet
indicar Control
que o ganho
est Installer
ajustadoCD
para seu valorcontrol for the channel is assigned to the Gain rotary enWhen
Gain
is displayed
on the input
the digitais).
encoders
control
for the
Gain
na seo
ACSchannel
Input. is assigned to the Gain rotary en (+10
Standalone
Software
CDe 0encoders,
padro
dB para
entradas Installer
analgicas
dB entradas
When
Gain
is displayed
on the input
encoders,
the encoders
coder in the ACS Input section.
indicator
LED so
lights
to indicate
that
the
isque
set to the decoder in the ACS Input section.
Alteraes
de ganho
sinalizadas
pelo
anel
degain
LEDs
indicator
LED
lights
to (for
indicate
that
the
gain
is set circunda
to the de- I/O Options
iLok
USB
Smart
Key
storing
plug-in
authorizations)
fault value
(+10 dB
for analog
inputs, and
dB for do
digital
in- 2 Ajuste
o ganho
o codificador
rotativo
atribudo.
o codificador
e o valor
do ganho
apresentado
no0
display
canal
2 Adjust
gain girando
by turning
the assigned
rotary
encoder.
fault
value
(+10
dB
for
analog
inputs,
and
0
dB
for
digital
in Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok
2 Adjust
by turning
assigned
rotary encoder.
Analoggain
Mic/Line
Inputthe
Card
that provides
16 analog
puts).
Gain change is indicated by the encoder ring LEDs, and AI16
quando
ajustado.
puts). Gain change is indicated by the encoder ring LEDs, and
Two
(2) is
IEC
powerincables
gain
value
shown
the channel display when adjusted.
gain value is shown in the channel display when adjusted.


outputs
Inputs andofInput
Routing 75
tional 8 channels of analog I/O
and 87:
AES/EBU
Chapter
7:channels
Inputs and Input
Routing 75
digital I/O.

ParaToajustar
o ganho
entrada
utilizando
recurso Gain Guess:
set input
gain de
using
the Gain
Guessofeature:
To set input gain using the Gain Guess feature:
1 Press and
hold the
rotary
encoder
while ao
the ganho
chan1 Pressione
e segure
o assigned
codificador
rotativo
atribudo
nel
is receiving
input
signal. The
LEDencoder
flashes
to
indicate
level
1 Press
the
assigned
rotary
while
theindicar
chanenquanto
o and
canalhold
est
recebendo
um
sinal.
O LED pisca
para
a anlise
sinal. input signal. The LED flashes to indicate level
sampling.
nel is do
receiving
ousampling.
or
Clique Guess na tela.
or
Click Guess on-screen.
2 Solte
o codificador rotativo. O ganho ser ajustado assim que o
Click Guess on-screen.
Release
theatingir
rotary0encoder
the current
gain
guess. Gain
sinal1 de
entrada
dB (se oto
modo
Peak est
selecionado)
ou
be(se
setthe
the
incoming
reaches
dB peak
(if Gain
Peak
1 RMS
Release
rotary
encoder
to the
current0 gain
guess.
0 dBwill
osomodo
RMS
est signal
selecionado).
mode
selected)
or 0 dB RMS
(if RMS
mode
is selected).
will beisset
so the incoming
signal
reaches
0 dB
peak (if Peak
Ajustando
Right
Offsetor
em
Estreo
mode is
selected)
0 Canais
dB RMS
(if RMS mode is selected).
Setting Right Offset on Stereo Channels
Em Input Channels estreo e FX Returns, o controle Gain afeta

Setting
Right
Offset
on Stereo
Channels
ambos
canais
(esquerdo
e direito).
O recurso
Offsetcontrol
permite
On os
stereo
Input
Channels
and FX
Returns,Right
the Gain
alterar
o
ganho
do
canal
direito
em
relao
aoThe
esquerdo
entre
20
affects
both
the left
and right
Right
Offset
feaOn stereo
Input
Channels
andchannels.
FX Returns,
the
Gain
control
dB e +20 dB, dentro dos limites gerais de ganho.
ture
letsboth
you the
offset
gain
of the
right channel
relative
to feathe
affects
leftthe
and
right
channels.
The Right
Offset
left
channel
by
20
dB
to
+20
dB,
within
the
overall
gain
limture
lets
you
offset
the
gain
of
the
right
channel
relative
to
the
Para ajustar o Right Offset para um canal estreo na tela:
its.
left channel by 20 dB to +20 dB, within the overall gain lim1 Vits.
pgina Inputs e selecione o canal estreo.
To adjust channel gain offset for a stereo channel on-screen:
2 Ajuste
o ganho
do canal
usando
o codificador
Right Offset
To adjust
channel
gain direito
offset for
a stereo
channel on-screen:
1 Go to the Inputs page and target the stereo channel.
da tela.
1 Go to the Inputs page and target the stereo channel.
2 Adjust the right channel gain using the on-screen Right OffIndicao
de the
Nvelright
de Diferena
(Stereo
Offset)
set
encoder.
2 Adjust
channel Estreo
gain using
the on-screen
Right Offset encoder.
O Led Stereo abaixo do canal pisca quando a diferena nos nveis de

Stereo Level Offset Indication
sinal entre os canais esquerdo e direito igual ou maior a 12 dB.
Stereo Level Offset Indication
The Stereo LED below the channel meter flashes when the dif-
Para
ajustarwidth
a largura
de um canal
estreo
na tela:
To adjust
of a stereo
channel
on-screen:
To adjust width of a stereo channel on-screen:
Select one
orou
more
11 Selecione
um
maischannels.
canais.
1 Select one or more channels.

2 In the Inputs page, adjust width by turning the on-screen
2 Na pgina Inputs, ajuste a largura girando o codificador rotativo

Width
rotary
encoder.
Turning
the
clockwise
moves
2 In the
Inputs
page,
adjust width
by turning
thealtera
on-screen
Width
da
tela.
Girar
o codificador
emencoder
sentido
horrio
a largura
the
width
to encoder.
full
stereo,
moves
the
Width
Turning
the encoder
clockwise
moves
para
orotary
estreo
mximo,
eand
emcounter-clockwise
sentido
anti-horrio,
para
o estreo
width
toA reverse
center
position
the width
to full stereo.
stereo,
and
counter-clockwise
moves mono.
the
reverso.
posio
centralThe
representa
mono. represents
width to reverse stereo. The center position represents mono.
High-Pass Filter
High-Pass Filter
High-Pass
Filter
Um
filtro passa-altas
de 4 ordem pode ser habilitado em cada canal
A built-in 4th-order High-Pass Filter can be engaged on each
de entrada. A faixa de frequncia de corte do HPF vai de 20 Hz a

input
channel.
The HPF
corner Filter
frequency
range
is from
Hz
A built-in
4th-order
High-Pass
can be
engaged
on20
each
500 Hz.
to
500channel.
Hz.
input
The HPF corner frequency range is from 20 Hz
to
500
Hz.
Para habilitar o HPF embutido pelos codificadores Input:
To engage the built-in HPF from the Input encoders:
engage
built-in HPF
from the pressione
Input encoders:
1To
Na
seotheEncoder
Assignment,
o switch HPF para
1 In the Encoder Assignment section, press the HPF switch to
atribuir o controle do filtro para os codificadores rotativos.
assign
HPF
control
to the rotary
encoders.
1 In the
Encoder
Assignment
section,
press the HPF switch to
assign HPF control to the rotary encoders.
22 Pressione
o codificador
rotativo de
canal
Press a channel
rotary encoder
to um
insert
the para
filter inserir
in thato filtro
naquele
canal.
O
LED
On
do
codificador
rotativo
se
acende
quando
channel.
rotary
encoder
Ontoindicator
LED
lights
when
2 Press a The
channel
rotary
encoder
insert the
filter
in that
othe
HPF
est
no
circuito.
HPF isThe
in circuit.
channel.
rotary encoder On indicator LED lights when
the HPF is in circuit.
33 Ajuste
frequncia
de corte
do HPFbygirando
o codificador
rotativo
Adjusta the
HPF corner
frequency
turning
the assigned
roatribudo.
tary
encoder.
3
Adjust
the HPF corner frequency by turning the assigned rotary encoder.
Phantom Power
Phantom Power
Phantom
power
de 48V pode ser aplicado a qualquer entrada Stage
Phantom
Power
48V phantom
power
canInput
be applied
toou
any
analgica
atribuda
a um
Channel
FXanalog
return.stage input
assign pan/balance control to the rotary encoders.
assigned
to an power
input channel
or FX return.
48V phantom
can be applied
to any analog stage input
assigned
to
an
input
channel
or
FX
return.
Para aplicar phantom power a uma entrada:
To apply phantom power to an input:
1ToNo
patchbay,
atribua
apply
phantom
power uma
to anentrada
input: de palco a um canal. Veja
1 In the patchbay, assign a stage input to a channel. See AsAtribuindo Fontes de Entrada a Canais na pgina 70.
signing
Sources
to Channels
on to
page
70.
1 In theInput
patchbay,
assign
a stage input
a channel.
See Assigning
Input
Sources
to
Channels
on
page
70.
22 Selecione
o channel
canal pressionando
Select.
Target the
by pressingseu
its switch
Select switch.
Press the o+48V
switch
ACSInut
Input
section.
The switch
33Pressione
switch
+48Vin
nathe
seo
do ACS.
O switch
se acende
quando
othe
phantom
power
aplicado.
lights
phantom
power
is ACS
applied.
3
Presswhen
+48V
switch
in
the
Input section. The switch
lights when phantom power is applied.
um canal
diferente,
If Se
an alguma
input is entrada
moved toa movida
differentpara
channel,
the gain,
pad, os
pad
e phantom
power
soinput.
movidos
and
power setting
will move
with the
If ajustes
anphantom
inputdeis ganho,
moved
to a different
channel,
gain,
pad, com
a
entrada.
and phantom power setting will move with the input.
tary
encoder.
2
Adjust
the channel pan/balance by turning the assigned ro-
20dBdB
20
PadPad
Pan/Balance
ference
in signal
level the
between
themeter
left and
rightwhen
channels
is
The Stereo
LED below
channel
flashes
the dif12
dB oringreater.
ference
signal level between the left and right channels is
O Pan ajusta o posicionamento panormico (para canais de entrada

12 dB or greater.
mono) e o balano estreo (para Input Channels estreo e FX
Returns).
Pan/Balance
Pan/Balance
adjusts
channel pan
mono input channels) and stereo
ParaPan
ajustar
pan/balance
pelos(for
codificadores:
balance
(forchannel
stereo input
channels
FX
returns).and stereo
Pan adjusts
pan (for
mono and
input
channels)
1 Na
seo(for
Encoder
pressione
switch Pan para
balance
stereo Assignment,
input channels
and FX oreturns).
atribuir
o
controle
de
pan/balance
aos
codificadores
rotativos.
To adjust channel pan/balance from the encoders:
To adjust channel pan/balance from the encoders:
1 In the
Encoder Assignment
the Pan switch
to
2 Ajuste
o pan/balance
do canalsection,
girandopress
o codificador
rotativo
assign
pan/balance
control to section,
the rotary
encoders.
1
In the
Encoder Assignment
press
the Pan switch to
atribudo.
2 Adjust the channel pan/balance by turning the assigned ro-
Stereo Width
tary encoder.
O Width
ajusta a largura da imagem estreo de Input Channels
Stereo
Width
estreo
e FX
Returns controlando conjuntamente posies de pan
Width
paraStereo
os canais
esquerdo e direito em direes opostas.
Width adjusts the stereo image of stereo input channels and
FX
returns
by controlling
gangedofpan
positions
of themono,
leftand
and
Width
adjusts
the stereointeiramente
image
stereo
input
channels
O Width
pode
ser
ajustado
para
LR, para
ou
right
channels,
in
opposite
directions.
FX
returns
by
controlling
ganged
pan
positions
of
the
left
and
para LR revertido. Esse controle no est disponvel em canais
right channels, in opposite directions.
mono.
Width can be adjusted from full LR, to mono, to full reversed
LR.
Width
controls
arefrom
not full
available
monotochannels.
Width
can be
adjusted
LR, toon
mono,
full reversed
LR. Width controls are not available on mono channels.
7676Guia
VENUE
Profile
VENUE
Profile
Guide
20 dB Pad
A 20 dB pad can be applied to any analog Stage input assigned
Um pad de 20 dB pode ser aplicado a qualquer entrada Stage

to
andB
input
or FX Return.
A 20
pad channel
can be applied
to any analog Stage input assigned
analogica atribuda a um Input Channel ou FX Return.
to an input channel or FX Return.

To apply
a 20
pad
Stage
input:
Para
aplicar
umdB
pad
deto
20adB
em uma
entrada Stage:
To apply a 20 dB pad to a Stage input:
11 Selecione
o channel
canal pressionando
Select.
Target the
by pressingseu
its switch
Select switch.
2 Press the 20 dB Pad switch in the ACS Input section. The
2switch
o when
switch
20
dB is
Pad
na seo
Input
doinput.
ACS.The
A luz se
the
pad
applied
to the
Stage
2 Pressione
Presslights
the 20
dB Pad
switch
in
the
ACS
Input
section.
acende
quandowhen
o padthe
aplicado
entrada
Stage.
switch lights
pad is applied
to the
Stage input.
The Gain Guess feature turns the Pad on or off as needed to
O Gain
recurso
Gain
Guess
liga
ou
conforme
accommodate
incoming
signal
level
The
Guess
feature
turns
the
Paddesliga
on or offoasPad
needed
to
necessrio para
acomodar
sinal de entrada recebido.
accommodate
incoming
signalo level
Inverso de Polaridade de Entrada (Phase)
Channel Solo
A polaridade do sinal de qualquer Input Channel ou FX pode ser

The
polarity
of
any
channel
or
return
can
Stage
Rack
Features
The Em
polarity
ofestreo,
any input
input
channel
or FX
FX
return signal
signal
can be
be
invertida.
canais
apenas
o canal
esquerdo
invetido.
Trs modos Solo esto disponveis: Solo In Place (SIP), Pr-Fader

Three
Solo
are
Solo
(SIP),
Pre-Fader
Additional
Required
Components
Three(PFL)
Solo emodes
modes
are available:
available:
Solo
InePlace
Place
(SIP),
Pre-Fader
Listen
After-Fader
Listen
(AFL),In
vrias
opes
esto
Listen
(PFL),
and
After-Fader
Listen
(AFL),
and
several
disponveis
para
asListen
operaes
de several
bus. Osoptions
canais
Listen (PFL),
andconfigurar
After-Fader
(AFL), and
options
The
following components
must
bebus
are
Solo
Channels
can
tambm
podemfor
serconfiguring
implicitamente
em Solo
como parte
are available
available
for
configuring
Solocolocados
bus operation.
operation.
Channels
can
de
um
VCA.
also
be
implicitly
soloed
as
part
of
a
VCA.
also
Video
(15-inch
beDisplay
implicitly
soloedor
asgreater
part offlat-panel
a VCA. VGA display
Input
Input Polarity (Phase)
(Phase) Invert
Invert
inverted.
inverted. With
With stereo
stereo channels,
channels, only
only the
the left
left channel
channel is
is ininStage
verted.
Para inverter
verted. a polaridade de um canal:
can be used
simultaneously,
supporting
to 96 total inputs.
1 Selecione
o canal
pressionando
seu switch up
Select.
To invert
invert
the polarity
polarity
of a
a channel:
channel:
To
the
of
Channel
Channel Solo
Solo

See Chapter
Chapter
14,14,
Solo
and Monitor
Monitor
Busses.
o Captulo
Busses
Solo e Monitor.
See
14,
Solo
and
Busses.
DVI Veja
supported.
1 Target
Target
the channel
channel
byinversion
pressing ()
its Select
Select
switch.
Audio
I/O
1
the
pressing
its
switch.
2 Pressione
o switch
polarityby
na seo
Input do ACS.
To
USB
keyboard
andem
trackball/mouse
(Windows compatible)
solo
A luz se
acende
quando
a
polaridade
est
invertida.
um canal
Solo:
Tocolocar
solo a
a channel:
channel:
48 inputs
with remotely
controllable
preamps
andsec- Para
2 Press
the polarity
inversion
() switch mic
in the
ACS Input
2 Press the polarity inversion () switch in the ACS Input sec

Press the
channels Solo
switch.
The
Solo
switch lights
solid
The
lights
the
individually
phantom
power.is
tion.
Press
the
Solo
switch.
The
Solo
solid
tion.
The switch
switchselectable
lights when
when
the polarity
polarity
is inverted.
inverted.
Digital
Snake
CableSolo
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only) lights
Safe
Pressione
o channels
switch
do canal.
O switch
se switch
acende
para indicar
indicate
the
channel
is
explicitly
soloed.
to
tooindicate
theexplicitamente
channel is explicitly
soloed.
que
canal
est
colocado
em
Solo.
digital
outputs
per Stage
Rack.
O switch
Safe alterna
os modos
Automation
Safe, Solo Safe ou Bank
Safe
Safe
Safe entre ligados e desligados, A funo do switch Safe no ACS
Channel
Mute Mute
Channel
from Avid orMute
assembled by your preferred vendor.
Channel
The
switch
toggles
Safe,
Safe,
or
determinada
switch
InputAutomation
Safe
naSolo
pgina
Options
>
Synchronization
and
Control
I/Oatribudo
The Safe
Safepelo
switch
toggles
Automation
Safe,
Solo
Safe,
or Bank
Bank
Interaction.
explicitamente colocar um canal em Mute (silenciar):
Safe
on/off.
The
function
of
ACS
Safe
Safe
on/off.
The current
current
function
of the
the and
ACSredundant
Safe switch
switch(ifis
is dede- Para
To
Snake
connectors
to enable
primary
To explicitly
explicitly mute
mute a
a channel:
channel:
termined
by
the
current
Input
Safe
switch
assignment
in
the
Optional Components
termined
by the
current Input
switch
in the
applicable)
connection
to a Safe
VENUE
FOHassignment
Rack.
Press
the
Mute
switch
the
The
mute
switch
Quando
o
modo
Safe
habilitado
para
o
canal
selecionado,
a
luz
do
Pressione
o
swich
Mute
doon
canal.
O switch se
acende
indicar
Press the Mute switch
on
the channel.
channel.
The
mute para
switch
Options
Options >
> Interaction
Interaction page.
page.
switch Safe no ACS se acende se esse modo Safe o atualmente
que
o
canal
est
explicitamente
colocado
em
silncio.
The
following
components
are
optional,
and
must
be
lights
solid
to
indicate
the
channel
is
explicitly
muted.
lights solid to indicate the channel is explicitly muted.
atribudo
ao switch
Input Safe.
O statusthe
Safe do canal
tambm
When
When a
a Safe
Safe mode
mode is
is enabled
enabled for
for the currently
currently selected
selected chanchan- purchased separately:
indicado
pelo estado
aceso ou apagado
do LED Safe
de cada
rgua
Canais
ser in
silenciados
trs with
maneiras:
Channelspodem
can be
be muted
muted
in
three ways:
ways: de
explicitly
with
the
nel,
Safe
Channels
can
three
explicitly
the
USB
flash disk
(or other
portable
USB storage
device for
System
Components
nel, the
the ACS
ACS
Safe switch
switch lights
lights if
if that
that Safe
Safe mode
mode is
is the
the curcurde canal.
explicitamente
com o implicitly
switch Mute
canal;
implicitamente
channel mute
mute switch;
switch;
as a
ado
result
of another
another
chanrently
assign
Input
Safe
Switch
mode.
Channel
safe
status
is
channel
implicitly
as
result
of
chantransfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
rently assign Input Safe Switch mode. Channel safe status is
como
resultado
canal ter
colocado
Solo;
nel being
being
soloed, de
andoutro
as a
a member
member
of sido
a Mute
Mute
Group or
orem
VCA.
also
indicated
by
the
lit
or
unlit
state
of
each
channel
strip
Safe
nel
soloed,
and
as
of
a
Group
VCA.
also
indicated
by
the
lit
or
unlit
state
of
each
channel
strip
Safe
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for mix
position
monitoring
ParaIncluded
configurar os
switches Safe para os modos Automation, Solo
eFor
como
membro
de
um
Mute
Group
ou
VCA.
Para
mais
Components
more information
information see
see Chapter
Chapter 15,
15, Muting
Muting and
and Mute
Mute
LED.
For more
LED.
ou Bank,
veja Switches Input Safe na pgina 65.
informaes,
veja1/4-inch
o Captulo
15, Muting
e Mute Groups
Headphones
with
jack
Groups
Groups
To
configure
the
Safe
switches
for
Automation,
Solo
or
Bank
To
configure
the
Safe
switches
for
Automation,
Solo
or
Bank
Para alternar
o status
Safeconsole
de um canal:
Channel Level
VENUE
Profile
mode,
(for Talkback)
mode, see
see Input
Input Safe
Safe Switches
Switches on
on page
page 65.
65.
Channel
Channel Level
Level
Footswitches
(upser
toajustado
2)
1 Selecione o canal pressionando seu switch Select.
O nvel
do canal pode
pelos faders Input ou FX Return
Channel
level
can
bena
adjusted
from
the
or
toggle
Monitor
VGA
screen
not included)
To
the
current
Safe
state
of
channel:
Channel
level
can
adjusted
from
the Input
Input
or FX
FX Return
Return
e utilizando
os faders
tela. Os
canais
selecionados
tambm
To
toggle
themount
currentfor
Safe
state
of a
a(screen
channel:
MIDI cables
(forbe
connecting
external
MIDI devices)
faders
and
using
the
on-screen
faders.
The
currently
selected
2 Pressione
o
switch
Safe
na
seo
Input
do
ACS.
O
switch
se
acende
podem
ser
ajustados
pelo
Flex
Channel.
faders
and
using
the
on-screen
faders.
The
currently
selected
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
1 Target
Target the
the channel
channel by
by pressing
pressing its
its Select
Select switch.
switch.
1
channel(s)
quando
canal est
no modo
channel(s) can
can also
also be
be adjusted
adjusted from
from the
the Flex
Flex Channel.
Channel.
oVENUE
Mouse
Pad Automation Safe, pisca no modo Solo
Safe, 22e pisca
rapidamente
quando
em
Bank
Safe.
Nveis
de
Input
Channel
tambm
podem
ser
afetados por VCAs.
Press
the
Safe
switch
in
the
ACS
Input
section.
The
switch
Press
the
Safe
switch
in
the
ACS
Input
section.
The
switch
VENUE Profile Guide
Input
channel
levels
can
also
be
VCAs.
For
more
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
GPI
devices)
Para
mais
informaes,
veja
Atribuindo
etoby
Utilizando
VCAs
Input
channel
levels
can
also
be affected
affected
by
VCAs.
For
morena
lights
lights solid
solid when
when the
the current
current channel
channel is
is Automation
Automation Safe,
Safe,
information,
see
Assigning
and
Using
VCAs
on
page
86.
Two when
(2) console
lights
Delay flashes
pgina
86.
information,
see
Assigning
and
Using
VCAs
on
page
86.
the
channel
is
Solo
Safe,
and
flashes
rapidly
flashes when the channel is Solo Safe, and flashes rapidly
Protective
Dust
Cover
when
in
Bank
Safe.
when
in Bank
Safe.
Um delay
varivel
pode
ser aplicado a qualquer Input Channel ou FX
Channel
Faders
Channel
Faders
ChannelProfile
Faders Expansion Options
Rack(s) (see next)
VENUE
Return. O alcance do delay de 0 a 250 milissegundos.
Delay
Delay
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and Cables
ParaRacks,
aplicar delay
a um canal
pela
console:
A
A variable
variable delay
delay can
can be
be applied
applied to
to any
any Input
Input Channel
Channel or
or FX
FX
Each
Mix Encoder
Rack or FOH
Rack includes:
Return.
The
range
0
1 Na
seo
Assignment,
pressioe
o milliseconds.
switch Delay para
Return.
The delay
delay
range is
is from
from
0 to
to 250
250
milliseconds.
atribuir oSystem
controleRestore
de delay
aos codificadores rotativos.
CD
To
delay
channel
from
console:
apply
ECx Ethernet
Control
To
apply
delay to
to a
a
channelSoftware
from the
theInstaller
console:CD
2 Pressione o codificador rotativo atribudo para aplicar delay ao
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
1
In
the
Encoder
Assignment
section,
Delay
canal.1OIn
LED
codificador
se acende
quandopress
delaythe
aplicado.
thedoEncoder
Assignment
section,
press
the
Delay switch
switch
to
assign
delay
control
to
the
rotary
encoders.
assign
iLok USB
Smart
Key to
(for
storing
authorizations)
to
delay
control
the
rotaryplug-in
encoders.
3 Ajuste
codificador
atribudo
aoany)
delaywith
parapre-authorized
ajustar a quantidade
o
Plug-in
installer
discs
(if
iLok
2
the
rotary
2 Press
Press
the assigned
assigned
rotary encoder
encoder to
to apply
apply delay
delay to
to the
the chanchandesejada
de delay
para o canal.
Two (2)
IEC power cables
nel.
nel. The
The encoder
encoder indicator
indicator LED
LED lights
lights when
when delay
delay is
is applied.
applied.
3
Adjust
the
assigned
Delay
encoder
to
set
the
desired
3 Adjust the assigned Delay encoder to set the desired amount
amount
of
delay.
Each
Stage Rack
includes:
of channel
channel
delay.
OsChannel
ChannelFaders
Fadersprovide
oferecem
controle
nvel from
dos
canais
channel
level de
control
(INF)
Channel
Faders
provide
channel
control
from
(INF)de
The
following
options
can be
addedlevel
to VENUE
Profile
systems.
(INF)
a
+12
dB.
Use
os
faders
da
console
ou
na
tela
para
ajustar
to
+12
dB.
Use
the
faders
on
the
console,
or
on-screen,
todetails
+12 dB.
the
faders
on the console, or on-screen, to
to adadFor
onUse
all
VENUE
systems
individualmente
oschannel
nveis de
canais.and options, visit the Avid
just individual
levels.
just individual
channel levels.
website
(www.avid.com).
Mix
Para
maisinformation
informaes
agrupamento
debanking,
faders de
For more
more
on sobre
input and
and
output fader
fader
For
information on
input
output
banking,
entrada
e
sada
em
bancos,
veja
o
Captulo
5,
Navegao
e
see Chapter
Chapter
5, Navigating
Navigating and
and Selecting
Selecting Channels.
Channels.
Rack
Options
see
5,
Seleo
de Canais.
I/O Options
outputs
digital I/O.
Chapter
Chapter 7:
7: Inputs
Inputs and
and Input
Input Routing
Routing 77
77

Fontes
Digitais
de Entrada
Digital
Input
Sources
systemsque
that includeuma
a DSI (Digital Stage Input) card, the
EmOn
sistemas
Digital
Inputincluem
Sources placa DSI (Digital Stage Input), os
following
additional
settings
and displays
are provided.
seguintes
ajustes
e displays
adicionais
esto presentes.
On systems that include a DSI (Digital Stage Input) card, the
following additional settings and displays are provided.
Lock LED
SRC Off
Source
Lock LED
SRC Off
Source
Input de
controls
a DSI
channel
Controles
entradafor
para
um canal
DSI
Lock LED Indicates lock status for the channel, and mirrors
Lock
LEDcontrols
Indica for
o status
de lock de um canal, e espelha o mesmo
Input
a DSI channel
the same LED on the DSI card.
LED na placa DSI.
Lock LED Indicates lock status for the channel, and mirrors
SRC Off Toggles Sample Rate Conversion on or off for that
LED
on the DSI
SRCthe
Offsame
Alterna
a Sample
Ratecard.
Conversion entre ligada e desligada
channel, and mirrors the same LED on the DSI card. A lit SRC
para aquele canal, e espelha o mesmo LED na placa DSI. Um switch
Off
indicates
thatRate
SRCConversion
is disabled. on or off for that
SRCswitch
Off Toggles
Sample
SRC apagado indica que o SRC est desligado.
channel, and mirrors the same LED on the DSI card. A lit SRC
ADAT (Source) Enables the ADAT Optical port as the active in-
Off(Source)
switch indicates
is disabled.
ADAT
Habilita athat
portaSRC
ADAT
Optical como fonte de entrada
put source on the DSI card. When lit, the DSI card is clocking
ativa na placa DSI. Quando aceso, a placa DSI card est travada e
and
to
corresponding
ADAT
input;
the
ADATlistening
(Source)
Enables
the ADAT
Optical
portwhen
as thedark,
active
inseguindo
a entrada
ADAT
correspondente;
quando
apagado,
o canal
channel
is receiving
input
corresponding
AES
input.
put
source
onsinal
the da
DSI
card.from
When
lit,
the DSI card is
clocking
est
recebendo
entrada
AESthe
correspondente.
and listening to corresponding ADAT input; when dark, the
Direct
Outs
aresempre
also available
onthe
DSI-fed
channels,
andinput.
their
channel
is
receiving
input
from
corresponding
AES
Direct
Outs
esto
disponveis
nos
canais
alimentados
pelo
point
can de
be specified
in the
patchbay.
DSI,pickoff
e seus
pontos
alimentao
podem
ser especificados no
Direct Outs are also available on DSI-fed channels, and their
patchbay.
pickoff point can be specified in the patchbay.
Using Input Direct
Utilizando Input Direct
Input Direct mode lets you completely bypass the built-in dy-
Using Input Direct
namicsInput
and Direct
EQ processing,
and all inserts
on input em
channels
O modo
permite colocar
completamente
bypass
FXDirect
returns.
This
mode
input
directly
Input
mode
lets
you routes
completely
bypass
the built-in
dyos and
processadores
de
dinmica
e EQ, the
e todos
ossignal
inserts
de Input
Channels
eand
FX
Returns.
Estepickoff
modo
enderea
o input
sinal
de
entrada
from
the
Top
ofprocessing,
Channel
toinserts
the channel
fader.
namics
EQ
and all
on
channels
diretamente
do ponto
de mode
alimentao
alto do
faderdirectly
de canal.
and FX returns.
This
routes mais
the input
signal
from
the Top
of Channel
tochannel
the channel
To
bypass
all processing
onpickoff
an input
or FXfader.
return:
Para colocar em bypass todos os processadores em um Input

1 Target
theReturn:
channel by pressing its Select switch.
Channel
ou FX
To bypass all processing on an input channel or FX return:
2 Go to the Inputs page.
1 Selecione
canal
pressionando
seuits
switch
Select.
1 Target o
the
channel
by pressing
Select
switch.
3 Click the Input Direct button in the Config section of the In2 Go
to the
Inputs page.
2 V
Inputs.
putspgina
page for
the selected channel. The button flashes to indicate
Input
modebutton
is active.
3
Click
theDirect
Input Direct
in the Config section of the In3 Clique no boto Input Direct na seo Config da pgina Inputs
puts page for the selected channel. The button flashes to indido canal selecionado. O boto pisca para indicar que o modo Input
cateest
Input
Direct mode is active.
Direct
ativo.
Input Direct
Input
Direct
button
Input
Direct
Input
Boto
InputDirect
Directbutton

Chapter 8: Outputs and Output Routing

Chapter
8:
and
Routing
Captulo
8: Sadas
e Roteamento
de Sadas
Chapter
8: Outputs
Outputs
and Output
Output
Routing
Stage Rack Features
Stage
Racksshows
are used
anthe
FOH
Rack, and provide all stage
This
chapter
howwith
to do
following:
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to busses
two Stage Racks
This
Configure
name
Mains,
and
chapterand
shows
how
to dooutputs
the following:
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96 total inputs.
Este This
captulo
ensina
como:
chapter
shows
to
the
This
chapter
shows
how
to do
do
the following:
following:
Assign
outputs
andhow
busses
to hardware
outputs
in the
Configure
and
name
Mains,
outputs
and busses
Configurar
e
nomear
Mains,
sadas
e
busses
Configure
Configure and
and name
name Mains,
Mains, outputs
outputs and
and busses
busses
Patchbay
Audio
Atribuir
e busses
para to
ashardware
sadas de
hardware
Assign
outputs
and busses
outputs
in theno
I/Osadas
Assign
outputs
and busses
busses
to hardware
hardware
outputs
in the
the
Patchbay
Route
outputs
to Mains,
Groups,
Aux Sends,
and Matrix
Assign
outputs
and
to
outputs
in
Patchbay
48
inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps and
Patchbay
mixers
Patchbay
Rotear
sadas para Mains, Groups, Aux Sends e mixers Matrix
individually
Route outputs
to Mains,
Groups,power.
Aux Sends, and Matrix
selectable
Usar
de plug-ins
eand
EQphantom
grficos
nas
sadas
inserts
Route
outputs
to
Groups,
Aux
Sends,
and
Using
plug-in
inserts,
using
Graphic
EQ
on outputs
Route
outputs
to Mains,
Mains,
Groups,
Aux
Sends,
and Matrix
Matrix
mixers
8mixers
analog
outputDirect
channels;
Atribuir
e
enderear
Outputs
mixers
Assign
and
route
Direct
Outputs
digital
Using
plug-in de
inserts,
using
Ajustar
parmetros
canais
de
sada Graphic EQ on outputs
outputs
per
Stageand
Rack.
Using
plug-in
inserts,
and using
using Graphic
Graphic EQ
EQ on
on outputs
outputs
Using
plug-in
inserts,
and
Adjust
output
parameters
Usar
VCAs
Assign
andchannel
route Direct
Outputs
Assign
and
route
Direct
Outputs
Assign
andand
route
DirectI/O
Outputs
Synchronization
Use
VCAs output
Control
Adjust
channel
parameters
Adjust
Adjust output
output channel
channel parameters
parameters
Snake
Use VCAs
Configurando
Sadas
Use
applicable)
Use VCAs
VCAs
connection to a VENUE FOH Rack.
Configuring
Outputs
Os
seguintes tipos de
busses de sada esto disponveis: Mains,
Groups
(ou
Variable
Groups),
Auxes, mixers Matrix e Personal Qs.
Configuring Outputs
The following types of output busses are available: Mains,

Configuring
Outputs
System
Components
Groups
(or Variable
Groups), Auxes, Matrix mixers, and
Mains
The following types of output busses are available: Mains,
The
following
types
of
busses
are
Mains,
Personal
Qs.
The
following
types Groups),
of output
outputAuxes,
bussesMatrix
are available:
available:
Groups
(or Variable
mixers,Mains,
and
Groups
(or
Variable
Groups),
Auxes,
Matrix
mixers,
and
Groups
(or
Groups),
Auxes, nos
Matrix
mixers,
and ou
Os busses
Main
podem ser
configurados
formatos
LR+M
Included
Components
Personal
Qs.Variable
Personal
Qs.
LCR.
Os busses
Main so controaldos pelos controles dedicados
Personal
Qs.
Mains
All VENUE
Profile
e fader
Mains na
seosystems
Output. include the following:

The following
components must be purchased separately:
3 Click
Edit.
3Video
ClickDisplay
Edit.
3 33Clique
Click
Edit.
ClickEdit.
Edit.
recommended;
DVI supported.

Setting
theconnection
Main bus configuration
The
a Digital
Snakebus
cable.
cable
canBusses.
be purchased directly
athe
configurao
do
bus This
Mainthe
Setting
Main
configuration
4 Ajustando
Select
the
configuration
for
Main
Setting
the
bus
Setting
the Main
Main
bus configuration
configuration
from Avid
or assembled
by your preferred vendor.
4
Select
configuration
foros
thebusses
Main
Busses.
5 4
Click
Apply.the
system restarts
with
the new
Main bus conSelecione
aThe
configurao
para
Main.
4
4 Select
Select the
the configuration
configuration for
for the
the Main
Main Busses.
Busses.
figuration.
5 Click Apply. The system restarts with the new Main bus conComponents
5
Click
Apply.
The
system
restarts
with
new
Main
5Optional
Clique
O
sistema
novas
5
ClickApply.
Apply.
The
systemreinicia
restartscom
withasthe
the
newconfiguraes
Main bus
bus concon-do
figuration.
bus
Main.
figuration.
figuration.
The
following components are optional, and must be
Groups
Groups
Eight
Group busses are available. These Group busses can be
Groups
Groups
globally configured to be mono or stereo as part of the system
Eight
Groupof
busses
available.
Group
busses can be
transfer
Showare
data;
512 MBThese
or larger
recommended)
Aux/Group
bus configuration.
See Configuring
Aux,
Group,
Eight
Group
busses
are
available.
These
Group
busses
can be
Eight
Group
busses
arebe
available.
These
Group
be
Oito
busses
Group
esto
disponveis.
Esses
Group
podem
globally
configured
to
mono or
stereo
asbusses
partbusses
ofmonitoring
the can
system
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
and
Variable
Group
Busses
on
page
80.
globally
configured
to
be
mono
or
stereo
as
part
of
the
system
globally
configured
to
be
mono
or
stereo
as
part
of
the
system
ser
globalmente
configurados
para
serem
mono
ou
estreo
como
Aux/Group bus configuration. See Configuring Aux, Group,
Headphones
with 1/4-inch
jack
Aux/Group
configuration.
See
Configuring
Group,
Aux/Group
bus
configuration.
See
Configuring
Aux,
Group,
partes
de umabus
configurao
deon
bus
Aux/Group.
VejaAux,
Configurando
andoutputs
Variable
Group
Busses
page
Group
can
be controlled
from
the80.
faders and encoders
and
Variable
Group
Busses
on
page
80.
Dynamic
or
condenser
microphone
and
XLR
mic
cable
Busses
Aux, Group
e Variable
na 80.
pgina 80.
and Variable
Group
BussesGroup
on page
VENUE
in the Output section.
TheMains
Main
bussesProfile
can beconsole
configured in LR+M or LCR for(foroutputs
Talkback)
Group
can be controlled from the faders and encoders
Mains
Configurando
os
busses
Main
Group
outputs
can
be
the
faders
and
mats.The
Main
busses
are cables
controlled from the dedicated
Two
(2) IEC
power
Group
outputs
can ser
be controlled
controlled from
from
the
faders
and encoders
encodersna
Sadas
Group
podem
pelos
fader
e codificadores
inSee
the
Output
section.
The Main busses can be configured in LR+M or LCR forFootswitches
(up tocontroladas
2)
Chapter
9,
Groups.
in
the
Output
section.
Mains
controls
and
fader
inVGA
the Output
section.
The
Main
busses
can
be
configured
in
LR+M
or
LCR
forseo
Output.
in
the
Output
section.
The
Main
busses
can
be
configured
in
LR+M
or
LCR
for
Monitor
mount
for
screen
(screen
not
included)
mats. Main
The Main
busses
are controlled
from
the como:
dedicated
Os busses
podem
ser configurados
para
operar
mats.
The
Main
busses
are
from
the
See Chapter 9, Groups.
mats.
The
Main
busses
areincontrolled
controlled
from
the dedicated
dedicated
Trackball
mount
(trackball
included)
Mains
controls
and
fader
thenot
Output
section.
See
9,
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
VejaChapter
o Captulo
9, Groups.Word clock between the
See
Chapter
9, Groups.
Groups.
Auxes
Mains
controls
and
fader
in
the
Output
section.
Configuring
the
Main
Busses
Mains
controls
and
fader
in
the
Output
section.
LR plus
Mono Mouse
Posiciona
VENUE
Pados sinais entre os canais esquerdo
e direito
para o busthe
LR,
e soma
os sinais para um bus mono Up to
Auxes
16 Aux busses are available. The number of available
Main
Busses
Auxes
VENUE
Guide
TheConfiguring
Main
bussesProfile
can be
configured
to operate as either:
Auxes
independente.
Configuring
the
Main
Busses
Configuring the Main Busses
Aux busses is set as part of the system Aux/Group bus configUp to 16 Aux busses are available. The number of available
Two (2)busses
console
canlights
be between
configured
operate
as either:
LR The
plusMain
Monobusses
Pans signals
theto
left
and right
chanuration.
Aux,
Group,The
and
Variable
Up16
toSee
16Configuring
AuxAux
busses
are
available.
The
number
ofGroup
available
At
busses
esto
disponveis.
O nmero
de
busses
Aux
Up
16
Aux
busses
are
available.
number
of
available
The
Main
can
be
configured
to
operate
as
either:
Auxtobusses
is set
as part
of
the system
Aux/Group
bus configThe
Main
busses
can
be
configured
to
operate
as
either:
LCR
Posiciona
os
sinais
entre
os
canais
esquerdo,
direito
e
the
Protective
Dust
ajustado
como
parte
configurao
de bus
Aux/Group
doconfigsistema.
nels to
LR bus,
andCover
sums signals to a separate mono bus.
Busses
pageis
Aux on
busses
is80.
set as
asda
part
of the
the system
system
Aux/Group
bus
configAux
busses
set
part
of
Aux/Group
bus
central.
LR plus Mono Pans signals between the left and right chanuration. See Configuring Aux, Group, and Variable Group
Veja
Configurando
Busses
Aux,
Group
e Variable
GroupGroup
na pgina
Rack(s)
(seePans
next)signals
LR
plus
Mono
between
the
left
and
chanuration.
See
Configuring
Aux,
Group,
and
Variable
Group
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
LR
plus
Mono
Pans
signals
between
the
left
and right
right
chanuration.
See
Configuring
Aux,
Group,
and
Variable
nels
to
the
LR
bus,
and
sums
signals
to
a
separate
mono
bus.
Busses
on
page
80.
LCR
Pans
signals
across
left,
center
and
right
channels.
Aux
bus
outputs
can
be
controlled
from
the
Output
faders.
80.
nels
mono bus.
Busses on
on page
page 80.
80.
nels to
to the
the LR
LR bus,
bus, and
and sums
sums signals
signals to
to a
a separate
separate mono
bus.
Busses
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
Cables
LCR
Pans
signals
across
left,
center
and
right
channels.
Aux
bus
outputs
can besee
controlled
from
the Sends
Output
faders.
O
udio
pode
ser
interrompido
ou
ter
seus
nveis
alterados
AudioPans
may signals
be interrupted
or may
change
levels during
this
For
moreoutputs
information,
Chapter
10,
Aux
and
As
sadas
busses
Auxbe
podem
ser and
controladas
Output.
For
details
on
all VENUE
systems
options,
visitfaders
the
Avid
LCR
across
center
and
Aux
bus
can
controlled
from
the
Output
faders.
LCR
Pansesse
signals
across left,
left,de
center
and right
right channels.
channels.
Aux
busdos
outputs
can
be
controlled
from
thepelos
Output
faders.
durante
procedimento
configurao.
configuration
procedure.
Variable
Groups.
Each Mix
Rack
orbe
FOH
Rack includes:
website
(www.avid.com).
Audio
may
interrupted
or may change levels during this
For
more information, see Chapter 10, Aux Sends and
Paramore
mais
informaes,
o Captulo
10,Sends
Auxand
Sends e
Audio
be
interrupted
or
For
information,
see
Chapter
10,
Audio may
may
be procedure.
interrupted
or may
may change
change levels
levels during
during this
this
For
more
information,
see veja
Chapter
10, Aux
Aux
Sends
and
System
Restore
CD
configuration
Variable
Groups.
To configure
the Main busses:
Variable Groups.
configuration
procedure.
Variable
Groups.
configuration
procedure.
Variable
Groups.
Variable
Groups
Para configurar
os busses
Main: Software Installer CD
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Mix Rack
Options
1 Put
systemthe
into
Config
mode.
To the
configure
Main
busses:
Variable
Standalone
Software
Installer CD
Variable
Groups
To
the
Main
busses:
When
the Groups
system
is in Variable Groups mode, the 8 Group
To configure
configure
theno
Main
busses:
1 Coloque
o sistema
modo
Config.
Variable
Groups
1 to
Put
the
system
into
Config
mode.
2 Go
the
Options
page
and
click
the
System
tab.
I/O
Options
busses
operate
in
much
the same way as Aux busses.
iLok
Smart
Key
(for storing
1 Put
Put
theUSB
system
into
Config
mode.plug-in authorizations)
When o
the
systemest
is inno
Variable
Groups mode,
the
Group
1
the
system
into
Config
mode.
Quando
sistema
modo Variable
Groups,
os8oito
busses
When
the
system
is
in
Variable
Groups
mode, the
2 V 2pgina
Options
e clique
aba
System.
When
the
system
is insimilar
Variable
Groups
the 8
8 Group
Group
Plug-in
installer
discs
(if
any)
with
Go
to the
Options
pagena
and
click
thepre-authorized
System tab. iLok
busses
operate
in
much
the
same
way
asmode,
Aux
busses.
Group
operam
de
modo
aos
busses
Aux.
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
that
provides
16
analog
When
set
to
Variable
Groups
mode,
the
Output
section
has
16
2
to
Options
page
and
busses
2 Go
to the
the
Options
page
and click
click the
the System
System tab.
tab.
busses operate
operate in
in much
much the
the same
same way
way as
as Aux
Aux busses.
busses.
Go
Two
(2) IEC
power
cables
mic/line
level
inputs
available
Aux
busses
and 8 available Variable Group busses,
When set
to Variable
Groups
mode,
the Groups,
Output section
has
16
Quando
ajustada
para
o
modo
Variable
atoseo
Output
One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console letting
youset
send
independently
controllable
signalssection
all 24
When
to
Groups
mode,
Output
has
When
set
to Variable
Variable
Groups
mode, the
the
Output
section
has 16
16
available
busses
and
available
Variable
Group
busses,
AO16
Analog
Output
provides
16 analog
line
level
possui
16 Aux
busses
AuxCard
e 88that
busses
Variable
Group
disponveis,
busses
in the Aux
system.
available
busses
and
8
available
Variable
Group
busses,
available
Aux
busses
and
8
available
Variable
Group
busses,
letting youenviar
send independently
controllable signals
to all 24
permitindo
sinais independentemente
controlveis
para
outputs
letting
you
send
independently
controllable
letting
you
send
independently
controllable signals
signals to
to all
all 24
24
todos
os
24
busses
do
sistema.
busses
in
the
system.
Variable
Groups
mode
is
set
as
part
of
the
system
Aux/Group
busses
in
system.
busses
in the
theand
system.
XO16
Analog
Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
bus configuration. See Configuring Aux, Group, and Variable
Variable
Groups
mode
set digital
as part
of the
system
Aux/Groupde
Oline
modo
Variable
Groups
ajustado
como
parte
da configurao
level
outputs,
and 8isAES
outputs.
Group
Busses
on page
80.is
Variable
Groups
mode
set
part
the
system
Aux/Group
Variable
Groups
mode
is Veja
set as
as
part of
of
theGroup,
system
Aux/Group
bus
Aux/Group
do sistema.
Configurando
Busses
Aux,
Group e
bus
configuration.
See Configuring
Aux,
and
Variable
bus
configuration.
See
Configuring
Aux,
Group,
and
bus
configuration.
See
Configuring
Aux,
Group,
and
Variable
AT16
A-Net
Output
Card
that
provides
16
channels
ofVariable
A-Net
Variable
Group
na
pgina
80.
Group Busses on page
80. 8: Outputs and Output Routing
Chapter
79
Group
Busses
page
80.
Groupcompatible
Busses on
on with
page Aviom
80.
output
Personal Mixers and other
Pro16 Series devices. Chapter 8: Outputs and Output Routing 79
Chapter
Chapter 8:
8: Outputs
Outputs and
and Output
Output Routing
Routing 79
79
digital I/O.
Captulo 8: Sadas e Roteamento de Sadas 79

Matrix Mixers and Personal Qs

Matrix
Mixers
andPersonal
Personal
Qsare available.
Eight
Eight Matrix
Matrix mixers
mixers and
and 88 Personal
Q
Q mixers
mixers are
available.
Matrix
Matrix
Mixers
and
Personal
Personal
Qs
Qs
Mixers
Matrix
eMixers
Personaland
Qs
Matrix
Mixers
and
Personal
Qs
Data
Data Cleared
Cleared When
When Changing
Changing Bus
Bus Configurations
Configurations
Data
Data
Cleared
Cleared
When
When
Changing
Changing
Bus
Bus
Configurations
Configurations
Dados
Apagados
nas
Alteraes
de Configurao
de Bus
Data
Cleared
When
Changing
Bus
Data Cleared When Changing BusConfigurations
Configurations
When
When the
the bus
bus configuration
configuration is
is changed,
changed, all
all settings
settings are
are
When
When
the
the
bus
configuration
configuration
isischanged,
ischanged,
changed,
all
all
settings
settings
are
are
Eight
Eight
Matrix
Matrix
mixers
mixers
and
and
8 Personal
8 Personal
Personal
QQmixers
Qmixers
mixers
are
are
available.
available.
When
the
bus
all
settings
are
Eight
Matrix
mixers
are
Oito
mixers
Matrix
e oito
mixers
Q
disponveis.
Cada cleared
Quando
abus
configurao
de
bus
alterada,
os
ajustes
das
cleared
(or
(or
set
set
to
toconfiguration
default)
default)
from
from
the
the
current
current
console
console
settings
settings
Each
Each
Matrix
Matrix
mixer
mixer
is
is aaand
discrete
discrete
12-in/1-out
12-in/1-out
(mono)
(mono)
submixer,
submixer,
When
the
bus
configuration
is changed,
alltodos
settings
are
Eight
Matrix
mixers
and8 8Personal
Personal
Q esto
mixers
areavailable.
available.
cleared
cleared
(or
(or
set
set
to
to
default)
default)
from
from
the
the
current
current
console
console
settings
settings
Each
Each
Matrix
Matrix
mixer
mixer
isisaisadiscrete
adiscrete
discrete
12-in/1-out
12-in/1-out
(mono)
(mono)
submixer,
submixer,
cleared
(or
set
to
default)
from
the
current
console
settings
mixer
matrix
um
submixer
12-in/1-out
(mono)
distinto,
com
a
configuraes
da
console
e
de
todos
as
cenas
armazenada,
de todos
Each
Matrix
mixer
12-in/1-out
(mono)
submixer,
and
from
from all
all
stored
snapshots,
for
forthe
all
all Groups.
Groups.
with
with
the
theMatrix
ability
abilitymixer
to
to link
link
adjacent
Matrix
mixers
mixers(mono)
into
into stereo
stereo
cleared
(orstored
set to snapshots,
default) from
current console settings
Each
isadjacent
a discreteMatrix
12-in/1-out
submixer, and
from
from
allso
all
stored
stored
snapshots,
snapshots,
forfor
all all
Groups.
Groups.
with
with
the
the
ability
ability
tototo
link
link
adjacent
adjacent
Matrix
Matrix
mixers
mixers
into
into
stereo
stereo
habilidade
dePQ
associar
mixers
Matrix
adjacentes
em
pares
estreo. and
osand
grupos,
apagados
(ou substitudos
pelos valores-padro).
and
with
the
Matrix
into
pairs.
pairs.
Each
Each
PQ
mixer
mixer
is
is aaadjacent
discrete
discrete
12-in/2-out
12-in/2-out
(stereo)
(stereo)
subsubandfrom
fromallallstored
storedsnapshots,
snapshots,for
forallallGroups.
Groups.
with
theability
ability
tolink
link
adjacent
Matrixmixers
mixers
intostereo
stereo
pairs.
pairs.
Each
Each
mixer
mixer
isisaisadiscrete
adiscrete
discrete
12-in/2-out
12-in/2-out
(stereo)
(stereo)
subsubCada
mixer
PQPQ
PQ
um
submixer
distinto
12-in/2-out
(stereo).
pairs.
Each
PQ
mixer
12-in/2-out
(stereo)
submixer.
mixer.
Linking
Linking
Aux
Aux
Busses
Busses
pairs. Each PQ mixer is a discrete 12-in/2-out (stereo) subAssociando
Busses
Aux
mixer.
mixer.
Linking
Linking
Aux
Aux
Busses
Busses
mixer.
Linking
Aux
Busses
mixer.
Linking
Aux
Busses
AsMatrix
fontes
de
entrada
dos
mixers
Matrix
e
Personal
Q
podem
incluir
Matrix mixer
mixer and
and Personal
Personal Q
Q input
input sources
sources can
can include
include up
up to
to
You
You can
can link
link odd/even
odd/even bus
bus pairs
pairs and
and pan
pan input
input signals
signals into
into
Matrix
Matrix
mixer
mixer
and
and
Personal
Personal
QQ
input
Qinput
input
sources
sources
can
can
include
include
up
tototo You
You
can
can
link
link
odd/even
odd/even
bus
bus
pairs
pairs
and
and
pan
pan
input
input
signals
signals
into
into
at
12
entradas,
selecionveis
de
qualquer
combinao
deup
busses
Voc
pode
associar
pares
de
busses
mpar/par
esignals
posicionar
sinais
Matrix
mixer
and
can
include
up
You
can
link
odd/even
bus
pairs
and
pan
input
12
12
inputs,
inputs,
selectable
selectable
from
from any
any
combination
combination
of
of
Aux,
Aux,
Group
Group
or
or to those
those
bus
bus
pairs.
pairs.
Aux
Aux
bus
bus
pairs
pairs
are
are
linked
linked
on
on
a
a
global
global
basis,
basis,
and
and
Matrix
mixer
andPersonal
Personal
Q
inputsources
sources
can
include
up
You
can link
odd/even
bus
pairs
andAux
panso
input
signalsinto
into
Aux,
Group
ou
Mains
acrescidos
de
at
8 Input of
Channel,
FX
returns
de
entrada
nesses
pares.
Pares
de
bus
associados
na
base
12
12
inputs,
inputs,
selectable
selectable
from
from
any
any
combination
combination
Aux,
ofAux,
Aux,
Group
Group
ororor those
those
bus
bus
pairs.
pairs.
Aux
Aux
bus
bus
pairs
pairs
are
are
linked
linked
on
on
a
global
a
global
basis,
basis,
and
and
12
inputs,
selectable
from
any
combination
of
Group
those
bus
pairs.
Aux
pairs
are
linked
on
a aglobal
Mains
Mains
busses
busses selectable
plus
plus up
up to
tofrom
88 unique
unique
input
input channels,
channels,
FX
FX returns
returns
appear
asbus
linked
linked
on
on
all
allbus
channels.
channels.
For
For
information
information
on
onbasis,
linking
linking
12 inputs,
any combination
of pr
Aux,
Group or appear
thoseas
pairs.
Aux
bus
pairs
are
linked
on
global
basis,and
and
ouMains
entradas
de
hardware.
Os
pontos
de
alimentao
e
ps-fader
global
e
aparecem
como
associados
em
todos
os
canais.
Para
Mains
busses
busses
plus
plus
up
up
to to
88unique
8unique
unique
input
input
channels,
channels,
FX
FX
returns
returns appear
appear
asaslinked
aslinked
linked
on
on
all
channels.
channels.
For
For
information
information
on
on
linking
linking
busses
plus
up
channels,
FX
returns
appear
on
allall
channels.
For
information
on
linking
or
orMains
hardware
hardware
inputs.
inputs.
PrePreand
post-fader
post-fader
tap
tap
for
forPickoffs
Matrix
Matrix
and
and
PQ
PQ
Auxes,
Auxes,
see
see
Linking
Linking
Aux
Aux
and
Variable
Variable
Group
Group
Busses
Busses
for
for
Stereo
Stereo
Mains
busses
plus
uptoand
to
8atribudos
uniqueinput
input
channels,
FX
returns
appear
as
linked
on
alland
channels.
For
information
onAssociando
linking
para
as
fontes
Matrix
e
PQ
so
na
aba
da
pgina
informaes
sobre
associao
de
busses
Aux,
veja
ororhardware
orhardware
hardware
inputs.
inputs.
PrePreand
and
post-fader
post-fader
tap
tap
forfor
Matrix
Matrix
and
and
PQPQ Auxes,
Auxes,
seesee
Linking
Linking
Aux
Aux
and
and
Variable
Variable
Group
Group
Busses
Busses
forfor
Stereo
Stereo
inputs.
Prepost-fader
Matrix
and
Auxes,
Linking
Aux
and
Group
sources
sources
are
are assigned
assigned
in
in
the
theand
Pickoffs
Pickoffs
tab
tab of
oftap
the
thefor
Options
Options
page.
page.
Operation
on
on
page
95.
95.
or hardware
inputs.
Preand
post-fader
tap
for
Matrix
andPQ
PQ Operation
Auxes,see
see
Linking
Aux
andVariable
Variable
GroupBusses
Bussesfor
forStereo
Options.
Busses
Aux
epage
Variable
Group
para
Operao
Estreo
naStereo
pgina
sources
sources
are
are
assigned
assigned
ininin
the
the
Pickoffs
Pickoffs
tab
tab
ofofof
the
the
Options
Options
page.
page.
Operation
Operation
on
on
page
page
95.
95.
sources
are
assigned
the
Pickoffs
tab
the
Options
page.
Operation
95.
sources are assigned in the Pickoffs tab of the Options page.
Operationon
onpage
page95.
95.
User
User
Source
Source input
input
assignments
assignments
are
are stored
storedso
in
in Snapshots
Snapshots as
as em
Atribuies
deinput
entrada
personalizadas
User
User
Source
Source
input
assignments
assignments
are
are
stored
stored
ininarmazenadas
Snapshots
inSnapshots
Snapshots
asasas
Naming
Channels
User
Source
input
assignments
are
stored
part
part
of
of
their
their
distinct
distinct
Matrix
Matrix
or
or
PQ
PQ
data
data
type.
type.
Snapshots
como
parte
dos tipos are
de dados
ou PQ.
Nomeando
Canais
User Source
input
assignments
stored Matrix
in Snapshots
as
Naming
Naming
Channels
Channels
part
part
of
their
of
their
distinct
distinct
Matrix
Matrix
or
PQ
or
PQ
data
data
type.
type.
Naming
Channels
part
of
their
distinct
Matrix
or
PQ
data
type.
Naming
Channels
part of their distinct Matrix or PQ data type.
Output
Output channel
channel names
names can
can be
be changed
changed from
from the
the Outputs
Outputs page
page
Matrix
mixer
mixer
and
and PQ
PQMatrix
mixer
mixer outputs
outputs
are
arecontroladas
controlled
controlled from
from the
the
Output
Output
channel
channel
names
names
can
can
bebebe
changed
changed
from
the
the
Outputs
Outputs
page
page
AsMatrix
sadas
dos
mixers
e
PQ
so
pelos
faders
Os
nomes
dos
canais
de
sada
podemfrom
ser
alterados
pela
pgina
Output
channel
names
can
changed
from
the
Outputs
Matrix
Matrix
mixer
mixer
and
and
PQ
PQ
mixer
mixer
outputs
outputs
are
are
controlled
controlled
from
from
the
the
or
or
from
from
the
the
Patchbay.
Patchbay.
Output channel names can be changed from the Outputspage
page
Matrix
mixer
and
mixer
outputs
are
from
output
faders;
faders;
matrix
matrix
inputs
inputs
are
are
controlled
controlled
from
from
the
the
encoders
encoders
deoutput
sada;
as
entradas
Matrix
so
controladas
pelos
codificadores
Outputs
ou
pelo
Patchbay.
Matrix
mixer
andPQ
PQ
mixer
outputs
arecontrolled
controlled
fromthe
the
oror
or
from
from
the
the
Patchbay.
Patchbay.
output
output
faders;
faders;
matrix
matrix
inputs
inputs
are
are
controlled
controlled
from
from
thethe
encoders
encoders
orfrom
fromthe
thePatchbay.
Patchbay.
output
faders;
matrix
inputs
are
when
when
aauma
particular
particular
matrix
matrix
is
is selected.
quando
matrix
particular
selected.
selecionada.
output
faders;
matrix
inputs
arecontrolled
controlledfrom
fromthe
theencoders
encoders
when
when
a
particular
a
particular
matrix
matrix
is
selected.
is
selected.
To
To
change
change
the
the
name
name of
of
an
Output
Output
channel:
channel:
when
a
particular
matrix
is
selected.
Para
alterar
o
nome
dean
uman
canal
Output:
when a particular matrix is selected.
ToToTo
change
change
the
the
name
name
of
an
of
Output
Output
channel:
channel:
change
the
name
of
an
Output
channel:
See
See
Chapter
Chapter
11,
11, Matrix
Matrix
and
andMatrix
Personal
Personal
Q
Q Mixers.
Mixers.
To change
the name
of an
Output
channel:
Veja
o Captulo
11,
Mixers
e Personal
Q.
11 Go
Go
to
to the
the Outputs
Outputs
page
page
or
or the
the Patchbay
Patchbay
page.
page.
See
See
Chapter
Chapter
11,
11,
Matrix
Matrix
and
and
Personal
Personal
Q
Mixers.
Q
Mixers.
See
11
1V
Go
to
to
the
the
Outputs
Outputs
page
page
or
the
the
Patchbay
Patchbay
page.
page.
1Go
to
pgina
Outputs
ou or
or
pgina
Patchbay.
Go
the
Outputs
page
the
Patchbay
page.
SeeChapter
Chapter11,
11,Matrix
Matrixand
andPersonal
PersonalQQMixers.
Mixers.
Configuring Aux, Group, and Variable Group

Configurando
Busses
Aux,
Group
e Variable
Group
Configuring
Configuring
Aux,
Aux,
Group,
Group,
and
and
Variable
Variable
Group
Group
Configuring
Aux,
Busses
Configuring
Aux,Group,
Group,and
andVariable
VariableGroup
Group
Busses
Busses
Busses
Busses
Auxes
e
Groups
(ou
Variable
Groups)
compartilham
os
Auxes
Auxes and
and Groups
Groups (or
(or Variable
Variable Groups)
Groups) share
share the
the available
availablebusses
syssys-
1 Go to the Outputs page or the Patchbay page.

22 Target
Target
the
the channel
channel whose
whose name
name you
you want
want to
to change
change by
by
2 2Target
2Target
Target
thethe
channel
channel
whose
whose
name
name
you
you
want
want
tototo
change
change
by by
whose
name
want
pressing
pressing
its
itsthe
Select
Select
switch
switch
or
or
selecting
selecting
it
it
on-screen.
on-screen.
22Selecione
ochannel
canal
cujo
nome
vocyou
quer
alterar
pressionando
Target
the
channel
whose
name
you
want
tochange
changeby
by
seu
pressing
pressing
itsitsits
Select
Select
switch
switch
or or
selecting
selecting
ititon-screen.
iton-screen.
on-screen.
pressing
switch
selecting
switch
Select
ou selecionado-o
na tela.
pressing
itsSelect
Select
switchoror
selecting
it on-screen.
33 Double-click
Double-click
the
the channel
channel
name.
name.
3 Double-click
3Double-click
Double-click
the
the
channel
channel
name.
name.
the
name.
Auxes
Auxes
and
and
Groups
Groups
(or(or
Variable
Variable
Groups)
share
share
the
the
available
available
sys-sys- 333Clique
Double-click
thechannel
channel
name.
disponveis
no
sistema.
Opes
deGroups)
configurao
incluem:
duas vezes
no
nome do
canal.
Auxes
and
Groups
Groups)
share
the
tem
tem
busses.
busses.
Configuration
Configuration
options
options
include
include
the
the
following:
following:
Auxes
and
Groups(or
(orVariable
Variable
Groups)
share
theavailable
availablesyssystem
tem
busses.
busses.
Configuration
Configuration
options
options
include
include
the
the
following:
following:
tem
busses.
Configuration
options
include
the
following:
tem+busses.
Configuration
options
include
the following:
8 88
Auxes
8+ Stereo
Groups
Divide
os busses
disponveis
nobusses
sistema
Auxes
Auxes
+
88 Stereo
Stereo
Groups
Groups
Divides
Divides
the
the available
available
system
system
busses
88Auxes
8Auxes
Auxes
++8+8Stereo
8Aux
Stereo
Groups
Groups
Divides
Divides
the
the
available
available
system
system
busses
busses
entre
8
busses
mono
e
8
busses
Group
stereo.
Stereo
Groups
Divides
the
available
system
between
between
88 mono
mono
Aux
Aux busses
busses and
and
88 stereo
stereo
Group
Group busses.
busses.
8 Auxes
+ 8 Stereo
Groups
Divides
the available
systembusses
busses
between
between
88mono
8mono
mono
Aux
Aux
busses
busses
and
and
88stereo
8stereo
stereo
Group
Group
busses.
busses.
between
Aux
busses
and
Group
busses.
between 8 mono Aux busses and 8 stereo Group busses.
1616
Auxes
+ 8++Mono
Groups
Divide
os busses
disponveis
no sistema
16
Auxes
Auxes
88 Mono
Mono
Groups
Groups
Divides
Divides
the
the available
available
system
system
busbus16
16
Auxes
Auxes
+ 8+8Mono
8Aux
Mono
Groups
Groups
Divides
Divides
the
the
available
available
system
system
busbus- Changing
entre
16
busses
mono
e8
busses
Group
mono.
16
Auxes
Divides
the
available
system
busChanging the
the name
name of
of an
an Output
Output channel
channel in
in the
the Outputs
Outputs page
page
ses
ses
between
between
16
mono
mono
Aux
Aux
busses
busses
and
and
88 mono
mono
Group
Group
busses.
busses.
16
Auxes+16
+ 8Mono
MonoGroups
Groups
Divides
the
available
system
busChanging
the
the
name
name
ofofan
of
Output
Output
channel
ininOutputs
the
inthe
the
Outputs
Outputs
page
page
Alterando
othe
nome
de um
canal
Output
nachannel
pgina
ses
ses
between
between
16
16
mono
mono
Aux
Aux
busses
busses
and
and
88mono
8mono
mono
Group
Group
busses.
busses. Changing
Changing
name
anan
Output
channel
Outputs
page
ses
between
16
mono
Aux
busses
and
Group
busses.
Changing
the
name
of
an
Output
channel
in
the
Outputs
page
ses between 16 mono Aux busses and 8 mono Group busses. 44 Type
Type
a
a
new
new
name
name
and
and
press
press
Enter
Enter
on
on
the
the
computer
computer
keykey1616
Auxes
++
8+ Variable
Groups
(24(24
Bus)
Divide
os busses
disponveis 4 Type
16
Auxes
Auxes
88 Variable
Variable
Groups
Groups
(24
Bus)
Bus)
Divides
Divides
the
the available
available
4Type
Type
a
new
a
new
name
name
and
and
press
press
Enter
Enter
on
on
the
the
computer
computer
key4
a
new
name
and
press
Enter
on
the
computer
key16
16
Auxes
Auxes
+
8+8Variable
8Variable
Variable
Groups
Groups
(24
(24
Bus)
Bus)
Divides
Divides
the
the
available
available
44 Digite
um
novo
nome
e pressione
Enter
no keyteclado
board.
board.
nosystem
sistema
entre
16
busses
Aux
mono
e
8
busses
Variable
Group
Type
a
new
name
and
press
Enter
on
the
computer
key- do
16
Auxes
+
Groups
(24
Bus)
Divides
the
available
system
busses
busses
between
16
16Groups
mono
mono(24
Aux
AuxBus)
busses
busses
and
and 88 the
mono
mono
VariVari16 Auxes
+ between
8 Variable
Divides
available
board.
board.
board.
computador.
system
system
busses
busses
between
between
16
16
mono
mono
Aux
Aux
busses
busses
and
and
88mono
8mono
mono
VariVarimono
(habilita
o
modo
Variable
Groups).
board.
system
busses
between
16
mono
Aux
busses
and
Variable
able
Group
Group
busses
busses
(enables
(enables
Variable
Groups
Groups
mode).
mode).
system
busses
between
16Variable
mono Aux
busses
and 8 mono VariWhen
When naming
naming channels
channels in
in the
the Patchbay,
Patchbay, double-click
double-click the
the
able
able
Group
Group
busses
busses
(enables
(enables
Variable
Variable
Groups
Groups
mode).
mode).
able
Group
busses
(enables
Variable
Groups
mode).
When
When
naming
naming
channels
channels
ininthe
inthe
the
Patchbay,
Patchbay,
double-click
double-click
the
the no
able
Group
busses
(enables
Variable
Groups
mode).
When
naming
channels
Patchbay,
double-click
the
Quando
nomeando
canais
no
Patchbay,
clique
duas
vezes
channel
channel
name
name
next
next
to
to
the
the
grid
grid
to
to
edit
edit
text;
text;
press
press
Tab
Tab
on
on
the
the
O
udio
pode
ser
interrompido
ou
ter
seus
nveis
alterados
When naming channels in the Patchbay, double-click
the
Audio
Audio may
may be
be interrupted
interrupted or
or may
may change
change levels
levels during
during this
this
channel
channel
name
name
next
next
to
the
to
the
grid
grid
to
edit
to
edit
text;
text;
press
press
Tab
Tab
on
on
the
the
nometo
dogo
canal
prximo
ao grid
para
editar
oTab
texto;
pressione
channel
name
to
the
grid
totoedit
text;
press
onon
the
Audio
Audio
may
may
bebebe
interrupted
interrupted
orormay
or
may
change
change
levels
levels
during
during
this
this
durante
esse
procedimento
de
configurao.
keyboard
keyboard
to
go
to
tonext
the
the
next
next
channel
channel
and
and
Shift+Tab
Shift+Tab
to
to go
go
to
to
channel
name
next
to
the
grid
edit
text;
press
Tab
the
Audio
may
interrupted
may
change
levels
during
this
configuration
configuration
procedure
procedure
Audio may be interrupted or may change levels during this
keyboard
keyboard
to
go
to
go
to
the
to
the
next
next
channel
channel
and
and
Shift+Tab
Shift+Tab
to
go
to
go
to
Tab
no
teclado
para
ir
para
o
prximo
canal
e
Shift+Tab
para
keyboard
gogototothe
next
channel
and
Shift+Tab
totogogototo
configuration
configuration
procedure
procedure
the
the
previous
previoustochannel.
channel.
keyboard
to
the
next
channel
and
Shift+Tab
to
configuration
procedure
configuration
procedure
the
the
previous
previous
channel.
channel.
ir
para
o
anterior.
Para
configurarthe
os busses
Aux/Group/Variable
the
To
To configure
configure
the
Aux/Group/Variable
Aux/Group/Variable
Group
Group Group:
busses:
busses:
theprevious
previouschannel.
channel.
ToToTo
configure
configure
the
the
Aux/Group/Variable
Aux/Group/Variable
Group
Group
busses:
busses:
configure
the
Aux/Group/Variable
Group
busses:
To
configure
the
Aux/Group/Variable
Group
busses:
Put
Put the
theo system
system
into
Config
Config
mode.
mode.
1 11Coloque
sistemainto
no modo
Config.
1 1Put
1Put
Put
the
the
system
system
into
into
Config
Config
mode.
mode.
Assigning
Busses
toSadas
Hardware
Outputs
the
system
into
Config
mode.
Atribuindo
Busses
Para
De Hardware
Assigning
Assigning
Busses
Busses
to
toHardware
Hardware
Outputs
Outputs
22 Go
Go to
to the
the Options
Options page
page and
and click
click the
the System
System tab.
tab.
Assigning
Busses
to
Hardware
Outputs
2 2VGo
pgina
Options
e
clique
na
aba
System.
Assigning
Busses
to
Hardware
Outputs
Go
tototo
the
the
Options
Options
page
page
and
and
click
click
the
the
System
System
tab.
tab.
Mains,
Mains,
Groups
Groups
(or
(or
Variable
Variable
Groups),
Groups),
Auxes,
Auxes,
Matrix
Matrix
mixer
mixer
outout2 2Go
the
Options
page
and
click
the
System
tab.
Mains,
Groups
(ou
Variable
Groups),
Auxes,
sadas
de
mixers
Matrix
Mains,
Mains,
Groups
Groups
(or
(or
Variable
Variable
Groups),
Groups),
Auxes,
Auxes,
Matrix
Matrix
mixer
mixer
outout33 Click
Click Edit.
Edit.
Mains,
(or
Variable
Groups),
Auxes,
mixer
outputs
puts
and
andGroups
PQ
PQ
mixer
mixer
outputs
outputs
can
can
be
be assigned
assigned
to
toMatrix
any
any hardware
hardware
Mains,
Groups
(or
Variable
Groups),
Auxes,
Matrix
mixer
out-de
3
Click
3
Click
Edit.
Edit.
3 Clique
Edit.
e
sadas
de
mixers
PQ
podem
ser
atribudas
a
qualquer
sada
3 Click
Edit.
puts
puts
and
and
PQ
PQ
mixer
mixer
outputs
outputs
can
can
be
be
assigned
assigned
to
to
any
any
hardware
hardware
puts
PQ
mixer
can
bebeassigned
totoany
hardware
3 Click Edit.
output
output
on
on
the
system.
system.
Available
Available
output
output
destinations
destinations
include:
include:
putsand
andthe
PQsistema.
mixeroutputs
outputs
can
assigned
any
hardware
44 Select
Select
aa bus
bus configuration.
configuration.
hardware
do
Destinos
de
sada
disponveis
incluem:
output
output
on
on
the
the
system.
system.
Available
Available
output
output
destinations
destinations
include:
include:
4 4Select
4Select
Select
a abus
abus
bus
configuration.
configuration.
output
on
the
system.
Available
output
destinations
include:
configuration.
Stage
Stage
audio
audio
outputs
outputs
output
on
the
system.
Available
output
destinations
include:
4 Selecione
uma
configurao
de
bus.
4 Select a bus configuration.
Stage
Stage
Stage
audio
audio
outputs
outputs
audio
outputs

Sadas
de
udio
Stage
FOH
FOH
(local)
(local)
audio
audio
outputs
outputs
Stage
audio
outputs
FOH
FOH
FOH
(local)
(local)
audio
outputs
outputs
Sadas
deaudio
udio
FOH
(local)
(local)
audio
FOH
(local)
audiooutputs
outputs
Pro
Pro
Tools
Tools
recording
recording
inputs
inputs
Entradas
de
gravao
do Pro Tools
Pro
Pro
Pro
Tools
Tools
recording
recording
inputs
inputs
ProTools
Toolsrecording
recordinginputs
inputs
To
ToPara
assign
assign
aa bus
busuma
or
or mixer
mixer
output
output
tomixer
aa hardware
hardware
output
output
from
from
the
the
atribuir
sada
bus
outo
para uma
sada
de
hardware
To
To
assign
assign
a abus
abus
bus
orormixer
or
mixer
output
output
totoa
toahardware
ahardware
hardware
output
output
from
from
the
the
To
assign
mixer
output
output
from
the
Patchbay:
Patchbay:
pelo
Patchbay:
To
assign
a
bus
or
mixer
output
to
a
hardware
output
from
the
Patchbay:
Patchbay:
Patchbay:
Patchbay:
1
1
Go
Go
to
to
the
the
Patchbay
Patchbay
page
page
and
and
click
click
the
the
Outputs
Outputs
tab.
tab.
Selecting
Selecting aa bus
bus configuration
configuration
11
1V
Go
to
to
the
the
Patchbay
Patchbay
page
and
and
click
click
the
the
Outputs
Outputs
tab.
tab.
1Go
to
pgina
Patchbay
epage
clique
na
aba
Outputs.
Selecting
Selecting
a abus
abus
bus
configuration
configuration
Go
the
Patchbay
page
and
click
the
Outputs
tab.
Selecting
configuration
1 Go to the Patchbay page and click the Outputs tab.
Selecionando
uma
configurao
de bus
Selecting
a
bus
configuration
22 To
To
the
the left
left of
of the
the channel
channel grid,
grid, click
click the
the Mains,
Mains, PQ,
PQ, Mtx
Mtx (Ma(Ma55 Click
Click Apply.
Apply. The
The
system
system
restarts
restarts with
with the
the new
new bus
bus configuraconfigura2 2To
2 To
the
the
left
left
ofofthe
ofthe
the
channel
channel
grid,
grid,
click
click
thethe
Mains,
Mains,
PQ,PQ,
MtxMtx
(Ma(Ma5 5Click
5Click
Click
Apply.
Apply.
The
The
system
system
restarts
restarts
with
with
the
the
new
new
bus
bus
configuraconfigura- trix),
the
left
channel
grid,
Mains,
Apply.
The
system
restarts
with
the
new
bus
configura22To
To
esquerda
do
grid
detab.
canais,
clique
nas
abas PQ,
Mains,
PQ,
Mtx
trix),
Aux
Aux
or
or
Grp
Grp
(Groups)
(Groups)
tab.
tion.
tion.
the
left
of
the
channel
grid,click
clickthe
the
Mains,
PQ,Mtx
Mtx(Ma(Ma5
Click
Apply.
The
system
restarts
with
the
new
bus
configuratrix),
trix),
Aux
Aux
or
or
Grp
Grp
(Groups)
(Groups)
tab.
tab.
5 tion.
Clique
Apply.
O
sistema
reinicia
com
as
novas
configuraes
de
tion.
trix),
Aux
or
Grp
(Groups)
tab.
(Matrix),
Aux
ou
Grp
(Groups).
tion.
trix), Aux or Grp (Groups) tab.
bus. tion.
80
80 VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Guide
80
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
8080VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Guide
3 Click in the channel grid to assign a bus or Matrix/PQ mixer

3 In the Bus Assigns section, press the LR (left and right) or
3 Click
in the
grid grid
to assign
a busa or
Matrix/PQ
mixer
In3the
section,
presspress
the LR
and and
right)
or or
3 Click
inchannel
the channel
to assign
bus
or Matrix/PQ
mixer 3
In Bus
the Assigns
Bus Assigns
section,
the (left
LR (left
right)
3 3InNa
the
Bus
Assigns
section,
press
the
LR
(left
or
C/Mono
(center/mono)
switch
so that
it is lit.
seo
Bus Assigns,
pressione
o switch
LRand
(leftright)
and right)
ou
Clickno
in the
grid
toaassign
auma
busoutput
or
Matrix/PQ
mixer
(listed
on
left)
to
hardware
(listed
3 3output
Clique
grid channel
de the
canais
para
sada
de bus across
ou
mixer
output
(listed
on
the
to aatribuir
hardware
output
(listed
across
output
(listed
on left)
the left)
to
a hardware
output
(listed
across
output
(listed
on
the
left)
to
a
hardware
output
(listed
across
the top). (listadas esquerda) a uma sada de hardware (listadas
Matrix/PQ
the top).
the
top).
the
top).
ao alto).
3 Click in the channel grid to assign a bus or Matrix/PQ mixer
Stage Rack Features
output (listed on the left) to a hardware output (listed across

Stage
the Racks
top). are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage
Assigning an output in the Patchbay Outputs page
Assigning
an output
in theinPatchbay
Outputs
page page
Audio
I/O
Assigning
an output
the Patchbay
Outputs
Assigning
an output
in the Patchbay
Outputs
page
C/Mono
(center/mono)
switch
so that
it is lit.
C/Mono
(center/mono)
switch
so that
it is lit.
C/Mono
(center/mono)
switch
so that
it is lit.
C/Mono (center/mono) para que fique aceso.
3 In the Bus Assigns section, press the LR (left and right) or

C/Mono
(center/mono) switch
so that it is lit.
Center/Mono
LeftCenter/Mono
LeftLeftThe
be Center/Mono
Rightfollowing components mustCenter/Mono
Left-

RightRight
Right

recommended;
1024x768 minimum
Center/Mono
LeftDVIRight
supported.
Groups
Groups
Groups
USB
keyboard
Groups
name mic
of the
bus or and
48Patchbay
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
preamps
The The
Patchbay
Outputs
pagepage
shows
the name
of the
bus
or
Outputs
shows
the
name
of
the
bus
or
The
Patchbay
Outputs page
shows
the name
of the
bus or bemixer
and
its
destination.
The
destination
is
also
displayed
individually
selectable
power.
and
its
destination.
The phantom
destination
is also
displayed
A mixer
pgina
Patchbay
Outputs
mostra
nome
do
bus
ou mixer
ebeseube- Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
mixer
and
its
destination.
Theodestination
is also
displayed
Assigning
an
output
Patchbay
Outputs
page
mixer
and
its
destination.
The
destination
also
displayed
below
the
channel
nameininthe
the
Outputs
pageisand
Patchbay
OutGroups
low the
name
in
the
Outputs
page
and
Patchbay
Out O
8channel
analog
output
channels;
expandable
up
to
48
analog
or
destino.
destino
tambm
apresentado
abaixo
do
nome
do
canal
low
the
channel
name
in
the
Outputs
page
and
Patchbay
low the
channel name in the Outputs page and Patchbay Out-Out- The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
puts
page.
The
Patchbay
Outputs
page
shows
the
name
of
the
bus
or
nas
pginas
Outputs
e
Patchbay
Outputs.
putsputs
page.
puts page.page.
a Digital Snake cable. This cable
can be purchased directly
mixer and its destination. The destination is also displayed beStereo Pan
Stereo
Pan Panvendor.
Stereo
from
Avid
or
assembled
by
your
preferred
Stereo
Pan
low the channel
name
in the
Outputs page and Patchbay OutSynchronization
and
Control
I/O
Bus Assign switches
puts page.
Bus Assign
switches
Bus Assign
switches
Switches
deswitches
atribuio
de bus
Bus
Assign
Components
4 Optional
Move the channels
fader to set the Stereo
GroupPan
output level.
4 Move
the
channels
faderfader
to set
output
level.level.
4 Move
the channels
tothe
set Group
the Group
output
4 4Move
the
channels
fader
to
set
the
Group
output
level.
Nome
e destino
na pgina Patchbay
Outputs Outputs page
Output
nameOutput
and destination
in the Patchbay
Mova
o fader do
canal para are
ajustar
o nveland
de
sada
do
The
following
components
optional,
must
be Group.
Output
name
and
destination
in
the
Patchbay
Outputs
page
Output
and destination
the Patchbay
Outputs
BusRouting
Assign switches
Output
namename
and destination
in theinPatchbay
Outputs
page page
Group
Indication on Output Encoders
Group
Routing
Indication
on
Output
Encoders
purchased
separately:
Group
Routing
Indication
on do
Output
Encoders
Group
Routing
Indication
on Output
Encoders
Indicao
de
nos output
Codificadores
de
4 Move
the Endereamento
channels
faderportable
to setGroup
the
Group
level.
Output
encoder
indicator
LEDs
indicate
Main
bus assign
USB
flash
disk
(or
other
USB
storage
device
for
System
Components
Sada
Endereando
Sadas
Group
aos
Busses
Output
encoder
indicator
LEDs
indicate
Main
bus
assignRouting
Group
Outputs
to
the
Output
encoder
indicator
LEDs
indicate Main
bus assignOutput name
and destination
in the Patchbay
Output
encoder
LEDs
indicate
assignRouting
Group
Outputs
to
ments as
follows:
transfer
ofindicator
Show data;
512
MB or Main
largerbus
recommended)
Routing
Group
Outputs
toOutputs
the page
Routing
Group
Outputs
to the
the
ments
as follows:
Mains
ments
as follows:
Group
Routing
Indication on Output Encoders
Mains
Busses
ments
as
follows:
Mains
Busses
Os LEDs
indicadores
dos codificadores
indicammonitoring
as atribuies
Near-field
monitor
speakers for Output
mix position
Mains
Busses
Included
Components
Mains
Busses
OffdoGroup
routing
tose
Mains
is turned off.
bus
Main
como
segue:
Off
Group
routing
to
Mains
is
turned
off.
Output
encoder
indicator
LEDs
indicate
Main
bus
assignYou can route Group outputs to the Main busses from the conOff
Group
routing
to Mains
is turned
Headphones
1/4-inch
jack
Off Group
routing
towith
Mains
is turned
off. off.
You
can
route
Group
outputs
to the
busses
fromfrom
the conVoc
pode
enderear
sadas
Group
para
os busses
Main
pela
Routing
Group
Outputs
to
the
You
can
route
Group
outputs
toMain
the
Main
busses
the
conAll
VENUE
Profile
systems
include
the
following:
You
can
route
Group
outputs
to
the
Main
busses
from
the
conments
as
follows:
sole or ou
on-screen.
Yellow
Group
output
is routed microphone
to the Mains and
LR XLR
bus. mic cable
Endereamento
Dynamic
or condenser
console
naon-screen.
tela.
sole sole
or on-screen.
Yellow
Group
output
is routed
to the
Mains
LR
bus.
OffYellow
do
Group
para
Mains
est
desligado.
Busses
or
Group
output
is routed
to
the Mains
LR bus.
sole Mains
or
on-screen.
Yellow
Group
output
is routed
to the
Mains
LR bus.
VENUE
Profile console
(for
Talkback)
Off
Group
routing
to
Mains
is
turned
off.
Green
Group
output
is
routed
to
the
Mains
C/M
bus.
To route
acan
Group
output
tooutputs
the
Main
busses
from
the
ACS:
Two
(2)
IEC
power
cables
Para
enderear
uma
sada
Group
para
busses
Main
pelo
ACS:the con- Green
output
is
routed
the
C/M
bus.
You
route
Group
toos
the
Main
busses
from
Amarelo
AGroup
sada
do (up
Group
est
paraC/M
o bus
Mains LR.
Green
output
is routed
to Mains
the Mains
bus.
To route
a Group
output
to the
busses
from
the
ACS:
Group
Footswitches
to
2) to
Green
Group
output
is
routed
toendereada
the
Mains
C/M
bus.
To route
a Group
output
to Main
the Main
busses
from
the ACS:
To route
a
Group
output
to
the
Main
busses
from
the
ACS:
sole
or
on-screen.
Monitor
mount
for
VGA
screen
(screen
not
included)
Yellow
Group
output
is
routed
to
the
Mains
LR
bus.
Red Group
output
is(for
routed
to both the
MainsMIDI
LR bus
and the
1 Press the Groups switch in the Output Fader assignment sec
MIDI
cables
connecting
external
devices)
Red
Group
output
is routed
toendereada
both
the Mains
LR
bus
and
Press
theoGroups
switch
in
Fader
assignment
sec- sec1 11Pressione
switch
Groups
nathe
seo
Fader
para
atribuir
Red
output
is est
routed
to both
the
Mains
LR
bus the
and
the
1 Press
the
Groups
switch
inOutput
the Output
Output
Fader
assignment
Verde
AGroup
sada
para
o bus
Mains
C/M.
Group
output
is routed
to both
the Mains
LR
bus
and
the
Press
the
Groups
switch
in
the
Output
Fader
assignment
sec- o Red
Mains
C/M
bus.do Group
tion
assign
control
of (trackball
Group
levels
the faders.
to Trackball
mount
not to
included)
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
the
Mains
C/M
bus.
tion tion
to dos
assign
control
of
Group
levels
to
the
faders.
controle
nveis
Group
aos
faders.
Green
Group
output
is
routed
to
the
Mains
C/M
bus.
Mains
to assign
control
oftoGroup
levels
to faders.
the
faders.
Mains
C/MC/M
bus. bus.
tion To
to
assign
control
of
Group
levels
to
the
route
a
Group
output
the
Main
busses
from
the
ACS:
VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE
system
and external
digital devices)
Vermelho
A sada
do Group
est endereada
para ambos os busses
route
aGroup
Groupoutput
outputistorouted
the Main
busses
Red
to
both
theon-screen:
Mains
LR
bus and the
1 Press
the Profile
GroupsGuide
switch in the Output Fader assignment sec- To
VENUE
LR
e
Mains
C/M.
ToMains
route
a
Group
output
to
the
Main
busses
on-screen:
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
to
GPI
devices)
To route
a Group
output
to Main
the Main
busses
on-screen:
To route
a Group
output
to the
busses
on-screen:
Mains
C/M
bus.
tion
to
assign
control
of
Group
levels
to
the
faders.
1 Go to the Outputs page and select the channel fader strip tor
1 Go1to
the
pagepage
and select
the channel
faderfader
stripstrip
tor tor
Go
toOutputs
the Outputs
and
select
the
channel
enderear
a sada
de select
umthe
Group
para
os
busses
1 Para
GoGroup
to
the
Outputs
page
and
the
channel
fader
strip Main
tor na
the
you
want
to route
to
Main
busses.
the
Group
you
want
to
route
to
the
Main
busses.
the
Group
you
want
to
route
to
the
Main
busses.
tela:
the
Group
you
want
to
route
to
the
Main
busses.
To route a Group output to the Main busses on-screen:
Rack(s) (see next)
2 VENUE
Click the Bus
Assign buttons
on-screen toOptions
toggle the bus asProfile
Expansion
2 Click
the
Bus
Assign
buttons
on-screen
tochannel
toggle
the
bus
as2
Click
the Outputs
Bus Assign
buttons
on-screen
to toggle
thestrip
bustor
as1
Go
to
page
and
select
the
fader
2 1Click
the
Bus
Assign
buttons
on-screen
to
the
assignment
for
the
selected
Group.
V pgina Outputs e selecione a rgua toggle
de canal
dobus
Group
que
Groups switch
signment
for
the
selected
Group.
signment
for
the
selected
Group.
Groups
switch
the
Group
you
wantos
to
route
to
the
Main busses.
The
following
options
can
be added
to VENUE
Profile systems.
signment
for the
selected
Group.
Groups
switch
deseja
enderear
para
busses
Main.
Groups
switch
Racks,
Software
2 Click the Bus Assign buttons on-screen to toggle the bus asEach Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes:
2website
Clique (www.avid.com).
os botes Bus Assign na tela para alterar a atribuio de
signment
for the selected Group.
Groups
switch
Assigning
Groups
to the Output
faders
bus do Group selecionado.
System
Restore
CD
Assigning
Groups
to
the
Output
faders
Atribuindo
Groups aos
faderstoOutput
Assigning
Groups
the Output faders
Atribuindo
uma sadaOutputs
na pgina page
Patchbay
Outputs
The Patchbay
shows
the
Assigning Groups to the Output faders
2 Select
each
Group that
you Software
want to assign
to CD
the Main bus ECx
Ethernet
Control
Installer
2 Select each Group that you want to assign to the Main bus-
2 Select
each
Group
that
you
to assign
tobusses
the Main
bus2Selecione
Select
each
Group
thatque
you
wantwant
toatribuir
assign
to
the
Main
bus2 ses
cada
Group
deseja
aos
Main
by
their
Select
switches.
pressing
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
ses by
pressing
their
Select
switches.
ses
by
pressing
their
Select
switches.
Assigning
Groups
toSelect
the Output
faders
pressionando
seus
switches
Select.
ses by
pressing
their
switches.
2 Select
each
Groupdiscs
that(if
you
want
to pre-authorized
assign to the Main
Plug-in
installer
any)
with
iLokbus-
ses by pressing their Select switches.


Mix Rack Options

I/O Options

Assigning a Group output to the Main busses from the Output page
Assigning
a Group
output
toCard
the Main
busses
from16
theanalog
Output
pagelevel
AO16
Analog
Output
thatMain
provides
line
Assigning
a Group
output
the
busses
the Output
Assigning
a Group
output
to thetoMain
busses
from from
the Output
page page
outputs
XO16
Analog
and Digital
Card
thatfrom
provides
8 analog
Assigning
a Group
output toOutput
the Main
busses
the Output
page
Atribuindo
uma
sada Output
os busses
Mains
na pgina Output
line level
outputs,
andpara
8 AES
digital
outputs.

card that
an addiChapter 8: Outputs
andprovides
Output Routing
81
Chapter
8: and
Outputs
and Output
Routing
81 81
Chapter
8: 8
Outputs
and of
Output
Routing
I/O
channels
AES/EBU
Chapter
8: Outputs
and Output
Routing
81
digital I/O.
Chapter
8: Outputs and
OutputProfile
Routing5 81
Chapter
1: Introduction
to VENUE
Using
UsingInserts
Insertson
onOutput
OutputBusses
Busses
Using Inserts on Output Busses
You
Youcan
canuse
usesoftware
softwareplug-in
plug-ininserts
insertsand
andgraphic
graphicEQ
EQon
onMains,
Mains,
Using
Inserts
on
Output
Busses
You
can
use
software
plug-in
inserts
and
graphic
EQ
on Mains,
Groups,
Auxes,
and
Matrixes.
Groups, Auxes, and Matrixes.
Utilizando
Insertsand
em
Busses Output
Groups, Auxes,
Matrixes.
You can use software plug-in inserts and graphic EQ on Mains,

Groups,
Auxes,
and
Matrixes.
Using
Plug-In
Inserts
on
Voc
pode utilizar
inserts
de
plug-ins
EQ
grficoBusses
em
Mains, Groups,
Using
Plug-In
Inserts
oneOutput
Output
Busses
AuxesUsing
e Matrixes.
Plug-In
ofthe
Click
the Hardware
Insertthe
button
tofrom
go
tothe
the
Inserts
page
of
and
insert
thePatchbay,
Patchbay,
andassign
assign
the
insert
from
thePatchbay.
Patchbay.
Click the Hardware Insert button to go to the Inserts page
Clique
noPatchbay,
boto Hardware
Insert
pgina
Inserts do
of the
and assign
the para
insertir from
the Patchbay.
Click
toto pelo Patchbay.
Patchbay, e atribua
o insert
Click
assign
assign
Click to
assign
Click to
assign
Inserts on Output Busses
You
Youcan
caninsert
insertplug-ins
plug-inson
onOutput
Outputbusses
bussesdirectly
directlyfrom
fromthe
the
Using
Plug-In
Inserts
on
Output
Busses
You
can
insert
plug-ins
on
Output
busses
directly
from the
Outputs
page.
Outputs
page.
Usando
Inserts
de Plug-In em Busses Output
Outputs page.
You can insert plug-ins on Output busses directly from the
Voc
pode ainserir
em busses
To
insert
on
bus:
ToOutputs
insert
aplug-in
plug-inplug-ins
onan
anoutput
output
bus: Output diretamente pela
page.
pgina
ToOutputs.
insert a plug-in on an output bus:
11 Go
Gototothe
theOutputs
Outputspage
pageand
andtarget
targetthe
thebus
buswhere
whereyou
youwant
want
1
Go
to
the
Outputs
page
and
target
the
bus
where
you want
to
insert
the
plug-in.
To
insert
plug-inem
on um
an output
bus:
toinseris
insert
theaplug-in
plug-in.
Para
um
bus Output:
to insert the plug-in.
1
Go
to
the Outputs
page
targetpage,
the bus
where
you
want
22In
section
Outputs
do
Inthe
theInserts
Inserts
sectionof
ofthe
theand
Outputs
page,
doone
oneofofthe
thefolfol1 V to
pgina
Outputs
e selecione o bus em que deseja inserir o
insert
the plug-in.
2 In
the Inserts
section of the Outputs page, do one of the following:
lowing:
plug-in.
lowing:
ofofthe
four
pop-up
and
choose
Click
one
the
fourInserts
Inserts
pop-upmenus
menus
and
choose
2 Click
In
theone
Inserts
section
of
the Outputs
page,
do
one
of theaafol
Click
one
of
the
four
Inserts
pop-up
menus
and
choose a
plug-in
directly
from
one
of
the
Plug-In
Rack
submenus.
2 Na lowing:
seo
Inserts
da pgina
plug-in
directly
fromOutputs:
one of the Plug-In Rack submenus.
plug-in
directly
frommenus
one ofpop-up
the Plug-In
Rack
submenus.
Clique
em
um
dos
quatro
Inserts
e
escolha
um
Click one of the four Inserts pop-up menus and choose a
or
or
plug-in
diretamente
de
um
dos
submenus
Plug-In
Rack.
or
one of
plug-in
from
onebuttons
of
the Plug-In
Rack
Inserts
totogo
the
Plug-In
Click
one directly
ofthe
thefour
four
Inserts
buttons
gototo
thesubmenus.
Plug-In
ou Click
Rack,
Click
one
of
the
four
Inserts
buttons
to
go
to
the
Plug-In
Rack,
and
route
the
signal
to
the
plug-in
using
Plug-In
and
route
the
signal
to
the
plug-in
using
Plug-In
Clique
em
um
dos
quatro
botes
Inserts
para
ir
ao
Plug-In
Rack,
or
Rack,
and
route
the osignal
to utilizando
the plug-inosusing
Plug-In
Rack
controls.
e enderece
o
sinal
para
plug-in
controles
do
Rack
controls.
Click one of the four Inserts buttons to go to the Plug-In
Rack
controls.
Plug-In
Rack.
Rack, and route the signal to the plug-in using Plug-In
Rack controls.
Click
Clicktoto
assign
assign
Click to
assign
Click to
Assigning
aaPlug-In
Insert
inpgina
the
page
Assigning
Plug-In
Insert
theOutputs
Outputs
assign
Atribuindo
um Insert
de plug-in
na in
Outputs page
Assigning a Plug-In Insert in the Outputs page
Click
Clicktoto
go
goto
tothe
theto
Click
Plug-In
Plug-In
go to the
Rack
Rack
Plug-Into
Click
Rack
go to the
Plug-In
The
Thename
nameofofthe
theplug-in
plug-ininsert
insertappears
appearsininthe
theon-screen
on-screen
Rack
O Plug-In
nome
plug-in
inserido
aparece
noappears
boto
na tela.
Thedo
name
of
the Insert
plug-in
insert
in the Insert
on-screen
Assigning
a Plug-In
in the
Outputs
pagePlug-In
Insert
button.
Plug-In
Insert
button.
Plug-In Insert button.

The
name
of the plug-in
insert
appears
in theveja
on-screen
Para
instrues
completas
sobre
plug-ins,
o Captulo
For
Forcomplete
completeinstructions
instructionson
onplug-ins,
plug-ins,see
seeChapter
Chapter18,
18,
18,For
Plug-Ins.
Plug-In
Insert
button.
complete instructions on plug-ins, see Chapter 18,
Plug-Ins.
Plug-Ins.
Plug-Ins.
Usando Inserts
de Hardware
em Busses
Output see Chapter 18,
For complete
instructions
on plug-ins,
Using
Hardware
UsingPlug-Ins.
HardwareInserts
Insertson
onOutput
OutputBusses
Busses
Click
Clicktoto
go
goto
tothe
theto
Click
Patchbay
Patchbay
go to the
Patchbay
Click to
go to the
Patchbay
Assigning
Assigningaahardware
hardwareinsert
insertininthe
theOutputs
Outputspage
page
Assigning a hardware insert in the Outputs page
The
Thename
nameofofthe
thehardware
hardwareinsert
insertdestination
destinationappears
appearsininthe
the
Atribuindo
um
insert
de hardware
na
pgina
Outputs
The
name
of
the
hardware
insert
destination
appears in the
Assigning
a
hardware
insert
in
the
Outputs
page
on-screen
Hardware
Insert
button.
on-screen Hardware Insert button.
on-screen Hardware Insert button.
The name
of thedo
hardware
destination
appears
in the
O nome
do destino
insert de insert
hardware
aparece no
boto Hardware
Setting
Hardware
Insert
Location
Setting
theHardware
Hardware
Insert
Location
on-screen
Insert
button.
Insert
nathe
tela.
Setting the Hardware Insert Location
You
can
the
ofofthe
hardware
You
canchoose
choose
thelocation
location
the
hardwareinsert
insertininthe
thesigsigAjustando
a the
localizao
do Insert
de Hardware
Setting
Hardware
Insert
Location
You
can
choose
of the
hardware
insert
in the signal
path,
relative
to
the
four
inserts,
for
channel.
nal
path,
relative
tothe
thelocation
fourplug-in
plug-in
inserts,
foreach
each
channel.
nal path,insert
relative
to not
the
four
plug-in
inserts, for
each channel.
AA
hardware
to be
currently
assigned
totodo
hardware
insertdoes
does
notneed
need
beinsert
currently
assigned
do
Voc
escolher
a localizao
de hardware
cadeia
Youpode
can choose
the
location
oftodo
the
hardware
insert inna
the
sigA
hardware
insert
does
not
need
to
be
currently
assigned
tocanal.
do
this.
this.
denal
sinal,
em
relao
aos
quarto
plug-ins
de
inserts,
para
cada
path, relative to the four plug-in inserts, for each channel.
this.
Um
de hardware
no
precisa
estar
atribudo para
isso.to do
A insert
hardware
insert does
not
need to
be currently
assigned
To
the
hardware
insert
location:
Toset
set
the
hardware
insert
location:
this.
Para
localizao
do insert
de hardware:
To ajustar
set theahardware
insert
location:
11 Go
Gototothe
theOutputs
Outputspage
pageand
andselect
selectthe
thechannel
channelwhere
whereyou
you
1
Go
to
the
Outputs
page
and
select the channel where you
want
to
set
hardware
insert
location.
To
set
the
hardware
insert
location:
want
to
set
the
hardware
insert
location.
1 V pgina Outputs e selecione o canal em que deseja ajustar a
want to set
hardware
insert location.
localizao
dothe
insert
de page
hardware.
1Inthe
Go
toInserts
the
Outputs
and
selectpage,
the
channel
where
you
22
In
section
Outputs
click
hardtheInserts
sectionof
ofthe
the
Outputs
page,
clickthe
the
hardwant
to
set
the
hardware
insert
location.
2
In
the
Inserts
section
of
the
Outputs
page,
click
the
hardware
insert
indicator
so
that
it
lights
red.
ware
insert Inserts
indicator
that Outputs,
it lights red.
2 Na seo
da so
pgina
clique no indicador de insert
ware insert indicator so that it lights red.
de2hardware
que
se
acende
em
In the Inserts section of thevermelho.
Outputs page, click the hardware insert indicator so that it lights red.
Click
Clicktotoset
set
HW
Insert
HWClick
Insert
to set
location
location
HW Insert
location
Click to set
HW Insert
location
Hardware
Inserts
onnaOutput
Busses
Voc Using
pode inserir
processadores
externos
cadeia de
sinal dos
You
insert
processors
ininthe
OutYoucan
can
insert
external
processors
thesignal
signalchain
chain
Outbusses
Output.
Osexternal
sinais dessas
fontes
so
roteados
de eofof
para
os
Using
Hardware
Inserts
on
Output
Busses
You
can
insert
external
processors
in
the
signal
chain
ofRack
Output
busses.
Signals
from
these
sources
are
routed
to
and
from
put busses.
theseanalgicas
sources areerouted
conectores
de Signals
entradasfrom
e sadas
digitaistodoand
Mixfrom
put
Signals
from theseon
sources
areRack
routed
to I/O)
and
from
analog
or
I/O
connectors
the
Mix
(FOH
or
Setting
(FOH
I/O)busses.
ou
do
FOH
Rack.
analog
ordigital
digital
I/O
connectors
on
the
I/O)
or
Settingaahardware
hardwareinsert
insertlocation
locationininthe
theInputs
Inputspage
page
You
can
insert
external
processors
inMix
the Rack
signal(FOH
chain
of Out-
analog
or digital I/O connectors on the Mix Rack (FOH I/O) or
the
FOH
Rack.
the
FOH
Rack.
put
busses.
Signals from these sources are routed to and from
Ajustando a localizao de um insert de hardware na pgina Inputs
Activating
and
Bypassing
Inserts
Activating
andinsert
Bypassing
Inserts
analog or digital I/O connectors on the Mix Rack (FOH I/O) or
Setting a hardware
location in the
Inputs page
Activating
and
Bypassing
Inserts
Assigning
Hardware
Inserts
to
Outputs
Assigning
Hardware
Inserts
to
Outputs
the
FOH
Rack.
Ativao
e
Bypass
de
Inserts
Voc Assigning
pode atribuir
inserts deInserts
hardwaretopara
os busses Output After
Afterplug-in
plug-ininserts
insertsare
areassigned
assignedtotoan
anOutput
Outputbus,
bus,they
theycan
canbe
be
Hardware
Outputs
Activating
andare
Bypassing
Inserts
After plug-in
inserts
assigned
to an
Output
bus, they
can be
diretamente
pelashardware
pginas
Outputs
Patchbay.
activated
and
from
the
or
using
You
inserts
totoOutput
activated
andbypassed
bypassed
from
theconsole
console
oron-screen
on-screen
using
Youcan
canassign
assign
hardware
insertsou
Outputbusses
bussesdirectly
directly
Aps
atribuirand
inserts
de plug-ins
a um
bus Output,eles podem ser
Assigning
Hardware
Inserts
to
Outputs
activated
bypassed
from
the
console or on-screen using
You
can
assign
hardware
inserts
to
Output
busses directly
the
corresponding
Output
page
from
the
Outputs
page
the
the
corresponding
Output
pagecontrols.
controls.
from
the
Outputs
pageor
orfrom
from
thePatchbay.
Patchbay.
After
plug-in
inserts
are
assigned
to
an
Output
they
can beos
ativados
ou
colocados
em
bypass
pela
console
oubus,
na tela
usando
Para atribuir
umOutputs
insert depage
hardware
para
um
bus:
the corresponding Output page controls.
from the
or from
the
Patchbay.
controles
correspondentes
na pgina
Output.or on-screen using
activated
and bypassed from
the console
You can assign hardware inserts to Output busses directly
To
ororbypass
bus
insert:
To
aahardware
insert
to aabus:
Toactivate
activate
bypassan
anOutput
Output
buscontrols.
insert:
Toassign
assign
hardware
insert
the
corresponding
Output
page
the
Outputs
ortofrom
theem
Patchbay.
1 V
from
pgina
Outputs
epage
selecione
obus:
bus
que deseja atribuir um
To ativar
activate
or
bypass
an
Outputum
businsert
insert:
To assign a hardware insert to a bus:
Para
ou
colocar
em
bypasse
do bus Output:
11 Target
insert
detoto
hardware.
11 Go
the
Targetthe
thebus
busby
bypressing
pressingits
itsSelect
Selectswitch.
switch.
Go
theOutputs
Outputspage
pageand
andtarget
targetthe
thebus
buswhere
whereyou
youwant
want
1
theorbus
by pressing
its bus
Select
switch.
1assign
Go
to
the
Outputsinsert.
page
and
To Target
activate
bypass
an Output
insert:
totoassign
the
To
assign
ahardware
hardware
insert
to atarget
bus: the bus where you want
the
hardware
insert.
22
the
the
1Press
Selecione
oofbus
pressionando
seu or
switch
Select.
Pressany
anyof
thePlug-In
Plug-Inswitches,
switches,
orclick
click
theHW
HWIn/Out
In/Out
2 Na to
seo
Inserts
da pgina insert.
Outputs page:
assign
the hardware
2
1
Press
Target
any
the
of
bus
the
by
Plug-In
pressing
switches,
its
Select
or
switch.
click
the
HW
In/Out
1
Go
to
the
Outputs
page
and
target
the
bus
where
you
want
button
on-screen.
The
switch
lights
when
the
Insert
isisacti2
In
the
Inserts
section
of
the
Outputs
page,
do
one
of
the
folbutton on-screen. The switch lights when the Insert
actiIn the no
Inserts
section
the Outputs
page,
do oneum
of the
fol 2 Clique
menu
pop-upofHardware
Insert
e escolha
destino
2
Pressione
qualquer
um
dos
switches
Plug-In,
ou
clique
boto
button
on-screen.
The
switch
lights
when
the
Insert
isno
actito
assign
the
hardware
insert.
2
In
the
Inserts
section
of
the
Outputs
page,
do
one
of
the
folvated.
(Hardware
insets
cannot
be
bypassed
from
the
Profile
lowing:
diretamente do menu.
vated.
(Hardware
insets
cannot
be
bypassed
from
the
Profile
lowing:
2 In/Out
Press any
of the
Plug-In
or clickothe
HW
In/Out
HW
na
tela.
Oinsets
switch
seswitches,
acende
quando
insert
est
ativado.
vated.
(Hardware
cannot
be
bypassed
from
the
Profile
lowing:
console;
use
the
on-screen
control
instead.)
use
the on-screen
control
instead.)
2 Click
Hardware
Insert
pop-up
menu
and
an
Click
the
Hardware
Insert
pop-up
menu
and
choose
an fol- console;
buttonde
on-screen.
The
lights
when
the Insert
is acti-pela
In
thethe
Inserts
section
of the
Outputs
page,
dochoose
one
of the
(Inserts
hardware
noswitch
podem
serinstead.)
colocados
em bypass
console; use
the on-screen
control
ou insert
Click
the
Hardware
Insert
pop-up
menu
and
choose
an
destination
directly
from
the
menu.
insert
destination
directly
from
the
menu.
vated.Profile;
(Hardware
insets
cannot
bypassed
from the Profile
lowing:
console
Em vez
disso,
use obe
controle
na tela.)
insert destination directly from the menu.
console; use the on-screen control instead.)
or
Click the Hardware Insert pop-up menu and choose an
or
or
insert
destination directly from the menu.
the FOH
Rack.
Atribuindo
Inserts
de Hardware s Outputs
or
82
82 VENUE
VENUEProfile
ProfileGuide
Guide
Inserting the Built-In Graphic EQs on Output

Output
Inserting the Built-In Graphic EQs on Output
Busses
A built-in
31-band Graphic EQ can be inserted on any of the
Busses
Um
equalizador
grfico de 31 bandas pode ser inserido em qualquer
Busses
Inserting
the Built-In
Graphic
EQs on
Inserindo
um EQ Grfico
Embutido nos
Busses Output
Output
Fader
Output
bus
types.
A maximum
of 24
EQs on
areany
availStage
Features
A built-in
31-band
Graphic
EQ
can
be inserted
of the
Additional
Required Components
dos
tipos
deRack
bus
Output.
Um mximo
deGraphic
24
equalizadores
grficos
Output
Adepending
built-in 31-band
Graphic
can be inserted
any inof the assignment
Output
Fader
able,
on the
how de
theyEQ
are
Foron
more
Output
bus types.
A maximum
of configured.
24
Graphic
EQs
are availest
disponvel,
dependendo
como
esto
configurados.
Para
switches
Fader
assignment
Stage
Racks
aretypes.
used A
with
an FOHof
Rack,
and provide
all stage
Output
bus
maximum
24 Graphic
EQs are
availThe
following components must be purchased separately:
formation
on
configuring
and
Graphic
mais
informaes
sobre
a configurao
e configured.
o usoEQs,
dos see
Graphic
EQs,
able,
depending
on the
howusing
they are
For more
inassignment
switches
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Stage
Racks
able,
depending
on
the
how
they
are
configured.
For
more
inswitches
veja
Graphic
EQ
para
Outputs
na
pgina
146.
Graphic
EQ
for
Outputs
on
page
146.
formation on configuring and using Graphic EQs, see
can
be used simultaneously,
supporting
up to 96EQs,
totalsee
inputs.
formation
on configuring and
using Graphic
Graphic EQ for Outputs on page 146.
Graphic
EQ
for
Outputs
on
page
146.
Para
inseriraum
Graphic
bus bus:
Output:
To insert
Graphic
EQEQ
onem
an um
Output
Audio I/O
To insert
abus
Graphic
EQ on an
Output
bus:
Target
the
by pressing
Select
switch.
1 1Selecione
o bus
pressionando
seu
boto
Select.
To
insert
a Graphic
EQ onits
an
Output
bus:
48
inputs
with remotely
controllable
mic preamps and
1 Target the bus by pressing its Select switch.
selectable
phantom
2 In theindividually
Outputs page,
click the
31-Band power.
Graphic Equalizer tab.
1 Target
the bus
by pressing
its SelectGraphic
switch. Equalizer.
2 Na pgina
Outputs,
clique
na aba 31-Band

DVI supported.
Output
Fader
controls and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
USB
keyboard
Output Fader controls
2 Move
a fader
change the level of its assigned output.
Output
Fader to
controls
Digital Output
SnakeFader
Cable
Controles
(VENUE Profile Systems Only)
2 Move a fader to change the level of its assigned output.

2 In8the
Outputs
page,
click the
31-Band Graphic
Equalizer
analog
output
channels;
expandable
up to 48
analogtab.
or
2
Move
a fader to changeFOH
the level
itsStage
assigned
3 Click
EQ
pop-up
and choose
an available
The
connection
Rack of
and
Rackoutput.
requires
2 Inthe
theGraphic
Outputs
page,
clickmenu
the 31-Band
Graphic
Equalizer tab. Tocreate
a level offsetbetween
between linked
Variable
Group
digital
outputs
perGraphic
Stage Rack.
2 Movimente
um fader
para alterar oAux
nvelbus
daor
sada.
3 mono
Clique
menu
pop-up
EQ
e Graphic
escolha
um
equalizador
ornostereo
Graphic
EQ.
The entire
EQ is
3 Click
the
Graphic
EQ
pop-up
menu
and choose
andisavailable busTo
a create
Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable
can
be
purchased
directly
output
faders:
a
level
offset
between
linked
Aux
bus
or
Variable
Group
grfico
ou Graphic
estreo. EQ
O Graphic
inteiro
apresentado
na
3 mono
Click
the
pop-up EQ
menu
and choose
an available
To
create
afaders:
level
offset between
linked
Aux bus
or Variable Group
played
on-screen.
mono
or stereo Graphic EQ. The entire Graphic EQ is disfrom
Avid
or
assembled
by
your
preferred
vendor.
bus
output
Para
criar
uma
diferena
de
nvel
entre
os
faders
do
bus
associado
tela.Synchronization
and
Control
I/O
1 Press
of the
following switches in the Output Fader asmono or stereo Graphic EQ. The entire Graphic EQ is disbus one
output
faders:
played on-screen.
played
on-screen.
GEQ (if
Snake
connectors to enable primary and redundant
applicable) connection to a VENUE FOH Rack. pop-up
GEQ
Aux
e dosection:
bus
Group: switches in the Output Fader assignment
1 Press
oneVariable
of the following
1 Press one of the following switches in the Output Fader asOptional
Components
signment
Aux 18section:
1 Pressione
um dos seguintes switches na seo de atribuio
signment section:
GEQ
pop-up
Aux
18
Aux
916
The
following
pop-up Output
Fader:
Aux 18components are optional, and must be
purchased
18
Aux
Aux
916
Groups
(when
in Variable Groups mode)
separately:
Aux
916
Graphic

Aux
916
Groups
(when
in other
Variable
Groups
mode)
EQ
USBofflash
disk (or
portable
USB
storage device for
System Components
2
Do one
the
following:
Groups
(when
Variable
Groups
mode)
Graphic
Groups
(quando
noinmodo
Variable
Groups)
Faders
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
EQGraphic
Do oneone
of the
following:
2 Touch
linked
bus output fader while moving the
EQ
Faders
2 Do
one
of
the
following:
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
2 Siga
um dosone
seguintes
Faders
other.
Included Components
Touch
linked procedimentos:
bus output fader while moving
the
Headphones
Touch
one
linked
bus
output
fader
while
moving
themove
Hold
Toque
em
um
fader
associado
ao
bus
de
sada
enquanto
with
1/4-inch
jack
other.
the Start (Win) key on the keyboard and move one
outro.
other.
Dynamic
or
condenser
microphone
and XLR
mic
cable
Aux
bus
fader
on-screen.
Segure
Hold
Start
(Win)
key
the keyboard
and
move
one
linked
athe
tecla
Start
(Win)
noon
teclado
mova um
fader
associado
(for
Hold
the
Start
(Win)
key
on theekeyboard
and
move
one
Talkback)
Aux
aolinked
bus Aux
nabus
tela.fader on-screen.
The offsetlinked
between
maintained until the offset
Auxthe
busfaders
fader ison-screen.
causes
aoffset
faderbetween
to reach the
its maximum
or minimum
value.
faders
is maintained
until
the
offset
A The
diferena
entre
os
faders
mantida
at que
um
dos
faders
atinja
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
MIDI
devices)
The
offset
between
the
faders
isexternal
maintained
until
the
offset
causes
amximo
fader toou
reach
its maximum or minimum value.
Output bus selected (Group 1)
seu
valor
mnimo.
causes
fader to
reach
its maximum
or minimum
BNCa cables
(for
connecting
Word clock
betweenvalue.
the
Graphic
EQ EQ
apresentado
Outputs
Output
buspage
selected (Group 1)
Graphic
displayednainpgina
Outputs
Output
Polarity
(Phase)
Invert
VENUE
Mousethe
Pad
Output bus selected (Group 1)
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
Inverso de Polaridade de Sada (Phase)
Graphic EQ displayed in the Outputs page
Output
Polarity
(Phase)
Invert
VENUE
Profile Guide
Graphic
EQ displayed
in the Outputs page
25-pinofD-Sub
cables bus
(for signal
connecting
GPI devices)
The polarity
any output
can betoinverted.
With
Two (2)
console lights
Ajustando
Controles
Adjusting
OutputOutput
Controls
Output Polarity (Phase) Invert
A The
polaridade
do
de qualquer
bus
pode
ser invertida.
stereo
outputs
busses)
onlyOutput
thebe
left
channel
is
polarity(stereo
of sinal
anyGroup
output
bus signal
can
inverted.
With
The
polarity
of
any
output
bus
signal
can
be
inverted.
With
Em
sadas
estreo
(busses
Group
stereo)
apenas
o
canal
esquerdo
inverted.
Protective
Dust
Cover
stereo
outputs
(stereo
Group
busses)
only
the
left
channel
is
Adjusting
Output
Controls
invertido.
stereo outputs (stereo Group busses) only the left channel is
Outputs
are
controlled
from
the
Output
faders,
encoders
and
Adjusting
Output
Controls
inverted.
As sadas
so controladas
Rack(s)
(see next) pelos faders, codificadores e switches
VENUE
inverted. Profile Expansion Options
switches.
Outputs are controlled from the Output faders, encoders and To invert
Output.
the polarity of an output bus:
Outputs are controlled from the Output faders, encoders and Para inverter a polaridade de um bus Output:
switches.
The
following
optionsofcan
added
to VENUE Profile systems.
To
invert
polarity
anbe
output
bus:
Racks,
1 Target
thethe
bus
by
pressing
its
Select
switch.
switches.
Todetails
invert
theall
polarity
of an
output
bus:
Output
Levels
For
on
VENUE
systems
and
options,
1
Selecione
o
bus
pressionando
seu
switch
Select.visit the Avid
Output Levels
1 Target the bus by pressing its Select switch.
2 Press
the(www.avid.com).
polarity
inversion
() its
switch
inswitch.
the ACS Input secEach Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes:
website
1 Target
the
bus
by
pressing
Select
Para Output
controlar osLevels
nveis de sada pelos faders Output:
tion.
The switch
lightspolarity
when the
polarity
inverted.
Press
theopolarity
inversion
()
switch
the ACS
Input
sec- O
Output
Levels
2 2Pressione
switch
inversion
() isnain
seo
Input
do ACS.
System
Restore
To control
output
levelsCD
from the Output faders:
2 Press the polarity inversion () switch in the ACS Input secswitch
se
acende
quando
a
polaridade
invertida.
tion.
The
switch
lights
when
the
polarity
is
inverted.
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Software
Installer
CDdeFader
To control
levels
from
the Output
faders:
1 1Pressione
dosfollowing
seguintes
switches
na
seo
atribuio
Mix
Options
tion.Rack
The switch
lights when the polarity is inverted.
Press
oneum
ofoutput
the
switches
in
the
Output
asTo control
output
levels from
the Output
faders:
Output
Fader:
Output
Solo
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
signment
Presssection:
one of the following switches in the Output Fader asOutput Solo
1Aux
18 one of the following switches in the Output Fader as- I/O
1 Press
Output
Solo
Options
Aux
iLok
USB
Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations)
signment
section:
18
Output
Solo
Aux
916 section:
signment
ToPara
control
the solo
status
an output
bus:Output:
controlar
o status
deofSolo
de um bus
Aux
installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok
Plug-in
Aux
18
916
Personal
Qs
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
that bus:
provides 16 analog
To
control
the
solo
status
of
an
output
Aux 18
1 Press
one of the
the solo
switches
inofthe
section.
Matrixes
Personal
IEC power cables
To control
status
anOutput
output bus:
Two
Aux(2)
916
Qs
mic/line
level
inputs
1 Pressione um dos switches da seo Output.
Aux 916
1 Press one of the switches in the Output section.
Groups
Matrixes
FOH Qs
Link cable for connection to a VENUE console 2 In 1the
Output
press anin
AFL
to section.
toggle the solo
One
Personal
Press
one section,
of the switches
theswitch
Output
VCA
Personal Qs
AO16
Analog
Output
Card that
provides
16 analog
line status
level de
2
Na
seo
Output,
pressione
o
switch
AFL
para
alternar
status
of
the
corresponding
output
bus.
2 In the Output section, press an AFL switch to
toggle othe
solo
Matrixes
Groups
outputs
Each
Stage
Rack
includes:
2
In
the
Output
section,
press
an
AFL
switch
to
toggle
the
solo
Matrixes
Solo
do of
busthe
Output
correspondente.
status
corresponding
output
bus.
Groups
VCA
status
of
the
corresponding
output
bus.
You can set Output banking to follow AFL selection, and
Two
Groups
VCA
Voc
pode
ajustar
o agrupamento
bancos
Output
viceYou
versa.
For
information
onfollow
Solo em
bus
operation,
see
can
setmore
Output
banking
to
AFL
selection,
and para
VCA
line level
outputs,
and
8AFL
AES
digital
outputs.
You
can
set
Output
banking
to
follow
AFL
selection,
and
seguir
a
seleo
e
vice-versa.
Para
mais
informaes
Chapter
14, Solo
and Monitor
Busses.
vice versa.
For more
information
on Solo bus operation, see
vice versa.
For more
information
on Solo
bus operation,
see
sobre
a operao
Solo
do bus, veja
o Captulo
14, Busses
Chapter
14, Solo
and
Monitor
Busses.
AT16 A-Net
Output
Card
that
provides
16 channels of A-Net
Solo
e Monitor.
Chapter
14, Solo and Monitor Busses.
card that
an addiChapter 8: Outputs
andprovides
Output Routing
83
I/O
and
8
channels
of
AES/EBU
Chapter 8: Outputs and Output Routing 83
digital I/O.

Output
OutputMute
Mute
Output Mute
ToTocontrol
controlthe
themute
mutestatus
statusofofananoutput
outputbus:
bus:
Para
controlar
oOutput
status
Mute
deto
um
bus
Output:
11
Bank
Bankthe
the
Output
faders
faders
tothe
the
desired
desired
type
typeofofoutput:
output:
2 2InIn
the
the
Output
Output
section,
press
pressapara
aMute
Mute
switch
tototoggle
toggle
the
1 Escolha
o banco
desection,
faders
Output
o switch
tipo
desejado
de the
sada:
mute
mutestatus
statusofofthe
thecorresponding
correspondingoutput
outputbus.
bus.
2 Na seo Output, pressione um switch Mute para alternar o status

Formore
more
information
information
ononMute
Muteoperation,
operation,see
seeChapter
Chapter15,
15,
de For
Mute
do bus
Output correspondente.
Muting
Mutingand
andMute
MuteGroups.
Groups.
Para mais informaes sobre operaes de Mute, veja o captulo

15, Muting e Mute Groups.
Output
OutputDelay
Delay
Output
Delay delay
AA
variable
variable
delay
can
can
bebe
applied
applied
toto
any
any
ofof
the
the
Main
Main
busses
busses
(L,(L,
RR
and
andC/M),
C/M),Aux
Auxbus
busoutputs,
outputs,and
andMatrix
Matrixmixer
mixeroutputs.
outputs.(Vari(Vari-
Um delay varivel pode ser aplicado a qualquer bus Main (L, R e

able
ableGroup
Groupoutputs
outputsdodonot
nothave
havethis
thisvariable
variabledelay
delayfeature.)
feature.)
C/M), sadas Aux e sadas de mixer Matrix. (Sadas Variable Group
no possuem esse recurso de delay varivel.)
ToToapply
applydelay
delaytotoananAux
Auxbus:
bus:
Par1aplicar
delay
a Aux
umbus
bus
Aux:
1Target
Target
the
theAux
busby
bypressing
pressingitsitsSelect
Selectswitch.
switch.
The
The
Left,
Left,
Right,
Right,
and
and
Center/Mono
Center/Mono
busses
busses
can
can
bebe
controlled
controlled
inindependently
dependently
or
or
in
in
tandem.
tandem.
You
You
can
can
create
create
an
an
offset
offset
between
between
Os busses Left, Right e Center/Mono podem ser controlados
any
anyofofthe
theMain
Mainbus
bus
levels,
levels,
and
andit itwill
willbebepreserved
preservedwhen
whenconconindependentemente
ou
em cooperao.
trolling
trolling
any
any
combination
combination
of
of
the
the
Main
Main
busses.
busses.
The
The
offset
offset
bebeVoc pode criar diferenas entre os nveis de qualquer bus Main, e
tween
tween
the
the
busses
busses
is ismaintained
maintained
until
until
atatleast
least
one
oneof
of
the
the
busses
busses
isso
ser
preservado
quando
controlando
qualquer
combinao
dos
busses
Main. Aordiferena
entre os busses mantida at que um dos
is
isminimized
minimized
ormaximized.
maximized.
busses atinja seu mximo ou mnimo.
Linking
LinkingMains
Mains
Associando Mains
You
You
can
can
link
link
any
any
ofof
the
the
three
three
Mains
Mains
faders
faders
for
for
grouped-control
grouped-control
Voc
pode
associar
of
oflevel
level
and
and
mute.
mute.qualquer um dos trs faders Mains para controle
em grupo de nvel e Mute.
To
Tolink
link
control
control
ofthe
theMains
Mains
bus
busoutput
output
levels:
levels:
Para
associar
o of
controle
dos nveis
de
sada
do bus Mains:
1 1InIn
the
theOutputs
Outputspage,
page,click
clickthe
theon-screen
on-screenchannel
channelLink
Linkbutbut1 tons
Na for
pgina
Outputs,
cliqueof
nos
botes
Link
dos
canais na tela
para
tons
forany
any
combination
combination
ofLeft,
Left,
Right,
Right,
oror
Center/Mono
Center/Mono
outoutqualquer
combinao
de
rguas
de
sada
Left,
Right
ou
Center/
put
putstrips
stripstotoassign
assigncontrol
controlofofthe
thecorresponding
correspondingbusses
bussestotothe
the
Mono para atribuir o controle dos busses correspondentes ao fader
Mains
MainsFader.
Fader.
Mains.
1 Selecione
othe
bus
Aux
pressionando
seu switch
Select.
2 2Press
Pressthe
ACS
ACS
Delay
Delay
rotary
rotaryencoder
encoder
totoengage
engage
the
thedelay.
delay.
3 3Adjust
Adjust
thedelay
delayvalue
value
bybyturning
turning
the
theDelay
Delay
rotary
rotaryencoder.
2 Pressione
othe
codificador
rotativo
ACS Delay
para
habilitar
oencoder.
delay.
Link
Link
The
The
amount
amount
ofof
delay
delay
available
available
depends
depends
on
on
the
the
type
type
ofof
output,
output,
3 Ajuste o valor do delay girando o codificador rotativo Delay.
asasfollows:
follows:
Up
Uptoto
500
500
ms
msdisponvel
for
forMains
Mainsand
andMatrix
Matrix
mixers
A quantidade
de
delay
depende
do mixers
tipo
de sada:
At
500
ms
para
Mains
e
mixers
Matrix
Up
Uptoto250
250ms
msfor
forAux
AuxSends
Sends
At 250 ms para Aux Sends
Mains
Mains
fader
fader
Link
Link
selectors
selectors
in
the
theOutputs
Outputspage
page
Seletores
link do
fader
Mains nainpgina
Outputs
Adjusting
AdjustingMain
MainBus
BusControls
Controls
Ajustando Controles do Bus Main

Mains
MainsBus
BusOutput
OutputLevels
Levels
Nveis de Sada do Bus Mains
The
TheMains
Mainsbus
busoutput
outputlevels
levelsare
arecontrolled
controlledfrom
fromthe
thesingle
single
Os Mains
nveis
de
sada
do bustoMains
so
controlados
por faders.
um
nico fader
Mains
Fader
Fader
located
located
tothe
theright
right
ofofthe
theOutput
Output
faders.
Mains localizado direita dos faders Output.

Select
Select
Mute
Mute
2 2Move
Movethe
theMains
Mainsfader
fadertotochange
changethe
thelevel
levelofofthe
theassigned
assigned
2 Movimente o fader Mains para alterar o nvel dos busses
busses.
busses.
associados.
Mute
do Bus
Mains
Mains
Mains
Bus
Bus
Mute
Mute
OThe
status
de
Muteofdos
busses
Main
iscontrolado
pelo
switch
The
mute
mute
status
status
ofthe
the
Main
Mainbusses
busses
iscontrolled
controlled
from
from
the
the Mute
localizado
acima
do above
fader
Mains.
Quando
um
dos at
busses
Main
Mute
Mute
switch
switch
located
located
above
the
the
Mains
Mains
Fader.
Fader.
When
When
at
least
least
one
one
colocado
embusses
Mute
enquanto
outros
(no (unlinked)
associados)
no
so, o
of
ofthe
theMain
Main
bussesis
ismuted
mutedwhile
whileothers
others
(unlinked)are
arenot,
not,
switch
Mutemute
pisca.
the
theMains
Mains
mute
switch
switchflashes.
flashes.
Para
controlar
omute
status
Muteofde
busses
Main:
To
Tocontrol
control
the
the
mutestatus
status
ofthe
theMain
Main
busses:
busses:
1
InInthe
theOutputs
Outputs
page,
page,
click
click
the
the
on-screen
on-screen
channel
channel
Link
butbut1 1Na
pgina
Outputs,
clique
nos
botes
Link dos
canaisLink
na tela
para
tons
tonsfor
forany
anycombination
combination
ofofLeft,
Left,
Right,
Right,
oror
Center/Mono
Center/Mono
outqualquer
combinao
de rguas
de
sada
Left,
Right ou outCenter/
Mono
paratoatribuir
ocontrol
controle
dos
busses
correspondentes
ao
fader
put
putstrips
strips
toassign
assign
controlofof
the
the
corresponding
corresponding
busses
bussestoto
the
the
Mains.
Mains
MainsFader.
Fader.
Fader
Fader
Mains
Mains
Fader
Fader
and
and
controls
controls
in
the
the
Output
Output
section
section
Fader
e controles
Mains
na
seo in
Output
8484 VENUE
VENUEProfile
ProfileGuide
Guide
2
Pressthe
theMute
Mute
switch
switch
tototoggle
toggle
themute
mute
status
ofofthe
theasas2 2Press
Pressione
o switch
Mute
parathe
alterar
ostatus
status
dos
busses
signed
signed
busses.
busses.
selecionados.
Delay do Bus Mains
Mains Bus Delay

Mains Bus Delay
Um delay varivel (de 0 a 500 ms) pode ser aplicado a qualquer
A variable delay (from 0 to 500 ms) can be applied to any of

Rack Features
busStage
Mains.
A
variable
the
Mains delay
busses.(from 0 to 500 ms) can be applied to any of
the Racks
Mainsare
busses.
Stage
used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage
Para aplicar delay a um bus Main:
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems. Up to two Stage Racks
To apply delay to a Main
bus:
Tobe
apply
delay
to a Main bus:
can
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up to 96
total oinputs.
1 Selecione
busMain
Mainbusem
que you
vocwant
deseja
aplicar
1 Targeto the
where
to apply
delay delay
by repressionando
repetidamente
o
switch
Select
na
seo
Mains,
ou
1
Target
the
Main
bus
where
you
want
to
apply
delay
byor
repeatedly pressing the Select switch in the Mains section,
by
Audio
I/O pressing
selecionando-o
na tela. the Select switch in the Mains section, or by
peatedly
selecting it on-screen.
selecting
it on-screen.
48 inputs
with remotely controllable mic preamps and
2 Ajuste
o valorthe
doDelay
Delayvalue
girando turning
o codificador
rotativo Delay
2 Adjust
the on-screen
Delay na
roindividually
selectable by
phantom power.
tela. 2tary
Adjust
the Delay value by turning the on-screen Delay roencoder.
8 encoder.
analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or
tary
digitalDivergence
outputs per
Stage
Rack. Mains
Opes Center
para
os Busses
Main Bus Center Divergence Options
Main
Bus Center
Options
Quando
os busses
Main
estoDivergence
configurados
para
o modo LCR
Synchronization
and Control
I/O
When the Main
set to LCR
(Left-Center-Right)
(Left-Center-Right),
o busses
ajusteareCenter
Divergence
determina a
Snake
to are
enable
primary
and
redundant
(if
When
the
Main
busses
set
to
LCR
(Left-Center-Right)
mode,
theconnectors
Center
Divergence
determines
amount
quantidade
de
sinal
posicionado
nosetting
canal
central
enviado
para of
a
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
Divergence
setting
determines
center-panned
signal
sent to the
center
output. amount of
sada mode,
Center.the Center
center-panned signal sent to the center output.

When Center Divergence is set to 100%, a channel panned
Direct
Outputs
Direct
Outputs
Direct
Outputs
Additional
Required
Components
All input
channels
and output
buses
feature
Direct Outputs.
Todos
os canais
de entrada
e busses
de sada
apresentam
o recurso
All input
channels and output buses feature Direct Outputs.
Direct
Outputs.
The following
Available destinations for Direct Outputs include:
Available destinations for Direct Outputs include:
Video
Display
(15-inch
or greater
flat-panel
Stage
audio
outputs
Destinos
disponveis
para Direct
Outputs
incluem:VGA display
recommended;
audio1024x768
outputs minimum resolution). VGA and
Stage
FOH audio
outputs
supported.
DVI
Sadas
de
udiooutputs
Stage
audio
FOH
Pro Tools
recording inputs
USB
Sadas de udio FOH
keyboard
and trackball/mouse
Pro
Tools recording
inputs
Plug-ins
Entradas
de gravao do Pro Tools
Plug-ins
Plug-ins
Digital
Snake Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Only)
Each output
destination
may
be fedSystems
by only one
Direct Output
Each output
destination
may besignals
fed by only
onebeDirect
Output
(multiple
Direct
Output
cannot
routed
to aum
Cada
de sada
pode
alimentado
apenas
por
signal
Thedestino
connection
between
FOHser
Rack
and
Stage Rack
requires
signal
(multiple
Direct
Output
signals
cannot
be
routed
to aser
single
output).
sinal
Direct
Outputcable.
(vrios
no directly
podem
a Digital
Snake
Thissinais
cableDirect
can beOutput
purchased
single
output).
endereados
uma nica
from Avid para
or assembled
bysada)
To route a channel or bus to a Direct Output:
Para
um canal
ou bus
umOutput:
Direct Output:
Toenderear
route a channel
or bus
to apara
Direct
1 Target the channel or bus you want to route to a Direct OutOptional

Components
1 Target
the channel
or bus
want to route to a Direct Output
by pressing
Select
switch.
1 Selecione
o canalitsou
bus
queyou
deseja
enderear para um Direct
put
by
pressing
its
Select
switch.
The
following
components
are
optional,
and must be
Output pressionando seu switch Select.
2 In the Directs page of the Patchbay, click the tab for the
2 In the or
Directs
pageyou
of the
channel
bus type
are Patchbay,
routing. click the tab for the
2 Na
Directs
do
clique na aba do tipo de canal ou
pgina
USB flash
disk
(orPatchbay,
other
channel
or bus
type
you
areportable
routing.USB storage device for
bus3 que
deseja
enderear.
Click
in the
channel
grid
to MB
route
channel
or bus (listed
transfer
of Show
data;
512
orthe
larger
recommended)
When
Center
Divergence
is set
to 0%,
channelonly
panned
to
center
is sent
equally
to the left
and
rightaoutputs
(phan3 Click
in the
channel
grid output
to route(listed
the channel
or bus (listed
on
the
left)
to
an
available
across
the
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
Quando
o ajuste
de
Centerto
Divergence
0%,
umoutputs
canal posicionado
center
is sent
equally
the left and
right
only (phan- 3 Clique no grid de canais para enderear o canal ou bustop).
Included
Components
tom
center).
(listados
on the left) to an available output (listed across the top).
para otom
canal
central enviado igualmente para as sadas esquerda
center).
Headphones
1/4-inch
jack(listada ao alto).
esquerda)
para umawith
sada
disponvel
A
Center
Divergence
setting
between
0%
and
100%
sends
a
All VENUE
Profile
systems
e direita
somente
(phantom
center).
A Center Divergence
setting
between
0%and
andright
100%outputs
sends a
center-panned
channel
to the left,
center,
VENUE Profile
console
(for Talkback)
center-panned
the
left,
and
right
theCenter
centerchannel
channelto
more
prominent
as
the
value
in Umwith
ajuste
Divergence
entre
0%center,
e 100%
envia
umoutputs
canal
Two
(2)
IEC
power
cables
with the
center
moreas
prominent
as the value
in- e
posicionado
no
canal channel
central para
sadas esquerda,
central
creases
towards
100%.
com
Monitor
mount
formais
VGAproeminente
screen (screen
not included)
creases
100%.
direita,
otowards
canal
central
conforme
o valor se
aproxima
de Center
100%.mount
set
Trackball
To
Divergence:
To
Center
Divergence:
set
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
1 Go the
Options
> Busses tab.
Para ajustar
o Center
Divergence:
VENUE
Profile >Guide
1 Go
the Options
Busses tab.
2 In the Panning section, click in the Center Divergence field
Two
(2) console
lights
1 V aaba
Options
> Busses.
2 Indrag
the Panning
click in the Center
Divergence
and
up/downsection,
to increase/decrease
the value
(or typefield
in a
Protective
Dust Cover
and
drag
up/down
to increase/decrease the value (or type in a
new
value).
2 Na seo Panning, clique no campo Center Divergence e arraste
Rack(s)
(see next)
new
value).
para cima
ou
para baixo para aumentar ou diminuir o valor (ou digite
3 Press Enter or Return on your keyboard to confirm the setum novo
valor)
3 Press Enter or Return on your keyboard to confirm the setting.
Racks,
ting.
Quando
o ajuste Divergence
de Center Divergence
100%, um canal
is output
set to 100%,
to When
centerCenter
is sent to the center
only. a channel panned
posicionado para o canal central enviado apenas para a sada
to center isComponents
sent to the center output only.
System
When Center Divergence is set to 0%, a channel panned to
central.
3 Pressione Enter ou Return no teclado para confirmar o ajuste.

Main Bus Automatic Delay Compensation

Compensao
Automtica
de Delay no
Bus Main
System
Restore
CD
Main
Bus
Automatic
Delay
Compensation
VENUE
systems automatically
compensate
ECx Ethernet
Control Software
Installerfor
CDdelays incurred
VENUE
systems
automatically
compensate
for delays
incurred
O sistema
VENUE
automaticamente
compensa
os atrasos
causados
by the
use
of
Groups
and insertion
of plug-ins
in the
signal
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
pelo uso
de
Groups
e
inserts
de
plug-ins
o
sinal
dos
busses
Main.to
by
the
use
of
Groups
and
insertion
of
plug-ins
in
the
signal
path to the Main busses. Delays are automatically applied
so
iLok
USBMain
Smartbusses.
Key (for
storing
plug-in
authorizations)
Delayspath
automaticamente
aplicados
aos
sinais
que
chegam
to
the
Delays
are
automatically
applied
to
signals arriving at the Main busses from multiple destinations
aos busses
Main
de vrios
destinos
para
manter
o alinhamento
de
Plug-in
installer
discs
(if
any)
with
pre-authorized
iLok
signals
arriving
at
the
Main
busses
from
multiple
destinations
to maintain the proper time alignment.
tempotoapropriado.
thepower
propercables
time alignment.
maintain
Two (2) IEC
One aFOH
Link cable
for connection to a VENUE console
Monitorando
Mixagem
Main
Monitoring
the
Main
Mix
Monitoring the Main Mix
Stage
Rack
includes:
You
can
send
Main mix
present on
Main
VocEach
pode
enviar
a the
mixagem
Main(the
(o signal
sinal presente
nosthe
busses
You
can
send
the
Main
mixfor
(the
signalto
present
on
Main
Two to
(2)
IEC
power
cables
Main busses)
busses)
para
oMonitor
bus
Monitor
para
enderear
esse
busthe
para
os
the
bus
routing
the
monitor
bus
for
busses)
to
the
Monitor
bus
for
routing
to
the
monitor
bus
for
headphones.
Veja
Enviando
a
Mixagem
Main
para
o
Bus
Monitor
headphones. See Sending the Main Mix to the Monitor Bus
na pgina
123.
headphones.
See
Sending
the
Main
Mix
to
the
Monitor
Bus
on page 123.
on page 123.
Assigning a Direct Output in the Patchbay Directs page

website
(www.avid.com).
Atribuindo
um Direct
Output
na pgina
do Patchbay
Assigning
a Direct
Output
in theDirects
Patchbay
Directs page
4 Select the pickoff point for the Direct Output by clicking the
4
Select
pickoff
for the Direct
by
clicking
the
4 Selecione
o ponto
alimentao
para
Directand
Output
clicando
letter
to the
the
right de
ofpoint
the
channel
or
busoOutput
name
choosing
Mix
Rack
Options
letter
to
the
right
of
the
channel
or
bus
name
and
choosing
nafrom
letra the
direita
do menu.
nome do canal ou
e escolhendo do menu
pop-up
pop-up.
from the pop-up menu.
I/O Options

outputs
Selecting um
a Direct
Output
pickoffDirect
pointOutput
in thenaPatchbay
Directs
page
Selecionando
ponto de
alimentao
pgina Directs
do Patchbay
Selecting
a Direct
point
in the
Patchbay
Directs
page
XO16
Analog
and Output
Digitalpickoff
Output
Card
that
provides
8 analog
5 In the ACS, press the Direct Output encoder so that its indiline
level
outputs,
and
8
AES
digital
outputs.
5 No
ACS,
pressione
o codificador
Output
parasoque
o indicador
5
In
the
press
the Direct Direct
Output
encoder
that
its indicator
LEDACS,
stays
lit (on).
LED
fiqueLED
aceso.
cator
stays
lit
(on).
6 Turn the Direct Out encoder to set the Direct Output level.
with
Personal
other
6 Turn
the DirectDirect
Out Aviom
encoder
set the
Direct
Output
level.
6output
Gire
o compatible
codificador
Out para to
ajustar
o Mixers
nvel
deand
Direct
Output.
digital I/O.
Captulo
8: Sadas
e Roteamento
deRouting
Sadas 85
Chapter
8: Outputs
and Output
85
Up
Up to
to 12
12 dB
dB of
of gain
gain can
can be
be added
added to
to the
the Direct
Direct Output
Output signal.
signal.
At
12todB
seradded
adicionado
ao
sinal
para osignal.
Direct
Direct
Output
is
displayed
in
the
Selected
Channel
disDirect
Output
level
iscan
displayed
in to
thethe
Selected
Channel
disUp
12de
dBganho
oflevel
gainpode
be
Direct
Output
Output.
O
nvel
Direct
Output
apresentado
no
display
Selected
play,
and
controls
areis
provided
on-screen
in the
theOutput
Patchbay,
Inplay,
and
controls
are
provided
on-screen
in
Patchbay,
InDirect
Output
displayed
intothe
Channel
disUp to
12
dB of level
gain
can
be added
theSelected
Direct
signal.
Channel,
e controles
so fornecidos na tela nas pginas Patchbay,
puts,
and
Outputs
pages.
puts,
and
Outputs
pages.
play,
and
controls
are
provided on-screen
in theChannel
Patchbay,
InDirect
Output
level
is
displayed
in
the
Selected
disInputs e Outputs.
puts,
Outputs are
pages.
play, and controls
provided on-screen in the Patchbay, Inputs,
and
Outputs
pages.
Ponto
de Alimentao
Output
Direct
Output Direct
Pickoff
Points
Direct Output Pickoff Points

Direct
Output
Pickoff
Points
The
pickoff
points for
for the
the
Direct
Output
signal so
are selecionados
selected in
in
OsThe
pontos
de alimentao
paraDirect
o sinalOutput
Direct Output
pickoff
points
signal
are
selected
Direct
Output
Pickoff
Points
Directs
page
of
the
The
following
points
nathe
pgina
Directs
do
Os seguintes
pontos
de alimentao
the
Directs
page
of Patchbay.
the
Patchbay.
The
following
pickoff
points
The
pickoff
points
forPatchbay.
the Direct
Output
signalpickoff
are
selected
in
esto
disponveis
cada
tipo
de canal
oubus:
bus: are
are
available
for
each
type
of
channel
are
available
forpara
each
type
of
channel
or
bus:
the
Directs
of for
the
Patchbay.
The or
following
pickoff
points
The
pickoffpage
points
the
Direct
Output
signal
selected
in
are
for Outs
each
of channel
or bus: pickoff points
the available
Directs
page
of
thetype
Patchbay.
The following
Pickoffs
for
Pickoffs
for Direct
Direct
Outs
are
available
for
each
type
of
channel
or bus:
Pickoffs
for Direct Outs
Channel
Available
Channel Type
Type
Available Pickoff
Pickoff Points
Points
Pickoffs
Direct Outs
ChannelforType
Available Pickoff Points
Input
Top
Input
Top of
of channel
channel
Channel Type
Available
Pickoff Points
Insert
Insert
return
Input
Top ofreturn
channel
Pre/post
fader
Pre/post
fader
Insert
Input
Top
of return
channel
Pre/post
fader
Insert
return
FX
Returns
Top
of
return
FX Returns
Top of return
Pre/post
fader
Pre/post
fader
Pre/post
fader
FX Returns
Top of return
Pre/post
fader
FX Returns
Topof
return
Outputs
Top
Outputs
Top
ofofbus
bus
Pre/post
fader
Pre
Pre
fader
Outputs
Topfader
of bus
Post
fader
Post
Pre fader
fader
Outputs
Top
of bus
Post
fader
Pre fader
Configurando
Pontos
de Alimentao
Direct Output
Configuring
Direct
Output
Configuring
Direct
Output Pickoff
Pickoff
Points
Post faderPoints
Configuring Direct Output Pickoff Points
Para
configurar osDirect
pontos de pickoff
alimentao
Direct Output para
To
configure
point
for
To
configure the
the Direct
Direct Output
Output
pickoff
point Points
for Inputs:
Inputs:
Configuring
Output
Pickoff
Inputs:
To configure
the Direct Output
pickoff point
for Inputs:
1
1 Go
Go to
to the
the Options
Options page
page and
and click
click the
the Pickoffs
Pickoffs tab.
tab.
To
configure
the
Direct
Output
pickoff
point
for Inputs:
1 V
pgina
Options
e clique
na aba
Pickoffs.
1 Go
to the
Options
page
and
click
the
Pickoffs
tab.
2
2 Under
Under Input
Input Strip
Strip Fader
Fader Pickoff
Pickoff Point,
Point, click
click Pre-Fader
Pre-Fader or
or
1 Go to the Options page and click the Pickoffs tab.
Post-Fader.
Post-Fader.
2
Under
Input
Strip
Fader
Pickoff
Point,
click
Pre-Fader
Em Input Strip Fader Pickoff Point, clique Pre Faderorou
2
Post-Fader.
Fader.
2
Under Input Strip Fader Pickoff Point, click Pre-Fader or
Post
Post-Fader.
Matrix Mixers
Mixers
Matrix
Matrix
Mixers
Eight
Eight Matrix
Matrix mixers
mixers are
are available
available for
for sending
sending up
up to
to eight
eight
Matrix
Mixers
Oito
mixers
Matrix
esto
disponveis
para
enviar
oito
mixagens
mono
mixes
of
input
channels
and
busses
to
any
available
mono
input are
channels
andfor
busses
to any
available
Eight mixes
Matrixofmixers
available
sending
up to
eightmono
dehardware
canais mixes
deoutput
entrada
busses
para
qualquer
plug-in
alimentado por
or
plug-in.
hardware
output
ore bus-fed
bus-fed
plug-in.
mono
of
input
channels
and
to any
Eight Matrix
mixers
are
available
forbusses
sending
up toavailable
eight
bus ou sada de hardware disponvel.
hardware
output
or bus-fed
plug-in.
mono mixes
of input
channels
and busses to any available
Each
Each Matrix
Matrix is
is a
a 12-in/1-out
12-in/1-out mono
mono mixer
mixer with
with assignable
assignable ininhardware
output
or
bus-fed
plug-in.
Cada
Matrix
um
mixer
mono
12-in/1-out
com
fontes
de3
put
sources
including
Group
busses
or
Aux
busses,
the
Main
put
sources
including
Group busses
Aux with
busses,
the
3 entrada
Main
Each
Matrix
is a 12-in/1-out
monoor
mixer
assignable
inassinalveis
incluindo
busses
Group
ou
Aux,
os
3 busses Main
busses
(LCR
and
any
up
to
8
user-selectable
busses
(LCR
ora LR+M)
LR+M)
and mono
any of
ofmixer
upAux
to with
8busses,
user-selectable
put
including
Group
busses
or
the 3 Main
Eachsources
Matrix
isor
12-in/1-out
assignable
in(LCR
ou LR+M)
e at oito
canais controlled
selecionados
pelothe
usurio.
channels.
Matrix
levels
Output
channels.
Matrix
input
levels
are
controlled
from
the
Output
busses
(LCR
orinput
LR+M)
andare
any
oforup
to busses,
8from
user-selectable
put
sources
including
Group
busses
Aux
the
3
Main
Os nveis de entrada do Matrix so controlados pelos codificadores
encoders
when
a
is
selected.
Adjacent
Matrix
inputs
encoders
when
a Matrix
Matrix
is selecionado.
selected.
Adjacent
Matrix
inputs
channels.
Matrix
input
levels
are
the
Output
busses
(LCR
or
LR+M)
and
anycontrolled
of
up
to 8from
user-selectable
Output
quando
um
Matrix
Entradas
adjacentes
da
can
be
linked
or
unlinked.
can
be linked
or aunlinked.
encoders
when
Matrix
is selected.
Adjacentfrom
Matrix
channels.
Matrix
input levels
are controlled
theinputs
Output
Matrix podem ser associadas ou desassociadas.
can
be linked
encoders
whenoraunlinked.
Matrix is selected. Adjacent Matrix inputs
Odd/even pairs of Matrix mixers can be linked to form stereo
Odd/even
pairs of
Matrix
be linked
to form stereo
Pares
deunlinked.
mixersmixers
Matrixcan
podem
ser associados
para
can mpar/par
be linked or
Matrix
output
busses.
The
master
output
of
each
Matrix
mixer
Matrix
output
busses.
The
master
output
eachmaster
Matrix
mixer
Odd/even
pairs
of Matrix
mixers
can be
linked
to
formde
stereo
formar
um
bus
estreo
de sada
Matrix.
A of
sada
cada
is
controlled
from
Output
faders.
isMatrix
controlled
from
the
Output
faders.
output
busses.
The
master
output
of eachtoMatrix
mixer
Odd/even
ofthe
Matrix
mixers
can
be linked
form stereo
mixer
Matrix
pairs
controlado
pelos
faders
Output.
is
controlled
theThe
Output
faders.
Matrix
outputfrom
busses.
master
output of each Matrix mixer
See
11,
Matrix
and
Personal
Q
See
Chapter
11,the
Matrix
andfaders.
Personal
Q Mixers.
Mixers.
VejaChapter
o Captulo
11,
Mixers
Matrix
e Personal
Q.
is controlled
from
Output
See Chapter 11, Matrix and Personal Q Mixers.
Personal Q Mixers
Mixers
Personal
Qmixers are available for sending up to
Personal
Q(PQ)
Mixers
Eight Personal
Personal Q
Q (PQ)
Eight
mixers are available for sending up to
Personal
Q
Mixers
eight
stereo
mixes
of
channels
or
busses
any
eight
discrete
stereo
mixes
of input
input
channelsfor
or sending
busses to
toup
any
Eightdiscrete
Personal
Q (PQ)
mixers
are available
to
Oito mixers Personal Q (PQ) esto disponveis para envio de oito
available
hardware
output
or
bus-fed
plug-in.
PQ
is
a
available
hardware
output
orof
bus-fed
plug-in.
Each
PQbusses
isto
aany
eight
discrete
stereo
mixes
input
channels
orsending
busses
Eight
Personal
Q (PQ)
mixers
are
available
forEach
up
to para
mixagens
estreo
distintas
de
canais
de entrada
ou
12
x
2
mixer
with
assignable
input
sources
including
Group
12
x
2
mixer
with
assignable
input
sources
including
Group
available
hardware
output
or
bus-fed
plug-in.
Each
PQ
is
qualquer
sada
disponvel
de
hardware
ou
plug-in
alimentado
eight discrete stereo mixes of input channels or busses to aany por
busses
ormixer
Aux
busses,
the 3
312
Main
busses
(LCR
or
LR+M)
and
bus.
PQbusses,
um assignable
mixer
x2
com
fontes
de
entrada
assinalveis
busses
Aux
the
Main
busses
(LCR
or
LR+M)
12
x Cada
2or
with
input
sources
including
Group
available
hardware
output
or
bus-fed
plug-in.
Each
PQ
isand
a
incluindo
busses
Group
ou
Aux,
os
3
busses
Main
(LCR
ou
LR+M)
any
of
up
to
8
user-selectable
channels.
any
of
up
to
8
user-selectable
channels.
busses
or
Aux
busses,
the
3
Main
busses
(LCR
or
LR+M)
and
12 x 2 mixer with assignable input sources including Group
e atofoito
canais
selecionados pelo
usurio.
any
upAux
to 8busses,
user-selectable
channels.
busses
or
the 3 Main
busses (LCR or LR+M) and
Each of
Each
of these
these PQ
PQ mixers
mixers can
can be
be remotely
remotely controllable
controllable by
by opopany of up to 8 user-selectable channels.
tional
PQ
Controller
units,
which
allow
of
PQ
Cada of
umthese
desses
mixers
PQ
podem
ser adjustment
remotamente
tional
PQ
Controller
units,
which
allow
adjustment
of controlados
PQ
Each
PQ mixers
can
be remotely
controllable
by oppor unidades
adicionais
PQ
Controller
permitemofajustes
mixer
levels
from
the
stage.
mixer
levels
from
the
stage.
tional
PQ
Controller
units,
allowque
adjustment
PQop- dos
Each
of
these
PQ
mixers
canwhich
be remotely
controllable
by
nveis de mixagem a partir do palco.
mixer
from theunits,
stage.which allow adjustment of PQ
tional levels
PQ Controller
If
no
PQ
Controllers
are
If
no
PQ
Controllers
are used,
used, the
the PQ
PQ mixers
mixers are
are still
still availavailmixer levels from the stage.
Se
PQ
Controllers
no
so
usados,
os
mixers
PQ continuam
able
for
use
as
stereo
Matrix
mixers
at
the
console.
able
as stereo Matrix
mixers
at mixers
the console.
If nofor
PQuse
Controllers
are used,
the PQ
are still
availdisponveis para uso como mixers Matrix estreo na
able
as stereoare
Matrix
the console.
If
no for
PQuse
Controllers
used,mixers
the PQatmixers
are still availPQ
levels
PQ input
inputconsole.
levels and
and PQ
PQ input
input pan
pan are
are controlled
controlled from
from the
the OutOutable for use as stereo Matrix mixers at the console.
put
encoders.
Adjacent
PQ
inputs
can
be
linked
or
unlinked.
put
Adjacent
inputs
be linked or
unlinked.
PQencoders.
input levels
and PQPQ
input
pan can
are controlled
from
the OutNveis de output
entradaofPQ
e posicionamento
so controlados
pelos
The
each
mixer
is
controlled
from
the
The
master
output
ofPQ
each
PQ
mixer
iscontrolled
controlled
from
theOutputmaster
encoders.
Adjacent
PQPQ
inputs
can
be linked from
or
unlinked.
PQ
input
levels
and
input
pan
are
the
codificadores
Output.
Entradas
PQ
adjacentes
podem
ser
associadas
Output
faders.
Output
faders.
The encoders.
master
output
each
PQ
mixer
controlled
from
the
put
Adjacent
PQ master
inputs
can
be
linked
unlinked.
ou desassociadas.
Aofsada
de iscada
mixeror
PQ
controlada
Output
faders.
The
master
output
of
each
PQ
mixer
is
controlled
from
the
pelos
faders Output.
See
11, Matrix and Personal Q Mixers.
See Chapter
Chapter
Output
faders. 11, Matrix and Personal Q Mixers.
SeeVeja
Chapter
11, Matrix
and Personal
Mixers.
o Captulo
11, Mixers
Matrix e Q
Personal
Q.
Assigning and Using VCAs

Assigning
andthe
Using
VCAs
VCA controls
controls emulate
emulate the
operation of
of traditional
traditional Voltage
Voltage
VCA
operation
Atribuindo
e
Utilizando
VCAs
Assigning
and
Using
VCAs
Controlled
Amplifiers
Up
VCA
are
Controlled
Amplifiers
(VCAs).
Up to
to eight
eight
VCA faders
faders
are
VCA controls
emulate(VCAs).
the operation
of traditional
Voltage
available
for
remote
control
of
channel,
FX
return,
available
for
remote
control
of input
input
channel,
FXfaders
return,
or
Controlled
Amplifiers
(VCAs).
Up to
eight
VCA
areor
VCA
controls
emulate
the
operation
of
traditional
Voltage
Controles
VCA
emulam
a operao
dos
tradicionais
amplificadores
output
channel
fader
gain.
output
channel
fader
gain.
available
for
remote
control
of
input
channel,
FX
return,
or At
Controlled
(VCAs).
UpControlled
to eight VCA
faders -are
controlados Amplifiers
por voltagem
(Voltage
Amplifiers
VCAs).
oito faders
VCA
esto
disponveis
para channel,
controle remoto
de ganho
output
channel
fadercontrol
gain. of input
available
for
remote
FX return,
or de
VCAs
control
level
of
the
assigned
channels
only.
They
do
VCAs
control
level
of
the
assigned
channels
only.
They
do
Input
Channel,
FX
return
ou
canais
de
sada.
output channel fader gain.
not
act
a
bus.
not
act as
as
a summing
summing
output
bus. channels only. They do
VCAs
control
level of output
the assigned
controlam
apenas
canaisonly.
assinalados.
notVCAs
actcontrol
as
a summing
output
bus. dos
VCAs
level oofnvel
the
assigned
channels
They do Eles
VCAs
control
fader
gain
VCAs remotely
remotely
control
the
fader
gain of
of each
each channel
channel asascomothe
bus
de sada.
notno
actatuam
as a summing
output
bus.
signed
the
fader,
not
change
the
signed
to
the VCA
VCA
fader, but
but
do
notgain
change
the position
position
of
the
VCAs to
remotely
control
the do
fader
of each
channel of
as-the
faders
on
those
channels.
The
accumulated
gain
of
a
channel
VCAs on
controlam
remotamente
onot
ganho
faders
cada
canal
faders
channels.
The
accumulated
gain
of ade
channel
signed
tothose
the VCA
fader,the
but
do
change
the
position
of the
VCAs
remotely
control
fader
gain
ofdos
each
channel
asassinalado
ao
fader
VCA,but
mas
no
alteram
a posio
dos
faders
belonging
to
several
VCAs
is
limited
to
dB.
belonging
to
several
VCAs
is
limited
to +12
+12 the
dB.
faders
on
those
channels.
The
gain
of a channel
signed
to the
VCA
fader,
doaccumulated
not change
position
of the
desseson
canais.
O ganho
de+12
umgain
canal
pertencente a
belonging
to several
VCAsacumulado
is limited
to
dB.
faders
those
channels.
The
accumulated
of a channel
vrios VCAs limitado a + 12 dB.
belonging to several
VCAs is
Assigning
Channels
tolimited
VCAsto +12 dB.
Atribuindo Canais
a VCAs
Assigning
Channels
to VCAs
To
assign
channels
to
VCAs:
To
assign
channels
to
VCAs:
Assigning Channels to VCAs
Para atribuir um canal a VCAs:
To assign
channels
to VCAs:the Output faders section.
1
1 Press
Press the
the VCAs
VCAs switch
switch in
in the Output faders section.
To
assign
channels
to VCAs:
1 Pressione
Press
the
VCAs
switch
into
the
Output
faders
section.
o switch
na
seo
defor
faders
Output.
2
you
want
target
assignment.
21Select
Select the
the VCA
VCA
youVCA
want
to
target
for
assignment.
1 Press the VCAs switch in the Output faders section.
2 Select the VCA you want to target for assignment.
32Press
Press
the Multi-Assign
Multi-Assign
switch
to the
theatribuir
right of
ofuma
the seleo.
Output secsec3
the
to
right
the
Output
Selecione
o VCA para oswitch
qual deseja
2 Select the VCA you want to target for assignment.
tion.
tion.
3 Press the Multi-Assign switch to the right of the Output sec3 Pressione
o switch Multi-Assign
esquerda
dathe
seo
Output.
tion.
3
Press theSelect
Multi-Assign
switch
to
the right of
Output
sec4
4 Press
Press the
the Select switches
switches on
on the
the input
input channels,
channels, FX
FX returns,
returns,
tion.
or
output
channels
you
want
to
assign
to
the
VCA.
or
channels
you want
assign
tochannels,
the VCA.FX
4
Press
the
Select
switches
ontothe
4 output
Pressione
os switches
Select
deinput
Input
Channels,
FXreturns,
Returns ou
or
output
channels
you
want
to
assign
to
the
VCA.
Output
Channels
que
voc
deseja
atribuir
ao
VCA.
4
Press
the
Select
switches
on
the
input
channels,
FX
returns,
5 Press
Press the
the flashing
flashing Multi-Assign
Multi-Assign switch
switch to
to confirm
confirm the
the assignassign5
or output
channels
you want
to to
assign
to the
VCA.
ment,
or
press
the
Cancel
switch
cancel
the
assignment.
ment,
or
press
the
Cancel
switch
to
cancel
the
assignment.
5 Press
the
flashing
Multi-Assign
switch
to
confirm
the
assign- a
5 Pressione o switch piscante Multi-Assign para confirmar
ment,
or
press
the
Cancel
switch
to
cancel
the
assignment.
5
Press the ou
flashing
Multi-Assign
switchpara
to confirm
the assignatribuio,
pressione
o switch Cancel
cancelar.
ment, or press the Cancel switch to cancel the assignment.
86
86 VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Guide
86
VENUE
Profile
86 Guia
VENUE
Profile
Guide
By default, channel VCA indication is on. You can turn off

The effective gain of any channel is equal to the combination
Turning Channel VCA Indication On and Off
Channel
Strips Show VCA Contribution
VCA indication in the Options > Interaction page.
of its individual channel fader, plus any (all) VCA level
Turning Channel VCA Indication On and Off
Channel Strips Show VCA Contribution
ByLigando
default,e channel
VCA
indication
is on. You can turn off
Desligando
Indicao
de VCA
indication
in the Options
> Interaction
default, channel
VCA indication
is on.page.
You can turn off
of itsThe
individual
fader,
plus any
(all) VCA
effective channel
gain of any
channel
is equal
to thelevel
combination VCABy
Input
and
output
channels
display
net(all)
effect
of seu
VCA
level
Ochanges
ganho
efetivo
de um
canal
fader,
igual plus
the
combinao
de
PorVCA
padro,
a indicao
doOptions
VCA est>ligada.
Voc pode
indication
in the
Interaction
page.deslig-la na
of its
individual
channel
any
VCA
levelfader
that
affect
that
channel.
Stage
Rack
(effective
gain)
on-screen.
This
lets
trackque
of what
all
Additional
individual
com
as Features
alteraes
nvel
deyou
VCAkeep
(todas)
afetam
pgina
Options >Required
Interaction. Components
changes
that
affect
that de
channel.
currently
assigned
VCAsdisplay
are doing
channels
Input
and output
channels
theto
net
effect ofand
VCAbusses
level at
esse
canal.
all
times.
Input
and output
channels
display
effect
of VCA
(effective
gain)
on-screen.
This lets
you the
keepnet
track
of what
alllevel
audio
I/O for
VENUEmostram
Profile systems.
UpVCA
to two
Stage
Racksna
Show VCA Contribution
Input
e
Output
Channels
o
efeito
do
(ganho
efetivo)
Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel
VGA display
(effective
gain)VCAs
on-screen.
This to
lets
you keep
track
of what
currently
assigned
are doing
channels
and
busses
at all
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96
total
inputs.
tela.
Isso
permite
acompanhar
quedoing
os VCAs
esto fazendo
com soat
currently
assigned
VCAsoare
to channels
and busses
all times.
On-Screen
VCA Indication
Displays settings in the Options > Interaction
page.
Show
VCA Contribution
canaisalle times.
busses em todos os momentos.
DVI supported.
Audio
I/O
Show
VCA Contribution
VENUE displays effective gain as a second, transparent fader
turnkeyboard
channel VCA
indication off or on:
On-Screen
VCA
Indication
ToUSB
and
trackball/mouse
Displays
settings in the
Options
> Interaction page.
Indicao
VCA
na
tela
cap
the fader displays
of bothmic
the Inputs
and
Out on-screen
48 inputs in
with
controllable
preamps
and
Ajustes
visualizaes
pgina
Options
> Interaction.
On-Screen
VCA remotely
Indication
1Displays
Godeto
the
Options
> Options
Interaction
page. page.
settings
innathe
> Interaction
putsindividually
pages. effective
selectable
power.
VENUE
displays
gain phantom
as a second,
transparent fader
To
turn
channel
VCA
indication
off
or
on:Systems Only)
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
A VENUE apresenta o ganho efetivo como um segundo boto de
VENUE
displays
effective
gainexpandable
asboth
a second,
transparent
fader
2To
In
theou
Displays
section,
click de
tooff
enable
cap on-screen
inoutput
the
displays
of
the
Inputs
and
Out 8 analog
channels;
up
to 48
analog
or
Para
ligar
desligar
a indicao
VCA:
turn
channel
VCA
indication
or on:(or disable) Show VCA
fader,
transparente,
nafader
tela
nas
visualizaes
de faders
das
pginas
1 Go
to the
Options >between
Interaction
page.
Selected
Channel
When
the
currently
selected
channel
is un The
connection
FOH
Rack and Stage Rack requires
cap
on-screen
in
the
fader
displays
of
both
the
Inputs
and
OutContribution.
puts
pages.
Inputs e Outputs.
1a Digital
Go to the
Options
> This
Interaction
page.
der
VCA
control, the net effect of all its assigned VCAs is
Snake
cable.
cable can
be purchased directly
pgina
> Interaction.
puts
pages.
2 1InV
the
DisplaysOptions
section,
click to enable (or disable) Show VCA
shownChannel
in the form
a transparent
fader cap.
Selected
Whenofthe
currently selected
channel is unfrom Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
2 In the Displays section, click to enable (or disable) Show VCA
Selected
Channel Quando
o canal I/O
selecionado est sob controle do Contribution.
Synchronization
and Control
VCA clique
Members
der oVCA
control,
theosnet
all
itsmostrado
assigned
VCAs
is deisum
Selected
When
theofcurrently
selected
channel
un- 2 Showing
Na
seo Displays,
para habilitar (ou desabilitar) Show VCA
VCA,
efeito
deChannel
todos
VCAeffect
atribudos
na
forma
Contribution.
Snake
connectors
to
enable
primary
and
redundant
(if
der
VCA
control,
the
net
effect
of
all
its
assigned
VCAs
is
Contribution.
shown
in
the
form
of
a
transparent
fader
cap.
boto de fader transparente.
Optional
Components
applicable)
connection
to a VENUE
FOH
Rack.
To view VCA
membership:
Showing
VCA
Members
shown
in the form
of a transparent
fader
cap.
that
affect
Thechanges
effective
gain
of anythat
channel
is equal
to the combination
Rguas
de Canal
Apresentam
achannel.
Atuao
do VCA
Channel level
System Components
Channel level
Channel level
Included Components
Effective gain (VCAs)

Effective gain (VCA contribution) shown on the selected channel

Inputs
and Outputs
Pages
In thenot
Inputs
and Outputs pages,
Trackball
mount
(trackball
included)
Effective
gain
(VCA do
contribution)
shown on
theselecionado
selected channel
Ganho
efetivo
(atuao
VCA)
apresentada
canal
red
ghost
fader
caps
appear no
below
the fader displays of
VENUE
Pad
Effective
gainMouse
(VCA contribution)
shown on the selected channel
channels
that are
currently
to one
or more
VCAs.
Inputs
and Outputs
Pages
In theassigned
Inputs and
Outputs
pages,
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Inputsand
Outputs
Pages
Nas pginas Inputs e Outputs, um boto
Inputs and
Outputs
Pages In
the the
Inputs
and
Outputs
red ghost
fader
caps appear
below
fader
displays
of pages,
vermelho
fantasma
de fader
aparece abaixo da visualizao de
Two
(2) console
lights
red
ghost
caps
appear below
theor
fader
displays
channels
that arefader
currently
to one
more
VCAs. of
faders
nos canais
atribudos
aassigned
um ou mais
VCAs.
Protective
Cover assigned to one or more VCAs.
channels
thatDust
are currently
Rack(s) (see next)
Mostrando
Membros
VCA
VCA
Members
The
following
components
are optional,
and faders
must be
1Showing
Press
the VCA
switch
to bank
the Output
to VCAs.
To purchased
view VCA membership:
separately:
Para
ver
aand
adeso
aothe
VCA:
2To
Press
hold
Default (Alt) switch, then press the Multi
view
VCA
membership:
1 Press
the VCA
bankportable
the Output
to device
VCAs. for
USB
flash switch
disk (ortoother
USBfaders
storage
Assign switch in the Output section. The Multi Assign switch
1 Press
the
VCA
switch
to512
bank
Output
faders to
VCAs.
transfer
of
Show
data;
MBthe
or
larger
recommended)
1
Pressione
o
switch
VCA
para
atribuir
os
faders
Output
para
VCAs.
LEDand
lights
to the
indicate
Multi
Assign
mode.
2 Press
hold
Default
(Alt)
switch,
then press the Multi
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
2 Press
and
the Default
(Alt)The
switch,
then
press
the Multi
Assign
switch
inhold
the Output
section.
Multi
Assign
switch
2 VCA
Pressione
e segure
switchinDefault
(Alt), e strip
presione
o switch
assignments
areoshown
each
channel
LCD with
a
Headphones
1/4-inch
jack
Assign
switch
inwith
the
Output
section.
The Multi
Assign
switch
LED
lights
to
indicate
Multi
Assign
mode.
Multi-Assign
na seo
Output.
O switch
Multi-Assign
se
acende
para
flashing
number
(the
number
indicates
the
VCA
to
which
LED
indicate
Multi
Assign mode.
Dynamic
or
condenser
microphone
and XLR mic cable
indicar
olights
modotoMulti-Assign.
each
channel
isare
assigned).
VCA
assignments
shown in each channel strip LCD with a
(for Talkback)
flashing
(the number
indicates
VCA to
which
VCAnumber
assignments
are shown
in eachthe
channel
strip
LCD with a
As atribuies
VCA (up
soto
apresentadas
em cada LCD de rgua de
Footswitches
2)
flashing
number
(the
number
indicates
the
VCA
to
To
exit
Show
VCA
Members
mode:
each
channel
is
assigned).
canal com um nmero piscante (o nmero indica o VCA awhich
que cada
MIDI
cablesis(for
each
channel
assigned).
canal
est
associado).
Press
the
Multi Assign switch, or Cancel.
Show
BNC cables
(for connecting
To exit
VCA Members
mode: Word clock between the
VENUE
system
and
external
digital devices)
Tosair
exit
Show
VCA
Members
mode:
Para
do
modo
Show
VCA
Members:
Press the Multi Assign switch, or Cancel.

Using
VCAs
25-pin
Press the Multi Assign switch, or Cancel.
Pressione o switch Multi-Assign ou Cancel.
To adjust
the levels of VCA members:
Using
VCAs
Utilizando
VCAs
Using
VCAs
1 Press the
VCAs switch to assign control of the VCAs to the
Profile
Options
To VENUE
adjust the levels
of VCAExpansion
members:
Output
faders.
Para
ajustar
os nveis dos membros do VCA:
To following
adjust theoptions
levels of VCA
The
bemembers:
added
to VENUE
systems.
1 Press
the VCAs switch can
to assign
control
of theProfile
VCAs to
the
2 Move the fader for the VCA whose members you want to adon
all VENUE
and
options,
visitdos
the VCAs
Avid
Output
faders.
1 details
Press
the
switch
to assign
control
of the
VCAs
to the
1For
Pressione
o VCAs
switch
VCAssystems
para
atribuir
o controle
aos
just.
faders
Output.
website
(www.avid.com).
Output
faders.
2 Move the fader for the VCA whose members you want to adjust.
2 solo
Move
the
forof
the
VCA whose
you want to adthe
members
a VCA:
2 To
Movimente
osfader
faders
dos
membros
quemembers
deseja ajustar.
ECx
Ethernet
Software
Installer
CD VCA levels:
Mix
The
opacity
of theControl
ghost caps
vary with
the actual
just.Rack Options
Press the Solo switch on the VCA channels whose members
Effective gain
(VCA contribution)
shown
in the on-screen
fader displays
Ganho efetivo
(atuao do VCA)
apresentado
na visualizao
de displays na tela
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
em Soloofmembros
ToPara
solocolocar
the members
a VCA: de um VCA:
Lighter
caps
indicate
smaller
amounts
of VCA gain.
you want to solo so that the Solo switch is lit.
Effective gain (VCA contribution) shown in the on-screen fader displays
The opacity
of
the
ghost
caps
vary
with
the
actual
VCA
levels:
I/O
Options
To
solo
the
members
of a VCA:
iLok
USB caps
Smartindicate
Key (forlarger
storing
plug-inofauthorizations)
Brighter
amounts
VCA
A opacidade
do boto
fanstasma
varia
de acordo
com gain.
oVCA
nvellevels:
de
Pressione
o
switch
Solo
nos
canais
VCAfollows
dos membros
que deseja
The
opacity
of
the
ghost
caps
vary
with
the
actual
Input
channel
solo
mode
(PFL
or
AFL)
the current
set Lighter
caps
indicate
smaller
amounts
of VCA gain. iLok
Plug-in
installer
discs
(if any)
with pre-authorized
Press
Solo
switch
on
the
VCA
whose
members
you
want
tothe
solo
so
that
thefique
Solo
switch
is
lit.
atuao
VCAs:
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
thatchannels
provides
16 analog
colocar
em
Solo,
para
que
aceso.
ting
on
the
Options
>
Busses
page.
Two
Lighter
caps
indicate
smaller
amounts
of
VCA
gain.
Brighter
caps
indicate
larger
amounts
of
VCA
gain.
you want
to inputs
solo so that the Solo switch is lit.
mic/line
level
solo mode (PFL or AFL) follows the current setOne
Brighter
caps
indicate
amounts
VCAde
gain.
Botes
mais
claros
indicam
pores
menores
ganho Input channel
O
modo
Solo
dos Input
Channel
(PFL
oufollows
AFL) segue
os ajustes
FOH
Link
cable
for larger
connection
to
aof
VENUE
console
Input
channel
mode
(PFL
AFL)
thecurrent
current
Input
solo
mode
(PFL
or or
AFL)
follows
the
ting
on the
Options
> solo
Busses
page.
AO16
Analog
Output
Card
that
provides
16 analog
line levelsetde VCA.
dachannel
pgina
Options
> Busses.
the Options
> Buses
page.
ting setting
on theon
Options
> Busses
page.
EachBotes
maisincludes:
brilhantes indicam pores maiores de
outputs
Stage Rack
Input channel solo mode (PFL or AFL) follows the current
ganho
de
VCA
setting
on the
Options
Buses(PFL
page.
Input
channel
solo>mode
or AFL)
follows the
current
XO16
Analog
and
Digital
Output
Card
that provides
8 analog
setting
on the
Options
Buses outputs.
page.
line level
outputs,
and
8 AES>digital
Channel levels
Effective
gain (VCAs)
Racks,
Channel
levels
Effective
Channel levels
Each
Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes:
gain (VCAs)
Effective
Effective
gainRestore
(VCA contribution)
shown in the on-screen fader displays
gain
System
CD
(VCAs)

output compatible with Aviom
Personal
andRouting
other 87
Chapter 8:
Outputs Mixers
and Output
Chapter 8: Outputs
andprovides
Output Routing
87
card that
an addiChapter 8: Outputs and Output Routing 87
digital I/O.

Para silenciar (Mute) membros do VCA:

Pressione o switch Mute switch dos canais VCA cujos membors
deseja silenciar. O LED Mute dos canais atribudos ao VCA pisca
para indicar que esto implicitamente silenciados pelo VCA.
VCA Spill
Voc pode distribuir (spill) um VCA para ter seus canais atribudos
seo Input. VCA Spill permite acessar rapidamente aqueles
canais atribudos para um VCA especfico e imediatamente focar
nesses canais, sem a necessidade de procur-los pelos bancos de
faders de entrada
Para distribuir um VCA:
1 Selecione o banco de faders de sada VCA.
2 Clique duas vezes o switch Select do VCA para espalhar seus
membros pelos faders de entradas.
O LED do switch Select do VCA selecionado pisca, assim como
o switches Bank (A-D) ou FX Return (1-8). Qualquer atribuio
Bank Safe encoberta (apesar do status Bank Safe permanecer
inalterado).
Se o VCA contm menos que 16 membros, os canais so justificados
direita dentro do banco de faders de entrada, de modo a mantlos o mais prximo possvel do centro da console. Rguas de canal
no usadas ficam em branco e inativas.
Se o VCA contm mais que 16 membros, apenas os primeiros 16
so mostrados.
Para cancelar o VCA Spill, siga um dos seguintes procedimentos:
Pressione o switch Select do VCA.

Pressione qualquer switch Bank (A-D).
Pressione o switch FX Returns 1-8.
Pressione o switch GEQ.
Na caixa de dilogo da tela, clique Exit VCA Spill.
Selecionando Outro VCA no modo Spill

Selecionar outro VCA enquanto o modo spill est ativo
automaticamente distribui esse VCA.
Captulo
9: Groups
Chapter
9: Groups
Chapter
9: Groups
Stage Rack Features
be used
simultaneously,
Estecan
captulo
mostra
como:
chapter busses
shows how
to do the following:
This
Configurar
Group
This
chapter
shows
how
to do the following:
Enderear
Configure
Group
busses
Audio
Groups
I/O
parmetros
bus Group
Ajustar
Configure
Groupdo
busses
Route
Groups
48
inputs
individually
Route
Groups
Adjust Group
bus parameters
selectable
phantom power.
Adjust
Group
bus
parameters
digital outputs
per Group
Stage Rack.
Configurando
Busses
Configuring Group Busses
Synchronization
ControlGroup
I/O
Configuring
Group
Busses
A seo
Output possuiand
8 busses
disponveis. As sadas Group
The Output section has 8 available Group busses. Group outpodem ser
atribudas
para os
Output,
para os plug-ins
Snake
connectors
to busses
enable Main
primary
and redundant
(if
puts
canpor
be bus,
assigned
to
MainMatrix
Output
busses,
toGroup
available
The Output
section
8mixers
available
Group
busses.
outalimentados
parahas
osthe
eFOH
para
qualquer
sada
applicable)
connection
to a VENUE
Rack.
bus-fed
plug-ins,
to
Matrix
mixers,
and
to
any
hardware
outputs
can
be
assigned
to
the
Main
Output
busses,
to
available
de hardware no sistema.
puts
on plug-ins,
the systems.
bus-fed
to Matrix mixers, and to any hardware outBusses
podem
ser globalmente configurados para serem
putsGroup
on the
systems.
Group
busses
can beparte
globally
configured todebebus
mono
or stereo
mono
ou estreo
como
da configurao
Aux/Group.
System
Components
as
part
of
the
Aux/Group
bus
configuration.
See
Configuring
Group
busses
can
be
globally
configured
to
be
mono
stereo
Veja Configurando Busses Aux, Group e Variable Group naorpgina
Aux,
Group,
Variablebus
Group
Busses onSee
page
80.
80. as
part
of the and
Aux/Group
configuration.
Configuring
Included
Aux, Group,Components
and Variable Group Busses on page 80.
Endereando
Entradas
para
BussesBusses
Group
VENUE Profile
console
Routing
Inputs
to
Group
Routing
Inputs
to Group Busses
Two (2) IEC
power cables
Para enderear
vrios canais
paratoum
nico Group:
To route multiple
channels
a single
Group:

To
routethe
multiple
channels
to abank
single
Group:
1 Press
Groups
switch
faders para
to the
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not the
included)
1 Pressione
o switch
Groups
paratoassociar
os Output
faders Output
os
Groups
busses.
busses
Groups.
1 Press
the
Groups
switch to bank the Output faders to the
VENUE
Mouse Pad
Groups
busses.
VENUE
Profileswitch
Guide the Output strip for the Group
2 Press
Select
2 Pressione
othe
switch
Select na in
rgua Output para o Group (18) ao
(18)
to
which
you
want
to the
assign
channels.
2
Press
the
Select
switch
Output
strip for the Group
Two
(2)
console
lightsin
qual voc deseja atribuir canais.
(18)
to whichDust
you want
to assign channels.
Protective
Cover
3 Press
the Multi-Assign
switch near the Output encoders. The
3 Pressione o switch Multi Assign prximo aos codificadores Output.
Rack(s)
(see
next)
Multi
Assign
and
outputswitch
Select near
switches
flash. encoders. The
3 Press
the Multi-Assign
the Output
Os switches Multi Assign e Select piscam.
Multi Assign and output Select switches flash.

4 Press the Select switch on the channels you want routed to
Racks,
Software
CDs,
anddeseja
Cables
4 Pressione
othe
switch
Select
dosiLoks,
canais que
enderear para
the
selected
Group.
4 Press
Select
switch on the channels you want routed to
o Group selecionado.
the selected
Group.
Each
Mix Rack
or FOH Rack includes:
5 Press the Multi Assign switch again to confirm the action.
System
Restore
CD Assign novamente para confirmar a
5 Pressione
o
switch
Multi
5 Press
or the Multi Assign switch again to confirm the action.
ao. ECx Ethernet Control Software Installer CD
or
Select another Group to confirm the current assignment but
ou remain
Selectin
Multi Assign
to assign
channels
to the newly
another
Group mode
to confirm
the current
assignment
but
targetedinGroup
remain
Multibus.
Assign mode to assign channels to the newly
Selecione
outro
Groupdiscs
para(ifconfirmar
atribuio atualiLok
mas
Plug-in
installer
any) witha pre-authorized
targeted Group bus.
continuar
no
modo
Multi
Assign
para
associar
canais
a
um
novo
bus
Group.


Para
enderear canais
para qualquer
nmero
de bussesVGA
Group:
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
and
To route channels to any number of Group busses:

DVI
supported.
route
channels
to any
number of Group busses:
1 1To
Selecione
um or
oumore
mais
canais.
Target
one
channels.
1 Target one or more channels.
the Bus
Assigns
section,
press qualquer
any of the
Group
switches
2 2NaInseo
Bus
Assigns,
pressione
dos
switches
Group
so
that
they
lit. (VENUE
para
que
fiquem
acesos.
2 In
the
Bus are
Assigns
section,Profile
press any
of theOnly)
Group switches
Digital
Snake
Cable
Systems
so that they are lit.
from
vendor.
Center/Mono
Left-Avid or assembled by your preferred
Right
LeftRight
Center/Mono
Optional Components
Groups
Groups
Stereo Pan

Stereo Pan
(for Talkback)
Bus Assign
switches
Switches de atribuio de bus
Assign
Footswitches
Bus
switches(up to 2)
Routing
Group
Outputs
the
Main
BNC cables
(for connecting
Wordto
clock
between
Endereando
Sadas
Group
para
os the
busses
Routing
Group
Outputs
to
the
Busses
VENUE system and external digital devices) Main
Main
Busses
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for connecting
GPI devices)
You
can route
Group
outputs
to the Mainto
busses
from the ACS
or
on-screen.
You
can route
Groupsadas
outputs
to the
Main
ACS
Voc
pode
enderear
Group
para
os busses
bussesfrom
Mainthe
pelo
ACS
on-screen.
ouorpela
tela.
To route a Group
outputExpansion
to the Main busses
from the ACS:
VENUE
Profile
Options
Para
enderear
umaoutput
sada Group
bussesfrom
Mainthe
pelo
ACS:
To route
a Group
to the para
Mainos
busses
ACS:
1 Press the Groups switch in the Output Fader assignment secThe following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
tion
to the
assign
control
of Group
levels
toFader
the
faders.
1
Press
switch
in
Output
assignment
sec- o
1For
Pressione
oGroups
switch
Groups
nathe
seo
Fader
para
details
on
all VENUE
systems
andOutput
options,
visit
theassociar
Avid
tion
to
assign
control
of
Group
levels
to
the
faders.
controle
dos
nveis
Group
aos
faders.
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options
Groups switch
AI16
Groups switch
mic/line
level inputs
AO16
Analog
Output
that
Assigning
Groups
to theCard
Output
faders
outputs
Assigning
Groups faders
to the Output faders
Atribuindo
Groups
2 Select
eachaos
Group Output
that you want to assign to the Main busXO16
Analog
and
Digital
Card
provides
analog
ses
by
pressing
their
Select
switches.
2 Select each Group thatOutput
you
want
tothat
assign
to the 8Main
bus2line
Selecione
cada and
Group
quedigital
desejaoutputs.
atribuir aos busses Main
level
outputs,
8
AES
ses by pressing their Select switches.
pressionando seus switches Select.

Chapter 9: Groups 89
IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addiChapter 9: Groups 89
digital I/O.
Captulo 9: Groups 89
3 In
the ACS
Bus Assigns
section,
press the
LR (left
right)
3 Na
seo
Bus Assigns
do ACS,
pressione
o switch
LRand
(left/right)
or
C/Mono
(center/mono)
switch
so
that
it
is
lit.
ou 3C/Mono
(center/mono)
para
que fique
In the ACS
Bus Assigns
section,
pressaceso.
the LR (left and right)
or C/Mono (center/mono) switch so that it is lit.
To
cancel
Group Spill,
do any ofSpill,
the following:
Para
cancelar
o Group
siga um dos seguintes
procedimentos:
To
Spill, do any
ofSelect
the following:
cancel
PressGroup
or double-press
the
switch on the currently
spilled
Press orGroup.
double-press the Select switch on the currently
Pressione o switch Select do Group.

Pressione qualquer switch Bank (A-D).
any
Bank
(A-D)FX
switch.
Press
the FX
1-8
switch.1-8.
Pressione
oReturns
switch
Returns

Pressione
o
switch
GEQ.
Press a
GEQ
the
FX switch.
Returns 1-8 switch.
Na
dilogo
da click
tela, clique
Exit Group
In
theacaixa
on-screen
dialog,
Exit Group
Spill. Spill.
Press
GEQde
switch.
Press
Bank (A-D) switch.
spilledany
Group.
LeftRight
LeftBusRight
Assign switches
Center/Mono
Center/Mono
Switches Bus Assign
Bus Assign switches
To route a Group output to the Main busses on-screen:
Para
uma sada
os busses
busses Main
na tela:
Toenderear
route a Group
outputGroup
to thepara
Main
on-screen:
1 Go to the Outputs page and select the Group you want to

route
to the
theOutputs
Main busses.
1 Go
to
Outputs
and select
the que
Group
you enderear
want to
1 V
pgina
epage
selecione
o Group
deseja
route
to
the
Main
busses.
para
os
busses
Main.
2 Click the Bus Assign buttons on-screen to toggle the bus as-
signment for the selected Group.
2 Click the Bus Assign buttons on-screen to toggle the bus as2 Clique
no boto Bus Assign na tela para alternar a atribuio de
signment
for the
selected Group.
bus para o Group
selecionado.
In the on-screen
dialog,
click Exit
Selecionando
Outro Group
no Modo
SpillGroup Spill.
Selecting Other Groups While Spilled

Selecionar outro
enquanto
o modo spill est ativo,
Selecting
OtherGroup
Groups
While Spilled
Selecting another Group while spill mode is active automatiautomaticamente distribui esse Group.
cally
spillsanother
that Group.
Selecting
Group while spill mode is active automatically
thatcom
Group.
Casosspills
Especiais
Spill
Special Cases with Spill

Faders
Special
Cases with Spill
Faders
Se voc est tocando um fader ao mesmo tempo em que chama
Faders
If
are Spill,
touching
a fader
theoff-line.
same time
umyou
Group
o fader
podeat
ficar
Solteaso you
faderinvoke
para traz-lo
Group
Spill,
that
fader
may
be
taken
off-line.
Let
go
of
the
de
volta.
If you are touching a fader at the same time as you invoke
fader
bringthat
it back
GrouptoSpill,
faderonline.
may be taken off-line. Let go of the
Visualizando
Atribuies
de Bus Group
fader to bring it back online.
Assigning a Group output to the Main busses from the Output page
Viewing
Group
Bus Assignments
Voc pode ver
as atribuies
do bus Group pela seo Input
console ou por
uma lista
dosAssignments
membros do Group na tela.
Viewing
Group
Bus
You can view Group bus assignments from the Input section
da
Endereando
sada Group
na pgina
Output
Assigninguma
a Group
outputpara
to os
thebusses
Main Main
busses
from the
Output page
of
the
console
or from
an
on-screen
of
Group
members.
You
can
viewAtribuies
Group
bus
assignments
from
theInput
Input
section
Visualizando
do
Bus Grouplist
na
Seo
of the console or from an on-screen list of Group members.
Managing Group Bus Assignments

Gerenciando
Atribuies
de Bus
Group
Managing
Group Bus
Assignments
To help manage Groups, the following sections explain how
Para ver os Group

membros
do Group
na console:in the Input
Viewing
Bus
Assignments
Section
Viewing Group Bus Assignments in the Input
1 Pressione o switch Groups para assoicar os faders Output aos
Section
you
can manage
spill,
view,
copy
(duplicate)
andsections
reset
Groups
and
Toauxiliar
help
Groups,
the following
explain
how
Para
a gerenciar
Groups,
a seguinte
seo
explica
como
Group
bus
assignments.
distribuir,
copiar
e resetarand
Groups
atribuies
you canver,
spill,
view,(duplicar)
copy (duplicate)
reset eGroups
and de
busGroup
de Group.
bus assignments.
To
view the
Group
on
the
console:
1
Press
Groups
switch
to bank
the Output
faders
to
2 Pressione
e membership
segure
o switch
Default,
e pressione
o switch
Multi
Assign
seo
Output.
Groups.
1
Pressna
the
Groups
switch to bank the Output faders to
Group
Group
Spill
Spill
Group
Spill
You can spill a Group to have only its assigned channels
Voc pode distribuir (spill) um Group para ter apenas seus canais
banked
the Input
section.
Group Spill
lets you quickly
acYou canto
Group
to have
its assigned
channels
associados
spill
seoaInput.
Group
Spillonly
permite
acessar rapidamente
cess
only
those
channels
assigned
to
a
specific
Group
and
imbanked
the Input
section. Group
you especfico
quickly acapenas
ostocanais
assinalados
para Spill
um lets
Group
e
mediately
focus
on
those
channels,
without
needing
to
search
cess only those
channels
assigned
to aa necessidade
specific Group
imimediatamente
focar
nesses canais,
sem
de and
procurthe
input
fader
mediately
focus
thosebanks.
channels, without needing to search
los through
pelos bancos
deon
faders.
through the input fader banks.
Para
um Group:
Todistribuir
spill a Group:
To spill a Group:
1 Select the Group output fader bank.

1 Selecione
o banco de faders de sada Group.
1 Select the Group output fader bank.

2 Double-press a Group Select switch to spill its members
2 Pressione
vezes
o switch Group Select para distribuir seus
across
theduas
input
2 Double-press
afaders.
Group Select switch to spill its members
membros pelos faders de entrada.
across the input faders.
The selected Group Select switch LED flashes, as do the cur-
O LED
do
switch
Group
Select
selecionado
pisca,
como
oschannels
switches
rent
input
Bank
or FX
Return
switch.
Any
Bank
Safed
The selected
Group
Select
switch
LED
flashes,
as
do the
curBank ou FX Return. Qualquer canal Bank Safe encoberto (apesar
are
hidden
(though
their
Bank
Safe status
is unaltered).
rent
input
Bank
or
FX
Return
switch.
Any
Bank
Safed
channels
do status Bank Safe permanecer inalterado).
are hidden (though their Bank Safe status is unaltered).
If the Group contains fewer than 16 members the channels are
Se right-justified
o Group contm
menos
que fader
16 membros,
os canais
so
within fewer
the input
bank, in order
to bring
If the Group contains
than 16 members
channels
are
justificados
direita dentro
do banco
de faders de the
entrada,
de modo
channels
as close
as possible
to the
center
console.
Unright-justified
within
thepossvel
input
fader
bank,of
inthe
order
to Rguas
bring
a mant-los
o mais
prximo
do centro
da
console.
used
channel
strips
are
left
blank
and
inactive.
close ficam
as possible
to theecenter
of the console. Unde channels
canal noas
usadas
em branco
inativas.
used channel strips are left blank and inactive.
If the Group contains more than 16 members only the first 16
Se o Group contm mais que 16 membros, apenas os primeiros 16

arecontains
shown. more than 16 members only the first 16
Ifmostrados.
the Group
somembers
members are shown.

90 Guia
VENUE
Profile
Guide
90
VENUE
Profile
Groups.
To
view Group membership on the console:
Groups.
2
and hold
the
Default
then
press the
OsPress
membros
de um
Group
so switch,
mostrados
(piscam)
emMulti
cada AsLCD de
sign
switch
in
the
Output
section.
2
Pressdeand
holdo the
Default
switch,
thenao
press
Multi
As-est
rgua
canal;
nmero
indica
o grupo
qualthe
cada
canal
atribudo.
sign
switch in the Output section.
Group numbers are shown (flashing) in each channel strip
LCD;
numberare
indicates
the Groupin
toeach
which
each channel
Groupthe
numbers
shown (flashing)
channel
strip
is
assigned.
LCD; the number indicates the Group to which each channel
is assigned.
Viewing Group Bus Assignments On-Screen

Viewing
Viewing
Group
Group
BusBus
Assignments
Assignments
On-Screen
On-Screen
2 Click the Input Assign pop-up menu at the bottom of the
Clique
noInput
menu
pop-up
Input
Assign
na
parte
inferior
da
Members
Members
list,
choose
Replace
With
Mix
From,
then
the
2 2Click
2 Click
the
the
Input
Assign
Assign
pop-up
pop-up
menu
menu
at
the
at
bottom
the
bottom
ofchoose
the
of
the
Visualizando Atribuies do Bus Group na Tela
List, escolha Replace With Mix From, e escolha o Group cujas

When a Group bus channel is targeted on-screen, its members Members
Group
whose
youWith
want
copy
to
the
currently
Members
list,
choose
list, assignments
choose
Replace
Replace
With
Mix
From,
MixtoFrom,
thenthen
choose
choose
the the
Quando
canal
deabus
selecionado
tela,
seus
membros
atribuies deseja copiar para o bus atualmente selecionado.
are
shown
in
listGroup
on
the
right
side
ofna
the
Outputs
page.
When
When
aum
Group
a Group
bus
channel
bus
channel
istargeted
is targeted
on-screen,
on-screen,
its
members
its
members Group
selected
bus.
Group
whose
whose
assignments
assignments
you
you
want
want
to
copy
to
copy
to
the
to
currently
the
currently
Stage Rack
Features
so
no lado
direito
daOutputs
pgina
Outputs.
aremostrados
shown
are shown
in aem
in
listuma
aon
listlista
the
on right
the
right
side
side
of the
of
the
Outputs
page.page.
Audio I/O
selected
selected
bus. bus.
Members

DVI supported.
Members
Members



Pop-up
Pop-up
Pop-up

Optional Components
Copiando
atribuies
de entrada entre
GroupsGroups
Copying
input assignments
between
System Components
Copying
Copying
inputinput
assignments
assignments
between
between
Groups
Groups
Included Components
Near-field
monitor
for mix
position
monitoring
You
can remove
inputspeakers
assignments
from
a Group
on-screen.
You You
can
remove
can remove
input
input
assignments
assignments
fromfrom
a Group
a Group
on-screen.
on-screen.
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
Para remover uma atribuio de entrada de um bus Group:
To
anor
input
assignment
from a Group
bus: mic cable
remove
Dynamic
condenser
microphone
and XLR
To remove
To remove
input
an input
assignment
assignment
fromfrom
a Group
a Group
bus: bus:
(foran
Talkback)
1 Select
the
Group
bus you
to change
so that
mem1 Selecione
o bus
Group
que want
voc deseja
alterar
paraitsque
seus
mostrados
na tela.
bers
aresejam
displayed
on-screen.
1 membros
Select
1 Select
the
Group
the Group
bus
you
bus
you
want
want
to change
to change
so that
so that
its memits memFootswitches
(up
to 2)
bers bers
areMIDI
displayed
are displayed
on-screen.
cables
(foron-screen.
connecting
external
MIDI devices)
2 In
the
of Group
members,
right-click
input
as- a
2 Na
lista
delist
membros
do bus
Group,
clique com
o botothe
direito
sobre
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
the
you
want
to
remove
and
choose
Unassign.
2 atribuio
Insignment
2the
In
list
theque
of
list
Group
of
Group
bus
members,
bus
members,
right-click
right-click
the
input
the
input
asasdeseja remover e escolha Unassign.
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
signment
signment
you you
want
want
to remove
to remove
and and
choose
choose
Unassign.
Unassign.
Para
todas
as
atribuies
defrom
entrada
deGPI
um
bus Group:
remover
25-pin D-Sub
cables
(for connecting
to
devices)
To
remove
all
input
assignments
a Group
bus:
To remove
To remove
all input
all input
assignments
assignments
fromfrom
a Group
a Group
bus: bus:
1 Select the Group bus you want to change so that its mem1 Selecione
o bus Group que deseja alterar para que seus membros
bers
are Group
displayed
on-screen.
1 sejam
Select
1 Select
the
the Group
bustela.
you
bus you
wantwant
to change
to change
so that
so that
its memits memmostrados
na
bers
bers
are displayed
are displayed
on-screen.
on-screen.
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
2 Click the pop-up menu at the bottom of the Members list
2 Clique no menu pop-up na parte inferior da Members List e escolha
and
choose
Reset
Mix.
2 Click
2 Click
the
pop-up
the pop-up
menu
menu
at be
the
atadded
bottom
the bottom
of the
of Members
the
Members
list list
The
following
options
can
to VENUE
Profile
systems.
Reset
Mix.
and
and
choose
choose
Reset
Reset
Mix.
Mix.

selected
output
(Group)
Currently
Monitor
mount
for VGA
screen (screen not included)
Currently
selected
selected
output
output
(Group)
(Group)
Group
members
shown
in the
Outputs
Currently
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not page
included)
Membros
de um
Group
mostrados
pgina
Outputs
GroupGroup
members
members
shown
shown
in thena
inOutputs
the
Outputs
page page
VENUE Mouse Pad
Copying Assignments Between Groups

VENUE
Profile
Guide
Copiando
Atribuies
Entre
Groups
Copying
Copying
Assignments
Assignments
Between
Between
Groups
Groups
You
can(2)
copy
the current
Two
console
lights input assignments from one Group
Voc
copiar
ascurrent
atribuies
atuais
um bus
Group
outro.
bus
to
another.
If current
the
Groups
arede
stereo,
assignments
can
be
Youpode
You
can
copy
can
copy
the
the
input
input
assignments
assignments
from
from
onepara
one
Group
Group
Protective
Dust
Cover
Se
o
Groups
estreo,
as
atribuies
podem
ser
copiadas
de
outros
copied
fromIfother
linked
busses.
letsassignments
you quickly
duplibus to
busanother.
to another.
the
If Groups
the
Groups
are
stereo,
are This
stereo,
assignments
can be
can
be
associados.
Rack(s) (seeIsso
next)
busses
permite
duplicar
rapidamente
mixagens
de
cate
monitor
mixes.
copied
copied
from
from
otherother
linked
linked
busses.
busses.
ThisThis
lets
you
lets you
quickly
quickly
dupliduplimonitor.
cate cate
monitor
monitor
mixes.
mixes.
Racks,Copying
Software
iLoks, andoverwrites
Cablesall the assignGroupCDs,
bus assignments
Copiar
atribuies
de
Group sobrescreve
todas
as
atribuies
ments
onGroup
the
Group
bus.
Copying
Copying
Group
busdestination
assignments
bus assignments
overwrites
overwrites
all the
allassignthe assignEach
orde
FOH
Rack includes:
doMix
busRack
Group
destino.
ments
ments
on the
ondestination
the destination
Group
Group
bus. bus.
copy
System
Restore
CD
To
input
assignments
between Group busses:
Para copiar atribuies de entrada entre busses Group:
To copy
To
copy
input
input
assignments
assignments
between
between
Group
Group
busses:
busses:
ECx Ethernet
Control
Software
Installer
CD destination of
1 Target
the Group
bus that
you want
to be the
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
the
copied
by
selecting
its
on-screen
channel
Target
1 Target
theo Group
the
Group
bus that
bus
you
want
you
want
to be
tothe
be
destination
theodestination
ofdasof
11Selecione
busassignments
Group
que that
voc
deseja
que
seja
destino
atribuies
copiadas
selecionando
sua
rgua
de
canal
na
tela.
strip.
the copied
the
copied
assignments
assignments
by
selecting
by
selecting
its
on-screen
its
on-screen
channel
channel
strip.strip.
USB flash
disk (or
Resetando
Atribuies
deother
Bus Group
Resetting
Group
Bus
transfer of Show
data;
512 Assignments
MB or larger recommended)
Resetting
Resetting
Group
Group
Bus
Bus
Assignments
Assignments
Voc pode remover atribuies de entrada de um Group na tela.
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options
Click
Click Click
Removing input assignments from a Group bus
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
that
16 analog
Removing
Removing
inputinput
assignments
assignments
from from
aCard
Group
a Group
bus provides
bus
Removendo
de entrada de um bus Group
mic/line atribuies
level inputs

outputs
9: Groups 91
tional 8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels
of AES/EBU
Chapter
Chapter
9:
Groups
9: Groups
91 91
digital I/O.
Group Bus Signal Flow Options

Opes de Fluxo de Sinal do Bus Group
Routing Signals to a Mono Group Bus
Endereando Sinais para um Bus Group Mono
Configuration
Quando
busses
os oito
Groups
podem
Whenconfigurados
configured ascomo
mono
busses,mono,
the eight
Groups
can be
fed
seras
alimentados
como
oito
busses
mono
dessassociados
ou
quatro
8 unlinked mono busses or up to 4 linked odd/even bus
pares
mpar/par associados.
pairs.
Desassociando Busses Mono
Unlinked Mono Busses
Para usar busses Group mono desassociados:

To use unlinked mono Group busses:
1 Certifique-se de que os busses Group esto configurados como

1 Make sure the Group busses are configured as mono busses.
mono. Veja Configurando Busses Aux, Group e Variable Group
See
Configuring
Busses
na pgina 80.
page 80.
2 Enquanto
enderea canais para os busses Group, certifique-se de
2 While routing channels to Group busses, make sure the Steque o switch Stereo Pan esteja desligado.
reo Pan switch is off.
Os The
switches
Group
na seo
do ACS
se acendem
em
Group
switches
in theBus
ACSAssigns
Bus Assigns
section
light green
verde para indicar operao mono. Nessa configurao, os sinais de
to indicate mono operation. In this configuration, input sigentrada so manueados da seguinte maneira:
nals are handled as follows:
Mono Input Signals Sinais mono so somados para contribuir com

Mono Input Signals Contributing mono signals are summed to
o bus Group mono. Qualquer informao de posicionamento (pan)
the mono Group bus. Any pan information from mono input
dos canais de entrada mono que alimentam o bus ignorada.
Routing Signals to a Stereo Group Bus

Endereando Sinais para um Bus Group Estreo
Configuration
When
as stereo
eight os
Groups
can be fed
Quandoconfigured
configurados
para busses,
busses the
estreo,
oito Groups
podem
ser8 alimentados
por oito
busses
estreo
nodual
modo
Expert)
as
true stereo busses
or (in
Expert
mode (apenas
only) as 8
mono
ou oito busses Dual Mono.
busses.
Busses Stereo
Stereo Busses
Para utilizar busses Group estreo:
To use stereo Group busses:
1 Make
Certifique-se
que os
busses
estoasconfigurados
como
1
sure thedeGroup
busses
are Group
configured
stereo busses.
busses estreo. Veja Configurando Busses Aux, Group e Variable
See Configuring Aux, Group, and Variable Group Busses on

Group Busses na pgina 80.
page 80.
2 Quando
endereando
canais
para
qualquer
busses
Group,
2
When routing
channels
to any
of the
Groupdos
busses,
make
certifique-se
de Pan
que switch
o switchest
aceso em amarelo.
sure
the Stereo
is lit yellow.
Quando
trabalhando
com
Gropus
no modo
When
working
with stereo
Groups
inestreo
Simple Mode,
theSimple,
Ste- o
switch
Stereo
Pan
est
sempre
aceso
para
indicar
que
reo Pan switch is always lit to indicate all Groups operate intodos
os Groups operam em estreo.
true stereo.
Busses Dual Mono
Dual Mono Busses

Busses
Dualbusses
mono may
podem
serbeutilizados
apenasMode.
no modo
Dual
mono
only
used in Expert
See Expert.
Veja Modos de Operao Simple e Expert na pgina 93.
Simple and Expert Operational Modes on page 93.
channels feeding the bus is ignored.
Stereo Input Signals Sinais estreo so somados para contribuir

Stereo Input Signals Contributing stereo signals are summed
com o bus Group mono mas sem atenuao. As informaes de
to theemono
bus
no attenuation.
The balance and
balance
width Group
do canal
dewith
entrada
estreo so ignoradas.
width information from each stereo input channel is ignored.
Associando Pares de Bus mpar/Par
Linked Odd/Even Bus Pairs
Para usar pares de bus Group mono associados:

To use linked mono Group bus pairs:
1 Certifique-se de que os busses Group esto configurados como

1 Make
sureVeja
the Group
busses are
configured
as mono
busses
mono.
Configurando
Busses
Aux, Group
e busses.
Variable
See Busses
Configuring
Aux,80.
Group, and Variable Group Busses on
Group
na pgina
page 80.
2 Enquanto enderea canais para os busses Group, pressione o

2 While
channels
Group
busses,
press the Stereo
switch
Stereorouting
Pan para
que se to
acenda
em
amarelo.
Pan switch so that it lights yellow.
Os switches Group na seo Bus Assigns do ACS e os LEDs Stereo

Group
switches in
theAssign
ACS Bus
and theem
PanThe
LED
no indicador
Bus
dosAssigns
canaissection
se acendem
Stereo para
Pan LED
in the
channels
Bus Assign
indicator
light yelamarelo
indicar
operao
estreo.
Nessa
configurao,
os
lowde
toentrada
indicateso
stereo
operation.
this configuration,
input
sinais
manueados
da In
seguinte
maneira:
signals are handled as follows:
Mono Input Signals Sinais mono so posicionados nos pares mpar/

Input
Signals
Contributing
monodesignals
are panned
parMono
de bus
Group
associados.
Informaes
posicionamento
(pan)
the linked
odd/even
Group
bus
pair. Pan
information
de across
cada canal
de entrada
determina
sua
posio
no par
de bus.
from each mono input channel determines its pan position in
Stereo
Input
Signals Sinais estreo so posicionados nos pares
the bus
pair.
mpar/par de bus Group associados. Informaes de balance e width
de Stereo
cada canal
entrada
estreo determinam
suaarecontribuio
Input de
Signals
Contributing
stereo signals
panned
para
os lados
mpar eodd/even
par do bus.
across
the linked
Group bus pair. Balance and width
information from each stereo input channel determines its
contribution to the odd and even sides of the bus pair.
Ajustando Controles
de Sada
do Bus
Group
Adjusting
Group Bus
Output
Controls
Nveis de Sada do Bus Group
Group Bus Output Levels

Os nveis do bus Group so ajustados da mesma forma que os outros
Group bus levels are adjusted just like other Output busses
busses Output (atribua aos Groups, ajuste os faders). Para mais
(bank to Groups, adjust the fader). For more information, see
informaes, veja Ajustando Controles de Sada na pgina 83.
Adjusting Output Controls on page 83.
Posicionamento (Pan) de Sada dos Bus Group
Group Bus Output Pan
O posicionamento (pan) de sada do bus Group controlado pelos
codificadores
Output.
Group
bus output
pan is controlled from the Output encoders.
Groups-to-Mains
assignment
is displayed
theindicador
indicatorde cada
Atribuio Groups-to-Mains
mostrada
peloby
LED
codificador
est associado
faders
LED
for eachOutput,
Output quando
encoder,Groups
when Groups
are bankedaos
to the
Output.
O
switch
Pan
do
codificador
Output
alterna
os
codificadores
Output faders. The Output encoder Pan switch cycles the ene LCDs and
paraLCD
parmetros
balance
width.parameters.
coders
to pan, pan,
balance
and e
width
Os controles
de pan
ajustam
pan in
(quando
na configurao
The
pan controls
adjust
pan (when
mono Groups
configu- de
Groups
mono)
ou
balance
e
width
estreo
(quando
na
configurao
ration) or stereo balance and width (when in stereo Groups
de Groups estreo) da sada Group para os busses Main apenas. As
configuration) of the Group output to the Main busses only.
sadas Group no Patchbay so canais esquerdo e direito distintos.
The Group outputs in the Patchbay are distinct left and right
channels.
Para controlar o pan de sadas de Group mono:
To
control os
mono
Group
output
pan:
1 Associe
faders
Output
para
Groups.
1 Bank the Output faders to Groups.
2 Pressione o switch Pan na seo de codificadores Output uma vez
para
atribuir
o controle
panOutput
do Group
aos codificadores
Output.
2
Press
the Pan
switch do
in the
encoder
section once
to
assign control of Group pan to the Output encoders.
3 Gire um codificador rotativo para ajustar o pan do Group mono
3
Turn a rotary encoder to adjust the pan for the correspondcorrespondente.
ing mono Group.

Para controlar balance e width de um Group estreo:

To control stereo Group output balance and width:
1 Pressione o switch Pan na seo de codificadores Output.

1 Stage
Press theRack
Pan switch
in the Output encoder section.
Features
2 2Gire
codificador
rotativo
parathe
ajustar
o balance
do Group
Turnum
aRacks
rotary
encoder
to adjust
balance
the correStage
are
used with
an FOH
Rack,
andfor
provide
all stage
estreo
correspondente.
sponding
stereo Group.

can
used
simultaneously,
supporting
upEncoder
to 96 total
inputs.
Pressbethe
Pan
in
the
assign3 3Pressione
oGroup
switch
Panswitch
na seo
deOutput
codificadores
Output
uma
vez
mais
para an
atribuir
controle
width
do Group
selecionado
ment
section
additional
time
to assign
Group
width con-aos
Audio
I/O
codificadores
Output.encoders.
trol
to the
Output
Turn
encoder
to adjust
width
for the corre4 4Gire
uma rotary
codificador
rotativo
para the
ajustar
o balance
e width do
sponding
stereo
Group.
Group estreo correspondente.
Simple
Expert
Operational
Modes
Synchronization
and Control
I/Oe Expert
Modos
De and
Operao
Simple
2 Selecione um Input Channel ou FX Return cujo sinal deseja enviar
Topara
set the
individual
mono vrios
Group busses
a o switch
um link
busstatus
Group.ofPara
selecionar
canais, on
use
channel
(Expert
Mode dos
only):
Multi-Select
prximo
fader de entrada.
1 Make sure Stereo Group Panning is set to Expert Mode.
3 Na seo Bus Assigns, pressione o switch Stereo Pan. O switch

para indicar
modowhose
de associao
dowant
bus.
2 pisca
Selectem
an amarelo
input channel
or FX oreturn
signal you
Video
or greater
flat-panel
VGAuse
display
to send
to aDisplay
Group (15-inch
bus. To select
multiple
channels,
the
4 Pressione
qualquer
umtodos
switches
Group
switches VGA
para associar
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
and
Multi-Select
switch
next
the
input faders.
ou DVI
desassociar
os pares de bus (12, 34, 56 ou 78). O switch
supported.
em amarelo
para
indicar
estreo,The
ou pisca
3 Group
In thepisca
Bus Assigns
section,
press
the associao
Stereo Pan switch.
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
em
verde
para
indicar
mono.
switch flashes yellow to indicate bus link mode.
4 5Digital
Press
any
ofo the
Group
switches
to link
or unlink
the o
bus
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Systems
Only)
Pressione
switch
Stereo
PanProfile
piscante
para
confirmar
status de
pairs
(12, 34,
56,
or 78).
The Group
switch pairs flash yelassociao
de
bus
para
os
canais
selecionados.
low to indicate stereo linked, or flash green to indicate mono.
Trabalhando
com
Busses
Group
Estreo
from
or assembled
byswitch
your
preferred
vendor.
5 Press
theAvid
flashing
Stereo
Pan
to confirm
the bus link
status for the selected channels.
Quando configurados como busses stereo, Groups podem operar

nos
seguintesComponents
modos:
Optional
configuring
Snake connectors
enable
primary
and redundant
(if
When
Group to
busses,
you
can choose
between two
Quando
configurando
busses
Group,
voc
pode
escolher
entre
dois
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
operational modes that provide different levels of flexibility:
modos de operao que oferecem diferentes nveis de flexibilidade:
Simple mode and Expert mode.
Working
with Stereo Group Busses
Ajustando
o Modo
de Operao
System
Setting
theComponents
Operational
Mode
purchased
separately:
When
configured
as
stereoestreo.
busses, Groups can operate in the
funcionam
como
busses
following
USBmodes:
flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
Simple e Expert.
Para
alternar entre os modos Simple e Expert:
To switch between Simple mode and Expert mode:
Included Components
Put theo system

mode.
1 1Coloque
sistemainnoConfig
modo Config.
2 Go toVENUE
the Options
and click the Busses tab.
Profilepage
console
2 V pgina Options e clique a aba Busses.
Two
(2) IEC
power
cables
3 Under
Stereo
Group
Panning
Operation, select the mode you
3 want
Em Stereo
Panning
Operation, selecione o modo que deseja
useGroup
(Simple
or Expert).
toMonitor
mount
usar (Simple ou Expert).
VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE Profile Guide
Rack(s) (see next)
Setting othe
Group
bus operational
mode
Ajustando
modo
de operao
do bus Group
Racks, Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and Cables
Trabalhando
como
Group
mono Busses
Working
withbusses
Mono
Group
Eachconfigured
Mix Rack or
FOH
Rack
includes:
When
ascomo
mono
busses,
Groups
can operate
in operar
the
Quando
configurados
busses
mono,
os Groups
podem
System
Restore CD
nos
seguintes
modos:
following
modes:
Simple Mode
Simple
Mode Software Installer CD
Standalone
iLok USB todos

Smart KeyGroups
(for storingmono
plug-in
No
ou authorizations)
todos
os grupos
In modo
SimpleSimple,
mode, eitheros
all Groupsso
on a channel
are mono,
or
atuam
como
pares
de
bus.
Plug-in
installer
discs
(if
any)
with
pre-authorized
iLok
all Groups on a channel act as bus pairs.
Expert Mode
One
FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console
Expert
Mode
No modo Expert, qualquer dos 4 pares de bus pode ser associado em

In Each
Expert
mode,
any
of the 4 bus pairs can be stereo linked inStage
Rack
includes:
estreo enquanto outros busses so deixados em mono, baseados
dividually
while
leaving
other busses as mono, on a per
Two (2) IEC powerthe
cables
em canais.
channel basis.
Para ajustar o status de associao de busses Group mono

individuais em um canal (modo Expert apenas):
1 Certifique-se de que o Stereo Group Panning est ajustado para
Expert Mode.
Simple Mode No modo Simple, todos os oito busses Group
Experttransfer
Mode No
Expert,
qualquer
um dos
oito busses Group
of modo
Show data;
512
MB or larger
recommended)
Simple
Mode
Inser
Simple
Mode,
all 8
Group
busses
estreo
pode
ajustado
para
atuar
como
bus function
estreo ou como
busas
mono
only
trueduplo,
stereobaseado
busses. em canais.
Expert
Mode
In
Mode,
any
of the
stereo
Group
busses
Para ajustar
o Expert
status
de
associao
de 8busses
estreo
Dynamic
or condenser
microphone
and Group
XLR mic
cablepara
can
set
act asExpert
true stereo
or as dual mono busses, on a per
umbecanal
(modo
apenas):
(forto
Talkback)
channel basis.
1 Certifique-se de que o Stereo Group Panning est ajustado para
MIDI
cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
Mode.
ToExpert
set the
link status of individual stereo Group busses for a
BNC
cables
(foronly):
connecting Word clock between the
channel
(Expert
Mode
2 Selecione
Input
Channel
FX Return
cujo sinal deseja
VENUE um
system
and
externaloudigital
devices)
1 enderear
Make surepara
Stereo
Panning
set to Expert
Mode.
umGroup
bus Group.
Paraisselecionar
vrios
canais, use o
switch Multi-Select prximo aos faders de entrada.
2 Select an input channel or FX return whose signal you want
to3route
to a Group
bus. To
use thePan. O
Na seo
Bus Assigns
doselect
ACS, multiple
pressionechannels,
o switch Stereo
Multi-Select
switch
next
to
the
input
faders.
switch pisca em amarelo para indicar o modo de associao de
bus.
3 In the ACS Bus Assigns section, press the Stereo Pan switch.
The
following
options
added bus
to VENUE
Profile systems.
The
switch
flashes
yellowcan
to be
indicate
link mode.
4For
Pressione
qualquer
um systems
dos switches
Group (18)
paraAvid
ajustar
details on
all VENUE
and options,
visit the
bus any
correspondetne
para
estreo
ou to
dual
mono.
O switch Group
4 oPress
of
the
Group
switches
(18)
set
the
correspondwebsite (www.avid.com).
pisca
amarelo
paramono.
indicarThe
estreo
ouswitches
em verde
para
indicar
ing
bus em
to stereo
or dual
Group
flash
yeldual mono.
low to indicate stereo, or flash green to indicate dual mono.
Mix Rack Options
Pressione
o switchStereo
Stereo
Panswitch
piscante
para confirmar
status de
5 5Press
the flashing
Pan
to confirm
the busolink
associao
bus para
os canais selecionados.
status
thedo
selected
channels.
I/Ofor
Options
Para utilizar
busses
Group
dual Card
(modothat
Expert
apenas):
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
provides
ToAI16
use dual
mono
Group busses
(Expert
Mode
only):16 analog
Certifique-se
de quebusses
os busses
Group esto
confgurados
1 1Make
sure the Group
are configured
as stereo
busses. para
busses
estreo.
Veja Group,
Configurando
Busses
Aux,
Groupe
Variable
See
Configuring
Aux,
andprovides
Variable
Group
Busses
on
AO16
Analog
Output
Card that
16
analog
line level
Group
na
pgina
80.
page
80.
outputs
2 2XO16
Make
sure theand
link
status
of the
Group
busses
you
want
to que
Certifique-se
de
que
o status
de associao
dos
busses
Group
Analog
Digital
Output
Card that
provides
8 analog
deseja
utilizar
esto
ajustados
para
dual
mono.
use
is
set
to
dual
mono.
When
channels
to
athat
dual
mono
bus, the
Stereo
Quando
endereando
canais
para
umGroup
bus
Group
dual
mono, o
AT16routing
A-Net
Output
Card
provides
16 channels
of
A-Net
Pan
switch
will
be
off
and
the
Group
switch
will
light
green
to em
switch
Stereo
Pan
ficar
desligado
e
o
switch
Group
se
output compatible with Aviom Personal Mixers andacende
other
verde
para
indicar
modo
de
operao
dual
mono.
indicate
dual
mono
operation.
digital I/O.
Chapter 9: Groups 93
Chapter
Aux Sends
andGroups
Variable Groups
Captulo
10: 10:
Aux Sends
e Variable
Stage Rack Features
This
explains
the following
Aux
bechapter
used
simultaneously,
supporting
upSends
to
96operations:
total inputs.
Estecan
captulo
explica
as seguintes
operaes
Aux
Sends:
Configuring Aux Send busses
Configurar
Audio
I/Obusses
Routing
toAux
AuxSend
Sends
Enderear para Aux Sends
48
inputs with
Adjusting
Auxremotely
Send parameters
Ajustar os parmetros de Aux Send
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
Managing
Gerenciar
Auxes Auxes

Configurando
busses
Auxand
e Variable
Group
Configuring
Aux
Variable
Group
Busses
At 16 busses
Aux esto to
disponveis.
O nmero
de busses (if
Aux
Snake connectors
enable primary
and redundant
disponveis
ajustado
como
parte
(Veja
applicable)
connection
todaa configurao
VENUE
FOHAux/Group.
Rack.
Up to
16
Aux busses
are
available.
The number
of available
Configurando
Busses
Aux,
Group
e Variable
na pgina
80.)
Aux busses
is set as
part
of the
overall Group
Aux/Group
bus configuration. (See Configuring Aux, Group, and Variable Group
Quando o sistema est ajustado para o modo Variable Groups, os
Busses on page 80.)
8 busses
Group Components
so substitudos pou busses Variable Group, que
System
operam
da mesma
maneira
os busses
Aux. mode,
Quandothe
ajustados
When
the system
is set que
to Variable
Groups
8 Group
para o modo Variable Groups (Var Groups), os 16 busses Aux e 8
busses
are
replaced
by
Variable
Group
busses,
which
operate
in
Included
Components
busses
Variable Group
oferecem at 24 busses.
much the same way as Aux busses. When set to Variable
All
VENUE Profile
include
following:
(Varsystems
Groups),
the 16the
Aux
and 8estreo.
VariableBusses
Group
AuxesGroups
podemmode
ser mono
ou associados
em
pares
VENUE
Profile
console
busses
provide
up
to
24
busses.
Auxes e Variable Group podem ser alimentados por Input Channels
e FX Returns,
e podem
ser atribudos
para sadas de hardware no
Two (2)
IEC power
cables
AuxesControles
can be mono,
or linked
to form
stereo pairs. de
Auxes
Patchbay.
de nvel
Aux Send
oferecem
INFand
a
Monitor mount
for VGA
screen
(screen ganho
not included)
Variable
Group
busses
can
be
fed
by
input
channels
and
FX re+12 dB.
Trackball
(trackball
not included)
turns,
and canmount
be assigned
to hardware
outputs in the Patch
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
bay.
Aux
Send
level
controls
provide
a
gain
INF to
Associando Busses Aux e Variable Group range
para ofoperao
estreo
+12
dB.
VENUE Profile Guide
Quando trabalhando com busses Aux/Var Group, voc pode associar

mpar/par
Protective
Dust
Cover
Linking
Aux
and
Group
Busses
for
busses
em
pares
eVariable
posicionar (pan)
os sinais
de entrada
nesses
deOperation
bus. next)
Stereo
pares
Rack(s)
(see
When working
Aux/Var
busses, you can link
Para associar
pares dewith
busses
Aux ouGroup
Var Group:
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and Cables
odd/even
bus pairs and
pan
input signals
into those bus pairs.
1 Coloque
o sistema
modo
Config.
Each Mix
Rack ornoFOH
Rack
includes:
To link Aux or Var Group bus pairs:

System Restore CD
1 Put
theEthernet
system into
Config
mode.Installer CD
ECx
Control
Software
2 V pgina Options e clique na aba Busses.
Standalone
Software
CDthe Busses tab.
2 Go
to the Options
pageInstaller
and click

ClickEdit.
Edit.
3 3Clique
recommended;
DVI supported.

Bus Pair
Links
The
connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
Optional
Components
Linking bus pairs in the Options > Busses page
Associando pares de bus na pgina Options > Busses
The
following
components
are optional,
4 Click
the checkboxes
above
any of theand
busmust
pairsbe
to link or
purchased
separately:
each
pair.
4 unlink
Clique as
checkboxes
acima de qualquer par de bus para associar
USB flash cada
disk (or
ou desassociar
par.other portable USB storage device for
5 Click Apply.
5 Clique
Apply. monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
Near-field
When busses are linked, signals are handled as follows:

Headphones
with
1/4-inch jack
Quando
busses
so
associados,
os
sinais
so manuseados
Mono Input
Signals
Contributing
mono
signals
are panned da
Dynamic
or
condenser
microphone and XLR mic cable
seguinte forma:
across the linked odd/even bus pair.
(for Talkback)
Input
WhenSignals
the Follows
Channel
Pandistribudos
option is off,
panning
of
Mono
Sinais
mono so
(pan)
pelos pares
Footswitches
(up
to 2)
the
mono
signal
to
the
bus
pair
is
controlled
by
the
Aux
de bus mpar/par associados .
MIDI
cables
(for
external
MIDI
devices)
Pan control
(theconnecting
even-numbered
send).
Quando
a opo
Follows Channel
Pan
est
desligada, o
posicionamento
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
dos
sinais
mono
para
os
pares
de bus
When the Follows Channel Pan option is on, the the
pan
in-
controlado
pelo
controle
Aux
Pan
control
(as
mandadas
pares).
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
formation from each mono input channel determines its
aD-Sub
opocables
Follows Channel
Pan est
ligada,
a informao
Quando
25-pin
to GPI
devices)
pan position
in the (for
bus connecting
pair.
de posicionamento de cada canal de entrada mono determina

seu posicionamento
no par de bus.
Stereo
Input Signals Contributing
stereo signals are panned
across the linked odd/even bus pair. Stereo width information
Stereo
InputProfile
Signals Sinais
estreo so posicionaods
(pan) pelos
VENUE
Expansion
Options
from the input
channel
is applied to the
bus signal.
pares de bus mpar/par associados. A informao width do canal de
When
the
Channel
Pan
is Profile
off, balance
of
Thefollowing
options
can
be sinal
added
VENUE
systems.
entrada
estreo
Follows
aplicada
ao
dotooption
bus.
the stereo
signal
to
the
bus
pair
is
controlled
by
the
Aux
For details
Quando
a
opo
Follows
Channel
Pan
est
desligada,
o
balance
doPan
sinal
estreo para o par de bus controlado pelo controle
control.
website
(www.avid.com).
Aux
Pan.
When the Follows Channel Pan option is on, the balance
Quando
a opo Follows Channel Pan est ligada, o balance
from each stereo input channel determines its contribuMixdeRack
Options
cada entrada
de canal estreo determina sua contribuio
tion to the odd and even sides of the bus pair.
para
os lados esquerdo e direito do par de bus.
I/O Options



outputs
Pro16 Series devices.Chapter 10: Aux Sends and Variable Groups 95
digital I/O.
Captulo 10: Aux Sends e Variable Groups 95

Selecionando Pontos de Alimentao Aux Send e Variable

Selecting Aux Send and Variable Group
Group
Selecting
Aux
Selecting
Aux Send
Send and
and Variable
Variable Group
Group
Pickoff Points
Pickoff
Points
Pickoff
Points
Voc
pode especificar
o ponto de alimentao (pickoff point) em Input
You can specify the pickoff point on input channels and FX
Channels
e FX
Returns para
mandadas
Aux e Var
Group. Os
pontos
You
can
specify
point
on
channels
and
FX
returns
for pickoff
Aux and
Var Group
sends.
Pickoff
points
You
canchannels
specify the
the
pickoff
point
on input
input
channels
and
FX
de returns
alimentao
so
ajustados
para
cada
bus
independentemente.
channels
for
Aux
and
Var
Group
sends.
Pickoff
points
are
set
for
each
bus
independently.
If
any
busses
are
linked,
channels
for Aux andoVar
Group
sends. Pickoff
points
Se returns
os busses
esto associados,
ponto
de alimentao
ajustado
are
set
for each
each
bus
independently.
If bus
anypair.
busses are
are linked,
linked,
the
pickoff
point
is set
for the linked
are
for
bus
independently.
If
any
busses
para
o set
par
de bus.
the pickoff
pickoff point
point is
is set
set for
for the
the linked
linked bus
bus pair.
pair.
the
Each
channel
sent to
anou
Aux
or Var Group
either
or
Cada
canal
pode can
ser be
enviado
pr
ps-fader
para um
Auxpreou Var
Each
channel
can
be
sent
to
an
Aux
or
Var
Group
either prepost-fader.
Pre-fade
several
choices
of
pickoff.
Each
can
beoffers
sent
to
an
Aux
orde
Var
Group
pre- or
or
Group.
Ochannel
pr-fade
oferece
vrias
opes
pontos
deeither
alimentao.
post-fader.
post-fader. Pre-fade
Pre-fade offers
offers several
several choices
choices of
of pickoff.
pickoff.
Pre-EQ Post-HPF and pre-EQ, Dynamics and Channel Inserts,
Pr-EQ Aps HPF e antes de EQ, Dynamics e Channel Inserts, prPre-EQ
Post-HPF
and pre-EQ,
Dynamics
and
Channel
pre-Mute,
and pre-Fader.
The
Aux
or Var
Group
send
isInserts,
notpelo
afPre-EQ
Post-HPF
pre-EQ,
and
Channel
Inserts,
Mute
e pr-Fader.
A and
mandada
AuxDynamics
ou Var
Group
no
afetada
pre-Mute,
and
pre-Fader.
The
Aux
or
Var
Group
send
fected
by the
mute.
pre-Mute,
andchannel
pre-Fader.
The Aux or Var Group send is
is not
not afafMute
de canal.
fected
fected by
by the
the channel
channel mute.
mute.
Pre-Mute
Post-HPF,
post-EQ,
Dynamics,
and Channel
Inserts,
Pr-Mute
Aps
HPF, Aps
EQ, Dynamics
e Channel
Inserts, pr-Mute
Pre-Mute Post-HPF,
Post-HPF,
post-EQ,
Dynamics,
and
Channel
Inserts,
pre-Mute,
and
pre-Fader.
The
Aux
or
Var
Group
send
is
not
afPre-Mute
post-EQ,
Dynamics,
and
Channel
Inserts,
e pr-Fader. A mandada Aux ou Var Group no afetada pelo
Mute
pre-Mute,
and
pre-Fader.
The
Aux
or
Var
Group
send
is
not
affected
by
the
channel
mute.
pre-Mute,
and
pre-Fader.
The
Aux
or
Var
Group
send
is
not
afde canal.
fected by
by the
the channel
channel mute.
mute.
fected
Pre-Fader
Post-HPF,
post-EQ
Dynamics,
and Channel
Inserts,
Pr-Fader
Aps
HPF, aps
EQ Dynamics
e Channel
Inserts, ps-Mute
Pre-Fader
post-EQ
Dynamics,
Channel
post-Mute,
and pre-Fader.
The
or Var
Group
sendInserts,
is afde
Pre-Fader
Post-HPF,
post-EQ
Dynamics,
and
Channel
Inserts,
e pr-Fader.
APost-HPF,
mandada
Aux ou
VarAux
Group
and
afetada
pelo
Mute
post-Mute,
and
pre-Fader.
The
fected by the
channel
mute.
post-Mute,
and
pre-Fader.
The Aux
Aux or
or Var
Var Group
Group send
send is
is afafcanal.
fected
by
the
channel
mute.
fected by the channel mute.
Para
ponto
depoint
alimentao
para
mandada
Aux ou
Toajustar
set the o
Pre
pickoff
for an Aux
or uma
Variable
Group send:
Variable
Group:
To
set
the
Pre
pickoff
point
for
an
Aux
or
Variable
Group
send:
To set the Pre pickoff point for an Aux or Variable Group send:
1
to
Options
page
click
the
1 Go
Go
to the
the
Options
page and
and
click
the Busses
Busses tab.
tab.
1 V
pgina
Options
e clique
na aba
Busses.
Classificando Auxes para Snapshots
Classifying Auxes for Snapshots

Classifying
Auxes
for
Classifying
Auxes
for Snapshots
Snapshots
Voc pode classificar
mandadas
Aux Sends e Variable Group como
You can classify Aux Sends and Variable Group sends as monmandadas
de monitor
(Mon)
ouVariable
mandadas
de efeitos
(FX)
para
You
can classify
classify
Aux
Sends
and
Variable
Group
sends
as
monitor sends
(Mon)
or as
effects
sends
(FX)Group
for the
purposes
of
You
can
Aux
Sends
and
sends
as
monfins
de
organizao
e
armazenamento
de
cada
tipo
separadamente
itor
sendsand
(Mon)
oreach
as effects
effects
sends (FX)
(FX)
for
the purposes
purposes
of
scoping
safingor
type separately
in for
snapshots.
See of
itor
sends
(Mon)
as
sends
the
em cenas.
Veja
Classificando
Aux
Sendsin
nasnapshots.
pgina 200.
scoping
and
safing
each type
type
separately
See
Classifying
Aux
Sends
on page
200. in
scoping
and
safing
each
separately
snapshots. See
Classifying Aux
Aux Sends
Sends on
on page
page 200.
200.
Classifying
Endereando
Inputstopara
Aux
Busses
Routing
Inputs
Aux
Busses
Routing
Inputs
to
Aux
Busses
Routing Inputs to Aux Busses
You
send
signals
from
input channel
or FX ou
return
to
Voccan
pode
enviar
sinais
deany
qualquer
Input Channel
FX Return
You
can
send
from
any
input
channel
or
return
to
paranumber
qualquer
nmero
deor
busses
AuxGroup
Send
ou
Variable
Group
any
Aux Send
Variable
busses
with
the inYou
can
sendofsignals
signals
from
any
input
channel
or FX
FX
return
tocom
any
number
of
Aux
Send
or
Variable
Group
busses
with
the
inos
codificadores
de
entrada,
pelo
ACS,
pela
seo
Output
ou na
put encoders,
the ACS,
from the
Output
section,
any
number offrom
Aux Send
or Variable
Group
busses
with or
the intela.
put
encoders,
from
the
ACS,
from
the
Output
section,
or
on-screen.
put
encoders, from the ACS, from the Output section, or
on-screen.
on-screen.
Para enderear canais para mandadas Aux ou Var Group utilizando
To route channels to Aux or Var Group sends using the input
os codificadores
de entrada:
To
encoders:
To route
route channels
channels to
to Aux
Aux or
or Var
Var Group
Group sends
sends using
using the
the input
input
encoders:
encoders:
1
Para
acessar
os
Aux
Sends
pelos
codificadores
dos
Input
Channel,
1 To access Aux Sends on the input channel encoders, press
an
1
To
access
Aux
Sends
on
the
input
channel
encoders,
press
pressione
um
switch
de
atribuio
de
codificador
Send
12
a 15
Encoder
assign
through
1516.
1 To access
Aux Send
Sendsswitch
on the12
input
channel
encoders, press an
an
16.
Encoder
assign
Send
switch
12
through
1516.
Encoder
or assign Send switch 12 through 1516.
ou
or
or
acessar
Para
os Variable
pressione
o switch
Var in
Groups
To
access
Variable
Groups,Groups,
press the
Var Groups
switch
To
access
Variable
Groups,
press
the
Var
Groups
switch
in
na
seo
Bus
Assigns
do
ACS.
Isso
apresenta
as
mandadas
ACS Bus
Assigns
section.
Thisthe
displays
Variable
Group
the
To access
Variable
Groups,
press
Var Groups
switch
in
Variable
Group
nosencoders
codificadores
de entradas
eSend
e nos
controles
the
ACS
Assigns
section.
This
displays
Variable
Group
Sends
onBus
the
input
and the
ACS Aux
conthe
ACS
Bus
Assigns
section.
This
displays
Variable
Group
Aux on
Send
ACS. encoders and the ACS Aux Send conSends
thedoinput
trols. on the input encoders and the ACS Aux Send conSends
trols.
trols.
Pickoff
point
Pickoff
Pickoff
options
point
point
options
options
Encoders
Encoders
Encoders
Setting Aux bus pickoff points

Setting
Aux
pickoff
Ajustando
de alimentao
do bus Aux
Settingo ponto
Aux bus
bus
pickoff points
points
2 Select a Pre pickoff point for any of the busses or linked bus
2 Select a Pre pickoff point for any of the busses or linked bus
pairs
by aclicking
the
Pre-Mute,
or
Pre-Fader
2 Select
Preponto
pickoff
point
for
anypara
of the
bussesum
orbutton.
linked
bus
2 Selecione
um
de Pre-EQ,
alimentao
qualquer
dos busses
clicking
the
Pre-Mute,
Pre-Fader
button.
pairs
bybusses
clicking
the Pre-EQ,
Pre-EQ,
Pre-Mute,
or
Pre-Fader
button.
ou pairs
par deby
associados
clicando
nosor
botes
Pr-EQ,
Pr-Mute
ou To
Pr-Fader.
activate a Pre pickoff point for an Aux or Variable Group send:
Aux
Sends
Aux
Aux
Sends
Sends
To
To activate
activate a
a Pre
Pre pickoff
pickoff point
point for
for an
an Aux
Aux or
or Variable
Variable Group
Group send:
send:
1 Go to the Inputs page and target the channel with the pickPara
ativar o ponto de alimentao para uma mandada Aux ou
1
to
and
offGo
point
youInputs
want page
to activate.
1
Go
to the
the
Inputs
page
and target
target the
the channel
channel with
with the
the pickpickVariable
Group:
off
off point
point you
you want
want to
to activate.
activate.

1 V
pgina
Inputs efollowing:
selecione o canal com o ponto de alimentao
2
2 Do
Do any
any of
of the
the following:
To activate
que deseja
ativar. an Aux Send Pre pickoff, click the correspond
an
Send
pickoff,
click
ingactivate
Pre button
in the
AuxPre
Sends
section.
To
To
activate
an Aux
Aux
Send
Pre
pickoff,
click the
the correspondcorresponding
Pre
button
in
the
Aux
Sends
section.
ing
Pre
button
in
the
Aux
Sends
section.
2 Siga um
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
or
Para
ativar
um ponto de alimentao Aux Send, clique no boto
or
or
Pre
To
activate
a Variable
correspondente
naGroup
seo Pre
Aux pickoff,
Sends. click the Var Groups
To
activate
a
Variable
Group
Pre
pickoff,
click
Var
button
in
the
Bus
Assign
section
to
display
Varthe
Groups,
then
To
activate
a
Variable
Group
Pre
pickoff,
click
the
Var Groups
Groups
ou
button
in
the
Bus
Assign
section
to
display
Var
Groups,
then
click ativar
the
button.
button
incorresponding
the
Assign
section
to display
Var Groups,
then
Para
umBus
ponto
dePre
alimentao
Variable
Group, clique
click
the
corresponding
Pre
button.
no
boto
Groups na seo
Bus Assign para visualizar Var
click
the Var
corresponding
Pre button.
Groups, entro clique no boto Pre correspondente.
Activating Pre pickoff for an Aux Send (Inputs page shown)
Activating
Pre
pickoff
an
Aux
Send
(Inputs
page
Activating
Prealimentao
pickoff for
forpara
an Aux
AuxSend
Send(pgina
(Inputs
page shown)
shown)
Ativando
ponto de
Inputs)
When the Pre button is lit, the selected Pre pickoff point is
When
the Pre
Pre
button
is lit,
lit, the
the
selected
Pre pickoff
pickoff
point
is
used. When
the
Pre button
off,
the pickoff
point point
is
When
the
button
is
selected
Pre
is
Quando
o boto
Pre
est
aceso,
oisponto
de alimentao
selecionado
used. When
When the
the Pre
Pre button
button is
is off,
off, the
the pickoff
pickoff point
point is
is
Post-Fader.
used.
est sendo usado. Quando o boto Pre est apagado, o ponto de
Post-Fader.
Post-Fader.
alimentao ps-fader.
96
VENUE
Profile
96 Guia
VENUE
Profile
Guide
96
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Encoder assignment switches for input channels

Switches de
atribuio de
codificadores
para Input
Channels
Encoder
assignment
switches
for
channels
Encoder
assignment
switches
for input
input
channels
2 For each channel you want to assign to the selected Aux

2
For
each
channel
you
want
to
to
the
selected
Aux
Send
press
itsque
channel
encoder
so
that
its Send,
On
indicator
2
Forbus,
each
channel
you
want
to assign
assign
to Aux
the
selected
Aux seu
2 Para
cada
canal
deseja
atribuir
o bus
pressione
Send
bus,
press
its
channel
encoder
so
that
its
On
indicator
codificador
paraitsque
o LED On
se acenda.
LED
lights.
Send
bus, press
channel
encoder
so that its On indicator
LED
Alights.
primeira
vez que
o codificador
Aux Sendassigns
pressionado
atribui
LED
lights.
The
first press
of an
Aux Send encoder
level conaThe
elefirst
controle
de an
nvel
das
mandadas
mpares.
O switch
se
press
of
Aux
Send
encoder
assigns
level
conthe
odd-numbered
send.
The switch
lights
green
trol
The of
first
press
of an Aux Send
encoder
assigns
level
conacende
em
verde
para
indicar
a
seleo
mpar.
trol
of
send.
The
to indicate
an odd-numbered
selection.
trol
of the
the odd-numbered
odd-numbered
send.
The switch
switch lights
lights green
green
Na
segundaanvez
que o codificador
Aux Send pressionado
to
indicate
odd-numbered
selection.
to
indicate
an
odd-numbered
selection.
atribui
The
second
press
of
an
Aux
Send
encoder
assigns
level
a ele controle de nvel das mandadas pares. O switch se
The
press
of
an
Send
encoder
assigns
level
control
of the
even-numbered
send.
The switch
acende
The second
second
press
ofpara
an Aux
Aux
Send
encoder
assignslights
level
em
amarelo
indicar
a seleo
par.
control
of
the
even-numbered
send.
The
switch
lights
control
ofindicate
the even-numbered
send. The
switch lights
yellow to
an even-numbered
selection.
yellow
to
even-numbered
selection.
3 Para
ajustar
o nvelan
Aux Send, siga
um dos seguintes
yellow
to indicate
indicate
ando
even-numbered
selection.
3
To set the Aux Send level, do either of the following:
procedimentos:
3
set
Aux
Send
level,
do
either
3
To
set the
the
Aux
Sendde
level,
docanal.
either of
of the
the following:
following:
To
othe
codificador
Gire
Turn
encoder
oncada
each
channel.
Turn
the
encoder
on
each
channel.
Pressione
o
switch
Flip
to
Faders,
e
ajuste
o fader
de canal.
Turn
the
encoder
on
each
channel.
Press the Flip to Faders switch, then adjust
the channel
Press
the
Flip
to
Faders
switch,
then
adjust
the
channel
fader.
Press the Flip to Faders switch, then adjust the channel
fader.
fader.
Para enderear canais para busses Aux Sends utilizando o ACS:

Rack Features
Stage
Para selecionar
um nico canal, pressione seu switch Select.
Stage
Para selecionar vrios canais, pressione Select do primeiro
canal, segure o switch Multi-Select (localizado esquerda dos
audio
VENUEeProfile
systems.
Up to two
Stage
fadersI/O
defor
entrada),
presione
os switches
Select
dosRacks
outros
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96
total
inputs.
canais.
I/O
2 NaAudio
seo
Aux Sends, pressione o switch Aux 18 ou 916 para
associ-lo
ao
par correspondente
Aux Sends.mic preamps and
48 inputs
with remotelyde
controllable
Endereando Aux Busses para Outputs e PlugIns

Busses
Aux e Var
Group podem
para sadas de
The following
components
mustser
be endereados
hardware outputs e plug-ins alimentados por bus disponveis.
recommended;
1024x768
resolution).
andMain
Para
enderear sadas
Aux ouminimum
Variable Group
para osVGA
busses
DVI
supported.
pelo
ACS:
1 Pressione um switch Aux (1-8 ou 9-16) na seo Output para

atribuir o controle dos nveis Aux aos faders Output.
connection
Rack atribuir
and Stage
Rack
requires
2 The
Selecione
cada between
Aux queFOH
deseja
aos
busses
Main
pressionando
seus cable.
switches
Select.
a Digital Snake
This
cable can be purchased directly
3 Pressione um codificador Aux Sends para habilitar essa

mandada.
4 Gire o codificador para ajustar o nvel de sada.
Para enderear canais para Aux Sends pela seo Output:

1 Pressione o switch Aux 18 ou 916 para atribuir os faders Output

para os busses Aux.
2 Pressione o switch Select na rgua Output para os Aux Send para
System Components
o qual deseja atribuir canais.
3 Pressione
o switch
Multi-Assign prximo aos codificadores Output.
Included
Components
Os switches Multi Assign e Select piscam.
4 Pressione
o switch
Select
nos canais que voc deseja enderear
VENUE
Profile
console
para o Aux Send selecionado.
Monitor
mountMulti-Assign
for VGA screen
(screen para
not included)
5 Pressione
o switch
novamente
confirmar a
ao. Trackball mount (trackball not included)
ou VENUE Mouse Pad
Selecione outro Aux Send para confirmar a atribuio corrente
VENUE
Guide
mas continuar
noProfile
modo Multi-Assign
para atribuir canais a um outro
bus Aux.
3 Na seo Bus Assigns do ACS, pressione o switch LR (left/right)

ou C/Mono (center/mono) para que se acenda.
Optional Components
4 Movimente os faders de canal para ajustar o nvel de sada do

Aux.
Assim
como
outros
Output,
busses
tambm
oferecem
USB
flash
diskbusses
(or other
portable
USBAux
storage
device
for
Directtransfer
Outs, inserts
e Graphic
EQ embutido.
Para
detalhes, veja:
of Show
data; 512
MB or larger
recommended)
Direct Outs Veja Direct Outputs na pgina 85.

Inserts
Veja Utilizando
Insertsmicrophone
em Busses Output
namic
pgina
82.
Dynamic
or condenser
and XLR
cable
(for Talkback)
Graphic EQ Veja Inserindo Graphic EQs Embutido em Busses

Output na pgina 83.


Rack(s) (see next)


System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options



outputs
digital I/O.

Para controlar o posicionamento de bus Aux bus ou pares de bus
Ajustando
Controles
Aux Send
Adjusting
Aux Send
Controls
To
control
panning
Aux Aux
bus or
Variable
Group bus pairs from
Variable
Group
pelaofseo
Sends
do ACS:
the ACS Aux Sends section:
Voc
pode
os Aux
Sends
codificadores
entrada,
You
can ajustar
adjust Aux
Sends
frompelos
the input
encoders,defrom
the
pelo
ACSand
e naon-screen.
tela.
ACS,
1 Atribua
osOutput
faders faders
Outputtofaders
para
osorAux
18
ou(for
Aux
1
Bank the
the Aux
18
Aux
916
(para Aux)
ou Groups
Variable
Groups).
Auxes)
or Groups
(for(for
Variable
Groups).
Utilizando os codificadores de entrada
1
Target the obus
you
want
to pan
by pressing
its Select switch.
2 Selecione
bus
que
deseja
posicionar
pressionando
seu switch
Using the Input Encoders
Para controlar os Sends utilizando os codificadores de entrada:

To control Aux Sends using the input encoders:
Pressione o switch Send (12/1516) para atribuir os Aux Send

Press an Encoder
assign Send switch (12/1516) to bank
aos codificadores
de entrada.
that Aux Send to the input encoders.
Para ligar ou desligar uma mandada:

To turn a send on or off:
1 Pressione o codificador de entrada Aux no canal desejado par

1 Press
the inputentre
encoder
forethe
Aux on the desired channel
alternar
a mandada
ligada
desligada.
to toggle that send on/off.
2 Para ajustar o nvel da mandada, gire o codificador.

2 To adjust send level, turn that encoder.
Quando
Aux esto
associados,
os sinais
entrada
so
Whenbusses
Aux busses
are linked,
input signals
are de
panned
across
distribudos pelos pares de bus. O posicionamento (pan) pode ser
the bus pair. Panning can be controlled from the Input encodcontrolado pelos codificadores Input ou da seo Aux Sends no
ers or from the ACS Aux Sends section.
ACS.
Controlling
Send and Variable
GroupAux
Send
Pane
Controlando
o Aux
Posicionamento
de Mandadas
Send
Variable Group
When Aux busses or Variable Group busses are linked, input
signals
panned
across
the bus
pair.
Panning
can beosconQuando
osare
busses
Aux ou
Variable
Group
esto
associados,
sinais
the Input encoders
or from
the ACS
Aux Sends
de trolled
entradafrom
so distribudos
pelos pares
de bus.
O posicionamento
(pan)
pode ser controlado pelos codificadores Input ou da seo Aux
section.
Sends no ACS.
To control panning of Aux bus or Variable Group bus pairs from
Para
o posicionamento do Aux ou dos pares de bus
thecontrolar
Input section:
Variable Group pela seo Input:
1 Do one of the following:
1 Siga um
dosan
seguintes
Press
Encoderproecedimentos:
assign Send switch to bank that Send to
Pressione
o switch
Send para atribuir essa mandada para os
the input
encoders.
codificadores Input.
Press the Var Groups switch in the ACS Bus Assign section
Pressione
do switch Var Groups na seo Bus Assign do ACS
toatribuir
bank Variable
Sends on
input
channels.
para
VariableGroup
Group Sends
nosthe
Input
Channels.
2 In the Input Encoder Assignment section, press the Send
2 Na
seo Input Encoder Assignment, pressione o switch Send
switch (116) for the bus pair you want to pan. If you banked
(116) para o par de bus que deseja posicionar. Se voc atribuir aos
to Variable Groups, press a Send switch 18.
Variable Groups, pressione um switch Send 18.
The firstvez
press
Aux switch
assigns control
of the
A primeira
queofothe
switch
Aux pressionado
atribui
a ele
send
level
to
the
encoder.
The
switch
lights
green
thee
controle de nvel da mandada. O switch se acende emand
verde
o display
do display
codificador
mostra
a mandada de nmero
encoder
shows
the odd-numbered
send. mpar .
Na
segunda
vezpress
que of
o switch
pressionado
atribuiofathe
ele
The
second
the AuxAux
switch
assigns control
controle de posicionamento (pan) da mandada. O switch se
send pan to the encoder. The switch lights yellow and the
acende em amarelo e o display apresenta um P antes da
display shows a P before the odd-numbered send.
mandada nmero mpar.
3 With the Aux switch lit, turn the rotary encoder on each In-
3 Com
switch Aux
aceso,
gireto
o adjust
codificador
rotativo
de cada Input
put o
Channel
or FX
Return
the send
pan.
Channel ou FX Return para ajustar o pan da mandada.
916
Select.
Em um
dethe
busACS
associados
o controle
Send
ACS:
In
a linked
buspar
pair,
Aux Send
controlsAux
show
thedofol Codificadores rotativos mpares controlam o nvel da mandada
lowing:
Condificadores rotativos pares controlam o posicionamento da

Odd-numbered rotary encoders control send level
mandada.
Even-numbered rotary encoders control send pan
2 Use os switches Aux 18, Aux 916 e Var Groups para selecionar
os busses de mandada desejados. O LED aceso do switch indica a
get the desired send busses. A lit switch LED indicates the curseleo atual.
2 Use the Aux 18, Aux 916 and Var Groups switches to tar-
rent selection.
3 Gire
rotativos
na seo
3
Turn os
thecodificadores
even-numbered
rotarypares
encoders
in theAux
AuxSends
Sendspara
ajustar o posicionamento da mandada.
section to adjust the corresponding send pan.
Voc
associar
a seo
Aux
Sendstodo
ACS para
You
canpode
link the
ACS Aux
Sends
section
follow
AFL, seguir
let- o
AFL, permitindo acesso imediato aos controles de mandadas
ting you immediately access send controls for Auxes and
de Auxes e Variable Groups colocando em Solo qualquer
Variable Groups by soloing any Aux or Group output strip.
rgua de sada Aux ou Group. Para mais informaes,veja
ForAuxes/Variable
more information,
see Auxes/Variable
Groups
Seguindo AFLGroups
e AFLFollow
Seguindo
AFL
and
AFL
Follows
Auxes/Variable
Groups
on
Auxes/Variable Groups na pgina 120.
page 120.
Utilizando Flip to Faders para acessar simultaneamente
Send Level
Using
Flipe Pan
to Faders to Access Send Level and Pan
Simultaneously
Voc pode usar o modo Flip to Faders para distribuir o controle de
You
to Faders
mode
toos
spill
Aux or
nvelcan
Auxuse
ouFlip
Variable
Group
para
faders
deVariable
entradaGroup
enquanto
mantm
o controle
de posicionamento
(pan) da
mandada
level
control
to the input
faders while retaining
control
of nos
codificadores
dethe
entrada.
Send
pan from
input encoders.
Para
acessar
nvel
de simultaneously:
mandada
e
To
access
Send level
and pan
simultaneamente:
posicionamento
1 Assign the input encoders to Aux Sends or Variable Groups

1 Atribua
os codificadores
de entrada para Aux Sends ou Variable
by
doing either
of the following:
Groups
seguindo
dos in
seguintes
procedimentos:
Press
a Send um
switch
the Input
Encoder Assignment sec Presione
um switch Send na seo Input Encoder Assignment
tion to assign the encoders to control level for the separa atribuir os codificadores para controlar o nvel da mandada
lected send.
selecionada.
Target an Aux
or Variable
Group bus
by selecting
in the
Selecione
um bus
Aux ou Variable
Group
na seo it
Output.
Output section.
2 Pressione o switch Flip to Faders, na parte inferior da seo Input

2 Press the Flip to Faders switch, at the bottom of the Input
Encoder Assignment. Os faders de entrada controlam e mostram
Encoder
Theselecionada,
input faders enow
agora o Assignment
nvel para asection.
mandada
os control
codificadores
and
display
level for the
selected send, and the encoders discontrolam
e mostram
o posicionamento.
play and control Send pan.
Ajustando o posicionamento do Aux Send para seguir o

posicionamento
doPan
canal
Setting
Aux Send
to Follow Channel Pan
Panning
of the input
can
set to follow
or bal-para
O posicionamento
dossignal
sinais
debeentrada
pode the
ser pan
ajustado
ance
of the
Channel
FXInput
Return
feeding
seguirvalues
os valores
deInput
pan ou
balanceor
dos
Channel
ou the
FX Return
alimentando
o bus Aux.
Aux
bus
Para
posicionamento
de Auxpan:
Send para seguir o
To
setajustar
the AuxoSend
pan to follow Channel
posicionamento do canal:
2 On any linked bus pairs, select the Follows Channel Pan op-
tion.
setting
is applied
to the
corresponding
2 EmThis
qualquer
par
de bus globally
associado,
selecione
a opo Aux
Follows
Send.
Channel Pan. O ajuste aplicado globalmente mandada Aux
correspondente
Managing Aux Bus Assignments

Gerenciando
de Bus Aux
Managing Atribuies
Aux Bus Assignments
Managing
Aux
Assignments
Viewing Aux
andBus
Variable
Group Bus
Copying Assignments Between Busses

Copiando Atribuies Entre Busses
Copying
Between
Busses
You canAssignments
copy the current input
assignments
from one Aux or
Copying
Assignments Between Busses
Variable Group bus (or Mains) to another bus of either type. If
Voc
as atribuies
de entrada
de one
um Aux
bus or
Aux ou
You
canpode
copycopiar
the current
input assignments
from
the can
busses
are
linked,
assignments
can be
from
other
You
copy
the
current
input
assignments
from one
Aux
or
Additional
Required
Components
Variable
Group
(ou
Mains)
para
outro
bus
deofcopied
qualquer
tipo.
Variable
Group
bus
(or
Mains)
to another
bus
either type.
IfSe os
linked
busses.
This
letsMains)
you quickly
duplicate
Viewing Aux and Variable Group Bus
Variable
Group
bus (or
to another
bus
ofmonitor
either type.
If
busses
esto
associados,
atribuies
podem
ser copiadas
demixes.
outros
busses
are linked,
assignments
be copied from
other
Stage
Racks are
usedand
withVariable
an FOH Rack,
and provide
The
following
components
mustcan
be purchased
separately:
Viewing
Aux
Group
Bus all stage the
busses
associados.
Issoassignments
permite diplicar
the busses
are linked,
can berapidamente
copied frommixes
other de
Assignments
Quando
um canal
debus
sada
Aux ou
Var Group
selecionado
When
an Aux
or de
Varbus
Group
output
channel
is targeted
linked busses.
Thisbus
lets
you quickly
duplicate
mixes. on
audio
Assignments
assignments
overwrites
allmonitor
theVGA
assignments
linked
VideoCopying
DisplayThis
(15-inch
or greater
flat-panel
display
na tela,
seus membros
so mostrados
emin
uma
lista
parte
busses.
lets you
quickly
duplicate
monitor
mixes.
on-screen,
its members
are shown
a list
onna
the
rightdireita
side of monitor.
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96
total
inputs.
anOutputs.
Aux bus or Var Group output channel is targeted
the destination
Aux bus.
daWhen
pgina
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
VGAon
and
the Outputs
When
an Auxpage.
bus or Var Group output channel is targeted
Copying bus assignments
overwrites
allresolution).
the assignments
on-screen, its members are shown in a list on the right side of
Copiar
atribuies
de bus
sobrescreve
todas
as atribuies
Copying
bus assignments
overwrites
all the
assignments
on
DVI
supported.
on-screen,
its
members
are
shown
in
a
list
on
the
right
side
of
the
destination
Aux
bus.
To copy
input
assignments
between busses:
I/O page.
dosdestination
bus Aux
deAux
destino.
theAudio
Outputs
Para
visualizar
as atribuies de entrada de um bus ou Variable
the
bus.
To view
inputpage.
assignments to an Aux or Variable Group bus:
the
Outputs
Group: 48 inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps and
1 Target
Aux bus that
you want
to be the destination of
To copy
input the
assignments
between
busses:
Para
copiar
atribuies
de entrada
entre
busses:
1
Go
to
the
Outputs
page.
To
copy
input
assignments
between
busses:
To viewindividually
input assignments
to anphantom
Aux or Variable
selectable
power. Group bus:
the
copied
assignments
by
selecting
its on-screen
Snake
(VENUE
Profile
Only) channel
view input
assignments to an Aux or Variable Group bus:
1 Digital
Target the
AuxCable
bus that
you want
to Systems
be the destination
of
1 V To
pgina
Outputs.
strip.
Target the
bus that
you
want
to be
the destination
of
8 the
analog
channels;
expandable
up to 48its
analog
or
Target
an output
Aux bus
output channel
by selecting
on-screen
1 Go2 to
Outputs
page.
11Selecione
o Aux
bus between
Aux
que
deseja
como
destino
das requires
atribuies
the
copied
assignments
by
selecting
its
on-screen
channel
The
connection
FOH
Rack
and
Stage
Rack
1 Go to the Outputs page.
the copied
assignments
by
selecting
its on-screen
channel
digital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
channel
fader
strip.
Input
channels
routed
to the selected
bus strip.
copiadas
selecionando
sua
rgua
de
canal
na
tela.
2 2Selecione
um
canal
de
sada
de
bus
Aux
selecionando
sua
rgua
2
Click the
Input
Assign
menu
the bottom
of the
a Digital
Snake
cable.
Thispop-up
cable can
be at
purchased
directly
Target an Aux bus output channel by selecting its on-screen
strip.
displayed
theoutput
Members
list onby
the
right side
of
the
page.
de fader
de
canal
nainbus
tela.
Input Channels
endereados
para
o bus
2are
Target
an Aux
channel
selecting
its
on-screen
Members
choose Replace
With
Mix From,
then choose the
from Avidlist,
or assembled
by your
preferred
vendor.
channel fader strip. Input channels routed to the selected bus
the
menuna
atparte
the bottom
Clique
noInput
menuAssign
pop-uppop-up
Input Assign
inferior of
dathe
Members
Synchronization
and Input
Control
selecionado
apresentados
naI/O
Members
list to
no the
ladoselected
direito bus
da 2 2Click
channelso
fader
strip.
channels
routed
Group
whose
assignments
want
to copy
to
2Aux/Var
Click
the
Inputbus
Assign
pop-up
menu
atyou
the
bottom
of the
are displayed in the Members list on the right side of the page.
list,
escolha
Replace
With
Mix
From,
e
escolha
o
bus
Aux/Var
Group
Members
list,
choose
Replace
With
Mix
From,
then
choose
the
pgina.
To
go to any
assigned
input
channel
fromright
the redundant
Outputs
page:
are
in the Members
listprimary
on the
side of the
page.
displayed
Snake
connectors
to
enable
and
(if
the
currently
selected
bus.
Members
list,
choose
Replace
With
Mix
From,
then
choose
the
de
ondeGroup
deseja
copiar
as atribuies
para
bus selecionado.
Aux/Var
bus
whose
assignments
youo want
to copy to
Optional
Components
applicable)
connection
to a channel
VENUE
Rack.
Click
name
of the
input
in
the
Members
Group bus whose assignments you want to copy to
To go
any the
assigned
input
channel
frompela
theFOH
Outputs
page: list. theAux/Var
Para
irato
qualquer
Input
Channel
atribudo
pgina
Outputs:
currently
selected
bus.
To go to any assigned input channel from the Outputs page:
the following
currently components
selected bus. are optional, and must be
The
Click the name of the input channel in the Members list.
Clique
no nome
do Input
Channel
Members
list.Members
Click
the name
of the
input na
channel
in the
list.
purchased
separately:
Member
Stage Rack
Features
Visualizando
as Atribuies
de Busses Aux e Variable Group
Assignments
System Components
Included Components
input
channels
Member
inputMember
channels
input
channels
Input assign
pop-up menu
Input assign
pop-up
menu
Input
assign

pop-up menu
Currently selected output
VENUE
Profile Guide
Aux bus assignments shown in the Outputs page
Protective
Cover
Aux bus
assignmentsDust
shown
in the Outputs page
Resetting
Aux
and
Variable
Group
Aux
bus assignments
shown
in the
Outputs page

(for Talkback)

VENUE Mouse Pad

Two
(2) console
Currently
selected
output lights
selected
output na pgina Outputs
AtrivuiesCurrently
de bus Aux
apresentados


Copiando
atribuies
de entrada entre
bussesAux
Aux busses
Copying
input assignments
between
Bus
Copying
inputatribuies
assignmentsMains
between
busses
Copiando
paraAux
Busses
Aux
Copying
Mains Assignments
Copying
input assignments
between Aux bussesto
Aux Busses
Resetting Aux and Variable Group Bus
Voc
pode
copiarthe
asAssignments
atribuies
do Aux
bus Main
busses
Copying
to
Busses
You
canMains
copy
current
Mainatuais
bus assignments
to para
Aux busses
Resetting Aux and Variable Group Bus
The
following
options
can
be
addedato
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Copying
Mains
Assignments
tomixes
Aux
Busses
Assignments
ou
Variable
Groupbusses
para
basear
mixagem
de
monitor
amain
partir
You
remove
input
assignments
from
Aux/Var
bus Aux
Voc
podecan
remover
atribuies
de entrada
dos
bussesGroup
Aux/Var
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
Cables
or
Variable
Group
to
base
monitor
from
a
Assignments
Forcan
details
on
VENUE
systems
anddos
options,
the
AvidRight
You
copy
theall
current
Main
bus assignments
tovisit
Aux
busses
de
uma
mixagem
principal.
Atribuies
busses
Main
Left/
Groupoutput
na tela.channels on-screen.
Rack(s)
(see next)
Resetando
Atribuies
de Bus Aux e Variable Group
Assignments
mix.
Assignments
to the Main Left/
Right bussesto
can
bebusses
copied
You
can
copy the current
bus assignments
Aux
You
can remove
assignments
from Aux/Var Group bus
Each
Rackinput
or input
FOH
Rack
includes:
ser
copiadas
paratobusses
associados,
e from
atribuies
website
(www.avid.com).
Variable
Group
busses
base monitor
mixes
a maindo bus
You Mix
can remove
assignments
from Aux/Var Group bus orpodem
to
linked
busses,
and
assignments
to
the
Center/Mono
bus
can
or
Variable
Group
busses
to
base
monitor
mixes
from
a
main
output
channels
on-screen.
Center/Mono
podem
serMain
copiadas
para busses
Para
remover
uma
atribuio
de entrada
bus Aux
ou mix.
Assignments
to the
Left/ Right
busses mono.
can be copied
System
Restore
CD
To
remove
an
input
assignment
from an de
Auxum
or Variable
Group
output
channels
on-screen.
be copied
to mono
busses.
mix.
Assignments
to
the
Main
Left/
Right
busses
can
be
copied
Variable
Group:
to linked busses, and assignments to the Center/Mono bus can
bus:
Mix
Rack
Options
to linked
busses,
and assignments to the Center/Mono bus can
copiar
atribuies
To remove an input assignment from an Aux or Variable Group
bePara
copied
to mono
busses.de bus dos Mains para Aux ou Variable
To
remove
an
input
assignment
from
an
Aux
or
Variable
Group
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
1
Target
the
bus
output
channel
you
want
to
change
by
selectTo
copy
bus
assignments
Groups:
be
copied
to
mono
busses.from the Mains to Auxes or Variable
1 bus:
Selecione o canal de sada do bus que deseja alterar selecionando
bus:
Groups:
ing
its
on-screen
channel
strip.
I/O
Options
sua rgua
de
canal
na
tela.
1 Target the bus output channel you want to change by selectTo copy bus assignments
from como
the Mains
to Auxes
or Variable
o bus
que deseja
das
atribuies
copiadas
1 Target
the bus output
channel
you
want
to change byiLok
select- 1 Selecione
To
bus
assignments
from
thedestino
Mains
to destination
Auxes
or Variable
Plug-in
discs
(if any)
with
pre-authorized
1 copy
Target
the
bus thatInput
you
want
to
be provides
the
of the
2 In
the listinstaller
ofchannel
member
input
channel
assignments,
right-click Groups:
ing its
on-screen
strip.
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Card
that
16 analog
selecionando
sua rgua de canal na tela.
2 Naing
listaitsdeon-screen
atribuies
de Input
Channel membros, clique com o
Groups:
channel
strip.
copied assignments
by selecting its on-screen channel strip.
Two
(2)assignment
IEC power
cables
the
input
remove
and
choose
Unassign.
boto
direito
deto
entrada
que
deseja
remover
e escolha 1 mic/line
Target thelevel
bus inputs
that you want to be the destination of the
2 In the
listna
of atribuio
member input
channel
assignments,
right-click
1
Target
the
bus
that
you
want
to be
destination
of
the
2 Clique
nothe
menu
pop-up
Input
Assign
nathe
parte
inferior
da
Members
2 InOne
the list
of Link
member
input
channel assignments,
right-click
FOH
cable
for connection
to a VENUE
console copied
Unassign.
2 Click
Input
pop-up
menu
at the
bottom
of
the
assignments
byAssign
selecting
its on-screen
channel
strip.
the input assignment to remove and choose Unassign.
AO16
Analog
Output
Card
that
provides
16
analog
line
level
copied
assignments
by
selecting
its
on-screen
channel
strip.
list,Members
escolha Replace
WithReplace
Mix From,
e escolha
o bus
Main
disponvel
To remove
all input assignments
from choose
a bus: Unassign.
the
input assignment
to remove and
list, choose
With
Mix From,
then
choose
the
outputs
Stage
Rackasincludes:
2 (Left-Right
Click the Input
Assign
pop-up
menu atdeseja
the bottom
of thecopiadas
ou Mono)
cujas
atribuies
que sejam
ParaEach
remover
todas
atribuies de entrada de um bus:
Main
(Left-Right
ormenu
Mono)at
whose
assignments
2available
Click the
Inputbus
Assign
pop-up
the bottom
of theyou
1 Target
bus outputfrom
channel
To remove
all the
inputAux
assignments
a bus:you want to change by Members
para o bus
list,selecionado.
choose Replace With Mix From, then choose the
remove
Two (2)allIEC
power
cables from a bus:
To
input
assignments
wantAnalog
to copy
to Digital
the currently
selected
bus.
Members
list,and
choose
Replace
With
Mixthat
From,
then choose
the
selecting
its on-screen
channel strip.
XO16
Output
Card
provides
8 analog
1 1Selecione
o
canal
de
sada
do
bus
Aux
bus
que
desjea
alterar
available
Main
bus (Left-Right or Mono) whose assignments you
Target the Aux bus output channel you want to change by
available
Main
bus
(Left-Right
or
Mono)
whose
assignments
you
line
level
outputs,
and
8
AES
digital
outputs.
1
Target
the
Aux
bus
output
channel
you
want
to
change
by
O
estado
dos
controles
de
bus
seguem
o
estado
dos
controles
selecionando
de
canal at
na
tela.
to copy
selected
2 Click
the rgua
pop-up
menu
the
bottom of the Members list wantThe
selecting
its sua
on-screen
channel
strip.
state to
of the
the currently
bus controls
followbus.
the state of the correwant to copy todos
theInput
currently
selected
bus. aos Mains: Channel
correspondentes
Channels
atribudos
selecting its on-screen channel strip.
and choose Reset Mix.
sponding
controlsCard
on the
input
channels
assignedoftoA-Net
the
AT16
A-Net Output
that
provides
16 channels
Mute
mapeia
Buscontrols
Send, Channel
mapeia
o Bus
Pan e o nvel
Clickothe
pop-up
menu
at the
bottom
the Members
list
The
state
of theobus
follow Pan
the state
of the
corre2 2Clique
menu
pop-up
na parte
inferior
da of
Members
list e escolha
Mains:
Channel
Mute
maps
to
Bus
Send,
Channel
Pan
maps
to
2 Click the pop-up menu at the bottom of the Members list
The
state
of
the
bus
controls
follow
the
state
of
the
correoutput
compatible
with
Aviom
Personal
Mixers
and
other
do fader controls
de canal on
mapeia
o nvelchannels
do bus Send.
Reset
Mix. Reset Mix.
and choose
sponding
the input
assigned to the
Bus Pan,
anddevices.
Channel
Fader
level
maps to
Bus Send
and choose Reset Mix.
sponding
controls
on the
input
channels
assigned
to level.
the
Pro16
Series
Mains: Channel Mute maps to Bus Send, Channel Pan maps to
Mains: Channel Mute maps to Bus Send, Channel Pan maps to
Bus
Pan, andand
Channel Fader
level maps
to Bus
Send level.
IOx
expansion
card
that
anlevel.
addiChapter
Aux
Sends
and
Groups 99
BusInput
Pan, and output
Channel
Fader 10:
level
maps
toprovides
BusVariable
Send
Chapter 10: Aux Sends and Variable Groups 99
digital I/O.
Chapter 10: Aux Sends and Variable Groups 99

100
Guia VENUE Profile
Captulo
11:11:
Mixers
Matrix
e Personal
Q Q Mixers
Chapter
Matrix
and
Personal
Stage Rack Features
can be
tomixer
96 total
inputs.
A seo
Outputs
oferece 8 mixers supporting
Matrix monoup
e8
Personal
Q (PQ) estreo
para configurar
mixagens
alternativas, ou mixagens
de cue,
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
VGA
and
The
Outputs
section
offers
8
mono
Matrix
mixers
and
8
stereo
Personal
Q (PQ) mixers for
setting up
alternateresolution).
mixes, fill and
delay
monitor ou press.
DVI supported.
feeds, and cue, monitor or press mixes.
Audio I/O

Mixers individually
Matrix selectable phantom power.
Matrix
Mixers
8 analog
output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or
Cada um dos 8 mixers Matrix disponveis pode receber at 12 canais de entradas.

As fontes between
de entrada
podem
combinao
The connection
FOH
Rackser
andqualquer
Stage Rack
requires de
digital
per
Stagemixers
Rack. can receive up to 12 channels of input. Input sources can be any combination of Auxes,
Each of
the
8 outputs
available
Matrix
busses
Aux,
Groups
ou Mains,
ou qualquer
dos 8 Matrix User Sends. Por padro,
cada
mixer
Matrix
possui
mono,
mas sadas
podem
a Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cablesada
can be
purchased
directly
or Mains
or any
the eight available Matrix User Sends.
ByAvid
default,
each Matrix
has a mono
output, but
serGroups
associadas
para busses,
formar um
par of
estreo.
from
or assembled
by mixer
your preferred
vendor.
Synchronization
and to
Control
I/O pairs.
outputs
can be linked
form stereo
Matrix Mixer tab
System Components
Included Components
Matrix output
All and
VENUE
level
controls

Optional Components
Matrix Input Source selectors
Headphones with 1/4-inch jackMatrix Source controls
(for Talkback)
User Assign
MIDI cables (for connecting external
MIDI devices)
VENUE Mouse Pad

VENUE Profile Guide

Rack(s) (see next)

Racks, Software
CDs,
and
CablesCurrently selected Matrix mixer
Reset,
Clear iLoks,
and Replace
selector
Matrix
Mixer
in Outputs
Mixer
Matrix
na pgina
Outputspage
System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options



outputs
Chapter 11: Matrix and Personal Q Mixers 101
digital I/O.
Captulo 11: Mixers Matrix e Personal Q
101
Mixers Personal Q
Personal Q Mixers
Cada um dos 8 mixers Personal Q (PQ) disponveis pode receber at 12 canais de entradas. As fontes de entrada podem ser qualquer
Each of the
8 available
(PQ)ou
mixers
can dos
receive
to 12
channels
input.
Input Qsources
beestreo.
any combination
combinao
de busses
Aux, Personal
Groups ouQMains,
qualquer
8 PQup
User
Sends.
Cada of
mixer
Personal
possui can
sada
Personal Q Mixers
of Auxes, Groups or Mains busses, or any of the eight available PQ User Sends. Each Personal Q mixer has a stereo output.
Each of the 8 available Personal Q (PQ) mixers can receive up to 12 channels of input. Input sources can be any combination
of Auxes, Groups or Mains busses, or any of the eight available PQ User Sends. Each Personal Q mixer has a stereo output.
PQ Source controls
PQ output
level and
controls
PQ Source controls
PQ output
level and
controls
User Assign
User Assign
Currently selected PQ mixer
Personal Q Mixer in Outputs page
Currently selected PQ mixer
Mixer Personal Q na pgina Outputs
Personal
Q MixerQinController
Outputs page System
Personal
Reset and Replace selector
Reset and Replace selector
(Optional)
Sistema Personal Q Controller System (Opcional)
With the optional Personal Q Controller system, performers
Personal Q Controller System (Optional)
theopcional
controls Personal
in the Personal
Q mixeros
from
a remote
Comcan
o adjust
sistema
Q Controller,
performers
(msicos
podem
ajustarPersonal
controles
nofor
mixer
Personal Q
location.
See
thePersonal
VENUE
Q Guide
details.
With
theetc)
optional
QosController
system,
performers
remotamente.
Veja
o GuiainVENUE
Personal
para from
mais detalhes.
can adjust the
controls
the Personal
QQmixer
a remote
If
no
PQ
Controllers
are
used,
the
PQ
mixers
are still availlocation. See the VENUE Personal Q Guide for details.
able for use as stereo Matrix mixers controllable from the
PQ
sendo
usados,
os mixer
console.
IfSeno
PQControllers
Controllersno
areestiverem
used, the PQ
mixers
are still
avail-PQ
mixers
disponveis
para controllable
uso como mixers
Matrix
able
for continuar
use as stereo
Matrix mixers
from the
estreo, controlveis pela console.
console.
102
Guia VENUE Profile
Configuring
Matrix
and
PQ
ConfiguringMixers
Matrix
and
PQ Mixers
Mixers
Configurando
Matrix
e PQ
Configuring
Matrix
and
PQ
Mixers
The
12 Inputs
forFeatures
each Matrix and PQ mixer can be any comStage
Rack
To
stereo
link
associar
Matrixes em estreo:
ToPara
stereo
link Matrixes:
Matrixes:
Tothe
stereo
link into
Matrixes:
1 Put
system
Config mode.
1 Put
the system
into Config
mode.
Additional
Required
Components
The 12 Inputs for each Matrix and PQ mixer can be any comGo to
to the
the Options
Options >
> Busses
Busses page.
page.
Asbination
12 entradas
para potential
cada mixer
Matrix e PQ mixer podem ser 22 Go
of
these
sources:
The 12
forpotential
each Matrix
and PQ mixer can be any com- 2 V pgina Options > Busses.
bination
of Inputs
these 35
35
sources:
Go
to the section,
Options
> Busses
qualquer
dessas
potenciais:
Stage combinao
Racks are used
with35
anfontes
FOH Rack,
and provide all stage 3 The
following
components
mustpage.
In2the
Matrix
click
Edit.
bination
24 shared
and
sources
ofAux
these
35Group
potential
sources:
3 In the Matrix section, click Edit.
shared
Aux
and
Group
sources
audio
2424fontes
compartilhadas
Auxsystems.
e GroupUp to two Stage Racks
I/O for
VENUE
Profile
3
Na
seo
Matrix,
clique
Edit.
Click
Video
Display
(15-inch
or
greater
flat-panel
VGA display
3
Intothe
Matrix
section,
click
Edit.
3 3
sources
(LCR
or
LR+M)
Mains
24Mains
shared
Aux
and
sources
enable
the
Link between
any
two adjacent
can
(LCR
ou
LR+M)
3fontes
Mains
sources
(LCR
orGroup
LR+M)
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting up to 96 total inputs. 4
4 Click to enable the Link between any two adjacent
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA and
8 88fontes
User
Input
(odd/even)
Matrixes.
Input
sources
User
3 Mains
4 Click
to habilitar
enable the
Link between
any
two
adjacent
(odd/even)
Matrixes.
User
Input sources
sources (LCR or LR+M)
4 Clique
para
a associao
entre
dois
Matrixes
(mpar/par)
DVI supported.
(odd/even)
Matrixes.
Audio
I/O
8 User Input sources
adjacentes.
5
Click
Apply.
(Click
Cancel
to
exit
Edit
mode
without
User
Inputs
can
input
channels,
FX
physical
stage
User
Input
Channels,
FX Returns,
entradas
(Clickand
Cancel
to exit Edit mode
without
USBApply.
keyboard
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
UserInputs
Inputspodem
can be
be ser
input
channels,
FX Returns,
Returns,
physical
stagede 5 Click
changes.)
door
48
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic
preamps
and
udio
palco
oucan
FOH
ou
entradas
da from
opes
deTools
playback
do
Pro
5 Click Apply. (Click Cancel to exit Edit mode without
audio
FOH
audio
inputs,
or
inputs
Pro
playback
changes.)
User
Inputs
be
input
channels,
FX
Returns,
physical
stage
audio or FOH audio inputs, or inputs from Pro Tools playback
5 Clique Apply. (Clique Cancel para sair do modo Edit sem
individually
Tools.
Alm
disso:
changes.)
options.
In
audio
FOH audio inputs, or inputs from Pro Tools playback alteraes).
Digital
Inoraddition:
addition:
options.
Um
ou
mais
dos
8 User
Inputsexpandable
disponveisup
pode
seranalog
enviado
One
8 analog
output
channels;
to 48
or
options.
or
more
of
the
8
available
user
inputs
can
be
sent
to
In
addition:
Oneum
or mais
moremixers
of theMatrix
8 available
user inputs can be sent to
para
ouRack.
PQ.
digital
outputs
perorStage
one
or
Matrix
mixers.
One
or
of de
the
8 available
inputs
be sent
one
or more
more
Matrix
or PQ
PQ
mixers.
Atribuies
demore
fontes
entrada
e deuser
User
Inputcan
podem
serto
armazenadas
Input
source
assignment
and
user
input
assignment
can
one
or
more
Matrix
or
PQ
mixers.
juntamente
com
uma
cena.
Input source assignment
and Controland
I/Ouser input assignment can
stored
on
a
per-snapshot
basis.
Synchronization
Asbe
fontes
de
entrada
dos
mixer
Matrix
e
PQ
mixers
so
Input
source
assignment
and
user
input
assignment
can
be stored on a per-snapshot basis.
Editing the link status of a Matrix pair in the Options > Busses page.
The
Snake
connectors
to
enable
primary
and
redundant
(if
como
ou
Ps-Fader
na aba
Pickoffs
da pgina
Editing the link status of a Matrix pair in the Options > Busses page.
configuradas
input
sources
Matrix
PQ
be
stored
on Pre
afor
per-snapshot
The
input
sources
for
Matrix and
andbasis.
PQ mixers
mixers are
are configconfigOptional
Components
Options.
Editing
the link
status
of a Matrix
pair in the Optionschannel
> Busses inpage.
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
When
a matrix
pair
is linked,
the
ured
as
Preor
Post-Fader
in
the
Pickoffs
tab
of
the
OpEditando
o status de
associao
de um
pareven-numbered
Matrix na pgina Options > Busses.
The
input
Matrix
and PQtab
areOpas Preor sources
Post-Fader
in
the
Pickoffs
of the
Asured
etiquetas
de
entradasfor(18,
Left,
Right,mixers
C/Mono
econfigUser) When a matrix pair is linked, the even-numbered channel inall
parameter
settings
of
the
odd-numbered
channel.
tions
page.
The
following
components
and must
be
When
a matrix
pair
is linked,
the
even-numbered
channel inas Preor Post-Fader
in the
Pickoffsqualquer
tab of the
Op- herits
herits
all
parameter
settings
ofare
theoptional,
odd-numbered
channel.
tionsured
page.
servem
apenas
como
guia. Em sua
utilizao,
fonte
Quando
um
par
Matrix
associado,
os
canais
pares
herdam
todos
purchased
separately:
herits all parameter settings of the odd-numbered channel.
deInput
labels
(18,
Left,
Right,
C/Mono
and
User)
are
only
tions
page.
entrada
pode
ser
atribuda
a
qualquer
entrada
do
mixer
(por
Input labels (18, Left, Right, C/Mono and User) are only
The
mixer
to
a
stereo
matrix
mixer:
os matrix
parmetros
dechanges
ajuste dos
canais
mpares.
The
matrix
mixer
changes
to
a
stereo
matrix
mixer:
intended
as
a
use,
any
input
source
be
as USB flash disk (or other portable USB storage device for
System
Components
exemplo,
Left
no
precisa
semprs
atribuda
can
entrada
Input
labels
(18,In
Right,
C/Mono
and
User)
only
intended
as
a guide.
guide.
InLeft,
use,
any ser
input
source
can
be are
as-Left
A
control
is
to
each
mixer
input
source.
matrix
mixer
changes
to a matrix
stereo matrix
mixer:
The
A Pan
Pan
control
is added
added
to 512
each
matrix
mixerrecommended)
input
source.
designed
um
mixer).
to
any
mixer
input
(for
example,
Left
doesn't
altransfer
of Show
data;
MB
or larger
intended
as
a
guide.
In
use,
any
input
source
can
be
assigned to any mixer input (for example, Left doesn't alO mixer
matrixsources
se transforma
em um
mixer
matrix
estreo:
All
input
are
panned
center
upon
linking.
A
Pan
control
is
added
to
each
matrix
mixer
input
source.
ways
have
to
be
assigned
to
the
Left
input
of
a
mixer).
All
input
sources
are
panned
center
upon
linking.
signed
to
any
mixer
input
(for
example,
Left
doesn't
al
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
Um controle de pan adicionado a cada fonte de entrada do
ways haveComponents
to be assigned to the Left input of a mixer).
Included
Configurando
Pontos de Alimentao (Pickoffs) de Aux,
AllMatrix.
input sources are panned center upon linking.
ways have to be assigned to the Left input of a mixer). Plug-in
mixer
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
assignments
to
formerly
mono
matrix
Group
Mains Profile systems include the following:
Plug-in
assignments
todethe
the
formerly
mono
matrix channels
channels
All eVENUE

Todas
as
fontes
entrada
esto
posicionadas
no centro at a
are
lost,
including
all
snapshot
references.
Configuring
Aux,
Group
and
Mains
Pickoffs
Dynamic
or
condenser
microphone
and matrix
XLR mic
cable
Plug-in
assignments
to the references.
formerly mono
channels
are lost,
including
all
snapshot
Configuring
Aux,
Group
and
Mains
Pickoffs
associao de canais.
VENUE
Profile
console
Para configurar
os
pontos
de
alimentao
(pickopffs)
de
Auxes,
(for
Talkback)
are lost, including all snapshot references.
Configuring Aux, Group and Mains Pickoffs
eTwo
(2)para
IECos
power
Groups
Mains
mixerscables
Matrix
e PQ:pickoffs for
To
Unlinking
Matrixes
Footswitches
(up para
to 2) os canais formadores do Matrix mono
To configure
configure Auxes,
Auxes, Groups,
Groups, and
and Mains
Mains pickoffs
for the
the Matrix
Matrix
Atribuies
de plug-ins
Unlinking
Matrixes
and
mixers:
Monitor
VGA and
screen
(screen
not for
included)
To
configure
Auxes, for
Groups,
Mains
pickoffs
the Matrix
and PQ
PQ
mixers: mount
soUnlinking
perdidos,
incluindo
todas as referncias
cenas
(snapshots).
Matrixes
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external de
MIDI
devices)
1 Coloque
os sistema
no modo Config.
and
PQ
mixers:
To
unlink
a
pair
of
Matrixes:
1 Put
the
system
in
Config
mode.
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
To
unlink
a
pair
of
Matrixes:
Matrixes
Tothe
unlink
a system
pair
of Matrixes:
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
1 Configurar
Put
the system
in
Config
mode. pode causar uma perda 1 Desassociando
Put
system
into
mode.
pontos
de
alimentao
VENUE
and external
1 Put the
system
into Config
Config
mode.digital devices)
Configuring
pickoff
points
may
cause
a
momentary
loss
of
Configuring
pickoff
points
may
cause
a
momentary
loss
of
momentnea
de
udio
e,
portanto,
no
pode
ser
realizado
VENUE Profile Guide
1
Put
the
system
into
Config
mode.
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
to GPI devices)
Para
desassociar
um>par
de Matrixes:
audio,
and
therefore
cannot
be
changed
in
mode.
Go to
the Options
Busses
page.
Configuring
pickoff
points
cause
momentary
audio,
andShow.
therefore
cannot
be may
changed
inaShow
Show
mode. loss of 2
2 Go to the Options > Busses page.
no modo
audio, and therefore cannot be changed in Show mode.
2 Go
to thethe
Options > section.
Busses page.
3 1Click
Edit
Coloque
no modo
Config.
2 Go toProtective
Options
page
and
click
the
3 Click
Editoin
insistema
the Matrix
Matrix
section.
Dust
Cover
to the
the Options
Options
and
click
the Pickoffs
Pickoffs tab.
tab.
2 2VGo
pgina
epage
clique
a aba
Pickoffs.
3
Click
Edit
in
the
Matrix
section.
2 Go
to the
Options
page and
click the
Pickoffs
4 VENUE
Click to
unlink
the
Matrixes.
Rack(s)
(see
next)
3 Under
Matrix
and
PQ Sources,
configure
Aux,
Groupstab.
and
Profile
Expansion
Options
4 2Click
unlink
the desired
desired
Matrixes.
V to
pgina
Options
> Busses.
3 Under Matrix and PQ Sources, configure Aux, Groups and
3 Mains
Em Matrix
e
PQ
Sources,
configure
Aux,
Groups
e
Mains
(LCR
ou
(LCR
or
LR+M)
as
preor
post-fader.
4
Click
to
unlink
the
desired
Matrixes.
3
Under
Matrix
and
PQ
Sources,
configure
Aux,
Groups
and
5 Click Apply.
Mainscomo
(LCR or
as pre- or post-fader.
5 The
Clickfollowing
Apply. options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
LR+M)
prLR+M)
ou ps-fader.
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and Cables
3 Clique Edit na seo Matrix.
Mains (LCR
or LR+M)
as preor post-fader.
5 details
Click Apply.
For
on all VENUE
systems and
options, visit the Avid
When a
a Matrix
Matrix pair
pair is
is unlinked
unlinked the
the even-numbered
even-numbered channel
channel
Associando
e Unlinking
Desassociando
Paresto form
de Sadas
Matrix When
Linking
Stereo
Each Mixand
Rack
or FOH Rack Pairs
includes:
website
(www.avid.com).
Linking
and
Unlinking
Pairs
to form
Stereo
4
Clique
para
desassociar
os
Matrixes
desejados.
again
inherits
all
settings
of
odd-numbered
When
a Matrix
pair is unlinked
even-numbered
channel
again
inherits
all parameter
parameter
settings the
of the
the
odd-numbered
Estreo
Matrix
Outputs
Linking
and Unlinking
Pairs to form Stereo channel.
System
Restore
CD
Matrix
Outputs
again
inherits
all
parameter
settings
of
the
odd-numbered
channel.
5 Clique Apply.
Matrix
Outputs
mixers
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Installer
CD (mpar/par)
The
eight
mono
Matrix
mixers
can
be
in
odd/even
pairs
Os
oito
Matrix
podem
serSoftware
associados
channel.
Mix
Rack Options
The
eight
mono
Matrix
mixers
can
be linked
linkedem
in pares
odd/even
pairs
Pre-existing
Pre-existing plug-in
plug-in and
and GEQ
GEQ routing
routing may
may be
be affected
affected when
when
para
formar
at
quatro
sadas
estreo.
Combinaes
de
mixers
to
form
up
to
four
stereo-linked
pairs
of
matrix
outputs.
A
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
The
eight
mono
Matrix
mixers
can
be
linked
in
odd/even
pairs
to form up to four stereo-linked pairs of matrix outputs. A
Quado
umlink
parstate
Matrix
desassociado,
os
canais
pares when
herdam
the
matrix
is
changed.
An
alert
dialog
warning
Pre-existing
plug-in
and
GEQ
routing
may
be
affectedof
mono
e
estreo
(pares
associados)
possvel.
Os
pares
(mpar/par)
the
matrix
link
state
is
changed.
An
alert
dialog
warning
of
combination
of
mono
and
stereo-linked
Matrix
mixers
is
posI/O
Options
to
form
up
to
four
stereo-linked
pairs
of
matrix
outputs.
A
iLok USB
Smart and
Key stereo-linked
(for storing plug-in
novamente
todos
os
ajustes
de
parmetros
dos
canais
mpares.
combination
of mono
Matrixauthorizations)
mixers is poslossmatrix
is shown
the
linkdialog
or unlink
op- of
the
linkprior
statetoisperforming
changed. An
alert
warning
so
associados
e matrix
desassociados
utilizando
os unlinked
controles using
da pgina data
sible.
Odd-even
pairs
are
linked
and
of mono
and
Matrix mixers
is pos- data loss is shown prior to performing the link or unlink opsible.combination
matrix
pairs
are
linked
and
unlinked
using
Odd-even
Plug-in
installer
discs
(if stereo-linked
any)
with
pre-authorized
iLok
eration.
Click
OK
to
complete
the
link
operation,
or
click
Can-opOptions
>
Busses
na
tela.
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
that
provides
16
analog
data
loss
is
shown
prior
to
performing
the
link
or
unlink
Click OK to
complete the
operation,
or click
on-screen
controls in
the
> Busses
Endereamentos
pr-existentes
delink
plug-in
e GEQ podem
serCanafetados
sible. Odd-even
matrix
pairs are
linked page.
and unlinked using eration.
on-screen
the Options
Options
Twocontrols
(2) IEC in
power
cables > Busses page.
cel
to
cancel
without
changes.
mic/line
level
inputs
eration.
Click
OK
to
complete
the
link
operation,
or
click
Cancelquando
to cancel
without
changes. do Matrix alterado. Uma caixa
o status
de associao
de
on-screen
controls
in
the
Options
>
Busses
page.
AOne
associao
de isMatrixes
realizada
utilizando
os mesmos
Linking
FOH
Link
cable
for connection
to asame
VENUE
console
cel
to
cancel
without
changes.
Matrixes
accomplished
using
the
Edit
and
alerta de perda de dados apresentada antes da operao de
Linking
Matrixes
is
accomplished
using
the
same
Edit
and
mtodos de Edit e Apply usados nos pares associados Aux.
Apply
methods
used
linking
Linking
Matrixes
is stereo
accomplished
using the same Edit and associao ou desassociao. Clique OK para completer a operao
Apply
methods
used for
for
stereo
linking Auxes.
Auxes.
outputs
Each
Stage
Rack includes:
ou
Cancel para cancelar sem alteraes.
Apply methods used for stereo linking Auxes.

digital I/O.
Captulo
e Personal
Q 103
Chapter11:
11:Mixers
MatrixMatrix
and Personal
Q Mixers
103
Snapshots
Snapshots
Todos
os ajustes
de Matrix,
incluindo
panexcluding
mas excluindo
o status
Snapshots
All
matrix
settings,
including
Pan obut
the stereo
de link
associao
sorecalled
armazenados
e carregados
com
status, areestreo,
stored and
with snapshots.
The stereo
All matrix
settings, including
Pan
but excluding
the
stereo
snapshots.
A
associao
estreo
do
master
do
Matrix
no
podem
link status of Matrix masters is not snapshottable.
link status,
stored and recalled with snapshots. The stereo
ser gravados
emare
cenas.
link status of Matrix masters is not snapshottable.
Compatibility
Compatibilidade
Compatibility
Show
files created in previous versions of software preserve all
Arquivos
criados
em in
verses
anteriores
doand
software
preservam
monoShow
matrix
settings
working
memory
snapshots.
Show
files created
in mono
previous
versionsde
oftrabalho
softwareepreserve
all
todos
os ajustes
de Matrix
na memria
snapshots.
Loading a Show file containing stereo-linked Matrixes in a
Carregar
arquivo
Showinque
contm
matrixes
monoum
matrix
settings
working
memory
andassociadas
snapshots.em
previous version of software preserves all date except Matrix
estreo
em uma
verso
anterior dostereo-linked
software preserva
todos
Loading
a Show
file containing
Matrixes
in aos
master
linkostatus.
dados,
exceto
statusofdesoftware
associao
masterall
dodate
Matrix.
previous
version
preserves
except Matrix
master link status.
Ajustes
Settings
Settings
You
can copiar
copy and
paste
settings
between
mono
and
stereo e
Voc
pode
e colar
ajustes
entre
Matrixes
mono
e estreo,
Matrixes,
and use
the Replace
withclicando
Mix command,
by direito
utilizar
o comando
Replace
with Mix,
com o boto
You can copy and paste settings between mono and stereo
do right-clicking
mouse no Matrix
e escolhendo
Copy,
Paste ou
Replace
Mix
on the
Matrix and
choosing
Copy,
Paste,with
or ReMatrixes, and use the Replace with Mix command, by
do place
menu.
with Mix from the menu.
right-clicking on the Matrix and choosing Copy, Paste, or Replace with Mix from the menu.
Copy/Paste
Copy and Paste
Copy/Paste
s Paste
se aplica
aosto
ajustes
rgua
master(fader,
(fader,mute,
Mute,
Copy and
Copy/paste
only
applies
masterdastrip
settings
polarity,
delay,
direct
out).
Parmetros
de mixagem
e fontes
polarity,
delay,
direct
out).
Mix parameters
and mix
sourcesso
Copy/paste
only applies to master strip settings (fader, mute,
manuseados
separadamente.
are handled
separately.
polarity, delay, direct out). Mix parameters and mix sources
are handled separately.

Replace
Replace
Associando
e
desassociando
entradas
Linking
and Unlinking
Adjacent Matrix Inputs
adjacentes no Matrix
Linking
andtoUnlinking
Matrix
Inputs
Adjacent
inputs
Matrix mixersAdjacent
can be linked
or unlinked
on
aEntradas
per inputadjacentes
pair basis.para
Link os
status
canMatrix
be specified
a per
Mamixers
podemonser
associadas
Adjacent inputs to Matrix mixers can be linked or unlinked on
trix
basis (for example,
inputs
1 and
2 can
linked for Matrix
ou desassociadas
em uma
base
por par
debe
entradas.
a per input pair basis. Link status can be specified on a per MaO but
status
de associao
pode
ser gives
especificado
umatobase
1,
unlinked
for Matrix
2). This
you the em
ability
con- por
trix basis
example, inputs 1
1 and
2podem
can beser
linked
for Matrix
Matrix
(por(for
e2
associadas
para
trol
inputs
asexemplo,
either a entradas
stereo-linked
pair
or as independent
but unlinked
Matrix 2). This
gives
you the
to con- a
a1,Matrix
1, mas for
desassociadas
para
a Matrix
2).ability
Isso oferece
mono
inputs.
trol inputsde
as controlar
either a stereo-linked
pair or
as independent
habilidade
entradas e pares
associados
em estreo
When
linked,
level
and source on/off controls are linked.
mono
inputs.
como
entradas
mono
independentes.
discrete
and
on/off
affect
When
Quando
associar,
controles
de
nvel
e controls
fontearehabilitada/
Whenunlinked,
linked,
level
and level
source
on/off
controls
linked.
desabilitada
so channel.
associados.
each
individual
When unlinked, discrete level and on/off controls affect
Quando
desassociar, controles de nvel e fonte habilitada/
each
individual
channel.
Stereo
inputs
(such
as stereo
groups,
Mains
and stedesabilitada
distintos
afetam
cada
canalLR,
individual.
reo-linked auxes) are linked by default, such as after a Clear
Stereo inputs (such as stereo groups, Mains LR, and steEntradasoperation.
estreo (como
Groups
estreo,
LR eorAux
associados
Console
Adjacent
inputs
can Mains
be linked
unlinked
reo-linked
auxes)
are linkedpor
bypadro,
default,como
such aps
as after
a Clear
em
estreo)
soConfig
associados
uma
operao
at
any
time, in
or Show mode.
Console
operation.
Adjacent
inputs can
be linked
or unlinked ou
Clear
Console.
Entradas
adjacentes
podem
ser associadas
at any time, ina Config
ortempo,
Show mode.
desassociadas
qualquer
nos modos Config ou Show.
To link or unlink inputs to Matrix mixers:
associar
ou desassociar
entradas
para
os mixers
1Para
Golink
to or
theunlink
Outputs
page,
and
click
to display
theMatrix:
Matrix
To
inputs
to Matrix
mixers:
mixer.
to the Outputs
click
to display
the
Matrix
11VGo
pgina
Outputs epage,
cliqueand
para
mostrar
o mixer
Matrix.
2 mixer.
Click the checkboxes below any adjacent inputs to link or
unlink
them.
check markabaixo
in thede
checkbox
indicates
a linkedpara
2 Clique
nas A
checkboxes
cada entrada
adjacente
2 Click the checkboxes below any adjacent inputs to link or
associ-las
ouan
desassoci-las.
Umaindicates
marca nounlinked
checkboxsources.
indica uma
input
source;
empty checkbox
unlink them. A check mark in the checkbox indicates a linked
fonte de entrada associada; uma checkbox vazia indica fontes
input source; an empty checkbox indicates unlinked sources.
desassociadas.
Voc
pode
o menu
do boto
direito
do mouse
para
substituir
Replace
You
can usar
use the
right-click
menu
to Replace
mixer
settings
be(Replace)
ajustes
de
mixer
matrixes
mono
e
stereo.
tween mono and stereo Matrixes.
.
You can use the right-click menu to Replace mixer settings between mono and stereo Matrixes.
From
To
Result
.
From
Mono
To
Mono
Mono
Mono
Mono
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
AllResult
mix parameters and mix
sources applied
All mix parameters and mix
applied and mix
Allsources
mix parameters
sources applied; Pans default to
center
sources applied; Pans default to
Allcenter
mix parameters and mix
sources applied
applied and mix
Allsources
mix parameters
sources except pan applied
sources except pan applied
Click to link or unlink

Click to link or unlink
Link controls in the Outputs page

Link controlsand
in the
Outputs page
Relinking
Offsets
Controles Link na
pgina
Outputs
Relinking
Offsetstheir level and on/off state will
When
inputs and
are relinked,
Reassociao
change
as follows:
When inputs are relinked, their level and on/off state will
Quando
entradas
so
reassociadas,
seus nveis
e estado
se alteram
change
aschannel
follows:
Level
Each
maintains
any offset
between
the two
como se segue:
channels.
This offset is not maintained if both linked controls
Level Each channel maintains any offset between the two
are adjusted beyond their maximum or minimum.
channels.
This offset
is not
maintained
if both
linked
controls
Level
Cada canal
mantm
qualquer
diferena
entre
os dois
canais.
Essa
diferena
no
mantida
se
ambos
os
controles
associados
are
adjusted
beyond
their
maximum
or
minimum.
On/Off Each channel maintains its discrete on/off state at the
estothe
alm
de seus
ouFor
mnimo.
time
sources
aremximo
relinked.
example, if one channel is
On/Off Each channel maintains its discrete on/off state at the
on and the other is off the stereo input will maintain these setOn/Off
Cada
canalare
mantm
seuFor
estado
ativado
(On)/no
ativado
time the
sources
relinked.
example,
if one
channel
is
tings after relinking, thus providing a stereo source with one
(Off)
distinto
no momento
que input
as fontes
reassociadas.
on and
the other
is off theem
stereo
will so
maintain
these set-Por
channel
on,
andcanal
the other
off. Toggling
one desabilitado,
channel froma entrada
Off
exemplo,
se um
est
habilitado
e o aoutro
tings after
relinking,
thus
providing
stereo source with
one
to
On results
in both
channels
switching
On; toggling oferecendo
one of
estreo
manter
esses
ajustes
depois
de
reassociados,
channel on, and the other off. Toggling one channel from Off
the
linked
channels
from On
to Off
results
in both
channels
dessa
maneira
uma fonte
estreo
com
um canal
habilitado
e outro
to On results in both channels switching On; toggling one of
no. Alterar
um canal de Off para On resulta na alterao de ambos
switching
Off.
the linked channels from On to Off results in both channels
para
on; alterar um dos canais associados de On para Off resulta na
switching
alterao
deOff.
ambos para Off.
104
Guia VENUE Profile
ConfiguringUser
UserInputs
Inputs
Configuring
Forany
anyassigned
assignedUser
UserInputs,
Inputs,click
clickthe
thePickoff
Pickoffpop-up
pop-upmenu
menu
4 4For
andchoose
choosethe
thedesired
desiredpickoff
pickofffor
forthat
thatUser
UserInput
Inputsource.
source.
and
Youcan
canassign
assignup
uptotoeight
eightUser
UserInputs
Inputstotobebeavailable
availableglobally
globally
You
Choices
include
Top
of
Channel,
Insert
Return,
and
Choices
of
Channel,
Insert
Return,
and
4 For
anyinclude
assigned
User
Inputs,
the
Pickoff
pop-up
menu
Configurando
User Inputs
qualquer
um Top
dos
User
Inputsclick
atribudos,
clique
no menu
popConfiguring
User
Inputs
theMatrix
Matrix
mixers
and,
separately,up
uptotoeight
eightUser
UserInputs
Inputs 4 De
totothe
mixers
and,
separately,
Pre/Post-Fader
(forInput
Input
Channels)
orTop
Topdesejado
of
FXReturn
Return
and
Pre/Post-Fader
(for
Channels)
or
of
FX
and
up
Pickoff
e
escolha
o
ponto
de
alimentao
para
aquela
and
choose
the
desired
pickoff
for
that
User
Input
source.
4 For any assigned User Inputs, click the Pickoff pop-up menu
available
globally
thePQ
PQmixers.
mixers.
Configuring
Inputs
toto
bebe
available
globally
totothe
Pre/Post-Fader
(for
FX
Returns).
can
assignUser
up
to
eight
User
Inputs
to be
available
globally
VocYou
pode
atribuir
at
oito
User
Inputs
para
estarem
disponveis
fonte
User Input.(for
As
opes
incluem
TopReturn,
of Channel,
Insert Return
Pre/Post-Fader
FX
Choices
Top
ofReturns).
Channel,
Insert
and
and
choose include
the desired
pickoff
for that
User Input
source.
Stage
Rack
Features
Additional
Required
Components
to
the
Matrix
mixers
and,
separately,
up
to
eight
User
Inputs
globalmente
para
os
mixers
Matrix
e,
separadamente,
at
oito
User
e
Pre/Ps-Fader
(para
Input
Channels)
ouTop
TopofofFXFX
Return
e Pre/
YouAny
canof
assign
up
toUser
eight
User Inputs
to
be
available
globally
Pre/Post-Fader
(for
Input
Channels)
or
Return
and
Any
ofthe
theeight
eight
UserInputs
Inputs
defined
for
the
Matrix
or
PQ
can
TopChannel
of Channel,
Insert
Return,
and
defined for the Matrix or PQ can Choices include
The(para
Input
Fader
Pickoff
setting
onthe
theOptions
Options>>
Inputs
para
estarem
disponveis
globalmente
para
os
mixers
PQ
Ps-Fader
FX
Returns).
The
Input
Channel
Fader
Pickoff
setting
on
to
be
available
globally
to
the
PQ
mixers.
to Stage
the
Matrix
and,
separately,
upInputs
to
eight
User
Inputs
Pre/Post-Fader
(for
FX Channels)
Returns).
assigned
any
mixer
input.
User
Inputs
are
assigned
from Pre/Post-Fader
Racks mixers
are
used
with
an
FOH
Rack,
and
provide
all stage
The
following
components
must
be
separately:
(for
Input
or purchased
Top
of FX Return
andpickoff
bebeassigned
totoany
mixer
input.
User
are
assigned
from
Pickoffs
page
determines
globally
whether
the
fader
mixers.
Pickoffs
page
determines
globally
whether
the
fader
pickoff
to audio
be
available
globally
to
the
PQ
mixers.
the
User
Assign
panel
of
the
Matrix
or
PQ
main
page.
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Stage
Racks
(for
FX
Returns).
the
Assign
of the Matrix
PQ
main
page.
AnyUser
of the
eightpanel
User Inputs
definedorfor
the
Matrix
or PQ can Pre/Post-Fader
points
are
preor
post-fader.
Os
ajustes
Input
Channel
Fader
Pickoff
na
pgina
Options
Video
Display
(15-inch
or greater
display
points
are preor post-fader.
The
Input
Channel
Fader
Pickoffflat-panel
setting onVGA
the Options
>
can
bedas
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
toare
96assigned
total
inputs.
Qualquer
oito
User
Inputs
definidas
para
o
Matrix
ou
PQ
pode
>
Pickoffs
determinam
globalmente
se
os
pontos
be
assigned
to
any
mixer
input.
User
Inputs
from
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA
and de
Any of the eight User Inputs defined for the Matrix or PQ can
Pickoffs
page
determines
globally
whether
the
fader
pickoff
The
Input
Channel
Pickoff
setting
on the to
Options
> MaClick
theUser
UserAssign
Assign
button
again
return
themain
main
ser
atribuda
qualquer
entrada
mixer. or
User
Inputs
so
atribudos
alimentao
soFader
pr
ou
ps-fader.
the Userato
Assign
panel
of
thedoMatrix
PQare
main
page.
5 5DVI
Click
the
button
again
totoreturn
to the
Masupported.
be assigned
any mixer
input.
User Inputs
assigned
from
points
are determines
pre- or post-fader.
Pickoffs
page
globally whether the fader pickoff
trix
screen.
peloAudio
painelI/O
User Assign da pgina Matrix ou PQ.
trix
screen.
the User Assign panel of the Matrix or PQ main page.
USB
keyboard
trackball/mouse
(Windows
points
are boto
pre- and
or User
post-fader.
5 Clique
no
Assign novamente
para compatible)
retornar a tela
5 Click the User Assign button again to return to the main MaMatrix.
trix
screen.
Assigning
Input
Sources
5 Click
the User Assign
button
again to return to the main Ma 8 analog output channels; expandable up toUser
48 Input
analog
or
Assign
User Input
Assign
User Input Assign
User Input Assign
Snake connectors to enable primary andClick

redundant
Clicktotoaccess
access(if
UserAssign
Assign
applicable) connection to a VENUE FOHUser
Rack.
System Components
Click to access
User Assign
Click to access
User Assign
Included Components
Currently selected Matrix mixer
Currently
selected
Matrixsystems
mixer
All
VENUE
Profile
UserInput
Inputpanel
panelshowing
showingassignments
assignmentsfor
fora aMatrix
Matrixmixer
mixer
User
VENUE
Profile console
Currently selected Matrix mixer
Digital
Snake Cable
(VENUE
Profile Systems Only)
Assigning
Input
Sources
trix
screen. Fontes de Entrada
Atribuindo
The connection
Toassign
assign inputsources
sourcestotoa aMatrix
MatrixororPQ
PQ mixer:
To
Assigning
Input
a Digitalinput
Snake
cable.Sources
This cable can
be mixer:
purchased directly
Par atribuir fontes de entrada para um mixer Matrix ou PQ:
1
Go
to
the
Outputs
page
and
click
to
select
MatrixororPQ
PQ
from
Avid
or
assembled
by
your
preferred
1 Go to theInput
Outputs
page and click to selectvendor.
a aMatrix
Assigning
Sources
To
assign
input
sources
to
a
Matrix
or
PQ
mixer:
mixer.
mixer.
1 V pgina Outputs e clique para selecionar um mixer Matrix
Toou
assign
input
sources
to
a Matrix
or at
PQto
mixer:
1 2PQ.
Go
to
the
Outputs
page
and click
select
a Matrix
or PQ or
Click
theInput
InputSource
Source
selector
the
topofof
eachMatrix
Matrix
Optional
Components
2 Click
the
selector
at the
top
each
or
mixer.
PQ
channel
and
select
the
desired
input
source.
Choices
in1 Go
the Outputs
page the
anddesired
click toinput
selectsource.
a Matrix
or PQ inPQto
channel
and select
Choices
2The
Clique
no selector
Input Source
no topo de
cada
canal
ou
following
components
are
optional,
and
must
be Matrix
clude
Auxes,
Groups,
Mains
and
any
the
8available
available
User
mixer.
clude
Auxes,
Groups,
Mains
and
any
ofofthe
8of
User
In-In2 Click
the Input
Source
at
the
top
each
Matrix
or
PQ
e selecione
a fonte
deselector
entrada
desejada.
As
opes
incluem
purchased
separately:
puts.
puts.
PQ
channel
and
select
the desired
input
source.
Choices
inGroups,
Mains
e qualquer
8 of
User
Inputs
disponveis.
2 Auxes,
Click
the
Input
atum
thedos
top
each
Matrix
USB
flash Source
disk (orselector
other portable
USB
storage
deviceorfor
clude
Auxes,
Groups,
Mains
and
any
of
the
8
available
User
PQ channel
andofselect
desired
input
Choices in- Intransfer
Showthe
data;
512 MB
or source.
larger recommended)
puts.
clude Auxes, Groups, Mains and any of the 8 available User In Near-field monitor speakers for mix position monitoring
puts.
(for Talkback)
configure
theUser
UserInputs
Inputs
fora aMatrix
MatrixororPQ
PQmixer:
mixer:
configure
Two (2) the
IEC
power
cables
ToTo
for
Currently
selected
Matrixshowing
mixer
User Input
panel
assignments for a Matrix mixer
Choosing
anInput
Inputde
Source
for
mixer
Escolhendo
uma
fonte
entrada
para
um
mixer
Monitor
mount
for
VGA
screen
(screen
not
included)
Choosing
Source
for
a amixer
1
Go
to
the
Outputs
page
and
click
a
Matrix
or
PQ
mixer
to
MIDIancables
(for connecting
1 Go to the Outputs page and click a Matrix or PQ mixer to
UserTo
Input
panel
showing
assignments
for
a
Matrix
mixer
Painel
User
Input
mostrando
atribuies
de
um
mixer
Matrix
configure
the
User
Inputs
for
a
Matrix
or
PQ
mixer:
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
navigate
to
that
mixer
page.
navigate to that mixer page.
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock between
the
Para
utilizar
Input
Channel
ou
FX Return
em
mixers
Matrix
ou
Touse
use
Input
FX
Return
channels
ina aMatrix
Matrix
PQ
Choosing
an
Input
Source
for
a mixer
To
Input
ororand
FX
Return
channels
in
ororPQ
GoVENUE
Mouse
Pad
To configure
the
User
Inputs
for
aum
Matrix
PQ mixer:
1configurar
to the
Outputs
page
and
click
aorMatrix
orouUser
PQ
mixer
to
VENUE
system
external
digital
devices)
Para
os
Inputs
para
mixer
Matrix
PQ:
PQ
mixer,
atribua-os
como
User
Inputs,
entro
atribua
esses
2
Click
the
User
Assign
button
to
display
the
Assign
2 Click the User Assign button to display the User Assign
mixer,
assign
them
as
User
Inputs,
then
assign
those
User
mixer,
assign
them
as
UserdeInputs,
then assign those User
Choosing
an
Input
Source
for afontes
mixer
toVENUE
Profile
Guide
navigate
that
mixer
page.
User
Inputs
como
entrada.
panel.
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for connecting
to GPI devices)
1 Go
the to
Outputs
page
and click a Matrix or PQ mixer to
panel.
Inputs
asinput
input
sources.
Inputs
as
sources.
To
use
Input
or
FX
Return
channels
in a Matrix or PQ
1navigate
V pgina
Outputs
e
clique
o
mixer
Matrix
ou
PQ
para
navegar
Two
(2)
console
lights
tothe
thatUser
mixer
page.
button
to User
display
the User
Assign
Forany
any
theAssign
eightavailable
available
Inputs,
clickthe
the
assign
them
as
User
Inputs, then
assign
para23a3Click
pgina
dele.
Atribuindo
Fontes
Vrios
Mixers
For
ofofthe
eight
User Inputs,
click
To mixer,
use Input
oraFX
Return
channels
a Matrix
orthose
PQ User
Assigning
Sources
toMultiple
MultipleinMixers
Mixers
panel.
Assigning
Sources
to
on-screen
Source
pop-up
menu
and
select
an
available
source.
2 Click
the
User
Assign
button
to
display
the
User
Assign
Inputs
as
input
sources.
on-screen Source pop-up menu and select an available source.
mixer, assign them as User Inputs, then assign those User
no
Rack(s)
(see
next)
2panel.
Clique
boto
User
Assign
para
visualizar
oStage
painel
User
Assign.
pode selecionar
vrios
mixers Matrix e/ou
PQ simultaneamente
Choices
include
Channels,
FX
Returns,
Stage
and
FOH
audio Voc
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Choices
include
Channels,
FX
Returns,
and
FOH
audio
3 For any
of the
eight
available
User Inputs,
click
the
Inputs
asselect
inputmultiple
sources. Matrix and/or PQ mixers
You
canselect
e
atribuir
fontes
para
todos
os
mixers
selecionados
ao mesmo
You
can
multiple
Matrix
and/or
PQ
mixers
sources,
and
Pro
Tools
record/playback
options
(if
any).
Assigning
Sources
to
Multiple
Mixers
sources,
Pro
Tools
record/playback
options
(if any).
on-screen
Source
pop-up
menu
andInputs,
select
an
available
source.
simultaneously
andassign
assign
sources
toall
allselected
selected
mixers
the
any ofand
the
eight
available
User
click
the
The
following options
can be
addedto
to
VENUE
Profile
systems.
simultaneously
and
sources
mixers
atatthe
33DeFor
qualquer
um dos
oito
UseriLoks,
Inputs
disponveis,
clique
no menu
tempo.
Racks,
Software
CDs,
and
Cables
Assigning
Sources
to
Multiple
Mixers
Choices
include
Channels,
FX
Returns,
Stage
and
FOH
audio
same
time.
on-screen
Source
pop-up
menu and
available As
source.
For
details
same
time.
pop-up
Source
na tela
e selecione
umaselect
fontean
disponvel.
opes
You can
select multiple Matrix and/or PQ mixers
sources,
and
Pro
record/playback
options
(if any).
Each
Mix
Rack
or
FOH
Rack
includes:
Choices
include
Channels,
FX Returns,
and
FOH
incluem
Channels,
FXTools
Returns,
fontes
deStage
udio
Stage
eaudio
FOH, e
Par
atribuir
fontesand
de assign
entrada
para mais
um mixer
website
(www.avid.com).
simultaneously
sources
to allque
selected
mixersMatrix
at theou
You
can
select
multiple
and/or
PQ
mixers
assign
input
sources
more
than
one
Matrixmixer,
mixer,orormore
more
opes
gravao/reproduo
do Pro Tools
(se existente).
mais
que
um
mixer
PQ: Matrix
ToTo
assign
input
sources
totomore
than
one
Matrix
sources,
and
Pro
Tools record/playback
options
(if any).
de
System
Restore
CD
same
time.
simultaneously
and
assign
sources
thanone
onePQ
PQmixer,
mixer,
time: to all selected mixers at the
than
atata atime:
same
Options
1Mix
Vtime.
Rack
pgina
Outputs
epage
useand
Multi-Select
(ou a tecla
Shift)
para
Go
theOutputs
Outputs
useMulti-Select
Multi-Select
(orthe
the
Shift
To1Go
assign
input
sources
to more
than
one Matrix mixer,
orShift
more
1
totothe
page
and use
selecionar
dois
ou mais
mixers
Matrix,
ou dois ou (or
mais
mixers
PQ,
than
one
PQ
mixer,
at
a
time:
key)toto
select
twooror
more
Matrix
mixers,
twooror
more
PQ
key)
select
two
more
Matrix
mixers,
oror
two
more
PQ
To
assign
input
sources
to
more
than
one
Matrix
mixer,
or
more
na
seo
de
faders
na
parte
inferior
da
tela.
I/O
Options
mixers,
in
the
fader
display
thebottom
bottomofofthe
the
screen.
than
PQin
mixer,
at a display
time:
mixers,
the
fader
atatthe
screen.
1 one
Go to
the
Outputs
page
and
use
Multi-Select
(or
the Shift
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
that
provides
16
Clique
oselect
seletor
Source
no Matrix
topo
de
um of
canal
do
(18,
Left,
key)
to
two
or
more
mixers,
or
twomixer
oranalog
more
PQ
2
Click
the
Source
selector
at
the
top
a
mixer
channel
(18,
1 2Go
to
the
Outputs
page
and
use
Multi-Select
(or
the
Shift
2 Click the Source selector at the top of a mixer channel
(18,
mic/line
level
inputs
Right,
C/Mono
ou
User)
e Matrix
selecione
aselect
fonte
desejada.
mixers,
in
the
fader
display
atand
the
bottom
ofdesired
the
screen.
Left,
Right,
C/Mono,
or
User)
the
source.
key)
to
select
two
or
more
mixers,
or
two
or
more
PQ
Left, Right, C/Mono, or User) and select the desired source.
mixers,
in
the
display
the
bottom
of
the
screen.
Choosing a User Assign source for a Matrix mixer
AO16
Analog
Output
Cardatthat
provides
16
analog
line level
2 Click
the fader
Source
selector
at
the
top of a
mixer
channel
(18,
Choosing a User Assign source for a Matrix mixer

Two a(2)
IEC
power
cables
Choosing
User
Assign
source
for a Matrix mixer
Choosinguma
a User
Assign
source
forum
a mixer
MatrixMatrix
mixer
Escolhendo
fonte
User Assign
para
outputs
Left, the
Right,
C/Mono,
or User)
the desired
source.
2 Click
Source
selector
at theand
topselect
of a mixer
channel
(18,
Left, Right, C/Mono, or User) and select the desired source.
Chapter11:
11:Matrix
Matrixand
andPersonal
PersonalQQMixers
Mixers 105
105
Chapter
digital I/O.
Captulo
Mixers
e Personal
105
Chapter
11: 11:
Matrix
and Matrix
Personal
Q Mixers Q105
Resetting Matrix and PQ Mixer Input
Adjusting Matrix
Matrix and
and PQ
PQ Mixer
Mixer Input
Input
Adjusting
Controls
Ajustando
Controles de Entrada Dos Mixers
Controls
Adjusting Matrix and PQ Mixer Input
Matrix e PQ
Controls
Matrix
and PQ Mixer Input Levels
Resetting
Matrix
andde
PQ
Mixer
Input
Resetando
controles
de entrada
Mixers
Matrix
e PQ
Controls
The levels for the first eight input sources (or sends) of a MaThe
levels for
the PQ
first eight
input
sources
(or sends) of a MaMatrix
and
Mixer
Input
Levels
trix or PQ as
mixer
are controlled
by theentrada
Output Encoders.
Os nveis
primeiras
oito fontes
sends) de
trix orpara
PQ mixer
are controlled
by de
the Output(ou
Encoders.
um mixer
ou PQ
codificadores
Output.
The Matrix
levels for
theso
firstcontrolados
eight inputpelos
sources
(or sends)
of a MaThe
eight
Output
encoders
control
the
input
levels
of the curtrix
or
PQ
mixer
are
controlled
by
the
Output
Encoders.
The eight Output encoders control the input levels of the currently
selected Matrix
or
PQ mixer
input sources.
Os oito
codificadores
Outputor
controlam
o nvel
entrada das fontes
rently
selected Matrix
PQ mixer
inputdesources.
The eight
Output
encoders
control the input levels of the curde entrada
do mixer
Matrix
ou PQ selecionado.
rently selected Matrix or PQ mixer input sources.
To reset
a Matrix
or PQ mixer
its default
Para
resetar
os parmetros
de parameter
um mixer to
Matrix
ou PQvalue:
para seus
1 Select one or more Matrix or PQ mixers you want to change.
valores-padro:
Matrix and PQ Mixer Input Levels

Nveis de entrada dos mixers Matrix e PQ
Controls
Resetting Matrix and PQ Mixer Input
Voc
resetar
ospan
ajustes
de nvel,
e associao
link de
You pode
can reset
level,
and stereo
linkpan
settings
for any Matrix
You
can reset level, pan and stereo link settings for any Matrix
Controls
qualquer mixer Matrix ou PQ. Atribuies de fontes de entrada se
or PQ mixer. Input source assignments persist.
or PQ mixer. Input source assignments persist.

mantm.
You can reset level, pan and stereo link settings for any Matrix
orreset
PQ mixer.
Input
source
persist.
To
a Matrix
or PQ
mixerassignments
parameter to
its default value:
1 To
Select
or more
or PQ
mixers you
to change.
resetone
a Matrix
or Matrix
PQ mixer
parameter
to itswant
default
value:
Right-click
the
encoder
on-screen
and
choose
Reset.
122Selecione
umthe
oumore
mais
mixers
Matrix
ou
PQchoose
que
encoder
on-screen
and
Reset.
1Right-click
Select one
or
Matrix
or
PQ mixers
you deseja
want
toalterar.
change.
2 reset
Right-click
the or
encoder
on-screen
and choose
Reset.
To
all Matrix
PQ mixer
parameters
to their
default
2To
Clique
o boto
no
codificador
e escolha
resetcom
all Matrix
ordireito
PQ mixer
parametersnatotela
their
default Reset.
values:
values:
Para
resetar
os parmetros
de
mixerstoMatrix
ou PQ para
resetone
alltodos
Matrix
PQ mixer
parameters
their
1To
Select
or moreorMatrix
or PQ
mixers you
wantdefault
to change.
1 values:
Select
one or more Matrix or PQ mixers you want to change.
seus
valores-padro:
2 Click the pop-up menu at the bottom of the mixer area and
1 Select one or more Matrix or PQ mixers you want to change.

1 choose
Selecione
um Mix.
ou mais mixers Matrix ou PQ que deseja alterar.
Reset
choose Reset Mix.

2 Clique
no menu pop-up na parte inferior da area do mixer e escolha
choose Reset Mix.
Matrixes
Matrixes
Matrixes
Banking Matrix mixers to the Output faders
Banking Matrix mixers to the Output faders
Associando mixers Matrix aos faders Output
To control mixer input source (send) levels on the console:

ToBanking
controlMatrix
mixermixers
input to
source
(send)
levels on the console:
the Output
faders
Para controlar os nveis de entrada das fontes de entrada (send)
1
Press
the
Matrixes
switch
or
the
Personal
Qs switch in the
na console:
1 To
Press
the mixer
Matrixes
switch
or (send)
the Personal
in the
control
input
source
levelsQsonswitch
the console:
Output fader assign section.
Output
fader
assign
section.
1 Pressione
o switch Matrixes ou Personal Q na seo Output.
1 Press the Matrixes switch or the Personal Qs switch in the
2 Press a Select switch for a Matrix or PQ to select that mixer
2 Output
Press a fader
Select
switchsection.
for a Matrix
PQ to
selectou
that mixer
assign
2 Pressione
um or
mixer
Matrix
and viewum
its switch
inputs.Select
Input para
parameters
are shown
on PQ
the para
top
and viewe its
Input parameters
are shown
on the top
selecion-lo
verinputs.
suas entradas.
Os parmetros
de entrada
so
2 Press
alinha
Select
switch
aLCD
Matrix
orlevels
PQ
tonveis
select
that
mixer
row
of na
the
Output
LCD.for
Input
source
are
controlled
by
mostrados
superior
dos
Output.
Os
das
fontes
row of the Output LCD. Input source levels are controlled by
de entrada
so controlados
pelos
codificadores,
os nveis
sada
the
and output
levels
are controlled
by the
faders.
andencoders,
view
its inputs.
Input
parameters
areeshown
onde
the
top
encoders, and output levels are controlled by the faders.
pelosthe
faders.
row
of the Output LCD. Input source levels are controlled by
3 Press the encoder to turn that mixer input source on or off.
3 the
Press
encoder
to
turn
thatou
mixer
inputa source
on
or off.
encoders,
and output
levels
are
controlled
byde
the
faders.
3 Pressione
othe
codificador
para
ativar
desativar
fonte
entrada
do mixer.
4 Turn the Output encoders 18 to set the level for the first
4 3Turn
encoders
set the
level
for the
Pressthe
theOutput
encoder
to turn 18
thatto
mixer
input
source
onfirst
or off.
eight input sources assigned to the currently selected Matrix
eight
input sources
assigned
theajustar
currently
selected
Matrix
4 Gire
os codificadores
Output
18to
para
o nvel
das primeiras
or
mixer.
4 PQ
Turn
the
Output
encoders
to Matrix
set theou
level
the first
oito or
fontes
de
entrada
atribudas
ao18
mixer
PQ for
atualmente
PQ mixer.
selecionado.
eight input sources assigned to the currently selected Matrix
5 To adjust source inputs 912, press the Next Page switch to
5 or
ToPQ
adjust
source inputs 912, press the Next Page switch to
mixer.
5 Para
ajustar
assources
fontes to
de Output
entradaEncoders
912, pressione
switchtoNext
bank
those
58. To o
return
bank
those
sources
tofontes
Output
Encoders
58. To
to
Pagesources
para
associar
essas
aos
codificadores
dereturn
sadaswitch
Output
18, press
the
Prev 912,
Page
switch.
5 To adjust
source
inputs
press the Next
Page
to
18, press
theas
Prev
Page18,
switch.
58.sources
Para retornar
para
fontes
pressione o switch Prev
bank
those
sources
to
Output
Encoders
58.
To
return
to
Page.
sources 18, press the Prev Page switch.
Matrix and PQ Mixer Input Pan
Matrix and
Input
Posicionamento
(pan)PQ
das Mixer
Entrada de
MixersPan
Matrix e PQ
The Matrix and PQ mixer input pan controls adjust the pan-
The
Matrix
and
mixer
input
pan controls
the panMatrix
and
PQ
Mixer
Pan eadjust
Os controles
pan
dasPQ
entradas
dos Input
mixers
Matrix
PQ ajustam
o
ning of each mixer input across the stereo outputs of either a
posicionamento
cadainput
entrada
do mixer
pelasoutputs
sadas estreo
ning of eachde
mixer
across
the stereo
of eitherdea
linked
stereoand
Matrix
or
PQ mixer
(PQ
mixers
arethe
always
The Matrix
PQ mixer
mixer
input
pan
controls
adjust
panum mixer
em estreo
ou de
ummixers
mixer
PQ
linkedmatrix
stereoassociado
Matrix mixer
or PQ mixer
(PQ
are(mixers
always
stereo).
ning
of each
mixer input across the stereo outputs of either a
PQ so
sempre
estreo).
stereo).
linked stereo Matrix mixer or PQ mixer (PQ mixers are always
Para To
controlar
pan dasend
mandada
stereo).
controloMatrix
pan: Matrix:
To control Matrix send pan:
1 Pressione
o switch
Matrix
na seo
deOutput
atribuio
deassign
faders.section.
1 Press the
Matrixes
switch
in the
fader
1 To
Press
the Matrixes
switch
control
Matrix send
pan:in the Output fader assign section.
2 Press um
an Output
channel
switch
to select
a Matrix.
2 Pressione
switch
Select
deSelect
um canal
Output
para
2 1Press
Output
channel
tofader
select
aselecionar
Matrix.
Pressan
the
Matrixes
switchSelect
in theswitch
Output
assign
section.
o Matrix.
3 Press the Pan switch located below the Prev Page and Next
3 2Press
switch
located
below
the Prev
Page aand
Next
Pressthe
anPan
Output
channel
Select
switch
to select
Matrix.
Page switches.
3 Pressione
o switch Pan localizado abaixo dos switches Prev Page
Page switches.
e Next3 Page.
Press the Pan switch located below the Prev Page and Next
4 Adjust the Output Encoder 18 to adjust pan on Matrix in4 Page
Adjust
the Output Encoder 18 to adjust pan on Matrix inswitches.
puts 18.
To access inputs
912 18
for the
current
mixer,
press the
4 Ajuste
os codificadores
Output
para
ajustar
o pan
puts 18.
To access inputs
912 for
the
current
mixer,
pressdas
the
entradas
18
Matrix.
Para
acessar
912
mixerinNext
Pagedo
switch.
4 Adjust
the
Output
Encoder
18astoentradas
adjust pan
on do
Matrix
Next Page switch.
atual,puts
pressione
o access
switch inputs
Next Page.
18. To
912 for the current mixer, press the
Page
switch.
106 Next
VENUE
Profile
Guide
106
VENUE
Profile
106Guia
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Reset Mix.
Resetting a mix
Resetting a mix
Clearing Matrix
Matrix and
and PQ
PQ Mixer
Mixer Settings
Settings
Clearing
Limpando
Ajustes
dos Mixer Matrix e PQ
Resetting
a mix
Youpode
can clear
mixer
input de
assignments
to
quickly
set
all the
Voc
limpar
atribuies
entrada deto
mixer
paraset
rapidamente
You
can clear
mixer
input
assignments
quickly
all the
Clearing
Matrix
and
PQ
Mixer
Settings
ajustar
asto
fontes
de entrada para None.
input todas
sources
None.
input sources to None.
You can clear mixer input assignments to quickly set all the
Para
limpar
atribuies
entradas
de Matrix ou PQ:
input
sources
to
To
clear
Matrix
or None.
PQ de
input
assignments:
To clear Matrix or PQ input assignments:
Select one
or
more
or PQ mixers
you wantalterar.
to clear.
111Selecione
umor
oumore
maisMatrix
mixer Matrix
PQ que
Select
or PQ ou
mixers
youdeseja
want to clear.
To
clearone
Matrix
or PQMatrix
input assignments:
the
pop-up
menu
at the
the
mixer
area
and
22Clique
no
menu
parte
inferior
da of
rea
do
mixer
e escolha
1Click
Select
one
or pop-up
more
Matrix
orbottom
PQ mixers
you
want
to
clear.
choose
Clear
Mix Sources.
Clear
MixClear
Sources.
choose
Mix Sources.
choose
Clear Mix
Copiando Ajustes
deSources.
Entrada de Mixers Matrix e PQ
Copying Matrix
Matrix and
and PQ
PQ Mixer
Mixer Input
Input Settings
Settings
Copying
Voc
copiar
ajustes
de um
mixer
Matrix
ou or
PQPQ
para
outro
Youpode
can copy
mixer
settings
from
one
Matrix
mixer
to de
You
can copyMatrix
mixer settings
one Matrix
or PQSettings
mixer to
Copying
and from
PQ
Mixer
Input
mesmo
tipo.
Isso of
permite
rapidamente
duplicar
mixagens
monitor
another
mixer
the same
type. This
lets you
quicklyde
duplianother
mixer of the
same
type. This lets you quickly dupliou
outras
de
sinal.
cate
monitor
orsettings
other signal
You
canmandadas
copymixes
mixer
from feeds.
one Matrix or PQ mixer to
cate monitor mixes or other signal feeds.

another mixer of the same type. This lets you quickly dupliCopiar ajustes
para um
mixer sobrescreve
todosonosthe
ajustes
Copying
mixer
settings
overwrites
all the settings
cateCopying
monitormixer
mixes
or other
signal feeds.
settings
overwrites
all the settings on the
existentes
nele.
destination mixer.
destination mixer.
Copying mixer settings overwrites all the settings on the
Para
copiarsettings
ajustes between
entre mixers:
To copy
mixers:
mixer. mixers:
To copydestination
settings between
Select theo Matrix
or PQ mixer
that
you
want to bedestino
the des111Selecione
mixer or
Matrix
ou PQthat
queyou
deseja
Select
Matrix
PQ mixer
wantcomo
to be the des-dos
To
copythe
settings
between
mixers:
tination
of the copied
settings
so that it is displayed
ajustes
copiados
para que
seja apresentado
na tela. on-screen.
tination of the copied settings so that it is displayed on-screen.
1 Select the Matrix or PQ mixer that you want to be the desClick the
pop-up
menu
at the bottom
of
the mixer
area,
222Clique
menu
na
parte
daisof
rea
mixer
e escolha
Clickno
the
menu
at theinferior
thede
mixer
area,
tination
ofpop-up
the pop-up
copied
settings
sobottom
that it
displayed
on-screen.
chooseWith
Replace
With
Mix
and Mix
Sources From.
Replace
Mix
e
Mix
Sources
From.
choose Replace With Mix and Mix Sources From.
2 Click the pop-up menu at the bottom of the mixer area,
3 Choose the Mtx (Matrix mixer) or PQ from the sub-menu
ChooseReplace
(Matrix
mixer)
the sub-menu
choose
With
Mix
and
Mix
Sources
From.
33Escolha
othe
MtxMtx
(mixer
Matrix)
ou or
PQPQ
dofrom
submenu
cujos ajustes
whose settings you want to copy to the current mixer.
whosecopiar
settings
you
want atualmente
to copy to the
current mixer.
deseja
para
o mixer
selecionado.
3 Choose the Mtx (Matrix mixer) or PQ from the sub-menu
whose settings you want to copy to the current mixer.
Adjusting Matrix and PQ Mixer Output

Controls
Adjusting
AdjustingMatrix
Matrixand
andPQ
PQMixer
MixerOutput
Output
Ajustando
Controles
de
Sada
de
Mixers
Controls
Controls
Matrix
and PQ Mixer Output Levels
Delay Compensation with Matrix and

PQ Mixers
Delay
with
Matrix
Compensao
de Delay com Mixers
Matrix
e PQ and
DelayCompensation
Compensation
with
Matrix
and
VENUE automatically compensates for the delay offsets that
PQ
PQMixers
Mixers
can arise
when combining
differentas
signal
paths within
a MaVENUE
automaticamente
compensa
diferenas
de delay
que
VENUE
automatically
for
offsets
that
Additional
Required
Components
trix
orsurgir
PQ
mixer.
VENUE
automatically
compensates
forthe
thedelay
delay
offsetsde
that
podem
quando
socompensates
combinados
diferentes
caminhos
sinal
can
when
combining
de um
mixer
Matrix ou different
PQ.
canarise
arise
when
combining
differentsignal
signalpaths
pathswithin
withinaaMaMaMatrix
andare
PQused
output
levels
are controlled
by
the Output
fad- dentro
Stage
Racks
an
FOH
Rack, and
provide
all stage
Matrix
and
PQ
Mixer
Output
Levels
Matrix
and
PQwith
Mixer
Output
Levels
Nveis
de Sada
de
Mixers
Matrix
e PQ
trix
or
PQ
mixer.
Additional
Information
about
Delay
Compensation
trix
or
PQ
mixer.
ers. I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
audio
Informaes
Adicionais
sobre
de Delay
Video Display
(15-inch
orCompensao
greater flat-panel
VGA display
Matrix
and
PQ
levels
are
by
the
Output
fadMatrix
and
PQoutput
output
levels
arecontrolled
controlled
by
the
Output
fad The overall latency through a Matrix or PQ mixer is deNveis
de
Matrix
e PQ so
controlados
pelos
faders
Output.
can
besada
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up to
96
total
inputs.

A
latncia
total
de
um
mixer
Matrix
ou
PQ
mixer VGA
determinada
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
and
Additional
Information
about
Delay
Compensation
Additional
Information
about
Delay
Compensation
ers.
ers.
termined
bycom
theapath
with
the highest latency.
To
control mixer output levels:
pelo
caminho
mais
alta
latncia.
DVI
supported.
ParaAudio
controlar
nveis
de
sada
do
mixer:
The
overall
latency
through
aPQ
or
PQ
deThe
overall
latency
through
aMatrix
Matrix
orguaranteed
PQmixer
mixer
deI/O
All
inputs
within
Matrix
orMatrix
mix
to
be
as
entradas
dea um
mixer
ouare
PQ
tem
a faseisis
correta
1 Press
the Matrixes or PQ switch to bank Matrix or PQ mixers Todas
termined
by
path
with
the
highest
latency.
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
To
termined
bythe
the
path
withare
the
highest
latency.
Tocontrol
controlmixer
mixeroutput
outputlevels:
levels:
garantida,
mas
os
mixes
no
so
necessariamente
alinhados
phase
accurate,
but
mixes
not
necessarily
aligned
to
to the
faders.
48 Output
inputs
remotely
controllable
preamps
andou
1 Pressione
o switchwith
Matrix
ou PQ para
associar mic
os mixers
Matrix
aos
outros.
Issoensures
que
nenhuma
mix
serpenalized
penalizada
uns
inputs
within
agarante
or
guaranteed
totobe
each
other.
This
that
allmix
mixes
are
not
All
All
inputs
within
aMatrix
Matrix
orPQ
PQ
mixare
are
guaranteed
be
11Press
the
Matrixes
or
Matrix
PQ aos
faders
Output.
Press
the
Matrixes
orPQ
PQswitch
switchtotobank
bank
Matrixor
orPQ
PQmixers
mixers
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
2 Adjust the fader corresponding to the output level you want
no
caso
da
existncia
de
um
ou
mais
caminhos
de
sinal
com
phase
accurate,
but
mixes
are
not
necessarily
aligned
to
in
the
case
of
one
or
more
exceptionally
high-latency
sigphase
accurate,
but
mixes
are
not
necessarily
aligned
to
toto
the
Output
faders.
the
Output
faders.
8 analog
output
latncias
excepcionalmente
altas.
to change.
2 Ajuste
o fader correspondente do nvel de sada que deseja
each
other.
This
that
all
mixes
are
not
nal
paths.
each
other.
Thisensures
ensures
that
alland
mixes
areRack
notpenalized
penalized
The
connection
between
FOH
Rack
Stage
requires
digital
outputs
per
Stage Rack.totothe
A in
compensao
de
delay
apenas
tem efeito
para pontos
de
22Adjust
the
fader
alterar.
Adjust
the
fadercorresponding
corresponding
theoutput
outputlevel
levelyou
youwant
want a Digital
the
case
of
one
or
more
exceptionally
high-latency
sigin
the
case
of
one
or
more
exceptionally
high-latency
sigSnake
cable.
This
cable
can
be
purchased
directly
alimentao
Delay compensation
accountsCanais
for a channels
ps-insert only
de canais.
que alimentam
totochange.
change.
nal
paths.
nal
paths.
from
Avid
or assembled
by your preferred
post-insert
pickoff.
that feed
User
Inputs
and
PQ
Limiter
Limiter
de Mixer
Sada do Output
Mixer
User
Inputs
e AuxesChannels
(pr-insert)
novendor.
sero
totalmente
Synchronization
and PQ
Control
I/O
compensados.
for
Auxes
(pre-insert)
willonly
not accounts
be
fully compensated
for.
Delay
Delaycompensation
compensation
only
accounts
foraachannels
channels
Snake
connectors
toto
primary
and
redundant
(ifdo
Alimiter
can
beaplicado
applied
the output
of PQ
PQ output
Um limiter
pode
ser
enable
sada
do mixer
PQ.mixers.
Os controles
post-insert
pickoff.
PQ
Output
Limiter
post-insert
pickoff.Channels
Channelsthat
thatfeed
feedUser
UserInputs
Inputsand
and
PQMixer
Mixer
Output
Limiter
Optional
Components
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
limiter
controls
on-screen
(Matrix mixers
dono
not
limiter
da sada
do PQappear
aparecem
apenasonly.
na tela.(Mixers
Matrix
See
also
Settings
Delay
Compensation
on
61.61.
Veja
Ajustes
parafor
Compensao
decompensated
Delay
na page
pgina
Auxes
(pre-insert)
will
not
for.
Auxes
(pre-insert)
will
notbe
befully
fully
compensated
for.
possuem
limiters
de
A
can
be
applied
have
output
limiters.)
Alimiter
limiter
can
besada.)
appliedtotothe
theoutput
outputofofPQ
PQmixers.
mixers.PQ
PQoutput
output The following components are optional, and must be
Stage
Rack Features
Matrix
e PQ
limiter
limitercontrols
controlsappear
appearon-screen
on-screenonly.
only.(Matrix
(Matrixmixers
mixersdo
donot
not
have
limiters.)
To
useoutput
a limiter
on the output of a PQ mixer:
Para usar
limiter
na sada de um mixer PQ:
haveum
output
limiters.)
System Components
1 V 1 pgina
Outputs.
Go to the
Outputs page.
To
Touse
useaalimiter
limiteron
onthe
theoutput
outputofofaaPQ
PQmixer:
mixer:
Included
Components
2 Selecione
canal
PQ para
apresentar
o mixer
que to
deseja
2 Select um
a PQ
channel
to display
the mixer
you want
con11 Go
Gototothe
theOutputs
Outputspage.
page.
configurar.
figure.

22 Select
SelectaaPQ
PQchannel
channeltotodisplay
displaythe
themixer
mixeryou
youwant
wanttotoconconfigure.
figure.
Two
(2)on-screen
IEC power
cables
4Drag
the
knob
to set
the limiterdothreshold.
4 Arraste
o knob
daLimiter
tela
para
ajustar
o to
threshold
limiter.
33Click
the
on-screen
Limiter
In
button
limiter.
Click
theLimiter
on-screen
Limiter
In
button
toengage
engagethe
the
limiter.
Balance
dethe
Sada
de Mixers
Matrix
Associados
emthreshold.
Estreo
44Drag
on-screen
Limiter
knob
set
Drag
the
on-screen
Limiter
knob
to
setthe
thelimiter
limiter
threshold.
Trackball
mount
(trackball
notto
included)
3 Clique
no
boto
Limiterconsole
In Limiter
da tela para
habilitar
o limiter.the limiter.
3Click
the Profile
on-screen
In button
to engage
VENUE
e PQ Stereo-Linked
Matrix and PQ Mixer Output
VENUE Mouse Pad

Balance
Mixers
e mixerProfile
MatrixGuide
associados
em estreo
oferecem
controle
Stereo-Linked
Matrix
PQ
Output
Stereo-Linked
Matrixand
and
PQMixer
Mixer
Output
PQ
VENUE
PQ Mixers
and de
stereo-linked
Matrix
mixers
provide
aestreo.
balance
de balance
do
sinal
sada
do
mixer
pelas
suas
sadas
Balance
Balance
Matrix
Two (2)
console
lightssada mono, portanto no possuem
(Mixers
mono
possuem
control
for
controlling
the balance of the mixer output signal
controle
Balance.)
Mixers
Protective
Dust
Cover(Mono
PQ
and
stereo-linked
Matrix
mixers
provide
balance
across
its stereo
outputs.
Matrix
mixers
haveaamono
PQ
Mixers
and
stereo-linked
Matrix
mixers
provide
balance
See
Settings
Seealso
also
Settingsfor
forDelay
DelayCompensation
Compensationon
onpage
page61.
61.
purchased
separately:
Snapshot
Data
and
Parameters
for for
USB flash disk
(or other
portable
USB storage device
Dados
e Mixers
de or Cena
para Mixers
transfer
ofParmetros
Show data; 512 MB
larger recommended)
Matrix
Snapshot
Data
and
Parameters
for
Snapshot
Dataspeakers
and Parameters
for
Matrix
Near-field monitor
for mix position monitoring
Snapshots can
store and recall all source assignments of each
Matrix
Mixers
Matrix
Mixers
Headphones
with 1/4-inch jack
Matrix and
PQ mixer
when the
MTX (Matrix)
data type isde
Snapshots
podem
armazenar
e carregar
todasorasPQatribuies
Dynamic
orstore
condenser
and
XLR
mic
cable
Snapshots
and
recall
all
source
assignments
of
fonte
de cada
mixer
Matrix
emicrophone
PQ
quando
os
tipos
de
dados
MTX
scoped.
In can
addition,
all
User
Input
assignments
are
stored,
letSnapshots
can
store
and
recall
all
source
assignments
ofeach
each
(for
Talkback)
(Matrix)
ou
PQPQ
esto
abrangidos.
Alm
disso,and
todas
atribuies
Matrix
and
mixer
when
(Matrix)
or
PQ
data
type
isis
ting
you
reconfigure
Matrix
or MTX
PQ
mixers
Input
asMatrix
and
PQ
mixer
whenthe
the
MTX
(Matrix)
orUser
PQas
data
type
descoped.
User
Input
so
permitindo
reconfigurar
atribuies
In
all
are
let Footswitches
(upsnapshot
to
2)
signments
on
aarmazenadas,
per
basis,assignments
if desired.
scoped.
Inaddition,
addition,
allUser
UserInput
Input
assignments
arestored,
stored,
letdeting
mixer
Matrix
ou PQMatrix
e Useroror
Input
em base
snapshot,
you
reconfigure
PQ
mixers
and
User
Input
ting
you
reconfigure
Matrix
PQ
mixers
andpor
User
Inputasas-se
MIDI
cables
(for connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
desejado.
The
following
table
describes
what
can
be
stored
and
recalled
signments on a per snapshot basis, if desired.
signments
on a(for
perconnecting
snapshot basis,
desired.
BNC cables
Wordif clock
between the
in each snapshot when the MTX and PQ data type is scoped.
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
A The
seguinte
tabela
descreve
o
que
pode
ser
armazenado
e recalled
carregado
Thefollowing
followingtable
tabledescribes
describeswhat
whatcan
canbe
bestored
storedand
and
recalled
Table
12. snapshot
Snapshot data
types os
andtipos
parameters
for Matrix
and
PQ esto
em
cada
quando
de
dados
MTX
e
PQ
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
to
GPI
devices)
inineach
eachsnapshot
snapshotwhen
whenthe
theMTX
MTXand
andPQ
PQdata
datatype
typeisisscoped.
scoped.
abrangidos.
Snapshot
Included
(for Each Scoped
Channel
Strip)
Table
Snapshot
data
types
for
and
Table
12.
Snapshot
dataParameters
typesand
andparameters
parameters
forMatrix
Matrix
andPQ
PQ
Data12.
Type
Snapshot
Snapshot
control
for
balance
ofofthe
Rack(s)
(see
next)
outputs,
socontrolling
they
do notthe
have
Balance
controls.)
control
for
controlling
the
balance
themixer
mixeroutput
outputsignal
signal
MTX
Mixer
Input
Sources, (for
User
Input
Assignments
(global
Included
Parameters
Scoped
Channel
Strip)
Included
Parameters
(forEach
Each
Scoped
Channel
Strip)
VENUE
Data
DataType
TypeProfile Expansion Options
Use
the on-screen
Balance
encoder
in the
Outputs page of all
outputs,
so
not
Balance
outputs,
sothey
theydo
do
nothave
have
Balance
controls.)
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
andcontrols.)
Cables
Matrix oroPQ
mixers
youde
need
to balance
levels.
Para controlar
balance
deifsada
mixers
Matrix ou
PQ:
Use
Balance
Usethe
theon-screen
on-screen
Balance
encoderininthe
theOutputs
Outputspage
pageofofall
all
Each
Mix
Rack
or FOH
Rackencoder
includes:
1 Selecione
o
canal
de
sada
Matrix
associado
em
estreo
ou PQ
Matrix
or
PQ
mixers
if
you
need
to
balance
levels.
Matrix
orMatrix
PQ
mixers
you need
to balance:
balance levels.
To
orCD
PQifmixer
output
control
System
Restore
Input
Link
state
Input on/off
state
and
Mixer
The
following options
can
be added
to Input
VENUE
Profile
systems.
MTX
Mixer
Sources,
User
(global
MTX
MixerInput
Input
Sources,
User
InputAssignments
Assignments
(global
to
all
Matrixes),
and
pickoffs;
Mixer
Input
level,
Mixer
to
all
Matrixes),
and
pickoffs;
Mixer
Input
level,
Mixer
ForPQ
details on all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit
the
Avid
Mixer Input Sources, User Input Assignments (global
Input
Link
state
Input
on/off
state
and
Mixer
Input
Link
state
Input
on/off
state
and
Mixer
to all PQs) and pickoffs; Mixer input level, pan, and
Use o codificador Balance da tela na pgina Outputs de qualquer

outputs.
(Mono
Matrix
mixers
across
its
stereo
outputs.
(Mono
Matrix
mixers
havemono
mono
mixeracross
Matrixits
oustereo
PQ que
necessite
ajustar
os nveis
de have
balance.
pressionando seu switch Select na seo Output Faders.
ECx Ethernet
Control Matrix
Software
CD
1Target
the stereo-linked
orInstaller
PQ mixer
output channel
To control Matrix or PQ mixer output balance:
To control Matrix or PQ mixer output balance:

2 Clique
eStandalone
ajuste oits
codificador
Balance
da
tela na pgina
by
Select
switch
in the
Output
Faders Outputs
section. do
pressing
Software
Installer
CD
mixer11PQ
selecionado.
Target
the
Target
thestereo-linked
stereo-linkedMatrix
Matrixor
orPQ
PQmixer
mixeroutput
outputchannel
channel
iLok and
USBadjust
Smartthe
Keyon-screen
(for storing
plug-in
authorizations)
2 Click
Balance
encoder
in the Outby
bypressing
pressingits
itsSelect
Selectswitch
switchininthe
theOutput
OutputFaders
Faderssection.
section.
Plug-in
installer
discs (if
with pre-authorized iLok
Delayputs
de
Sada
Mixers
Matrix
page de
for
the targeted
PQany)
mixer.
22Click
adjust
the
Click
andIEC
adjust
theon-screen
on-screenBalance
Balanceencoder
encoderininthe
theOutOutTwoand
(2)
power
cables
Um delay
varivel
(0500
ms) pode
ser
aplicado sada de mixers
puts
page
for
the
targeted
PQ
mixer.
puts
page
for
the
targeted
PQ
mixer.
Matrix.
Para instrues,
DelayDelay
de Sada na pgina 84.
Matrix
Mixer veja
Output
Each
Stage Rack
A variable
delayincludes:
(0500 ms) can be applied to the output of
Matrix
Output
MatrixMixer
Mixer
OutputDelay
Delay
Matrix
mixers.
For
instructions,
see Output Delay on
Two (2) IEC power
cables
A
page
84. delay
Avariable
variable
delay(0500
(0500ms)
ms)can
canbe
beapplied
appliedtotothe
theoutput
outputofof
Matrix
Matrixmixers.
mixers.For
Forinstructions,
instructions,see
seeOutput
OutputDelay
Delayon
on
page
page84.
84.
to all Matrixes), and pickoffs; Mixer Input level, Mixer
PQ
PQ
Mix Rack
on/off
state,
Mixer Input
Link
state,
Limiter threshold
Mixer
User
Input
Assignments
(global
MixerInput
InputSources,
Sources,
User
Input
Assignments
(global
and
LImiterand
in/out
to
toall
allPQs)
PQs) andpickoffs;
pickoffs;Mixer
Mixerinput
inputlevel,
level,pan,
pan,and
and
Options
on/off
on/offstate,
state,Mixer
MixerInput
InputLink
Linkstate,
state,Limiter
Limiterthreshold
threshold
and
andLImiter
LImiterin/out
in/out
You cannot snapshot link state of Matrix outputs.

I/O Options
AI16
Mic/Line
Input
Card
that
provides
16deanalog
The Analog
Recall
Safe
tab
of
the link
Snapshots
page
provides
two
data
Voc
no
pode
salvar
em
snapshots
o estado
associaes
You
snapshot
state
ofof
Matrix
outputs.
Youcannot
cannot
snapshot
link
state
Matrix
outputs.
sadas
Matrix.
mic/line
level
inputs
Mixdedata
types
that let you discretely safe source and/or
The
page
provides
data
user
input
assignments
toSnapshots
prevent
them
from
beingtwo
changed
TheRecall
RecallSafe
Safetab
tabofofthe
the
Snapshots
page
provides
two
data
Analog
Output
Card
that
provides
16
analog
lineand/or
level
AAO16
aba
Recall
da
pgina
Snapshots
oferece
dois
tipos
de Mix
Mix
types
that
let
safe
source
with
a data
snapshot
recall.
Mix
dataSafe
types
that
letyou
youdiscretely
discretely
safe
source
and/or
outputs
de
dados
que
permitem distintamente
salvar
atribuies
de
user
userinput
inputassignments
assignmentstotoprevent
preventthem
themfrom
frombeing
beingchanged
changed
fonte
e/ou Userinformation
Input para prevenir
que snapshots,
sejam alterados
com um
For
complete
on
VENUE
see
with
aasnapshot
recall.
withAnalog
snapshot
recall. Output Card that provides 8 analog
XO16
andsnapshot.
Digital
carregamento
Chapter 21, de
Snapshots.
line
level outputs,
and 8 AES digital
outputs.
For
Forcomplete
completeinformation
informationon
onVENUE
VENUEsnapshots,
snapshots,see
see
Para
informaes
completas
sobre
snapshots
na VENUE, veja o
Chapter
21,
Snapshots.
Chapter
21,
Snapshots.
Captulo 21, Snapshots.

IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an additional 8 channels of analog
I/O11:
and
8 channels
of AES/EBU
Chapter
Matrix
and
QQMixers
Chapter
11:
Matrix
andPersonal
Personal
Mixers 107
107
digital I/O.
Captulo 11: Mixers Matrix e Personal Q
107
Working with a PQ Controller

Trabalhando
comPersonal
PQ Controller
When an optional
Q remote control system is connected to a VENUE system, it can be used to adjust the con-
Quando
um sistema de controle remoto Personal Q conectado a
trols in the Personal Q mixers from a remote location.
um sistema VENUE, ele pode ser usado para ajustar os controles do
mixer
de um lugar on
remoto.
For Personal
completeQinstructions
connecting and using PQ Controllers, refer to the Personal Q Controller Guide, included with
Para instrues completas sobre conexo e uso de PQ Controllers,

the PQ Controller system.
veja o Guia Personal Q Controller, includo com o sistema PQ
Controller.
Controller Detection
Controller Detection
When a PQ Controller is detected, the Controller Detected indicator lights

the corresponding
Q Controller
mixer on-screen
Quando
um PQin
Controller
detectado,Personal
o indicator
Detected
sewindow.
acende na tela na pgina dos mixer Personal Q correspondente.
PQ Controller Detected indicator in PQ mixer
Indicador PQ Controller Detected no mixer PQ
Controller Lockout
Controller Lockout
Lockout From Console The PQ Controller can be locked out by
Lockout
Console OLockout
PQ Controller
podebutton
ser travado
clickingFrom
the on-screen
From Console
in any ofna
tela
clicando
no
boto
Lockout
From
Console
em
qualquer
the PQ mixers. When this Lockout button is engaged, themixers
PQ
PQ. Quando este boto est acionado, o PQ Controller no pode
Controller cannot adjust PQ mixer controls. The performer usajustar os controles do mixer PQ. O performer que estiver usando
ing the PQ Controller cannot override this lockout from the
o PQ Controller no pode superar esse travamento a partir do
controller.
controlador.
Lockout From Controller Users can lock their PQ Controllers to
Lockout From Controller Usurios podem travar seus PQ Controllers

prevent
inadvertent
changes
to controller
settings.
When this
para
prevenir
alteraes
dos ajustes
realizadas
inadvertidamente.
is done,
theon-screen
Lockout From
Controller
indicator lights
Quando
isso
feito, o indicador
Lockout
From Controller
na tela
the corresponding
PQ mixer. This Essa
function
does
notpode
lockser
sein
acende
no mixer PQ correpondente.
funo
no
out control
ofconsole.
the PQ mixer from the console.
destravada
pela
Chamando
Operador
da Console
pelo from
PQ Controller
Calling othe
Console
Operator
the
PQ Controller
Para chamar o operador da console por um Personal Q

Controller:
To call the console operator from a Personal Q Controller:
Pressione
o knob Volume
codificador
Masterknob.
Volume.
Press the Master
encoder
Uma
mensagem
chamado
surge
no console
display da
console
A call
message de
appears
on the
Profile
display
thatProfile
que
identificawhich
qual PQ
chamando.
O LED
Call
identifies
PQ Controller
Controllerest
is calling.
The Call
LED
onno
thePQ
Controller
pisca at
que until
a mensagem
seja is
apagada
display
PQ Controller
flashes
the message
cleared do
from
the da
console.
console display.
108
Guia VENUE Profile
Chapter 12: Patchbay

Chapter
Chapter12:
12:Patchbay
Patchbay
Captulo 12: Patchbay
Stage Rack Features

Stage Racks are the
used with
Accessing
Patchbay
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
Accessing
Accessingthe
thePatchbay
Patchbay
Tocan
show
screen: supporting up to 96 total inputs.
be the
usedPatchbay
Acessando
osimultaneously,
Patchbay
To To
show
thethe
Patchbay
screen:
show
Patchbay
screen:
Press
the
Patchbay
switch,
located in the View Modes sec-
Audio
I/O a tela Patchbay:
Para
visualizar
tion, or click the Patchbay tab on-screen.
Press
thethe
Patchbay
switch,
located
in in
thethe
View
Modes
sec Press
Patchbay
switch,
located
View
Modes
sec or48click
inputs
with
remotely
tion,
thethe
Patchbay
tabtab
on-screen.
tion,
or
click
Patchbay
on-screen.
Pressione o switch Patchbay, localizado na seo View Modes, ou
individually
selectable
phantom
To jump
to Patchbay
the Patchbay
from the
Inputs power.
and Outputs screens:
clique
a aba
na tela.
jump
8 to
analog
output
channels;
expandable
up
to 48screens:
analog
or
To
jump
the
Patchbay
from
the
Inputs
andright
Outputs
To
to
the
Patchbay
from
the
Inputs
Outputs
screens:
Click on the channel routing indicator, and
below
the
digital
outputs per
Stage
Rack.
Para
saltar
para
Patchbay
das
janelas
Inputs
e
Outputs:
channel
name
display.
The
screen
automatically
jumps
tothe
the
Click
on
thethe
channel
routing
indicator,
right
below
the
Click
on
channel
routing
indicator,
right
below
corresponding
Patchbay
screen
(whether
an input,
output,
or
channel
name
display.
The
screen
automatically
jumps
to to
the
channel
name
display.
The
screen
automatically
jumps
Clique
no indicadorand
de roteamento
de
Synchronization
Control I/Ode canal, abaixo do display the
bus).
corresponding
Patchbay
screen
(whether
an
input,
output,
or or
corresponding
Patchbay
screen
(whether
an
input,
output,
nome do canal. A tela automaticamente salta para a janela Patchbay
bus).
bus).
correspondente
(seja uma entrada, sada ou bus).
Channel
Routing
Channel
Channel
indicator
Routing
Routing
indicator
Jump
to Patchbay
indicator
Jump
to Patchbay
Included
Components
Jump
to Patchbay
System Components
The main tools and sections of the Patchbay screen are the
Themain
following
components
must
be
purchased
separately:
following:
The
tools
and
sections
of
thethe
Patchbay
screen
are the
main
tools
and
sections
of
screen
AsThe
principais
ferramentas
e sees
da Patchbay
tela Patchbay
so:are the
following:
following:
Tabs
Abas
DVI supported.
Tabs
Tabs
The
Patchbay is navigated using the following tabs.
Se
navega
pelo Patchbay
utilizando as seguintes
abas.
USB
keyboard
and trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
The
Patchbay
is navigated
using
thethe
following
tabs.
The
Patchbay
is navigated
using
following
tabs.
I/O
Tabs
Abas
I/OSnake Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
Digital
I/OI/O
Tabs
Click
toTabs
display andbetween
patch Inputs,
Outputs,
or Directs
(Direct
The
connection
FOH Inputs,
Rack
and
Stage
Rack
requires
Clique
para
visualizar e enderear
Outputs
ou
Directs
(Direct
Outputs).
Other
options
in
the
Patchbay
screen
change
to reClick
to
display
and
patch
Inputs,
Outputs,
or
Directs
(Direct
a
Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable
can
be
purchased
directly
Click
to
display
and
patch
Inputs,
Outputs,
or
Directs
Outputs). Outras opes na tela Patchbay se alteram para(Direct
refletir a
flect
the
currently
tab.
Outputs).
Other
in I/O
the
Patchbay
screen
change
to to
re-refrom
Avid
or options
assembled
bythe
your
preferred
vendor.
Outputs).
Other
options
in
Patchbay
screen
change
aba
de entradas
ouselected
sadas
selecionada.
flect
thethe
currently
selected
I/OI/O
tab.
flect
currently
selected
tab.
Channel
Type Tabs
Abas Channel
Type
Optional
Components
Channel
Type
Tabs
Channel
Type
Tabs
Click these tabs to
select and display specific types of chanClique
nessas abas
para selecionar
e visualizar
tipos
especficos
The
following
components
are
optional,
and
mustof
be
nels,
as
available
for
the
currently
selected
I/O.
The
following
Click
these
tabs
to
select
and
display
specific
types
chanthesedetabs
to
select
and
display
specific
types
of
chandeClick
canais,
acordo
com
os
disponveis
na
entrada
ou sada
purchased
separately:
table
shows
the
available
Channel
Types
for
the
current
I/O. para
nels,
as
available
forfor
thea
currently
selected
I/O.
The
following
selecionada.
A tabela
seguir
apresenta
os
tipos
de
canais
nels,
as
available
the
currently
selected
I/O.
The
following
shows
USB
disk
(or other
portable
USB
storage
device
for
table
thethe
available
Channel
Types
forfor
thethe
current
I/O.
entradas
eflash
sadas.
table
shows
available
Channel
Types
current
I/O.
I/O tab
Channel
available
transfer of Show
data; Types
512 MB
or larger recommended)
I/OI/O
Channel
Types
available
tabNear-field
monitor
speakers
foravailable
mix position monitoring
tab
Channel
Types
Inputs
Channels,
FX
Returns
All VENUE Profile

systems
Overview
of the
Patchbay
VENUE
Profile
console
Viso
geral doof
Patchbay
Overview
Patchbay
Overview
ofthe
the
The
Patchbay screen
lets
you Patchbay
patch hardware I/O to input and
output
channels.
The
Patchbay
screen
lets
you
patch
hardware
I/OI/O
tode
input
and
A tela
Patchbay
permite
enderear
entradas
e sadas
hardware
The
Patchbay
screen
lets
you
patch
hardware
to
input
and
output
channels.
para
canais
de
entrada e sada.
output
channels.
VENUE Mouse Pad
Hardware tabs
VENUE Profile Guide
Hardware
tabs
Hardware
tabs

I/O
tabs
I/O
I/O
tabs
tabs
Rack(s) (see next)
Headphones with
1/4-inch
jack
Inputs
Channels,
FX FX
Returns
Inputs
Channels,
ReturnsPQ, Mains
Outputs
Groups,
Auxes,
Matrix,
Outputs
Groups,
Auxes,
Matrix,
PQ,PQ,
Mains
Outputs
Groups,
Auxes,
Matrix,
Mains
Directs
FX
Returns,
Outputs
(for Talkback) Channels,
Directs
Channels,
Returns,
Outputs
Footswitches (up
to 2) FX
Directs
Channels,
Returns,
Outputs
Inserts
Channels,
FX FX
Returns,
Outputs
MIDI cables (for

connecting
external
MIDI devices)
Inserts
Channels,
FX FX
Returns,
Outputs
Inserts
Channels,
Returns,
Outputs
Hardware
BNCTabs
cables (for connecting Word clock between the
Hardware
Tabs
VENUE
system and external digital devices)
Hardware
Tabs
Click these tabs
to display the hardware inputs and outputs
Aba Hardware
available
fortabs
the
current
I/O
and
Channel
Type.
These
repreClick
these
to
display
the
hardware
inputs
and
outputs
Click
these
tabs
to
display
the
hardware
inputs
and
outputs
sent
the
physical
inputs
and
outputs
of
the
system.
available
for
the
current
I/O
and
Channel
Type.
These
repreavailable for the current I/O and Channel Type. These
repre-
Clique nestas abas para visualizar as entradas e sadas de hardware

Channel
controls
Each
Channel
Channel
controls
controls
System Restore CD
sent
thethe
physical
inputs
and
outputs
of of
thethe
system.
sent
physical
inputs
outputs
system.
disponveis
para os
tipos
deand
canal
e entrada
e sadas
selecionadas.
Choices include Stage audio inputs and outputs (Mix Rack or
Elas
representam
as entradas
e sadas fsicas
dos sistema.
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Stage
Rack),
FOHStage
(local)
inputs
and
outputs
(Mix(Mix
Rack
or Rack
FOH
Choices
include
audio
inputs
and
outputs
Rack
or or
Choices
include
Stage
audio
inputs
and
outputs
(Mix
Rack),
and
Pro
Tools
playback/record
option
inputs
and
outStage
Rack),
FOH
(local)
inputs
and
outputs
(Mix
Rack
or
FOH
The
following
options
caninputs
beeadded
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Stage
Rack),
FOH
(local)
andto
outputs
Rack
orRack
FOHou
As
escolhas
incluem
entradas
sadas
de
udio(Mix
Stage
(Mix
puts,
ifand
any.
Available
hardware
inputs
and
outputs
based
Rack),
Pro
Tools
playback/record
option
inputs
and
outFor
details
on
allTools
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visitare
the
Avid
Stage
Rack),
entradas
eplayback/record
sadas
FOH
(local)
(Mix
Rack
ou
FOH
Rack)
Rack),
and
Pro
option
inputs
and
outon
channel
type
selection,
system
configuration
andare
hardputs,
if any.
Available
hardware
inputs
and
outputs
based
ewebsite
opes
de
entradas
ehardware
sadas
de
gravao/reproduo
do Pro
puts,
if (www.avid.com).
any.
Available
inputs
and
outputs
are
based
ware
device
status.
See
I/O
onhardwares
pageand
110.
Tools,
se existentes.
As Unavailable
entradas
e sadas
de
disponveis
on
channel
type
selection,
system
configuration
hardon
channel
type
selection,
system
configuration
and
hard-
so
baseadas
na seleo
de tipo de canal,
configurao
do sistema
ware
device
status.
SeeSee
Unavailable
I/O
on
page
110.
ware
device
status.
Unavailable
I/O
on
page
110.
Rack
Options de hardware. Veja Entradas e Sadas
eMix
status
dos dispositivos
Indisponveis na pgina 110.
I/O Options

Channel Type tabs
Patching Grid
Channel
Type
tabs
Channel
Type
tabs
Patching
Patching
Grid
Patchbay
page
(Inputs
tab
shown)
One
FOH
Link
cable
for connection
to Grid
a VENUE
console
Patchbay
page
(Inputs
tabtab
shown)
Patchbay
page
(Inputs
shown)

outputs
Chapter 12: Patchbay 109

Chapter 12:12:
Patchbay
109
Patchbay
output compatible with Aviom PersonalChapter
Mixers and
other 109
digital I/O.
Captulo 12: Patchbay
109
Patching Grid
Patching Grid
Unavailable hardware I/O appear grayed out in the patchbay
Patching Grid
The Patching Grid shows hardware I/O across the top, and
O Patching
Grid
apresenta
entradas
sadas
de
hardware
aoand
alto,
The Patching
Griddown
shows
hardware
I/O
the top,
VENUE
channels
the
left e
side.
Theacross
available
channel
Patching
Grid
e canais
VENUE ao
lado
esquerdo.
abas
deavailable
canal e channel
as opes
Patching
Grid
VENUE
down
the leftAs
side.
The
tabs
andchannels
choices
are
determined
by the
currently
selected I/O
disponveis so determinadas pela aba I/O selecionada e o tipo de
tabsand
andChannel
choices
are
determined
bysquares
the
The
Patching
Grid
shows
hardware
I/O currently
across
theselected
top,
andI/O
tab
type(s).
The
grid
represent
patch
The
Grid
shows
hardware pontos
I/O across
the top, and
canal.
OsPatching
quadrados
no grid
representam
de endereamento
tab andbetween
Channelhardware
type(s).
The
grid
squares
represent
patch
VENUE
channels
down the
left
side.
The available
channel
points
I/O
and
VENUE
mixing
channels.
entreVENUE
entradas
e sadas
dethe
hardware
e The
canais
de mixagem
channels
down
left side.
available
channelna
points
between
I/O and
mixingselected
channels.
tabs
and
choiceshardware
are determined
byVENUE
the currently
I/O
VENUE.
tabs and choices are determined by the currently selected I/O
By
hardware
inputs
routed
in arepresent
1-to-1 pattern
tabdefault,
and Channel
type(s).
Theare
grid
squares
patch to
tabdefault,
and
Channel
type(s).
Theare
grid
squares
represent
patch
By
hardware
inputs
routed
in
a
1-to-1
pattern
input
channels.
For
example,
Stage
inputs
148
appear
onto
Inhardware
I/O and VENUE
mixing channels.
Por points
padro,between
as entradas
de hardware
so endereadas
em
um
points
between
hardware
I/O
and VENUE
mixing
channels.
input
channels.
For
example,
Stage
inputs
148
appear
on
Input
Channels
116
(Bank
A),
1732
(Bank
B)
and
so
on.
padro 1-para-1 para Input Channels. Por exemplo, entradas Stage
put
Channels
116
(Bank
A),
1732
(Bank
B)
and
so
on.
By
default,
hardware
inputs
are
routed
in
a
1-to-1
pattern
to
de 1By
a 48
aparecem
nos Input
Channels
1 ain16a (Bank
17 a 32
default,
hardware
inputs
are routed
1-to-1 A),
pattern
to
input
channels.
For
example, Stage inputs 148 appear on In(Bank
B)
e
assim
por
diante.
input channels.
For example, Stage inputs 148 appear on InChannel
Controls
put Channels 116 (Bank A), 1732 (Bank B) and so on.
put Channels
116 (Bank A), 1732 (Bank B) and so on.
Channel
Controls
Controles
Canal mirror the controls for the currently selected
Thesede
controls
These
controls
mirror the
controls
for Inputs,
the currently
selected
channel.
For example,
when
showing
the Channel
Channel
Controls
Esses
controles
espelham
os
controles
do Inputs,
canal selecionado.
Por
Channel
Controls
channel.
For
example,
when
showing
the
Channel
controls let you adjust input gain, polarity, phantom power,
exemplo, quando visualizando Inputs, os controles permitem ajustar
controls
let Out,
youmirror
adjust
input
gain,
polarity,
phantom
power,
These
controls
the
controls
for the
currently
selected
HPF, Direct
and basic
level
without
leaving
the Patchbay.
ganho
de entrada,
phantomfor
power,
HPF, Direct
Out e
These
controls polaridade,
mirror the controls
the currently
selected
HPF, Direct
and basic
level
without
leaving
theChannel
Patchbay.
channel.
ForOut,
example,
when
showing
Inputs,
the
nvelchannel.
bsico sem
a tela
Patchbay.
Fordeixar
example,
when
showing Inputs, the Channel
controls
let you adjust
input gain, polarity, phantom power,
Channel
Outs
controls letDirect
you adjust
input gain, polarity, phantom power,
HPF,
Direct
Out,
and
basic
level without leaving the Patchbay.
Channel
Direct
Outs
Channel
Direct
Outs
HPF,
Direct
Out,
and
basic
level without
leaving
thetoPatchbay.
The channel area in the Patchbay
provides
access
Direct
Thedechannel
area
in the Patchbay
provides
access
to Direct
Out
controls.
A rea
canais
no
Patchbay
oferece
acesso
aos
controles
Direct
Channel Direct Outs
Direct Outs
Out controls.
Out. Channel
The
channel
area
in thelevel
Patchbay
provides
access to Direct
To adjust
Direct
Output
from the
Patchbay:
The channel area in the Patchbay provides access to Direct
ParaOut
ajustar
o nvel
doOutput
Direct level
Output
pelo
To
adjust
Direct
from
thePatchbay:
Patchbay:
controls.
1
Incontrols.
the Patching Grid, patch the channel Direct Out to an
Out
1 In the Patching
Grid, patch
the Direct
channel
an
available
output.
1 NoToPatching
Grid, Output
enderece
o canal
OutDirect
para Out
umatosada
adjust Direct
level
from the
Patchbay:
available
output.Output level from the Patchbay:
To adjust Direct
disponvel.
2 In the channel controls, adjust the on-screen Direct Output
1 In the Patching Grid, patch the channel Direct Out to an
1 In the channel
2
Patchingcontrols,
Grid, patch
adjust
the the
channel
on-screen
Direct
Direct
Out Output
to an
encoder.
2 Nos
controles
de canal, ajuste o codificador Direct Output na tela.
available
output.
available output.
encoder.
encoder.
encoder.
Adjusting
Output
the Patchbay
Ajustando
o nvelDirect
de Direct
Outputlevel
pelo from
Patchbay
Adjusting Direct Output level from the Patchbay
VisualVIsuais
Indicators
Indicadores
e Displays and
Displays
Adjusting
Direct
Output leveland
from the
Patchbay
Visual
Indicators
Displays
Adjusting Direct Output level from the Patchbay
The Patchbay
the following
visual conventions
in all its
O Patchbay
utiliza uses
as seguintes
convenes
visuais em todas
as
Patchbay
uses the following visual conventions in all its
pages
ande tabs.
suasThe
pginas
abas.
Visual Indicators and Displays
Visual
and Displays
pages andIndicators
tabs.
The
Patchbay
uses
the
following
conventions in all its
Unavailable
I/O
Unavailable
I/Othe following visual
The Patchbay uses
visual conventions in all its
pages
and
tabs.
Unavailable
I/O
pages
and tabs.shows
The Patchbay
hardware
tabs
fortodas
all possible
configuraO Patchbay
mostra abas de
hardware
para
as configuraes
The Patchbay
showsindicates
hardwareI/O
tabs
forisall
possible
configurapossveis.
tions.
The
Patchbay
that
offline
or
unavailable
Unavailable I/O
Unavailable
O Patchbay
se columns
uma entrada
outhat
est
offline ou
tions.
Theindica
Patchbay
indicates
I/O that
issada
offline
or unavailable
by
graying
out I/O
the
beneath
device.
indisponvel
tornando
cinza
as colunas
abaixo
dispositivo.
by graying
outshows
the
columns
beneath
that
device.
The
Patchbay
hardware
tabs
for
alldesse
possible
configuraThe Patchbay shows hardware tabs for all possible configurations. The Patchbay indicates I/O that is offline or unavailable
tions. The Patchbay indicates I/O that is offline or unavailable
by graying out the columns beneath that device.
by graying out the columns beneath that device.
Entrada/Sada
indisponvel
(colunas
cinza)
Unavailable
I/O (grayed
columns)
Unavailable I/O
Unavailable I/O
Unavailable I/O (grayed columns)

Unavailable I/O (grayed columns)
I/O (grayed
110Unavailable
VENUE Profile
Guide columns)
110
Guia VENUE Profile

Unavailable I/O
Unavailable I/O
Entradas/sadas
de hardware
indisponveis
aparecem
em
cinza no
Unavailable
I/O appear
in the patchbay
and
italicizedhardware
in all routing
pop-upgrayed
lists. Itout
is possible
to make
patchbay e em itlico em todas as listas pop-up de endereamento.
and italicizedto
inunavailable
all routing pop-up
lists.
It is possible to make
assignments
hardware
I/O.
possvel fazer atribuies para entradas/sadas de hardware
assignments hardware
to unavailable
hardware
I/O.out in the patchbay
Unavailable
I/O appear
grayed
indisponveis.
Unavailable
hardware I/O
appear provides
grayed out
in the patchbay
The
VENUE Standalone
software
additional
display
and italicized in all routing pop-up lists. It is possible to make

and italicized
in all routing
pop-up
lists.
It is
possible to
make
The
VENUE
Standalone
provides
additional
display
options
for hardware
I/Osoftware
(including
unavailable
to unavailable
hardware
I/O. opesI/O).
Aassignments
verso Standalone
software VENUE
oferece
de visualizao
assignments
to unavailable
hardware
I/O.
options
for hardware
I/O (including
unavailable
I/O).
adicionairs para entradas/sadas de hardware (incluindo entradas/
See Chapter
24, Using
the Standalone
Software. display
The VENUE
Standalone
software
provides additional
sadas
indisponveis).
The VENUE
Standalone
software
provides additional
display
See for
Chapter
24, Using
the Standalone
Software.
options
hardware
I/O (including
unavailable
I/O).
options
for hardware
I/O (including unavailable I/O).
Assigned
I/O
Assigned
I/O 24, Using
See
Chapter
the Standalone
Software.
Veja
o Captulo
24, Utilizando
o software
Standalone.
Chapter 24,
Using theisStandalone
Software.
WhenSee
a hardware
connection
assigned, its
connection is
When a hardware
connection
is This
assigned,
its connection
is
dimmed
in
all
Patchbay
screens.
lets
you
see which hardAssigned I/O
Entrada/sada
atribuda
Assigned
I/O
dimmed
in all
Patchbay
This having
lets youtosee
which
hardware
connections
are in screens.
use without
switch
back
wareforth
connections
are
in use without
having
switch
back
and
between
Patchbay
screens.
can
also
use
When
a hardware
connection
is assigned,
itsto
connection
is
Quando
conexo
de hardware
You
assinalada,
suathe
conexo
When auma
hardware
connection
is assigned,
its connection
is
and
forth
between
Patchbay
screens.
You
can
also
use
the
column
number
indicator
to
jump
to
the
Patchbay
dimmed
in
all
Patchbay
screens.
This
lets
you
see
which
harddimmed
marcadainem
todas as screens.
telas Patchbay.
permite
ver
quais
all Patchbay
This lets Isso
you see
which
harddimmed
column
number
indicator
to
jump
to
the
Patchbay
tab
for
the
existing
assignment
(forsem
more
see trs
ware
connections
are
in use
without
having
to navegar
switch
back
conexes
de
hardware
uso
terinformation,
que
para
ware connections
areesto
in useem
without
having
to switch back
tab
for
thebetween
existing
assignment
(for more
information,
seeusar o
Shortcut
for
Locating
Assignments
on
page
113).
forth
Patchbay
screens.
You
can
also use
the
eand
para
frente
pelas
telas
do Patchbay.
Voc
tambm
pode
and forth between Patchbay screens. You can also use the
Shortcut
for
Locating
Assignments
page
indicador
do
nmero
da coluna
marcada
para
saltar
a aba do
dimmed
column
number
indicator
toon
jump
to113).
thepara
Patchbay
dimmed column number indicator to jump to the Patchbay
Patchbay
para
a of
atribuio
existente
mais
informaes,
tab
forDisplay
the
existing
assignment
(for (para
moreDestination
information,
see veja
Text
Patch
Source
and
tab for the
existing assignment
(for more
information,
Atalhos
para
deSource
Atribuies
pgina
113). see
Shortcut
forLocalizao
Locating
Assignments
onnapage
113).
Text
Display
of Patch
and
Destination
Shortcut
for
Locating
Assignments
on
page
113).
Above the grid tabs are from and to text display fields that
Displays
de
e Destino
Above the
grid
are
from
and to text
display
fields that
display
theFonte
fulltabs
text
names
of hardware
and channels.
Text Display
of
Patch
Source
andI/O
Destination
Text
Display
andI/O
Destination
display
the full of
textPatch
namesSource
of hardware
and channels.
Sobre as abas do grid h campos de display de texto de e para
Above
tabsofare
from
and to
display fields that
To viewthe
fullgrid
names
a patch
source
andtext
destination:
Above
the grid
tabs are
from and
text
display
fields that
que
mostram
o nome
completo
dos to
canais
e das
entradas/sadas
To view the
full names
ofnames
a patchofsource
and I/O
destination:
display
full text
hardware
and channels.
de
hardware.
Place the
the full
cursor
a Channel
Name. I/O and channels.
display
textover
names
of hardware
Place the cursor over a Channel Name.
To
view
full
names
of a completos
patch source
and destination:
Para
visualizar
os nomes
de uma
fonte
ou destino:
Channel
Name
Destination
To
view
full
names
of Source
a patch source
and destination:
Channel Name
Source
a Channel Name.
Destination
Place the cursor over
Place the
cursorsobre
over aum
Channel
Coloque
o cursor
nome Name.
de canal (Channel Name).
Channel Name
Channel Name
Source
Source
Channel source and destination display

Channel source and destination display
Destination
Destination
If the channel is already routed, its source and destination asIf the channel
is already
routed,
andGrid.
destination
assignments
appear
directly
above its
thesource
Patching
An asterChannel source and destination display
signments
appear
directly
above
the indicates
Patching aGrid.
An asterChannel
source
and
display
isk
at the
end
of a destination
destination
name
multiple
outDisplay de fonte e destino de canal
iskthe
at
the
end of
aalready
destination
name
indicates
multiple
outIf
channel
is See
routed,
its source
andadestination
asput
assignment.
Multiple
Input
and
Output
Assignments
If the channel is already routed, its source and destination asput
assignment.
See
Multiple
Input
and
Output
Assignments
signments
appear
directly
above
the
Patching
Grid.
An
asterin
the
Patchbay
on
page
112.
Se
o canal est
endereado,
suas atribuies
de fonte
destino
signments
appear
directly above
the Patching
Grid.eAn
aster-so
in the
Patchbay
pagesobre
112. name
isk
at the
enddiretamente
of aon
destination
indicates
a Um
multiple
outapresentadas
o
Patching
Grid.
asterisco
isk at the end of a destination name indicates a multiple out- no
putde
assignment.
Seedestino
Multiple
Input
and Output
Assignments
fim
um nome de
indica
mltiplas
atribuies
de sadas.
put
assignment.
See Multiple
Input
Output Assignments
Naming
Channels
from
theand
Patchbay
in the
Patchbay
on pagede
112.
Veja
Mltiplas
Atribuies
Entradas e Sadas na pgina 112.
in
the Patchbay
on pagefrom
112. the Patchbay
Naming
Channels
Channel names can be changed from the Patchbay. Channel
Nomeando
Canais
Pelo
Patchbay
Channel
be
changed from
the Patchbay.
Channel
names can
be upcan
to 32
characters
in length.
When displayed
Namingnames
Channels
from the
Patchbay
Naming
Channels
from
the
Patchbay
names
can
be
up
to
32
characters
in
length.
When
displayed
on the console, names are abbreviated to fit the display.
Nomes de canais podem ser alterados pelo Patchbay. Nomes de
on the console,
abbreviated
to fit
the display.
Channel
names names
can be are
changed
from the
Patchbay.
Channel
canais
podem
tecan
atbe32
caracteres.
apresentados
Channel
names
changed
from Quando
the Patchbay.
Channel na
names
can
be
up
to
32
characters
in
length.
When
displayed
To nameosornomes
rename a channel
from the caberem
Patchbay:no display.
console,
abreviados
names can be up so
to 32
characterspara
in length. When
displayed
on
the console,
names
are abbreviated
to fit the display.
To name
or rename
a channel
from the Patchbay:
1
channel
name.
onDouble-click
the console,the
names
are abbreviated
to fit the display.
Para
nomear ou renomear
um canal
1 Double-click
the channel
name.pelo Patchbay:
2
new
namea and
pressfrom
Enter
your keyboard.
To Type
nameaor
rename
channel
theon
Patchbay:
To name or rename a channel from the Patchbay:
Type duas
a newvezes
name
press
12Clique
noand
nome
do Enter
canal. on your keyboard.
1 Double-click the channel name.
When naming
in the Patchbay, press Tab on the
1 Double-click
the channels
channel name.
When
naming
inchannel
theEnter
Patchbay,
press
Tabtoon
keyboard
to
go channels
toand
next
and
Shift+Tab
gothe
to
22Digite
um
novo
nome
ethe
pressione
no
teclado.
Type
a new
name
press
Enter
on
your
keyboard.
2 Type
a
new
name
and
press
Enter
on
your
keyboard.
keyboard
to
go
to
the
next
channel
and
Shift+Tab
to
go to
the previous channel.
Quando
nomeando
canais
Patchbay,
pressione
Tab no
the
previous
channel.
When
naming
channels
in theno
Patchbay,
press
Tab on the
When
naming
channels
in the Patchbay,
press Tabpara
on the
teclado
para
o prximo
canal
Shift+Tab
ir para
keyboard
to goirtopara
the next
channel
andeShift+Tab
to go to
keyboard
to go to the next channel and Shift+Tab to go to
o anterior.
the
previous channel.
the previous channel.
Busca Type Text
Type Text Search
pelo Grid,
Patching
um dos
ToPara
scroll rolar
the Patching
do oneGrid,
of thesiga
following:
procedimentos:
seguintes
A Type
buscaText
Typesearch
Text permite
teclado para
rpida
nevegao Click the up/down or left/right Patching Grid scroll arrows
lets youutilizar
use theo keyboard
for fast
navigation
Toscroll
scroll
thesetas
Patching
Grid,
doone
oneofbaixo
ofthe
thefollowing:
following:
Type
Text
Search
Stage
Rack
Features
ToClique
the
Patching
Grid,
do
Additional
Required
Components
Type
Text
Search
move
square
by
square.
para
um
canal.
Voc
pode
digitar
os
primeiros
caracteres
do nome to
nas
para
cima/para
ou
esquerda/direita do
to a channel. You can enter the first characters of a channel
do canal ou o nmero absoluto do canal para selecionar esse canal
Patching
Grid
para
movimentar-se
quadrado
por
quadrado.
Click
the
up/down
or
left/right
Patching
Grid
scrollarrows
arrows
Click
or left/right
Grid
scroll
name
orRacks
the
absolute
channel
number
to target
that
channel
Type
Text
search
lets
youan
use
thekeyboard
keyboard
for
fast
navigation
Stage
are
used
with
FOH
Rack,
andfor
provide
all stage Click
The
following
must
bePatching
purchased
separately:
thethe
up up/down
orcomponents
down Patching
Grid
double
arrows
to move
Type
Text
search
lets
you
use
the
fast
navigation
no ACS.
to
move
square
by
square.
to move
square by square.
onaudio
the
toa aACS.
channel.
Youcan
can
entersystems.
thefirst
firstcharacters
characters
ofa achannel
channel
I/O
for VENUE
Profile
Up
to two of
Stage
Racks
screen
by screen.
to
channel.
You
enter
the
nas setas
duplas or
para
cima/para
baixoVGA
do Patching
Clique
Video
Display
(15-inch
greater
flat-panel
display Grid
name
or
the
absolute
channel
number
to
target
that
channel
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96
total
inputs.
the absolute
Click
the
up
or
down
Patching
Grid
double
arrows
move
Para name
buscaror
e selecionar
umchannel
canal: number to target that channel
para
movimentar-se
tela
a
tela.
Click
the
up
or
down
Patching
Grid
double
arrows
totomove
and
To search
and select a channel:
onthe
thefor
ACS.
on
ACS.
Audio
I/O
11Digite
primeiras
o nome
completo
ou o nmero
de canal
Typeas
the
first fewletras,
letters,
full name,
or channel
number
of
de um
canal.
Por
exemplo,
digite
s
para
ir
para
o
primeiro
canal
To
search
for
and
select
a
channel:
for
select
a channel:
search
48 inputs
with
remotely
controllable
micfirst
preamps
and
theTo
channel.
Forand
example,
type
s
to go to the
channel
comeado com a letra s (como Snare).
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
beginning
with
thefew
letter
s (such
asname,
Snare).
Type
thefirst
first
fewletters,
letters,
full
name,
channelnumber
numberofof
1 1Type
the
full
ororchannel
the
For
example,
type
s
togo
gotoup
tothe
the
first
channel
channel.
8channel.
analog
output
channels;
expandable
to
48
analog
or
the
For
example,
type
s
to
first
channel
2 2Pressione
a
tecla
Tab
para
navegar
e
selecionar
qualquer
outro
Press the Tab key to cycle through and select any other
beginning
with
the
letter
s(such
(such
asSnare).
Snare).
digitalcom
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
canal
iniciado
essa
letra
(como
Snare
Top,
Snare
Bottom
ou
beginning
with
the
letter
s
as
channels beginning with that letter (such as Snare Top, Snare
Strings).
Bottom,
or Strings).
Press
theTab
Tabkey
keytotocycle
cyclethrough
throughand
andselect
selectany
anyother
other
2 2Press
the
Right-click in the Patching Grid and drag in any direction.

screen
byscreen.
screen.
screen
by
DVI supported.
Clique com o boto direito do mouse no Patching Grid e arraste

Right-click
thePatching
PatchingGrid
Gridand
and
dragininany
anydirection.
direction.
USB
keyboard
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
Right-click
ininand
the
drag
para
qualquer
direo.

channels
beginning
with
thatletter
letter
(suchasasSnare
Snare
Top,
Snare
channels
beginning
with
that
(such
Snare
Evite giving
dar
aos
canais
nomes
quebegin
comeam
comTop,
nmeros
channels
that
numbers
difAvoid
Snakeorconnectors
tonames
enable
primary with
and redundant
(if
Bottom,
Strings).
Bottom,
or Strings).
diferentes
do nmero absoluto do canal.Quando voc digita
Optional Components
ferent
from the absolute channel
number.FOH
When
you type a
applicable)
to a VENUE
Rack.
um
nmero, connection
a VENUE navega
por nmeros
absolutos de
number,
VENUE
navigates
to
absolute
channel
numbers
reAvoid
giving
channels
names
that
begin
with
numbers
difAvoid
canal
emgiving
vez dochannels
nome donames
canal.that begin with numbers dif- Scrolling
The following
components
are optional,
and must be
the Patching
Grid by right-clicking
and dragging
gardless
offrom
the the
channel
name.
ferent
from
theabsolute
absolute
channelnumber.
number.When
Whenyou
youtype
typea a
ferent
channel
number,VENUE
VENUEnavigates
navigatestotoabsolute
absolutechannel
channelnumbers
numbersrerenumber,
Scrolling
thePatching
Patching
Grid
right-clicking
and
draggingdevice for
USB
flash
disk
other
portable
USB
storage
System
Components
Scrolling
Grid
bybycom
right-clicking
and
dragging
Rolando
pelothe
Patching
Grid(or
clicando
boto direito
e arrastando
gardless
of
the
channel
name.
gardless of the channel name.
Assigning
Channels
inMB
the
Patchbay
transfer of
Show data; 512
or larger
recommended)
Navigating
the
Patchbay
Navegando
pelo
Patchbay
Included Components
Navegando
pelos
de
Canal
Navigating
the
Patchbay
Navigating
toTipos
Channel
Types
Navigating
the Patchbay
All
VENUE Profile systems

ToAtribuindo
assign
channels
in
the no
Patchbay:
Assigning
Channels
thePatchbay
Patchbay
Assigning
Channels
ininthe
Canais
Patchbay
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
1 Go toDynamic
a Patchbay
page by clicking
the appropriate
I/O tab,
or condenser
microphone
and XLR mic
cable
assign
channels
in
thePatchbay:
Patchbay:
Para
atribuir
canais
noinPatchbay:
ToToassign
channels
the
Channel
Type
tab, and
Hardware
tab.
(for
Talkback)
VENUE
Profile
console
OThe
Patchbay
utiliza
mltiplas
abas
acessar
diferente
entradas/
Patchbay
uses
multiple
tabspara
to access
different
hardware
Navigating
to
Channel
TypesPor exemplo, a tela Inputs
Navigating
to
Channel
Types
sadas
de
hardware
e
tipos
de
canais.
Two
(2) IEC
power
I/O and
channel
types.
Forcables
example,
the Inputs screen proGototoa aPatchbay
Patchbay
page
byclicking
clickingthe
theappropriate
appropriateI/O
I/O tab,
1 1Go
page
(up
to Patching
2)by
2 1Place
cursor
over
the
Grid.na
The
cursor
changestab,
V Footswitches
the
uma
pgina
Patchbay
clicando
aba
de entrada/sada
oferece
abas
Channels
emultiple
FX Returns
para
voc
enderear
esses
vides
and
FXmultiple
Returns
tabs
for
you
todifferent
patch
these
difChannelType
Typetab,
tab,and
andHardware
Hardwaretab.
tab.
The
Patchbay
uses
tabs
toaccess
access
different
hardware
Channels
Monitor
mount
for VGAtabs
screen
(screen
not included)
Channel
The
Patchbay
uses
to
hardware
Channel
Type
e Hardware.
toapropriada,
a crosshair,
and lines
extend
aboveexternal
and to the
leftdevices)
of the cur MIDI cables
(for
connecting
MIDI
tipos
de channel
canais independentemente.
ferent
types independently.
I/O
andchannel
channel
types.
Forexample,
example,
theInputs
Inputsscreen
screenproproI/O
types.
For
the
and
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not included)
sor location
to cursor
identify
thethe
column
andGrid.
row.
2Place
Place
the
cursor
over
the
Patching
Grid.
The
cursorchanges
changes
BNCthe
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
the
over
Patching
The
cursor
videsChannels
Channelsand
andFX
FXReturns
Returnstabs
tabsfor
foryou
youtotopatch
patchthese
thesedifdif- 2 2Posicione
vides
o cursor
sobre
o Patching
Grid.
O to
cursor
se of
altera
para
Exemplos
VENUE Mouse Pad
to
a
crosshair,
and
lines
extend
above
and
the
left
the curVENUE
system
andchannel
external
digital
devices)
to a crosshair,
and
lines
extend
above
and
tocolumn
the left for
of the
Examples
3 uma
Click
in the
row
for
and
in
thecurferentchannel
channeltypes
typesindependently.
independently.
cruz,
e linhas
sothe
extendidas sobre
e the
esquerda
da localizao
ferent
sor
location
to
identify
the
column
and
row.
VENUE Profile Guide
to
identify
the
and row.
location
25-pin
D-Sub
cableslinhas
(forcolumn
connecting
to GPI devices)
hardware
I/O
source.
dosor
cursor
para
identificar
e colunas.
Para visualizar Inputs:
Two
(2)
console
lights
To show
Inputs:
Examples
Clickininthe
therow
rowfor
forthe
thechannel
channeland
andininthe
thecolumn
columnfor
forthe
the
Examples
3 3Click
3 Clique
na linha
de
um canal e na coluna de uma fonte de entrada/
Protective
Dust
Cover
V
pgina
Patchbay
e
clique
a
aba
Inputs.
hardware
I/O
source.
hardware
I/O
source.
Go to the Patchbay page and click the Inputs tab.
sada de hardware.
showInputs:
Inputs:
ToTo
show
Rack(s)
(see next)
Para visualizar um tipo especfico de Input no Patching Grid:
To show
specific
type of page
Input
in
the
Patching
grid:tab.
Goatoto
thePatchbay
Patchbay
pageand
and
click
theInputs
Inputs
tab.
Go
the
click
the
Racks,
Software
CDs,
and Cables
Na
pgina
Patchbay,
clique
a iLoks,
aba
Channels
ou FX
ShiftIn
the Patchbay
page,
click
the Channels
tab,
or Returns.
the FX ReTo
show
a
specific
type
of
Input
in
the
Patching
grid:
To
show
a
specific
type
of
Input
in
the
Patching
grid:
click
para
selecionar
e
mostrar
mltiplos
tipos
de
uma
vez.
turns
tab.
Shift-Click
to
select
and
show
multiple
types
at
once.
Inthe
thePatchbay
Patchbaypage,
page,click
clickthe
theChannels
Channelstab,
tab,ororthe
theFXFXReRe In
turnstab.
tab.Shift-Click
Shift-Clicktotoselect
selectand
andshow
showmultiple
multipletypes
typesatat
turns
To navigate
once. to a different hardware source:
once.
Clique
a aba de hardware
apropriada
no alto do Patching Grid.
Standalone
Software
Installer CD
Click the appropriate Hardware tab across the top of the
iLok
USBto
Smart
Key (for
storingsource:
navigate
different
hardware
ToTonavigate
to a adifferent
hardware
source:
Rolando
pelo
Patchbay
Patching
Grid.
Clickthe
theappropriate
appropriateHardware
Hardwaretab
tabacross
acrossthe
thetop
topofofthe
the
Click
Para rolar
pela(2)
listaIEC
de power
canais (verticalmente):
Two
cables
Patching
Grid.
Scrolling
the Patchbay
Patchingin
Grid.
System
CD de hardware diferente:
Para navegar
paraRestore
uma fonte
Mova o cursor sobre um nome de canal esquerda do Patching

To scroll
through
channel
list
(vertically):
Scrolling
the
Patchbay
Grid,
ento
pressione
as
teclas
de setas
para cima e para baixo no
Scrolling
ininthe
the
Patchbay
Each
Stage
Rack
includes:
teclado.
Move the cursor over a channel name at the left of the
scroll
through
thechannel
channel
list
(vertically):
ToToscroll
through
Patching
Grid,
thenthe
press
the Uplist
or(vertically):
Down
Arrow keys on the
Para rolar pela lista de entradas/sadas de hardware

keyboard.
Movethe
thecursor
cursorover
overa achannel
channelname
nameatatthe
theleft
leftofofthe
the
Move
(horizontalmente):

Routing a hardware input to an Input Channel
4 Click and drag vertically, horizontally, or at an angle to asMix

Rack
Options
Routing
hardware
input
Input
Channel
Routing
a ahardware
input
toto
anan
Endereando
uma
entrada
de hardware
para Channel
um
Input Channel
sign
multiple
patch
points
in
aInput
single
action.
Clickand
anddrag
dragvertically,
vertically,horizontally,
horizontally,ororatatan
anangle
angletotoasas4 4Click
5 4I/O
Repeat
as
needed.
Options
Clique
e arraste
verticalmente, horizontalmente ou em ngulo para
sign multiple patch points in a single action.
sign multiple
points
in a single action.
atribuir
mltiplospatch
pontos
de endereamento
em uma nica ao.
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Patchbay
Click
and
Drag
5
Repeat
as
needed.
5 Repeat as needed.
level inputs
5mic/line
Repita conforme
necessrio.
You can quickly select a range of crosspoints in the Patchbay

Patchbay
Click
andDrag
Dragthat provides 16 analog line level
Patchbay
Click
and
AO16
Analog
Output
Card
grid
in one
operation
with
a left-click and drag of the cursor.
Clique
e Arraste
no Patchbay
outputs
You
cancan
click
and drag
horizontally,
vertically,
and
at
45
deYou
canquickly
quickly
select
rangeofofcrosspoints
crosspoints
the
Patchbay
You
select
a arange
ininthe
Patchbay
Voc
pode
selecionar
uma
gama
de
pontos
de
gree
angles
in rapidamente
any
direction.
grid
inone
one
operation
with
aleft-click
left-click
and
dragofof
the
cursor.
grid
in
operation
with
a
and
drag
the
cursor.
XO16 Analog
and Digital
Output
Card
that provides
8 analog
interseo
no
Patchbay
Grid
em
uma
operao
de
clicar
e
arrastar
Youcan
canclick
clickand
anddrag
draghorizontally,
horizontally,vertically,
vertically,and
andatat45
45dedeYou
line
level
outputs,
and
8e
AES
outputs.
do
cursor.
Voc
pode
arrastar
horizontalmente,
verticalmente
You
cannot
undo
changes
todigital
the Patchbay
grid.
gree
angles
anyclicar
direction.
gree
angles
ininany
direction.
PatchingGrid,
Grid,then
thenpress
pressthe
theUp
UpororDown
DownArrow
Arrowkeys
keyson
onthe
the e em ngulos de 45 graus em qualquer direo.
Patching
AT16 A-Net
Output
that provides
and
drag undo
inCard
thechanges
Patchbay
grid:
scroll
hardware
I/O de
listentrada/sada
(horizontally): de hardware To use click
keyboard.
You
cannot
thePatchbay
Patchbay
grid.
keyboard.
ToMova
o through
cursour the
sobre
um canal
cannot
undo
changes
totoPersonal
the
Voc
no pode
desfazer
alteraes
para
ogrid.
Patchbay
grid.
outputYou
compatible
with
Aviom
Mixers
and other
no alto
do
Patching
Grid,
ento
pressione
as
teclas
de
setas
para
a
1
Left-click
on
the
crosspoint
defining
the
start
of
the range.
Move the cursor over a hardware I/O channel at the top of
Pro16
Series
devices.
Para
usar
oclick
clicar
edrag
arrastar
noPatchbay
Patchbay
grid:
useclick
and
dragininthe
the
Patchbaygrid:
grid:
ToTouse
and
esquerda
ou direita
teclado.
Toscroll
scroll
through
thehardware
hardware
I/Olist
list(horizontally):
(horizontally):
through
the
theTo
Patching
Grid,no
then
press
theI/O
Left
or
Right
Arrow keys on
Input
output
expansion
card that
provides
addi1Left-click
Left-click
on
theinterseo
crosspoint
defining
the
start
ofan
the
range.
noand
ponto
de
definindo
othe
incio
daofseleo.
thekeyboard.
1Clique
on
the
crosspoint
defining
start
the
range.
Move
Movethe
thecursor
cursorover
overa ahardware
hardwareI/O
I/Ochannel
channelatatthe
thetop
topofof 1IOx
tional
8
channels
of
analog
I/O
and
8
channels
of
AES/EBU
thePatching
PatchingGrid,
Grid,then
thenpress
pressthe
theLeft
LeftororRight
RightArrow
Arrowkeys
keyson
on
the
digital I/O.
thekeyboard.
keyboard.
the
Captulo 12: Patchbay 111
Chapter
12:Patchbay
Patchbay
111
Chapter 1: Introduction
to VENUE
Profile 5111
Chapter
12:
2 Continue to hold the left-click button, then drag horizon-
2 Continue
segurar
oa boto
esquerdo,
e arraste
horizontalmente
tally
(toapopulate
row),left-click
vertically
(to
populate
a column),
or
Continue
hold
button,
then
drag
horizon2 2
Continue
to to
hold
thethe
left-click button,
then
drag
horizon(para
marcar
uma
linha),
verticalmente
(para
marcar
coluna)
horizontally
and vertically
(a 45 degree
angle). auma
tally
(to
populate
a
row),
vertically
(to
populate
column),
or
(to populate ea verticalmente
row), vertically
(tongulo
populate
a column),
outally
horizontalmente
(em
de 45
graus). or
horizontally
and
vertically
degree
angle).
horizontally
and
vertically
(a (a
4545
degree
angle).
3 Release the
left-click
button
when the
destination cros3 Solte
o boto
quando
oAll
ponto
de interseo
de
destino
alcanado.
spoint
is reached.
crosspoints
along
the
path
are
filled
3
Release
the
left-click
button
when
the
destination
cros- in.
3 Release the left-click button when the destination
crosTodos
os pontos
de interseo
ao longoalong
do caminho
soare
marcados.
spoint
is
reached.
All
crosspoints
the
path
filled
spoint
is reached. All
crosspoints
the path
are filled
in.in.
The destination
crosspoint
sets along
the targeted
channel.
If the
O ponto
de
interseo
de destino
ajustatargeted
o canalchannel.
selecionado.
new
assignments
steal
any previous
assignments,
a warning
The
destination
crosspoint
sets
If theSe
The
destination
crosspoint
sets
thethe
targeted channel.
If the
umadialog
nova
atribuio
rouba
qualquer
atribuio
anterior,
uma
will
ask yousteal
to confirm
or cancel
the reassignment.
new
assignments
any
previous
assignments,
a
warning
new assignments steal any previous assignments, a warning
mensagem
de ask
alerta
pede
a confirmao
ou
cancelamento
da
dialog
will
you
to
confirm
or
cancel
the
reassignment.
dialog will ask you to confirm or cancel the reassignment.
operao.
Using the Arrow Keys to Assign Channels

Using
the
Arrow
Keys
to
Assign
Channels
Utilizando
teclas
de
setas
parato
assinalar
canais
Using
the
Arrow
Keys
Assign
Channels
3 Click additional grid squares in the same column to assign
3the
Clique
quadrados
adicionais
no grid
na
coluna
para
atribuir
source
to additional
channels.
Themesma
selected
hardware
inClick
additional
grid
squares
same
column
assign
3 3
Click
additional
grid
squares
in in
thethe
same
column
to to
assign
aput
fonte
a
canais
adicionais.
A
entrada
de
hardware
selecionada
is routed
to
each of the
assignedThe
Input
Channels
or FXinRethe
source
to
additional
channels.
selected
hardware
the
source to additional
channels.
selected
hardware
endereada
para cada
um dosThe
Input
Channels
ou FX inReturns
turns.
put
is
routed
to
each
of
the
assigned
Input
Channels
or
FX
put
is routed to each of the assigned Input Channels or FX Re-Reatribudos.
turns.
turns.
Multiple input
assignments
Multiple
input
Multiple
input
assignments
assignments
You can use the Arrow keys to assign routing.

You can use the Arrow keys to assign routing.
You can
use the
Arrowaskeys
to assign
Voc
pode
utilizar
teclas
de routing.
setas para assinalar
To assign channels using the Arrow Keys on the keyboard:
endereamentos.
A hardware
routed
to multiple
Uma
entrada deinput
hardware
endereada
paraInput
vriosChannels
Input Channels
assign
channels
using
the
Arrow
Keys
the
keyboard:
To To
channels
using
the
Arrow
Keys
onon
the
keyboard:
1assign
Place
the
cursor
over
the
Patching
Grid
so
that
the cursor
Parachanges
assinalar
endereamentos
utilizando
as
teclas
de
setas
no
to the
crosshair.
1
Place
the
cursor
over
the
Patching
Grid
so
that
the
cursor
1 Place the cursor over the Patching Grid so that the
cursor
teclado:
changes
to
crosshair.
changes
thethe
crosshair.
2 Presstothe
Left
or Right Arrow keys to move the crosshair to
assign
Output
bus
to
multiple
hardware
outputs:
To To
anan
Output
bus
to
multiple
hardware
outputs:
1assign
Go
the
appropriate
Output
tab in
the Patchbay.
1 2Posicione
cursor
sobre
o
Patching
Grid
para
quecrosshair
se
torne
uma
thePress
nexto
or
previous
hardware
I/O
column;
press
the
Down
or
2
Left
Right
Arrow
keys
move
crosshair
Press
thethe
Left
or or
Right
Arrow
keys
to to
move
thethe
to to
cruz.Up
to move
the cursor
to the next
orthe
previous
the Arrow
next orkeys
previous
hardware
I/O column;
press
Down or
Click
in
the
Patching
Grid
to
assign
the
Output
bus
the
Clique
Grid
para
o bus
Output
para
primeira
2 22
Click
inno
thePatching
Patching
Grid
toatribuir
assign
the
Output
bus
toato
the
the next or previous hardware I/O column; press the Down or

channel.
Arrow
keys
move
cursor
to
next
or
previous
UpUp
Arrow
keys
to to
move
thethe
cursor
to ou
thethe
next
or
previous
2 Pressione
as
teclas
de setas
esquerda
direita
para
movimentar
channel.
channel.
3 para
When
the crosshair
over
the
correctanterior
square in
grid,
a cruz
a prxima
colunaisou
para
a coluna
de the
entradas/
sadas
de Enter
hardware;
pressione
asthe
teclas
de setas
para
cima
ougrid,
para
press
tocrosshair
assign
the
patch.
When
is over
the
correct
square
3 3
When
thethe
crosshair
is over
correct
square
in in
thethe
grid,
baixopress
paraEnter
movimentar
o cursor
para o prximo canal ou o anterior.
to assign
the patch.
press Enter to assign the patch.
Multiple
Inputsobre
ando Output
Assignments
in
3 Quando
a cruz estiver
quadrado correto
no grid, pressione
the
Patchbay
Multiple
Input
and
Output
Assignments
Enter
para
assinalar
um
endereamento.
Multiple Input and Output Assignments inin
A hardware input
routed
to
multiple
Input
Channels
A hardware
routed
to
multiple
Input
Channels
To assigninput
an Output
bus
to multiple
hardware outputs:
Para atribuir um bus Output para vrias sadas de hardware:
11VGo
aba appropriate
Output apropriada
no Patchbay.
Output
in
Patchbay.
1 Go
thethe
appropriate
Output
tabtab
thethe
Patchbay.
2 Click
in the Patching
Grid
toinassign
the Output bus to the
first hardware output.
sada
de hardware.
first
hardware
output.
first
hardware
output.
3 Click additional grid squares in the same row to assign the

same
Output
bus togrid
additional
hardware
outputs.
An
asterisk
Click
additional
squares
same
row
assign
the
Clique
quadrados
nathe
mesma
linha
para
atribuir
3 33
Click
additional
grid adicionais
squares
in in
the
same
row
to to
assign
the
(*)
appears
at
the
end
of
the
displayed
destination
to
indicate
Output
bus
additional
hardware
outputs.
An
asteriskUm
osame
mesmo
bus
Output
para sadas
adicionais
deAnhardware.
same
Output
bus
to to
additional
hardware
outputs.
asterisk
the
multiple
routing.
(*)
appears
the
end
of
displayed
destination
indicate
asterisco
(*)
aparece
fim
do display
de destino
para
indicar
(*)
appears
at at
the
end
ofno
thethe
displayed
destination
to to
indicate
mltiplos
endereamentos.
multiple
routing.
thethe
multiple
routing.
thePatchbay
Patchbay
the
InputRoteamentos
sources can be
multiple
Input Channels in
Mltiplos
de assigned
Entradas etoSadas
no Patchbay
the
Patchbay.
Output
busses can
be
assigned
to multiple
hardInput
sources
can
assigned
multiple
Input
Channels
Input
sources
can
bebe
assigned
to to
multiple
Input
Channels
in in
ware
outputs.
Patchbay.
Output
busses
can
assigned
multiple
hardFontes
de
entrada
podem
ser
atribudas
para
vrios
Input
Channels
thethe
Patchbay.
Output
busses
can
bebe
assigned
to to
multiple
hardnoware
Patchbay.
Busses
de
sada
podem
ser
assinalados
para
vrias
ware
outputs.
outputs.
Stage
inputs assigned to multiple channels share a common
sadas
de hardware.
preamp
gain.assigned
Adjusting one
channel's
gain share
automatically
adStage
inputs
multiple
channels
a common
Stage
inputs
assigned to to
multiple
channels
share a common
justs
all other
channels.
All other
channel
functions
(suchadas
Entradas
Stage
atribudas
a
vrios
canais
compartilham
o
ganho
preamp
gain.
Adjusting
one
channel's
gain
automatically
preamp gain. Adjusting one channel's gain automatically ad-de
preamp
comum.
Ajustar
ganho
de
canal
automaticamente
ajusta
EQ,
dynamics,
and um
panning)
remain
independent,
making
it
justs
all
other
channels.
All
other
channel
functions
(such
justs all other channels. All other channel functions (such as as
outros
canais.
Todas
as outras
funes
de canal
(como
EQ,
dinmica
convenient
to have
a channel
appear
on
one
input
strip
to bus
EQ,
dynamics,
and
panning)
remain
independent,
making
EQ, dynamics, and panning) remain independent, making it it
e posicionamento
continuam
tornando
and
process to
itpanormico)
for the
house
mix,
andindependentes,
onone
another
input
strip
convenient
have
a channel
appear
on
input
strip
bus
convenient
tocanal
have
a channel
appear
on
one
input
strip
to to
bus
possvel
ter
um
em
uma
rgua
para
endere-lo
e
process-lo
with
different
processing
formix,
monitor
mixing.
and
process
it
for
the
house
and
on
another
input
strip
andaprocess
it for
the house
on another
input strip
para
house mix
e outra
rguamix,
com and
diferente
processamento
para
with
different
processing
for
monitor
mixing.
with
different
processing
for
monitor
mixing.
mixagem
de
monitorao.
Using multi-assigned inputs requires additional input channels
bemulti-assigned
available in the
current
System
Configuration.
If you
Using
inputs
requires
additional
input chan-
Usingentradas
multi-assigned
inputs requires
inputadicionais
chanUtilizar
multi-atribudas
requeradditional
Input Channels
are
using
all available
stage
inputs,
you Configuration.
must increase the
nels
available
current
System
If you
nels
bebe
available
in in
thethe
current
System
Configuration.
If you
disponveis
na configurao
do sistema.
Se voc est utilizando
number
ofallInput
Channels
in
the Options
> System
page.
(To
are
using
available
stage
inputs,
you
must
increase
the
are using
all available
stage
inputs, youvoc
mustpode
increase
the
todas
as entradas
Stage
disponveis,
aumentar
o
learn
how
to
configure
the
number
of
Input
Channels,
see
number
of
Input
Channels
in
the
Options
>
System
page.
(To
nmero
pgina
Options
> System.
(Para
numberdeofInput
InputChannels
Channelsna
in the
Options
> System
page. (To
System
Configuration
Settings
on of
page
58.)Channels,
learn
how
configure
number
Input
saber
como
configurar
o nmero
de Input
Channels,
veja Ajustes
learn
how
to to
configure
thethe
number
of Input
Channels,
seesee
deSystem
Configurao
de
Sistema
na
pgina
58.)
System
Configuration
Settings
on
page
58.)
Configuration Settings on page 58.)
On VENUE Mix Rack systems, choosing the 64 channel setgives Mix
you
additional
input
processing
channels
beyond
On
VENUE
Mix
Rack
systems,
choosing
channel
Emting
sistemas
VENUE
Mix
Rack,
escolher
a64
configurao
On
VENUE
Rack
systems,
choosing
thethe
64
channel
set-setthe
number
of
hardware
inputs
(48).
Use
this
setting
to be
de
64
canais
oferece
canais
adicionais
de
processamento
ting
gives
you
additional
input
processing
channels
beyond
ting gives you additional input processing channels beyond
alm
do
nmero
de entradas
de
hardware
(48).
Usetoessa
able
to
multi-assign
inputs
to
input
processing
channels.
the
number
of
hardware
inputs
(48).
Use
this
setting
the number of hardware inputs (48). Use this setting to be be
configurao
para permitir
a mltipla
atribuio
de
entradas
able to
multi-assign
inputs
input
processing
channels.
able
multi-assign
inputs
to to
input
processing
channels.
parato
canais
de processamento
demultiple
entradas.
To assign
a hardware
input source to
Input Channels or
FX assign
Returns:
a hardware
input
source
multiple
Input
Channels
To To
assign a hardware
input
source
to to
multiple
Input
Channels
or or
ParaFX
atribuir
uma fonte de entrada de hardware para vrios Input
Returns:
FX1Returns:
Go
to the appropriate Input tab in the Patchbay.
Channels ou FX Returns:
1 Go
the appropriate
Input tab
Patchbay.
1 Go
to to
the
in in
thethe
Patchbay.
2 Click
in appropriate
the PatchingInput
Gridtab
to assign
the
source to the first In-
1 V aba Input apropriada no Patchbay.
put
Channel
or
FX Return.
2
Click
Patching
Grid
assign
source
first
2 Click
in in
thethe
Patching
Grid
to to
assign
thethe
source
to to
thethe
first
In-In-
2 put
Clique
no Patching
Grid
para atribuir a fonte ao primeiro Input
put
Channel
FX
Return.
Channel
or or
FX
Return.
112 VENUE
Guide
Channel
ou FXProfile
Return.
112VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Guide
112
Profile
Guide
112
Guia VENUE Profile
Multiple output
assignments
Multiple
output
Multiple
output
An Output bus
assigned to multiple hardware outputs
assignments
assignments
An
Output
assigned
to
multiple
hardware
outputs
Um
bus
Output
atribudo
a to
mltiplas
sadas
de hardware
An
Output
busbus
assigned
multiple
hardware
outputs
Choosing the Digital Source (AES or ADAT)

(AES
ADAT)
Choosing
the
Digital
Source
(AES
oror
ADAT)
If your system
includes
a DSI
digital input
card,
do
the followEscolhendo
a fonte
(AES ou
ADAT)
Choosing
thedigital
Digital
Source
ing
to specify
the
digital
If your
system
includes
a source.
DSI
digital
input
card,
do
followseu
sistema
inclui
placa
de
entrada
digital
DSI,
faa o
IfSe
your
system
includes
auma
DSI
digital
input
card,
do
thethe
followseguinte
para
especificar
a
fonte
digital.
ing
to
specify
the
digital
source.
ing to specify the digital source.
To configure a digital input for AES or ADAT:
Paraconfigure
configurara uma
entrada
digital
para
AES ou ADAT:
digital
input
AES
or
ADAT:
To To
a digital
input
for
AES
orother
ADAT:
1configure
In the Patchbay,
route
a for
DSI
or
digital input to an input
channel.
1
In
the
Patchbay,
route
a
DSI
or
other
digital
input
Nothe
Patchbay,
enderece
DSI
ou outra
para
1 1In
Patchbay,
route auma
DSI entrada
or otherdigital
digital
input
to to
anan
in-in-um
put
channel.
Input
Channel.
put
2 channel.
Click the Inputs tab and navigate to the input channel being
fed
fromthe
the
DSI input.
2
Click
Inputs
tab
and
navigate
to
channel
being
2 2Click
thena
Inputs
and
to para
thethe
input
channel
being
Clique
aba tab
Inputs
enavigate
navegue
oinput
para
o Input
Channel
fed from
the
DSI
input.DSI.
alimentado
entrada
fed
DSI
input.
3 from
Clickthe
thepela
ADAT
button on-screen, in the channel Input controls
section.
When
lit, ADAT
input in
is active;
when Input
unlit, conAES
3
Click
the
ADAT
button
on-screen,
channel
3 3Click
on-screen,
thethe
channel
Input
Cliquethe
noADAT
botobutton
ADAT na
tela, na in
seo
de
controles
deconentrada.
inputsection.
is active.
The corresponding
channels
Source
LED on
trols
When
lit,
ADAT
input
is
active;
when
unlit,
AES
trols
section.
When
lit, ADATADAT
inputest
is active;
unlit,
AES
Quando
aceso,
a entrada
ativa;when
quando
apagado,
a
the Stage
Rack DSI
Card
lights to indicate
AESSource
or ADAT.
input
is
active.
The
corresponding
channels
LED
on
input
is active.
Theativa.
corresponding
channels
Source
LED on
entrada
AES est
O LED Source
do canal
correspondente
na
the
Stage
Rack
DSI
Card
lights
to
indicate
AES
ADAT.
placa
Stage
Rack
DSI
selights
acende
indicar
AES
ou
ADAT.
the
Stage
Rack
DSI
Card
topara
indicate
AES
or or
ADAT.
Advertncias
Patchbay
Quando
Roubar
Entradas
Sadas
no
Exportao de Informaes do Sistema

VENUE
System
Information
Export
VENUE
VENUE
System
Information
Export
Additional
Required
Components
Warning
when
Stealing
Inputs or
Warning
when
Stealing
Inputs
Stage
Rack
Features
Warning
when
Stealing
Inputs or
or
VENUE System
System Information
Information Export
Export
Warning
when
Stealing
Inputs
or
VENUE
Outputs
in
the
Patchbay
OOutputs
Patchbay
indica
as sadas
de hardwareInputs
que esto
em uso
Warning
when
Stealing
orall
VENUE
System
Information
Export
in
the
Patchbay
The
System
Information
Export
feature
lets
you
generate
an
Outputs
in
the
Patchbay
O
recurso
Information
Export
permite
gerar
um
documento
HTML
The
System
Information
Export
feature
lets
you
generate
an
Stage
Racks
are
used
with
an
FOH
Rack,
and
provide
stage
The
following
components
must
be purchased
separately:
Outputs
in the
Patchbay
The
System
Information
Export
feature
lets
you
generate
an
acendendo
o
nmero
da
coluna
da
sada
fsica.
Alm
disso,
uma
The
System
Information
Export
feature
lets
you
generate
an
HTML
(text)
document
that
details
the
systems
hardware,
Outputs
in
the
Patchbay
The
Patchbay
indicates
hardware
outputs
that
are
already
in
(texto)
que
detalha
as
configuraes
do
hardware
do
sistema,
HTML
(text)
document
that
details
the
systems
hardware,
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Stage
Racks
The Patchbay indicates hardware outputs that are already in
The System Information Export feature lets you generate ando
mensagem
apresentada
se o endereamento
roubar
uma
The
Patchbay
indicates
hardware
outputs
that
are
alreadyoutput.
in
The
Patchbay
indicates
hardware
outputs
that
are
in
use
byused
dimming
the
column
number
for
that
physical
can
be
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96already
total
inputs.
use
by
dimming
the
column
number
for
that
physical
output.
entrada
ou
sada
de
hardware
que
est
em
uso,
perguntando
sobre
The
Patchbay
indicates
hardware
outputs
that
are
already
in
useIn
by
dimming
the
column
number
for
that
physical
byaddition,
dimming
the
column
number
for
thatwill
physical
output.
acancelamento
dialog
is shown
ifatribuio.
the
patch
steal
aoutput.
hardware
a use
confirmao
ou
da
In
addition,
a
dialog
is
shown
if
the
patch
will
steal
a
hardware
use
by
dimming
the
column
number
for
that
physical
output.
In
addition,
a
is
if
will
a
hardware
InAudio
addition,
a dialog
dialog
is shown
shown
if the
the
patch
will steal
steal
ato
hardware
input
or output
that
is already
inpatch
use,
asking
you
confirm
or
I/O
input
output
that
is
already
in
use,
asking
you
to
confirm
or
Inor
addition,
a dialog
is shown
if the
patch
will
steal
a hardware
input
or
output
that
is
already
in
use,
asking
you
to
confirm
or
input
or output
that
is already
in use, asking
you to
confirm
or
cancel
the
reassignment.
Para
confirmar
uma
reatribuio,
siga
um
dos
seguintes
cancel
reassignment.
the
48 inputs
with
remotely
controllable
micyou
preamps
and or
input
or
output
that
is already
in use, asking
to confirm
cancel
cancel the
the reassignment.
reassignment.
procedimentos:
HTML
(text)
document
that
details
the
systems
hardware,
software
Video
Display
(15-inch
or
greater
VGA
display
HTML
(text)
document
that
details
theflat-panel
systems
hardware,
currently
loaded
Show
file
configurations.
This
software
eand
do
arquivo
show
atualmente
carregado.
Esse
documento
software
and
currently
loaded
Show
file
configurations.
This
HTML
(text)
document
that
details
the
systems
hardware,
software
and
currently
loaded
Show
file
configurations.
This
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA
and
software
andlido
currently
loaded
Show
filede
configurations.
This
document
can
be
read
by
any
Internet
browser,
such
as
Interpode
ser
por
qualquer
browser
internet,
como
Internet
document
can
be currently
read
by any
Internet
browser,
such as
Inter-This
software
and
loaded
Show
file configurations.
document
can
read
any
Internet
browser,
DVI
supported.
Explorer,
Mozilla
Firefox
ou
Safari.
document
can be
beMozilla
read by
byFirefox
any
Internet
browser, such
such as
as InterInternet
Explorer,
or Safari.
net
Explorer,
Mozilla
Firefox
or
Safari.
documentMozilla
can beFirefox
read byor
any
Internet browser, such as Internet
Safari.
net Explorer,
Explorer,
Mozilla
Firefox
or
Safari.
net The
Explorer,
Firefox
or Safari.separately
A patch
lista Mozilla
decanendereamentos
pode ser
exportada
list
also
be exported
(for
more
inThe
patch
also
be
exported
separately
(for
more
inTheformation,
patch list
list can
can
also
be
exported
separately
(for
more
inseparadamente
(para
mais
informaes,
veja
Exportao
individually
cancel
the reassignment.
The
patch
list
can
also
be
exported
separately
(for
more
insee
Patch
List
Export
on
page
114).
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
formation,
see
Patch
on
page
114).
To confirm
a reassignment,
do one
of the
following:
The
patch
list
canList
alsoExport
be exported
separately
formation,
see
Patch
List
Export
onpgina
page
114).
de
Lista
dePatch
Endereamentos
na
114).(for more inTo confirm
a
reassignment,
do
one
of
the
following:
formation,
see
List
Export
on
page
114).
8Assign
analog
outputperguntado
channels;
up to
48 analog or
confirm
a
do
of
following:
To
Clique
quando
para
a reatribuio.
To
confirm
a reassignment,
reassignment,
do one
one expandable
of the
theconfirmar
following:
formation,
see
Patch
List
Export
on
page
114).requires
The
connection
between
FOH
Rack
and
Stage
Rack
System
Information
document
can
be sent
directly
to pro To
Click
Assign
when
prompted
to confirm
the
reassignment. TheThe
confirm
a reassignment,
one
of thethe
following:
outputs
per
Stagedo
Rack.
System
Information
document
can
be
sent
directly
to
pro Clickdigital
Assign
when
prompted
to
confirm
reassignment.
The
System
Information
document
can
be
sent
directly
to
pro Click Assign when prompted to confirm the reassignment.
O
documento
System
Information
pode
ser
enviado
diretamente
a
Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable
can
be
purchased
directly
The
System
Information
document
can
be
sent
directly
to
production
or
rental
companies
to
describe
your
exact
console
Assign when prompted to confirm the reassignment.
ouClick
Click
duction
or
rental
companies
to
describe
your
console
The
System
Information
document
can
beexact
sent
directly
duction
or
rental
companies
to
describe
your
exact
consoleto pro needs.
produtora
oucompanies
locadora
para
descrever
exatamente
suas
or or Assign when prompted to confirm the reassignment. duction

from
Avid
or
assembled
by
your preferred
vendor.
or
rental
to
describe
your
exact
console
Once
exported,
the
information
can
be
re-formatted
as
Synchronization
and Control I/O
needs.
Once
exported,
the
information
can
be
re-formatted
as
or
or
duction
or
rental
companies
to
describe
your
exact
console
necessidades
de
console.
Aps
exportada,
a
informao
pode
ser
needs.
Once
exported,
the
information
can
be
re-formatted
as
needs.
Once
exported,
the
information
can
be
re-formatted
as
Click
again
on
the
same
patch
point.
or
desired
by
copying
and
pasting
the
data
into
a
word
processClique
novamente
no
mesmo
ponto
de
interseo.
Click
again
on
point.
desired
by
copying
and
pasting
the
data
a
word
processneeds.
Once
exported,
the information
can
be re-formatted
as
reformatada
como
desejado,
colando
einto
copiando
dados
em um
Snake
enable
Click
again connectors
on the
the same
sametopatch
patch
point.
desired
by
copying
and
pasting
the
data
into
a
word
process Click again on the same patch point.
desired
by
copying
and
pasting
the
data
into
a
word
processing
or spreadsheet
application.
ing
or
spreadsheet
application.
Optional
Components
processador
de
textos.
Click
again on
the same to
patch
point.FOH Rack.
desired
by
copying
and
pasting
the
data
into
a
word
processapplicable)
connection
a
VENUE
ing or
or spreadsheet
spreadsheet application.
application.
Para Tocancelar
uma reatribuio,
dos seguintes ing
cancelreassignment,
a reassignment,
do eithersiga
of theum
following:
To
ing or spreadsheet application.
To cancel
cancel a
a reassignment,
reassignment, do
do either
either of
of the
the following:
following:
procedimentos:
The
following
components
To
cancel
a
do
either
of
the
following:
To export
VENUE
System
Information:
Para
exportar
VENUE
System
Information:
To
Click
Cancel
to leave the patchpoint
unchanged.
To
export
VENUE
System
Information:
cancel
a reassignment,
do either of the
following:
Click Cancel to leave the patchpoint unchanged.
To
export
VENUE
System
Information:
purchased
separately:
To export VENUE System Information:
Click Cancel to leave the patchpoint unchanged.
Click Cancel
Cancel para
to leave
theopatchpoint
unchanged.
1 To
Insert
a USB
key
disk
into
a USB
port
on
the
system.
export
VENUE
System
Information:
Clique
deixar
ponto
de interseo
inalterado.
Insert
a
USB
key
disk
into
a
USB
port
on
the
system.
Click
Click
any
Cancel
other
to
point
leave
in
the
the
patchpoint
grid
(the
Patchbay
unchanged.
grid
remains 1
Insira
uma
mdia
de
armazenamento
USB
na porta
USB
flash
disk
(or
other
portable
USB
storage
deviceUSB
for do
System
Components
1
a
key
disk
into
a
port
the
system.
Click
any
other
point
in
the
grid
(the
Patchbay
grid
remains
1 1Insert
Insert
a USB
USB
key
disk
into
a USB
USB
port on
on
the
system.
Click any other point in the grid (the Patchbay grid remains
Click
any
other
point
inConfirm
the grid (the
Patchbaydialog
grid remains
active,
even
when
the
Assignment
is open
2 1Go
Insert
to the
a USB
Options
key
>
disk
System
into
apage.
USBorport
on recommended)
the system.
sistema.
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
larger
active,
even
when
the
Confirm
Assignment
dialog
is
open
2
Go
to
the
Options
>
System
page.
active,
Clique
qualquer
outro point
pontoin
nothe
gridgrid
(o Patchbay
grid se
mantm
Click
any other
(the Patchbay
grid
remains 2 Go to the Options > System page.
even
active,
even when
when the
the Confirm
Confirm Assignment
Assignment dialog
dialog is
is open
open
2 Go to the Options > System page.
on-screen).
on-screen).
Near-field
monitor
speakers
ativo,
mesmoeven
quando
a caixa
de dilogoAssignment
de confirmao
est
active,
when
the Confirm
dialog
is aberta
open
3V
2Click
to
the
the
Info
Options
button.
System page.
Included
Components
on-screen).
Go
pgina
Options
> >System.
3 2Click
the
Info
button.
on-screen).
3
Click
the
Info
button.
na tela).
3 Click
the Info button.
on-screen).
Headphones
with 1/4-inch jack
3 Click the Info button.
3 Clique
no boto
Dynamic
orInfo.
condenser microphone and XLR mic cable
(for Talkback)
Export VENUE System Information button in Options > System
Export VENUE
buttonexternal
in OptionsMIDI
> System
MIDI System
cables Information
(for connecting
devices)
Export
Export VENUE
VENUE System
System Information
Information button
button in
in Options
Options >
> System
System
4 Export
any
of the
following:
VENUE
System
Information
button
in
Options
> System
Expor
VENUE
System
Information
na pgina
> between
System
Do
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
WordOptions
clock
the
4 Boto
Do
4 Do
Do any
any of
of the
the following:
following:
VENUE Mouse Pad
4
any
of
the
following:
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
If
you
have
more
than
one
USB
key
disk
connected,
make
youany
than
one
USB
key
disk
connected,
make
4If Do
ofmore
the following:
If
have
more
than
one
USB
key
disk
connected,
make
4Siga
umhave
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
VENUE Profile Guide
If you
you
have
more
than
one
USB
key
diskto
connected,
make
sure
the
correct
USB
key
disk
is
selected.
If
it
is
not,
click
sure
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
GPI
devices)
the
correct
USB
key
disk
selected.
If
it
is
not, click
If
you
havemais
more
than
oneis
USB
key
connected,
make
sure
Se
voc
tem
que
uma
mdia
dedisk
armazenamento
USB
Warning when reassigning an output that is already in use
the
correct
USB
disk
is
selected.
If
it
is
click
sure
the
correct
USB key
key
disk
iseach
selected.
If
it disk
is not,
not,
click
Warning
when(2)
reassigning
an
output that is already in use
Next
Disk
to
cycle
through
available
until
the
Two
console
lights
Warning
reassigning an
output
that
already in
Next
Disk
to
cycle
through
each
available
disk
the
sure
the
correct
USB key
disk
isaselected.
Ifuntil
it is
not,
click
conectada,
certifique-se
de
que
mdia
USB
correta
est
Warning when
when
output
that is
is
in use
use
Next
Disk
to
cycle
through
each
available
disk
until
the
Advertncia
quandoreassigning
atribuir uma an
sada
que esteja
emalready
uso
Next
Disk to
cycle
through each available disk until the
correct
one
is selected.
Warning
when reassigning
an output that is already in use
Protective
Dust Cover
correct
is
selected.
selecionada.
Secycle
no,through
clique Next
Disk paradisk
alternar
pelas
Nextone
Disk
to
each available
until the
correct
one
is
selected.
To
suppress
the
reassignment
warning
dialog,
hold
Default
correct
one
is
selected.
Click
Save
to
proceed
and
export
system
info
to
the
sesuppress
the
reassignment
warning
dialog,
hold
Default
mdias
disponveis
at
que
a
correta
esteja
selecionada.
To
Rack(s)
(see
next)
Click
Save
to
proceed
and
info
correct
one
is selected.
To
suppress
the reassignment
reassignment
warning
dialog,
hold while
Default
Para
eliminar
aorcaixa
dilogodialog,
de
advertencia
de
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
To
suppress
the
warning
hold
Default
Click
Save
to
proceed
and export
export system
system
info to
to the
the seseon the
console
Alt
on de
the
computer
keyboard
clickSave
to
proceed
and
export
system
info
the
selected
USB
disk.exportar
on
the
or
Alt
on
the
computer
keyboard
while
Click
Clique
Save
para
as informaes
do to
sistema
para a
Toconsole
suppress
the
reassignment
dialog,
hold
Default
reatribuio,
segure
Default
na warning
console
ou Alt
noclickteclado
lected
USB
disk.
on
the
console
or
Alt
on
the
computer
keyboard
while
click
Click
Save
to
proceed
and
export
system
info
to the seon
the
console
or
Alt
on
the
computer
keyboard
while
clicklected
USB
disk.
ing
in
the
patch
grid
to
change
the
assignment.
lected
USB
disk.
mdia
USB
desejada.
ing
in
the
patch
grid
to
change
the
assignment.
The
following
options
can
be
added
to
VENUE
Profile
systems.
do
computador
enquanto
clica
no
patch
grid
para
alterar
a
Click
Cancel
to
dismiss
the
dialog
without
exporting.
on
the
console
or
Alt
on
the
computer
keyboard
while
clicking in
in Software
the patch
patch grid
grid
to change
change
theand
assignment.
Racks,
CDs,
iLoks,
Cables
lected
USB
disk.sairthe
Click
Cancel
to
dismiss
without exporting.
ing
the
to
the
assignment.
Cancel
to
dismiss
the
dialog
For
Clique
Cancel
para
semdialog
exportar
details
on all
systems
andwithout
options,exporting.
visit the Avid
atribuio.
Click
Click
Cancel
toVENUE
dismiss
the
dialog
without
exporting.
ing in the patch grid to change the assignment.
Click
Cancel
to
dismiss
the
dialog
without exporting.
5 Click
OK
to
confirm
the
export
procedure.
Shortcut
for
Locating
Assignments
Each Mix Rack
or
FOH Rack includes:
5 website
Click
OK
to
confirm
the
export
procedure.
(www.avid.com).
Shortcut
for
Locating
Assignments
5 5Click
Click
OK
topara
confirm
the export
export
procedure.
Shortcut
for
Locating
Assignments
5
OK
confirm
the
procedure.
Clique
OKto
confirmar
o procedimento
de exportao.
Shortcut
for
Locating
Assignments
Atalhos
Localizao
de
Atribuio
para
System
Restore
CD
5 Click
OK to
confirm
the
export
procedure.
You
can
now
remove
the
USB
key
disk
from
there,
you
can
Shortcut
for
Locating
Assignments
Before
reassigning
in
the
Patchbay,
you
may
want
to
douYou
can
remove
the
USB
key
disk
there,
you
can
Before
reassigning
in
the
Patchbay,
you
may
want
to
douYoutransfer
can now
now
remove
thefile
USB
key
disk from
from
there,for
you
can
Before
reassigning
in
the
Patchbay,
you
may
want
to
douYou
can
now
remove
the
USB
key
disk
from
there,
you
can
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Software
Installer
CD
the
exported
to
a
personal
computer
printing,
Before
reassigning
in
the
Patchbay,
you
may
want
to
douVoc
pode
remover
a
mdia
USB
dela
voc
pode
transferir
o
ble-check
the
existing
assignment
to
the
desired
hardware
Mix
Rack
Options
Antes
da reatribuio
no
Patchbay,
voc
pode
querer
transfer
file
a
personal
for
printing,
ble-check
the
existing
assignment
to
the
desired
Youthe
canexported
now remove
the
USB key computer
disk from
there,
you can
Before
reassigning
in the
Patchbay,
you
mayhardware
want tochecar
doutransfer
the
exported
file to
to
adistribution.
personal
computer
forpara
printing,
ble-check
the
existing
assignment
to
the
hardware
transfer
the
exported
file
to
a
personal
computer
for
printing,
formatting,
archiving
or
arquivo
exportado
para
um
computador
pessoal
impresso,
ble-check
the
existing
assignment
to
the desired
desired
hardware
output:
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
duplamente
a
atribuio
existente
para
a
sada
de
hardware
formatting,
or
output:
transfer archiving
the exported
file to a personal computer for printing,
ble-check the existing assignment to the desired hardware
formatting,
archiving
or distribution.
distribution.
output:
formatao,
arquivamento
ou distribuio.
formatting,
archiving
or
distribution.
output:
desejada:
I/O
Options
formatting,
archiving or distribution.
output:
Standalone
Software
Toidentify
the
bus
or channels
currently
assigned
tohardware
a hardware
Standalone Software
To
identify
the
bus
or
channels
currently
assigned
to
a
Plug-in
installer
discs (if
any)
with
pre-authorized
iLok
Software
Standalone
Software
To
identify
the
bus
or
channels
assigned
to
a
hardware
AI16 Analog
Standalone
Software
Para
identificar
o bus
ou canaiscurrently
atualmente
atribudos
para uma Standalone
output:
To
identify
the
bus
or
channels
currently
assigned
to
a
hardware
output:
Standalone
Software
When
exporting
System
Info
from
the
Standalone
software,
To
identify
or channels
hardware:
Two (2)the
IECbus
power
cables currently assigned to a hardware When
output:
mic/line
level
inputs
sada
de
exporting
System
Info
from
the
Standalone
software,
output:
When
exporting
System
Info
from
the
Standalone
software,
output:
Click
on
any
dimmed
(already
assigned)
column
number
at
When
exporting
System
Info
from
the
Standalone
software,
the
exported
System
Information
file
is
displayed
immediately
Quando
exportar
System
Info
do
software
Standalone,
o arquivo
Click
on any
dimmed
(already
assigned) column
number
at
One
FOH
Link cable
for connection
to a VENUE
console
the
exported
System
Information
is
displayed
immediately
When exporting
System Infofile
from
the Standalone
software,
Click on any dimmed (already assigned) column number at
the
exported
System
Information
file
is
displayed
immediately
Click
on
any
dimmed
(already
assigned)
column
number
atasthe
top
of
the
Patchbay.
The
Outputs
tab
containing
the
System
Information
exportado
apresentado
imediatamente
the
exported
System
Information
file
is
displayed
immediately
AO16
Analog
Output
Card
that
provides
16
analog
line
level
using
the
default
browser
installed
on
your
computer.
the
Clique
em
qualquer
nmero
de
coluna
assinalada
no
alto
do
top
of
the
The
Outputsassigned)
tab
containing
the
asthe
default
browser
installed
on
your
computer.
Click
onPatchbay.
any dimmed
(already
column
number
at using
the
exported
System
Information
file
isseu
displayed
immediately
the
top
of
the
Patchbay.
The
tab
the
using
the
default
browser
installed
on
your
computer.
utilizando
o browser
padro
instalado
em
computador.
theEach
top Stage
of
theis
Patchbay.
The Outputs
Outputs
tab containing
containing
the asassignment
automatically
revealed.
using
the
default
browser
installed
on
your
computer.
outputs
Rack
includes:
Patchbay.
A
aba
Outputs
contendo
as
atribuies
automaticamente
signment
is
automatically
revealed.
the top
of
the Patchbay.
The Outputs tab containing the asusing the default browser installed on your computer.
signment
is
automatically
revealed.
signment
is (2)
automatically
revealed.
revelada.
Two
IEC
power cables
VENUE
System
Information
Contents
signment
is
automatically
revealed.
VENUE
System
Contents
Contedo
do VENUE
SystemOutput
Information
Click
XO16
andInformation
Digital
VENUE Analog
System
Information
Contents
Click
VENUE
System
Information
Contents
Click
Click
line
level outputs,
and
8 AES
digital Contents
outputs.
VENUE
System
Information
Exported
VENUE
System
Information
is saved
as an
HTML
Exported
VENUE
System
Information
is
saved
as
an
HTML
Click
Ofile,
VENUE
System
Information
exportado
and
salvo
como
um
arquivo
Exported
VENUE
System
Information
is
saved
as
an
HTML
Exported
VENUE
System
Information
is
saved
astime
an
HTML
and
the
file
name
includes
the
date
of
the
exfile,
and
the
file
name
includes
the
date
and
time
of
the
exExported
VENUE
System
Information
is
saved
asda
an
HTML
HTML,
e
o
nome
do
arquivo
inclui
a
data
e
a
hora
exportao.
AT16
A-Net
Output
Card
that
provides
16
channels
of
A-Net
file,
and
the
file
name
includes
the
date
and
time
of
the
exfile,port.
and Contents
the file name
includes
the date (not
and time
of the
exinclude
the
following
all
data
will
be
genClicking a column number to go to its current assignment
port.
Contents
include
the
following
(not
all Mixers
data
will
be
genClicking
column
number
to para
go to
its suas
current
assignment
Ooutput
contedo
inclui
seguintes
informaes
(nem
todos
os dados
Clicando
umaum
nmero
de coluna
ir para
atribuies
atuais
file,
and
the
fileas
name
includes
the
date
and
time
of the
excompatible
with
Personal
and
port.
Contents
include
the
following
(not
be
genClicking
port.
Contents
include
the Aviom
following
(not all
all data
data will
will
beother
genClicking a
a column
column number
number to
to go
go to
to its
its current
current assignment
assignment
erated
from
the
Standalone
software):
erated
from
the
Standalone
software):
sero
gerados
pelo
software
Standalone):
port.
Contents
include
the
following (not all data will be genClicking a column number to go to its current assignment
Pro16
Series
devices.
erated
from
the
Standalone
software):
erated from the Standalone software):
erated from the Standalone software):
digital I/O.
Captulo
12:12:
Patchbay
Chapter
Patchbay 113
113

Chapter
Patchbay
113
Chapterto12:
12:
Patchbay
Chapter 1: Introduction
VENUE
Profile113
5
VENUE
VENUE
System
Information
Registra
data
e aand
hora
em the
queInfo
o arquivo
Info
System
Information
Listsathe
date
time
file was
foi gerado.
generated.
Console
Registra
configurao
atual doconfiguration
hardware e de
opcionais
Console
Lists athe
current hardware
and
inda console,
incluindofor
placas
ECx e FWx
(se existentes).
stalled options
the console,
including
ECx and FWx cards
(if any).
Stage Configuration Registra o contedo de cada slot do Stage

RackStage
ou doConfiguration
Stage I/O. Lists card slot contents for each detected
Stage Rack or Stage I/O slot.
Installed Plug-Ins Registra verses e outras informaes (como

informado
por
cada Lists
plug-in)
de todos
os plug-ins
atualmente
Installed
Plug-Ins
version
and other
information
(as reinstalados.
A lista
osfor
plug-ins
por seuinstalled
estado de
habilitado
ported by
eachagrupa
plug-in)
all currently
plug-ins.
The
ou desabilitado.
Plug-insby
habilitados
e emare
usoEnabled
aparecem
no topo,
list groups plug-ins
whether they
or Disabled.
seguidos
por qualquer plug-ins habilitado (mas no em uso). As
Enabled and In Use plug-ins appear at the top, followed by
informaes dos plug-ins no esto disponveis quando exportando
any remaining enabled (but not In Use) plug-ins. Plug-in inda verso Standalone do software.
formation is not available when exporting from the Stand-
alone
software. Registra o nome, caminho, data e hora dos
Show
File Information
mais recentes arquivos Show carregados.
Show File Information Lists the name, file path, date and time
of the
most recently
loadedinformaes
Show file. encontradas na aba
System
Configuration
Registra
Options > System.
System Configuration Lists information found on the Options

System
tab. os processos atribudos a cada DSP da placa
DSP >Usage
Registra
Mix Engine. A informao subdividida por Mix Engine como

DSP Usage Lists the processes assigned to each DSP of each
apresentado na aba Options > Devices.
Mix Engine card. Information is sub-divided by Mix Engine as
displayed
on the
Options de
> Devices
tab. Patchbay. Uma lista
Patch
List Registra
o contedo
cada pgina
completa de endereamentos est includa no System Information
Patch List Lists the contents of each Patchbay page. A comExport,
ou uma lista detalhada pode ser exportada separadamente
patch
list a
is seguir).
included in the System Information Export,
peloplete
Patchbay
(veja
or a detailed patch list can be exported separately from the
Patchbay (see next).
Patch List Export
Patch List Export

A exportao do Patchbay gera uma lista de endereamentos em
um formato
de fcilexport
leitura.generates a patch list in an easily readThe Patchbay
Para exportar informaes do Patchbay:
To export
Patchbay
information:
1 Insira
uma mdia
USB em
qualquer porta USB na console.
1 Insert a USB key disk into any USB port on the console.
2 V pgina Patchbay.
2 Go to the Patchbay page.

3 Click the Export button on the Patchbay page.
Export button
Guia VENUE Profile
sonal computer for printing, formatting, and distribution.
Quando exportar um Patch List pela verso Standalone do

When exporting a Patch List from the Standalone software,
software, o arquivo HTML gerado automaticamente aberto
the
generated
HTML
file isdeautomatically
opened
usingInternet
utilizando
seu
browser
internet padro
(como
your
default
Internet
browser
(such
as
Internet
Explorer,
Explorer, Mozilla Firefox ou outro).
Mozilla Firefox or other).
Contedo do Exported Patchbay Information
Contents of Exported Patchbay Information
O Exported Patchbay Information salvo como um arquivo HTML, e

information
saved
an HTML O
file,
and
oExported
nome do Patchbay
arquivo inclui
a data e aishora
daas
exportao.
contedo
the file name includes the date and time of the export. Coninclui:
tents include the following:
VENUE Patch List

VENUE Patch List
Show Nome, caminho, data e hora dos arquivos Show mais
Show Name, carregados.
file path, date and time of most recently loaded
recentemente
Show file.
Input and Output Patching

Input and Output Patching
A lista de endereamentos dividida em trs sees: Stage, FOH e
The patch list is divided into three sections: Stage, FOH, and
Pro Tools (FWx).
Pro Tools (FWx).
Stageinputs
Inputsshow
mostra
nmero
global
1-48,
nome
das entradas,
Stage
global
number
1-48,
input
name(s),
card
slotand
e nmero
da placa.
slot
number.
Stage Outputs mostra o nmero global 1-16 (ou 32 em sistemas
Stage
outputs show
number
(or 32
expanded
expandidos),
nome global
da sada,
slot e1-16
nmero
da on
placa.
output
card
slot and
number.
systems),
FOH Inputs
and name,
Outputs
(local)
mostra
nome e nmero das
entradas/sadas
quandoshow
aplicvel.
FOH
(local) inputsfsicas,
and outputs
the physical inPro
Tools
Inputs
and
Outputs
mostra
todas as 18 possveis
put/output name and number, where applicable.
atribuies de entradas/sadas.
Pro
Toolsindisponveis
inputs and outputs
show all
18 possible
Canais
so marcados
como
N/A. input/output
assignments.
Direct
outs so identificados diferentemente.
Unavailable channels are labelled N/A.

Direct outs are identified uniquely.
3 Clique no boto Export na pgina Patchbay.
114
Click
to dismissothe
dialog without
exporting. Voc
5 Clique
OKCancel
para confirmar
procedimento
de exportao.
pode
remover
a
mdia
USB
dela
voc
pode
transferir
o arquivo
5 Click OK to confirm the export procedure. You can now
reexportado para um computador pessoal para impresso, formatao,
move the USB key disk and transfer the export file to a perarquivamento ou distribuio.
able format.
Patchbay
Information icon
coneExport
Export Patchbay
Information
44Siga
seguintes
procedimentos:
Do um
anydos
of the
following:
Se voc tem mais que uma mdia de armazenamento USB
conectada,
If you havecertifique-se
more than one
disk connected,
make
de USB
quekey
a mdia
USB correta
est
sure the correct
USB one
is selected.
If itpara
is not,
click Next
selecionada.
Se no,
clique
Next Disk
alternar
pelas
Disk to
cycle through
each
disk until
the correct
mdias
disponveis
at que
a available
correta esteja
selecionada.
one isSave
selected.
Clique
para exportar as informaes do Patchbay para a
desejada.
mdia
ClickUSB
Save
to proceed and export Patchbay info to the se Clique
Cancel
para
sair sem exportar
lected USB key
disk.
Chapter
13:
Metering
Chapter
13:
Metering
Chapter
13:
Metering
Captulo
13:13:
Metering
Chapter
Chapter
13:Metering
Metering
Stage Rack Features
Stage Racks
are used
an FOH
and provide
all mestage
VENUE
provides
signalwith
metering
onRack,
the channels,
in the

The following components
must
be purchased
separately:
Compressor/Limiter
Gain
Reduction
Meter
A VENUE
oferece
medio
demetering
sinal
doson
canais,
na
seoin
metering
de Reduo de Ganho
do Compressor/Limiter
VENUE
signal
the to
channels,
the me- Medidor
Compressor/Limiter
Gain
Reduction Meter
audio
I/Oprovides
for and
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
two Stage
Racks
tering
section,
on-screen.
Compressor/Limiter
Video Display (15-inch or
greater
flat-panel Meter
VGA display
VENUE
provides
signal
metering on the channels, in the meGain
Reduction
e na
tela.
tering
section,
and
on-screen.
The LEDs in the Compressor/Limiter
meter show
the amount
LEDs
in the Compressor/Limiter
meter
show
the
amount
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA
and
tering
section,
and
on-screen.
OsThe
LEDs
no medidor
do Compressor/Limiter
mostram
a quantidade
VENUE
VENUE
provides
provides
signal
signal
metering
metering
on on
thethe
channels,
channels,
in the
in the
me-me- Compressor/Limiter
Compressor/Limiter
Gain
Gain
Reduction
Reduction
Meter
Meter
of gain
reduction
being
applied
to
the
input
channel
byamount
the
The
LEDs
in
the
Compressor/Limiter
meter
show
the
de
reduo
de
ganho
sendo
aplicada
ao
Input
Channel
pelo
of
gain
reduction
being
applied
to
the
input
channel
by the
DVI supported.
tering
tering
section,
section,
and
and
on-screen.
on-screen.
built-in
Compressor/limiter
from right
to input
left, according
to the
Audio I/O
of
gain
reduction
being
applied
the
channel
by
Compressor/Limiter
embutido,
datodireita
para
a the
esquerda,
de
The
The
LEDs
LEDs
in
the
in the
Compressor/Limiter
Compressor/Limiter
meter
meter
show
show
the
amount
amount
built-in
Compressor/limiter
from
right
to
left,
according
to
Channel
Meters
USB
keyboard
the
following
Channel
built-in
Compressor/limiter
from
to channel
left,channel
according
to
com
a scale:
seguinte
tabela:
Channel
Meters
48 Meters
inputs with
remotely controllable mic preamps and
ofacordo
gain
of gain
reduction
reduction
being
being
applied
applied
to the
toright
the
input
input
by by
thethe
the
following
scale:
Channel
Meters
individually
selectable
Input
and
FX return
channelsphantom
provide apower.
compressor/limiter
Input
and FX
return
channels
provide
compressor/limiter
Input
Channels
e FX
Return
oferecem
um amedidor
de reduo
Channel
Channel
Meters
Meters
gain
an
input level
meter,
and
indicator
reduction
8 analog
output
channels;
expandable
up
to
48 analog
or
Input
andcompressor/limiter,
FXmeter,
return
provide
a compressor/limiter
de ganho
do
um
medidor
de
e LEDs
gain reduction
meter,channels
an input
level
meter,
andnvel
indicator
LEDs
for
EQ, stereo,
and
gate
status.
digital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
gain
reduction
meter,
an
input
level
meter,
and
indicator
indicadores
para
status
de
EQ,
estreo
e
gate.
Input
Input
and
and
FX
FX
return
return
channels
channels
provide
provide
a
compressor/limiter
a
compressor/limiter
LEDs for EQ, stereo, and gate status.
LEDs
for EQ,meter,
stereo,
and
gate
status.
gain
gain
reduction
reduction
meter,
an
an
input
input
level
level
meter,
meter,
andand
indicator
indicator
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O
Comp/Lim
LEDs
LEDs
forfor
EQ,EQ,
stereo,
stereo,
and
and
gate
gate
status.
status.
Comp/Lim
Gain
Reduction
Comp/Lim
Snake
Gain
Reduction
Gain
Reduction
applicable)
Comp/Lim
Comp/Lim
Gain
Gain
Reduction
Reduction
Input
Level
Input Level
Input Level
System
Components
EQInput
In/Out
Input
Level
Level
EQ In/Out
EQ In/Out
Stereo
Stereo
Included
Components
EQ EQ
In/Out
In/Out
Input
channel
meters
and LEDs
Stereo
Medidores
de Input
Channel
Inpute LEDs
channel
meters
and LEDs
Gate
Gate
Gate
Gate
Gate
All
VENUE
Profile
systems
include
the resolution
following: on-screen
Input
channel
meters
and
LEDs
Stereo
Stereo
All
console
channel
meters
have
higher
the
following
scale:
Channel
Compressor/Limiter
gain
reduction
meter
built-in
built-in
Compressor/limiter
Compressor/limiter
from
from
right
right
to left,
to scale
left,
according
according
to to
Digital
Snake
Cable (VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
Channel
Compressor/Limiter
gain
reduction
meter scale
the
the
following
following
scale:
scale:
Channel Compressor/Limiter
gain reduction
meter scale
LED
Gain Reduction
Color
The
FOH Rack andColor
Stage Rack requires
LED connection between
Gain Reduction
Channel
Channel
Compressor/Limiter
Compressor/Limiter
gain
gain
reduction
reduction
meter
meter
scale
scale directly
LED
Gain
Reduction
Color
a
Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable
can
be
purchased
none
0 dB
Off
none
0 dB
Off
none
Off
1 (right)
<= 03 dB
dB
Green
1 (right)
<= 3 dB
Green
none
none
0 dB
0 dB
Off Off
1 (right)
3 dB
Green
2Optional
<= <=
6 dB
Green
Components
2
<= 6 dB
Green
1 (right)
1 (right)
<= <=
3 dB
3 dB
Green
Green
2
<=
6dBdB
Green
3The
(left)
<=
12
Green
components
and must be
3 following
(left)
<= 12are
dBoptional, Green
2 2
<= <=
6 dB
6 dB
Green
Green
3 (left) separately: <= 12 dB
Green
purchased
by
your preferred
vendor.
LEDfrom
LED Avid or assembled
Gain
Gain
Reduction
Reduction
Color
Color
EQ
Status LED <= <=
3 EQ
(left)
12
dB dB
Green
Green
3 (left)
USB
flashLED
disk (or 12
other
portable USB
storage device for
Status
LED
de
status EQ
EQ
Status
transfer
ofLED
Show data;
MB or
larger
A single
red LED
indicates
EQ512
In/Out
status
as recommended)
shown in the
single
red
LED
indicates EQ In/Out status as shown in the
EQA
EQ
Status
LED
LED
following
table.
Status
Near-field
A
single
red
LEDindica
indicates
In/Out
in acordo
the
Um
LED
vermelho
se o EQ
EQ est
no status
circuitoasoushown
no, de
following
table.
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
com
a
seguinte
tabela.
following
table.
A single
A single
redred
LED
LED
indicates
indicates
EQEQ
In/Out
In/Out
status
status
as shown
as shown
in the
in the
Color
EQ Status
Color
Dynamic
or condenser
EQ Status microphone and XLR mic cable
following
table.
table.
All
console
channel
meters
have higher
resolution
on-screen
Todos
medidores
de
canal
da console
possuem
equivalentes
de following
os
VENUE
Profile
console
Input
Input
channel
channel
meters
meters
and
and
LEDs
equivalents
that
appear
inLEDs
both
the targeted
channel
controls
Color
Status
All
console
channel
meters
have
higher
resolution
on-screen
(for
Talkback)
(none)
NotEQ
in circuit
equivalents
in both the
controls
alta resoluo
nathat
tela,appear
que aparecem
emtargeted
ambos channel
os controles
de
(none)
Not in circuit
andequivalents
above
the
faders
in the
channel
overview.
Two
(2)
IEC
power
cables
that
appear
in
both
the
targeted
channel
controls
Color
Color
EQ
EQ
Status
All and
All
console
console
channel
channel
meters
meters
have
have
higher
higher
resolution
resolution
on-screen
on-screen
FootswitchesNot
(upStatus
2)
above
the
indos
the
channel
overview.
canal
selecionados
efaders
abaixo
faders
na viso
geral dos
canais.
intocircuit
Red(none)
In circuit
and
above
the
faders
inVGA
theboth
channel
overview.
Monitor
mount
for
screen
(screen
not
included)
equivalents
equivalents
that
that
appear
appear
both
in
thethe
targeted
channel
controls
controls
Meter
ballistics
and
clip in
margin
can
be targeted
set forchannel
channel
meters.
In circuit
Red
MIDI cables
connecting
(none)
(none)
Not(for
Not
in circuit
in circuit
ballistics
and
margin
can
be
set for
channel
meters.
Red
In circuit
Medidores
balsticos
e margem
dechannel
clipe
podem
seron
ajustados
para
andMeter
and
above
thethe
faders
faders
inclip
the
in Metering
the
channel
overview.
overview.
above
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
For
more
information,
see
page 118.
BNC
cables (for
Meter
ballistics
and mais
clip
margin
canOptions
beveja
set for
channel
meters.
Channel
LED
For more
information,
see
Metering
Options
on page
118. Stereo
medidores
de
canal.
Para
informaes,
Metering
Options
Red
Red
In circuit
In circuit
Stereo
Channel
LEDexternal digital devices)
VENUE
Mouse Pad see Metering Options on page 118.
VENUE
system
and
For
more
information,
Meter
ballistics
ballistics
andand
clipclip
margin
margin
cancan
be set
be set
forfor
channel
channel
meters.
meters. LED
naMeter
pgina
118.
Stereo
Channel
LED a stereo input channel. The stede canal
Stereo
A single
yellow
LED indicates
VENUE
Profile Guide
For
For
more
more
information,
information,
seesee
Metering
Metering
Options
Options
on on
page
page
118.
118.
Input
Channels
and
FX
Returns
FX Returns
Input Channels and FX Returns
Protective
Dust Cover
Input
Level
Meters
Input
Input
Channels
and
and
FXFX
Returns
Returns
InputChannels
Meters
Medidores
deLevel
Nvel de
Entrada
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for connecting
to GPI
devices)
Asingle
yellow
LED
indicates
a stereo input
channel.
The steStereo
Channel
Channel
LED
LED
reoStereo
channel
LED flashes
if a 12 dBa or
greater
offset
is detected
A
single
yellow
LED
indicates
stereo
input
channel.
The stereo
channel
LED
flashes
ifcanal
a 12 dB
or
greater
offset isOdetected
Um
LED
amarelo
indica
um
de
entrada
estreo.
LED
pisca
between
left and
right
inputs.
reo
channel
LED
flashes
if
a
12
dB
or
greater
offset
is
detected
Ase
single
A
single
yellow
yellow
LED
LED
indicates
indicates
a
stereo
a
stereo
input
input
channel.
channel.
The
ste-stebetween
left and
inputs.
uma diferena
deright
12 dB
ou mais detectada entre asThe
entradas
between
and
rightifinputs.
reo
reo
channel
channel
LED
LED
flashes
flashes
aif12
a 12
dB dB
or greater
or greater
offset
offset
is detected
is detected
esquerda
e left
direita.
Rack(s)
(seeMeters
next)
Input
Color
Channel Expansion
Status
VENUE
Profile
Options
Each
inputLevel
and FX
return channel strip has a 6-segment Input
Color
Channel
Status
between
between
left
left
and
and
right
right
inputs.
inputs.
Each
input
and
FX return
strip
has um
a 6-segment
Input
Cada
rgua
de
Input
Channel
e channel
FXlevels
Return
possui
medidor
Input
Input
Input
Level
Level
Meters
Meters
Color
Channel
Level
meter
that
shows
input
from
bottom
to top, ac(none)
Mono
Each
input
and
FX
return
channel
strip
hasbottom
a 6-segment
The
following options
can Status
Level
meter
that
shows
input
levels
from
to
top,
acLevel
de 6 segmentos
queCDs,
mostra
os nveis
de Cables
entrada de baixo Input
para
Racks,
Software
iLoks,
and
(none)
Mono
cording
to
the
following
scale:
Color
Color
Channel
Channel
Status
Status and options, visit the Avid
Level
meter
that
shows
input
levels
from
to top,
acFor(none)
details on all VENUE
systems
Each
Each
input
and
and
FXfollowing
FX
return
return
channel
channel
strip
strip
hashas
a bottom
6-segment
a 6-segment
Input
Input
Mono
cording
to
the
scale:
cima,
deinput
acordo
coma
seguinte
escala:
Yellow
Stereo
cording
to
the
scale:
Each
Mix
Rack
or
FOH
Rack
includes:
Yellow(www.avid.com).
Stereo
website
following
Level
Level
meter
meter
that
that
shows
shows
input
input
levels
levels
from
from
bottom
bottom
to top,
to top,
ac-ac(none)
(none)
Mono
Mono
LED
Level
Colors
Yellow
Stereo
Colors
cording
cording
to the
to the
following
following
scale:
scale:
LED
System
Restore
CDLevel
Gate
Status
LED
LED
Yellow
YellowStatusStereo
Stereo
Gate
LED
1 (top)
ClipLevelSoftware Installer
RedColors
CD
Mix
Rack
Options
1 (top)
Clip
Red
Gate
Status
LED
+15
dB
Yellow
LEDLED
Level
Level
Colors
Colors
ALed
single
bi-color
de status
de LED
Gate shows the current Expander or Gate staClip
Red
1 (top)
Standalone Software
CD
+15Installer
dB
Yellow
A single
bi-color
LED shows the current Expander or Gate staGate
Status
Status
LED
LED
tus,Gate
as
shown
in
the
following
+15
dB
Yellow
A
single
bi-color
LED
shows table.
the current Expander or Gate staI/O
Options
2
+6
dB
Yellow
1 (top)
1
(top)
Clip
Clip
Red
Red
tus,
as
shown
in
the
Um LED bicolor mostrafollowing
o status table.
atual do Expander ou Gate, de
2
+6 dB
Yellow
tus,
asbi-color
shown
in the
following
table.
+15+15
dB dB
Yellow
Yellow
A
single
A
single
bi-color
LED
LED
shows
shows
the
the
current
current
Expander
Expander
or Gate
or Gate
sta-sta
Plug-in
installer
discs
(if
any)
with
pre-authorized
iLok
acordo
com
a
seguinte
tabela:
2
+6
dB
Yellow
Color
Gate
Status 16 analog
3
0 dB
Green
AI16 AnalogExpander
Mic/LineStatus
Input Card that
provides
Color
Statustable.
tus,tus,
as shown
as shown
inExpander
the
in the
following
following
table. Gate Status
3
0 dB
Green
cables
2 2 Two (2) IEC power
+6 +6
dB
dB
Yellow
Yellow
mic/line
inputs Status
Color level
Status
Green
(none)
NotExpander
in circuit
NotGate
in circuit
4 3
6 0
dBdB
Green
(none)
Not in circuit
Not in circuit
6 for
dB connection to Green
4 One FOH Link cable
a VENUE console
Color
Expander
Status
Gate
Status
Color
Expander
Status
Gate
Status
3 3
0 dB
0 dB
Green
Green
(none)
Not
in circuit
Not
inanalog
circuit
AO16
Analog
Output
Card that provides
16
line level
Green
Green
3 dB
gain
reduction
Gate
Open
& Hold
5 4
126dBdB
Green
Green
3
dB
gain
reduction
Gate
Open
& Hold
5 Stage Rack includes:
12 dB
Green
outputs
Each
(none)
in circuit
NotNot
in circuit
(none) NotNot
in circuit
in circuit
4 4
6 6
dB dB
Green
Green
Green
gainreduction
reduction
Gate
Open & Hold
5
Green
Yellow
21 3dBdBgain
Gate
Release
6 (bottom)
3012
dB dB
Green
6 (bottom)
Two (2) IEC power
cables
Yellow
21 dB gain reduction
Gate Release
30
dB
Green
XO16
Analog
and
Digital
Output Card
that
provides
8 analog
Green
3 dB
gain
reduction
Gate
Open
& Hold
Green
3 dB
gain
reduction
Gate
Open
& Hold
5 5
1212
dB dB
Green
Green
Yellow > 21
21dB
dBgain
gainreduction
reduction Gate
Gate
Release
6 (bottom)
30 dB
Green
Red
Closed
line
level
outputs,
and
8
AES
digital
outputs.
Red
> 21 dB gain reduction
Gate Closed
Yellow
dB dB
gaingain
reduction
Release
Yellow 21 21
reduction Gate
Gate
Release
6 (bottom)
6 (bottom)
3030
dB dB
Green
Green
Red
Gate Closed
RedRed
> 21
dB dB
gaingain
reduction
Closed
> 21
reduction Gate
Gate
Closed
Chapter
13: Metering 115
Mixers13:
andMetering
other 115
Chapter
13: Metering 115
and
InputInput
Channels
e FX
Returns
Two Channels
(2)
console
lights
Chapter
Chapter
13:13:
Metering
Metering
115115
digital I/O.
Captulo 13: Metering
115
Bank Clip Indicators

Bank
Clip
Indicators
The Clip
LED
at the top of Input Channel and FX Return
Bank Clip
Indicators
Indicadores
de
Clip
channels
lights
when
clipping
occurs
on a hidden
bank.
The
ClipClip
LED at
the top
of Input
Channel
and FX fader
Return
Bank
Indicators
The
channel
position
of the Clip
indication
corresponds
to
channels
lights
when clipping
occurs
on a hidden
fader bank.
The
Clip
at the
topChannel
of Input
Channel
and
FX Return
O LED
Clip
no LED
alto
dos
Input
e FX
Return
seLED
acende
quando
The
Clip
LED
at the
topthe
ofchannel.
Input
Channel
and
FXflashes
Return
the
position
of
the
off-bank
The
Clip
to
The
channel
position
of
Clip
indication
corresponds
to
channels
lights
when
clipping
occurs
on a A
hidden
fader
bank.
ocorre
um
clip
em
um
banco
oculto
de
faders.
posio
declipcanal
channels
lights
when
clipping
occurs
on
a
hidden
fader
bank.
indicate
momentary
clips,
and
lights
solid
for
sustained
position
the off-bank
The
Clipoculto.
LED flashes
The
channel
position
of the
Clip indication
corresponds
to
dothe
indicador
Clipofcorresponde
channel.
posio
do
canal
O LED to
Clip
The channel
position
of the
Clip
indication
corresponds
to
ping.
indicate
momentary
clips,
and
lights
solid
for
sustained
clipposition
of clips
the off-bank
channel.
Clip LED
to
piscathe
para
mostrar
momentneos
e seThe
acende
para flashes
clipes
de
the position of the off-bank channel. The Clip LED flashes to
ping.
longa
durao.
indicate
momentary clips, and lights solid for sustained clipmomentary
clips, and lights solid for sustained clipToindicate
locate the
clipped channel:
ping.
ping.
Para
localizar
canais
clipados:
To
locate
the
clipped
channel:
Press
the
Bank
switches
until the Channel Input Level meters
To show
locateclipping.
the clipped channel:
Press the Bank switches until the Channel Input Level meTo locateos
the
clippedBank
channel:
Pressione
switches
at que os medidores Channel Input
ters
showthe
clipping.
mostrem
Press
Bank
switches
until
the Channel
Input Level
Level
o
cliping.
For
more information on clip
indication,
see Metering
Op-me Press the Bank switches until the Channel Input Level meters
show
clipping.
tions
on information
page
118. on clip indication, see Metering OpFor
more
ters
show
clipping.
Para
mais
informaes
sobre indicao de clipes, veja Opes de
tions
on
page
118.
For more
information
Medio
na pgina
118. on clip indication, see Metering OpFor more information on clip indication, see Metering Options on page 118.
tions on page 118.
ACS Input and Dynamics Meters
Medidores
ACSand
InputDynamics
e DynamicsMeters
ACS Input
Selected
Channel
Level
Meters
ACS
Meters
Medidores
Nvel
deand
CanaisDynamics
Selecionados
ACS deInput
Input
and
Dynamics
Meters
Selected
Channel
Level
Meters
The Selected Channel
meters
in the
ACS include two 10-segOs medidores
Selected
Channel
no ACSMeters
incluem dois medidores de
Selected
Channel
Level
ment
level meters:
The
Selected
Channel
meters
in theMeters
ACS include two 10-segSelected
Channel
Level
nvel de 10 segmentos:
ment
meters:
The level
Selected
Channel meters in the ACS include two 10-segThe Selected Channel meters in the ACS include two 10-segment level meters:
ment level meters:
Meters
Meters
Meters
Meters
Selected
Channel
meters
and LEDs
Medidores
e LEDs
Selected
Channel
Selected Channel meters and LEDs
Solo
Solo
Stereo
Solo
Solo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
These meters show mono or stereo levels on the selected chanEsses

medidores mostram os nveis mono ou estreo do canal
Selected
Channel
meters
and
LEDs
nel.
The
dual,
10-segment,
LED meters
input
These
meters
show
mono
orbi-color
stereo
levels
on the
selected
chanselecionado.
O medidor
duplo
de
10 segmentos
deindicate
LEDs bicolores
Selected
Channel
meters
and
LEDs
level
for
the
currently
targeted
or
Soloed
channel.
indicam
o nvel
entrada
do sinal
selecionado
emselected
Solo.input
nel.
The
dual,de10-segment,
bi-color
LED
meters
indicate
These
meters
show
mono
or stereo
levels
onouthe
chanThese
meters
show mono
or stereo
levelschannel.
on the selected chanlevel
the
currently
or Soloed
Selected
Channel
Meter targeted
Scale bi-color
nel.for
The
dual,
10-segment,
LED meters indicate input
nel. The dual, 10-segment, bi-color LED meters indicate input
level for
the currently
targeted or Soloed
channel.
Selected
Channel
Meter
Scale
LED
Level
Color channel.
level for
the currently
targeted or Soloed
Selected Channel Meter
Scale
LED
Level
Color
1Selected
(top)
Clip Scale
Red
Channel Meter
+15
dB
Yellow
LED
Level
Color
1 LED
(top)
Clip
Red
Level
Color
+15
dB
Yellow
2 1 (top)
+9Clip
dB
Yellow
Red
1 (top)
Clip
Red
+15 dB
Yellow
2
+9+15
dB dB
Yellow
Yellow
3
+3
dB
Yellow
2
+9 dB
Yellow
3
+3
dBdB
Yellow
Yellow
42
0 +9
dB
Green
3
+3 dB
Yellow
4
0
dB
Green
Yellow
53
-3 +3
dB dB
Green
4
0 dB
Green
5
-3 0dB
Green
Green
64
-9
dBdB
Green
5
-3 dB
Green
6
-9
dB
Green
-3
dB
Green
75
-15
dB
Green
6
-9 dB
Green
7
-15
Green
-9dB
dB
Green
86
-21
dB
Green
7
-15 dB
Green
87
-21
dBdB
Green
-15
Green
9
-30
dB
Green
8
-21 dB
Green
9
-30
dBdB
Green
-21
Green
108(bottom)
-60
dB
Green
9
-30 dB
Green
109(bottom)
-60
dBdB
Green
-30
Green
10 (bottom)
-60 dB
Green
10 (bottom)
-60 dB
Green

116
Guia VENUE Profile
Selected Channel Gain Reduction Meters

Selected
Channel
Gain Reduction
The three dynamics
gain reduction
meters in theMeters
ACS section
Selected
Channel
Gain
Reduction
Meters
Medidores
de
Reduo
de
Ganho
de
Canais
Selecionados
show
gain
reduction
for
the
built-in
Compressor/Limiter
The
three dynamics
gain reduction
meters in the ACS
section
Selected
Channel
Gain Reduction
Meters
(Comp/Lim),
the built-in
Expander/Gate
(Exp/Gate), and any
show
gain
reduction
for
the
built-in Compressor/Limiter
The
three
dynamics
gain
reduction
meters
in the ACS
ACSmostram
section a
Os
trs
medidores
deplug-in
reduo
dethe
ganho
na seo
The
three
dynamics
gain
reduction
meters
in
the ACS
section
applicable
Dynamics
on
selected
channel.
(Comp/Lim),
the built-in
(Exp/Gate),
and
any
show gain
reduction
forExpander/Gate
the built-in Compressor/Limiter
reduo
de
ganho
do
Compressor/Limiter
embutido,
do
Expander/
show
gain
reduction
for
the
built-in
Compressor/Limiter
applicable
Dynamics
plug-in
on
the
selected
channel.
(Comp/Lim),
built-in Expander/Gate
(Exp/Gate),
and any do
Gate
embutido the
(Exp/Gate),
e de qualquer plug-in
de dinmica
(Comp/Lim), the built-in Expander/Gate (Exp/Gate), and any
applicable
Dynamics plug-in onCompressor/Limiter
the selected channel.
canal
selecionado.
applicable Dynamics plug-in on the selected channel.
Compressor/Limiter
Expander/Gate
Compressor/Limiter
Compressor/Limiter
Expander/Gate
Plug-in
Expander/Gate
Expander/Gate
Plug-in
Selected Channel Gain Reduction meters

Plug-in
Plug-in
Comp/Lim and Plug-In Gain Reduction Meters

Medidores
reduo
de
ganho
de Gain
canais
selecionados
Selectedde
Channel
Reduction
meters
Comp/Lim
andGain
Plug-In
Reduction
Meters
On the ACS Comp/Lim
and Plug-In
gain reduction
meters, the
Comp/Lim
and Plug-In
Gain Reduction
Meters
6
LEDs
show
dynamics
gain
reduction
from
right
to
left, acOn
the ACSde
Comp/Lim
and
Plug-In
reduction
meters,
the
Comp/Lim
and Plug-In
Gain
Reduction
Meters
Medidores
Reduo
de
Ganho
degain
Comp/Lim
e Plug-In
cording
to thedynamics
following scales
6 On
LEDs
show
from
right tometers,
left, ac-the
the
ACS Comp/Limgain
andreduction
Plug-In gain
reduction
On
the
ACS
Comp/Lim
andde
Plug-In
gain
reduction
meters,
the
Nos
medidores
de
reduo
ganho
Comp/Lim
e
Plug-In
cording
to
the
following
scales
ACS
gain
reduction
meter
scale
for
comp/lim/plug-in
6 LEDs show dynamics gain reduction from right to left,do
ac-ACS,
6
LEDs
show
dynamics
gain
reduction
from
right
to
left,
acos
seis LEDs
mostram
reduo
de ganho dinmica da direita para a
cording
to the
following
scales
ACS
gain reduction
meter
scale
for comp/lim/plug-in
LED
Gain
Reduction
Color
cording
to
following
esquerda,
dethe
acordo
com
ascales
seguinte
tabela:
ACS gain reduction meter
scale
LED
Gain
Reduction
Color
(none)
0 dBscale
(none)
LED
Gain Reduction
Color
(none)
0 Gain
dBdB Reduction
(none)
Color
1 LED
(right)
1.5
Green
(none)
1
(right)
2 (none)
1 (right)
2
3 1 (right)
2
3
42
3
4
53
4
5
64
(left)
5
65
(left)
0 dB
1.5
dB
30
dBdB
(none)
Green
(none)
Green
1.5 dB
3
dB
6 1.5
dB dB
3 dB
6
dB
93
dBdB
Green
Green
Green
Green
6 dB
9
dB
dB
156
dB
Green
Green
Green
Yellow
9 dB
15
dB
219dB
dB
Green
Yellow
Green
Yellow
15 dB
2115
dBdB
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Green
Green
Green
Green
Expander/Gate
Gain
Reduction Meter
6 (left)
21 dB
Yellow
6 (left)
21 dB
Yellow
Expander/Gate
Gain
Reduction
Meter
On the ACS Exp/Gate gain reduction meter, the 6 LEDs show
Expander/Gate
Gainfrom
Reduction
Meter
dynamics
gain
reduction
right to
left,
according
the
On
the ACS
Exp/Gate
gain
reduction
meter,
the 6 LEDstoshow
Expander/Gate
Reduction
Meter
Medidores
de
reduoGain
de ganho
Expander/Gate
following
scales
dynamics
gainExp/Gate
reductiongain
from
right to left,
according
to the
On the ACS
reduction
meter,
the 6 LEDs
show
On
the
ACS
Exp/Gate
gain reduction
meter, do
theACS,
6 LEDs
show
following
scales
Nos
medidores
reduo
Exp/Gate
os to
seis
LEDs
ACS
gain
reduction
meter
scalede
forganho
exp/gate/plug-in
dynamics
gainde
reduction
from
right
to left, according
the
dynamics
gain reduction
from
rightdatodireita
left, according
to the de
mostram
reduo
de
ganho
dinmica
para
a
esquerda,
following
scales
ACS
gain reduction
meter
scale
for exp/gate/plug-in
LED
Gain
Reduction
Color
following
acordo
comscales
a seguinte
tabela:
scale
LED
Gain
Reduction
Color
(none)
0
dBscale
(none)
LED
Gain Reduction
Color
(none)
0 Gain
dB Reduction
(none)
Color
1 LED
(right)
3
dB
Green
(none)
1 (none)
(right)
2
1 (right)
2
3 1 (right)
0 dB
3
dB
60
dBdB
3 dB
6
dB
dB
123
dB
(none)
Green
(none)
Green
2
3
42
3
4
53
6 dB
12
dB
216dB
dB
Green
Green
Green
Green
12 dB
21
dB
3612
dBdB
Green
Green
Green
Yellow
4
5
64
(left)
5
65
(left)
21 dB
36
dB
6021
dBdB
36 dB
6036
dBdB
Green
Yellow
Green
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
60 dB
60 dB
Yellow
Yellow
6 (left)
6 (left)
Green
Green
Green
Green
Selecting Output Meter Display
Selecionando Apresentao de Medidores de Sada

Metering Section
Selecting Output Meter Display
Seo Metering
To select an output type for metering:
Metering
Section
The Metering
section includes Bus and Main Outputs meters. Para selecionar um tipo de sada para medio:
Stage
Rackinclui
Features
A The
seo
Metering
para
Bus
e Main
Outputs.
Metering
section medidores
includes Bus
and
Main
Outputs
meters.
The Metering section includes Bus and Main Outputs meters.

Audio I/O
Masters
Meteringmic preamps
Main and
48 inputsBus
with
individually
selectable phantom
Meters
Bus Masters
Meteringpower. Main
8ofanalog
output channels;
to 48 show
analog
or
Medidores
Meters
All
the 10-segment
meters expandable
in the meterup
bridge
levels
digital outputs
per Stage scale:
Rack.
according
to the following
All ofos
themedidores
10-segment
in the meter
levels
Todos
demeters
10 segmentos
do bridge
grupo show
de medidores
according
to
the
following
scale:
Table 14.
Meterconforme
bridge
10-segment
scale
apresentam
nveis
a tabela
seguir:
Synchronization
and Control
I/Oameter
Table 14.
Meterconnectors
bridge 10-segment
meter
scale and redundant (if
LED
Level
Snake
to
enable
primary
connection
LED 1 applicable)
Level+15 dB
(top)
(red=clip)
1 (top)
+15 dB
(red=clip)
2
+9 dB
System Components
+9 dB
+3 dB
+3 dB
0 dB
+3 dB
4
0 dB
Included
Components
3 dB
All 5
VENUE Profile systems
dB9 dB
6 VENUE Profile3console
7 Two (2) IEC power

cables
9 dB15
dB
7
8
9
Required
ToAdditional
select
an the
output
type
for metering:
Press
Select
switch
inComponents
the metering section to cycle
through
Pressioneavailable
o switchchoices
Select (Auto,
na seo
de
medio
para alternar
18,
Aux
916,
The following
must
beAux
purchased
separately:
the Selectcomponents
switch in the
metering
section
to
cyclePersonal
Press
entre as
opes disponveis
(Auto,
Aux 18,
Aux 916,
Personal Qs,
Qs, Matrixes
or
Groups).
TheAux
currentlyAux
assigned
bus is indithrough
available
choices
(Auto,
916,
Matrixes
ou
Groups).
O bus
atualmente
selecionado
display
indicado por
Video
Display
(15-inch
or
greater18,
flat-panel
VGAPersonal
cated by or
its Groups).
Meter LED
lighting.
Qs,
Matrixes
The
currently
assigned
bus
is
indi-and
seu
LED
aceso.
catedDVI
by its
Meter
LED
lighting.
supported.
Toajustar
set metering
to follow
the Output
faders:
Para
a medio
para seguir
os faders
Output:
To set
metering
follow
the Output
Press
the to
Meter
Select
switch faders:
repeatedly so that the Auto
Pressione o switch Meter Select repetidamente at que o LED
LED
is
lit.
Press the Meter Select switch repeatedly so that the Auto

Digital
Auto
se acenda.
LED is lit.
Optional Components
BusSelect
output
LEDsBus
andOutput
Select switch
Switch
e LEDs
Bus output LEDs and Select switch

USB flash
(or other portable USB storage device for
Medidores
Main disk
Output
Main Output Meters

Main
Output
Meters
three
Main
output
metersna
in
the
bridge
show
outOs The
medidores
Main speakers
Output
de medidores
mostram
trs
Near-field
monitor
forseo
mixmeter
position
monitoring
levels
for
the
three
outputs
(either
inshow
LCR
orLCR
in
os put
nveis
de sada
dos
trsMain
Main
Outputs
(tanto
no
formato
The
three
Main
output
meters
in the
meter
bridge
out Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
quanto
no
LR+M).
LR+M
format).
put
levels
for
the
three
Main
outputs
(either
in
LCR
or
in
LR+M (for
format).
Talkback)
15 dB
21 dB
30 dB
9 VENUE Mouse21
PaddB
21 dB

dB
10VENUE
Guide
(bottom)Profile30
60 dB
Two (2) console

10 (bottom)
60lights
dB
Protective
Dust
Cover
Bus
Output
Meters
Rack(s)
(see
next)
BusThe
Output
Meters
Medidores
do Bus
Output
eight
output
level meters in the meter bridge are assignable as a unit for metering of Groups, Auxes, Matrixes, and
The
eight
output
level
meters
in thedo
meter
bridge
are assign-so
Os
oito
medidores
de nvel
de iLoks,
sada
grupo
de medidores
Racks,
Software
CDs,
and
Cables
Qs. metering of Groups, Auxes, Matrixes, and
able Personal
as a unit
atribudos
comoforuma
unidade para medio de Groups, Auxes,
Each eMix
Rack or
Rack includes:
Personal
Qs.
Matrixes
Personal
Qs.FOH
The Bus
Output
meters can automatically follow the current
System
Restore
Output
fader
bankCD
assignment (indicating level for the cur-
The
Bus Output
meters
can podem
automatically
follow the current
Os
medidores
Bus
Output
automaticamente
seguir as
ECxselected
Ethernet
Control
Software
Installerto
CD
rently
Output
or be assigned
a bus
output
Output
fader
bank assignment
(indicating
level for
the
cur-parafor
atribuies
de associao
de bus),
faders
Output (indicando
o nvel
persistent
bus
level
indication.
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
selected
Output bus),
assignedpara
to auma
bus output
forbus
o rently
bus Output
selecionado),
ou or
serbeatribudo
sada de
output
indicao
permanente
do nvelplug-in
do bus.authorizations)
para
iLok
USB
Smart
Key (for storing
persistent
bus
level
indication.
Stereo Output Metering
Medidores
StereoMetering
Output
Stereo Output
Main output level meters in the meter bridge
Medidores de nvel Main Output na seo de medidores
MainThe
output
meters
the meter
10level
LEDs
showininput
levelsbridge
from bottom to top, according
Os 10 LEDs mostram nveis de entrada de baixo para cima, de
scale
shown
Tablefrom
14 on
page 117.
The to
10 the
LEDs
show
inputinlevels
bottom
to top, according
acordo
com a tabela
14can
apresentada
naVENUE
pgina 117.
The following
options
be added to
Profile systems.
to the scale shown in Table 14 on page 117.
Medio
do Bus Solo
Metering
the Solo Bus
Metering the Solo Bus

Medindo Canais em Solo
Metering Soloed Channels
Mix Rack Options

Metering
Channels
A medioSoloed
do bus Solo
depende do tipo de canal que est em Solo.
Solo bus metering depends on the type of channel being
soloed.
I/O
Options
Solo
bus
metering depends on the type of channel being
Canais Isolados
soloed.
AI16
Analog
Single
Channels
Nos
modos
PFL,
AFL ou SIP (Solo-in-place), um canal isolado em
With
stereo
Groups
the
output level meters in the metering
Two
(2) IEC
power
cables
mic/line
level
inputs
Single
Channels
In
PFL,
AFL,
or
SIPdo
(solo-in-place)
modes,
single
soloed
chanSolo
apresentado
mesmo modo
como ase
o canal
estivesse
section
show
level
for
only
the
of
left
right
stereo
Oneestreo,
FOH
Link
cable
for level
connection
athe
VENUE
console
With
Groups
the
output
meters
insada
the
metering
Com
Groups
os
medidores
dehighest
nvel deto
na and
seo
de
selecionado
no
ACS.
nel
is
metered
in
the
same
way
as
if
the
channel
were
targeted
AO16
Analog
Output
Card
that
provides
16
analog
line
level
In
PFL,
AFL,
or
SIP
(solo-in-place)
modes,
a
single
soloed
chanchannels.
medio
mostram
o nvel
apenas
mais alto
dosleft
canais
esquerdo
section
show level
for only
the do
highest
of the
and right
the ACS.
neloutputs
ison
metered
in the same way as if the channel were targeted
e channels.
direito.
To
see
level
for
both
the
left
and
right
channels
of
a
stereo
outon
the
ACS.
put,
theambos
on-screen
meters,
oruma
target
the
on
the XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
Para
ver
orefer
nvel
de
osand
canais
sada
estreo,
veja
To see
level
fortoboth
the left
rightde
channels
of achannel
stereo outline level outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
ACS
use
theou
Selected
Channel
Level
Meters.
osput,
medidores
na
tela,
selecione
oorcanal
na
seo
ACS on
e use
referand
to the
on-screen
meters,
target
the
channel
the os
medidores
Selected
ChannelChannel
Level. Level Meters.
ACS and use
the Selected

Metering 117
tional 8 channels of analog I/O and 8 channels
of 13:
AES/EBU
digital I/O.
Chapter 13: Metering 117
Captulo 13: Metering
117
Multiple Channels
Mltiplos Canais
In PFL or AFL mode, when multiple channels are soloed, the

left and right channels of the Solo bus are metered on the SeNos modos PFL ou AFL, quando mltiplos canais esto em Solo, os
lected
Channel
meters,dopre-Solo
control. pelos medidores
canais
esquerdo
e direito
bus SoloTrim
so medidos
Selected Channel, antes do controle Trim do Solo.
In SIP mode, when multiple channels are soloed, the Left and
Right
bus meters
are mirrored
on the
No modoMain
SIP, quando
mltiplos
canais esto
emSelected
Solo, os Channel
medidores
meters.
esquerdo e direito do bus Main so espelhados nos medidores
Selected Channel.
Dynamics Key Listen
Key Listen
When Key Listen is activated, the left and right channels of

the Solo
busListen
are metered
on theos
Selected
Quando
o Key
est ativado,
canais Channel
esquerdometers,
e direito do
pre-Solo
Trim
control.
bus
Solo so
medidos
pelos medidores Selected Channel, antes do
controle Trim do Solo.
Solo Clip Indication
Indicao de Clip no Solo
When the Selected Channel meters are showing levels of a sin-
Quando
os medidores
Channel
esto mostrando
nveis de
gle soloed
channel, Selected
the clipping
information
in the metering
umsection
canal em
Solo
isolado,
informao
de clipping
LEDs
mirrors
thataon
the channel
itself. nos LEDs da
seo de medio espelham esse clipping no canal.
. Quando
os Selected
medidores
Selected
Channel
nametering
seo desection
medio
When the
Channel
meters
in the
esto
os nveis
do busthe
Solo,
os LEDs
medio
are mostrando
showing Solo
bus levels,
meter
LEDsde
turn
red totornamindisecate
vermelhos
para
clipping
clipping
onindicar
the Solo
bus. no bus Solo.
Metering
Options
Opes
de Medio
Apresentao de Medio
Meter Display
AsThe
seguintes
opes
podem
ser configuradas
para os
following
display
options
can be configured
formedidores.
meters.
Essas
opes
afetam
todos
os
medidores
da
console.
These options affect all meters on the console.
Peak Hold Time

Peak Hold Time
Peak Hold Time can be set within a range of 020 seconds.
O Peak Hold Time pode ser ajustado entre 0 e 20 segundos.
To set the Peak Hold Time:
Peak Hold
Time:
1Para
Goajustar
to the oOptions
page
and click the Interactions tab.
21 Under
Meter,Options
enter aevalue
Hold Time.
V pgina
cliquefor
nathe
abaPeak
Interactions.
32 Press
Enterinsira
on the
Em Meter,
umkeyboard.
valor para
o Peak Hold Time.
3 Pressione Enter no teclado.

Clipping
Indication
Indicao
de Clipping
VENUE
meter
clip indicators are proximity warnings that
show when an input or output signal reaches or exceeds the
IndicadoresClip
de clip
da VENUE so advertncias de proximidade que
configured
Margin.
mostram quando um sinal de entrada ou sada atinge ou ultrapassa
a Clip Margin
configurada.
Clipping
can occur
at several points throughout the signal
chain. A clip at any one of these points is indicated by lighting
Clipping pode ocorrer em vrios pontos da cadeia de sinal. Um clip
the top LED red on the meter. For more information on the loem qualquer um desses pontos indicado pelo acendimento do LED
cation of clip detect points, refer to Chapter 26, Signal Flow
vermelho do medidor. Para mais informaes sobre a localizao
Diagrams.
dos pontos de deteco de clips, verifique o Captulo 26, Diagramas
de Fluxo de Sinal.
Clip Margin
Clip Margin
The Clip Margin setting lets you configure the amount of

headroom
you
want permite
before clipping
indication
begins.
O ajuste Clip
Margin
configurar
a quantidade
de Clip
headroom
desejada
antes queasadBindicao
de clip (where
se inicie.
Clip Margin
Margin
is expressed
below maximum
maximum
is
emofdB+20
abaixo
do mximo (onde mximo um pico de nvel
aexpressa
peak level
dBVU).
de +20 dBVU).
Clip Margin can be set within a range of 0 dB to 30 dB below

A Clip Margin
ser ajustada
entre for
0 dB
e 30and
dB outabaixo do
maximum,
andpode
is configured
separately
inputs
mximo, e configurada separadamente para entradas e sadas.
puts.
Para ajustar a Clip Margin:
To set the Clip Margin:
V topgina
Optionspage
e clique
abathe
Interaction.
11 Go
the Options
and na
click
Interaction tab.
22 Under
Meter,
enter
values
forInput
InputClip
ClipMargin
Margin Below
Below Max
Max and
Em Meter,
entre
valores
para
e Output
Output
Clip Margin
Clip Margin
Below Below
Max. Max.
3 Press Enter to confirm the setting.
3 Pressione Enter para confirmar o ajuste.
Metering options in the Interactions tab of the Options page
Opes de medio na aba Interactions da pgina Options
Meter Ballistics
Medidores Balsticos
Meters can be set to operate in the following modes:
Os medidores podem ser ajustados para operar nos seguintes

RMS Mode (Default) Meters follow the characteristics of a
modos:
damped analog meter. In this mode, meter response and de-
RMS
(Padro)
Medidores
seguem
as caractersticas
de um
cayMode
is slower
than in
Peak mode,
providing
an average reading
medidor
analgico
lento.
Nesse
modo,
a
resposta
e
o
decay
of the metered signal. A single LED shows the peak levelde
forum
medidor
mais
lenta
que
no
modo
Peak,
oferecendo
uma
leitura
da
the designated Peak Hold Time.
mdia do sinal medido. Um LED mostra o nvel de pico do Peak Hold
Time
assinalado.
Peak
Mode Meters follow the characteristics of a standard
peak meter. In this mode, meter response is instantaneous,
Peak Mode Medidores seguem as caractersticas de um medidor de

showing the true peak level of the metered signal.
pico padro. Nesse modo, a resposta dos medidores instantnea,
mostrando o verdadeiro nvel de pico de um sinal medido.
118
Guia VENUE Profile
Clip
HoldTime
Time
Clip Hold
The
Clip
Hold
Time
determines
howtempo
long auma
clip indication
O Clip
Hold
Time
determina
quanto
indicao de clip
lasts
after the
last clipped
signal.
HoldClip
Time
canTime
be set
permanece
depois
do ltimo
sinalClip
de clipe.
Hold
pode ser
within
a range
seconds.
ajustado
entre of
0 e020
20 segundos.
Para
Clip
Hold
Time:
To
setajustar
the Clip
Hold
Time:
11 Go
the Options
and na
click
Interaction tab.
V topgina
Optionspage
e clique
abathe
Interaction.
2 Under Meter, enter a value for the Clip Hold Time.
2 Em Meter, entre um valor para o Clip Hold Time.
3 Press Enter to confirm the setting.
3 Pressione Enter para confirmar.
Chapter
Chapter
14:Solo
Solo
and
and
Monitor
MonitorBusses
Busses
Captulo
14:14:
Busses
Solo
e Monitor
Chapter
14: Solo
and
Monitor Busses
Stage Rack Features
can bedo
used
simultaneously,
Modos
Bus
Solo
Solo
Solo
Bus
Bus
Modes
Modes
Solo
Bus
Modes
Audio
I/O
Three
Three
Solo
Solo
modes
modes
areare
offered:
offered:
Pre-Fader
Pre-Fader
Listen
Listen
(PFL),
(PFL),

Selecionando
modo
Solo resolution). VGA and
Selecting
Selecting
a um
a
Solo
Solo
Mode
Mode
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
DVI supported.a Solo Mode
Selecting
TheThe
Solo
Solo
mode
mode
cancan
be be
selected
selected
from
from
thethe
Solo/PFL
Solo/PFL
section
section
or or
Trs modos Solo so oferecidos: Pr-Fader Listen (PFL), After-Fader

O modo Solo pode ser selecionado pela seo Solo/PFL ou na tela.
on-screen.
USBSolo
keyboard
compatible)
Listen
(AFL)
e
Solo
In
Place
(SIP).
After-Fader
After-Fader
Listen
Listen
(AFL)
(AFL)
and
and
Solo
Solo
In
Place
In
Place
(SIP).
(SIP).
on-screen.
Three
Solo
modes
are
offered:
Pre-Fader
Listen
(PFL),
The
mode and
can trackball/mouse
be selected from (Windows
the Solo/PFL
section or
Nos
modos
AFL
ou
PFL,
colocar
em
Solo
afeta
apenas
o
que
Para
selecionar
o
modo
Solo
pela
console,
siga
um
dos
seguintes
After-Fader
Listen
(AFL)
and
Solo
In
Place
(SIP).
on-screen.
In
individually
AFL
In AFL
or PFL
or PFL
mode,
mode,
soloing
soloing
only
only
affects
affects
what
what
youyou
hear
hear
selectable
phantom
power.
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
voc ouve no bus estreo dedicado AFL/PFL Solo (Cue), que To
procedimentos:
select
To
select
the
the
Solo
Solo
mode
mode
from
from
the
the
console,
console,
do
do
one
one
of
the
of
the
on
theAFL
the
dedicated
dedicated
stereo
stereo
AFL/PFL
AFL/PFL
Solo
Solo
(Cue)
(Cue)
bus,
bus,
which
which
8 In
or
PFL mode,
soloing
only
affects
what
you
hear
on
analog
output
channels;
expandable
up
to
48
analog
or
alimenta
o bus
Monitor.
following:
following:
The
connection
FOH
and Stage
Rack
requires
To
select
the Solobetween
mode from
theRack
console,
do one
of the
feeds
feeds
the
the
Monitor
Monitor
Bus.
Bus.
on
the
dedicated
stereo
AFL/PFL
Solo
(Cue)
bus,
which
digitalSolo
outputs
per Stage
Rack.
No modo
In Place,
colocar
em Solo afeta apenas o que
Pressione o switch Stereo AFL para entrar no modo AFL.
following:
a
Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable
can
be
purchased
directly
Press
Press
thethe
Stereo
Stereo
AFLAFL
switch
switch
to enter
to enter
AFLAFL
Solo
Solo
mode.
mode.
feeds
the
Monitor
Bus.
voc
In
ouve
Solo
In
Solo
In
Place
Inbusses
Place
mode,
mode,
soloing
soloing
only
only
affects
affects
what
what
youyou
hear
hear
nos
Main.
from
Avid
assembled
by
preferred
vendor.
the
Stereo
AFL
switch
to
enter
AFL
Solo
mode.
Press
Press
andand
hold
hold
thethe
Solo
Solo
Inyour
Place
InSolo
Place
switch
for
for
at
least
atno
least
2mnimo
sec2 sec- 2
in
in Solo
the
Main
Main
busses.
eor
segure
o switch
Inswitch
Place
por
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O
the
In
Inbusses.
Place
mode, soloing
only affects what you hear Pressione
Pr-Fader Listen
(PFL)
segundos
para
entrar
no
modo
SIP.
onds
onds
to
enter
to
enter
SIPSIP
mode.
mode.
Press
and
hold
the
Solo
In
Place
switch
for
at
least
2 secin
the
Main
busses.
Pre-Fader
Pre-Fader
Listen
Listen
(PFL)
(PFL)
connection
VENUE
FOH Rack.
O modo applicable)
PFL Solo envia
o sinal to
deaInput
Channels
e FX Returns
Pre-Fader
Listen
(PFL)
colocados
em
Solo
explicitamente
para
o
bus
AFL/PFL
Solo
(Cue)
PFLPFL
Solo
Solo
mode
mode
sends
sends
thethe
signal
signal
from
from
explicitly
explicitly
soloed
soloed
input
input
bus.
O
sinal
ps-insert,
pr-fader
e
pr-Mute.
channels
channels
and
and
FX
FX
returns
returns
to
the
to
the
AFL/PFL
AFL/PFL
Solo
Solo
(Cue)
(Cue)
bus.
bus.
The
The
PFL Solo mode sends the signal from explicitly soloed input
signal
signal
is post-insert,
is post-insert,
pre-fader
pre-fader
pre-mute.
pre-mute.
channels
and
FX returns
toand
theand
AFL/PFL
Solo (Cue) bus. The
System
Components
Sinais de entrada mono so enviados para ambos os lados do

signal is post-insert, pre-fader and pre-mute.
bus
sent
Solo
(Cue),
e os
e direito
de
um
sinal
de
Mono
Mono
input
input
signals
signals
arecanais
are
sent
sent
toesquerdo
both
to both
sides
sides
of the
of the
Solo
Solo
(Cue)
(Cue)
entrada
estreo
so
enviados
para
os
lados
correspondentes
do
Included
Components
bus,
bus,
and
and
the
the
left
left
and
and
right
right
sides
sides
of
stereo
of
stereo
input
input
signals
signals
are
are
sent
sent
Mono input signals are sent to both sides of the Solo (Cue)
bus Solo (Cue).
to the
to
the
corresponding
corresponding
sides
sides
ofsides
the
of the
Solo
(Cue)
(Cue)
bus.
bus.
bus,
and
the left and
right
of Solo
stereo
input
signals are sent
to
the
corresponding
sides
of
the
Solo
(Cue)
bus.
PFL
PFL
oismodo
Solo
padro.
VENUE
Profile
console
PFL
the
is the
default
default
Solo
Solo
mode.
mode.
PFL
is the
Solo cables
mode.
Two
(2)default
IEC power
After-Fader Listen (AFL)
After-Fader
After-Fader
Listen
(AFL)
MonitorListen
mount
for(AFL)
VGA screen (screen not included)
After-Fader
Listen
(AFL)
O modo
envia omount
sinal de(trackball
canais colocados
em Solo explicitamente
AFL
Trackball
not included)
AFLAFL
Solo
Solo
mode
mode
sends
sends
thethe
signal
signal
from
from
explicitly
explicitly
soloed
soloed
chanchan-
e entradas
Solo-safe
para
o bus AFL/PFL Solo (Cue). Colocar em
and
VENUE
Mouse
Padthe
nels
nels
and
solo-safe
solo-safe
inputs
inputs
to the
to
the
AFL/PFL
AFL/PFL
Solo
Solo
(Cue)
(Cue)
bus.
bus.
SoloSoloAFL
Solo
mode
signal
from explicitly
soloed
chanSolo busses
Output
sends
sempre
AFL.
inging
of
output
of
output
busses
busses
is
always
is always
VENUE
Profile
Guide
nels
and
solo-safe
inputs
toAFL.
theAFL.
AFL/PFL Solo (Cue) bus. Solo-
ing
ofAFL
output
busses
is
always
Two
(2)
console
No modo
Solo,
tantolights
sinais
de AFL.
entrada quanto de sada so
In AFL
In AFL
Solo
Solo
mode,
mode,
both
both
input
input
andand
output
output
signals
signals
areare
sent
sent
to to
enviados
para
o
bus
Solo
(Cue)
ps-fader
e ps-pan/balance, e so
Protective
Dust
Cover andand
the
the
Solo
Solo
(Cue)
(Cue)
bus
bus
post-fader
post-fader
post-pan/balance,
post-pan/balance,
and
and
are
In
AFL
Solo
mode,
both
input
and
output
signals
are
sent
to
sempre posicionados panoramicamente para estreo quando are
os
Rack(s)
(see
next)
always
always
panned
panned
toconfigurados
stereo
to
stereo
even
even
if the
if the
Main
Main
busses
busses
areare
configconfigthe
Solo
(Cue)
bus
post-fader
and
post-pan/balance,
and are
busses
Main
esto
no
modo
LCR.
ured
ured
in LCR
in panned
LCR
mode.
mode.
always
to stereo even if the Main busses are configRacks,
iLoks,
and
Monitorando
Busses mode.
Aux eCDs,
Variable
Group
comCables
AFL
ured in Software
LCR
Monitoring
Monitoring
AuxAux
andand
Variable
Variable
Group
Group
Busses
Busses
with
with
AFLAFL
EachAux
Mixassociados
Rack or FOH
Rack includes:
Busses
e Variable
Variable
Group
estreo with
utilizam
Monitoring
Aux and
Group Busses
AFLestreo
Linked
Linked
Aux
Aux
busses
busses
andand
Variable
Variable
Group
busses
busses
useuse
true
stereo
stereo
verdadeiro
no
AFL.
Quando
voc Group
coloca
em
Solo
umtrue
bus
Aux
System
Restore
CD
AFL.
AFL.
When
When
you
you
solo
solo
a
linked
a
linked
Aux
Aux
bus,
bus,
the
the
two
two
busses
busses
are
are
Linked
Aux
busses
and
Variable
Group
busses
use
true
stereo
associado,
os
dois
busses
so
ouvidos
como
um
par
estreo
no
bus
heard
heard
aasstereo
a stereo
pair
pair
onaon
the
the
Solo
Solo
(Cue)
(Cue)
bus.
bus.
Solo
(Cue).
AFL.asWhen
you
solo
linked
Aux
bus,
the
two busses are

heard as a stereo pair on the Solo (Cue) bus.
Mono
Mono
Aux
Aux
busses
and
and
Variable
Variable
Group
are
are
heard
heard
as dois
dual
as dual
mono
mono
iLok
USB
Smart
Key
(for Group
storing
plug-in
authorizations)
Busses Aux
e busses
Variable
Group
mono
so
ouvidos
como
mono
no
onSolo
on
the
the
Solo
Solo
(Cue)
(Cue)
bus.
bus.
bus
(Cue).
Mono
Aux
busses
and
Variable
Group
are
heard
as
dual
mono
on the Solo (Cue) bus.
Solo
In
Place
(SIP)
Solo
Solo
In In
Place
Place
(SIP)
(SIP)
Solo In Place (SIP)
enter
SIP
mode.
Press
onds
Press
a litto
aComponents
Solo
lit
Solo
mode
mode
switch
switch
to turn
to turn
it off.
it off.
When
When
no no
Optional
Pressione um switch de modo Solo aceso para deslig-lo. Quando

switch
is
lit
the
in the
Solo/PFL
Solo/PFL
section,
section,
theit
the
system
system
is in
isno
PFL
in PFL
switch
Pressisalit
litin
Solo
mode
switch
to turn
off.
When
nenhum
switchest
aceso naare
seo
Solo/PFL,
o sistema
est no
The following
components
optional,
and must
be
mode.
mode.
switch
is
lit
in
the
Solo/PFL
section,
the
system
is
in PFL
modo
PFL. separately:
purchased
mode.

Level
Level
TrimTrim

Level Trim
(for Talkback)
Solo
Solo
Clear
Clear
Stereo
Stereo
AFLAFL
Solo Clear
Stereo AFL
InBNC
cables (for connecting Word clock
between
the
Solo
Solo
Place
In Place
Mix
Mix
to Monitors
to Monitors
VENUE
Solo
In Placesystem and external digital devices)
Mix to Monitors
SoloSolo
busbus
controls
controls
Controles de bus Solo
Solo bus controls
To select
To select
thethe
Solo
Solo
mode
mode
on-screen:
on-screen:
Para selecionar o modo Solo na tela:
To
select
the
Solo mode
on-screen:
1 Go
1 Go
to the
to the
Options
Options
page
page
and
and
click
click
thethe
Busses
Busses
tab.tab.
1 V
pgina
cliqueand
na click
aba Busses.
1 Go
to theOptions
Optionse page
the Busses tab.
2 The
Under
2 Under
Solo
Solo
andoptions
and
Monitor
Monitor
Operations,
Operations,
thethe
Type
Type
pop-up
pop-up
andand
following
can
be addedclick
toclick
VENUE
Profile
systems.
choose
choose
thethe
desired
Solo
Solo
mode.
mode.
2
Under
Solo
andVENUE
Monitor
Operations,
click
the Type
pop-up
and
details
ondesired
all
systems
and
options,
visit
theeAvid
2For
Em
Solo
and
Monitor
Operations,
clique
o pop-up
Type
escolha
choose
the
desired
Solo
mode.
diretamente
o modo Solo desejado.
Type
Type
Mix
Rack
Options
Type
I/O Options
O SIP
modo
SIP
se applies
aplica
a channels
Input Channels
e returns
FX Returns.
Solo
SIP
mode
mode
applies
to apenas
input
to input
channels
andand
FX FX
returns
only.
only.
Solo
Solo Choosing
Choosing
the the
SoloSolo
mode
mode
in Options
in Options
> Busses
> Busses
outputs
Eachenvia
StageoRack
includes:
In In
Place
sinal
dos
canais
colocados
em
Solo
para
os
busses
Place
In
Place
sends
sends
the
the
signal
signal
from
from
the
the
soloed
soloed
channel
channel
to
the
to
the
Mains
Mains
SIP mode applies to input channels and FX returns only. Solo
Escolhendo
o
modo
Solo
em
Options
>
Busses
Choosing the Solo mode in Options > Busses
e Monitor.
Two
(2)busses.
IEC
power
cables
Mains
O
sinal
enviado
andand
Monitor
busses.
Signal
Signal
is sent
isps-pan/balance.
sent
post-pan/balance.
post-pan/balance.
InMonitor
Place
sends
the signal
from
the
soloed
channel to the Mains
and Monitor busses. Signal is sent post-pan/balance.
NoSIP
modo
SIP,
omode,
audio
is
enviado
diretamente
para
os
busses
In
In
SIP
SoloSolo
mode,
audio
audio
sent
is sent
directly
directly
to the
to the
Main
Main
busses.
busses.
Main.
Utilize
esse
recurso
com
cautela.
UseIn
Use
this
this
feature
feature
with
with
caution.
caution.
SIP
Solo
mode,
audio
is sent directly to the Main busses.
Use this feature with caution.

Chapter
14:14:
SoloSolo
andand
Monitor
Monitor
Busses
Busses
119119
Pro16 Series devices. Chapter
Chapter 14: Solo and Monitor Busses 119
digital I/O.
Captulo 14: Busses Solo e Monitor
119
Solo
States
Modes
when Shows
Loading Shows
Estado
e Modos
Soloand
Quando
Carregando
Solo
and
when
Loading
Shows
SoloStates
States
andModes
Modes
when
Loading
Shows
Channel
Solo States
When you
load
a Show file,
all solos are
Auxes Follow
AFL
Auxes
Follow
Auxes
Follow
AFL
AFL
Channel Solo States Quando voc carrega um arquivo Show, todos

cleared. Solo states are not saved with Show files.
Solo
States
When
you
load
a Show
file,
allall
solos
are
osChannel
Solos
so
limpos.
Estados
deyou
Solo
no
salvos
em
arquivos
Channel
Solo
States
When
load
a so
Show
file,
solos
are
Show.
cleared.
Solo
states
are
not
saved
with
Show
files.
cleared.
Solo
states
aredo
not
saved
Show
files.
Solo
Mode
Show
files
not
openwith
in SIP
mode.
If you save a
Show file while in SIP, when you reopen the Show file, it will
Solo
Mode
Show
files
dodo
not
open
inin
SIP
mode.
If If
you
save
aa
Solo
Mode
Arquivos
Show
no
so
abertos
no
modo
SIP.
Sesave
voc
Solo
Mode
Show
files
not
open
SIP
mode.
you
open in AFL Solo mode.
salvar
um
arquivo
Show
no
modo
SIP,
quando
voc
reabrir
o
arquivo
Show
file
while
in
SIP,
when
you
reopen
the
Show
file,
it
will
Show file while in SIP, when you reopen the Show file, it will
Show,
ele
ser
aberto
no
modo AFL.
open
inin
AFL
Solo
mode.
open
AFL
Solo
mode.
Solo Operation Options

Solo
Operation
Solode
Operation
Options
Opes
Operao Options
Solo
Momentary or Latching Switch Operation

Momentary
ororLatching
Switch
Operation
Channel
solo switches
can operate
with momentary
or latchMomentary
Latching
Switch
Operation
Os switches Solo de canais podem operar com comportamento

ing behavior.
momentneo
ou switches
travado.
Channel
solo
can
operate
with
momentary
oror
latchChannel
solo
switches
can
operate
with
momentary
latching
behavior.
ing
behavior.
engageSolo
momentary
solo on
channel:
ParaTo
habilitar
momentneo
emaum
canal:
Hold the
solo switch
for
than one second. Release the
To engage
momentary
solo
onmore
a channel:
To engage
momentary
solo on
channel:
Segure
o switch
Solo por mais
de aum
segundo. Solte o switch Solo
solo switch to unsolo the channel.
Hold
solo
for
more
than
one
second.
Release
the
para
tirar
othe
canal
deswitch
Solo.
Hold
the
solo
switch
for
more
than
one
second.
Release
the
solo
switch
toto
unsolo
the
channel.
solo
switch
unsolo
the
channel.
latch
solo de
on um
a channel:
ParaTo
travar
o Solo
canal:
Press
and
release
the solo switch. Press the switch a second
ToTo
latch
solo
on
aa
channel:
latch
solo
on
channel:
Pressione e solte o switch Solo. Pressione o switch uma segunda

time to unsolo the channel.
and
the
solo
switch.
Press
the
switch
a second
vez para
tirar
orelease
canal
de
Solo.
Press
Press
and
release
the
solo
switch.
Press
the
switch
a second
time
toto
unsolo
the
channel.
time
unsolo
the
channel.
Auxes/Variable
Groups Follow
AFLFollow
e AFL AFL
Follows
Auxes/Variable
Groups
andAuxes/
AFL
Variable
Groups Auxes/Variable Groups
Follows
Auxes/Variable
Auxes/VariableGroups
GroupsFollow
FollowAFL
AFLand
andAFL
AFL
Follows
Auxes/Variable
Groups
Voc
podecan
personalizar
a how
interao
entre
associao
codificadores
You
customize
encoder
banking
andde
AFL
interact.
Follows
Auxes/Variable
Groups
e AFL.
You
can
customize
how
encoder
banking
and
AFL
interact.
You
can
customize
how
encoder
banking
and
AFL
interact.
Auxes/Variable Groups Follow AFL
Auxes/Variable Groups Follow AFL
Auxes/Variable
Groups
Follow
AFL
Auxes/Variable
Groups
Follow
AFL
When the Auxes/Variable
Groups
Follow
AFL option is selected,
Quando
a opo
Auxes/Variable
Groups
Follow AFL
selecionada,
soloing
an Aux/Var
Group bus
by pressing
its AFL
switch asWhen
the
Auxes/Variable
Groups
Follow
AFL
option
is seu
selected,
colocar
em
Solo
um bus Aux/Var
Group
pressionando
switch
When
the
Auxes/Variable
Groups
Follow
AFL
option
is
selected,
signs level and pan controls for that bus to the input encoders.
soloing
an
Aux/Var
byby
pressing
its
AFL
switch
AFL
atribui
controles
deGroup
nvel
e bus
posicionamento
para
aquele
busasaos
soloing
an
Aux/Var
Group
bus
pressing
its
AFL
switch
as level
With
busses,
level
is assigned
to the
input
encodcodificadores
demono
entrada.
signs
and
pan
controls
for
that
bus
toto
the
input
encoders.
signs
level
and
pan
controls
for
that
bus
the
input
encoders.
ers.
Withmono,
stereo o(linked)
level
is assigned
to the
Com
busses
nvel
busses,
atribudo
aos
codificadores
de
With
mono
busses,
level
is
assigned
to
the
input
encodWith
mono
busses,
level
is
assigned
to
the
input
encodencoders.
entrada.
Com busses estreo (associados), o nvel atribudo
ers.
With
stereo
(linked)
busses,
level
is is
assigned
toto
the
ers.
With
stereo
(linked)
busses,
level
assigned
the
aos
codificadores
encoders.
When Flip to Faders is pressed, level is flipped to the fadencoders.
Quando
Flip
to
Faders
pressionado,
o
nvel
lanado
aos
ers and pan for the Aux/Var Group bus (even numbered
When
toto
Faders
is is
pressed,
level
ispara
flipped
toto
the
fadfaders
e oFlip
posicionamento
panormico
os bus
Aux/Var
When
Flip
Faders
pressed,
level
is
flipped
the
fadsend) is automatically mapped to the input encoders.
ersers
and
pan
for
the
Aux/Var
Group
bus
(even
numbered
Group
(mandadas
pares)
automaticamente
mapeado
para
and
pan
for
the
Aux/Var
Group
bus
(even
numbered
The pan button
flashes O
while
this
mode
isenquanto
enabled. esse
os send)
codificadores
de entrada.
boto
Pan
pisca
is is
automatically
mapped
toto
the
input
encoders.
send)
automatically
mapped
the
input
encoders.
modo
est
ativado.
The
pan
button
flashes
while
this
mode
is
enabled.
The
pan
button
flashes
while
this
mode
is
enabled.
If the encoders were already flipped to the faders, flipped
status
is maintainedjwhen
anlanados
Aux bus ispara
soloed.
Se
os
codificadores
esto
os
faders, o
If If
the
encoders
were
already
flipped
toto
the
faders,
flipped
the
encoders
were
already
flipped
the
faders,
flipped
status
mantido
quando
um
bus
Aux
colocado
em
Solo.
status
is is
maintained
when
anan
Aux
bus
issolo:
soloed.
status
maintained
when
bus
is
soloed.
To set
Auxes
and
Variable
Groups
toAux
follow
Para
ajustar
Auxes
e Variable
Groups
seguirem
o Solo:
Go
to
theand
Options
page
and para
click
the Busses
To1
set
Auxes
Variable
Groups
toto
follow
solo:
To
set
Auxes
and
Variable
Groups
follow
solo: tab.
12
toto
the
Options
page
and
click
the
Busses
Solo
andeMonitor
Operation,
select
the tab.
Auxes/Variable
1Go
Go
the
Options
page
and
click
the
Busses
tab.
1 V
Under
pgina
Options
clique
na
aba
Busses.
Groups Follow AFL option.
2 2Under
Solo
and
Monitor
Operation,
select
the
Auxes/Variable
Under
Solo
and
Monitor
Operation,
select
the
Auxes/Variable
2 Em Solo and Monitor Operation, selecione a opo Auxes/Variable

Groups
Follow
AFL option.
Groups
Follow
Groups
Follow
AFL.AFL option.
Solo Solo
and and
Monitor
Operation
the Options
> Busses page.
Ajuste
Monitor
Operationsettings
na pginainOptions
> Busses.
Solo
and
Monitor
Operation
settings
inbus
the
Options
>>
Busses
page.
33Solo
Coloque
em
Solo
uma bus
sada
Aux
seu switch
Solo
an
Aux
output
byde
pressing
itspressionando
AFL
switch.
and
Monitor
Operation
settings
in
the
Options
Busses
page.
AFL.
3 3Solo
anan
Aux
output
bus
byby
pressing
itsits
AFL
switch.
Solo
Aux
output
bus
pressing
AFL
switch.
To cancel
display
of Aux send
Para
cancelar
a visualizao
dos controls:
controles de mandadas Aux:
cancel
Unsolo
the bus,
orAux
select
any
other parameter for the input
ToTo
display
of Aux
send
controls:
cancel
display
send
controls:
Tire
o bus
de ofSolo,
ou
selecione
outro parmetro para os
encoders.
debus,
entrada.
codificadores
the
bus,
oror
select
any
other
parameter
forfor
the
input
Unsolo
Unsolo
the
select
any
other
parameter
the
input
encoders.
encoders.
AFL
Follows
Auxes/Variable
Groups Groups
AFL
Follows
Auxes/Variable
AFL
Auxes/Variable
When
the
Follows
Groups option is
selected,
AFLFollows
Follows
Auxes/Variable
Groups
Quando
a AFL
opo
AFLAuxes/Variable
Follows Groups
Auxes/Variable
Groups
est
assigning encoders
an
Aux/Var Group
soloes
selecionada,
atribuirto
codificadores
paraautomatically
um Aux/Var
Group
When
the
AFL
Follows
Auxes/Variable
Groups
option
is is
selected,
When
the
AFL
Follows
Auxes/Variable
Groups
option
selected,
that bus. The AFLcoloca
Followsesse
Auxes
setting
is stored
and AFL
recalled
automaticamente
bus
em Solo.
O ajuste
Follows
assigning
encoders
toto
anan
Aux/Var
Group
automatically
soloes
assigning
encoders
Aux/Var
Group
automatically
soloesPor
Auxes
armazenado
e default,
carregado
cada
arquivo
Show.
with each
Show file. By
thecom
option
is off
(not selected).
that
bus.
The
AFL
Follows
Auxes
setting
is is
stored
and
recalled
that
bus.
The
AFL
Follows
Auxes
setting
stored
and
recalled
padro, a opo est desabilitada (no selecionada).
with
each
Show
file.
ByBy
default,
the
option
is is
offoff
(not
selected).
with
each
Show
file.
default,
the
option
(not
selected).
To set AFL to follow Aux encoder assignment:
Para ajustar o AFL para seguir a atribuio do codificador Aux:
Go
to
the
Options
> Busses
tab
and select the AFL Follows
To1
set
AFL
toto
follow
Aux
encoder
assignment:
To
set
AFL
follow
Aux
encoder
assignment:
1Auxes/Variable
V aba Options
> Busses
e selecione a opo AFL Follows Auxes/
Groups
option.
1 1Go
toto
the
Options
>>
Busses
tab
and
select
the
AFL
Follows
Go
the
Options
Busses
tab
and
select
the
AFL
Follows
Variable
Groups.
Auxes/Variable
Groups
option.
2
In the Input Groups
section,option.
assign encoders to an Aux Send bus.
Auxes/Variable
Nathe
seo
Input,
atribua
os codificadores
para
um Send
bus Aux
Send.
222In
Input
section,
assign
encoders
toto
anan
Aux
bus.
In the
Input
section,
assign
encoders
Aux Send
bus.
To cancel (unsolo) in AFL Follows Auxes mode:
Para cancelar (unSolo) no modo AFL Follows Auxes:
cancel
Press
the
flashing
Solo
Clear button
ToTo
(unsolo)
inin
AFL
Follows
Auxes
mode:
cancel
(unsolo)
AFL
Follows
Auxes
mode:
Press
Pressione
oflashing
botoSolo
piscante
Solo
Clear
the
flashing
button
Press
the
Clear
button
The
Events
List Solo
canClear
be
used
to assign the Solo Clear function to a footswitch or any other available trigger.
A Events
Events
pode
usada
para
atribuir
a funo
Solo
The
List
can
beser
used
toto
assign
the
Solo
Clear
funcThe
Events
List
can
be
used
assign
the
Solo
Clear
func-Clear
a
um
a
footswitch
ou
qualquer
outro
trigger
disponvel.
tion
to
a
footswitch
or
any
other
available
trigger.
tion to a footswitch or any other available trigger.
Auto Cancel and Input Priority

Auto
Cancel
and
The
Auto
Cancel option
determines
whether Solo switches canAuto
Cancel
andInput
InputPriority
Priority
Auto Cancel e Input Priority
otherAuto
soloed
channels
or are determines
additive (latching).
Input PriAcel
opo
Cancel
determina
se switches
os switches
Solo
The
Auto
Cancel
option
determines
whether
Solo
canThe
Auto
Cancel
option
determines
whether
Solo
switches
canority determines
whether
or notou
soloed
inputs replace
soloed
cancelam
o
Solo
de
outros
canais
so
aditivos
(travados).
Input
celcel
other
soloed
channels
oror
are
additive (latching).
Input
Priother
soloed
channels
are
Input
PriPriority
determina
se os canais
deadditive
entrada (latching).
em Solo substituem
ou
outputs
on the AFL/PFL
Solo bus.
ority
determines
whether
oror
not
soloed
inputs
replace
soloed
ority
determines
whether
not
soloed
inputs
replace
soloed
no os canais de sada em Solo no bus Solo AFL/PFL.
outputs
onon
the
AFL/PFL
Solo
bus.
outputs
the
AFL/PFL
Solo
bus.
To set Solo switch operation:
Para ajustar a operao do switch Solo:
1set
Go
to
the
Options
page and click the Busses tab.
ToTo
Solo
switch
operation:
set
Solo
switch
operation:
12
toto
the
Options
page
and
click
the
Busses
tab.
Under
Solo
and Monitor
Operations,
select
the
options
in any
1Go
Go
the
Options
page
and
click
the
Busses
tab.
of the following combinations:
Em
Solo
and
Monitor
Operations,
selecione
a options
opo
em
qualquer
222Under
Solo
and
Monitor
Operations,
select
the
inin
any
Under
Solo
and
Monitor
Operations,
select
the
options
any
das
seguintes
combinaes:
of
the
following
of
the
following
combinations:
Auto
Cancel
On,combinations:
Input
Priority Off A solo cancels all other solos
(inputs
and
outputs)
Auto
Cancel
On,
Input
Priority
Off
Solo
cancela
todos
ossolos
outros
Auto
Cancel
On,
Input
Priority
Off
AUm
solo
cancels
allall
other
solos
Auto
Cancel
On,
Input
Priority
Off
A
solo
cancels
other
Solos (entradas
e sadas).
(inputs
and
outputs)
(inputs
and outputs)
Auto
Cancel
On, Input Priority On An input solo cancels all
otherCancel
soloedOn,
inputs;
an
outputOn
solo
cancels
all other
output
Auto
InputPriority
Priority
Um
Solo
em
entrada
Auto
Cancel
On,
Input
OnOn
An
input
solo
cancels
all cancela
Auto
Cancel
On,
Input Priority
An
input
solo
cancels
todos
outros
Solos
em entrada;
um
Solo
em
sadaallcancela
solos;os
soloed
inputs
temporarily
replace
soloed
outputs
other
soloed
inputs;
anan
output
solo
cancels
allem
other
other
soloed
inputs;
output
solo
cancels
all
other
output
todos
os
outros
Solos
em
sada;
entradas
Solooutput
substituem
solos;
soloed
inputs
temporarily
replace
soloed
outputs
temporariamente
sadas
em Solo.
solos;Cancel
soloedOff,
inputs
temporarily
soloed
outputs
Auto
Input
Priority
Off replace
Solos are
additive,
and soloed inputs and outputs are heard together
Auto
Cancel
Off,
Input
Priority
Off
Solos
are
additive,
and
Auto
Cancel
Off,
Input
Priority
Off
OsSolos
Solos
so
aditivos,
esoentradas
Auto
Cancel
Off,
Input
Priority
Off
are
additive,
and
soeAuto
sadas
em
Solo
so
ouvidas
juntas.
loed
inputs
and
outputs
are
heard
together
loed inputs
are heard
together
Cancel and
Off, outputs
Input Priority
On Solos
are additive, and so-

120
Profile
Guide
120
Guia
VENUE
Profile
120 VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Guide
loed inputs temporarily replace soloed outputs.

Auto
Cancel
Off,
Input
Priority
On
Solos
are
additive,
and
Auto
Cancel
Off,
Input
Priority
On
Os
Solos
so
aditivos,
esoSolo
Auto
Cancel
Off,
Input
Priority
On
Solos
are
additive,
and
so- em
entradas
temporariamente
substituem
sadas
em
Solo
loed
inputs
temporarily
replace
soloed
outputs.
loed inputs temporarily replace soloed outputs.
Solo Bus Operation
Operao de Bus Solo

Soloing
Stage
RackChannels
Features
Colocando
Canais
em
Solo
Solo operation depends on the type of channel being soloed,
Soloing VCAs
Colocando VCAs em Solo
When you solo a VCA, its member channels are soloed. If the
VCA members
include
a combination
of input
output so
Quando
voc coloca
um VCA
em Solo, seus
canaisand
membros
Additional
Required
Components
channels,
solo
follows
anyincluem
Solo switch
options.
colocados
emtheir
Solo.
Se osstatus
membros
do VCA
uma combinao
de See
canais
de Operation
entrada e sada,
seu status
Solo
segue qualquer opo
Solo
Options
on page
120.
Stage Racks
are used do
with
ande
FOH
Rack,
andcolocado
provide em
all stage
Operao
Solo depende
tipo
canal
sendo
Solo,
Solo de switches. Veja Opes de Operao Solo na pgina 120.
and I/O
on any
selected
Solo switch
all Stage
modes,
a chane deaudio
qualquer
opo
de operao
dos options.
switches
Solo.
Em todos
os
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up toIn
two
Racks
To
Video
(15-inch
greater flat-panel VGA display
soloDisplay
the members
of aorVCA:
nel
Solo
switch
lights
to
indicate
that
the
channel
is
soloed.
modos,
switch
Solo de canal se
acende para
que inputs.
o canal
can um
be used
simultaneously,
supporting
up indicar
to 96 total
Para
colocar em Solo
membrosminimum
do VCA: resolution). VGA and
recommended;
1024x768
est em Solo.
DVI supported.
InputI/O
Channels
Audio
you want to
solo soSolo
thatnos
the canais
Solo switch
is lit. membros deseja
Pressione
o switch
VCA cujos
Input
Channels
USB keyboard
andque
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
colocar
em
Solo
para
o
switch
Solo
se
acenda.
Pressing
a Solo
switch
on an controllable
input channel
or preamps
FX Return
sends
48 inputs
with
remotely
mic
and
Pressionar um switch Solo em um Input Channel ou FX Return envia
signal
to the Solo
(Cue) bus
(when inpower.
PFL or AFL modes) or to
individually
selectable
phantom
Clearing
Solos
o sinal para
o bus Solo
(Cue) (quando
nos modos PFL ou AFL) ou
Digital
Snake
(VENUE Profile Systems Only)
Limpando
SolosCable
the
Mains
bus
(when
in
SIP
mode).
busses
8 analog
output
channels;
expandable
para os
Mains
(quando
no modo
SIP). up to 48 analog or
Press
The connection
FOH
Rack in
and
Stage
Rack requires
the flashingbetween
Solo Clear
switch
the
Monitoring
section
o switch piscante Solo Clear na seo Monitoring para
In SIP mode only, when a channel is soloed, all other channels Pressione
a
Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable
can
be
purchased
directly
to clear all soloed channels.
No modo SIP apenas, quando um canal colocado em Solo, todos
limpar todos os canais colocados em Solo.
thatcanais
are not
soloed
or solo
safe are implicitly
Implicit
os outros
que
no esto
colocados
em Solo oumuted.
Solo Safe
so
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O
mutes
are
indicated
by
a
flashing
mute
switch.
implicitamente silenciados e indicados pelo switch Mute piscando.
Busses Output
applicable)
Output
Bussesconnection to a VENUE FOH Rack.
Optional Components
Quando
o switch AFL na seo Output pressionado, o sinal
When the AFL switch in the Output section is pressed, signal
enviado para o bus Solo AFL/PFL. Isso se aplica a Groups, Auxes,
is sent to the AFL/PFL Solo bus. This applies to Groups, Auxes,
Matrixes e Personal Qs. Sadas so sempre AFL.
TheSolo
following
Clear components are optional, and must be
System
Components
Matrixes, and
Personal Qs. Outputs are always AFL.
Solo Clear
Colocando Canais Isolados em Solo
Medio do Bus Solo
Para colocar em Solo um canal isolado, siga um dos seguintes

AllToVENUE
Profilechannel,
systems do
include
procedimentos:
solo a single
one ofthe
thefollowing:
following:
Quando um canal ou entrada enviada para o bus Solo, seu sinal

When
medidoa channel
nos medidores
Selected
Channel,
or dynamics
key input
is senttemporariamente
to the Solo bus,
Dynamic
or condenser
microphone
and XLR
mic
cable
substituindo
qualquer
canal
assinalado.
Para
informaes,
its signal is metered on the Selected Channelmais
meters,
tempo(for
Talkback)
veja Medio do Bus Solo na pgina 117.
Soloing Single
Channels
Included
Components
Press the channels Solo switch so it is lit. The solo switch

Pressione
o switch Solo do canal para que fique aceso. O switch
latches
a momentary
press.
Solo trava
comonuma
presso momentnea.
ou or
Hold
theMouse
channel
Solo switch
forde
more
onepara
second
Segure
o switch
Solo do
canal
por mais
um than
segundo
Solofor
VENUE
Pad
momentary
solo.
The
channel
will
automatically
unsolo
when
momentneo.
O canal ser automaticamente tirado de Solo quando
VENUE Profile Guide
voc solta
o switch.
you release
the switch.
Colocando Mltiplos Canais em Solo

Soloing
Multiple Channels
Para colocar
mltiplos
canais em Solo, siga um dos seguintes
Rack(s)
(see next)
procedimentos:
To solo multiple channels, do one of the following:
theAuto
AutoCancel
Cancelhabilitada,
option enabled,
press
Solo Solo
Com aWith
opo
pressione
os the
switches
de Each
mltiplos
canais
simultaneamente.
switches
on
multiple
channels
simultaneously.
System Restore CD
Hold Multi-Select (Shift) and press the Solo switches on one

Segure
o switch Multi-Select (Shift) e pressione os switches Solo
more
channels.
ou
ECx
Ethernet
em umor
mais
canais.Control Software Installer CD
or
ou Standalone
With Auto Cancel disabled, press the Solo switches on mul Com
a opo Auto Cancel desabilitada, pressione os switches
Plug-in
installer
discs
(if any) withSolo
pre-authorized
iLok
tiple
channels
in any
switches
latch
Solo de
mltiplos
canais
emsequence.
qualquer The
sequencia.
O switch
Soloon.

travado.
One FOH
Link
cable
for connection
to a VENUE
console
Toggling
the
Solo
Status
of Multiple
Channels
Alternando o Status Solo de Mltiplos Canais

To toggle Solo on multiple channels, do one of the following:
Para alternar
o Solo
em mltiplos
Two (2)
IEC power
cables canais, siga um dos seguintes
With Auto Cancel enabled, hold the Multi-Select switch
procedimentos:
while pressing the Solo switches on channels to toggle.
Com Auto Cancel habilitado, segure o switch Multi-Select enquanto

or
pressiona os switches Solo em canais para alternar.
ou With Auto Cancel disabled, press Solo switches in any sequence. The Solo switches latch on and off.
Com o Auto Cancel desabilitado, pressione os switches Solo em

qualquer sequncia. Os switches Solo travam-se acionados ou no
acionados.

Solo
Bus Metering
rarily replacing any currently targeted channel. For more in Footswitches (up to 2)
formation, see Metering the Solo Bus on page 117.
Canais
Solo
Safe
BNC
cables
(for connecting Word clock between the
Solo
Safe Safing
um estado
que previne que um canal de ser
Solo
Channels
25-pin D-Sub
cables
(for connecting
to GPI
devices)
implicitamente
mutado
quando
qualquer outro
canal
colocado em
Solo
Safe
is
a
state
which
prevents
a
channel
from
being imSolo. Apenas Input Channels e FX Return podem ser colocados
em
Solo
Safe. muted
Canaiswhen
Solo Safe
so automaticamente
plicitly
any other
channel is soloed.adicionados
Only inputa
qualquer
explicitamente
colocado
em
Solo.
Solo
Safe
somente
and FXcanal
return
channels can
be made
solo
safe.
Solo
safed
VENUE
Options
se
aplica aosProfile
modos
SIPExpansion
e AFL.added
O status
Solo
Safe ignorado
channels
are
automatically
to any
explicitly
soloed no
modo
PFL. Solo Safe only applies to SIP and AFL modes. Solo
channels.
safe
status
ignored
insystems
PFL mode.
For
details
onisall
VENUE
Para alternar o status Solo Safe de Input Channels e FX Returns, os
website
(www.avid.com).
switches
input
devem
estarstatus
no modo
Solo Safe.
To toggle
the
solo safe
of Input
Channels and FX Returns, the input switches must be set to Solo Safe mode.
Para ajustar switches Safe para controlar a funo Solo Safe:
Mix Rack Options
Toset
Safe Options
switches
to control
the Interaction.
Solo Safe function:
1 V
pgina
e clique
na aba
I/O Options
1 Go to the Options page and click the Interaction tab.
2 Em Input Safe Switches, selecione Act as Solo Safes.

2 Under Input Safe Switches, select Act as Solo Safes.
Para alternar o status Solo Safe de um canal:
To toggle
the
solo safe
status
a channel,
do the line
following:
AO16
Analog
Output
Card
that of
provides
16 analog
level
Selecione um ou mais canais, pressione o switch Safe na seo

outputs
Select one or more channels, then press the Safe switch in
Selected
Channel Input.
the Selected Channel Input section.
ou
or outputs, and 8 AES digital outputs.
line level
Click
on-screen
Solo
button
for the channel.
Clique
nothe
boto
Solo
Safe
doSafe
canal
na tela.
AT16
A-Net
Output
Card
that
provides

IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addiChapter 14: Solo and Monitor Busses 121
digital I/O.
121
Atribuio
de Sada
de Monitor
Assignable
Monitor
Output
Assignable Monitor Output

Assignable Monitor Output
routed to para
hardware
and toe para
OThe
busMonitor
Monitor bus
podecan
serbe
endereado
sadasoutputs
de hardware
The
Monitor
bus
can
be
routed to hardware
outputs
and to
bus-fed
plug-ins.
The
Monitor
bus can bepor
routed
to hardware outputs and to
os
plug-ins
alimentados
bus.
bus-fed plug-ins.
On-screen Solo Safe button

On-screen Solo Safe button
On-screen
Solo
Boto
Solo Safe na
telaSafe button
The Safe switch and button flash to indicate the channel is

The Safe switch and button flash to indicate the channel is
solo Safe
safe.switch
When a
channel
is flash
soloed
its channel
Solo SafeisstaThe
and
button
tobecause
indicateofthe
O switch
e o When
boto Safe
piscam
para indicar
que
em
solo safe.
a channel
is soloed
because
of oitscanal
Solo est
Safe status,
its
Solo
switch
flashes.
solo
safe.
When
a
channel
is
soloed
because
of
its
Solo Safe
staSolotus,
Safe.
um canal
colocado em Solo, por causa
de seu
its Quando
Solo switch
flashes.
tus,Solo
its Solo
flashes.
status
Safe,switch
o switch
Solo pisca.
Monitor
Bus Operation
Monitor
Monitor Bus
Bus Operation
Operation
The Monitor
signal to both the near-field monitor
Operao
dobus
Busoutputs
Monitor
The Monitor bus outputs signal to both the near-field monitor
output
(FOH bus
Rack)
and headphone
output
on the console.
The
Monitor
outputs
signal to both
the near-field
monitor
output
(FOHenvia
Rack)o and
output
on the
console.
O bus
sinalheadphone
para
ambas
as sadas
Monitor
(FOH
TheMonitor
Monitor
bus outputs
can also
beoutput
routed
tothe
hardware
outoutput
(FOH Rack)
and
headphone
on
console.
Thee Monitor
bus na
outputs
canAalso
be routed
hardware
outRack)
headphone
console.
sada
de bus to
Monitor
tambm
puts Monitor
and
to bus-fed
plug-ins.
The
bus outputs
can also
be routed
to
hardware
outputs
and
to bus-fedpara
plug-ins.
pode
ser
endereada
sadas
de
hardware
e
para
alimentar
puts and to bus-fed plug-ins.
plug-ins.
Monitor Bus Switching
Monitor
Bus Switching
Monitor
Bus Switching
Monitor
Bus Switching
The following signals can feed the Monitor bus, listed below
The following signals can feed the Monitor bus, listed below
in order
of
priority:
Key
Listen,
(Cue)
bus,
2-Track
The
following
signals
can
feed Solo
the
Monitor
bus,
listed return,
below
Os seguinte
sinais
podem
alimentar
o bus
Monitor,
listados
abaixo
in order of priority: Key Listen, Solo (Cue) bus, 2-Track return,
COM
input,
and theKey
Mains
mix.
order
ofprioridade:
priority:
Solo
bus, 2-Track
return,
em in
ordem
de
KeyListen,
Listen,
bus(Cue)
Solo (Cue),
return 2-Track,
COM input, and the Mains mix.
entrada
e mix
COMCOM
input,
andMains.
the Mains mix.
Dynamics Key Listen

Dynamics
Key Listen
Dynamics
Key Listen
Dynamics
Key Listen
Pressing a Key Listen button on-screen sends the key signal

Pressing a Key Listen button on-screen sends the key signal
from theoatargeted
channels
built-in
dynamics
processor
to the
Pressing
Key Listen
button
on-screen
sends
signal
Pressionar
boto
Key
Listen
na
tela envia
o sinalthe
dokey
processador
from the targeted channels built-in dynamics processor to the
de dinmica
embutidochannels
do canal built-in
selecionado
para oprocessor
bus Monitor.
Monitor
from
the bus.
targeted
dynamics
to the
Monitor bus.
Monitor bus.
Listentemporariamente
temporarily overrides
the currently
enabled Solo
KeyKey
Listen
sobrescreve
as operaes
Solo
Key Listen temporarily overrides the currently enabled Solo
atualmente
habilitadas
(PFL
ouand
AFL),
substitui
qualquer
outro
bus operation
(PFL or
AFL),
replaces
any other
signal
on
Key
Listen
temporarily
overrides
thee currently
enabled
Solo
bus
operation
(PFL
or oAFL),
and
replaces any other signal on
sinal
noMonitor
bus Monitor
com
sinal
mono.
the
bus
with
the
mono
key signal.
bus
operation
(PFL
or AFL),
and
replaces
any other signal on
the Monitor bus with the mono key signal.
the Monitor bus with the mono key signal.
BusAFL/PFL
Solo AFL/PFL
Solo Bus
AFL/PFL Solo Bus
AFL/PFL Solo Bus
NosIn
modos
PFL, sinais
qualquer
canalchannels
em Solo isenviado
AFL orAFL
PFLoumode,
signalde
from
any soloed
sent to
or
PFL mode,
signal
from any
soloed
channelsem
is sent
to
paraIn
oAFL
bus
Monitor.
Quando
qualquer
canal
colocado
Solo,
the
Monitor
When
any
channel
is soloed,
the Solo
bustoo
In
AFL
or
PFLbus.
mode,
signal
from
any
soloed
channels
is sent
Monitor
bus. When
any2-Track
channel
is
soloed,
the Solo
bus
busthe
Solo
sobrescreve
o
return
se
est
habilitado
ou
a
mix
overrides
thebus.
2-Track
return
it is enabled,
or the
mix
the
Monitor
When
any if
channel
is soloed,
theMains
Solo bus
overrides
2-Track return
it is enabled,
the Mains mix
Mains
se estthe
atualmente
sendo ifenviada
para osor
monitores.
if it is currently
beingreturn
sent toifthe
overrides
the 2-Track
it ismonitors.
enabled, or the Mains mix
bus-fed plug-ins.
These
are in addition
the adio
existing, dedicated
MonEssafeeds
alimentao
occoreto
existentes
sadas
These
feeds
are in addition
toem
the existing,sdedicated
Monitor
outputs
the
Mix
Rack,
andeare
These
feeds on
are
in addition
theFOH
existing,
dedicated
Mondedicadas
Monitor
noRack
Mixtoand
Rack
e FOH
Rack,
sotaken
tomadas
itor outputs on the Mix Rack and FOH Rack, and are taken
aps
o controle
Monitor
e aps
o bus
delay
do bus
post-Monitor
control
andFOH
post-Monitor
delay.
itor
outputs
onSpeakers
the Mix
Rack Speakers
and
Rack,
and
are
taken
post-Monitor Speakers control and post-Monitor bus delay.
Monitor. Speakers control and post-Monitor bus delay.
post-Monitor
Hardware Outputs For routing to hardware outputs, the MoniHardware Outputs For routing to hardware outputs, the MoniHardware
Pararouting
enderear
para
as sadas
de the
hardware,
tor (Solo) Outputs
bus outputs
are
available
in the
Mains
tab
of the
Hardware
For
to hardware
outputs,
Moni- as
tor (Solo)
bus
are
available
in
the Mainsnatab
of the
sadas
do Outputs
bus outputs
Monitor
(Solo)
esto
disponveis
aba
Mains
Patchbay
page.
Monitor
busin
outputs
are assignable
to da
tor
(Solo)
bus
outputs
are
available
the Mains
tab
of the
Patchbay
Outputs
page. Monitor
bus
outputs
are assignable
to
pgina
Patchbay
Outputs.
As sadas
do
bus
Monitor
so
atribuveis
any number
of physical
outputs
on
the
system.
this
capaPatchbay
Outputs
page. Monitor
bus
outputs
areUse
assignable
to
any number
ofnmero
physicalde
outputs
on
the system.
Use this
capapara
qualquer
sadas
fsicas
do
sistema.
Utilize
essa
bilitynumber
to routeofmonitor
toon
multiple
cue stations
(in-ear
any
physicaloutputs
outputs
the system.
Use this
capability to route
monitor
outputs
to multiple
cue stations
(in-ear de
capacidade
para
enderear
sadas
Monitor para
vrias estaes
mix and
wedge
mix), or
to an outboard
analyzer.
bility
to route
monitor
outputs
to multiple
cue stations (in-ear
retorno
(in-ear
mix
e wedge
ou para um
analisador externo.
mix and
wedge
mix),
or tomix),
an outboard
analyzer.
mix and wedge mix), or to an outboard analyzer.
Bus-Fed Plug-Ins For routing to bus-fed plug-ins, the Monitor
Bus-Fed Plug-Ins For
routing
to bus-fed
the Monitor por
Bus-Fed
Para
enderear
para plug-ins,
plug-ins alimentados
bus appears
as a choice
in the
selector.
This
Bus-Fed
Plug-Ins
For routing
toplug-in
bus-fedrouting
plug-ins,
the Monitor
bus,
o bus Monitor
aparece
uma
escolha
no seletor
bus appears
as a choice
in the como
plug-in
routing
selector.
This de
lets you
route
Monitor
bus plug-in
to a bus-fed
stereo
plug-inThis
such
bus
appears
asthe
a choice
in the
routing
selector.
endereamento
doMonitor
plug-in. bus
Issoto
permite
rotear
o bus
Monitor
lets you route the
a bus-fed
stereo
plug-in
suchpara
as
an
onboard
analyzer.
Plug-ins
can
not
be
inserted
on
the
lets
you
route
the
Monitor
bus
to
a
bus-fed
stereo
plug-in
such
um
plug-in
estreo
alimentado
por
bus
como
um
analisador
onboard.
as an onboard analyzer. Plug-ins can not be inserted on the
Monitor
bus.
as
an
onboard
analyzer.
Plug-ins
can
not
be
inserted
on
the
Plug-ins
Monitorno
bus.podem ser inseridos no bus Monitor.
Monitor bus.
Endereando
o Bus
MonitorBus
Bus para
Sadas Adicionais
Routing the
Monitor
to Additional
Outputs
Routing the Monitor Bus to Additional Outputs

Routing the Monitor Bus to Additional Outputs
Para
rotear
o bus
Monitor
sadas adicionais:
To route
the
Monitor
bus para
to additional
outputs:
To route the Monitor bus to additional outputs:

To route the Monitor bus to additional outputs:
1 In the Patchbay, go to Outputs and click the Mains tab.
1 In the Patchbay, go to Outputs and click the Mains tab.
2 Click in the grid to assign the Monitor output to the desired
22 Click
Cliqueinno
atribuir
uma sada
Monitor
destino
thegrid
grid para
to assign
the Monitor
output
to the ao
desired
destination.
2
Click in the grid to assign the Monitor output to the desired
desejado.
destination.
destination.
Solo
In Place,
when quando
engaged, is simultaneously
routed to
Solo
In Place,
simultaneamente
Solo
In Place,
when engaged, habilitado,
is simultaneously
routed to
the
Mains
andwhen
Monitor
busses.
Solo
In Place,
engaged,
isMains
simultaneously
routed to
endereado
para
os
busses
e
Monitor.
the Mains and Monitor busses.
the Mains and Monitor busses.
In the
Patchbay,
to Outputs
andnaclick
Mains tab.
11 No
Patchbay,
v go
Outputs
e clique
abathe
Mains.
Routingothe
Bus
to Plug-Ins
Roteando
Bus Monitor
Monitor para
Plug-Ins
Routing the
Monitor
Bus
to Plug-Ins
Routing the Monitor Bus to Plug-Ins
Para
rotear
a sadaoutput
Monitor
um plug-in:
To route
Monitor
topara
a bus-fed
plug-in:
To route Monitor output to a bus-fed plug-in:

To route Monitor output to a bus-fed plug-in:
1 Go to the Plug-Ins page.
1 Go to the Plug-Ins page.
2 Make sure the desired stereo plug-in is installed and as2 Certifique-se
Make sure the
desired
stereo plug-in
installedest
and as2signed
deslot.
que o plug-in
estreo is
desejado
e
2 Maketosure
the
desired
stereo plug-in
is
installed andinstalado
asa rack
signed
to
a
rack
slot.
atribudo a um slot do rack.
signed to a rack slot.
3 Click the Plug-In Input selector at the top of the correspond3 Click the Plug-In Input selector at the top of the correspond33ingClick
Clique
noPlug-In
selector
Input
no
docorrespondslot
de rack
rackthe
slot,
and
choose
Bus Outs
Mains
> Monitor
- stereo.
InputPlug-In
selector
at >
the
topalto
of
the
ing rack slot, and
Mains
Monitor
correspondente
, e choose
escolhaBus
BusOuts
Outs>
Mains>
Monitor-- -stereo.
stereo.
ing rack slot, and
choose
Bus
Outs
>>Mains
>>Monitor
stereo.
Plug-in outputs cannot be returned to input channels, in orPlug-in
outputs
cannot
bepodem
returned
to inputpara
channels,
in orSadas
de plug-ins
no
retornar
Input Channels,
der
to prevent
feedback
loops.
Plug-in
outputs
cannot
be
returned
to input channels,
in order
to
prevent
feedback
loops.
a to
fimprevent
de prevenir
loops
de feedback.
der
feedback
loops.
11 V
pgina
Plug-Ins.page.
Go to
the Plug-Ins
if it is currently being sent to the monitors.

if it is currently being sent to the monitors.
Return 2-Track
2-Track Return
2-Track Return
Return2-Track est habilitada, qualquer sinal dessas
Se 2-Track
uma
entrada
If
2-Track
input is enabled, any signal from those inputs is sent
If
2-Track
input ispara
enabled,
any
signal from
those
inputs is sent
entradas
enviado
o bus
Monitor.
Se
Mix
to Monitors
est
to2-Track
the Monitor
If Mix to
Monitors
is enabled,
the 2-Track
If
input bus.
is enabled,
any
signal from
those inputs
is sent
to the Monitor
If Mix
to Monitors isento
enabled,
themonitorar
2-Track
habilitado,
a entradabus.
2-Track
o sobrescreve,
pode-se
input
it so If
you
monitor is
the
2-Trackthe
return
withto
the overrides
Monitor bus.
Mixcan
to Monitors
enabled,
2-Track
o return
semitter
o Mix
Monitors.
input2-Track
overrides
so que
you desabilitar
can monitor
theto
2-Track
return without having
to disable
Mixcan
to monitor
Monitors.
input
overrides
it so you
the 2-Track return without having to disable Mix to Monitors.
having to disable Mix to Monitors.

Mixout
to Monitors
Mix to Monitors
Mix to Monitors
Mix to Monitors
A mixagem
Mains (o sinal presente nos busses Mains) pode ser
The Mains mix (the signal present on the Mains busses) can be
enviada
ao busmix
Monitor.
The Mains
(the signal present on the Mains busses) can be
sent Mains
to the mix
Monitor
bus. present on the Mains busses) can be
The
(the signal
sent to the Monitor bus.
sent to the Monitor bus.

122 VENUE
ProfileProfile
Guide
122
Guia VENUE
Assigningsadas
monitor
output
a plug-in
bus-fed plug-in
Atribuindo
Monitor
paratoum
Assigning monitor output to a bus-fed plug-in
Assigning monitor output to a bus-fed plug-in
Sending the Main Mix to the

Enviando
a Mix Main
para oMix
Bus Monitor
Sending
the
Main
to
Sending
theMix
Main
Mix
to the
the
Monitor Output from an L-C-R Main Mix
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
Bus
Bus
Bus
SadaThe
Monitor
deMix
uma
mix
Main
L-C-R
Monitor
Output
from
an L-C-R
Mainis Mix
stereo
to
Monitors
signal
derived from the LCR
Monitor
Output
from
an L-C-R
Main Mix
Stage
Rack
Features
Main mix by adding a 3 dB signal from the Center channel to
Theestreo
stereo Mix
MixtotoMonitors
Monitors
signal is da
derived
fromLCR
the LCR
O sinal
derivado
mix Main
Main
The
stereo
Mix
to Monitors
signal
is derived
from the
Stage
Racks
are
used
with
anchannels.
FOH Rack,
and
provide
allLCR
stage
the
Left
and
Right
monitor
Main
mix
by
adding
a
3
dB
signal
from
the
Center
channel
to
adicionando
um
sinal
de3
dB
do
canal
Center
para
os
canais
Left
Main I/O
mixfor
by adding
aProfile
3 dB signal
from
channel
audio
VENUE
systems.
Upthe
to Center
two Stage
Racksto
e Right
Monitor.
thedo
Left
and Right
monitor
channels.
the
Left
and
Right
monitor
channels.
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
Monitor
Output
from
an LR+M
Main Mix
SadaMonitor
MonitorOutput
de umafrom
mix Main
LR+MMain Mix
anonly
LR+M
In
a LR+M
Main
mix,
the Left
Monitor
from
an LR+M
Mainand
MixRight channels are
Audio
I/OOutput
heard
in
the
Solo
bus.
In a mix
LR+M
mix,
only the
Left and
channels
are
Em uma
MainMain
LR+M,
apenas
os
canais
LeftRight
e Right
so ouvidos
inputs
withmix,
remotely
controllable
mic
preamps
and
Ina 48
LR+M
Main
only the
Left and
Right
channels
are
no bus
Solo.
heard
in the Solo bus.
individually
phantom power.
heard
in the Soloselectable
bus.
To send the Main mix to the monitors:
8 analog
output
channels;
expandable
up to 48 analog or
Para To
enviar
uma
Main
Monitors
:
send
theofmix
Main
mixpara
to the
monitors:
1
one
the following:
To Do
send
theoutputs
Main
mix
toStage
the monitors:
digital
per
Rack.
Press
thethe
Mix
to
Monitors switch in the Mains section.
1 um
Do
one
of
following:
1 Siga
dos seguintes
procedimentos:
1 Do one
of the following:
Synchronization
and
Control
I/Oswitch in the Mains section.
or
Press
Mix to Monitors
the
Press
the Mix to Monitors switch in the Mains section.
Pressione
o switch Mix to Monitors na seo Mains.
Snake
enable primary
and redundant
Go to connectors
the Options to
> Busses
tab and select
the Mix to(if
Mon or
or
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
itors
option.
to the Options > Busses tab and select the Mix to Mon ou Go
Go to the Options > Busses tab and select the Mix to Monitors
2 Turn
theoption.
Monitor Speakers knob or the Headphones knob to
itors
option.
adjust
V aba
Options > Busses
e selecione a opo Mix to
the
corresponding
output
2Monitors.
Turn the Monitor Speakers
knoblevel.
or the Headphones knob to
2 Turn the Monitor Speakers knob or the Headphones knob to
System
Components
adjust the corresponding
output level.
adjust the corresponding output level.
2 Gire
o knob Monitor
Speakers
Headphones para ajustar o nvel
Adjusting
Solo
Busou
Level
de sada
correspondente.
Included
Components
Adjusting
Solo
Bus
Level
PFL Solo bus levels
be controlled
Adjusting
Solocan
Bus
Level by the Level Trim knob
All
VENUE
Profile
systems
include
theon-screen
following:
in
section,
and
with the
Level
Trimknob
conAjustando
oSolo/PFL
Nvel
do
Bus
Solobe
PFLthe
Solo
bus
levels
can
controlled
by
the Level
Trim
PFL
Solo
bus
levels
canisbeadjustable
controlled by the
LevelofTrim
knob
trol.
The
trim
amount
a range
dB
to
the
VENUE
Profile
console
in
Solo/PFL
section,
and with theover
on-screen
Level20
Trim
con-
in
the
Solo/PFL
section,
the on-screen
Level
TrimTrim
conNveis
do
bus
Solo PFL
podemand
serwith
controlados
pelo knob
Level
+20
dB.
trol.
The (2)
trim
amount
adjustable over a range of 20 dB to
Two
IEC
poweriscables
trol. Solo/PFL,
The trim amount
is adjustable
a range
20 dB to
na seo
e com o controle
Level over
Trim na
tela. Aofquantidade
+20
dB.
pode
Monitor
mount
for
VGA
screen
(screen
not can
included)
do Trim
ser ajustada
entre20
dB
+20
dB.you
Because
Trim only
affects
PFLe signals,
easily bal+20
dB. Level
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
ance
AFLLevel
signals
or only
Mix
to
Monitors
with PFL
withbala
Because
Trim
affects
PFL included)
signals,
yousignals,
can easily
Level
Trim Trim
onlyafeta
affects
PFL signals,
you
canavoc
easily
balPelo Because
fato
de que
Level
apenas
os sinais
PFL,
pode
minimum
ofoMouse
Monitoring
adjustment
during
show.
VENUE
ance
AFL signals
or Pad
Mix tolevel
Monitors
with PFL
signals,
with a
facilmente
equilibrar
AFL
Mix to Monitors
sinais
PFL,a
ance AFL
signalssinais
or Mix
to ou
Monitors
with PFLcom
signals,
with
ofProfile
Monitoring
duringdurante
a show.
VENUE
Guide
com minimum
um
mnimo
ajustes
delevel
nveladjustment
de monitorao
minimum
of de
Monitoring
level
adjustment
during a show.um
To trim the Solo bus level:
show. Two (2) console lights
ToSolo
trim
SoloDust
bus
1
athe
channel
or level:
press a Key Listen switch.
Protective
Cover
To trim
the
Solo bus
level:
Para ajustar o nvel de sinal do bus Solo:
1
a channel
or press a Key Listen switch.
2 Solo
DoRack(s)
one
of(see
the next)
following:
1
Solo
a channel
or press a Key Listen switch.
1 Coloque
um canal
em
Solo
pressione
um switch
Key Listen.
Turn
the
Level
Trimou
knob
to control
the amount
of signal
2 Do
one
of the
following:
Racks,
Software
CDs,bus.
iLoks,
and Cables
Monitor
sent
Turnto
thethe
Level
Trim knob
to control the amount of signal
Turn
the Level Trim
knob to control the amount of signal
2 Siga um
dos seguintes
procedimentos:
Go
Options
> Busses
tab and adjust the Level Trim
sentto
tothe
theor
Monitor
bus.
Rack
FOH
includes:
Each
Gire Mix
o knob
Level
TrimRack
para
controlar a quantidade de sinal
sent
to the
Monitor
bus.
setting
in
the
Solo
and
Monitor
Go ao
to the
Options
Busses tabOperations
and adjustsection.
the Level Trim
enviada
bus
Monitor.
Restore
CD>
System
Go to the
Options
> Busses tab and adjust the Level Trim
setting
in
the
Solo
and
Monitor
Operations
section.
V ECx
aba
Options
>
Busses
e
ajuste
a
configurao
Level Trim
Ethernet
Installer CD
setting
in theControl
Solo andSoftware
Monitor Operations
section.
na seo Solo and Monitor Operations.

The following diagrams show the signal flow for PFL and AFL
modes.
following
diagrams
show
the de
signal
PFL PFL
and AFL
OThe
diagrama
seguinte
mostra
o fluxo
sinalflow
nos for
modos
AFL.
The
following
diagrams
show
the signal
flow
for
PFL andeAFL
modes.
modes.
Level Trim (PFL)
Level Trim (PFL)
Input ChannelRequired Components

Additional
Level Trim (PFL)
Solos (PFL)
Level Trim (PFL)
Channel
TheInput
following
Input
Solos Channel
(PFL)
To Monitor/
Solos (PFL)
+
Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel
VGA
display
Headphones
To Monitor/
Output
Channel
recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution).
VGA and
To Monitor/
+
Headphones
Solos (AFL)
+
Headphones
DVI
supported.
Output
Channel
Output
Channel
Solos (AFL)
USB
keyboard
Solos
(AFL)
Level Trim in PFL mode


a Input
Digital
Channel
from
SolosAvid
(AFL)or assembled by your preferred vendor.
Input Channel
Input
Solos Channel
(AFL)
Solos (AFL)
To Monitor/
Headphones
To Monitor/
Output Channel
To
Monitor/
+
Headphones
+
(AFL) components are optional, and
TheSolos
following
mustHeadphones
be
Output Channel
Output
Channel
purchased
separately:
Solos (AFL)
Solos (AFL)
Optional Components
No Level Trim in AFL mode
No Level
Trim in AFL
mode speakers for mix position monitoring
Near-field
monitor
No
Level
Trim in Monitoring
AFL
mode
Adjusting
and Headphone Level
Adjusting Monitoring and Headphone Level

Headphones with
1/4-inchde
jack
Ajustando
Nveis
Monitorao
e
Adjusting
Monitoring
and
Headphone
Level
Output
levels for
the near-field
monitors
and XLR
headphones
are
Adjusting
Monitoring
and
Headphone
Level
Dynamic
or
condenser
microphone
and
mic
cable
Headphone
controlled by the corresponding volume knobs in the Moni-
controlled
by for
thethe
corresponding
volume and
knobs
in the MoniOutput
near-field monitors
headphones
are
(forlevels
Talkback)
Output
levels
for
thecan
near-field
monitors
and headphones
toring
section.
You
also
use
the
on-screen
controls,
orareso
controlled
by
the
corresponding
volume
knobs
in
the
MoniNveis
de
sada
para
seus
monitores
near-field
e
headphones
Footswitches
(up
to 2)
controlled
theMains
corresponding
volume knobs in the Monimap
Cue
toby
the
controlados
pelos
knobs
de use
volume
correspondentes
naorseo
toring
section.
You
canfader.
also
the on-screen
controls,
MIDI
cablesYou
(forcan
connecting
external
MIDIcontrols,
devices) or
toring
section.
also use the
on-screen
Monitoring.
tambm
pode utilizar os controles na tela ou
map Cue toVoc
the Mains
fader.
map
Cue
topara
the o
Mains
fader.
BNC
(for
connecting
mapear
Cuecables
fader
Mains. Word clock between the
Monitoring controls
Controles
de Monitorao
Monitoring
controls
Adjusting
Monitor
Level
Delay
The
following options
can be
addedand
to VENUE
Profile systems.
Ajustando
Nvel
e
Delay
de
Monitor
For
details on all
VENUE systems
and
options,
visit the Avid
Adjusting
Monitor
Level
and
Delay
Adjusting
Monitor
Level
and
Delay
To adjust
Solo/Monitor
level
from the
console
Monitoring
website
(www.avid.com).
section:
Para
ajustar o nvel Solo/Monitor pela seo Monitoring da
To adjust Solo/Monitor level from the console Monitoring
To adjust Solo/Monitor level from the console Monitoring
console:
section:
Adjust the Monitoring or Headphone level, as needed.

section:
Monitoring controls
Mix Rack Options
Adjust
as needed.
Ajuste
o the
nvelMonitoring
Monitoring or
ouHeadphone
Headphone,level,
conforme
necessrio.
Adjust
the
Monitoring
or
Headphone
level,
as needed.
See also
Cue on Mains
Fader on page
124.
I/O Options
See
also
Cue on
Mains
FaderFader
on page
Veja
tambm
Cue
on Mains
na124.
pgina 124.
See
also
on
Mains
Fader
on page
124.
To adjust
the Cue
Solo/Monitor
level
on-screen:
To Go
adjust
the
Solo/Monitor
level
1
to level
the
Options
> Busses
tab.
Para
ajustar
o nvel
Solo/Monitor
naon-screen:
tela:
mic/line
inputs
To adjust
the
Solo/Monitor
level
on-screen:
1 In
Gothe
to the
> Busses
tab. section, adjust the Moni2
SoloOptions
and Monitor
Operations
1VGo
to the
Options
>Card
Busses
1AO16
aba
Options
> Busses.
Analog
Output
thattab.
toring
encoder.
2 In the Solo and Monitor Operations section, adjust the Monioutputs
2 In the Solo and Monitor Operations section, adjust the Moni2toring
Na seo
Solo and Monitor Operations, ajuste o codificador
encoder.
toring encoder.
Monitoring
. and Digital Output Card that provides 8 analog
XO16 Analog
that and
provides
anBusses
addi- 123
Chaptercard
14: Solo
Monitor
tional 8 channels of analogChapter
I/O and
8
channels
of
AES/EBU
14: Solo and Monitor Busses 123
digital I/O.
123
You can apply an adjustable delay to the monitor outputs and
can
applyum
andelay
adjustable
delay
to the monitor
and
VocYou
pode
aplicar
ajustvel
s sadas
Monitor eoutputs
headphone
You
can
apply
an adjustable
delay
to the delay
monitor
outputs
headphone
outputs
to match the
acoustic
from
the and
outputs
to match
the acoustic
delay from
the de
paraheadphone
corresponder
ao delay
acstico
do sistema
principal
headphone
outputs to match the acoustic delay from the
main
speaker system.
amplificao.
main speaker system.
main speaker system.
To adjust
monitor
output
Para
ajustar
o delay
da
sadadelay:
Monitor:
To
adjust
monitor
output
delay:
To adjust monitor output delay:
1 Go to the Options > Busses tab.
the Options
> Busses tab.
1 V11 Go
abato
Options
> Busses.
Go
to
the Options
> Busses tab.
2 Adjust the Delay setting in the Solo and Monitor Operations

2 Adjust the Delay setting in the Solo and Monitor Operations
2 section.
Ajuste
a configurao
Delay
seo
and Monitor
Operations.
2 Adjust
the Delay
setting
the Solo
Operations
Be sure
to click
thena
Inin
button
beneath
the on-screen
section. Be sure to click the In button beneath the on-screen

Certifique-se
de sure
clicar
boto
InInabaixo
codificador
na
tela para
section.
tonoclick
the
button
beneath
theis
on-screen
encoder
to Be
enable
Delay.
When
lit,
thedo
Delay
setting
applied
encoder
to enable
Delay.
When
lit, the
Delaysetting
is applied
habilitar
o
delay.
Quando
aceso,
o
ajuste
de
Delay
aplicado
sada
to enable
Delay. When lit, the Delay setting is applied
to encoder
the monitor
output.
to the monitor output.
Monitor.
to the monitor output.
Cue
on Mains
Fader
Cue
on Mains
Fader
Cue on Mains
Fader
Cue on Mains Fader
Adjusting the Mains While Cue On Mains Fader is

AdjustingMains
the Mains
WhileCue
Cue On Mains
Ajustando
Enquanto
Mains Fader
Fader is est
Adjusting the Mains
While Cue On
On Mains
Fader
is
Enabled
Enabled
Habilitado
Enabled
When Cue on Mains Fader is enabled, the Mains output level

When Cue
on
enabled,
the Mains
output
Quando
Cue
onMains
MainsFader
Faderis
habilitado,
ofrom
nvel
daslevel
sadas
Whenat
Cue
on
Mains
is est
enabled,
the Mains
output
level
remains
its last
settingFader
and remains
accessible
the conremains
at its last
setting
andajustes
remains
the conMains
mantm
seus
ltimos
e accessible
permanecefrom
acessvel
pela
remains
at its last as
setting
and remains accessible from the console
and on-screen,
follows:
sole and
on-screen,
as follows:
console
e na
tela:
sole and on-screen, as follows:
Adjusting
Mains with
the
Output Encoders
Ajustando
com
os the
codificadores
Output
AdjustingMains
Mains
with
Output Encoders
Adjusting Mains with the Output Encoders
Enabling Cue on Mains Fader puts Mains control on Output enEnablingCue

Cue on
putscoloca
Mains control
on Output
Habilitar
on Mains
MainsFader
Fader
o controle
Mainsennos
Enabling
coders
13.Cue on Mains Fader puts Mains control on Output encoders 13.Output 13.
codificadores
coders 13.
Mains
L R C/M Mains
(or L C R)
Mains
L R C/M
(or L C R)
L R C/M (or L C R)
Mains fader
can be
assigned
to controlar
control cuenvel
(Monitor
bus)
O The
fader
atribudo
para
de sada
Cue
TheMains
Mainspode
faderser
can
be assigned
to controlo cue
(Monitor
bus)
The Mains
fader can
be assigned
toMains
control
cue
(Monitor
bus)
output
level.Habilitar
Enabling
the
Cue
on on
Mains
Fader
option
letsajustar
you
(Monitor
bus).
a
opo
Cue
Fader
permite
output level. Enabling the Cue on Mains Fader option lets you
output
level.
Enabling
Mains
lets you
o adjust
nvel
desolo
Solo
PFL/AFL
semthe
ter Cue
que on
tirar
suastoFader
mos
dos faders.
PFL/AFL
level
without
having
takeoption
your
hands
adjust solo PFL/AFL level without having to take your hands
solo PFL/AFL level without having to take your hands
offadjust
the faders.
off the faders.
O controle
dos busses Mains permanece disponvel pelos
off the faders.
codificadores
Output
e na
tela na
pginaavailable
Outputs. from the OutControl of the
Mains
busses
remains
Control of the Mains busses remains available from the Outof and
the Mains
busses
remains
available
putControl
encoders
on-screen
in the
Outputs
page. from the Output encoders and on-screen in the Outputs page.
O ajuste
Cue on Mains
Fader armazenado
com opage.
arquivo Show.
put encoders
and on-screen
in the Outputs
The Cue on Mains Fader setting is stored with the Show file.
The Cue on Mains Fader setting is stored with the Show file.
ParaThe
habilitar
on Mains:
Cue Cue
on Mains
Fader setting is stored with the Show file.
To enable Cue on Mains:
Tooenable
Cue on
Mains: inteiramente no sentido anti-horrio
1 Gire
codificador
Monitoring
To enable
Cue on
Mains:
1 Turn the Monitoring encoder fully counter-clockwise (off).
(off).

3 Under Solo and Monitor Operations, select the Cue on Mains
3 Under Solo and Monitor Operations, select the Cue on Mains
3 Fader
Em3 Solo
andSolo
Monitor
Operations,
selecione
a opo
Cue on
on Mains
Mains
Under
and Monitor
Operations,
select
the Cue
option.
to the
Options
> Busses page.
2 V2 Go
pgina
Options
> Busses.
Fader option.
Fader.
Fader option.
Cue
Cue
(Monitoring)
Cue
(Monitoring)
(Monitoring)
Bus control while Cue on Mains is enabled
While Cue on Mains Fader is active:

While Cue on Mains Fader is active:
Enquanto
Cue
onMains
Mains
Fader
ativo:
Cue
on
Fader
isest
active:
While
Enabling
Insert
mode
replaces
the
current Output enHabilitar
Enablingo Insert
mode
replaces
theascurrent
Output
endos
coder
modo
Insert
substitui
atribuies
atuais
Enabling
Insert mode
replaces
the current
Output
enassignments
with insert
controls.
coder assignments
with controles
insert controls.
codificadores
Output com
de insert.
coder assignments
withreplaces
insert controls.
Banking
to
Matrix
or
PQ
the
current
Output
en Associar
Matrixorou
substitui
atribuies
Bankingpara
to Matrix
PQPQ
replaces
the as
current
Output atuais
endos
Banking
to
Matrix
or
PQ
replaces
the
current
Output
en-PQ
coder
assignments
with
the
sources
for
the
selected
Macodificadores
com
as fontes
doselected
Matrix Maou
coder
assignmentsOutput
with the
sources
for the
coder
assignments with the sources for the selected Matrix
or PQ.
selecionado.
trix or PQ.
trix or PQ.
AjustandoMains
MainsOn-Screen
Na Tela
Adjusting
Adjusting Mains On-Screen
Adjusting Mains On-Screen
You
can use the
controls
in thena
Outputs
on-screen
to seVoc
usar
controles
pginapage
Outputs
para selecionar,
You pode
can use
theos
controls
in the Outputs
page on-screen
to seYou
canou
use
the controls
inof
the
Outputs
page
on-screen
lect,
mute,
or
adjust
level
any
of the
busses
RRsesilenciar
ajustar
othe
nvel
de
qualquer
dos Mains
busses
Mains(L,
(L,to
e C/
lect, mute, or adjust the level of any of the Mains busses (L, R
Mono).
lect,
mute, or adjust the level of any of the Mains busses (L, R
and
C/Mono).
Cue on Mains
Cue on Mains
Cue on Mains
Cue on Mains
Cue on Mains
Cue on
Mainsagora controla o nvel Monitoring. O switch Mains
O The
fader
Mains
Mains
fader now controls Monitoring level. The Mains Se-
The
Mains
fader now controls Monitoring level. The Mains SeSelect
pisca
rapidamente.
Mains
fader quickly.
now controls Monitoring level. The Mains SelectThe
switch
flashes
lect switch flashes quickly.
lect switch flashes quickly.
Para sair de Cue on Mains Fader (retornar ao normal):
To exit Cue on Mains (return to normal):

To exit Cue on Mains (return to normal):
To exit
CueOptions
on Mains
(return to
normal):
V
pgina
Busses
e clique
desmarcar
a opo
Go
to
the Options
>>Busses
page,
thenpara
click
to deselect
the
Go to the Options > Busses page, then click to deselect the
Cue
on
Mains.
Go
to
the
Options
>
Busses
page,
then
click
to
deselect
the
Cue on Mains option.
Voccan
pode
umtoEvent
e desligar
You
set configurar
up an Event
togglepara
Cue ligar
on Mains
on or Cue
off. on
You can
set
up an Event
to
toggle Cue on Mains on or off.
Mains.
Veja
o
Captulo
22,
Eventos.
can set
an Event to toggle Cue on Mains on or off.
SeeYou
Chapter
22,upEvents.
See Chapter 22, Events.
See Chapter 22, Events.
Enquanto
Cue
on Mains
est the
habilitado,
os busses
While Cue
on Mains
is enabled,
Mains busses
remain Mains
While Cue
on Mains na
is enabled,
the Mains
busses remainpara
permanecem
disponveis
tela,
e
podem
ser
selecionados
While Cue
on Mains
enabled,
the Mains
available
on-screen,
andiscan
be targeted
to thebusses
ACS. remain
available on-screen, and can be targeted to the ACS.
o ACS.
available on-screen, and can be targeted to the ACS.

124
Guia VENUE Profile
and C/Mono).
and C/Mono).
Select
a Mains
to target
it in the ACS,
Selecione
um bus
bus on-screen
Mains na tela
para direcion-lo
nothen
ACS, use
e use os
Select a Mains bus on-screen to target it in the ACS, then use
Select
a Mains
busChannel
on-screen
targetmute,
it in silenciar
the
ACS, ou
then
use o
controles
Selected
para
selecionar,
the
selected
channel
controls
toto
select,
or adjust
theajustar
the selected channel controls to select, mute, or adjust the
nvel
dos
busses
Mains.
the
selected
channel
controls
to
select,
mute,
or
adjust
the
level of the Mains busses.
Talkback,
2-Track
andand
Oscillator
Talkback,
2-Track
Oscillator
Controles
Talkback, 2-Track e Oscillator
Controls
Controls
Talkback,
Talkback,2-Track
2-Trackand
andOscillator
Oscillator
Stage
Rack
You
can assign
Talkback
microphone
input,
2-Track
in-deinVoc
pode
atribuir
aFeatures
entrada
demicrophone
microfone
Talkback,
as source
entradas
You
can
assign
Talkback
input,
2-Track
source
Controls
Controls
puts,puts,
and and
the ebuilt-in
Oscillator
to
any
Input
Channel
or
FX
fontes
2-Track,
o
Oscillator
embutido
para
qualquer
Input
Channel
the used
built-in
Oscillator
to anyand
Input
Channel
or FX
Stage Racks are
with
an FOH Rack,
provide
all stage
You
can
Talkback
microphone
input,
2-Track
source
inouReturn.
FX
Return.
As sadas
Talkback,
2-Track
einput,
Oscillator
podem
Talkback,
2-Track,
and
built-in
Oscillator
output
canser
You
canassign
assign
Talkback
microphone
2-Track
source
inReturn.
and
built-in
Oscillator
output
audio
I/O Talkback,
for VENUE2-Track,
Profile systems.
Up to
two Stage
Rackscan
endereadas
para
qualquer
bus
de
sada.
and
the
built-in
Oscillator
to
any
Input
Channel
or
FX
be puts,
routed
to
any
output
busses.
puts,
and
the
built-in
Oscillator
to
any
Input
Channel
or
FX
be routed to any output busses.
Return.
Return.Talkback,
Talkback,2-Track,
2-Track,and
andbuilt-in
built-inOscillator
Oscillatoroutput
outputcan
can
Utilizando
Talkback
beberouted
totoany
output
busses.
routed
any
output
busses.
Audio I/O
Using
Talkback
Using
Talkback
A entrada
na console
aceita
sinal de qualquer
microfone
48Talkback
inputs with
remotely
controllable
mic preamps
and
TheUsing
Talkback
input
on the
console
accepts
signal
fromfrom
any dyThe
Talkback
input
on
the
console
accepts
signal
any dydinmico
ou
condensador.
Talkback
Using
Talkback
individually
Talkback
Mic Mic
Talkback
connector
connector
Talkback
Mic
The following components must be purchased
separately:
Talkback
Mic
connector
connector
Talkback
Talkback
Video
Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
switch
switch
LevelLevel
control
Talkback
control
Talkback
2-Track
DVI2-Track
supported.
switch
switch
USB
keyboard
compatible)
Oscillator
Level
control
Oscillator
2-Track and trackball/mouse (Windows
Level
control
2-Track
RouteRoute
To Selected
Oscillator
On/Talk
Digital
Snake
Cable (VENUE Profile Systems
Only)
namic
or condenser
microphone.
To Selected
Oscillator
On/Talk
namic
or condenser
microphone.
switch
switch
8
analog
output
channels;
expandable
up
to
48
analog
or
The
Talkback
input
on
the
console
accepts
signal
from
any
dyThe
Talkback
input
on
the
console
accepts
signal
from
any
dyAtribuindo a Entrada de Microfone Talkback
Route
digital
outputs per
Stage Rack.
On/Talk
namic
ororcondenser
microphone.
RouteToToSelected
Selected
Talkback
controls
in theinTalkback/Osc
section
On/Talk
namic
condenser
microphone.
Talkback
controls
the
Talkback/Osc
section
Assigning
Talkback
Microphone
Input
a Digital
Snake
cable.
This cable can
be purchased
Controles
Talkback
na seo
Talkback/Osc
Assigning
Talkback
Microphone
Input
switch
switch directly
Para atribuir a entrada Talkback para um Input Channel ou FX
from Avid
or assembled
by and
your Setting
preferred Level
vendor.
Activating
Talkback
Input
Synchronization
and Control
I/O
Talkback
controls
ininthe
Talkback/Osc
section
Activating
Talkback
Input
and
Setting Level
Return:
Talkback
controls
the
Talkback/Osc
section
Talkback
Input
To Assigning
assign
Talkback
inputinput
to Microphone
an
Channel
or FXorReturn:
Ativando
e Ajustando
o Nvel
da Entrada
Talkback
Assigning
Talkback
Microphone
Input
To assign
Talkback
toInput
an Input
Channel
FX Return:
Activating
Talkback
Setting
Level
Go1to
the
Patchbay
>
tab,
thenthen
click
theChannels
Channels
tab FX
activate
andComponents
set
the
level
for Talkback
input:
1 1V
aba
> Inputs
Inputs
e clique
a aba
ou
Activating
Talkback
and
Setting
Level
Go
toPatchbay
the Patchbay
> Inputs
click
the Channels
tab ToPara
Toativar
activate
and
set
the Input
level
forand
Talkback
input:
Optional
e ajustar
o nvel
daInput
entrada
Talkback:
ToToassign
input
Channel
orRack.
applicable)
connection
to
atab,
VENUE
FOH
assignTalkback
Talkback
inputtotoan
anInput
Input
Channel
orFXFXReturn:
Return:
Returns.
or the
tab. tab.
or FX
theReturns
FX Returns
1 Press
the Talkback
switch
in the
section
so that
Press
the Talkback
switch
inTalkback/Osc
the
Talkback/Osc
section
following
components
are
optional,
and
must
be so that
1 1Go
To1
set
level
for
Talkback
input:
Gototothe
thePatchbay
Patchbay> >Inputs
Inputstab,
tab,then
thenclick
clickthe
theChannels
Channelstab
tab 1The
Toactivate
activateand
and
setthe
the
level
for
Talkback
input:
Pressione
o
switch
Talkback
na
seo
Talkback/Osc
para que
it
is
lit.
2
At
the
top
of
the
channel
grid,
click
the
FOH
tab.
it is lit. separately:
2 the
At
the
top
the
channel
grid,
2 Noor
alto
doFX
grid
deof
canais,
clique na
abaclick
FOH.the FOH tab.
purchased
tab.
or
the
FXReturns
Returns
tab.
fique
aceso.
1 1Press
the
Talkback
switch
inin
the
Talkback/Osc
section
soso
that
Press
the
Talkback
switch
the
Talkback/Osc
section
that
doing
one
of the
following:
USBTalkback
flash
diskby(or
other
portable
device for
3 System
Click
in the
channel
grid grid
to assign
the Talk
input
source
to to 2 Activate
Components
2is Activate
Talkback
by
doing
one
ofUSB
the storage
following:
3AtClick
intop
the
channel
to
assign
the
Talk
input
source
it
lit.
2
the
top
of
the
channel
grid,
click
the
FOH
tab.
it
is
lit.
2
At
the
of
the
channel
grid,
click
the
FOH
tab.
3 Clique no grid de canais para atribuir a fonte de entrada Talk para
2Ative
oPress
Talkback
seguindo
um
procedimentos:
of Show
data;
512
MB
or larger
recommended)
an Input
Channel
or FX
(listed
on the
left).
Press
the On/Talk
switch
in dos
the
Talkback/Osc
section.
an Input
Channel
orReturn
FXReturn
Return
(listed
on
the left).
transfer
the
On/Talk
switch
inseguintes
the
Talkback/Osc
section.
qualquer
Input Channel
ou
FX
(listados
esquerda).
2 2Activate
Talkback
bybydoing
one
ofofthe
following:
3 3Click
Activate
Talkback
doing
one
the
following:
Clickininthe
thechannel
channelgrid
gridtotoassign
assignthe
theTalk
Talkinput
inputsource
sourcetoto
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
Click
the on-screen
In button
in the
Talkback
section
of of
Click
the
on-screen
In
button
in
the
Talkback
section
Included
Components
Pressione
oOn/Talk
switch On/Talk
na
seo
Talkback/Osc.
ananInput
Press
the
switch
ininthe
section.
InputChannel
ChannelororFX
FXReturn
Return(listed
(listedon
onthe
theleft).
left).
Headphones
PressOptions
the
switch
theTalkback/Osc
Talkback/Osc
section.
the
Options
> On/Talk
Misc
page.
with
1/4-inch
jack
the
>
Misc
page.
Clique
no boto In na tela na seo Talkback da pgina
Click
on-screen InInbutton
section
of
Dynamic
Clickthe
buttonininthe
theTalkback
Talkback
section
oron-screen
condenser
microphone
XLR
mic
cableof
Options
>the
Misc.
3 Set3 the
Talkback
input
level
by
doing
oneand
of the
following:
Set
the
Talkback
input
level
by
doing
one
of
the
following:
the
Options
>
Misc
page.
the
Options > Misc page.
(for
Talkback)
Turn
the Level
knobknob
in the
section.
Turn
the de
Level
in Talkback/Osc
the Talkback/Osc
section.
33Ajuste
o
nvel
entrada
Talkback
seguindoofum
dos seguintes
the
input
level
Footswitches
(up
to 2)
3Set
Set
theTalkback
Talkback
input
levelbybydoing
doingone
one ofthe
thefollowing:
following:
procedimentos:
or or
Turn
the
Level
knob
in
the
Talkback/Osc
section.
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
Turn the Level knob in the Talkback/Osc section.
Assigning
Talkback
inputinput
to anInput
Channel
in theinPatchbay
Assigning
Talkback
toInput
an
Input
Channel
the Patchbay
Drag
the on-screen
LevelLevel
knobknob
in the
section
of of
Atribuindo
Entrada
Talkback
para
Channel
no
Patchbay
Drag
the on-screen
in Talkback
the Talkback
section
aTrackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
BNC
(for connecting
the
knob Level
na seo Talkback/Osc.
Gire
or
o cables
or
Options
>
Misc
page.
the Options > Misc page.
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
Routing
Talkback
to
an
ou VENUE
system and external
digital devices)
Assigning
Talkback
input
to
Input
Channel
Routing
Talkback
to
an
Output
Assigning
Talkback
input
toanOutput
an
Input
Channelininthe
thePatchbay
Patchbay
Endereando
Talkback
para
uma
sada
Drag
Dragthe
theon-screen
on-screenLevel
Levelknob
knobininthe
theTalkback
Talkbacksection
sectionofof

Arraste
oD-Sub
knobcables
Level (for
na connecting
tela na seo
Talkback
da pgina
VENUE Profile Guide
25-pin
to GPI
devices)
the
Options
> >Misc
page.
the
Options
Misc
page.
To
route
Talkback
directly
to
an
output
on-screen:
To
route
Talkback
directly
to
an
output
on-screen:
Options
>
Misc.
Routing
Talkback
to
an
Output
To route
Talkback
inputinput
directly
antooutput:
Routing
todirectly
anto
Output
To
route
Talkback
an output:
Para
enderear
a Talkback
entrada
Talkback
diretamente
para uma sada:
Two
(2)
console
lights
1 Go1 to
the
> Misc
pagepage
and and
clickclick
the Route
button
in in
Go
to Options
the Options
> Misc
the Route
button
1 Press
the Talkback
switch
in the
section
so that
ToToroute
directly
totoananoutput
on-screen:
Press
Protective
Dust
Cover
the Talkback
switch
inTalkback/Osc
the
Talkback/Osc
section
so that Para
routeTalkback
Talkback
directly
output
on-screen:
enderear
Talkback
diretamente
para
uma
sada
na
tela:
To1
route
Talkback
input
directly
to
an
output:
the
Talkback
sections.
1 Pressione
o
switch
Talkback
na
seo
Talkback/Osc
para
que
To route Talkback input directly to an output:
the Talkback sections.
it is lit.
it
lit.
isRack(s)
(see next)
1 1Go
Options
the
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
fique1aceso.
Gototothe
the
Options> >Misc
Miscpage
pageand
andclick
click
theRoute
Routebutton
buttoninin
Press
the
Talkback
switch
in
the
Talkback/Osc
section
so
that
1 Press the Talkback switch in the Talkback/Osc section so that 1 V pgina Options > Misc e clique no boto Route na seo
the
Talkback
sections.
2 Press
the
Route
to
Selected
switch.
The
switch
flashes
to
inthe
Talkback
sections.
2is Press
the Route to Selected switch. The switch flashes to in- Talkback.
itit
islit.
lit. switch
2 dicate
Pressioneo
Route
to Selected.
O switch
pisca indicando o
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks, and
Cables
Route
to Selected
mode.
dicate
Route
to Selected
mode.
modo
Route
to
Selected.
2 2Press
Pressthe
theRoute
RoutetotoSelected
Selectedswitch.
switch.The
Theswitch
switchflashes
flashestotoininEach
MixSelect
Rack
or
FOH
Rack
includes:
3 Press
the
switch
on
each
of
the
output
busses
(Auxes.
3
Press
the
Select
switch
on
each
of
the
output
busses
(Auxes.
dicate
dicateRoute
RoutetotoSelected
Selectedmode.
mode.
PQs,
Matrixes,
orde
Mains)
where
you
want
to
route
3 Groups,
Pressione
o switch
Select
cada
um
dos
busses
de
sada
System
Restore
CD
Groups,
PQs,
Matrixes,
or
Mains)
where
you
want
to(Auxes,
route
3 3Press
the
Select
on
each
ofoofthe
busses
(Auxes.
Groups,
PQs,
Matrixes
ou
Mains)
para
qual
deseja
enderear
o
Talkback
signal.
The switch
Select
switches
flash
tooutput
indicate
Talkback
the
Select
switch
on
each
the
output
busses
(Auxes.
Talkback
signal.
The
Select
switches
flash
toCD
indicate
Talkback
Press
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Software
Installer
Mix Rack Options
sinal
Talkback.
Os
switches
Select
piscam
para
indicar
a
atribuio
Groups,
PQs,
Matrixes,
or
Mains)
where
you
want
to
route
assignment.
Groups, PQs, Matrixes, or Mains) where you want to route
assignment.
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
do Talkback.
controls
in theinOptions
> Misc
page page
Talkback
Talkback
controls
the Options
> Misc
Talkbacksignal.
signal.The
TheSelect
Selectswitches
switchesflash
flashtotoindicate
indicateTalkback
Talkback Talkback
4 Press
the flashing
Route
to(for
Selected
switch
to confirm
the asI/O Options
iLok
USBflashing
Smart
Key
storing
plug-in
authorizations)
4 Press
the
Route
to
Selected
switch
to
confirm
the
asassignment.
assignment.
2 Go2to
the
Outputs
pagepage
and click
to select
the desired
output
Go
tocontrols
the Outputs
and
click
to select
the desired
output
or
press
the
Cancel
to
cancel
the
4 signment,
Pressione
o switch
Route
toCancel
Selected
piscante
paraassignconfirmar
Talkback
ininthe
>Misc
signment,
or press
the
switch
to
cancel
the
assignTalkback
controls
theOptions
Options
>Misc
Miscpage
page
Plug-in
installer
discs
(ifswitch
any)
with
pre-authorized
iLok a
Controles
Talkback
na pgina
Options
>Card
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
that
provides
16
analog
(it
flashes
briefly).
4 4Press
the
flashing
Route
to
Selected
switch
to
confirm
the
as(it
flashes
briefly).
atribuio
ou
pressione
o
switch
Cancel
para
cancelar.
ment.
Press
the
flashing
Route
to
Selected
switch
to
confirm
the
asment.
2 2Go
select
the
output
mic/line
level
inputs page
Gototothe
theOutputs
Outputs
pageand
andclick
clicktoto
select
thedesired
desired
output
signment,
signment,ororpress
pressthe
theCancel
Cancelswitch
switchtotocancel
cancelthe
theassignassignV
Inpgina
Outputs dialog
e clique
para
selecionar
aclick
sada
desejada
(ela
3 2In
confirmation
that
appears,
click
Route
to con3the
the briefly).
confirmation
dialog
that
appears,
Route
to con(it
flashes
One
FOH
Link
cable
for
connection
to
a
VENUE
console
(it
flashes
briefly).
ment.
ment.
pisca
brevemente).
firm
your
assignment
orCard
click
Cancel
to cancel
without
changAO16
Analog
Output
that
provides
analog
line
level
firm
your
assignment
or click
Cancel
to16
cancel
without
chang3the
InIncurrent
the
dialog
ingoutputs
routing.
3
theconfirmation
confirmation
dialogthat
thatappears,
appears,click
clickRoute
RoutetotoconconEach Stage Rack includes:
ing
the
current
routing.
3firm
No
dilogo
de
confirmao,
clique
Route
para
confirmar
a atribuio
your
assignment
or
click
Cancel
to
cancel
without
changfirm
your
assignment
or
click
Cancel
to
cancel
without
chang Two (2) IEC power cables
ou
Cancel
para
cancelar
sem
alterar
os
atuais
endereamentos.
Signals
are routed
to output
busses
post-mute
and post
fader.
XO16
Analog
and
Digital
Card
that
provides
analog
ing
the
current
routing.
Signals
are
routed
toOutput
output
busses
post-mute
and8post
fader.
ing
the
current
routing.
Os sinais
so roteados
para busses
de sada ps-Mute
e psSignals
Signalsare
arerouted
routedtotooutput
outputbusses
bussespost-mute
post-muteand
andpost
postfader.
fader.
YouA-Net
can designate
a footswitch,
Function
switch
or other
fader.
You
can
designate
athat
footswitch,
Function
switch
other
AT16
Output
Card
provides
16 channels
oforA-Net
triggers
to control
Talkback.
For Personal
more
information,
seeother
triggers
to control
Talkback.
For more
information,
see
output
compatible
with
Aviom
Mixers
and
You
can
designate
a
footswitch,
Function
switch
ororother
Voc
pode
designar
um
footswitch,
switch
Function
ou outro
Chapter
22,
Events.
You
can
designate
a
footswitch,
Function
switch
other
22, Events.
Pro16Chapter
Series devices.
triggers
para
controlar
o Talkback.
Para
mais informaes,
triggers
control
Talkback.
For
information,
see
triggerstoto
control
Talkback.
Formore
more
information,
see
Veja
o Captulo
22,
Eventos.
Chapter
22,
IOx Input
and
output
expansion
card that provides an addiChapter
22,Events.
Events.
Chapter
14: Solo
and Monitor
Busses
125 125
Chapter
Solo
and Monitor
Busses
tional 8 channels of analog I/O
and14:
8 channels
of AES/EBU
digital I/O.
Chapter
Monitor
Busses
125
Captulo
14:
Busses
Solo
e Monitor
Chapter14:
14:Solo
Soloand
and
Monitor
Busses125
125
Setting Talkback Dim Level

When
Talkback
is sentDim
directly
to an Output bus, the bus proSetting
Talkback
Level
gram material (minus the talkback signal) is automatically reWhenbyTalkback
is sent
directlyin
tothe
an Dim
Output bus,
the bus produced
the amount
specified
setting.
Quando
Talkback
enviado
diretamente
para umLevel
bus Output,
o nvel
gram material (minus the talkback signal) is automatically redo material do bus (menos o sinal do talkback) automaticamente
duced by the amount specified in the Dim Level setting.
To set na
thequantidade
Talkback Dim
Level:
reduzido
especificada
na configurao Dim Level.
Ajustando o Talkback Dim Level
4 Click in the channel grid to assign the Com input source (at
the top right of the grid) to an Input Channel or FX Return

4 Click in the channel grid to assign the Com input source (at
(listed
onno
the
left).
4 Clique
grid
de canais para atribuir a fonte de entrada Com (
the top right of the grid) to an Input Channel or FX Return
direita
e acima do grid) para um Input Channel ou FX Return (listados
on the left).
(listed
esquerda).
1 Go to the Options page and click the Misc tab.
set the
Talkback
Dim
Level:
ParaTo
ajustar
o Talkback
Dim
Level:
2 1InGo
thetoTalkback
section,
the
Dimtab.
Level text box
the Options
pagedouble-click
and click the
Misc
1 V
pgina
e clique
nainaba
and
enter aOptions
Dim Level
value
theMisc.
range 60 dB (maximum
2 In the Talkback section, double-click the Dim Level text box
gain reduction) to 0 dB (no gain reduction).
Routing Intercom input in the Patchbay
2 Naand
seo
Talkback,
duas vezes
caixa60
de dB
texto
Dim Level
enter
a Dim clique
Level value
in thena
range
(maximum
e insira
um
valor
Dim
Level
entre60
dB
(mxima
reduo
de
ganho)
gain reduction) to 0 dB (no gain reduction).
Phantom
Power for Talkback Input
e 0Activating
dB (sem reduo
de ganho).
Routing Intercom
input in the
Patchbay
Activating
Intercom
Input
The
Talkback input
has available
+15V
phantom power
Activating
PowerTalkback
for Talkback
Inputfor usAtivando
PhantomPhantom
Power na Entrada
1 To
Route
the Intercom
inputsoasitdescribed
in the
activate
the Com input
is mixed with
theprevious
Monitor secbus:
ing a condenser microphone.

The Talkback input has available +15V phantom power for us-
A entrada Talkback oferece phantom power +15V para utilizao de

ing a condenser microphone.
apply phantom
power to the talkback mic input:
umTo
microfone
condensador.
On the back panel, move the Talkback Mic Phantom Power

switch to the right.
On the back panel, move the Talkback Mic Phantom Power
No painel traseiro, mova o switch Talkback Mic Phantom Power
switch to the right.
applyphantom
phantompower
powerto
the talkback
mic input:
ParaTo
aplicar
entrada
de microfone
Talkback:
para
a direita.
Using
the
Intercom (Com)
Utilizando
o Intercom
(Com)
The
Intercom
input(Com)
on the Mix Rack or FOH Rack
Using
the(Com)
Intercom
can accept input from any compatible dynamic or condenser
The Intercom
input
theou
Mix
Rack
orpode
FOH aceitar
Rack
A entrada
Intercom(Com)
(Com) no
Mixon
Rack
FOH
Rack
microphone.
entrada
qualquer
ou dinmico.
can de
accept
inputmicrofone
from anycondensador
compatible dynamic
or condenser
microphone.Com Mic
Input
Com Mic
Com Mic
InputPhantom
Power
Com Mic
Phantom
Com Mic Gain
Power
Com Mic Gain
Intercom
controls
Controles
Intercom
When activated, the Intercom signal is mixed into the Moni-
Intercom controls
Quando
ativada, o sinal Intercom mixado ao bus Monitor depois
tor bus after the source selectors in the Solo/PFL selection, so
do seletor
de fonte na
seleo
Solo/PFL,
ento into
audvel
no
When
activated,
thewhat
Intercom
is mixed
theMain
Moniis audible
no matter
sourcesignal
(AFL/PFL,
2-Track, or
importanto
qual
fonte
(AFL/PFL,
2-Track
ou
Main
Mix)
enviada
ao
tor bus
after
selectors
is sent
tothe
thesource
Monitor
bus. in the Solo/PFL selection, so
busMix)
Monitor.
is audible no matter what source (AFL/PFL, 2-Track, or Main

The
Intercom
signal
can also bus.
be routed to any input or FX reMix)
is sent to
the Monitor
O sinal Intercom tambm pode ser endereado a qualquer Input
turn
channel.
Channel
ou FX Return.
The Intercom signal can also be routed to any input or FX return channel.
Endereando
a Entrada Intercom
Routing Intercom
Input
Intercom
Para
enderear
a entrada
Intercom
para
qualquer
Channel
ToRouting
route Intercom
input Input
to
any input
channel
or FXInput
return:
ou FX Return:
1 To
Go
to the
Patchbay
and
the Inputs
tab.
route
Intercom
input
to click
any input
channel
or FX return:
1 V Patchbay e clique na aba Inputs.
2 1To
the
the channel
the Channels
tab or the
Go
toleft
theof
Patchbay
and grid,
click click
the Inputs
tab.
FX Returns tab.
2 2esquerda
doofgrid
canais,grid,
clique
aba
Channels
FX
To the left
thede
channel
clicknathe
Channels
tab ou
or the
Returns.
3 FX
AtReturns
the toptab.
of the channel grid, click the FOH tab.
3 No3alto
cliquegrid,
na aba
FOH.
At do
thegrid
topde
of canais,
the channel
click
the FOH tab.

126
Guia VENUE Profile
Endereando a entrada Intercom no Patchbay
Input
ToActivating
activate theIntercom
Com input so
it is mixed with the Monitor bus:
Ativando a Entrada Intercom
Para (Routing
ativar a entrada
ComInput
para que
tion
Intercom
on seja
pagemixada
126). ao bus Monitor:
1 Route the Intercom input as described in the previous sec21tion
Press
the Talkback
button
in the
Talkback/Osc
Enderece
a entrada
Intercom
como
descrito
seo and
anterior
(Routing
Intercom
Input
on
page
126). nasection
press
the Level aencoder
turn COM
LED ring
(Endereando
EntradatoIntercom
naon/off
pgina(its
126).
2 Press the Talkback button in the Talkback/Osc section and
lights).
press
the Level
encoder
to turn
COMTalkback/Osc
on/off (its LED
ring
2 Pressione
o boto
Talkback
na seo
e pressione
o
lights). Level para ligar e desligar o COM (seu anel de LEDs se
codificador
Activating Phantom Power for Intercom Input

acende).
The
Com inputPhantom
has available
15V phantom
power Input
for using a
Activating
Power
for Intercom
Ativando Phantom
Power para a Entrada Intercom
condenser
microphone.
The Com input has available 15V phantom power for using a
Acondenser
entrada Com
oferece phantom power +15V para utilizao de um
microphone.
To apply phantom power to the Intercom microphone:
microfone condensador.
On
the phantom
back panel
of the
Rack, move
the Com Mic
To
apply
power
to FOH
the Intercom
microphone:
Para aplicar
phantom
power
ao microfone
Intercom:
Phantom
Power
switch
to the
right.
On the back panel of the FOH Rack, move the Com Mic
Phantom
No painelPower
traseiro
do FOH
mova o switch Com Mic Phantom
switch
to Rack,
the right.
To set the Intercom microphone input level:
Power para a direita.
On
the
back
panel of
the FOH Rack,
To
set
the
Intercom
microphone
input turn
level:the Com Mic Gain
Para ajustar o nvel de entrada do microfone Intercom:
knob.
On the back panel of the FOH Rack, turn the Com Mic Gain
knob.
No painel traseiro do FOH Rack, gire o knob Com Mic Gain.
Using 2-Track Inputs and Outputs

Utilizando Entradas e Sadas 2-Track
Analog
Digital 2-Track
Inputs
Outputs are available.
Usingand
2-Track
Inputs
andand
Outputs
Entradas e sadas analgicas e digitais 2-Track esto disponveis.

Analog and Digital 2-Track Inputs and Outputs are available.
Assigning 2-Track Source Input

Atribuindo Fonte de Entrada 2-Track
2-Trackinputs
Source
Input
ToAssigning
assign the 2-Track
to Input
Channels or FX Returns:
Para atribuir as entradas 2-Track a Input Channels ou FX
1Returns:
Goassign
to thethe
Patchbay
Inputs to
tabInput
and click
the Channels
tab or
To
2-Track> inputs
Channels
or FX Returns:
the FX Returns tab.

Gotoaba
the Patchbay
Patchbay >>Inputs
click
tabou
or FX
11V
Inputstab
e and
clique
nathe
abaChannels
Channels
2 the
At FX
theReturns
top of the
tab.channel grid, click the FOH tab.
Returns.
3 2Click
in top
the of
channel
grid togrid,
assign
anythe
of FOH
the following
At the
the channel
click
tab.
2 No altoinput
do grid
de canais,
aba
FOH.of the grid) to an
2-Track
sources
(listedclique
at thenatop
right
3 Click in the channel grid to assign any of the following
Input
Channel or FX Return (listed on the left):
32-Track
Clique no
gridsources
de canais
para
fonte
de to
entrada
input
(listed
at atribuir
the topqualquer
right of the
grid)
an
AL(listadas
(Analog Left)
2-Track
e acima
do grid)
a umleft):
Input Channel ou FX
Input Channel
ordireita
FX Return
(listed
on the
Return
esquerda):
AR(listadas
(AnalogRight)
AL (Analog Left)
AL
(Analog
Left)
DL (Digital Left)
(Analog
Right)
ARAR(Analog
Right)
DR(Digital
(DigitalLeft)
Right)
DL
DL (Digital Left)
DR (Digital Right)
DR (Digital Right)
Ativando e Ajustando Nvel da Entrada 2-Track
Activating 2-Track Input and Setting Level
Para alimentar os busses Monitor e Mains com a entrada

Stage Rack
Features
2-Track:
Activating
2-Track
Input and Setting Level
To feed 2-Track input to the Monitor and Mains busses:
11To
VGo
tela
Options
> Misc.
to2-Track
the
Options
>toMisc
screen. and Mains busses:
feed
the
Monitor
audio
I/O forinput
VENUE
Profile
2
In
the
2-Track
section,
click
the
Fedup
to to
Monitors
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
96
inputs.
Goseo
to the2-Track,
Optionsclique
> Miscnoscreen.
21Na
menuInput
pop-up
Input
Fedtotal
to and
Monitors
Masters
pop-up
and
select
Analog
2-Track
or
Digital
2-Track.
and Masters e selecione Analog 2-Track ou Digital 2-Track.
2 In
the I/O
2-Track section, click the Input Fed to Monitors and
Audio
Masters
pop-up
and
selecteAnalog
2-Track
2-Track.
Para
ativar
entrada
2-Track
o nvel:or Digital
To activate
2-Trackwith
input
andajustar
set controllable
level:
48a inputs
remotely
mic preamps and
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
Click
the
on-screen
button
inlevel:
the 2-Track
2-Track
section
of the
Opactivate
2-Track
andna
set
11To
Clique
no boto
Ininput
naIntela
seo
da pgina
Options
page.
> Misc
8 analog
>tions
Misc.
1 Click the on-screen In button in the 2-Track section of the Opdigital outputs per Stage Rack.
2
Drag
the on-screen
Level knob in the 2-Track section of the
tions
> Misc
page.
2 Arraste o knob Level na tela na seo 2-Track da pgina
Options > Misc page.
Options
>
Misc
page.
Synchronization
andLevel
Control
2 Drag
the
on-screen
knobI/O
in the 2-Track section of the
Options
> Miscconnectors
page.
Snake
to enable primary and redundant (if
System Components
2-Track controls in the Options > Misc page
Controles 2-Track na pgina Options > Misc
Included Components
2-Track controls
in the to
Options
> Misc page
Routing
2-Track
an Output
Bus
Endereando
2-Track
para
um bus
de sada
All VENUE
Profile
systems
include
the following:
Routing
2-Track
to
an Output
To route
the
2-Track
inputs
directly toBus
an output bus:
VENUE
Profile
console
Para enderear as entradas 2-Track diretamente para um bus de

toTwo
IEC power
cables
1
the (2)
Options
> Miscdirectly
tab.
sada:
To Go
route
the
2-Track
inputs
to an output bus:
Route
button
in tab.
the 2-Track section on-screen. The
Go
tothe
the
Options
> Misc
121VClick
aba
Options
>
Misc.
Trackball
mount
switch flashes to indicate Route to Selected mode.
2 Click the Route button in the 2-Track section on-screen. The
VENUE
Mouse
Pad seo 2-Track na tela. O switch pisca
23Clique
no boto
Route
Pressflashes
the
Select
switchna
on
each
the output
channels
switch
to
indicate
Route
toof
Selected
mode.
VENUE
Profile
Guide
para indicar
o modo
Route
to Selected.
(Auxes, Groups, Matrixes, or Mains) where you want to route

Two
(2)The
console
3 Press
the
Select
switch
on
each of
the to
output
channels
signal.
Selectlights
switches
flash
indicate
as32-Track
Pressione
o switch
Select
em
cada
um
dos canais
de 2-Track
sada
(Auxes,
(Auxes,
Groups,
Matrixes,
or
Mains)
where
you
want
to route
signment.
Groups, Matrixes ou Mains) para o quel deseja enderear o sinal
2-Track
signal. The
Select
switches flash to indicate 2-Track as Os
Rack(s)
(seeSelect
next)piscam
2-Track.
switchs
para indicar a atribuio 2-Track.
4 Click Done in the Route to Selected dialog to confirm the assignment.
signment.
44Clique
Done
na
caixa
deCDs,
dilogo
Routedialog
to Selected
para confirmar
Racks,
Software
iLoks,
and
Cables
Click
Done
in the
Route
to Selected
to confirm
the asasignment.
atribuio.
Signals are routed to output busses post-mute and postEach Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes:
fader.
Os
sinais
so
roteados
para
busses
de sada
ps-Mute
Signals
System
CD
areRestore
routed
to
output
busses
post-mute
and
post- and
ps-fader.
fader.
Roteando para as sadas 2-Track
Routing to the 2-Track Outputs
Voc pode rotear qualquer bus de sada para as sadas 2-Track .
Additional
Components
You
can route
anyRequired
output bus
or
Direct Output to the 2-Track
Routing
to the
2-Track
Outputs
Para
rotear
qualquer
bus
de
sada
para as sadas 2-Track:
outputs.
The
following
must
be purchased
You
can
route anycomponents
output bus or
Direct
Output to separately:
the 2-Track
1
V
Patchbay
e
clique
na
aba
Outputs.
outputs.
To route any output bus to the 2-Track outputs:
DVI
esquerda
do grid
de the
canais,
na tab.
aba de um bus Output
1
to
the
Patchbay
click
theclique
Outputs
supported.
To2Go
route
any
output
busand
to
2-Track
outputs:
(Auxes, Groups, PQs, Matrixes ou Mains).
2
the
left
of the and
channel
grid,the
click
the
tab
for an
Output
USB
keyboard
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
1 To
Go
to the
Patchbay
and
click
Outputs
tab.
bus
(Auxes,
Groups,
Matrixes,
3 No
alto do
grid dePQs,
canais,
cliqueor
naMains).
aba FOH.
2 To the left of the channel grid, click the tab for an Output
3
At(Auxes,
the topGroups,
of the channel
grid, click
the FOH tab.
bus
PQs, Matrixes,
or Mains).
4 Clique
no grid debetween
canais para
umStage
bus Output
(listado
The connection
FOHatribuir
Rack and
Rack requires
para
qualquer
dasclick
seguintes
sadas
(listadas
4
Click
intop
the
channel
griduma
to
assign
Output
bus 2-Track
(listed
on
3 esquerda)
At athe
of
the
channel
grid,
the
FOH
tab.
Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable an
can
be
purchased
directly
direita
eany
acima
do grid):
the
left)
toAvid
of
following
output vendor.
sources (listed
from
or the
assembled
by 2-Track
your preferred
at
the top right of the grid):
left)ARto(Analog
the
any of Right)
the following 2-Track output sources (listed
AL
(Analog
Left)
DL
(Digital
Left)
at
the
top
right
of
the grid):
Optional Components
AR
DR(Analog
(Digital Right)
Right)
AL (Analog Left)
components are optional, and must be
The
DLfollowing
(Digital Left)
AR
(Analog
Right)Output para as sadas 2-Track:
Para
rotear
um
Direct
purchased
separately:
DR (Digital Right)
DL (Digital Left)
1 V
PatchbayRight)
e clique na aba Directs.
DR (Digital
Show to
data;
MB outputs:
To routetransfer
a DirectofOutput
the 512
2-Track
4 ClickAL
in(Analog
the channel
Left) grid to assign an Output bus (listed on

FX Returns
2 esquerda
do grid and
de canais,
clique
na aba
1
to a
the
Patchbay
click2-Track
the
Directs
tab.Channels,
To Go
route
Direct
Output to the
outputs:
ou Outputs.
2
leftPatchbay
of the channel
grid,the
click
the tab
for a channel
1 To
Gothe
toDynamic
the
and click
Directs
tab.
or condenser
microphone
and XLR mic cable
3 No alto
do grid de
clique
na aba FOH.
source
(Channels,
FXcanais,
Returns,
or Outputs).
(for
2 To the
leftTalkback)
of the channel grid, click the tab for a channel
3 4
AtClique
top
of the
channel
grid,
click uma
the FOH
the
Footswitches
(up
topara
2)
source
(Channels,
Returns,
or
Outputs).
no grid
deFX
canais
atribuir
fontetab.
de canal (listadas
esquerda) para qualquer uma das seguintes sadas 2-Track (listadas

direita e acima do grid):
left)
BNCto
cables
(for
connecting
clock
between
the
on the
any of
the
following Word
2-Track
output
sources
(Analog
Left) grid to assign a channel source (listed
4
ClickAL
inthe
thetop
channel
VENUE
system
and
external
digital devices)
(listed
at
right
of
the
grid):
AR (Analog Right)
on the left) to any of the following 2-Track output sources
DL
25-pin
D-Sub
(Analog
Left)
AL
(Digital
Left)cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
(listed at the top right of the grid):
ARDR(Analog
(Digital Right)
Right)
MIDI
cables
(forgrid
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
4
theof
channel
to
assign
channel
source
(listed
3 Click
At theintop
the channel
grid,
clicka the
FOH tab.
AL (Analog Left)
DL (Digital Left)
AR (Analog Right)
Profile
VENUE
DR (Digital
Right) Expansion Options
DL (Digital Left)
following
The
DR
(Digital Right)
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options



outputs
digital I/O.
Captulo
Solo e Busses
Monitor127127
Chapter
14: 14:
SoloBusses
and Monitor
Routing
the Oscillator
Roteando
o Oscillator
Routing
the Oscillator
The output of the internal oscillator can be routed to Input
A sada
do
Oscillator
interno
pode
ser roteada
Input Channels,
The
output
of Returns,
the
internal
oscillator
can para
be routed
Input
Channels,
FX
or any
of the output
busses. to
The
OscilFX Returns ou qualquer bus de sada. O Oscillator oferece tipos de
Channels,
FX
Returns,
or
any
of
the
output
busses.
The
Oscillator provides selectable signal type, frequency (for Variable
sinal selecionveis, frequncia (para Variable Sine) e nvel de sinal,
lator
provides
selectable
signal
type,
frequency
(for
Variable
Sine)
and
level,
as well as
a master on/off switch.
assim
como
umsignal
switch
liga/desliga
master.
Sine) and signal level, as well as a master on/off switch.
Configurando
o Oscillator
e Ajustandoand
o Nvel
Configuring
the Oscillator
Setting Level
Configuring the Oscillator and Setting Level
ParaTo
ativar
e ajustar
nvel
Oscillator:
activate
andoset
thedo
level
for the oscillator:
To activate and set the level for the oscillator:
to the
Options
> Misc page.
1 V1 Go
pgina
Options
> Misc.
1 Go to the Options > Misc page.

2 As a precaution, click and drag the on-screen Level encoder
2 Como precauo, clique e arraste para baixo o codificador Level

2
As a to
precaution,
clicklevel
and to
drag
on-screen
Level encoder
down
set Oscillator
offthe
before
you proceed.
na tela para baixar ao mnimo (off ) o nvel Oscillator antes de
down to set Oscillator level to off before you proceed.
continuar.
To assign
Oscillator
signal to
anum
output
bus:
Para
atribuirthe
o sinal
do Oscillator
para
bus de
sada:
To assign the Oscillator signal to an output bus:
1 In the Options > Misc page, click the Route button in the Os11cillator
Na
pgina
Options
> page,
Misc, click
clique
boto
Route
In the
Options
> Misc
theno
Route
button
in na
the seo
Ossection.
Oscillator.
cillator section.
2 Do either of the following:
22Siga
doshad
seguintes
procedimentos:
Do
either
of
the
following:
Ifum
you
already
selected the desired output, click to
SeIfconfirm
voc
j havia
selecionado
a sada
desejada,
clique
you had
already
selected
the
desired
output,
to para
the currently
displayed
Route To
modeclick
(in the
confirmar o autal modo Route To (no canto inferior esquerdo
confirm
currently
lower leftthe
corner
of thedisplayed
screen). Route To mode (in the
da tela).
lower left corner of the screen).
ou or
V
to
pgina
Outputs page
e clique
uma
sada
or
Go
the Outputs
and para
click selecionar
to select an
output
(it(ela
pisca
brevemente).
Go to the Outputs page and click to select an output (it
flashes briefly).
flashes briefly).
33No
de confirmao,
clique
Route click
para Route
confirmar
suas
In dilogo
the confirmation
dialog that
appears,
to conatribuies
ou
Cancel
para
cancelar
sem
alterar
as
atribuies
3
In
the
confirmation
dialog
that
appears,
click
Route
to
confirm your assignment or click Cancel to cancel without changatuais.
firm
your
assignment
or click Cancel to cancel without changing the
current
routing.
ing the current routing.
Os sinais
roteados
parabusses
bussespost-mute
de sada and
ps-Mute
Signals
areso
routed
to output
post e psfader.
Signals
fader. are routed to output busses post-mute and post
fader.
Talkback, 2-Track e Oscillator Quando Carregando Shows

Oscillator controls in the Options > Misc page
Oscillator
controls
in the
Options
> Misc page
Controles
Oscillator
na pgina
Options
> Misc
3 In the Oscillator section, click the Signal pop-up and select

3
In the
click the Signal pop-up and select
from
the Oscillator
followingsection,
signal types:
3 Na seo Oscillator, clique no pop-up Signal e selecione entre os

from
the
100
HzdeSine
seguintes
tiposfollowing
sinal: signal types:
100
Hz
Sine
100
Hz
Sine
1 kHz Sine
1 kHz
Sine Sine
1
10kHz
kHz Sine
10kHz
Sine
10 kHz Sine
Variable
Variable SineSine
Sine
Pink
Noise
Variable
Pink
Noise
White
Noise
Pink
Noise
White Noise
White Noise
4 Se4voc
selecionar
Variable
Sine,
voc
ajustar
frequncia
If you
select Variable
Sine,
you
canpode
set the
sine awave
freda onda
com
o
de
frequncia
na
tela
(
direita
do
pop-up
Signal).
4
If
you
select
Variable
Sine,
you
can
set
the
sine
wave
frequency with the on-screen frequency control (directly
to the
quency
the on-screen
right of with
the Signal
pop-up). frequency control (directly to the
5 Clique
In na pop-up).
tela na seo Oscillator.
rightno
ofboto
the Signal
5 Click the on-screen In button in the Oscillator section.
5 Click
thedo
on-screen
button in the
Oscillator section.
6 Ajuste
o nvel
OscillatorInaumentando
lentamente
o codificador
Settela.
oscillator level by slowly raising the on-screen Level enLevel6 na
6
Set oscillator level by slowly raising the on-screen Level encoder.
coder.

128
Guia VENUE Profile
Talkback, 2-Track
Talkback,
2-Track
Loading
Shows
Quando
voc
carrega
Loading
Shows
2-Track e Oscillator
and Oscillator States When

and Oscillator States When
um arquivo Show, os controles Talkback,
so
para off
When you load a Show
file,ajustados
Talkback, 2-Track
and(desativados),
Oscillator
independentemente
de
seus
estados
quando
o
arquivo
Show foi
When
you
a Show
file, Talkback,
2-Track of
and
Oscillator
controls
areload
set to
off (deactivated),
regardless
their
state
salvo pela ltima vez
controls
set to
offlast
(deactivated),
regardless of their state
when theare
Show
was
saved.
when the Show was last saved.
Chapter 15: Muting and Mute Groups

Captulo 15: Muting e Mute Groups
Stage Rack Features
Muting
audio
can
be
used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs.
Muting
Channels can be muted in three ways: explicitly (lit solid),
with the channel mute switch; implicitly (flashing), as a result
Audiopodem
I/O
Canais
ser silenciados (Mute) de trs maneiras:
of another channel being soloed, and as a member of a Mute
explicitamente
(aceso),
com
o switch
Mute do canal;
implicitamente
Group
48 inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic preamps
and
or VCA
(flashing).
(piscante),
como
resultado
de outro canal ser colocado em Solo; e
como membro de um Mute Group ou VCA (piscante).
switches
always
behaveexpandable
in additiveup
(latched)
fashion.
Mute
8 analog
output
channels;
to 48 analog
or
Channels
can
be
muted
in
any
sequence,
and
they
will
remain
digital
outputs
Stage Rack. de modo aditivo (travados).
Os switches
Mute
sempreper
se comportam
they are unmuted.
Canaismuted
podemuntil
ser colocados
em Mute em qualquer sequncia, e
continuam
silenciados
atControl
que o Mute
Synchronization
and
I/O seja desabilitado.
The following provide some additional information about

channels,
Snake connectors
tomuting:
enable primary and redundant (if
busses,
and
As sees seguintes
oferecem
informaes adicionais sobre canais,
applicable)
connection
busses e muting:
Input Channels and FX Returns Channel mute is pre-fader on
input channels
FX returns.
Input Channels
and FXand
Returns
O Mute de canal pr-fader nos
Input Channels e FX Returns.
System
Components
Output Busses
Mute operation is post-fader on all types of
OutputOutput
Busses busses.
A opero Mute ps-fader em todos os tipos de
busses
de sada. Components
Included
Mains The mute status of the Main busses is controlled from

the
MuteProfile
switch
above
the
Mains
Fader.
AllO
VENUE
include
the
Mains
status
de
Mutesystems
dos busses
Main
following:
controlado pelo switch
Mute sobre
o fader
Mains.
VENUE
Profile
console
Only the linked Mains busses are muted. The Mains Mute
switch
Two (2)
IEC to
power
cables
flashes
indicate
not all Mains are muted. For inforApenas os busses Mains associados so silenciados. O switch Mains
mation
on
linking
Mains,
Linking
Mains
onem
page
84.
Monitor
mount
for
VGA
screen
(screen
not
included)
Mute pisca para indicar que nemsee
todos
os
Mains
esto
Mute.

Mute Groups

Mute
Groups
recommended;
1024x768
resolution).
VGA
and
Channels
can be
assignedminimum
to any of the
8 available
Mute
DVI
supported.
Groups.
Mute Groups let you mute and unmute multiple
Canais podem ser atribudos a qualquer um dos 8 Mute Groups

channels
simultaneously
by pressing
a single switch.
USB
keyboard
and trackball/mouse
(Windows
disponveis.
Mute Groups
permitem colocar
em Mutecompatible)
e tirar de Mute
vrios canais simultaneamente pressionando um nico switch.
Any type of channel, including all Input Channels and all
Output channels, except VCAs, can be assigned to Mute
Todos
os
tipos de canais,
incluindo
Channels
todosrequires
os Output,
The
connection
between
FOH Input
Rack and
StageeRack
Groups.
exceto
VCAs, podem ser atribudos a Mute Groups.
MuteAvid
Groups
only affectby
the
status
of channel
Mute switches,
from
or assembled
your
preferred
vendor.
Mute
Groups apenas
afetam o status
dos
switches
Mute dos canais, e
and
do
not
affect
the
on/off
status
of
Aux
Sends,
output
of the
no afetam o status on/off de Aux Sends, sadas da seo
Talkback/
Talkback/Oscillator
section,
or
the
routing
of
signals
to
Oscillator,
ou oComponents
roteamente de sinais para as sadas Monitor. the
Optional
monitor outputs.
Show Members
Cancel
USB flash disk (or other portable USB
storage device for
transfer of Show
recommended)
Assigndata; 512 MB or larger
Function

Mute Groups/F 18

(for Talkback)
Mute
Seo
MuteGroups
Groups section
Para informaes
sobre como
associar
Mains, veja Associando
Trackball mount
(trackball
not included)
BNC cables
(for connecting Word clock between the
VCAs When you mute a VCA, its member channels are muted. Atribuindo
Mute Groups
Assigning
Mute Groups
Mains na
pgina 84.
VENUE Mouse Pad

The member channel Mute switches flash to indicate they are
Mute
Groups
can
bedefinidos
defined
from
the console
or
on-screen.
VENUE
Profile
Guide
muted
as
part
of
a
VCA.
Mute
Groups
podem
ser
pela console
ou na
tela.
Qualquer
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for connecting
to GPI
devices)
VCAs Quando voc coloca um VCA em Mute, seus canais membros
Any mixture
typesser
canatribuda
be assigned
to Mute
a Mute
mistura
de tipos of
dechannel
canais pode
a um
Group.
Two (2)Os
console
lights
so silenciados.
switches
Mute dos canais membros piscam para
Canais
podem
ser atribudos
maistodemore
um Mute
Group.
Channels
can be para
assigned
thanGroup.
one Mute
indicarque
eles
esto
silenciados
como
parte
de
um
VCA.
Protective Mute
Dust Cover
Flashing
Indication
Group.
Rack(s) (see next)
Para
atribuir ou
remover canais
de um MuteOptions
Group:
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Indicao
Mute Piscante
A flashing
Mute switch indicates the channel is implicitly
assign oroptions
remove can
channels
fromtoaVENUE
Mute Group:
muted as a result of a Solo or Mute Group activation.
TheTofollowing
be added
Profile systems.
1 Certifique-se de que a seo Mute Groups/Function est no modo

Software
iLoks,
Um Racks,
switch Mute
piscanteCDs,
indica
que o and
canalCables
est implicitamente
For1details
VENUE
systems
andaceso,
options,
visitisthe
Make on
sure
the
MuteFunction
Groups/Function
section
in Avid
Muteque
Mute
Groups.
Seallo
switch
est
pressione-o
para
mutadoSolo
como
resultado
demode,
uma when
ativao
de um or
Solo
ouis Mute
In Solo
In Place
a channel
VCA
soloed,
se
apague
(indicando
o modo
Muteswitch
Groups).
website
(www.avid.com).
Groups
mode. If the
Function
is lit, press it so that it
Group.
all other channels that are not soloed or solo safe are implicitly
System
Restore CD
muted.
Solo In Solo
modo Place,
quando
um Installer
canal ouCD
VCA colocado
ECxNo
Ethernet
Control
Software
em Solo,
todos
os outros
canais
que
sogroup
estoare
emimplicitly
Solo ou em
Solo
Mute
Group
Members
of
a
mute
muted
Standalone
Software
Installer CD
Safe so
implicitamente
mutados.
and flash when the mute group is active.
Mute Group
Membros
um(ifMute
Grouppre-authorized
so implicitamente
Plug-in
installerde
discs
any) with
iLok
silenciados e piscam quando o Mute Group est ativo.

turns off (indicating Mute Groups mode).
2 Pressione o switch Assign na seo Mute Groups. O switch Assign

Mix
Rack
2 Press
theOptions
Assign
switch
in the Mute Groups section. The Aspisca
para
indicar
o modo
Assign.
sign switch flashes to indicate Assign mode.
3I/O
Pressione
o switch Mute Group (18) do grupo para o qual deseja
Options
3 Press the Mute Group switch (18) for the group where you
atribuir
ou remover canais. O switch pisca para indicar o grupo
want
topara
assign
or remove
channel.
This switch
flashes to inAI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input aCard
that provides
16 analog
assinalado
atribuio.
dicate level
the group
mic/line
inputsis targeted for assignment.
4 Pressione o switch Select de cada canal que deseja atribuir ou

4 Press
theOutput
Select switch
for each
channelanalog
you want to
assign
AO16
Analog
that
provides
level
remover
do Mute
Group.Card
Os switches
Select 16
dos canais line
selecionados
or
remove
from
the
Mute
Group.
The
Select
switches
on
the
outputs
piscam.
selected channels flash.

Chapter 15: Muting and Mute Groups 129
digital I/O.
129
To confirm the Mute Group definition, press the flashing

switch or
the flashing Mute Group switch (18).
5 Siga umAssign
dos seguintes
procedimentos:
Para
a definio de Mute Group, pressione o switch
orconfirmar
Assign piscante ou o switch Mute Group piscante (18).

ou To cancel the Mute Group definition, press the Cancel
in the
Function
Paraswitch
cancelar
a definio
desection.
Mute Group, pressione o switch
Cancel na seo Function.
To assign or remove members of a Mute Group on-screen:
Viewing Members of Mute Groups

You can view Mute Group members in input channels and FX
returns.
Visualizando Membros de Mute Groups
Voc pode visualizar os membros de Mute Group em Input Channels

the members of Mute Groups in the Inputs section:
eTo
FXview
Returns.
Press the Show Members switch in the Mute Groups section.
Para ver os membros de um Mute Groups na seo Inputs:
The Bus Assign LEDs 18 at the top of each input channel
Para atribuir ou remover membros de um Mute Group na tela:
flash
Pressione
o switch
Show
Membersmembership
na seo Mute
Groups.
in each
channel
to indicate
in the
corre-
1 V2 Click
pginathe
Inputs
ou button
Outputs.
Assign
in the Mute Groups section (to the
Os LEDs Bus Assign 18 no alto de cada Input Channel piscam

em
cada
canal
que so mode
membros
do Mute
Press
Cancel
to para
leave indicar
Show Members
and return
theGroup
Incorrespondente.
put section to its previous display.
1 Go to the Inputs or Outputs page.
right of the on-screen faders). The Assign button flashes to in-
2 Clique no boto Assign na seo Mute Groups ( direita dos faders

dicate Assign mode.
na tela). O boto Assign pisca para indicar o modo Assign.
sponding Mute Group.
Pressione Cancel para sair do modo Show Members e retornar a

seo
Input
para sua
visualizao anterior.
Using
Mute
Groups
Mute Groups
activated from the Mute Groups section on
Utilizando
Muteare
Groups
the console or from the Mute Group controls on-screen in the
Mute
Groups
so ativados
pela seo Mute Groups na console ou
Inputs
and Outputs
pages.
pelos controles Mute Group na tela nas pginas Inputs e Outputs.
To activate a Mute Group:
Para ativar um Mute Group:

GroupAssign
Assign mode
ModoMute
Mute Group
3 Below the flashing Assign button, one of the Mute Group
3 Abaixo
do boto Assign piscante, um dos botes Mute Group
buttons 18 flashes to show which Mute Group is selected for
18 pisca para mostrar qual Mute Group est selecionado para
assignment. If desired, click to select a different Mute Group.
atribuio. Se desejado, clique para selecionar um Mute Group
diferente.
4 Click to select the channels you want assigned to the selected Mute Group (click their fader strips to select individual
4 Clique
para selecionar os canais que deseja atribuir para o Mute
channels; click their on-screen bank numbers to select multiGroup selecionado (clique em suas rguas para selecionais canais
ple channels at once).
isolados; clique em seus nmeros de banco na tela para selecionar
vrios
5 de
Douma
one vez).
of the following:
To confirm the Mute Group definition, click the flashing

button or the flashing Mute Group switch (18).
ParaAssign
confirmar a definio de Mute Group, clique no boto
Click
the on-screen
banner
display
show the
confirmaAssign
piscante
ou no switch
Mute
Grouptopiscante
(18).
tion
click
Clique
no dialog,
banner then
na tela
paraAssign.
mostrar o dilogo de confirmao
e clique Assign.
or
ou
To
cancel the
Mute Group
definition,
click the
Para
cancelar
a definio
de Mute
Group, clique
no on-screen
banner e
banner display and click Cancel.
em Cancel.
1 Make sure the Mute Groups / Function section is in Mute
mode.
theaFunction
switch
is lit,
press it est
so that
it
1Groups
Certifique-se
deIfque
seo Mute
Groups
/ Function
no modo
Mute
Se o switch
Function
est
aceso, pressione-o para que
turnsGroups.
off (indicating
Mute
Groups
mode).
se apague (indicando o modo Mute Groups).
2 Press a Mute Groups switch 18 to mute the members of the
group.Mute
The Groups
Mute switches
ofsilenciar
the Mute
2corresponding
Pressione um switch
18 para
osGroup
membros
members
flash to indicate
are implicitly
do
grupo correspondente.
Osthey
switches
Mute dos muted.
membros do Mute
Group piscam para indicar que eles esto implicitamente em Mute.
To activate multiple Mute Groups:
Para ativar vrios Mute Groups:
Press any number of Mute Group switches 18 in any se-
Mute
Groupsnmero
functiondeinswitches
an additive
fashion.
quence.
Pressione
qualquer
Mute
Group 18 em
qualquer sequncia. Mute Groups funcionam de modo aditivo.
To deactivate a Mute Group:
Para desativar um Mute Group:
Press a lit Mute Group switch.
Pressione um switch Mute Group aceso.
Explicit and Implicit Channel Mute with

Mute Groups and VCAs
Mute Explcito e Implcito de Canal com Mute Groups e VCAs

Esta
descreve
o comportamente
switches
Mute
de canais
Thisseo
section
describes
the behavior ofdos
channel
Mute
switches
quando
utilizados
com Mute
Groups
e VCAs.Solo/PFL
O comportamento
when used
with Mute
Groups
and VCAs.
implicit de
Mute implcito Solo/PFL inalterado.
mute behavior is unchanged.
Mute Groups, VCAs e Mutes Explcitos
Mute Groups, VCAs and Explicit Mutes
Canais podem ser colocados em Mute de trs maneiras:

Channels can be muted in three ways:
Explicitamente Utilizando o switch Mute do canal.

Explicitly Using the channel Mute switch.
Implicitamente
membro
de umGroup
Mute Group
ou VCA.
Implicitly As aComo
member
of a Mute
or VCA.
e and
Implicitly As a Como
result of
anotherde
channel
being ser
soloed.
Implicitamente
resultado
outro canal
colocado em
Solo.
130
Guia VENUE Profile
Using
Using Channel
Channel Mute
Mute Switches
Switches
To
To re-enable
re-enable Mute
Mute Groups:
Groups:
Click the flashing Disable button in the Mute Groups
Any
Click the flashing Disable button in the Mute Groups
Any input
input or
or output
output channel
channel implicitly
implicitly muted
muted by
by a
a Mute
Mute
section.
Group
or
VCA
can
be
explicitly
un-muted,
explicitly
muted,
section.
Qualquer
canal
de entrada
ou sada implicitamente
colocado
em
Clique
no boto Disable piscante na seo Mute Groups.
Group
or VCA
can be explicitly
un-muted, explicitly
muted,
To
re-enable
Mute Required
Groups:
Using
Channel
Mute
Switches
Stage
Rack
Features
Additional
Components
Mute
por
um
Mute
Group
ou
VCA
pode
ser
explicitamente
tirado
and
reset
to
its
implicit
mute
state
by
repeatedly
pressing
a
and reset to its implicit mute state by repeatedly pressing a
dessechannel
estado, Mute
explicitamente
mutado eunmuting
resetado or
para
seu estado
switch.
Explicitly
muting
a
chan Click the flashing Disable button in the Mute Groups
channel
switch.
unmuting
or muting
chan- The following components must be purchased separately:
Any
input
or Mute
output
channel
implicitly
muted
by
a Mute
Stage
Racks
are used
withExplicitly
an
FOH Rack,
and provide
all astage
de Mute
implcito
pressionando
repetidamente
o switch
Mute do section.
nel
this
way
does
not
remove
that
channel
nelorin
in
this
way
does
not permanently
permanently
remove
that
channel
Group
VCA
can
be
explicitly
un-muted,
explicitly
muted,
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Stage
Racks
canal.from
Tirar the
explicitamente
doorestado
de Mute ou silenciar um canal
Group
from
the
Mute
Group
or VCA.
VCA.
and
reset
to
itsMute
implicit
mute
state
by repeatedly
pressing
a
can
be used
simultaneously,
supporting
upde
to um
96
total
desse
modo
no
o remove
permanentemente
Muteinputs.
Group
Disable
recommended;
Disable
channel
Mute
switch.
Explicitly
unmuting
or muting
a chanou
VCA.
This
feature
is
useful
to
temporarily
unmute
a
channel
during
DVI supported.
This
feature
is
useful
to
temporarily
unmute
a
channel
during
I/O
nelAudio
in
this
way does
not permanently
remove that
channel
a
line
check
without
having
to
Mute Group
a the
lineMute
check
without
having
to release
release the
the entire
entire
Group
Esse
muito
til
para
temporariamente
tirar
deMute
Mute
um
fromrecurso
Group
or
VCA.
VCA.
48 inputs with remotely controllable mic preamps
and
or
or
VCA.
Disable
canal durante um teste de linha sem que seja preciso liberar todo o
This
feature
is
useful
to
temporarily
unmute
a
channel
during
Digital
Snake
Cable (VENUE Profile Systems Only)
Mute Group ou VCA.
To
cycle
through
the
available
Mute
modes:
check
8 analog
output
channels;
expandable
up to
48 analog
a line
without
having
to release
entire
Mute
Group or
To
cycle
through
the
available
Mutethe
modes:
digital
outputs
per
Stageor
Rack.
Para
circular
entre
os
modos
Mute
disponveis:
or VCA.
1 Activate
a
Mute
Group,
mute
a
VCA.
The
Mute
switches
a Digital
This cable can be purchased directly
Mute
Group
controls
on-screen
1 Activate a Mute Group, or mute a VCA. The Mute switches Controles
Mute Snake
Group
nacable.
tela
Mute Group
controls
on-screen
on
all
implicitly
muted
channels
flash.
from
Avid
or
assembled
onum
allMute
implicitly
muted
channels
flash.um VCA. Os switches
1To
Ative
ouControl
coloque
em
Mute
Synchronization
I/O
cycle
throughGroup
theand
available
Mute
modes:
a
switch
to
explicitly
unmute the
chanMute 22emPress
todos
os canaisMute
mutados
implicitamente
piscam.
a flashing
flashing
Mute
switch
to
explicitly
the(if
chan Press
Snake
connectors
to enable
primary
and unmute
redundant
Function
Switches
1 Activate
aMute
Muteswitch
Group,isor
mute
a VCA. The Mute switches
nel.
Its
now
unlit.
Switches
Function
Mute
Group controls
on-screen
Function
Switches
Optional
Components
nel.applicable)
Its Mute switch
is nowtounlit.
connection
a VENUE FOH Rack.
2on
Pressione
um
switch
Mute
piscante
para
explicitamente
tirar
o
all implicitly muted channels flash.
VENUE
Profile
provides
8
Function
switches
(F
same
(now
unlit)
Mute
again
canal 33doPress
Mute.the
Seu
switch
Mute
agora
estswitch
apagado.
VENUE
Profile
provides
8 are
Function
switches
(F keys).
keys).
The
following
components
optional,
and
must
be
Profile
oferece
8 switches
Function
(F
keys).
Press
the
same
(now
unlit)
Mute
switch
again to
to explicitly
explicitly VENUE
2 Press
a
flashing
Mute
switch
to
explicitly
unmute
the
chanmute
the
channel.
Its
Mute
switch
is
now
lit
solid.
purchased
separately:
mute the channel. Its Mute switch is now lit solid.
Its Muteoswitch
now unlit.
3nel.
Pressione
switchis Mute
(agora apagado) novamente para Function Switches
System
4 Press theComponents
same
Mute
switch
again
to
mute
the
4 Press the
same Mute
switch
again Seu
to implicitly
implicitly
muteagora
the
explicitamente
colocar
o canal
em Mute.
switch Mute
Show provides
Members 8 Function switches
Cancel
VENUEtransfer
Profile
(F recommended)
keys).
3 Press
the same
(now
unlit)
Mute switch
again
to
explicitly
Show of
Members
Show data; 512 MB or larger
channel
and
return
it
to
being
controlled
by
the
active
Mute
Cancel
est aceso.
channel and return it to being controlled by the active Mute
muteGroup
the channel.
Its
Mute switch
is now lit flashing.
solid.
Its
Assign speakers for mix
Function
Near-field monitor
position monitoring
Group or
or VCA.
VCA.
Its Mute
Mute switch
switch resumes
resumes flashing.
Assign
Included
Components
Function
44Pressione
o
switch
Mute
novamente
para
implicitamente
colocar
Press the same Mute switch again to implicitly mute the
Select
multiple
channels
first
be
able
to
toggle
all
Show Members
All VENUE
Profile
systems
the
ochannel
canal
emand
Mute
e retornar
seuinclude
controle
para
o Mute
GroupMute
outheir
VCA
Cancel
Select
multiple
first to
to
befollowing:
able
toactive
toggle
all
their
return
it tochannels
being
controlled
by
the
states
at
once.
The
behavior
may
vary
if
some,
but
not
ativo. Seu
switch
Mute
volta
aMute
piscar.
Mute Groups/F 18
VENUE
Profile
console
states
at
once.
The
Mute
behavior
may
vary
if
some,
but
not
Mute
Groups/F
18
Group or VCA. Its Mute switch resumes flashing.
Assign
Function
(for
Talkback)
all,
of
the
channels
all,(2)
of IEC
the selected
selected
channels are
are members
members of
of a
a Mute
Mute Group
Group
Two
power cables
Selecione
primeiramente vrios canais para que seja possvel
or
VCA.
ormultiple
VCA.mount
channels
first screen
to be able
to toggle
all their
Select
Monitor
for VGA
(screen
included)
alternar
seus estados
simultaneamente.
Onot
comportamento
states at once. The Mute behavior may vary if some, but not
Groups/F
18
Seo
de Switches
Mute Groups/Function Switches (F keys)
pode mount
variar em
alguns canais,
mas no todos, se so Mute
Mute
Trackball
(trackball
not included)
BNC
cables (for connecting
Word
clock between the
Disabling
Mute
Groups
Mute
Groups/Function
switches (F keys)
section
all,
of the selected
channels
areou
members
of a Mute Group
Disabling
Mute
Groups
Mute Groups/Function switches (F keys) section
membros
de
um
Mute
Group
VCA.
or VENUE
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
VCA. Mouse Pad
A funo
e o comportamento
de
cada switch
Function
ser
The
function
and
behavior
of
each
switch podem
can
You
can
disable
The
function
and
behavior
of
each Function
Function
can be
be14
You
can temporarily
temporarily
disable all
all Mute
Mute Group
Group functions.
functions. When
When personalizados
VENUE
Profile
Guide
na
Event
List.
Por
padro,
os
switches
Function
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
to
GPIswitch
devices)
Desabilitando
Mute
Groups
customized
in
the
Event
List.
By
default,
Function
switches
Mute
Groups
are
all channels implicitly muted as a
the
Event Preview,
List. By odefault,
Function
switches
Mute
Groups
are disabled,
disabled,
socustomized
mapeados in
para
o modo
modo Variable
Groups,
copiar
Two
(2)
console
lights all channels implicitly muted as a Mute
Disabling
Mute
Groups
Groups/Function
switches
(F keys)
section
14
are
mapped
to
Preview
mode,
Variable
Groups
mode,
result
of
Mute
Group
activation
are
unmuted.
14
are
mapped
to
Preview
mode,
Variable
Groups
mode,
of
Mute Group activation
are todas
unmuted.
e
colar
de
canais,
respectivamente.
Voc result
pode
temporariamente
desabilitar
as
funes
Mute
and
paste,
respectively.
channel
copy
and channel
channel
paste,
respectively.
The channel
functioncopy
and behavior
of each
Function
switch can be
You Channels
can
temporarily
disable
all
Groupwhen
functions.
When
Group.
Quando
Mute
Groups
soMute
desabilitados,
todos
os
canais
can
still
be
explicitly
muted
Mute
Groups
are
Rack(s)
(see
next)
Channels
can
still
be
explicitly
muted
when
Mute
Groups
are
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Para
mais
informaes,
veja
o
Captulo
22,
Eventos.
customized
in
the
Event
List.
By
default,
Function
switches
colocados
implicitamente
em
Mute
como
resultado
da
ativao
Mutedisabled.
Groups Mute
are disabled,
all channels implicitly
muted
as
a
For
more
see
Chapter
22,
Events.
Group
assignments
are
preserved
and
made
For mapped
more information,
information,
see
Chapter
22, Groups
Events.
disabled.
Mute
Group
assignments
are
preserved
and
made
Mute
Group
so
tirados
desse
estado.
14
are
to
Preview
mode,
Variable
mode,
result
of Muteagain
Group activation
are unmuted.
available
Mute
Groups
are
re-enabled.
The acessar
following
options can
Para
switches
Function:
available
again when
when
Mute
Groups
areCables
re-enabled.
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
channel
copy os
and
channel
paste, respectively.
To
access
the
For
allFunction
VENUE switches:
systems and options, visit the Avid
Todetails
accesson
the
Function
switches:
Canais
podem
a ser explicitamente
em are
Mute
Channels
cancontinuar
still be explicitly
muted when colocados
Mute Groups
Each
Mix
Rack
or
FOH
Rack
includes:
website
(www.avid.com).
To
disable
Mute
Groups:
1
Pressione
o
switch
Function
Mute
Groups.
Quando no
quando
Mute
Groups
esto
desabilitados.
As
atribuies
Mute
For
more
information,
see
Chapter
22,
disabled.
MuteMute
Group
assignments are preserved and made
1 Press the Function switchna
in seo
the Events.
Mute
Groups
section.
To disable
Groups:
1 Press the Function switch in the Mute Groups section.
modo
Function,
o
LED
do
switch
Function
se
acende.
Group
so
preservadas
e
tornam-se
disponveis
novamente
quando
System
Restore
CD
available
when
Mute
Groups are re-enabled.
When
1 Goagain
to
Inputs
or
When in
in Function
Function mode,
mode, the
the Function
Function switch
switch LED
LED lights.
lights.
1 Go
to the
the
Inputs
or Outputs
Outputs pages.
pages.
os Mute
so
re-habilitados.
To Mix
access
the Function
switches:
Groups
ECx Ethernet
Control Software Installer CD
Rack
Options
ao
modo
Mute
Groups,
pressione
o
switch
Function
2 Toretonar
return
to
Mute
Groups
mode,
press
the
Function
switch
2 Click the Disable button on-screen in the Mute Groups sec- 2 Para
2 To return to Mute Groups mode, press the Function switch
2 Click
the Groups:
Disable
button
on-screen
To disable
Mute
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD in the Mute Groups sec- 1 novamente.
Press
the Function switch in the Mute Groups section.
Para desabilitar
Mute
Groups:
again.
tion.
The
Disable
switch
flashes
to
indicated
disabled
state.
again.
tion. The Disable switch flashes to indicated disabled state.
I/O
Options
Smart
Key (for
When
in
Function mode, the Function switch LED lights.
1 GotoiLok
the USB
Inputs
or Outputs
pages.
Utilizando Switches Mute de Canais
1 V pgina
Inputs
ou Outputs.
Plug-in
installer
2 Click the Disable button on-screen in the Mute Groups sec-
The
Two
(2) IEC
powerflashes
cablesto indicated disabled state.
switch
2tion.
Clique
noDisable
boto Disable
na tela na
seo Mute Groups. O switch
One
FOH
Link
cable
Disable pisca indicando estadofor
deconnection
desabilitado.to a VENUE console
Para re-habilitar Mute Groups:
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Cardpress
that the
provides
16 analog
2 To
return
to Mute
Groups
mode,
Function
switch
again.
outputs
IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addiChapter 15: Muting and Mute Groups 131
Muting and
Groups 131
tional 8 channels of analog Chapter
I/O and15:
8 channels
ofMute
AES/EBU
digital I/O.
131
Chapter 1:
15:Introduction
Muting andtoMute
Groups
VENUE
Profile131
5
132
Parte IV: Processamento
133
134
Guia VENUE Profile
Chapter 16: Dynamics

Captulo
16: Dynamics
VENUE Mix Rack and Profile systems offer the following dynamics features:
Built-In Compressor/Limiter
A built-in Compressor/Limiter and Expander/Gate is

One built-in Compressor/Limiter (Comp/Lim) is available on
VENUE
Mix
Profile
systems offer the following dyavailable
onRack
eachand
input
channel.
input channel. The Comp/Lim defaults to compression,
Sistemas
VENUE
Mix Rack e Profile oferecem os seguintes recursos eachBuilt-In
Compressor/Limiter
features:
namics
Dynamics
plug-ins can be used on input and output
or
can
be switched to a limiter
by setting the Ratio to its maxde dinmica:
Compressor/Limiter
Embutido
A
built-in
Compressor/Limiter
and Expander/Gate
is
imum
setting.
Mono
and stereo
processing
are supported.
One
built-in
Compressor/Limiter
(Comp/Lim)
is available on
Stage
Umchannels.
Compressor/Limiter
e um Expander/Gate
embutidos esto
Rack
Features
Additional
Required
Components
available
onyou
each
input
channel.
em cada
Input
Channel.
input channel. The
Comp/Lim
defaults
to compression,
disponveis
All channels
let
inset
hardware
dynamics processors.
Um each
Compressor/Limiter
(Comp/Lim)
embutido
est
disponvel em
Racks
used
with
an
FOH
Rack,on
and
provide
stage
Theorfollowing
components
must be
purchased
separately:
Stage
Plug-ins
de are
dinmica
podem
ser
usados
em
canais
deall
entrada
Dynamics
plug-ins
can
be
used
input
and
output
cada
Input
Channel.
O
Comp/Lim
padronizado
para
compresso
can
be
switched
to
a
limiter
by
setting
the
Ratio
to its max All built-in and most plug-in dynamic processors support
Comp/Lim
Parameters
audio
I/O
for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
e sada.
ou
pode
ser
comutado
para
limiter
ajustando
o
Ratio
para
o valor
channels.
imum
setting.
Mono
and
stereo
processing
are
supported.
Video
Display
(15-inch
or
greater
flat-panel
VGA
display
side-chain keying with key filtering.
can
Todos
os canais
permitem inserir
hardware
be used
simultaneously,
supporting
upde
toprocessamenteo
96 total inputs.
mximo.
Processamento
monominimum
ethe
estreo
suportado.
recommended;
resolution).
VGA
Threshold
Increases 1024x768
or decreases
threshold
level for
theand
All
channels
let
you
inset
hardware
dynamics
processors.
dinmico.
Dynamics settings can be copied, pasted, stored and reDVI Comp/Lim.
supported.
I/O
Allusing
built-in
and most
plug-in
dynamic
processors
called
Snapshots
Presets.
Audio
Todos
os
processadores
deand
dinmica
embutidos
e muitos support
plug- built-in
Comp/Lim
Parameters
Parmetros
Comp/Lim
side-chain
keyingewith
key filtering.
ins suportam
side-chain
filtros.
RatioThreshold
IncreasesIncreases
or decreases
the ratiothe
for threshold
the Comp/Lim.
The
48 inputs with
mic
preamps
and
decreases
level
for
the
Configuraes
desettings
dinmica
ser pasted,
copiadas,
coladas,
Threshold
Aumenta
ou or
diminui
o nvel de
threshold
do
Comp/Lim
Dynamics
canpodem
be copied,
stored
and re- most
extreme
clockwise
setting
(100:1)
switches
the
process
individually
selectable utilizando
phantom Snapshots
power.
Built-In
Dynamics
built-in
Comp/Lim.
armazenadas
e
carregadas
e
Presets.
embutido.
called using Snapshots and Presets.
into Limiting mode.
Each input channel provides a built-in Compressor/Limiter
The
connection
between
FOH
Rack
and
Rack requires
Ratio
Increases or
decreases
the
ratio
forStage
the Comp/Lim.
The
Processadores
Dinmica
digitaldeoutputs
perEmbutidos
Stage Rack.
Ratio
Aumenta
ou
diminui
o Ratio
dotime
Comp/Lim.
O ajuste extremo
Attack
Increases
orclockwise
decreases
attack
forpurchased
the Comp/Lim.
(Comp/Lim), and an Expander/Gate (Exp/Gate). Built-in dya
Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable
can
be
directly
most
extreme
setting
(100:1)
switches
the
process
Built-In Dynamics
em sentido horrio (100:1) comuta o processamento para o modo
namics
areChannel
not limited
by DSP
resources,
and can be(Comp/Lim)
configfrom
Avid or assembled
into
Limiting
mode.
Cada
Input
oferece
um I/O
Compressor/Limiter
Lim.
Synchronization
and
Control
Comp
Knee
Increases
or decreases the knee width for the
as preor post
the
built-in
EQ
per channel.
Built-in
input
channel
provides
a processadores
built-in
Compressor/Limiter
e ured
um Each
Expander/Gate
(Exp/Gate).
Os
de dinmica
Comp/Lim.
A knee value
of 0 provides
atime
hardfor
knee
(Comp/Lim),
Snake
connectors
toExpander/Gate
enable
primary
and
(ifser
Attack
Increases
or decreases
attack
thesetting;
Comp/Lim.
Comp/Lim
and
Exp/Gate
Threshold
can de
be
adjusted
from
the
and anpelos
(Exp/Gate).
Built-in
dy- Attack
embutidos
so
limitados
recursos
DSP,redundant
e podem
Aumenta
ou knee.
diminui
o tempo
de attack
do Comp/Lim.
100
provides
a
soft
Optional
Components
applicable)
connection
a VENUE
FOH
Rack.
configurados
como
pr
ou ps
EQto
embutido
por
canal.
O adjusted
Threshold
input
encoders;
all
other
dynamics
parameters
can
be
namics
are not
limited
by
DSP
resources,
and
can
be configComp Knee Increases or decreases the knee width for the
dousing
Comp/Lim
epredo or
Exp/Gate
pode
ser ajustado
pelos
the as
dedicated
Dynamics
controls
ACS,codificadores
orBuilt-in
ured
post
the
built-in
EQ in
perthe
channel.
Comp
Knee
Aumenta
ou diminui
a largura
do the
knee
do
The following
components
are
optional,
and
must
be Comp/Lim.
Release
Increases
decreases
release
time for
Comp/Lim.
Comp/Lim.
Aor
knee
value
of
0 provides
a100
hardoferece
knee setting;
deon-screen.
entrada;
todosand
os Exp/Gate
outros parmetros
podem
ser ajustados
valor
0
oferece
um
Ajuste
hard
knee;
um soft
Comp/Lim
Threshold can
be adjusted
from the Um
100 provides
a soft or
knee.
utilizando
os encoders;
controles dedicados
Dynamicsparameters
no ACS, oucan
na be
tela.
knee.
Gain Increases
decreases the make-up gain applied
input
all other dynamics
adjusted Make-Up
System Components
by the
Comp/Lim.
using the dedicated Dynamics controls in the ACS, or
Release
Increases
ordata;
decreases
release
time recommended)
for the Comp/Lim.
transfer
of Show
MB
or release
larger
Plug-ins
Plug-Ins
Release
Aumenta
ou diminui
o512
tempo
de
do Comp/Lim.
on-screen.
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
In/Out
Takes
the
Comp/Lim
in
or
out
of
circuit
(bypass).
Included
Components
Make-Up Gain Increases or decreases the make-up
gain applied
Dynamics
plug-ins
can
be used
inputem
andcanais
output
Plug-ins
de dinmica
podem
ser on
usados
dechannels.
entrada e
Make-Up
Gain Aumenta
ou diminui
o ganho aplicado pelo Comp/
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
by
the
Comp/Lim.
When
assigned
in
the
plug-in
racks,
Dynamics
plug-ins
can
be
sada.
no rackinclude
de plug-ins
os plug-ins de dinmica Side-Chain
Keying Provides side-chain and key listen.
AllQuando
VENUEatribudos
Profile systems
the following:
Lim.
Plug-Ins
inserted
individual
stereo
or fed
by buspodem
ser on
inseridos
em mono
canais or
mono
ouchannels
estreo ou
alimentados
Side-Chain
features
available on-screen
only.
For(bypass).
details,
In/Out
Takes
theare
Comp/Lim
in or out of
circuit
(for
Talkback)
por
busses.
Plug-ins
de dinmica
ajustados
utilizando
os see
Dynamics
can be
used
onser
input
and
channels.
ses.
Dynamics
plug-ins
be podem
adjusted
using
theoutput
dedicated
In/Out
Coloca
o Keys
Comp/Lim
dentro on
ou fora
circuito (bypass).
Side-Chain
and Filters
pagedo
139.
Two
(2) IEC Dynamics
power cables
controles
dedicados
no from
ACS,
pelos
codificadores
Output
Side-Chain
Footswitches
(up
to 2) side-chain and key listen.
When
assigned
in the
the ACS,
plug-in
racks,
plug-ins
can be
Dynamics
controls
in
theDynamics
Output
encoders
(in
Keying
Provides
(noInsert
modo
Insert),
ou
na pgina
Plug-Ins
na
tela.channels
Alm
presets
inserted
Monitor
mount
for on-screen
VGA
screen
(screen
notdisso,
included)
Keying
Oferece
side-chain
e key
listen.
on
individual
mono
or stereo
fed
by bus- Side-Chain
Mode),
or
from
the
Plug-Ins
page.
InoraddiSide-Chain
MIDI cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
features
areligao
available
on-screen
only.
For details,
Comp/Lim
Gain
Reduction
Meters
de plug-ins
podem mount
ser salvos
e carregados.
Trackball
included)
tion,ses.
plug-in
presetsplug-ins
can(trackball
be can
stored
and
loaded.
Dynamics
benot
adjusted
using the dedicated
Side-Chain
Keys
and Filters
onclock
page between
139.
seeBNC
cables (for
connecting
Word
the
Recursos Side-Chain
esto disponveis
apenas
tela. Para
gain reduction
meters
on each
inputna
channel
controls
in the ACS, from the Output encoders (in Three-segment
Dynamics
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
Os controles
Dynamics
no
ACSACS
oferecem
um
set unificado
de
detalhes, veja Side-Chain Keys and Filters na pgina 139.
The
Dynamics
controls
in the
provide
a unified
set
indicates
Comp/Lim
gain
reduction
from
left
to
right,
as
Insert
Mode),
or
from
the
on-screen
Plug-Ins
page.
In
addi controles
VENUE Profile
Guide
para processamento
interno e plug-ins.
Gain
Reduction
Meters
Comp/Lim
25-pin D-Sub
cables
(for connecting
to GPI devices)
of controls
forpresets
both built-in
plug-in
shown in the following table:
tion,
plug-in
can be and
stored
and dynamics
loaded. proMedidores de Reduo de Ganho Comp/Lim
cessing.
Three-segment gain reduction meters on each input channel
Inserts de Hardware
Channel Compr/Lim gain reduction meter scale
Protective
Dust Cover
The Dynamics
controls in the ACS provide a unified set
indicates
reduction
from left toem
right,
Medidores
deComp/Lim
reduo degain
ganho
de 3 segmentos
cadaasInput
LED
GainExpansion
Reduction
Color
of
controls
for
both built-in
plug-in em
dynamics
pro- e
Rack(s)
(see
next)
Voc
pode
inserir
um
processador
deand
dinmica
hardware
shown
in
the
following
table:
Hardware
Inserts
VENUE
Profile
Options
Channel indicam a reduo de ganho do Comp/Lim da esquerda
controlar seucessing.
estado no circuito/fora do circuito e ponto de insero
para
a direita,
conforme
tabela:
none
0 dBa seguinte
Off
Compr/Lim
meter
scale Profile systems.
can
insert
a hardware
Dynamics
processor and control its
TheChannel
following
optionsgain
canreduction
be added
to VENUE
naYou
tela.
(Veja
o Captulo
19,
Inserts
de Hardware.)
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and Cables
in/out state and insert position on-screen. (See Chapter 19,
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
LED
Colorvisit the Avid
1 (right)
<= 3Gain
dB Reduction Green
Hardware Inserts
Hardware
Each Mix Inserts.)
Rack or FOH Rack includes:
dB
Off
<= 60dB
Green
can insert
a hardware
Dynamics processor and control its 2 none
You
System
Restore
CD
state and Control
insert position
on-screen.
(See Chapter 19,
1 Rack
(right) Options
<=dB
3 dB
Green
3Mix
(left)
<= 12
Green
in/out
ECx Ethernet
Software
Installer CD
Hardware Inserts.)
2
<= 6 dB
Green
Six-segment gain reduction meters are provided in the ACS for
I/O Options
higher3 resolution
metering.
Chapter 13,Green
Metering.
(left)
<= (See
12 dB
Six-segment
gain reduction
are
provided
inoferecidos
the ACS
for
mic/line
level
inputs
Medidores
de reduo
de ganhometers
de 6 segmentos
so
na
Chapter
16:
Dynamics
135
higher
metering.
(See Chapter
seo
ACS resolution
para medies
de resoluo
mais 13,
altaMetering.
(Veja o Captulo
AO16
Analog Output
13,
Metering.
)
outputs
Chapter 16: Dynamics 135

Captulo 16: Dinmicas 135
IOx Input and output expansion card that provides an addi-
Comp/Lim Defaults and Ranges
Padres
e ExtensoDefaults
de Comp/Lim
Comp/Lim
and Ranges
The following table lists the default values and ranges for the
A seguinte
tabela lista
os lists
valores
a extenso
do Comp/Lim
The following
table
thepadro
defaultevalues
and ranges
for the
built-in
Comp/Lim:
embutido:
built-in Comp/Lim:
Comp/Lim (defaults to Compressor mode)
Comp/Lim (defaults to Compressor mode)
Parameter
Parameter
Threshold
Threshold
Attack
Attack
Release
Release
Ratio
Ratio
Knee
Knee
Makeup Gain
Makeup Gain
Default
Default
0 dB
0 dB
10 ms
10 ms
100 ms
100 ms
2:1
2:1
0 (hard)
0 (hard)
0 dB
0 dB
Minimum
Minimum
40 dB
40 dB
100 us
100 us
10 ms
10 ms
1.25:1
1.25:1
0
0
40 dB
40 dB
Maximum
Maximum
+20 dB
+20 dB
200 ms
200 ms
4 sec
4 sec
100:1
100:1
100
100
+20 dB
+20 dB
Built-In Expander/Gate
Built-In Expander/Gate
Expander/Gate
Embutido
One built-in Expander/Gate (Exp/Gate) is available on each

Onechannel.
built-in Expander/Gate
(Exp/Gate)
isdisponvel
available
on
each
The
Exp/Gate
defaults
to gate
(Ratio of
100:1,
Uminput
Expander/Gate
(Exp/Gate)
embutido
est
para
cada
input
channel.
The Exp/Gate
to to
gate
(Ratio
ofmode
100:1,
Input
Channel.
O Exp/Gate
padronizado
para
gate
(Ratio of
100:1,
the
maximum
setting).
It
can bedefaults
switched
Expander
maximum
setting).
can
be switched
mode
o ajuste
mximo).
Ele
pode
ser
comutado
parato
o Expander
modo
Expander
bythe
setting
the Range
to its It
minimum
setting.
Mono
and
stereo
configurando
Range
para
mnimo.
Processamento
mono
by settingo
the
Range
to o
itsajuste
minimum
setting.
Mono and stereo
processing
are
supported.
e estreo
so suportados.
processing
are supported.
Parmtros
Expander/GateParameters
Expander/Gate
Expander/Gate Parameters
ThresholdAumenta
Increases
decreases
the threshold
leveldoforExp/Gate
the
Threshold
ouordiminui
o nvel
de threshold
Threshold
Increases
or
decreases
the
threshold
level
for
the
built-in
Exp/Gate.
embutido.
built-in Exp/Gate.
Ratio
Increases
decreases
the ratio
for the Exp/Gate.
The
Ratio
Aumenta
ouor
diminui
o Ratio
do Exp/Gate.
O ajuste extremo
Ratio
Increases
or
decreases
the
ratio
for
the
Exp/Gate.
The
most
extreme
clockwise
setting
(100:1)
puts
the
process
em sentido horrio (100:1) comuta o processamento para ointo
modo
most
extreme
clockwise
setting
(100:1)
puts
the
process
into
Gate
mode.
Lower
settings
enable
Expander
mode.
Gate. Ajustes menores habilitam o modo Expander.
Exp/Gate Gain Reduction Meters

Medidores
de Reduo
de Ganho Exp/Gate
Exp/Gate
Gain Reduction
Meters
A single bi-color Gate LED on each input channel indicates

Um
LED activity,
bicolor
em
canal
indica
atividade
Exp/Gate,
A single
bi-colorGate
Gate
LEDcada
onthe
each
input
channel
indicates
Exp/Gate
as
shown
in
following
table.
conforme
tabela ainseguir.
Exp/Gatemostrado
activity, na
as shown
the following table.
Color
Expander Status
Gate Status
Color
Expander Status
Gate Status
(none)
Not in circuit
Not in circuit
(none)
Not in circuit
Not in circuit
Green
3 dB gain reduction
Gate Open & Hold
Green
3 dB gain reduction
Gate Open & Hold
Yellow
Gate Release
Yellow
Gate Release
Red
Gate Closed
Red
Gate Closed
Six-segment gain reduction meters are provided in the ACS for
Six-segment
gain
reduction
meters
are provided
in channel.
the ACS for
metering
of the
Exp/Gate
on the
currently
selected
Medidores
de the
reduo
de ganho de 6 segmentos esto disponveis
metering
of13,
Exp/Gate on the currently selected channel.
(See
Chapter
Metering.
no ACS para medio do Exp/Gate do canal selecionado. (Veja o
(See Chapter 13, Metering.
Captulo 13, Metering.)
Exp/Gate Defaults and Ranges

Exp/Gate
Defaults
and Ranges
Padres
e Extenso
de Exp/Gate
The following table lists the default values for the Exp/Gate:
following
the default
values
the Exp/Gate:
AThe
seguinte
tabelatable
listalists
os valores
padro
para for
o Exp/Gate:
Exp/Gate Defaults (defaults to Gate mode)
Exp/Gate Defaults (defaults to Gate mode)
Parameter
Parameter
Threshold
Threshold
Attack
Attack
Release
Release
Ratio
Ratio
Gate Hold
Gate Hold
Gate Range
Gate Range
Default
Default
0 dB
0 dB
1 ms
1 ms
250 ms
250 ms
100:1 (Gate
100:1 (Gate
mode)
mode)
100 ms
100 ms
20 dB
20 dB
Minimum
Minimum
60 dB
60 dB
20 us
20 us
10 ms
10 ms
1.25:1
1.25:1
Maximum
Maximum
+20 dB
+20 dB
500 ms
500 ms
4 sec
4 sec
100:1
100:1
10 ms
10 ms
80 dB
80 dB
4 sec
4 sec
0 dB
0 dB
Gate mode. Lower settings enable Expander mode.
Attack
Increases
or decreases
the de
attack
time
the Exp/Gate.
Attack
Aumenta
ou diminui
o tempo
attack
dofor
Exp/Gate.
Attack Increases or decreases the attack time for the Exp/Gate.

Gate
Hold
Increases
decreases
the de
time
the gate
Gate
Hold
Aumenta
ou or
diminui
o tempo
atuao
doholds.
gate.
Gate Hold Increases or decreases the time the gate holds.
Release Increases or decreases the release time for the
Release Aumenta ou diminui o tempo de release do Exp/Gate.
Release Increases or decreases the release time for the
Exp/Gate.
Exp/Gate.
Range Ajusta a mxima profundidade de atenuao do gate nesse
Range Sets the maximum range or depth of attenuation of the
canal.
Range
Sets channel.
the maximum range or depth of attenuation of the
gate
on that
gate on that channel.
In/Out Coloca o Exp/Gate dentro ou fora do circuito (bypass).
In/Out Takes the Exp/Gate in or out of circuit (bypass).
In/Out Takes the Exp/Gate in or out of circuit (bypass).
Side-Chain
Keying
O The
Exp/Gate
suporta
side-chain
e key listen.
Para
Side-Chain
Keying
Exp/Gate
supports
side-chain
and key
detalhes,
vejadetails,
Side-Chain
Keys
e Filters
naand
pgina139.
Side-Chain
Keyingsee
The
Exp/Gate
supports
side-chain
listen.
For
Side-Chain
Keys
Filters onand key
listen.
page
139.For details, see Side-Chain Keys and Filters on
page 139.
Adjusting Dynamics
Adjusting Dynamics
Ajustando
Dynamics
The
VENUE Profile
console provides Dynamics controls in inThe
VENUE
Profile
console
provides
Dynamics controls in input channel strips, the
ACS, and
on-screen.
Aput
console
VENUE
Profile
oferecm
channel
strips,
the ACS,
and controles
on-screen.Dynamics em rguas
Input Channel, no ACS, e na tela.
Input Fader Strip Dynamics Controls

Controles
de Dinmica
na Rgua
Input Fader
Input Fader
Strip
Dynamics
Controls
All Input fader strips provide Threshold level control for

All Input
fader strips
provide
Threshold
level
controlde
fornvel de
built-in
Dynamics.
Todas
as
rguas
de faders
Input
oferecem
controle
built-in
Dynamics.
Threshold para processadores dinmicos embutidos.
Compressor and Gate

Threshold
Compressor
and Gate
Assign
for
Threshold
Encoders
Assign for
Encoders
Input Encoder assignment switches for built-in Dynamics

Input Encoder
assignment
switches
for built-in Dynamics
Switches
de atribuio
Input Encoder
para processadores
dinmicos embutidos
136
Guia VENUE Profile
To adjust
Threshold
inputInput:
strip:
Para
ajustar
o Threshold
defrom
umaan
rgua
To adjust Threshold from an input strip:
1 Press an Encoder Assign switch (Comp/Lim, or Exp/Gate).
Press an um
Encoder
switch
(Comp/Lim,
11Pressione
switchAssign
Encoder
Assign
(Comp/Limor
ouExp/Gate).
Exp/Gate).
2 Rotate a channel encoder to adjust Threshold.
Rotate a channel encoder to adjust Threshold.

22Gire
um codificador de canal para ajustar o Threshold.
Dynamics
Section
Seo
ACS
Dynamics
ACSACS
Dynamics
Section
Controle
Dynamics
na Tela Do
Software
Software
Screen
Dynamics
Controls
Software
Screen
Dynamics
Controls
The software
screen
lets you
adjustprocessadores
built-in or plug-in
dynamA tela
do software
permite
ajustar
de dinmica
The
software
screen lets
you adjust
built-in or plug-in dynamics on-screen,
with
simultaneous
access
to
Comp/Lim
and a
embutidos
ou
em
plug-in
na
tela,
com
acesso
simultneo
ics on-screen, with simultaneous access to Comp/Lim and
parmetros
e Exp/Gate
as configuraes
Exp/GateComp/Lim
parameters
(including(incluindo
their side-chain
settings).sideExp/Gate parameters (including their side-chain settings).
chain).
The Inputs screen also provides the Dynamics Graph display.

The Inputs screen also provides the Dynamics Graph display.
A
tela
tambm
oferece
o display
Dynamicsresponse
Graph. O of
Dynamics
TheInputs
Dynamics
Graph
displays
a composite
the
Stage
Rack Features
Dynamics Graph
displays aComponents
composite response of the
Additional
Required
The Dynamics
controlsACS
in the
ACS provide
a unified,
consis- The
Os
controles
Dynamics
oferecem
set
de consiscontroles
Graph
mostra uma
resposta
composta
e built-in
gate que
The
Dynamics
controls no
in the ACS
provideum
a unified,
compressor
and gate
that you
can usede
to compressor
view and edit
compressor and gate that you can use to view and edit built-in
tent set
of controls
for both built-in anddinmico
plug-in dynamics
unificado
e controls
coerente
embutido
voc
pode usar
para ver e editar
parmetros
processadores
Stage
Racks
are used
with processamento
an FOH and
Rack,
and provide
all stage
tent
set of
forpara
both
built-in
plug-in
dynamics
The
following
components
must be
purchaseddos
separately:
Dynamics
parameters.
parameters.
processing
for the
targeted
channel. Seus
Its sixseis
dual-purpose
ro- Dynamics
ou
de
plug-ins
para
o
canal
selecionado.
codificadores
Dynamics
embutidos.
audio I/Ofor
forthe
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Updual-purpose
to two Stage Racks
processing
targeted
channel.
Its six
ro Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display
tary/switch
encoders,
three In/Out
switches,
three
Selecttrs
de can
dupla
rotativo/interruptor,
trs
switches
In/Out,
be funo
used
simultaneously,
supporting
upthree
to 96 Select
total
inputs.
tary/switch
encoders,
three In/Out
switches,
switches
Select,and
e medidores
reduo de ganho
dedicadosmede
switches,
dedicated de
high-resolution
gain reduction
switches, and dedicated high-resolution gain reduction meDVI supported.
alta resoluo
oferecem
um
modo
familiar
de
ajustar
e
visualizar
ters provide
a familiar way to adjust and view any type of DyAudio
I/Oa familiar
ters
provide
wayDynamics
to adjusteand
view
any type of Dyqualquer
tipo
de
parmetro
suas
configuraes.
namics parameters and their settings.
namics
parameters
andremotely
their settings.
48
inputs with
TodosAll
compatveis,
os selectable
plug-ins
dephantom
dinmicamap
mapeiam
controles
individually
power.
-compatible
Dynamics
plug-ins
their seus
controls
to the
All -compatible Dynamics plug-ins map their controls to the
para
os
switches
e
codificadores
apropriados
no
ACS.
appropriate
ACS encoders
andexpandable
switches. up to 48 analog or
8 analog output
channels;
appropriate ACS encoders and switches.
Attack
Release
Attack
Release
Comp Knee/
Comp Gain/
Ratio
Comp Gate
Knee/
Gain/Range
Hold Comp Gate
Gate
Range
Gate
Hold
enable primary and redundant (if
Threshold
Synchronization and Threshold

Control I/ORatio
Snake connectors to
System Components
Select
Dynamics In/Out
IncludedSelect
Components
Dynamics In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
Gain Reduction
All
VENUE
Gain
Reduction
meters
meters
Dynamics section and controls

Dynamics
section
and controls
Seo
e controles
Dynamics
LED indication of Dynamics Processing

LED indication
ofmount
Dynamics
Processing
Monitor
forDinmico
VGA
screen
not included)
Indicao
de Processamento
por (screen
LED
Dynamics
Dynamics
Graph
Graph
Digital Snake

Side-chain
Side-chain
directly
Comp/Lim
Comp/Lim
Optional Components
Exp/Gate
USB flash
Exp/Gate


Controle
Dynamics
na Tela
Software
Dynamics
controls
inDo
the
software screen
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
Dynamics controls in the software screen

Toajustar
adjust os
Dynamics
parameters
on-screen:
parmetros
Dynamics
na tela:
ToPara
adjust
Dynamics
parameters
on-screen:
(for
Talkback)
1 Select a channel on-screen.
Footswitches
(up
2)
1 1Select
a channel
on-screen.
Selecione
um canal
natotela.
2 Adjust
the on-screen
controlsexternal
as needed:
MIDI cables
(for connecting
MIDI devices)
2 Adjust the on-screen controls as needed:
The
LEDs beneath
each
Dynamics
encoder light green when
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
2 Ajuste
os cables
controles
na
tela conforme
necessrio:
BNC
For
the built-in
comp/lim
or exp/gate,
adjust the
The LEDs
beneath
each Dynamics
encoder
light green when
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
theparam For
theComp/Lim
built-in comp/lim
or exp/gate,
adjust
theosparamthe
Dynamics
section
is controlling
Comp/Lim
or plug-in
O LED
de
cadaPadcodificador
Dynamics
se acende
emdy-
Para
ou Exp/Gate
embutidos,
ajuste
parmetros
abaixo
VENUE
Mouse
eter on-screen.
the Dynamics
section
is controlling Comp/Lim or plug-in dyVENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
eter
verde namics
quandoparameters,
a seo Dynamics
Comp/Lim
ou
na on-screen.
tela.
and lightest
red controlando
to indicate Exp/Gate
mode.
VENUE
Profile
Guide
namics
parameters,
and
light red to indicate Exp/Gate mode.
25-pin
Forplug-ins,
plug-ins,
clickno
the
Insert
slotque
displaying
the
Dynamics
D-Subclique
cables
(for
connecting
to
GPI devices)
parmetros dos plug-ins, e em vermelho para indicar o modo Exp/
For
Para
slot
Insert
mostra
o
plug-in
e v
plug-ins,
click the Insert
slot
displaying
the Dynamics
plug-in
to go to the Plug-Ins page.
Gate. To
pgina
Plug-Ins.
plug-in to go to the Plug-Ins page.
adjust Dynamics parameters from the ACS:
To adjust
DynamicsDust
parameters
Protective
Cover from the ACS:
1
Target
a
channel
by pressing
its
Select switch.
Para
ajustara parmetros
pelo
ACS:
Para
resetar
parmetro
Dynamics
numatotela
para seu
valor
To reset
an um
on-screen
Dynamics
parameter
its default
value,
1 Target
channel
byDynamics
pressing its
Select
switch.
Rack(s)
(see next)
To VENUE
reset an on-screen
Dynamics
parameter toOptions
its default value,
Profile
Expansion
padro,
um following:
dos seguintes
procedimentos:
do onesiga
of the
2 Press the Dynamics Select switch for the corresponding pro- do one of the following:
12Selecione
canal pressionando
seu
Select.
Press theum
Dynamics
Select switch
forswitch
the corresponding
proThe
followingthe
options
Alt-click
control.
cess: Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables
Racks,
Alt-Clickthe
no control.
controle.

Alt-click
cess:
For the
press the
2 Pressione
o built-in
switch Compressor/Limiter,
Dynamics Select para
o Comp/Lim
processo
or
ForMix
the built-in
or (www.avid.com).
Each
Rack or Compressor/Limiter,
FOH Rack includes: press the Comp/Lim
correspondente:
website
ou
Select switch.
switch.
Right-click the control and choose Reset.
Select
System
Restore CD
Para
Compressou/Limiter,
pressionepress
o switch
Comp/Lim
For
the built-in Expander/Gate,
the Exp/Gate
Select Right-click the control and choose Reset.
Select.
For
the
built-in
Expander/Gate,
press
the
Exp/Gate
Select
Clique
com oOptions
boto direito e escolha Reset.
ECx
Ethernet Control Software Installer CD
Mix
Rack
switch.
switch.
To reset an entire Dynamics section to its default settings:
Para
Expander/Gate, pressione o switch Exp/Gate Select.
To
reset
an
entire
Dynamics section to its default settings:
Standalone
Software
Installer
CDthe Plug-In Select switch.
Forplug-in,
a Dynamics
plug-in,
press
Para
pressione
o switch
Select.
Para resetar uma seo Dynamics completa para seus valores
For um
a Dynamics
plug-in, press
thePlug-In
Plug-In
Select switch.
Hold
the
Default
switch and press the Comp/Lim or
I/O Options
padro:
Hold
the Default switch and press the Comp/Lim or
3 Adjust the appropriate Dynamics parameter.
Exp/Gate
Select
switches
in the ACS Dynamics section.
Adjust
the appropriate
Dynamics
33Ajuste
parmetro
Dynamics
apropriado.
oPlug-in
installer
discs
(if
any)parameter.
Exp/Gate
SelectMic/Line
switches Input
in theCard
ACS that
Dynamics
section.
AI16 Analog
provides
16 analog
Segure
or o switch Default e pressione o switch Comp/Lim Select ou
Two
(2)
IEC
power
cables
mic/line
level inputs
or
To
take
the
process
in/out
of
circuit:
Para
colocar
processamento
e fora do circuito:
Exp/Gate Select na seo ACS Dynamics.
To take
theoprocess
in/out ofdentro
circuit:
On-screen, right-click anywhere on the Compressor/Limiter
Press the appropriate In/Out switch in the ACS Dynamics
On-screen,
right-click
anywhere
on the Compressor/Limiter
AO16 Analog
Output Card
that provides
16 analog line level
Press the appropriate
In/Out
switch innathe
ACS ACS
Dynamics
or Expander/Gate sections (but not directly on an encoder or
Pressione
o
switch
In/Out
apropriado
seo
Dynamics
ou
section
(Comp/Lim,
Exp/Gate,
or
Plug-In).
or
Expander/Gate
sections
(but
not
directly on an encoder or
outputs
Each (Comp/Lim,
section
Exp/Gate,
or
Plug-In).
button) and choose Reset.
(Comp/Lim, Exp/Gate ou Plug-In).
button) and choose Reset.
Two
or (2) IEC power cables
Na
clique
o boto
direito
emthat
qualquer
lugar
da seo
or
XO16tela,
Analog
andcom
Digital
Output
Card
provides
8 analog
ou Press the Dyn In switch in the ACS Dynamics section to tog- Compressor/Limiter ou Expander/Gate (mas no diretamente sobre
Press the Dyn In switch in the ACS Dynamics section to togum codificador ou boto) e escolha Reset.
gle the currently targeted dynamics processor in or out.
gle
the
currently
targeted
dynamics
processor
in
or
out.
Pressione o switch Dyn In na seo ACS Dynamics para colocar ou
tirar o processador dinmico atualmente selecionado do circuito.
Chapter
16:
137
output compatible with Aviom Personal
Mixers
andDynamics
other
Chapter
16: Dynamics
137
Using the Dynamics Graph Display

Using
the
Dynamics
Graph
Display
Using
Using
the
the
Dynamics
Dynamics
Graph
Graph
Display
Display
Utilizando o display Dynamics Graph
In addition to the on-screen encoders and buttons, you can

In
InIn
addition
addition
to
toto
the
the
on-screen
on-screen
encoders
encoders
and
buttons,
buttons,
you
you
can
can
addition
the
on-screen
encoders
and
buttons,
you
can
adjust
Dynamics
parameters
using
the and
Dynamics
Graph.
Alm
dos
botes
e
codificadores
na
tela,
voc
pode
ajustar
adjust
adjust
Dynamics
Dynamics
parameters
parameters
using
using
the
the
Dynamics
Dynamics
Graph.
Graph.
adjust Dynamics parameters using the Dynamics Graph. os
parmetros Dynamics utilizando o Dynamics Graph.
To adjust Dynamics on-screen using the Graph display:

To
ToTo
adjust
adjust
Dynamics
Dynamics
on-screen
on-screenusing
using
the
the
Graph
Graph
display:
display:
adjust
Dynamics
using
the
Graph
display:
Para
ajustar
naon-screen
tela usando
display
Graph:
1 Select
aDynamics
channel on-screen,
and omake
sure
the Comp/LimSelect
on-screen,
and
make
sure
the
Comp/Lim11 1Select
Select
channel
achannel
channel
on-screen,
on-screen,
and
and
make
make
sure
sure
the
the
Comp/LimComp/Limiter
or
theaaExp/Gate
is
in circuit,
and
targeted
in
the
Dynamics
1 Selecione
uma
canal is
na
tela
e certifique-se
de que
othe
Comp/Limiter
iter
or
the
Exp/Gate
is
in
circuit,
and
targeted
in
Dynamics
iter
iter
or
or
the
the
Exp/Gate
Exp/Gate
in
is
in
circuit,
circuit,
and
and
targeted
targeted
in
in
the
the
Dynamics
Dynamics
Graph.
ouGraph.
oGraph.
Exp/Gate est no circuito e selecionado no Dynamics Graph.
Graph.
Drag to adjust
Drag
Drag
tototo
adjust
adjust
Drag
adjust
Dragging a handle in the Dynamics graph

Dragging
Dragging
aahandle
handle
ininin
the
the
Dynamics
Dynamics
graph
Dragging
aala
handle
the
Dynamics
graph
Arrastando
uma
no Dynamics
Graph graph
If the channel EQ is currently the target of the Dynamics

Se
othe
canal
EQ EQ
EQ
oisalvo
atual do
Dynamics
Graph,
clique em
IfIf
the
channel
isis
currently
the
target
the
Dynamics
If
the
channel
channel
EQ
currently
currently
the
the
target
target
ofofof
the
the
Dynamics
Dynamics
Graph,
click
anywhere
in the on-screen
Comp/Limiter
or
qualquer
lugar
das
sees
Comp/Limiter
ou
Exp/Gate
Graph,
click
anywhere
inin
the
on-screen
Comp/Limiter
ororna
Graph,
Graph,
click
click
anywhere
anywhere
in
the
the
on-screen
on-screen
Comp/Limiter
Comp/Limiter
or
Exp/Gate
sections
to
change
the
display.
tela para alterar o display.
Exp/Gate
sections
change
the
display.
Exp/Gate
Exp/Gate
sections
sections
tototo
change
change
the
the
display.
display.
2 Drag handles in the on-screen Dynamics Graph to adjust
2 Arraste
as
alas na
tela
Dynamics Dynamics
Graph paraGraph
ajustartoThreshold
Drag
handles
inin
the
on-screen
adjust
22 2Drag
Drag
handles
handles
in
the
the
on-screen
on-screen
Dynamics
Dynamics
Graph
Graph
toto
adjust
adjust
Threshold
and
Ratio.
e Ratio.
Threshold
and
Ratio.
Threshold
Threshold
and
and
Ratio.
Ratio.
The
DynamicsGraph
Graphno
doessuporta
not support
Fine adjust
mode us- o
O Dynamics
o modo
Fine utilizando
The
The
Dynamics
Dynamics
Graph
Graph
does
does
not
not
support
support
Fine
Fine
adjust
adjust
mode
mode
ususThe
Dynamics
Graph
does
not
support
Fine
adjust
mode
using
the
Fine
switch.
switch Fine.
ing
ing
the
the
Fine
Fine
switch.
switch.
ing the Fine switch.
Ajustando
Plug-ins
Dynamics
Adjusting
Dynamics
Plug-Ins
Adjusting
Dynamics
Plug-Ins
Adjusting
AdjustingDynamics
DynamicsPlug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Dynamics
plug-insmapeiam
map their seus
threshold,
ratio, attack,
release,
Plug-ins
Dynamics
controles
threshold,
ratio,
Dynamics
plug-ins
map
their
threshold,
ratio,
attack,
release,
Dynamics
Dynamics
plug-ins
plug-ins
map
their
their
threshold,
threshold,
ratio,
ratio,
attack,
release,
release,
attack,
release,
gain
emap
filter
para
os correspondentes
no
ACS.
gain,
and
filter
controls
to
the
corresponding
inattack,
the
ACS.
(Dygain,
and
filter
controls
to
the
corresponding
in
the
ACS.
(Dygain,
gain,
and
and
filter
filter
controls
controls
to
to
the
the
corresponding
corresponding
in
in
the
the
ACS.
ACS.
(Dy(Dy(Controles
Dynamics
em
rguas
de
entrada
podem
controlar
apenas
namics controls on input strips can only control built-in dynamics
controls
on
input
strips
can
only
control
built-in
dyprocessadores
dinmicos
embutidos.)
namics
namics
controls
controls
on
on
input
input
strips
strips
can
can
only
only
control
control
built-in
built-in
dydynamics processors.)
namics
processors.)
namics
namics
processors.)
processors.)
Semore
maisthan
de one
um Dynamics
plug-in Dynamics
inserido
canal,
If
plug-in isest
inserted
on a no
chanIf
more
than
one
Dynamics
plug-in
is
inserted
on
a
chanapenas
o
primeiro
Exp/Gate
ser
mapeado
para
o
If
If
more
more
than
than
one
one
Dynamics
Dynamics
plug-in
plug-in
is
is
inserted
inserted
on
on
a
chana
channel, only the first Exp/Gate will map to the ACS. You canACS.
Voc
pode
usar
osExp/Gate
codificadores
Output
no
modo
Insert
para
nel,
only
the
first
Exp/Gate
will
map
the
ACS.
You
can
nel,
nel,
only
only
the
the
first
first
Exp/Gate
will
will
map
map
toto
to
the
the
ACS.
ACS.
You
You
can
can
use
the
Output
encoders
in Insert
mode
to
control
any
addicontrolar
qualquer
plug-in
Dynamics
adicional
noany
canal.
use
the
Output
encoders
in
Insert
mode
to
control
any
addiuse
use
the
the
Output
Output
encoders
encoders
in
in
Insert
Insert
mode
mode
to
to
control
control
any
addiadditional Dynamics plug-ins on the channel.
tional
Dynamics
plug-ins
onon
the
channel.
tional
tional
Dynamics
Dynamics
plug-ins
plug-ins
on
the
the
channel.
channel.
Para ajustar um plug-in Dynamics pela console:
To adjust a Dynamics plug-in from the console:
ToTo
adjust
plug-in
from
the
console:
To
adjust
adjust
aaDynamics
aDynamics
Dynamics
plug-in
plug-in
from
from
the
the
console:
console:
1 1Marque
canal
com owith
plug-in
seu switch
Select.
Targetothe
channel
thepressionando
plug-in by pressing
the channel
11 Target
the
the
channel
channel
with
with
the
the
plug-in
plug-in
by
by
pressing
pressing
the
the
channel
channel
1Target
Target
the
channel
with
the
plug-in
by
pressing
the
channel
Select
switch.
Select
Select
switch.
switch.
2 Pressione
o switch Select do plug-in (localizado prximo dos
Select switch.
2 Press the
switch
next to
the ACS gain
medidores
deplug-in
reduoSelect
de ganho
do(located
ACS na seo
Dynamics),
e siga
Press
the
plug-in
Select
switch
(located
next
toto
the
ACS
gain
22dos
2
Press
Press
the
the
plug-in
plug-in
Select
switch
switch
(located
(located
next
next
to
the
the
ACS
ACS
gain
reduction
meters
inSelect
the
Dynamics
section),
then
do
one
ofgain
the
um
seguintes
procedimentos:
reduction
meters
in
the
Dynamics
section),
then
do
one
of
the
reduction
reduction
meters
meters
in
in
the
the
Dynamics
Dynamics
section),
section),
then
then
do
do
one
one
of
of
the
the
following:
Se o plug-in mapear corretamente, ajuste os parmetros
following:
following:
following:
pressionando
ou
girando
os
codificadores
correspondentes
If the plug-in maps correctly, adjust parameters by press-na
ACS
Dynamics.
seo
IfIfIf
the
the
plug-in
plug-in
maps
maps
correctly,
correctly,
adjust
adjust
parameters
parameters
by
by
presspressthe
plug-in
maps
correctly,
adjust
parameters
by
pressor
turning
the
corresponding
encoders
in the
ACS
Seing
o
plug-in
no
mapear
para
o
ACS,
pressione
o
switch
Insert
ing
ing
or
or
turning
turning
the
the
corresponding
corresponding
encoders
encoders
in
in
the
the
ACS
ACS
ing or turning
the corresponding encoders in the ACS
Dynamics
section.
Mode
na seo
Output. Utilize os codificadores Output para
Dynamics
Dynamics
section.
section.
Dynamics
section.
ajustar
If theparmetros;
plug-in does
not
to the
ACS, press
Insert
use
osmap
switches
Previous
Pagethe
e Next
Page
Mode
the
plug-in
does
not
map
toto
the
ACS,
press
the
Insert
para
IfIfIf
the
the
plug-in
plug-in
does
does
not
not
map
map
to
the
the
ACS,
ACS,
press
press
the
the
Insert
Insert
switch
in
the
Output
section.
Use
the
Output
enacessar
outros
parmetros.
Mode
switch
inin
the
Output
section.
Use
the
Output
enMode
Mode
switch
switch
in
the
the
Output
Output
section.
section.
Use
Use
the
the
Output
Output
enencoders
to
adjust
parameters;
use
the Previous
Page
and
coders
to
adjust
parameters;
use
the
Previous
Page
and
coders
coders
to
to
adjust
adjust
parameters;
parameters;
use
use
the
the
Previous
Previous
Page
Page
and
and
Next page switches to access other parameters.
Next
page
switches
toto
access
other
parameters.
Next
Next
page
page
switches
switches
to
access
access
other
other
parameters.
parameters.
138
138
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
138VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Guide
138
Guia VENUE Profile
Channel Modes Affecting Dynamics

Channel
Modes
Affecting
Dynamics
Channel
ChannelModes
ModesAffecting
AffectingDynamics
Dynamics
Modos
de Canal
Afetando
Dynamics
Both
the Channel
Config
settings for
Input Direct mode and
Both
the
Channel
Config
settings
for
Input
Direct
mode
and
Both
Both
the
the
Channel
Channel
Config
Config
settings
settings
for
for
Input
Input
Direct
Direct
mode
mode
and
and
Dyn Pre EQ affect operation of built-in
Dynamics.
Dyn
Pre
EQ
affect
operation
ofof
built-in
Dynamics.
Oa
ajustes
Channel
Config para
obuilt-in
modoDynamics.
Input
Direct e Dyn Pre EQ
Dyn
Dyn
Pre
Pre
EQ
EQ
affect
affect
operation
operation
of
built-in
Dynamics.
afetam a operao dos Dynamics embutidos.
Dyn Pre EQ
Dyn
Pre
EQ
Dyn
Dyn
Pre
Pre
EQ
EQ
Dyn Pre EQ
By default, built-in Dynamics processing occurs before

By
default,
built-in
Dynamics
processing
occurs
before
By
By
default,
default,
built-in
Dynamics
Dynamics
processing
processing
occurs
before
before
built-in
EQ built-in
processing
in the signal
chainoccurs
of
input
channels.
Por
padro,
oprocessing
processamento
Dynamics
embutido
ocorrre
antes do
built-in
EQ
processing
in
the
signal
chain
of
input
channels.
built-in
built-in
EQ
EQ
processing
in
in
the
the
signal
signal
chain
chain
of
of
input
input
channels.
channels.
This
can
be
changed
on
a
per-channel
basis
by
toggling
the
processamento
EQ
embutido
na
cadeia
de
sinal
dos
Input
Channels.
This
can
bebe
changed
on
basis
by
toggling
the
This
This
can
can
be
changed
changed
on
aaper-channel
aper-channel
per-channel
basis
basis
by
by
toggling
toggling
the
the
channels
EQon
setting.
Isso podeDyn
ser Pre
mudado
em uma base por canal alterando o ajuste
channels
Dyn
Pre
EQ
setting.
channels
channels
Dyn
Dyn
Pre
Pre
EQ
EQ
setting.
setting.
Dyn Pre EQ do canal.
To toggle the Dyn Pre EQ setting:

To
toggle
the
Dyn
Pre
EQ
setting:
To
To
toggle
toggle
the
the
Dyn
Pre
Pre
EQ
EQ
setting:
setting:
Para
alterar
oDyn
ajuste
Dyn
Pre
EQ:
1 Target the input channel by pressing its Select switch, and
1 1Target
Target
the
input
channel
pressing
itsits
Select
switch,
and
1
Target
the
the
input
input
channel
channel
by
by
pressing
pressing
its
Select
Select
switch,
switch,
and
and
make
sure the
page is by
displayed.
1 Marque
o Inputs
Input
Channel
pressionando seu switch Select e
make
sure
the
Inputs
page
displayed.
make
make
sure
sure
the
the
Inputs
Inputs
page
page
isisis
displayed.
displayed.
dePre
queEQ
a pgina
sendo Config
exibida.section
2 certifique-se
Click the Dyn
buttonInputs
in theest
(channel)
2 2Click
Click
the
Dyn
Pre
EQ
button
in
the
(channel)
Config
section
2
Click
the
the
Dyn
Dyn
Pre
Pre
EQ
EQ
button
button
in
in
the
the
(channel)
(channel)
Config
Config
section
section
in the upper right corner of the screen. When enabled,
the
Dyn
2in
Clique
no right
boto
Dyn
Pre
EQ
na
seo
(Channel)
Config
no
canto
in
the
upper
right
corner
of
the
screen.
When
enabled,
the
Dyn
in
the
the
upper
upper
right
corner
corner
of
of
the
the
screen.
screen.
When
When
enabled,
enabled,
the
the
Dyn
Dyn
Pre EQ LED lights.
direito
superior
da
tela.
Quando
habilitado
o
LED
Dyn
Pre
EQ
se
Pre
EQ
LED
lights.
Pre
Pre
EQ
EQ
LED
LED
lights.
lights.
acende.
Channel Config controls in the Inputs page

Channel
Channel
Config
Config
controls
controls
ininin
the
the
Inputs
Inputs
page
page
Channel
Config
controls
the
Inputs
page
Controles
Channel Mode
Config na pgina Inputs
Input
Direct
Input
Direct
Mode
Input
Input
Direct
Direct
Mode
Mode
Input
ModoDirect
Input mode
Direct lets you completely bypass any and all
Input
Input
Direct
Direct
mode
mode
lets
lets
you
you
completely
completely
bypass
any
any
and
and
all
all
Input
Direct
mode
lets
you
completely
bypass
any
and
all
built-in
dynamics
and
EQ,
plug-ins
and bypass
inserts
processing
on
built-in
built-in
dynamics
dynamics
and
and
EQ,
EQ,
plug-ins
plug-ins
and
and
inserts
inserts
processing
processing
on
on
dynamics
and
EQ, plug-ins
inserts processing
on e
Obuilt-in
modo
Input
Direct
permite
ignorarand
completamente
qualquer
input
channels
and
FX
returns.
input
input
channels
channels
and
and
FX
FX
returns.
returns.
inputos
channels
and FX returns.
todos
processamentos
de dinmica e EQ embutidos, plug-ins e
inserts em Input Channels e FX Returns.
To toggle Input Direct model:

To
ToTo
toggle
toggle
Input
Input
Direct
Direct
model:
model:
toggle
Input
Direct
model:
1 Para
Target
the oinput
by pressing its Select switch, and
alterar
modochannel
Input Direct:
Target
the
input
channel
by
pressing
itsits
Select
switch,
and
11 1Target
Target
the
input
input
channel
channel
by
pressing
pressing
its
Select
Select
switch,
switch,
and
and
make
surethe
the
Inputs
page isby
displayed.
make
sure
the
Inputs
page
displayed.
make
sure
sure
the
Inputs
Inputs
page
page
isisis
displayed.
displayed.
1make
Marque
othe
Input
Channel
pressionando
seu switch Select, e
2 certifique-se
Click the Input
Direct
buttonInputs
in theest
(channel)
de que
a pgina
sendo Config
exibida.section
Click
the
Input
Direct
button
in
the
(channel)
Config
section
22 2
Click
Click
the
the
Input
Input
Direct
Direct
button
button
in
the
the
(channel)
(channel)
Config
Config
section
section
in
the
upper
right
corner
of thein
screen.
When enabled,
the
Inin
the
upper
right
corner
of
the
screen.
When
enabled,
In-Inin
in
the
the
upper
upper
right
right
corner
corner
of
of
the
the
screen.
screen.
When
When
enabled,
enabled,
the
the
Input
Direct LED
lights.
2 Clique
no boto
Input Direct na seo (Channel) Configthe
no
canto
put
Direct
LED
lights.
put
put
Direct
Direct
LED
LED
lights.
lights.
direito superior da tela. Quando habilitado o LED Input Direct LED
se acende.
Dynamics Settings and Presets

Ajustes
e Presets Dynamics
Dynamics
Settings
Dynamics
Settings and
and Presets
Presets
Built-in Dynamics settings can be copied and pasted between
2 Click the Comp/Lim or Exp/Gate Presets icon on-screen.

2 Click the Comp/Lim or Exp/Gate Presets icon on-screen.
2 Click
Comp/Lim
or Exp/Gate
icon
on-screen.
2 Clique
nothe
cone
Preset Comp/Lim
ou Presets
Exp/Gate
Presets
na tela.
Presets Comp/Lim
Presets Comp/Lim
Presets Comp/Lim
Built-in
Dynamics
settings
can
be
copied
and
between
Ajustes
de Settings
Dynamics
embutidos
podem
ser copiados
e colados
channels.
can
also
be stored,
and pasted
transferred
Built-in
Dynamics
settings
can
beloaded,
copied
and
pasted
between
channels.
Settings
can
also
be
stored,
loaded,
and
transferred
entre
canais.
Ajustes
tambm
podem
ser
salvos,
carregados
e
as dynamics
Presets.
channels.
Settings can also be stored, loaded, and transferred
transferidos
como Presets.
as dynamics
Presets.
as dynamics Presets.
Copying
andFeatures
Pasting
Dynamics
Copiando
Ajustes Dynamics
Stagee Colando
Rack
Settings
Copying
and
Pasting
Dynamics
Copying and Pasting Dynamics Settings
Settings
Additional Required
Presets Exp/Gate
Presets Exp/Gate
ComponentsPresets Exp/Gate
Para
copiar
e colar
dynamics:
Racks
areajustes
used
with
ToStage
copy
and
paste
dynamics
settings:

To
copy
paste
dynamics
settings:
audio
I/O and
for VENUE
Profile systems.
Built-in dynamics Presets buttons
To
copy
and
paste
dynamics
settings:
Right-click anywhere in the Comp/Lim or Exp/Gate areas of
1 1Clique
com
o simultaneously,
boto direito nassupporting
res Comp/Lim
ou
Exp/Gate
na
Built-in dynamics Presets buttons
can
used
up to
96
total
inputs.
Built-in
dynamics
Presets
buttons
1 be
Right-click
anywhere
in
the
Comp/Lim
or
Exp/Gate
areas
of
Botes
Preset
de select
Dynamics
Embutidos
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA and
the
on-screen
Dynamics
section
and
choose
Copy
Comp/Lim
3
If
necessary,
the
appropriate
Presets
folder by clicking
Right-click
anywhere
in the
Comp/Lim
or Exp/Gate
seo1Dynamics
e escolha
Copy
Comp/Lim
Settings
ou Copyareas
Exp/of
the
on-screen
Dynamics
section
and
choose
Copy
Comp/Lim
3
If
necessary,
select
the
appropriate
Presets
folder
by clicking
DVI
supported.
Settings,
or
Copy
Exp/Gate
Settings.
and
selecting
it
from
the
Folder
selector.
Gate Settings.
the on-screen Dynamics section and choose Copy Comp/Lim
3 If necessary, select the appropriate Presets folder by clicking
Audio
I/O or Copy Exp/Gate Settings.
3 Se
necessrio,
selecione
aFolder
pastaselector.
Presets apropriada clicando e
Settings,
and
selecting
it
from
the
Settings, or Copy Exp/Gate Settings.
it from
the Folder selector.
and
USB selecting
keyboard
trackball/mouse
selecionando-a
noand
seletor
Folder.
Presets Folder selector

Copying dynamics settings
Copying dynamics settings
Copying
2 Go
to thedynamics
channelsettings
where you want to paste the settings.
Copiando ajustes Dynamics
System Components
2 V ao
deseja colar
esses
2 canal
Go toonde
the channel
where
youajustes.
want to paste the settings.
2 Go to the channel where you want to paste the settings.

3 Right-click in the Comp/Lim or Exp/Gate areas of the de3channels
Right-click
in
the
or
Exp/Gate
areas
of
the
Included
Components
3 sired
Clique
com o boto
nas reassection
ou
Exp/Gate
do
on-screen
Dynamics
and choose
3 Right-click
in direito
the Comp/Lim
Comp/Lim
orComp/Lim
Exp/Gate
areas
ofPaste
the dede-
sired
channels
on-screen
Dynamics
section
and
choose
Paste
canal
desejado
na seo
Dynamics
na tela
e escolha
Paste
Comp/
Comp/Lim
Settings
or
Paste
Exp/Gate
Settings.
sired
channels
on-screen
Dynamics
and
choose
Paste
VENUE
systems include
thesection
following:
LimAll
Settings
ouProfile
Paste
Exp/Gate
Settings.
Comp/Lim
Settings
or Paste
Exp/Gate Settings.
Comp/Lim Settings or Paste Exp/Gate Settings.
To copy and paste all of a channels built-in Dynamics settings:
Para copiar
e colar
todos
os
ajustes
Dynamics
de um
canal: settings:
Two
(2) IEC
power
cables
To
paste
all
built-in
Dynamics
To copy
copy and
and
paste
all of
of a
a channels
channels
built-in
settings:
1 Right-click
in the
on-screen
Dynamics
GraphDynamics
and choose
Monitor mount
for
VGA screen
(screenGraph
not included)
1Dynamics
Right-click
in
the
on-screen
Dynamics
and
choose
1 Copy
Clique
com
o
boto
direito
no
Dynamics
Graph
na
tela
e
escolha
Settings.
1 Right-click in the on-screen Dynamics Graph and choose
Trackball
mount
Copy
Dynamics
Settings.
Copy Dynamics
Settings.
Copy Dynamics Settings.
2 Select the channel where you want to paste the settings.
VENUE Mouse Pad
2 Select the channel where you want to paste the settings.
2 3Selecione
o canal
onde
que
colaryou
esses
ajustes.
2 Select
the the
channel
where
want
to paste the settings.
Right-click
on-screen
VENUEinProfile
Guide Dynamics Graph of the new
3 Right-click
in
on-screen
of
new
channel
and choose
Paste
DynamicsDynamics
Settings. Graph
3 Right-click
in the
the
on-screen
Dynamics
Graph
of the
the
newe
Two
console
lights
3 Clique
com (2)
o boto
direito
no Dynamics
Graph
do novo
canal
channel
and
choose
Paste
Dynamics
Settings.
channel
and choose
Paste Dynamics Settings.
escolha
Dynamics
Paste
Protective
Dust Settings.
Cover
Presets
for(see
Built-In
Rack(s)
next) Dynamics
Presets
for
Built-In Dynamics
Dynamics
You can store and load settings as presets for built-in and
PresetsPresets
Para Dynamics
for Embutidos
Built-In


Optional Components
Previewing a preset in the Presets window
Previewing a preset in the Presets window
apreset
preset
the Presets
Presets window
na in
janela
4 Visualizando
DoPreviewing
one ofum
the
following:
Do
one
the
following:
4
preview
existing
preset,
click its name
in the
Presets
4ToDo
one of
ofan
the
following:
Dynamic
or
condenser
microphone
and XLR
mic
cable
4 Siga um
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
To
preview
existing
preset, click
its
in the
Presets
(for
ToTalkback)
preview an
an
existing
clickclique
its name
name
thenome
Presets
window.
Para
visualizar
um
presetpreset,
existente,
em in
seu
na
window.
window.
To
load
the currently
preset, press Enter or click
Footswitches
(up toselected
2)
janela
Presets.
To
load
selected
preset,
press
Enter
or
Close
boxthe
(X)
in
the Presets
window
title
bar.
the
Para
ocurrently
preset
selecionado,
pressione
Enter
clique
MIDI
Tocarregar
load
the
currently
selected
preset,
press
Enter ou
or click
click
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
the
Close
box
(X)
in
the
Presets
window
title
bar.
na
caixa
Close
(X)
na
barra
de
ttulo
da
janela
Presets.
ToBNC
save
the
current
dynamics
settings
as a between
new
thecables
Close
box (X)
in the Presets
titlepreset,
bar.the
(for
connecting
Wordwindow
clock
click
Para
salvar
osenter
ajustes
dynamics
atuais
como
um novo
preset,
To
save
the
current
dynamics
settings
as
New
and
a name
for digital
the
preset
file.
VENUE
To
save
the
current
dynamics
settings
as a
a new
new preset,
preset,
system
and
external
devices)
clique
New
e digite
um nome
para
othe
arquivo
preset.
click
New
and
enter
a
name
for
preset
file.
click
New
and
enter
a name
the
preset
file.
cancel
without
changing
settings,
click
Cancel.
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
to
GPI
devices)
ToPara
cancelar
sem
alteraes
defor
ajuste,
clique
Cancel.
To
To cancel
cancel without
without changing
changing settings,
settings, click
click Cancel.
Cancel.
Side-Chain
Keys Expansion
and FiltersOptions
VENUE Profile
Side-Chain
Keys Keys
e Filters
Side-Chain
and
Side-Chain
Keys
and Filters
Filters
The built-in Comp/Limiter and Exp/Gate support side-chain
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
Cables
You
can
store
and
load
as
presets
for
built-in
The
built-in
Comp/Limiter
and
Exp/Gate
support
side-chain
Os
Comp/Limiter
eVENUE
Exp/Gate
embutidos
suportam
side-chain.
Voc
pode
armazenar
e carregar
configuraes
presetsand
para triggering.
plug-in
from
the
or on-screen.
Youdynamics
can
store processors
and
load settings
settings
as console
presetscomo
for
built-in
and
The
built-in
Comp/Limiter
and and
Exp/Gate
support
side-chain
For
details
on all
systems
options,
visit the
Avid
processadores
dinmicos
embutidos
ou
em
plug-ins
pela
console
plug-in
dynamics
processors
from
the
console
or
on-screen.
triggering.
plug-in
processors
from the console or on-screen.
triggering.
Each
Mix dynamics
Rack or FOH
Rack includes:
website
(www.avid.com).
Key In/Out
ouTona
tela.or load a preset:
save
Key In/Out
Key
In/Out
OMix
switch
Key InOptions
alterna o sinal entre dentro e fora do circuito para o
KeyRack
In/Out
1 Adjust dynamics settings on a channel (if saving a preset), or The Key In switch toggles the key signal in or out of circuit for
System Restore CD
To save or load a preset:
To save
or
load settings
aum
preset:
1 Adjust
dynamics
onSoftware
a channelInstaller
(if saving
a preset), or
Para
salvar
ou Ethernet
carregar
preset:
ECx
Control
CD
ou Exp/Gate embutidos.
select
input
channel
(to load
a preset).
1 an
Adjust
dynamics
settings
on
a channel
(if saving a preset), or Comp/Lim
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
The
In
the
the built-in
or Exp/Gate.
The Key
KeyComp/Lim
In switch
switch toggles
toggles
the key
key signal
signal in
in or
or out
out of
of circuit
circuit for
for
I/O
Options
the
built-in
Comp/Lim
or
Exp/Gate.
Para
sinal side-chain
dentro e fora do circuito, siga um
thealternar
built-ino Comp/Lim
or Exp/Gate.
Todos
toggle
the side-chain
key
signal
in or
outprovides
of circuit,
one of
seguintes
procedimentos:
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
that
16doanalog
To
toggle
the
side-chain
key
signal
in
or
out
of
circuit,
do
the following:
To
toggle
the
side-chain
key
signal
in
or
out
of
circuit,
do one
one of
of
the
following:
Clique
no
boto
Key
In
nos
controles
side-chain
na
seo
Dynamics
the
following:
Click
the
Key
In
button
in
the
side-chain
controls
of
the
na
tela.Analog
AO16
Output
Card thatthe
provides 16 analog
line level
Click
the
button
on-screen
Dynamics
Click
the Key
Key In
Insection.
button in
in the side-chain
side-chain controls
controls of
of the
the
outputs
on-screen
Dynamics
section.
on-screen
Dynamics
section.
Quando
o Key
In do Comp/Limiter
est ligado, ele utiliza seu
When the Comp/Limiter key is in, it uses its own source chan Two (2) IEC power cables
prprio
canal
fonte
(Self) como
sinal
key.
Quando
Key
In
to Exp/
Analog
and
Digital
Output
Card
that
provides
8
analog
When
key
is
in,
its
source
nelXO16
(Self)
asthe
theComp/Limiter
key source
signal.
the Exp/Gate
key
ischanWhen
the
Comp/Limiter
key
isWhen
in, it
it uses
uses
its own
own
source
chanGate
est
ligado,
ele
pode
ser
autochaveado
ou
utilizar
outro
canal
line
level
and 8use
AES
digital
outputs.
(Self)
as
signal.
the
in,disponvel.
itnel
can
beoutputs,
self-keyed
any
otherWhen
available
channel. key
nel
(Self)
as the
the key
keyorsource
source
signal.
When
the Exp/Gate
Exp/Gate
key is
is
in,
it
can
be
self-keyed
or
use
any
other
available
channel.
in,
it
can
be
self-keyed
or
use
any
other
available
channel.
Mixers16:
andDynamics
other 139
select
input
channel
(to
load
preset).
1 Ajuste
as an
configuraes
dynamics
emaaum
canal (se salvando um
select
an
input
channel
(to storing
load
preset).
ou
iLok
USB
Smart
Key (for
plug-in
authorizations)
preset),
selecione
um Input
Channel (para
carregar
um preset).
Key Assign
Key
Key
Assign
Assign
The
on-screen
Key Assign selectors lets you select the
Key
Assign
Atribuio de Key
side-chain
for
atela
gatepermite
(compressors
are always
keyed
by
O The
selector
Keysource
Assign
naAssign
selecionar
aselect
fonte
side-chain
The
on-screen
on-screen
KeyKey
Assign
selectors
selectors
letslets
youyou
select
thethe
The
on-screen
Keyand
Assign
selectors
lets
youSource
select
thesinal isdo
the
channel
signal)
itsso
pickoff.
The
Key
selector
para
um
gate
(compressores
sempre
chaveados
pelo
side-chain
side-chain
source
source
forfor
a gate
a gate
(compressors
(compressors
areare
always
always
keyed
keyed
by by
side-chain
source
for a gate
(compressors
are
always
keyed by
canal)
e seu ponto
de
alimentao.
O selector Key
Source
oferecido
provided
in the
Exp/Gate
controls.
thethe
channel
channel
signal)
signal)
and
and
its its
pickoff.
pickoff.
TheThe
KeyKey
Source
Source
selector
selector
is is
the channel
signal) and its pickoff. The Key Source selector is
nos controles
Exp/Gate.
provided
provided
in the
in the
Exp/Gate
Exp/Gate
controls.
controls.
provided
Key
Sourcesin the Exp/Gate controls.
Fontes Key
Key
Key
Sources
Sources
The
is self-keyed. You can use any of the
KeyCompressor/Limiter
Sources
O Compressor/Limiter
autochaveado.
Voc pode usar qualquer
following as the keysource
for the Exp/Gate:
The
The
Compressor/Limiter
Compressor/Limiter
is self-keyed.
isKey
self-keyed.
You
You
cancan
useuse
anyany
of the
of the
uma
das
seguintes
fontes como
do Exp/Gate:
The
Compressor/Limiter
is
self-keyed.
You can use any of the
Self as the
following
following
as
the
key
key
source
source
for
for
the
the
Exp/Gate:
Exp/Gate:
following
Ele prprioas the key source for the Exp/Gate:
Self
Input
orFX
FXReturn
Return)
Qualque
Input (Channel
Channel ou
Any
Self
Self
Qualquer
entrada
de
hardware
Any
Any
hardware
input
Any
Input
Input
(Channel
(Channel
or or
FXFX
Return)
Return)
Any Input (Channel or FX Return)
Any
Any
hardware
hardware
input
input
You
also
specify
the
pickoff
sourcedeforalimentao
the key signal
Voc tambm
pode
especificar
o ponto
da for
fonte
can
Any
hardware
input
para
o sinal
Key de Input Channels.
input
channels.
You
You
cancan
also
also
specify
specify
thethe
pickoff
pickoff
source
source
forfor
thethe
keykey
signal
signal
forfor
You can also specify the pickoff source for the key signal for
input
input
channels.
channels.
Para
selecionar
sinal
Key para
o Gate
tela:
Toinput
selectchannels.
theokey
signal
for the
Gatenaon-screen:
1 To
Select
an
Input
Channel.
To
select
select
the
the
key
key
signal
signal
for for
thethe
Gate
Gate
on-screen:
on-screen:
1 Selecione
um
Input
To select
the
key Channel.
signal for the Gate on-screen:
12 Select
1
Select
an an
Input
Input
Channel.
Channel.
Click
the
Side-Chain
tab in the Dynamics section to se1 Select
anE/G
Input
Channel.
2 Clique
na aba
E/G
Side-Chain
na seo Dynamics para selecionar
To engage Key Listen:
Para habilitar o Key Listen:
Click
the
Listen
button in the on-screen Exp/Gate controls.
To
To
engage
engage
Key
Key
Listen:
Listen:
To engage Key Listen:
Click
Clique
Click
the
the
Listen
Listen
button
button
in the
incontroles
the
on-screen
on-screen
Exp/Gate
Exp/Gate
controls.
controls.
no
boto
Listen
nos
Exp/Gate
na tela.
Click the Key
Listen
button in the on-screen Exp/Gate controls.
To disengage
Listen:
desabilitar
o
KeyListen:
Listen:
Para
Click
ListenKey
again.
The
Solo bus reverts to its previous signal.
To
To
disengage
disengage
Key
Listen:
To disengage Key Listen:
You can press Solo Clear to turn off any engaged Key Listen.
Click
Click
Listen
Listen
again.
again.
TheThe
Solo
Solo
busbus
reverts
reverts
tose
its
to its
previous
previous
signal.
signal.
Clique
Listen
bus
Solo
reverte
o sinal
Click
Thetime
SoloOto
bus
reverts
to its
previous
signal.
Press
SoloListen
Clearagain.
anovamente.
second
clear
channel
solos,para
if any.
You
You
cancan
press
press
Solo
Solo
Clear
Clear
to turn
to turn
offClear
off
anyany
engaged
engaged
KeyKey
Listen.
Listen.Key
anterior.
Voc
pode
pressionar
Solo
para
desligar
qualquer
You can press Solo Clear to turn off any engaged Key Listen.
Press
Press
Solo
Solo
Clear
Clear
a Pressione
second
a second
time
time
toClear
clear
to clear
channel
channel
solos,
solos,
any.
if any.
Listen
habilitado.
Solo
uma
segunda
vezifpara
limpar
Press Solo Clear a second time to clear channel solos, if any.
canais em Solo,Filters
se existentes.
Side-Chain
Side-Chain
Side-Chain
Filters
Filters
Both
the
Comp/Limiter
and Exp/Gate side-chains provide two
FIltros
Side-Chain
Side-Chain
Filters
bands of EQ to band-limit the key signal.

Both
Both
thethe
Comp/Limiter
Comp/Limiter
and
and
Exp/Gate
Exp/Gate
side-chains
side-chains
provide
provide
twotwo
Bothchains
the Comp/Limiter
and Exp/Gate
side-chains
provide
Side
de Comp/Limiter
e Exp/Gate
oferecem
EQ detwo
duas
bands
bands
of EQ
of EQ
to band-limit
to band-limit
thethe
keykey
signal.
signal.
bandas
para
equalizar
o
sinal
key.
bands
of
EQ
to
band-limit
the
key
signal.
To enable a side-chain filter on-screen:
1Para
Click
the
C/L
Side-Chain
or
E/G
Side-Chain
tab in the DynamTo
To
enable
enable
a side-chain
a um
side-chain
filter
on-screen:
on-screen:
habilitar
filtrofilter
side-chain
na
tela:
To enable
a side-chain
filter on-screen:
ics section to select the desired processor.
1 Click
1 Click
thethe
C/LC/L
Side-Chain
Side-Chain
or E/G
or E/G
Side-Chain
Side-Chain
tabtab
in the
in the
DynamDynamClick the
or E/G Side-Chain
tab in the Dynam11 Clique
na C/L
abaSide-Chain
C/L Side-Chain
ou E/G Side-Chain
na seo
ics
section
section
toLPF
select
to select
thethe
desired
desired
processor.
processor.
2 ics
Click
the
or
HPF
side-chain
filter
In
buttons.
ics section
to select
the desired
processor.
Dynamics
para
selecionar
o processador
desejado.
2 Click
2 Click
thethe
LPFLPF
or HPF
or HPF
side-chain
side-chain
filter
filter
In buttons.
In buttons.
2 Click the LPF or HPF side-chain filter In buttons.
2 Clique os botes LPF

ou HPF side-chain filter In.
LPF frequency
LPF in/out
LPF LPF
frequency
frequency
HPF
frequency
frequency
LPFLPF
LPF
in/out
in/out
HPF
in/out
LPF in/out
HPF
frequency
HPF
frequency
Key Listen
HPF
frequency
HPF
in/out
KeyHPF
In in/out
HPF in/out
Listen
Key Key
Listen
KeyKey
In Listen
Key
In
Key In
lect the gate.

2 Click the E/G Side-Chain tab in the Dynamics section to select
thethe
gate.
gate.
3 lect
Click
the
Key Source selector and choose an available chanlect
the
gate.
3 nel
Clique
no
or bus. selector Key Source e escolha um canal ou bus
3 Click
3 Click
thethe
KeyKey
Source
Source
selector
selector
and
and
choose
choose
an an
available
available
chanchandisponvel.
3 Click the Key Source selector and choose an available channelnel
or or
bus.
bus.
nel or bus.
o gate.
2 Click
2 Click
thethe
E/GE/G
Side-Chain
Side-Chain
tabtab
in the
in the
Dynamics
Dynamics
section
section
to seto se-
Side-Chain controls in the software screen (Exp/Gate shown)

Side-Chain
Side-Chain
controls
in the
in EQ:
the
software
software
screen
screen
(Exp/Gate
(Exp/Gate
shown)
shown)
ToSide-Chain
adjust controls
a side-chain
controls in the
software screen (Exp/Gate shown)
Controles Side-Chain na tela do software (Exp/Gate)
Choosing a Key Source
Escolhendo uma Fonte Key
Choosing
apickoff
Key
Source
Source
ToChoosing
selecta aKey
point for the key source signal:
a Key Source
ParaChoosing
selecionar
um ponto de alimentao para o sinal de fonte
Click
the
Source
Pickoff
and
choose
a pickoff source
To
To
select
select
a pickoff
a
pickoff
point
point
forselector
for
thethe
keykey
source
source
signal:
signal:
Key:
To select a pickoff point for the key source signal:
for the selected key signal:

Click
Click
thethe
Source
Source
Pickoff
Pickoff
selector
selector
and
and
choose
choose
a pickoff
a pickoff
source
source
Click
Source Pickoff
choose a um
pickoff
source
Clique
notheselector
Sourceselector
Pickoffand
e escolha
ponto
de
forfor
thethe
selected
selected
keykey
signal:
signal:
alimentao
da fontekey
para
o sinal chave selecionado:
for the selected
signal:
Key Listen
Key
Listen
Key
Key
Listen
Listen
The
Key
Listen button toggles the key onto the Solo (Cue) bus,
Key
Listen
Turn
the
HPF
or LPF
encoder
to adjust the frequency.
To
To
adjust
adjust
a side-chain
a side-chain
EQ:
EQ:
To adjust a side-chain EQ:
On-screen,
the
LEDs
around
the
encoder light, and the current
Ajustar
a HPF
EQorde
Para
Turn
Turn
thethe
HPF
LPF
orside-chain:
LPF
encoder
encoder
to adjust
to adjust
thethe
frequency.
frequency.
Turn the
HPFisor
LPF encoder
to adjust the frequency.
frequency
value
displayed
on-screen.
On-screen,
On-screen,
thethe
LEDs
LEDs
around
around
thethe
encoder
encoder
light,
light,
and
and
thethe
current
current
the LEDs
around
thepara
encoder
light,
and the current
On-screen,
Gire o side-chain
codificador
ou LPF
ajustar
a frequencia.
Na tela,
Dynamics
EQ
defaults
and
ranges
frequency
frequency
value
value
is displayed
is HPF
displayed
on-screen.
on-screen.
valuedo
is codificador
displayed on-screen.
osfrequency
LEDs ao redor
se acendem, e o valor da frequncia
Filter
Default
Minimum
Dynamics
Dynamics
side-chain
side-chain
EQ na
EQ
defaults
defaults
andand
ranges
ranges
atual
apresentado
tela.
Dynamics
side-chain EQ
defaults
and ranges
Filter
Default
Minimum
Filter
HPF
10Default
Hz, Off
10Minimum
Hz
Filter
Default
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
20Maximum
kHz
Maximum
HPF
LPFHPF
HPF
10
Hz,
Off
Hz,
Off
2010
kHz,
Off
10 Hz, Off
10
Hz
1010
HzHz
10 Hz
20
kHz
2020
kHzkHz
20 kHz
LPFLPF
LPF
20 20
kHz,
Off Off
kHz,
20 kHz, Off
10 10
Hz Hz
10 Hz
20 20
kHzkHz
20 kHz
Side-Chain Limitations
Side-Chain
Side-Chain
Limitations
Limitations
Up
to 32 side-chain
Key signals can be routed from the followSide-Chain
Limitations
Limitaes de Side-Chain
replacing any currently soloed channel.
O The
boto
Key
Listen
altera
a Key
para
o bus
Solo
(Cue),
substituindo
The
Key
Key
Listen
Listen
button
button
toggles
toggles
thethe
key
key
onto
onto
the
the
Solo
Solo
(Cue)
(Cue)
bus,
bus, ing sources:
The Key Listen button toggles the key onto the Solo (Cue) bus, Up
Up
to 32
to 32
side-chain
side-chain
KeyKey
signals
signals
cancan
be be
routed
routed
from
from
thethe
followfollowqualquer
canal any
em
Solo.
Up
to 32 side-chain
Key
signals
can be routed from the followreplacing
replacing
currently
currently
soloed
soloed
channel.
sources:
Channel
fader
pickoff
Key
Listenany
always
overrides
thechannel.
Solo
bus (previously soloed
At
32
sinais pre/post
chave side-chain
podem ser roteados das seguintes
replacing
any currently
soloed
channel.
ing
ing
sources:
ing sources:
channels are suppressed until Key Listen is cleared). Pressing
fontes:
Return
pre/post-fader
pickoff
Channel
FXChannel
pre/post
pre/post
fader
fader
pickoff
pickoff
KeyListen
Key
Listen
Listen
always
always
overrides
overrides
theothe
Solo
Solo
bus
bus
(previously
(previously
soloed
soloed
Key
sempre
sobrescreve
bus
Solo
(canais
previamente
Channel
Channel
pre/post fader
pickoff
Keyon
Listen
always
overrides
the
Solo
busadds
(previously
soloed

pr/ps-fader
pickoff
Solo
other
channels
while
Key
Listen
them
but
they
colocados
em
Solo
so suprimidos
at
que
Key Listen
seja
Channel
Insert
return
channels
channels
areare
suppressed
suppressed
until
until
KeyKey
Listen
Listen
is
cleared).
is cleared).
Pressing
Pressing
FXFX
Return
Return
pre/post-fader
pre/post-fader
pickoff
pickoff
FX
Return
pr/ps-fader
pickoff
channels
are suppressed until Key Listen is cleared). Pressing
FX
Return
pre/post-fader
pickoff
remain
suppressed.
desativado).
Pressionar
Solo
em
outros
canais
enquanto
Key
Listen
Solo
Solo
onon
other
other
channels
channels
while
while
KeyKey
Listen
Listen
adds
adds
them
them
but
but
they
they

Retorno
Channel
Insert
Channel
Channel
Insert
Insert
return
return
Solo
on other
channels
while
Listen adds
them but they
There
no limits
to the
number of side-chain Key signals
est
acionado
os adiciona
mas
elesKey
continuam
suprimidos.
are
Channel
Insert
return
remain
remain
suppressed.
suppressed.
Key
Listensuppressed.
is also exclusive to itself; pressing Key Listen on a
remain
different
processor
or channel
replaces
the pressionar
previous Key
Key
Listen
tambm
exclusive
exclusivo
ele
mesmo;
KeyListen
Listen
Key
Key
Listen
Listen
is also
is also
exclusive
toa itself;
to
itself;
pressing
pressing
KeyKey
Listen
Listen
on
on
a a
Keyprocessador
Listen
also
exclusive
to itself;
pressing
Key Listen
on a
with
the
newisKey
Listen.
emdifferent
um
ou
canal
diferente
substitui
o
antigo
Key
Listen
different
processor
processor
or channel
or channel
replaces
replaces
thethe
previous
previous
Key
Key
Listen
Listen
different
processor
or channel replaces the previous Key Listen
pelo
novo
Key
Listen.
with
with
the
the
new
new
KeyKey
Listen.
Listen. plug-in does not route the signal
Key
Listen
a Dynamics
with
the
new on
Key
Listen.
to the
Soloem
bus,um
butplug-in
to theDynamics
plug-in output.
Use caution.
Key
Listen
no
othe
sinal
para
Key
Key
Listen
Listen
on on
a Dynamics
a Dynamics
plug-in
plug-in
does
does
notroteia
not
route
route
the
signal
signalo
Key
Listen
onpara
a Dynamics
plug-in
does
notprecauo.
route the signal
bus
Solo,
mas
a sada do
plug-in.
Use
to the
to the
Solo
Solo
bus,
bus,
butbut
to the
to the
plug-in
plug-in
output.
output.
UseUse
caution.
caution.
to the Solo bus, but to the plug-in output. Use caution.
140140VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
140 Guia
VENUE
ProfileProfile
Guide
140
VENUE
that can be routed from hardware inputs, Input Channel or FX

There
There
areare
nono
limits
limits
to the
to
the
number
number
of canais
side-chain
of side-chain
KeyKey
signals
signals
No
h
limites
para
o the
nmero
de
chave
side-chain
There
are
no limits
to
number
of side-chain
Key
signals que
Return
top-of-channel
pickoffs,
or channel
insert returns.
that
that
cancan
be be
routed
routed
from
from
hardware
hardware
inputs,
inputs,
Input
Input
Channel
Channel
or FX
or FXou
podem
ser
roteados
para
entradas
de
hardware,
Input
Channel
that can be routed from hardware inputs, Input Channel or FX
FXReturn
Return,
ou retnnros pickoffs,
de pickoffs,
insertsordechannel
canal.
Return
top-of-channel
top-of-channel
or
channel
insert
insert
returns.
returns.
Side-chain
level may vary
dramatically
depending
on where
Return
top-of-channel
pickoffs,
or channel
insert returns.
the Key signal is sourced. The top of channel pickoff can be
O nvel do
side-chain
pode
variar drasticamente
Side-chain
Side-chain
level
level
may
may
vary
vary
dramatically
dramatically
depending
depending
ondependendo
on
where
where
level
vary
dramatically
depending
on where
asSide-chain
much
as o
18
dBmay
louder
than
other pickoff
points
and
de
onde
sinal
chave
originado.
O
ponto
de
alimentao
thethe
KeyKey
signal
signal
is sourced.
is sourced.
TheThe
toptop
of channel
of channel
pickoff
pickoff
can
can
be be
the
Key signal is pode
sourced.
The
top mais
of channel
pickoff
can be
sources.
top-of-channel
ser
18
dB
altopoints
que
outros
as much
as
much
as 18
as 18
dB dB
louder
louder
than
than
other
other
pickoff
pickoff
points
andandpontos
as
as 18 dBe louder
demuch
alimentao
fontes.than other pickoff points and
sources.
sources.
sources.
Stage Rack Features
Audio I/O

System Components
Included Components

DVI supported.

Optional Components
(for Talkback)
VENUE Mouse Pad

VENUE Profile Guide

Rack(s) (see next)


System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options



outputs
142
Guia VENUE Profile
Chapter
17:
Chapter
17:
EQEQ
Captulo 17: EQ
The following EQ features are available:
following
EQ features
are available:
OsThe
seguintes
de EQ
esto
disponveis:
A recursos
built-in EQ
is available
on each input channel and FX
Built-In EQ Parameters
Built-In EQ Parameters
A built-in EQ is available on each input channel and FX
Parmetros do EQ Embutido
return.
Stage
Umreturn.
EQ Rack
embutido
est disponvel em cada Input Channel e FX
Features
Additional
Required Components
HPF
Graphic EQs are available for use on output channels.
Return.
HPF
Graphic EQs are available for use on output channels.
HPF
Racks
are
useddisponveis
with
FOH
and
provide
stage
Stage
EQs grficos
esto
para
uso
nos
canais
deall
sada.
EQ plug-ins
can
bean
used
onRack,
input
and
output
channels.
Each input channel provides a fourth-order high-pass filter
EQ
plug-ins
can
be
used
on
input
and
output
channels.
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Stage
Racks
Each
inputDisplay
channel
provides
fourth-order
high-pass
filter
audio
Plug-ins
de
EQ
podem
ser
utilizados
em
canais
de
entrada
e
All channels let you insert hardware EQ processors.
Video
(15-inch
oragreater
display
Cada
canalwith
de entrada
oferece
um
filtroflat-panel
passa-altas
de quarta
ordem
(HPF)
adjustable
corner
frequency
andVGA
in/out
control.
sada.
All
let you insert
hardware up
EQto
processors.
can
be channels
supporting
96 total inputs.
(HPF)
with
adjustable
corner
frequency
and
in/out
control.
com
frequncia
de corte
ajustvel
e controle dentro/fora
recommended;
resolution).
VGA and do
The
input
HPF 1024x768
defaults
tominimum
20
Hz, out-of-circuit.
Dynamics settings can be copied, pasted, stored and re- (HPF)
Todos
os canais
permitem
inserts
de processadores
de EQ
The
input
defaults
to 20
Dynamics
settings
can be
copied,
pasted, stored and
re-em
circuito.
OHPF
padro
do HPF
20Hz,
Hz.out-of-circuit.
DVI
supported.
called using Snapshots and Presets.
hardware.
Audio
I/Ousing Snapshots and Presets.
called
You can adjust HPF frequency and in/out state from each in Ajustes Dynamics podem ser copiados, colados, salvos e You
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
can
adjust
HPF
frequency
and
in/out
state from
each
inde
Voc
pode
ajustar
frequncia
o estado
dentro/fora
do circuito
put
strip,
fromathe
ACS, or eon-screen.
48 inputs
with remotely
controllable
carregados
utilizando
Snapshots
e Presets.mic preamps and
Built-In EQ
put
strip,
from
the
ACS,
or
on-screen.
cada rgua de entrada pelo ACS, ou na tela.
individually
Built-In
EQ
of built-in
EQexpandable
are available
channels,
EQ Embutido
Different
8 analogtypes
output
channels;
upfor
toinput
48 analog
or
Input
Parametric
EQ
EQ
Paramtrico
de Entrada
Different types of built-in EQ are available for input channels,
The
connection
between
Input
Parametric
EQ FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
FXdigital
returns,
and outputs.
outputs
per Stage Rack.
FX
returns,
and
outputs.
aInput
Digital
Snake cable.
This
cableprovide
can bebuilt-in
purchased
directly EQ.
Diferentes tipos de EQ embutidos esto disponveis para Input
channels
and
FX
returns
parametric
Input
Channels
e FXFX
Returns
oferecem
EQ
paramtrico
embutido.
channels
and
returns
provide
built-in
parametric
EQ. Os
Input
Channels
Each
input channel provides a high-pass filter Input
from
Avid or
assembled
byare
your
preferred
vendor.
Channels,
FX
Returnse
sadas.
The
following
parameters
available
in
the
built-in
and
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O provides a high-pass filter
seguintes
parmetros
esto
disponveis
no
EQbuilt-in
embutido,
eEQ,
podem
Input
Channels Each
input
channel
The
following
parameters
are
available
in
the
EQ,
and
plus a built-in four-band parametric EQ. EQ can be set for digcan
be
adjusted
using
the
EQ
controls
in
the
ACS
or
on-screen.
ser ajustados utilizando os controles EQ no ACS ou na tela.
plusa built-in
four-band to
EQ. EQand
canredundant
be set for digSnake
connectors
enable
(if EQ can
be adjusted using the EQ controls in the ACS or on-screen.
Input
Channels
Cada
Input parametric
Channel
oferece
um
filtro
passa-altas
ital
or analog
mode.
In
digital primary
mode only,
the four-band
Optional Components
ital
or
analog
mode.
In
digital
mode
only,
the
four-band
EQ
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
mais um
EQ
paramtrico
de
4
bandas.
O
EQ
pode
ser
ajustada
provides selectable Bell/Shelf shapes for the Hi and Lo bands. EQ In
EQ In
provides
Bell/Shelf
shapes
Hi and Loobands.
para
o Input
modoselectable
digital ouEQ
analgico.
Apenasfor
nothe
modo
EQ de 4 EQ
channel
can be configured
as
pre-digital
or post-Dynamics
Infollowing components are optional, and must be
The
Input
channel
EQ
can
be
configured
as
preor
post-Dynamics
bandason
oferece
formas Bell/Shelf para as bandas Hi e Lo.
a per-channel basis.
EQ
In altera
o estado
do equalizador
embutido
(todas in
asorbandas)
EQ
In toggles
the built-in
EQ processor
(all bands)
out of
purchased
separately:
O on
EQ ade
Input Channel
per-channel
basis.pode ser configurado como pr ou psEQ
In dentro
togglesou
thefora
built-in
EQ processor
(all bands)
in or outTambm
of
para
do
circuito
dos canais
selecionados.
circuit
on the
selected
channels.
EQUSB
In/Out
can device
be controlled
USB
flash
disk
(or
other
portable
storage
for
System
Components
Dynamics
em umaEach
baseFX
porreturn
canal. provides a built-in two-band EQ. circuit
on controlado
the selected
channels.
In/Out can be controlled
FX Returns
pode
ser
ACS ou naEQ
tela.
from
the ACS
or no
on-screen.
transfer
of Show
data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
FX Returns Each FX return provides a built-in two-band EQ.
from
the
ACS
or
on-screen.
FX return EQ can be used in digital or analog mode; in digital
FXFX
Returns
FX Return
um or
EQanalog
embutido
de 2inbandas.
returnCada
EQ can
be usedoferece
in digital
mode;
digital O
Near-field
EQ Status
LED LED
Included
mode, theComponents
bands can be individually configured for Bell or
EQ Status
EQmode,
do FX the
Return
pode
ser
nos modos
digitalfor
ouBell
analogico;
bands
can
beutilizado
individually
configured
or
EQ
Status
LED
Headphones
with 1/4-inch jack
Shelf modes.
noShelf
modo
digital,Profile
as bandas
podem
ser individualmente
All VENUE
systems
include
the following:configuradas
modes.
O LED
(vermelho)
EQ
InEQ
indica
o estado
da equalizao
dentro
The
(red)
channel
In LED
indicates
EQ in/out
status
ase for
Dynamic or condenser
microphone
and
XLR mic
cable
para modos Bell ou Shelf.
The
(red)
channel
EQ In
LED indicates
a doshown
circuito
conforme
a seguinte
tabela:EQ in/out status as
in
the
following
table.
(for Talkback)
Graphic EQs
shown in the following table.
Graphic
TwoEQs
EQs
grficos
busses
can have
a built-in
Graphic
EQ included)
assigned to
Color
EQ Status
Output
Monitor
mount
VGA
screen
(screen
Output
busses can
havefor
a built-in
Graphic
EQ not
assigned
to
Color
EQ(for
Status
MIDI cables
Bussesthem.
Output
podem
ter
um
EQ
grfico
atribudo
a
eles.
(none)
Not
in circuit Word clock between the
them. Trackball mount (trackball not included)
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
(none)
Not in circuit
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
VENUE
system
and
external digital devices)
Plug-Ins
dePlug-Ins
EQ
Red
In circuit
EQ
Red 25-pin D-Sub
In circuit
EQ Plug-Ins
VENUE Profile Guide
Plug-Ins
EQ(2)
podem
utilizados
em canais
de entrada
e sada.
plug-ins
canser
be lights
used
on input
and output
channels.
When Modos de EQ Analgico e Digital
EQde
Two
console
Analog and Digital EQ Modes
EQ plug-ins
can be
used
on input
and output
When
Quando
atribudos
nos
racks
de
plug-in,
podemchannels.
ser
emon Analog and Digital EQ Modes
assigned
in the
plug-in
racks,
EQ plug-ins
can inseridos
be inserted
Protective
Dust
Cover
assigned
inou
the
plug-in racks,
EQ plug-ins
can be Plug-Ins
inserted onEQ
canais
mono
estreo
alimentados
por or
busses.
The Analog/Digital
buttonotoggles
theEQbuilt-in
parametric
EQ
individual
mono ou
or stereo
channels
fed by busses.de
EQ
O boto
Analog/Digital alterna
modo do
paramtrico
embutido
Analog/Digital
button
toggles the built-in
parametric EQ
ser
Rack(s)
(seeor
next)
individual
mono
stereo channels
or codificadores
fed by busses.Output
EQ
podem
ajustados
utilizando
o
ACS,
os
(noen- The
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
between
digital
mode
and analog
on apor
per-channel
baplug-ins can be adjusted using the ACS, using the Output
entre
os modos
digital
e analgico,
em mode,
umaOptions
base
canal.
between digital mode and analog mode, on a per-channel bamodo
Insert),
pginausing
Plug-Ins
tela.
plug-ins
canoubepela
adjusted
the na
ACS,
using the Output enfuno
tambm est
disponvel
na is
tela.
sis.
Analog/digital
mode
switching
available on-screen.
coders (in Insert mode), or from the on-screen Plug-Ins page. Essa
The
following options
be added
VENUEon-screen.
Profile systems.
Presets
de
plug-ins
ser
salvos
e carregados.
sis.
Analog/digital
modecan
switching
is to
available
coders
(in
Insert podem
mode),
or from
the
on-screen
Plug-Ins page.
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
Cables
Plug-in presets can be saved and loaded.
Plug-in presets can be saved and loaded.
The EQ controls in the ACS provide a unified set of conOs
controles
de inEQ
ACSprovide
oferecem
um set
EQ controls
thenoACS
a unified
set unificado
of con- de
The
System
CD
trols Restore
for
both
built-in and plug-in
EQ processing.
controles
para
processamento
deEQ
EQ processing.
embutido
ou plug-in.
trols
for
both
built-in
and
plug-in
ForDigital
detailsMode
on allAVENUE
systems
and
options,EQ.
visit the Avid
standard
digital
parametric
Digital
Mode EQ paramtrico
digital padro.
Gama deFrequency
frequncia de
Digital
Mode
A standard digital parametric EQ. Frequency
website
(www.avid.com).
of kHz
20 Hz
to 20 kHz
and gain
+/18 dB em
are avail20 range
Hz a 20
e ganho
de +/18
dB range
esto of
disponveis
todas
range
of 20 Hz to 20As
kHz
and gain
range
of +/18
dB are
avail- ou
as quatro
bandas
Hi eLo
Lobands
podem
(padro)
able onbandas.
all four bands.
Hi and
canser
be Bell
Bell (default)
or
able
onOallQfour
bands.
Hi andem
Lo bands
can
be 10
Bell(esquerda,
(default) or
Shelf.
Digital
expresso
fatores
entre
banda
Shelf.
Digital
Q
is
expressed
in
Q
factor
terms
in
the
range
10
MixDigital
RackQOptions
Shelf.
is expressed
in
Q factor
terms
in the
range
estreita)
(direita,
banda
larga).
O modo
Digital
oDigital
modo10
padro
(left, a
a 0.1
narrow
band)
to 0.1
(right,
a wide
band).
Mode
Inserts
Hardware
Standalone
Inserts
de
Hardware
(left,
a narrow band) to 0.1 (right, a wide band). Digital Mode
Hardware Inserts
do EQ.
is
the
default
EQ
mode.
I/O Options
You
iLok
Smart
Key (for EQ
storing
plug-in
authorizations)
canUSB
insert
a hardware
processor
and
control its in/out is the default EQ mode.
Voc
inseriraum
processador
de EQ em
hardware
e controlar
Youpode
can
insert
hardware
EQ
processor
and
control
its
in/out
state
Plug-in
installer
discs (if
any) withSee
pre-authorized
iLok
and insert
on-screen.
Chapter
19,na
HardAI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
seu
estado
aposition
do on-screen.
circuito
e posio
de
insero
tela.
state
and dentro/for
insert position
See Chapter
19, Hardware
Inserts.)
Two
(2)
IEC
power
cables
Veja
o
Captulo
19,
Inserts
de
Hardware.)
ware Inserts.)
outputs
Chapter 17: EQ 143

Chapter 17: EQ 143


Captulo 17: EQ 143
Analog
Analog
Mode
Mode
AnAn
EQ
with
with
aresposta
response
a response
modeled
modeled
on
on
that
that
of of
an
an
an-anAnalog
Mode
Um
EQEQ
com
modelada
de
uma
console
Analog
Mode
An
EQ with
a response
modeled
on that
anisanAdjusting
EQ
Ajustando
oEQ
EQ
alog
alog
console
console
renowned
renowned
forfor
its
its
EQ
section.
section.
Frequency
range
range
is Adjusting
renomada
por
sua
seo
de
EQ.
A EQ
gama
de Frequency
frequncia
of
limitada
Adjusting EQ
alog
console
renowned
for
its
EQ
section.
Frequency
range
is
e limited
aslimited
bandas
exteriores
oferecem
apenas
shelving.
Oshelving
Q analgico
to to
match,
match,
and
and
thethe
outer
outer
bands
bands
provide
provide
shelving
only.
only.
You
can
can
adjust
adjust
EQEQ
controls
controls
in in
input
input
channel
channel
strips,
strips,
in in
thethe
expresso
em
deand
banda
entre
0.1
(esquerda,
um
dcimo
de You
limited
tooitavas
theoctaves
outer
provide
shelving
only.
Analog
Analog
Q is
Q
expressed
ismatch,
expressed
in in
octaves
ofbands
of
bandwidth
bandwidth
in in
the
the
range
range
0.1
0.1
Voc
pode
ajustarEQ
os controls
controlesindeinput
EQ nachannel
rguas de
entrada,
Youand
can
adjust
strips,
in theno ACS
ACS,
ACS,
and
on-screen.
on-screen.
oitava)
e
2a (direita,
duas
oitavas.)
Analog
Q isofexpressed
in to
octaves
of bandwidth
in the range 0.1
eACS,
na tela.
(left,
(left,
a tenth
tenth
of
an
an
octave)
octave)
to
2 (right,
2 (right,
two
two
octaves.)
octaves.)
and on-screen.
(left, a tenth of an octave) to 2 (right, two octaves.)
O HPF
no
se
altera
quando
o EQ
alternado
entrebetween
os
modos
The
The
HPF
HPF
does
does
notnot
change
change
when
when
the
the
EQ
EQ
is switched
is switched
between
Digital
eand
Analogico.
The HPF
does
not mode.
change
Digital
Digital
and
Analog
Analog
mode.when the EQ is switched between
Digital and Analog mode.
Gain, Frequency e Q/Bandwidth
Gain,
Gain,
Frequency,
Frequency,
and
and
Q/Bandwidth
Q/Bandwidth
Gain, Frequency, and Q/Bandwidth
Cada
banda
doof
EQ
paramtrico
embutido
oferece
os
seguibntes
Each
Each
band
band
of
built-in
built-in
parametric
parametric
EQEQ
provides
provides
thethe
following
following
parmetros,
como
disponvel
nos
Input
Channels
ou
FX
Returns:
Each
band
of
built-in
parametric
EQ
provides
the
following
parameters,
parameters,
as as
available
available
onon
input
input
channels
channels
or or
FXFX
returns:
returns:
Ajustando
Controles
HPF
Adjusting
Adjusting
HPF
HPFControls
Controls
Adjusting HPF Controls
Each
Each
input
input
strip
strip
provides
HPF
HPF
frequency
frequency
control.
HPF
HPF
can
can
bebe
Cada
rgua
de provides
entrada
oferece
controlecontrol.
de
frequencia
do
HPF.
Each
strip
provides
HPF
frequency
control.
be de
Oadjusted
HPF input
pode
ser
ajustado
utilizando
o and
switch
HPF
eHPF
as can
linhas
adjusted
using
using
thethe
Encoder
Encoder
HPF
HPF
switch
switch
and
row
row
of of
encoders.
encoders.
adjusted using the Encoder HPF switch and row of encoders.
codificadores.
parameters, as available on input channels or FX returns:
Gain
Incrementa
oucuts
corta
ocorresponding
ganho da banda
correspondente.
Os
Gain
Gain
Boosts
Boosts
or or
cuts
thethe
corresponding
band.
band.
LEDs
LEDs
around
around
thethe
LEDs
ao
redor
do
codificador
Gain
se
acendem
do
ponto
central
para
Gain
Boosts
or
cuts
the
corresponding
band.
LEDs
around
the
Gain
Gain
encoder
encoder
light
light
from
from
thethe
center-point
center-point
to to
thethe
right
right
(boost),
(boost),
a direita
(incremento)
oufrom
parathe
a esquerda
(corte)
para
apresentar
o
encoder
light
center-point
toshow
the
right
(boost),
or Gain
or
from
from
thethe
center-point
center-point
to to
thethe
leftleft
(cut)
(cut)
to to
show
current
current
Gain.
Gain.
ganho
or atual.
from the center-point to the left (cut) to show current Gain.
Freq
Freq
Sets
Sets
thethe
center
center
or or
corner
corner
frequency,
frequency,
as as
follows:
follows:
FreqFreq
Ajusta
o centro
ou a or
frequncia
de corte: as follows:
Sets
the
center
corner
frequency,
Freq
Freq
sets
sets
the
the
center
center
frequency
frequency
forfor
thethe
Hi-Mid
Hi-Mid
and
and
Lo-Mid
Lo-Mid
Freq
ajsuta a frequncia central para as bandas Hi-Mid e Lobands,
Freq sets
the
center
frequency
for the
Hi-Mid
and
Lo-Mid
bands,
and
and
for
for
the
the
Hi
Hi
and
and
Lo
Lo
filters
filters
when
when
in
in
Bell
Bell
mode.
mode.
Mid, e para os filtros Hi e Lo quando no modo Bell.
bands,
and
for
the
Hi
and
Lo
filters
when
in
Bell
mode.
Freq
Freq
sets
sets
the
the
corner
corner
frequency
frequency
forfor
the
HiHi
and
and
filters
filters
Freq
ajusta
a
frequncia
de
corte para
osthe
filtros
HiLo
e Lo
quando
Freq
sets
the
corner
frequency
for
the
Hi
and
Lo
filters
nowhen
modo
Shelf.
(Veja
Modos
Bell
e
Shelf
para
Filtros
Hi
e Hi
Lo
when
in in
Shelf
Shelf
mode.
mode.
(See
(See
Bell
Bell
and
and
Shelf
Shelf
Modes
Modes
forfor
Hi
naand
pgina
144.)
when
in
Shelf
mode.
(See
Bell
and
Shelf
Modes
for
Hi
and
LoLo
Filters
Filters
onon
page
page
144.)
144.)
and Lo Filters on page 144.)

Girar
o codificador
noclockwise
sentido
horrio
incrementaa
frequncia
Turning
Turning
thethe
encoder
encoder
clockwise
increases
increases
thethe
frequency
frequency
forfor
Turning
the
encoder
increases
the frequency
for
daquela
banda.
Gir-lo
sentido anti-horrio
diminui
a the
frequncia.
that
that
band;
band;
turning
turning
item
counter-clockwise
it clockwise
counter-clockwise
decreases
decreases
the
frefreUm
LED
ao
redor
do
codificador
mostra
o
ajuste
atual
dele.
A
gama
that
band;
turning
it
counter-clockwise
decreases
the
frequency.
quency.
A single
A single
LED
LED
around
around
thethe
encoder
encoder
shows
shows
thethe
current
current
disponvel
para
cada
banda
depende
do each
modo
de
EQ
(Digital
ou
quency.
A single
LED
around
the
encoder
shows
the
current
encoder
encoder
setting.
setting.
The
The
available
available
range
range
of of
each
band
band
depends
depends
onon
Analog).
Vejasetting.
Gama The
de Controle
para
EQofparamtricos
embutidos
encoder
available
range
each
band
depends
on
thethe
EQEQ
mode
mode
(Digital
(Digital
or or
Analog).
Analog).
SeeSee
Control
Control
Ranges
Ranges
forfor
(todos os nodelos) na pgina 149.
the
EQParametric
mode
(Digital
or(All
Analog).
See
Control
Ranges for
Built-In
Built-In
Parametric
EQEQ
(All
Modes)
Modes)
onon
page
page
149.
149.
Built-In Parametric EQ (All Modes) on page 149.
Q (Q/Bandwidth) Controla o Q (no modo digital) ou a largura de
Q (Q/Bandwidth)
Q (Q/Bandwidth)
Controls
Controls
QQ
(in(in
digital
digital
mode)
mode)
or or
bandwidth
bandwidth
banda
(no modo analgico).
Q
(Q/Bandwidth)
(analog
(analog
mode).
mode). Controls Q (in digital mode) or bandwidth
(analog mode).
No
Digital,
oQ
fator
Q. Quando
os filtros
Hi the
outhe
Lo
In
modo
In
Digital
Digital
mode,
mode,
QoQ
determines
determines
QQ
factor.
factor.
When
When
Hiesto
Hi
or or
Lono
Lo
Inare
Digital
mode,
Q determines
factor.
When
the
Hiof
orthe
Lo
modo
Shelf,
o knob
Qmode,
determina
Q knob
doQshelf.
filters
filters
are
in
in
Shelf
Shelf
mode,
thethe
Qo Q
knob
determines
determines
thethe
QQ
of
the
filters
are
in
Shelf
mode,
the
Q
knob
determines
the
Q
of
the
shelf.
shelf.
No
modo Analog, se altera para um controle de largura de banda
shelf.
In
In
Analog
Analog
mode,
mode,
this
this
control
changes
changes
to to
a bandwidth
a bandwidth
conconque
realiza
essencialmente
acontrol
mesma
funo.
which
Inwhich
Analog
mode,essentially
this
control
changes
to
a bandwidth control
trol
performs
performs
essentially
thethe
same
same
function.
function.
whichCada
performs
thede
same
Bandtrol
In/Out
uma essentially
das bandas
EQ function.
disponveis podem
Band
Band
In/Out
In/Out
Each
of of
thethe
available
available
EQEQ
bands
bands
can
can
be
be
taken
taken
inseus
in
or or
ser
colocadas
ouEach
retiradas
do circuito
(bypass)
utilizando
Band
In/Out
of
the
available
EQ
bands
can be taken in or
out
out
(bypassed)
(bypassed)
using
their
their
encoder
encoder
(or
(or
on-screen).
on-screen).
codificadores
(ou Each
nausing
tela).
out (bypassed) using their encoder (or on-screen).
In
In
thethe
ACS
ACS
EQEQ
section,
section,
thethe
Gain
Gain
knob
knob
forfor
each
each
band
band
serves
serves
Na
seo
EQ
do EQ
ACS,section,
o knob Gain
para knob
cada banda
funciona
como
In
the
ACS
the Gain
for The
each
band
serves
as
as
the
the
in/out
in/out
control
control
byby
pushing
pushing
thethe
encoder.
encoder.
The
indicator
indicator
controle
dentro/fora
empurrando
o codificador.
O LED
indicativo
se
as
the
in/out
control
by
pushing
the
encoder.
The
indicator
LED
LED
lights
lights
to to
indicate
indicate
band
band
In.In.
acende para indicar dentro (In).
LED lights to indicate band In.
On-screen,
On-screen,
a dedicated
a dedicated
In/Out
In/Out
switch
switch
is located
is located
just
just
below
below
On-screen,
a dedicated
In/Out
switch
located just
below
each
Na
tela,
um
switch
dedicado
In/Out
est islocalizado
abaixo
do
each
Gain
Gain
knob.
knob.
knobeach
Gain.Gain knob.
HPF
HPF
forfor
Encoders
Encoders
HPF for
Encoders
Encoders
Encoders
Encoders
HPF
HPF
controls
controls
forfor
input
input
channels
channels
HPF controls for input channels
To To
adjust
adjust
HPF:
HPF:
To adjust
Para
ajustarHPF:
o HPF:
1 Bank
1 Bank
thethe
Input
Input
section
section
to to
thethe
desired
desired
channels.
channels.
1 Bank the Input section to the desired channels.
aHPF
seo
Input para
os canais
desejados.
2 1Press
2Associe
Press
thethe
HPF
Encoder
Encoder
Assign
Assign
switch.
switch.
2 Press the HPF Encoder Assign switch.
3 2Rotate
3Pressione
Rotate
thethe
appropriate
channel
Encoder
Encoder
to to
adjust
adjust
itsits
HPF
HPF
oappropriate
switch
HPFchannel
Encoder
Assign.
3 RotatePress
the
appropriate
channel
Encoder
to
adjust
HPF
frequency.
frequency.
Press
thethe
appropriate
appropriate
encoder
encoder
shaft
shaft
switch
switch
toits
to
toggle
toggle
frequency.
Press thedo
appropriate
encoderpara
shaft
switchato
toggle
3HPF
Gire
o or
codificador
canal apropriado
ajustar
frequencia
HPF
in in
or
out.
out.
HPF
inPressione
or out. o codificador apropriado para colocar ou retirar o
do
HPF.
HPF do circuito.
Adjusting
AdjustingChannel
ChannelParametric
ParametricEQ
EQControls
Controls
Adjusting
Channel
Parametric
EQ Controls
Ajustando
Controles
do EQ Paramtrico
de Canal
The
The
EQEQ
controls
controls
in in
thethe
ACS
ACS
provide
provide
a unified,
a unified,
consistent
consistent
setset
of of
The EQfor
controls
inbuilt-in
the ACS
provide
aEQ
unified,
consistent
set
of
controls
controls
for
both
both
built-in
and
and
plug-in
plug-in
EQ
processing
processing
for
for
the
the
Os controles EQ no ACS oferecem um set unificado e coerente de
controls
for both
built-in
and plug-in
EQ
processing
for the
targeted
targeted
channel.
channel.
Twelve
Twelve
dual-purpose
dual-purpose
rotary/switch
rotary/switch
encoders
encoders
controles para processamento dos EQ embutidos ou em plug-in para
targeted
channel.
Twelve
dual-purpose
control
EQ
parameters
parameters
and
and
their
their
settings.
settings.
ocontrol
canalEQ
marcado.
Doze
codificadores
derotary/switch
funo duplaencoders
(rotativos/
controlcontrolam
EQ parameters
and their
settings.do EQ.
switch)
os parmetros
e ajustes
EQEQ
plug-ins
plug-ins
can
can
map
map
their
their
controls
controls
to to
thethe
ACS
ACS
EQEQ
section,
section,
and
and
EQ
plug-ins
can
map
their
controls
to
the
ACS
EQ
section,
all
all
plug-ins
plug-ins
can
can
be
be
controlled
controlled
using
using
the
the
Output
Output
encoders
encoders
in
in
InIn- e
Plug-ins de EQ podem mapear seus controles para o EQ do and
ACS,
allmode.
plug-ins
can podem
be controlled
using the Output
encoders
in Insert
sert
mode.
todos
os plug-ins
ser comntrolados
utlizando
os codificadores
sert mode.
Output
no modo Insert.
Low
Plug-In
Plug-In Low
Low
Plug-In
Low-Mid
Low-Mid
Low-Mid
Bell
Bell
and
and
Shelf
Shelf
Modes
Modes
forfor
HiHi
and
and
LoLo
Filters
Filters
Bell and Shelf Modes for Hi and Lo Filters
Modos Bell e Shelf Modes para Filtros Hi e Lo
In In
digital
digital
EQEQ
mode,
mode,
thethe
HiHi
and
and
LoLo
filters
filters
onon
input
input
channels
channels
No modo
de EQ
digital,
osthe
filtros
Hi e Lo
Lo filters
nos
Input Channels
e
In
digital
EQ
mode,
Hi and
filters
on
input
channels
and
and
FX
FX
returns
returns
can
can
bebe
toggled
toggled
between
between
Bell
Bell
and
and
Shelf
Shelf
modes.
modes.
FX Returns
alternados
entre
os modos
Bell Shelf
e Shelf.
and FXpodem
returnsser
can
be toggled
between
Bell and
modes.
When
When
in in
Bell
Bell
mode,
mode,
thethe
HiHi
or or
LoLo
filters
filters
function
function
as as
a parameta paramet-
Quando
nowith
modo
Bell,Q.
osQ.
filtros
Hiin
ouShelf
Lomode,
funcionam
umisEQ
in
Bell
mode,
the
Hi or
Lo
filters
function
as
amodule
parametricWhen
ric
EQEQ
with
variable
variable
When
When
in
Shelf
mode,
thethe
Hicomo
Hi
module
is
paramtrico
comvariable
Q varivel.
Quando
no modo
Shelf,
o modulo
Hi
ric
EQ
with
Q.
When
in
Shelf
mode,
the
Hi
module
is
a high-shelf
a high-shelf
EQ,
EQ,
and
and
thethe
LoLo
module
module
is aislow-shelf
a low-shelf
EQ.
EQ.
ForFor
in-incorresponde a um EQ high-shelf EQ, e o mdulo Lo um EQ lowa
high-shelf
EQ,
and
the
Lo
module
is
a
low-shelf
EQ.
For
instructions
structions
onon
configuring
configuring
these
these
bands
bands
forfor
Bell
Bell
or or
Shelf
Shelf
mode,
mode,
shelf.
Para instrues
sobre como
configurar
essas
bandas
para
os
structions
onEQ
configuring
these
bands for Bell or Shelf mode,
see
see
Adjusting
Adjusting
EQ
on
on
page
page
144.
144.
modos Bell ou Shelf, veja Ajustando o EQ na pgina 44.
see Adjusting EQ on page 144.
144
144VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
144
VENUE
144 Guia
VENUE
ProfileProfile
Guide
In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
EQEQ
controls
controls
in the
in the
ACS
ACS
EQ controls in the ACS
High-Mid
High-Mid
High-Mid
High
High
High
Para
ajustar
osparameters
parmetros
de EQ
pelo
ACS:
To adjust
EQ
from
the
ACS:
To adjust
EQ parameters
from
the ACS:
Controles de EQ na Tela do Software

Software
Screen
EQ EQ
Controls
Software
Screen
Controls
Target
a channel
by
pressing
its seu
Select
switch.
1 Target
channel
by pressing
itsswitch
Select
switch.
11Selecione
umacanal
pressionando
Select.
Voc
o EQbuilt-in
embutido
os botes
dedicados
na
You
canpode
adjust
the built-in
EQ using
dedicated
on-screen
but- butYou
can ajustar
adjust
the
EQutilizando
using
dedicated
on-screen
tela
para
alternar
entre
colocar
outoggling.
retirar
uma banda do circuito e
tons
for
band
in/out
and
bell/shelf
tons
for
band
in/out
and
bell/shelf
toggling.
2 Press
the EQ
In
to enable
built-in
EQ on
chan2 Press
EQswitch
In switch
to enable
built-in
EQthat
on that
chan2 Pressione
o the
switch
EQ
In para habilitar
o EQ
embutido
nesse canal.
modos bell ou shelf.
nel.
The
EQ
In
LED
lights
to
indicate
the
EQ
is
engaged.)
nel.
The
EQ
In
LED
lights
to
indicate
the
EQ
is
engaged.)
(O LED EQ In se acende para indicar que o EQ est habilitado.)
The The
software
screen
also also
provides
the EQ
display
to adsoftware
screen
provides
theGraph
EQ Graph
display
to adA tela
software
tambm
oferece o display EQ Graph para ajustar
just
frequency
and and
gain
simultaneously.
3 Adjust
the appropriate
EQ encoder
for High,
Hi-Mid,
just do
frequency
gain
simultaneously.
3 Adjust
the appropriate
EQ encoder
for High,
Hi-Mid,
3Lo-Mid,
Ajuste
oorcodificador
apropriado para as bandas High, Hi-Mid, Loganho e frequencia simultaneamente.
Stage
Rack
Features
Low
bands.
Lo-Mid,
or Low
bands.
Mid ou Low.
audio I/O forGain
VENUE
Profile
Up
to two Stage Racks
(rotate)
and Band
In/Out
(press)
Gain (rotate)
andsystems.
Band In/Out
(press)
Q (digital
mode)mode)
Q (digital
Audio I/O
Frequency
(rotate)
and Bell/Shelf
(press)(press)
Frequency
(rotate)
and Bell/Shelf

High High
EQ controls
in theinACS
EQ controls
the ACS
Gain (rotate)
and Band
(press)(press)
Gain (rotate)
and In/Out
Band In/Out

applicable)
connection
to
a VENUE
FOHmode)
Rack.
Q (digital
mode)mode)
or bandwidth
(analog
mode)
Q (digital
or bandwidth
(analog
Digital/Analog
Digital/Analog
In/Out
In/Out components must
The
following
be

Gain Gain
recommended; 1024x768 minimum
Band in/out
Band in/out
Q/Bandwidth
Q/Bandwidth
Hi Hi
DVI
supported.
Bell/Shelf
Bell/Shelf
Frequency
Frequency

Gain Gain
Digital Snake Cable (VENUE Profile

Systems
Band in/out
Band
in/out Only)
Q
Hi Mid
Hi Mid
The connection between FOH

Rack
and Stage Rack requires
Frequency
Frequency
Gain Gain
from Avid or assembled by your
preferred vendor.
Q
Band in/out
Band in/out
Lo Mid
Lo Mid
Frequency
Optional ComponentsFrequency
Gain
The following components areGain
optional,
and must be
Frequency
(rotate)
and Bell/Shelf
(press)(press)
Frequency
(rotate)
and Bell/Shelf
System Components
Hi-Mid
EQ controls
in theinACS
Hi-Mid
EQ controls
the ACS
Included Components
Gain (rotate)
and Band
(press)(press)
Gain (rotate)
and In/Out
Band In/Out
Two (2) QIEC

power
(digital
mode)cables
or bandwidth
(analog
mode)mode)
Q (digital
mode)
or bandwidth
(analog
(rotate)
and Bell/Shelf
(press)(press)
Frequency
(rotate)
and
Bell/Shelf
TrackballFrequency
mount
(trackball
not
included)
VENUE Mouse Pad

EQ
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Lo-Mid
controls
in theinACS
Lo-Mid
EQ controls
the ACS
Gain (rotate)
and Band
(press)(press)
Gain (rotate)
and In/Out
Band In/Out
Rack(s) (see
next)
Q (digital mode)
(digital mode)
Racks, SoftwareQ CDs,
iLoks, and Cables
(rotate)
and Bell/Shelf
(press)(press)
Frequency
and Bell/Shelf
Each Mix Rack Frequency
or FOH
Rack(rotate)
includes:
System Restore CD
Low EQ
in theinACS
Lowcontrols
EQ controls
the ACS

To toggle
all USB
bands
in orin
out:
To
all bands
or (for
out: storing plug-in authorizations)
toggle
iLok
Smart
Key
Para colocar ou retirar todas as bandas do circuito
Q/Bandwidth
Q/Bandwidth
purchased
separately:
Bell/Shelf
Bell/Shelf
Band in/out
Band in/out
Lo
Lo
Frequency
USB flash disk (or other portable
Frequency
Presets
Presets
controls
Near-field
monitor
speakers
forInput
mix
position
EQ controls
in theinsoftware
screen
(4-band
Channel
EQmonitoring
shown)
EQ
the
software
screen
(4-band
Input
Channel
EQ shown)
Controles de EQ na tela do software (EQ de Input Channel de 4 bandas)

To adjust
parametric
EQ parameters
on-screen:
To adjust
parametric
EQ parameters
on-screen:
Para ajustar
os parmetros
do EQ
paramtrico
na XLR
tela: mic cable
Dynamic
or condenser
microphone
and
1 Select
a channel
on-screen.
1 Select
a channel
on-screen.
(for Talkback)
1 Selecione um canal na tela.
2 Click
the EQ
switch
to
Footswitches
to put
2)to the
2 Click
theInEQ
In(up
switch
put EQ
thein
EQcircuit.
in circuit.
MIDI
cables EQ
(forcontrols
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
2 Clique
noon-screen
switch
para
colocar
oby
EQ
no
3 Adjust
the
by doing
onecircuito.
of
the
3 Adjust
the
on-screen
controls
doing
one
offollowing:
the following:
BNC
(for knob
connecting
Word clock between
the
Turn
an cables
on-screen
(Gain,
Q/Bandwidth,
or Frequency)
Turn
an on-screen
knob
(Gain,
Q/Bandwidth,
or Frequency)
3 Ajuste
os controles
tela
por umdigital
dos seguintes
VENUE
system na
and
external
devices)modos:
each
frequency
band.
forum
each
frequency
band. Q/Bandwidth ou Frequency) para
for
Gire
knob
na tela (Gain,
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for connecting
to
GPI
devices)
Click
tobanda
toggle
any
on-screen
EQ switch
(EQ
in/out,
bandband
Click
to toggle
any on-screen
EQ switch
(EQ in/out,
cada
de
freqncia.
orpara
bell/shelf).
in/out,
Clique
qualquer switch na tela EQ (EQ in/out,
in/out,
or alternar
bell/shelf).
banda
in/out
ou value
bell/shelf).
Click
a displayed
and and
typetype
a new
value.
Click
a displayed
value
a new
value.
VENUE
Clique um valor apresentado e digite um novo valor.
Profile
Expansion
Options
up orup
down
in a value
display
to increase
or decrease
Drag
or cima
down
in para
a value
display
increase
or decrease
Drag
Arraste
para
ou
baixo
um to
valor
apresentado
para
the
value.
the
value.
ou diminu-lo.
The aumenta-lo
following options
ToPara
reset
an on-screen
EQ parameter
itsto
default
value,
do one
parmetro
de EQtona
tela
seuvalue,
valor
padro,
To resetar
reset
anum
on-screen
EQ parameter
its para
default
do
one
of siga
the
of following:
the dos
following:
um
seguintes procedimentos:
Alt-click
the control
(or, hold
the console
Default(Alt)
Alt-click
the control
(or, hold
the console
Default(Alt)
Mix
Alt-click
controle
(ou segure o switch Default(Alt) na console
Rack
Options
switch
andnoand
click
the control).
switch
click
the control).
e clique no controle).
Right-click
control
and no
choose
Reset.
Right-click
the control
and
choose
I/O
Clique
comthe
o boto
direito
controle
eReset.
escolha Reset.
Options
Press
the EQ
Plug-in
installer
Press
theIn
EQswitch.
In switch.
ToPara
reset
the entire
EQseo
section
bands)
on(todas
a on
channel,
doanalog
one
resetar
EQ(allcompleta
as 16
bandas)
de of
um
To reset
theuma
entire
EQ Input
section
(all bands)
a channel,
do of
one
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Card
that
provides
thecanal,
following:
the
following:
siga
um
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
To reset
an EQ
to its
value:
To
anparameter
EQLink
parameter
todefault
its default
value:
Right-click
anywhere
in the
on-screen
(but (but
Right-click
anywhere
in EQ
thesection
EQ section
on-screen
reset
One
FOH
cable
for
connection
to a VENUE console
Para resetar um parmetro de EQ para seu valor padro:
AO16
Clique
comOutput
o boto
direito
em
qualquer
daline
seo
EQ na
Analog
Card
that
provides
16lugar
analog
level
not
directly
on
an
encoder
or
button)
and
choose
Reset
not
directly
on
an
encoder
or
button)
and
choose
Reset
Hold
the Default
switch
and and
adjust
the control.
Hold
the Default
switch
adjust
the control.
tela
(mas
no
diretamento
sobre
um
codificador
ou
boto)
e
outputs
EQ Section.
EQ Section.
Segure o switch Default e ajuste o controle.
escolha Reset EQ Section.
reset
Two
(2)
power
cables
Hold
Default
and
clickclick
the
on-screen
EQ In
button.
Analog
Hold
and
the Card
on-screen
EQ
In
To reset
the entire
EQ
section
(all bands)
on a on
channel:
To
theIEC
entire
EQ section
(all bands)
a channel:
XO16
Segure
oDefault
switch
Default
e clique
no boto
EQ
In button.
na8tela.
and
Digital
Output
that
provides
analog
Para
resetar
a
seo
EQ
completa
(todas
as
bandas)
em
um
Hold
the Default
switch
and and
presspress
the EQ
Hold
the Default
switch
theIn
EQswitch.
In switch.
Pressione
switch
In. cables
Twoo(2)
IEC EQ
power
canal:
Segure o switch Default e pressione o switch EQ In.

output compatible with Aviom Personal Mixers
and
other
Chapter
17: EQ
Chapter
17: 145
EQ 145
Captulo 17: EQ 145
Utilizando o display EQ Graph
Using the EQ Graph Display

Using the EQ Graph Display
EQ Graph
O Using
display the
EQ Graph
na telaDisplay
permite utilizar o mouse para ajustar a
The on-screen EQ graph lets you use the mouse to adjust freThe
on-screen
EQ
letsavailable
you
use the
mouse
to adjust frefrequencia
eand
o ganho
de
banda
de band.
EQ disponvel.
quency
gaingraph
forqualquer
any
EQ
The
on-screen
EQ
graph
lets you use the
mouse to adjust frequency and gain for any available EQ band.
quency and gain for any available EQ band.
EQ
EQgraph
EQ
graph
graph
Dragging
the
EQ graph display
Arrastando
alashandles
no displayinEQ
Graph
Dragging handles in the EQ graph display
Dragging handles in the EQ graph display
To
adjust
EQ na
on-screen
using the
Graph grfico:
display:
Para
ajustar
o EQ
tela utilizando
o display
To adjust EQ on-screen using the Graph display:
To 1adjust
EQa on-screen
using the Graph display:
Select
channel on-screen.
1
Select
a
channel
on-screen.
1 1Selecione
canalon-screen.
na tela.
Select a um
channel
2 Click the EQ In switch to put the EQ in circuit.
Click the EQ In switch to put the EQ in circuit.
2 22Clique
switch
In para
EQin
nocircuit.
circuito.
Clickno
the
EQ InEQ
switch
to colocar
put theoEQ
3 Drag the handles in the on-screen EQ graph display for each
3 Drag the handles in the on-screen EQ graph display for each
EQ band
(Lo, na
Lo-Mid,
Hi-Mid,
or EQ
Hi),
as follows:
Drag
the alas
handles
in the
on-screen
graph
display
for (Lo,
eachLo3 3EQ
Arraste
tela
EQ
graph
cada
banda
de EQ
bandas(Lo,
Lo-Mid,
Hi-Mid,
or para
Hi), as
follows:
EQ Hi-Mid
band
(Lo,
Lo-Mid,
Hi-Mid,
or Hi),
as follows:
Drag
handle right
or left
to increase
or decrease freMid,
ou aHi):
Drag
auma
handle
left to ou
increase
or decrease
fre Arraste
alaright
para or
a direita
a esquerda
para aumentar
quency.
Drag
a handle
right
or
left to increase
or decrease
freouquency.
diminuir
a
freqncia.
quency.
Drag a handle up or down to increase or decrease gain.
Arraste
alaup
para
cima ou
baixo
aumentar
Drag auma
handle
or down
to para
increase
or para
decrease
gain. ou
Drag a handle up or down to increase or decrease gain.
diminuir o ganho.
Adjusting EQ Plug-Ins
Adjusting
EQ
Ajustando
Plug-ins
EQ
Adjusting
EQdePlug-Ins
Plug-Ins
EQ plug-ins can map their gain, frequency, and Q/bandwidth
EQ plug-ins can map their gain, frequency, and Q/bandwidth
corresponding
encoders
in the
ACS.
Plug-ins
de EQto
podem
seus
controles
de
ganho,
frequencia
EQcontrols
plug-ins
can
mapmapear
their gain,
frequency,
and
Q/bandwidth
to corresponding
encoderscorrespondentes
in the ACS.
e controls
Q/bandwidth
para
os
codificadores
no ACS.
controls to corresponding encoders in the ACS.
When a plug-in provides additional parameters beyond those

When
plug-in
provides
additional
parameters
beyond
those
that a
map
to the
dedicated
EQ encoders,
you can
use the
OutWhen
aum
plug-in
provides
additional
parameters
beyond
those
Quando
plug-ins
oferece
parmetros
adicionais
alm
desses
that
map
to
the
dedicated
EQ
encoders,
you
can
use
the
Out-os
mapeados
para
os
codificadores
de
EQ,
voc
pode
utilizar
put
encoders.
that map to the dedicated EQ encoders, you can use the Output encoders.
codificadores
Output.
put encoders.
All plug-ins, including EQ plug-ins that do not map directly
All
including
EQ plug-ins
map
directly
Todos
os plug-ins,
incluindo
de do
EQnot
no
toplug-ins,
dedicated
EQ encoders,
can os
bethat
controlled
using
thesejam
OutAll
plug-ins,
including
EQ plug-ins
that
do
notque
map
directly
to
dedicated
EQ
encoders,
can
be
controlled
using
the
Outdiretamente
mapeados
para
os
codificadores
dedicados,
put encoders
Insert mode.
to dedicated
EQin
encoders,
can be controlled using the Output
encoders
in Insert mode.
podem
ser controlados
utilizando os codificadores Output
put
encoders
in Insert mode.
no modo
To adjust
an Insert.
EQ plug-in from the console:
To adjust an EQ plug-in from the console:
To 1adjust
anthe
EQchannel
plug-in from
the
Target
theconsole:
plug-in by pressing the channel
Para
ajustar
um plug-in
de with
EQ pela
console:
1 Target the channel with the plug-in by pressing the channel
Select the
switch.
1 Target
channel with the plug-in by pressing the channel
Select switch.
switch.
1 Select
Selecione
o canal com o plug-in pressionando seu switch Select.
2 Press the plug-in Select switch in the ACS.
2 Press the plug-in Select switch in the ACS.
Press theo plug-in
Selectdo
switch
in no
theACS.
ACS.
2 2Pressione
plug-in
3 Do oneswitch
of theSelect
following:
3 Doone
of the
If the
EQ following:
plug-in maps correctly, adjust parameters by
3 Siga
umthe
dosEQ
seguintes
procedimentos:
If
plug-in
maps
correctly,
adjust parameters
bythe
pressing
or turning
the
corresponding
encoders in
If
the
EQ
plug-in
maps
correctly,
adjust
parameters
by
Sepressing
o plug-in
de
EQ
est
mapeado
corretamente,
ajuste
or
turning
the
corresponding
encoders
in
the
ACS
EQ
section.
pressing
or
turning
the
corresponding
encoders
in
the
osACS
parmetros
pressionando
ou
girando
os
codificadores
EQ section.
ACS
EQ EQ
section.
If the
plug-in
does EQ
notdo
map
to the ACS controls, press
correspondentes
na seo
ACS.
If
the
EQ
plug-in
does
not map
the ACSsection.
controls,
press
SeIfothe
plug-in
deMode
EQ no
mapear
osto
ACS, pressione
the
Insert
switch
in the
Output
Use
the o
EQ
plug-in
does
not map
tocontroles
the ACS controls,
press
the
Insert
Mode
switch
in
the
Output
section.
Use
the
switch
InsertMode
Modeswitch
natoseo
Output.
Utilize
os the
codificadores
encoders
adjust
parameters;
use
theOutput
Insert
in the
Output
section.
UsePrevious
the
Output
encoders
toparmetros;
adjust
parameters;
thepages,
Previous
Output
para
ajustar
osuse
switches
Previous
Page
and
Next page
switches
toUse
access
other
bands,
Output
encoders
to adjust
parameters;
use
the Previous
Page
and
Next
page
switches
to
access
other
pages,
bands,
Page
e
Next
Page
para
acessar
outras
pginas,
bandas
e
and
parameters.
Page
and
Next page switches to access other pages, bands,
parmetros.
and parameters.
and parameters.
For more information, see Chapter 18, Plug-Ins.
Para
mais
informaes,
o Captulo
18, Plug-Ins.
For
more
information,
seeveja
Chapter
18, Plug-Ins.
For more information, see Chapter 18, Plug-Ins.

146
VENUE
146
Guia Profile
VENUEGuide
Profile
146 VENUE
Profile
Guide
Channel
Modes
Affecting
EQ
Modos
de Canal
Afetando
EQ
Channel
Modes
Affecting
EQ
Channel
Modes
Affecting
EQ
The following features affect operation of built-in EQ.
Os seguintes recursos afetam a operao do EQ embutido.

Dyn
EQ EQ
DynPrePre
Dyn Pre EQ
Dyn Pre EQ
By default,
Dynamics
processing
occurs before
Por
padro, built-in
processamento
embutido
Dynamics
ocorrem antes
Bydo
default,
built-in
Dynamics
processing
occurs
before
EQ
processing
in embutidona
the
signal chain
of input
channels.
processamente
do EQ
cadeia
de
sinal
dos Input
Bybuilt-in
default,
built-in
Dynamics
processing
occurs
before
built-in
EQ be
processing
in
the
signal
of input
channels.
Channels.
pode ser
mudado
emchain
umabasis
base
portoggling
canal alterando
This can
changed
on
a per-channel
by
the
built-in
EQ Isso
processing
in
the
signal
chain
of input
channels.
This
can be do
changed
per-channel
basis by toggling the
os
ajustes
DynPre
Preon
EQaasetting.
do
canal.
channels
Dyn
EQ
This
can be changed
on
per-channel
basis by toggling the
channels Dyn Pre EQ setting.
channels Dyn Pre EQ setting.
Para alterar os ajustes Dyn Pre EQ se um Input Channel:
To toggle the Dyn Pre EQ setting of an input channel:
To toggle the Dyn Pre EQ setting of an input channel:
To11toggle
the
Dyn
Pre
EQwhose
setting
of anPre
input
channel:
Selecione
ochannel
canal
cujo modo
Dyn
EQyou
deseja
mudar
Target
the
Dyn
EQ Pre
mode
want to
1 pressionando
Target
the
channel
whose
Dyn
Pre
EQ
mode
you want to
seu switch
Select.
changethe
by channel
pressing
its Select
switch.
1 Target
whose
Dyn
Pre EQ mode you want to
change by pressing its Select switch.
change by pressing its Select switch.
In seo
the on-screen
channel
Configno
section,
EQ
22Na
Config na
tela, clique
switchclick
Dynthe
PreDyn
EQ.Pre
Quando
2 In the on-screen channel Config section, click the Dyn Pre EQ
switch.
When
enabled,
the
Dyn
Pre
EQ
switch
LED
lights.
2 habilitado
In the on-screen
channel
click the Dyn Pre EQ
o LED do
switch Config
Dyn Presection,
EQ se acende.
switch. When enabled, the Dyn Pre EQ switch LED lights.
switch. When enabled, the Dyn Pre EQ switch LED lights.
Dyn Pre EQ button

Dyn Pre EQ button
Dyn Pre EQ button
Dyn Pre EQ
Dyn Pre EQ
Dyn Pre EQ
InputInput
Direct Mode
Modo
Input
DirectDirect
Mode
Input Direct Mode
Input Direct mode lets you bypass the built-in dynamics and
O modo
Input
Direct
permite
colocar
embuilt-in
bypassdynamics
os processamentos
Input
Direct
mode
lets
you
bypass
andReEQ processing,
and
inserts
onthe
Input
Channels
and FX
Input
Directe mode
letsall
you
bypass
the
dynamics
and
Dynamics
EQand
embutidos,
e on
todos
os built-in
insetts
em
InputFX
Channels
e
EQ
processing,
all
inserts
Input
Channels
and
Returns.
EQ
processing,
and all inserts on Input Channels and FX ReFX
Returns.
turns.
turns.
To toggle
Direct
model:
Para
alterarInput
o modo
Input
Direct:
To toggle Input Direct model:
To 1toggle
Input
Direct
model:
Target the input channel by pressing its Select switch, and
Selecione
o Input
Channel
pressionando
seiswitch,
switch and
Select, e
1 1Target
the input
channel
byispressing
its Select
make sure
the Inputs
page
displayed.
1 certifique-se
Target
the input
channel
byInputs
pressing
itssendo
Selectapresentada.
switch, and
de
que
a
pgina
est
make sure the Inputs page is displayed.
make sure the Inputs page is displayed.
2 Click the Input Direct button in the channel Config section in
2 2Click
theno
Input
Direct
button
theseo
channel
Config
in
Clique
boto
Input
Direct
na
Config
nosection
canto
the
upper
right
corner
of
thein
When
enabled,
the superior
Input
2 Click
the Input
Direct
button
inscreen.
the channel
Config
section
in
direito
daright
tela. corner
Quandoofhabilitado,
o LED
Input
Direct the
se acende.
the
upper
the
screen.
When
enabled,
Input
lights.
theDirect
upperLED
right
corner of the screen. When enabled, the Input
Direct LED lights.
Direct LED lights.
EQ
Grfico para
Sadas
Graphic
EQ for
Outputs
Graphic
EQ
for
Outputs
Graphic
EQ
for
Outputs
A built-in 31-band Graphic EQ can be inserted on Mains,
Um EQ grfico de 31 bandas embutido pode ser inserido em Mains,
A built-in
31-band
Graphic EQ
beThe
inserted
on Mains,
Groups,Auxes,
Auxes,
Matrixes,
andcan
Graphic
EQ provides
AGroups,
built-in
31-band
Graphic
EQ
can
inserted
on Mains,
Matrixes
e PQs.
OPQs.
EQbegrfico
oferece
Groups,
Auxes,
Matrixes,
and
PQs.
The
Graphic
EQ provides
+/
12
dB
of
gain
and
constant
Q.
+/
12
dB
de
ganho
e
Q
constante.
Groups, Auxes, Matrixes, and PQs. The Graphic EQ provides
+/ 12 dB of gain and constant Q.
+/ 12 dB of gain and constant Q.
Assigning
Graphic
a mono
uses one
Atribuir
um aEQ
grficoEQatoum
canal channel
mono utiliza
umavailable
EQ grfico
Assigning
aEQ.
Graphic
EQ toaaGraphic
mono channel
uses
one
available
Graphic
Assigning
EQ
to
a
stereo
channel
uses
disponvel.
Atribuir um
EQa grfico
a um canal
utiliza
dois
Assigning
a Graphic
EQ to
mono channel
uses estreo
one available
Graphic
EQ.
Assigning
a Graphic
EQ to a stereo channel uses
Graphic
EQs
disponveis.
two
available
Graphic
EQs.
Graphic EQ. Assigning a Graphic EQ to a stereo channel uses
two available Graphic EQs.
two available Graphic EQs.
Graphic
be adjusted
on-screen,
or ou
using
the input
fadOs
GraphicEQs
EQscan
podem
ser ajustados
na tela
utilizando
os faders
Graphic
EQs can
beoferecem
adjusted
on-screen,
orof
using
the input
fad- de
de
entrada,
que
acesso
a
dois
bancos
de
bandas
ers,
which
provide
access
to
two
banks
16
frequency
bands
Graphic EQs can be adjusted on-screen, or using the input faders,
which provide
to two banks of 16 frequency bands
freqncia
cada. access
each.
ers,
which provide
access to two banks of 16 frequency bands
each.
each.
Configurando Graphic EQs
Graphic
Graphic
EQ EQ
Controls
Controls
Controles EQ grfico
Para configurar o nmero de Graphic EQs:
OsInput
faders
de entrada
1-16
oferecem
controle
das
bandas de
Input
faders
faders
1-16
1-16
provide
provide
control
control
of Graphic
of Graphic
EQ frequency
EQ
frequency
frequencia
do can
Graphic
EQ.
Voc
pode
ajustar
os Graphic EQs na
bands.
bands.
You You
can also
also
adjust
adjust
graphic
graphic
EQs EQs
on-screen.
on-screen.
Configuring
Configuring
Graphic
Graphic
EQsEQs
To configure
To configure
the number
the number
of Graphic
of Graphic
EQs:EQs:
11Coloque
sistema
no modo
Config.
Put
1 the
Putosystem
the
system
into
into
Config
Config
mode.
mode.
tela.
to
Gothe
to Options
Options
the Options
page
and
click
the System
the System
tab. tab.
22VGo
2pgina
epage
clique
naand
aba click
System.
Stage
Features
3 Click
3 Click
theRack
Edit
the button
Edit
button
on-screen.
on-screen.
Stage
Racks
are
with
FOH
and
provide
all stage
4 Choose
4 Choose
the number
the used
number
of
Graphic
ofan
Graphic
EQsRack,
EQs
fromfrom
the pop-up
the pop-up
menu.
menu.
3 Clique no boto Edit na tela.
4You
Escolha
o nmero
de
EQs
no resources
menu
Voc
pode
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Upresources
topop-up.
two
Racks
You
can choose
can
choose
to
dedicate
to Graphic
dedicate
processing
processing
to Stage
provide
to
provide
0, 0,
escolher
os
recursos
de
processamento
dedicado
para
proporcionar
be
used
simultaneously,
8, can
16,
8,or
16,24
orGraphic
24
Graphic
EQs.EQs. supporting up to 96 total inputs.
0, 8, 16 ou 24 Graphic EQs.

DVI supported.
Audio I/O
GEQ GEQ (Windows compatible)

USB keyboard and trackball/mouse

Configuring
Configuring
the number
the number
of Graphic
of Graphic
EQs EQs
20630
20630
Hz Hz
80020kHz
80020kHz
InputInput
faderfader
banking
banking
and assignment
and assignment
switches
switches
The
connection
between
Para
habilitar
o Graphic
EQ: FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
To enable
To
enable
the graphic
the graphic
EQ: EQ:
a Digital
Snake
cable.
Selecione
um
bus
Output
um
EQ
grficoatribudo.
SeIfnenhum
Avid
orOutput
assembled
by
your
preferred
1 1Target
1from
Target
an
Output
an
bus
with
bus com
with
a Graphic
a Graphic
EQ assigned.
EQvendor.
assigned.
If no
no
EQ grficoest atribudo, abra a aba 31-Band Graphic Equalizer na
graphic
graphic
EQ isEQ
assigned,
is assigned,
display
display
the 31-Band
the 31-Band
Graphic
Graphic
Equalizer
Equalizer
pgina Outputs e atribua um utilizando o menu pop-up Graphic EQ.
tab in
tabthe
in Outputs
the Outputs
pagepage
and and
assign
assign
one one
using
using
the Graphic
the Graphic
EQ EQ
Optional Components
pop-up
pop-up
menu.
menu.
To insert
To insert
aum
Graphic
a
EQ on
EQ
anon
Output
anbus
Output
bus: bus:
Para
inserir
EQGraphic
grfico
em
um
Output:
2 Clique no boto In na tela para alternar o status in/out. Quando
The following
components
are optional,
and must be
dobutton
LED
doon-screen
switch
In/Out
setoggle
acende.
2 habilitado,
Click
2 Click
the In
the
In button
on-screen
to toggle
to
in/out
in/out
status.
status.
When
When
1 Target
1 Target
the bus
the by
buspressing
by pressing
its Select
its Select
switch.
switch.
1 Selecione o bus pressionando seu swtich Select.
enabled,
enabled,
the In/Out
the In/Out
switch
switch
LED LED
lights.
lights.
a curva
Graphic
EQ:
ajustar
USB flash
diskdo
(or
other portable
2 In
2the
InOutputs
the Outputs
page,page,
clickclick
the 31-Band
the 31-Band
Graphic
Graphic
Equalizer
Equalizer
tab. tab. Para
System
Components
2 Na pgina Outputs, clique na aba 31-Band Graphic Equalizer.
Toaset
graphic
a graphic
EQ curve:
EQda
curve:
3 Click
3 Click
the Graphic
the Graphic
EQ pop-up
EQ pop-up
menu
menu
and and
choose
choose
an available
an available To1set
Pressione
o switch
banda do EQ grficoou clique na tela para
Included
Components
mono
or
or stereo
Graphic
Graphic
EQ.grfico
EQ. e escolha um EQ grfico mono 1 selecionar
3mono
Clique
nostereo
menu
pop-up
EQ
o
banco
apropriado
deswitch
bandas
EQ:on-screen
(20 toto630
800
Press
1 Press
the Graphic
the Graphic
EQ band
EQ band
switch
or click
orde
click
on-screen
select
toHz,
select
20
Headphones
with116
1/4-inch
jack
ou estreo disponvel.
Hz
to
kHz).
Entradas
so
temporariamnte
substitudas
com
the appropriate
the appropriate
bankbank
of graphic
of graphic
EQ bands:
EQ bands:
(20 to
(20630
to 630
Hz, Hz,
31-Band
31-Band
Graphic
Graphic
Equalizer
Equalizer
tab tab
faders
de controle
de freqncia.
Dynamic
or
condenser
microphone
andreplaced
XLRreplaced
micwith
cable
800
800
Hz
to
Hz
20
to
kHz).
20
kHz).
Inputs
Inputs
116
116
are
temporarily
are
temporarily
with
(for
Talkback)
frequency
frequency
faderfader
controls.
controls.
2 Ajuste um dos 16 faders controlando a banda do EQ
grficoselecionada.
2
Adjust
2 Adjust
one one
of the
of 16
thefaders
16 faders
controlling
controlling
the selected
the selected
graphic
graphic
EQ
bands.
EQ
bands.
3 Pressione
outro (for
switch
da bandaWord
do EQ
grficoou
clique
BNC cables
connecting
clock
between
the na tela
selecionar
outro
banco
deband
bandas
de
EQ
e ajsute
conforme
VENUE Mouse Pad
3 para
Press
3 Press
another
another
Graphic
Graphic
EQexternal
band
EQ
switch
switch
or
click
or click
on-screen
on-screen
to to
VENUE
system
and
digital
devices)
necessrio.
select
select
another
another
bankbank
of graphic
of graphic
EQ bands
EQ bands
and and
adjust
adjust
as needed.
as needed.
VENUE Profile Guide
Para
ajustar
ographic
ganho
do Graphic EQ:
To adjust
To adjust
graphic
EQ gain:
EQ gain:

Press
Press
the GEQ
theoGEQ
80020kHz
80020kHz
switch,
thenthen
adjust
adjust
last
the enlast
enPressione
switch
GEQ switch,
80020kHz
switch
,the
e ajuste
o ltimo
Rack(s) (see next)
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
fader
sobre
o banco
dos
faders
GE,
ouuse
use
o controle
Output na
coder
coder
above
above
that
that
bankbank
of GEQ
of GEQ
faders,
faders,
or
or the
use
on-screen
the on-screen
tela.
Output
Output
control.
control.
The
following
Assigning
Assigning
a graphic
a graphic
EQ (mono)
EQ
(mono)
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks, and Cables
The
31-Band
31-Band
Graphic
Graphic
EQ appears
EQ appears
on-screen.
on-screen.
OThe
EQ
grficode
31 bandas
apresentado
Resetando
os Parmetros EQ grfico
Each
Mix Rack
or FOHRack
includes:na tela.
Inserting
Inserting
Graphics
Graphics
EQs
onprimary
on
Outputs
Outputs
Inserindo
Graphics
EQs
em Outputs
Snake
connectors
toEQs
enable
and redundant (if
System Restore CD
Resetting
Resetting
Graphic
Graphic
EQ EQ
Parameters
Parameters
In-Circuit
In-Circuit

Output
Output
Para resetar uma banda para seus valores padro, siga um dos
procedimentos:
Toseguintes
reset
To reset
a band
a band
to
itstodefault
its default
setting,
setting,
do one
do of
one
the
of following:
the following:
Mix
Rack
Options
Hold
Hold
the Default
the Default
switch
switch
and and
presspress
the Select
the Select
switch
switch
on on
I/O
Segure o switch Default e pressione o switch Select do fader
theOptions
fader
the fader
corresponding
corresponding
to the
to graphic
the graphic
EQ band.
EQ band.
Right-click
Right-click
the
individual
the individual
band
faderfader
on-screen
on-screen
and and
AI16
Clique
com
o boto
direitoband
o fader
banda
na
e escolha
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
thatde
provides
16 tela
analog
Bands
Bands

31-band
31-band
graphic
graphic
EQ EQ
correspondente banda do Graphic EQ.
choose
choose
Reset.
Reset.
Reset.
mic/line
level inputs
Alt-click
a
banda
na
tela.
Alt-click
Alt-click
the band
the band
on-screen.
on-screen.
Para resetar todo o EQ grfico para flat:
To outputs
reset
To reset
the entire
the entire
graphic
graphic
EQ toEQflat:
to flat:
Clique
com
oand
boto
direito
lugar
na on-screen
seo
EQ grfico
Right-click
Right-click
anywhere
anywhere
in the
inem
Graphic
thequalquer
Graphic
EQ
section
EQprovides
section
on-screen
XO16
Analog
Digital
Output
Card
that
8
analog
na
tela
(mas
no
diretamente
sobre
um
fader)
e
escolha
Reset
GEQ
(but
(but
not
directly
not
directly
on
a
on
fader)
a
fader)
and
and
choose
choose
Reset
Reset
GEQ
GEQ
Section.
Section.
Section.

and
Chapter
Chapter
17: other
EQ
17: 147
EQ 147
Captulo 17: EQ 147
3 Choose a Presets folder in the Folder display at the top of the

Presets window. If necessary, choose the appropriate Presets
folder
by selecting
it frominthe
3 Choose
a Presets folder
theFolder
Folderpop-up
displaymenu.
at the top of the
Built-in parametric and Graphic EQ settings can be copied and
EQ Settings and Presets
3 3Escolha
uma
de Presets
no
Folder
no
Presets
window.
Ifpasta
necessary,
choose
thedisplay
appropriate
Presets
Choose
a
Presets
folder
in
the
Folder
display
at the
toptopo
of theda
pasted between channels. EQ presets can also be saved and
For
more
information,
see
Chapter
20,
Shows
and
File
janela
Presets.
Se
necessrio,
escolha
a
pasta
Presets
apropriada
EQ
Settings
and
Presets
folder
by selecting
the Folder
pop-up
menu.
Ajustes
e archive
Presetsand
EQtransfer
Presets
window.itIffrom
necessary,
choose
the appropriate
Presets
loaded to
Built-in
parametric
and
Graphicsettings.
EQ settings can be copied and
selecionando-a
no menu pop-up Folder.
Management.
folder
by
selecting
it
from
the
Folder
pop-up
menu.
pasted
between channels.
presets
can
also be saved
and and
Built-in
andEQ
EQ
settings
copied
For more information, see Chapter 20, Shows and File
Ajustes
de EQparametric
paramtricos
eGraphic
EQ grficos
podemcan
serbecopiados
e
loaded
to
archive
and
transfer
settings.
Para mais informaes, veja o Captulo 20, Gerenciamento
pasted
between
channels.
EQ
presets
can
also
be
saved
ande
Management.
colados
entre and
canais.
Presets de
EQSettings
podem tambm ser salvos
For more information, see Chapter 20, Shows and File
Copying
Pasting
EQ
de Arquivos e Shows.
loaded
to
archive
and
transfer
settings.
carregados para arquivar e tranferir ajustes.
Management.
EQ Settings and Presets
To
copy and and
paste Pasting
an EQ setting:
Copying
EQ Settings
Copying
Pasting EQ Settings
1 Do
one of theand
following:
Copiando e Colando Ajustes EQ
To copy and paste an EQ setting:
Paracopiar
e colar
um ajuste EQ
EQ: setting, right-click the on-screen
To copy
a parametric
To one
copyofand
an EQ setting:
1 Do
thepaste
following:
EQ section
or
EQ graph (not on an encoder) and choose
1 Siga
dos
procedimentos:
Docopy
one
of
the following:
Copy
EQseguintes
1 um
To
aSettings.
parametric
EQ setting, right-click the on-screen
Para
copiar um ajuste de EQ paramtrico, right-click na seo
EQ
section
or
EQ
graph
(not
on an encoder)
and
choose
To
copy
a
parametric
EQsobre
setting,
thee
on-screen
EQ
orou
EQ grfico na tela (no
umright-click
codificador)
escolha
Copy
EQsection
Settings.
EQ
or
EQ
graph
(not
on
an
encoder)
and
choose
EQ Settings.
Copy
To copy
a Graphic EQ setting, right-click the graphic EQ
Copy
EQ
Settings.
ouor
display
(not on a fader) and choose Copy GEQ Settings.
Para
copiar
ajusteEQ
de EQ
grfico,
right-clickthe
nographic
display do
or
aum
To
copy
Graphic
setting,
right-click
EQEQ
grfico (no sobre um fader) e escolha Copy GEQ Settings.
display
(notaon
a fader)
and
choose
Copy GEQthe
Settings.
To copy
Graphic
EQ
setting,
right-click
graphic EQ
display (not on a fader) and choose Copy GEQ Settings.
Presets window
Presets icon
EQ Presets window
Presets window
Presets icon
EQ Reset/Copy/Paste pop-up menu

EQ Reset/Copy/Paste
pop-up menu
Menu
pop-up EQ Reset/Copy/Paste
3 Do
of the following:
EQone
Reset/Copy/Paste
pop-upyou
menu
2 Go
to
the channel where
want to paste the settings.
2 VaoTo
canal
noaqual
deseja colar
os ajustes.
paste
parametric
EQ setting,
right-click in the new

3 Dochannels
one of the
following:
EQ
section or graph and choose Paste EQ Set-

3 To
Dopaste
one of
the following:
tings.
a parametric
EQ setting, right-click in the new
Para
colar um ajuste de EQ paramtrico, right-click na seo EQ
channels
EQ
section
or
and Paste
choose
EQthe
Set-new
To
paste
a
parametric
setting,
right-click
in
ou
orEQ
grfico do novo canalgraph
eEQ
escolha
EQPaste
Settings.
tings.
channels
EQ
section
or
graph
and
choose
Paste
ou To paste a Graphic EQ setting, right-click in the newEQ Settings.um ajsute de EQ grfico, right-click na seo EQ ou
Para
or
colar
channels
Graphic EQ section and choose Paste GEQ SetEQ grfico do novo canal e escolha Paste GEQ Settings.
Presets window
EQ Presets window
Presets icon
To preview an existing preset, click its name in the Presets

EQany
Presets
window
4 Do
of the
following:
window.
4 Siga
um
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
4
Do
any
of
the
following:
To preview
existing
preset, click
its name
in theor
Presets
load
thean
currently
selected
preset,
pressseu
Enter
To
Para
visualizer
um preset
existente,
clique
nomeclick
na janela
window.
To
preview
anthe
existing
preset,
clicktitle
its name
the
Close
box in
Presets
window
bar. in the Presets
Presets.
window.
To
load
the
currently
selected
press
Enter
or click
Para
carregar
o and
preset
selecionado,
Enter
ou clique
To
load
a preset
close
the preset,
Presetspressione
window,
douthe
Close
box
in
the
Presets
window
title
bar.
na
caixa
Close
na
barra
de
ttulos
da
janela
Presets.
To
load
the
currently
selected
preset,
press
Enter
or
click
ble-click the preset.
Para
um
Preset
ethe
fechar
a janela
Presets,
clique duas
thecarregar
Close
box
in
the
Presets
window
title
bar.
To
load
a preset
and
close
Presets
window,
douTo save
the
current
EQ
settings
as
a new
preset,
click New
vezes
no
preset.
ble-click
the
preset.
To
load
presetfor
and
thefile.
Presets window, douand
enter
a aname
theclose
preset
Para salvar os ajustes de EQ atuais como um novo preset,
ble-click
the
preset.
save
thewithout
current
EQ
as a onew
preset,
New
To
To
cancel
changing
click
Cancel.
clique
New
e digite
umsettings
nomesettings,
para
arquivo
de click
preset.
and
enter
a
name
for
the
preset
file.
To
save
the
current
EQ
settings
as
a
new
preset,
click
New
Para cancelar sem alterar ajustes, clique Cancel.
and
enter
a
name
for
the
preset
file.
To or
cancel
settings,
To save
load without
a preset changing
for the Graphic
EQ: click Cancel.
or
a Graphic EQ setting, right-click in the new
tings.
To
paste
channels
Graphic
and right-click
choose Paste
GEQnew
Set ToEQ
paste
a Graphic
EQ
setting,
in the
Para salvar
ou carregar
um preset
parasettings,
o Graphic
EQ: Cancel.
Presets para
embutido
eEQ
EQsection
grfico
To
without
changing
1 Go to
thecancel
Outputs
page for
the channel
on click
which
the
tings.
channels Graphic EQ section and choose Paste GEQ Set- To
save or load a preset for the Graphic EQ:
Presets for Built-In and Graphic EQ
graphic
EQ
is
assigned.
If
necessary,
click
the
31-Band
Graphic
1
V
pgina
Outputs
do
canal
em
que
o
EQ
grfico
est
atribudo.
Voc podetings.
armazenar e carregar ajustes de EQ em um disco como
To to
save
a preset
for
the channel
Graphic
taborOutputs
toload
display
the
graphic
EQ on EQ:
that
channel.
1 Se
Go
the
page
the
on
which
the
necessrio,
clique
nafor
aba
31-Band
Graphic
Equalizer
para
You can
store and
loadpodem
EQ settings
to disk
as processasdores
Preset files. Pre-de Equalizer
arquivos
Preset.
Presets
ser usados
com
Presets
for
Built-In
and Graphic
EQArquivos Preset graphic
assigned.
Ifpage
necessary,
the 31-Band
Graphic
visualizer
EQ
grfico
nesse
canal.
EQsets
embutidos
ou plug-ins,
incluindo
o EQ grfico.
1 GoEQ
toois
the
Outputs
for theclick
channel
on which
the
can be used
with built-in
and plug-in
EQ processors,
in2 Click the Presets icon (above the EQ bands, next to the
Presets
forload
Built-In
and
Graphic
EQ
Equalizer
tabEQ
to is
display
the If
graphic
EQ on
that
channel.
podem
serthe
movidos
sistemas
e utilizados
outros
graphic
assigned.
necessary,
click
the
31-Band Graphic
cluding
graphic
EQ. EQ
Preset
files
can
be moved
between
sysYou
can
store
andentre
settings
to disk
aspara
Preset
files.Shows.
PreIn-Circuit
button).
2 Clique
no
cone
Presetsthe
(acima
das EQ
bandas
de channel.
EQ, prximo ao
Presets
podem
ser
acessados
pela
superfcie
de
controlefrom
ou na
Equalizer
tab
to
display
graphic
on
that
tems
and
used
for
other
Shows.
Presets
can
be
accessed
sets
can
be
used
with
built-in
and
plug-in
EQ
processors,
inYou can store and load EQ settings to disk as Preset files. Pre- 2 Click the Presets icon (above the EQ bands, next to the
boto
In).
tela.
3 Choose a Presets folder in the Folder display at the top of the
the sets
control
on-screen.
cluding
the surface
graphic
EQ.
Preset
filesand
canplug-in
be moved
sys-in- In-Circuit
can
be usedor
with
built-in
EQ between
processors,
2 Clickbutton).
the Presets icon (above the EQ bands, next to the
Presets window. If necessary, choose a different Presets folder
tems
and
used
for
other
Shows.
Presets
can
be
accessed
from
cluding
the
graphic
EQ.
Preset
files
can
be
moved
between
sys3
Escolha uma
pasta de Presets no display Folder no topo da
Verifique
a
pasta
Factory
Presets
para
ajustes
prIn-Circuit
button).
Check the
Factory
Presets folder for preconfigured settings.
by
clickinga Presets
and selecting
it from
the Folder
pop-up
3 Choose
folder in
the Folder
display
at themenu.
top of the
the tems
control
or other
on-screen.
andsurface
used for
Shows. Presets can be accessed from
janela Presets. Se necessrio, escolha uma pasta Presets diferente
configurados.
Presets
window.
If
necessary,
choose
a
different
Presets
folder
3
Choose
a
Presets
folder
in
the
Folder
display
at
the
top
of the
the control surface or on-screen.
4 clicando
Do any eofselecionando-a
the following:no menu pop-up Folder.
To save
or load
a
preset:Presets folder for preconfigured settings.
Check
the
Factory
by
clicking
and
selecting
it
from
the
Folder
pop-up
menu.
Presets
window.
If
necessary,
choose
a
different
Presets
folder
Para salvar ou carregar um preset:
To preview an existing preset, click its name in the Presets
1 AdjustCheck
EQ parameters
needed.
the FactoryasPresets
folder for preconfigured settings.
4 Siga
um dos and
seguintes
procedimentos:
by clicking
selecting
it from the Folder pop-up menu.
4 Dowindow.
any of the following:
To save or load a preset:
Para visualizar um preset existente, clique seu nome na janela
1 Ajuste os parmetros EQ conforme necessrio.
2 Click
theor
EQload
Presets
icon on-screen. (The Presets icon is
Do
anythe
of an
the
following:
4 To
To
preview
existing
preset, click
its name
in theor
Presets
load
currently
selected
preset,
press Enter
click
To save
a preset:
Presets.
1 Adjust
EQ parameters
as needed.
available
in
the
Inputs
screen
EQ
section,
and
in
the
graphic
window.
To
preview
an
existing
preset,
click
its
name
in
the
Presets

Para
carregar
o
preset
selecionado,
pressione
Enter
ou
clique
the
Close
box
in
the
Presets
window
title
bar.
2 Clique
no cone EQ Presets na tela. (o picone Presets est
1 Adjust EQ parameters as needed.
EQ
screen
output
channel).
2 Click
the
EQanPresets
(The
na
caixa
Close
na
barra
de
ttulos
da
janela
Presets.
window.
disponvel
nafor
seo
EQ daicon
tela on-screen.
Inputs, e na
telaPresets
Graphicicon
EQ is
de um
To
load
the
currently
selected
preset,
press
Enter
or
click
To load a preset and close the Presets window, douavailable
inthe
theEQ
Inputs
screen
EQ
section, and
the graphic
the
Para
carregar
um
Preset
e fechar
a
janela
Presets,
clique
duas
canal
sada).
2deClick
Presets
icon
on-screen.
(TheinPresets
icon is
Close
box
in
the
Presets
window
title press
bar.
To
load
the
currently
selected
preset,
Enter
or click
ble-click
the
preset.
vezes no preset.
EQ available
screen forinanthe
output
channel).
Inputs
screen EQ section, and in the graphic
the Close
boxand
in graphic
the
Presets
window
title
bar.
load
a preset
close
the Presets
window,
douTo
save
the
current
as
a new
To
Para
salvar
os ajustes
de EQ
EQ settings
atuais como
um preset,
novo preset,
EQ screen for an output channel).
ble-click
the
preset.
To
load
a
preset
and
close
the
Presets
window,
douclick
New
and
enter
a
name
for
the
preset
file.
clique New e digite um nome para o arquivo de preset.
ble-click
the
preset.
save
the
current
graphic
EQ
settings
as
a
new
preset,
To
Para
cancelar
sem
alterar
ajustes,
clique
Cancel
To cancel without changing settings, click Cancel.
click
a name
for EQ
the settings
preset file.
ToNew
saveand
theenter
current
graphic
as a new preset,

148
Guia VENUE Profile
click New
and enter
a name
for theclick
preset
file.
To cancel
without
changing
settings,
Cancel.
To cancel without changing settings, click Cancel.
Control Ranges for Built-In Parametric EQ (All Modes)

Table 18. Control ranges for built-in parametric EQ
Band
Control
Range (Digital)
Defaults (Digital)
Range (Analog)
Defaults (Analog)
High
(Bell/Shelf)
Frequency
20 Hz to 20 kHz
10 kHz
2 kHz to 20 kHz
6 kHz
18 dB
0Additional
dB
Stage Rack Features

Gain
Q/Bandwidth
10 to 0.1
can
supporting up to
High-Mid
Frequency
2096
Hztotal
to 20inputs.
kHz
Audio I/O
Gain
18 dB

Q/Bandwidth
10 to 0.1
8 analog output channels;
analog
Low-Mid
Frequency expandable up
20 to
Hz48
to 20
kHz or
Gain
18 dB
Q/Bandwidth
10 to 0.1

to a VENUE FOH
Low applicable) connection
Frequency
20 Rack.
Hz to 20 kHz
(Bell/Shelf)
Gain
System Components
Q/Bandwidth
Required
15 dB Components
0 dB
1.0
Shelf only
none

5 kHz
400 Hz tominimum
8 kHz
2 kHz
recommended; 1024x768
resolution).
VGA and
DVI supported.
0 dB
15 dB
0 dB
1.0
0.1 to 2.0 octaves
0.2

1 kHz
100 Hz to 2 kHz
450 Hz
1.0
0.1 to 2.0 octaves
0.2

directly
0 dBa Digital Snake cable.
15 This
dB cable can be0purchased
dB
Optional
200
Hz
Components
30 Hz to 200 Hz
80 Hz

15 dB
0 dB
18 dB
0 dB
10 to 0.5
other
storage device for
1.0 USB flash disk (or
Shelf
only portable USBnone
Included Components
Fader Banks and Graphic EQ Frequency Bands

(for Talkback)
VENUE Profile Fader Banks and Graphic EQ Frequency Bands
Bank
1 (2) IEC power cables
Two
(20 to

630 Hz)
1
Fader
VENUE Mouse
Pad
VENUE Profile Guide

Freq
20 Hz
Freq
125 Hz

5
6
7
8
25 Hz
31.5 Hz
40 Hz
50
25-pin
cables
to GPI
Hz D-Sub63
Hz (for connecting
80 Hz
100devices)
Hz
11
12
200 Hz
250 Hz
160 Hz
(800 Hz
to 20Mix
kHz)Rack or FOH Rack includes:
Each
2

800
Hz
1000 Hz
Freq
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
1.25 kHz
13
14
15
16
VENUE
Expansion
315 Hz Profile
400 Hz
500 Hz Options
630 Hz
Bank 2Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables

Racks,
Fader
System Restore
CD
1
Fader
Protective9Dust Cover 10
Rack(s) (see next)
1.6 kHz
2.5 kHz
3.15 kHz
4 kHz
14
15
16
Mix Rack Options

2 kHz
Fader
iLok USB Smart
Key (for10
storing plug-in
9
11 authorizations)
12
I/O13
Options

12.5 kHz
16 kHz
20 kHz
n/a
5 kHz
6.3 kHz
Freq
Two (2) IEC
power cables
8 kHz
10 kHz


outputs
and
Chapter
17:other
EQ 149
Captulo 17: EQ 149
150
Guia VENUE Profile
Chapter
18:
Chapter
18:Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Chapter
Plug-Ins
Captulo
18: 18:
Plug-Ins
Este
captulo
explica
como
instalar
einstall
configurar
plug-ins
antes
de uma
This
chapter
explains
how
to to
install
and
configure
plug-ins
be-beThis
chapter
explains
how
and
configure
plug-ins
This chapter
explains
how
to install
anduma
configure
plug-ins beperformance
e como
utilizar
plug-ins
durante
performance.
fore
a performance,
and
how
to to
use
plug-ins
during
a perforfore
a performance,
and
how
use
plug-ins
during
a perforfore a performance,
and how to use plug-ins during a perforStage
Rack Features
mance.
mance.
mance.
Plug-ins podem ser inseridos em todos os canais e busses de sadas,
Stage Racks
areinserted
used with
an
FOH
Rack,
and
provide
allreverb
stage
ouPlug-Ins
utilizados
como
dechannels
bus
para
efeitos
como
can
be
onon
all all
channels
and
bus
outputs,
or or
Plug-Ins
can
beprocessadores
inserted
and
bus
outputs,
Plug-Ins
can
be inserted
on all
channels
and
busStage
outputs,
or
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Racks
e delay.
used
as as
busbus
processors
forfor
effects
such
as as
reverb
and
delay.
used
processors
effects
such
reverb
and
delay.
used
as
bus
processors
for
effects
such
as
reverb
and
delay.
Para
informaes
completas
sobre
plug-ins compatveis
com
For
complete
information
on on
VENUE-compatible
plug-ins,
For
complete
information
VENUE-compatible
plug-ins,
For
complete
information
VENUE-compatible plug-ins,
VENUE,
visite
o website
Avid on
(www.avid.com).
Audio
I/O
visit
thethe
Avid
website
(www.avid.com).
visit
Avid
website
(www.avid.com).
visit the Avid website (www.avid.com).
48 inputs
Guia Rpido
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Quick
Start
individually
selectable
Plug-Ins
Quick
Startphantom power.
Utilizando
os modos
Config
e Show
para Plug-Ins
Using
Config
and
Show
Modes
for Plug-Ins
Using
Using Config
Config and
and Show
Show Modes
Modes for
for Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
The
current
Console
mode
status
(Config
or or
Show
mode)
deOAdditional
modo
atual
da
console
(Config
ou
Show)
determina
quais
funes
The
current
Console
mode
status
(Config
Show
mode)
deRequired
Components
The current Console mode status (Config or Show mode) de-
dotermines
plug-ins
estoplug-in
disponveis.
termines
which
functions
areare
available.
which
plug-in
functions
available.
termines
which
plug-in functions
available.
The
following
components
must beare
purchased
separately:
Config
mode
is required
to to
install
plug-ins,
assign
them
to to
OConfig
modo
Config
necessrio
para
instalar
plug-ins,
atribu-los
a slots
mode
is
required
install
plug-ins,
assign
them
Video mode
Display
flat-panelassign
VGA
display
Config
is (15-inch
required or
to greater
install plug-ins,
them
to
derack
racks,
eand
estabelecer
roteamento
derouting.
side-chain.
Quando
no
modo
rack
slots,
to to
establish
side-chain
When
in in
Show
slots,
and
establish
side-chain
routing.
When
Show
recommended;
minimumrouting.
resolution).
VGA
and
rack
slots,
andoperao
to1024x768
establish
side-chain
in Show
Show,
qualquer
que
pode
interromper
oWhen
fluxo
de
udio
mode,
any
operations
that
might
interrupt
audio
throughput
mode,
any
operations
that
might
interrupt
audio
throughput
DVI supported.
mode,
operations
that might interrupt audio throughput
travada
eany
fica
indisponvel.
are
locked
outout
and
unavailable.
are
locked
and
unavailable.
locked
out and
are
USB
keyboard
andunavailable.
trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
Aes
de
plug-ins
que
interrompem
o audio
exigem
o modo
Plug-In
actions
that
interrupt
audio
require
Config
mode.
Plug-In
actions
that
interrupt
audio
require
Config
mode.
Plug-In
actions
thatinformaes,
interrupt
audio
Config
mode.
Config.
Para
mais
vejarequire
Modos
Config
e Show
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
ForFor
more
information,
see
Config
Mode
and
Show
Mode
Plug-Ins Quick Start
more information, see Config Mode and Show Mode
For
more information,
see Config Mode and Show Mode
Antes de
performance,
habilite expandable
o modo Config
na pgina
8uma
analog
output channels;
upe:
to 48 analog or
on on
page
40.40.40.
Before
a performance,
enable
Config
mode
and
dodo
thethe
followpage
Before
a
performance,
enable
Config
mode
and
follow
The
connection
Before
Instale
(Veja
e Autorizando
Plug-Ins
na
on page 40.
aplug-ins
performance,
enable
Config
mode and do
the followdigital
outputs
perInstalando
Stage Rack.
ing:
ing:
pgina 151).
ing:
Synchronization
Atribua
plug-ins
aos
racks
e
slots
de
racks
(Veja
Racks
de
PlugInstall
plug-ins
(see
Installing
and
Authorizing
Plug-Ins
Install plug-ins
(see
Installing
Authorizing Plug-Ins
and
Control
I/O and
Ins
Install
plug-ins
(see
Installing
and Authorizing Plug-Ins
Installing
Authorizing
Plug-Ins
na
pgina
156).
on
page
151).
Installing
and
Plug-Ins
Instalando
eand
Autorizando
Plug-Ins
on page 151).
Installing
and Authorizing
Authorizing
Plug-Ins
onSnake
connectors
to
and
redundant
(if
page
151).
Atribua
endereamento
deenable
entradaprimary
e sada de
plug-ins,
incluindo
Assign
plug-ins
to
racks
and
rack
slots
(see
Plug-In
Optional
Plug-ins
cancan
beComponents
installed
and
authorized
onon
systems
using
roteamento
Assign
plug-ins
to
racks
and
slots
(see
Plug-In
Racks
applicable)
connection
to
arack
VENUE
FOH
Rack. Racks
Plug-ins
be
installed
and
authorized
systems
using
de
side-chain
(Veja
Atribuindo
e
Endereando
Plug Assign plug-ins to racks and rack slots (see Plug-In Racks
Plug-ins
podem
instalados
autorizados
sistema
utilizado
Plug-ins
can beser
installed
and eauthorized
onno
systems
using
on
page
156).
their
installer
discs
or or
USB
storage
devices.
(Plug-ins
areare
notnot
on
page
156).
Ins
na
pgina
159).
their
installer
discs
USB
storage
devices.
(Plug-ins
seus
discos
de instalao
ou mdias
dedevices.
armazenamento
(No
The
following
components
are
optional,
and(Plug-ins
must beUSB.
on page 156).
their
installer
discs or USB
storage
are not
to to
beinstalar
installed
adjusted
using
only
thethe
Standalone
Assign
Visualize
e ajuste
plug-ins
utilizando
a console
ou a tela do able
able
be
installed
or
adjusted
using
only
Standalone
softplug-in
input
and
output
routing,
including
possvel
ouor
configurar
plug-ins
utilizando
apenas o softsoftware
Assign
plug-in
input
and
output
routing,
including
purchased
separately:
able
to
be
installed
or
adjusted
using
only
the
Standalone
softsoftware
Assign (Veja
plug-in
input and
outputna
routing,
including
Ajustando
Plug-Ins
pgina
161).
ware.)
ware.)
Standalone.)
side-chain
routing
(see
Assigning
and
Routing
Plug-Ins
on
side-chainComponents
routing (see Assigning and Routing Plug-Ins on
ware.)
USB
flash
disk
(or
other
portable
USB
storage
device
for
System
side-chain
routing
(see Assigning
Routing
Plug-Ins
on
page
Salve
e carregue
ajustes
de plug-insand
como
Presets
ou com
159).
page
159).
transfer
of
Show data;
512
MB
or larger
recommended)
snapshots
(Veja Presets de Plug-In Presets e Snapshots na
Because
installing
cancan
interrupt
audio
throughput,
page 159).
Because
installing
plug-ins
interrupt
audio
throughput,
Pelo fato
de queplug-ins
instalar
pode
interromper
o fluxo de
Because
installing
plug-insplug-ins
can interrupt
audio throughput,
View
and
adjust
plug-ins
using
the
console
or
software
pgina
164).
View
and
adjust
plug-ins
using
the
console
or
software
always
install
plug-ins
before
a
performance.
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
always
install
plug-ins
before
a
performance.
udio,
sempre
instale
plug-ins
antes
de
uma
performance.
Included
View and Components
adjust plug-ins using the console or software
always install plug-ins before a performance.
screen
(see
Adjusting
Plug-Ins
onon
page
161).
screen
(see
Adjusting
Plug-Ins
page
161).
screen
(see Adjusting
Plug-Ins
on page 161).
Durante
uma performance,
voc
pode: the
All
VENUE
Profile
systems
include
following:
Instalando Plug-Ins
and
load
plug-in
settings
as as
Presets,
or or
with
snapshots
Plug-Ins
Habilitar
Save
and
load
plug-in
settings
Presets,
with
snapshots
Dynamic
or
Installing
Plug-Ins
Save
o modo
Show para
travar
atribuies
rack de Installing
Save
and
load
plug-in
settings
as as
Presets,
or withdosnapshots
Installing
Plug-Ins
VENUE
Profile
console
(see
Plug-In
Presets
and
Snapshots
on
page
164).
(see Plug-In
Presets
and Snapshots
on
page 164).
(for Talkback)
plug-ins
e
outras
operaes
do
rack
de
plug-ins
que
possam
(see Plug-In Presets and Snapshots on page 164).
Para
instalar
um plug-in:
To To
install
a plug-in:
Two (2) aIEC
power cables
a plug-in:(up to 2)
interromper
performance.
install
Footswitches
To
install
a
plug-in:
During
a
performance,
do
all
of
the
following:
a performance,
do para
all ofplug-ins
the following:
During
Enderear
canais
e busses
disponveis,
re-atribuir 11 Put
Monitor
mount
for do
VGA
not included)
During
a performance,
all screen
of the (screen
following:
the
system
into
mode.
Coloque
ocables
sistema
noConfig
modo
Config.
1
the
system
into
Config
mode.
Put
MIDI
(for
connecting
Enable
Show
mode
to to
safe
out)
plug-in
rack
assigndemode
plug-ins,
ou (lock
re-atribuir
endereamento
sideo roteamento
Enable
Show
safe
(lock
out)
plug-in
rack
assignTrackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
chain
Enable
Show
mode
to
safe
(lock
out)
plug-in
rack
assign
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
theinto
2 If
from
a CD-ROM,
insert
installer
disc
into
existente.
ments
and
other
plug-in
rack
operations
that
could
interIfinstalando
installing
from
aCD-ROM,
CD-ROM,
insert
the
installer
disc
ments
and
other
plug-in
rack
operations
that
could
inter2 22Seinstalling
de
um
insira
othe
disco
de instalao
no drive
If VENUE
installing
from
a CD-ROM,
insert
the
installer
disc into
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
ments
and
other
plug-in
rack
operations
that
could
intersystem
and
external
digital
devices)
rupt
Ajustar
de plug-in pelo ACS, codificadores Output the
system
CD-ROM
drive.
a performance.
system
CD-ROM
drive.
dethe
CD-ROM
do
sistema.
rupt
aparmetros
performance.
the system CD-ROM drive.
a performance.
VENUE
Profile Guide
ourupt
na
tela.
channels
and
busses
to
available
plug-ins,
re-assign
3 Go
to to
thethe
Options
page
and
click
thethe
Plug-Ins
tab.
The
fol-folSalvar
Patch
channels
and
busses
to
available
plug-ins,
re-assign
3 Go
Options
page
and
click
Plug-Ins
tab.
The
Patch
e
carregar
ajustes
de
plug-in
como
Presets
ou
dentro
de
Two channels
(2) console
lights
Patch
and
busses to available plug-ins, re-assign
3 3VGo to
pgina
Optionspage
e clique
na aba
As The
duasfollistas
the Options
and click
the Plug-Ins.
Plug-Ins tab.
plug-in
routing,
or
re-assign
existing
side-chain
routing.
lowing
two
lists
are
shown:
plug-in routing, or re-assign existing side-chain routing.
snapshots.
lowing two
are shown:
seguintes
so lists
apresentadas:
routing,
re-assign existing side-chain routing.
lowing two
lists
are shown:
plug-in
Protective
DustorCover
Adjust
plug-in
parameters
from
thethe
ACS,
Output
Encoders,
Adjust
plug-in
parameters
from
ACS,
Output
Encoders,
to to
Install
This
listlist
shows
available
plug-in
installers.
Rack(s)
(see next)
Plug-Ins
Install
This
shows
available
plug-in
installers.
Adjust
plug-in
parameters from the ACS, Output Encoders, Plug-Ins
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Plug-InstotoInstall
InstallEsta
Thislista
list shows
plug-indisponveis
installers. de
Plug-Ins
mostraavailable
as instalaes
or or
on-screen.
on-screen.
At
the
top
of
the
list
is
the
Device
selector,
which
provides
a a
At
the
top
of
the
list
is
the
Device
selector,
which
provides
or on-screen.
plug-ins.
No topo
da list
listaisesta
seletorselector,
Device, que
oferece
um menu
At the top
of the
the oDevice
which
provides
a
The
following
options
can
be
added
to
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Save
and
load
plug-in
settings
as
Presets,
or
within
snappop-up
menu
of
available
media
sources.
Plug-In
installers
are
Save and
load plug-in
Presets,
or within snappop-up
menu
of available
media
installers
Racks,
Software
CDs,settings
iLoks,as
Cables
pop-up
das
mdias
disponveis.
Os sources.
arquivos Plug-In
de instalao
de are
plug Save and
load plug-in
settings
asand
Presets,
or within snappop-up
menu
of available
media
sources.
Plug-In
installers
are
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and options,
visit
Avid
shots.
stored
locally
after
plug-in
installation,
and
appear
asthe
availshots.
stored
locally
after
plug-in
installation,
appear
as
availins
so
armazenados
localmente
depois
daand
instalao,
e aparecem
shots.
stored
locally after plug-in
installation,
and
appear as
availEach
website
(www.avid.com).
able
items
when
Previous
Installs
is
selected
from
the
Device
able itens
itemsdisponveis
when Previous
Installs
is selected
the Device no
como
quando
Previous
Installsfrom
selecionado
able items when Previous Installs is selected from the Device
selector.
This
letslets
you
re-install
plug-ins
without
the
original
System Restore CD
selector
Device.
Isso
permite
reinstalar
os
plug-ins
sem
a mdia ou
selector.
This
you
re-install
plug-ins
without
the
original
selector. This lets you re-install plug-ins without the original
CD-ROM
originais.
CD-ROM
or
other
media.
CD-ROM
or
other
media.
Mix
Rack
Options
CD-ROM
or other
media.
Installed
Plug-Ins
This
list
shows
all all
plug-ins
installed
Installed
lista
mostra
todos
os already
plug-ins
jinstalled
instalados
InstalledPlug-Ins
Plug-InsEsta
This
list
shows
plug-ins
already
Installed
Plug-Ins This list shows all plug-ins already installed
I/O
Options
on
the
system.
The
plug-ins
shown
in
plain
text
are
available
no
sistema.
Os
plug-ins
apresentados
em
texto
normal
esto
on the system. The plug-ins shown in plain text are
available
on the system.
The
plug-ins shown
in
plainPlug-ins
text arelistados
availableem
disponveis
para
processamento
de
udio.
to
process
audio.
Plug-Ins
listed
in
italics
are
disabled
and
un Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized iLok
to process
Plug-Ins
italics
are disabled
and unAI16
Analogaudio.
Mic/Line
Inputlisted
Cardin
provides
16 analog
to process
audio.
Plug-Ins
inthat
italics
are
disabled
and un- e
italic
esto
desabilitados
elisted
indisponveis.
(Veja
Habilitando
available
(see
Enabling
and
Disabling
Installed
Plug-Ins
onon
available
(see
Enabling
and
Disabling
Installed
Plug-Ins
mic/line
level
inputs
available
(see
Enabling
and
Disabling
Installed
Plug-Ins
on
Desabilitando
Plug-Ins na pgina 154).
page
154).
page 154).
page 154).
outputs
Chapter 18:18:
Plug-Ins
151
Plug-Ins
XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card thatChapter
provides
analog 151
Chapter
18:8Plug-Ins
151

Captulo 18: Plug-Ins 151
Available plug-ins
Installed plug-ins
Available plug-ins
Installed plug-ins
Install
Install
Device selector
Device selector
Figure 14. Options > Plug-Ins screen

Figure 14. Options > Plug-Ins screen
4 Click
Device
Selector
pop-up
menu
andum
do dos
oneseguintes
of the fol4 Clique
no the
menu
pop-up
Device
Selector
e siga
procedimentos:
lowing:
4
Click the Device Selector pop-up menu and do one of the fol lowing:
Escolha
Previous
Installs
para
acessar
instalador
Choose
Previous
Installs
to access
anyalgum
plug-in
installersde
afplug-ins depois de uma atualizao do sistema.
ter
a
system
update.
Choose
Previous
accessosany
plug-in installers
af Escolha
Console
paraInstalls
acessartotodos
instaladores
dos plug
Choose
Console
to
access
all
factory-installed
plug-in
inter
a
system
update.
ins instalados de fbrica depois de uma atualizao do sistema
stallers. after
a system
or a full system plug-in
restore. inourestaurao
completa
doupdate
sistema.
Choose
Console
to access
all factory-installed
Escolha
uman
dispositivo
de
armazenamento
externo,
se
Choose
external
storage
device,
as available,
to access
stallers.
after
a system
update
or a full
system
restore.
disponvel,
para
acessar
os instaladores
de plug-in
do drive CDplug-in
installers
loaded
in
the
CD-ROM
drive.
Choose an external storage device, as available, to access
ROM.
plug-in installers loaded in the CD-ROM drive.
Device
selector
Device
selector
Choosing a Device
Escolhendo um dispositivo (Device )
Choosing
a plug-in
Device from the Plug-Ins to Install list on the left by
5 Select a
5 Selecione
um
plug-in
da lista Plug-Ins to Install esquerda
doing
any
of the
following:
5 Select
a plug-in
from the Plug-Ins to Install list on the left by
seguindo um dos seguintes procedimentos:
any to
the
following:
Click
select
a single installer.
doing
Clique
paraofselecionar
um instalador.
Shift-click
to select
multiple
contiguouscontguos.
installers.
Click para
to select
a single
installer.
Shift-click
marcar
mltiplos
instaladores
Control-click
para
ouor
desmarcar
vrios instaladores,
um
to select
deselect
installers
one at a time.
Control-click
Shift-click
tomarcar
select
multiple
contiguous
installers.
de cada vez.
Control-click to select or deselect installers one at a time.
6 Click Install to install the selected plug-ins. Once installed,
the
plug-in
appears
in the
Installed
list
on the
6 Clique
Install
para
instalar
os
plug-insPlug-Ins
selecionados.
Umaright.
vez
6 Click
Install
to install
the
selected
plug-ins.
Once
installed,
instalado,
O plug-in
aparece
na lista
Installed
Plug-Ins
direita.
the plug-in
appears
in the
Installed
Plug-Ins
list on
the right.
7 Repeat as necessary to re-install all plug-ins needed on the
system.
7 Repeat
as necessary
toreintalar
re-installtodos
all plug-ins
needed
on the
7 Repita
se necessrio
para
os plug-ins
requeridos
pelosystem.
sistema.
Instalando
Plug-Ins
Manualmente
Installing
Plug-Ins
Manually
Installing Plug-Ins Manually
If um
a plug-in
appear
thePlug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Install
list,ser
it que
Se
plug-indoes
no not
aparece
na in
lista
to to
Install,
pode
may
not
have
a
fully
compatible
VENUE
installer
and
must
no
possua
um
instalador
completamente
compatvel
com
VENUE
If a plug-in does not appear in the Plug-Ins to Install list, itbe e
deve
manualmente.
Isso
necessrio
da
primeira
manually
installed.
This
is required
the
first
timeand
you
install
mayser
notinstalado
have
a fully
compatible
VENUE
installer
must
bevez
que
voc
instala
o
plug-in
e
sempre
que
for
necessrop
reinstalar
the
plug-in,
and
whenever
you
need
to
re-install
a
plug-in
manually installed. This is required the first time you install um
plug-in
(como
utilizar
o CD System
RestoretoCD
para atualizar
(such
as afteraps
using
the System
update
or reset ou
the plug-in,
and
whenever
you Restore
need to CD
re-install
a plug-in
resetar
o
sistema).
the system).
(such as after using the System Restore CD to update or reset
the system).
plug-in
sem um
instalador
VENUE
pode
compatvel.
AUm
plug-in
without
a VENUE
installer
may
stillser
be comConsulte o fabricante do plug-in para informaes de
patible.
Consult
thea plug-in
compatibilAcompatibilidade.
plug-in
without
VENUEmanufacturer
installer mayfor
still
be comity
information.
patible. Consult the plug-in manufacturer for compatibil-
ity information.
Para instalar
um plug-in manualmente:
To install a plug-in manually:
installsure
a plug-in
manually:
1To
que systems
todo o are
sistema
de som
est mudo e
1 Certifique-se
Make
allde
sound
shut down
or muted.
desligado.
1 Make sure all sound systems are shut down or muted.
2 Insert the plug-in installer disc into the CD-ROM drive.
223Insira
o disco
de instalao
dodisc
plug-in
no
drive
detab.
CD-ROM.
Insert
the Options
plug-in
installer
into
the
CD-ROM
drive.
Go to
the
page and
click
the
System
Go
tothe
theCtrl
Options
and
click
theConsole
Systemon-screen.
tab.
334VHold
pgina
Options
epage
clique
na
aba System.
key and
click
Shutdown
Follow
on-screen
to exit
to the Desktop.
4 Hold
the Ctrldirections
key and click
Shutdown
Console on-screen. Fol-
4 Segure a tecla Ctrl e clique Shutdown Console na tela. Siga as

low
on-screen
directions
to exit
topartition
the Desktop.
5 Copy the
installer
the
named User Data.
instrues
naplug-in
tela para
sair doto
Desktop.
5 Copy the plug-in installer to the partition named User Data.
6 Launch the plug-in installer application and follow any
5 Copie o instalador do plug-in para uma partio chamada User

on-screen
prompted,
do not restart
the system
6 Launch directions.
the plug-inIfinstaller
application
and follow
any
Data.
from
a plug-in
installer.
(Doing so will
notrestart
harm the
the system
system,
on-screen
directions.
If prompted,
do not
but
will
take
longer,
especially
if
you
have
multiple
plug-ins
to na
installer.
(Doing so
noteharm
theintrues
system,
6from
Inicieaaplug-in
aplicao
de instalao
do will
plug-in
siga as
install
manually.)
tela.
Se
solicitado,
no
reinicialize
o
sistem
a
partir
do
instalador
but will take longer, especially if you have multiple plug-ins to do
plug-in.
(Fazer
isso no prejudice o sistema, mas leva mais tempo,
install
manually.)
7 Quit the installer application and eject the installer disc.
especialmente
se existem muitos plug-ins para serem intalados
7 Quit the installer application and eject the installer disc.
manualmente.)
8 Click the Return to D-Show shortcut on the desktop to
re-launch
the
VENUE
software.
8
Click the
Return
to D-Show
shortcut on the desktop to
7 Feche a aplicao de instalao e ejete o disco.

re-launch the VENUE software.
9 Go to the Options page and click the Plug-Ins tab. Verify that
89the
Clique
no atalho
Return
to D-Show
noPlug-Ins
para
reinicar
manually
installed
plug-in
appears
indesktop
the Console
listthat
of o
Go
to the
Options
page
and
click
the
tab.
Verify
software
VENUE.
available plug-ins.
152
Guia VENUE Profile
the manually installed plug-in appears in the Console list of

available plug-ins.
9 V pgina Options e clique na aba Plug-Ins. Verifique se o plugin manualmente instalado aparece na lista Console dos plug-ins
disponveis.
Authorizing
Plug-Ins
Autorizando
Plug-Ins
Authorizing
Plug-Ins
Authorizing
Plug-Ins
Authorizing
Plug-Ins
After installing a plug-in, the system re-creates the list of availAfter

a plug-in,
the
system
re-creates
the
listavailof availDepois
de installing
instalar
um
plug-in,
osystem
sistema
recria
a system
lista
dos
plug-ins
After
installing
a plug-in,
theracks
re-creates
list
of
installing
a plug-in,
the
system
re-creates
the
list
of availableAfter
plug-ins.
Whenever
the
initialize,
thethe
checks
able
plug-ins.
Whenever
the
racks
initialize,
the
system
checks
disponveis.
Sempre
que
o
rack
inicializado,
o
sistema
checa
as
able
plug-ins.
Whenever
the
racks
initialize,
the
system
checks
able
plug-ins.
Whenever
the
racks
initialize,
the
system
checks
authorizations for all installed plug-ins. If no previous authoautorizaes
de todos
os
plug-ins
instalados.
Seno
uma
autorizao
authorizations
for
all
installed
plug-ins.
If
previous
authoauthorizations
for all
installed
plug-ins.
If no
previous
authoauthorizations
foris
allrecognized,
installed
plug-ins.
Ifbe
no
previous
authorization
forum
a plug-in
you will
prompted
to
prvia
para
plug-in
nois recognized,
encontrada,
vocr
ser
solicitado
a
rization
for
a plug-in
you
will
be prompted
to
rization
for
a
plug-in
is
recognized,
you
will
be
prompted
to
rization
for
a
plug-in
is
recognized,
you
will
be
prompted
to
try a demo version,
or authorize
full version
of the
plug-in. do
experimentar
uma
verso
demo
outhe
autorizar
aversion
ver~so
completa
try
a
demo
version,
or
authorize
the
full
of
the
plug-in.
try atry
demo
version,
or authorize
the the
full full
version
of the
plug-in.
a demo
version,
or authorize
version
of the
plug-in.
plug-in.
Stage
Rack supports
Features
VENUE
software
challenge/response and iLok USB
VENUE
software
supports
challenge/response
USB
VENUE
software
supports
challenge/response
andand
iLokiLok
USB
VENUE
software
supports
challenge/response
and
USB
Key
authorization,
including
pre-authorized
and
OSmart
Software
VENUE
autorizaes
por
consulta
eiLoks
viaiLok
iLok
USB
Stage
Racks
aresuporta
used with
an
FOH Rack,
and provide
all stage
Smart
Key
authorization,
including
pre-authorized
iLoks
and
Smart
Key
authorization,
including
pre-authorized
iLoks
and
Smart
Key
authorization,
including
pre-authorized
iLoks
and
iLok Authorization
cards.pr-autorizados e cartes
Smart
Key,
incluindo
iLoks
audio
I/O for VENUEcards.
iLok
Authorization
iLok
Authorization
cards.
iLok
Authorization
cards.
iLok.can be used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs.
Challenge/Response Challenge/response authorization is
Challenge/Response
Challenge/response
authorization
is
Challenge/Response
Challenge/response
authorization
is
Challenge/response
is
onlyChallenge/Response
valid for the single
system the
plug-in
isauthorization
currently
inChallenge/Response
Autorizaes
por the
consulta
so
vlidas
apenas
only
valid
for
the
single
system
plug-in
is
currently
inAudio
I/O
only
valid
for
the
single
system
the
plug-in
is
currently
inonly
valid
for
the
single
system
the
plug-in
is
currently
stalled
on. Challenge/response
codes
be communicated
para
o sistema
em que o plug-ins
estcan
atualmente
instalado.in-Os
stalled
on.
Challenge/response
codes
can
be
communicated
stalled
on.
Challenge/response
codes
cancan
be communicated
stalled
on.
Challenge/response
codes
be communicated
any
48 computer
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic
preamps
and
using
with
Internet
access.
cdigos
de
consulta
podem
ser comunicados
utilizadno
qualquer
using
any
computer
with
Internet
access.
using
any
computer
with
Internet
access.
computador
com
acesso
internet.
using
any
computer
with
Internet
access.
It is not possible to connect a VENUE system to the Internet
8 It
analog
output channels;
expandable
up toto48the
analog
or
is not
possible
to connect
a VENUE
system
Internet
It
is Itnot
possible
to connect
a VENUE
system
to the
isnot
possible
to connect
system
to Internet
the
No
possvel
conectar
oa VENUE
sistema
VENUE
Internet
directly.
digital
directly.
directly.
diretamente.
directly.
iLok USB Smart Key Plug-Ins supporting web authorizations
iLok
USB
Smart
Key
Plug-Ins
supporting
web
authorizations
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O
iLok
USBSmart
Smart
KeyAutorizaes
Plug-Ins
supporting
web
authorizations
iLok
USB
Smart
Key
Plug-Ins
supporting
web
authorizations
iLok
USB
Key
via
web
do
site
iLok.com
through
iLok.com
can
be
authorized
foratravs
your
iLok
Smart
Key
through
iLok.com
can
be
authorized
for
your
iLok
Smart
Key
podem
ser
feitar
para
ocan
iLok
Smart
Key
qualquer
computadir
through
iLok.com
can
be
authorized
forde
your
iLok
Smart
Key
through
iLok.com
beenable
authorized
for
your
iLok
Smart
any
Snake
connectors
to
primary
and
redundant
(ifKey
from
computer
with
Internet
access.
This
lets
you
take
from
any
computer
with
Internet
access.
This
lets
you
take
com
acesso
internet.
Isso
permite
voc
carregar
seu
iLok
e
suas
from
any
computer
withwith
Internet
This
lets
youyou
take
from
any
Internet
access.
This
lets
take
applicable)
to aaccess.
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
your
iLok
andcomputer
yourconnection
plug-in
authorizations
anywhere,
to
use
iLok
your
plug-in
authorizations
anywhere,
to use
autorizaes
deand
plug-ins
a
qualquer
lugar, para
utilizar
os
youryour
iLokinstalled
and
your
plug-in
authorizations
anywhere,
to plug-ins
use
your
iLok
and
your
plug-in
authorizations
anywhere,
to use
plug-ins
on
any
system.
plug-ins
on
any
system.
instalados
eminstalled
qualquer
sistema.
plug-ins
installed
on any
system.
plug-ins
installed
on any
system.
VENUE systems provides multiple USB ports that can be
VENUE
systems
provides
multiple
USB
ports
that
can
O sistema
VENUE
oferece
vrias
portas
USB
que
podem
System
Components
VENUE
systems
provides
multiple
USB
ports
that
can
be be
VENUE
systems
provides
multiple
USB
ports
that
can
beser
used
to connect
an
iLok.
For
more
information,
see
utilizadas
para
conectar
um
iLok.
Para
mais
informaes,
used
to
connect
an
iLok.
For
more
information,
see
usedused
to connect
an iLok.
For
more
information,
see see
to Configuring
connect
an iLok.
more
information,
Chapter
2,
andFor
Connecting
Profile.
veja
o Captulo
2, COnfigurando
e Conectando
a Profile.
Chapter
2, Configuring
and
Connecting
Profile.
Chapter
2,
Configuring
and
Connecting
Profile.
Chapter
2,
Configuring
and
Connecting
Profile.
Included Components
To authorize a plug-in:
Para autorizar
um aplug-in:
To authorize
plug-in:
To All
authorize
a Profile
plug-in:
systems include the following:
ToVENUE
authorize
a plug-in:
1 When a plug-in authorization dialog appears, do one of the
1 When
a
plug-in
authorization
dialog
appears,
dosurge,
one
ofsiga
the
VENUE
Profile
consolede autorizao
1Quando
When
a plug-in
authorization
dialog
appears,
do one
of the
1following:
uma
de dilogo
de plug-in
1 When
acaixa
plug-in
authorization
dialog
appears,
do one
of the
following:
um
dos
procedimentos:
following:
Toseguintes
Two
IEC
power
cables click Try.
following:
try a(2)
demo
of
the plug-in,
Para
testar
uma
verso
demo
declick
umclick
plug-in,
clique Try.
To
try
a
demo
of
the
plug-in,
try
demo
of the
plug-in,
Try. Try.
To
forthe
VGA
screenclick
(screen
Monitor
To atry
a mount
demo
of
plug-in,
Try. not included)
ou or
or
Trackball
mount (trackball
not included)
or
Para
tero reconhecimento
da autorizao
do iLok
pelo sistema,
To or
have
the system recognize
the required
authorization
To
have
the
system
recognize
the
required
authorization
Authorize.
Insira
seu
iLok
Smart
Key
em
qualquer
porta
To
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
clique
have
the
system
recognize
the
required
authorization
To
have
the
system
recognize
the
required
authorization
on your iLok, click Authorize. Insert your iLok Smart Key
on your
iLok,
click
Authorize.
Insert
your
iLok
Smart
Key
USB
disponvel
quando
solicitado.
your
iLok,
click
Authorize.
Insert
your
iLok
Smart
Key
on
VENUE
Profile
Guide
on
your
iLok,
click
Authorize.
Insert
your
iLok
Smart
Key
into any available USB port when prompted.
into
any
available
USB
port
when
prompted.
into
any
available
USB
port
when
prompted.
into
any
available
USB
port
when
prompted.
No
Twoescolha
(2) console
lights
Internet
Activation. Utilize Challenge/Response
Do not choose Internet Activation. Use Challenge/Response
ou
Protective
Dust
Cover
Do
not
choose
Internet
Activation.
Use
um
iLok
Smart
Key
autorizado
para
aChallenge/Response
autorizao de um
Doan
not
choose
Internet
Activation.
Use
Challenge/Response
Doauthorized
not
choose
Internet
Activation.
Use
Challenge/Response
or
iLok
Smart
Key for
plug-in
authorization.
or
an
authorized
iLok
Smart
Key
for
plug-in
authorization.
orplug-in.
Rack(s)
(see
next)
an
iLokiLok
Smart
Key Key
for plug-in
authorization.
orauthorized
an authorized
Smart
for plug-in
authorization.
2 Follow the instructions on-screen to complete the software
22Siga
instrues
na tela para
completer
otoprocesso
de the
autorizao
2 as
Follow
the
instructions
on-screen
complete
software
Follow
the
instructions
on-screen
toand
complete
the
software
2 Follow
the
instructions
on-screen
to complete
the
software
authorization
process.
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
Cables
do software.
authorization
process.
authorization
process.
authorization
process.
System Restore CD
Managing
Plug-Ins
onon
the
System
Managing
Plug-Ins
the
System
Managing
Plug-Ins
onon
the
System
Gerenciando
Plug-Ins
no
sistema
Managing
Plug-Ins
the
System
To keep your system up to date and running smoothly, always

To keep
system
update
to date
running
smoothly,
always
To
keep
youryour
system
up to
andand
running
smoothly,
To
keep
your
system
up versions
toatualizado
date
and
running
smoothly,
always
the
current
recommended
of your
plug-ins.
Para
manter
seu
sistema
e rodando
semalways
problemas,
the
current
recommended
versions
of
your
plug-ins.
the
current
recommended
versions
of your
plug-ins.
the
current
recommended
versions
of your
plug-ins.
sempre
utilize
verses atuais
e
recomendadas
de seus plug-ins.
Use the following features to check and maintain plug-in
Use
the
following
features
to check
and
maintain
plug-in
Use
the
following
features
topara
check
and
plug-in
Use
following
features
to checar
check
and
maintain
plug-in
compatibility,
to disable
plug-ins,
and
how
to
remove
and deUse
osthe
seguintes
recursos
emaintain
manter
aremove
compatibilidade
compatibility,
to
disable
plug-ins,
and
how
to
and
decompatibility,
to disable
plug-ins,
andand
toremover
remove
de- plugcompatibility,
to
disable
plug-ins,
how
to remove
and
delete
plug-ins
their
installers.
dos
plug-ins,and
para
desabilitar
plug-ins,
ehow
para
eand
apagar
Additional
Required
Components
lete
plug-ins
and
their
installers.
lete
plug-ins
andand
their
installers.
plug-ins
their
installers.
inslete
e seus
instaladores.
Plug-in
Version
Checker
Checador
de Version
Verso
do
Plug-in
Checker
Plug-in
Video Version
Display
(15-inch
or greater flat-panel VGA display
Plug-in
Checker
Plug-in
Version
Checker
VENUE
software includes
a comprehensive
database of
recommended;
1024x768
minimum resolution).
VGA and
software
includes
a comprehensive
database
of verses
O VENUE
software
VENUE
inclui
um
banco
de dadosdatabase
abrangente
de
VENUE
software
includes
a comprehensive
of help
VENUE
software
includes
a comprehensive
database
of
plug-in
and
compatibility
information
that can
DVIversion
supported.
deplug-in
plug-insversion
e insofmraes
de compatibilidade
quethat
podem
auxiliand
compatibility
information
can
help
plug-in
version
andand
compatibility
information
thatthat
can
help
plug-in
version
compatibility
information
can
help
you
maintain
current
versions
of
all
your
plug-ins.
It
also
lets
lo
aUSB
manter
as verses
atualizadas
de
seus
plug-ins.
Isso
tambm
you
keyboard
and trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
maintain
current
versions
of
all
your
plug-ins.
It
also
you
maintain
current
versions
ofare
all
your
plug-ins.
It also
lets lets
you
maintain
current
versions
ofestiver
all your
plug-ins.
Itdowngrade
lets
the
system
you
when
you
about
to
downgrade
aalso
permite
aowarn
sistema
avis-lo
quando
realizando
um
the
system
warn
you
when
you
are
about
to
downgrade
the
system
warn
you
when
you
are
about
to downgrade
a a
the
system
warn
you
when
you
are
about
to
downgrade
a
plug-in
(install
an
older
version
over
a
newer
version).
de
plug-in
(instalando
uma
verso
mais
antiga
sobre
a
nova).
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
plug-in
(install
an older
version
a newer
version).
plug-in
(install
an older
version
overover
a newer
version).
plug-in
(install
an older
version
over
a newer
version).
The
connection
between
FOHonRack
and Stage
Rack requires
See the
VENUE
plug-in
pages
the
Avid
website
Veja
as
pginas
de
plug-ins
VENUE
no
website
Avid (www.
See
the
VENUE
plug-in
pages
on
the
Avid
websitedirectly
See
the
VENUE
plug-in
pages
on
the
Avid
website
a(www.avid.com)
Digital
Snake
cable.
cable
can
beAvid
purchased
See
the
VENUE
pages
on
the
website
forplug-in
theThis
most
up atualizadas.
to
date
information.
avid.com)
para
informaes
(www.avid.com)
for the
most
up
to date
information.
(www.avid.com)
for the
most
up to
date
information.
from
Avid or assembled
by most
your
preferred
vendor.
(www.avid.com)
for the
up
to date
information.
ToPara
viewvisualizar
plug-in version
information:
informaes sobre a verso do plug-in:
To view
plug-in
version
information:
To view
plug-in
version
information:
To view
plug-in
version
information:
1 Go
to the Options
> Plug-Ins page.
Optional
Components
1
Go
to
the
Options
>
Plug-Ins
page.
1
V
pgina
Options
>
Plug-Ins.
1 Go
to the
Options
> Plug-Ins
page.
1 Go
to the
Options
> Plug-Ins
page.
2 Select
a
single
plug-in
from
the
Plug-Ins to
Install
orbeInThe
following
components
are
optional,
and
2 Select a single plug-in from the Plug-Ins
tomust
Install
or In- PlugSelecione
um
plug-in
da lista
to
Install
ou or
Installed
2 2Select
a single
plug-in
from
thePlug-Ins
Plug-Ins
to
Install
In2
Select
a
single
plug-in
from
the
Plug-Ins
to
Install
oraInstalled
Plug-Ins
list
(version
information
is
not
shown
for
purchased
separately:
stalled
Plug-Ins
list
(version
information
is
not
shown
a
Ins
(informaes
de
verso
no
so
apresentadas
para
uma
seleo
stalled
Plug-Ins
list list
(version
information
is not
shown
for afor
stalled
Plug-Ins
(version
information
is not
shown
for
a
multi-selection).
multi-selection).
mltipla).
multi-selection).
multi-selection).
(for Talkback)
Info about a recommended update in Options > Plug-Ins
Info about a recommended update in Options > Plug-Ins
Info Info
about
a recommended
update
in Options
> Plug-Ins
about
a recommended
update
in Options
> Plug-Ins
The
Info pane
shows
details
about
the currently
selected
Informaes
sobre
uma atualizao
recomendade
em Options
> Plug-Ins
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
The
pane
shows
details
about
the
currently
selected
The
InfoInfo
pane
shows
details
the
currently
selected
The
Info
pane
shows
details
about
the
currently
selected
plug-in,
including
whether
aabout
newer
version
of the
plug-in
is
plug-in,
including
whether
a
newer
version
of
the
plug-in
O
painel
Info
mostra
detalhes
sobre
o
plug-in
selecionado,
incluindo
plug-in,
including
whether
a
newer
version
of
the
plug-in
is is
The
following
options
can
be
added
to
VENUE
Profile
systems.
plug-in,
including
whether
a
newer
version
of
the
is
available and whether it is a recommended update or a plug-in
critical
available
and
whether
it
is
a
recommended
update
or
a
critical
se
uma
nova
verso
do
plug-in
est
disponvel
e
se
uma
atualizao
available
and
whether
it
is
a
recommended
update
or
a
critical
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit
the
Avid
available
and
whether
it
is
a
recommended
update
or
a
critical
update.
update.
website
recomendada
ou crtica.
update.
(www.avid.com).
update.
If you choose to install a plug-in for which there is a critical or
If voc
you
choose
to
a plug-in
for which
there
is
a critical
or
Se
optar
porinstall
instalar
umforplug-in
ois aqual
exista
If
you
choose
toupdate,
install
athe
plug-in
which
there
critical
or uma
If you
choose
to
install
asystem
plug-in
for which
is
a critical
or
recommended
asks
youpara
to there
confirm.
recommended
update,
the
system
asks
you
to
confirm.
atualizao
crtica
ou
recomendada,
o
sistema
pede
uma
Mix
Rackupdate,
Options
recommended
the the
system
asksasks
youyou
to confirm.
recommended
update,
system
to confirm.
confirmao.
I/O Options



outputs
Dialog shown when attempting to install a plug-in that has a known

Dialog
shown
when attempting
to
install outputs.
a plug-in that has a known
line
level
outputs,
and 8 AES
digital
newer
version.
Dialog
shown
when
attempting
to install
a plug-in
that that
has has
a known
Dialog
shown
when
attempting
to
install
a plug-in
a known
Caixa
de dilogo
newer
version.advertindo sobre a instalao de um plug-in que possui uma nova
newer
version.
newer
version.
verso.
Chapter 18: Plug-Ins 153
Chapter and
18: Plug-Ins
153
Mixers
other
Chapter
18: 18:
Plug-Ins
153153
Chapter
Plug-Ins
Captulo 18: Plug-Ins
153
A similar dialog appears when attempting to replace an installed plug-in with an older version of the same plug-in. FolUma caixa de dilogo similar surge quando tentar substituir um pluglow the com
instructions
on-screen
to install
anyway,
or cancel.
in instalado
uma verso
mais antiga
do mesmo
plug-in.
Siga as
A similar dialog appears when attempting to replace an ininstrues na tela para instalar mesmo assim ou cancele.
stalled
with
the same
plug-in. FolUsingplug-in
System
Infoan
toolder
Viewversion
Plug-in of
Version
Information
low the instructions
on-screen
anyway,
or cancel. de
Utilizando
System Info
parato install
Visualizar
Informaes
Plug-in version information is included in exported System
Verso de Plug-in
InfoSystem
data. The
Plug-in
sections
of the
exported
System Info file
Using
Info
to View
Plug-in
Version
Information
show critical
recommended
updates,
with linksnod
to sites
to
Informaes
sobreand
a verso
do plug-in
esto includas
dados
Plug-in
version
information
is included
in exported
SystemInfo
download
or check
versions.
exportados
System
Info.for
A newer
seo
Plug-in do
arquivo System
Info data.mostra
The Plug-in
sections
of the eexported
System Info
exportado
atualizaes
crticas
recomendadas,
comfile
links
show
critical
and
recommended
updates,
with
links
to
sites
to
para
sites
para
fazer
o
download
ou
checar
por
novas
verses.
To use System Info for Plug-In Version Maintenance:
download or check for newer versions.
Insert oa USB
keyInfo
diskpara
into manutenes
an available USB
port. do PlugPara1utilizar
System
de verso
In:To 2use
for Plug-In
Version
GoSystem
to the Info
Options
> System
page.Maintenance:
1 Insert
USBInfo
keybutton.
disk
an available
USB port.
1 Insira
umadispositivo
USBinto
na porta
USB disponvel.
3 Click
the
2 V pgina Options > System.

3 Click the Info button.
3 Clique no boto Info.
Export VENUE System Information button in Options > System

VENUE
If System
youSystem
have
more
than
one
USB
disk>connected,
make
Boto
VENUE
Information
em
Options
>
System
Export
Information
button
in key
Options
System
sure the correct USB key disk is selected. If it is not, click
4 Doum
any
ofDisk
the following:
4 Siga
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
Next
to cycle
through each available disk until the
you
have
more
than
one
USB key
disk
connected,
make
SeIfvoc
tem
mais
uma
unidade
USB
conectada,
certifiquecorrect one
isque
selected.
sesure
de que
a unidade
correta
foiisselecionada.
Se
no,click
clique
the
correct
USB
key
disk
selected.
If
it
is
not,
Click Save to proceed and export system info to the seNext
Disk
para
circular
entre cada
unidade
disponvel
atthe
que a
Next
Disk
to
cycle
through
each
available
disk
until
lected USB disk.
correta
esteja
correct
one selecionada.
is selected.
Click
Cancel
dismiss the
dialog without
Clique
Save
paratoexporter
o arquivo
System exporting.
Info para o
Click Save to proceed and export system info to the sedispositivo USB selecionado.
Click
OK
to disk.
confirm the export procedure.
lected
USB
5Clique
Cancel
para ignorar a caixa de dilogo sem exportar.
Remove
Click Cancel
to dismiss
the dialog without exporting.
6
the USB
key disk.
5 Clique OK para confirmar o procedimento de exportao.

5 Click OK to confirm the export procedure.
You can now transfer the exported file to a personal computer
6 Remova
o dispositivo
USB.
printing,
formatting,
6 for
Remove
the USB
key
disk.archiving or distribution. If viewing
the System Info document from a computer with internet acAgora

voc
pode
transferir
olinks
arquivo
exportado
para umupdates.
computador
You
canuse
now
transfer
the
exported
file to
computer
cess,
the
included
to check
fora personal
plug-in
pessoal
para impresso,
formatao,
arquivamento
distribuio.
for printing,
formatting,
archiving or
distribution.e If
viewing
Sethe
visualizar
oInfo
arquivo
Systemfrom
Info em
um computador
com acesso
System
document
a
computer
with
internet
acAutomatic Plug-ins Cleanup During Show Load
internet, utilize os links includos para checar por atualizaes dos
cess, use the included links to check for plug-in updates.
plug-ins.
Plug-ins are verified while Show files are loaded to streamline
plug-in lists
and menus.
Unused
plug-ins
(plug-ins that were
Automatic
Plug-ins
Cleanup
During
Show Load
Limpeza
Automtica
de Plug-ins
Durante
o Carregamento de
once installed but subsequently uninstalled or disabled) are
Show
Plug-ins
are verified
while
Show
files and
are loaded
streamline
identified,
and will
appear
in lists
menus to
italicized.
plug-in lists and menus. Unused plug-ins (plug-ins that were
Os plug-ins so verificados enquanto arquivos Show so carregados
At any
time,but
the subsequently
plug-in lists can
be reset manually
using
once
installed
or disabled)
are the
para
simplificar
as listas
e menus dosuninstalled
plug-ins. Plug-ins
no utilizados
Remove
Unavailable
Plug-ins
command.
This
command
results
identified,
and
will appear
in lists and menus italicized.
(os
que foram
instalados
e subsequentemente
desinstalados ou
in
the
following:
desabilitados) sa identificados, e aparecero nas lista e menus em
At any time, the plug-in lists can be reset manually using the
itlico.
Plug-ins that are not available and not in use in the rack are
Remove Unavailable Plug-ins command. This command results
automatically filtered from plug-in menus when the show
the following:
A inqualquer
momento,
lista list
de isplug-ins
podetheser
resetada
file is stored.
This afiltered
saved with
Show
file.
manualmente
utilizando
o
commando
Remove
Unavailable
Plug-ins.
Plug-ins that are not available and not in use in the rack
are
comando
Plug-instem
thatcomo
are not
available but are in use remain in the
Esteautomatically
resultado:
filtered from plug-in menus when the show
rack and
display
a warning
icon in etheir
and are
file
Plug-ins
que
no esto
disponveis
em rack
uso slot,
no rack
so
is stored. This filtered list is saved with the Show file.
automaticamente
menu de plug-ins quando o
listed italicized infiltrados
plug-insdo
menus.
arquivo Show
salvo.
Essa listabut
filtrada
salva
com oinarquivo
Plug-ins
that are
not available
are inuse
remain
the
Show.
rack
and display a warning icon in their rack slot, and are
listed
Plug-ins
que in
noplug-ins
esto menus.
disponveis mas esto emu so
italicized
permanecem no rack e apresentam um cone de advertncia
154 em
VENUE
Guide
seus Profile
slots do
rack, e so listado em itlico nos menus de
plug-ins.
154
Guia VENUE Profile
Enabling and Disabling Installed Plug-Ins

Habilitando
e desabilitando
instalados
The Installed
Plug-Ins list plug-Ins
shows Disabled
plug-ins in italics.
Plug-Ins can
be manually
disabled
and enabled
to manage
Enabling
and
Disabling
Installed
Plug-Ins
A lista Installed
Plug-Ins
mostra plug-ins
desabilitados
em itlico.
DSP resources, troubleshoot possible conflicts, and to manage

Plug-Ins podem ser manualmente desabilitados e habilitados para
The
Installed
Plug-Ins list shows Disabled plug-ins in italics.
plug-in
availability.
gerenciar
recursos DSP, possveis conflitos e problemas, alm de
Plug-Ins
can
be
manually disabled
and enabled to manage
gerenciar a disponibilidade
do plug-in.
DSP
troubleshoot
possible
conflicts, and to manage
Toresources,
globally disable
or enable
a plug-in:
plug-in
availability.
Para habilitar
ou desabilitar globalmente um plug-in:
1 Click to select the plug-in name in the Installed Plug-Ins list,
at the right of the Options > Plug-Ins tab.
Clique para
selecionar
umanome
de plug-in na lista Installed PlugTo1 globally
disable
or enable
plug-in:
Ins,
direita
da
aba
Options
>
Plug-Ins.
2 Right-click the plug-in and select whether to disable or en1 Click to select the plug-in name in the Installed Plug-Ins list,
able
the selected
plug-in.> Plug-Ins tab.
at the right
of the Options
2 Clique com o boto direito no plug-in e selecione se deseja habilitar
ou
desabilitar
o plug-in
assigned to
rackselecionado.
slots,
the plug-in
will
displayed
2 If
Right-click
theany
plug-in
and select
whether
to be
disable
or en-as
unavailable
and
inactive.
able
the selected
plug-in.
Se atribudo a qualquer slot de rack, o plug-in sera apresentado
indisponvel
e inativo.
Ifcomo
assigned
to any rack
slots, the plug-in will be displayed as
Removing
and
Deleting Plug-Ins and
unavailable and inactive.
Removendo
e Apagando Plug-Ins e Instaladores
Installers
Removing
plug-in
uninstalls
the
plug-in
from
the racks,
Remover
uma and
plug-in
desinstala
o plug-in
dos
racks,
mas ele
Removing
Deleting
Plug-Ins
and
continua
instalado
no cache
Previous
Installs,
ocache,
que making
torna fcil
but
its
installer
remains
in
the
Previous
Installs
Installers
reinstal-lo
sem que
sejamtime
necessrios
o CD ou
it easier to posteriormente
reinstall the plug-in
at a later
without requiroutro
mdia
com CD
osuninstalls
instaladores.
Plug-Ins
Removing
a plug-in
the(Veja
plug-in
from the racks,
ing the
installer
or other media.
(SeeRemovendo
Removing
Plug-Ins na
pgina
154.) remains in the Previous Installs cache, making
but
itspage
installer
on
154.)
it easier to reinstall the plug-in at a later time without requirApagar uma plug-in
ocompletely
remove completamente
( eitsseu
instalador)
plug-in
removes
it and
installer
from do
ingDeleting
the installer
CD or
other media.
(See Removing
Plug-Ins
sistema.
(Veja
Apagando
Plug-Ins
Desinstalados
on
na
pgina
onyour
pagesystem.
154.) (See Deleting Uninstalled Plug-Ins on
155.)
page 155.)
Deleting a plug-in completely removes it and its installer from
AThe
listalist
dosof
plug-ins
queyou
vocsee
v no
VENUE automaticamente
plug-ins
in software
VENUE Plug-Ins
software
ison
updated auyour
system.
(See Deleting
Uninstalled
atualizada cada vez que um arquivo Show carregado para manter
tomatically
each
time
you
load
a
Show
file
to
keep
plug-in lists
page
155.)e menus de plug-ins em ordem.
as listas
and menus uncluttered.
The list of plug-ins you see in VENUE software is updated auVoc tambm pode remover ou deletar plug-ins e/ou seus
You can also
remove
or load
delete
plug-ins
installers
tomatically
each
time you
a Show
fileand/or
to keeptheir
plug-in
lists
instaladores
manualmente.
manually.
and menus uncluttered.
Instalar, desintalar e apagar plug-ins no so suportados
uninstalling,
deleting
plug-ins
not supYou canInstalling,
also remove
or delete and
plug-ins
and/or
theirare
installers
quando usando o software Standalone.
ported
using
the
Standalone
software.
manually.
Removendo Plug-Ins
Installing, Plug-Ins
uninstalling, and deleting plug-ins are not supRemoving
ported
using
Para desinstalar the
um Standalone
plug-in do software.
sistema mas deixar seu instalador
To uninstall a plug-in from the system but leave its installer
disponvel:
Removing
available: Plug-Ins
11Coloque
sistemainnoConfig
modo mode.
Config.
Put theosystem
To uninstall a plug-in from the system but leave its installer
22VGo
pgina
Options epage
clique
naclick
aba Plug-Ins.
available:
to the Options
and
the Plug-Ins tab.
2 Go to the Options page and click the Plug-Ins tab.
3 Right-click the specific plug-in name from the right-hand
3 Click the Device selector and choose Previous Installs.
3 Right-click the specific plug-in name from the right-hand

3 Click the Device selector and choose Previous Installs.
33Clique
com o boto
direitoplug-in
no nomename
do plug-in
especfico
na lista 3 3Click
Clique
seletorselector
Deviceand
e escolha
Right-click
the specific
from
theselected
right-hand
thenoDevice
choosePrevious
PreviousInstalls.
Installs.
list
and
choose
the
Uninstall
option
for
the
plug-in.
list
and
choose
the
Uninstall
option
for
the
selected
plug-in.
direita e escolha a opo Uninstall para o plug-in selecionado.
list and choose the Uninstall option for the selected plug-in.
Right-click
Right-click
Right-click
Stage Rack Features

Audio
I/O a plug-in
Uninstalling
Uninstalling a plug-in
Uninstalling
a plug-in
Desinstalando
plug-inwith
48 um
inputs
Device
Device
selector
Device
selector
selector
Choosing
Device
Additional
Required
Choosing
a dispositivo
Device
Escolhendo
uma
Choosing a Device
Components
4
the
and
If
plug-in
The
following
components
must Install.
be purchased
separately:
4 Select
Select
the plug-in
plug-in
and choose
choose
Install.
If the
the desired
desired
plug-in is
is
4 Selecione
oitplug-in
escolha
Install.
Se o
plug-inplug-in
desejado
4 Select
the
plug-in
andechoose
Install.
If the
desired
is no
not
listed,
not listed,
it must
must be
be re-installed
re-installed from
from the
the original
original CD-ROM
CD-ROM or
or
Video
Display
(15-inch
or greater da
flat-panel
display
est
na lista,
elebe
deve
ser reinstalado
mdia ouVGA
CD originais.
not
listed,
it must
re-installed
from the original
CD-ROM
or
other
media.
other
media.
recommended;
other media.
Apagando
Plug-Ins Desintalados
DVI supported.
Deleting
Uninstalled
Plug-Ins
Deleting
Uninstalled
Plug-Ins (Windows compatible)
USB
and trackball/mouse
Deleting
Uninstalled
Plug-Ins
Uma
vezkeyboard
que o plug-in
est
desintalado, seu instalador pode ser
Removing
Unavailable
Plug-ins
the
Once
plug-in
is
its
can
from
Removing
Unavailable
Plug-ins from
frompower.
the Racks
Racks
Once a
a do
plug-in
is uninstalled,
uninstalled,
its installer
installerinstalados
can be
be deleted
deleted
from
deletado
sistema.
(Plug-ins atualmente
no podem
individually
selectable
Removing
Unavailable
Plug-insphantom
from
the Racks
Once
a plug-in
is(Plug-ins
uninstalled,
itsProfile
installer
can be
deleted
from be
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Systems
Only)
the
system.
which
are
currently
installed
cannot
Removendo
Plug-ins
Indisponveis
dos
Racks
ser
deletados).
the
system.
(Plug-ins
which
are
currently
installed
cannot
be
Unavailable plug-ins can be removed from rack slots using the
8 analog output
channels;
expandable
to slots
48 analog
Unavailable
plug-ins
can be removed
fromup
rack
usingor
the the system.
(Plug-ins which are currently installed cannot be
deleted).
deleted).
Unavailable
plug-ins
can
beStage
removed
from rack slots using the
Remove
Unavailable
Plug-Ins
command.
digital
outputs
per
Rack.
Remove
Unavailable
Plug-Ins
command.
deleted).
Plug-ins indisponveis podem ser removidos dos slots dos racks
Para
removerSnake
completamente
plug-in
e seu
instalador:
a Digital
cable. Thisum
cable
can be
purchased
directly
Remove Unavailable Plug-Ins command.
usando o comando Remove Unavailable Plug-Ins.
To
completely
remove
a
plug-in
and
its
installer:
from
Avid
or
assembled
by
your
preferred
vendor.
To
completely
remove
a
plug-in
and
its
installer:
To manually
manually remove
remove
unavailable
plug-ins:
Synchronization
and Control
I/O plug-ins:
Coloque o sistema
modoand
Config.
To
unavailable
To1completely
remove anoplug-in
its installer:
1
Put
the
system
in
Config
mode.
To manually
remove unavailable
plug-ins:
1
Put
the
system
in
Config
mode.
Para
remover
manualmente
plug-ins
indisponveis:
1
Put
the
system
in
Config
mode.
Snake
connectors
to
enable
primary
and
redundant
(if
1 2Put
the
system
in Config
mode.
V
pgina
Options
e clique
na aba Plug-Ins.
Optional
Components
1 Put the
system inconnection
Config mode.
2
applicable)
2 Go
Go to
to the
the Options
Options page
page and
and click
click the
the Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins tab.
tab.
2
Make
sure
the
plug-in
rack
is
fully
initialized
(the
Status
in1 Coloque
o
sistema
no
modo
Config.
2 Make sure the plug-in rack is fully initialized (the Status in- 2 Go to the Options page and click the Plug-Ins tab.
2 Make
sure the plug-in
rack is fully initialized (the Status infollowing
components
areselector
optional,
and
must be
3The
Selecione
Previous
Installsfrom
no
Device.
3
Previous
Installs
the
selector.
dicator
3 Select
Select
Previous
Installs
from
the Device
Device
selector.
dicator displays
displays OK).
OK).
Previous
Installs from the Device selector.
2dicator
Certifique-se
que o rack de plug-ins est completamente 3 Select
displaysdeOK).
purchased
separately:
4
the
name
and
choose
the
Delete
option
3
Plug-In
selector
in
rack
4 Right-click
the plug-in
plug-in
name
anddo
choose
the
Delete
option
inicializado
(othe
indicador
com
o boto
direito
noportable
nome
plug-in
e escolha
afor
opo
3 Click
Click
the
Plug-In Status
selectormostra
in any
anyOK).
rack slot
slot and
and choose
choose Remove
Remove 4 Clique
Right-click
USB
flash
disk
(or
other
USB
storage
device
System
Components
4 Delete
Right-click
the
plug-in
name
and
choose
the
Deletefrom
option
3 Click
the Plug-In
selector
in any
rack
slotisand
choose
Remove
for
the
selected
plug-ins.
The
plug-in
is
removed
the
sysUnavailable
Plug-Ins.
This
menu
item
only
available
when
para
o
plug-in
selecionado.
O
plug-in
removido
do
sistema,
for
the
selected
plug-ins.
The
plug-in
is
removed
from
the
sysUnavailable Plug-Ins. This menu item is only available when
transfer plug-ins.
of Show data;
512 MBisor
larger recommended)
fore the
selected
The
plug-in
removed
from
the sysPlug-Ins.
This
menu
item
is are
only
available
when
tem,
and
the
stored
plug-in
installer
is
removed
from
the
Preone
or
more
unavailable
plug-ins
present
in
the
rack.
o
instalador
do
plug-in
armazenado
removido
da
lista
Previous
3Unavailable
Clique
no
selector
Plug-In
em
qualquer
slot
de
rack
e
escolha
tem,
and
the
stored
plug-in
installer
is
removed
from
the
Preone or more unavailable plug-ins are present in the rack.
and
Near-field
monitor
mix position
the stored
plug-inspeakers
installerfor
is removed
frommonitoring
the Preone
or more
unavailable
plug-ins
in the
rack.
Remove
Unavailable
Plug-Ins.
Esse are
itempresent
de menu
est
disponvel tem,
Installs.
vious
Included
Components
vious Installs
Installs list.
list.
4
Remove
proceed,
or
Cancel.
you
with
4 Click
Click
Remove
tomais
proceed,
or click
click
Cancel. If
If esto
you proceed
proceed
with viousInstalls
list.
apenas
quando
um outo
plug-ins
indisponveis
presentes
Headphones
with 1/4-inch jack
4 Click
Remove
to proceed,
or include
click Cancel.
If you proceed with
Allthe
VENUE
Profile
systems
the following:
removal:
no
rack.
the
removal:
the removal:
Profile console
All
plug-ins
VENUE
All unavailable
unavailable
plug-ins are
are removed
removed from
from the
the rack.
rack.
(for Talkback)
Overview
of
Working
with
Plug-Ins
4 Clique
Remove
continuar,
ou clique
Se voc
All
unavailable
plug-ins
are
removed
fromCancel.
theare
rack.
Overview
of
Working
with
Plug-Ins
Viso
Geral Sobre
Trabalho com
Plug-Ins
Two
(2) IECpara
power
cables
Italicized
entries
for
unavailable
plug-ins
removed
Italicized
entries
for
unavailable
plug-ins
are
removed
Footswitches
(up to 2)
Overview
of
Working
with
Plug-Ins
continuar:
Italicized
entries
for
unavailable
plug-ins
are
removed
from
all
plug-in
menu
lists.
Monitor
formenu
VGA lists.
screen
(screen not
included)
The
Plug-Ins
screen
displays
the
plug-in
Racks,
where
the
from
allmount
plug-in
The
Plug-Ins
screen
displays
the
plug-in
Racks,
where
the mama Todos
os plug-ins
indisponveis
so removidos
do rack.
MIDI
cables
(for connecting
MIDI
devices)
A tela
Plug-Ins
mostra
os racks
deexternal
plug-ins,
onde
athe
maioria
dos
from
allreferences
plug-in menu
lists.
The
Plug-Ins
screen
displays
the
plug-in
Racks,
where
maAll
to
unavailable
plug-ins
are
removed
from
jority
of
plug-in
features
are
located.
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
Entradas
em
italic
para
plug-ins
indisponpiveis
so
removidas
All references to unavailable plug-ins are removed from
jority
of
plug-in
features
are located.
recursos
de
plug-in
esto
localizados.
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
the
deAll
references
to
unavailable
plug-ins
are
removed
from
plug-in features are located.
the
Insert
Processing
section
of
listas
e menus
de
plug-ins.
theas
Insert
Processing
section
of all
all affected
affected channels,
channels, and
and jority ofVENUE
todas
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
the Insert
Processing
section is
of
all affected
channels,
and da
the
insert
point
plug-in
set
to
None.
Todas
as
referncias
a
plug-ins
indisponveis
so
removidas
To
access
Plug-Ins
page:
the insert
point
plug-in is set to None.
Para
acessa
a the
pgina
Plug-Ins:
To
access
the
Plug-Ins
page:
VENUE
Profile
Guide
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
the
point
plug-in
set toosNone.
seo
Insert
Processing
deistodos
canais afetados,
e o ponto
To access
the Plug-Ins
page: (for connecting to GPI devices)
insert
All
references
to
unavailable
plug-ins
are
removed
from
All
references
to
unavailable
plug-ins
are
removed
from
Press
the
Plug-Ins
switch
in the View Mode section (or click
insero
Two (2) do
console
lights
Press the Plug-Ins switch in the View Mode section (or click
do
ajustado
paraare
None.
deAll
references
to plug-in
unavailable
plug-ins
removed from
the
Pressione
o tab).
switch
Plug-Ins
seo
View
Mode (or
(ouclick
clique
na
all
snapshots.
Press
the
Plug-Ins
switch
in thena
View
Mode
section
all
snapshots.
Plug-Ins
By
default,
the
Plug-Ins
page
all
four
Todas
as referncias
a plug-ins indisponveis so removidas de
the
Plug-InsPor
tab).
By default,
the Plug-Ins
Plug-Insmostra
page displays
displays
allquarto
four
Protective
Dust Cover
aba
Plug-Ins).
padro,
a
pgina
todos
os
all
snapshots.
Plug-Ins
tab). are
By default,
the Plug-Ins
page
all four (See
racks,
which
empty
until
plug-ins
havedisplays
been
assigned.
todos
os snapshots. list of available plug-ins is subsequently the
racks,
which
arevazios
emptyat
until
plug-ins
been sido
assigned.
(See
The
new,
racks,
que
esto
que
plug-inshave
tenham
atribudos.
Rack(s)
(see next)
The
new, updated
updated
list of available plug-ins is subsequently
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
racks,
which
are
empty
until
plug-ins
have
been
assigned. (See
also
Jump
To
Plug-Ins
on
page
163.)
The saved
new, updated
list of
available plug-ins is subsequently
alsotambm
Jump To
Plug-Ins
on page
163.)
(Veja
Jump
To
Plug-Ins
na
pgina
163.)
to
the
Show
file.
saved tonova
the Show
file.
Jump To Plug-Ins on page 163.)
Uma
e atualizada
de plug-ins disponveis also
saved lista
to the Show file.
Racks, Software
iLoks,
and Cables
subsequentemente
salva CDs,
no arquivo
Show.
History
History File
File and
and Removing
Removing Plug-ins
Plug-ins
History
File and
Plug-ins
Each Mix
RackRemoving
or FOH Rack
includes:
Arquivo
History
e Remoo
deimmediately
Plug-ins
A History
file
is written
before removing unavailA History
file is written
immediately before removing unavailSystem
CD
A History
file is Restore
written
immediately
before removing
unavailable
plug-ins
from
the
rack,
letting
recall
that
History
file
able
plug-ins
from
the
rack,
letting you
youantes
recall da
that
Historyde
file
Uma
History
criado
imediatamente
remoo
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Software
Installer
CD
ablearquivo
plug-ins
from
the
rack,
letting
you
recall
that
History
file
to
revert
the
system
to
its
state
prior
to
removing
plug-ins.
to revert
the system
to itso state
prior tocarregar
removing
plug-ins.
plug-ins
indisponveis
do rack,
que permite
esse
arquivo
to revert
the systemSoftware
to its state
prior to
Standalone
Installer
CDremoving plug-ins.
para reverter o sistema a seu estado anterior remoo dos plug iLok USB Smart
Key (for storing
a
Plug-in
ins. Reinstalling
Reinstalling
a Removed
Removed
Plug-in
Reinstalling
a Removed
Plug-in
Plug-in installer
discs (if
any) with pre-authorized iLok
Reinstalando
Removido
To
a
removed
plug-in:
To
reinstall
a
removed
plug-in:
reinstall
Two um
(2) Plug-in
IEC
power
cables
To reinstall a removed plug-in:

2
to
Options
page
Each
Stage
Rack
includes:
2 Go
Go
to the
the
Options
page and
and click
click the
the Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins tab.
tab.
12Coloque
o sistema
nopage
modoand
Config.
Go to the
Options
click the Plug-Ins tab.
One
FOH
Linkin
cable
for connection
to a VENUE console
1 Put
the
system
Config
mode.
Para reinstalar
um
plug-in
removido:
2 V pgina Options e clique na aba Plug-Ins.
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options
Plug-In
racks
(no
plug-ins
assigned)
Racks
de Plug-Ins
plug-ins atribudos)
Plug-In
racks (sem
(no
plug-ins
assigned)
mic/line
inputs
Plug-In
racks level
(no plug-ins
assigned)
You
populate
the
racks
by
plug-ins
in
slots.
DurYou
populate
the
racks
by assigning
assigning
plug-ins
in rack
rack
slots.
DurVoc
preenche
osracks
racks
atribuindo
plug-ins
em
de
rack.
Durante
AO16
Analog
Card
that
provides
16
analog
line
level
You
populate
theOutput
by
assigning
plug-ins
inslots
rack
slots.
During
a
performance,
plug-ins
that
have
been
assigned
in
rack
ingperformance,
a performance,
plug-ins
that
have
been assigned
inderack
uma
plug-ins
que
foram
atribudos
em
slots
racks
ingoutputs
aslots
performance,
plug-ins
that
have and
been assigned
in rack
be
channels
to/from
slots can
can
be inserted
inserted
oncanais
channels
and routed
routed para
to/from
busses
podem
ser inseridos
emon
e endereados
e debusses
busses
slotson-screen.
can be inserted
onparameters
channels and
routed
to/from
Plug-in
can
then
be
adjusted
from the
na
tela.Analog
Os parmetros
de Output
plug-ins
podem
ento
ser busses
ajustados
on-screen.
Plug-in
parameters
can
then
beprovides
adjusted
thena
XO16
and Digital
Card
that
8from
analog
on-screen.
Plug-in
parameters
can
then
be
adjusted
from
the
console
as
well
as
on-screen.
console
assim
como
na
tela.
console
as
well
as
on-screen.
console as well as on-screen.
Chapter
Chapter 18:
18: Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins 155
155
Mixers
other
Chapter
18: and
Plug-Ins
155
Plug-In
Plug-In
Racks
Racks
Racks
de Plug-Ins
The
The
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
page
page
provides
provides
four
four
plug-in
plug-in
racks.
racks.
Each
Each
of of
thethe
four
four
racks
racks
hashas
2525
slots
slots
into
into
which
which
you
you
cancan
load
load
a plug-in.
a plug-in.
The
The
four
four
A different
pgina
Plug-Ins
oferece
quarto
racks
de plug-in.
Cada um and
dosand
quatro
rackszoom
possui
25
slots em que voc pode carregar um plug-in. Os quatro
different
racks
racks
cancan
be be
viewed
viewed
all all
at once,
at once,
individually,
individually,
in in
varying
varying
zoom
levels.
levels.
racks diferentes podem ser visualizados de ma vez, individualmente e em vrios nveis de zoom.
Click
Click
to display
to display
Racks
Racks
1414
Zoom
Toggle
Zoom
Toggle
Presets
Presets
Push-pin
Push-pin
Rack
Rack
slots
slots
Mode
Mode
andand
Status
Status
Racks e slots de racks, viso principal, com nomes personalizados de racks.
Figure
Figure
15.15.
Plug-In
Plug-In
racks
racks
andand
rack
rack
slots,
slots,
Main
Main
view,
view,
with
with
custom
custom
rack
rack
names
names
shown.
shown.
Nomeando Racks de Plug-In
Naming
Naming
Plug-In
Plug-In
Racks
Racks
Por padro, os racks so nomeados como Rack 1, Rack 2, Rack 3 e

ByBy
default,
the
racks
racks
areare
named
named
Rack
Rack
1, Rack
1, Rack
2,sua
Rack
2, Rack
3, and
3, and
Rack
4.default,
Voc the
pode
renomear
cada
rack
conforme
necessidade.
Rack
Rack
4. You
4. You
cancan
rename
rename
each
each
rack
rack
as as
needed.
needed.
Para renomear um rack de plug-in:

To To
rename
rename
a plug-in
a plug-in
rack:
rack:
1 Clique duas vezes no nome do rack para destac-lo na tela.
1 Double-click
1 Double-click
thethe
rack
rack
name
name
to to
highlight
highlight
it on-screen.
it on-screen.
Visualizaes de Rack
Rack
Rack
Views
Views
A pgina Plug-Ins pode ser apresentado em visualizaes Full ou
The
The
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
page
can
can
be
be
displayed
displayed
in in
Full
Full
orvisualizaes
or
Zoom
Zoom
views,
views,
Zoom,
com apage
opo
de
apresentar
ambas
as
no modo
with
with
thethe
option
option
to to
display
display
either
either
view
view
in in
Mini-view
Mini-view
mode.
mode.
Mini.
Visualizao
Full
Full
View
ViewFull
The
default
default
view
view
of of
thethe
rack
rack
screen
screen
is Full
is Full
view,
in in
which
which
all que
AThe
visualizao
padro
da
tela
de
racks
a view,
visualizao
Full,allem
2 2Digite
um
novo
nome
e pressione
Enter.
retornar
oto
rack
seu
todos
os quatro
racks(see
so
apresentados
(Veja
Figura
15). Essa
four
racks
racks
areare
shown
shown
(see
Figure
Figure
15).
15).
This
This
screen
screen
provides
provides
ac-ac-tela
Type
2 Type
a new
a new
name
name
and
and
press
press
Enter.
Enter.
ToPara
To
return
return
a rack
a rack
to
its a
its
dede- four
nome
padro,
deixe
o nome
emblank
branco
e pressione
Enter.
oferece
aslot
todos
os and
controles
de
de
racks, e mostra
cess
cess
to to
allacesso
all
rack
rack
slot
controls,
controls,
and
shows
shows
anslots
an
icon
icon
representing
representing
fault
fault
name,
name,
leave
leave
the
the
name
name
blank
and
and
press
press
Enter.
Enter.
um
cone
representando
cada
plug-in
atribudo.
Permite
que voc
each
each
assigned
assigned
plug-in.
plug-in.
This
This
letslets
you
you
quickly
quickly
seesee
what
what
plug-ins
plug-ins
Plug-Ins
podem
ser
colocados
em
qualquer
slot
de
rack.
rapidamente
veja
quais
plug-ins
esto
disponveis
e
ajuste
seus
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
cancan
be be
placed
placed
in in
anyany
rack
rack
slot.
slot.
UseUse
thethe
different
different
areare
available,
available,
and
and
adjust
adjust
their
their
routing.
routing.
Use
os
diferentes
racks
para
organizar
as
funes
de
roteamentos.
racks
racks
to organize
to organize
processing
processing
functions
functions
such
such
as as
Dynamics,
Dynamics,
processamento como Dynamics, EQ, Reverb ou Group
EQ,EQ,
Reverb,
Reverb,
or Group
or Group
Inserts.
Inserts.
Inserts.
156
156VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
156
Guia VENUE Profile
Visualizao
Zoom
(Modo
de
Visualizao
Plug-In)
Zoom
View
(Plug-In
View
Mode)
Zoom
View
(Plug-In
View
Mode)
Zoom View (Plug-In View Mode)

Zoom View (Plug-In View Mode)
Identificando
slots de
racks Slots
Identifying
Rack
Identifying
Rack
Slots
Identifying
Rack
Slots
Identifying Rack Slots
the rest of the screen displays the targeted plug-in.
lighting its rack slot controls in blue.
In
a
remains
on-screen
to
the
The
racks
indicate
plug-in
is
targeted
by
highNa
visualizao
um rack
nico
rack
permanence
na left,
tela and
The
Osracks
racks
indicam
qualwhich
plug-in
est
selecionado
destacando
slot
In Zoom
view,view,
a Zoom,
single
rack
remains
on-screen
to the
and
indicate
which
plug-in
is currently
targeted
by highIn Zoom
Zoom
view,
a single
single
rack
remains
on-screen
to left,
the
left,
and
The
racks
indicate
which
plug-in
is currently
currently
targeted
byseu
highIn Zoom
view,
athe
single
rack
remains
on-screen
to
the left, and
The
racks
indicate
which
plug-in isincurrently
targeted by highthe
rest
of
screen
displays
the
targeted
plug-in.
esquerda,
e
o
resto
da
tela
apresenta
o
plug-in
selecionado.
de
rak
em
azul.
lighting
its
rack
slot
controls
blue.
the rest
displays
the targeted
plug-in.
lighting
its rack
slot controls
in blue.
the of
restthe
of screen
the screen
displays
the targeted
plug-in.
lighting
its rack
slot controls
in blue.
Stage Rack Features

Audio I/O

Plug-In display
Plug-In
displaydisplay
Plug-In
I/O
Plug-In display
Visualizao Zoom, com um plug-in aberto na tela
View Toggle
View Toggle
View Toggle
View Toggle
view,
Snake
towindow
enable
primary
and redundant (if
view,
with
a plug-in
on-screen
ZoomZoom
withconnectors
a
plug-in
window
openopen
on-screen
Zoom
view,
with
a plug-in
window
open
on-screen
Zoom view,
with a plug-in
window open
applicable)
connection
to aon-screen
VENUE FOH Rack.
Para alternar
entre
os modos
demodes,
visualizao
Full
ou Zoom, siga
To
Full
or
do
one
of
the
To toggle
Full or
Zoom
viewview
modes,
do one
the
To toggle
toggle
Full
or Zoom
Zoom
view
modes,
do of
one
of following:
the following:
following:
um
seguintes
To dos
toggle
Full or procedimentos:
Zoom view modes, do one of the following:
Press the Plug-Ins switch (in the View Modes section), or
Press
the Plug-Ins
switch
(in the
Modes
section),
or or
Press
the Plug-Ins
switch
(in View
the View
Modes
section),
Press
the
switch
(in the
Viewright
Modes
section),
orrack).
click
the
View
toggle
switch
(upper
corner
of
the
click
Pressione
oPlug-Ins
switch
Plug-Ins
(na seo
View
Modes),
ou
clique
no
the View
toggle
switch
(upper
right
corner
of the
click
the
View
toggle
switch
(upper
right
corner
of rack).
the
rack).
System
Components
click
the
View
toggle
switch
(upper
right
corner
of
the
rack).
switch View Toggle (canto superior direito do rack).
Included Components
Zoom/Full
view
toggle
Zoom/Full
view
toggle
Zoom/Full
view
Two
(2)
IECtoggle
power cables
Zoom/Full
view
toggle
Boto
Zoom/Full
View
Toggle
or

or
Monitor
or
ou or
Trackball
(trackball
not
included)
Double-click
a
icon
in
any
rack
view
to
that
Clique
duas vezes
em
um
cone
plug-in
em qualquer
rack
Double-click
a mount
plug-in
icon
inde
any
rack
view
to open
thatpara
Double-click
a plug-in
plug-in
icon
in
any
rack
view
to open
open
that
Double-click
a
plug-in
icon
in
any
rack
viewZoom.
to open that
window
in
Zoom
view.
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
abrir
aplug-in
janela
do
plug-in
no
modo
de
visualizao
plug-in
window
in
Zoom
view.
plug-in window in Zoom view.
plug-in window in Zoom view.

VENUE Profile Guide
VENUE
provides
ways
to
jump
to
plug-in
view.
VENUE
oferece
outros
modos
saltar
visualizao
VENUE
provides
otherother
ways
to de
jump
to apara
plug-in
view.
For For
VENUE
provides
other
ways
to
jump
to a
auma
plug-in
view.
For
VENUE
Two
(2)
console
lights
provides
other
ways
to jumpTo
to aPlug-Ins
plug-in
view.
For
more
information,
see
Jump
on
page
de
plug-in.
Para
mais
informaes,
veja
Jump
To
Plug-Ins
moremore
information,
see Jump
To Plug-Ins
on page
163.163.
information,
see Jump
To Plug-Ins
on page
163.
more
Protective
Dust see
Cover
information,
Jump To Plug-Ins on page 163.
na
pgina
163.
Mini-View
Mode
Rack(s)
(see
next)
Mini-View
Mode
Mini-View
Mode
Modo
de Visualizao
Mini-View
Mode Mini
Mini-view
mode
an
available
in
Zoom
Mini-view
mode
is anis
available
in Full
and and
Zoom
Mini-view
mode
isoption
an option
option
available
in Full
Full
and
Zoom
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
Cables
mode
is opo
anthe
option
available
in Full
and Zoom
modes
in
which
rack
slot
displays
are
minimized
OMini-view
modo
Mini
uma
doisponvel
para
os
modos
Full
Zoom
modes
in which
the rack
slot displays
are minimized
andeand
modes
in which
the rack
slot displays
are minimized
and
modes
inapresentao
which
the
rack
slot
displays
are
minimized
and
em
que
a
dos
slots
de
racks
minimizada
e
os
cones
plug-in
icons
are
hidden,
to
let
you
see
more
of
the
racks
plug-in
icons
are hidden,
to
lettoincludes:
you
see more
of the
at at
Each
Mix icons
Rack
or
Rack
plug-in
areFOH
hidden,
let you
see more
of racks
the racks
at
plug-in
icons
are
hidden,
tobypass,
let you
see more
of
themais
racks
at ao
de
plug-in
so ocultos,
para
permitir
a visualizao
de
racks
one
time.
You
can
still
route,
and
work
with
plug-in
one one
time.
You
can
still
bypass,
route,
and
work
with
plug-in
time.
You
can
still
bypass,
route,
and
work
with
plug-in
tempo.
SystemVoc
Restore
CD
mesmo
pode
continuar
trabalhando
controles
one snapshot
time.
Youcontrols
can still
bypass,
route,
and work com
withos
plug-in
in
mode.
snapshot
controls
in Mini-view
mode.
snapshot
controls
in Mini-view
Mini-view
mode.
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Software
de
plug-ins
no
modo
Mini.
snapshot controls in Mini-view
mode. Installer CD
Standalone
Software
Installer CD
To
mini-view
or
To toggle
oron
off:
To toggle
toggle
mini-view
on
or off:
off:
Para
ligar
e mini-view
desligar
oon
modo
Mini:
To toggle
mini-view
on orKey
off: (for storing plug-in authorizations)
iLok
USB Smart
Click the Mini-view icon (upper left corner of the rack
Click
the Mini-view
iconicon
(upper
left corner
of the
Click
the Mini-view
(upper
left corner
of rack
the rack
Plug-in
installer
discs(upper
(if any)
with
pre-authorized
Clique
no
Mini (canto
superior
esquerdo
do the
rack).
Click
thecone
Mini-view
icon
left
corner
of
rack iLok
view).
view).
view).
view). Two (2) IEC power cables
Mini-view
Mini-view
Mini-view
Visualizao
Mini
Mini-view
Components

rack
slot
indicating
targeted
plug-in
SlotHighlighted
de rack
destacado
indicando
plug-in
selecionado
DVI
supported.
Highlighted
rack
slot indicating
targeted
plug-in
Highlighted
rack
slot
indicating
targeted
plug-in
Highlighted rack slot indicating targeted plug-in

Targeted
plug-in
Targeted
plug-in
Targeted
(rack
slotplug-in
Targeted
(rack
slotplug-in
(rack
slot
(rackhighlighted
slot in in
highlighted
highlighted
Additional
Required
blue) in in
highlighted
blue)
blue)
blue)
each
color
outlines
appear
around
each
Within
USBeach
keyboard
andslot,
trackball/mouse
(Windows
Within
rack rack
slot,
color
outlines
appear
around
each
Within
each
rack
slot,
color
outlines
appear
around
each
Dentro
de
cada
slot,
bordas
coloridas
aparecem
aocompatible)
redor
de cada
Within
eachto
rack
slot, color
outlines
appearcurrently
around each
plug-in
indicate
the
type
of
plug-in
targeted
plug-in
to
indicate
the
type
of
plug-in
currently
targeted
on on
plug-in
to indicar
indicate
of plug-in
currently
on de
plug-in
para
o the
tipo type
de plug-in
selecionado
natargeted
superfcie
plug-in
toSnake
indicate
the type
of
plug-in currently
targeted
on
the
surface.
The
following
colors
are
used:
Digital
Cable
Systems
the
control
surface.
The(VENUE
following
colors
are used:
controle.
As
seguintes
cores
soProfile
usadas:
the control
control
surface.
The
following
colors
areOnly)
used:
the control surface. The following colors are used:
Outline
The
connection
between
Color
Coding
of Rack
Slots Rack and Stage Rack requires
Outline
Color
Coding
of Rack
SlotsFOH
Outline
Color
Coding
of Rack
Slots
Outline
Color Coding
of cable.
Rack Slots
a Digital
Snake
Color
ColorColor
Indication
from
Avid
Indication
Indication
Outline
Color
Outline
Outline
Indication
Outline
Green
EQ plug-in
is mapped
the console
GreenGreenAn EQAn
is mapped
to theto
Anplug-in
EQ plug-in
is mapped
toconsole
the console
Optional
Green
An EQComponents
plug-in is mapped to the console
Blue
A
Comp/Lim
plug-in
is
mapped
the console
Blue Blue A Comp/Lim
plug-in
is mapped
to theto
A Comp/Lim
plug-in
is mapped
toconsole
the console
Blue
A Comp/Lim
plug-in is are
mapped
to the and
console
The following
components
optional,
must be
YellowAn Exp/Gate
An Exp/Gate
plug-in
is mapped
the console
Yellow
plug-in
is mapped
to theto
Yellow separately:
An Exp/Gate
plug-in
is mapped
toconsole
the console
purchased
Yellow
An Exp/Gate plug-in is mapped to the console
A plug-in
is mapped
toAssignable
the Assignable
Output
Encoders
USB
flash
disk
(or
other
portable
USBOutput
storage
device
for
Red Red
A plug-in
is mapped
to the
Encoders
Red
A plug-in
is mapped
to the Assignable
Output
Encoders
(Insert
mode)
Red transfer
A
plug-in
is
mapped
to
the
Assignable
Output
Encoders
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
(Insert
mode)
(Insert
mode)
(Insert mode)
Display
of
or
Inactive
Plug-Ins
Display
of Unavailable
or Inactive
Display
ofdeUnavailable
Unavailable
or jack
Inactive
Plug-Ins
Apresentao
Plug-Ins
Indisponveis
ouPlug-Ins
Inativos
Headphones
with 1/4-inch
Display
of Unavailable
or Inactive
Plug-Ins
It
possible
a
be
a
slot
but
is
or
condenser
microphone
XLR
It is possible
for afor
plug-in
to beto
displayed
in and
a in
rack
slotmic
but
be
It
isDynamic
possible
for
a plug-in
plug-in
to
be displayed
displayed
in
a rack
rack
slotcable
but be
be
possvel
apresentar
um
em inum
slot
mas
ele
It
is possible
for
afor
plug-in
to and
beplug-in
displayed
a rack
slot
butoccur
be estar
unavailable
channel
bus
processing.
This
can
in
(for
Talkback)
unavailable
for
channel
and
bus
processing.
This
can
occur
in
unavailable
for processamento
channel and busde
processing.
This
can Isso
occurpode
in
indisponvel
para
um
canal
ou
bus.
unavailable
for following
channel and
bus processing. This can occur in
any
of
the
circumstances:
Footswitches
(up
to
2)
any
of
the
following
circumstances:
any of
the
following
ocorrer
em
qualquer
umacircumstances:
das seguintes circunstncias:
any of theThere
following
circumstances:
is
not
enough
DSP
available
the
plug-in.
There
h
DSP
suficiente
disponvel
para
ofor
plug-in.
No
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
is cables
not
DSP
available
for the
plug-in.
MIDI
There
is enough
not
enough
DSP
available
for
thedevices)
plug-in.
is
not
enough
DSP
available
for
the
plug-in.
There
O
plug-in
parte
de
um
arquivo
Sshow
mas
no
est
instalado
The
assigned
plug-in
is
part
of
the
show
file
but
is
not
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
the
The
assigned
plug-in
is
part
of
the
show
file
but
not
The assigned plug-in is part of the show file is
but
is innot ininno stalled
sistemaon
atual.
The
assigned
plug-in
is
part
of
the
show
file
but
is
not
inthe
current
system.
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
stalled
on
the
current
system.
stalled on the current system.
stalled
O plug-in
foi desabilitado
manualmente.
onplug-in
the
current
system.
The
has
manually.
D-Sub
cables
(fordisabled
connecting
to GPI devices)
The
plug-in
has been
disabled
manually.
25-pin
The
plug-in
has been
been
disabled
manually.
The plug-in has been disabled manually.
Para ver a alocao de recursos DSP, veja DSPs Disponveis
To
DSP
resource
allocation,
see
Available
To view
DSP
resource
DSPs
Available
for for
To view
view
DSP
resource
allocation,
see DSPs
DSPs
Available
for
para
Plug-Ins
naallocation,
pgina
58.see
To view
DSP
resource
allocation,
see DSPs Available for
Plug-Ins
on
page
58.
Plug-Ins
on page
58. 58.
Plug-Ins
on page
Plug-Ins Profile
on page 58.Expansion Options
VENUE
Plug-Ins Indisponveis
Unavailable
Plug-Ins
Unavailable
Plug-Ins
Unavailable
Plug-Ins
The following
Unavailable
Plug-Ins
Quando
um
plug-in cannot
naa pode
ser usado
por causa de insuficientes
When
a
plug-in
be
due
to
DSP
reWhen
a plug-in
be used
due and
to
DSPthe
re-Avid
For
details
on cannot
all VENUE
systems
options,
visit
When
a plug-in
cannot
be used
dueinsufficient
to insufficient
insufficient
DSP
rerecursos
debecause
DSP,
porque
ele
foiused
desabilitado,
ou
porque
ele
When
a plug-in
cannot
bedisabled,
used
dueortobecause
insufficient
DSPinstalled,
re- no est
sources,
it
is
it
is
not
a
sources,
because
it
is
disabled,
or
because
it
is
not
installed,
a
website
(www.avid.com).
sources,
because
it
is
disabled,
or
because
it
is
not
installed,
a
instalado,
um cone
de advertncia
surgeitnaisfrente
desse plug-in.
sources,
because
itappears
is disabled,
or because
notThe
installed,
a iconO
warning
icon
in
front
of
that
plug-in.
plug-in
warning
icon
appears
in
front
of
that
plug-in.
The
plug-in
icon
warning
icon
appears
in
front
of
that
plug-in.
The
plug-in
icon
cone de
plug-in
esmaecido,
o switch
Power
do slot possui
warning
icon
appears
in front slot
of e
that
plug-in.
The plug-in
icon um
is
dimmed,
the
switch
a
is LED
dimmed,
and and
the rack
slot Power
switch
has ahas
yellow
LED.LED.
is amarelo.
dimmed,
and
the rack
rack
slot Power
Power
switch
has
a yellow
yellow
LED.
Mix Rack Options
is dimmed, and the rack slot Power switch has a yellow LED.
I/O Options
Unavailable
plug-in
Unavailable
plug-in
Unavailable
plug-in
outputs
Unavailable plug-in
Indication
an unavailable
plug-in
Indication
of anof
plug-in
Indication
ofunavailable
an unavailable
plug-in
Indicaoof
dean
umunavailable
plug-in indisponvel
Indication
plug-in
For
information,
see
Authorizing
For more
information,
see Installing
and and
Authorizing
For more
more
information,
see Installing
Installing
and
Authorizing
line
level
outputs,
and
8Installing
AES
digitaland
outputs.
For
more
information,
seeveja
Authorizing
Para
mais
informaes,
Instalando
e
Autorizando
Plug-Ins na
Plug-Ins
on
page
151.
Plug-Ins
on page
151.151.
Plug-Ins
on page
Plug-Ins
on page 151.
pgina 151.
Chapter
18: Plug-Ins
Mixers
other
Chapter
18: and
Plug-Ins
157 157
Chapter
18: Plug-Ins
157
Chapter
18:
Plug-Ins
Captulo 18: Plug-Ins157157
Inactive Plug-Ins
Inactive Plug-Ins
Inactive
Plug-Ins
Inactive
Plug-Inshas been manually made inactive, the plug-in
Plug-Ins
WhenInativos
a plug-in
When a plug-in has been manually made inactive, the plug-in

icon is agreyed
out.
Plug-Ins
can be made inactive
manually,
When
plug-in
has
been
manually
inactive,
the
When
agreyed
plug-in
has
beeninativo
manually
made inactive
inactive,
the plug-in
plug-in
icon is
out.
Plug-Ins
can manualmente,
be made
manually,
Quando
um
plug-in
foitheir
feito
o in
cone
plugletting
you
retain
assignment
and settings
thedo
rack
icon
is
greyed
out.
Plug-Ins
can
be
made
inactive
manually,
is you
greyed
out.
Plug-Ins
canser
befeitos
made
inactivemanualmente,
in icon
acinzentado.
Plug-Ins
podem
inativos
letting
retain
their
assignment
and settings
inmanually,
the rack
while freeing
up their
DSP
resourcesand
for settings
other tasks.
letting
you
retain
their
assignment
in
rack
letting
you
retain
theiratribuies
assignment
in the
the
rack
permitindo
manter
e and
ajustes
notasks.
rack
enquanto
while freeing
up suas
their
DSP
resources
for settings
other
while
freeing
up
their
DSP
resources
for
other
tasks.
libera
seus
recursos
DSP para
tarefas.
while
freeing
up their
DSP outras
resources
for other tasks.
Indication of an inactive plug-in

Indication of an inactive plug-in
Indication
an inactive
Indicao
de umof
plug-in
inativo plug-in
Indication
of
an inactive
plug-in
For
more
information,
see Active and Inactive Plug-Ins on
For more information, see Active and Inactive Plug-Ins on

pagemore
160. information, see Active and Inactive Plug-Ins on
For
For
more
information,
seePlug-Ins
Active and
Inactive
Plug-Ins
on
page
160.
Para
mais
informaes,
veja
Ativos
e Inativos
na pgina
page
160.
page
160.
160.
Scope Indication in the Plug-Ins Page
Scope Indication in the Plug-Ins Page
Scope
Indication
in
Plug-Ins Page
Scope
Indication
in the
the
Page
Indicao
de
Abrangncia
naPlug-Ins
Pgina
The Plug-In
Rack provides
visualPlug-Ins
indication whenever a
The Plug-In Rack provides visual indication whenever a

plug-in
is scoped
in
the currently
targeted
snapshot.
Thea SnapThe
Plug-In
Rack
provides
visual
indication
whenever
The
Plug-In
Rackin
provides
visual
indication
whenever
a Snap-
plug-in
is scoped
the
currently
targeted
snapshot.
O rack
oferece
indicao
visual
sempre
que umThe
shot Plug-In
pop-up
menu
turns
red whenever
that
plug-in
isplug-in
scoped
plug-in
is
scoped
in
the
currently
targeted
snapshot.
The
Snapplug-in
is
scoped
in
the
currently
targeted
snapshot.
The
Snapshot
pop-up
menu
turns
red
whenever
that
plug-in
is
scoped
alvo do snapshot selecionado atualmente. O menu pop-up Snapshot
by the
currently
targeted
snapshot.
shot
pop-up
menu
turns
red
whenever
that
plug-in
is
scoped
shot
pop-up
menu
turns
whenever
that
plug-inselecionado
is scoped
torna-se
vermelho
sempre
quered
o plug-in
alvo
snapshot
by
the
currently
targeted
snapshot.
by
atualmente.
by the
the currently
currently targeted
targeted snapshot.
snapshot.
Scoped
Scoped
Scoped
Scoped
Indication of a scoped plug-in
(Snapshot
(Snapshot
(Snapshot
(Snapshot
menu
menu
menu
menu
red)
red)
red)
red)
Indication
a scoped
Indicao
de umof
alvo plug-in
Indication
ofplug-in
a scoped
plug-in
Indication
a scoped plug-in
For more of
information,
see Plug-In Presets and Snapshots on
For more information, see Plug-In Presets and Snapshots on
page
164.
For
more
information,veja
see Presets
Plug-In de
Presets
andeSnapshots
Para
mais
informaes,
Plug-In
Snapshotson
na
For
pagemore
164.information, see Plug-In Presets and Snapshots on
pgina
164.
page
164.
page 164.
Rack
Slots
Slots
de racks
Rack
Slots
Rack
Slots
Rack
Slots
Each rack
provides 25 plug-in slots. You can assign any in-
Each
rack
provides
25 plug-in
slots.Voc
You pode
can assign
any
inCada
rack
oferece
25 slots
de plug-in.
atribuir
qualquer
stalledrack
plug-in
to any
available
rack You
slot. can assign any inEach
provides
25
plug-in
slots.
Each
rack
provides
25 available
plug-in
can assign any inplug-in
instalado
a to
qualquer
slot deslots.
disponvel.
stalled
plug-in
any
rack You
slot.
stalled
stalled plug-in
plug-in to
to any
any available
available rack
rack slot.
slot.
Current
Current
Current
Current
routing assignment
routing assignment
routing assignment
routing assignment
Input (source)
Input (source)
Input
(source)
Channel
Insert
Input (source)
Power
Channel
or
OutputInsert
Power
Channel
or
OutputInsert
Power
Channel
Insert
Power
Plug-In
or Output
or
Output
Plug-In
selector
In/Out
Plug-In
selector
Plug-In
In/Out
selector
Snapshots
In/Out
selector
In/Out
Snapshots
Assigned plug-in
Snapshots
Snapshots
Assigned plug-in
A rack slot and its controls, Assigned
with an plug-in
assigned plug-in shown
Assigned plug-in
A rack slot and its controls, with an assigned plug-in shown
Um A
slot
de rack
seusits
controles,
com
um an
plug-ins
atribudo
rack
sloteand
controls,
with
assigned
plug-in shown
A
rackrack
slot and
controls,the
withfollowing
an assigned
plug-in shown
Each
slotits
provides
controls
to select and
Each rack slot provides the following controls to select and

manage
plug-ins:
Each
slot
the
following
controls
to
and
Cada
slotrack
deplug-ins:
rack
oferece os
seguintes
controles
selecionar
Each
rack
slot provides
provides
the
following
controlspara
to select
select
and e
manage
manage
plug-ins:
gerenciar
plug-ins:
manage plug-ins:
Power (Config Mode Only)

Power (Config Mode Only)
Power
(Config
Mode
Only)
Power
(Apenas
no modo
Power
(Config
Mode Config)
Only)
Power turns the rack slot on or off. When off, the plug-in conPower turns the rack slot on or off. When off, the plug-in consumes turns
no DSP.
Power
the
rack
on
off.
off,
Power
ligaturns
desliga
slot.
Quando
desligado,
plug-inconno
Power
the
rack oslot
slot
on or
or
off. When
When
off, the
theoplug-in
plug-in
consumes
noou
DSP.
sumes
no
DSP.
consome
sumes DSP.
no DSP.
158
158
158
158
158
VENUE
VENUE
VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
Guide
Guide
Guia VENUE Profile
In/Out (bypass)
In/Out (bypass)
In/Out
(bypass)
In/Out
(bypass)
In/Out
(bypass)
The
In/Out
switch takes the rack slot in or out of circuit (by-
The In/Out switch takes the rack slot in or out of circuit (bypasses
the slot
and takes
any plug-in
assigned
to out
it). of circuit (byThe
In/Out
switch
the
rack
slot
in
or
The
In/Out
switch
takes
the
rack
slot
indentro
or
of for
circuit
passes
theIn/Out
slot
and
any plug-in
assigned
to out
it).ou
O
switch
coloca
o
slot
de
rack
a do(bycircuito
passes
the slot
and
plug-in assigned
to
it).
passes
and oany
any
assigned
to atribudo
it).
(colocathe
emslot
by-pass
slotplug-in
e qualquer
plug-in
a ele).
Input
Input
Input
Input
The Input pop-up menu determines plug-in input (source).
The Input pop-up menu determines plug-in input (source).

Use this
menu
to designate
the plug-in
as a channel
insert or
The
Input
pop-up
menu
determines
plug-in
input
The
Input
pop-up
menu
determines
plug-in
input (source).
(source).
Use
this
menu
to
designate
the aplug-in
asdo
a channel
insert or
menu
pop-up
Input
determina
entrada
plug-in
aO bus
processor
bydesignate
choosing
from
the Inserts
or Bus(fonte).
Use
this
menu
to
the
plug-in
as
a
channel
insert
Use
menu
to
the
plug-in
ascomo
a channel
insert or
or
aUtilize
busthis
processor
bydesignate
choosing
from
the Inserts
orum
Businsert
esse
menu
para
designer
o
plug-in
canal
sub-menus.
For by
more
information,
seeInserts
Routing
Plug-Insdeon
a
bus
processor
choosing
from
the
or
Bus
a
bus
processor
by
choosing
from
the
Inserts
or
Bus
ou
um
processador
de
bus
escolhendo
nos
submenus
Inserts
sub-menus. For more information, see Routing Plug-Ins on ou
page 160. For more information, see Routing Plug-Ins on
sub-menus.
sub-menus.
For more
information,
see Routing
Plug-Ins
Bus. 160.
Para mais
informaes,
veja Roteando
Plug-Ins
na on
pgina
page
page
160.
160.
page
160.
Once a plug-in has been routed, its input source is displayed in
Once a plug-in has been routed, its input source is displayed in
the Input
area of
each
rack
slot,its
as input
follows:
Once
a
has
been
routed,
source is
in
Once
a plug-in
plug-in
haseach
been
routed,
is displayed
displayed
in
UmaInput
vez
que
o plug-in
foirack
roteado,
sua
fontesource
de entrada
apresentada
the
area
of
slot,its
as input
follows:
the
Input
area
of
each
rack
slot,
follows:
If
the
plug-in
is
being
used
as
an
insert,
the
channel
or
narea
Input
de
cada
slot,
conforme
se
segue:
the
Input
area
of
each
rack
slot,
as
follows:
If the plug-in is being used as an insert, the channel or
bus
and
number
is usado
shown,
for
example,
Kick
If
plug-in
is
being
used
as
insert,
channel
or1) e o
Se
oname
plug-in
est
sendo
como
umthe
insert,
o (Ch
nome
If the
the
plug-in
being
used
as an
an
insert,
the
channel
bus
name
andis
number
is shown,
for
example,
Kick (Chor1)
or
Aux
(12).
The
Channel
Insert/Bus
Output
selector
aunmero
do
canal
ou
do
bus
apresentado,
por
exemplo,
Kick
bus
name
and
number
is
for
Kick
1)
busAux
name
andThe
number
is shown,
shown,
for example,
example,
Kick (Ch
(Chau1)
or
(12).
Channel
Insert/Bus
Output
selector
(Ch
1)
ou
Aux
(12).
O
seletor
Channel
Insert/Bus
Output
tomatically
switches
to
Channel
Insert
mode,
showing
or
The
Insert/Bus
Output
selector
auor Aux
Aux (12).
(12).switches
The Channel
Channel
Insert/Bus
Output
selector
automatically
to Channel
Insert
mode,
showing
automaticamente
alterna
o modo
Channel
Insert,
the
insert point
occupied
bypara
the plug-in.
tomatically
switches
to
Channel
Insert
mode,
showing
tomatically
switches
to
Channel
Insert pelo
mode,
showing
the
insert point
occupied
by the
plug-in.
mostrando
o
ponto
de
insero
ocupado
plug-in.
the
insert
point
occupied
by
the
plug-in.
If
the
plug-in
is on
a bus, the
bus source is shown
the
point
occupied
byselected
the
plug-in.
Se
oinsert
plug-in
est
em
umthe
bus,
a fonte
desource
bus selecionada
If
the
plug-in
is on
a bus,
selected
bus
is shown
inthe
theplug-in
Input selector,
for the
example,
Aux
1 source
or Grp is
1.shown
The
If
is
on
a
bus,
selected
bus
no
selector
Input,
por
exemplo,
Aux
1
ou
Grp 1. O
mostrada
If
the
plug-in
is
on
a
bus,
the
selected
bus
source
shown
in the Input selector, for example, Aux 1 or Grp is
1.
The
Channel
Insert/Bus
Output
selector
can
be
used
to
assign
in
the
Input
selector,
for
example,
Aux
1
or
Grp
1.
The
seletor
Channel
Insert/Bus
Output
pode
ser
utilizado
in
the
Input
selector,
for
example,
Aux
1
or
Grp
1.
The
Channel Insert/Bus Output selector can be used to assignpara
the output
routing
of
the
a channel
bus.
Channel
Insert/Bus
Output
selector
can
be
to
assign
atribuir
um
roteamento
de plug-in
sada
dotoplug-in
paraor
um
canal ou
Channel
Insert/Bus
Output
selector
be used
used
to
assign
the output
routing of
the plug-in
tocan
a channel
or
bus.
bus.
the
output
routing
of
the
plug-in
to
a
channel
or
bus.
the output routing of the plug-in to a channel or bus.
Channel Insert or Bus Output

Channel
Insertou
orBus
BusOutput
Output
Channel Insert
Channel
Channel Insert
Insert or
or Bus
Bus Output
Output
The Channel Insert/Bus Output pop-up menu displays differThe Channel Insert/Bus Output pop-up menu displays different
choices
depending
onOutput
whether
the plug-in
ismostra
being used
as
The
Channel
Insert/Bus
pop-up
menu
differO menu
pop-up
Channel
Insert/Bus
Output
diferentes
The
Channel
Insert/Bus
pop-up
menuisdisplays
displays
different choices
depending
onOutput
whether
the plug-in
being used
as
a
channel
insert,
or
as
a
bus
processor,
as
follows:
escolhas
dependendo
se
o
plug-in
ussado
como
um
insert
de
ent
choices
depending
on whether
the
is
ent
choicesinsert,
depending
whether
the plug-in
plug-in
is being
being used
used as
as
a channel
or as aonbus
processor,
as follows:
canal
ou
um
processador
de
bus:
a
a
processor,
as
If the insert,
plug-inor
isas
being
as a channel
insert, the Chana channel
insert,
a bus
busused
processor,
as follows:
follows:
Se
If the
plug-inor
isas
being
used
as a channel
insert,
the
Chan channel
oInsert
plug-in
est
sendo
usado
como
um
insert
canal, o
nel
selector
shows
the
four
insert
points
ondethat
If
the
plug-in
is
being
used
as
a
channel
insert,
the
Chan selector
If the
plug-in
is being
used
as four
a channel
the
Channel
Insert
selector
shows
the
points
on
Channel
Insert
mostra
os insert
quatroinsert,
pontos
dethat
insero
channel
(14).
Theshows
letter the
I is
shown
before
the
insert
nel
Insert
selector
four
insert
points
on
that
nel
Insert(14).
selector
shows
four
insert
points
oninsert
that do
do
canal
(14).
A letra
I the
apresetndad
antesthe
do
nmero
channel
The
letter
I
is
shown
before
number (for
example,
I1 I
indicates
thebefore
current
plug-in
is
channel
(14).
The
letter
is
shown
the
insert
insert
(por
exemplo,
I1
indica
que
o
plug-in
est
insertado
channel
(14).
The
letter
I
is
shown
before
the
insert
number (for example, I1 indicates the current plug-in is na
inserted
into
the
first
insert
position
on
its
channel).
number
(for
example,
I1
indicates
the
current
plug-in
primeira
canal).
number
(for
I1
indicates
the
plug-in is
is
inserted posio
intoexample,
thedesse
first insert
position
oncurrent
its channel).
inserted
into
the
first
insert
position
on
its
channel).
If
the
plug-in
is
being
used
as
a
bus
processor,
the
menu
Se
o
plug-in
est
sendo
usado
como
um
processador
de bus, o
inserted
into
the
first
insert
position
on
its
channel).
menu
If the retorna
plug-in oisseletor
being used
asusado
a bus processor,
the menu
Output
selecionar
o destino
becomes
the Output
selector
used
topara
select
thethe
destina
If
is
used
a
menu
becomes
If the
the plug-in
plug-in
is being
beingselector
used as
asused
a bus
bustoprocessor,
processor,
the
menu
the
Output
select
the
destinada
sada
do
plug-in.
tion
for
plug-in
output.
becomes
the
selector
becomes
the Output
Output
selector used
used to
to select
select the
the destinadestination
for plug-in
output.
tion
for
plug-in
output.
tion for plug-in output.
Bus Output
Channel Insert
Bus Output
Channel Insert
Busplug-in
Output
Insert (at left) and a stereo
A mono plug-in insertedChannel
on
a
channel
Bus Output
Channel
Insert
Um
plug-in
mono
insertado
em
um(at
canal
e um plug-in
A
mono
plug-in
inserted
on a(at
channel
left) (
andesquerda)
a stereo plug-in
assigned
as
a
bus
processor
right)
A mono plug-in
inserted
a(at
channel
left) and a stereo plug-in
assigned
as a bus
processor
right) (at
A
mono plug-in
inserted
onprocessador
a channel
(atde
left)
and(adireita)
stereo plug-in
estreo
atribudo
comoon
bus
assigned as a bus processor (at right)
assignedSelector
as a bus processor (at right)
Plug-In
Plug-In Selector
Seletor de
Plug-In
Plug-In
Selector
Plug-In
Selector
The Plug-In
selector displays a list of available plug-ins to load
The Plug-In selector displays a list of available plug-ins to load

into
that rack
slot. Plug-Ins
arranged
process
typeto(such
The
Plug-In
displays
a
of
plug-ins
load
O seletor
deselector
Plug-In
mostra are
uma
lista
deby
plug-ins
disponveis
The
selector
displays
a list
list
of available
available
plug-ins
loadpara
into Plug-In
that rack
slot. Plug-Ins
are
arranged
by process
typeto(such
as
EQ,
Dynamics,
and
Delay).
For
more information,
see(such
As-pelo
into
that
rack
slot.
Plug-Ins
are
arranged
by
process
type
carregar
naquele
slot
de
rack.
Plug-Ins
so
organizados
into
that
rack slot.and
Plug-Ins
areFor
arranged
by process type
as EQ,
Dynamics,
Delay).
more information,
see(such
Assigning
and
Routing
Plug-Ins
on
page
159.
tipo
deDynamics,
processamento
(como For
EQ,more
Dynamics
e Delay).see
Para
mais
as
EQ,
and
Delay).
information,
as
EQ, Dynamics,
andPlug-Ins
Delay). For
more
information, see AsAssigning
and
Routing
on
page
159.
informaes,
veja Atribuindo
e Roteando
Plug-Ins na pgina 159.
signing
and
Routing
Plug-Ins
on
page
159.
signing and Routing Plug-Ins on page 159.
Menu
Snapshots
Snapshots
Menu
Formatos
de Plug-In
Plug-In
Formats
OThe
menu
Snapshots
oferece
ferramentas
gerenciar
recursos de
Snapshots
menu
provides
tools topara
manage
snapshot-replug-ins
relacionados
a snapshots
de dentro
da telascreen.
Plug-Ins.Using
Usando
lated plug-in
features
from within
the Plug-Ins
o the
menu
Snapshots,
voc
pode
rapidamente
checar
quais
snapshots
Snapshots menu, you can quickly check to see which exexistentes
se referem ao plug-in, assim como criar, atualizar ou
isting snapshots refer to the current plug-in, as well as create,
remover snapshots.
Plug-Insinserted
insertados
em canaismust
precisam
ser simtrcos
(em outras
Plug-Ins
on channels
be symmetrical
(in other
palavras,
mono
in/out
stereo
in/out).
Plug-Ins
busses
words,
mono
in/out
or ou
stereo
in/out).
Plug-Ins
onem
busses
canpodem
ser
assimtricos
(mono-in/stereo
ou
multichannel
out).
be asymmetrical (mono-in/stereo or multichannel out).
update, or remove snapshots.
Stage Rack Features
Seletor Side-Chain
Side-Chain Selector
OThe
seletor
Side-Chain
aparece
prximo
ao topo
do rack
quando
voc
audio
I/O for selector
VENUE
Profile
Racks
Side-Chain
appearssystems.
near theUp
toptooftwo
the Stage
Rack view
seleciona
um
plug-in
que
suporta
entradas
side-chain
ou
key.
can you
be used
simultaneously,
supporting
up to 96or
total
inputs.
when
select
a plug-in that supports
side-chain
key
inNo modo Config, o seletor Side-Chain permite estabelecer um
put.
In
Config
mode,
the
Side-Chain
selector
lets
you
establish
roteamento side-chain para o plug-in. Uma vez estabelecido, voc
Audio I/O routing to the plug-in. Once established, you can
a side-chain
pode
enderear e reenderear sinais side-chain em ambos os modos
route
side-chain
signals
in both
Config
and Show
48 re-route
inputs
controllable
mic side-chain,
preamps
and
Configeand
Show.
Parawith
maisremotely
informaes
sobre
sinais
veja
mode. For
more
information
about
side-chain
signals,
see
Endereamento
de
Side-Chain
na
pgina
161.
Side-Chain
Routing
page 161.
8 analog
outputon
channels;
Atribuindo
e Roteando
Plug-Ins
Synchronization
and Control
I/O
Assigning and Routing Plug-Ins
deSnake
connectors
to enable
Antes
usar um
plug-in como
insertprimary
de canaland
ou redundant
processador(ifde
Before you can use a plug-in as a channel insert or bus procesapplicable)
VENUE
Rack.
bus, o plug-in
precisaconnection
ser atribudotoaaum
slot deFOH
rack.
sor the plug-in must be assigned to a rack slot.
Antes de ujm plug-in ser atribudo, ele deve ser instalado.

Before a plug-in can be assigned, it must be installed. See
Veja Instalando e Autorizando Plug-Ins na pgina 151.
InstallingComponents
and Authorizing Plug-Ins on page 151.
System
Atribuindo Plug-Ins a Slots de Rack
Assigning
to Rack Slots
Included Plug-Ins
Components
Para atribuir um plug-in:
ToAll
assign
a plug-in:
VENUE
VENUE
Profile
1 Put the
system
into console
Config mode.

2 2VGo
pgina
to the Plug-Ins.
Plug-Ins page.
3 3Clique
seletor
deselector
plug-in
sobre
slot
de rack
(ouan
emalum
Click
the
Plug-In
on anum
empty
rack
slotvazio
(or on
no
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
slot
atribudo
pararack
alterar
plug-in.)
ready
assigned
slot atoatribuio
change ade
plug-in
assignment.)
VENUE Mouse Pad
Choose
anplug-in
available
plug-indo
from
the Plug-In
selector
VENUE
Profile
Guide
4 4Escolha
um
disponvel
submenu
do seletor
de Plug-In.
sub-menus.
Only
plug-ins
that
are
installed
will
be
available.
Apenas
plug-ins
que
esto
instalados
estaro
disponveis.
Rack(s) (see next)

Mono
Pode
ser usado
como
inserts
apenas
emorrguas
Mono
Can
be used
as inserts
only
in mono
strips
monomono ou
busses
Auxes,
Groups
ou
Matrix
mono,
ou
no
bus
C/M.
Auxes,
mono Groups,
or MatrixComponents
busses or on the C/M bus.
Additional
Required
Stereo
Pode
ser
usado
como
insert
em rguas
estreo, Auxes
The following
components
must
be purchased
separately:
Stereo
Can
be used
as inserts
in
stereo
strips,
stereo-linked
associados
em
estreo,
Groups
estreo,
busses
PQ
(que
so
sempre
Auxes,
stereo
Groups, PQ busses
(whichflat-panel
are always
stereo)
and
Video
or greater
VGA
display
estreo)
eDisplay
busses (15-inch
LR.
across
the LR busses.
recommended;
DVI
supported.
Other
(Mono
In/StereoOut)
Out)Can
Pode
usado
em busses
para delay,
Other
(Mono
In/Stereo
beser
used
on busses
for delay,
reverb
e
processamentos
similares.
USBand
keyboard
reverb,
similar and
processing.
Movendo e Copiando Plug-Ins
Digital and
Snake
Moving
Copying
(Modo Config
apenas) Plug-Ins
TheMode
connection
(Config
Only) between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
Para
mover ou
copiar
um This
plug-in
no rack,
arraste
o cone
do plug-in
a Digital
Snake
cable.
cable
can be
purchased
directly
para
um
novo
slot.
Um
menu
pop-up
surge
oferecendo
trs
escolhas:
To move
copy
plug-in in by
theyour
rack,preferred
drag the plug-in
to
fromor
Avid
oraassembled
vendor.icon
Cancel,
Copy
Plug-In
Here
ou
Move
Plug-In
Here.
a new rack slot. A pop-up menu appears offering three choices:
Cancel, Copy Plug-In Here, or Move Plug-In Here.
Optional
Movendo
um Components
Plug-In
Moving
a Plug-Incomponents are optional, and must be
The following
Quando
voc move um plug-in de um slot para outro, so mantidos
separately:
opurchased
tipoyou
do plug-in,
statusfrom
in/out
e power
on/off,
os ajustes
When
move aos
plug-in
one
rack slot
to another,
theatuais
e
o
roteamento.
Alm
disso,
todos
os
snapshots
associados
USB
flash
disk
(or
other
portable
USB
storage
device
plug-in type, in/out state, power on/off, current plug-in set-for so
atualizados
para
refletirdata;
a nova
posio
rack.recommended)
transfer
of Show
512
MB orno
larger
tings, and routing are maintained. In addition, all associated
Near-field
monitor
speakers
mix
position
monitoring
snapshots
are updated
to reflect
thefor
new
rack
position.
Copiando um Plug-In
Copying
avoc
Plug-In
Quando
copia
um plug-inmicrophone
para um novo
slotXLR
de rack,
o tipo do
Dynamic
or condenser
and
mic cable
plug-in(for
original,
assim como os status in/out e power on/off e os
Talkback)
When you copy a plug-in to a new rack slot, the source plug-in
ajustes atuais so copiados para o slot de destino. No entanto, o
Footswitches
to 2)
type,in-circuit
state, (up
active
state, and current plug-in settings
roteamoeno no copiado. Alm disso, snapshots de plug-in no
are
copied
to cables
the destination
rack slot.
However,
source
copiados.
MIDI
(for connecting
external
MIDIthe
devices)
so
plug-in
routing
is not
In addition,
plug-in
snapshots
BNC
cables
(forcopied.
connecting
Word clock
between
the
are
not VENUE
copied. system
Sobrescrevendo
um plug-in
existente
and external
digital devices)
Movendo ou
se existe um plug-in no slot de rack de
Overwriting
An copiando,
Existing Plug-In
destino, esse plug-in deletado. Quando o plug-in no slot de destino
When
either todos
moving
copying, ifou
there
is an existing
plug-in
deletado,
os or
roteamentos
referncias
a ele em
snapshots
inexistentes
the destination
rack slot, that plug-in
is deleted. When the
so automaticamente
apagados.
plug-in in the destination rack is deleted, any routing or references

the deleted
plug-in
will be
auThe to
following
options
can in
be existing
added tosnapshots
VENUE Profile
systems.
tomatically
For detailscleared.
System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options
Plug-In
selector
menus
Menu
seletor
de Plug-In

If the plug-in
isinstaller
not installed
or therewith
are insufficient
DSPiLok
rePlug-in
discs (if
pre-authorized
Se o plug-in
no est
instalado
ou any)
no h recursos
DSP suficientes
sources available, the plug-in will appear as unavailable, or indisponveis,
plug-in
como indisponvel ou inativo.
Twoo (2)
IEC aparecer
power cables
active.
Coloque o cursor sobre o plug-in para mostrar uma dica que

Place the cursor over the plug-in to display a Tool Tip that
explica
o plug-in est indisponvel ou inativo.
Each
Stage porque
Rack includes:
explains why the plug-in is unavailable or inactive.
I/O Options
outputs
Mixers
other
Chapter
18: and
Plug-Ins
159
Plug-Ins Ativos e Inativos
Para
insertar um plug-in em um canal pela pgina Plug-Ins:
To insert a plug-in on a channel from the Plug-Ins page:
Para alternar o status ativo/inativo de um plug-in:
Make sure the

is already
to aa um
rackslot
slot.de
(See
11Certifique-se
de plug-in
que o plug-in
estassigned
atribudo
rack.
(Veja
Atribuindo
Roteando
Plug-Ins
pgina
159.)
Assigning
and eRouting
Plug-Ins
onnapage
159.)
Active and Inactive Plug-Ins

To toggle the active/inactive state of a plug-in:
Clique
no switch Power do slot de rack apropriado. Quando
Click the appropriate rack slot Power switch. When active,
ativo,the
o switch
emWhen
verde.a Quando
plug-in est
Power Power
switchse
is acende
lit green.
plug-in um
is unavailable
indisponvel (e inativo), o switch Power se acende em amarelo.
(and inactive), the Power switch is lit yellow.
Click othe
InputInput
(source)
selector
in de
therack
rackeslot
and choose
22Clique
seletor
(fonte)
no slot
escolha
um canal
a channel
its Inserts sub-menu.
do
submenufrom
Inserts.
Power
Insertando
slot de
rack
canal pela
Plug-Ins page
Insertingum
a rack
slot
onema um
channel
frompgina
the Plug-Ins
Indication
of an inactive
Indicao
de um plug-in
inativo plug-in
Roteando
Plug-Ins
Routing
Plug-Ins
After
plug-in
has
rack
you can
specify
Depois
deaum
plug-in
terbeen
sidoassigned
atribudoto
a aum
slotslot,
de rack,
voc
pode
especificar
seu roteamento.
O roteamento
Plug-Inthe
detemina
its routing.
Plug-In routing
determinesdo
whether
plug-inse
is
ele sera
como insert
deorcanal
usedusado
as a channel
insert
as a ou
busprocessador
processor. de bus.
slotautomaticamente
automatically identifies
and
connects
the firstslot
OThe
slotrack
de rack
identifica
e conecta
aotoprimeiro
available
insert slot(14)
(14)no
oncanal
the selected
channel.
The Chande
insert disponvel
selecionado.
O seletor
Channel
nel Insert
selector
shows
current
Insert
mostra
a posio
do the
insert
atual. insert position.
Utilizando Plug-Ins como Insert de Canal
Using Plug-Ins as Channel Inserts
CadaEach
canal
ofereceprovides
quarto slots
para for
inserts
de canal.
O sinal
channel
four slots
channel
inserts.
Signaldo
canal
roteado
para
o
insert
e
retorna
ao
mesmo
canal.
Voc
pode
from the channel is routed to the insert and returned to the
atribuir plug-ins para pontos de insero especficos pela tela Plugsame channel. You can assign plug-ins to specific channel inIns ou pela tela Input.
sert points from the Plug-Ins screen or from the Input screen.
Para insertar um plug-in em um canal pelas pginas Inputs ou

To insert a plug-in on a channel from the Inputs or Outputs page:
Outputs:
1 Go to the Input or Output screen.
1 V tela Input ou Output.
2 Click the first available Channel Insert selector and choose
2 Clique
no primeiro
seletor
disponvel
e escolha
an available
plug-in
fromChannel
the rackInsert
sub-menus.
All currently
um plug-in
dos
submenus.
Todos
os
plug-ins
disponveis
de
formato
available plug-ins of a compatible mono/stereo format
are
mono/estreo compatvel so listados nos submenus. Plug-Ins
listed in the sub-menus. Plug-Ins that are unavailable are
indisponveis so listados em itlico. Plug-Ins que j esto atribudos
listed in italics. Plug-Ins that are already assigned as channel
como inserts de canal so mostrados com suas atribuies de
inserts are shown with their insert assignment.
insert.
Channel Insert selector for a plug-in rack
Seletor Channel Insert de um rack de plug-in
If no insert slots are available on the channel, the selector dis-
Se
slotsa de
insert no
esto disponveis no canal, o seletor mostra
plays
question
mark.
um ponto de interrogao.
Using Plug-Ins
as a Processadores
Bus Processor
Utilizando
Plug-Ins como
de Bus
Plug-Ins can be used on busses for send-and-return processing
Plug-Ins podem ser usados em busses para processamento send/

with effects such as reverb and delay. A plug-in is configured
return com efeitos como reverb e delay. Um plug-in configurado
for bus
processing by
an Aux,
Matrix,
PQ
or
para
processamento
deassigning
bus atribuindo
umGroup,
bus Aux,
Group,
Matrix,
Mains
bus
(including
Monitor
output),
or
an
input
channel
PQ ou Mains (incluindo sada Monitor), ou um Direct Out de canal
Direct
Out,como
as thea plug-in
source,
then
assigning
the
de
entrada,
fonte deinput
entrada
de um
plug-in,
e atribuindo
a
output
the plug-in
toInput
an input
channel
FX return,
or to
sada
do of
plug-in
para um
Channel
ou FXorreturn,
ou para
uma
sada
de hardware,
conforme
se segue:
a hardware
output,
as follows:
Retorne
plug-ins
alimentados
busor
para
um Input
Channel
Return bus-fed plug-ins to anpor
input
FX Return
to estabou FX Return para estabelecer um efeito send/return.
lish an effects send-and-return path.
Roteie
plug-ins alimentados por buspara uma sada de hardware
para
Route
bus-fed plug-ins
to a hardware
output for specialnecessidades
especializadas
de processamento
(como
ized processing
needs externo).
(such as feeding an external crossalimentar
um crossover
over).
Voc atribui plug-ins para processamento de bus na tela Plug-Ins.

You assign plug-ins for bus processing in the Plug-Ins screen.
Para usar um plug-in como processador de bus:

To use a plug-in as a bus processor:
1 V tela Plug-Ins.
1 Go to the Plug-Ins screen.
Clicking the Channel Insert selector (top)
Clicando no seletor Channel Insert (alto)
22Certifique-se
de plug-in
que o plug-in
est insataldo
e atribudo
a um
Make sure the
is installed
and assigned
to a rack
slot.slot
de rack.
3 The plug-in appears in the Inserts list for that channel.
3 O plug-in aparece na lista Inserts desse canal.
4 To open the window for an inserted plug-in, click its name
4 Para
a janelaInserts
para um
plug-in insertado, clique seu nome na
in abrir
the channel
list.
lista Inserts do canal.
160
Guia VENUE Profile
Um
plug-in atribudo
a um
slot
de rack
A plug-in
assigned
to a
rack
slot
3
Side-Chain Routing
Routing
3 Click
Click the
the Plug-In
Plug-In Input
Input selector
selector at
at the
the top
top of
of the
the correspondcorrespondSide-Chain
3
Click
the
Plug-In
Input
selector
at
the
top
of
corresponding
rack
slot,
and
choose
an
available
bus
from
Input
Side-Chain
3
Input selector
at thebus
topfrom
of the
thethe
correspondSide-Chain Routing
Routing
ingClick
rackthe
slot,Plug-In
and choose
an available
the
Input
3 Click
the
Plug-In
Input
selector
atslot
the
top
of
the
correspond3ing
Clique
noslot,
seletor
Plug-In
Input
no
topo do
rack
correpondente,
Roteamento
Side-Chain
systems
support
side-chain
Side-Chain
Routing
rack
and
choose
an
available
from
the
Input
VENUE
systems
support
side-chain (key)
(key) processing
processing for
for
3 Click
Input
thede
top
of
the
correspond- VENUE
sub-menus.
Side-Chain
Routing
ing
rack
slot,the
andPlug-In
choose
an selector
availableatbus
bus
from
the
Input
sub-menus.
e escolha
um bus
nosan
submenus.
ing rack
slot,disponvel
and choose
available bus from the Input
VENUE
support
side-chain
(key)
plug-ins
that
side-chain
triggering.
VENUE systems
systems
support
side-chain
(key) processing
processing for
for
sub-menus.
plug-ins
that support
support
side-chain
triggering.
ingClick
rackthe
slot,Plug-In
and choose
an available
Input
sub-menus.
3
Input selector
at thebus
topfrom
of thethe
correspondSide-Chain
Routing
VENUE
systems
support
side-chain
(key)
processing
O
sistema
VENUE
suporta
processamento
side-chain for
(key) para
plug-ins
that
support
side-chain
triggering.
sub-menus.
VENUE
systems
support
side-chain
(key)
processing
for
plug-ins
that
support
side-chain
triggering.
sub-menus.
ingInput
rackselector
slot, and choose an available bus from the Input
Plug-in
Input
selector
plug-ins
support
side-chain
triggering.
plug-ins
quethat
suportam
gatilhos
side-chain.
Plug-in
Side-chain
routing
is
not
stored
in
snapshots.
plug-ins
that
support
side-chain
triggering.
Side-chain
routing
is
not
stored
in
snapshots.
VENUE systems support side-chain (key) processing for
Plug-in
Input
sub-menus.
Plug-in
Input selector
selector
Side-chain
routing
is
stored
snapshots.
Side-chain
routing
is not
not
stored in
intriggering.
snapshots.
Plug-in Input selector
plug-ins
that
support
side-chain
Side-chain
routing
is
stored
in
Roteamentos
side-chain
no
so
The Side-Chain
Side-Chain
selectors
appear
across
the
top of
ofarmazenados
the plug-ins
plug-ins em
Side-chain
routing
is not
notacross
stored
in snapshots.
snapshots.
The
selectors
appear
the
top
the
snapshots.
The
Side-Chain
selectors
appear
across
the
top
of
the
plug-ins
screen.
You must
must
be in
in Config
Config
mode
tothe
establish
or remove
remove
a
The
Side-Chain
selectors
appear
across
top
of
the
plug-ins
screen.
You
be
mode
to
establish
or
a
Side-chain routing
is appear
not stored
in snapshots.
The
Side-Chain
selectors
across
the
top
of
the
screen.
You
must
be
in
Config
mode
to
establish
or
remove
a
TheYou
Side-Chain
across
the top
the plug-ins
plug-ins
side-chain
assignment.
Once appear
established,
side-chain
routing
screen.
must Required
be selectors
in Config
mode
to establish
orofremove
a
Stage Rack Features
Additional
Components
side-chain
assignment.
Once
established,
side-chain
routing
screen.
You
must
be
in
Config
mode
to
establish
or
remove
a
O
seletor
Side-Chain
aparece
no
topo
da
tela
dos
plug-ins.
Voc
deve
side-chain
assignment.
Once
established,
side-chain
routing
screen.
You (but
must
beOnce
in
Config
mode
to
establish
or
remove
a
can be
be
changed
(but
not
added
or removed)
removed)
in top
Show
mode.
side-chain
assignment.
established,
side-chain
The
Side-Chain
selectors
appear
across
the
ofrouting
the
plug-ins
can
changed
not
added
or
in
Show
mode.
estar
no
modo
Config
para
estabelecer
ou
remover
uma
atribuio
side-chain
assignment.
Once
established,
side-chain
routing
Stage
Racks
are
used
with
an
FOH
Rack,
and
provide
all
stage
The
following
components
must
be
purchased
separately:
can
be
changed
(but
not
added
or
removed)
in
Show
mode.
side-chain
assignment.
Once
established,
side-chain
routing
Assigning
plug-in
Input
source
to
a
Group
bus
can
be
changed
(but
not
added
or
removed)
in
Show
mode.
screen.
You
must
be
in
Config
mode
to
establish
or
remove
a
Assigning
plug-in de
Input
source
Group bus
Atribuindo
a entrada
plug-in
a um to
busa Group
side-chain.
Uma vez(but
estabelecido,
o or
roteamento
side-chain
pode ser
can
be
changed
added
removed)
in
mode.
audio I/O
forInput
VENUE
Profile
systems.
can
be Display
changed
(but not
notOnce
added
or flat-panel
removed)
in Show
Show
mode.
Assigning
plug-in
source
to a
a Group
Group
bus Up to two Stage Racks
Video
(15-inch
or
greater
VGA
display
Assigning
plug-in
Input source
to
bus
side-chain
assignment.
established,
side-chain
routing
alterado (mas no adicionado ou removido) no modo Show.
4 Click
Plug-In
Output
selector
choose
a destination
Assigning
plug-in
Input source
to
aand
Group
bus
Click
the
Plug-In
Output
selector
choose
can
bethe
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up to
96 total inputs.
Assigning
plug-in
Input source
to
aeand
Group
bus
444Clique
no
seletor
Plug-In
Output
escolha
umaa destination
canal
ou bus de
recommended;
minimum
resolution).
VGAmode.
and
can
be changed 1024x768
(but not added
or removed)
in Show
Click
the
Plug-In
Output
selector
and
choose
destination
channel
or
bus.
4
Click
the
Plug-In
Output
selector
and
choose
a
destination
channel or bus.
destino.
4
Click
the
Plug-In
Output
selector
and
choose
a
destination
DVI
supported.
Assigning
plug-in
Input
source
to
a
Group
bus
channel
or
bus.
4 Click
the Plug-In Output selector and choose a destination
channel
or
Audio
I/Obus.
channel
or
channel
or bus.
bus.
4 Click the
Plug-In Output selector and choose a destination
Click
Click to
to specify
specify
Click to
to select
select
Click
Key
(side-chain)
channel or bus.
side-chain
pickoff
Key
(side-chain)
Click
to
side-chain
pickoff
Click
Click
to select
select
Click to
to specify
specify
source
Digital Snake
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
source
Key
(side-chain)
Click to
selectside-chain
pickoff
Click to
specify Only)
Key Cable
(side-chain)
pickoff
Click
to selectside-chain
Click
to
specify
source
Key (side-chain)
side-chain
pickoff
source
Side-Chain controls
controls
Key
(side-chain)
side-chain
pickoff
Side-Chain
The connection
between
Racktoand
Stage Rack requires
source
Click
to selectFOHClick
specify
source
Side-Chain
controls
Side-Chain
controls
Keyrouting
(side-chain)
a Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable
can bepickoff
purchased directly
side-chain
To
assign
side-chain
to
a
plug-in:
Side-Chain
controls
ToControles
assign
side-chain
routing to a plug-in:
Side-Chain
controls
Side-Chain
source
from side-chain
Avid or assembled
To
assign
routing
a
To
assign
side-chain
routing to
toby
a plug-in:
plug-in:
1
a
that
side-chain
processing.
Side-Chain
controls
To
assign
side-chain
routing
to
a
1 Select
Select
a plug-in
plug-in
that supports
supports
side-chain
processing.
To
assign
side-chain
routing
to
a plug-in:
plug-in:
Para
atribuir
um
roteamento
side-chain
para
um plug-in:
1
Select
a
plug-in
that
supports
side-chain
1 Select a plug-in that supports side-chain processing.
processing.
2
system
into
mode
display
Side-chain
1
Select
a
plug-in
that
supports
side-chain
processing.
Tothe
assign
side-chain
routing
to a to
plug-in:
2 Put
Put
the
system
into Config
Config
mode
to
display the
the
Side-chain
Optional
Components
1
Select
a
plug-in
that
supports
side-chain
processing.
2 1Put
Put
the
system
into
Config
mode
to
display
the
Side-chain
tools.
2
the
system
into
Config
mode
to
display
the
Side-chain
Selecione
um
plug-in
que
suporte
processamento
side-chain.
tools.
Assigning
plug-in
output
1 Put
2
Select
the
plug-in into
that Config
supports
mode
side-chain
to
processing.
the
Side-chain
Atribuindo
uma
sada output
de plug-in
Assigning
plug-in
tools.
2 Put
thea system
system
into
Config
mode
to display
display
thebe
Side-chain
The
following
components
are optional,
and must
tools.
3
Choose
the
side-chain
source
signal
from
the
Key
Source
Assigning
tools.
Assigning plug-in
plug-in output
output
3
Choose
the
side-chain
source
signal
from
the
Key
Source
2
Coloque
o
sistema
no
modo
Config
para
mostrar
as
ferramentas
tools.
purchased
separately:
When
a
bus-fed
plug-in
has
both
its
input
source
and
output
2
Put
the
system
into
Config
mode
to
display
the
Side-chain
Assigning
plug-in
outputhas both its input source and output
When
aum
bus-fed
plug-in
3
Choose
the
menu.
Assigning
plug-in
output
3 Side-chain.
Choose
the side-chain
side-chain source
source signal
signal from
from the
the Key
Key Source
Source
Quando
plug-in
alimentado
por
bus
possui
suas
fontes de pop-up
pop-up
menu.
When
a
bus-fed
plug-in
has
both
its
input
source
and
output
assigned,
it
appears
similar
to
the
following
in
the
rack:
tools.
3
Choose
the
side-chain
source
signal
from
the
Key
Source
When
a
bus-fed
plug-in
has
both
its
input
source
and
output
USB
flash
disk
(or
other
portable
USB
storage
device
for
System
Components
assigned,
it appears
similar
to the
in the
rack:
menu.
3 Choose
entrada
e sua
sada output
atribudas,
elefollowing
aparece
de
modo
similar ao pop-up
pop-up
menu. the side-chain source signal from the Key Source
When
bus-fed
plug-in
its
source
and
Assigning
plug-in
assigned,
ita
appears
similar
tohas
theboth
following
in the
the
rack:
When
aappears
bus-fed
plug-into
has
both
its input
input
source
and output
output 4
Choose
the
pickoff
point
(tap)
for
the
side-chain
signal
from
pop-up
menu.
assigned,
it
similar
the
following
in
rack:
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
4 Choose
themenu.
pickoff point (tap) for the side-chain signal from
seguinte
no rack:
pop-up
3Escolha
Choose
the
side-chain
source
signal
from
the
Keypop-up
Source Key
3 Source
apickoff
fonte
de menu.
sinal
side-chain
pelo menu
assigned,
it
similar
to the
following
in
rack:
4 Choose
Choose
the
point
(tap)
for the
the
side-chain
signal
from
assigned,
it appears
appears
similar
the its
following
in the
theand
rack:
Pickoff
pop-up
4
the
pickoff
point
(tap)
for
side-chain
signal
from
When a bus-fed
plug-in
hasto
both
input source
output the
the
Source
Pickoff
pop-up
menu.
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
Source.
Included Components
pop-up
menu.
4
Choose
the
pickoff
point
(tap)
for
the
side-chain
signal
the Source
Source
Pickoff
pop-up point
menu.(tap) for the side-chain signal from
4 Choose
the pickoff
from
the
Pickoff
pop-up
menu.
assigned, it appears similar to the following in the rack:
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
the
Source
Pickoff
pop-up
menu.
the
Sourcethe
Pickoff
pop-up
menu.
4
Choose
pickoff
point
(tap)
for
the
side-chain
signal
from
4 Escolha
o ponto
de alimentao
pickoff and
(tap)XLR
paramic
o sinal
Dynamic
or condenser
microphone
cablesidethe
Source
Pickoff
pop-up
menu.
chain signal pelo
menu pop-up Source Pickoff.
Adjusting
Plug-Ins
(for Talkback)
Adjusting
Plug-Ins
A bus-fed
bus-fed
plug-in
inIEC
thepower
rack cables
Adjusting
Plug-Ins
Two
(2)in
A
plug-in
the
rack
Footswitches
(upand
to 2)
Plug-Ins
can
Adjusting
Plug-Ins
A
plug-in
the
A bus-fed
bus-fed
plug-inporin
inbus
thenorack
rack
Plug-Ins
can be
be selected
selected
and adjusted
adjusted from
from the
the console
console or
or
Adjusting
Plug-Ins
Plug-in
alimentado
rack
Monitor
mount
for
VGA
screen
(screen
not
included)
A
bus-fed
plug-in
in
the
rack
Routing
Channel
Direct
Outs to
to Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
MIDI
cables
(for connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
Plug-Ins
can
be
selected
and
adjusted
from
the
console
or
on-screen.
A bus-fed
plug-in inDirect
the rack Outs
Routing
Channel
Plug-Ins
can
be
selected
and
adjusted
from
the
console
or
on-screen.
Adjusting
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
can
be
selected
and
adjusted
from
the
console
or
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
Routing
Channel
Direct
Outs
to
Plug-Ins
Routing
Channel
Direct
Outs
to
Plug-Ins
on-screen.
Plug-Ins
can
be
selected
and
adjusted
from
the
console
Ajustando
Plug-Ins
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
theor
on-screen.
A
bus-fed
plug-in
the
rack
Roteando
Direct
Outsinde
canal
para
Plug-Ins
You
can
route
input
channel
Direct
Outs
to
plug-ins.
This
lets
Channel
Direct
Outs
to
Plug-Ins
on-screen.
You Routing
can
route
input
channel
Direct
Outs
to
plug-ins.
This
lets
Routing
Direct Outs to Plug-Ins
VENUEChannel
Mouse Pad
on-screen.
VENUE
system
and external
digitalfrom
devices)
Plug-Ins
can
be selected
and adjusted
the console or
You
can
input
channel
Direct
Outs
plug-ins.
This
lets
you
directly
feed
plug-ins
from
individual
preYou
can route
route
input
channel
Direct
Outs to
tochannels
plug-ins.to
This
lets
On
the
Console
you Routing
directly
feed
plug-ins
from
individual
channels
to
preOn
the
Console
Plug-Ins
podem
ser
selecionados
e
ajustados
na console ou na
Channel
Direct
Outs
to
Plug-Ins
You
can
route
input
channel
Direct
Outs
to
plug-ins.
This
lets
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Voc
pode
rotear
Direct
Outs
de
canais
de
entrada
para
plug-ins.
on-screen.
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
to
GPI
devices)
you
directly
feed
plug-ins
from
individual
channels
to
preYou
can
route
input
channel
Direct
Outs
to
plug-ins.
This
lets
serve
Aux
busses
for
other
uses,
with
control
over
send
level
On
the
Console
you directly
feed for
plug-ins
from
channels
to preserve
Aux busses
other
uses, individual
with
control
over
send
level
tela.
Isso
permite
alimentar
diretamente
plug-ins
de
canais
individuais
you
directly
feed
plug-ins
from
individual
channels
to
preVENUE
Profile
provides
plug-in
controls
in
the
ACS
and
On
the
Console
Two
(2)
console
lights
VENUE
Profile
provides
plug-in
controls
in
the
ACS
and OutOutserve
Aux
busses
for
other
uses,
with
control
over
send
level
you
directly
feed
plug-ins
from
individual
channels
to
preusing
the
channel
Direct
Out
level
control.
On the Console
servepreserver
Aux
busses
for
other
uses,
with
control
over
send level
You
route
input
Direct
Outs
to controle
plug-ins.
This lets
using
thecan
channel
Direct
Out
level
control.
para
busses
Auxchannel
de
outros
usos,
com
sobre
o put
VENUE
Profile
provides
plug-in
controls
in
the
ACS
and
serve
Aux
busses
for
other
uses,
with
control
over
send
level
encoder
sections
for
real-time
interaction
with
plug-ins.
VENUE
Profile
provides
plug-in
controls
in thewith
ACSplug-ins.
and OutOutput
encoder
sections
for
real-time
interaction
using
the
channel
Direct
Out
level
control.
serve
Aux
busses
for
other
uses,
with
control
over
send
level
Protective
Dust
Cover
using
the
channel
Direct
Out level
control.
you
directly
feed
plug-ins
from
individual
channels to preNaVENUE
console
On
theProfile
Console
provides
plug-in
controls
the
ACS
nvel
de
envio
utilizando
oDirect
controle
Direct
Out
do canal.
put
sections
for
interaction
with
VENUE Profile
provides
plug-in
controls in
in
theplug-ins.
ACS and
and OutOutusing
the
channel
Out
level
control.
put encoder
encoder
sections
for real-time
real-time
interaction
with
plug-ins.
using
the
channel
Direct
Out
level
control.
serve
Aux busses
for other uses, with control over send level
Rack(s)
(see next)
put
encoder
sections
for
real-time
interaction
with
plug-ins.
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
put
encoder
sections
for
real-time
interaction
with
plug-ins.
Insert
Processing
VENUE
Profileoferece
provides
plug-in de
controls
the
ACS ACS
and OutInsert
Processing
A VENUE
Profile
controles
plug-ininna
seo
e nos
using the channel Direct Out level control.
Insert
Processing
Insert
putProcessing
encoderOutput
sections
forinterao
real-time
interaction
with
plug-ins.
codificadores
para
em
tempo
real
com
plug-ins.
The
following
options
can
be
added
to
VENUE
Profile
systems.
The
Processing
section lets you bypass, select, and target
Insert
Processing
The Insert
Insert
InsertProcessing
Processingsection lets you bypass, select, and target
For
details
on all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit
Avid
The
Insert
Processing
section
lets you
you
bypass,
select,
andthe
target
plug-ins
inserted
on
the
currently
selected
channel.
The
Insert
Processing
section
lets
bypass,
select,
and
target
plug-ins
inserted
on the
currently
selected
channel.
Insert
Processing
Insert
Processing
The
Insert
Processing
section
lets
you
bypass,
select,
and
website
(www.avid.com).
plug-ins
inserted
on the
the currently
currently
selected
channel.
The Insert
Processing
section lets
you bypass,
select, and target
target
plug-ins
inserted
on
selected
channel.
plug-ins
inserted
on
the
currently
selected
channel.
System Restore CD
plug-ins
inserted
on the
currently
selected
channel.
The
Insert
Processing
section
lets you
bypass,
select, and target
A seo Insert Processing permite colocar em bypass, selecionar e

plug-ins
inserted
on thenocurrently
selected channel.
apontar
plug-ins
inseridos
canal atualmente
selecionado.
Mix
Rack
Options
Assigning a
a channel
channel Direct
Direct Out
Out as
as a
a plug-in
plug-in input
input source
source in
in the
the Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Assigning
page
iLok
USB Smart
Keyas
(for
storing
plug-in
authorizations)
Assigning
a
channel
Direct
Out
a
plug-in
input
source
in
the
Plug-Ins
page
Assigning
a
channel
Direct
Out
as
a
plug-in
input
source
in
the
Plug-InsPlugAtribuindo
um Direct
Out de canal
como
entrada
de plug-in
a channel
Direct
Outfonte
as ade
plug-in
input
sourcenainpgina
the Plug-Ins
page Assigning
page
Assigning
a
channel
Direct
Out
as
a
plug-in
input
source
in
theiLok
Plug-Ins
aPlug-in
installer
discs
(ifrouted
any) with
pre-authorized
Ins
When
channel
Direct
Out
is
to
a
plug-in,
it
follows
page
When
a
channel
Direct
Out
is
routed
to
a
plug-in,
it
follows
page
Assigning
a channel
Direct
Out
asthat
a plug-in
source
in the Plug-Ins
When
channel
Direct
Out
is
routed
a
plug-in,
it
a
(2)
IEC
power
cables
the
one
global
pickoff
setting
specific
Direct
Out
When
aTwo
channel
Direct
Out
isfor
routed
to
a input
plug-in,
it follows
follows
the
one
global
pickoff
setting
for
that to
specific
Direct
Out (as
(as
When
a
channel
Out
is
routed
to
a
plug-in,
it
page
Quando
um
OutDirect
de canal
roteado
um plug-in,
the one
global
pickoff
setting
for
specific
Out
(as ele
When
aDirect
channel
Direct
Out
isthat
routed
topara
a Direct
plug-in,
it follows
follows
I/O Options
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins 14
14
AI16Plug-Ins
Analog
Plug-Ins
14Mic/Line Input Card that provides 16 analog
14
14
mic/line Plug-Ins
level inputs
Plug-Ins
14
set
Patchbay),
and
is
in
to
any
other
asthe
one
global
pickoff
setting
forconnection
that
specific
(as
the
One
FOH
Link
cable
for
to Direct
a VENUE
console
set in
in
the
Patchbay),
and
is applied
applied
in addition
addition
to
any Out
other
as-
Plug-Ins 14
the
one
global
pickoff
setting
for
that
specific
Direct
Out
(as
segue
othe
ajuste
defor
ponto
de
alimentao
global
daquele
Direct
Out
set
in
Patchbay),
and
is
in
addition
any
other
aspickoff
setting
that
specific
Direct
Out
signment
made
that
Direct
Out.
This
makes
it
possible
to
set
inthe
theone
Patchbay),
and
is applied
applied
in
addition
to
any
other
as- (as
When
a global
channel
Direct
Out
isfor
routed
to
a to
plug-in,
it follows
signment
made
for
that
Direct
Out.
This
makes
it
possible
to
especfico
(como
ajustado
no Patchbay),
e
makes
aplicado
adio
aasset in
the
Patchbay),
and
is
applied
in
addition
to
any
other
Each
Stage
Rack
LED
signment
made
for
that
Direct
Out.
This
it
possible
to
in
theglobal
Patchbay),
and
isroute
applied
inchannel
addition
toem
any
other
as- outputs
use
channels
Direct
Out
to
that
both
a
signment
made
forincludes:
that
Direct
Out.
This
makes
itto
possible
to (as
the
one
pickoff
setting
for
that
specific
Direct
LED
use a
aset
channels
Direct
Out
toquele
route
that
channel
both
aOut
In/Out
Select
qualquer
outra atribuio
feita
Direct
Out.makes
issototorna
possvel
signment
made
for
that
Direct
Out.
This
it
possible
to
In/Out
Select
LED
use
a
channels
Direct
Out
to
route
that
channel
to
both
a
Two
(2)
IEC
power
cables
signment
made
for
that
Direct
Out.
This
makes
it
possible
to
LED
Pro
Tools
recording
option
and
to
a
plug-in.
use
channels
Direct
Out
to
route
that
totoboth
aother
set
in Direct
the Patchbay),
and
ispara
applied
inchannel
addition
any
as- XO16 Analog and Digital
Pro aTools
recording
option
and
to arotear
plug-in.
In/Out
Select
utilizar
um
Out
de
canal
aquele
canal
para
uma
Output
ACS
Insert
Processing
section
LED
In/Out
Select
use
a
channels
Direct
Out
to
route
that
channel
to
both
a
Pro
recording
option
and
to
a
plug-in.
use
a channels
Direct
Out
to
that
both a to ACS Insert Processing sectionIn/Out LED
Pro Tools
Tools
recording
option
and
toroute
aOut.
plug-in.
signment
made
for
that
Direct
Thischannel
makes itto
possible
opo
de
gravao
de
Pro
Tools
e
para
um
plug-in.
ACSline
Insert
Processing
section
Select
level
outputs,section
and In/Out
8 AES digitalSelect
outputs.
ACS
Insert
Processing
Pro Tools recording option and to a plug-in.
Pro
recording
option
and
to athat
plug-in.
use aTools
channels
Direct
Out to
route
channel to both a
Pro Tools recording option and to a plug-in.
ACS Insert Processing section LED

ACS Insert Processing section
In/Out
SelectChapter
Chapter
18:
18: Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins 161
161
AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides Chapter

16 channels
of A-Net
Chapter 18:
18: Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins 161
161
ACS Insert Processing section
Chapterand
18: Plug-Ins
other 161
Chapter 18: Plug-Ins
161
Dynamics
Dynamics
Dynamics
Dynamics plug-ins can be selected and adjusted in the Dy-
Plug-ins
de Dynamics
selecionados
e ajustados
seo
Dynamics
plug-inspodem
can beser
selected
and adjusted
in thena
Dynamics section in the ACS. (Dynamics and EQ plug-ins can be
Dynamics
ACS. in
(Plug-ins
de (Dynamics
Dynamics eand
EQ podem
ser atribudos
namics no
section
the ACS.
EQ plug-ins
can be
targeted
on theACS
ACS and
Output
encoders simultaneously).
aos
codificadores
Output
simultaneamente).
targeted
on the ACSeand
Output
encoders simultaneously).
Release
Attack
Threshold
Comp Knee/
Release
Comp Gain/
Threshold Ratio Attack
Gate
Hold
Comp Knee/
Gate Range
Comp
Gain/
Ratio
Gate Hold
Gate Range
In/Out
Select
In/Out
Select
Gain Reduction
meters
Gain Reduction
meters
Dynamics In/Out
Dynamics In/Out
ACSe Dynamics
section no
and
controls
Seo
controles Dynamics
ACS
ACS Dynamics section and controls
Equalizer
Equalizer
Equalizer
6 Pressione Previous Page ou Next Page para acessar os outros
EQ plug-ins can be selected and adjusted with the controls in

EQ plug-ins can be selected and adjusted with the controls in
the EQde
section
in the ACS.
and Dynamics
plug-ins can
Plug-ins
EQ podem
ser (EQ
selecionados
e ajustados
combeos
the EQ section in the ACS. (EQ and Dynamics plug-ins can be
targetednaonseo
the Output
encoders
and de
ACS
controles
EQ do ACS.
(Plug-ins
EQsimultaneously.
e Dynamics podem
on aos
the codificadores
Output encoders
ACS simultaneamente).
simultaneously.
sertargeted
atribudos
ACS eand
Output
Plug-In
Plug-In
To
adjust
a plug-in
from the
Para
ajustar
um plug-in
pelaconsole:
console:
To
adjust
a plug-in
from the
console:
1 Select the channel or bus on which the plug-in is inserted.
11 Select
the channel
on
plug-in is inserido.
inserted.
Selecione
canal or
oubus
bus
emwhich
que
othe
plug-in
To
select a busoprocessing
plug-in,
bank
to and est
select the FX Para
To
select a bus
bank to de
andbus,
select
selecionar
um processing
plug-in de plug-in,
processamento
v the
ao FX
banco e
Return or other channel assigned as the plug-in output.
selecione
o FX Return
ou assigned
outro canal
atribudo
como
sada do plugReturn
or other
channel
as the
plug-in
output.
2in.In the Insert Processing section of the ACS, press the Select
2 In the Insert Processing section of the ACS, press the Select
switch for the plug-in so that its switch is lit.
switch
for the
plug-in
so that do
its ACS,
switch
is lit. o switch Select do
2 Na seo
Insert
Processing
pressione
3plug-in
Press para
the Insert
switch, located near the Output enque seMode
acenda.
3 Press the Insert Mode switch, located near the Output encoders. The first page of plug-in parameters is mapped to the
coders.
The first
of plug-in
is mapped
to the aos
3 Pressione
o page
switch
Insert parameters
Mode, localizado
prximo
eight
Output encoders.
eight
Output
encoders.
codificadores Output. A primeira pgina dos parmetros de plug-in
4mapeada
To reset para
a parameter
to its defaultOutput.
value, hold the Alt key
os oito codificadores
4 To reset a parameter to its default value, hold the Alt key
while rotating or pushing an encoder.
while rotating or pushing an encoder.
4 Para resetar um parmetro para seu valor padro, segure a telca
5 To adjust with greater resolution, hold the Ctrl key while rogiragreater
ou pressione
o codificador.
5Alt
Toenquanto
adjust with
resolution,
hold the Ctrl key while rotating an encoder.
tating an encoder.
Para Previous
ajsutar com
maior,
segure
teclaplug-in
Ctrl enquanto
65Press
Pageresoluo
or Next Page
to bank
to a
other
pa6gira
Press
Page or Next Page to bank to other plug-in paumPrevious
codificador.
rameters.
rameters.
Low
Low
Low-Mid
Low-Mid
High-Mid
High-Mid
High
High
Display
of do
Plug-Ins
parmetros
plug-in. in Insert Mode
Display of Plug-Ins in Insert Mode
While in Insert Mode, the Output LCD displays the value and
Visualizao
de Mode,
Plug-Insthe
noOutput
modo Insert
While
in Insert
LCD displays the value and
name of the 8 currently banked plug-in parameters in the upname of the 8 currently banked plug-in parameters in the upper
and lower
row,Insert,
respectively,
for each
parameter.
Quando
no modo
o LCD Output
mostra
o valor e o nome dos
per and lower row, respectively, for each parameter.
8 parmetros atualmente associados do plug-in nas linhas superior
In
this default
Insert Mode view,
adjusting
an Output fader
e inferior,
respectivamente,
para cada
parmetro.
In
this default
Insert Mode view,
adjusting
an Output fader
temporarily shows fader level in the lower row of the Output
temporarily shows fader level in the lower row of the Output
LCD
forvisualizao
that channel,
replacing
the Insert,
parameter
name
Nessa
padro
do modo
ajustar
um display.
fader Output
LCD for that channel, replacing the parameter name display.
temporariamente mostra o nvel do fader na linha inferior do LCD

Output daquele
o nome do parmetro.
Alternate
Insertcanal,
Modesubstituindo
View
Alternate Insert Mode View
You
can use an
alternateno
view
to Insert
have Insert Mode display paVisualizao
Alternativa
Modo
You can use an alternate view to have Insert Mode display parameter values in the upper row and the associated bus name
rameter values in the upper row and the associated bus name
in
thepode
lowerusar
row.
Voc
uma visualizao alternativa para ter os valores dos
in
the lower sendo
row. apresentados na linha superior e o nome do bus
parmetros
associado
na linha
inferior.
To
view values
and bus
names for the Output encoders in Insert
To
view values and bus names for the Output encoders in Insert
Mode:
Mode:
Para ver valores e nomes do bus associado aos codificadores
Press Default/Alt+Insert Mode.
Output no modo Insert:
Press Default/Alt+Insert Mode.
In/Out
In/Out
ACS EQ controls
ACS EQ
Controles
EQcontrols
no ACS
Output Encoders
Output Encoders
Codificadores
Output
The Output encoders can be placed into Insert mode to adjust

The Output encoders can be placed into Insert mode to adjust
selected plug-in.
parameters
map
the eight
en- o
Osany
codificadores
Output Plug-in
codificadores
podem
sertoalocados
para
any selected plug-in. Plug-in parameters map to the eight encoders
andpara
their
switches;
additional
areParmetros
accessed
modo
Insert
ajustar
qualquer
plug-inparameters
selecionado.
coders and their switches; additional parameters are accessed
dowith
plug-in
mapeados
oitoPage
codificadores
theso
Previous
Pagepara
andos
Next
switches.e seus switches;
with the Previous
Next Page
switches.
parmetros
adicionaisPage
so and
acessados
pelos
switches Previous Page
e Next Page.
Output Encoders
Output Encoders
Insert Mode
Insert
switch Mode
switch
Encoders and Insert mode switch in the Output section
Encoders eand
Insert
mode
switch
in the Output section
Codificadores
switch
Insert
na seo
Output
162
Guia VENUE Profile
Using
the Source
Switch
Pressione
Default/Alt+Insert
Mode.
Using the Source Switch
The
Source oswitch
displays to show the names of
Utilizando
Switchtoggles
SourceInput
The
Source switch
toggles
Input displays to show the names of
bus-fed plug-ins routed to a channel. Use the Source switch to
bus-fed plug-ins routed to a channel. Use the Source switch to
quickly
identify
FXos
Returns
or Input
other para
channels
are being
O switch
Sourcewhich
habilita
displays
mostrar
os nomes
quickly identify which FX Returns or other channels are being
used
as plug-inalimentados
returns.
dos piug-=ins
por bus roteados para um canal. Utilize
used
as plug-in
o switch
Sourcereturns.
para rapidamente identificar quais FX Returns ou
outros
esto
sendousados
comofor
retorno
plug-ins.
To
view canais
encoder
values
and bus names
Input de
or FX
Return
To
view
encoder
values
and
bus
names
for
Input
or
FX
Return
channels:
channels:
Para visualizao valores dos codificadores e nomes do bus para
Press the Source switch, located in the Display section to the
Input Channels ou FX Return:
Press the Source switch, located in the Display section to the
left of the input Mute/Solo/Select switches.
left of the input Mute/Solo/Select switches.
Pressione o switch Source, localizado na seo Display esquerda
dos switches Mute/Solo/Select.
Colocando Plug-Ins em Bypass
Plug-ins na tela
Plug-ins On-Screen
Plug-ins
On-Screen
Plug-ins
On-Screen
A tela
do software
pode
usada
para route,
enderear
e reenderear
The
software
screen
can
beser
used
to patch,
or re-route
Plug-ins
On-Screen
Bypassing Plug-Ins
Bypassing
Plug-Ins
Bypassing
Plug-Ins
Para colocar
um plug-in
em bypass pela console:
Bypassing
Plug-Ins
To bypass a plug-in from the console:
plug-ins durante uma perfoumance, mesmo quando no modo
The software
software
screen
can be
be even
used to
to
patch,
route,mode.
or re-route
re-route
plug-ins
during a screen
performance,
while
in Show
The
can
used
patch,
route,
or
Show.
The
software
screen
can be usedeven
to patch,
or re-route
plug-ins
during
a performance,
performance,
whileroute,
in Show
Show
mode.
plug-ins
during
a
even while
in
mode.
1
plug-ins
performance,
while
Show mode.
1 Select
Select the
the channel
channel on
on which
which the
the plug-in
plug-in is
is inserted.
inserted.
Plug-Ins during
must beainstalled
on theeven
system
and in
assigned
to a
In 1seo
the
Insert
Processing
section
of thepressione
ACS, press
the
In/Out
Select
the
channel
on
which
plug-in
iso inserted.
22Na
Insert
Processing
do ACS,
switch
In/Out
Plug-Ins devem
estar instalados
no sistema
e atribudostoaaum
be
on
and
rack Plug-Ins
slot to bemust
available
while mixing.
See Assigning
Plug-Ins
must
be installed
installed
on the
the system
system
and assigned
assigned to a
2
In
the
Insert
Processing
section
of
the
ACS,
press
the
In/Out
switch
forthe
theInsert
plug-in
to toggle
it in-circuit/out-of-circuit.
In
Processing
of thedo
ACS,
press Quando
the In/Out
para
o2 plug-in
para
alternar
entresection
dentro/fora
circuito.
o
slot
de
rack
para
estarem
disponveis
a mixagem.
Plug-Ins
must
be
installed
on
the
systemdurante
and assigned
to a
rack
slot
to
available
while
mixing.
Stage
Rack
Features
Additional
Required
Components
Plug-Ins
Rack
Slots
on page
159.
rack to
slot
to be
be
available
while
mixing. See
See Assigning
Assigning
2 In the
Insert
Processing
section
of
the ACS,
press the
In/Out
switch
for
the
plug-in
to
toggle
it
LED
do
switch
est
aceso,
o plug-in
est
dentro
do circuito.
Quando
Veja
Atribuindo
Plug-Ins
A Slots
de Rack
na
pgina 159.
When
the switch
is lit,
the
plug-in
is in-circuit.
When
unswitch
for
theLED
plug-in
to
toggle
it in-circuit/out-of-circuit.
in-circuit/out-of-circuit.
rack
slot
to
be
available
while
mixing.
See
Assigning
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins to
to Rack
Rack Slots
Slots on
on page
page 159.
159.
switch
for switch
theest
plug-in
tolit,
toggle
it(bypassed).
When
the
is
the
is
When
apagado,
o plug-in
fora
do
circuito
Racks
usedLED
with
FOH
Rack, and
provide all
stageunlit,Stage
the
plug-in
is out-of-circuit
(bypassed).
When
the are
switch
LED
is an
lit,
the plug-in
plug-in
is in-circuit.
in-circuit.
When
un- The following
components
be purchased
separately:
Plug-Ins
to Rack Slotsmust
on page
159.
Jump
To
Plug-Ins
When
the
switch
LED is lit, the (bypassed).
plug-in is in-circuit. When un- Saltar para Plug-Ins
lit,
the
plug-in
is
out-of-circuit
audio
I/Oplug-in
for VENUE
Profile systems.
lit, the
is out-of-circuit
(bypassed).
Jump
To Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Jump
Video Display
To
lit, the plug-in is out-of-circuit (bypassed).
can be used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs. The Jump
To
Plug-Ins
Input
and
Output
screens let
you jump
to a specific
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGAde
and
AsThe
telasInput
Inputand
e Output
permitem
saltar
para
umto
plug-in
insert
Output
screens
let
you
jump
plug-in
insert
to
adjust
it
on-screen.
The
Input
and
Output
screens
let
you
jump
to a
a specific
specific
DVI
supported.
especfico
para
ajust-lo
na
tela.
The
Input
and
Output
screens
let
you
jump
to
a
specific
plug-in
insert
to
adjust
it
on-screen.
Audio I/O
plug-in insert to adjust it on-screen.
insert to
adjust
it on-screen. (Windows compatible)
plug-in
USB keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
To
jump
to a plug-in
from the
Outputs
screen:
Para saltar
para insert
um plug-in
deInputs
insertor das
pginas
Inputs ou
To
jump
to
a
plug-in
insert
from
the
Inputs
or
Outputs
screen:
In/Out
To
jump
to
a
plug-in
insert
from
the
Inputs
or
Outputs
screen:
Outputs:
1 Select
a
channel
to
show
it
in
the
Inputs
or
Outputs
page.
Digital
Snake
Profile
Systems
Only) screen:
To jump
to a Cable
plug-in (VENUE
insert from
the Inputs
or Outputs
In/Out
In/Out
1 Select
Select a
a channel
channel to
to show
show it
it in
in the
the Inputs
Inputs or
or Outputs
Outputs page.
page.
8 analog
1
In/Out
Selecione
connection
between
FOH
Rack
and
Stage
canal
para
mostrar
as
pginas
Inputs
ourequires
Outputs.
2 1
Click
the
plug-in
name
the
channel
Insert
section.
1The
Select
aum
channel
toshown
show
itinin
the
Inputs
or Rack
Outputs
page.
2
the
plug-in
name
shown
the
Insert
section.
Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable in
can
bechannel
purchased
directly
2a Click
Click
the
plug-in
name
shown
in
the
channel
Insert
section.
2 Click
plug-in
name apresentado
shown in thena
channel
Insertdo
section.
2 Clique
nothe
nome
do plug-in
seo
Insert
canal.
from Avid
or assembled
by your preferred
vendor.
To bypasscanal
a plug-in
fromo the
console:insertado.
11Selecione
emon
que
plug-in
Select theo channel
which
the est
plug-in is inserted.

I/O
LED
LED
Insert
Processing
Seo
Insert
Processingsection
LED
Snake connectors to enable
LED
Insert
Processing
section
Insert
Processingconnection
section
applicable)
To bypass
aProcessing
plug-in
on-screen:
Insert
section
para
colocar
em
bypass
um plug-in na tela:
To
To bypass
bypass a
a plug-in
plug-in on-screen:
on-screen:
1 Select
the channel
onon-screen:
which the plug-in is inserted.
To bypass
a plug-in
1 Selecione
o
canal
em
que
o plug-in
insertado.
1
Select
the
channel
which
the
is
1 Select the channel on
on
which est
the plug-in
plug-in
is inserted.
inserted.
2 In 1the
Inserts
section
of the
Inputs the
or Outputs
click the
Select
theComponents
channel
on which
plug-in page,
is inserted.
System
2
In
the
Inserts
section
of
the
Inputs
or
Outputs
page,
the
2In/Out
Na seo
Inserts
das
pginas
Inputs
ouitOutputs,
clique
noclick
switch
switch
for the
plug-in
toggle
in-circuit/out-of-cir2 In
the
Inserts
section
ofto
the
Inputs
or
Outputs
page,
click
the
2
In
the
Inserts
section
of
the
Inputs
or
Outputs
page,
click
the
In/Out
switch
for
the
plug-in
to
toggle
it
in-circuit/out-of-cirIn/Out
para switch
olit,plug-in
para
alternar
dentro/fora
do circuito.
cuit.In/Out
When
thefor
plug-in
is in-circuit.
When
unlit, the
the plug-in
toentre
toggle
it in-circuit/out-of-cirIn/Out
switch
for
the
plug-in
to
toggle
it
When
lit,
the
plug-in
is
in-circuit.
When
unlit,
the
Quando
aceso,
o Components
plug-in
dentro
do circuito.When
Quando
apagado,
Included
plug-in
isWhen
out-of-circuit
(bypassed).
cuit.
lit, theest
plug-in
is in-circuit.
unlit,
the o
cuit.
lit,circuito
the plug-in
is in-circuit. When unlit, the
plug-inplug-in
estWhen
fora
do
(bypassed).
is
out-of-circuit
(bypassed).
plug-in
is
out-of-circuit
(bypassed).
Allplug-in
VENUE
systems(bypassed).
is Profile
out-of-circuit
In

Out
In
In
Trackball mount
In
Out
Out
Out
VENUE Mouse
Pad
In/Out
VENUE Profile Guide
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
In/Out
In/Out
LED indication
of in
circuit
and
out
of circuit
(bypassed) inserts
Indicao
de (2)
inserts
dentro/fora
(bypassed)
do circuito
LED
Two
console
lights
In/Out
LED
LED indication
indication of
of in
in circuit
circuit and
and out
out of
of circuit
circuit (bypassed)
(bypassed) inserts
inserts
Protective
Dust
Cover
LED
indication of
in circuit
and out of circuit (bypassed) inserts
Rack(s) (see next)

System Restore CD
Click
Optional Components
Click
Click
The following
Click
Jumping
to a plug-incomponents
on a channel
insert
Jumping
a
purchased
Jumping to
toseparately:
a plug-in
plug-in on
on a
a channel
channel insert
insert
ToSaltando
jump
topara
a to
plug-in
onem
a um
bus:
Jumping
a plug-in
plug-in
on
a channel
insert
um
insert de canal
USB flash
disk (or other
To
To jump
jump to
to a
a plug-in
plug-in on
on a
a bus:
bus:
1 Bank
to thetoFX
Return
or
type assigned
as the
transfer
Showon
data;
512channel
MB or larger
recommended)
To jump
aofplug-in
aother
bus:
Para
saltar
para
um
plug-in
em
um bus:
1
to
the
FX
Return
or
other
channel
type
assigned
as
plug-in
output,
or
bank
to
the
output
feeding
the
plug-in.
1 Bank
Bank
to
the
FX
Return
or
other
channel
type
assigned
as the
the
Bank
Near-field
speakers
for
mix position
monitoring
1
to
the monitor
FXorReturn
or the
other
channel
type the
assigned
as the
plug-in
output,
bank
to
output
feeding
plug-in.
plug-in output, or bank to the output feeding the plug-in.
V
FXoutput,
Return or
ou
outro
tipo
de
canal
atribudo
como
sada do
2 1Select
the
channel
tobank
display
it in
the
Inputs
or Outputs
ao
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
plug-in
to
the
output
feeding
the
plug-in.
2 Select
Select
the
channel
to display
display
it in
in the
the Inputs
Inputs or
or Outputs
Outputs
plug-in,
ou
sada
que
alimenta
o
plug-in.
screen.
2
the
channel
to
it
2 Select the channel to display it in the Inputs or Outputs
screen.
screen.
(for
3 2Click
the Talkback)
routing
beneath
the Channel
screen.
Selecione
o canaldisplayed
para mostr-lo
na tela
Inputs ou Name.
Outputs.
3
Click
beneath
Footswitches
(updisplayed
to 2)
3 Click the
the routing
routing
displayed
beneath the
the Channel
Channel Name.
Name.
3 Click the routing displayed beneath the Channel Name.
3 Clique
no roteamento
mostrado abaixo
do nome
canal.
MIDI
external
MIDI do
devices)

Jumping to a plug-in on an FX Return
Jumping
Jumping to
to a
a plug-in
plug-in on
on an
an FX
FX Return
Return
Jumping
toum
a plug-in
plug-inand
onum
anChannel
FXReturn
Return Selection
Plug-Ins
Screens
Saltando
para
em
FX
Plug-Ins
Screens
Channel
VENUE
Expansion
Options
Plug-InsProfile
Screens and
and
Channel Selection
Selection
Plug-Ins
Screens
and
Channel
Selection
When
jumping
to ea Seleo
plug-in,
display
depends
on the type of
Telas
de Plug-Ins
de
Canais
When
jumping
to a
a plug-in,
plug-in,
display
dependsProfile
on the
the
type of
of
The
following
options
can be added
to VENUE
systems.
plug-in
routing,
as
follows:
When
jumping
to
display
depends
on
type
When
jumping
to
plug-in,
display
depends visit
on the
type
of
plug-in
routing,
as afollows:
follows:
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
the
Avid
plug-in
routing,
as
Quando saltar para um plug-in, o que apresentado depende do
plug-in
routing,
as
follows:
Channel
Inserts
If
the
Plug-Ins
screen
is
in
Zoom
view
while
website
(www.avid.com).
tipo
de roteamento
do plug-in, conforme segue:
Channel
Inserts If
Ifthe
thelast
Plug-Ins
screen
is in
in
Zoom
view while
while
you select
a channel,
selected
plug-in
for
that channel
Channel
Inserts
the
Plug-Ins
screen
is
Zoom
view
Channel
Inserts
If
thethe
Plug-Ins
screen plug-in
is in Zoom
viewchannel
while
you select
select a
a channel,
channel,
last selected
selected
for that
that
is Channel
automatically
selected
and
displayed
in
the
Plug-Ins
screen.
you
the
last
plug-in
for
channel
Inserts Se a tela Plug-Ins est no modo de visualizao
you
select
a
channel,
the
last
selected
plug-in
for
that
channel
Mix
Rack Options
is automatically
automatically
selected
and
displayed
in the
theplug-in
Plug-Ins
screen.
is
and
in
Plug-Ins
screen.
Zoom
enquanto
vocselected
seleciona
umdisplayed
canal, o ltimo
selecionado
is automatically
selected
inathe
Plug-Ins
screen.
Bus-Fed
Plug-Ins
plug-insand
aredisplayed
inserted
on
channel
(such
para esse
canalIfno
automaticamente
selecionado
e apresentado
na
Bus-Fed
Plug-Ins
If no
no plug-ins
plug-ins
are
inserted
on a
a channel
channel
(such
astela
when
returning
a
bus-fed
plug-in
to
an
FX
Return)
the
Bus-Fed
Plug-Ins
If
are
inserted
on
(such
I/OPlug-Ins.
Options
Bus-Fed
Plug-Ins
If no
plug-ins
are inserted
on aReturn)
channel
(such
as when
when
returning
aReturn
bus-fed
plug-in
to an
an FX
FX
the
plug-in
feeding
that FXa
isplug-in
displayed.
as
returning
bus-fed
to
Return) the
as
when
returning
a
bus-fed
plug-in
to
an
FX
Return)
the
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Cardis
plug-in
feeding
that
FX
Return
isthat
displayed.
plug-in
feeding
FX
Return
displayed.
Bus-Fed
Plug-Ins
Sethat
nenhum
plug-in
estprovides
inserido16
noanalog
canal (como
plug-in
feeding
that
Return
is displayed.
mic/line
level
inputs
quando
retornando
umFX
plug-in
alimentado
por bus para um FX
Return) o plug-in que alimenta esse FX Return apresentado.

outputs
Mixers
other
Chapter
18: and
Plug-Ins
163
Captulo
18: 18:
Plug-Ins
Chapter
18:
Plug-Ins163
163
Chapter
Plug-Ins
163
Pinning a Plug-In View

Pinning a Plug-In View
It is possible
to decouple
the plug-in view from the console for
Fixando
Visualizao
de um Plug-In
It is
possible to
decouple
the
plug-in
from
the console
for
consistent
and
constant
access
to aview
single
plug-in
on-screen,
consistent
and
constant
access
to
a
single
plug-in
on-screen,
Pinning
a
Plug-In
View
possvel
disassociar
a to
visualizao
plug-in
daplug-ins
consolefrom
para
while still
being able
select and do
adjust
other
while
still
being
toplug-in
select nico
and
adjust
other
from
acesso
constante
aable
um
na any
tela,
complug-ins
disponibilidade
the
console.
This
capability
is
useful
time
you
want
to
alIt is possible to decouple the plug-in view from the console for
console.
This
capability
isplug-in
useful
any
time
you
want
to aldethe
acessar
e ajustar
outros plug-ins
pela
console.
Essa
capacidade
ways
display
an
important
(such
as
an
analysis
plug-in
consistent
and constant
accessvisualizar
to a single
plug-in
ways
muito
til sempre
que desejar
plug-in on-screen,
importante
display
an
important
plug-in
(such asum
an analysis
plug-in
or
primary
EQ).
while
still
being
able
to select
and
adjust other plug-ins from
(como
um
plug-in
de
anlise
ou
EQ
primrio).
or primary EQ).
the console. This capability is useful any time you want to alpindisplay
plug-in
ways
anview:
important
plug-in (such as an analysis plug-in
ParaTo
fixar
aavisualizao
de um plug-in:
To pin a plug-in view:
orBring
primary
1
the EQ).
desired plug-in into the main plug-in view (use the
Bring
desired
plug-in
into
main plug-in
view (use
the
1 1Traga
othe
plug-in
desejado
para
athe
visualizaa
principal
de plug-in
channel
Select
and
Insert
Mode
switches,
or
double-click
the
(use
os
switches
Select
do
canal
e
Insert
Mode,
ou
clique
duas
vezes
channel
Select
and
Insert
Mode
switches,
or
double-click
the
To pin a plug-in
plug-in view:
desired
in the rack).
nodesired
plug-inplug-in
desejado
in no
therack).
rack).
1
main plug-in
view
(use(the
the
2 Bring
Click the
the desired
Push-Pinplug-in
icon ininto
the the
upper-right
of the
screen
Click
the
Push-Pin
icon
in
the
upper-right
of
the
screen
(the
channel
Select
and
Insert
Mode
switches,
or
double-click
the
2 2Clique
no
cone
Push-Pin
no
canto
superior
direito
da
tela
(o
cone
icon is located just to the left of the Presets and View Toggle
icon
is located
the
leftcones
of thePresets
Presetseand
Toggle
est
localizado
just
esquerda
dos
ViewView
Toggle).
desired
plug-in
into
the
rack).
icons.
icons.
Quando habilitado, o cone Push-Pin aparece aceso. Isso indica
When
the Push-Pin
icon
appears
lit.
This
2que
Click
the enabled,
Push-Pin
icon
in the upper-right
of the
screen
(the
o plug-in
atualthe
permanence
na
tela
e no
sair
deindifoco,
When
enabled,
Push-Pin
icon
appears
lit.
This indicates
that
the
current
plug-in
will
remain
on-screen
and
icon
is
located
just
to
the
left
of
the
Presets
and
View
Toggle
mesmo que outro canal seja selecionado.
cates
the current
plug-in
will remain
on-screen
and
willthat
not
focus, even
if another
channel
is targeted.
icons.
Quando
nolose
habilitado,
o cone
Push-Pin
aparece
apagado.
not lose focus,
even if
another
channel
targeted. de
A will
visualizao
de plug-ins
a seleo
daislit.
superfcie
When not
enabled,
thesegue
Push-Pin
icon
appears
unlit.
enabled,
the Push-Pin
icon
appears
This
indicontrole.
When
notview
enabled,
the Push-Pin
icon appears
unlit.
Plug-in
selections.
cates that
thefollows
currentcontrol
plug-insurface
will remain
on-screen and
Plug-in view follows control surface selections.
will not lose focus, even if another channel is targeted.
When not enabled, the Push-Pin icon appears unlit.
Plug-in view follows control surface selections.
conePush-Pin
Push-Pin plug-in view icon
Push-Pin plug-in view icon
Plug-In
Presets
and Snapshots
Push-Pin
view icon
Presets
deplug-in
Plug-In
e Snapshots
Plug-In
Presets
and Snapshots
To save a Preset:
To save a Preset:
1 Adjust the plug-in parameters as desired.
salvar
Preset:parameters as desired.
1 Para
Adjust
theum
plug-in
2 Click the Presets icon in the Plug-Ins screen.
save
a Preset:
2 1To
Click
the
Presets
icon do
in plug-in
the Plug-Ins
screen.
Ajuste
os
parmetros
como desejado.
3
In
the
Presets
window,
click
New.
1 Adjust the plug-in parameters as desired.
3 In the Presets window, click New.
2 Clique no cone Presets na tela Plug-Ins.
4
a custom
name
the Plug-Ins
Preset. screen.
2 Enter
Click the
Presets
iconfor
in the
4 Enter a custom name for the Preset.
3 Na janela Presets, clique New.
3 In
thea Presets
window,
click New.
To
load
Preset into
a plug-in:
To load a Preset into a plug-in:
441 Digite
nome
personalizado
para
o Preset. and available
Enter
asure
custom
name for
Preset.
Makeum
the presets
are the
already
transferred
1 Make sure the presets are already transferred and available
on the current system. (Many plug-ins come with factory prePara
carregar
um
Preset
dentroplug-ins
de um plug-in:
on
the
current
system.
come
with factory preTo
load
a will
Preset
into a(Many
plug-in:
sets
that
be installed
along with the
plug-in.)
sets that will be installed along with the plug-in.)
Make the
surechannel
the
already
transferred
112 Certifique-se
depresets
quecontaining
osare
presets
esto
transfeirods
eavailable
disponveis
Select
the
plug-in,
andand
target
the de2 no
Select
the
channel
containing
the
plug-in,
and
target
desistema.
(Muitos
plug-ins
vm
com
presets
de
fbrica
que
sero
on
the
current
system.
(Many
plug-ins
come
with
factory
presired plug-in (press the Insert Mode switch, or click thethe
plug-in
instalados
juntamento
comalong
oMode
plug-in.)
sired
plug-in
(press
the
Insert
switch,
or
click
the
plug-in
sets
that
will
be
installed
with
the
plug-in.)
on-screen).
on-screen).
Select
the Presets
channel
containing
the
plug-in,
target the
de223 Selecione
o canal icon
que in
contm
o plug-in,
eand
o plug-in
desejado
Click the
the Plug-Ins
screen.
3 (pressione
Clickplug-in
the Presets
the Mode
Plug-Ins
screen.
sired
(pressicon
the in
Insert
switch,
click the plug-in
o switch
Insert
Mode,
ou clique
noorplug-in
4
Single-click
a preset name in the Presets list to preview it.
na
tela).
on-screen).
4 Single-click a preset name in the Presets list to preview it.
With the Presets list displayed, do any of the following:
With
the Presets
list
displayed,
doPlug-Ins
any of the
following:
Click
thecone
Presets
icon na
in tela
the
screen.
33 Clique
Presets
Plug-Ins.
To no
scroll
through
the list,
press
Up or Down arrow keys
Toon
scroll
thekeyboard.
list, press Up or Down arrow keys
yourthrough
computer
4 Single-click
a preset name
in the Presets list to preview it.
4 Clique
em computer
um nome de
na lista Presets para visualiz-lo.
on your
keyboard.
With
theload
Presets
list displayed,
do any
of the
To
a preset
and close the
Presets
list,following:
double-click a
Com
aload
listaa preset
de Presets
sendo
sigadouble-click
um dos seguintes
Toname
and close
theexibida,
Presets list,
a
in
the
Presets
list.
To
scroll
through
the
list,
press
Up
or
Down
arrow keys
procedimentos:
name in the Presets list.
on your
computer
keyboard.
Click
Cancel
close
the Presets
without
changing
Para
rolar
pelatolista,
pressione
aslist
teclas
de setas
Up ousetDown
Click
Cancel
to
close
the
Presets list without changing setno
teclado.
tings.
To
load a preset and close the Presets list, double-click a
tings.
Para
carregar
preset
e fechar a lista Presets list, clique duas
name
in the um
Presets
list.
vezes em um nome na lista Presets.
Click Cancel to close the Presets list without changing set Snapshots
Clique Cancel para fechar a lista Presets sem alterar as
Snapshots
tings.
configuraes.
You can save and load plug-in Presets files to import, export,
Voc
pode
salvarand
e carregar
arquivos
Preset
deto
plug-ins
Presets
para
You
can
save
load settings
plug-in
Presets
files
import,
export,
and
transfer
plug-in
files.
importar,
exportar
e transferir
ajustes.
Plug-In
Presets
and
and
transfer
plug-in
settings
files. Snapshots
Snapshots can also be used to automate changes to plug-in
Snapshots
podem
sertousados
parafiles
automatizar
alteraes
You cantambm
savealso
and
load
plug-in
Presets
to import,
export,
Snapshots
can
be
used
automate
changes
to plug-in
routing and
settings.
derouting
roteamento
e plug-in
ajustes de
plug-ins.
and transfer
settings
files.
and settings.
Snapshots can automate plug-in settings, including routing,

Snapshots
can
automate
plug-in
settings,
including
routing,
and in/out
state.
(Side-chain
routing
is not
supported
in SnapSnapshots
and
in/out
state.
(Side-chain
routing
is
not
supported
in SnapSnapshots
shots.)
shots.)
Snapshots
podem
automatizar
ajustes de
plug-ins,
incluindo
Snapshots can
automate
plug-in settings,
including
routing,
Snapshots can
also store
and recall
tempo, to
synchronize
de-
roteamento
e
status
in/out.
(Roteamento
de
side-chain
no
and in/out
state.
routing
is not
in SnapSnapshots
can
also (Side-chain
storethat
and support
recall
tempo,
tosupported
synchronize
delay and echo
Tempo
Sync.
suportado
em plug-ins
Snapshots.)
layshots.)
and echo plug-ins that support Tempo Sync.
Presets can be applied to multiple Shows, while snapshots

Presetscan
podem
a vrios
arquivos
Show,
Snapshots
can
also
beser
used
to automate
changes
to plug-in
Presets
be
toaplicados
multiple
Shows,
while
snapshots
apply only
toapplied
the Show
file in which
they
are
stored.
enquanto
snapshots
se
aplica
apenas
ao
arquivo
Show
em
routing
and
settings.
apply only to the Show file in which they are stored.
Snapshots
do notpodem
store orarmazenar
recall Presets.
Snapshotstempo,
store para
Snapshots
tambm
e carregar
Snapshots
can
and
recall
tempo,
to synchronize
deSnapshots
doalso
not store
store
recall
Snapshots
store
plug-in
settings
at
theor
time
thePresets.
Snapshot
is created
or saved.
sincronizar
plug-ins
de
delay
e
echo
que
suportem
Tempo
Sync.
lay plug-in
and echo
plug-ins
Tempo
Sync. or saved.
settings
at thethat
timesupport
the Snapshot
is created
que est armazenado.
Presets
Presets can be applied to multiple Shows, while snapshots
Presets
Presets
apply only to the Show file in which they are stored.
Presets are files that you can create to save, load, archive and
transfer
plug-in
settings.
canpara
thensalvar
createcarregar,
your
Presets
socustom
arquivos
que voc
podeYou
criar
transfer
plug-in
settings.
You can
then
create
your and
Presets
arquivar
ecustom
tranferir
ajustes
personalizados
de
plug-ins.
Voc
pode
own Preset
folders
to organize
Preset
files.
Preset
folders
own
Preset
folders
organize
files.arquivos
Preset folders
criar
sua
prpria
pastatoPreset
paraPreset
organizar
Preset.and
Pastas
files
can
be
transferred
using
the
Filing
Page.
can be
transferred
using
the Filingutilizando
Page.
e files
arquivos
Preset
podem ser
transferidos
a pgina Filing.
transfer custom plug-in settings. You can then create your
To
create a custom
Presets
folder:
own
folders
to
organize
Preset files. Preset folders and
Para
criarPreset
uma
pasta
Presets
personalizada:
To create
a custom
Presets
folder:
files
be transferred
the Filing
Page. tab.
1 Gocan
to the
Filing pageusing
and click
the Transfer
to the Filing
Filingepage
and
the Transfer tab.
1 1VGo
pgina
clique
na click
aba Transfer.
2 Click the Preset Folders icon.
create
custom
Presets
folder:
2 To
Click
the aPreset
Folders
icon.
2 Clique
no cone
Preset
Folders.
3
Click
the
New
button
at
the
leftthe
of the
screen.
1 Go to the Filing page and click
Transfer
tab.
3 Click the New button at the left of the screen.
4
one
ofPreset
the
following:
3 Clique
no
boto
New
esquerda
da tela.
2 Do
Click
the
Folders
icon.
To leave the folder at its default name, press Enter.
3 Click
theseguintes
Newfolder
button
left of
the screen.
To
the
at at
itsthe
default
name,
press Enter.
4 Siga
umleave
dos
procedimentos:
ordeixar
4Para
a pasta com seu nome padro, pressione Enter.
or
Doone of the following:
ou Type a new name and press Enter.
a new
name
and
Enter.
Type
Toum
leave
the
folder
atpress
its default
name, press Enter.
Digite
novo
nome
e pressione
Enter.
or

Type
a new
name and press Enter.
164 VENUE
Profile
Guide
164
Guia VENUE Profile
Each rack
slot in the
Plug-Ins
screen
provides aPresets.
Snapshot
Snapshots
armazenam
ouPresets.
carregam
Snapshots
Snapshots
dono
not
store or
recall
Snapshots
store
Each
rack
slot shortcuts
in the
Plug-Ins
screen
provides
a Snapshot
menu,
with
for
common
snapshot-related
armazenam ajustes de plug-in no momento tasks:
em que o
plug-in
settings at
time the Snapshot is created or saved.
menu, with
shortcuts
forthe
common
Snapshot
criado
ou salvo.snapshot-related tasks:
Create
a new snapshot
Each
Create
a new
rack
slotsnapshot
in the Plug-Ins screen provides a Snapshot
Add
one
more
to the
MIDI/Plug-Ins
and auCada
slot
deorrack
na plug-ins
tela Plug-Ins
oferece
um menu list,
Snapshot,
com
with
shortcuts
for common
snapshot-related
tasks:
menu,
Add
one
or
more
plug-ins
the MIDI/Plug-Ins
list, and
automatically
re-scope
the to
snapshot
to include
plug-ins.
atalhos
para tarefas
comuns
relacionadas
a snapshots:
re-scope
the snapshot to include plug-ins.
Create
a new
snapshot
tomatically
Criar um
snapshot
Remove plug-ins from one or more snapshots
Adicionar
umfrom
ou one
mais plug-ins
lista MIDI/Plug-Ins, e

plug-ins
snapshots
Remove
Add one
or more
plug-insor
tomore
the MIDI/Plug-Ins
list, and auautomaticamente
redirecionar
o snapshot
para loaded
incluir esses
Snapshots
Containing
this
Plug-In
Lists
all
currently
tomatically re-scope the snapshot to include
plug-ins.
plug-ins.
Snapshots
Containing
this
Plug-In
Lists
all
currently
loaded
snapshots referencing the plug-in, in sequential order. Choose
a snapshot
Remover
plug-insfrom
de plug-in,
um
snapshots
Remove
plug-ins
oneouormais
more
snapshots
snapshots
referencing
sequential
order.
to load it.the
(This
menuin
option
is useful
for Choose
targeting
a snapshot
to
load
it.
(This
menu
option
is
useful
for
targeting
snapshots
while
editing
plug-in
racks.)
Snapshots Containing
this
Lists all currently loaded
Snapshots
Containing
thisPlug-In
Plug-In
snapshots
while
editing plug-in
racks.)Lista todos os snapshots
snapshots referencing
the plug-in,
in sequential
order. sequencial.
Choose
carregados
que referenciam
o plug-in,
em ordem
Escolha
um to
snapshot
para carreg-lo.
(Essa
opofor
dotargeting
menu til
a snapshot
load it. (This
menu option
is useful
para
apontar
snapshots
editando racks de plug-in.)
snapshots
while
editingenquanto
plug-in racks.)
Create New Snapshot Containing this Plug-In Adds a new snapshot toNew
the Snapshot
snapshot list
in whichthis
only
plug-ins
are scoped.
Create
Containing
Plug-In
Adiciona
um novo
This snapshot
inserted
immediately
the currently
tar-
snapshot
lista is
em
que apenas
plug-ins after
so alvo.
Esse snapshot
inserido
imediatamente
o snapshot
marcado
geted snapshot,
which aps
may not
necessarily
be theatualmente,
last snap- ue
no
precisa
ser necessariamente
o ltimo
O snapshot
shot.
The snapshot
is named to reflect
thesnapshot.
plug-in rack
position,
nomeado
para
refletir
sua
posio
no
rack
plug-in,
por
for example: PI 1-1: Reverb One is a Reverb Oneexemplo:
PI
1-1: Reverb One um plug-in Reverb One atribudo ao rack 1,
plug-in assigned to rack 1, slot 1.
slot 1.
Add
(or Update)
Plug-In to Snapshot Adds a plug-in referStage
Rackthis
Features
Add
(ouwith
Update)
thissettings,
Plug-In to
Snapshot
Adicoona
uam
referncia
ence,
current
if the
currently
targeted
snapshot
a um
plug-in,
com
os atuais
ajustes,
se o and
snapshot
atualmente
Stage
Racks
are
used
with
an
FOH
Rack,
provide
does not already reference this plug-in. If the currently all
tar-stage
marcado
no
referencia
esse
plug-in.
Se Up
o snapshot
atualmente
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
to
two
Stage
geted snapshot already references this plug-in, the choiceRacks
is
marcado
referencia
esse plug-in, supporting
essa opo up
aparece
Update
can be
used
simultaneously,
to 96 como
total
inputs.
Update
(see
next).
If
multiple
snapshots
are
selected,
this
com(veja a seguir). Se mltiplos snapshots esto selecionado, esse
mand changes
to para
AddAdd
Plug-In
to Selected
for para
comando
se altera
Plug-In
to SelectSnapshots
ed Snapshots
Audio I/O
batch-assignment.
atribuio
em lote.
Update this
this Plug-In
Updates
snapshots
withcom
curos
Update
Plug-Ininselectable
inSnapshots
Snapshots
Atualiza
snapshots
individually
phantom
power.
rent settings,
ifsethe
currently atualmente
targeted snapshot
(or(ou
currently
ajustes
atuais,
o
snapshot
marcado
snapshots
atualmente
marcados)already
j referencia
essethis
plug-in.
selected snapshots)
references
plug-in.
Removethis
this Plug-In
Plug-In in
to thisa esse
Remove
in Snapshot
Snapshot Removes
Remove reference
as referencias
Synchronization
and Control
I/O
plug-in
the currently
targeted
snapshot,
ortodos
from os
allsnapshots
curplug-in
noinsnapshot
atualmente
marcado,
ou de
atualmente
marcados.
rently selected
snapshots.to enable primary and redundant (if
Snake
connectors
VejaChapter
Captulo
21,Snapshots.
Snapshots.
See
21,
Plug-Ins
e Software
VENUEStandalone
Standalone Software
Plug-Ins
and VENUE
System Components
You pode
can use
VENUE
Standalone
to preconfigure
Voc
usar
o software
VENUEsoftware
Standalone
para pr-configurar
routing
in/outin/out
state, de
with
the following
oplug-in
roteamento
e and
o status
plug-ins,
com aslimitaseguintes
Included Components
limitaes:
tions:
All
Plug-Ins no podem ser instalados no software Standalone.
VENUE
Profile
the following:
cannot
be systems
installedinclude
the Standalone
Software.
Plug-Ins
Um arquivo
Show
precisa
serintransferido
da console
em que os
VENUE
Profile
foram
previamente
instalados.
Aplug-ins
Show
file
must
be console
transferred
from a console on which
plug-ins
Uma
vez
um
arquivo
Show contend os plug-ins foi
Two
(2)que
IEC
power
cables
were
previously
installed.
transferido para o software standalone , as seguintes regras
soa aplicadas:
Once
Show file containing plug-ins has been transferred to
Trackball
mount
not included)
the Plug-Ins
podem
ser(trackball
posicionados
e roteados
no modo
standalone
software,
the
following rules
apply:
Standalone.
VENUE Mouse Pad
Plug-Ins can be placed in racks and routed in Standalone
Snapshots
criados, carregados e armazenados.
VENUEpodem
Profileser
Guide
mode.
Configuraes
de Plug-Ins no podem ser ajustadas.
Twode
(2)Plug-no
console
lights ser
Snapshots
can be created,
loaded,
Presets
podem
salvosand
ou stored.
carregados.
Protective
Dust
Coverbe adjusted.
Plug-In
settings
cannot
Rack(s)
(see next)
Plug-In
Presets
cannot be saved or loaded.

System Restore CD
Plug-In DSP Usage

Uso de
DSPDSP
pelo
Plug-In
Plug-Ins
utilize
resources
when they are assigned to a rack
slot, and that rack slot is powered on. You can turn off unused
Plug-Instoutilizam
quandothem
so atribudos
um slot
plug-ins
reclaim recursos
their DSPDSP
by making
inactive, ora by
de rack, e o slot de rack est ligado. Voc pode desligar plug-ins
removing them from the system.
no utilizados para realocar seus DSP tornando-os inativos ou
removendo-os
do sistema.
Plug-In
availability
is limited to the available DSP resources.
A disponibilidade
plug-ins
limitadaalso
pelos
recursos
de DSP
The
amount of DSP de
available
forplug-ins
varies
with the
The following
componentssettings
must befor
purchased
separately:
disponveis.
current
system configuration
Input Channels,
FX
Video
Display
(15-inch
or greater
flat-panel
VGA
display
Returns,
and
graphic
EQs. Higher
number
of Input
Channels
A quantidade de DSP disponvel para plug-ins tambm varia de cordo
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
leaverecommended;
fewer DSP resources
for plug-ins,
as shown
in theVGA
Op-and
com os ajustes de configurao do sistema para Input Channels, FX
supported.
tionsDVI
> System
Config screen.
Returns e Graphic EQs. Um alto nmeor de Input Channels deixa
poucos
recursos DSP
para plug-ins,
como
mostrado na
USB keyboard
and disponveis
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
tela
Options
>
System
Config.
Initializing the Plug-In Racks
Inicializando
os Racks de(or
Plug-In
The
racks are initialized
re-initialized) whenever the sys-

tem is first powered on, whenever the FOH Rack is restarted,
a Digital
cable. (ou
Thisrecable
can be purchased
directly
Os
soSnake
incializados
incializados)
sempre
que
o sistema
after racks
installing
a plug-in, and
after
disabling or
re-enabling
a
from Avid
or assembled
preferred
ligado
ou reiniciado
apsbyayour
instalao
de vendor.
um plug-in, e aps
plug-in.
habilitar ou rehabilitar um plug-in.
While the racks are initializing, they are offline and do not
Optional
Components
Enquanto
os racks
inicializados,
esto offline
e nofuncprocessam
process
audio.
Avoidso
performing
any Filing
or Transfer
udio.
Evite
realizar
qualquer
funo
Filing
ou
Transfer
at que os
Theuntil
following
components
areinitializing.
optional, and
must
beis
tions
the racks
are finished
Rack
status
disracks terminem sua inicializao. O status do rack apresentado
purchased
separately:
played
on-screen
in the banner display.
na tela, no banner.
Near-field
Plug-In
Levels
Nveis
de Plug-In
Headphones
with 1/4-inch jack
VENUE systems display levels in meters in dBVU, with
O sistema
VENUE
apresenta
em medidores em dBVU, com
0 dBVU
=+4dBu
analog
out = nveis
20dBFS.
(for Talkback)
0 dBVU =+4dBu sada analgica = 20dBFS.
Footswitches
(up toprovide
2)
Internally,
VENUE systems
up to 48-bit processing for
Internamente,
o
sistema
VENUE
oferece
processamento
de
built-in
EQ
and
dynamics.
Plug-Ins
up
to
24-bit
pro MIDI cables (for connecting provide
external
MIDI
devices)
at 48-bit
para matching
EQ e Dynamics
embutidos.
Plug-Ins maxoferecem
cessing,
with
level
circuitry
and
logic
ensuring
processamenteo
de
at performance
24-bit, com nvel
apropriado
para assegurar
imum
fidelity
sonic
throughout
VENUEand
system
and external digital
devices)the entire
a mxima
e performance
todo o iscaminho
de
signal
path. fidelidade
Due to variances
in how sonora
plug-inpor
metering
im 25-pin
D-Sub
(for connecting
to GPI devices)
sinal.
Por caonta
decables
cariaes
de como medies
em plug-in so
plemented by different manufacturers, performance may vary
implementadas por diferentes fabricantes, a performance pode
with regard to plug-in gain reduction meters and their relative
variar no que diz respeito aos medidores de reduo de ganho do
levels.
plug-ins e seus nveis relativos.
When using side-chain routing, be aware of potential level difQuando usando roteamento de side-chain, tenha cuidado com
The following
options
can be added
to VENUE
Profile
systems.
ferences
between
Inputde
Channel
pickoff
points.
For more
indiferenas
potenciais
nvel entre
pontos
de alimentao
de Input
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit
the
Avid na
formation,
see
Side-Chain
Keys
and
Filters
on
page
139.
Channel. Para mais informaes, Veja Keys e Filtros Side-Chain
website139.
(www.avid.com).
pgina
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options



outputs
18: Plug-Ins
165
AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides Chapter
16 channels
of A-Net
Plug-In
Latency and
Processing
Delay
Delay
de Processamento
e Latncia
de Plug-In
Plug-In latency includes processing delay of the plug-in itself
A latncia
de um plug-in inclui o delay do processamento do prprio
plus routing delay, as follows:
plug-in adicionado ao delay do roteamento, conforme segue:
Instance
delay:por
2 samples
Delay:
2 samples
plug-in per plug-in
Delay
roteamento
3 samples
DSPde
routing
delay:de
3 DSP:
samples
Verificando
a Latncia
do Plug-In
Viewing Plug-In
Latency
Cumulative
channel
processing delay
can be
viewed
by
O delay
acumulativo
de processamento
de canal
pode
ser visualizado
clicando
com o boto
direitoarea
na rea
right-clicking
the Inserts
of the selected channel. The cuInserts
do canal
O delay
acumulativo
a latncia
mulative
delayselecionado.
includes latency
reported
by all inclui
inserted
apresentada
por
todos
os
plug-ins
inseridos,
roteamento
dedelay,
sinal e
plug-ins, signal routing and the known hardware insert
o delay
de
inserts
de
hardware,
se
aplicvel.
if applicable.
Total delay
Viewing cumulative delay by right-clicking the Inserts section
Visualizando delay acumulativo clicando com o boto direito na seo Inserts
Individual plug-In processing delay can be seen by right-click-
Delay
de processamento
pode ser
visualizado
ing the
plug-in icon inindividual
the rack. de
Useplug-in
the number
reported
clicando
com o boto
direitofornomanual
cine do
plug-in
no rack. Use o
when calculating
latency
delay
compensation.
npumero apresentado quando calcular a latncia para compensao
manual de delay.
Examples
Exemplos
If there is only one plug-in on a channel, the total delay will
be the amount of plug-in latency + 2 + 3. (2 samples for the
Se h apenas um plug-in em um canal, o delay total ser a quantidade

one plug-in instance, plus 3 samples for the DSP routing to the
de latncia do plug-in + 2 + 3. (2 samples para um plug-in, mais 3
racks and back.)
samples para o roteamento de DSP para os racks e de volta.)
If you have two plug-ins on a channel or bus, the delay will be
Se voc tem dois plug-ins em um canal ou bus, o delay ser a latncia

plug-in #1 latency + 2 + plug-in #2 latency + 2 + 3. If plug-in #1
do plug-in #1 + 2 + a latncia do plug-in #2 + 2 + 3. Se o plug-in #1
has12
12samples
samplesde
of latncia
latency, eand
plug-in#2
#2tem
has15,
15, atotal
latency
tem
o plug-in
latncia
total
willdebe34
34samples
samples(12
(12++22++15
15++22++3).
3).
ser
166
Guia VENUE Profile
Chapter 19: Hardware Inserts

Chapter19:
19:Hardware
HardwareInserts
Inserts
Chapter
Captulo 19: Inserts de Hardware
Mix Rack and FOH Racks let you route signals to and from external devices as hardware inserts. Hardware inserts can be used on
FXpermitem
returns,
Auxes,
Matrixes,
Personal
Qs,
and
Mains.
Mix Rack
and
FOH
Racks letGroups,
you route
signals
to
and
from external
devices
as hardware
Hardware
can be podem
used onser
Mix input
Rack
echannels,
FOH
Racks
rotear
sinais
para
e de
dispositivos
externos
como
inserts deinserts.
hardware.
Insertsinserts
de hardware
Mix
Rack
and FOH
Racks
letreturns,
you
route
signals
to
and
from
external
devices
as hardware inserts. Hardware inserts can be used on
usados
em channels,
Input
Channels,
FX
Groups,
Auxes,
Matrixes,
Personal
Qs
e Mains.
input
FX
returns,
Groups,
Auxes,
Matrixes,
Personal
Qs,
and
Mains.
Mix channels,
Rack and FOH
Rack provide
8 analog
insert channels.
Up
to 16 analog and 8 digital hardware inserts can be used
input
FX returns,
Groups,
Auxes, hardware
Matrixes, Personal
Qs, and
Mains.
Stage
Rack Features
Additional
Required Components
with
an
FOH
Rack
(requires
an
I/Ox
expansion
option).
Mix
Rack
and
FOH
Rack
provide
8
analog
hardware
insert
channels.
Up
analog
8 digital
hardwareeinserts
canpodem
be usedser
Mix Rack e FOH Rack oferecem 8 canais de insert de hardware analgico. Atto
1616
inserts
deand
hardware
analgicos
8 digitais
Mix
Rack
and
FOH
Rack
provide
analog
hardware
insert
channels.The
Up following
to 16 analog
and 8 digital
hardware
insertsseparately:
can be used
Stage
Racks
are
used
with
anum
FOH
Rack,
and
provide
all
stage
components
must
be purchased
usadis
com
FOH
Rack
(exige
opcional
de
expanso
I/Ox).
with
anum
FOH
Rack
(requires
an8
I/Ox
expansion
option).
with
anI/O
FOH
(requires
ansystems.
I/Ox expansion
option).
audio
forRack
VENUE
Profile
Up to two
Stage Racks
Analog
18
Video Display (15-inch
orI/O
greater
recommended; 1024x768
Analog minimum
I/O 18
DVI supported. Analog I/O 18
Audio I/O
IO
section
IO individually selectable phantom power.
section
IO
section

16. Hardware
insert
patch
oneMix
FOH Rack,
showing
standard
mix
(FOH)
connectors
FiguraFigure
16. Conexes
de insert de
hardware
nopoints
Mix Rack
FOHRack
Rack, and
mostrnado
conectores
da posio
de mixagem
(FOH) I/O
from
Avid
or position
assembled
byI/O
your
preferred vendor.
Figure
16. Hardwareand
insert
patch points
position
(FOH)do
I/Oone
connectors
Synchronization
Control
I/O on Mix Rack and FOH Rack, showing2standard
In the mix
Inserts
section,
of the following:
Connecting
External
Effects Units
outputsinsert
per Stage
Figuredigital
16. Hardware
patch Rack.
points on Mix Rack and FOH Rack, showing standard mix position (FOH) I/O connectors
Snake connectors
to enable
primary Units
and redundant (if
the Hardware
pop-up
menu
and choose an in2 InClick
the Inserts
section,Insert
do one
of the
following:
Connecting
External
Effects
Outboard gear is made available to the system by connecting
22Optional
In
Inserts
section,
do
one
of
the
following:
Components
Nathe
seo
Inserts,
siga
um
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
sert
destination
directly
from
the
menu.
The choose
name ofan
the
Click the Hardware Insert pop-up menu and
inits
inputs and
connectors
in the
FOHbyI/O
sections
Outboard
gearoutputs
is madetoavailable
to the
system
connecting
Click
the
Hardware
Insert
pop-up
menu
and
choose
an
in The
Clique
no
menu
pop-up
Hardware
Insert
e
escolha
o
destino
hardware
insert
destination
appears
in
the
on-screen
sert destination
directly
from
the menu.
The name
of thedo
following
components
are
optional,
and
must
be
Outboard
gear
is
made
available
to
the
system
by
connecting
of
Mix
Rackoutputs
ortornam-se
FOH to
Rack.
Hardware
inserts
canI/O
then
be asitsthe
inputs
and
connectors
in
the
FOH
sections
Dispositivos
externos
disponveis
ao
sistema
conectando
insert
diretamento
do menu.
O nome
doThe
destino doofinsert
sert
destination
directly
from the
menu.
the de
Hardware
Insert
button.
hardware
insert
destination
appears
in thename
on-screen
purchased
separately:
itssigned
inputs
and
outputs
to conectores
connectors
in the
FOHFOH
I/O
sections
on
channels
similarly
inserting
plug-ins.
suas
entradas
eRack
sadas
nas
sees
dobe
Mix
hardware insert
surge na
tela e no boto
Hardware
Insert.
of
the Mix
or aos
FOH
Rack.to
Hardware
inserts
canI/O
then
ashardware
destination
appears
in
the
on-screen
Hardware
Insert
or
flash disk
ofSystem
the
Mixon
Rack
or
FOHsimilarly
Rack.
Hardware
inserts
canser
then
be as
USB
(orbutton.
other portable USB storage device for
Components
Rack
ou FOH
Rack.
Inserts
de hardware
podem
ento
atribudos
ou
signed
channels
to inserting
plug-ins.
Hardware Insert button.
signed
on
channels
similarly
to
inserting
plug-ins.
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB orto
a canais
de modo
similar gear
a inserir
plug-ins.
Clique
no Hardware
boto Hardware
Insert
elarger
v torecommended)
pgina
Inserts
Click
Insert
button
go
the
Inserts
page do
or
the
To connect
outboard
for use
as a hardware insert:
orPatchbay,
e
atribua
o
insert
pelo
Patchbay.
of
the
Patchbay,
and
assign
the
insert
from
the
Patchbay.
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
Click
the
Hardware
Insert
button
to
go
to
the
Inserts
page
To
connect
outboard
gear
for
use
as
a
hardware
insert:
Included
Components
1 Connect the
external externos
device inputs tousop
analog
or digital
Para
conectaroutboard
dispositivos
como
insertOut
de
Click
thePatchbay,
Hardware Insert
button
toinsert
go to from
the Inserts
page
To connect
gear for use as para
a hardware insert:
of
the
and
assign
the
the
Patchbay.
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
connectors
(Analog
18, device
Analoginputs
916, or analog
AES 18) on the
1 Connect
the external
hardware:
All
VENUE Profile
systems
include the to
following:or digital Out
1 Mix
Connect
the
external
device
inputs
to
analog
digital
Out
Rack
or
FOH
Rack.
connectors (Analog 18, Analog 916, or AESor
18)
on the
Click to
Click to
VENUE
Profile18,
console
916, or
AES 18)
the
(for Talkback)
1 connectors
Conecte
as(Analog
entradas
doAnalog
dispositivo
externo
aoson
conectores
assign
Mix
Rack
or
FOH
Rack.
go to the
2
Connect
the
external
device
outputs
to
the
corresponding
Click
to
Click to
Two
(2)
IEC
power
cables
Mix Rackou
or digitais
FOH Rack.
Patchbay
analgicos
Out (Analog 18, Analog 916, ou AES 18)
Footswitches (upClick
toassign
2)
to
Click
go to
to the
In
connectors
on
the
back
panel
of
the
Mix
Rack
or
FOH
Rack.
2
Connect
the
external
device
outputs
to
the
corresponding
no MixRack
ou FOH
Rack.for VGA screen (screen not included)
Monitor
mount
assign
go Patchbay
to the
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
2 For
Connect
the
external
device
outputs
to
the
corresponding
example, signal
taken
FOH
Output
1 returns
on FOH
In connectors
on the
backfrom
panel
of the
Mix Rack
or FOH
Rack.
Patchbay
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
connectors
onsignal
the do
back
panel
the
Mix
Rack
FOH Rack.
Input
1.as sadas
2 In
Conecte
dispositivo
externo
aos
conectores
In
For
example,
taken
fromofFOH
Output
1 or
returns
on FOH
VENUEsignal
Mouse
Pad from
ForInput
example,
taken
Output
returns on FOH
correspondentes
na traseira
do MixFOH
Rack
ou FOH1 Rack.
1.
Atribuindo
de hardware
pgina
Outputspage
Assigninguma insert
insert na
in the
Outputs
Input
1.
VENUE
Profile
Guideda Output 1 do FOH retornam para a
Por
exemplo,
sinais
retirados
25-pinhardware
D-Sub cables
(for connecting
to GPI devices)
Input 1 do
FOH.
Assigning
a
hardware
insert
in
the
Outputs
page
To assign a hardware insert from the Patchbay:
Connecting
External
Units
applicable)
connection
to a VENUE
FOH Rack.
Conectando
Unidades
de Efeitos Effects
Externas
Assigning Hardware Inserts to

Channels
Assigning
Hardware Inserts to
Assigning
Hardware
Inserts to
Rack(s) (see
next)
Channels
You canInserts
assigndehardware
directly from the Inputs page
Atribuindo
Hardwareinserts
a Canais
Channels
or
Outputs
page.hardware
YouCDs,
can inserts
also
make
hardware
insert
assignYou
canSoftware
assign
directly
from the
Inputs
page
Racks,
iLoks,
and
Cables
You
can
assign
hardware
inserts
from the insert
Inputspginas
page
Voc
pode
atribuir
inserts
hardware
diretamente
pelas
ments
from
the
Patchbay.
or
Outputs
page.
Youde
can
alsodirectly
make
hardware
assignorEach
Outputs
page.
You
can
also
make
hardware
insert
assignInputs
ou
Outputs.
Voc
tambm
pode
fazer
atribuies
de
inserts
Mix
Rack
or
FOH
Rack
includes:
ments from the Patchbay.
dements
hardware
Patchbay.
For pelo
complete
instructions,
see Chapter 12, Patchbay.
from
the
Patchbay.
System
Restore
CD
For Ethernet
complete instructions,
see Chapter
12,CD
Patchbay.
ECx
Control
Toassign
a hardware
insert Software
tosee
aveja
channel
or
Para
instrues
completas,
o Installer
Captulo
12, Patchbay.
For
complete
instructions,
Chapter
12,bus:
Patchbay.
assign
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD or bus:
hardware
insert
to a channel
1ToGo
to thea Inputs
or the
Outputs
page and
target the channel
Para
insert
deinsert
hardware
para umplug-in
canal
bus:
To atribuir
assign
aum
hardware
to a storing
channel
or
bus:ou
iLok
USB
Smart
Key
(for
authorizations)
where
you
want
to
assign
the
hardware
insert
by pressing
the
1 Go to the Inputs or the Outputs page and target
the channel
Plug-in
installer
discs
(if
any)
with
pre-authorized
iLok
1 channel
Go
to
the
Inputs
or
the
Outputs
page
and
target
the
channel
Select
switch.
youInputs
want to
thee hardware
byonde
pressing
the
1 V where
pgina
ou assign
Outputs
selecione insert
o canal
deseja
where
you
want
assign cables
thepressionando
hardware insert
by pressing
oTwo
(2) IEC
power
atribuir
insert
detoswitch.
hardware
o switch
Selectthedo
channel
Select
channel
Select
canal.
One
FOHswitch.
Link cable for connection to a VENUE console
Para atribuir
um insert
deinhardware
pelo
Patchbay:
Assigning
a hardware
insert
the Outputs
page
assign
a hardware
fromthe
theInserts
Patchbay:
1ToGo
to the
Patchbay insert
and click
tab. The Hardware
To
assign
a hardware
insert
from the
Patchbay:
1VENUE
V
pgina
Patchbay
eExpansion
clique
na aba
Inserts.
A aba Hardware do
Profile
Options
Tab
fortothe
Mix
Rack orand
FOH
Rack
is Inserts
shown.
1 Go
the
Patchbay
click
the
tab. The Hardware
Mix Rack ou FOH Rack apresentada.
1 Go to the Patchbay and click the Inserts tab. The Hardware
Tabfollowing
for the Channels,
Mix
Rack can
or Returns,
FOH
Rack to
isOutputs
shown.
The
options
be added
VENUEtabs
Profile
systems.
2 Click
to show
the
Tab
for thethe
Mix Rack or FX
FOH Rack isorshown.
2For
Clique
na on
abaallChannels,
FX Returns
ou
Outputs
para
mostrar
os
details
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit
Avid
desired
channel
types
in
the
grid.
If
you
jumped
to
the
patch2 Click the Channels, FX Returns, or Outputs tabs to show the
dethe
canais
desejados
no grid.
Se
vocappropriate
saltar
para
o Patchbay
2tipos
Click
Channels,
FX
Returns,
or
Outputs
tabs
to
show
the
website
(www.avid.com).
bay
from
the
Inputs
or
Outputs
page,
the
Channel
desired channel types in the grid. If you jumped to the patchdas pginas
Inputs
ouinOutputs,
aIfaba
Channel
Type
apropriada
desired
channel
types
grid.
youthe
jumped
to the
patch-
Type
tabs
are
enabled.
bay from
the automatically
Inputs
or the
Outputs
page,
appropriate
Channel
automaticamente
habilitada.
bayType
fromtabs
theare
Inputs
or Outputsenabled.
page, the appropriate Channel
automatically
Mix Rack
Options
Type tabs are automatically enabled.
I/O Options
outputs
Chapter 19: Hardware Inserts 167
Chapter 19: Hardware Inserts 167
XO16 Analog and Digital OutputChapter

Card that
providesInserts
8 analog
19: Hardware
167

Captulo 19: Inserts de Hardware 167
3 Clique
no grid
de channel
canais para
o nmero
da entrada/sada
3 Click
in the
gridatribuir
to assign
the insert
input/output
de insert (listadas no topo) para o canal em que voc deseja atribuir
number (listed across the top) to the channel where you want
o insert (listados esquerda).
to assign the insert (listed on the left).
Ativando e Colocando em Bypass Inserts de Hardware
Activating and Bypassing Hardware Inserts
Os
controles
ativao eand
bypass
de inserts
de hardware
esto
The
controlspara
for activating
bypassing
hardware
inserts are
disponveis
na tela nain
seo
available on-screen
the Inserts sections of the Inputs and
Inserts das pginas Inputs e Outputs.
Outputs pages.
Para ativar e colocar em bypass um insert de hardware:

To activate or bypass a hardware insert:
11Selecione
canal emwhere
que deseja
ativar
ou colocar
em bypass
Target theo channel
you want
to activate
or bypass
the o
insert
seuchannel
switch Select.
insertpressionando
by pressing the
Select switch.
22Clique
no In/Out
boto button
In/Out para
o HW
insert
HW. The
O boto
selights
acende
Click the
for the
insert.
button
quando
o insert
est
ativado (no
when the
insert
is activated
(incircuito).
circuit).
Assigning a hardware insert in the Patchbay Inserts page
Atribuindo um insert de hardware na pgina Patchbay Inserts
The Patchbay Inserts tab shows the name of the channel and
A aba
Inserts
mostra
o nome
canal e The
seu Insert
destino
na
itsPatchbay
destination
at the
current
cursordo
location.
localocalizao
do
cursor.
A
localizao
do
Insert
tambm
apresentada
tion is also displayed in the Inserts section in the Inputs or
na seo Inserts das pginas Inputs ou Outputs.
Outputs page.
Ajustando a localizao do Insert de Hardware
Setting the Hardware Insert Location
Voc pode escolher a localizao do insert de hardware no caminho

You can
location
the hardware
insertpara
in the
sigdo sinal
em choose
relaothe
aos
quatro ofinserts
de plug-ins,
cada
nal
path
relative
to
the
four
plug-in
inserts,
for
each
channel.
canal.
ParaTo
ajustar
a localizao
do insert
de hardware:
set the
hardware insert
location:
1 Go to the Outputs page and select the channel where you
1 V pgina Outputs e selecione o canal em que deseja ajustar a

want todo
setinsert
the hardware
insert location.
localizao
de hardware.
2 In the Inserts section of the Outputs page, click the hard-
2 Na seo Inserts da pgina Outputs, clique no indicador Hardware

ware insert indicator so that it lights red.
Insert para que se acenda em vermelho.
Click to set
HW Insert
location
In/Out
Ajustando a localizao do insert de hardware na pgina Inputs
168
Guia VENUE Profile
Parte V: Shows
169
170
Guia VENUE Profile
Chapter 20: Shows and File Management

Chapter
Shows
File
Management
Captulo
20:20:
Gerenciamento
de
Arquivos
e Shows
Chapter
20:
Showsand
and
File
Management
Chapter 20: Shows and File Management
Dados
ser armazenados,
transferidos
entre
Data podem
can be stored,
recalled andcarregados
transferredebetween
VENUE
sistemas
VENUE.
Existem
trs
tipos
de arquivosbetween
de
informao
que
Data can
be stored,
recalled
and
transferred
VENUE
systems.
There
are
three
types
of
information
files
that
can
be
Data
can
be
stored,
recalled
and
transferred
between
VENUE
Data
can
be
stored,
recalled
and
transferred
between
VENUE
podem
ser
gerenciados
separadamente,
como
segue:
systems. There are three types of information files that can be
managed
separately,
as
follows:
systems.
There
are
three
types
of
information
files
can
systems.
There
are as
three
types
of transferred
informationbetween
files that
thatVENUE
can be
be
Data
can
be stored,
recalled
and
managed
separately,
follows:
managed
separately,
as
follows:
Show
Files
Esses
arquivos
so
utilizados
para
armazenar,
carregar
managed
separately,
as used
follows:
systems.
There
are three
types
information
files
that can
Show
Files These
files
are
toof
store,
recall and
transfer
sys-be
e transferir
ajustes
de
sistema,
snapshots
eventos.
Show
Files
These
files
are
used
to store,erecall
and transfer sysmanaged
separately,
as
follows:
tem
settings,
snapshot,
and
events.
Show
Files
These
files
are
used
to
store,
recall
Stage
Rack
Features
Show
Files
These
files
are
used
to
store,
recall and
and transfer
transfer syssystem settings, snapshot, and events.
tem
settings,
snapshot,
and
events.
Preset
Files
Esses
arquivos
so
utilizados
para
armazenar
ajustes
tem
settings,
snapshot,
and
events.
Show
Files
These
filesare
are
used
tostore
store,
recall
and
transfer
sysPreset
Files
These
files
used
to
settings
for
channel
destrips,
rguas
de canal,
processadores
embutidos
eRecall
plug-ins,
eScope
ajustes
tem built-in
settings,
snapshot,
and
events.
Preset
Files
These
files areand
used
to
storeand
settings
forSafe
channel
processors
plug-ins,
audio
I/O
forThese
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up settings
to two Stage
Racks
Preset
Files
files
are
to
for
Preset
Files
These
files
are used
used
to store
store
for channel
channel
Recall
Safe
Scope.
strips,
built-in
processors
and
plug-ins,
andsettings
Recall Safe
Scope
Sets.
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96
total
inputs.
strips,
built-in
processors
and
plug-ins,
and
Recall
Safe
Scope
strips, built-in
processors
plug-ins,
Recall
Scope
Preset
Files These
files areand
used
to storeand
settings
forSafe
channel
Sets.
Sets.
Console
Setting
Files
Esses
arquivos
so
utilizados
para
transferir
Sets. Setting
strips,
built-inFiles
processors
andare
plug-ins,
Recall
Console
These files
used toand
transfer
orSafe
backScope
up
Audiobackup
I/O
ouConsole
fazer
doFiles
status
corrente
do sistema
VENUE. or back up
Setting
These
files system.
are
used to transfer
theSets.
current
state
of
the
VENUE
Console Setting
Files These
are
transfer
or
up
Setting
These files
files
are used
used to
tomic
transfer
or back
back
48 inputs
remotely
controllable
preamps
andup
theConsole
current
state with
ofFiles
the
VENUE
system.
the
current
state
of
the
VENUE
system.
O
sistema
no
precisa
estar
no
modo
Config
para
realizar
theThe
current
state
ofnot
the
VENUE
Console
Setting
Files
These
files
areConfig
used
to
transfer
or back
system
does
need
to
be system.
in
mode
to carry
out up
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
tarefas
destate
gerenciamento
arquivos.
No entanto,
thefile
current
theneed
VENUE
The
system
doesofnot
tode
be system.
in
Config
mode
to carrymuitas
out
management
tasks.
However,
many
file
management
das
8The
analog
output
up
to 48
analog
oro
system
does
not
need
to
be
Config
mode
to
carry
operaes
dechannels;
gerenciamento
de
arquivos,
incluindo
system
does
not
need
toexpandable
be in
in
Config
mode
to
carry out
out
fileThe
management
tasks.
However,
many
fileinterrupt
management
operations,
including
loading
Shows,
may
audio
digital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
file
management
tasks.
However,
many
file
management
carregamento
de Shows,
podem
o fluxo
udio.
file management
tasks.
However,
many
file
management
The
system
does
not
need
toShows,
beinterromper
in Config
mode
to de
carry
operations,
including
may
interrupt
audioout
throughput.
Make
sureloading
toloading
perform
all
filemay
management
Certifique-se
de
realizar
todas
as
tarefas
de
gerenciamento
operations,
including
Shows,
interrupt
audio
operations,
including
loading
Shows,
may
interrupt
audio
file
management
tasks.
However,
many
file
management
throughput.
Make
sure
to perform
all file management
tasks
before antes
a
performance.
dethroughput.
arquivos
desure
uma
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O
Make
to
perform
all
file
throughput.
Make
sure
toperformance.
perform
all may
file management
management
operations,
loading
Shows,
interrupt audio
tasks
before a including
performance.
tasks
before
a
performance.
Snake
to
enable
primary
redundant (if
tasks connectors
before a
performance.
throughput.
Make
sure
to perform
all and
file management
applicable)
tasks beforeconnection
a performance.
Creating Shows
Creating
Shows
A Show
file contains
all configuration, signal routing, mixer
A
Show
file
contains
all todas
configuration,
signal
routing,
mixer de
Creating
Shows
settings,
plug-in
information,
snapshots,
and
other
operaUm
arquivo
Show
contm
as
configuraes,
roteamentos
System
Components
A Show file contains all
configuration,
signal
routing,
mixer
Criando
Shows
Creating
Shows
Creating
Shows
A Show
file contains
all configuration,
signal
routing,
mixer
settings,
plug-in
information,
snapshots,
and
operasinal,
ajustes
de
kixer
informaes
de
plug-ins,
snapshots,
e outros
tional
settings.
Shows
are grouped
together
inother
Show
Folders.
settings,
plug-in
information,
snapshots,
and
other
operasettings,
plug-in
information,
snapshots,
and
other
operaA
Show
file
contains
all
configuration,
signal
routing,
mixer
tionaloperacionais.
settings. Shows
are so
grouped
together
Show
Folders.
ajustes
Shows
agrupados
em in
Show
Folders.
tional
settings.
Shows
are
grouped
together
in
Show
Folders.
tional
settings.
Shows
are
grouped
together
in
Show
Folders.
settings,
plug-in
information,
snapshots,
and
other
operaIncluded Components
tional
settings. Shows are grouped together in Show Folders.
Show
Folders
Show
Folders
All VENUE
Show
Folders
Show
Folders
Show
Folders
Show
Folders
contain
Show files. You can create and manage
VENUE
Profilearquivos
console
Show Folders
contm
Show. Voc pode criar e gerenciar
Show
Folders
contain
Show
files.
can
create
and manage
Show
Folders
Show
Folders
from
the
Save
tab
ofYou
the
Filing
page.
Folders
contain
Show
files.
You
can
and manage
ShowShow
Folders
pela
aba
Save
da
pgina
Filing.
Two
(2)
IEC
power
cables
Show
Folders
contain
Show
You
can create
create
Show
Folders
from
the Save
tabfiles.
of the
Filing
page. and manage
Show
Folders
from
the
Save
tab
of
the
Filing
page.
from the
Save
tab
ofYou
the
Filing
page.
Show
Foldersmount
contain
Show
can
create
and manage
Monitor
for
VGAfiles.
screen
(screen
not
included)
Show
Folders mount
from the
Save tabnot
of the
Filing page.
Trackball
(trackball
included)
VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE Profile Guide
Rack(s) (see next)

System Restore CD
Standalone
Software
CDof the Filing page
Show Folders
and Show
files in Installer
the Save tab
Show
Folders
and
Show
files
in
the
Save
tab
of the Filing
page
iLok
USB
Smart
Key
(for
storing
plug-in
authorizations)
Show Show
Folders e arquivos
Show na aba
Savethe
da pginatab
Filing
Show Folders
Folders and
and Show
Show files
files in
in the Save
Save tab of
of the
the Filing
Filing page
page
Show Folders and Show files in the Save tab of the Filing page

Criando Show
Folders
Creating
Show
Folders
Creating Show Folders
Creating
Folders
Creating
Show
Folders
Para
criar umaShow
nova Show
Folder:
To create a new Show Folder:
Creating
Show
Folders
To create a new Show Folder:
To
new
Show
Folder:
V create
topgina
Filing
e clique
na
aba
Save.
11 Go
the a
page
and
click
the
Save tab.
To
create
aFiling
new
Show
Folder:
1 Go
to
the
Filing
page
and
click
the
Save tab.
To Go
create
a new
Show
Folder:
1
to
the
Filing
page
and
click
the Save
tab.
22Additional
In
1NaGo
the
to
Show
the
Folders
Filing
page
column,
and
click
Save
New
button.
tab.
Required
Components
coluna
Show
Folders,
clique
no the
boto
New.
2 In
the
Show
Folders
column,
click
the
New
button.
1
Go
to
the
Filing
page
and
click
the
Save
tab.
2
the
Show
Folders
column,
click
the
New
button.
3 The
Type
2 In
Infollowing
the
a name
Showfor
Folders
the Show
column,
Folder
and
the
press
NewEnter.
button.
components
mustclick
be
purchased
separately:
3
Digite
um
nome
para
uma
Show
Folder
e
pressione
Enter.
3 Type
a name
for
the Show
Folder
andthe
press
Enter.
2
In
the
Show
Folders
column,
click
New
button.
3
Type
a
name
for
the
Show
Folder
and
press
Enter.
Type Display
a name for
the Show
Folderflat-panel
and pressVGA
Enter.
3 Video
(15-inch
or greater
display
Duplicating
Show
Folders
Duplicando
Show
Folders
3 recommended;
Type a name
for
the
Showminimum
Folder and
press Enter.
1024x768
resolution).
VGA and
Duplicating Show Folders
Duplicating
Show
DVI supported.
Duplicating
Show Folders
Folders
To
duplicate
Show Folders:
Folders:
Para
duplicara Show
Show
Folders
USB keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
ToDuplicating
duplicate
a Show
Folders:
To the
duplicate
a
Folders:
1 In
Show Folders
duplicate
a Show
Show column,
Folders: click a Show Folder name to se1 To
Nathe
coluna
Show
Folders,
clique
em aum
nome
de Show
1 In
Show
Folders
column,
click
Show
Folder
nameFolder
to se-para
lect
the
folder.
To
duplicate
a
Show
Folders:
1
the
Show
Folders
column,
click
a
Show
Folder
to
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)name
selecionar
a pasta.
1 In
In
the
Show
Folders
column,
click
a
Show
Folder
name
to seselect the folder.
lect
folder.
lect
the
folder.
2 Click
1 The
Inthe
the
the
Show
Duplicate
Folders
button.
column,
click
a
Show
Folder
name
to
seconnection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
Clique
nofolder.
boto Duplicate.
22 Click
the
Duplicate
button.
lect
the
aClick
Digital Snake
cable.
2
Duplicate
button.
2 folder
Click the
the
The
andDuplicate
all of thebutton.
Show files it contains are duplicated.
A 2pasta
e todos
osofarquivos
Show
que
ela contm
duplicados.
Click
the
The
folder
andDuplicate
all
thebutton.
Show
files
it contains
areso
duplicated.
The
folder
and all
of
Show
it
duplicated.
The
folder
of the
the folders
Show files
files
it contains
contains are
are
duplicated.
You
can and
also all
duplicate
by right-clicking
a Show
The
folder
and
all
ofchoosing
the folders
Show
files
it contains
are
duplicated.
You
can
also
duplicate
by right-clicking
a oShow
Voc
tambm
duplicar
pastas
clicando
com
boto direito
Folder
name
and
Duplicate.
Optional
Components
You
can
also
duplicate
folders
by
a Show
You
can
also
duplicate
folders
by eright-clicking
right-clicking
Show
sobre
um
nome
de Show
Folder
escolhendo a
Duplicate.
Folder
name
and
choosing
Duplicate.
Folder
name
and
choosing
Duplicate.
Folder
name
and
choosing
Duplicate.
You
can
also
duplicate
folders
by
right-clicking
a
The following
components
Renaming
Show
Folders are optional, and must beShow
Folder
name
and
choosing Duplicate.
Renomeando
Show
Folders
Renaming
Show Folders
Renaming
Renaming Show
Show Folders
Folders
To rename
Show
Folder:
USB aflash
disk
Para
renomear
uma
Show
Folder:
Renaming
Show
Folders
To
rename
a Show
Folder:
transfer
of
Show
data; 512
MBaor
larger
recommended)
To
rename
a
Show
1 In
Show
column,
click
Show
Folder
name to seTo the
rename
a Folders
Show Folder:
Folder:
11In
the
Show
Folders
column,
click
a
Show
Folder
name
to se-para
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
Na
coluna
Show
Folders,
clique
um
nome
de
Show
Folder
lect
the
folder.
ToIn
rename
a Show
Folder:
1
Show
Folders
1 In the
the
Show
Folders column,
column, click
click a
a Show
Show Folder
Folder name
name to
to seselect
theHeadphones
folder.
selecionar
a pasta.
with
1/4-inch
jack
lect
the
folder.
lect
2 Click
1 Inthe
the
thefolder.
Show
Rename
Folders
button.
column, click a Show Folder name to se Dynamic
or condenser
22 Click
the
Rename
button. microphone and XLR mic cable
lect
the
folder.
no
boto
Rename.
2Clique
Click
the
Rename
button.
2
Click
the
Rename
button.
(forcan
Talkback)
You
also
rename
Show Folders by right-clicking a Show
2 Click
the
Rename
button.
You
can
also
rename
Show
Folders by
right-clicking
a Show
name
and
choosing
Rename,
orby
byright-clicking
double-clicking
a
Folder
Footswitches
(up
to
2)
Voccan
pode
tambm
renomear
uma
Show
Folders
clicando
You
also
rename
Show
Folders
a
You
can
also
rename
Show
Folders
a Show
Show
Folder
name
and
choosing
Rename,
orby
byright-clicking
double-clicking
a
Show
Folder
name.
com
o
boto
direito
sobre
um
nome
de
Show
Folder
e
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
Folder
name
and
choosing
by
double-clicking
a
Folder
name
and
choosing
Rename,
orright-clicking
by
double-clicking
a
You
can
also
rename
Show Rename,
Folders
byor
a Show
Show
Folder
name.
escolhendo
Rename,
ou
clicando
duas
vezes
sobre
um
Show
Folder
name.
BNC
cables
(for
Word clock
between
the a
Show
Folder
name.
Folder
name
and
choosing
or bypress
double-clicking
3 Type
anome
new
name
forconnecting
the ShowRename,
Folder
and
Enter.
de
Show
Folder.
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
3 Type Show
a newFolder
namename.
for the Show Folder and press Enter.
3
3 Type
Type a
a new
new name
name for
for the
the Show
Show Folder
Folder and
and press
press Enter.
Enter.
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
connecting
GPI devices)
3
Digite
um
novo
nome
para(for
a Show
Folder etopressione
Enter.
Deleting
Show
Folders
3 Type a new name for the Show Folder and press Enter.
Deleting Show Folders

Deleting
Show
Folders
Deleting
Show
Folders
When
you delete
a Show
Folder, all Show files contained in
Apagando
Show
Folders
When
you
delete
a
Show
Folder, all Show files contained in
Deleting
Show
that
folder
aredelete
also deleted.
When
you
aFolders
Show Folder, all Show files contained in
When
you
delete
a Show
Folder,Folder,
all Show
filesoscontained
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Quando
voc
apaga
uma
Show
todos
aqruivos in
Show
that
folder
are
also
deleted.
that
folder
are
also
deleted.
that
folder
are
also
deleted.
When
you
delete
a
Show
Folder,
all
Show
files
contained
in
contidos
nela
tambm
so
apagados.
ToThe
delete a Showoptions
Folder:can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
thatfollowing
folder are also deleted.
ToFor
delete
a Show
Folder:
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
options,
visit
theto
Avid
To
delete
a
Show
Folder:
1Para
In
Show
Folders
column,
clickand
a Show
Folder
name
seapagar
Show
Folder:
To the
delete
auma
Show
Folder:
website
(www.avid.com).
1
In
the
Show
Folders
column,
click
a
Show
Folder
name
to
select
the
folder.
To
delete
a
Show
Folder:
1 In
In the
the Show
Show Folders
Folders column,
column, click
click a
a Show
Show Folder
Folder name
name to
to sese1
lect
the
folder.
1 lect
Na coluna
Show Folders, clique um nome de Show Folder para
lect
the
folder.
2selecionar
Click
1 Inthe
the
thefolder.
Show
Delete
Folders
button.
column,
click
a
Show
Folder
name
to
sea pasta.
Rack
Options
2 Mix
Click
thefolder.
Delete
button.
lect
the
2
the
Delete
2 Click
Click
thealso
Delete button.
button.
You no
can
2 Clique
boto right-click
Delete. a Show Folder name and choose
2 Click
the
Delete
button.
You
can
also
right-click
a Show Folder name and choose
to
delete
the
folder.
I/ODelete
Options
You
can
also
right-click
a
You to
can
also the
right-click
a Show
Show Folder
Folder name
name and
and choose
choose
Delete
delete
folder.
Voc
pode
tambm
clicar
com
o
boto
direito
em
um nome
Delete
to
delete
the
folder.
Delete
to
delete
the
folder.
You
can
also
right-click
a
Show
Folder
name
and
choose
de Show Folder e escolher Delete para apagar a pasta.
Delete
delete the folder.
mic/line
leveltoinputs
Chapter 20: Shows and File Management 171
20: provides
Shows and16File
Management
171
AO16 Analog Output Chapter
Card that
analog
line level
Chapter
Chapter 20:
20: Shows
Shows and
and File
File Management
Management 171
171
outputs

Captulo 20: Gerenciamento de Arquivos e Shows
171
Show Show
Files
Arquivos
Show Files
Show
Files
Show
Files
Show
Files
Creating
and Saving
Show
Criando
e
Salvando
Arquivos
ShowFiles
Show
Files
Creating
and Saving Show Files
Renaming Show Files

Renomeando
Arquivos
Shows
Renaming Show
Files
Renaming
Show
Files
Renaming
Show
Files
Renaming
Showfile:
Files
ToPara
rename
a Show
renomear
um arquivo
Renaming
Show
FilesShow:
To rename a Show
file:
file
the
current
state
of
the
system.
file
captures
the
current
state
of
system.
4
3
Incaptures
the
a name
Shows
column,
the
Show
click
file
and
New
press
button.
Enter. The new Show
fileType
captures
thefor
current
state
of the
the
system.
4
Type
a
name
for
the
Show
file
and
press Enter.
file
captures
the
current
state
of
the
system.
4 Digite
um
nome
para
o
arquivo
Show
e
pressione
Enter.
4 Type
a name
for
the
Show
file
press
Enter.
4 Double-click
Type
a name
for
the
Show
file
press
Enter.
5
forand
the
Show
and type any
4 Type a name in
forthe
theNotes
Showfield
file and
and
press
Enter.
5
in
the
Notes
field
forShow.
the
Show
and type any
want
to
save
with
4 Double-click
Type
ayou
name
for
the
Show
filethe
and
press
Enter.
5 Double-click
in
Notes
field
for
the
Show
any
5comments
duas
vezes
nothe
campo
Notes
para
oShow
Show
e and
digitetype
qualquer
5Clique
Double-click
in
the
field
for
the
5 Double-click
in want
the Notes
Notes
field
for the
the Show.
Show and
and type
type any
any
comments you
to save
with
comentrio
que
deseja
salvar
com
o
Show.
comments
you
want
to
save
with
the
Show.
comments
you
want
to
save
with
the
Show.
5 Double-click
inthe
the
Notes
field
forShow.
thein
Show
and type
any
Information
about
file
isthe
shown
the Info
area of
comments
you
want
toShow
save
with
To the
delete
a Show
file: click a Show file name to select it.
1
In
Shows
column,
To
To delete
delete a
a Show
Show file:
file:
In
the
Shows
column,
click
a Show
file name
select
it.
11ToNa
coluna
Shows,
clique um
nome
de arquivo
Show to
para
selecion-lo.
delete
a Show
file:
1 In
the
Shows
column,
click
a Delete
Show
file
name to
select it.
1
In
the
Shows
column,
click
athe
Show
file
name
2
1 In the Shows column, click a
Show
filebutton.
name to
to select
select it.
it.
2
In
the
Shows
column,
click
Delete
1 Na
In coluna
the Shows
column,
click
athe
Show
filebutton.
name to select it.
Shows,
clique
nothe
boto
Delete.
2 In
the
Shows
column,
click
the
Delete
button.
2 2
In
the
column,
click
button.
2 In the
Shows
column,
click
the Delete
Delete
button.
You Shows
can also
right-click
a Show
file name
and choose
2 In
the
column,
the Delete
button.
You Shows
can
also
right-click
a Show
file name
and choose
Delete
to
delete
the
file. click
To rename a Show file:
1
the
Shows
column,
To In
To
rename
rename
a
a Show
file:
file: click a Show file name to select it.
Creating
and
Saving
Show
Creating
and
Saving
Show
When
you
create
aum
newnovo
Show
file,Files
itFiles
captures
thecaptura
currentostate
a Show
Show
file:
Creating
and
Show
Files
Quando
voc
criaSaving
arquivo
Show, ele
status To11rename
Na
coluna
Shows,
clique um
nome
de arquivo
Show to
para
selecion-lo.
In
the Shows
column,
a Show
file name
select
it.
To
rename
a
Show
file: click
When
you
create
a
new
Show
file,
it
captures
the
current
state
and
Saving
Show
Files
1 In the
Shows column,
click
a Rename
Show
file
name
to select
it.
of Creating
the system.
Show
files
are
automatically
saved
when
they
1 In
Show
file
to
button.
corrente
do
sistema.
Show
so
automaticamente
salvos
When
you
create
aArquivos
new
Show
file,
it captures
the
current
state 2
1 In the
the Shows
Shows column,
column, click
click a
athe
Show
file name
name
to select
select it.
it.
When
you
create
a
new
Show
file,
it
captures
the
current
state
When
you
create
a new files
Show
file,
it captures the
current
state
the
system.
Show
are
automatically
saved
when
they
2
In
the
Shows
column,
click
the
Rename
button.
areof
created
or
overwritten.
1
In
the
Shows
column,
click
a
Show
file
name
to
select
it.
quando
criados
ou
sobrescritos.
2
Na
coluna
Shows,
clique
no
boto
Rename.
of
the
system.
Show
files
are
automatically
saved
when
they
of
the
system.
Show
are
automatically
saved
when
they
2 In
the Shows
column,
click
the Rename
button.
you create
afiles
new
Show
file, it captures
the
current
state 2 In
the
column,
click
the
button.
of When
the created
system.
Show
files
are
automatically
saved
when
they
are
or
overwritten.
2 In the
Shows
column,
click
the Rename
Rename
button.
You Shows
can also
right-click
a Show
file name
and choose
are
created
overwritten.
are
or or
overwritten.
ofcreated
the
system.
Show files are automatically saved when they
2 In
the
Shows
column,
click
the
Rename
button.
You
can
also
right-click
a Show
Show
file
name
and
choose
are
created
overwritten.
Rename,
or
double-click
the
file
to
rename
Para
criar um
novo
arquivo
Voc
pode
tambm
clicar
com
o name
boto
direito
em um nome
To create
a or
new
Show
file:Show:
You
can
also
right-click
a Show
file
name
and
choose
You
can
also
right-click
a
Show
file
name
and
choose
are created or overwritten.
You
can
also
right-click
a
Show
file
name
and
choose
Rename,
or
double-click
the
Show
file
name
to
rename
de
arquivo
Show
e
escolher
Rename,
ou
clicar
duas vezes no
To create a new Show file:
the file.
Rename,
Rename,
or
double-click
or double-click
the
Show
Show
file
name
name
to
rename
to choose
rename
To
create
aFiling
new
Show
file: click the Save tab.
You
can
also
right-click
Show
filefile
name
and
to the
and
create
a
Show
file:
Rename,
ordo
double-click
theathe
Show
file
name
rename
the
file.
11To
VGo
pgina
Filing
epage
clique
nome
arquivo
Show
para
renomear
oto
arquivo.
To
create
a new
new
Show
file: na aba Save.
the
file.
1
Go
to
the
Filing
page
and
click
the
Save
tab.
the
file.
Rename,
or
double-click
the
Show
file
name
to
rename
To Go
create
aFiling
new
Show
file:
3 Type
new name for the Show file and press Enter.
theafile.
1
to
the
Filing
page
and click
the
Save
tab.
1
to
page
and
the
tab.
2 Go
In
the
Show
Folders
select
the
Show
1
Go
to the
the
Filing
pagecolumn,
and click
click
the Save
Save
tab. folder where
the
file.
3
Type
a
new
name
for
the
Show
file
and
press
Enter.
2you
Na
coluna
Show
Folders,
selecione
a pasta
Show onde where
deseja
3 Digite um novo nome para o arquivo Show e pressione Enter.
2
In
Show
Folders
column,
select
the Show
save
the page
Show.
1 want
Gothe
totothe
Filing
and click
the Save
tab. folder
3 Type
a new
name
Show
and
press
Enter.
Type
a new
name
forfor
thethe
Show
filefile
and
press
Enter.
2 In
the
Show
Folders
column,
select
Show
folder
where 3
2 In
the
Show
Folders
column,
select
thethe
Show
folder
where
3 Type a new name for the Show file and press Enter.
salvar
o want
Show.
2 In
the
Show
you
to Folders
save thecolumn,
Show. select the Show folder where
Deleting
Show
Filesfor the Show file and press Enter.
3
Type
a
new
name
you
want
to
save
the Show.
you
to
save
the
Apagando
Show
3 In
2 want
In
the
the
Shows
column,
Folders
click
column,
the New
select
button.
the Show
The folder
new Show
where
DeletingArquivos
Show Files
you
want
toShow
save
the Show.
Show.
Deleting
Show
Files
Show
Files
3 captures
In
the Shows
column,
click
the
New
new Show
3file
Na
coluna
Shows,
clique
no
boto
New.button.
O novoThe
arquivo
Show Deleting
you
want
to
the
save
current
the
Show.
state
of
the
system.
Deleting
Show
Files
3 In
Shows
column,
click
the New
button.
The
new
Show To delete a Show file:
3 In
theothe
Shows
column,
click
the
button.
The
new
Show
captura
status the
atual
do sistema.
Para
apagar Show
um arquivo
Show:
3 In
Shows
column,
click
theofNew
New
filethe
captures
current
state
the button.
system.The new Show
Deleting
Files
To delete a Show file:
Voc
pode
tambm
com
o name
boto
direito
no nome de
You
can
also
right-click
a Show
file
and
choose
You
can
also
right-click
aclicar
Show
name
and
choose
about
the
file isthe
shown
in the Info area of
comments
you
want
toShow
save with
Show.
theInformation
Filing page.
You
can arquivo
also
right-click
Show file
file
namepara
andapagar
choose o arquivo.
Delete
to delete
the file.
Information
about
the
Show
file
isapresentadas
shown
in
the
Info
area
of
Informaes
sobre
o the
arquivo
Show
so
na
re
Info
da
um
Show
e aescolher
Delete
Information
about
Show
file
is
shown
in
the
Info
area
of
Delete
to
delete
the
file.
Delete
to
delete
the
file.
Information
about
the
Show
file
is
shown
in
the
Info
area
of
You
can
also
right-click
a
Show
file
name
and
choose
the Filing page.
Delete to delete the file.
pgina
Filing.
the
Filing page.
the
Filing
about
the Show file
is shown
in the
area of
theInformation
Filing
page.
Showpage.
files are
automatically
saved
when they
areInfo
created;
Delete to delete the file.
thenoFiling
page.
Loading Shows
Show
files
are automatically
saved
when they are created;
further
action
is
required
to
save
them.
Arquivos
so automaticamente
salvos
quando
Show
filesShows
are
automatically
saved
when
they
are created;
Show
files
automatically
saved
when
they
Loading
Shows
Carregando
Shows
Show
files are
areaction
automatically
saved
when
they are
are created;
created;
no further
is required
to save
them.
Loading
Shows
Loading
criados;
nenhuma
outra
ao
necessria
para
salv-los.
You
can load Shows
Show
files using the Load tab of the Filing page.
no
further
action
is
required
to
save
them.
no
further
action
is
required
to
save
them.
Loading
Shows
Show
files
are
automatically
saved
when
they
are
created;
no further
action isanrequired
save them.
To update
or overwrite
existingtoShow
file:
You
can
load
Show
files using
theutilizando
Load tab a
ofaba
the Load
Filingnapage.
Loading
Shows
Voc
pode
carregar
arquivos
Show
pgina
no further
action isanrequired
save them.
To update
or overwrite
existingtoShow
file:
You
can
load
files
using
Load tab
of
the Filing
page.
You
can
load
files
thethe
Load
the
page.
Shows
cannot
beShow
loaded
onto
the
destination
system
Para
atualizar
ou
sobrescrever
um arquivo
Show
You
can
load Show
Show
files using
using
Load tab
tab of
of VENUE
the Filing
Filing
page.
To
update
or
overwrite
an
existing
Show
file:existente:
In
the
Shows
column,
right-click
the
Show
file name you
To
update
or
overwrite
an
existing
Show
file:
Filing.
To update or overwrite an existing Show file:
In
Shows
column,
the
Show
name you
want
tothe
overwrite,
and choose
Overwrite
from
thefile
pop-up
To
update
or overwrite
an right-click
existing
Show
file:
the
Shows
column,
right-click
the
Show
file
name
you
In
In
the
Shows
column,
right-click
the
Show
file
name
menu.
Na
coluna
Shows,
clique
com
boto
no
doyou
arquivo
In
the
Shows
column,
right-click
thedireito
file
name
you
want
to
overwrite,
andof
choose
Overwrite
from
the
pop-up
The
current
state
theosystem
isShow
saved
tonome
the
selected
want
to
overwrite,
and
choose
Overwrite
from
the
pop-up
want
to
overwrite,
and
choose
Overwrite
from
the
pop-up
In
the
Shows
column,
right-click
the
Show
file
name
you
Show
que
deseja
sobrescrever
escolha
Overwrite
no
menu
pop-up.
want
to
overwrite,
andstate
choose
Overwrite
from
the
pop-up
menu.
The current
ofethe
system
is saved
to
the selected
Show
file.
menu.
The
current
state
of
the
system
is from
saved
to
the
selected
The
current
state
of
the
system
is
saved
to
the
selected
Omenu.
status
atual
do
sistema
salvo
para
o
arquivo
Show
selecionado.
want
to
overwrite,
and
choose
Overwrite
the
pop-up
menu.
ShowThe
file.current state of the system is saved to the selected
file.
Show
Show
file.
menu.
Show
file.The current state of the system is saved to the selected
Show file.
Shows
cannot
be loaded
ontodevice;
the destination
You can
load
Show
files
using
Load
tabmust
of VENUE
the
Filing
page.
directly
from
a portable
storage
they
first
besystem
Shows
cannot
be loaded
onto
the
destination
VENUE
system
Shows
cannot
be
onto
the
destination
VENUE
system
Shows
cannot
bea loaded
loaded
onto
the
destination
VENUE
system
directly
from
portable
storage
device;
they
must
first
be
transferred
to
the
system
before
loading.
Shows
no
podem
serstorage
carregados
diretamente
para
obesistema
directly
from
abe
portable
storage
device;
they must
firstsystem
directly
from
a
device;
they
first
Shows
cannot
loaded
onto
the
destination
directly
from
atoportable
portable
device;
they must
mustVENUE
first be
be
transferred
thede
system
before
loading.
VENUE
de destino
umstorage
dispositivo
de armazenamento
porttil; eles
transferred
to
the
system
before
loading.
transferred
toathe
system
before
loading.
directly
from
a portable
storage
device; they
must first
be
transferred
the
system
before
loading.
Loading
show
automatically
replaces
the de
current
console
devem
sertotransferidos
para
o sistema
antes
serem
carregados.
transferred
to
the
system
before
loading.
Loading
a
show
automatically
replaces
the
current
console
settings with those of the loaded show, and may interrupt
Loading
Loading
a
a show
automatically
automatically
replaces
replaces
the
current
current
console
console
Loading
a show
show
automatically
replaces
thethe
current
settings
withum
those
of the
loaded
show,
and
mayconsole
interrupt
Carregar
Show
automaticamente
substitui
os ajustes
audio
throughput.
settings
settings
with
with
those
those
of
the
of
the
loaded
loaded
show,
show,
and
and
may
may
interrupt
interrupt
Loading
a
show
automatically
replaces
the
current
console
settings
with
those
of the loaded
and may
interrupt
audio
throughput.
atuais
da
console
pelos show,
do Show
carregado,
e pode
audio
throughput.
audio
throughput.
settings
with those
of de
theudio.
loaded show, and may interrupt
audio
throughput.
interromper
o fluxo
audio throughput.
Clicando
com o boto
direito
um nome
de Shows
arquivo Show
na coluna Shows
Right-clicking
a Show
fileemname
in the
column
Right-clicking a Show file name in the Shows column

Right-clicking a Show file name in the Shows column
Right-clicking
Right-clicking
a Show
a Show
filefile
name
name
in the
in the
Shows
Shows
column
column
Duplicating
Show
Files
Right-clickingArquivos
a Show
file
name in the Shows column
Duplicando
Show
Right-clicking
a Show
file Files
name in the Shows column
Duplicating
Show
Show
Files
Duplicating
Duplicating
Show
Files
Duplicating
Showfile:
Files
To duplicate a Show
Duplicating
Show
Files
Para
duplicar um
arquivo
Show:
To duplicate
a Show
file:
To duplicate a Show file:
In
the
Shows
click
Show de
fileum
name
to select
it. para
To
duplicate
duplicate
a
Show
acolumn,
Show
file:
file:
11To
coluna
clique
no anome
arquivo
Show
ToNa
duplicate
aShows,
Show
file:
1
In
the
Shows
column,
click
a
Show
file
name
to
select
it.
To In
duplicate
acolumn,
Show
file:
selecion-lo.
1
the
Shows
column,
click
a Duplicate
Show
name
select
1
the
Shows
click
a
Show
filefile
name
to to
select
it. it.
2 In
the
button.
1 In the Shows column, click a Show file name to select it.
2
Shows column,
column, click
click a
the
Duplicate
button.
1 In
In the
the
Shows
Show
file name
to select it.
2 In
the Shows,
Shows
column,
the
Duplicate
button.
In
the
column,
the
Duplicate
222Na
clique click
noclick
boto
Incoluna
the
Shows
column,
click
the Duplicate.
Duplicate
button.
You Shows
can also
right-click
a Show
file namebutton.
and choose
2 In
the
column,
click
the Duplicate
You Shows
cantoalso
right-click
a Show
file namebutton.
and choose
Duplicate
duplicate
the
file.
Show Folders and Show files in the Load tab of the Filing Page
Show
e arquivos
Show
na aba
Load
da pgina
ShowFolders
Folders
and Show
files
in the
Load
tab ofFiling
the Filing Page
Show
Show
files
in the
Load
of the
Filing
Page
Show
Folders
andand
Show
files
in the
Load
tabtab
of the
Filing
Page
To
load
aFolders
Show
Show
Folders
andfile:
Show files in the Load tab of the Filing Page
To
load
a Show
Para
carregar
umfile:
arquivo
Show
Folders
and
Show
filesShow:
in the Load tab of the Filing Page
To load
a Show
1
Go
to the
Filingfile:
page and click the Load tab.
To
To load
load a
a Show
Show file:
file:
Go
to
the
Filing
page
andnaclick
Load tab.
111ToV
pgina
Filing
e clique
abathe
Load.
load
athe
Show
file:
Go
to
Filing
page
and click
click
the
Load
tab. name to se1
Go
to
the
page
and
Load
2
Folders
column,
Folder
1 In
Gothe
to Show
the Filing
Filing
page
and click
click the
thea Show
Load tab.
tab.
2
In
the
Show
Folders
column,
click
a
Show
Folder
name
to select
folder.
Show
files
the
folder
are tab.
displayed
in
the
Gothe
to Show
the Any
Filing
page
andin
click
the
Load
212 the
Na
coluna
Show
Folders,
clique
uma Show
nome
de Show
Folder
para
In
Folders
column,
click
Folder
name
to
se2 In
the
Show
Folders
column,
click
a
Show
Folder
name
to
se2
In
the
Show
Folders
column,
click
a
Show
Folder
name
to
seselecionar
a
pasta.
Qualquer
arquivo
Show
na
pasta
apresentado
lect
the
folder.
Any
Show
files
in
the
folder
are
displayed
in
the
Shows
column.
lect
the
folder.
Any
Show
files the
inclick
the
folder
are
displayed
intothe
lect
folder.
Any
Show
files
folder
are
in
2 the
In
the
Show
Folders
a Show
Folder
name
sena
coluna
Shows.
lect
the
folder.
Any
Show column,
files in
in the
folder
are displayed
displayed
in the
the
can
also
right-click
acom
Show
file
name
and
choose
You
You
can
also
right-click
a
Show
name
and
choose
Voc
pode
clicar
ofile
boto
direito
nome de um
You
can
alsotambm
right-click
athe
Show
file
name
and no
choose
Duplicate
to
duplicate
file.
Duplicate
to eduplicate
the
file. file
Duplicate
to
duplicate
the
file.
arquivo
Show
escolher
Duplicate
para
duplicar
o arquivo.
You
can
also
right-click
a
Show
name
and
choose
Shows column.
Duplicate to duplicate the file.
Shows
column.
Shows
column.
lectthe
the
folder.column,
Any Show
files
in the file
folder
are to
displayed
3 In
Shows
click
a Show
name
select it.in the
Duplicate to duplicate the file.
Shows
column.
33 Na
Shows,
clique um
nome
de arquivo
Show to
para
selecion-lo.
Incoluna
the
Shows
column,
click
a Show
file name
select
it.
Shows
column.
3 In
click
a Show
file
name
to
select
it.
3
the
the
Shows
Shows
column,
click
a
Show
file
name
to
select
it.
4 In
Click
the
Loadcolumn,
button.
3
In
the
Shows
column,
click
a
Show
file
name
to
select
it.
44 Clique
no
boto
Load.
Click
the
Load
button.
3 In the Shows column, click a Show file name to select it.
4 Click
Load
button.
4 Click
thethe
Load
button.
4 Click the Load button.
172VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Guide
172
Guide
172
GuiaProfile
VENUE
Profile
172
VENUE
Profile
Guide
tem configuration, routing, and control settings with those

contained in the new file.
The system loads the new Show file, replacing the current sysOSystem
sistema
carrega
o novo
arquivo
Show,
substituindo
configuraes,
The
loads
the
newand
Show
file,
replacing
the
current
sysConfigurations
Loading
Shows
tem system
configuration,
routing,
and
control
settings
with
those
roteamentos
e
ajustes
de
controle
atuais
do
sistema
com
as
tem
configuration,
routing,
and
control
settings
with
those
containedarquivo
in the Show.
new file.
existentes
Show filesno
include VENUE
system configuration settings (such
contained in the new file.
as the type of console (VENUE Profile or VENUE D-Show Main
Confirguraes
de
e Carregamento
de Number
Shows
and
Loading
Shows
andSystem
Sidecars);Configurations
theSistema
number
of Mix
Engines;
of Input
System Configurations and Loading Shows
Channels, FX Returns, and EQs; Aux and Group Bus configuShow
files include
configuration
settings
(such
Arquivo
Shows
incluemVENUE
ajustes system
de configurao
do sistema
VENUE
rations),
and plug-in
status.
Show
VENUE
system
configuration
settings
(such
as the
type
of console
(VENUE
Profile
VENUE
D-Show
Main
(como
tipofiles
da include
console
(VENUE
Profile
ou or
VENUE
D-Show
Main
e
as
the
type
of
console
(VENUE
Profile
or
VENUE
D-Show
Main
Sidecars);
o nmero
denumber
Mixthe
Engines;
o Engines;
nmero
de
Input Channels,
Ifand
a Show
file includes
same
system
configuration
Sidecars);
the
of Mix
Number
ofsetInput
and
Sidecars);
the number
Mix
Engines;
Number
of
Input
FX Returns
e EQs;
configuraes
de
bus
Aux
e Group
Group),
e status
de
tings
as the
current
configuration,
the
configuration
inforChannels,
FX
Returns,
andof
EQs;
Aux
and
Bus
configuplug-ins.
Channels,
FX
Returns,
and
EQs;
Aux
and
Group
Bus
configumation
appears
in bluestatus.
text in the Info area.
rations),
and plug-in
Stage
Se um arquivo
Show inclui
os mesmos ajustes de configurao
Rack
Features
rations),
and plug-in
status.
Ifde
aIfShow
file file
differs
the
configuration,
but can
a
Show
thecurrent
same system
configuration
setsistema
queincludes
afrom
configurao
atual,
as
informaes
de
configurao
If aRacks
Show
file
includes
the
same
system
configuration
setbe
loaded
the
system,
the
relevant
configuration
changes
Stage
are
used
with
anazul
FOH
provide
all inforstage
tings
ason
the
current
configuration,
theand
configuration
aparecem
em
naRack,
rea
Info.
theVENUE
current
configuration,
the
configuration
inforinasorange
text
in
theda
Info
area.
the
file
isser
audio
I/O
for
Profile
systems.
Up to
twoShow
Stagepode
Racks
mation
appears
in
blue
text
in
the When
Info
area.
appear
Setings
o arquivo
Show
difere
configurao
atual,
mas
mation
appears
in
blue
text
in
the
Info
area.
carregado
sistema,
as alteraes
relevantes
de total
configurao
loaded,
the no
system
restarts
insupporting
the new
configuration.
can
be used
simultaneously,
up to 96
inputs.
If a Show file differs from the current configuration, but can
aparecem
em laranja
na rea
Info.
Quando
o arquivo Show
aloaded
Show
differs
from
the
current
configuration,
but
IfaIf
Show
filefile
differs
from
thethe
current
configuration
andchanges
can-can
be
on
the
system,
relevant
configuration
carregado,
o
sistema
reinicia
na
nova
configurao.
Audio
I/O on
be
loaded
the
system,
the
relevant
changes
be
on
the
system
in
its entirety,
the the
configurain orange
text
in da
the
Info
area.configuration
When
Show
file
is
not
Seappear
umloaded
arquivo
Show
difere
configurao
atual
e no
pode
ser
appear
in
orange
text
in
the
Info
area.
When
the
Show
file is
loaded,
48 inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic
preamps
and
tion
information
in
in the
Info
area.
the
restarts
in text
the
new
configuration.
carregado
parasystem
oappears
sistema
emred
sua
totalidade,
as informaes
de
loaded,
theaparecem
system
restarts
in the new
configuration.
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
em vermelho
na
rea
Info.
Plug-in
statusfile
is differs
reviewed:
configurao
If a Show
from
the current
configuration
and can Onot
status
de
plug-ins
revisado:
analog
output
channels;
expandable
up
to
48
analog
or
If
a8 Show
file
differs
from
the
current
configuration
and canbe
loaded
on
the
system
in
its
entirety,
the
configurathat
have
been
removed(desinstalados)
(uninstalled) no
longer
ap Plug-ins
Plug-ins
que
foram
removidos
no
aparecem
digital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
not
be
loaded
on
the
system
in
its
entirety,
the
configuration
information
appears in red text in the Info area.
pear
in menus
and
lists.
mais
menus
e listas.
tionem
information
appears in red text in the Info area.
Verses
Plug-in
status
is reviewed:
Plug-in
de
plug-ins
so
cehacadas
para compatibilidade
com
versions
are
checked
for
with the curSynchronization
and
Control
I/Ocompatibility
o Plug-in
status
is reviewed:
sistema
atual.
rent
system.that have been removed (uninstalled) no longer ap Plug-ins
Plug-ins
that have
(uninstalled) no longer appear
in menus
andbeen
lists.removed
applicable)
connection
to a VENUE
FOH Rack.
Para
mais
informaes
sobre
gerenciamento
plug-ins,
For
information
on plug-in
management,
seede
Manpearmore
in menus
and lists.
veja Gerenciando
Sistema
na pgina
153.
Plug-in
versions arePlug-Ins
checkednofor
compatibility
with
the curaging Plug-Ins on the System on page 153.
Plug-in
versions are checked for compatibility with the current system.
Se
configurao
Show
muito
grande
para o system,
sistemamix
atual,
rent
system.
If auma
Show
configuration
is too
large for
the current
System
Components
elementos
demore
mixagem
so perdidas
na seguinte
ordem:see ManFor
information
on
plug-in
management,
elements are dropped in the following order:
For
more
information
on plug-in
see Managing
Plug-Ins
on the System
onmanagement,
page 153.
11Plug-Ins
so
desativados
aging
Plug-Ins
on the System on page 153.
Plug-Ins
are
deactivated
Included Components
If a Show configuration is too large for the current system, mix
2
Graphics
EQs
are
dropped
If
aVENUE
Show
configuration
too
large the
for the
current system, mix
2 Graphics
EQs
so
perdidos
All
Profile
systems
include
following:
elements
are
dropped
inisthe
following
order:
elements are dropped in the following order:
3 Input
Channels
are dropped
VENUE
Profile
console
1 Plug-Ins
are
deactivated
3 Input
Channels
so
perdidos
1 Plug-Ins
deactivated
Two (2)are
IEC
power cables
2 Graphics EQs are dropped
MonitorEQs
mount
2 Graphics
are dropped
3 Input
Channels
are(trackball
dropped not included)
Trackball
mount
3 Input Channels are dropped
VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE Profile Guide
Preset files are used to store, recall and transfer factory or

user-defined presets. Preset files are grouped in the following
Working
with Presets
types
of Preset Folders:
Working with
Trabalhando
com Presets
Presets
Preset4-band
files are
used
to store,
recall EQ,
and Compressor/Limtransfer factory or
Built-in
EQ,
31-band
Graphic
Preset
files
are
used
toPreset
store,para
recall
and
transfer
factory
or
user-defined
presets.
files
are
grouped
in the
following
Arquivos
Preset
so
usados
armazenar,
e transferir
iter, Expander/Gate, and Input Channel Presetscarregar
user-defined
presets.
Preset
files
are
grouped
in
the
following
presets
fbrica
ou definidos pelo usurio. Arquivos Preset so
types ofdePreset
Folders:
typesPlug-ins
of Preset
Folders:
agrupados
nosSettings
seguintes
tipos de Preset Folders:
Plug-In
Files
Built-in 4-band EQ, 31-band Graphic EQ, Compressor/LimBuilt-in
4-band
EQ,
31-band
Graphic
EQ,
Compressor/LimScope
Settings
for
Recall
Safe
configurations
Built-in
Presets
de
4-band
EQ,
31-band
Graphic
EQ, Compressou/
iter,Sets
Expander/Gate,
and Input
Channel
Presets
iter,
Expander/Gate,
and
Input
Channel
Presets
Limiter, Expander/Gate e Input Channel
Plug-In Plug-ins Settings Files
Plug-InArquivos
Plug-insde
Settings
Preset
Folders
Plug-In
ajustesFiles
de plug-ins
Scope Sets Settings
for Recall
Safe configurations
Additional
Required
Components
Preset
Folders
files.Safe
Each
of the built-in procesScope
Sets contain
Settings Preset
for Recall
configurations
Scope Sets Ajustes para configuraes Recall Safe
sors
(Compressor/Limiter,
Expander/Gate,
4-bandseparately:
EQ,
The
following components
must be purchased
Preset
Folders
31-band
Graphic
EQ)
and
each
plug-in
has
its
own
Factory
DePreset
Folders
Preset
Video
Display
Folders
faults folder. Additional folders are provided for Scope Sets.
recommended;
1024x768
VGA
and
Preset
Folders contain
Presetminimum
files. Eachresolution).
of the built-in
procesPreset
Folders
Preset.
Cada
um
dos
processadores
Preset
Folderscontem
containarquivos
Preset
files.
Each
of the
built-in
procesDVI
supported.
sors
Expander/Gate,
4-band
EQ,
You
can create
additional Preset Folders
for each processor
or 31embutidos
Expander/Gate,
4-band
sors
Expander/Gate,
4-band
EQ, EQ,
31-band
Graphic
EQ)
and each
plug-in
hasfolders
its
own
Factory
Deplug-in
and
store
new
Presets
in
them.
These
can
then
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
band
Graphic
EQ) eEQ)
cada
possui has
sua its
prpria
pasta Factory
31-band
Graphic
andplug-in
each plug-in
own
Factory
Defaults
folder.
Additional
folders
are
provided
for
Scope
Sets.
beDefaults.
transferred
to a adicionais
portable storage
device for
transfer
toSets.
other
Pastas
so oferecidas
para
Scope
faults folder.
Additional folders
are provided
for
Scope
Sets.
Digitalsystems.
VENUE
You can create additional Preset Folders for each processor or
Voc
pode
criar Preset
Folders
adicionais
para
cadaRack
processador
You
can
create
additional
Preset
Folders
for
each
processor
or ou
plug-in
The connection
between
FOH
and
Stage
requires
and
store
new
Presets
in Rack
them.
These
folders
can
then
For information
onnovos
saving,
previewing
loading
built-in
plug-in
e and
armazenar
Presets
nelas.and
Essas
pastas
podem
ser
plug-in
store
new
Presets
in
them.
These
folders
can
then
Digital Snake
Thisstorage
cable can
be purchased
directly
beatransferred
to um
acable.
portable
for transferporttil
to other
transferidas
dispositivo
de device
armazenamento
dynamics para
and EQ
presets,
see Chapter
16, Dynamics
and para
be
transferred
a portableby
storage
device for transfer to other
from
Avid
orto
assembled
your preferred
VENUE
systems.
trans
ferncia
outros sistemas
VENUE. vendor.
Chapter
17,para
EQ.
VENUE systems.
For plug-in settings, see Chapter 18, Plug-Ins. For Scope
For
information
on saving,
previewing
loading built-in
Para
informaes
sobre salvar,
reverand
ou carregar
presets de
Sets,
seeinformation
Chapter
21,
Snapshots.
Optional
Components
For
onpresets,
saving,see
previewing
andDynamics
loading built-in
dynamics
and
EQ
Chapter
16,
and
Dynamics e EQ, veja o Captulo 16, Dynamics e o Captulo
Fordynamics
Input Channel
Presets,
seeChapter
5, 16,
Navigating
andand
and
EQ
presets,
see
Chapter
Dynamics
Chapter
17,
EQ.
17, EQ.components are optional, and must be
The following
Selecting
Channels,
Chapter
17,settings,
EQ.
Para
ajustes
de plug-ins,
veja o 18,
Captulo
18, Plug-Ins.
For
plug-in
see Chapter
Plug-Ins.
For Scope
purchased
separately:
For
plug-in
settings,
see
For Scope
Para
Scope
Sets,21,
veja
oChapter
Captulo18,
21,Plug-Ins.
Snapshots.
Sets,
see
Chapter
Snapshots.
USBPreset
flash disk
Creating
Folders
Sets,
see
Chapter
21,
Snapshots.
Para
presets
de Input
Channel,
veja o Captulo
5, Navegando
For
Input
Channel
Presets,
seeChapter
5,
Navigating
and
e Selecionando
For
InputChannels,
ChannelCanais.
Presets, seeChapter 5, Navigating and
Selecting
To create
a new Preset
Folder:
Near-field
monitor
speakers for mix position monitoring
Selecting
Channels,
Criando
Preset
Folders
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
1 Go
to the Filing
pageFolders
and click the
Transfer tab.
Creating
Preset
Creating
Preset
Foldersmicrophone and XLR mic cable
Dynamic
or condenser
nova
Preset
Folder:
2 Para
Clickcriar
the uma
Preset
Folders
icon.
A list of Preset Folders appears
(for Talkback)
To create
a new Preset Folder:
in the
left column.
To create
a new Preset Folder:
Footswitches
toand
2)naclick
11VGo
pgina
Filing (up
epage
clique
aba Transfer.
to the Filing
the Transfer tab.
1 GoMIDI
to the
Filing
page
and
clickexternal
the Transfer
tab.
MIDI
devices)
Clickno
thecone
Preset
Folders
icon. Uma
A listlista
of Preset
Folders
appears
22Clique
Preset
Folders.
de Preset
Folders
surge
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
2 Click
the
Preset Folders icon. A list of Preset Folders the
appears
in
the left
column.
na
coluna
esquerda.
VENUE
in the
left column.

Rack(s) (see next)


Preset Folders icon in the Transfer tab of the Filing page
System Restore CD
3 In the left column, click the New button.
Mix aRack
Options
4 Type
name for
the Preset Folder and press Enter.

Preset Folders icon in the Transfer tab of the Filing page
cone
Preset
Folders
na aba
Transfer
na pgina
Preset
Folders
icon
in the
Transfer
tab ofFiling
the Filing page
The
Preset
is available
in the
Preset window for
3 new
InOptions
the
left Folder
column,
click the New
button.
I/O
Incoluna
the left
column,
the no
New
button.
each
processor
or
plug-in.click
33Na
da
esquerda,
clique
boto
New.
4 Type
a name
for theInput
PresetCard
Folder
and
press Enter.
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
that
provides
16 analog
4 Type a name for the Preset Folder and press Enter.
level
inputs
4mic/line
Digite um
nome
para a Preset Folder e pressione Enter.
The new Preset Folder
is available
in and
the Preset
window for
Chapter
20: Shows
File Management
173
The
new
Preset or
Folder
is available in the Preset window for
each
processor
plug-in.
Carddisponvel
that provides
16 analog
linepara
levelcada
AAO16
novaAnalog
Preset Output
Folder est
na janela
Preset
each processor or plug-in.
outputs
processador
ou plug-in.
Chapter
20:Card
Showsthat
andprovides
File Management
XO16 Analog and Digital
Output
8 analog 173
173
Duplicating
Duplicating Preset
Preset Folders
Folders
Duplicating Preset Folders
Duplicating
Preset
Folders
Duplicating
Preset
Folders
To
duplicate
a
Folder:
Toduplicar
duplicate
a Preset
Preset
Folder:
Para
uma
Preset Folder:
Duplicating
Preset
Folders
Duplicando Preset Folders
To duplicate a Preset Folder:

1
In
the
column,
click
1
the left
left a
click a
a Preset
Preset Folder
Folder name
name to
to select
select it.
it.
To
duplicate
Preset
To In
duplicate
acolumn,
Preset Folder:
Folder:
1ToNa
coluna
Preset
esquerda,
clique
um nome
dename
PresettoFolder
1duplicate
In
the left
column,
click
a Preset
Folder
select para
it.
a
Folder:
Duplicating
Preset
Folders
2
Click
the
Duplicate
button.
1
In
left
column,
click
2
selecion-la.
1 Click
In the
thethe
leftDuplicate
column, button.
click a
a Preset
Preset Folder
Folder name
name to
to select
select it.
it.
1
In
the left
a Preset Folder name to select it.
Duplicating
Presetclick
Folders
2 Click
thecolumn,
Duplicate
button.
2
Click
the
Duplicate
button.
The
folder
all
the
Preset
The
folder
and
all of
of
the
Preset files
files it
it contains
contains are
are duplicated.
duplicated.
2
Click
the
Duplicate
button.
duplicate
aand
Preset
Folder:
2To
Clique
no
Duplicate.
2 Click
theboto
Duplicate
button.
The
folder
and
all
of
the
Preset
files
it
contains
are
duplicated.
To
duplicate
acolumn,
Preset
Folder:
The
folder
and
all right-click
of
the aPreset
Preset
files
itFolder
contains
are
duplicated.
1 In
the
leftcan
click
Preset
Folder
name
to
select
it.
You
also
a
name
and
choose
The
folder
and
all
of
the
files
it
contains
are
duplicated.
You
can
also
right-click
a Preset
Preset
Folder
name
and
choose
AThe
pasta
e
todos
os
arquivos
Preset
que
ela
contm
so
duplicados.
and
all
ofduplicate
the
Preset
files
it contains
are
duplicated.
1 Infolder
theYou
left
column,
click
a
Preset
Folder
name
to
select
it.
Duplicate
to
the
folder.
can
also
right-click
a
Preset
Folder
name
and
choose
to duplicate
folder.
2 Click Duplicate
the Duplicate
button. the
You
can
right-click
a
Folder
You
can also
also
right-clickthe
a Preset
Preset
Folder name
name and
and choose
choose
Duplicate
to
duplicate
folder.
Voc
clicar
com
o boto
direito
nome de
2 Click
the
Duplicate
button.
You
canpode
alsotambm
right-click
athe
Preset
Folder
name
and no
choose
Duplicate
to
duplicate
folder.
Duplicate
toofFolder
duplicate
thefiles
folder.
Renaming
Preset
The
folder
and
all
the Folders
Preset
it contains are duplicated.
Renaming
Preset
Folders
uma
Preset
etheescolher
Duplicate
to duplicate
folder. Duplicate para duplicar a
Renaming
Preset
pasta.
The
folder
and all
of the Folders
Preset files it contains are duplicated.
Renaming
Preset
Folders
Renaming
Preset
Folders
You
can a
also
right-click
a Preset Folder name and choose
To
rename
Preset
Folder:
To
rename
a
Preset
Folder:
Renaming Preset Folders
Duplicate
to
duplicate
the
folder.Folder name and choose
canPreset
right-click
To You
rename
aalso
Preset
Folder:a Preset
Renomeando
Folders
1
In
the
column,
click
1
the left
left
column,
click a
a Preset
Preset Folder
Folder name
name to
to select
select it.
it.
To
rename
a
Preset
Folder:
To In
rename
a
Preset
Folder:
Duplicate to duplicate the folder.
In thealeft
column,
click a Preset Folder name to select it.
To 1rename
Preset
Folder:
Renaming
Preset
Folders
Para
uma
Preset
Folder:
2
Click
Rename
button.
1 renomear
In the
thethe
left
column,
click
a Preset
Preset Folder
Folder name
name to
to select
select it.
it.
2
Click
the
Rename
button.
1
In
left
column,
click
a
1
In
the left
column,
click
Renaming
2 Click
thePreset
RenameFolders
button.
2
Click
Rename
button.
1To
Na
coluna
esquerda,
clique no
nome de
umaname
Preset
Folder
para
You
also
right-click
a
Folder
and
choose
2rename
Click
the
Rename
button.
acan
Preset
Youthe
can
alsoFolder:
right-click
a Preset
Preset
Folder
name
and
choose
2 Click the Rename button.
selecion-la.
Rename,
or
rename
the
You
also
right-click a
PresetFolder
Foldername
nameto
and
choose
or double-click
double-click
aa Preset
Preset
Folder
name
rename
To
rename
a can
Preset
Folder:
1 In
theRename,
left
column,
click a Preset
Folder
name
totoand
select
it. the
You
can
also
right-click
a Preset
Folder
name
choose
You
can
also
right-click
Preset
Folder
name
choose
folder.
Rename,
or double-click
aa Preset
Folder
name
toand
rename
the
folder.
You
cancolumn,
alsoor
right-click
Preset
Folder
name
and
choose
In the
left
click aaPreset
Folder
name
it. the
Rename,
double-click
a Preset
Folder
nameto
toselect
rename
212Clique
Rename.
Rename,
or
double-click
Click no
theboto
Rename
button. a Preset Folder name to rename the
folder.
Rename,
or double-click
a Preset Folder
name topress
rename the
folder.
3
a
name
for
folder.
3 Type
Type
a new
new
name
for the
the Preset
Preset Folder
Folder and
and press Enter.
Enter.
2 Click
the
Rename
button.
folder.
Voc
pode
tambm
clicar
com
o
boto
direito
um nome
3 Type
a new
for the
PresetFolder
Foldername
and press
Enter.
You can
alsoname
right-click
a Preset
andem
choose
3
a
new
name
for
the
Preset
Folder
and
press
Enter.
de Preset
Folder
e escolher
Rename,
ou clicar
duas
vezes
3 Type
Type
a
new
name
for
the
Preset
Folder
and
press
Enter.
Rename,
or double-click
aa Preset
name
toand
rename
the
You
can also
right-click
PresetFolder
Folderand
name
choose
Deleting
Preset
Deleting
Folders
3 Type
a new
name
forFolders
the Preset
press
em
um Preset
nome
de
Preset
FolderFolder
para renomear
aEnter.
pasta.
folder. Preset
Rename,
or double-click
a Preset Folder name to rename the
Deleting
Folders
Deleting
Folders
When
you
delete
Folder,
When
you Preset
delete a
a Preset
Preset
Folder, all
all Presets
Presets contained
contained in
in that
that
Deleting
Preset
Folders
folder.
3Deleting
Digite um novo
nome
para a Preset Folder e pressione Enter.
Preset
Folders
folder
also
deleted.
3 Type
When
you
new
delete
name
afor
Preset
the Preset
Folder,Folder
all Presets
and press
contained
Enter.in that
foldera are
are
also
deleted.
When you
you delete
delete a
a Preset
Preset Folder,
Folder, all
all Presets
Presets contained
contained in
in that
that
When
foldera are
also
deleted.
3 Type
new
name
for the
Presetall
Folder
and
press Enter.
Apagando
Preset
When
you
delete
a Preset
Folder,
Presets
contained
in that
folder
are
alsoFolders
deleted.
folder
are
also
deleted.
To
a
Folder:
Deleting
Preset
Folders
To delete
delete
a Preset
Preset
Folder:
folder
are also
deleted.
To
delete
a
Preset
Folder:
Quando
voc
apaga
uma
Preseta Preset
Folder,Folder
todos name
os Presets
contidos
Deleting
Preset
Folders
1
In
the
left
column,
click
it.
1
In
the delete
left
column,
click
a Preset
Foldercontained
name to
to select
select
it.
To
delete
a
Preset
Folder:
When
you
a Preset
Folder,
all Presets
in that
Totambm
delete
aso
Preset
Folder:
nela
apagados.
1delete
In
the
left
column,
click
a
Preset
Folder
name
to
select
it.
To
a
Preset
Folder:
folder
are
also
deleted.
When
you
delete
a
Preset
Folder,
all
Presets
contained
in
that
2
Click
the
Delete
button.
1
In
left
column,
click
2
button.
1 Click
In the
thethe
leftDelete
column,
click a
a Preset
Preset Folder
Folder name
name to
to select
select it.
it.
1
In
the
column,
click
folder
areleft
also
deleted.
Para
uma
Presetbutton.
Folder:
2 apagar
Click
the
Delete
2
Click
the
Delete
button.
You
can
also
right-click
Click
button. a
To 2delete
athe
Preset
Folder:
You
canDelete
also
right-click
a Preset
Preset Folder
Folder name
name and
and choose
choose
Click You
the Delete
button.
Delete
to
delete
the
folder.
can
also
right-click
a
Preset
Folder
name
and
choose
12To
Na
coluna
esquerda,
clique
no
nome
de
uma
Preset
Folder
para
Delete
to
delete
the
folder.
delete
a Preset
Folder:
1 In
theYou
left
column,
click a Preset
Folder
name
to and
select
it.
You
can
also right-click
right-click
a Preset
Preset
Folder
name
and
choose
can
a
Folder
name
choose
selecion-la.
Delete
toalso
delete the folder.
You
cancolumn,
also
right-click
PresetFolder
Folder name
name to
andselect
choose
1 In the
left
click
aaPreset
it.
Delete
to delete
delete
the folder.
folder.
to
the
2 Click Delete
the Delete
button.
Preset
Files
Delete
to
delete
the
folder.
22Clique
no
boto
Delete.
Click
the Delete
Preset
Filesbutton.
You
also right-click
a Preset
Folder
name tab
andof
You
can
manage
Preset
from
Transfer
the
Preset
Files
You
cancan
manage
Preset files
files
from the
the
Transfer
tab
ofchoose
the Filing
Filing
Preset
Files
Voc
pode
tambm
clicar
com
o boto
direito
em
umFiling
nome
Preset
Files
Delete
to
delete
the
folder.
page.
You
cannot
create
Preset
files
from
the
Filing
page.
PreYou
can
manage
Preset
files
from
the
Transfer
tab
of
the
You
can
also
right-click
a
Preset
Folder
name
and
choose
page. You cannot create Preset files from the Filing page.
PreYou
can
manage
Preset
files
from
the
Transfer
tab
of
the
Filing
de
Preset
Folder
e escolher
Delete
parathe
apagar
a channel,
pasta.
You
can
manage
Preset
files
from
the
Transfer
tab
of
the
Filing
set
files
are
created
from
the
Presets
window
of
the
page.
You
cannot
create
Preset
files
from
Filing
page.
PreDelete
to
delete
the
folder.
set
files
are
created
from
the
Presets
window
of
the
channel,
You
can You
manage
Preset
filesPreset
from the
Transfer
tabFiling
of thepage.
Filing
page.
cannot
create
files
from
the
Prepage.
You
cannot
create
Preset
files
from
the
Filing
page.
Preprocessor
or
plug-in;
Scope
Sets
are
created
from
the
Scope
Sets
set
files
are
created
from
the
Presets
window
of
channel,
processor
or plug-in;
Scope
Sets
arefrom
created
the
Scope
Sets
Preset
Files
page.
You
cannot
create
Preset
files
the from
Filing
page.
PreArquivos
Preset
set
files
are
created
from
the
Presets
window
of
the
channel,
set
files
are
created
from
the
Presets
window
of
the
channel,
window
of
the
Recall
Safe
page.
processor
or
plug-in;
Scope
Sets
are
created
from
the
Scope
Sets
window
of
the Recall
Safe
page. window of the channel,
Preset
Files
set
files
created
from
thefrom
Presets
processor
or plug-in;
Scope
Sets
are
created
the
Scope
Sets
You
canare
manage
Preset
files
tab of
the
Filing
processor
plug-in;
Scope
Setsthe
are Transfer
created from
from
the
Scope
Sets
window
oforthe
Recall
SafePreset
page.
Voc
pode
gerenciar
arquivos
na
aba Transfer
daScope
pginaSets
Filing.
processor
or
plug-in;
Scope
Sets
are
created
from
the
window
of
the
Recall
Safe
page.
page.
You
cannot
createfiles
Preset
files
from
the Filing
page.
Prewindow
of
the
Recall
Safe
page.
You
can
manage
Preset
from
the
Transfer
tab
of
the
Filing
Duplicating
Presets
Voc
no of
pode
criar
arquivos
Preset pela pgina Filing. Arquivos
Duplicating
Presets
window
the
Recall
Safethe
page.
set
files
arecannot
created
from
Presets
window
of
the
channel,
page.
You
create
Preset
files from
Filing
page. Pre- ou
Preset
so
criados
pela
janela
Presets
do the
canal,
processador
Duplicating
Presets
Duplicating
Presets
processor
or
plug-in;
Scope
Sets
are
created
from
the
Scope
setDuplicating
files
are
created
from
the
Presets
window
of
channel,
plug-in;
Scope
Sets
so
criados
pela
janela
Scope
Sets
na Sets
pgina
Presets
To
a
To duplicate
duplicate Presets
a Preset
Preset file:
file:
Duplicating
window
of
the
Recall
Safe
page.
processor
or
plug-in;
Scope
Sets
are
created
from
the
Scope
Sets
Recall
Safe.
To duplicate a Preset file:
1
Go
to
Filing
page
and
1
to
the
Filing
page
and click
click the
the Transfer
Transfer tab.
tab.
To
duplicate
Preset
file:
window
of the
the a
Recall
Safe
To Go
duplicate
a
Preset
file:page.
Go to Presets
the
Filing file:
page and click the Transfer tab.
To 1duplicate
a Preset
Duplicando
Duplicating
1 Go
Go to
to the
the Presets
Filing page
page and
and click
click the
the Transfer
Transfer tab.
tab.
1
Filing
1
Go to the Filing
Duplicating
Presets
Para duplicar um arquivo Preset:
To duplicate a Preset file:
duplicate
Preset
file:and
1V
Go
to the a
Filing
Transfer tab.
1To
pgina
Filing
epage
clique
naclick
aba the
Transfer.
1 Go to the Filing page and click the Transfer tab.
174
174 VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Guide
174
Profile
Guide
174
Guia VENUE
174 VENUE
VENUE
ProfileProfile
Guide
2
2 Click
Click the
the Built-In
Built-In or
or Plug-In
Plug-In icon
icon and
and choose
choose a
a processor
processor or
or
22plug-in
Clique
no Built-In
cone
Built-In
ouicon
Plug-In
echoose
escolha
um Folders
processador
the
menu.
The
Click from
the
or Plug-In
andavailable
aPreset
processor
or
plug-in
from
the pop-up
pop-up
menu.
The
available
Preset
Folders
2
Click
the
Built-In
or
Plug-In
icon
and
choose
a
processor
or
ou
plug-in
no
menu
pop-up.
As
Preset
Folders
disponveis
para o
2
Click
the
Built-In
or
Plug-In
icon
and
choose
a
processor
or
for
the
processor
or
plug-in
appear
in
a
pop-up
menu
above
plug-in
from
the
pop-up
menu.
The
available
Preset
Folders
for the
processor
orPlug-In
plug-in
appear
in
a pop-up
menu
above
2 processador
Click
the
Built-In
or
icon
and
choose
a processor
orcoluna
ou
plug-in
surgem
no
menu
pop-up
sobre
a
plug-in
from
the
pop-up
menu.
The
available
Preset
Folders
plug-in
from the pop-up
menu.
Theinavailable
the
left
column.
for
processor
or plug-in
appear
a pop-upPreset
menuFolders
above
the the
left
column.
esquerda.
plug-in
from
the pop-up
menu.
The available
Preset
Folders
for the
processor
or plug-in
appear
in a pop-up
menu
above
for
the the
left processor
column. or plug-in appear in a pop-up menu above
for the processor or plug-in appear in a pop-up menu above
the
left column.
plug-in
the pop-up
menu.
Folders
2
Click from
the Built-In
or Plug-In
iconThe
andavailable
choose aPreset
processor
or
for
the
processor
or
plug-in
appear
in
a
pop-up
menu
above
plug-in from the pop-up menu. The available Preset Folders
the
left processor
column. or plug-in appear in a pop-up menu above
for the
the left column.
the
2 Click
thecolumn.
Built-In or Plug-In icon and choose a processor or
the left
left
column.
Built-In
Built-In EQ
EQ in
in the
the Transfer
Transfer tab
tab of
of the
the Filing
Filing Page
Page
Built-In EQ in the Transfer tab of the Filing Page
3
Click
the
Folder
name
and
choose
Built-In
EQ
in Preset
the Transfer
Transfer
tab
of the
the
Filing
Page a
3
ClickEQ
the
Preset
Foldertab
name
and
choose
a Preset
Preset Folder
Folder from
from
Built-In
in
the
of
Filing
Page
3the
Clique
no
nome
da
Preset
Folder
e
escolha
Preset
Folder
no
menu
Built-In
EQ
in
the
Transfer
tab
of
the
Filing
Page
pop-up
menu.
Any
Presets
in
the
folder
appear
in
left
3
Click
the
Preset
Folder
name
and
choose
a
Preset
from
the pop-up menu. Any Presets in the folder appearFolder
in the
the
left
EQ embutido na aba Transfer da pgina Filing
3
the
Folder
name
and
choose
a
Preset
Folder
from
pop-up.
Qualquer
Preset
na
pasta
coluna
esquerda.
3 Click
Click
the Preset
Preset
Folder
name
and
choose
ana
Preset
Folder
from
column.
the
pop-up
menu.
Any Presets
inaparecem
the
folder
appear
inthe
left
column.
3 Click
the Preset
Folder
name
andin
choose
a Preset
Folder
the pop-up
menu.
Any
Presets
the folder
appear
in from
the left
the
pop-up menu. Any Presets in the folder appear in the left
column.
Built-In
EQ in menu.
the Transfer
of theinFiling
the
pop-up
Anytab
Presets
the Page
folder appear in the left
column.
column.
Built-In EQ in the Transfer tab of the Filing Page
column.
3 Click the Preset Folder name and choose a Preset Folder from
the
pop-up
menu.Folder
Any Presets
in the
folder
appearFolder
in thefrom
left
3 Click
the Preset
name and
choose
a Preset
column.
the pop-up menu. Any Presets in the folder appear in the left
column.
Preset
Folder
of
Presets
Nomes
Presetnames
Folders at
no the
topotop
da coluna
Presetde
Folder
names
at
the
top
of the
the Presets
Presets column
column
Preset Folder names at the top of the Presets column
Click
a
file
name
toofselect
the
Folder
names
the
the
column
Click
a Preset
Preset
file
name
the file.
file.
444Preset
Clique
no
nome
doat
para
selecion-lo.
Preset
Folder
names
atarquivo
the top
toptoPreset
ofselect
the Presets
Presets
column
Preset
Foldera names
top oftothe
Presets
4 Click
Preset at
filethe
name
select
thecolumn
file.
5
Duplicate
button.
4 Click
a Preset
Preset
file name
name
to select
select the
the file.
file.
5
Click the
the
Duplicate
button.
4
Click
a
file
to
Clique
no
4 5
Click
a Preset
file Duplicate.
name
to select the file.
5 Click
theboto
Duplicate
button.
5
Duplicate
You
can
also
a
file
name
Preset
Folder
names
at right-click
the button.
top of the
Presets
column
5 Click
Click
the
Duplicate
button.
Youthe
can
also
right-click
a Preset
Preset
file
name and
and choose
choose DuDu5 Click the
Duplicate
button. clicar
Voc
pode
tambm
comfile
o boto
direito
no nome
plicate
to
duplicate
You
can
also
a Preset
name and
choose
Du- do
Preset Folder
names
at right-click
the topthe
of Preset.
the
Presets
column
plicate
to
duplicate
the
Preset.
4 Click You
a arquivo
Preset
file
name
to select
the file
file.name
can also
right-click
a Preset
choose
DuPreset
e escolher
Duplicate
paraand
duplicar
o Preset.
You
cantoalso
right-click
a Preset file name and choose Duplicate
duplicate
the Preset.
You
also
right-click
a Preset.
Preset file name and choose Du4 Click
a can
Preset
file
name to
plicate
to
duplicate
the
plicate
toPresets
duplicate
theselect
Preset.the file.
Renaming
5 Click
the Duplicate
button.
Renaming
Presets
Renomenado
Presets the Preset.
plicate to duplicate
Renaming
Presets
5 Click
the Duplicate
button.
Renaming
Presets
Renaming
Presets
can a
right-click
a Preset file name and choose DuTo
rename
Preset
file:
To You
rename
aalso
Preset
file: Preset:
Para
renomear
um
arquivo
Renaming
Presets
duplicate
the Preset.
You
cantoaalso
right-click
a Preset file name and choose DuTo plicate
rename
Preset
file:
1 In
the
left
column,
click
a
file name
to select
the
In
the
left
column,
clickclique
a Preset
Preset
name
select Preset
the file.
file.para
rename
a Preset
file:
ToNa
rename
Preset
file:
11To
coluna
esquerda,
no file
nome
do to
arquivo
plicate
toa duplicate
the Preset.
1
In
the
left
column,
click
a
Preset
file
name
to
select
the file.
Toselecion-lo.
rename a Preset file:
Renaming
Presets
2
Click
Rename
1 In
thethe
left
column,button.
click a Preset file name to select the file.
2
Click
the
Rename
button.
1 In the left column, click a Preset file name to select the file.
1
In
the left
column,
a Preset file name to select the file.
Renaming
Presets
2 Click
the
Renameclick
button.
222 Clique
no
boto
Rename.
Click
the
Rename
button. a
You
also
right-click
Click
Rename
button.
To rename
a can
Preset
Youthe
can
alsofile:
right-click
a Preset
Preset file
file name
name and
and choose
choose ReRe2 Click the Rename button.
name,
or
double-click
a
Preset
file
name
to
rename
the
PreYou
can
also
right-click
a
Preset
file
name
and
choose
Rename,
or
double-click
a
Preset
file
name
to
rename
the
PreTo
rename
a
Preset
file:
Voc
pode
tambm
clicar
com
o
boto
direito
no
nome
1 In theYou
leftcan
column,
click a Preset
file name
to select
the file.
also right-click
a Preset
file name
and choose
Re-
de
You
can
right-click
a Preset
file
name
and
choose
Reset.
name,
oralso
double-click
aescolher
Preset
fileRename,
name
toou
rename
the
Preset.
um
arquivo
Preset
e
clicar
duas
vezes
You
can
also
right-click
a
Preset
file
name
and
choose
Re1 In thename,
left column,
click a Preset
file
toto
thethe
file.
or
a
file
name
rename
Preor double-click
double-click
a Preset
Preset
filename
namerenomear
toselect
rename
the
Pre2 Click name,
the
set.
no Rename
nome
debutton.
um arquivo
Preset
para
um
Preset.
name,
or
double-click
athe
Preset
filefile
name
topress
rename
the Preset.
3
Type
a
new
name
for
Preset
and
Enter.
set.
3 Type
a new
name
for the Preset file and press Enter.
2 Click
the
Rename
button.
set.
33 Digite
oa novo
nome
para
oa arquivo
Preset
pressione
Type
new
for the
Presetfile
file
andepress
Enter.Enter.
You can
alsoname
right-click
Preset
name
and
choose
Re3
Type
a
new
name
for
the
Preset
file
and
press
Enter.
3 Type
a
new
name
for
the
Preset
file
and
press
Enter.
name,
or
double-click
a
Preset
file
name
to
rename
the
PreYou
can also
right-click
a Presetfile
fileand
name
and
choose ReDeleting
Presets
Deleting
Presets
3 Apagando
Type
a new
name
for the Preset
press
Enter.
Presets
set.
name, orPresets
double-click a Preset file name to rename the PreDeleting
Deleting
Presets
Deleting
To set.
delete
a Presets
Preset
file: Preset:
To
delete
a
Preset
file:
Para
apagar
um
arquivo
Deleting
Presets
3 Type a new
name for the Preset file and press Enter.
To delete a Preset file:
1
In
the
left
column,
click
a
file
to
select
it.
1
In
the
left
click
a Preset
Preset
name
to
selectPreset
it.
To
delete
a
file:
3 1
Type
acoluna
new
name
for
Preset
file
andname
press
Enter.
ToNa
delete
a Preset
Preset
file:the
column,
esquerda,
clique
no file
nome
do arquivo
para
1delete
In the
left column,
Toselecion-lo.
a Preset
file: click a Preset file name to select it.
Deleting
Presets
2
Click
the
Delete
button.
1 In
In the
thethe
leftDelete
column,
click a
a Preset
Preset file
file name
name to
to select
select it.
it.
2
Click
button.
1
left
column,
click
1
In
the left
column,
click a Preset file name to select it.
2 Click
the
Delete button.
Deleting
Presets
22 Clique
no
boto
Delete.
Click
button.
You
can
also
right-click
Click
the
Delete
button. a
To 2
delete
athe
Preset
file:
You
canDelete
also
right-click
a Preset
Preset file
file name
name and
and choose
choose DeDe2 Click the Delete button.
lete
to
delete
the
Preset.
You
can
also
right-click
a Preset file name and choose Delete
to
delete
the
Preset.
To
delete
a
Preset
file:
Voc
pode
tambm
clicar
com
o boto
direito
de
1 In theYou
left
column,
click a Preset
file file
name
to select
it.no nome
can
also
right-click
a
name
and
DeYou
can
also the
right-click
a Preset
Preset
file
name
and choose
choose
Delete
to
delete
Preset.
um
arquivo
Preset
eaPreset
escolher
apagar
o Preset.
You
can
also
right-click
Presetfile
fileDelete
namepara
and
choose
De1 In the
left
column,
click
a
name
to
select
it.
lete
to
delete
the
Preset.
deletebutton.
the Preset.
2 Click lete
the to
Delete
lete to delete the Preset.
2 Click the Delete button.
You can also right-click a Preset file name and choose Delete
delete
Preset. a Preset file name and choose DeYou to
can
also the
right-click
Transferring
Settings,
Shows
and
Transferring
Settings,
Shows
and
Transferring
Settings,
Shows
and
Presets
Transferring
Settings,
Shows
and
Transferring
Settings,
Shows
and
You
can
copy
Console
Settings,
Shows,
and
Presets
to
Voc
pode
copiar
Console
Settings,
Shows
e Presets
para
e and
de um
YouYou
cancan
copy
Console
Settings,
Shows,
and
Presets
to and
and
copy
Console
Settings,
Shows,
and
Presets
to
Presets
from
a
portable
storage
device
(such
as
a
USB
key
disk)
for
Presets
dispositivo
de
aramzenamento
porttil
(como
um
pen
drive
from a portable storage device (such as a USB key disk)
for USB)
Presets
Transferindo
Presets Ajustes, Shows e Presets
from a portable storage device (such as a USB key disk) for
backup,
transfer
from
standalone
software,
and
transfer
bepara
backup,
transferncia
do
software
standalone,
e transferncia
backup,
transfer
standalone
andand
transfer
You
can
copy
Console
Settings,
Shows,
and
Presets
to
and
backup,
transfer
from
standalone
software,
transfer
beYou
can
copy from
Console
Settings,software,
Shows,
and
Presets
tobeand
tween
systems.
entre
sistemas.
tween
systems.
from
a portable storage device (such as a USB key disk) for
tween
from a systems.
portable storage device (such as a USB key disk) for
backup,
transfer
from
standalone
software,
and transfer
bebackup,
transfer
from
standalone
software,
transfer
beConsole
Settings
are
equivalent
to
auto-saved
Show
file,
Console
Settings
equivalentes
a umand
arquivo
Show,
Console
Settings
areso
equivalent
to an
an
auto-saved
Show
file,file,e
tween
systems.
Console
Settings
are
equivalent
to
an
auto-saved
Show
tween
systems.
armazena
o current
status atual
dathe
console.
Transferindo
Console
and
store
the
state
of
console.
By
transferring
andand
store
the the
current
state
of the
console.
By transferring
store
current
state
ofo the
console.
transferring
Settings,
voc pode
trasnferir
estado
atualBy
da
console
sem
Console
Settings,
you
can
transfer
the
current
state
of
the
Console
Settings,
you
can
transfer
the
current
state
of
the
Console
Settings
are
equivalent
to
an
auto-saved
Show
file,
Stage
Rack
Features
Console
Settings,
you
can
transfer
the
current
state
of the
Settings
are
equivalent
to
an
auto-saved
Show
file,
ter
que
criar
e
nomear
um
arquivo
Show.
console
without
having
to
first
create
and
name
a
Show
file.
console
without
having
to
first
create
and
name
a
Show
file.
and
store
the
current
state
of
the
console.
By
transferring
console
without
having
to
first
create
and
name
a
Show
file.
and
store
the
current
state
of
the
console.
By
transferring
Console
Settings,
you
can
transfer
the
state
of
the
Settings,
Shows
e Presets
no
podem
sercurrent
carregados
para
Console
Settings,
you
can
transfer
the
current
state
of
the
Settings,
Shows
and
Presets
cannot
be
loaded
onto
the
destiaudio I/O
for VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up to onto
two Stage
Racks
Settings,
Shows
and Presets
cannot
be loaded
the
desticonsole
without
having
to
first
and
name
a
file.
Settings,
Shows
Presets
cannot
be storage
loaded
onto
the
destisua
destinao
no and
sistema
diretamento
de
um
dispositivo
de
console
without
having
to
first create
create
and
a Show
Show
file.
nation
system
directly
from
the
portable
device,
but
can be
supporting
up
toname
96
total
inputs.
nation
system
directly
from
the
portable
storage
device,
but
armazenamento
porttil,
mas
devem
primeiramente
serem
nation
system
directly
from
the
portable
storage
device,
but
must
first
be
transferred
to
the
system
before
loading.
must
firstfirst
be
transferred
toates
the
system
before
loading.
Settings,
Shows
and
cannot
be
loaded
onto
transferidos
para
sistema
carregados.
must
be otransferred
to de
the
system
before
loading.
Settings,
Shows
and Presets
Presets
cannot
be
loaded
onto the
the destidestiAudio
I/O
nation
system
directly
from
the
portable
storage
device,
but
nation
system
directly
from
the
portable
storage
device,
but
Transfer
of
Settings
files,
Show
files,
and
Preset
files
is
manTransfer
of Settings
files,
Show
files,
andand
Preset
files
isgerenciada
manTransferncia
de
arquivos
Settings,
Shows
e
Presets
must
first
be
transferred
to
the
system
before
loading.
Transfer
of
Settings
files,
Show
files,
Preset
files
is
manfrom
48first
inputs
with remotely
controllable
mic
preamps
and
must
be
transferred
to
the
system
before
loading.
aged
the
Transfer
tab
of
the
Filing
page.
The
Transfer
tab
aged
from
thethe
Transfer
tabtab
of the
Filing
TheThe
Transfer
tabtab
pela
aba
Transfer
naselectable
pgina
Filing.
A page.
aba
Transfer
mostra
os
aged
from
Transfer
of
the
Filing
page.
Transfer
individually
phantom
power.
shows
the
system-resident
files
in
the
left
column
and
the
shows
the
system-resident
files
in
the
left
column
and
the
Transfer
of
Settings
files,
Show
files,
and
Preset
files
is
manarquivos
residentes
no sistema
na
coluna
and
esquerda
e oand
contedo
shows
the
system-resident
files
in
the
left
column
the
Transfer
of
Settings
files,
Show
files,
Preset
files
is
man 8 analog
output channels;
expandable
up
to 48
analog or
of
portable
storage
device
in
the
right
column.
contents
of the
the
portable
storage
device
in coluna
the
right
column.
aged
from
Transfer
tab
of
the
Filing
page.
The
Transfer
tab
docontents
dispositivo
de
armazenamento
porttil
na
da
direita.
Itens
contents
ofthe
the
portable
storage
device
in the
right
column.
aged
from
the
Transfer
tab
of
the
Filing
page.
The
Transfer
tab
digital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
Items
are
selected
for
transfer
in
the
center.
so
selecionados
para
transferncia
no
centro.
Items
are
selected
for
transfer
in
the
center.
shows
the
system-resident
files
in
the
left
column
and
the
Items
for transfer
showsare
theselected
system-resident
filesininthe
thecenter.
left column and the
contents
storage
device in the right column.
contents of
of the
the portable
portable
storage
Synchronization
and Control
I/O device in the right column.
Items
are
selected
for
transfer
in
Items are selected for transfer in the
the center.
center.
System Components
Included Components
File transfer
controls
Controles
transferncia
de arquivos
deTrackball
mount
(trackball
File transfer
controls
File transfer controls
not included)
VENUE Mouse Pad
To
Presets
or
from
portable
Para
transferirSettings,
Settings,Shows
Showsor
Presetsto
e dea
dispositivo
To transfer
transfer
Settings,
Shows
orou
Presets
topara
or
a um
portable
To transfer
Settings,
Shows
or Presets
to from
or from
a portable
File
transfer
controls
device:
VENUE
Profile
Guide
File transfer
controls
destorage
armazenamento
porttil:
storage
device:
storage device:
Two (2)
console
lights
1 Go
to
page
and
the
To transfer
Settings,
or Presets
to or tab.
from a portable
1 Go
to the
the Filing
Filing
pageShows
and click
click
the Transfer
Transfer
tab.
transfer
Settings,
Shows
orclick
Presets
to or from
a portable
Go
todevice:
the
Filing
page
and
the Transfer
tab.
1 V 1To
pgina
Filing
e clique
na
aba
Transfer.
storage
Protective
Dust
Cover
storage a
device:
2 Connect
portable storage device (such as a USB key disk) to
2 Connect a portable storage device (such as a USB key disk) to
2 Connect
a(see
portable
storage
device
(such
as acolumn.
USB
key disk) to
Rack(s)
next)
1
Go
to
the
Filing
page
and
the
Transfer
tab.
system.
The
device
appears
above
the
right
2 the
Conecte
um
dispositivo
de
armazenamento
porttil
(como
um pen
1
Go
to
the
Filing
and click
click
tab.
the system. The
devicepage
appears
abovethe
theTransfer
right
column.
system.
The device
appears above
theacima
right column.
drivethe
USB)
ao sistema.
O dispositivo
aparece
da coluna da
2 Connect
a
storage
device
(such
as
a
key
disk)
3 Do
one
of
the
following
to
select
the
type
of
to
transfer:
2 Connect
a portable
portable
storage
device
(such
asdata
a USB
USB
disk) to
to
direita.
3 Do
one
of
the
following
to
select
the
type
of
data
to key
transfer:
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
Cables
3 Do one of the following to select the type of data to transfer:
the
system.
The
device
appears
above
right
To
transfer
all
data,
the
Console
icon.
system.
The
deviceclick
appears
above the
the
right column.
column.
the
To
transfer
all all
data,
click
thethe
Console
icon.
To
transfer
data,
click
Console
icon.
Each
Mix
Rack
or
FOH
Rack
includes:
3 Siga
umtransfer
dosofseguintes
procedimentos
para
selecionar
o tipo de
3
To
Console
Settings,
click
the
Settings
icon.
Do
one
the
following
to
select
the
type
of
data
to
transfer
Console
Settings,
clickthe
thetype
Settings
icon.
3 To
DoTo
one
of the
following
to select
of data
to transfer:
transfer:
transfer
Console
dados
transferido:
a ser
System
Restore
CD Settings, click the Settings icon.
To
transfer
all
data,
click
the
Console
icon.
To
transfer
Show
Folders,
click
the
Show
Folders
icon.
To
transfer
all
data,
click
the
Console
icon.
To
transfer
Show
Folders,
click
the
Show
Folders
icon.
Para
transferir
todos
osFolders,
dados,
clique
ni
cone
Console.
To
transfer
Show
click
the
Show
Folders
icon.
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Software
Installer
CD
To
transfer
Console
Settings,
click
Settings
icon.
To
transfer
individual
Shows,
click
the
Shows
icon.
Para
transferir
Console
Settings,
clique
nithe
cone
Settings.
To
transfer
Console
Settings,
click
the
Settings
icon.
To
transfer
individual
Shows,
click
the
Shows
icon.
To
transfer
individual
Shows,
click
the
Shows
icon.
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
Para
transferir
Show
Folders,
clique
noPreset
cone
Show
Folders.
To
transfer
Preset
Folders,
click
the
Folders
icon.
To
transfer
Show
Folders,
click
Show
Folders
icon.
To
transfer
Preset
Folders,
click
thethe
Preset
Folders
icon.
To
transfer
Show
Folders,
click
the
Show
Folders
icon.
To
transfer
Preset
Folders,
click
the
Preset
Folders
icon.
iLok
USB Smart
Key
(for storing
plug-in
authorizations)
Para
transferir
Shows
individualmente,
clique
no
cone
Shows.
To
transfer
individual
Shows,
click
the
Shows
icon.
To
transfer
Presets
for
individual
items,
click
the
Built-In
To
transfer
individual
Shows,
click
the
Shows
icon.
To
transfer
Presets
for
individual
items,
click
the
Built-In
Para
transferir
Preset
Folders,
clique
no
cone
Preset
Folders.
To
transfer
Presets
for
individual
items,
click
the
Built-In
or Plug-in
installer
discs (ifaany)
withprocessor
pre-authorized
iLok
icon
and
choose
built-in
or
Plug-In
To
transfer
Preset
Folders,
click
the
Preset
Folders
icon.
or
Plug-In
icon
and
choose
aitens
built-in
processor
or plug-in,
plug-in,
Para
transferir
Presets
para
individuais,
clique
cone
To
transfer
Preset
Folders,
the
Preset
Folders
icon.
or
Plug-In
icon
and
choose
aclick
built-in
processor
orno
plug-in,
or Two
(2)Channel
IEC
power
cables
Input
from
the
pop-up
menu.
Built-In
ou
Plug-In
e
escolha
o
processador
embutido
ou
o
plugor
Channel
from
the
pop-up
menu.
Input
To
transfer
Presets
for
individual
items,
click
the
Built-In
or Input
Channel
the pop-up
menu.
To
transfer
Presets from
for individual
items,
click the Built-In
One
FOH
Link
cable
forRecall
connection
to
athe
VENUE
console
in,To
transfer
Scope
Sets
for
Safe,
click
Scope
Sets
ou
Input
Channel
no
menu
pop-up.
or
Plug-In
icon
and
choose
a
built-in
processor
or
plug-in,
To
Scope
SetsSets
for for
Recall
Safe,
click
thethe
Scope
Sets
or Plug-In
icon
and
choose
a built-in
processor
or plug-in,
transfer
To
transfer
Scope
Recall
Safe,
click
Sets
Para
transferir
Scope
Sets
para
Recall
Safe,
cliqueScope
no cone
icon.
or
Input
Channel
from
the
pop-up
menu.
icon.
or
Input
Channel
from
the
pop-up
menu.
Each
Stage
icon.
Scope
Sets.Rack includes:
To
Scope Sets
for
To transfer
transfer
for Recall
Recall Safe,
Safe, click
click the
the Scope
Scope Sets
Sets
Two
(2) IEC Scope
powerSets
cables
icon.
icon.

DVI to
supported.
Preparing
transfer items to USB key disk
Preparing to transfer items to USB key disk
Preparingpara
to transfer
to USB
key disk USB
Preparando
transferiritems
items para
um dispositivo
and trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
4
DoUSB
onekeyboard
of the following
to select the items
to transfer:
4 Do one of the following to select the items to transfer:
4 Do onetooftransfer
the following
to select
the items to transfer:
Preparing
items to USB
key disk
4Preparing
Siga
umleft
dos
seguintes
procedimentos
para
selecionar
um item
In
the
column,
select
the
items
want
to
to
transfer
items
to USB
key
diskyou
In
the
left
column,
select
the
items
youyou
want
to transfer
transfer
Digital
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
transferncia:
InSnake
the
left
column,
select
the
items
want
to transfer
para
to
the
portable
storage
device.
4 to
Do
one
of
the
following
to
select
the
items
to transfer:
the
portable
storage
device.
Do
one
ofportable
the
following
todevice.
selectos
the
items
transfer:
the
storage
4 The
Nato
coluna
esquerda,
slecione
itens
quetoRack
deseja
transferir
connection
between
FOH
Rack and
Stage
requires
In
the
left
column,
select
the
items
you
want
to
transfer
or
para
o
dispositivo
de
armazenamento
porttil.
In
the
left
column,
select
the
items
you
want
to
transfer
or
aDigital
cable. This cable can be purchased directly
or
theSnake
to
portable
storage
device.
In
right
column,
select
the
items
you
want
to
ou
the
toAvid
the
portable
storage
In
the
right
column,
select
the
items
youyou
want
to transfer
transfer
from
or
assembled
bydevice.
your
preferred
vendor.
In
the
right
column,
select
the
items
want
to
transferdo
from
Na
coluna
da
direita,
selecione
os
itens
que
deseja
transferir
the
portable
storage
device
to
the
VENUE
system.
or
from
the
portable
storage
device
to
the
VENUE
system.
or
from the de
portable
storage device
to the
system.
dispositivo
armazenamento
porttil
paraVENUE
o sistema
VENUE.
the
right
column,
select
5 Click
the
Transfer
button.
In
In
right
column,
select the
the items
items you
you want
want to
to transfer
transfer
5 Optional
Click
thethe
Transfer
button.
Components
5 Click
the
Transfer
button.
from
the
portable
storage device to the VENUE system.
5 Clique
no boto
Transfer.storage device to the VENUE system.
from
the portable
Large
take
time.
Transfer
status
is
shown
a
Thetransfers
followingmay
components
are
optional,
and
beby
Large
transfers
may
take
time.
Transfer
status
is must
shown
by by
a a
5
Click
the
Transfer
button.
Large
transfers
may
take
time.
Transfer
status
is shown
5
Click
the
Transfer
button.
progress
bar.
A
transfer
may
be
cancelled
by
clicking
Cancel.
purchased
separately:
Grandes
transferncias
podem
demorar. by
O status
deCancel.
transferncia
progress
bar.
A
transfer
may
be
cancelled
clicking
progress bar. A transfer may be cancelled by clicking Cancel.
Large
apresentado
uma
barra
de progresso.
Uma
trasnferncia
transfers
may
take
time.
Transfer
status
is
shown
by
a
USB
flash como
disk
other
portable
USB
storage
device
for
Large
transfers
may(or
take
time.
Transfer
status
iscontents,
shown
by
a
Cancelled
transfers
may
result
in
partial
folder
pode
ser
cancelada
clicando
em
Cancel.
Cancelled
transfers
may
result
in
partial
folder
contents,
progress
bar.
A
transfer
may
be
cancelled
by
clicking
Cancel.
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
Cancelled
transfers
may
result
in
partial
folder
contents,
progress
bar.have
A transfer
may bemanually.
cancelled by clicking Cancel.
which
will
to
be
deleted
which
willwill
have
to be
manually.
which
have
to deleted
be
deleted
manually.
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position resultar
monitoringem
Transferncias
canceladas
podem
Cancelled
transfers
may
result
in
Cancelled
transfers
may
result
in partial
partial folder
folder contents,
contents,
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
contedos
parciais
em
pastas,
queand
devem
ser
apagadas
Synchronizing
Settings,
Shows
Presets
which
will
have
to
be
deleted
manually.
Synchronizing
Settings,
Shows
and
Presets
which
will
have
to
be
deleted
manually.
Synchronizing
Settings,
Shows
Presets
manualmente.
Dynamic
or condenser
microphone
andand
XLR mic
cable
Instead
of
transferring
data
in
one
direction
between
the
Instead
of
transferring
data
in
one
direction
between
the
(for
Talkback)
Instead
of transferring
data storage
in
oneShows
direction
between
the
Synchronizing
Settings,
and
Presets
Sincronizando
Settings,
Shows
e Presets
VENUE
system
and
a
portable
device,
you
can
synSynchronizing
Settings,
Shows
and
VENUE
system
andand
a(up
portable
device,
you
canPresets
syn Footswitches
to 2) storage
VENUE
system
a
portable
storage
device,
you
can
synchronize
all
data
in
columns
of
Transfer
tab
in
sinchronize
allof
data
in both
both
columns
of the
the
Transfer
tabtab
in a
ain
sinInstead
transferring
data
in
one
direction
between
the
chronize
all
data
in
both
columns
of
the
Transfer
aVENUE
sinInstead
of
transferring
data
in
one
direction
between
the
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
Em
vez
de
trasnferir
dados
emu
ma
direo
entre
o
sistema
gle
operation.
gle
operation.
VENUE
system
and
a
portable
storage
device,
you
can
synVENUE
system
and
aconnecting
portable storage
device,
you
cansincronizar
syne gle
um
dispositivo
armazenamento
porttil,
pode
operation.
BNC
cablesde
(for
Word
clockvoc
between
the
chronize
all
data
in
both
columns
of
the
Transfer
tab
a
todos
os dados
em
asfiles
colunas
nadevices)
abaand
Transfer
meu
ma
Synchronizing
causes
new
to
be
copied
files
with
chronize
all data
data
inambas
both
columns
of
the
Transfer
tab in
in
a sinsinVENUE
system
and
external
digital
Synchronizing
data
causes
new
filesfiles
to
be
copied
andand
files
with
Synchronizing
data
causes
new
to
be
copied
files
with
gle
operation.
pnica
operao.
the
same
name
but
a
recent
modification
date/time to
operation.
thegle
same
name
butbut
a more
more
recent
modification
to be
be
same
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
to date/time
GPIdate/time
devices)
the
name
a more
recent
modification
to be
automatically
updated.
automatically
updated.
Synchronizing
data
causes
new
files
to
be
copied
and
files
with
Sincronizar
dados
fazcauses
novosnew
arquivos
copiados
e arquivos
automatically
updated.
Synchronizing
data
files toserem
be copied
and files
with
the
same
name
but
a
more
recent
modification
date/time
to
be
com
o
mesmo
nome
mas
uma
modificao
mais
recente
the
samesynchronizing
name but a more
recent
modification
date/time
toserem
be
When
data,
the
VENUE
software
reWhen
synchronizing
data,
the the
VENUE
software
re- reautomatically
updated.
automaticamente
atualizados.
When
synchronizing
data,
VENUE
software
automatically
updated.
places
data
files
of
the
same
name
with
the
file
that
has
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
places
data
filesfiles
of the
same
name
with
the the
file file
thatthat
hashas
places
data
of the
same
name
with
the
most
recent
date/time.
Check
to
be
sure
that
the
systhe When
most
recent
date/time.
Check
to
be
sure
that
the
syssynchronizing
data,
the
VENUE
software
reQuando
sincronizando
dados,
o
software
VENUE
substitui
the
most
recent
date/time.
Check
toVENUE
be sure
that
the
sysWhen
synchronizing
data,
the
VENUE
software
reThetem
following
options
can
be
added
to
Profile
systems.
clock
times
and
time
zones
are
correctly
set
on
the
templaces
clock
times
and
time
zones
are
correctly
set
on
the
data
files
of
the
same
name
with
the
file
that
has
arquivos
de
dados
de
mesmo
nome
pelos
arquivos
que
tem
clock
times
and
time
zones
arewith
correctly
setthat
on
the
places
data
files
of thesystems
same
name
the file
has
Forsystem
details
on
all
VENUE
and
options,
visit
the
Avid
and
on
computer
running
the
Standalone
possuem
othe
mais
recente
horrio/data.
Verifique
se os
system
and
on
the
computer
running
the
Standalone
the
most
recent
date/time.
Check
to
be
sure
that
the
syssystem
and
on
the
computer
running
the(www.avid.com).
most
recent
date/time.
Check
to bethe
sureStandalone
that the syswebsite
software
when
preparing
data
for
synchronization.
relgios
do
sistema
e do
computador
rodando
o software
software
when
preparing
data
for
synchronization.
tem
times
and
zones
are
correctly
software
when
preparing
data
for
tem clock
clock
times
and time
time
zones
aresynchronization.
correctly set
set on
on the
the
Standalone
esto
corretamento
ajustados
quando
preparar
system
and
on
the
computer
running
the
Standalone
system
and
on
the
computer
running
the
Standalone
dados
para
sincronizao.
Mix Rack
Options
software
software when
when preparing
preparing data
data for
for synchronization.
synchronization.
I/O Options
outputs
Chapter
20: Shows
and
File Management
175
XO16 Analog and Digital
Output
that
8 analog
Chapter
20:Card
Shows
andprovides
File Management
175
175

The Notes field for each auto-saved Show file includes a deThe Notes field for each auto-saved Show file includes a description
of Notes
the conditions
caused
the automaticamente
automatic save.
O campo
de cada that
arquivo
Show
scription
of the conditions
that
caused
the automatic save. salvo
inclui
uma
descrio
das
condies
que
causaram
o salvamento
The Notes
field for
each
auto-saved
file includes
Several
conditions
cause
the
system toShow
automatically
saveaadeautomtico.
Several
conditions
cause
the
system
to
automatically
savesave.
a
system and a portable storage device:
scription
of
the
conditions
that
caused
the
automatic
new Show file in the History tab, as follows:
portable
storage
device
such as a USB key disk.
1 22VConnect
pginaaaFiling
e clique
na aba
Transfer.
new Show file in the History tab, as follows:
Connect
portable
storage
device
such as a USB key disk.
1 device
Go to the
Filing
page the
andright
clickcolumn.
the Transfer tab.
The
appears
above
foram
sistema
a automaticamente
salvar
Vrias
In
thecondies
course
of normal
a new
Show
file is automatiSeveral
conditions
causeowork,
the
system
to
automatically
save
a um
The device appears above the right column.
In
the
course
of normal
work,
a new
Show
file is automati2 Conecte dispositivo de armazenamento porttil como um pen
novo
arquivo
Show
na
aba
History,
como
segue:
cally
saved
infile
the History
tab approximately
every ten minnew
Show
the History
tab, as follows:
2 Connect
a portable
storage
device
suchofas
a USB
key disk.
3 Do
oneOofdispositivo
the
following
to select
theda
type
data
synchrocally
saved
in thein
History
tab approximately
every ten mindrive
USB.
aparece
no alto
coluna
da to
direita.
3 Do
one of the following
to select
the type
of data
to
synchroutes. Saves are less frequent when the console is idle.
The device appears above the right column.
nize:
utes.
Saves
are
less
frequent
when
the
console
isfile
idle.
In
the
course
of
normal
work,
a
new
Show
is automati
No
curos
de
um
trabalho
normal,
um
novo
arquivo
Show
nize:
automaticamente
A
new
Show
file
is
automatically
saved
just
prior
to
a
signif3 Siga
umone
dosofseguintes
procedimentos
para
selecionar
o
tipo
de
salvo
na
aba
History
aproximadamente
a cada
cally
saved
in
the
History
tab
approximately
every
ten
min3 Do
To
synchronize
all
data,
click
the
Console
icon.
the following
select
type oficon.
data to synchro- A new Show file is automatically saved just prior to a signif To synchronize
all data,to
click
thethe
Console
dados
a ser
sincronizado:
dez
minutos.
Salvamentos
so
menso
frequentes
quando
a console
icant
change
in
the
console
setup,
including:
utes.
Saves
are
less
frequent
when
the
console
is
idle.
nize:
To
synchronize
Console Settings, click the Settings icon.
icant change in the console setup, including:
To synchronize
Console
Settings,
click
Settings
icon.
Para
sincronizar todos
os dados,
clique
no the
cone
Console.
est
intiva. of console channel or bus configuration
A
Change
To
synchronize
Show
Folders,
click
the
Show
Folders
icon.
new Show
file is automatically
saved
just prior to a signif
To
synchronize
all
data,
click
the
Console
icon.
Change
of console
channel or bus
configuration
Para
sincronizar Console
Settings,click
clique
cone
Settings.
To synchronize
Show Folders,
theno
Show
Folders
icon.
Recall,
storage,
or
modification
of
a
Snapshot
icant
change
in
the
console
setup,
including:
To
synchronize
individual
Shows,
click
the
Show
icon.
novostorage,
arquivoorShow
automaticamente
salvo antes de uma
Para
sincronizar
ShowConsole
Folders,Settings,
clique noclick
conethe
Show
Folders.
To
synchronize
Settings
Um
Recall,
modification
of a Snapshot
To
synchronize
individual Shows,
click the
Show
icon.icon.
Loading
of of
Console
oror
a Show
alterao
significativa
naSettings
configurao
da console,
incluindo:
Para
sincronizar
Shows
individuais,
clique
no
coneFolders
Show. icon.
Change
console
channel
bus
configuration
To
synchronize
Preset
Folders,
click
the
Preset
To
synchronize
Show
Folders,
click
the
Show
Folders
Loading
of
Console
Settings
or
a
Show
To synchronize
PresetFolders,
Folders,
clickno
thecone
Preset
Folders

Alterao
na
configurao
dos
canais
ou
bus
Para
sincronizar
Preset
clique
Preset
Folders.
icon.
Recall, storage, or modification of a Snapshot
To
synchronize
individual
Shows,
click the
Shownoicon.
icon.
Carregamento, armazenamento ou modificao de um
Para
sincronizar
Presets
para itens
individuais,
clique
cone
Built-In
To
synchronize
Presets
for
individual
items,
click
the
Snapshot
Loading
of Console Settings or a Show
an
To
synchronize
Presetfor
Folders,
clickitems,
the
ou
Plug-In ePresets
escolha
oindividual
processador
ou Preset
plug-in
no menu Loading
To
synchronize
click Folders
the
Loading
an Auto-Saved
Auto-Saved Show
Show
Built-In
icon
or
the
Plug-In
icon
and
choose
a
processor
or
Carregamento de Console Settings ou Show
pop-up.
icon.icon or the Plug-In icon and choose a processor or
Built-In
To return the console to an earlier state at any time, you can
plug-in from the pop-up menu.
plug-in
from the pop-up
To synchronize
Presetsmenu.
for individual items, click the
Loading
Auto-Saved
Show
load
any of thean
auto-saved
Show files
displayed in the History
Carregando
umauto-saved
Arquivo Show
Automaticamente
Salvo
4 Dos menus pop-up sobre cada coluna, escolha as pastas que load
any of the
Show
files displayed in
the History
icon or
the Plug-In
choose
a processor
4 FromBuilt-In
the pop-up
menus
aboveicon
eachand
column,
choose
the or tab.
contm
osthe
elementos
deseja
sincronizar.
4 From
pop-up que
menus
above
each column, choose the
tab.
plug-in from
the
pop-up you
menu.
folders containing
the
elements
want to synchronize.
Para
a console
a umShow
estado
anterior
a qualquer
momento,
folders containing the elements you want to synchronize.
loadretornar
any of the
auto-saved
files
displayed
in the History
load pode
an auto-saved
Show
file:
voc
carregar
um
arquivo
Show
automaticamente
salvo
5 5Clique
no
boto
Sync
All. OThe
contedo
das
colunas
esquerda
4 From
pop-up
menus
above
each
column,
the e To
Click
thethe
Sync
All
button.
contents
of
the leftchoose
and
right
To tab.
load an auto-saved Show file:
5 Click
Sync All button. The contents of the left and right
apresentado na aba History.
direita
sothe
sincronizados.
folders
containing
the elements you want to synchronize.
columns
are
synchronized.
1 Go to the Filing page and click the History tab.
columns are synchronized.
1 Go to the Filing page and click the History tab.
To load
an auto-saved
Show
file:
carregar
arquivo
Show
automaticamente
salvo:
Utilizando
o
software
Standalone
em
um
laptop,
voc
5 Click
the
Sync
All
button.
The
contents
of
the
left
and
right
2 Para
In the
Show um
Folders
column,
click the Show Folder
name to
Using the Standalone software on a laptop computer, you
2 In the Show Folders column, click the Show Folder name to
Using
the
Standalone
software
on
a
laptop
computer,
you
pode
configurar
o
roteamento
do
sistema
VENUE,
ajustar
columns
are
synchronized.
1
Go
to
the
Filing
page
and
click
the
History
tab.
select
the
folder
and
display
its
contents
in
the
Shows
column.
can configure VENUE system routing, set up mixes, create
folderFiling
and display
in the Shows column.
can
configure
VENUE
systemerouting,
set up mixes,
create
1 V the
pgina
e cliqueits
nacontents
aba History.
mixagens,
criar
Snapshots
salvar Shows
e Presets.
Voc select
Snapshots,
and
save Shows
and Presets.
You
can
then
2 the
In the
Show
Foldersclick
column,
click for
thethe
Show
Folder
Shows
column,
the name
Show
youname
want to
pode
ento
trasnferir
seus
dados
para
um
pen
drive
USByou
para 33 In
Snapshots,
save Shows
and Presets.
You
can
then
Using
theand
Standalone
software
on
a laptop
computer,
In the Shows column, click the name for the Show you want
transfer
your
data to VENUE.
a USB disk
for
use on a 24,
VENUE
sys- o load.
select
the
folder
and
display
its
contents
in
the
Shows
column.
2
Na
coluna
Show
Folders,
clique
no
nome
da
Show
Folder
para
uso
em
um
sistema
Veja
o
Captulo
Utilizando
transfer
your data
to a USB
disk routing,
for use on
VENUE
can configure
VENUE
system
setaup
mixes,syscreate
load.
tem.
See Chapter
24, Using
the Standalone Software.
selecionar
a
pasta
e
apresentar
seu
contedo
na
coluna
Shows.
Software
Standalone
.
tem.
See Chapter
Using
Standalone
Software.
Snapshots,
and24,
save
Showsthe
and
Presets. You
can then
3 In the Shows column, click the name for the Show you want
transfer your data to a USB disk for use on a VENUE sysload.
3 Na coluna Shows, clique no nome do Show que deseja carregar.
tem. See Chapter 24, Using the Standalone Software.
To synchronize Settings, Shows, or Presets between the VENUE
To synchronize Settings, Shows, or Presets between the VENUE
system
and a portable
storage
device:
Para
sincronizar
Settings,
Shows
ou Presets entre um sistema
system
and a portable
storage
device:
VENUE
e
um
dispositivo
de
armazenamento
porttil:
1 Go
to
the
Filing
page
and
click
Transfer
tab.
To synchronize Settings, Shows, the
or Presets
between
the VENUE
Desfazendo
AlteraesUsing
Utilizando
o Recurso
Undoing
the
Undoing Changes
Changes
Using
the History
History
History
Feature
Feature
Undoing Changes Using the History
VENUE
system
automaticallysalva
saves the
current
of
O The
sistema
VENUE
automaticamente
estado
atualstate
da console
The
VENUE
system
automatically saveso the
current
state
of
theFeature
console
while
you
are working,
allowingayou
to quickly
reenquanto
voc
est
trabalhando,
permitindo
voc
rapidamente
the console while you are working, allowing you to quickly reretornar
a console
estado anterior.
turn the
console atoum
a previous
state.
turn
the
console
to a previous
state. saves the current state of
The
VENUE
system
automatically
the
console
while
you
are
working,
allowing
youconsole
to
quicklyda
reHistory
feature
uses
Show files
topara
capture
the
O The
recurso
History
utiliza
arquivos
Show
capturer
o estado
The
History
feature
uses
Show files
to capture
the console
turn
the
console
to
a
previous
state.
console,
e apresenta
os arquivos
na aba
History.
state, and
displays the
files in the
History
tab.
state, and displays the files in the History tab.
The
History feature
uses Show
files to capture
the console
Show
Show
files
displayed
in the History
ShowFolders
Foldersand
e arquivos
Show
apresentados
na abatab
History
Show
Folders
andthe
Show
files
displayed
in tab.
the History tab
state,
and
displays
files
in
the
History
podem
ser apagados.
Eles
podem or
serrenamed.
duplicados
can
onlyapenas
be deleted.
They cannot
beno
duplicated
can only be deleted. They cannot be duplicated or renamed.
ou renomeados.
Show Folders and Show files displayed in the History tab
Show Folders in the History Tab
Show
Folders
inHistory
the History
Tab be duplicated or renamed.
can only
be
deleted.
They cannot
Show Folders
na aba
There are two Show Folders in the History tab:
There are two Show Folders in the History tab:
Show
in the
Tab
Existem
duasFolders
Show Folders
na History
aba History:
The Most Recent Changes folder includes all auto-saved Show
The Most Recent Changes folder includes all auto-saved Show
files
for aare
ten-hour
period.
two Show
Folders in the History tab:
for a ten-hour
period.
files
AThere
pasta
Most
Recent
Changes inclui arquivos Show salvos
The
Previous
Days
folder
includes
only
theall
last
auto-saved
automaticamentepor
um
perodo
de dez
horas.
The Most Recent Changes
folder
includes
auto-saved
Show
The Previous Days folder includes only the last auto-saved
Show
file
for
each
day
since
the
console
was
last
cleared.
files
for
a
ten-hour
period.
Show file for each day since the console was last cleared.
A pasta Previous Days inclui apenas o ultimo arquivo Show salvo

The Previous Days folder includes only the last auto-saved
automaticamente
desde que a console foi limpa pela ltima vez.
Show
ineach
the History
Tabconsole was last cleared.
ShowFiles
file for
since the
Show
Files
in the day
History
Tab
Arquivos
Show na Show
aba History
The auto-saved
files displayed in the History Tab are
The auto-saved Show files displayed in the History Tab are

Show
Files intothe
named
according
the History
date and Tab
time of their creation, and
according
to the date and time
of their
creation, na
andaba
Osnamed
arquivos
Show automaticamente
salvos
apresentados
cannot be renamed.
cannot
be renamed.
Thesa
auto-saved
Show
displayed
the eHistory
History
nomeados
de files
acordo
com aindata
a horaTab
de are
suas
criaes,
e no
podem to
serthe
renomeados.
named
according
date and time of their creation, and
cannotProfile
be renamed.
176 VENUE
Guide
176
VENUE
176 Guia
VENUE
ProfileProfile
Guide
Loading an auto-saved Show file

Carregando
arquivo Show
salvo file, replacing the
The
VENUEumsystem
loadsautomaticamente
the selected Show
The
VENUE
system
loads
the selected Show file, replacing the
4 Click
the
Load
button.
current
system
configuration,
routing, and control settings
current
system
configuration,
routing, and control settings
4 Clique
no boto
Load.
with those contained in the selected file.
with
those
contained
thethe
selected
file.Show file, replacing the
The
VENUE
system in
loads
selected
Ocurrent
sistemasystem
VENUEconfiguration,
carrega o arquivo
Show and
selecionado,
substituindo
routing,
control settings
configuraes,
roteamentos
e
ajustes
de
controle
atuais
do sistema
with those contained in the selected file.
por aqueles contidos no arquivo selecionado.
Chapter
Snapshots
Captulo
21:21:
Snapshots
Snapshots permitem flexibilizar o armazenamento e o carregamente de uma ampla gama de parmetros de mixagem. Snapshots
Snapshots
let you
flexibly
and recall
a wide range
mixing
parameters.
Snapshots
commonly
to store
the mixer
so
geralmente
usados
para store
armazenar
a configurao
doofmixer
e os
nveis individuais
de are
cenas,
msicasused
ou sons
dispostos
em uma
setup and levels
for individual
scenes,
songs or
sound
cues in ade
performance.
Snapshots
storetambm
information
and
perfomance.
Snapshots
armazenam
informaes
sobre
parmetros
canais e mixagem,
e podem
incluirabout
MTC, channels
tempo, e instrues
parameters, and can also include MTC, tempo, and crossfade instructions.
demix
crossfade.
Snapshotsso
arecontidos
contained
and stored as como
part ofparte
a Show.
A single
file can
contain
up to
999conter
snapshots.
Snapshots
are conSnapshots
e armazenados
de um
Show.Show
Um nico
arquivo
Show
pode
at 999
snapshots.
Snapshots
Stage
Rack
Features
Additional
Required
Components
trolled
from
the
on-screen
or from
the Snapshot
on
console.
Once
snapshots
can be recalled
so
controlados
pela
pgina Snapshots page,
na tela,
ou pelos
controles controls
Snapshot
nathe
console.
Uma
vezstored,
armazenados,
snapshots
podem ser
carregados
ou automaticamente
(disparados
eventos
ou MTC).
tambm
disparar
eventos.
O sistema
manuallymanual
or automatically
(triggered by
events or por
MTC).
Snapshots
canSnapshots
also trigger
events.podem
The system
also
provides
a varietytambm
of
oferece
umatovariedade
de mtodos
para editar,
visualizar
methods
edit, preview,
and manage
snapshot
data.e gerenciar dados snapshot.

DVI supported.
Audio I/O
Snapshots
Page
Pgina
Snapshots

The Snapshots page provides controls for storing, recalling, and managing snapshots, providing a central location for setting up
A pginaindividually
Snapshots oferece
controles
parapower.
armazenamento, carregamento e gerenciamento de snapshots, colocando disposio uma
selectable
phantom
and replaying automated performances.
central
para
configurar
e
reproduzir
performances
automatizadas.
a Digital
Data Type
Main and Recall Safe tabs
Snapshot
Chase MTC Command
from Scope
Avid or assembled
by your
preferred vendor.
Current Target
Crossfade
button
buttons

Snapshot
Recall
buttons
System Components
Included Components
Snapshots
VENUE
Profile console
list

buttons
Name
controls
Optional Components
MIDI/Plug-Ins
Near-field monitor speakers for mix position
monitoring
list

(for Talkback)
Notes
section
MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI
devices)
VENUE Mouse Pad

VENUE Profile Guide

Channel
Scope controls
Channel Scope
buttons

Rack(s) (see next)
Racks,
Tool Tips
and Snapshots
BannerMix
display
Each
System Restore CD
Figura 17.
da pgina Snapshots
Sees
ECx Ethernet
Control
Software
Figure 17. Sections of the Snapshots
page Installer CD

Next and Last Recalled

Snapshots display
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options


Chapter 21: Snapshots 177

outputs

Captulo 21: Snapshots
177
ParaTovisualizar
pgina Snapshots,
siga
umfollowing:
dos seguintes
display thea Snapshots
page, do one
of the
procedimentos:
Click the Snapshots tab on-screen.
display
do one of the following:
To
Clique
nathe
abaSnapshots
Snapshotspage,
na tela.
or
Click the Snapshots tab on-screen.
ouPress the Snapshots switch in the View Modes section.
or
thein
Snapshots
View
Mode
button togPressione
switchpressing
Snapshots
na
seo
View
Modes.
Press Repeatedly
theoSnapshots
switch
the
View
Modes
section.
gles between the Main and Recall Safe tabs.
Pressionarpressing
repetidamente
o boto
Snapshots
ViewtogMode
Repeatedly
the Snapshots
View
Mode button
alterna
entre
as
abas
Main
e
Recall
Safe.
gles between
the MainSafe
and Recall Safe tabs.
Main
and Recall
MainThe
e Recall
Safe screen provides the Main and Recall Safe tabs.
Snapshots
Main and Recall Safe
A tela
Snapshots
oferece
as abassnapshot
Main e Recall
Safe.
Main
Provides
the primary
controls.
The Snapshots screen provides the Main and Recall Safe tabs.
Recall
Safe
matrix offundamentais.
channel parameters that can
Main
Oferece
osProvides
controlesasnapshot
Main Provides the primary snapshot controls.
be globally safed (or isolated) from Recall for all snapshots.
Recall
matriz
parmetros
de canais
que
RecallSafe
SafeOferece
Providesuma
a matrix
of de
channel
parameters
that can
podem
ser protegidos
(ouRecall
isolados)
do snapshots.
Recall de todos
be globally
safed (orglobalmente
isolated) from
for all
Snapshots List
os snapshots.
Snapshots can be targeted, renamed, recalled, previewed, edList
ited, locked, reordered, duplicated, searched, and deleted from
the Snapshots
Snapshots
can belist.
targeted,
renamed, renomeados,
recalled, previewed,
edSnapshots
podem
ser selecionaods,
visualizados,
Lista
Snapshots
Snapshots
ited, locked,
reordered,
duplicated,
searched,
and deleted
from
editados,
travados,
reordenados,
duplicados,
procurados
e apagados
dathe
lista
Snapshots.
Snapshots
list.
Snapshot Command Buttons
Botes
de Comando
de Snapshot
Disable
Temporarily
disables all snapshot functions.
Snapshot Command Buttons
Disable
Desabilita
temporariamente
todas the
as funes
Preview
An offline
mode in which
consolesnapshot.
continues to
Disable Temporarily disables all snapshot functions.

process audio using its settings at the time Preview is invoked,
Preview
Modo
offline
que
a console continua
a processar
udio
letting
you
recall, em
edit
and
snapshots
without affectPreview
An
offline
mode
in manage
which the
console continues
to
utilizando suas configuraes no momento em que um Preview
ing
the
current
mix.
process audio using its settings at the time Preview is invoked,
chamado, permitindo recarregar, editar e gerenciar snapshots sem

letting
you recall,
edit and manage snapshots without affectafetar
a mixagem
Recall
Recallsatual.
the targeted snapshot, updating the console to
ing the current mix.

reflect the status of all scoped data types and channels in the
Recall Recarrega o snapshot alvo, atualizando a console para
snapshot
(subject
to the snapshot,
current Recall
Safe settings).
Recall
Recalls
the targeted
updating
the console to
refletir o status de todos os tipos de dados e canais abrangidos no

reflect the
statusaos
of ajustes
all scoped
data types
and
channels in the
snapshot
de Recall
Safe
atuais).
Store (sujeito
Stores the
current state
of the
console
in the targeted
snapshot (subject to the current Recall Safe settings).

snapshot for all data types and channels, overwriting any ex-
Store Armazena o estado atual da console no snapshot alvo para

isting
datathe
in current
the snapshot.
Store
of the
console in the
targeted
todos
osStores
tipos
de
dados
e state
canais,
sobrescrevendo
qualquer
dados
snapshotno
forsnapshot.
all data types and channels, overwriting any exexistentes
Propagate Enables Propagate mode. Lets you apply isolated

isting data in the snapshot.
changes to one or more snapshots at once (such as updating a
Propagate Habilita o modo Propagate. Permite aplicar modificaes
channel
EQ
all snapshots).
Propagate
mode. de
Letsuma
yous
apply
isoladas
emEnables
um across
ou Propagate
mais
snapshots
vez isolated
(como uma
changes tona
one
snapshots
at once
(such as updating a
atualizao
EQor
demore
um canal
em todos
os snapshots).
Edit Enables Edit mode. Lets you adjust parameters freely and
channel EQ across all snapshots).
those
changes
one or more
Changes
can
Edit apply
Habilita
o modo
Edit.toPermite
ajustarsnapshots.
parmetros
livremente
be
applied
in
Absolute
or
Relative
fashion.
Enables
mode. Letsayou
parameters
freely
and
e Edit
aplicar
essasEdit
modificaes
um adjust
ou mais
snapshots.
Alteraes
apply ser
those
changes
one or
more snapshots.
podem
aplicadas
detomodo
Absolute
ou Relative.Changes can
be applied in Absolute or Relative fashion.
Undo
console
ao last
ltimo
comando
Undo Reverte
Returns a
the
consoleaotoestado
its stateanterior
before the
snapshot
snapshot.
command.
Undo
Returns
console
to its
state
before
the last
snapshot
New
umthe
novo
snapshot
que
captura
o estado
atual
de
todos
NewCria
Creates
a new
snapshot
that
captures
the current
state
of os
command.
tipos
de
dados
e
canais.
all data types and channels.
New Creates a new snapshot that captures the current state of
Duplicate
uma acpia
snapshots
selecionados.
DuplicateCria
Creates
copydos
of the
selected
snapshots.
all data types and channels.
Clear
o contedo
snapshot
selecionado,
masretains
mantm
ClearRemove
Clears the
contents do
of the
targeted
snapshot, but
Duplicate Creates a copy of the selected snapshots.
qualquer
informao
associada.
any associated
MTCMTC
information.
Clear Clears the contents of the targeted snapshot, but retains
Delete
os the
snapshots
selecionados.
DeleteApaga
Deletes
targeted
snapshots.
any associated MTC information.
Controles
de Abrangncia
Snapshot
Delete
Deletes
the targetedde
snapshots.
Snapshot Scope Controls
A seleo dos tipos de dados e canais a serem recarregados

The selection of data types and channels to be recalled is reatribuda como
a abrangncia
do snapshot. A abrangncia dos
Snapshot
Scope
Controls
ferredato
as the
scope of a snapshot.
The
scope
ofcada
data snapshot.
to be redados
serem
recarregados
tambm
salva
com
called
is also
within
each
snapshot.
The
selection
ofstored
data types
and
channels
to be recalled is referred
to as the
scope ofData
a snapshot.
The scopenaoftela
datadeterminam
to be re- (e
Os botes
Snapshot
Type e Channels
The Snapshot
Datatipos
Type buttons
and
Channels
apresentam)
quais
dados
soon-screen
recarregados
para dequais
called
is also stored
within de
each
snapshot.
termine
(and
display)
which
data
types
are
recalled
for
which
canais na console.
channels
onData
the console.
The
Snapshot
Type buttons and on-screen Channels de-
A aba Recall
Safe oferece
global
do estado
termine
(and display)
which controle
data types
are recalled
for proteo
which de
The Recall para
Safe tab
providesem
global
control
of automation safe
automao
parmetros
canais
individuais.
channels
on the console.
status for parameters on individual channels.
Estados
Abrangncia
The
RecalldeSafe
tab provides global control of automation safe
status
for
parameters
Scope States on individual channels.
Scoped A indicao vermelha sinaliza que o tipo de dado ou canal

Scoped
Red display
indicates that
the
data type
or carregamento
channel is
est
atualmente
na abrangncia
e ser
afetado
por um
Scope States
de
snapshot.
currently
scoped and will be affected by snapshot recall.
Scoped Red display indicates that the data type or channel is
NotScoped
ScopedAGray
display
indicates
datade
type
or ou
chanNot
indicao
cinza
sinalizathat
quethe
o tipo
dado
canal
currently scoped and will be affected by snapshot recall.
est
atualmente
fora scoped
da abrangncia
e no
ser afetado
por um
nel is
not currently
and will not
be affected
by snapcarregamento
dedisplay
snapshot.
shot
recall.
Not
Scoped
Gray
indicates that the data type or channel is not currently scoped and will not be affected by snapBotes Snapshot Data Type
shot recall.
Data Type Scope Buttons
Os botes Snapshot Data Type apresentam o estado de abrangncia

Thetipos
Snapshot
Data Type buttons display
status
dos
de controles
na scope
console.
Vejafor
a the
Tabela
Data
Type
Scope ofcorrespondentes
Buttons
corresponding
controls
on the console. See Table 22
22
na pgina 201types
para uma
lista completa.
onSnapshot
page 201Data
for aType
complete
list.display scope status for the
The
buttons
corresponding types of controls on the console. See Table 22
on page 201 for a complete list.
Data type
currently
MIDI and
scoped
Plug-Ins
Data
type
(red)
currently
MIDI and
scoped
Plug-Ins
(red)
Data type
Notes
not currently
scoped
Data
type
(gray)
Notes
not currently
Data Type Scope buttons showing different scope states
scoped
Botes Data Type Scope mostrando diferentes estados de abrangncia de MIDI e plug(gray)
ins (vermelho)
Data Type Scope buttons showing different scope states
178
Guia VENUE Profile
Channel Scope Controls

Channel
ChannelScope
ScopeControls
Controls
Channels are included or excluded from snapshots by clicking
Controles de Abrangncia de Canal
Channels are included or excluded from snapshots by clicking
Selected Channel Indication

Indicao de Canais Selecionados
Selected
SelectedChannel
ChannelIndication
Indication
The Snapshots page indicates the currently selected channel.
The Snapshots page indicates the currently selected channel.
Canais
so includos
ouSnapshot
excludos
de from
snapshots
sendo
clicados
pgina
Snapshots
indica
os canais
atualmente
selecionados.
them
on-screen
in
the
Channel
Faders
display.
The
Channels
Channels
are
are
included
included
ororexcluded
excluded
from
snapshots
snapshots
by
by
clicking
clicking AIfThe
TheSnapshots
Snapshots
page
page
indicates
indicates
the
thecurrently
currently
selected
selected
channel.
channel.
them
on-screen
in
the Snapshot
Channel
Faders
display.
The
If the
the selected
selected channel
channel is
is not
not scoped
scoped in
in the
the currently
currently sesena
tela
noon-screen
display
Snapshot
Channel
Faders.
Os
faders
Snapshot
Snapshot
faders
display
the
scope
status
of
each
channel
on
them
them
on-screen
in
in
the
the
Snapshot
Snapshot
Channel
Channel
Faders
Faders
display.
display.
The
The
Snapshot faders display the scope status of each channel on
snapshot,
it
indicated
with
a
highlight.
IfIf
the
selected
selected
channel
isis
not
not
scoped
scoped
inthe
thecurrently
currently
seselected
snapshot,
it is
ischannel
indicated
with
a blue
blue
highlight.
mostram o estado de abrangncia atual de cada canal na console, lected
Se
osthe
canais
selecionados
no
esto
na in
abrangncia
do snapshot
the
console,
with
indication
of
the
fader
positions
and
Snapshot
Snapshotalong
faders
faders
display
display
the
thescope
scope
status
status
ofofeach
eachchannel
channel
on
on
the
console,
along
with
indication
of
the
fader
positions
and
lected
lected
snapshot,
snapshot,
it
it
is
is
indicated
indicated
with
with
a
a
blue
blue
highlight.
highlight.
alm da indicao das posies dos faders e estados Mute
atualmente
selecionado,
indicados
com destaque
em azul.
If the currently
selected so
channel
is scoped
in the currently
mute
states
thatalong
will
result
by
recalling
the
targeted
snapshot.
the
the
console,
console,
along
with
with
indication
indication
of
ofthe
the
fader
faderpositions
positionsand
and If the currently selected channel is scoped in the currently
mute
states
will
result
by
recalling
the
targeted
snapshot.
resultantes
dothat
recarregamento
do
snapshot
selecionado.
selected
snapshot,
it
is
indicated
by
a
blue
outline
around
the
If
If
the
the
currently
currently
selected
selected
channel
channel
is
is
scoped
scoped
in
in
the
the
currently
currently
snapshot, it is indicated by a blue outline around
the
mute
mutestates
statesthat
thatwill
willresult
resultby
byrecalling
recallingthe
thetargeted
targetedsnapshot.
snapshot. selected
Se osfader
canais
selecionados esto na abrangncia do snapshot
on-screen
strip.
selected
selected
snapshot,
snapshot,
it
it
is
is
indicated
indicated
by
by
a
a
blue
blue
outline
outline
around
around
the
the
on-screen fader strip.
atualmente selecionado, eles so indicados por um contorno em
on-screen
on-screenfader
faderstrip.
strip.
azul ao redor da rgua de fader na tela.
Stage Rack Features
Audio I/O
8 analog output channels; expandable
Channels
Channels
not
Channels
Channelsup
notto 48 analog or
currently
scoped
currently
scoped
currently
scoped
currently
scoped
digital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
Channels
Channels
Channels
Channelsnot
not
(red)
(gray)
(red)
(gray)
currently
currentlyscoped
scoped
currently
currentlyscoped
scoped
(red)
(red)
(gray)
(gray)
Display
Snapshot
Channel
Fader
mostrando
diferentes
estados
de abrangncia
Snapshot
channel
fader
display
showing
different
scope
states
Snapshot
channel
fader
display
showing
different
scope
states
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O

DVI supported.

Snapshot
Snapshotchannel
channelfader
faderdisplay
displayshowing
showingdifferent
differentscope
scopestates
states
Channel
Fader
Position
do
Snake
Channel
Fader
Position
Posio
Faderconnectors
de Canal to enable primary and redundant (if
Selected
channel,
not
Selected
Selected
channel,
not scoped
scoped
Selected channel,
channel, scoped
scoped
Optional
Components
applicable)
connection
Channel
Channel
Fader
FaderPosition
Position to a VENUE FOH Rack.
(blue
outline)
(blue
outline)channel,
When
you
target
a
snapshot
with
scoped
channels
that
have
When
you
target
a
snapshot
with
scoped
channels
that
have
Selected
Selected
channel,
channel,
not
not
scoped
scoped
Selected
Selected
channel,
scoped
scoped
Quando voc seleciona um snapshot com canais em sua abrangncia
The followingindication
components
are optional,
and
must be
(blue
(blue
outline)
outline)
different
fader
positions
from
current
fader
positions,
the
When
When
you
you
target
targeta de
asnapshot
snapshot
with
with
scoped
scoped
channels
channels
that
have
have Selected
different
fader
positions
from
the
current
fader
positions,
the
Selected channel
channel indication in
in the
the Snapshots
Snapshots page
page
que
possuem
posies
fader the
diferentes
das
atuais,
asthat
posies
purchased
separately:
target
fader
positions
are
in
bright
red.
dechannel
canais
selecionados
pgina
Snapshotspage
different
different
fader
fader
positions
from
from
the
the
current
current
fader
faderpositions,
positions,the
the Indicao
target
fader
positions
are shown
shown
in
bright
red.
Selected
Selected
channel
indication
indicationna
ininthe
theSnapshots
Snapshots
page
dos
faders
alvo
so positions
apresentadas
em
vermelho
brilhante.
USB
flash
System
Components
target
targetfader
faderpositions
positionsare
areshown
shownininbright
brightred.
red.
Though the
selected
channel
Though
the currently
currently
selectedatualmente
channel is
is displayed
displayed in
in the
the sejam
Embora
os canais
transfer
of Show
data; 512
MB or largerselecionados
recommended)
Snapshots
page,
keep
in mind
mind
that
you cannot
cannot
target a
aindifdifThough
Though
the
the
currently
currently
selected
selected
channel
channel
is
is
displayed
displayed
the
theno
Snapshots
page,
keep
in
that
you
target
mostrados na pgina Snapshots, lembre-se de quein
voc
ferent
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
channel
from
this
The
currently
selected
(tarIncluded Components
Snapshots
Snapshots
page,
page,keep
keep
in
inmind
mind
that
that
you
you
cannot
cannot
target
target
different
channel
from
this
page.
The
currently
selected
(tar-aOadifpode
selecionar
um page.
canal
diferente
nessa
pgina.
canal
get)
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
channel
is
for
visual
reference
only.
To
ferent
ferentchannel
channel
from
from
this
thispage.
page.
The
Thecurrently
currently
selected
(tar(target)
channel
is indicated
indicated
for
visual
reference
only.selected
To select
select
atualmente
selecionado
jack
indicado
apenas
para
referncia
target
a
different
channel,
the
channel
Select
visual.
um
canal
diferente,
use
os
switches
get)
get)channel
channel
isselecionar
isindicated
indicated
for
foruse
visual
visual
reference
only.
only.
To
To
select
select
and
Dynamic
or
condenser
microphone
and XLR
mic
cable
and
target
aPara
different
channel,
use
thereference
channel
Select
Select
canais
ouScroll
os
botes
Channel
Scroll.
switches
or
the
Channel
buttons.
and
and
target
target
different
different
channel,
channel,
use
use
the
thechannel
channel
Select
Select
(for
Talkback)
switches
or dos
thea a
Channel
Scroll
buttons.
switches
switchesororthe
the
Channel
Channel
Scrollbuttons.
buttons.
Footswitches
(up
to 2) Scroll
Botes de Ao de Abrangncia de Tipos de Dados
Data
Typecables
Scope
Action Buttons
MIDI
(for connecting
Data
Data
Type
Type
Scope
Scope
Action
Action
Buttons
Buttons
All
Coloca
todos
os
tipos
de
dados
na
abrangncia
de is
uma
s vez.
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
the
All Turns on the scope for all data types
atclock
once.between
This
equiv-
All Turns on the scope for all data types at once. This is equivequivalente
aonsystem
clicar
em
todos
os
botes
Data
Type
para
que
fiquem
VENUE
and
external
digital
devices)
alent
to
clicking
all
of
the
Data
Type
buttons
so
they
are
All
All
Turns
Turns
on
the
thescope
for
for
all
all
data
data
types
typesat
atonce.
This
This
isequivequivalent
to
clicking
all
ofscope
the
Data
Type
buttons
soonce.
they
areisred.
red.
vermelhos.
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Snapshot
Snapshot
channel
channel
fader
fader
display
displayshowing
showingtarget
targetfader
faderpositions
positions
25-pin
D-Suball
cables
(for
connecting
to GPI
alent
alent
totoclicking
clicking
all
ofofthe
the
Data
Data
Type
Typebuttons
buttons
sosodevices)
they
theyare
arered.
red.
Channel
Mute
State
Channel
MuteCanal
State
None
Estado
None Turns
Turns off
off the
the scope
scope for
for all
all data
data types
types at
at once.
once. This
This is
is
Mute
Twodo
(2) console lights
Channel
ChannelMute
MuteState
State
None
Coloca
todos
osall
tipos
de
dados
fora
daatabrangncia
de
equivalent
to
of
Data
Type
buttons
so
are
None
None
Turns
Turns
off
offthe
the
scope
scope
for
for
all
alldata
data
types
types
atonce.
once.
This
This
is
is uma
equivalent
to clicking
clicking
all
of the
the
Data
Type
buttons
so they
they
are
When
you
target
snapshot
with
When
you
target a
aDust
snapshot
with scoped
scoped channels
channels that
that have
have
voc
Protective
Cover
s
vez.
equivalente
a
clicar
em
todos
os
botes
Data
Type
para
Quando
seleciona
um
snapshot
com
canais
em
sua
abrangncia
gray.
equivalent
equivalenttotoclicking
clickingall
allofofthe
theData
DataType
Typebuttons
buttonssosothey
theyare
are
different
mute
states
the
mute
the
target
When
When
you
youtarget
targetafrom
asnapshot
snapshot
with
withscoped
scoped
channels
channels
thathave
have gray.
different
mute
states
from
the current
current
mute states,
states,
thethat
target
que
fiquem cinza.
Rack(s)
(see
next)
que possuem
estados
Mute diferentes dos atuais, os botes Mute
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
gray.
gray.
mute
buttons
are
outlined
in
yellow.
different
differentmute
mute
states
statesfrom
from
the
thecurrent
currentmute
mutestates,
states,the
thetarget
target
mute
are outlined
in yellow.
alvo
sobuttons
contornados
em amarelo.
mute
mutebuttons
buttonsare
areoutlined
outlinedininyellow.
yellow.
Botes
de Ao
de Abrangncia
de Canais
The following
options
can be added
to VENUE Profile systems.
Channel
Scope
Action
Buttons
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
Snapshot
channel
fader
display
showing
target
Display
Snapshot
Channel
Fader
mostrando
posies
dosfader
faderspositions
alvo
Snapshot
channel
fader
display
showing
target
fader
positions

System Restore CD

Snapshot
channel
fader
display
showing
target
mute
Display
Snapshot
Channel
Fader
mostrando
estados
Mute
Snapshot
channel
fader
display
showing
target
mute states
states
Snapshot
Snapshotchannel
channelfader
faderdisplay
displayshowing
showingtarget
targetmute
mutestates
states

Channel Scope Action Buttons

For
details onScope
all VENUE
systemsButtons
Channel
Channel
Scope
Action
Action
Buttons
All Turns on the scope for all channels displayed on the cur-
Coloca
todos
os canais
apresentadas
na aba atual
(como
AllAll
Turns
on
the scope
for all
channels displayed
on the
cur- 148)
website
(www.avid.com).
rent
tab
(such
as
148).
Double-clicking
All
button
na
abrangncia.
Clicar
duas
vezes
no the
boto
coloca
todos
All
All
Turns
Turns
on
on
the
scope
scope
for
forall
all
channels
channels
displayed
displayed
on
onturns
the
the
curcur-os
rent
tab
(such
asthe
148).
Double-clicking
the
All All
button
turns
do
sistema
abrangncia.
oncanais
the
scope
for all
all
channels
on the
the system.
system.the
rent
rent
tab
tab(such
(such
asasna
148).
148).
Double-clicking
Double-clicking
theAll
Allbutton
buttonturns
turns
on
the
scope
for
channels
on
Mix
Rack
on
onthe
the
scope
scopeOptions
for
forall
allchannels
channelson
onthe
thesystem.
system.
None
Clicking
None
turns
for
all
None
Coloca the
todos
os button
canais apresentadas
na aba
None
Clicking
the
None
button
turns off
off the
the scope
scope
foratual
all fora da
abrangncia.
Clicar
duas
vezes
no
boto
All
coloca
todos
canais
channels
on
the
current
tab.
Double-clicking
the
None
button
None
None
Clicking
Clicking
the
the
None
None
button
button
turns
turns
off
off
the
the
scope
scope
for
foros
all
all
channels
on
the
current
tab.
Double-clicking
the
None
button
I/O Options
do
sistema
fora
dafor
abrangncia.
turns
off the
theon
scope
for
all channels
channels
on the
the system.
system.
channels
channels
onthe
the
current
current
tab.
tab.Double-clicking
Double-clicking
the
theNone
Nonebutton
button
turns
off
scope
all
on
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card that
provides
16 analog
turns
turns
off
offthe
the
scope
scopefor
for
all
allchannels
channels
on
on
the
thesystem.
system.
outputs
Chapter
21: Snapshots
179
XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card
that provides
8 analog
Chapter
Chapter21:
21:Snapshots
Snapshots 179
179
179
NextdeSnapshot
Indication
in Status
Indicao
Prximo Snapshot
no Diplay Status
Display
Next
NextSnapshot
SnapshotIndication
IndicationininStatus
StatusDisplay
Display
The Snapshot Status display shows the currently targeted
O The
display
Snapshot
Status
mostra
oshows
snapshot
alvo
(prximo)
em texto
The
Snapshot
Snapshot
Status
Status
display
thethe
currently
currently
targeted
targeted
(next)
snapshot
in display
red
textshows
directly
above
the display
of the
vermelho
diretamente
sobre
o ltimo
(mais
recentemente
chamado)
(next)
(next)
snapshot
snapshot
in
in
red
red
text
text
directly
directly
above
above
the
the
display
display
of
of
thethe
last (most recently recalled) snapshot. Pressing the Snapshot
snapshot. Pressionar o boto Snapshot Recall imediatamente
last
last
(most
(most
recently
recently
recalled)
recalled)
snapshot.
snapshot.
Pressing
Pressing
the
the
Snapshot
Snapshot
Recallobutton
immediately
recalls
the targeted
snapshot
and
recarrega
snapshot
alvo e faz dele
o ltimo
snapshot
chamado.
Recall
Recall
button
button
immediately
recalls
thethe
targeted
targeted
snapshot
snapshot
and
and
makes
it theimmediately
last
recalled recalls
snapshot.
makes
makes
it the
it the
last
last
recalled
recalled
snapshot.
snapshot.
Next snapshot (red)
Next
Next
snapshot
snapshot
(red)
(red)
Most
recently
recalled
snapshot
(green)
Most
Most
recently
recently
recalled
recalled
snapshot
(green)
snapshot
(green)
Next and Last Recalled snapshot display in the Status area
Indicao
do
snapshot
alvo e do
ultimo
snapshot
carregado
na
rea
Status
Next
Next
and
and
Last
Last
Recalled
Recalled
snapshot
snapshot
display
display
in the
in the
Status
Status
area
area
Snapshot Controls on the Console

Snapshot
SnapshotControls
Controlsononthe
theConsole
Console
Controles
Console
SnapshotSnapshot
controls arena
provided
in the Snapshots section.
Snapshot
Snapshot
controls
controls
areare
provided
provided
in
thethe
Snapshots
section.
section.
These controls
provide
direct in
access
toSnapshots
a few basic
snapshot
Controles
Snapshot
so direct
oferecidos
nato seo
Snapshots.
Esses
These
These
controls
controls
provide
provide
direct
access
access
to
a of
few
a few
basic
basic
snapshot
snapshot
commands
and
allow
manual
control
snapshot
recall.
controles
proporcionam
acesso
direto
a
alguns
comandos
bsicos
commands
commands
and
and
allow
allow
manual
manual
control
control
of of
snapshot
snapshot
recall.
recall. e
permitem controle manual do carregamento de snapshots.
Snapshots Section
Next Instantly recalls the snapshot immediately following the

Next
Carrega
instantaneamente
o snapshot
imediatamente
seguinte
Next
Next
Instantly
Instantly
recalls
recalls
thethe
snapshot
snapshot
immediately
immediately
following
following
thethe
most
recalled
snapshot.
This
switch mirrors
Recall
ao
maisrecently
recentemente
carregado.
Este
switch
espelha othe
boto
Recall
most
most
recently
recently
recalled
recalled
snapshot.
snapshot.
This
This
switch
switch
mirrors
mirrors
the
the
Recall
Recall
Nextbutton
button
the Snapshots
page.
Next
nain
pgina
Snapshots.
Next
Next
button
button
in in
thethe
Snapshots
Snapshots
page.
page.
The
Previous
and
Next
switches
combineselecionar
target anderecall
Os switches Previous e Next combinam
carregar
The
The
Previous
Previous
and
and
Next
Next
switches
switches
combine
combine
target
target
and
and
recall
recall
actions
in
one
step,
causing
the
next
or
previous
snapshot
to
em um passo, tornando o snapshot anterior
ou posterior
actions
actions
in in
oneone
step,
step,
causing
causing
the
the
next
next
orswitches
or
previous
previous
snapshot
to to ser
be
instantly
active.
These
switches
cannot
besnapshot
used
to preinstantaneamente
ativo.
Esses
no
podem
be view
be
instantly
instantly
active.
active.
These
These
switches
switches
cannot
cannot
be be
used
used
to
prepresnapshots
before
recalling
them.
usados
para
um
preview
de snapshot
antes
deto
carreg-lo.
view
view
snapshots
snapshots
before
before
recalling
recalling
them.
them.
F1
Mode
F1para
forPreview
Preview
Mode
F1F1
forfor
Preview
Preview
Mode
Mode
When the
Mute Mute
Groups/Function
section
is in
Quando
a seo
Groups/Function
est
noFunction
modo Function,
When
When
the
the
Mute
Mute
Groups/Function
Groups/Function
section
section
is
in
is
in
Function
Function
mode,
pressing
F1
engages
Preview
mode
(see
Preview
Mode na
pressionar F1 habilita o modo Preview (Veja Modo
Preview
mode,
mode,
pressing
pressing
engages
engages
Preview
Preview
mode
mode
(see
(see
Preview
Preview
Mode
Mode
pgina
191).
on
page
191).F1F1
onon
page
page
191).
191).
Para
mais
informaes
sobre
a Event
For
more
information
on how
to como
use theusar
Event
List toList
cus-para
ForFor
more
more
information
information
how
how
to
to
use
use
thethe
Event
Event
List
List
to 22,
to
cuscuspersonalizar
esta on
ouon
outras
funes
da
console,
veja o
tomize
this
or other
console
functions,
see
Chapter
Captulo
22,
Events.
tomize
tomize
this
this
or
or
other
other
console
console
functions,
functions,
see
see
Chapter
Chapter
22,
22,
Events.
Events.
Events.
Snapshots
List
Lista
Snapshot
Snapshots
Snapshots
List
List
Snapshots
Snapshots
Section
Seo
Snapshots Section
You can target (select), store, and recall snapshots from the
You
can
can
target
target
(select),
(select),
store,
store,
and
and
recall
snapshots
snapshots
from
from
the
the
Snapshots
controls
in
this
section.
VocYou
pode
selecionar,
armazenar
e recall
carregar
snapshots
pelos
Snapshots
Snapshots
controls
controls
in in
this
this
section.
section.
controles
Snapshots.
Select
Display
and Encoder
Select
Select
Display
andand
Encoder
Display
Encoder
Store
Store
Store
Previous
Previous
Previous
Recall
Recall
Recall
Next
Next
Next
Preview
Preview
Preview
Snapshots section on the console
Seo Snapshots na console
Snapshots
Snapshots
section
section
on on
thethe
console
console
The Snapshot controls in the Snapshots section perform the

The
Snapshot
Snapshot
controls
controls
in
thethe
Snapshots
Snapshots
section
section
perform
perform
thethe
OsThe
controles
Snapshot
nainseo
Snapshots
realizam
as seguintes
following
functions:
funes:
following
following
functions:
functions:
Store Stores the current state of all console parameters in the
Store
Store
Stores
Stores
the
current
current
state
state
of
all
all
console
console
parameters
in in
the
the
Store
Armazena
othe
estado
atual
daof
console
noparameters
snapshot
alvo
para
targeted
snapshot.
This
switch
mirrors
the
Store
button
in
the
todos
os
tipos
de
dados
e
canais,
sobrescrevendo
qualquer
dados
targeted
targeted
snapshot.
snapshot.
This
This
switch
switch
mirrors
mirrors
the
the
Store
Store
button
button
in
in
the
the
Snapshots page.
existentes
nopage.
snapshot.
O switch espelha o boto Store na pgina
Snapshots
Snapshots
page.
Snapshots.
Recall Recalls the targeted snapshot. This switch mirrors the
Recall
Recall
Recalls
Recalls
thein
the
targeted
targeted
snapshot.
snapshot.
This
This
switch
switch
mirrors
mirrors
thethe
Recall
button
the
Snapshots
page.
Recall
Carrega
o in
snapshot
alvo. Este
switch espelha o boto Recall
Recall
Recall
button
button
in
thethe
Snapshots
Snapshots
page.
page.
na pgina
SelectSnapshots.
Display and Encoder Turning the Select encoder scrolls
Select
Select
Display
Display
and
Encoder
Encoder
Turning
Turning
thethe
Select
Select
encoder
scrolls
scrolls
through
andand
selects
the targeted
snapshot
inencoder
the
Snapshots
Select
Display
and
Encoder
Girar
o
codificador
Select
percorre
through
through
and
and
selects
selects
the
the
targeted
targeted
snapshot
snapshot
in
in
the
the
Snapshots
Snapshots
list. The 6-character display shows the name of the currently
e list.
seleciona
osnapshot.
snapshot
alvo
na
lista
Snapshots.
Odisplayed
display
de
6
list.
The
The
6-character
6-character
display
shows
the
the
name
name
of of
the
the
currently
currently
targeted
A display
period
isshows
appended
to the
snapcaracteres
mostra
o nome
do snapshot
alvo.toUm
ponto
adicionado
targeted
targeted
snapshot.
snapshot.
A
period
A
period
is
appended
is
appended
to
the
the
displayed
displayed
snapsnapshot name to indicate whenever it has been edited since being
aoshot
nome
do snapshot
apresentado
indicar
se ele
foi being
editado
shot
name
name
to to
indicate
indicate
whenever
whenever
itpara
has
it has
been
been
edited
edited
since
since
being
recalled.
desde quando foi carregado.
recalled.
recalled.
Previous Instantly recalls the snapshot prior to the most rePrevious
Carrega
instantaneamente
o snapshot
anterior
aomost
snapshot
Previous
Previous
Instantly
recalls
recalls
thethe
snapshot
snapshot
prior
to to
the
the
most
recently Instantly
recalled
snapshot.
This
switchprior
mirrors
the
RecallrePrevimais recentemente carregado. Este switch espelha o boto Recall
cently
cently
recalled
recalled
snapshot.
snapshot.
This
This
switch
switch
mirrors
mirrors
the
the
Recall
Recall
PreviPrevious button
in the
Snapshots page.
Previous
na pgina
Snapshots.
ous
ous
button
button
in in
thethe
Snapshots
Snapshots
page.
page.

180
180VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
180
Guia VENUE Profile
Snapshots
Lista
Snapshotlist
Snapshots
Snapshots
listlist
Snapshot
Itens
SnapshotEntries
Snapshot
Snapshot
Entries
Entries
Each entry in the Snapshots List has a number (001999) and

Cada
item
nain
Snapshots
List possui
um
nmero
(001999)
e um
Each
Each
entry
entry
the
the
Snapshots
Snapshots
List
has
has
aand
number
a number
(001999)
and
and
name.
Toin
the
right
of each List
number
name(001999)
are
icons for
the
nome. direita de cada nmero e nome esto cones para os
name.
name.
ToTo
the
the
right
right
of of
each
each
number
number
and
and
name
name
are
icons
icons
for
for
the
the
currently
displayed
attributes.
Theare
Snapshot
List
lets
atributos
do
snapshotsnapshot
atualmente
apresentado.
A Snapshots
List
currently
currently
displayed
displayed
snapshot
snapshot
attributes.
attributes.
The
The
Snapshot
Snapshot
List
List
lets
lets
you
configure,
display
and
control
the
following
attributes
permite configurar, visualizar e controlar os seguintes atributosfor
para
you
you
configure,
configure,
display
display
and
and
control
control
thethe
following
following
attributes
attributes
forfor
each
snapshot:
cada
snapshot:
each
each
snapshot:
snapshot:
If either the MIDI Read or Generate feature is enabled,
SeIfoeither
recurso
MIDI
Read
ou
Generate
habilitado,
snapshot
If
either
the
the
MIDI
MIDI
Read
Read
orhave
or
Generate
Generate
feature
is enabled,
iscada
enabled,
each
snapshot
will
also
a est
timefeature
code
value,
trigger
intambm
ter
um valor
time
code,
indicador
de
trigger
ou
indicador
each
each
snapshot
snapshot
will
will
also
also
have
have
a
time
a
time
code
code
value,
value,
trigger
trigger
in-indicator, or send indicator. (See Adding MIDI Messages
to
de envio.
(Veja
Adicionando
Mensagens
MIDI
aMessages
Snapshots
dicator,
dicator,
or or
send
send
indicator.
indicator.
(See
(See
Adding
Adding
MIDI
MIDI
Messages
to to na
Snapshots
on
page
195.)
pgina 195.)
Snapshots
onon
page
page
195.)
195.)
Snapshots
If the System
Tempo
has been enabled in Options > Misc,
If
the
If
the
System
System
Tempo
Tempo
has
been
enabled
enabled
in
in
Options
Options
>ofMisc,
>MIDI
Misc,
Tempo
can
be
stored
for
each
snapshot
instead
Se o Tempo do sistemahas
foibeen
habilitado
em
Options
>
Misc, o
Tempo
Tempo
can
be
be
stored
stored
forfor
each
each
snapshot
snapshot
instead
instead
ofvez
of
MIDI
Tempo
podecan
ser
armazenado
para
cada
snapshot
em
de MIDI
(both
MIDI
and
Tempo
are
available
parameters
atMIDI
all
(both
(both
MIDI
MIDI
and
Tempo
Tempo
areare
available
parameters
parameters
atList
at
allall
(parmetros
tanto
MIDI
quanto
Tempo
sempre disponveis;
times;
theand
only
limitation
isavailable
thatesto
the
Snapshots
can a
nica
limitao
only
que
alimitation
Snapshots
pode
apresentar
apenas
times;
times;
the
the
only
limitation
is that
isList
that
Snapshots
Snapshots
List
can
canum
only
display
one
or the other
atthe
a the
time).
WhenList
the
Snapou outro
deList
uma
vez).
a Snapshots
List
est
configurada
only
only
display
display
one
orQuando
or
thethe
other
at at
aTempo,
time).
a time).
When
When
thethe
SnapSnapshot
is one
configured
toother
show
each
list
item
will
parashot
mostrar
Tempo,
cada item
da
lista
ir mostrar
o list
valor
associado
shot
List
List
is
configured
istempo
configured
to associated
to
show
show
Tempo,
Tempo,
each
list
item
item
will
will
show
the
value
witheach
each
tempo,
along
a cada tempo, juntamente com um cone Tempo On/Off. (Veja
show
show
the
the
tempo
tempo
value
value
associated
associated
with
with
each
each
tempo,
tempo,
along
along
with
a
Tempo
On/Off
toggle
icon.
(See
Adding
Tempo
Adicionando Dados de Tempo a Snapshots na pgina 196.)
with
with
a Tempo
atoTempo
On/Off
On/Off
toggle
toggle
icon.
(See
(See
Adding
Adding
Tempo
Tempo
Data
Snapshots
on
pageicon.
196.)
Data
Data
to to
Snapshots
Snapshots
onon
page
page
196.)
196.)
Se o If
sistema
inclui
umincludes
opcional
gravao/reproduo
Pro
the
If the
system
system
includes
a Pro
adePro
Tools
Tools
record/playback
record/playback
op-Tools,
opsnapshots podem ser configurados para criar um marcador (Marker)
tion,
tion,
snapshots
snapshots
cancan
be configured
be configured
to create
to create
a Marker
a Marker
in in
na gravao do Pro Tools sempre que o snapshot chamado. (Veja
thethe
ProPro
Tools
Tools
recording
recording
whenever
whenever
thatthat
snapshot
snapshot
is reis reMarkers do Pro Tools e Snapshots na pgina 196.)
called.
called.
(See(See
Pro
Pro
Tools
Tools
Markers
Markers
andand
Snapshots
Snapshots
on on
page
page
196.)
196.)
Cada snapshot oferece um cone Lock que alterna o snapshot entre
Locked
contra
gravao)
eicon
Unlocked.
Veja
Protegendo
Each
(protegido
Each
snapshot
snapshot
provides
provides
a Lock
a Lock
icon
thatthat
toggles
toggles
thethe
snapsnapSnapshots
na
pgina
188.
shot
shot
between
between
Locked
Locked
(write-protected)
(write-protected)
andand
Unlocked.
Unlocked.
SeeSee
Locking
Locking
Snapshots
Snapshots
on on
page
page
188.
188.
Botes Recall
Snapshot
Snapshot
Function
Function
Keyboard
Keyboard
Shortcut
Shortcut
Recall
Recall
Targeted
Targeted
Snapshot
Snapshot
Ctrl+R
Ctrl+R
Store
Store
Targeted
Targeted
Snapshot
Snapshot
Ctrl+S
Ctrl+S
Undo
Undo
Ctrl+U
Ctrl+U
AddAdd
or update
or update
MIDI/Plug-in
MIDI/Plug-in
datadata
to to
snapshot
snapshot
Right-click
Right-click
MIDI/Plug-ins
MIDI/Plug-ins
entry
entry
Recall
Recall
Buttons
Buttons
Selecting
Snapshots
Snapshots
Os
botes
Recall
Previous
() e Recall Next (+) no topo da Snapshots Selecting
Stage
Rack
Features
Additional
Required Components
Selecionando
Snapshots
List fazem que o snapshot anterior ou seguinte seja selecionado e
TheThe
Recall
Recall
Previous
Previous
() ()
andand
Recall
Recall
Next
Next
(+) (+)
buttons
buttons
at the
at the
toptop
You
can
can
select
select
single
single
snapshots
snapshots
or multiple
orbe
multiple
snapshots
snapshots
in order
in order
Stage Racks
are
The
following
components
must
purchased
separately:
chamado
de uma
sused
vez. with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage You
pode
selecionar
snapshots
individualmente
ou
mltiplos
of the
of the
Snapshots
Snapshots
ListList
cause
cause
thethe
previous
previous
or next
or next
snapshot
snapshot
to be
to be toVoc
target,
to
target,
recall,
recall,
duplicate,
duplicate,
edit,
edit,
lock
lock
or
delete
or
delete
them
them
in
the
in
the
Video Display
(15-inch
or greater
flat-panel
display
snapshots
para
marcar,
carregar,
duplicar,
editar, VGA
proteger
ou apagtargeted
targeted
and
and
recalled
recalled
in
one
in
one
step.
step.
snapshots
snapshots
list.
list.
Chase
canMTC
be used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs.
losrecommended;
da Snapshots List.
Habilita
ou
suspende
o carregamento automtico de snapshots
Chase
Chase
MTC
MTC
Audio
I/O
quando uma das opes MTC Read ou MTC Generate est
48
with
remotely
controllable
mic preamps
and
Enables
Enables
orinputs
suspends
or suspends
automated
automated
recall
recall
of snapshots
of snapshots
when
when
eieihabilitada.
selectable
phantom
power.
therther
theindividually
the
MTC
MTC
Read
Read
or
MTC
or MTC
Generate
Generate
option
option
is enabled.
is enabled.
Navegando
pela Snapshots
List
8 analog
output channels;
Navigating
Navigating
the
the
Snapshots
Snapshots
List
Snapshots
so destacados
em coresList
na
Snapshots list para
indicar:
Snapshots
Snapshots
are are
highlighted
highlighted
in color
in color
in the
in the
Snapshots
Snapshots
list list
to into indicate
dicate
the
the
following:
following:
Verde Indica o ltimo snapshot carregado

Green
Green
Indicates
Indicates
thethe
lastlast
recalled
recalled
snapshot
snapshot
Vermelho Indica snapshot atualmente selecionado
RedRed
Indicates
Indicates
thethe
currently
currently
targeted
targeted
snapshot
snapshot
Amarelo Indica que o snapshot o ultimo carregado e o atualmente

System
Components
selecionado
Yellow
Yellow
Indicates
Indicates
thatthat
thethe
snapshot
snapshot
is both
is both
thethe
lastlast
recalled
recalled
andand
currently
currently
targeted
targeted
snapshot
snapshot
Azul Indica que o snapshot parte de uma seleo mltipla mas

Included
Components
no
o Indicates
ltimo
carregado
ou snapshot
o atualmente
Snapshots
Blue
Blue
Indicates
thatthat
thethe
snapshot
is part
is part
ofselecionado.
aofmultiple
a multiple
snapshot
snapshot
carregados
oubut
selecionados
tambm
podem
ser
parte
desnapuma
selection
selection
but
not
not
thethe
lastlast
recalled
recalled
or currently
or
currently
targeted
targeted
snapAll
VENUE
Profile
systems
include
the
following:
seleo
mltipla
naand
lista.
Nesse
caso,
o nmero
also
azulpart
e part
oof
resto
shot.
shot.
Recalled
Recalled
and
Targeted
Targeted
snapshots
snapshots
can
can
also
be
be
a
of
ado
nome
vermelho,
verde
ou
amarelo.
multiple
multiple
selection
selection
in the
in the
list.list.
In this
In this
case,
case,
thethe
sequence
sequence
numnum Two (2) IEC power cables
berber
is blue
is blue
while
while
thethe
restrest
of the
of the
name
name
is red,
is red,
green
green
or yellow.
or yellow.
Atalhos
Tecladomount
de Snapshot
de
Monitor
Snapshot
Snapshot
Keyboard
Keyboard
Shortcuts
Shortcuts
Quando
a pgina
Snapshots
mostrada, voc pode realizar as
VENUE
Pad com esses atalhos de teclado:
seguintes
funesMouse
Snapshot
DVI supported.
ToPara
select
To select
multiple
multiple
contiguous
contiguous
snapshots:
snapshots:
selecionar
mltiplos
snapshots
contguos:
Shift-click
Shift-click
thethe
snapshot
snapshot
names
names
in the
in the
Snapshots
Snapshots
list.list.
Shift-click no nome dos snapshots na Snapshots List.

To clear
To clear
a selection
a selection
of multiple
of multiple
contiguous
contiguous
snapshots:
snapshots:
Para
limpar
uma seleo
de mltiplos
snapshots
contguos:
The
connection
between
FOH Rack
and Stage
Rack requires
Click
Click
any
any
snapshot
snapshot
name
name
in
the
in
the
Snapshots
Snapshots
list.
list. directly
Clique qualquer nome na Snapshots List.
from
or
or Avid or assembled by your preferred vendor.
ou
o knob
Select
na
Snapshots.
Turn
Gire
Turn
the
the
Select
Select
knob
knob
inseo
the
in the
Snapshots
Snapshots
section.
section.
Optional Components
marcar
desmarcar
snapshots no
contguos:
ToPara
select
To select
or de-select
ore de-select
non-contiguous
non-contiguous
snapshots:
snapshots:

Ctrl-click
Ctrl-click
Ctrl-click
the
the
snapshot
snapshot
names
names
in the
in the
Snapshots
Snapshots
list.
list.
nos
nomes
dos
snapshots
na
Snapshots
List.
purchased
separately:
(for Talkback)
Multiple
items
selected
in
Snapshots
Multiple
items
selected
in the
Snapshots
Vrios
itens
selecionados
nathe
Snapshots
List list list

VENUE
system
and
external
Snapshot
Snapshot
Type
Text
Text
Search
Search digital devices)
Busca
TypeType
Text
em
Snapshots
When
When
the
Snapshots
Snapshots
page
is displayed,
is displayed,
youyou
cancan
perform
perform
thethe
the
VENUE
Profilepage
Guide
Type
Text
Text
search
search
letslets
youyou
useuse
thethe
keyboard
keyboard
for for
fastfast
navigation
navigation
following
following
Snapshot
Snapshot
functions
functions
with
with
these
these
keyboard
keyboard
shortcuts:
shortcuts: Type
A busca Type Text permite utilizar o teclado para rpida navegao
ofna
the
ofSnapshots
the
Snapshots
Snapshots
List.
List.
List.
Protective
Dust Cover
Snapshot
Snapshot
Function
Function
Keyboard
Keyboard
Shortcut
Shortcut
Rack(s) (see next)
Target
Target
Next/Previous
Next/Previous
Snapshot
Snapshot
Up/Down
Up/Down
Arrow
Arrow
keyskeys
Target
Target
FirstFirst
Snapshot
Snapshot
in List
in List iLoks, and
Home
Home
key key
Racks,
Software
CDs,
Cables
Target
Target
Last
Last
Snapshot
Snapshot
in List
in Rack
List includes:
EndEnd
key key
Each
Mix
Rack
or FOH
Snapshot
System
Restore
Target
Target
Snapshot
at Top
at Top
ofCD
Page
of Page
Page
Page
Up Up
Target
Target
Snapshot
Snapshot
at Bottom
at Bottom
of Page
of Page
Page
Page
Down
Down
Select
Select
Multiple
Multiple
Contiguous
Contiguous
Snapshots
Snapshots
Shift-click
snapshots
snapshots
iLok
USB
Smart
Key
(for
storingShift-click
plug-in
authorizations)
Plug-in
installer
discs (if
any)
pre-authorized
Select
Select
Multiple
Multiple
Non-Contiguous
Non-Contiguous
SnapSnap-with
Ctrl-click
Ctrl-click
snapshots
snapshotsiLok
shots/Deselect
shots/Deselect
any any
Snapshot
Snapshot
Two (2) IEC
power
cables
One
Link cable for connection
to a VENUE console
Select
Select
All Snapshots
AllFOH
Snapshots
Ctrl+A
Ctrl+A
Create
Create
New
New
Snapshot
Snapshot
Each
Stage
Rack
includes:
Ctrl+N
Ctrl+N
VENUE
Profile
ToPara
search
To search
for for
and
target
target
a Expansion
snapshot:
a snapshot:
procurar
eand
selecionar
um
snapshot:
Options
1 Go
1 Go
to
the
to the
Snapshots
Snapshots
page.
The
following
optionspage.
can
1 V pgina Snapshots.
(www.avid.com).
2website
umthe
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
Siga
Type
Type
the
number
number
of the
of the
snapshot.
snapshot.
2 Do
2 Do
oneone
of the
of the
following:
following:
or or o nmero do snapshot.
Digite
Rack Options
Mix
ou
Type
Type
thethe
firstfirst
letters
letters
of the
of the
snapshot
snapshot
name.
name.
Digite as primeiras letras do nome do snapshot.
3 Press
3 Press
thethe
TabTab
keykey
to cycle
to cycle
through
through
anyany
snapshots
snapshots
thatthat
start
start
I/O
Options
with
thethe
same
same
letter.
3with
Pressione
a letter.
tecla
Tab para percorrer os snapshots cujos nomes se
AI16 Analog
iniciam
com asMic/Line
mesmasInput
letras.Card that provides 16 analog

outputs
Chapter
Chapter
21: 21:
Snapshots
Snapshots
181181
181
Centering
the
Centralizando
na Snapshots
List
Centering
the Snapshot
Snapshot
List
List
Centering the Snapshot List
The
> Snapshots
page
a
setting
to
The Options
Options
Snapshotsoferece
page provides
provides
a preference
preference
setting
to
A pgina
Options >>
Snapshots
um ajuste
de preferncia
para
The
Options
>the
Snapshots
page
provides
a preference
setting
to
always
center
Snapshot
list
on
the
last
recalled
snapshot.
always
center the
Snapshot
list on
the last recalled
snapshot.
sempre
centralizar
o
ltimo
snapshot
chamado
na
Snapshots
List.
always
center
the
Snapshot
list
on
the
last
recalled
snapshot.
setting
lets
you
the
immediately
This
setting
lets visualizar
you always
always
view
the snapshots
snapshots
immediately
EsseThis
ajuste
permite
osview
snapshots
imediatamente
acima
This
setting
lets you
always
view
the snapshots
immediately
above
and
below
(prior
to
and
following)
the
last
e abaixo
e seguinte)
ltimo
snapshot
Esse
above(anterior
and below
(prior todo
and
following)
thecarregado.
last recalled
recalled
above
below
tode
and
following)
theposition
last
snapshot.
This
only
affects
the
scroll
of
ajuste
afetaand
apenas
a (prior
posio
rolagem
itens
nasrecalled
Snapshots
snapshot.
This setting
setting
only
affects
thedos
scroll
position
of items
items
This setting only affects the scroll position of items
in
List. snapshot.
in the
the Snapshot
Snapshot list.
list.
in the Snapshot list.
Creating Snapshots
Creating
Snapshots
Criando
Snapshots
Creating
Snapshots
Snapshots
Snapshots can
can be
be created
created at
at any
any time
time to
to store
store the
the current
current
Snapshots
can
be created
at any
time
to store
thenew
current
channel
parameter
settings.
You
snapSnapshots
podem
ser criados
a qualquer
tempo
para
salvar os
channel and
and
parameter
settings.
You can
can create
create
new
snapchannel
and parameter
settings.
You
can
create
new criar
snapajustes
atuais
deincanais
e parmetros.
Voc
pode
novos
shots
manually
the
Snapshots
page
(see
Creating
New
shots manually in the Snapshots page (see Creating New
shots
manually
in the
Snapshots
page (see existing
Creating
New novos
snapshots
manualmente
naor
pgina
Snapshots
(veja Criando
Snapshots
on
page
182),
by
duplicating
snapshots
Snapshots on page 182), or by duplicating existing snapshots
Snapshots
na
182),
oubyduplicar
snapshots
existentes.
Snapshots
onpgina
page
or
duplicating
existing
snapshots
to build your
mix
as182),
you work.
to build your mix as you work.

to build your mix as you work.
Usetheo first
primeiro snapshot
emfileum
arquivo the
Show para
Use
in
to
Use
the first snapshot
snapshot
in a
a Show
Show
file para
to establish
establish
the basic
basic
estabelecer
os ajustes
bsicos
uma perfomance.
Use
the first
snapshot
in a Show
file to establish
the basic
settings
for
a
performance.
For
subsequent
snapshots,
use
settings
for
a
performance.
For
subsequent
snapshots,
use
Para os
snapshots
subsequentes,
utilize
os controles
settings
for
a performance.
ForSafe
subsequent
snapshots,
use
the
scope
controls
and
Recall
settings
to
selectively
rethe
scope
controls
and
Recall
Safe
settings
to
selectively
rede scope
abrangncia
e Recall
ajustesSafe
Recall
Safe
para carregar
the
controls
and
settings
tobetween
selectively
recall
only
those
controls
that
need
to
change
seccall
only those controls
need controles
to change que
between
sec- ser
seletivamente
apenasthat
aqueles
precisam
call only
those leaving
controlsother
that need
to change
between
sections
or
songs,
controls
unaffected
by
snapalterados
entre
sees
oucontrols
msicas,
no afetando
outros
tions
or songs,
leaving
other
unaffected
by snaptions
or songs, leaving other controls unaffected by snapshot
recall.
controles
shot
recall.pelo carregamento de um snapshot.
shot recall.
Criando
NovosNew
Snapshots
Creating
Snapshots
Creating New Snapshots

Creating New Snapshots
When
a
it
the
of
Quando
voccreate
cria um
snapshot,
ele captura
estadostate
de todos
When you
you
create
a snapshot,
snapshot,
it captures
captures
theocurrent
current
state
of all
all os
When
you
create a snapshot, it captures the current state of all
ajustes
da
console.
console
settings.
console settings.
console settings.
Snapshot list with Center Last Recalled Snapshot enabled

Snapshot list with Center Last Recalled Snapshot enabled
Snapshot
listawith
Center
Snapshot
enabled
Snapshots
List com
funo
CenterLast
LastRecalled
Recalled Snapshot
habilitada
To center
Snapshot
List
the
recalled
snapshot:
center the
the
Snapshot List
List on
onltimo
the last
last
recalledcarregado:
snapshot:
ParaTo
centralizar
a Snapshots
snapshot
To
center the
Snapshot Listno
on the last
recalled snapshot:
1 Go to the Options > Snapshots page.
1 Go to the Options > Snapshots page.
to the
Options
> Snapshots page.
1 V1 Go
pgina
Options
> Snapshots.
2 In the Snapshots General Preferences section, click to select
2 In the Snapshots General Preferences section, click to select
2 InCenter
the Snapshots
General
Preferences
section, click to select
Last
Snapshot
setting.
the
Center
Last Recalled
Recalled
Snapshot
setting.
2 Nathe
seo
Snapshots
General
Preferences,
clique para selecionar
the Center Last Recalled Snapshot setting.
o ajuste Center Last Recalled Snapshot.
Para
criar um
novosnapshot:
snapshot:
To create
a new
To create a new snapshot:
To create a new snapshot:
Set
parameters
on
whose
state
want
to
111 Ajuste
os parmetros
da console
estados
Set all
alltodos
parameters
on the
the console
console
whosecujos
state you
you
wantdeseja
to
1 Set in
allthe
parameters
on the console whose state you want to
store
snapshot.
armazenar
no
snapshot.
store in the snapshot.
store in the snapshot.
Click
New.
new
snapshot
appears
in
List.
222Clique
novo
snapshot
surge
na Snapshots
List.
ClickNew.
New.OThe
The
new
snapshot
appears
in the
the Snapshots
Snapshots
List.
2 Click New. The new snapshot appears in the Snapshots List.
3 For each channel you want affected when the snapshot is
For each
you que
wantdeseja
affected
snapshot
is
333Clique
em channel
cada canal
quewhen
seja the
afetado
quando
Forrecalled,
each
channel
youchannel
want affected
the
snapshot
is
later
click the
so that when
it is scoped
(displayed
later recalled,
click the channel
so that
it is scoped
snapshot
for posteriormente
carregado
(mostrados
em(displayed
vermelho).
later recalled,
click the channel
so that
it is scoped
(displayed
in
in red).
red).
in red).
Click to select-/de-select bank

Adding channels
toabrangncia
the scope of snapshot
a snapshot
Adicionando
canais na
Adding channels
to the scope do
of a snapshot
Adding channels to the scope of a snapshot
To
To quickly
quickly select
select (or
(or de-select)
de-select) banks
banks of
of channels,
channels, click
click their
their
Para
rapidamente
selecionar
(ouof in
desselecionar)
grupos
To
quickly
select
(or
de-select)
banks
channels,
click their
blue
labels
below
the
Channel
Faders
the
Snapshots
blue labels below the Channel Faders in the Snapshots
de canais,
cliquethe
nas
etiquetas
azuis
dos faders na
blue
labels below
Channel
Faders
inabaixo
the Snapshots
page.
page.
pgina Snapshots.
page.

182
Guia VENUE Profile
4 For each parameter of the scoped channels you want affected

when
the
snapshot
isthe
later
recalled,
click
the
corre4
each
parameter
of
the
scoped
channels
you
want
af4 For
For
each
parameter
of of
the
scoped
channels
you
want
af-af4 For
each
parameter
scoped
channels
you
want
sponding
Data
Type
button
so
that
it
is
scoped
(displayed
in
4fected
Clique
no
boto
Data
Type
correpondente
a
cada
parmetro
when
the
snapshot
is
later
recalled,
click
the
correfected
when
the
snapshot
later
recalled,
click
the
correfected
when
the
snapshot
is scoped
later
recalled,
click
the
corre4 For
each
parameter
ofisthe
channels
you
want
afdos
canais
de
alcance
que
deseja
que
sejam
afetados
quando
red).
sponding
Data
Type
button
so
that
it
is
scoped
(displayed
in
sponding
Data
Type
button
soisso
that
itrecalled,
is
(displayed
in in o
sponding
Data
button
that
it scoped
is scoped
(displayed
fected when
theType
snapshot
later
click
the corre-
snapshot
for posteriormente carregado (mostrados em vermelho).
red).
red).
red).
sponding Data Type button so that it is scoped (displayed in
red).
Stage Rack Features

can be
Plug-ins
included
in the scope of a snapshot
Plug-ins included in the scope of a snapshot
Plug-ins
included
in the
scope
of aofsnapshot
Plug-ins
included
in the
scope
a snapshot
Plug-ins
includos
no alcance
de um
snapshot
Audio
I/Oyou create a new snapshot it automatically inherits
Whenincluded
Plug-ins
in the scope of a snapshot
When
48
inputs
with
controllable
preamps
and
the
channel
and
data
scope
ofit
currently
targeted
Quando
voc
cria
um
novo
snapshot,
elemic
automaticamente
you
create
a
new
snapshot
automatically
inherits
When
youyou
create
aremotely
new
snapshot
it the
automatically
inherits
When
create
a type
new
snapshot
it automatically
inherits
herda
o
alcance
de
canais
de
tipos
de
dados
do
snapshot
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
snapshot.
the
channel
and
data
type
scope
of
the
currently
targeted
thethe
channel
data
scope
of the
currently
targeted
channel
and
data
type
scope
ofit the
currently
targeted
When
youand
create
a type
new
snapshot
automatically
inherits
atualmente
selecionado.
snapshot.
8snapshot.
analog
output
expandable
up to 48targeted
analog or
snapshot.
the
channel
and channels;
data type scope
of the currently
The
New command
canser
be undone.
O snapshot.
comando
New pode
desfeito.
TheThe
New
command
cancan
be be
undone.
The
New
command
can
be
undone.
New
command
undone.
Synchronization
and Control
I/O
Nomeando
Snapshots
Naming
The Snapshots
New command can be undone.

Naming
Snapshots
Naming
Snapshots
Naming
Snapshots
Novos
snapshots
soconnection
automaticamente
numerados
eappear
surgem
New
are
automatically
and Rack.
as como
applicable)
to anumbered
VENUE
FOH
Naming
Snapshots
<Untitled>
na
Snapshots
List.
Snapshots
podem
ser
renomeados
<Untitled>
inare
the
Snapshots
list.numbered
Snapshots
can
beappear
renamed
New
snapshots
are
automatically
numbered
and
appear
as as
New
snapshots
automatically
and
appear
as
New
snapshots
are
automatically
numbered
and
a<Untitled>
qualquer
momento.
Voc
pode
desfazer
operaes
derenamed
nomear.
at
any time.
You
canSnapshots
undo
snapshot
naming
operations.
in the
list.
Snapshots
can
be
<Untitled>
in in
the
Snapshots
list.
Snapshots
can
beappear
renamed
<Untitled>
the
Snapshots
list.
Snapshots
can
be
renamed
New snapshots
are
automatically
numbered
and
as
at any
any
time.
You
can
undo
snapshot
naming
operations.
at
time.
You
can
undo
snapshot
naming
operations.
at
any
time.
You
can
undo
snapshot
naming
operations.
<Untitled>
in
the
Snapshots
list.
Snapshots
can
be
renamed
ParaSystem
nomear um snapshot:
Components
To at
name
snapshot:
anyatime.
You can undo snapshot naming operations.
To
name
ados
snapshot:
name
snapshot:
To
name
a the
snapshot:
1To
um
seguintes
procedimentos:
1Siga
Do
onea
of
following:
Included Components
name
snapshot:
1
one
of
the
following:
To
Double-click
the
snapshot name in the Snapshots list or
1 Do
Do
one
ofa of
the
following:
1 Do
one
the
following:
Clique duas vezes no nome do snapshot nas Snapshots List

current
target
name
display.
All
systems
include
the
following:
the
Double-click
the
snapshot
name
in in
the
Snapshots
listlist
or or
one
ofProfile
the
following:
Double-click
the
snapshot
name
in
the
Snapshots
list
or
VENUE
Double-click
the
snapshot
name
the
Snapshots
ou1 Do
the
current
target
name
display.
the
Profile
console
current
target
name
display.
the
current
target
name
display.
Double-click
the
snapshot
name in the Snapshots list or
or
VENUE
Clique
com
o
boto
direito
no
nome
snapshot
e escolha
the
current
target
name
display.
Two
(2)
IEC
power
cables
or
or
Right-click
the snapshot name and do
choose
Rename.

or
Rename.
Right-click
the snapshot name and choose Rename.
or
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not included)
Right-click
the
snapshot
name
and choose Rename.
222Digite
um
para
othe
snapshot.
Type
a name
name
for
the
Type
a
for
the
snapshot.
2 Type
anome
name
for
snapshot.
3 Press
Enter
on
the
keyboard
or
click
another snapshot name.
VENUE Mouse Pad
2 Type
a name
for
the snapshot.
Press
Enter
on
the
keyboard
click
another
name.
Press
onProfile
thethe
keyboard
or ou
click
another
snapshot
name.
333 Pressione
Enter
no
telcadoor
clique
emsnapshot
outro
nome
de
3 Press
Enter
on
keyboard
or
click
another
snapshot
name.
Enter
VENUE
Guide
snapshot.
3 Press Enter
on the
keyboard
or click another snapshot name.
Adding
Notes
to
Snapshots
Right-click
thethe
snapshot
name
and
choose
Rename.
Right-click
snapshot
name
and
choose
Rename.
2 Type
a name for
the
snapshot.
Adding Notes to Snapshots

Notes
tosave
Snapshots
Rack(s)
(see to
next)
to Adding
store
the
to
theatnotes
in theYou
snapshot.
You
can
addsnapshot
notes
snapshots
any time.
do not need
Adding
Notes
tosnapshots
Snapshots
Adding
Notes
Snapshots
Protective
Dust
Cover
Adicionando
Anotaes
ato
Snapshots
You
can
add
notes
to
at any time. You do not need
You
cancan
add
notes
to to
snapshots
at any
time.
You
dodo
notnot
need
You
add
notes
snapshots
at any
time.
You
need
Voc
podethe
adicionar
anotaes
a snapshots
a qualquer
momento.
to
store
snapshot
to
save
the
notes
in
the
snapshot.
to You
store
thethe
snapshot
to to
save
thethe
notes
intime.
thethe
snapshot.
store
snapshot
save
notes
in
can
add
notes
at
any
You
do not need
Vocto
no
precisa
salvartoosnapshots
snapshot
para
salvar
assnapshot.
anotaes
no
To Racks,
add
or edit
comments
forsave
a iLoks,
snapshot:
Software
andin
Cables
to
store
the
snapshotCDs,
to
the notes
the snapshot.
snapshot.
To
add
or
edit
comments
for
a
To
addadd
or or
edit
comments
forfor
a snapshot:
snapshot:
To
edit
comments
a snapshot:
1 Double-click
the
or click the list icon to exEach Mix Rack
orNotes
FOH header
Rack includes:
To
add
or
edit
comments
for
a
snapshot:
Para
adicionar
ou
editar
comentrios
umthe
snapshot:
pand
the
Notes
field.
1
Double-click
the
Notes
header
or
click
list
icon
to
ex1 Double-click
thethe
Notes
orpara
click
the
listlist
icon
to to
ex-ex1 Double-click
Notes
header
or
click
the
icon
System Restore
CDheader
pand
the
Notes
field.
pand
the
Notes
field.
pand
the
Notes
field.
1
Double-click
the
Notes
header
or
click
the
list
icon
to
Double-click
in the
Notes
field
and
enter
text.CDno cone ex ECx
Software
Installer
12Clique
duasEthernet
vezes
noControl
cabealho
Notes
ou clique
para
pand
the
Notes
field.
2 Double-click
Double-click
in
the
Notes
field
and
enter
text.
expandir
o
campo
Notes.
2
in
the
Notes
field
and
enter
text.
StandaloneinSoftware
Installer
CDenter text.
2 Double-click
the Notes
field and
2 Double-click
in theKey
Notes
andplug-in
enter text.
iLok USB Smart
(forfield
storing
authorizations)
2 Clique duas vezes no campo Notes e digite o texto.


Recalling Snapshots
Recalling
RecallingSnapshots
Snapshots
Recalling
Snapshots
Carregando
Snapshots
Targeting
Snapshots
Targeting
Snapshots
Targeting
Snapshots
Targeting
a snapshot
lets you preview which data types and
Selecionando
Snapshots
Targeting
Snapshots
channels
will
be
affected
snapshot
before
Targeting a snapshot lets by
youthat
preview
which
data recalling
types andit.
Targeting
a snapshot
letslets
you
preview
which
data
types
and
Targeting
a snapshot
you
preview
which
data
types
and
When
a snapshot
is affected
targeted,
the
on-screen
Data
Type
buttons
Selecionar
snapshot
ter
umwhich
preview
derecalling
quaisand
channels
will
be
affected
bypermite
that
snapshot
before
recalling
it.canais
channels
will
be
affected
by
that
snapshot
before
recalling
it.
channels
will
be
by
that
snapshot
before
it.
Targeting
aum
snapshot
lets
you
preview
data
types
eWhen
tipos
de will
dados
afetados
pelo
antes
de
carregand
Channel
Faders
update
to
show
thesnapshot
data
types
and
chanWhen
a snapshot
snapshot
issero
targeted,
the
on-screen
Data
Type
buttons
When
a
targeted,
the
on-screen
Data
Type
buttons
a snapshot
is
targeted,
the
on-screen
Data
Type
buttons
channels
beis
affected
by
that
snapshot
before
recalling
it.
lo. Channel
Quandofor
umrecall
snapshot
toselecionado,
os botes
DatachanType e os
nels
enabled
by
the
and
Faders
update
show
thethe
data
types
and
and
Channel
Faders
update
tosnapshot.
show
the
data
types
and
chanand
Channel
Faders
update
to
show
data
types
and
chanWhen
a snapshot
is
targeted,
the
on-screen
Data
Type
buttons
Channel
Faders
na tela
so
atualizados para mostrar os canais e
nels
enabled
forfor
recall
by
thethe
snapshot.
nels
enabled
for
recall
by
the
snapshot.
nels
enabled
recall
by
and
Channel
Faders
update
tosnapshot.
show
the data types
and chantipos
de
dados
habilitados
para
carregamento
dorecall
snapshot.
Preview
mode
lets you take
theo console
offline to
and
nels enabled for recall by the snapshot.
editPreview
snapshots
in
their
entirety
without
affecting
the
current
Preview
mode
lets
you
take
the
console
offline
to
recall
andand
Preview
mode
lets
you
take
the
console
offline
to
recall
and
mode
lets you take
the console offline to recall
Additional
Required
Components
OSee
modo
Preview
permite
colocar
a console offline
para
mix.
Preview
Mode
on
page
191.
edit
snapshots
in
their
entirety
without
affecting
the
current
edit
snapshots
in
their
entirety
without
affecting
the
current
edit
snapshots
in their
current
Preview
mode lets
you entirety
take thewithout
console affecting
offline tothe
recall
and
carregar e editar snapshots sem afetar a mixagem atual.
See
Preview
Mode
on
page
191.
Themix.
following
components
must
be
purchased
separately:
mix.
See
Preview
on
page
191.
mix.
See
Preview
Mode
on
page
191.affecting
edit
snapshots
inMode
their
entirety
without
the current
Modo
Preview
pgina
191.
To target Veja
a snapshot,
do any ofna
the
following:
mix.Display
See Preview
Mode
on pageflat-panel
191.
Video
(15-inch
or greater
VGA display
To
target
a
do
any
of
the
following:
ToPara
target
a snapshot,
snapshot,
do
anyany
of the
following:
To
target
a snapshot,
do
of the
following:
Click
the
snapshot
name
in
Snapshot
list.
selecionar
um
snapshot,
sigaresolution).
um dosVGAseguintes
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
and
To
target
a
snapshot,
do
any
of
the
following:
procedimentos:
Click
the
snapshot
name
in
the
Snapshot
list.
Click
the
snapshot
name
in
the
Snapshot
list.
DVI
supported.
Click
the
snapshot
name
in
the
Snapshot
list.
Type the number or name of the snapshot on the keyboard.
Click
the
snapshot
nameofin
the
Snapshot
list.
Type
Type
the
number
or or
name
the
snapshot
on
thethe
keyboard.
Clique
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
the
number
or
name
of
the
snapshot
the
keyboard.
Type
number
name
of
snapshot
on
keyboard.
no
nome
do
snapshot
nathe
Snapshots
List.

Press
thethe
Home/End,
Page
Up/Page
Down, on
and
Up/Down
Type
the
number
orthe
name
of the list.
snapshot
onUp/Down
the keyboard.
Arrow
keys
to
navigate
Snapshot
Press
the
Home/End,
Page
Up/Page
Down,
and
Press
thethe
Home/End,
Page
Up/Page
Down,
and
Up/Down
Press
Home/End,
Page
Up/Page
Down,
and
Up/Down
Digital
Cable
Profile
Systems
Only)
Digite Snake
o nmero
ou o(VENUE
nome
do
snapshot
no teclado.
Arrow
keys
to
navigate
the
Snapshot
list.
Arrow
keys
to
navigate
the
Snapshot
list.
Arrow
keys
to
navigate
the
Snapshot
list.
Press
the
Home/End,
Page
Up/Page
Down,
and
Up/Down
Turn the Select knob in the ACS to scroll through the
Snap The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
Arrow
keys
to
navigate
the
Snapshot
list.
Pressione
as
teclas
Home/End,
Page
Up/Page
Down,
e Seas setas
shot
list.
Snapshot
names
appear
in
the
display
above
the
Turn
the
Select
knob
in
the
ACS
to
scroll
through
the
Snap
Turn
the
Select
knob
in
the
ACS
to
scroll
through
the
Snap a
Turn
the Snake
Select cable.
knob in
thecable
ACS can
to scroll
through the
SnapDigital
This
be purchased
directly
para
navegar
pela
Snapshots
List.
lectshot
knob.
shot
list.
Snapshot
names
appear
in in
the
display
above
thethe
Seshot
list.
Snapshot
names
appear
in
the
display
above
the
Selist.
Snapshot
names
appear
display
above
SeTurn
the
Select
knob
in
the
ACS
tothe
scroll
through
Snapfrom
Avid
or assembled
by your
preferred
vendor.
lectlect
knob.
lect
knob.
knob.
shot
list.
Snapshot
names
appear
in
the
display
above
the
Se- Os
Gire
o knob
Select
no ACS
para percorrer
a Snapshots
List.
The
current
target
snapshot
is highlighted
in red
in the Snaplect knob.
nomes
dos
snapshots
aparecem
no
display
sobre
o
knob
Select.
shots
list,
and
shown
in red is
inhighlighted
the
Status display.
The
current
target
snapshot
is
highlighted
in in
redred
in in
thethe
SnapOptional
Components
The
current
target
snapshot
in
red
in
the
SnapThe
current
target
snapshot
is
highlighted
Snapshots
list,
and
shown
in
red
in
the
Status
display.
shots
list,
and
shown
in
red
in
the
Status
display.
shots
list, and
shown
in red is
inhighlighted
the Status display.
The current
target
snapshot
in red in the SnapOThe
snapshot
atualmente
selecionado
destacado
embe
vermelho na
following
components
are optional,
and must
shots list, and
shown
in red in
Status display.
Recalling
Snapshots
Snapshots
e apresentado
emthe
vermelho
no display Status.
purchasedList,
separately:
Recalling
Snapshots
Recalling
Snapshots
USB
flash
disk (or other
storage device for
You
can
do the
following
whenportable
recallingUSB
snapshots:
Carregando
Snapshots
Recalling
Snapshots
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
You
do and
the following
whensuccessive
recalling snapshots:
can
Target
instantly recall
snapshots
(next or
You
cancan
dodo
thethe
following
when
recalling
snapshots:
You
following
when
recalling
snapshots:
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
Voc
pode
fazer
o
seguinte
quando
carregar
snapshots:
previous)
You
Target
and
instantly
recall
successive
snapshots
(next
or or
do
the
following
when
recalling
snapshots:
Target
and
instantly
recall
successive
snapshots
(next
or
can
Target
and
instantly
recall
successive
snapshots
(next
previous)
Selecionar
e
instantaneamente
carregar
snapshots
sucessivos
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
previous)
Target
first,
then
recall one
more snapshots
previous)
Target
and
instantly
recallorsuccessive
snapshots (next or
(prximo ou anterior)
Target
Dynamic
or then
condenser
microphone
andallXLR
mic cable
Target
first,
then
recall
one
or recall
more
snapshots
previous)
Select
multiple
snapshots
and
them
sequentially
first,
then
recall
one
or
more
snapshots
Primeiro
Target
first,
recall
one
or
more
selecionar,
depois
carregar
umsnapshots
ou mais
snapshots
(for
Talkback)
Select
multiple
snapshots
and
recall
them
all
sequentially
Selecionar
Target
first,
then
recall and
one
or
more
snapshots
Target
snapshots,
change
Data
Type
orthem
Channel
Scope
vrios
snapshots
erecall
carreg-los
sequencialmente
Select
multiple
snapshots
them
all
sequentially
Select
multiple
snapshots
and
recall
all
sequentially
Target
Footswitches
(up
to 2)
snapshots,
alterar
os
ajustes
Data
ou
Channel
settings,
then
recall.
snapshots,
change
Data
Type
or
Channel
Scope
Select
multiple
snapshots
and
recall
allType
sequentially
Target
snapshots,
change
Data
Type
orthem
Channel
Scope
Selecionar
Target
snapshots,
change
Data
Type
or
Channel
Scope
Scope,
e
carregar.
settings,
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
then
recall.
settings,
recall.
then
recall.
settings,
Target then
snapshots,
change Data Type or Channel Scope
Undoing snapshot recall commands might cause audio to
BNC
cables
(for
settings,
then
recall.
Desfazer
comandos
de carregamento
de snapshots
be
interrupted.
Use recall
Undo
with
caution
in
performance.
Undoing
snapshot
commands
might
cause
audio
to
Undoing
snapshot
recall
commands
might
cause
audio
to topode
Undoing
snapshot
recall
commands
might
cause
audio
VENUE
and
external
digital
causarsystem
interrupo
do
udio.
Useinodevices)
Undo com cautela em
be
interrupted.
Use
Undo
with
caution
performance.
be be
interrupted.
UseUse
Undo
with
caution
in
performance.
interrupted.
Undo
with
caution
in
performance.
Undoing
snapshot
recall
might
cause
audio to
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(forcommands
connecting
to
GPI
devices)
perfomances.
Recalling
Successive
Snapshots
Instantly
be interrupted. Use Undo with caution in performance.
Recalling
Successive
Snapshots
Instantly
Recalling
Successive
Snapshots
Instantly
Recalling
Successive
Snapshots
Instantly
You
can instantly
recall successive
snapshots
in the Snapshots
Carregando
Snapshots
Sucessivos
Instantaneamente
Recalling
Successive
Snapshots
Instantly
list.
This
command
references
the
previously
recalled
snapYou can instantly recall successive snapshots in
the Snapshots
You
cancan
instantly
recall
successive
snapshots
in in
thethe
Snapshots
You
instantly
recall
successive
snapshots
Snapshots
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Voc
pode
instantaneamente
carregar
sucessivos
snapshots
na
shot,
not
the
last
targeted
snapshot.
list.
This
command
references
the
previously
recalled
snaplist.
This
command
references
the
previously
recalled
list.
This
command
references
the
previously
recalled
snapYou
can
instantly
recall
successive
snapshots
in
the snapSnapshots
Snapshots
List.
Esse
comando
tem
referncia
com
o
ltimo
snapshot
shot,
not
the
lastoptions
targeted
snapshot.
shot,
not
the
last
targeted
snapshot.
The
following
can
be added
to VENUE recalled
Profile systems.
shot,
not
the
list.
This
command
the previously
snapcarregado,
nolast
comtargeted
oreferences
ltimosnapshot.
selecionado.
To For
instantly
successive
snapshots,
one of the
following:
details
on last
all
VENUE
anddo
options,
visit
the Avid
shot,
notrecall
the
targetedsystems
snapshot.
ToPara
instantly
recall
successive
snapshots,
do
oneone
of
the
following:
website
(www.avid.com).
To
instantly
recall
successive
snapshots,
one
of
the
following:
To
instantly
recall
successive
snapshots,
do
of the
On
the
console,
press
the
Previous
or do
Next
switch
in following:
thesiga um
instantaneamente
carregar
sucessivos
snapshots,
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
To
instantly
recall
successive
snapshots,
do
one
of
the
following:
Snapshots
section.
On
the
console,
press
the
Previous
or
Next
switch
in
thethe
On
the
console,
press
the
Previous
or
Next
switch
in
the
On the console, press the Previous or Next switch in
Snapshots
section.
Snapshots
section.
On Rack
thesection.
console,
press the Previous or Next switch in the
Snapshots
or
Mix
Options
Na console, pressione os switches Previous ou Next na seo
Snapshots
section.
or
or
or click the Recall Previous () or Recall Next (+) but Snapshots.

On-screen,
I/O
Options
the
or
topclick
ton
at
ofclick
the
list. ()
On-screen,
the
Recall
Previous
or
Recall
Next
(+)
but On-screen,
click
theSnapshots
Recall
Previous
() ()
or or
Recall
Next
(+)(+)
but On-screen,
the
Recall
Previous
Recall
Next
but-
ou
ton
at
the
top
of
the
Snapshots
list.
AI16
Mic/Line
Input
that()
provides
analog
ton
at
the
toptop
of
thethe
Snapshots
list.
ton
atAnalog
the
of
list.
On-screen,
click
theSnapshots
Recall Card
Previous
or Recall16Next
(+) butmic/line
ton
thelevel
top inputs
ofnos
thebotes
Snapshots
Naat
tela,
clique
Recalllist.
Previous () ou Recall Next (+) no
topo da Snapshots List.

outputs
Chapter
21:
Snapshots
Chapter
21:21:
Snapshots
183
Chapter
Snapshots183
183

183
The Snapshot Recall buttons combine target and recall

The Snapshot Recall buttons combine target and recall
one step, Recall
causing the previous
next selecionar
snapshot to
Osactions
botesin
as or
aes
actions
inSnapshot
one step, causingcombinam
the previous
or
next snapshot toe
be
instantly
active.
These
buttons
cannot
be
used
to
The
Snapshot
Recall
buttons
combine
target
and
recall
carregar
em um
nicoThese
passo,
tornando
o snapshot
be instantly
active.
buttons
cannot
be used toanterior
preview
snapshots
before
recalling
them.
actions
in
one
step,
causing
the
previous
or
next
snapshot
oupreview
posterior
instantaneamente
ativo.
Esses
The
Snapshot
Recall
buttons
combine
target
andswitches
recall tono
snapshots
before recalling
them.
podem
ser
usados
para
um
preview
de
snapshot
be
instantly
active.
These
buttons
cannot
be
used
to antes
actions in one step, causing the previous or next snapshot
to de
Targeting
Before
Recalling
Snapshots
carreg-lo.
preview
snapshots
before
recalling
them.
be instantly
active. These
buttons
cannot be used to
Targeting
Before
Recalling
Snapshots
preview snapshots before recalling them.

Selecionando
eand
Carregando
Snapshots
To target Before
then Recalling
recall
a snapshot:
Targeting
Snapshots
To target and then recall a snapshot:
Targeting
Before
Recalling
Snapshots
1selecionar
Target the
snapshot
you want
to recall by clicking the snapPara
ethen
depois
carregar
um snapshot:
Target
the
snapshot
want
to recall by clicking the snapTo 1
target
and
recall
ayou
snapshot:
shot name in the Snapshot list, or turning the Select knob in
shot name in the Snapshot list, or turning the Select knob in
target
and
thensection.
recall
a snapshot:
the
Snapshots
1Selecione
Target
the
you
want
recall byclicando
clickingno
thenome
snap-do
1 To
o snapshot
snapshot
que
desejatocarregar
the Snapshots
section.
snapshot
na
Snapshots
List,want
ou girando
oby
knob
Select
nasnapseo
shot
name
in
the Snapshot
list,
or
turning
the
Select
knob
in
1
Target
the
snapshot
you
to
recall
clicking
the
2 (Optional) Set the scope of the snapshot by doing the folSnapshots.
(Optional)
Set
the scope
of or
the
snapshot
by
doing
thein
folthe2Snapshots
section.
shot
name
in
the
Snapshot
list,
turning
the
Select
knob
lowing:
lowing:
the
Snapshots
section.
(Optional)
Set channel
the
scope
of want
the do
snapshot
bythe
doing
theum
fol-click
For each
you
tosnapshot
recall in
snapshot,
2 2(Opcional)
Ajuste
a abrangncia
seguindo
dos
For each channel you want to recall in the snapshot, click
lowing:
seguintes
procedimentos:
2 (Optional)
Set the so
scope
snapshot
by doing
folthe
channel
thatof
it the
is scoped
(displayed
in the
red).
the channel so that it is scoped (displayed in red).
lowing:
em
cada
canal
deseja
que
sejasnapshot,
afetado
quando
Clique
For
each
channel
you que
want
to scoped
recall
inchannels
the
click to
For
each
parameter
of the
you want
snapshot
For each for
parameter
of the scoped
channels
you wantem
to
o the
posteriormente
carregado
(mostrados
channel
so snapshot,
that
is scoped
(displayed
in red).Data
in the
click
the
corresponding
Type
Forrecall
each
channel
youitwant
to recall
in the snapshot,
click
recall in the snapshot, click the corresponding Data Type
vermelho).
so so
that
it of
is
(displayed
in
red).
Forbutton
each
parameter
the
scoped
channels
you
want
to
the
channel
that
it scoped
is
scoped
(displayed
red).
Clique
no boto
Data
Type
correspondente
a in
cada
parmetro
button
so that
it is
scoped
(displayed in
red).
recall
in
the
snapshot,
click
the
corresponding
Data
Type
Configure
Recall
Safe
page
to
further
filterwant
snapshot
dos
For
each parameter
of the
scoped
channels
you
to
canais
da the
abrangncia
que
deseja
que sejam
afetados
Configure
the
Recall Safe
page
to further
filter snapshot
button
that
it is
scoped
in
red). Data
quando
oso
snapshot
for
posteriormente
(mostrados
data
on
recall.
(See
Recall
Safe
andcarregado
Channel
Automation
recall
in
the
snapshot,
click(displayed
the
corresponding
Type
data on recall. (See Recall Safe and Channel Automation
vermelho).
Safeso
onthat
page
em
Configure
the
Recall
Safe page
to further
filter snapshot
button
it 184.)
is scoped
(displayed
in red).
Safe on page 184.)
Configure
a pgina
Recall
Safe
facilitar
o Automation
filtro de dados
data on recall.
(See
Recall
Safepara
and
Channel
Configure
the
Recall
Safe
page
to
further
snapshot
3snapshot
Click theno
Recall
button on-screen,
or
pressfilter
the
Recall
switch
carregamento.
(Veja
Recall
Safe
e Channel
3 Click
the
Recall184.)
button
on-screen,
or
press the
Recall
switch
Safeon
onrecall.
page
data
(See
Recall
Safe
and
Channel
Automation
in
the
Snapshots
section.
Automation
Safesection.
na pgina 184.)
in
the Snapshots
Safe
on
page
184.)
3 Click the Recall button on-screen, or press the Recall switch
Snapshot
Recall
can
also
by ao footswitch
or any
3 3in
Clique
no
boto
Recall
naon-screen,
tela, be
outriggered
pressione
switch
na
the Snapshots
section.
Click
the
RecallRecall
button
or press
Recall Recall
switch
Snapshot
can
also
be
triggered
bythe
a footswitch
or any
number of other console functions in the Events window.
seo Snapshots.
in the Snapshots
number ofsection.
other console functions in the Events window.
For more
information,
see
Chapterby22,
Events. or any
Snapshot
Recall
can also be
triggered
a footswitch
For more information, see Chapter 22, Events.
Snapshot
Recall
tambm
podeinby
ser
disparado
number
ofRecall
other
console
thea Events
window.
Snapshot
can
also functions
be triggered
footswitch
orpor
any um
footswitch
ou
qualquer
nmero
de
outras
funes
da
console
Selecting
and
Recalling
Multiple
Snapshots
For moreofinformation,
Chapter in
22,
Events.
number
otherRecalling
consolesee
functions
the
Events window.
Selecting
Snapshots
na janela and
Events.
Para maisMultiple
informaes,
veja o Captulo 22,
For
more
information,
see
Chapter
22,
Events.
YouEvents.
can select and recall multiple snapshots to load them all
You can select
and recall multiple
snapshots
to load them all
Selecting
and Recalling
Multiple
Snapshots
in sequence, and in one step. This is useful to quickly reset the
in
sequence,
and
in
one
step.
This
is
useful
to
quickly
reset the
Selecting
and
Recalling
Multiple
Snapshots
Selecionando
Vrios
console
toe aCarregando
sub-cue
otherSnapshots
specific
pointtowithin
a longer
You
can select
and
recallormultiple
snapshots
load them
all
console to a sub-cue or other specific point within a longer
scene
or
cue
and
pick
up
from
there.
in
sequence,
and
in
one
step.
This
is
useful
to
quickly
reset
the
You
can select
multiple
snapshots
to load them all
scene
or
cueand
andrecall
up from
there.
Voc
podeto
selecionar
epick
carregar
vrios
snapshots
na sequncia
em
console
a sub-cue
or
other
specific
pointtowithin
a reset
longer
in sequence,
and in one
step. This
is useful
quickly
the
um nico passo. Isso til para rapidamente resetar a console para
scene
orto
cue
and pick
from
there.
To recall
snapshots:
console
amultiple
sub-cue
or up
other
specific
a longer
um
ponto
especfico
dentro
de uma
cenapoint
longawithin
e pegar
dali.
To recall
multiple
snapshots:
scene
or cuemultiple
and pick
up fromin
there.
1 Select
snapshots
the list (Shift-click to select
Select
multiple
snapshots in the list (Shift-click to select
To 1
recall
multiple
snapshots:
Para
carregar
vrios
snapshots:
multiple
adjacent
(contiguous) snapshots; Ctrl-click to select
multiple adjacent (contiguous) snapshots; Ctrl-click to select
To Select
recall multiple
multiple snapshots:
non-contiguous
items or to
a single item.
1
snapshots
in deselect
the list (Shift-click
to select
non-contiguous
items or to
a single item.
1 multiple
Selecione
vrios snapshots
nadeselect
lista (Shift-click
paratoselecionar
adjacent
(contiguous)
snapshots;
Ctrl-click
select
1 Select multiple snapshots in the list (Shift-click to select
2 Pressadjacentes;
the Recall switch,
clickselecionar
the Recallitens
button
snapshots
Ctrl-clickorpara
noon-screen.
contguos
2
Press
the
Recall
switch,
or
click
the
Recall
button
on-screen.
non-contiguous
items
or
to
deselect
a
single
item.
multiple
adjacentum
(contiguous)
snapshots; Ctrl-click to select
ou
para desmarcar
item).
non-contiguous
items
or
to
deselect
single
item.
If
multiple
snapshots
are
selected,
toggling
Data
Type or
2 Press the
Recall switch,
or click
theaRecall
button
on-screen.
If multiple
snapshots
are selected,
toggling
Data
Type or
2 Pressione
o switch
Recall,
ou clique
noall
boto
Recall
na tela. This
Channel
Scope
buttons
affects
selected
snapshots.
2 Press the
RecallScope
switch,
or click
the all
Recall
button
on-screen.
Channel
buttons
affects
selected
snapshots.
This
provides snapshots
a quick way
removing
a channel
dataortype
If multiple
areofselected,
toggling
DataorType
provides
a
quick
way
of
removing
a
channel
or
data
type
Se(such
vrios
snapshots
so
alterar
os can
botes
as
EQ)
from some
orselecionados,
allall
snapshots.
This
action
be
Channel
Scope
buttons
affects
selected
If multiple
are
selected,
togglingsnapshots.
Data
TypeThis
or
(such
as snapshots
EQ)
from
some
or all snapshots.
Thisos
action
can be
Data
Type
ou
Channel
Scope
afeta
todos
snapshots
undone
using
the
Undo
button.
provides
a
quick
way
of
removing
a
channel
or
data
type
Channel
affects
all selected snapshots. This
undoneScope
usingbuttons
the oferece
Undo
button.
selecionados.
Isso
uma maneira rpida de remover
(such
as EQ)
fromway
some
or
all snapshots.
Thisor
action
can be
provides
a
quick
of
removing
channel
data
um canal ou tipo de dados (comoaEQ)
de alguns
outype
todos os
undone
using
the
Undo
button.
(such
as EQ) Essa
from some
all snapshots.
This
action can
snapshots.
ao or
pode
ser desfeita
utilizando
o be
boto
undone
Undo. using the Undo button.

184VENUE Profile Guide

184
Recall
Recall Safe
Safe and
and Channel
Channel Automation
Automation
Safe
Safe
Recall
Safe
and Channel
Automation
Recall
Safe
e Channel
Automation
Safe global auThe Recall
Safe
tab in the Snapshots
page provides
Recall
The Recall
Safe
Safe tab
and
in the
Channel
Snapshots page
Automation
provides global auSafe
tomation safe settings of nearly every section of the console.
of nearly
every
section
of thedeconsole.
Atomation
aba Recallsafe
Safesettings
na pgina
Snapshots
oferece
ajustes
segurana
Safe
The Recall Safe tab in the Snapshots page provides global au-
de
automao
global
de praticamente
todas
sees da safe
console.
You
cansafe
also
place individual
channels
in as
automation
tomation
settings
of nearly
every
section
of theglobal
console.
You
canSafe
also
place
channels
in automation
safe
The
Recall
tab
in individual
the
Snapshots
page
provides
aufrom the console or on-screen. For more information, see Aufrompode
the
console
or
on-screen.
For
more
information,
see AuVoc
tambm
colocar
canais
individuais
of
salvo
automaes
tomation
safe
settings
of
nearly
every
section
the de
console.
tomation
Channelschannels
on page 187.
You
can alsoSafing
place individual
in automation safe
pela
console
ou naChannels
tela. Para on
mais
informaes,
veja Automation
tomation
Safing
page
187.
from
theChannels
console
orna
on-screen.
For morein
information,
AuYou
can
also
place
individual
channels
automationsee
safe
Safing
pgina 187.
tomation
Safing Channels
onFor
page
187.information, see Aufrom
the console
or on-screen.
more
Recall Safe
Recall
Safe
Recall
Safe
tomation
Safing
Channels on page 187.
Recall Safe lets you select which parameters on which chanRecall Safe
lets you select which parameters on which chanRecall
Safe
Recall
Safewant
permite
quais
parmetros de quais canais
nels you
to beselecionar
safed from
snapshots.
nels
you
want
to be safed
from snapshots.
Recall
Safe
voc
deseja
proteger
dos
snapshots.
Recall Safe lets you select which parameters on which chanRecall
Safe istoglobal
to allfrom
snapshots,
can be turned on or off
nels
you
want
beselect
safed
snapshots.
Recall
Safe
global
to all
snapshots,
can be
or off
Recall
Safe
letsisyou
which
parameters
onturned
which on
chanRecall
Safe
global
para
todos
os snapshots,
pode
ser
quickly,
and
provides
preset
capabilities
in the
form
of ligado
Scope ou
quickly,
andtoprovides
preset
capabilities
in the form of Scope
nels
you
want
be
safed
from
snapshots.
desligado
oferece
recursos
de preset
na
forma
Sets.Safe
Scope
Sets can
be eloaded
and
saved
likeon
Presets
for de
Recall
israpidamente,
global
to all
snapshots,
can
be just
turned
or off
Sets. Scope
Sets
can
be loaded
and
saved
just like
Presetscomo
for os
Scope
Sets.
Scope
Sets
podem
ser
carregados
e
salvos
built-in
EQ,
Dynamics,
and
plug-in
settings.
Current
Recall
quickly,
and
capabilities
in
form
of or
Scope
Recall
Safe
is provides
global
topreset
all snapshots,
can
bethe
turned
on
off
built-in
EQ,
Dynamics,
and
plug-in
settings.
Current
Recall
Presets para EQ embutido, Dynamics, e plug-ins. Os ajustes atuais
Safe
settings
are
with
the saved
Showin
file.
Sets.
Scope
canstored
bepreset
loaded
and
just
like
Presets
for
quickly,
andSets
provides
capabilities
the
form
ofShow.
Scope
Safe
settings
are
with
thejunto
Showcom
file.
de
Recall
Safe
sostored
armazenados
o arquivo
built-in
EQ,Sets
Dynamics,
and plug-in
settings.
Recall
Sets.
Scope
can be loaded
and saved
just Current
like Presets
for
Safe
settings
are
stored
with
the
Show
file.
built-in
EQ,
Dynamics,
and
plug-in
settings.
Current
Recall
Recall
Safe
Tab
Aba Recall Safe
Recall Safe Tab
Safe settings are stored with the Show file.

Safe
opens
the Recall
Safe
page
AThe
abaRecall
Recall
Safetab
abre
a pgina
Recall
Safe
na on-screen.
tela. A abaThe
Recall
The
Recall
tab
opens
the Recall
Safe
page
on-screen.
The
Recall
SafeSafe
Tab
Recall
Safe
tab
is
red
when
Recall
Safe
is
on
and
inefetivo,
effect, eand
Safe
vermelha
quando
o
Recall
Safe
est
ligado
e
cinza
Recall
Safe
tab
is
red
when
Recall
Safe
is
on
and
in
effect,
and
Recall
Safe
Tab
The
Recall
SafeRecall
tab
the
Safe
page
on-screen.
gray
when
Safe
offRecall
or when
nothing
is
safed. The
quando
Recall
Safeopens
estis
ou
nada
est
protegido.
gray when
Recall
Safe
isdesligado
off or when
nothing
is
safed.
Recall
Safe Safe
tab istab
redopens
whenthe
Recall
Safe
is on
and
in effect, The
and
The Recall
Recall
Safe
page
on-screen.
gray
when
Recall
Safe
is
off
or
when
nothing
is
safed.
Recall Safe tab is red when Recall Safe is on and in effect, and
gray when Recall Safe is off or when nothing is safed.
Indication
of active
from
the main Snapshots page
Indicao
de Recall
SafeRecall
ativo naSafe
pgina
Snapshots
Indication
of active
Recall
Safe
from
the main Snapshots page
RecallofeSafe
Displays
andthe
Controls
Displays
Controles
Recall
Indication
active
Recall
Safe Safe
from
main Snapshots page
Recall Safe
Displays
and Controls
Indication of active Recall Safe from the main Snapshots page
Recall Safe Displays
and
ControlsGlobal safe
Master
On/Off
Master On/Off
Global
Scope Sets
MIDIsafe
Channel for
Recall
Safe
tab
Scope Sets
Recall Recall
Safe Safe
Displays
and Controls
for MIDI
plug-ins
Channel and
tab
tabs
and plug-ins
tabs
Master On/Off
Global safe
Scope Sets
Channel for MIDI
Recall Safe tab Master On/Off
Global
safe
and plug-ins
tabs
Scope Sets
Channel for MIDI
Recall Safe tab
and plug-ins
tabs
Channel
Snapshot List,
Parameter matrix
Channel
Type
Snapshot
Parameter matrix
Recall, andList,
Store
Type
tabs
Recall, and Store
tabs
Channel
Snapshot
Displays List,
and controls in Type
the Recall Safe
page
Parameter
matrix
Displays and
controls in the Recall Safe page
Recall,
Store
Displaysand
e Controles
na pgina
Recall Safe
Channel
tabs
Snapshot List,
Parameter
matrix
Recall, and
and controls
Store in theType
Displays
Recall Safe page
tabs
Displays and controls in the Recall Safe page
On
On
Parameter Matrix
Parameter Matrix
On The master On button toggles the entire Recall Safe feature on Parameter
Matrix
On
Matriz
Parmetros
The de
parameter
matrix is a scrollable grid in which you can safe
The master On button toggles the entire Recall Safe feature on
The parameter matrix is a scrollable grid in which you can safe
or off globally.
When
lit (blue),
Recall
SafeSafe
is active.
When
parametersmatrix
and channels.
You can
undo
andyou
redocan
parameter
master
On
toggles
the
entire
Recall
feature
on
The
parameter
is a scrollable
grid
in which
safesalvar
OThe
boto
Onglobally.
ligabutton
ou When
desliga
recurso
Recall
globalmente.
A matriz
de parmetros
um You
grid can
rolvel
emand
queredo
vocparameter
pode
or
off
lito(blue),
Recall
SafeSafe
is active.
When
parameters
and channels.
undo
dark,
Recall
Safe
is
suspended.
matrix
operations.
or off globally.
When Recall
lit (blue),
Recall
Safe
is active.
When
parameters
and
channels.
You
can desfazer
undo ande redo
parameter
Quando
aceso
(azul),
Safe
est
ativo.
Quando
apagado,
parmetros
e
canais.
Voc
pode
refazes
operaes
na
dark, Recall Safe is suspended.
matrix operations.
dark, Safe
Recall
Safesuspenso.
is suspended.
matrix
Recall
est
matrizoperations.
de parmetros.
Snapshot List, Recall and Store
Parameters
Snapshot List, Recall and Store
Parameters
Snapshots
List,
Recall
e
Store
Snapshot
List, Recall
Parameters
The Snapshot
List and
and Store
its Recall and Store functions remain
The
Snapshot
List and
its Recall
and Store
functions
remain
visible
and available
from
the Recall
Safe page
at all times.
Snapshot
andfunes
its Recall
and e
Store
functions
remain e
AThe
Snapshots
ListList
eavailable
suas
Store
sepage
mantm
visible and
from Recall
the Recall
Safe
at allvisveis
times.
visible andpela
available
theSafe
Recall
at all times.
disponveis
pginafrom
Recall
em Safe
todospage
os momentos.
Channel Tabs
Channel Tabs
Aba
Channel
Channel
Tabs and Outputs tabs at the top of the parameter maThe Inputs
Channel Safe
Channel Safe
Channel Safe
The
Inputs the
andchannel
Outputstype
tabswhose
at the safe
top of
the parameter
matrix selects
status
you want to
The
Inputs
and
Outputsnotabs
atda
the
top of
parameter
maAs
abas
Inputs
e Outputs
topo
matriz
dethe
parmetros
seleciona
trix
selects
the
channel
type
whose
safe
status youmatrix
want are
to
view
orthe
edit.
Along
the
left
side
of the
parameter
channel
type
whose
safe
status
want Do
to lado
otrix
tiposelects
de canal
cujo
status
Safe
voc
deseja
ver you
ou editar.
view
or
edit.
Along
the
left
side
of
the
parameter
matrix
are
Typede
selector
which
will
change
depending
on
esquerdo
da matriz
parmetros
esto
abas
de tipos
deare
canais,
viewchannel
or edit.
Along
the
lefttabs,
side of
the as
parameter
matrix
channel
Type
selector
tabs,
which
will change
depending on
Channels
whether
you
are
viewing
Input
or
Output
tabs.
que
podem
mudar
dependendo
do
que
voc
est
vendo
na
aba
channel Type selector tabs, which will change depending on
Channels
whether
you are viewing Input or Output tabs.
Input
ou
Output.
Channels
whether you are viewing Input or Output tabs.
Shift-click channel type tabs to view more than one type at
Shift-click
channel
tabs
to view
morever
than
one typeum
at
once inchannel
theabas
scrollable
parameter
matrix.
Shift-click
as
dostype
tipos
canais
para
mais
Shift-click
type
tabs
tode
view
more
than one
typeque
at
once
in the
scrollable
parameter
matrix.
tipo
por
vez
na
matriz
de
parmetros.
once in the scrollable parameter matrix.
Global Safe for MIDI Output and Plug-Ins
Globalpara
Safe for Output
MIDI Output
and Plug-Ins
Global
Plug-Ins
GlobalSafe
Safe forMIDI
MIDI Outpute and
Plug-Ins
These checkboxes let you globally suspend recall of MIDI outChannel grid icons
Parameter grid icons
These
checkboxes
let
you globally
suspend
recall of
MIDI output
and/or
plug-in
changes.
They
are
considered
separate
These
checkboxes
let you
globally
suspend
recall oofcarregamento
MIDI
outEstes
checkboxes
permitem
suspender
globalmente
Channel grid icons
put
and/or
plug-in
changes.
They
are
considered
separate
Channel
gridmatrix
iconsfor Recall Safe
from MIDI
the
parameter
matrix
not
follow
the
Recall Safe
de
ou mudanas
emand
plug-in.
Eles
soseparate
considerados
Parameter
putsadas
and/or
plug-in
changes.
They
aredoconsidered
from the
matrix
and do not
theo Recall
Safe
Matriz
de parmetros
para
Safe
Parameter
matrix
forRecall
Recall
Safe
Onparameter
(ormatriz
Off)
status.
separadamente
da
de
parmetros
nofollow
segume
status
frommaster
the parameter
matrix
and do not efollow
the Recall
Safe On Parameter
matrix are
for Recall
Safe in the columns of the parameter
Parameters
represented
master
On
(or
Off)
status.
(ou
Off)
do
Recall
Safe.
master On (or Off) status.
Parameters
are
represented
in the
columns
of in
thede
parameter
matrix;are
channels
are listed
along
the
left
rows.
Parmetros
so
representados
nas
colunas
daside
matriz
parmetros;
Parameters
represented
in the
columns
of
the
parameter
Scope Sets
matrix;
channels
are
listed
along
the
left
side
in
rows.
canais
so
listados
do
lado
esquerdo
em
linhas.
ScopeScope
Sets Sets
matrix; channels are listed along the left side in rows.
Scope
SetsSets are presets for the Recall Safe page that can be
Clicking in the grid enables safe status for that parameter on
Scope
Clicking
in habilita
theParameter
gridoenables
status grid
for
that
parameter
on
Scope
Sets
are
presets
for
the
Recall
Safe
page
that
can
be
thatno
channel.
andsafe
Channel
icons
provide
Clicar
grid
status
protegido
para
aquele
parmetro
stored
and
loaded,
just
like
and
Dynamics
presets. Clicking
in
the grid
enables
safe
status
for that
parameter
on
Scope
Sets
sopresets
presets
para
a plug-in,
pgina
Recall
Safe
que
Scope
Sets are
for
the
Recall
SafeEQ
page
that
can
be podem
that
channel.
Parameter
and
Channel
grid
icons
provide
stored
andcan
loaded,
just like
plug-in,
EQ
and
Dynamics
naquele
canal.
conesall
Parameter
e Channel
oferecem
atalhos
para
shortcuts
to
safe
parameters
in
a single-click,
and
to safe
ser
armazenados
e be
carregados,
como
osand
presets
de plug-in,
EQ e that
Scope
used
a template
when
creating
newpresets.
shows,
channel.
Parameter
and
Channel
grid
icons
provide
stored
and sets
loaded,
just
likeas
plug-in,
EQ
Dynamics
presets.
shortcuts
to safe
all parameters
in anico
single-click,
and
to salvar
safe
proteger
todos
os
parmetros
em
um
clique,
e
para
Scope
sets
can
be
used
as
a
template
when
creating
new
shows,
entire
channels.
Clicking
these
icons
lets
you
quickly
toggle
Dynamics.
Scope
Sets
podem
ser
usados
como
um
template
quando
orsets
used
tobe
change
Recall
Safe settings
during anew
performance.
shortcuts to safe all parameters in a single-click, and to safe
Scope
can
used as
a template
when creating
shows,
entire
channels.
Clicking
these
icons
lets
you
quickly
toggle
canais
inteiros.
Clicar
nesses
cones
permite
alternar
rapidamente
or
used
to change
Recall
Safe
during
a performance.
criar novos
shows,
ou utilizados
parasettings
alterar
as
configuraes
recall
safe
status
for
entire
and
rows.
You
can
also
use
Like
presets
and
settings
files,
Scope
Sets
can be Recall
trans- entire
channels.
Clicking
thesecolumns
icons lets
you
quickly
toggle
or used
toother
change
Recall
Safe
settings
during
a performance.
o
status
protegido
para
colunas
ou
linhas
inteiras.
Voc
pode
recall
safe
status
for
entire
columns
and
rows.
You
can
also
use
Safe Like
durante
uma
perfomance.
Como
outros
presets
e
arquivos
other
presets
and
settings
files,
Scope
Sets
can
be
transthe
master
grid
icon
located
in
the
upper
left
most
corner
to
ferred
from
the
Filing
page,files,
making
it Sets
easy can
to maintain
and recall
safe status
entire
columnsno
andcanto
rows.superior
You canesquerdo
also use para
Like
other Scope
presets
and
settings
Scope
be transtambm
usar grid
oforcone
localizado
the
master
icon
located
in
the
upper
left
most
corner
to
de
ajustes,
Sets
podem
ser
transferidos
pela
pgina
Filing,
ferred
from
the
Filing
page,
making
it
easy
to
maintain
and
toggle
the
entire
grid.
transfer
Recall
Safepage,
configurations.
For more
information,
see the
mastertodo
gridoicon
in the upper left most corner to
ferred
from
the
Filing
making
it easy
to maintain
andPara
alternar
grid.located
tornando
fcil
manter
e
transferir
configuraes
Recall
Safe.
toggle
the
entire
grid.
transfer
RecallSets
Safe configurations.
For more information, see toggle the entire grid.
Using
Scope
on page 187.
transfer
Recall
Safe
configurations.
For more
see
mais
informaes,
veja
Utilizando
Scope
Sets information,
na pgina 187.
Using Scope Sets on page 187.
Using Scope Sets on page 187.
Grid master icon
Grid master icon
Grid master
icon SAFE
CHANNEL
CHANNEL SAFE
CHANNEL SAFE
None Some
None Some
None Some
All
All
All
Display states for grid icons in Recall Safe
Display estado
statesdos
forcones
grid icons
Recall
Safe
Mostrando
no gridinRecall
Safe
Display states for grid icons in Recall Safe

185
The display state of the Parameter and Channel grid icons in-
To safe individual parameters or channels:
Odicate
estado
dosstatus
cones
Parameter
e Channel
indica
o status
protegido
salvar
parmetros
ou canais
for
that
or row
as
follows:
To safe
individual
parameters
orindividuais:
channels:
The safe
display
state
of
thecolumn
Parameter
and
Channel
grid
icons in- 1 Para
Place
the
cursor above
the grid,
above a parameter or chanpara aquela coluna ou linha como segue:
dicate safe status for that column or row as follows:
nel
name,
or
above
any
Channel
Safe
button.
To be sureorthe
Place theo cursor
grid,sobre
above
parameter
chanou
None A dark Parameter or Channel grid icon indicates that no
11 Coloque
cursor above
sobre the
o grid,
o anome
do parmetro
To
safe
individual
parameters
or
channels:
The
display
state
of
the
Parameter
and
Channel
grid
icons
incursor
is
above
a
valid
area,
you
should
be
able
toTosee
at
least
To
safe
individual
parameters
or
channels:
The
display
state
of
the
Parameter
and
Channel
grid
icons
innel
name,
or
above
any
Channel
Safe
button.
be
sure
the de
Nenhum
Um
cone
Parameter
ou
Channel
escuro
indica
que
nenhum
canal,
ou
sobre
qualquer
boto
Channel
Safe.
Para
certificar-se
items
in
that
column
or
row
are
safe
enabled.
To safe individual parameters or channels:
The
of theor
Parameter
grid icons
inNonedisplay
A dark state
Parameter
Channel and
grid Channel
icon indicates
that no
safe
status
for
that
column
or
row
as
follows:
one
parameter
name
or channel
name
highlight.
itemdicate
nessa
coluna
ou
linha
est
protegido
.
que
o
cursor
est
sobre
uma
rea
vlida,
voc
deve
ser
capaz
de
dicate
safe
status
for
that
column
or
row
as
follows:
cursor
is
above
a
valid
area,
you
should
be
able
to
see
at
least
1
Place
the
cursor
above
the
grid,
above
a
parameter
or
chandicate
safe
status
for that
column
or row
as follows:
items in
that
column
or row
are safe
enabled.
1
cursor above
the
above
or
1 Place
Place the
the
above
the grid,
grid,
above a
a parameter
parameter
or chanchanSome A dark triangle inside a lit blue circle indicates that at
visualizar
noorcursor
mnimo
um
nome
de parmetro
ou canal
destacado.
one
parameter
name
or
channel
name
highlight.
nel
name,
above
any
Channel
Safe
button.
To
be
sure
the
2 Use
the Arrow
keys of
the
computer
keyboard
to move
the
nel
or
any
Channel
Safe
button.
be
the
None
A
dark
Parameter
or
Channel
grid
icon
indicates
that
no
nel name,
name,
or above
above
any
Channel
Safe
button. To
To
be sure
sure
the
None
A
dark
Parameter
or
Channel
grid
icon
indicates
that
no
least
one
that
column
or
row
is safe
enabled.
Algum
Um
tringulo
escuro
de
um
crculo
azul indica
None
AAitem
dark
Parameter
ordentro
Channel
grid
icon
indicates
thatque
no
Some
darkin
triangle
inside
a lit
blue
circle
indicates
that
at
cursor
is
above
a
valid
area,
you
should
be
able
to
see
at
least
cursor
right,
left,
up,
or
down
to
other
grid
points.
(You
cancursor
is
above
a
valid
area,
you
should
be
able
to
see
at
least
items
in
that
column
or
row
are
safe
enabled.
2 Use
Use as
the
Arrowado
keys
of
thepara
computer
keyboard
topara
move
the
cursor
is
above
valid
area,
you
should
be
able
to
see
at
least
in
that
column
or
row
are
safe
enabled.
peloitems
menos
um
item
na
coluna
ou
linha
est
protegido.
2
setas
teclado
mover
o
cursor
a
direita,
items
in that
row are
least one
itemcolumn
in that or
column
or safe
rowenabled.
is safe enabled.
one
parameter
name
or
channel
name
highlight.
not
navigate
to left,
parameter
or channel
gridpontos
icons,
or to
the(Voc
one
parameter
name
or down
channel
name
highlight.
All A lit (white) triangle indicates that all items in that column
cursor
right,
up,abaixo
or
other
grid
points.
(You
can-no
esquerda,
acima
ou
paratooutros
do
grid.
one
parameter
name
channel
name
highlight.
A
dark
triangle
inside
a
lit blue
circle
indicates
that at
Safe column.)
Some
A
dark
triangle
inside
a
blue
circle
indicates
at
or Some
rowA
are
safe enabled.
Todos
Um
branco
aceso
que
todos
os that
itens
pode
navegar
para
conesthe
decomputer
parmetros
ou
canais,
a
not
navigate
to
parameter
or
channel
grid
icons,
or move
toou
thepara
Some
Atringulo
dark
triangle
inside
a lit
litindica
blue
circle
indicates
that
atna Channel
2
the
keys
keyboard
to
the
All
lit
(white)
triangle
indicates
that all
items
in that
column
2 Use
Use
the Arrow
Arrow
keys of
of the
the
computer
keyboard
to
move
the
least
one
item
in
that
column
or
row
is
safe
enabled.
2
Use
the
Arrow
keys
of
computer
keyboard
to
move
the
least
one
item
in
that
column
or
row
is
safe
enabled.
coluna
ou
linha
esto
protegidos.
coluna
Channel
Safe.)
Channel
Safe
column.)
least
one
that column or row is safe enabled.
cursor
right,
up,
or
down
other
grid
points.
(You
or row
areitem
safe in
enabled.
3 Press
toleft,
enable
safe
status
the currently
cursorEnter
right,
left,
up, or
or disable
down to
to
other
gridfor
points.
(You cancancursor
right,
left,
up,
or
down
to
other
grid
points.
(You
canChannel Safe Controls
not
navigate
to
parameter
or
channel
grid
icons,
or
to
the
All
A
lit
(white)
triangle
indicates
that
all
items
in
that
column
focused
grid
point.
Continue
navigating
to
and
toggling
safe
not
navigate
to
parameter
or
channel
grid
icons,
or
to
the
All
A
lit
(white)
triangle
indicates
that
all
items
in
that
column
3
Press
Enter
to
enable
or
disable
safe
status
for
the
currently
not
navigate
to
parameter
or
channel
grid
icons,
or
to
the
Controles
Channel
3 Pressione Enter para habilitar ou desabilitar o status protegido
All A lit
(white)Safe
triangle indicates that all items in that column
Channel
Safe
Controls
Channel
Safe
column.)
or
row
are
safe
enabled.
status
ofoother
Channel
Safeparameters
column.)
The
SAFE
column acts as a global all channel setor
row
enabled.
focused
grid
point.
navigating
to and toggling
para
atual
pontoContinue
do and
grid.channels.
Continue navegando
para safe
outros
Channel
Safe
column.)
orCHANNEL
row are
are safe
safe
enabled.
or
override,
mirroring
the
SAFE
switch
on
the
console
and
Ating
coluna
Channel
Safe
atua
como
um
ajuste
global
todos
os
canais,
parmetros
e
canais
para
ajustar
o
status
protegido.
status
of
other
parameters
and
channels.
3
Press
Enter
to
enable
or
disable
safe
status
for
the
currently
The CHANNEL SAFE column acts as a global all channel set3
Press
Enter
or
disable safe
status
the
3
Press
Enter to
to enable
enable
or
safe
status for
for
the currently
currently
Channel
Safe
Controls
safe
a parameter
across
all disable
currently
displayed
channel
types:
refletindo
switch
Safe
na console
e naswitch
tela
os switches
on-screen
(when
in
Input
Safe
Switches
act (Quando
ason
Automation
Channel
Safe
grid
point.
Continue
navigating
to
and
toggling
safe
ting orooverride,
mirroring
the
SAFE
the console
and To focused
Channel
Safe Controls
Controls
focused
grid
point.
Continue
navigating
to
and
toggling
safe
focused
grid
point.
Continue
navigating
to
and
toggling
safe
Input
Safe
Switches
atuam
no
modo
Automation
Safes).
Para
proteger
um
parmetro
ao
longo
de
todos
os
tipos
de
canais
Safes
mode).
To
safe
a
parameter
across
all
currently
displayed
channel
types:
status
of
other
parameters
and
channels.
on-screen
(when
in
Input
Safe
Switches
act
as
Automation
Click
the
Parameter
grid
icon
at
the
top
of
the
appropriate
The
CHANNEL
SAFE
column
acts
as
a
global
all
channel
setstatus
of
other
parameters
and
channels.
The CHANNEL
CHANNEL SAFE
SAFE column
column acts
acts as
as a
a global
global all
all channel
channel setsetstatus of other parameters and channels.
apresentados:
The
Safes
mode).
until the triangle is white.
ting
override,
mirroring
the
SAFE
on
the
console
and
Click the Parameter grid icon at the top of the appropriate
ting or
or
override,
mirroring
the
SAFE
switch
onpart
theda
console
and
Controles
na
coluna
Channel
Safe
noswitch
so
parte
de column
Controls
in
the
CHANNEL
SAFE
column
are not
ofmatriz
the pating
or
override,
mirroring
the
SAFE
switch
on
the
console
and
To
safe
auntil
parameter
across is
allno
currently
displayed
channel types:
types:
on-screen
(when
in
Input
Safe
Switches
act
as
Automation
To
safe
parameter
across
currently
channel
column
the Parameter
triangle
parmetros;
eles
funcionam
em
adio
matriz
de
parmetros.
Clique
cone
alto da displayed
coluna apropriada
at que
on-screen
(when
infunction
Input Safe
Safe
Switches
act
as
Automation
rameter
matrix;
they
in addition
toact
theas
parameter
ma-paTo safe a
ano
parameter
across all
allwhite.
currently
displayed
channel types:
on-screen
in
Input
Switches
Automation
Controls
in(when
the
CHANNEL
SAFE
column
are
not
part of the
Safes
mode).
To
safe
all
parameters
for
a
particular
channel:
Como
resultado,
voc
no
precisa
habilitar
nenhum
ajuste
Channel
o
tringulo
fique
branco.
Safes
mode).
trix.
As amode).
result,
you
do function
not needin
toaddition
enable any
CHANNEL
Safes
rameter
matrix;
they
to the
parameter ma Click the Parameter grid icon at the top of the appropriate
Safe
para
usar atomatriz
deRecall
parmetros
Recall Safe.
To
safe
all
parameters
for ais
particular
channel: for that chancolumn
until
the grid
triangle
isin
white.
SAFE
settings
use
the
Safe
parameter
matrix.
Click
the
Channel
icon
the ALL column
column
until
the
trix.
As
a
result,
you
do
not
need
to
enable
any
CHANNEL
Controls
in
the
CHANNEL
SAFE
column
are
not
part
of
the
pacolumn
untiltodos
the triangle
triangle
is white.
white.
Controls in
in the
the CHANNEL
CHANNEL SAFE
SAFE column
column are
are not
not part
part of
of the
the papaPara
proteger
os parmetros
de um canal em particular:
Controls
nel
(row).
SAFE
settings
to
use the
Recall in
Safe
parameter
matrix.
Click the Channel grid icon in the ALL column for that chanrameter
matrix;
they
function
addition
to
parameter
maPara
mais
informaes,
Automation
Safing
Channels
rameter
matrix;
they
function
in
addition
to the
the
parameter
maFor
more
information,
see veja
Automation
Safing
Channels
rameter
matrix;
they
function
in
addition
to
the
parameter
maTo
safe
all
parameters
for
channel:
ToClique
safe
allno
parameters
for a
a particular
particular
channel:
nel
(row).
trix.
As
a
result,
you
do
not
need
to
enable
any
CHANNEL
na
pgina
187.
cone Channel
em todaschannel:
as colunas daquele canal
To
safe
all
parameters
for
a
particular
trix.
As
a result,
result,
you do
do not
not need
need to
to enable
enable any
any CHANNEL
CHANNEL
onAs
page
187.information,
trix.
a
you
For
more
see
Automation
Safing
Channels
To
toggle
the
status
of
a
parameter
column
or channel row:
(linha).
SAFE
settings
to
use
the
Recall
Safe
parameter
matrix.
Click the Channel grid icon in the ALL column for that chanSAFE settings
settings to
to use the Recall Safe parameter matrix.
Click the Channel grid icon in the ALL column for that chanSAFE
Click the Channel grid icon in the ALL column for that chanonRecall
page Safe
187.use the Recall Safe parameter matrix.
Utilizando
To
the status ofParameter
a parameter
column or
channel
row:
nel
(row).
Click
the appropriate
or Channel
grid
icon repeatneltoggle
(row).
Using Recall Safe
nel
(row).
Para
alterar
o status
de
uma status.
coluna For
de more
parmetros
ou linha de
For
more
information,
see
Automation
Safing
Channels
For
more
information,
see
Automation
Safing
Channels
edly
until
it
displays
the
desired
information,
ForRecall
more information,
see Automation Safing Channels
Click the appropriate Parameter or Channel grid icon repeatSafe
ParaUsing
acessar
a pgina
Recall Safe:
canais:
on
page
187.
on
page
187.
toggle
status
of
a
parameter
column
or
channel
row:
seeTo
Parameter
Matrix
on
page 185.
on the
pageRecall
187. Safe page:
To access
To
toggle
the
status
a
parameter
column
or
row:
edly
untilthe
it displays
the
status.
For more
information,
To
toggle
the
status of
of
a desired
parameter
column
or channel
channel
row:
11Siga
um
seguintes
To
access
Recall
Safe page:
Using
Recall
Safeprocedimentos:
Do
onedos
of the
following:
Using
Using Recall
Recall Safe
Safe
Go to the Snapshots page and click the Recall Safe tab.

Safe
access
theRecall
Snapshots
page and click the Recall Safe tab.
Toor
access
the
Recall
Safe page:
page:
To
Go tothe
one of the following:

V1ToDo
Pgina
Snapshots
e clique
a aba Recall Safe.
access
the
Recall Safe
page:
Do
one of
of the
thethe
following:
ou11 Do
following:
Double-press
Snapshot View switch until the Recall
orone
Go
to
the
Snapshots
page
and
click
the
Recall
Safe
tab.
Safe
tab
displayed.
to
the
Snapshots
page
and
click
the
Recall
Safe
tab.
Go
Double-press
the
Snapshot
View
switch
until
Go
to is
the
Snapshots
page
and
click
the
Safe
tab.
Pressione
duas
vezes
o switch
Snapshot
View
atRecall
que athe
abaRecall
Recall
or
Safe
tab
is
displayed.
or
Safe
esteja
sendo
mostrada.
2 Click
a
channel
type
tab
to
display
the
desired
channels.
or
Double-press
Double-press the
the Snapshot
Snapshot View
View switch
switch until
until the
the Recall
Recall
2 Click
a channel the
typeSnapshot
tab to display
desired
Double-press
View the
switch
untilchannels.
the Recall
2ToClique
uma
de tipo de
canal para
mostrar os canais
Safe
tababa
isparameters
displayed.
safe Safe
individual
on
specific
channels:
tab
is
displayed.
Safe tab is displayed.
desejados.
To
safe
parameters
on
specific
channels:
2
Click
athe
channel
type
tab to
display
desired
channels.
Click
inindividual
grid at
the intersection
of the
the
appropriate
pa2
2 Click
Click a
a channel
channel type
type tab
tab to
to display
display the
the desired
desired channels.
channels.
rameter
(column)
and
channel
(row).
A
blue
dot
appears,
Para salvar
em canaisofespecficos:
Clickparmetros
in the gridindividuais
at the intersection
the appropriateinpaTo
safe
individual
parameters
on
specific
channels:
dicating
a
parameter
is
safed.
To
safe
individual
parameters
on
specific
channels:
rameter
(column)
and
channel
(row).
A
blue
dot
appears,
inTo safe individual parameters on specific channels:
Clique na interseo apropriada de parmetro (coluna) e canal
dicating
a
parameter
is
safed.
Click
in
the
grid
at
the
intersection
of
the
appropriate
pa Click
in
at
the
of
pa(linha)
no grid.
Um grid
ponto
aparece, indicando
que o parmetro
Click
in the
the
grid
at azul
the intersection
intersection
of the
the appropriate
appropriate
pa(column)
and
channel
(row).
A
blue
dot
appears,
inClick
rameter
(column)
and
channel
(row).
A
blue
dot
appears,
estrameter
protegido.
rameter (column) and channel (row). A blue dot appears, inindicating
a
parameter
is
safed.
dicating
Click
dicating a
a parameter
parameter is
is safed.
safed.
Click
Click
Click
Enabling recall safe for channel 1 fader

recall
channel
1 fader
Habilitando
Recall
Safesafe
parafor
o fader
do
1
To Enabling
safe multiple
parameters
orcanal
channels
at a time:
To
safe
multiple
channels
a time:
Click
and
drag inparameters
a column,or
across
a row,
or
at
angle.
Para
salvar
mltiplos
canais
deat
uma
san
vez:
Enabling
recall safeparmetros
for channel ou
1 fader
Enabling
Enabling recall
recall safe
safe for
for channel
channel 1
1 fader
fader
Click and drag in a column, across a row, or at an angle.
Click
Click and
and drag
drag in
in a
a column,
column, across
across a
a row,
row, or
or at
at an
an angle.
angle.
Click
and
drag
in
a
column,
across
a
row,
or
at
an
angle.
To
parameters
or
a
Clique
e multiple
arraste em
uma coluna,
ao longoat
uma linha, ou em
To safe
safe
multiple
parameters
or channels
channels
atde
a time:
time:
To
safe
multiple
parameters
or
channels
at
a
time:
ngulo.
186
VENUE Profile Guide
186
Guia VENUE Profile
186
VENUE Profile
Guide
186
186 VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Guide
see
Parameter
Matrix
on
page
185.
Click
the
appropriate
Parameter
or Channel
grid icon
repeat
Clique
no cone
Parameter
ou Channel
apropriado
repetidamente
Click the appropriate Parameter or Channel grid icon repeat Click the appropriate Parameter or Channel grid icon repeatToat
safeque
all apresente
parameters
across
all
channels
and
clear
any
current veja
o
status
desejado.
Para
mais
informaes,
edly
until
it
displays
the
desired
status.
For
more
information,
edly
it
desired
status.
For more
edly until
until
it displays
displays the
the
desired
status.
more information,
information,
settings:
Matriz
de
na
pgina
185. For
To
safe
all Parmetros
parameters
across
all channels
and clear any current
see
Parameter
Matrix
on
page
185.
see
Parameter
Matrix
on
page
185.
see
Parameter
Matrix
on
page
185.
settings:
Click
the triangular icon at the top of the ALL column.
Para proteger todos os parmetros de todos os canais e limpar os

To
safe
all
channels
and
clear
any
current
theparameters
triangularacross
icon atall
top of the
column.
To
safe
all
parameters
across
allthe
channels
and ALL
clear
any
ajustes
ToClick
safeatuais:
all
parameters
channels
clear
any current
current
You
can
undo or redoacross
the lastallaction
takenand
in the
parameter
settings:
settings:
settings:
matrix.
Youthe
can
undotriangular
or redo
the
incolunas.
the
parameter
Clique
Click
triangular
icon
atlast
theaction
top
oftaken
theasALL
column.
no
cone
no
alto
de todas
Click the triangular icon at the top of the ALL column.
Click
the triangular icon at the top of the ALL column.
matrix.
CHANNEL SAFE
You
canpode
undo
or redo
the
actionataken
the parameter
Voc
desfazer
oulast
refazer
timainao
realizada na
You
undo
You can
can
undo or
or redo
redo the
the last
last action
action taken
taken in
in the
the parameter
parameter
CHANNEL
SAFE
matriz
de
parmetros.
matrix.
matrix.
To automation
matrix.safe an individual channel and retain all recall safe
settings for that channel:
To
automation
safe an individual channel and retain all recall safe
CHANNEL
SAFE
Channel
Safe
CHANNEL
SAFE
CHANNEL
settings
forSAFE
that channel:
Click
in the
CHANNEL
SAFE column for the desired channels.
Para
proteger
automao
canalfor
individual
e manter
todos
To
automation
safe
an
individual
channel
and
all
safe
Click
in the da
CHANNEL
SAFE um
column
theretain
desired
channels.
To
automation
safe
an
individual
channel
and
retain
all recall
recall
safe
Toajustes
automation
safe
an
individual
channel
and
recall
safe
CHANNEL
SAFE
does
not canal:
need
to be lit
inretain
order all
to Recall
os
Recall
Safe
daquele
settings
for
that
channel:
settings for
for that
that channel:
channel:
settings
Safe
individual
parameters
forneed
thattochannel.
CHANNEL
SAFE
does not
be lit in order to Recall
Click in the CHANNEL SAFE column for the desired channels.
Clique
Click
in
the
CHANNEL
SAFE
column
for
the
desired
na
coluna
Channel
Safe
dos
canais
Click
inindividual
the CHANNEL
SAFE column
forchannel.
thedesejados.
desired channels.
channels.
Safe
parameters
for that
To automation safe all parameters across all channels and retain

CHANNEL
SAFE
does
not
need to
be
lit
in
order to
Recall
CHANNEL
SAFE
does
not
to
be
lit
in
to
Recall
all current
recall safe
settings:
Channel
Safe
no
precisa
estar
para
colocar
em
Recall
CHANNEL
SAFE
does
not need
need
toaceso
beall
litchannels
in order
order
to
Recall
To automation
safe
all
parameters
across
and
retain
Safe
individual
parameters
for
that
channel.
Safe
individual
parameters
for
that
channel.
Safe
parmetros
individuais
daquele
canal.
Safe
individual
parameters
that
channel.
all current
recall safe
settings:
Click
the CHANNEL
SAFE
master for
icon
at the
top of the ChannelTo
Safe
column.
ToClick
automation
safe
all SAFE
parameters
across
all
channels
and
retain os
the CHANNEL
master
icon
the
top of and
the
safe
all
across
channels
retain
Para
proteger
da automao
todos
os atall
parmetros
de Chantodos
To automation
automation
safe
all parameters
parameters
across
all
channels
and
retain
all
current
recall
safe
settings:
all
current
recall
safe
settings:
nel
Safe
column.
canais
e
manter
os
ajustes
Recall
Safe
atuais
all The
current
recall
safe
settings:
CHANNEL SAFE column mirrors the channel automa Click the CHANNEL SAFE master icon at the top of the Chan Click
the
CHANNEL
SAFE
master
icon
at
the
top
of
Chantion
Safe
controls.
For
more
information,
see channel
Automation
Click
the
CHANNEL
SAFE
master
iconda
at the
the
topChannel
of the
the
ChanThe
CHANNEL
SAFE
column
mirrors
automa
Clique
no
cone
Channel
Safe
no topo
coluna
Safe.
nel
Safe
column.
nel
Safe
column.
Channels
on For
pagemore
187.information, see Automation
nelSafing
Safe
tioncolumn.
Safe controls.
A CHANNEL
coluna
Channel
Safe187.
espelha
os channel
controles
Channel
Safing
Channels
on page
The
SAFE
column
mirrors the
the
automaThe
CHANNEL
SAFE
column
mirrors
automaThe
CHANNEL
SAFE
column
mirrors
the channel
channel
automaAutomation
Safe.
Para
mais
informaes,
veja
Automation
tion Safe
Safe controls.
controls. For
For more
more information,
information, see
see Automation
Automation
tion
tion
SafeChannels
controls. For
information,
see Automation
Safing
na more
pgina
187.
Safing Channels
Channels on
on page
page 187.
187.
Safing
Safing Channels on page 187.
MIDI
MIDI
MIDI
MIDI
MIDI
To enable Recall Safe for MIDI Snapshot output:

Parahabilitar
o RecallSnapshot
Safe para Output
sadas MIDI:
Click the
Safe
button,
ClickRecall
the MIDI
MIDI
Snapshot
Safeoutput:
button, located
located above
above
To enable
Safe
for MIDI Output
Snapshot
Click
the MIDI
Snapshot Output Safe button, located above
the
parameter
matrix.
the parameter matrix.
Clique
no
MIDI
Snapshot
Safe, localizado
acima da
Click
theboto
MIDI Snapshot
OutputOutput
Safe button,
located above
the parameter
matrix.
matriz
deFor
parmetros.
the parameter
matrix.
more
information,
see
Adding
MIDI
Messages
For more information, see Adding MIDI Messages to
to SnapSnapFor
more
information,
see Adding MIDI Messages to Snapshots
on
page
195.
shots
on
page
195.
Para
mais
veja Adicionando
Mensagens
MIDI
For
more
information,
MIDI Messages
to Snapshots
oninformaes,
page 195.see Adding
a
Snapshots
na
pgina
195.
shots
on
page
195.
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
To enable Recall Safe for plug-ins:
3
3 Do
Do any
any of
of the
the following:
following:
To
preview
an
Scope
Siga
um
dos
procedimentos:
any
To
preview
an existing
existing
Scope Set,
Set, click
click its
its name
name in
in the
the
3 3Do
of
theseguintes
following:
Para
To preview
an existing Scope Set, click its name in the
Scope
window.
terSets
um preview
Scope
Sets
window.de um Scope Set existente, clique em seu
Tonome
preview
an
existing
click its name in the
Scope
Sets
window.
na janela
Scope Scope
Sets. Set,Scope
the
To
To load
load
the currently
currently selected
selected Scope Set,
Set, press
press Enter
Enter or
or
Sets
window.
Scope
Para
carregar
o
Scope
Set
selecionado,
pressione
Enter
click
To load
the
currently
selected
ScopeSets
Set,window
press Enter
or ou
the
Close
box
(X)
in
the
Scope
click the Close box (X) in the Scope Sets window title
title bar.
bar.
no
box
Close
(X)
na
barra
de
ttulo
da
janela
Scope
Sets.
Toclique
load
the
currently
selected
Scope
Set,
press
Enter
or
click
the Close
boxchanging
(X) in the Recall
Scope Safe
Sets window
title
bar.
To
cancel
without
settings,
click
To
cancel
without
changing
Recall
Safe
settings,
click
click
Parathecancelar
sem
alterar
os ajustes
Recalltitle
Safe,
clique
Close
box
(X)
in
the
Scope
Sets
window
bar.
Cancel.
To cancel without changing Recall Safe settings, click
Cancel.
Cancel.
To Cancel.
cancel without changing Recall Safe settings, click
Cancel.
Scope
Scope Sets
Sets
Folder
Scope
Sets
Folder selector
selector
Folder
selector
Scope
Sets
Folder selector
Components
To enable Recall Safe for plug-ins:

Stage
Rack
Features
To enable
Recall
Safe for plug-ins:
Additional Required
Stage
Racks
used
with anSafe
FOHbutton,
Rack, and
provide
allthe
stage
Click
the are
Plug-In
Snapshot
located
above
parameter
rameter matrix.
matrix.
habilitar
Click the
Plug-In
Safe
Para
Recall
SafeSnapshot
para
plug-ins:
ClickRecall
the
Plug-In
Snapshot
Safe button,
button, located
located above
above the
the papaTo enable
Safe
for
plug-ins:
Click
the
Plug-In
Snapshot
Safesystems.
button,
located
above
the
paaudio
I/O
for VENUE
Profile
Up
to two
Stage
rameter
matrix.
Clique
no
boto
Plug-In
Snapshot
Safe, localizado
acima
daRacks
matriz
rameter
matrix.
de parmetros.
more
information,
Adding
Data
to
Snapcan beFor
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up to 96
total
For
more
information, see
see
Adding Plug-In
Plug-In
Data
to inputs.
SnapFor
more
shots
oninformation,
page 197.
197. see Adding Plug-In Data to Snapshots
on
page
For
more
information,
Adding
Plug-In Data
to SnapPara
mais
Adicionando
Dados
de Plug-In
shots
oninformaes,
page 197.see veja
Audio
I/O
shots
on
page
197.
a
Snapshots
na
pgina
197.
Matrix
and
PQ
Matrix
PQwith remotely controllable mic preamps and
48 and
inputs
Matrix
and
PQ
Snapshots
and
all
assignments
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
Matrix
and
PQcan
Matrix
e PQ
Snapshots
can store
store
and recall
recall
all source
source
assignments of
of each
each
Snapshots
canoutput
store and
recall all
source assignments
of each
Matrix
and
when
Matrix
PQ
8 analog
upand/or
to 48 analog
Matrix
and PQ
PQ mixer
mixerchannels;
when the
theexpandable
Matrix (Mtx)
(Mtx)
and/or
PQ data
dataor
Snapshots
can
store
and
recall
all
source
assignments
of
each
Matrix
and
PQ
mixer
when
the
Matrix
(Mtx)
and/or
PQ
data
Snapshots
armazenar
e carregar
todas assignments
as atribuies
typesdigital
ispodem
scoped.
In addition,
addition,
all
User Input
Input
assignments
arede
outputs
per Stage
Rack.
types
is
scoped.
In
all
User
are
Matrix
and
PQ
mixer
when
the
Matrix
(Mtx)
and/or
PQ
data
types
is
scoped.
In
addition,
all
User
Input
assignments
fonte
de
cada
mixer
Matrix
e
PQ
quando
os
dados
Matrix
(Mtx)
e/
stored, letting
letting you
you reconfigure
reconfigure Matrix
Matrix or
or PQ
PQ mixers
mixers and
and are
User
stored,
User
types
is
scoped.
In
addition,
all
User
Input
assignments
are
ou
PQ
esto
no
alcance.
Alm
disso,
todas
as
atribuies
User
Input
stored,
letting
you
reconfigure
Matrix
or
PQ
mixers
and
User
Input assignments
assignments
onControl
a per
per snapshot
snapshot
basis, if
if desired.
desired.
Synchronization
andon
I/O
Input
a
basis,
stored,
letting
you
reconfigure
Matrix oros
PQmixers
mixers
and ou
User
so
armazenadas,
permitindo
reconfigurar
Matrix
PQ e
Input
assignments
on a per
snapshot
basis,
if desired.
assignments
Snake
connectors
to snapshot
enable
primary
redundant
atribuies
UserSafe
Input
em
uma
base por
snapshots,
se desejado.
The
Recall
Safe
tab
of
the
Snapshots
pageifand
provides
three (if
paInput
on
a per
basis,
desired.
The
Recall
tab
of
the
Snapshots
page
provides
three
paapplicable)
connection
to a VENUE
FOH
Rack.three paThe
Recall
Safe
tab
of
thePQ
Snapshots
page
provides
rameters
for
Matrix
and
snapshot
recall
safe:
rameters
for
Matrix
and
PQ snapshot
recall
safe:
Recall
tab
the
page
provides
paAThe
aba
RecallSafe
Safe
daofpgina
Snapshots
oferece
trsthree
parmetros
rameters
for
Matrix
andSnapshots
PQ
snapshot
recall
safe:
para
Recall
Safe
de Matrix
e and
PQ:
MIX
Safes
both
Source
and
User assignments.
assignments.
rameters
for
Matrix
and PQ
snapshot
recall safe:
MIX
Safes
both
Source
User
MIX Safes both Source and User assignments.
System
Components
MIX
SRCboth
Safes
only and
source
inputs.
MIX
Safes
Source
User
MIX
Protege
asSafes
atribuies
Source
eassignments.
User.
MIX
SRC
only
source
inputs.
MIX SRC Safes only source inputs.
MIX
USER
Safes
only
user
inputSource.
assignments.
MIXMIX
SRC
SafesSafes
onlyonly
source
inputs.
MIX
SRC
Protege
apenas
asuser
entradas
USER
input
assignments.
Included
Components
MIX USER Safes
only user input assignments.
For
a list
listSafes
of what
what
can
be input
storedassignments.
and recalled
recalled in
in each
each snapshot,
snapshot,
MIXFor
USER
only
user
a
of
can
be
stored
and
MIX
USER
Protege
apenas
atribuies
User
Input.
All
VENUE
systems
include
following:
For
a list ofProfile
what
can
be stored
andthe
recalled
in each
see Snapshot
Snapshot
Data
Types
and Parameters
Parameters
on
page snapshot,
201.
see
Data
Types
and
on
page
201.
For a list
of what
can
beconsole
stored
and
recalled in each
snapshot,
VENUE
Profile
Snapshot
Datapode
Types
Parameters
on page
201.
Parasee
uma
lista do que
serand
armazenado
e carregado
em cada
see Snapshot
Types and
Parameters on page 201.
Two (2)Data
IEC power
cables
snapshot,
TiposSets
de Dados e Parmetros Snapshot na pgina
Using
Scope
Usingveja
Scope
Sets
201.Using
Scope
Setsfor VGA screen (screen not included)
Monitor
mount
Configurations
of
Recall
page
can
Using
Scope Sets
Configurations
of the
the(trackball
Recall Safe
Safe
page
can be
be stored
stored as
as Scope
Scope
Trackball mount
not
included)
Configurations
the Recallcan
Safe page
can be stored as and
Scope
Set
Utilizando
Scopefiles.
SetsofScope
Set settings
settings
files.
Scope Sets
Sets can be
be previewed,
previewed, recalled
recalled and
settings
VENUEfiles.
Mouse
PadSets
Configurations
of the
Recall
Safe
can be stored
as Scope
Set
Scope
canpage
be previewed,
recalled
and
transferred
transferred just
just like
like plug-in,
plug-in, EQ
EQ and
and Dynamics
Dynamics settings.
settings.
Settransferred
settings
files.
Scope
Sets can
bepodem
previewed,
recalled
andcomo
Configuraes
da
pgina
Recall
Safe
ser armazenadas
VENUE
Profile
just
like Guide
plug-in,
EQ
and
Dynamics
settings.
transferred
just
like
plug-in,
EQ
and
Dynamics
settings.
arquivos
de
ajustes
Scope
Set.
Scope
Sets
podem
ser
analisados
Twothe
(2) current
consoleRecall
lightsSafe
To
settings
as a
Scope
Set:
Tostore
store
the
current
settings
Scope de
Set:
em preview,
carregados
eRecall
transSafe
feridos
como as
os a
plug-in,
Tostore
the current
Recall
Safe
settings
as
aajustes
Scope Set:
Protective
Dust
Cover
1
Configure
the
Recall
Safe
page
as
desired.
EQ
e
Dynamics.
1 Configure
the Recall Safe
as desired.
To store
the current
Safe page
settings
as a Scope Set:
1 Configure
the next)
Recall Safe page as desired.
Rack(s) (see
2 Click the Scope Sets icon (the folder icon located above and
2
the Scope
icon (the
folder icon located above and
toClick
the right
of theSets
parameter
matrix).
1 Configure
Recall
Safe
page
ascomo
desired.
2armazenar
Click thethe
Scope
Sets
icon
(the
folder
icon
located
Para
os
ajustes
Recall
Safe
um
Scope
Set:above and
to the right of the parameter matrix).
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
2 Click
the Scope
Sets icon
(the
folderand
iconCables
located above and
to the right
of the
parameter
matrix).
1 Configure
a pgina
Recall
Safe como
desejada.
3 Click New.

DVI supported.

fromSets
Avid
Scope
window
Scope
Sets
window
Janela
ScopeScope
SetsSets
window
Scope Sets window
See
Chapter
20,
and
for
Optional
See
Chapter
20, Shows
Shows
and File
File Management
Management
for comcomVeja
oComponents
Captulo
20, Gerenciamento
de Arquivos
e Shows
See
Chapter 20, Shows
and File Management
for complete
on
transferring
system
data.
parainformation
informaes
sobre
transferncia
de dados
plete
information
oncompletas
transferring
system
data.
See
Chapter
20,
Shows
and
File
Management
for be
comThe
following
components
are
optional,
and
must
plete
information
on
transferring
system
data.
de sistema.
plete information
on transferring system data.
purchased
separately:
Automation
Automation Safing
Safing Channels
Channels
Input
Safe
(both
console
and
can
Automation
Channels
ofSafing
Show
data;
512 MB
or on-screen)
larger recommended)
Inputtransfer
Safe switches
switches
(both
console
and
on-screen)
can be
be set
set to
to
Automation
Safing
Channels
USB flash
disk
(or other
Automation
Safing
Channels
Input
Safe switches
(both
and
can
be as
set to
Os
switches
Input
Safe
(na console
console
e naon-screen)
tela)
podem
ser
Automation,
Solo,
or
Safe
When
set
act
Automation,
Solo,
or Bank
Bank
Safe modes.
modes.
set to
to
actajustados
as AuAuSafe
Near-field
monitor
speakers
foron-screen)
mixWhen
position
monitoring
Input
switches
(both
console
and
can
be
set
toAuAutomation,
Solo,
or
Bank
Safe
modes.
When
set
to
act
as
para
os
modos
Automation,
Solo,
ou
Bank
Safe.
Quando
ajustados
tomation
Safes,
Input
Safe
let
tomation
Safes, the
the
Input
Safe Switches
Switches
let you
you suspend
suspend the
the efef
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
Automation,
Solo,Automation
or Bank
Safe
modes.
When
set
to
act
as permitem
Aupara
atuar
como
Safes,
os switches
Input
Safe
tomation
Safes,
the
Input
Safe
Switches
let you
suspend
the effect
fect of
of snapshots
snapshots on
on all
all parameters
parameters of
of individual
individual Input
Input ChanChansuspender
o efeito
de all
snapshots
em todos
os suspend
parmetros
de
tomation
Safes,
the
Safe
Switches
you
the
ef- Input
of
Dynamic
or Input
condenser
microphone
and
XLRInput
mic
cable
fect
snapshots
on
parameters
ofletindividual
Channels
Returns.
nels and
and FX
FX
Channels
e FXReturns.
Returns.
fect
of snapshots
on all parameters of individual Input Chan(for
nels
and Talkback)
FX
Returns.
nels and
FX can
Returns.
You
also
control
automation
safe
in
Footswitches
(up to channel
2)
You
can
also tambm
control
channel
automation
safe status
status
in the
the
Voc
pode
controlar
o status Channel
Automation
You
can
alsotab.
control
channel
automation
safe
status
in the
Recall
Safe
See
CHANNEL
SAFE
on
page
186.
Recall
Safe
tab.
See
CHANNEL
SAFE
on
page
186.
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
Safe
na control
aba
Safe.
VejaSAFE
Channel
Safe
YouRecall
can also
channel
automation
safe
in na
the pgina
Safe
tab.Recall
See
CHANNEL
on status
page
186.
186.
Recall
BNC
cables
between
Safe
tab.(for
See connecting
CHANNELWord
SAFEclock
on page
186. the

to the
rightNew.
of the parameter matrix).
3 Click
Each
MixNew.
3 Click
23Clique
no
cone
Scope Sets
(o cone de pasta localizado acima e
Click
New.
preview
Systemand
Restore
CD
To
a
To da
preview
recall
a saved
saved Scope
Scope Set:
Set:
direita
matrizand
de recall
parmetros).
Topreview
and recall
a saved
Scope Set:
ECx Ethernet
Control
Software
Installer CD
Mix
Rack
Options
1
From
the
Recall
Safe
page,
click
the
On-screen
Automation
Safe
1 From the
page,
click Set:
the Scope
Scope Set
Set icon
icon to
to display
display
To preview
andRecall
recall Safe
a saved
Scope
On-screen
Automation
Safe button
button
Boto
Automation
Safe
Scope
Standalone
Software
Installer
CDScope Set icon to display
3 Clique
New.
1 From
theSet
Recall
Safe page,
click the
On-screen
Automation
Safe button
the
window.
the Scope Set window.
To
the
status
of an
Input
Channel
or
Return
1 From
the Recall
Safe page,
the Scope
Set icon
to display
On-screen
Automation
Safe
button
I/O
Options
the
Set window.
Scope
iLok
USB
Smart
Key click
(for storing
plug-in
authorizations)
To toggle
toggle
theo Safe
Safe
status
an um
InputInput
Channel
or FX
FX ou
Return
Para
alterar
status
Safeof
de
Channel
FX Return
If
necessary,
choose
the
appropriate
Scope
Sets
folder
by
To
toggle
the
Safe
status
of
an
Input
Channel
or
FX
Return
directly
from
the
channel
strip:
Para
ter
um
preview
e
carregar
um
Scope
Set
salvo:
the2
Scope
Set
window.
2 If necessary, choose the appropriate Scope Sets folder by
directly
from
the
channel
strip:
If necessary,
Plug-in installer
discs
(if
any) withScope
pre-authorized
iLok
diretamente
de
uma
rgua
de
canal:
2
choose
the
appropriate
Sets
folder
by
To
toggle
the
Safe
status
of
an
Input
Channel
or
FX
Return
directly
from Mic/Line
the channel
strip:
AI16
Analog
Input
clicking
clicking and
and selecting
selecting it
it from
from the
the Folder
Folder selector.
selector.
1
to
page
1 Go
Gofrom
to the
the
Options
and click
click the
the Interaction
Interaction tab.
tab.
Ifclicking
necessary,
the
Scope
Sets
by
directly
theOptions
channel
strip:and
Twoand
(2)choose
IEC
power
cables
selecting
itappropriate
from
Folder
selector.
12Na
pgina
Recall
Safe,
clique
no the
cone
Scope
Set folder
para visualizar
mic/line
level
inputs page
1V
Go
to the Options
page
and
click
the Interaction tab.
1
pgina
Options
e
clique
na
aba
Interaction.
and
selecting
it
from
the
Folder
selector.
aclicking
janela
Scope
Set.
One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console 1 Go to the Options page and click the Interaction tab.
outputs
2 SeEach
necessrio,
escolha
a pasta Scope Sets apropriada clicando e
Stage Rack
includes:
selecionando-a
Two (2)pelo
IECseletor
powerFolder.
cables
Chapter
Chapter 21:
21: Snapshots
Snapshots 187
187
Chapter
21:
Snapshots
XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card that provides
8 analog 187
187
2 2NaIn
Input
Safe
Switches,
selecione
aselect
opo
Act
as
proteger
um snapshot:
To
lock
lock
a snapshot:
a snapshot:
2seo
the
In the
Input
Input
Safe
Safe
Switches
Switches
section,
section,
select
thethe
ActAct
asAutomation
as
AutomaAutoma- ToPara
To lock a snapshot:
2 In the Input Safe Switches section, select the Act as AutomaSafes.
tiontion
Safes
Safes
option.
option.
1 1Go
1VGo
to
the
to the
Main
Main
tab
of the
of the
Snapshots
Snapshots
page.
page.
aba
Main
da tab
pgina
Snapshots.
tion Safes option.
1 Go to the Main tab of the Snapshots page.
3 3Pressione
oSafe
switch
Safeinnathe
Input,
ou clique
boto
Press
3 Press
thethe
Safe
switch
switch
inseo
the
Input
Input
section,
section,
or click
or no
click
the
the Safe
2 In
2 the
In the
Snapshot
Snapshot
list,list,
click
click
thethe
padlock
padlock
icon
icon
at the
at the
far far
right
right
of of
3 Press
the
Safe
switch
in the
Input ou
section,
or click
the
na
tela
paraSafe
cada
um
dosfor
Input
Channels
FXChannels
Returns
que
deseja
22Na
List,list,
clique
nothe
cone
direita
daatlinha
de right
cada item.
InSnapshots
the Snapshot
click
padlock
icon
the far
of
on-screen
on-screen
Safe
button
button
for
each
each
of the
of the
Input
Input
Channels
or FX
or
FX
thethe
rowrow
forfor
anyany
item.
item.
TheThe
padlock
padlock
icon
icon
illuminates
illuminates
to indicate
to indicate
on-screen
Safe
button
for
each
of
the
Input
Channels
or
FX
proteger.
Oyou
switch
Safe
seThe
acende
para
indicar
que
o canal
est
Othe
cone
seThe
acende
para
indicar
que o snapshot
est
rowde
forcadeado
any item.
padlock
icon
illuminates
to indicate
Returns
Returns
you
want
want
to
safe.
to safe.
The
Safe
Safe
switch
switch
lights
lights
solid
solid
to indito indithe
snapshot
snapshot
is now
is now
locked.
locked.
Returns youSafed.
want to safe. The Safe switch lights solid to indi- the
em
Automation
protegido.
the snapshot is now locked.
cate
cate
that
that
thethe
channel
channel
is automation
is automation
safed.
safed.
cate that the channel is automation safed.
Locked/Unlocked
Locked/Unlocked
indicator
indicator
Locked/Unlocked indicator
Voc
pode
usar
a Event
List
para
dethrough
percorrer
You
You
can
can
useuse
thethe
Event
Event
ListList
to be
to able
be ser
able
tocapaz
cycle
to cycle
through
thetheos
vrios
Safe List
Switch
um footswitch
You modos
can useInput
the Event
to beutilizando
able to cycle
through theou
various
various
Input
Input
Safe
Safe
Switch
Switch
modes
modes
using
using
a footswitch,
a footswitch,
funcfuncoutros
triggers
o Captulo
22, Events.
various
Inputdisponveis.
Safe Switch Veja
modes
using a footswitch,
functiontion
switch
switch
or other
or other
available
available
trigger.
trigger.
SeeSee
Chapter
Chapter
22,22,
tion switch or other available trigger. See Chapter 22,
Events.
Events.
Events.
Gerenciando Snapshots
Managing
Managing
Snapshots
Snapshots
VocManaging
pode gerenciar Snapshots
snapshots na lista armazenando, protegendo,
You
You
cancan
manage
manage
snapshots
snapshots
in the
in
listlist
by by
storing,
storing,
locking,
locking,
limpando,
duplicando,
apagando
ou the
movendo-os.
You can manage snapshots
in
the
list by storing, locking,
clearing,
clearing,
duplicating,
duplicating,
deleting,
deleting,
or moving
or moving
them.
them.
clearing, duplicating, deleting, or moving them.
Armazenando Snapshots
Storing
Storing
Snapshots
Voc
pode Snapshots
modificar
o contedo de um snapshot existente,
Storing
Snapshots
sobrescrevendo-o
com
o novo
ajuste,
utilizando
osnapshot,
comando
Store.
You
You
cancan
modify
modify
thethe
contents
contents
of an
of ean
existing
existing
snapshot,
overovercan modify
the contents
of an existing
snapshot,
overNo You
necessrio
carregar
um snapshot
para salv-lo.
Snapshots
writing
writing
it with
it with
new
new
settings,
settings,
using
using
thethe
Store
Store
command.
command.
It isItnot
is not
podem
ser salvos
pela
tela
ou pelos
controles
Snapshots
na console.
writing
it with
new
settings,
using
the Store
command.
It is not
necessary
necessary
to recall
to recall
a snapshot
a snapshot
to store
to store
it. Snapshots
it. Snapshots
cancan
be be
Vocnecessary
pode desfazer
comandos
Store.
to recall
a snapshot
to store it. Snapshots can be
stored
stored
from
from
on-screen
on-screen
or from
or from
thethe
snapshot
snapshot
controls
controls
on on
thethe
stored from on-screen or from the snapshot controls on the
console.
console.
You
You
can
can
undo
undo
Store
Store
commands.
commands.
Paraconsole.
armazenar
o estado atual da console em um snapshot
You can undo Store commands.
existente:
To To
store
store
thethe
current
current
console
console
state
state
in an
in an
existing
existing
snapshot:
snapshot:
To store
theos
current
consolenastate
in anque
existing
snapshot:
1 Ajuste
todos
parmetros
console
deseja
que sejam
1 Set
1 Set
all all
parameters
parameters
on on
thethe
console
console
as you
as you
want
want
them
them
to be
to be
armazenados
no snapshot.
1 Set all parameters
on the console as you want them to be
stored
stored
in the
in the
snapshot.
snapshot.
stored in the snapshot.
2 2Selecione
snapshot
nathe
List,
ou girelist,
o list,
knob
Select
2 Select
theothe
snapshot
snapshot
in
inSnapshots
the
on-screen
on-screen
Snapshot
Snapshot
or turn
orSelect
turn
2 SelectSnapshots
the snapshot
the on-screen
Snapshot list,
turn
na seo
parain selecionar
o snapshot
que ordeseja
thethe
Select
Select
knob
knob
in the
in the
Snapshots
Snapshots
section
section
to target
to target
a snapshot
a snapshot
sobrescrever.
the Select knob in the Snapshots section to target a snapshot
youyou
want
want
to overwrite.
to overwrite.
you want to overwrite.
3 3Clique
no the
boto
Store
na
tela, ou or
pressione
oStore
switch
Storeinna
Click
3 Click
the
Store
Store
button
button
on-screen,
on-screen,
press
or press
thethe
Store
switch
switch
in
3 Click
the Store button on-screen, or press the Store switch in
seo
Snapshots.
thethe
Snapshots
Snapshots
section.
section.
the Snapshots section.
Set
4 Set
the
scope
scope
by by
doing
doing
thethe
following:
following:
4 4Ajuste
a the
abrangncia:
Set the
scope
by
doing
thedeseja
following:
4Clique
em
cada
canal
que
que
seja
afetado
quando
For
For
each
each
parameter
parameter
youyou
want
want
to be
to
be
affected
affected
when
when
the
the
snapshot
For each for
parameter
you wantcarregado
to be affected
when theem
o snapshot
posteriormente
(mostrados
snapshot
is recalled,
is recalled,
click
click
thethe
corresponding
corresponding
Data
Data
Type
Type
vermelho).
snapshot is recalled, click the corresponding Data Type
button
button
so that
so that
it isitscoped
is scoped
(displayed
(displayed
in red).
in red).
Clique
no boto
Data
correpondente
a cada
button
so that
it isType
scoped
(displayed in
red). parmetro
dos
For
For
each
each
channel
channel
you
you
want
want
affected
affected
when
when
the
snapshot
snapshot
is is
canais de abrangncia que deseja quethe
sejam
afetados
For each channel you want affected when the snapshot is
recalled,
recalled,
click
click
thethe
channel
fader
fader
so that
socarregado
that
it isitscoped
is scoped
(dis(disquando
o snapshot
forchannel
posteriormente
(mostrados
recalled, click the channel fader so that it is scoped (disem
vermelho).
played
played
in red).
in red).
played in red).
Protegendo Snapshots
Locking
Locking
Snapshots
Snapshots
Locking Snapshots
Snapshots podem ser protegidos de serem acidentalmente

Snapshots
Snapshots
cancan
be be
locked
locked
to prevent
to prevent
them
them
from
from
being
being
accidenaccidenalterados,
sobrescritos
ou apagados.
Snapshots
can be locked
to prevent them from being accidentally
tally
altered,
altered,
overwritten
overwritten
or deleted.
or deleted.
tally altered, overwritten or deleted.
Snapshots protegidos podem ser selecionados, carregados, movidos

Locked
Locked
snapshots
snapshots
cancan
be be
selected,
selected,
recalled,
recalled,
moved
moved
andand
duplidupliou duplicados.
Eles no
ser sobrescritos,
reomeados,
ou
Locked snapshots
canpodem
be selected,
recalled, moved
and duplicated.
cated.
They
They
cannot
cannot
be be
overwritten,
overwritten,
renamed,
renamed,
rescoped
rescoped
or othor othde qualquer
modo
alterados.
Snapshotsrenamed,
novos e rescoped
duplicados
cated. They
cannot
be overwritten,
or so
otherwise
erwise
changed.
changed.
New
andand
duplicated
snapshots
snapshots
default
default
to unto undesprotegidos
por New
padro.
O duplicated
status
de proteo
pode
ser
alterado
a
erwise changed.
New and
duplicated
snapshots
default
to unlocked.
locked.
Lock
Lock
status
status
can
can
be
be
changed
changed
at
any
at
any
time,
time,
including
including
qualquer momento, incluindo no modo Preview.
locked. Lock status can be changed at any time, including
while
while
in Preview
in Preview
mode.
mode.
while in Preview mode.
188188VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
188 Guia
VENUE
ProfileProfile
Guide
188
VENUE
Controles Snapshot Lock
ClickClick
to lock
to lock
or unlock
or unlock
Click to lock or unlock
Snapshot
Snapshot
locklock
controls
controls
Snapshot lock controls
Selecione
vrios
snapshots
utilizando
aShift
tecla
Shift
o switch MultiSelect
Select
multiple
multiple
snapshots
snapshots
using
using
thethe
Shift
keykey
or Multi-Select
orou
Multi-Select
Select para
multiple
snapshots
using thevrios
Shift snapshots
key or Multi-Select
Select
proteger
ou
desproteger
switch
switch
to lock
to lock
or unlock
or unlock
multiple
multiple
snapshots
snapshots
at once.
at once.de uma vez.
switch to lock or unlock multiple snapshots at once.
Uma
vez
travado,
operaes
quewould
poderiam
afetar
o snapshot
fazem
Once
Once
locked,
locked,
operations
operations
that
that
would
otherwise
otherwise
affect
affect
thethe
snapsnapOnce
locked,
operations
that
wouldeotherwise
affect
the snapo
display
Status
e
os
LCDs
de
canais
Snapshot
temporariamente
shot
shot
cause
cause
thethe
Status
Status
display
display
andand
channel
channel
LCDs
LCDs
andand
Snapshot
Snapshot
shot cause uma
the Status
display
and channel
and Snapshot
mostrarem
mensagem
lembrando
queLCDs
a operao
no pode
LCD
LCD
to temporarily
to temporarily
show
show
a message
a message
reminding
reminding
youyou
that
that
thethe
ser
realizada
enquantoshow
o snapshot
estreminding
protegido. you that the
LCD
to temporarily
a message
operation
operation
cannot
cannot
be be
applied
applied
while
while
thethe
snapshot
snapshot
is locked.
is locked.
operation cannot be applied while the snapshot is locked.
Para desproteger um snapshot:
To To
unlock
unlock
a snapshot:
a snapshot:
To unlock a snapshot:
Clique
no
de cadeado
aceso
linha
dosnapshot.
snapshot.
Click
Click
thethe
litcone
padlock
lit padlock
icon
icon
in the
in
the
rowna
row
for
for
that
that
snapshot.
Click the lit padlock icon in the row for that snapshot.
Voc
pode
desfazer
asunlocking
deofproteger
ou by
desproteger
You
You
cancan
undo
undo
locking
locking
or
oraes
unlocking
aofsnapshot
a snapshot
by
clicking
clickingum
You can clicando
undo locking
or unlocking of a snapshot by clicking
snapshot
the
the
Undo
Undo
button.
button.no boto Undo.
the Undo button.
Undo e Snapshots Protegidos
Undo
Undo
andand
Locked
Locked
Snapshots
Snapshots
Undo and Locked Snapshots
Voc
pode
desfazer
aes
proteger
desproteger
um
snapshot.
You
You
can
can
undo
undo
locking
locking
or unlocking
or de
unlocking
a snapshot.
ae snapshot.
When
When
togtogYou can
undo locking
orde
unlocking
a snapshot.
WhendetogQuando
alterando
o
status
proteo
para
uma
seleo
mais de
gling
gling
lock
lock
status
status
forfor
a selection
a selection
of more
of more
than
than
oneone
snapshot,
snapshot,
gling
lock status
a selection
ofum
more
than
onede
snapshot,
um
snapshot,
todafor
a operao
cria
nico
ponto
restaurao
thethe
entire
entire
operation
operation
creates
creates
a single
a single
undo
undo
point
point
(it (it
does
does
notnot
(no
possvel
marcarcreates
e oferecer
umundo
pontopoint
de restaurao
the entire
operation
a single
(it does notpara
track
track
andand
provide
provide
undo
undo
forfor
each
each
individual
individual
snapshot
snapshot
in the
in the
se- secada
da seleo).
tracksnapshot
and provide
undo for each individual snapshot in the selection).
lection).
lection).
Lembre-se de que o Undo pode reverter snapshots para

Keep
Keep
in mind
in mind
that
that
Undo
Undo
cancan
revert
revert
snapshots
snapshots
to
tovoc
unlocked
status
desprotegido.
Por
exemplo,
seunlocked
alterar a
Keep
in mind
that Undo can
revert
snapshots
to unlocked
status.
status.
For
For
example,
example,
if
you
if
you
change
change
the
the
scope
scope
of
an
of
an
unlocked
unlocked
abrangncia
de
um
snapshot,
proteger
o
snapshot
e usar o
status. For example, if you change the scope of an unlocked
snapshot,
snapshot,
lock
thethe
snapshot
snapshot
and
then
then
useuse
Undo,
Undo,
thethe
snapsnap-uma
Undo, lock
o snapshot
estarand
desprotegido.
Pressionar
Undo
snapshot, lock the snapshot and then use Undo, the snapshot
shot
is unlocked.
is
unlocked.
Pressing
Pressing
Undo
Undo
oneone
more
time
time
willwill
revert
revert
vez
mais,
reverter
o snapshot
amore
sua
abrangncia
original.
shot is unlocked. Pressing Undo one more time will revert
thethe
snapshot
snapshot
to its
to its
original
original
scope.
scope.
the snapshot
to its
original
scope.
Protegendo
Snapshots
e MIDI
Record
Locking
Locking
Snapshots
Snapshots
andand
MIDI
MIDI
Record
Record
Lockingutilizando
Snapshots
MIDIMIDI
Record
Quando
o and
recurso
Record, todos os dados MIDI
When
When
using
using
the
the
MIDI
MIDI
Record
Record
feature,
feature,
all all
MIDI
MIDI
data
data
captured
captured
capturados
no
ponto
em
que
o
snapshot
so
preservados.
When using the MIDI Record feature, protegido
all MIDI data
captured
upSe
up
toathe
tooperao
the
point
point
a MIDI
snapshot
a snapshot
is locked
is
locked
is preserved.
is
preserved.
If the
Ifothe
MIDI
MIDI
Record
continua
ativa
quando
snapshot
up to the point a snapshot is locked is preserved. If the MIDI
Record
Record
operation
operation
is still
is
active
active
at the
at
the
time
time
thethe
snapshot
is torna-se
is
protegido,
o modo
destill
gravao
fechado,
osnapshot
boto
REC
Record operation is still active at the time the snapshot is
indisponvel
para
aquele
snapshot,
e button
mensagens
MIDIunrecebidas
locked,
locked,
record
record
mode
mode
is exited,
is exited,
thethe
REC
REC
button
becomes
becomes
unlocked, recordno
mode
exited, the REC button becomes unposteriormente
soiscapturadas.
available
available
forfor
that
that
snapshot,
snapshot,
andand
subsequent
subsequent
incoming
incoming
MIDI
MIDI
available for that snapshot, and subsequent incoming MIDI
messages
messages
areare
notnot
captured.
captured.
messages are not captured.
Operao Disponveis em Snapshots Protegidos
Duplicating Snapshots
AThe
seguinte
tabela
detalha
ou not
nobeser
following
table
details quais
which operaes
operations podem
can or can
realizadas
em
snapshot
protegido.
performed
onum
a locked
snapshot.
Snapshots
podem
ser duplicaods
pela
Snapshots
Snapshots
can
be duplicated
from the
Snapshots
list.List.
YouVoc
can pode
desfazer comandos Duplicate.
undo Duplicate commands.
Available Operations with Locked Snapshots
Para duplicar snapshots:
Summary of allowed/disallowed operations when locked
Operation
Allowed
while
Locked
Select/target snapshot
Disallowed
while locked
Click Dup (Duplicate).
Manually editing sequence numX

48 inputs with remotely controllable
mic preamps and
ber
Re-sorting by time code
Selecione
os snapshots
deseja
duplicar.
1 1Select
the snapshots
youque
want
to duplicate.
2 2Do
one
ofdos
theseguintes
following:
Siga
um
procedimentos:
X
Recall snapshot
X
Duplicate snapshot
can be usedinsimultaneously,
Re-sequence
snapshot list by:supporting up to 96 total inputs.
Audio I/O
To duplicate snapshots:
Stage Rack Features
Dragging in snapshot list
Duplicando Snapshots

digital
outputs
persnapStage Rack.
Overwrite
(Store
to locked
X
shot)
X
Propagate changes
Apply Edit
mode changes
applicable)
connection to a VENUE FOH Rack.X
Additional
Clique Dup Required
(Duplicate). Components
or
ou
following
components
must
purchased
separately:
Right-click
the
name
and
choose
Duplicate.
The
Clique
com
o snapshot
boto direito
nobe
nome
do snapshot
e escolha
Duplicate.
Uma
cpia
de
cada
snapshot
selecionado

A copycolocadoa
of each selected
placed
aps asnapshot
seleo, iscom
um after
sinalthe
(+)selection,
adicionado ao
with a nome
plus sign
(+) appended to the original snapshot name.
original.
DVI supported.
If Se
multiple
snapshots
selected
in the (Windows
list,
new
vrios
snapshots
so
selecionados
nathe
list,
os(duplinovos itens
USB
keyboard
andare
trackball/mouse
compatible)
cate)
items areso
added
below their
original
source snapshots.
(duplicados)
adicionados
abaixo
dos originais.

Apagando Snapshots
Deleting
Snapshots
The connection
a Digital podem
Snake cable.
This cableda
can
be purchased
directly
Snapshots
ser apagados
Snapshots
List.can
Voc pode
Snapshots
can be deleted
from the Snapshots
list. You
from Avid
or assembled
desfazer
comandos
Delete. by your preferred vendor.
undo Delete commands.
Para apagar snapshots:
Components
To Optional
delete snapshots:
Clear
Selecione
os snapshots
deseja
apagar.
1 1Select
the snapshots
youque
want
delete.
The following
components
areto
optional,
and must be
Delete
2 2Do
one
ofdos
theseguintes
following:
Siga
um
procedimentos:
Modify Scope
Add/Modify
stored
MIDI data
Included
Components
Add/Modify
Plug-In
datainclude the following:
All VENUEstored
Profile
systems
System Components
VENUE
X
Modify
Notes Profile console
X
Modify X-Fade time
X
Modify
Snapshot mount
Name (trackball not included)
Trackball
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
Modify
Time Code
Location
VENUE Profile Guide
Toggle Time Code Enable
Undo
changes
X
X
X
Rack(s) (see next)
Clearing Snapshots
Limpando
Snapshots
Racks,
Software
CDs,can
iLoks,
and Cables
The
contents
of a snapshot
be cleared
while keeping the
in
the
list
and
its MTC
informaOsnapshot
contedo
deRack
umSnapshot
snapshot
pode
serretaining
limpo enquanto
ele
estiver na
Each Mix
or FOH Rack
includes:
tion.
This
lets
you
maintain
a
placeholder
that
you
can
use
Snapshots
List
e
manter
sua
informao
MTC.
Isso
permite
manter
System Restore CD
um
espao
reservado
para
later
to store
new data.que
Youvoc
can pode
undo usar
Clearposteriormente
commands.
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Software
Installer
CD Clear.
armazenar
novos
dados.
Voc pode
desfazer
comandos
Standalone
Software
Installer CD
To clear
the contents
of a snapshot:
Para limpar
o contedo
deKey
um (for
snapshot:
iLok
USB Smart
1 Select the snapshots you want to clear.
1 Selecione os snapshots que deseja limpar.
2 Click Clear. Cleared snapshots are renamed <Empty>.
2 Clique
Snapshots
limpos
nomeados
<Empty>.
Clear.
One FOH
Link cable
forso
connection
tocomo
a VENUE
console
Click Del (Delete).
transfer
Clique
Delof(Delete).
or
ou
Right-click
Clique com
o snapshot
boto direito
noand
nome
do snapshot
the
name
choose
Delete. e escolha
Delete.
Dynamic
condenser
microphone
and list,
XLRand
mic succable
The snapshots
areorremoved
from
the Snapshots
(for
Talkback)
ceeding
snapshots
renumbered.
Os snapshots
soare
removidos
da Snapshots List, e os snapshots
restantes
so renumerados.
Footswitches
(up to 2)

Moving
MovendoSnapshots
Snapshots

Existing snapshots can be rearranged in the Snapshots list.
VENUE
system and
external
digital devices)
Snapshots
existentes
podem
ser rearranjados
na Snapshots List.
When you move one or more snapshots, they are automatiQuando
voc
move
um
ou
mais
snapshots,
eles
25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting
toso
GPIautomaticamente
devices)
cally
renumbered
themas
list, os
butvalores
MTC values
are left
unrenumerados
na in
lista,
MTC ficam
inalterados.
Voc
changed.
You
can
undo
a
snapshot
move.
pode desfazer uma movimentao de snapshot.
mover
um
snapshot,
siga
umfollowing:
dos seguintes
procedimentos:
ToPara
move
a snapshot,
do one
of the
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Drag
the currently
selected
snapshots
a newProfile
location
in
The
following
canselecionados
be
added to to
VENUE
systems.
Arraste
os options
snapshots
para
um
novo
local
na
the
Snapshots
list.
Snapshots
For detailsList.
website
or (www.avid.com).
ou
Double-click the snapshot number in the Snapshots list or

Mix
Rack
Options
the
banner
display,
type
new number,
and press
on theList ou
Clique
duas
vezes
noa nmero
do snapshot
na Enter
Snapshots
no display banner, digite um novo nmero, e pressione Enter no
keyboard.
teclado.
I/O Options

outputs
189
Making Changes to Snapshots

Making
Changes to Snapshots
There may be situations where you need to change specific parameters
inbe
existing
snapshots
leaving
other parameters
There may
situations
where while
you need
to change
specific paFazendo
Alteraes
a Snapshots
unchanged.
rameters in existing snapshots while leaving other parameters
Making Changes to Snapshots
unchanged.
Podem
haver situaes em que voc precise alterar parmetros
For example, if a guitarist changes instruments in the middle
There may
situationsexistentes
where you enquanto
need to change
specific
paespecficos
embesnapshots
mantm
outros
of
tour it might
be necessary
to change
levels and
EQmiddle
on the
Fora example,
if a guitarist
changes
instruments
in the
parmetros
rametersinalterados.
in existing snapshots while leaving other parameters
guitar
channel
in be
allnecessary
the snapshots
in a show.
of a tour
it might
to change
levels Snapshots
and EQ onprothe
unchanged.
vides
the
following
modes
to
accommodate
these
sitguitar
channel
the snapshots
in instrument
a show. Snapshots
proPor
exemplo,
se in
umall
guitarrista
troca de
notypes
meioofde
uma
uations:
vides
following
to nveis
accommodate
these da
types
sit-em
turn,
example,
necessrio
os
e EQ
do canal
Forthe
if alterar
amodes
guitarist
changes
instruments
inguitarra
theofmiddle
Examples of Absolute and Relative Edits

Absolute Changing a fader level from 0 dB to 3 dB and applyingExemplos

that change
as Absolute
results
in that
setapplyidenAbsolute
Changing
a fader
level
0 dBfader
to 3being
dB and
de Edies
Relativas
efrom
Absolutas
tically
3 dB in
selected
snapshots.
ing
thattochange
as all
Absolute
results
in that fader being set iden-
Absolute
o nvel
de um
fader de 0 dB a 3 dB e aplicar
tically
to 3 Alterar
dB in all
selected
snapshots.
Relative
Changing
a fader
level from
0 tonesse
3 dBfader
and applying
essa
alterao
como
resultado
absoluto
fazand
queapplyele seja
Absolute
Changing
a fader level
from 0
dB to 3 dB
that
change
as Relative
results
in
that
reduced
by
definido
como
3a dB
em
todos
os
snapshots
Relative
Changing
fader
level
from
0fader
to 3being
dBselecionados.
and
applying
ing that change as Absolute results in that fader being set idenamountas
inRelative
all selected
snapshots,
or 3 dB
relative
to the
that change
results
in that fader
being
reduced
by
tically to 3 dB in all selected snapshots.
Relative
Alterar
oselected
nvelinde
um
fader or
de3 For
0 dB
a 3 to
dBathe
e aplicar
value
previously
stored
the
snapshot(s).
example,
that
amount
in all
snapshots,
dB
relative
essa
alterao
como
resultado
relativo
nesse
fader
resulta
que a
channel
previously
at 6
dB
would
be changed
to
dB.applying
value
previously
stored
the
snapshot(s).
For
a
Relative
Changing
ain
fader
level
from
0 to
3example,
dB9
and
quantidade de reduo do fader ser aplicada em todos os snapshots

channel
previously
at 6 dBresults
wouldinbethat
changed
to 9 dB.
that change
as Relative
fader being
reduced by
selecionados, ou seja, 3 dB relativamente ao valor previamente
todos
os
snapshots
em
um
show.
Snapshots
oferecem
os
seguintes
uations:
Relative
Changes
withsnapshots,
Mixed Data
Types
of a tour it might be necessary to change levels and EQ on the Making
that
amount
in
all
selected
or
3
dB
relative
to the em
armazenado no snapshot. Por exemplo, um canal previamente
Edit Mode
Lets
you capture
individual
control changes while
modos
parachannel
acomodar
esse
de situao:
guitar
in all
thetipo
snapshots
in a show. Snapshots pro- Making
Relative
Changes
with
Mixed
Data
Types
value
previously
stored
in
the
snapshot(s).
For
example,
dB seria alterado
dB. parameters (such as gaina
If a6
combination
of dBpara9
and non-dB
you
those changes
to one
or more
pre-existing
Edit mix,
Modeand
Letsapply
you capture
individual
control
changes
while
vides the following modes to accommodate these types of sit-
snapshots
as
absolute
or relative
changes.
example,
you
Edit
Permite
mudanas
controles
individuais
you Mode
mix, and
apply capturar
those
changes
to oneem
orFor
more
pre-existing
uations:
enquanto
voc
mixa
e
aplicar
essas
alteraes
a
um
ouguimais
could
enter
Edit
mode
the
first
time
a
guitarist
uses
a
new
snapshots as absolute or relative changes. For example, you
snapshots
pr-existentes
como
alteraes
relativas
ou
absolutas.
tar
in
rehearsal.
When
you
are
satisfied
with
your
settings
you
could
enter
Edit
mode
first time
a guitarist
useschanges
a new guiEdit
Mode
Lets
you the
capture
individual
control
while
Por
exemplo,
voc
pode
entrar
no
modowith
Edit na primeira
vez
can
apply
them
(in
absolute
or
relative
to
update
tar in
rehearsal.
you
are
satisfied
settings
you em
you
mix,
andWhen
apply
those
changes
tofashion)
oneyour
or more
pre-existing
que
o snapshots.
guitarrista utilizar
a nova
guitarra
em page
um ensaio.
Quando
other
Seeabsolute
Using
Edit
Mode
on
190.
cansnapshots
apply them
or relative
fashion)
update you
as (in
absolute
or relative
changes.
Forto
example,
voc estiver satisfeito com seus ajustes, voc pode aplic-los (de
other
snapshots.
Seemode
Using
Edit
Mode
page 190.
could
enter ou
Edit
the
first
time aon
guitarist
uses a newVeja
guimodo
absoluto
relativo)
para
atualizar
outros
snapshots.
Propagate
Mode Lets
you update
data in pre-existing
snaptar in rehearsal.
When
you
are 190.
satisfied with your settings you
Utilizando
o
Modo
Edit
na
pgina
shots after you've already made changes and decided you
Propagate Mode Lets you update data in pre-existing snapcan apply them (in absolute or relative fashion) to update
want
keep
them.
Whilemade
Edit mode
requires
you to know
shots to
after
you've
already
changes
and decided
you
Propagate
Mode Permite
atualizar
osMode
dadoson
empage
snapshots
prother snapshots.
See Using
Edit
190.
ahead
of
time
that
you
will
be
updating
snapshots,
Propagate
want to keep
them.
While
mode
youeto
know que
existentes
depois
que
vocEdit
j fez
as requires
mudanas
decidiu
mode
lets
youMode
decide
towill
update
other
snapshots
with
current
ahead
of time
that
you
updating
snapshots,
Propagate
Lets
you
data
in pre-existing
snapquer
mant-las.
Enquanto
obeupdate
modo
Edit
requer
quePropagate
voc
saiba
settings
after
making
adjustments
to
your
mix.
For
example,
if
mode
letsafter
you you've
decide
tovoc
update
other
snapshots
current
shots
made
changes
and with
decided
antecipadamente
quealready
vai
atualizar
snapshots,
oyou
modo
its
the
third
consecutive
night
youve
reached
to
increase
gain
settings
making
adjustments
tomode
your
mix. For
example,
if
Propagate
a voc
decidir
atualizar
outros
snapshots
wantafter
topermite
keep
them.
While
Editpor
requires
you
to
know
com
osthird
ajustes
atuais
de
faz-los
em
sua
mix.
PorPropagate
exemplo,
on
the
DI of
channel
fordepois
a new
guitar,
you
could
Propagate
its the
consecutive
night
youve
reached
touse
increase
gain
ahead
time
that
you
will
be
updating
snapshots,
se
a terceira
noite
consecutiva
em que
voc
aumentou
oand
ganho
mode
to
gain
increase
you
justuse
made
ap- no
onthe
DIquickly
channel
forthe
a new
guitar,
you
could
Propagate
mode
lets
youtake
decide
to
update
other
snapshots
with
current
canal
para
a
nova
guitarra,
voc
pode
usar
o
modo
Propagate
paraif
ply
it
to
other
snapshots.
See
Using
Propagate
Mode
on
mode
to quickly
take theadjustments
gain increase
made
and apsettings
after making
toyou
yourjust
mix.
For example,
rapidamente
assumir que deve aumentar o ganho e aplicar isso em
page
191.
ply its
it to
other
See
Using
Propagate
Mode
on gain
the
thirdsnapshots.
consecutive
night
youve
reached
to increase
outros snapshots. Veja Usando o Modo Propagate na pgina 191.
pageon191.
the DI channel for a new guitar, you could use Propagate
Events-driven recall of snapshots is disabled while in Propmode
to quickly take
gain increase
youpor
justeventos
made and
apCarregamentos
de the
snapshots
guiados
esto
agate or Edit mode.
more information,
seewhile
Chapter
22,
Events-driven
recall For
of snapshots
is disabled
in Propply
it to other snapshots.
See Using
Propagate
Mode
desabilitados
nos modos
Propagate
ou Edit.
Para on
mais
Events.
agate
or Edit mode.
more information,
see Chapter 22,
page
191.
informaes,
veja For
o Captulo
22, Events.
Events.
channel
previously
at 6 dB
would
be changed
to 9 dB.
and
EQ frequency)
and
applied
in relative
If a combination
ofare
dB edited
and non-dB
parameters
(suchfashion,
as gain
Fazendo
Alteraes
Relativas
Com
Tipos
deand Dados
the
as relative
changes
anddB
EQparameters
frequency)are
areadjusted
edited and
applied(delta)
in relative
fashion,
Misturados
Making Relative Changes with Mixed Data Types
the dB
non-dB
are applied
as absolute
changes.
parameters
are adjusted
as relative
(delta) changes and
theSe
non-dB
are applied
changes.
If
auma
combination
of as
dB
and
non-dB
parameters
as ganho
gain e
combinao
deabsolute
parmetros
dB
e no-dB(such
(como
To frequncia
update
parameters
in existing
snapshots
using fashion,
Edit
and EQspecific
frequency)
areeditados
edited
and
applied
inderelative
de EQ)
so
e aplicados
forma
relativa,
os
mode:
To parmetros
update
parameters
incomo
existing
snapshots
using
Editand
the dB specific
parameters
are adjusted
as relative
(delta)
changes
dB so
ajustados
alteraes
relativas
(delta)
e os
mode:
no-dB
so
como
absolutas.
the non-dB
aremain
applied
as alteraes
absolute
changes.
1 Navigate
to aplicados
the
Snapshots
page.
1 Navigate to the main Snapshots page.

2 Click
Edit button
to enter
Edit mode.
Edit button
Para the
atualizar
parmetros
especficos
emThe
snapshots
existentes
To update specific parameters in existing snapshots using Edit

usando
o modo
Edit: toflashing
changes
into
twobutton
smaller
buttons:
The
2 Click
the
Edit
enter Edit
mode.Abs,
The and
Edit Rel.
button
mode:
system begins
tracking
allflashing
changesbuttons:
while you
make
changes
into two
smaller
Abs,
andthem.
Rel. The
Navigate
to the main
Snapshots page.
11Navegue
pgina
Snapshots.
system
begins tracking
all changes while you make them.
2 Click the Edit button to enter Edit mode. The Edit button
2 Clique no boto Edit para entrar no modo Edit. O boto Edit se

changes into
twopequenos
smaller flashing
buttons: Abs,
The
tranforma
em dois
botes piscantes:
Abs and
e Rel.Rel.
O sistema
system
begins
tracking
all
changes
while
you
make
them.
comea a monitorar todas as mudanas que voc fizer nele.
Events-driven
Usingo Edit
Usando
Modo Mode
Edit recall of snapshots is disabled while in Propagate or
Edit mode. For more information, see Chapter 22,
Using
Edit
Mode
mode
is
a powerful
waydetoatualizar
update parmetros
specific parameters
OEdit
modo
Edit
um
jeito rpido
especficos em
Events.
across
multiple
snapshots
without
overwriting
any
settings
Edit
mode
is a powerful
way
to update
specific
parameters
vrios
snapshots
sem sobrescrever
qualquer
ajuste
que
se queira
you want
to preserve.
By entering
Edit
mode
making
preservar.
Entrando
no modo
Edit antes
de
fazerbefore
ajustes,
voc pode
across
multiple
snapshots
without
overwriting
any settings
Using
Edit
Mode
editar
um nico
controle
nmero
controles,
eofsuas Edit mode
adjustments,
you
can edit
aqualquer
single Edit
control
orde
any
number
you
want
to preserve.
Byou
entering
mode
before
making
alteraes
so
controladas
o ponto
em
que
entrou
noof
modo
controls,
and you
your
changes
tracked
from
the
Edit
adjustments,
edit desde
a are
single
control
or
anypoint
number
Edit mode
is a can
powerful
way
to
update
specific
parameters
Edit mode
3 Adjust any combination of snapshottable parameters on the
Edit.
mode wasand
entered.
controls,
your changes are tracked from the point Edit
across multiple snapshots without overwriting any settings
mode
entered.
youwas
want
to preserve. By entering Edit mode before making
A habilidade
para
editarcontrol
um nico
controle
no modo Edit
The
ability to edit
a single
in Edit
mode provides
adjustments,
you
can edit a single
control
or any number of
oferece
mais
seletividade
quemode.
o modo
Propagate.
more
selectivity
than
Propagate
The
ability
to
edit
a
single
control
in
Edit
mode
provides
controls, and your changes are tracked from the point Edit
morewas
selectivity than Propagate mode.
mode
Edio
Absolutaentered.
e Relativa
console
on-screen.
3 Adjustor
any
combination of snapshottable parameters on the
console or on-screen.
4 Select
the snapshot(s) to which you want to apply your edEdit mode
Modo Edit
its.
4 Select the snapshot(s) to which you want to apply your ed3 Adjust any combination of snapshottable parameters on the
its.
Absolute and Relative Edits
3console
Ajuste
qualquer
combinao
de Abs
Parmetros
na console
5 Click
either
the flashing
buttons
(for Absolute)
or Rel ou na
or of
on-screen.
tela.
(for
Relative).
You
can
cancel
Edit
mode
by
pressing
the
CanAbsolute
and
Relative
Edits
5
Click
either
of
the
flashing
buttons
Abs
(for
Absolute)
or
Rel
ability
to
aone
single
control
in ou
Editmais
mode
provides
Alteraes
podem
seredit
aplicadas
a um
snapshots
Changes The
can
be applied
to
or more
selected
snapshots
as
4 Select the snapshot(s) to which you want to apply your edcel
button
on
the
control
surface,
clicking
the
Cancel
button
(for
Relative).
You
can
cancel
Edit
mode
by
pressing
the
Canmore
selectivity
than
Propagate
mode.
selecionados
com
valores
absolutos
ou
Qualquer
absolute or
relative
values.
parameter
canrelativos.
be snapshots
edited in
abChanges
can
be
applied
toAny
one
or more selected
as
4its.
Selecione
os snapshots
emESC
quekey
deseja
aplicar
suas edies.
on-screen,
or by
on your
keycel
button on
thepressing
control the
surface,
clicking
the computer
Cancel button
parmetro
pode
ser
editado
de
forma
absoluta;
todos
os
parmetros
solute fashion;
all dB
parameters
can be edited
in edited
relativeinfashabsolute
or relative
values.
Any parameter
can be
abboard.
em dB
podem ser
editados
de forma
relativa.
on-screen,
by pressing
the ESCbuttons
key on Abs
your
computer
keyAbsolute
and
Relative
Edits
5 Click or
either
of
the
flashing
(for
Absolute)
or Rel
5 Clique um dos botes piscantes: Abs (para Absolute) ou Rel
(para
ion. fashion; all dB parameters can be edited in relative fashsolute
board.
(for
Relative).
You
can
cancel
Edit
mode
by
pressing
the
CanRelative).
Voc
pode
cancelar
o
modo
Edit
pressionando
o
boto
ion.Changes can be applied to one or more selected snapshots as The selected snapshots are updated according to your changes
cel button
on the control
surface,
clicking
Cancel
button
Cancel
na superfcie
de controle,
clicando
no the
boto
Cancel
na tela,
and selected
your choice
of Absolute
or Relative
edit. to your changes
absolute or relative values. Any parameter can be edited in ab- The
snapshots
are updated
according
on-screen,
or byapressing
key on your computer keyou
pressionando
tecla ESCthe
noESC
teclado.
solute fashion; all dB parameters can be edited in relative fash- and your choice of Absolute or Relative edit.
board.
ion.
Os snapshots selecionados so atualizados de acordo com as
The selected
snapshots
arede
updated
toRelative.
your changes
alteraes
e suas
escolhas
edio according
Absolute ou

190
Guia VENUE Profile
and your choice of Absolute or Relative edit.
Using Propagate Mode

Using Propagate Mode
Usando o Modo Propagate
You can use the Propagate command to capture changes and

Voc
pode
usar
o existing
comandosnapshots.
Propagate
para
capturar
alteraes
You
can them
use
the
commandPropagate
to capture
changes
and e
apply
to Propagate
mode
is most
aplic-las
a snapshots
existentes.
OPropagate
modo Propagate
most
mais til
apply
them
to
existing
snapshots.
mode
is
useful when you realize during the course of mixing that you
quando voc percebe durante a mixagem que deseja capturar seus
useful
when
you realize
during the
course
mixing
that you
wantatuais
to capture
yourem
current
to of
use
in other
ajustes
para usar
outrossettings
snapshots.
Voc
pode snapdesfazer
want
to
capture
your
current
settings
to
use
in
other
snapshots. You
can undo Propagate commands.
comandos
Propagate.
shots. You can undo Propagate commands.
update parmetros
specific parameters
in em
existing
snapshots:
ParaToatualizar
especficos
snapshots
existentes:
To update specific parameters in existing snapshots:

1 Make sure the channel is set as needed.
1 Make sure the channel is set as needed.
Rack Features
2Stage
Click Propagate.
The current data and channel scope is
22Clique
Propagate. The
A abrangncia
e canais
Click Propagate.
current datados
anddados
channel
scope isatual
cleared.
limpa.
cleared.
3audio
Set the
to reflect
onlysystems.
those parameters
want
to
I/Oscope
for VENUE
Profile
Up to two you
Stage
Racks
Set
scope
to reflect
only
those
parameters
you
want
toque
33Ajuste
a abrangncia
para
refletir
apenas
aqueles
parmetros
update
by
doing
the
following:
canthe
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up to 96
total
inputs.
deseja
update
by doing
the following:
atualizar:
For
each parameter
you want to update, click the corre-
1 Certifique-se o canal est ajustado como necessrio.
em parameter
cada canalyou
quewant
deseja
que seja
afetado
quando
Audio
I/O
Clique
For
each
tothat
update,
click
the
corresponding
Data Type button
so
it is scoped
(displayed
o snapshot for posteriormente carregado (mostrados em
Data
Type
button so
that it is scoped
(displayed
in
sponding
48red).
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic preamps
and
vermelho).
in red).
individually
- e - and
Clique
no
boto
Data
Typewant
correpondente
a cada
and
8
analog
output
channels;
expandable
to 48
analog
For each channel
you
to update, up
press
itsparmetro
channelor
canais
de abrangncia
que
deseja press
que sejam
afetados
digital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
dos
For
each
channel
you
want
to
update,
its
channel
Select switch on the console, or click the channel
quando o snapshot for posteriormente carregado (mostrados
Select
switch
on
the
console,
or
click
the
channel
on-screen so that it is scoped (displayed in red).
em vermelho).
Synchronization
and Control I/O
on-screen so that it is scoped (displayed in red).

System Components
Included Components
VENUE Mouse Pad
Propagating an EQ change for a channel

VENUE
Propagating
an EQProfile
changeGuide
for a channel
4 Select
the
snapshot
orum
range
Propagando
uma
mudana
EQ para
canal of
snapshots you want to up Two

(2) consoleorlights
4 date
Select
range of snapshots you want to upinthe
thesnapshot
Snapshots list.
in Protective
Dustou
Cover
4date
Selecione
snapshot
srie de snapshots que deseja atualizar
theoSnapshots
list.
5 Click Propagate.
The
na Snapshots
List.
Rack(s) (see next) scoped parameters are updated in the
5 selected
Click Propagate.
The scoped parameters are updated in the
snapshots.
selected
snapshots.
5 Clique Propagate. Os parmetros na abrangncia so atualizados
nos snapshots selecionados.

System Restore CD
Preview Mode
Preview
Mode
Modo Preview
Preview mode lets you recall, store and edit snapshots without
Preview
mode
you recall,
store and edit snapshots without
affecting
thelets
current
mix.carregar,
O
modo Preview
permite
armazenar e editar snapshots
affecting the current mix.
sem afetar a mixagem atual.
When enabled, Preview mode takes the console offline from
When
enabled,
Preview
mode
takes
console offline
from
the live
audio
mix sooyou
canPreview
workthe
ahead
a rehearsal,
Quando
habilitado,
modo
colocaduring
a console
offline da
the
live
audio
mix
so
you
can
work
ahead
during
a
rehearsal,
performance
or event
to preview
andensaio,
mixagem
de udio
e voc
pode irupcoming
em frentesnapshots
durante um
performance
orou
event
toAny
preview
upcoming
snapshots
edit them as
needed.
control
that can
be
stored and
and
reperformance
evento
para
ter um
preview
dos
prximos
snapshots
e
edit
them
as
needed.
Any
control
that
can
be
stored
and
recalled bysesnapshots
is available
while inque
Preview
and
edit-los
necessrio.
Qualquer controle
pode mode,
ser
armazenado
called
by snapshots
is available
in Preview
mode,
and preeyou
carregado
snapshots
estwhile
disponvel
no modo
Preview,
e voc
can
alsoem
modify
the Snapshot
List.
Once
you
are
done
Additional
Required
Components
pode
tambm
modificar
a
Snapshots
List.
Uma
vez
que
voc
you
can
also
modify
the
Snapshot
List.
Once
you
are
done
previewing or editing snapshots, you can store your changes
tofez o
preview
e editing
editou
snapshots,
voc
pode
armazenar
suas alteraes
viewing
orthe
snapshots,
you
can
store
your changes
to
update
existing
snapshots
with
changes.
The following
components
must
beyour
purchased
separately:
para atualizar
snapshots
existentes
com changes.
suas modificaes.
update
the existing
snapshots
with your
recommended;
1024x768
Usando
oPreview
Modo Preview
Using
Mode minimum resolution). VGA and
Using
DVI Preview
supported. Mode
O
fluxo
de
trabalho
bsicoPreview
para usar
ois modo
Preview o
The
basic
workflow
fortrackball/mouse
using
mode
as follows:
USB
keyboard
and
(Windows
compatible)
seguinte:
The basic workflow for using Preview mode is as follows:
1 Make sure your active mix is set as desired, and make sure
1 1the
Make
sure
your
active
mix
set
as desired,
and
make
sure
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
rehearsal,
event
or
performance
has
an upcoming
opporCertifique-se
de
que
suaismixagem
ativa
est
ajustada
como
the
rehearsal,
event
or offline.
performance
has an upcoming
opportunity
for
you
to
go
desejado
e
certifique-se
de
que
o
ensaio,
evento
ou
performance
tunity
for uma
you oportunidade
to go offline. futura para ir para o modo offline.
posssui
a Digital
Snakemode
cable.byThis
cable the
canon-screen
be purchased
directly
2 Enter
Preview
clicking
Preview
butfrom
Avid
or
assembled
by
your
preferred
vendor.
2 ton
Enter
Preview
mode
by
clicking
the
on-screen
Preview
but- in
in the
page. Thenoword
PREVIEW
flashes
2 Entre
nomain
modoSnapshots
Preview clicando
boto
Preview
na tela
na
ton
inacross
theSnapshots.
main
page.
The word
PREVIEW
flashes
in
red
the Snapshots
screen
for confirmation.
(By
default,
the Funcpgina
A palvra
PREVIEW
pisca
em vermelho
na tela
red
across
the F1
screen
for confirmation.
(By
default,
the
Function
switch
is assigned
to Preview
mode,
but this
be
para
confirmao.
(Por
padro,
o Function
Switch
F1can
atribudo
Optional
Components
tion
switch
F1
is
assigned
to
Preview
mode,
but
this
can
para
o
modo
Preview,
mas
isso
pode
ser
personalizado
utilizando
customized using Events. For more information, see be
The following
components
areveja
optional,
and 22,
must
be
Events.
Para
mais
informaes,
o Captulo
customized
using
Events.
For more
information,
seeEvents.)
Chapter
22,
Events.)
purchased
separately:
Chapter
22, Events.)
(for Talkback)
Modo
Preview
Preview
mode
Preview mode
options
Dofollowing
any
of the
following:
33The
Siga
um dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
3 Do
of the
following:
For any
details
on all
VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
Edit
the Snapshots
List Reorder snapshots in the list, if dewebsite
Edite
a (www.avid.com).
Snapshots List Reordene os snapshots na lista, se
Edit
the by
Snapshots
List
Reorder
snapshots
in the list,
if desired,
clicking
and
dragging
them.
Changes
to ordem
the
order
desejado, clicando e arrastando-os.
Alteraes
na
dosof
itens
sired,
byin
clicking
and dragging
them.
Changes
to the
order
of if
items
the
Snapshots
list
may
affect
the
current
active
mix
na Snapshots List podem afetar a atividade atual de mixagem
se os
Mix
Rack
Options
items
in
the Snapshots
listrely
may
the
active
if mais
the
affected
snapshots
onaffect
MIDI
or current
MTC
(For
snapshots
afetados
dependem
de
triggers
MIDItriggering.
ou
MTC.mix
(Para
the
affected
snapshots
rely
on Ajustes
MIDI Console
orda
MTC
triggering.
(For
informaes,
veja Alterando
Console
o Modo
Preview
more
information,
see
Changing
Settings
in Preview
I/O
Options
more
information,
see Changing Console Settings in Preview
na
pgina
Mode
on192.)
page 192.)
Mode on page 192.)
AI16um
Analog
provides
analog
Create
a novo
New Mic/Line
Snapshot
Adjust
settings
as
desired16
and
create
a
Crie
snapshotInput
AjusteCard
as that
configuraes
como
desejado
mic/line
level
inputs
Create
aum
New
Snapshot
Adjust
settings
asNew.
desired
and
create aNovos
enew
criesnapshot
novo
snapshot
clicando
(Veja
Criando
by
clicking
New.
(Seeem
Creating
New
Snapshots
Snapshots
na
182.)
new
bypgina
clicking
New. (See Creating New Snapshots
onsnapshot
page 182.)
on page 182.)
outputs
Chapter
21: Snapshots
XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card that
provides
8 analog191
191
Recall and Edit an Existing Snapshot Recall a snapshot to preview itsand

settings
make Snapshot
any adjustments
Recall
Edit anand
Existing
Recall anecessary,
snapshot being
to presure
to
re-store
the
snapshot
before
exiting
Preview
mode.
view
its
settings
and
make
any
adjustments
necessary,
being
Recalle and
Existing
Snapshot
Recall um
a snapshot
preCarregue
editeEdit
uman
snapshot
existente
Carregue
snapshotto
para
Recall
and Edit
an
Existing
Snapshot
Recall
a snapshot
to preStoring
aitssnapshot
in
Preview
mode
does
notPreview
affect
previously
sure
to
re-store
snapshot
exiting
mode.
view
settings
and
make before
adjustments
necessary,
being
ter
um
preview
dethe
seus
ajustes
eany
fazer
qualquer
ajuste
necessrio,
viewMIDI
settings
and
make(ifany
adjustments
necessary,
being
stored
orde
Plug-in
data
Storing
aitssnapshot
in
Preview
mode
does
not
affect
sure
to
re-store
the
snapshot
before
exiting
Preview
tendo
a certeza
re-armazenar
oany).
snapshot
antes
de previously
sair mode.
do modo
sure
to
re-store
the
snapshot
before
exiting
Preview
mode.
stored
MIDI
or Plug-in
data
(if any).
Preview.
Armazenar
um in
snapshot
no
mododoes
Preview
no afeta
dados
Storing
a snapshot
Preview
mode
not affect
previously
Edit Channel
and Scope
Edit any
channel
settings,
paa snapshot
in Settings
Preview
mode
does
not affect
previously
MIDIStoring
ou Plug-in
armazenados
stored
MIDIpreviamente
or Plug-in data
(if any). (se existentes).
rameters,
or scope
associated
the
snapshot
pre- pastored
MIDI
Plug-in
datawith
(ifEdit
any).
Edit
Channel
andorScope
Settings
any
channelbeing
settings,
viewed.
The
Snapshots
displays
the
current
snapshot
rameters,
or scope
associated
with the
snapshot
being
preEditar
Ajustes
deand
Canal
epage
Abrangncia
Edite
quaisquer
ajustes,
Edit
Channel
Scope
Settings
Edit
any
channel
settings,
paEditinChannel
and
Scope
Settings
Edit
any
channel
settings,
paname
italics
to
indicate
that
at
least
one
parameter
has
parmetros,
ou
abrangncia
associados
com
o
snapshot
viewed.
The
Snapshots
page
displays
the
current
snapshot
rameters, or scope associated with
snapshot beingbeen
pre-em
rameters,
or
scope
associated
with
the
snapshot
being
prechanged,
and
Channelthat
Faders
show
you
previous
levelem
preview.
A italics
pgina
Snapshots
mostra
o nome
dothe
snapshot
name
in
to
indicate
atdisplays
least
one
parameter
hasatual
been
viewed.
Thethe
Snapshots
page
the
current
snapshot
Thethe
Snapshots
page
displays
theType
current
snapshot
itlico
para
indicar
que
pelo
menos
um
parmetro
foi
alterado,
e
forviewed.
each
channel
in
bright
red.
Scope
Data
buttons
and
changed,
and
Channel
Faders
show
you
the
previous
level
name in italics to indicate that at least one parameter has
been
osfor
Channel
Faders
mostram
o
nvel
anterior
para
cada
canal
em
name
in
italics
to
indicate
that
at
least
one
parameter
has
been
Channel
Scope
remain
live
active
at alland
each channel
in bright
red.
Scopeshow
Dataand
Type
buttons
changed,
andfunctionality
the
Channel
Faders
you
the
previous
level
vermelho
brilhante.
funcionalidades
dos
botes
Scope
Data
changed,
andwords,
theAsChannel
Faders
show
you
the previous
level
times
(in
other
changes
made
to
these
controls
while
Channel
Scope
functionality
remain
live
and
active
at all
for each channel in bright red. Scope Data Type buttons
and
Typefor
e Channel
Scopeinsebright
mantm
ativos
em
todos
os
momentos
each
channel
red.
Scope
Data
Type
buttons
and
in Channel
Preview
mode
will
remain
once
Preview
mode
is exited).
times
(in other
words,
changes
made
to live
these
controls
while
Scope
functionality
remain
and
active
at
all no
(em
outras
palavras,
alteraes
feitas
a
esses
controles
quando
Channel
Scope
functionality
remain
live
and
active
at
all
in times
Preview
will
remain
onceomade
Preview
modecontrols
exited).
(inmode
other
words,
changes
toPreview
these
while
modo
Preview
permanecem
quando
modo
is fechado).
Addtimes
and
Edit
MIDI words,
or Plug-In
Data To
add to
MIDI
or controls
plug-in
data
(in other
changes
made
these
while
in Preview mode will remain once Preview mode is exited).
associated
with
theorsnapshot,
click
Add
button
in
Addinand
Edit
MIDI
Plug-In
Data
Tothe
add
MIDI
or plug-in
data
Preview
mode
will
remain
once
Preview
mode
is the
exited).
Adicionar e editar dados MIDI ou Plug-In Para adicionar dados
MIDI
Plug-Ins
snapshot
list.click
With
plug-ins
thisoradds
the data
with
the
snapshot,
the
AddMIDI
button
in
the
Addorand
Edit MIDI
or Plug-In
Data
To
add
plug-in
deassociated
MIDI
ou plug-ins
associados
ao
snapshot,
clique
no
boto
Add
Addorand
Editplug-in
MIDI
orsettings
Plug-In
Data
To
add MIDI
or
plug-in
data
current
online
to
the
snapshot.
If
you
need
to
MIDI
Plug-Ins
snapshot
list.
With
plug-ins
this
adds
associated
with
the
snapshot,
click
the
Add
button
in
the
na Snapshot List. Com plug-ins, isso adiciona os ajustesthe
atuais
associated
with
the
snapshot,
click
theassociated
Add button
in the
update
MIDI
plug-in
data
with
athe
online
plug-in
settings
to
the
snapshot.
you
need
toou
decurrent
plug-in
aoPlug-Ins
snapshot.
Se or
voc
precisar
atualizarIfthis
dados
MIDI
MIDIpre-existing
or
snapshot
list.
With
plug-ins
adds
MIDI
or
Plug-Ins
snapshot
list.
With
plug-ins
this
adds
snapshot,
right-click
thesnapshot,
corresponding
entry
the
plug-ins
associados
a MIDI
um
com
oinboto
direito
update
pre-existing
or plug-in
datasnapshot.
associated
with
atheno
current
online plug-in
settings
toclique
the
If you
need
to
current
online
plug-in
settings
to the
snapshot.
IfSnapshots
you
need
to
MIDI/Plug-ins
view
ofthe
the
Snapshots
page
and
choose
the
Upitem
correspondente
na
rea
MIDI/Plug-ins
da
pgina
snapshot,
right-click
corresponding
entry
in
the
update
pre-existing
MIDI
or plug-in
data
associated
with
a e
update
pre-existing
MIDI
or
plug-in
data
associated
with
a
escolha
a opo
Update
opo
incluir
aand
posio
plug-in
date
option
(this
option
will
include
the
plug-in
rack
position,
MIDI/Plug-ins
view
of(essa
the
Snapshots
page
choose
the
Up-no
snapshot,
right-click
the
corresponding
entry
in do
the
snapshot,
right-click
the
corresponding
entry
in the
rack
ethe
o nome
do
Snapshot
associado).
Paraplug-in
mais
informaes,
veja
and
name
of
the
snapshot).
For
more
informadate
option
(this
option
the
rack
position,
MIDI/Plug-ins
viewassociated
ofwill
theinclude
Snapshots
page
and
choose
the UpPlug-Ins
e
MIDI
no
Modo
Preview
na
pgina
193.
MIDI/Plug-ins
view
of
the
Snapshots
page
and
choose
the
tion,
seeoption
Plug-Ins
and
MIDI
ininclude
Previewthe
Mode
onrack
page
193.Upand
the
name
of the
associated
snapshot).
For more
informadate
(this
option
will
plug-in
position,
date
option
(this
option
will
include
the
plug-in
rack
position,
tion,
Plug-Ins
in Preview
Mode
pageinforma193.
andsee
the
name ofand
the MIDI
associated
snapshot).
Foronmore
and the name of the associated snapshot). For more information, see Plug-Ins and MIDI in Preview Mode on page 193.
tion, see Plug-Ins and MIDI in Preview Mode on page 193.
Updating dados
snapshot
plug-in
Atualizando
de plug-ins
emdata
snapshot
Updating
snapshot
plug-in
data while in Preview mode, click the
4 To undo
an action
made
4 Para
desfazer
umaplug-in
ao data
realizada no modo Preview, clique no
Updating
snapshot
Undo
button
(Forwhile
more in
information
aboutclick
Undo
in
4 To
undo
anon-screen.
action
made
Preview
mode,
boto
Undo
na
tela.
(Para
mais
sobre
Undo
nothe
modo
Updating
snapshot
plug-in
data informaes
Preview
mode,
see
Making
Changes
Snapshots
on
Undo
button
on-screen.
(For
more
about
Undo
in
4 To
undo
an
action
made
while
intoPreview
mode,
click
the
Preview,
veja
Fazendo
Alteraes
eminformation
Snapshots
na
pgina
190.)
4 To
undo
action
made
while intoPreview
mode,
the
page
190.)
Preview
mode,an
see
Making
Changes
Snapshots
onclick
Undo
button
on-screen.
(For
more information
about
Undo in
Undo
button
on-screen.
(For
more
information
about
Undo
in
5 page
Para
atualizar
o snapshot
em Changes
preview mas
manter-se on
no modo
190.)
Preview
mode,
see Making
to Snapshots
5 To
update
the currently
previewed
snapshot
but remain
in
Preview
mode,
see
Making
Changes
to
Snapshots
on
Preview,
ou clique Store.
pagepressione
190.)
Preview
mode,
or click
Store. snapshot but remain in
5 To
update
thepress
currently
previewed
page
190.)
mode,
press
oreclick
Store.
5 To update
the currently
previewed
snapshot
butnecessrio
remain
6 Preview
empreviewing
preview
editando
ajustes
conforme
6Continue
Continue
and
editing
settings
as needed
(all in
5 To update the currently previewed snapshot but remain in
(todas
as
funes
snapshot
esto
disponveis
no
modo
Preview).
Preview
mode,
press
or
click
Store.
snapshot
are available
in preview
6 Continue
previewing
and
editing
settings mode).
as needed (all
Previewfunctions
mode,
press
or
click
Store.
snapshot
functions
are
available
in
preview
mode).
6
Continue
previewing
and
editing
settings
needed
(all
7 7Quando
vocaretiver
finalizado
e precisar
doasmodo
Preview,
When
you
finished
and need
to exit sair
Preview
mode,
press
6 Continue previewing and editing settings as needed (all
snapshot
functions
are
available
in
preview
mode).
pressione
F1
no boto
Preview
na Preview
tela). mode, press
F1
(or click
the
on-screen
Preview
button).
7 When
you(ou
areclique
finished
need
toinexit
snapshot
functions
areand
available
preview
mode).
F1 7(or
click you
the are
on-screen
Preview
button).
When
finished
and need
to exit Preview mode, press
Sair do
modo
Preview
semneed
salvar
asmode,
alteraes
Exiting
Preview
mode without
storing
willPreview
discard
the
7 When
you
are finished
and
todescartar
exit
press
F1 (or
click
the on-screen
Preview
button).
feitas
enquantdo
no
modo
Preview
(o
modo
Preview
limpo
changes
made
while
in
Preview
mode
(Preview
mode
F1 Exiting
(or click
the on-screen
Preview
button).
Preview
mode without
storing
will discard theis
cada vez
que
voc
sai dele).
Vocexplicitly
precisa store
explicitar as
cleared
each
time
you
Youmode
must
changes
made
while
inexit).
Preview
(Preview
mode is
Exiting
Preview
mode
without
storing
will discard
the
mudanas
para atualizar
os snapshots
selecionados.
Exiting
Preview
mode
without
storing
will
discard
the
changes
to
update
the
associated
snapshots.
cleared
eachmade
time while
you exit).
You must
explicitly
changes
in Preview
mode
(Previewstore
mode is
changes
made
while
in
Preview
mode
(Preview
mode
is
changes
update
theyou
associated
snapshots.
clearedtoeach
time
exit). You
must explicitly store
cleared each time you exit). You must explicitly store
changes to update the associated snapshots.
changes to update the associated snapshots.

192
Guia VENUE Profile
Undo and Preview Mode

Undo
and Preview Mode
In Preview mode, you can Undo actions applied to the SnapUndo
and
Preview
Mode
Undo
e
Modo
Preview
shot
List (such
as
Recall,
Store,
New
and Duplicate)
afIn Undo
Preview
mode,
you can
Undo
actions
applied towithout
the Snapand
Preview
Mode
fecting
the
online
mix.
shot
(such
as Recall,
New and
Duplicate) without
afInList
Preview
mode,
youStore,
can
actions
the SnapNo
Preview,
voc
podeUndo
aplicar
aesapplied
Undo to
In modo
Preview
mode,
you can
Undo
actions
applied
toSnapshot
the Snap-List
fecting
the
online
mix.
shot List
(suchStore,
as Recall,
New and Duplicate)
af(como
Recall,
NewStore,
e available.
Duplicate)
sem afetarwithout
a mixagem
Multiple
levels
Undo
are
shot
List (such
as of
Recall,
Store,
New and Duplicate) without affecting the online mix.
online.
fecting
the levels
online
Multiple
ofmix.
Undo are available.
Changing Console Settings in Preview Mode

Multiple
levels
of de
Undo
areesto
available.
Mltiplos
nveis
Undo
disponveis .
Multiple
levels
of Undo
available.
Changing
Console
Settings
in are
Preview
Mode
The system tracks any changes to console settings or to the

Changing
Console
in
Preview
Mode
Alterando
Ajustes
dainSettings
Console
Preview
Snapshot
List
while
Previewno
mode,
but
only
Snapshot
List
The
system
tracks
any
changes
toModo
console
settings
or to the
Changing
Console
Settings
in
Preview
Mode
actions
create
an
Undo
point.
Choosing
Undo
will
undo
the
Snapshot
List while
Preview
mode,
but only
Snapshot
The system
tracksin
any
changes
to console
settings
or toList
the
OThe
sistema
monitora
qualquer
alterao
nosup
ajustes
da
system
tracks
any
changes
to console
settings
or console
tothe
the ou
last
action
you
took
while
in Preview
mode,
to
aSnapshot
maximum
actions
create
an
Undo
point.
Choosing
Undo
will
undo
Snapshot
List
while
in
Preview
mode,
but
only
List
Snapshot
Snapshots
List
enquanto
no
modo
Preview,
mas
apenas
aes
List
while
in Preview
mode,
butup
only
Snapshot
List
of
100
levels
oftook
Undo.
Any
changes
to
console
settings
madethe
last
action
you
while
in
Preview
mode,
to
a
maximum
actions
create
an
Undo
point.
Choosing
Undo
will
undo
Snapshots
List
criam
um
ponto
de
restaurao.
Escolher
Undo
actions
create
an Undo
point.
Choosing
Undo
will
undo
the vai
after
the
last
Preview
action
are
also
undone
(the
Snapshot
ofdesfazer
100
levels
of
Undo.
Any
changes
console
settings
made
last
action
you
took
in Preview
mode,
up
to
a maximum
a ltima
aowhile
realizada
noto
modo
Preview,
at
um
mximo
lastthe
action
you took
while
in
Preview
mode,
up
to
a that
maximum
screen
is nveis
returned
to
its
exact
state
prior
the
action
creafter
last
Preview
action
also
undone
(the
Snapshot
of100
100
levels
ofUndo.
Undo.
Anyare
changes
totoconsole
settings
de
de
Quaisquer
mudanas
nos
ajustes
damade
console
of
100
levels
of
Undo.
Any
changes
to
console
settings
made
ated
the
Undo
point).
screen
returned
to its exact
totambm
the action
that crefeitas
ltima
ao state
Preview
(a tela
afterisdepois
the
lastda
Preview
action
are prior
alsoso
undone
(thedesfeitas
Snapshot
after
last
Preview
action
areexatamente
also undoneanterior
(the Snapshot
Snapshot
retorna
atoseu
estado
ao
que
ated
thethe
Undo
point).
screen
is returned
its exact
state prior to the
actionthat
crescreen
isthe
returned
to its
exact
state prior
to the action that creChanging
Snapshot
List
in
Preview
Mode
criou
o
ponto
de
Undo).
ated the Undo point).
ated thethe
Undo
point).List in Preview Mode
Changing
Snapshot
Changes
made
to the Snapshot
List are
automatically tracked
Alterando
a Snapshots
List no Modo
Preview
Changing
the
Snapshot
List in of
Preview
Mode
and
available
for
Undo,
regardless
whether
Preview mode
is
Changes
made
toSnapshot
the Snapshot
List
are
automatically
tracked
Changing
the
List in
Preview
Mode
enabled
or not.
This
any Recall
of snapshots
triggered
Alteraes
feitas
naregardless
Snapshots
List
so
automaticamente
and
available
for
Undo,
of
whether
Preview
mode
is
Changes
made
to includes
the
Snapshot
List
are
automatically
tracked
Changes
made
toor
the
Snapshot
List
are
automatically
tracked
bymonitoradas
incoming
MIDI
MTC
while
in
Preview
mode.
eThis
disponveis
para
Undo,
independentemente
enabled
or not.
includes
any
Recall
of snapshots
triggered
and
available
for
Undo,
regardless
of whether
Preview
mode is se
available
for or
Undo,
regardless
of whether
Preview
mode
is
modo
Preview
est
habilitado
ou
no.
Isso
inclui
qualquer
byoand
incoming
MIDI
MTC
while
inRecall
Preview
mode.
enabled
or
not. This
includes
any
of snapshots
triggered
For
example,
ade
MIDI
Snapshot
Recall
occurs
while
are
in
carregamento
snapshots
disparados
por
ouyou
MTC
enquanto
enabled
or if
not.
This
includes
any
Recall
of MIDI
snapshots
triggered
by incoming MIDI or MTC while in Preview mode.
Preview
mode,
online
mix while
will
beinupdated
with
thatare
snapno
modo
Preview.
For
example,
if athe
MIDI
Snapshot
Recall
occurs
while
you
in
by
incoming
MIDI
or
MTC
Preview
mode.
shot.
immediately
that
Recall
will
undo
Preview
mode,Undo
the
mix willafter
be
updated
with
that
snapForPressing
example,
if a online
MIDI
Snapshot
Recall
occurs
while
you
are in
For
example,
ifum
a MIDI
Snapshot
Recall
occurs
while
you
are in
Por
exemplo,
se
MIDI
Snapshot
ocorre
voc
est
that
Snapshot
recall
revert
thewill
online
mix
toenquanto
its
state
prior
shot.
Pressing
Undo
immediately
after
Recall
will
undo
Preview
mode,
theand
online
mix
bethat
updated
with
that
snapno
modo
Preview,
a
mixagem
ser
atualizada
com
esse
snapshot.
Preview
mode,
the
online
mix
will
be
updated
with
that
snapto shot.
the
Undo.
that
Snapshot
recall
andimmediately
revert the online
its state
Pressing
Undo
after mix
thatto
Recall
willprior
undo
Pressionar
Undo
imediatamente
Recall
Pressing
Undo
immediatelyaps
after o
that
Recallvai
willdesfazer
undo o
to shot.
the Undo.
that
Snapshot
recall
and
revert
the
online
mix
to
its
state
prior
carregamento
do
Snapshot
e
reverter
a
mixagem
para
seu
estado
Consider
turningrecall
off the
Chase
MTC
option mix
while
that Snapshot
and
revert
the online
toin
itsPreview
state prior
to
the
Undo.
anterior
ao
Undo.
mode
to disable
MIDI
recall of
snapshots.
In addition,
you
Consider
turningalloff
the Chase
MTC
option while
in Preview
to the
Undo.
canConsider
always
use
the
feature
to recover
from
any
unexmode
to disable
all History
MIDI
recall
of snapshots.
In
addition,
you
turning
off
the
Chase
MTC
option
while
in
Preview
Considere
desligar
a
ChaseMTC
MTCoption
enquanto
estiver
no modo
Consider
turning
offopo
the feature
Chase
while
inunexPreview
pected
results.
can
always
use
the
History
to
recover
from
any
mode
to
disable
all
MIDI
recall
of
snapshots.
In
addition,
you
Preview
para
desabilitar
todos
os
MIDI
recall
de
snapshots.
Alm
mode
to disable all MIDI recall of snapshots. In addition, you
pected
results.
can
always
use
the
History
feature
to
recover
from
any
unexdisso, voc pode sempre usar o recurso History para sobrescrever
can always
use
History
to recover
Changing
MIDI
or the
Plug-In
Datafeature
in Preview
Modefrom any unexpected results.
qualquer
resultado
inesperado.
pected
results.
Changing MIDI or Plug-In Data in Preview Mode
Changes made to MIDI and Plug-In data cannot be undone.
Alterando
Dados
ou Plug-In
Preview
Changing
MIDI MIDI
or Plug-In
Datano
in Modo
Preview
Mode to SnapFor
more made
information,
see
Messages
Changes
to MIDI
andAdding
Plug-In
data
cannot
be undone.
Changing
MIDI
or Plug-In
Data inMIDI
Preview
Mode
shots
oninformation,
page
195
Adding
Data
to Snapshots
For
more
see
Adding
MIDI
Messages
to
SnapChanges
made
to
MIDI
and
data
cannot
beser
undone.
Alteraes
feitas
a and
dados
MIDIPlug-In
ePlug-In
Plug-In
no
podem
desfeitas.
Changes
made
toand
MIDI
and Plug-In
data
cannot
be undone.
on
page
197.
shots
on
page
195
Adding
Plug-In
Data
to Mensagens
Snapshots
For
more
information,
seeveja
Adding
MIDI
Messages
to Snap-MIDI
Para
mais
informaes,
Adicionando
more
information,
see195
Adding
MIDI Messages
to SnapaFor
Snapshots
pgina
e Plug-In
Adicionando
Dados
Plug-In a
on
page
197.
shots
on pagena195
and Adding
Data to
Snapshots
Takeon
advantage
Tool
Tips in the
banner
display
to conshots
page
195ofand
Adding
Plug-In
Data
to Snapshots
Snapshots
na
pgina
197.
on page 197.
theTool
Undo
button
will
revert.display
See Undoing
onfirm
pagewhat
197.actionof
Take
advantage
Tips
in the
banner
to conSnapshot
Commands
on
page
194.
Aproveite
as the
Tool
Tips button
no
para
confirmar
qual
ao
firm
what
action
See
Undoing
Take
advantage
ofUndo
Tool
Tipsbanner
inwill
the revert.
banner
display
to
conTake
advantage
Tips194.
inVeja
the banner
display Comandos
to cono boto
Undo of
vaiTool
reverter.
Snapshot
Commands
on
page
firm
what
action
the
Undo
button
willDesfazendo
revert. See Undoing
firm
what action
the Undo
button will revert. See Undoing
Snapshot
na pgina
194.
Snapshot
Commands
on page 194.
Snapshot Commands on page 194.
In order to maintain essential mix indicators and controls

Available and Unavailable Functions in
while in Preview mode, not all functions are taken offline.
Preview
Mode
Funes
Disponveis
e No Disponveis no Modo Preview
The following sections detail what is and what is not available

In order to maintain essential mix indicators and controls
during
Preview
Para
manter
os mode.
indicadores e controles essenciais da mixagem
while in Preview mode, not all functions are taken offline.
enquanto no modo Preview, nem todas as funes so colocadas
offline.
Always
Activesections detail what is and what is not available
The following
during Preview mode.
AsCertain
seguintes
seesmix
detalham
o que
est e live
o queand
noactive
est disponvel
essential
functions
remain
at all
durante
o
modo
Preview.
times, regardless of whether Preview mode is enabled. The fol-
those controls which are not able to be stored or recalled via

Not Available in Preview Mode
snapshots. In addition, Config mode options are unavailable
disponveis
no Modo
Preview while in Preview mode are
inNo
Preview
The
onlymode.
controls
not available
those controls which are not able to be stored or recalled via
Unavailable
functionsno
include
the following:
Os nicos controles
disponveis
no modo Preview so aqueles
snapshots. In addition, Config mode options are unavailable
que
no
podem
ser
armazenados
ou carregados via snapshots.
in Make
Stereo,
or
Split
to
Mono
Preview mode.
Alm disso, opes do modo Config esto indisponveis no modo
Move channels
Preview.
functions
Unavailable
Input channel
Gain include
Guess the following:
Make
Stereo,and
or incluem:
Split
to Mono
Funes
indisponveis
Input
channel
FX Return
Input Direct switch
Always Active
Move
channels

Make
Stereo
ou
Split
to
Mono
lowing vital mix functions continue to affect or be affected by
Input channel Dyn Pre EQ switch
Sempre Ativo
Mover
Inputcanais
channel Gaincannot
Guess
theCertain
consoleessential
and software:
mix functions remain live and active at all
Insert
Gain mode
Guess (plug-ins
em Input Channelbe edited)
Input channel
and FX
Return
Input
switch
times,
Metering
(including
input,
output mode
and
dynamics
meters,
regardless
of whether
is enabled.
The em
fol Enabling
or disabling
sample
rate
conversion
Certas
funes
essenciais
de Preview
mixagem
mantm-se
ativas
Additional
Switch Input
Direct
em
Input
Channel
eDirect
FX Return
Stage
Rack
Features
Required
Components
clip
and
bank
clip
indicators)
lowing
vital
mix
functions
continue
to
affect
or
be
affected
by
Input
channel
Dyn
Pre
EQ
switch
todos os momentos, independentemente se o modo Preview est
Switch Dyn Pre EQ em Input Channel
Stage
Racks
are
with
an FOH
and provide
all stagea
following
components
must
bebepurchased
functions
are neither
available
foreditados)
offlineseparately:
access in
console
andused
software:
habilitado.
As seguintes
funes
vitaisRack,
de mixagem
continuam
TheThese
Modo
Insert
(plug-ins
no
podem
ser
theAFL/PFL
Insert
mode
(plug-ins
cannot
edited)
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Stage
Racks
afetar
ou
serem
afetadas
pela
console
e
software:

Habilitar
ou
desabilitar
a
converso
de
sample
rate
Preview
mode,
nor
do
they
remain
active
(online)
while
in
MeteringKey
(including
Video
Display
greaterrate
flat-panel
VGA
display
Enabling
or (15-inch
disablingorsample
conversion
Dynamics
Listen input, output and dynamics meters,
can
Medidores
(incluindo
medidores
de
entradas,
de
sadas
e
de
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96
total
inputs.
Preview
mode.
To
adjust
any
of
the
above
settings,
you
clip and bank
indicators)
Dynamics,
Monitoring
level,clip
Headphone
level and Monitoring bus
indicadores
de clip e banco)
Essas
funesmode.
no esto disponveis para acesso offline no
must
exitfunctions
Preview
These
are neither available for offline access in
DVI
supported.
AFL/PFL
Delay
Audio
AFL/PFL
modo
Preview,
nem so mantidas ativas (online) enquanto
I/O
Preview mode, nor do they remain active (online) while in
Dynamics
Key
Dynamics
Key
Listen
no
modo Preview.
Para alterar qualquer
doscompatible)
ajustes acima,
USB
keyboard
and trackball/mouse
(Windows
Talkback,
Osc
andListen
2-Track
Config
Mode
Preview
mode. sair
To adjust
anyPreview.
of the above settings, you
48deinputs
with remotely
mic
preamps
andde
Nvel
monitorao,
nvel
decontrollable
headphones
eMonitoring
delay
do bus
voc precisa
do modo
Monitoring
level,
Headphone
level
and
bus
Mute
Groups (recall
only)phantom power.
must exit
Preview
mode.
individually
selectable
Config
mode
is not
available
while
in Preview
mode.
monitorao
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)Pressing
Delay
Recall
Safe
Talkback,
Oscoutput
e 2-Track
Modo
Config
Config
switch (or double-clicking the Config/Show mode
8 analog
channels; expandable up to 48 analog or the
Talkback,
OscRecall,
and 2-Track
Config
The connection
Mode
Mute
Groups
(carregamento
apenas)
MIDI
snapshot
Chase
MTC and Disable (Snapicon on-screen) displays a dialog box in which you can choose
digital
outputs
per Stage
Rack.
a
Digital
Snake
cable.
This cableno
canmodo
be purchased
directly o
Recall
Safe
O
modo
Config
no
estto
disponvel
Preview.
Pressionar
Mute
Groups
(recall
only)
shots)
to Config
Exit Preview
online
mix,
in Config
mode),
or
mode is (return
not available
while
in Preview
mode.
Pressing
from
Avid
or
assembled
by
your
preferred
vendor.
Synchronization
MIDI
Snapshot
Recall,
Chase
MTC
e
Disable
(Snapshots)
switch
Config
(ou
clicar
duas
vezes
no
cone
Config/Show
na tela)
Recall Safe
OK
in Preview
mode).
andRecall
Control
I/O
Snapshot
List and
Safe
(deleting, adding, or editing
the (remain
Config switch
(or double-clicking
the Config/Show mode
Snapshots List e Recall Safe (deletar, adicionar ou editar apresenta uma caixa de dilogo em que voc pode escolher entre
Snake
MIDI snapshot
Recall,
Chaseprimary
MTC and
(Snapbeto
reflected
online
and
affect
the
mix)
iconPreview
on-screen)
displays
a dialog box
in which
youConfig),
can choose
snapshots
connectors
enable
andDisable
redundant
(if
snapshots
seare/will
refletem
online
e afetam
a mixagem)
Exit
(retornar
mixagem
online,
nomode
modo
The
system automatically
switches to
Show
if Configou OK
shots)
Optional
Components
to
Exit
Preview
(return
to
online
mix,
in
Config
mode), or
History
(auto-save)
applicable)
History
(auto-save)
(mantendo-se
nothe
modo
Preview).
mode
is active at
time
Preview mode is entered.
Snapshot List and Recall Safe (deleting, adding, or editing
Recall
Safe
no in
Modo
Preview
Recall
Safe
Preview
Mode
snapshots
are/will
be reflected online and affect the mix)
History (auto-save)
The
RecallRecall
Safe Components
settings
global,
and
are applied
to filter
System
Os
ajustes
Safe soare
globais
e so
aplicados
ao filtro
de dados
snapshot
data
regardless
of
the
current
operating
mode.
ForPara
do snapshot independentemente do modo de operao atual.
Recall Safe in Preview Mode
details on
Recall
Safe Safe
and other
automation
see e
detalhes
sobre
Recall
e outros
recursos, safe
vejafeatures,
Recall Safe
Included
Components
Channel
Automation
Safe
na
pgina
184.
Recall
Safe
and
Channel
Automation
Safe
on
page
184.
The Recall Safe settings are global, and are applied to filter
All
VENUEdata
Profile
systems
the following:
snapshot
regardless
ofinclude
the current
operating mode. For
Disponveis e Editveis no Modo Preview
details
onand
Recall
Safeconsole
andin
other
automation
Available
Editable
Preview
Modesafe features, see
VENUE
Profile
Recall
Safe
Channel
Automation
Safe
on page 184. e
Two
(2)
IEC
power
Quase
asand
funes
docables
sistema,
como
selecionar
Almosttodas
all system
functions,
such as selecting
channelscanais
and
agrupar
faders,
esto
disponveis
no
modo
Preview.
Monitor
mount
for VGA
screen (screen
banking
faders, are
available
in Preview
mode. not included)
Available
and
Editable
in Preview
Mode
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not included)
Apenas
aqueles
controles
que
podem
armazenados
e
thoseMouse
controlsPad
that can be stored andser
recalled
via
Only
VENUE
Almost
all system
selecting channels
and e
carregados
via functions,
snapshots such
estoasdisponveis
para preview
snapshots are available for offline previewing and editing.
banking
faders,
are available
offline.
edio
VENUE
Profile
Guide in Preview mode.
Only those controls that can be stored and recalled via
Protective
Dust
Cover for offline previewing and editing.
snapshots are
available
Rack(s) (see next)

System Restore CD
OK (remain in Preview mode).

O sistema automaticamente alterna para o modo Show se o modo

purchased
separately:
The system
automatically
switches
to Show
mode if Config
Plug-Ins
and
MIDI
in Preview
Mode
Config
est
ativo
quando
o modo
Preview
acionado.
USB
flash at
disk
(or
other
portable
USBisstorage
device for
mode
is active
the
time
Preview
mode
entered.
In Preview mode, plug-ins and MIDI operate in a similar way
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
Plug-Ins e MIDI no Modo Preview
as when using the standalone software.
Near-field
forMode
mix position monitoring
Plug-Ins
and monitor
MIDI inspeakers
Preview
No modo Preview, plug-ins e MIDI operam de maneira similar a

Headphones
with 1/4-inch jack
Plug-Ins
inusando
Preview
Mode
quando
o software
In Preview
mode,
plug-insStandalone.
and MIDI operate in a similar way
Dynamic
or
microphone
and XLR mic cable
as when
thecondenser
standalone
software.
Recalling
a using
snapshot
that
contains
plug-in data affects the of(fornoTalkback)
Plug-Ins
Modo Preview
fline (Preview) routing and bypass state of the plug-in only;
Footswitches
to 2)
Plug-Ins
in Preview(up
Mode
the
online plug-in
parameter
aredados
not recalled,
and the
Carregar
um snapshot
quesettings
contm
de plug-in
afeta o
mix
MIDIiscables
online
not
affected.
roteamento
(Preview)
e o estado
de bypass
plug-in
apenas;
Recalling
aoffline
snapshot
that contains
plug-in
datado
affects
the
of BNC
cables
(for de
connecting
Word
between
os
parmetros
online
plug-ins
no
soclock
carregados,
e athe
mixagem
fline
(Preview)
routing
and
bypass
state
of the
plug-in
only;
The
following
plug-in
functions
are digital
available
offline in PreVENUE
system
and external
online
no plug-in
afetada.
the online
parameter
settings
are devices)
not recalled, and the
view mode:
25-pin
D-Sub
online
mix is
not affected.
As
funes
esto disponveis offline no modo
seguintes
Plug-in routing
candebeplug-in
changed
Preview:
The
following
plug-in
functions
are available offline in Pre Plug-in rack view can be changed
viewOmode:
roteamento de plug-in pode ser alterado
Plug-ins can be added to a snapshot to capture its current
VENUE
A visualizao
do rack
de plug-in podeOptions
ser alterada
Profile
Expansion
Plug-in
routing settings
changed
parameter
and (Previewa mode)
routing
online
Plug-ins
podem can
serbeadicionados
um snapshot
para
The
following
options
can
to VENUE
systems.
capturar
Plug-in rack
view
canbe
beadded
changed
seus
parmetros
de ajuste
onlineProfile
e (modo
Preview)
The
following
plug-in
functions
are not
available
while
in Preroteamento
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit
the
Avid
Plug-ins can be added to a snapshot to capture its current
view
mode:
website
(www.avid.com).
online
parameter settings and (Preview mode) routing
As
seguintescannot
funes
plug-in
esto from
disponveis
no modo
Plug-ins
be de
added
to orno
removed
rack slots
Preview:
following
plug-in
functions
are not
available while in PreThe
Plug-in
presets
cannot
be recalled
or saved
Rackno
Options
Mix
Plug-ins
podem ser adicionados ou removidos de slots de
mode:
view
Plug-in
parameters cannot be changed (you cannot open
racks
Plug-ins
cannotwhile
be added
to or removed
rack slots
plug-in
windows
in Preview
mode) from
I/O
Presets
de plug-in
no podem
ser carregados
ou salvos
Options
Parmetros
Plug-incannot
presets
cannot
be
saved
Plug-ins
de be
plug-ins
norecalled
podemorser
alterados (voc no
installed
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Card
that
provides
analog
abrir
a janela Input
plug-in
nobe
modo
Preview)
pode
Plug-in
parameters
cannot
changed
(you16
cannot
open
Chapter
21: Snapshots
mic/line
Plug-ins
no
podemwhile
ser instalados
level
inputs
plug-in
windows
in Preview
mode)
193
Plug-ins
installed
AO16
Analog cannot
Output be
Card
that provides 16 analog line level
outputs

193
You must explicitly add or update plug-in (or MIDI) data to
You
explicitly
add
plug-in
(or
data
Voc
precisa
explicitamente
adicionar
ou atualizar
dados
detoto
plugYoumust
must
explicitly
addororupdate
plug-in
(orMIDI)
MIDI)
data
update
snapshots,
whether
orupdate
not Preview
mode
is enabled.
inupdate
(ou
MIDI)
para
atualizar
snapshots,
se
o
modo
Preview
est
snapshots,
whether
or
not
Preview
mode
is
enabled.
update
snapshots,
or Snapshot
not Preview
mode
is enabled.
You
can do
this fromwhether
the main
page,
or from
the
habilitado
outhis
no.from
Vocthe
pode
fazer
isso pela
pgina
Snapshot
ou
You
can
do
main
Snapshot
page,
or
from
the
You can
do this from the main Snapshot page, or from the
plug-in
racks.
pelos
racks
de plug-in.
plug-in
racks.
plug-in racks.
If the Undo button is highlighted, you can place the cursor

If
button
isest
you
can
place
the
Ifthe
Se
obutton
boto
Undo
destacado,
voc
pode
colocar
o cursor
theUndo
Undo
button
ishighlighted,
highlighted,
you
can
place
thecursor
cursor
over
the
to
display
text
in the status
bar
describing
sobre
ele
para
mostrar
o
texto
na
barra
de
status
descrevendo
que
over
the
button
to
display
text
in
the
status
bar
describing
oversnapshot
the button
to display
text
in the status bar describing
what
actions
will be
undone.
aes
de snapshot
podem
serundone.
desfeitas.
what
snapshot
actions
will
be
what snapshot actions will be undone.
If the Undo button is dimmed, Undo is not available.
Se o boto Undo est apagado, Undo no est disponvel.
Place cursor
Place
cursor
over
Undo
Place
cursor
over
overUndo
Undo
Updating
plug-in
data em
in an
associated
snapshot
from the plug-in
Atualizar
dados
de plug-in
snapshots
associados
na visualizao
plug-in view
Updating
plug-in
inin
ananassociated
snapshot
from
the
plug-in
view
Updating
plug-indata
data
associated
snapshot
from
the
plug-in
view
MIDIno
inModo
Preview
Mode
MIDI
Preview
MIDI
MIDIininPreview
PreviewMode
Mode
Incoming MIDI or MTC continues to trigger snapshot recall
Incoming
MIDI
ororMTC
continues
totocarregamentos
trigger
snapshot
Receber
MIDI
ou MTC
continua
a disparar
derecall
snapshot
Incoming
MIDI
MTC
continues
trigger
snapshot
while
in Preview
mode.
However,
MIDI
messages
stored recall
to
no
modo
Preview. mode.
No entanto,
mensagens
MIDI armazenadas
while
in
Preview
However,
MIDI
messages
stored
toto a
while in Preview
mode.
MIDI messages
stored
snapshots
are not sent
outHowever,
when a snapshot
is recalled
in Presnapshots
no
so
enviadas
quando
um
snapshot
est
carregado
snapshots
are
not sent
out
isisrecalled
ininPresnapshots
are
sent
outwhen
whena asnapshot
snapshot
recalled
Preview
mode.
For not
more
information,
see
Adding
MIDI
Mesno
modo
Preview.
Para
mais informaes,
veja
Adicionando
view
mode.
For
more
information,
see
Adding
MIDI
Mesview
mode.
For
more
information,
see
Adding
MIDI
Messages
to
Snapshots
on
page
195
and
Adding
Plug-In
Data
to
Mensagens
MIDI a Snapshots
na pgina
195 e Adicionando
Dados
sages
Snapshots
on
page
sagesto
Snapshots
on
page195
195and
andAdding
AddingPlug-In
Plug-InData
Datatoto
Snapshots
on pagena
197.
Plug-In
ato
Snapshots
pgina
197.
Snapshots
Snapshotson
onpage
page197.
197.
Disparo
de Other
Eventos
MTC eEvent
Outros
MTC and
Online
Triggers
MTC
MTCand
andOther
OtherOnline
OnlineEvent
EventTriggers
Triggers
While
in Preview
mode,
triggers
that occur
in the
No
modo
Preview,
disparos
que
podem
ocorrer
noonline
estadostate
online
While
ininPreview
mode,
triggers
that
occur
ininthe
online
state
While
Preview
mode,
triggers
that
occur
the
online
state
of
the
console
are
executed,
including
MTC-driven
recall
of
da console so executados, incluindo carregamento de
snapshots
ofofthe
are executed,
including
MTC-driven
recall
ofof
theconsole
console
executed,
including
MTC-driven
recall
snapshots.
Triggers
caused
by changes
toalteraes
the offlinedos
(Preview)
dirigidos
por
MTC.are
Disparos
causados
por
controles
snapshots.
Triggers
caused
by
changes
to
the
offline
(Preview)
snapshots.
Triggers
caused
changes
to the
offline
offline
(Preview)
so ignorados
e no
realizam
osto
eventos.
Para
controls
are ignored
and
do by
not
cause
events
occur.(Preview)
For mais
controls
are
ignored
and dodo
not
cause events
informaes,
veja
o Captulo
22,
Events.
controls
are
ignored
not
eventstotooccur.
occur.For
For
more
information,
see and
Chapter
22,cause
Events.
more
moreinformation,
information,see
seeChapter
Chapter22,
22,Events.
Events.
Undoing Snapshot
Commands
Desfazendo
Comandos Snapshot
Undoing Snapshot
Commands
Tool Tip
Tool
ToolTipTip
Using Tool Tips to verify the effect of Undo in the Snapshots page
Using
Tool
totoverify
the
Undo
Snapshots
page
Using
ToolTips
Tips
verify
theeffect
effectofof
Undoininthe
the
Snapshots
page
ToUtilizando
undo a snapshot
command:
Tool Tips para
verificar o efeito do Undo na pgina Snapshots
ToToundo
undoa asnapshot
snapshotcommand:
command:
Click the Undo button in the Snapshot commands section.
Para
desfazer
um
comando
snapshot:
Click the Undo button in the
Snapshot commands section.
Click the Undo button in the Snapshot commands section.
Clique no boto Undo na seo de comandos Snapshot.
Disabling Snapshots
Disabling
DisablingSnapshots
Snapshots
You can temporarily disable the storage and recall of all snapYou
can
temporarily
disable
the
and
ofofallallsnapYou
can
temporarily
disable
thestorage
storage
andrecall
recall
snapshots.
While
snapshots
are globally
disabled,
you
can
target
Desabilitando
Snapshots
shots.
While
snapshots
are
globally
disabled,
you
can
shots. While
snapshots
areList
globally
disabled,
cantarget
target
snapshots
in the
Snapshots
to preview
theiryou
properties,
snapshots
ininthe
Snapshots
List totopreview
properties,
Voc
pode
temporariamente
o armazenamento
e
snapshots
the
Snapshots
previewtheir
their
properties,
but
you cannot
recall
them. List desabilitar
but
you
cannot
recall
them.
carregamento
de
todos
os
snapshots.
Quando
snapshots esto
but you cannot recall them.
globalmente desabilitados, voc pode selecionar snapshots na
To disable all snapshots:

Snapshots
List para ter um preview de suas propiredades, mas no
ToTo
disable
disableallallsnapshots:
snapshots:
Undoing Snapshot Commands
Click
the Disable button in the Snapshot commands secpode carreg-los.
The Undo function returns the console to the state immedi Click the Disable button in the Snapshot commands secAThe
funo
Undo revertereturns
a console
ao
estado imediatamente
anterior tion.
Click the Disable button in the Snapshot commands secconsole
immediTheUndo
Undofunction
function
returnsthe
the
consoletoUndo
tothe
thestate
state
immediately
before
the
last snapshot.
snapshot
command.
is
multi-level
ao
ltimo
comando
Undo multinvel
(at
100), est tion.
Para desabilitar todos os snapshots:
tion.
ately
before
the
last
snapshot
command.
Undo
is
multi-level
ately
before
the
last
snapshot
Undo
isao
multi-level
(up
to 100),
available
while
incommand.
Preview
mode
and
afterdeperdisponvel
no is
modo
Preview
e depois
de realizar
uma
modo Suspend MTC Recall
(up
to
100),
is
available
while
in
Preview
mode
and
after
per(up
100),
is available
while
in Preview
forming
an Edit
or Propagate
mode
action.mode and after perSuspend
MTC
Recall
Edit
outo
Propagate.
Clique
no boto
Disable na seo comandos Snapshot.
Suspend
MTC
Recall
forming
formingananEdit
EditororPropagate
Propagatemode
modeaction.
action.
disable MTC Recall of individual snapshots in the list:
Undoing
snapshot
recall
may de
cause
audio podem To
Desfazer
comandos
decommands
carregamento
snapshot
Suspender
Carregamento
por MTCsnapshots
ToTo
disable
Recall
disableMTC
MTC
Recallofofindividual
individual
snapshotsininthe
thelist:
list:
Undoing
snapshot
recall
commands
may
cause
audio
Undoing
snapshot
commands
tocausar
be interrupted.
Userecall
Undo
with caution
incause
perforinterrupo
do udio.
Use may
Undo
com audio
cautela em 1 Click the green Enable icon in the row for the desired snaptotobebeinterrupted.
Use
Undo
with
caution
in
perfor1
Click
the
green
Enable
icon
in
the
row
for
the
desired
interrupted. Use Undo with caution in perfor1Para
Click
theitgreen
icon in por
the MTC
row for
desiredsnapsnapperfomance.
mance.
o Enable
carregamento
de the
snapshots
individuais
shot
sodesabilitar
that
is unlit.
mance.
shot
so
that
it
is
unlit.
mance.
na lista:
shot
so that it is unlit.
2 Click the Disable/Enable icon again to re-enable the snap2 2Click
the Disable/Enable
icon
totore-enable
the
iconagain
again
re-enable
thesnapshot.
1 Click
Cliquethe
noDisable/Enable
cone verde Enable
na linha
para que
osnapsnapshot
shot.
shot.
desejado esteja apagado.
You can similarly suspend Tempo on a per snapshot basis (see
You
can
similarly
suspend
Tempo
on
a per
snapshot
basis (see
You
can
similarly
suspend
Tempo
on
apage
per
snapshot
(see o
Adding
Tempo
Data
to Snapshots
on
196).
2 Clique
no cone
Disable/Enable
ovamente
para basis
re-habilitar
Adding
Tempo
Data
to
Snapshots
on
page
196).
Adding
Tempo
Data
to
Snapshots
on
page
196).
snapshot.
Voc pode similarmente suspender Tempo em uma base por

snapshot (veja Adicionando Dados de Tempo a Snapshots na
pgina 196).

194
194 VENUE
VENUEProfile
ProfileGuide
Guide
194
Guia VENUE Profile
Adding MIDI Messages to Snapshots
3 Click Add and choose a message from the pop-up menu.
No MIDI message data is captured when a snapshot is first cre3 Clique

Add
e escolha
uma amensagem
do menu
pop-up.menu.
3 Click
Add
and choose
message from
the pop-up
ated.Adding
MIDI messages
are
added
to
existing
snapshots
directly
3 Click Add and choose a message from the pop-up menu.
MIDI Messages
to Snapshots
Adicionando Mensagens
MIDI a Snapshots
fromAdding
the MIDI list.
You can
store up to 20to
MIDI
messages in
MIDI
Messages
Snapshots
MIDIde
message
data MIDI
is captured
whenquando
a snapshot
is first creeachNo
snapshot.
Nenhum
dado
mensagem
capturado
um snapshot
No
MIDI
message
data
is
captured
when
a
snapshot
is directly
first created.
MIDI
messages
are
added
to
existing
snapshots
criado. Mensagens MIDI so adicionadas a snapshots existentes
When
the
MIDI
data
type
is
scoped
for
a
snapshot,
any
stored
ated.
MIDI
messages
are
added
to
existing
snapshots
directly
from
the
MIDI
list.
You
can
store
up
to
20
MIDI
messages
diretamente da MIDI List. Voc pode armazenar at 20 mensagensin
MIDI
messages
are sent
when
thestore
snapshot
from
thesnapshot.
MIDI
list. You
can
up to is
20recalled.
MIDI messages in
MIDI
em
cada
each
snapshot.
each snapshot.
The When
following
supported
the
MIDI
data
isna
scoped
for a and
snapshot,
anyin
stored
Quando
o tipo
deMIDI
dadomessages
MIDItype
estare
abrangncia
deavailable
um snapshot,
the MIDI
list:
When
the MIDI
data
type
is scoped
for a snapshot,
any stored
MIDI
messages
are
sent
when
the
snapshot
is recalled.
qualquer
mensagem
MIDI
armazenada
enviada
quando
o snapshot
are sent when the snapshot is recalled.
carregado.
MIDI
Note messages
Off
Stage
Rack Features
The following
MIDI messages are supported and available in
Note On
The MIDI
following
messages
are supported
and disponveis
available in
the
list: MIDIMIDI
As seguintes
mensagens
so suportadas
e esto
message to
the Snapshotmust
MIDI list
Stage
Racks
used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage Adding
The afollowing
components
the
Poly
Key are
Pressure
na MIDI
List:
MIDI
Notelist:
Off
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Stage
Racks
Control
Change
Note
Video
Display
(15-inch
greater
flat-panel
VGA
display
A MIDI
plug
icon appears
inor
the
Snapshots
List for
each
snap Off
Note
Off
Note simultaneously,
On
be
used
can
On
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA
and
shot
that
contains
MIDI
messages.
Note
Program
Change
Adicionando
mensagem
MIDI
List
Poly
Note Key
On Pressure
Adding auma
message
to the
Snapshot
MIDI list
Poly
Key Pressure
DVI
supported.
Channel
Pressure
Adding a message to the Snapshot MIDI list
I/O
Poly
Key
Pressure
Audio
Control
Change
Control
Change
Acone
MIDI
plugaparece
icon
appears
Snapshots
for
each snapToUm
record
incoming
MIDI
data
toinathe
snapshot.
MIDI
na Snapshots
List
para List
cada
snapshot
que
USB keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
Pitch
Bend
Program
Change
Control
Change
A
MIDI
plug
iconMIDI.
appears
in the Snapshots List for each snap 48Program
inputs
with
shot
that
contains
MIDI messages.
Change
contm
mensagens
1 Click REC.
Channel
PressureControl Stop
MIDI
Machine
shot that contains MIDI messages.
individually
Program
Channel Change
Pressure
Pitch
Bend
MIDI
Machine
Control
Play
Para
dados
MIDI
recebidos
emaum
snapshot.
a supported
MIDI
command.
Channel
Pressure
Togravar
record
incoming
MIDI
data to
snapshot.
8Machine
analog
output
channels;
expandable up to 48 analog or 2 Send
MIDI
Control
Stop
Pitch Bend
The
connection
between
FOH
Rack
and
Stage Rack requires
To
record
incoming
MIDI
data
to
a
snapshot.
MIDI
Machine
Control
FastRack.
Forward
outputs
perPlay
Stage
digital
Pitch
MIDI
Machine
Control
1
Click
REC.
3 1Click
REC
again
MIDI Bend
Machine
Control Stop
Clique
REC.
a Digital
Snakewhen
cable.done.
MIDI
Machine
Control
MIDI
Control
FastRewind
Fouward
1 Click REC.
Machine
MIDI
Control
Stop
from
Avid
or assembled
MIDI Machine
Machine
Control
Play
2
Send
a supported
MIDIbycommand.
Synchronization
MIDI
Machine
Control
Rewind
and
Control
I/O
MIDI
Machine
Control
Eject
2edit
Envie
umacomando
suportado.
MIDI
MIDI
Machine
Control
Play
To
a MIDI
messageMIDI
inMIDI
the
MIDI
list:
2
Send
supported
command.
Machine
Control
Fast
Forward
MIDI
Machine Control Eject
Snake
connectors
to
enable
primary
and
redundant
(if
3
Click
REC
again
when
done.
MIDI
Machine
Control
Chase
MIDI
Forward
MIDI Machine
Control Control
Chase Fast
1 3Optional
Double-click
the
message
text
to
display the pop-up menu
MIDI Machine
Machine
Control
Rewind
Components
Clique
REC
novamente
quando
terminar.
3 Click
REC
again
when
done.
applicable)
connection
MIDI
Machine
Control
Pause
MIDI
Control
Pause
Machine
MIDI
Machine
Control
Rewind
bar for the message.
MIDI Machine Control Eject
To following
edit a MIDIcomponents
message in are
the optional,
MIDI list: and must be
MIDI
Machine
Control
Locate
The
MIDI
Machine
Control
Locate
MIDI
MIDI
Machine
Control
Eject
Para
MIDI
MIDI
List:
Toeditar
edit auma
MIDImensagem
message in
thena
MIDI
list:
Machine
Control
Chase
purchased
separately:
1 Double-click
the message text to display the pop-up menu
MIDI
Machine
Control
Chase
Quando
o tipo
deMachine
dado
MIDI
est
naPause
abrangncia
de um
When the
MIDI
data type
is
scoped
for a snapshot,
its snapshot,
MIDI
MIDI
Control
1 Double-click
the
text
to display
the mostrar
pop-up
1 Clique
vezes
nomessage
texto da
mensagem
para
afor
barra
bar
forduas
the
message.
USB
flash
disk
(or
other
portable
USB storage
device menu
System
Components
qualquer
MIDI
armazenada
enviada
quando
o
snapshot
mensagem
MIDI
Machine
Control
Pause
messages
are
sent
when
the
snapshot
is
recalled.
bartransfer
for
thea of
message.
MIDI Machine Control Locate
pop-up
para
mensagem.
carregado.
MIDI Machine Control Locate
Included
Components
When the MIDI
MIDI
data type
is scopedMTC
for Enable
a snapshot,
Message
Indicator
Icon its MIDI
When
the
MIDI
data
type
is
scoped
for
a
snapshot,
its
MIDI
messages are sent when the snapshot is recalled.
Allmessages
VENUE Profile
include
the following:
are sentsystems
when the
snapshot
is recalled.
Editing a MIDI message in the snapshot MIDI list
(for Talkback)
MIDI Message Indicator
MTC Enable Icon
Two (2) IECMIDI
power
cablesIndicator
2 Choose
the message
Message
MTC Enable Icon
Footswitches
(upname
to 2)and send channel or device ID
from the pop-up menus.
MIDI
cables
(for connecting
external
MIDI devices)
Editing
a MIDI
message
in the snapshot
MIDI list
Editing
a message
MIDI
message
in the
snapshot
MIDI
list
uma
mensagem
MIDI
na
MIDI
List text
3 Editando
Enter
the
values
in the
fields
or between
drag up or
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
the ID
2 Choose the message name and send channel
or device
VENUE Mouse Pad
down
across
the
text
field
to
change
the
values.
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
2 Choose
the message
name and send channel or device ID
from
theopop-up
menus.
2 Escolha
nome da
mensagem e o canal de envio ou ID do
VENUE Profile Guide
from
the
pop-up
menus.
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
connecting
to GPI devices)
4 dispositivo
Click in the
MIDI
listpop-up.
area(for
to dismiss
the pop-up
menu bar.
nos
menus
3 Enter the message values in the text fields or drag up or
Two
(2)
console
lights
Snapshots List showing snapshot containing MIDI messages
3
Enter
the
message
values
in
the
text
fields
or
down across the text field to change the values.drag up or
Snapshots List mostrando snapshot que contm mensagens MIDI
Digite oavalor
mensagem
campos de texto ou arraste sobre
To3remove
MIDIda
message
fromnos
snapshot:
down across
the
text field
toa change
the values.
To add a MIDI message to a snapshot:
o
campo
de
texto
para
cima
e
para
baixo
para
valores.
4
Click
in
the
MIDI
list
area
to
dismiss
thealterar
pop-up
menu bar.
Rack(s)
(see
next)
Para adicionar
uma
mensagem
MIDI a um snapshot:
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Right-click the MIDI message in the MIDI
list and choose
4 Click in the MIDI list area to dismiss the pop-up menu bar.
Snapshots
List showing
snapshot
1 Target
the snapshot
you
want tocontaining
modify. MIDI messages
Delete.
4The
Clique
na rea da MIDIcan
Listbepara
sairtoda
barra pop-up.
Snapshots
List showing
containing MIDI messages
added
VENUE
Profile systems.
Tofollowing
remove a options
MIDI message
from
a snapshot:
1 Selecione
o snapshot
quesnapshot
deseja
modificar.
Racks,
iLoks,
and Cables
2 Double-click
the message
wordCDs,
MIDItoin
MIDI/Plug-Ins
list header to
To add Software
a MIDI
a the
snapshot:
Todetails
removeona all
MIDI
message
from and
a snapshot:
For
VENUE
systems
options, visit the Avid
remover
Right-click
MIDI message
inum
thesnapshot:
MIDI list and choose
To add
MIDI list.
message to a snapshot:
Para
umathe
mensagem
MIDI de
expand
theaMIDI
Each
Mix
orna
FOH
Rack
2 Clique
duasRack
vezes
palavra
MIDI
website
(www.avid.com).
1 Target
the snapshot
you includes:
wantno
to cabealho
modify. da MIDI List/ Viewing
MIDIthe
Messages
ininHexadecimal
Right-click
MIDI message
the MIDI list and choose
Delete.
1 Target
the
snapshot
Plug-Ins
para
expandir
a MIDI
List.want to modify.
Format
System
Restore
CD you
Clique com o boto direito na mensagem MIDI na MIDI List e
2 Double-click the word MIDI in the MIDI/Plug-Ins list header to Delete.
escolha
Delete.Options
ECx
Ethernet
Control
Software
Installer
CD
2
Double-click
the
word
MIDI
in
the
MIDI/Plug-Ins
list
header
to
Mix
expand the MIDI list.
You
can Rack
toggle the
viewMessages
of MIDI messages
in the MIDI list beViewing
MIDI
in Hexadecimal
expand
the
MIDI
list.
tween
hexadecimal
and
decimal
formats.
Viewing MIDI Messages in Hexadecimal
FormatMensagens MIDI em Formato Hexadecimal

Visualizando
I/O
Options
Format
You
can
toggle
the
view
of MIDI
messages
in the MIDI
list beToVoc
toggle
thealternar
view format
of the
MIDI
pode
a visualizao
daslist:
mensagens
na MIDI
List
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
provides MIDI
16 analog
You
can
toggle
the view
of
MIDIthat
messages
tween
hexadecimal
and decimal
formats. in the MIDI list beentre
formatos
hexadecimal
e
decimal.
Click
the
Hex
button
in
the
MIDI/Plug-Ins
list
header.
mic/line
level inputs and decimal formats.
tween hexadecimal
Para
othe
formato
visualizao
da MIDI
Toalterar
toggle
view de
format
of the
MIDI
list:
AO16
Analog
Output
Card
that
provides
16List:
analog line level
Chapter
To toggle the view format of the MIDI
list: 21: Snapshots 195
outputs
Click the Hex button in the MIDI/Plug-Ins list header.
Clique no boto Hex no cabealho da MIDI/Plug-Ins List.
Click the Hex button in the MIDI/Plug-Ins list header.
Captulo
21: 21:
Snapshots
Chapter
Snapshots195
195
Preservando
a Sada
de Mensagens
MIDI
Safing MIDI
Message
Output

No teclado,
digite um
novo
valortempo
de Tempo.
value.
From
From the
the keyboard,
keyboard, type
type a
a new
new tempo
value.
Voc
temporariamente
desabilitar
sada de mensagens
You
can
disable
output
MIDI
You pode
can temporarily
temporarily
disable
output of
ofaembedded
embedded
MIDI mesmes-MIDI
Safing
Message
Output
anexadas
paraMIDI
queare
no
sejam
enviadas
quando isum
snapshot
sages
not
recalled,
sages so
so that
that they
they are
not sent
sent when
when a
a snapshot
snapshot is
recalled,
carregado,
quedata
o tipotype
de dado
MIDI esteja na abrangncia.
even whenmesmo
the MIDI
is scoped.
or
or
ou
Safing MIDI Message Output
From
a new
value.and
the
Up
and
Arrow
keys
to
Press
Press
the the
Up keyboard,
and Down
Downtype
Arrow
keystempo
to increase
increase
and dede-
crease
as setas
Up e Down para aumentar ou diminuir o
value.
crease
the selected
selected
value.
Pressione
or the
even
when
MIDI data
type isoutput
scoped.
You
can the
temporarily
disable
of embedded MIDI mesvalor selecionado.
Enter
Press the
Up and
Down
Arrow keys
to increase
or
another
snapshot
Tempo
value
consages
so
that MIDI
they are
not
sent when a snapshot
is recalled,
Press
Enter
or click
click
another
snapshot
Tempo
value to
toand
con-deA
sada
automaticamente
suspensa
no modo 22 Press
MIDI
output
is
automatically
suspended
while
in
Preview
MIDI output is automatically suspended while in Preview
crease
the
selected
value.
firm
the
even
when the MIDI data type is scoped.
Preview.
2 Pressione
firm
the entry.
entry.Enter ou clique em outro valor de Tempo para confrmar
mode.
mode.
o2item.
Press Enter or click another snapshot Tempo value to conMIDIaoutput
is automatically
suspended
Para
preservar
sada de
mensagens MIDI
na tela: while in Preview
To
the
current
To assign
assign
theentry.
current System
System Tempo
Tempo to
to a
a snapshot:
snapshot:
To
firm the
To safe
safe MIDI
MIDI message
message output
output on-screen:
on-screen:
mode.
Para atribuir o atual System Tempo a um snapshot:
1
1 Make
Make sure
sure Tempo
Tempo is
is shown
shown in
in the
the Snapshots
Snapshots List.
List.
to
and
the
111VGo
pgina
Snapshots page
e clique
aba Recall
Safe.Safe
Go
to the
the Snapshots
Snapshots
page
andaclick
click
the Recall
Recall
Safe tab.
tab.
To
assign
the
current
System
Tempo
to a snapshot:
To safe MIDI message output on-screen:
1
Certifique-se
de
que
Tempo
est
sendo
mostrado
na Snapshots
2
2 Right-click
Right-click and
and choose
choose the
the Set
Set Tempo
Tempo to
to option,
option, which
which will
will
2 Click
MIDI global
output
Safe
above the
paramClick the
the
outputOutput
Safe button
button
22 Clique
no MIDI
boto global
MIDI Global
Safe above
acima the
da parammatriz de
List.
1
Make
sure
Tempo
is
shown
in
the
Snapshots
List.
display
the
current
System
Tempo.
1 matrix
Go
to
the
Snapshots
page
and
click
the
Recall
Safe
tab.
display
the
current
System
Tempo.
eter
so
that
it
is
lit.
eter matrixpara
so that
lit.
parmetros
queitseisacenda.
Right-click
the
Set Tempo
to option,
which
will ir
22Clique
com
oand
boto
e Options
escolha
a> opo
Set Tempo,
2 Click the MIDI global output Safe button above the param- The
System
Tempo
ischoose
setdireito
in the
the
Misc
page.
For dede-que
The System
Tempo
is
set
in
Options >
Misc
page.
For
apresentar
o current
System System
Tempo atual.
display
the
Tempo.
eter matrix so that it is lit.
tails on
on configuring
configuring the
the system
system tempo
tempo and
and using
using it
it to
to synchrosynchrotails
nize
plug-ins,
see
Tap
Tempo
for
Plug-ins
on
page
213.
Adding Tempo Data to Snapshots
nize
plug-ins,
see
Tap
Tempo
for
Plug-ins
on
page
213.
System
Tempo
is set in
Options
> Misc
page.
Fordetalhes
deOThe
System
Tempo
ajustado
nathe
pgina
Options
> Misc.
Para
Adicionando dados de Tempo a Snapshots
sobre
como
configurarthe
o System
e utiliz-lo
para
sincronizar
tails on
configuring
system Tempo
tempo and
using it
to synchroThe
The Snapshots
Snapshots List
List can
can be
be toggled
toggled to
to display
display Tempo,
Tempo, along
along
To
toggle
tempo
on/off
for
each
snapshot:
To
toggle
tempo
on/off
for
each
snapshot:
plug-ins,
veja
Tap
Tempo
para
Plug-ins
na
pgina
213.
nize plug-ins, see Tap Tempo for Plug-ins on page 213.
Adding
Tempo
Data
to
Snapshots
Awith
Snapshots
ListOn/Off
pode exibir
o Tempo,
alm
de um indicador
para
a
indicator
for
snapshot
entry.
with
a Tempo
Tempo
On/Off
indicator
for each
each
snapshot
entry.
1
cada item de snapshot.
1 Make
Make sure
sure Tempo
Tempo is
is shown
shown in
in the
the Snapshots
Snapshots List
List (if
(if not,
not,
The Snapshots List can be toggled to display Tempo, along
Para
ligar etempo
desligar
Tempo
para cada
snapshot:
To toggle
right-click
any
in
list
and
choose
right-click
any item
itemon/off
in the
thefor
listeach
and snapshot:
choose Show
Show Tempo).
Tempo).
with a Tempo On/Off indicator for each snapshot entry.
1Certifique-se
Make
Tempo
shown
in
the
Snapshots
(if(disnot,
deicon
queisso
Tempo
sendo
mostrado
na
Snapshots
2
Click
the
Tempo
that
is
(enabled)
or
unlit
2 1
Click
thesure
Tempo
icon
so
that it
itest
is lit
lit
(enabled)
orList
unlit
(disList
(caso
no
esteja,
clique
com
o
boto
direito
em
qualquer
item
right-click
any
item
in
the
list
and
choose
Show
Tempo).
abled).
abled).
Snapshots List showing tempo
Snapshots
showing
tempo
Snapshots
ListList
mostrando
tempo
Storing
Storing a
a tempo
tempo with
with snapshots
snapshots lets
lets your
your system
system tempo
tempo
Armazenar
umList
Tempo
com
snapshots
permite full
ao sistema alterar
o
Snapshots
tempo
change
per
or
This
change
per song
songshowing
or scene.
scene.
This lets
lets you
you take
take full advantage
advantage of
of
Tempo por msica ou cena. Isso permite aproveitar ao mximo o
Tempo
Sync
(aka Tap
Tap
Tempo)
to synchronize
synchronize
delay and
and
echo
Tempo
Sync
(aka
Tempo)
to
delay
echo
Storing
a(Tap
tempo
with
snapshots
lets your
system
tempo
Tempo
Sync
Tempo)
para
sincronizar
plug-ins
de delay
e echo.
plug-ins.
plug-ins.
change per song or scene. This lets you take full advantage of
da lista e escolha Show Tempo).
2 Click the Tempo icon so that it is lit (enabled) or unlit (dis-
2abled).
Clique no cone Tempo para que se acenda (habilitado) ou apague
(desabilitado).
Mostrando
Tempo
naTap
Snapshots
Tempo oSync
(aka
Tempo)List
to synchronize delay and echo Snapshots
Snapshots List
List showing
showing tempo
tempo
Displaying
Displaying
Tempo in
in the
the Snapshots
Snapshots List
List
plug-ins. Tempo
Para mostrar Tempo na Snapshots List:
To
Tempo
the
To show
show
Tempo in
inTempo
the Snapshots
Snapshots
List:
Displaying
in the List:
Snapshots List
Clique com o boto direito em qualquer lugar da Snapshots List e
anywhere
Right-click
Right-click
anywhere in
in the
the Snapshots
Snapshots List
List and
and choose
choose Show
Show
escolha
Show Tempo.
To show Tempo in the Snapshots List:
Tempo.
Tempo.
O Tempo
apresentado em BPM (beats per minute) ou milissegundos,
Right-click anywhere in the Snapshots List and choose Show
Tempo
displayed
BPM
per
Tempo is
isajustado
displayed
inpgina
BPM (beats
(beats
per>minute)
minute)
or milliseconds,
milliseconds,
conforme
nain
Options
Misc. or
Tempo.
For
For more
more information
information on
on enabling
enabling Events
Events for
for Tap
Tap Tempo,
Tempo, see
see
Snapshots
ListList
mostrando
Tempo
Snapshots
showing
tempo
Tap
Tempo
for
Plug-ins
on
page
213.
Tap Tempo for Plug-ins on page 213.
For more
informationsobres
on enabling
Events
forpara
TapTap
Tempo,
seeveja
Para
mais informaes
habilitar
Events
Tempo,
Tap
Tempo
for
Plug-ins
on
page
213.
Tap Tempo para Plug-ins na pgina 213.
Pro Tools Markers and Snapshots
On
On systems
systems with
with VENUE
VENUE Link
Link enabled,
enabled, snapshots
snapshots can
can be
be conconProto
Tools
Markers
and
Snapshots
figured
create
a
marker
(Memory
Location)
in
the
Pro
Tools
figured
to
create
a
marker
(Memory
Location)
in
the
Pro
Tools
Marcadores
do
Pro
Tools
e
Snapshots
ParaTempo
alterar aisunidade
dein
apresentao
do Tempo:
displayed
BPM (beats per
minute) or milliseconds,
timeline
when with
that snapshot
snapshot
is recalled.
recalled.
Marker
statuscan
canbebe
becontimeline
when
that
is
Marker
status
can
To
for
On systems
VENUE Link
enabled,
snapshots
To change
change
the
units
for Tempo
Tempo
display:
as set inthe
theunits
Options
> Miscdisplay:
page.
shown
in
the
Snapshot
List
for
all
snapshots,
and
toggled
Em
sistemas
com
VENUE
Link
habilitado,
snapshots
podem
shown
in
the
Snapshot
List
for
all
snapshots,
and
toggled
1 V pgina Options > Misc.
figured to create a marker (Memory Location) in the Pro Toolsser
1
1 Go
Go to
to the
the Options
Options >
> Misc
Misc page.
page.
configurados para criar um marcador (Memory Location) no timeline
on/off.
on/off.
timeline when that snapshot is recalled. Marker status can be
To change the units for Tempo display:
do Pro Tools quando o snapshot carregado. O status do marcador
222Na
TapTempo
Tempo,section,
clique para
BPMor
oums.
ms.
In
the
click
to
shown
in the
Snapshot on
Listthis
for and
all snapshots,
and Link
toggled
Inseo
the Tap
Tap
Tempo
section,
clickselecionar
to select
select BPM
BPM
or
ms.
Forpode
complete
information
other
VENUE
feaser apresentado
naon
Snapshots
List
para
todosLink
os snapshots,
For
complete
information
this and
other
VENUE
fea1 Go to the Options > Misc page.
on/off.
e ligado
ou desligado.
tures,
see the
the
Live Recording
Recording Guide.
Guide.
Atribuindo e Habilitando um Tempo
tures,
see
Live
Assigning
and
Enabling
a
2 In the Tap
section,
click to select BPM or ms.
Assigning
andTempo
Enabling
a Tempo
Tempo
For complete information on this and other VENUE Link feaPara informaes completas sobre este e outros recursos VENUE
Cada
snapshot
pode
armazenar
um
valor de tempo
personalizado.
Each
tures, see the Live Recording Guide.
Each snapshot
snapshot can
can store
store a
a custom
custom tempo
tempo value.
value. You
You can
can manmanLink,
veja o Guia Live Recording.
VocAssigning
pode manualmente
entrar com
um tempo personalizado ou
and tempo,
Enabling
a Tempo
ually
enter
a
custom
or
use
a
shortcut
to
assign
the
curually
enter
a
custom
tempo,
or
use
a
shortcut
to
assign
the
curutilizar um atalho para atribuir o atual System Tempo.
rent
System
Tempo.
rentEach
System
Tempo.
snapshot
can store a custom tempo value. You can manas
as set
set in
in the
the Options
Options >
> Misc
Misc page.
page.
Vocually
podeenter
usaraocustom
cone Tempo
habilitar
ou desabilitar
tempo,Enable
or use para
aenable
shortcut
to assign
the curYou can
Enable
icon
or
tempo
can use
use the
the Tempo
Tempo
Enable
icon to
toum
enable
or disable
disable
tempo
oYou
carregamento
do Tempo
quando
snapshot
associado
rent
System
Tempo.
recall
recall when
when the
the associated
associated snapshot
snapshot is
is recalled.
recalled.
carregado.
You can use the Tempo Enable icon to enable or disable tempo
To
a
to
snapshot
manually:
To assign
assign
a Tempo
Tempo
value
to a
a de
snapshot
manually:
Para
atribuir
umvalue
valor
Tempo
para um snapshot
recall
when
the
associated
snapshot
is recalled.
manualmente:
1 In the Snapshots List, double-click the Tempo value you
1 In the Snapshots List, double-click the Tempo value you
To to
assign
a Tempo
value
to of
a snapshot
manually:
want
change,
then
do
the
want
to
change,
then
do one
one
of
the following:
following:
1 Na Snapshots
List,
clique
duas
vezes
no valor Tempo que deseja
1 Ine the
List, double-click
the Tempo value you
alterar,
sigaSnapshots
um dos seguintes
procedimentos:
want to change, then do one of the following:

196
196 VENUE
VENUE Profile
Profile Guide
Guide
196
Guia VENUE Profile
Adding
Adding Plug-In
Plug-In Data
Data to
to Snapshots
Snapshots
No
is
a
is
No Plug-In
Plug-In data
dataDados
is captured
captured
when
a snapshot
snapshot
is first
first created.
created.
Adicionando
de when
Plug-In
a Snapshots
Plug-In
data
to
snapshots
from
Adding
Plug-In
Data
to Snapshots
Plug-In
data is
is added
added
to existing
existing
snapshots
from the
the Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
list or
or from
from
the
Plug-Inrack.
rack.
Nenhum
dadothe
de plug-in
capturado quando um snapshot criado.
list
Plug-In
data is captured when a snapshot is first created.
DadosNo
de Plug-In
plug-in so
adicionados a snapshots existentes pela PlugWhen
the
Plug-In
data
type
is
scopedsnapshots
for a
a snapshot,
snapshot,
plug-in
Plug-In
data
added
to is
existing
from the
Plug-Ins
When
the
Plug-In
data
type
scoped
for
plug-in
Ins List ou pelo rackisde
plug-ins.
routing,
in/out
state,
and settings
settings
are recalled
recalled with
with the
the snapsnaplist or
from state,
the Plug-In
rack. are
routing,
in/out
and
shot. (Adding
(Adding
ordechanging
changing
plug-in
side-chain
routing
is not
not o
Quando
um tipoor
dado Plug-In
est
no alcance
da snapshot,
shot.
plug-in
side-chain
routing
is
When in
Plug-In
data type is scoped
for a snapshot,
plug-in
supported
snapshots.)
roteamento,
othe
estado
ligado/desligado
e os ajustes
do plug-ins
so
supported
in
snapshots.)
routing,
in/out
state, and
settingsou
are
recalled
with the snapcarregados
com
o snapshot.
(Adicionar
alterar
o roteamento
do
The shot.
Snapshots
Plug-Ins
list
lets
you select
select
multiplerouting
plug-ins
(Adding
or changing
plug-in
side-chain
is not
side-chain
no
suportado
emlets
snapshots.)
The
Snapshots
Plug-Ins
list
you
multiple
plug-ins
Stage
RackinFeatures
and
add, remove
remove
and
update them
them simultaneously
simultaneously across
across one
one
supported
snapshots.)
and
add,
and
update
A or
Plug-Ins
List
permite selecionar
vrios
plug-inscan
e adicionar,
remover
or multiple
multiple snapshots.
snapshots.
Multiple
snapshots
can
be selected,
selected,
Multiple
snapshots
be
Stage
Racks
are used
with an
FOH
Rack,
and multiple
provide all
stage
The
Snapshots
Plug-Ins
listremoved
lets
you
select
plug-ins
ouand
atualiz-los
ou to
vrios
snapshots.
Mltiplos
snapshots
others
canem
be um
added
or
from
the selection,
selection,
at
and
others
can
be
added
to or
removed
from
the
at
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Stage
Racks
and
remove
and removing,
simultaneously
across
one
podem
seradd,
selecionados,
eupdate
outrosthem
podem
ser adicionados
any time
time
prior
to adding,
adding,
or updating
updating
plug-ins
and ou
any
prior
to
removing,
or
plug-ins
and
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up to
96 total
inputs.
removidos
da
seleo,
a
qualquer
tempo,
para
adicionar,
remover
or
multiple
snapshots.
Multiple
snapshots
can
be
selected,
snapshots.
ousnapshots.
atualizar
plug-ins
and others
canem
be snapshots.
added to or removed from the selection, at
Audio
I/O
any time prior to adding, removing, or updating plug-ins and
Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
List
List
48 inputs
snapshots.
Plug-Ins
Listwith remotely controllable mic preamps and
Para
ver dados
dedata
plug-ins
para snapshots
na MIDI/Plug-Inslist:
List:
To
plug-in
for
in the
To view
view
for snapshots
snapshots
the MIDI/Plug-Ins
MIDI/Plug-Ins
8plug-in
analogdata
output
channels; in
expandable
up to 48 list:
analog or
Plug-Ins List
Target
the
you
want
to
modify,
multiple
digital
outputs per
Rack.
1 11Selecione
o snapshot
snapshot
queStage
deseja
ouselect
selecione
vrios
Target
the
you
want
tomodificar,
modify, or
or
select
multiple
snapshots
in
the
list.
snapshots
na
lista.
snapshots
the list.
To viewinplug-in
data for snapshots in the MIDI/Plug-Ins list:
2
Double-click
Plug-Ins
in
list
header
to
ex1 Target
thePlug-Ins
snapshot
youMIDI/Plug-Ins
want
to modify,
or select
Double-click
in the
the
MIDI/Plug-Ins
list
header
to multiple
ex-List
2 2Clique
duas vezes
em Plug-Ins
no
cabealho
da MIDI/Plug-Ins
the
Snake
connectors
to enable primary and redundant (if
pand
Plug-In
list.
snapshots
in list.
the List.
list.
pand
the Plug-In
para
expandir
a Plug-In
Adding
Adding Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins to
to Snapshots
Snapshots
Adicionando Plug-Ins a Snapshots
To
To add
add a
a plug-in
plug-in to
to one
one or
or more
more snapshots
snapshots from
from the
the Snapshots
Snapshots
page:
page:Adding Plug-Ins to Snapshots
Para adicionar um plug-in a um ou mais snapshots pela pgina
1
Select
an
snapshot, or
create
of
1 Snapshots:
Select
an aindividual
individual
or snapshots
create a
a multi-selection
multi-selection
of
To add
plug-in to snapshot,
one or more
from the Snapshots
snapshots
in the Snapshots list.
snapshots
page: in the Snapshots list.
1 Selecione um snapshot, ou crie uma multiseleo de snapshots
2
Display
the
List
(see
List
page
List.
1Snapshots
Select
individual
or create
multi-selection
2 na
Display
theanPlug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Listsnapshot,
(see Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
Listaon
on
page 197).
197). of
snapshots
inbutton
the Snapshots
list.Snapshot Plug-Ins list and
3
the
within
the
3 2Click
Click
the ADD
ADD
button List
within
Snapshot
Plug-Ins
list 197).
and
Apresente
a Plug-Ins
(vejathe
Plug-Ins
List
na pgina
select
plug-in
(or
All
the
2a
Listfrom
(see Plug-Ins
select
aDisplay
plug-inthe
(orPlug-Ins
All Plug-Ins)
Plug-Ins)
from
the menu.
menu.List on page 197).
3 Clique no boto ADD dentro da Plug-Ins List e selecione um plug-in
3 Click
the ADD
button within the
Snapshot
Plug-Ins list and
To
add
plug-in
multiple
from
menu. snapshots
To(ou
addAlla
aPlug-Ins)
plug-in to
todo
multiple
snapshots
from the
the Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins page:
page:
Additional
Required
Components
select a plug-in (or All Plug-Ins) from the menu.
1
a
of snapshots
on
page
1 Create
Create
a multi-selection
multi-selection
snapshots
on the
the Snapshots
Snapshots
pagePlugThe adicionar
following
components
must
be purchased
separately:
Para
um
plug-inofpara
vrios
snapshots
pela
pgina
Totoadd
aPlug-Ins
plug-in to
multiple snapshots from the Plug-Ins page:
2
page.
2 Ins:
GoVideo
to the
theDisplay
Plug-Ins(15-inch
page. or greater flat-panel VGA display
Go
1
Create
a multi-selection
of
snapshots
on
theadded
Snapshots
page
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA and
3
the
menu
for
to
3 1Click
Click
the Snapshots
Snapshots
menu
for the
the plug-in
plug-in
to be
beSnapshots
added and
and
Crie uma
multiseleo
de snapshots
na pgina
DVIAdd
supported.
choose
Selected
2 Go
the Plug-In
Plug-InsTo
choose
AddtoThis
This
Plug-In
Topage.
Selected Snapshots.
Snapshots. The
The selected
selected
plug-in
is
addedPlug-Ins.
to
the
targeted
snapshot,
as
2 V
is
pgina
USB
keyboard
trackball/mouse
plug-in
added
to and
the currently
currently
targeted(Windows
snapshot,compatible)
as well
well as
as
3 Click
the Snapshots
menu
for the plug-in to be added and
all other
other
snapshots
within the
the
multi-selection.
all
snapshots
within
multi-selection.
choose
ThisSnapshots
Plug-In To Selected
Snapshots.
The selected
3Digital
Clique
noAdd
menu
plug-inSystems
a ser adicionado
e escolha
Snake
Cable
(VENUEnoProfile
Only)
is added
the currently
targeted
snapshot,
as well as
Addplug-in
This Plug-In
To to
Selected
Snapshots.
O plug-in
adicionado
ao
all
Theother
connection
between
Rack
and Stage
Rack requires
snapshot
selecionado,
assimFOH
como
a todos
os outros
snapshots
snapshots
within
the
multi-selection.
a Digital
Snake
cable. This cable can be purchased directly
dentro
de uma
multiseleo.
Optional
Components
Using
Using the
the Snapshots
Snapshots pop-up
pop-up menu
menu in
in the
the plug-in
plug-in rack
rack (Plug-Ins
(Plug-Ins page)
page)
2 Double-click Plug-Ins in the MIDI/Plug-Ins list header to exThe
following
components
are
optional,
and
must
be
Snapshots
Snapshots within
within the
the multi-selection
multi-selection that
that already
already contained
contained
pand the Plug-In list.
purchased
separately:
the
plug-in
added
are
unaffected
preserve
any
Usando
o menu
pop-up
Snapshots
rack de
rack
(pgina
Plug-Ins)
the
plug-in
being
added
are no
unaffected
and
preserve
any prepreUsing
thebeing
Snapshots
pop-up
menu
in plug-ins
theand
plug-in
rack (Plug-Ins
page)
USB
flash
System Components
viously
stored
settings.
viously
stored
settings.
Snapshots
within
the
multi-selection
that already
transfer
of Show
data;
512 MB
larger
recommended)
Snapshots
dentro
da multiseleo
queorcontm
o plug-incontained
adicionado
plug-in
being eadded
are unaffected
andajuste
preserve
any prenothe
so
afetadas
preservam
qualquer
previamente
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
Included Components
Removing
a
viously stored
settings. from
Removing
a Plug-In
Plug-In
from Snapshots
Snapshots
armazenado.
To
remove
a
from
snapshots
from
page:
Dynamic
condenser
microphone
and XLR mic
cable
um or
Plug-In
de Snapshots
ToRemovendo
remove
a plug-in
plug-in
from
snapshots
from the
the Snapshots
Snapshots
page:
Removing
a Plug-In from Snapshots
(for Talkback)
1
1 Select
Select an
an individual
individual snapshot,
snapshot, or
or create
create a
a multi-selection
multi-selection of
of
Para
um plug-in
snapshots
pela
pgina
Snapshots:
remover
Footswitches
(up tode2)
snapshots
in
the
Snapshots
List.
snapshots
in the
Snapshots
List.
Expanded
Plug-In
list
To
remove
a
plug-in
from
snapshots
from
the
Snapshots
page:
Expanded
Plug-In
list
Plug-In List
expandida mount for VGA screen (screen not included)
Monitor
1Click
Selecione
umindividual
snapshot,
ou icon
crie uma
multiseleo
de snapshots
2
the
Plug-Ins
to
the
Snapshots
It
is
also
to
multiple
plug-ins
in
1 Select
an
snapshot,
create
a multi-selection
of
2 Click
the Snapshots
Snapshots
Plug-Ins
icon
toorshow
show
the
Snapshots
Trackball
(trackball
included)
It is also possible
possiblemount
to select
select
multiplenot
plug-ins
in the
the Snapshots
Snapshots
BNC
cables
na Snapshots
List.(for connecting Word clock between the
Tambm
possvel
selecionar
vrios
plug-ins
na
Plug-Ins
List
e
Plug-Ins
list.
Plug-Ins
list
and
remove
or
update
these
plug-ins
across
mulsnapshots
in
the
Snapshots
List.
Plug-Ins
list.
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
Plug-Ins
listatualizar
and
remove
or update
across mulExpanded
Plug-In
list
remover
ou
esses
plug-insthese
em plug-ins
vrios snapshots
nos
tiple
snapshots
using
Right-click
commands.
Selections
can
be
tiple
snapshots
using
Right-click
commands.
Selections
can
be
3
Right-click
a
plug-in
within
the
plug-in
the
currently
2
Clique
nothe
cone
Plug-Ins
para
visualizar
Plug-Ins
List.
VENUE
Profile
Guide
comandos
quepossible
surgemtoclicando
com o plug-ins
boto direito.
2 Click
Snapshots
Plug-Ins
icon toalist
show
thedevices)
Snapshots
3 Right-click
aD-Sub
plug-in
within
the
plug-in
list
ofGPI
the
currently
25-pin
cables
(for
connecting
toof
It is also
select multiple
in This
the Selees
Snapshots
contiguous
or
non-contiguous
plug-ins
in
the
list.
lets
contiguous
or
non-contiguous
plug-ins
in
the
list.
This
lets
targeted
snapshot
and
choose
Remove
This
Plug-In
From
podem
ser
contguas
ou
no
contguas.
Isso
permite
gerenciar
Plug-Ins
list. and choose Remove This Plug-In From Sesnapshot
Se Two (2)
console
lights or update these plug-ins across mul- targeted
Plug-Ins
list
and
remove
you
more
manage
all
inserted
on
single
chan3 Clique
com o boto direito em um plug-in dentro da Plug-In List do
you facilmente
more easily
easilytodos
manage
all plug-ins
plug-ins
inserted
on a
anico
single
chanSnapshots.
mais
os plug-ins
inseridos
em um
canal,
por lected
lected
Snapshots.
tiple
snapshots
using
Right-click
commands.
Selections
can
be
Protective
Dust
Cover
nel,
3 Right-click
a plug-in
withinRemove
the plug-in
list of the
currently
snapshot
selecionado
e escolha
This Plug-In
From
Selected
exemplo.
nel, for
for example.
example.
contiguous
or non-contiguous
plug-ins in the list. This lets
Rack(s) (see
next)
Snapshots.
targeted
snapshot
and
choose
Remove
This
Plug-In
From
SeVENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
To remove a
a plug-in
plug-in from
from multiple
multiple snapshots
snapshots from
from the
the Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins
you more easily manage all plug-ins inserted on a single chan- To remove
lected
Snapshots.
page:
page:
The following
options
cande
be added
VENUE Profile
systems.
nel, forSoftware
example. CDs, iLoks, and Cables
Para
remover um
plug-in
vrios to
snapshots
pela pgina
PlugRacks,
1
Create
a
multi-selection
of
snapshots
on
the
Snapshots
page
Ins:
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit
the
Avid
1 Create
a multi-selection
of multiple
snapshots
on the Snapshots
page
To remove
a plug-in from
snapshots
from the Plug-Ins
website
(www.avid.com).
page:
2
Go
to
the
Plug-Ins
page.
2 1Go
touma
the Plug-Ins
page.de snapshots na pgina Snapshots.
Crie
multiseleo
System Restore CD
1
Create
a
multi-selection
of snapshots
on the
Snapshots page
3
3 Click
Click the
the Snapshot
Snapshot menu
menu for
for the
the plug-in
plug-in to
to be
be removed
removed and
and
Mix
Rack
Options
2
V
pgina
Plug-Ins.
choose
Remove
This
Plug-In
From
Selected
Snapshots.
2 Go
to
the
Plug-Ins
page.
choose
Remove
This
Plug-In
From
Selected
Snapshots.
Managing
multiple
plug-ins
across
snapshots
Managing
multiple
plug-ins discs
across(ifmultiple
multiple
snapshots
Plug-in
installer
any) with
pre-authorized iLok
Gerenciando vrios plug-ins em mltiplos snapshots

One FOH
Linkplug-ins
cable for
connection
to a VENUE console
Managing
multiple
across
multiple snapshots
3I/O
Clique
nothe
menu
Snapshot
plug-in
acurrently
ser to
removido
e escolha
Options
The
selected
plug-in
is
from
3
Click
Snapshot
menudofor
thethe
plug-in
betargeted
removed
and
The
selected
plug-in
is removed
removed
from
the
currently
targeted
Remove
This
Plug-In
From
Selected
Snapshots.
snapshot,
as
well
as
all
other
snapshots
within
the
multi-selecchoose
Remove
This
Plug-In
From
Selected
Snapshots.
snapshot,
as well
as all other
snapshots
within
the multi-selecAI16 Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card that
provides
16 analog
tion.
Only
snapshots
within
the
multi-selection
that
contain
tion.
Only selecionado
snapshots
within
the
multi-selection
thatcomo
contain
Omic/line
plug-in
removido
do
snapshot,
assim
de todos
level inputs
The
selected
plug-in
is
removed
from
the
currently
targeted
the
selected
plug-in
are
affected.
the
plug-in are
affected.
osselected
outros
snapshots
dentro
de
uma
multiseleo.
Apenas
snapshots
snapshot, as well as all other snapshots within the multi-selecAO16 Analog
Output Card
provides
analog
line level so
dentro
da multiseleo
que that
contenham
o 16
plug-in
selecionado
tion. Only snapshots within the multi-selection that contain
outputs
afetados.
Chapter
21:
Snapshots
the selected plug-in are affected. Chapter 21: Snapshots 197
197
Captulo
21: 21:
Snapshots
Chapter
Snapshots197
197
Updating a Plug-In Across Multiple

Snapshot Options
Snapshots
Opces Snapshot
Updating
a
Plug-In
Across
Multiple
The Options >Options
Snapshots page provides Snapshot General
Para atualizar um plug-in em vrios snapshots pela pgina Snapshot
To update a plug-in across snapshots from the Snapshots page:
Snapshots
Snapshots:
Preference settings for centering the snapshot list, and for opAtualizando um Plug-In em Vrios Snapshots
1 Select an individual snapshot, or create a multi-selection of
update aum
plug-in
acrossousnapshots
the Snapshots
page:
1 To
Selecione
snapshot,
criepage.
uma from
multiseleo
de snapshots
snapshots
on
the Snapshots
na1 Snapshots
List.
Select an individual snapshot, or create a multi-selection of
2 Select a plug-in within the plug-in list of the currently tarsnapshots on the Snapshots page.
2 Selecione
um plug-in dentro da Plug-In List do snapshot
geted snapshot.
selecionado.
2 Select a plug-in within the plug-in list of the currently tar-
3 Right-click and choose Update Plug-In In Selected Snapshots.

geted snapshot.
3 Clique com o boto direito e escolha Update Plug-In In Selected

3 Right-click and choose Update Plug-In In Selected Snapshots.
Snapshots.
A pgina Options > Snapshots oferece ajustes Snapshot General
The
Options
>
Snapshots
page a
provides
Snapshot
timizing
crossfades
between
snapshots.
Preference
para
centralizar
Snapshot
List, eGeneral
para otimizar
Preference
settings
for
centering
the
snapshot
list, and for opcrossfades entre snapshots.
The next
section explains
to utilize snapshot crossfade.
timizing
crossfades
between how
snapshots.
(For
information
on
the
Center
Last Recalled
Snapshot
preferA prxima seo explica como utilizar
crossfade
entre snapshots.
The
next
section
explains
how
to
utilize
snapshot
crossfade.
ence,
see
Centering
the
Snapshot
List
on
page
182.)
(Para informaes sobre a opo Center Last Recalled Snapshot,
(For
on na
theSnapshots
Center Last
Recalled
Snapshot
vejainformation
Centralizando
List
na pgina
182.) preference, see Centering the Snapshot List on page 182.)
Snapshot
Crossfades
entreCrossfades
Snapshots
All snapshots provide a Crossfade setting that determines how

Snapshot
Crossfades
Todos os snapshots
oferecem um ajuste Crossfade que determina
long scoped faders will crossfade to the stored values in that

como faders de longo alcance vo realizar a transio para os
Allsnapshot
snapshots
provide
Crossfade
setting
that> determines
how
when
it isarecalled.
The
Options
Snapshots page
valores armazenados no snapshot quando este carregado. A
long
scopedSnapshot
faders will
crossfade
to the stored
values
in that
provides
General
Preference
settings
for
optimizing
pgina Options > Snapshots oferece ajustes Snapshot General
snapshot
when
itotimizar
is recalled.
The Options
> Snapshots
page
crossfades
between
snapshots.
Preference
para
os crossfades
entre
snapshots.
provides Snapshot General Preference settings for optimizing
crossfades between snapshots.
Snapshots plug-ins pop-up menu with multiple plug-ins selected in the
Snapshots page
Snapshots
plug-ins
pop-up
multiple na
plug-ins
Menu
pop-up plug-ins
com
vrios menu
plug-inswith
selecionados
pgina selected
Snapshotsin the
To update a plug-in across multiple snapshots from the Plug-Ins

page:
Para atualizar um plug-in em vrios snapshots pela pgina PlugTo 1update
a plug-in across multiple snapshots from the Plug-Ins
Ins: Create a multi-selection of snapshots on the Snapshots page
page:
2 Go to the Plug-Ins page. All plug-ins that are associated with
1 1Crie
uma amultiseleo
de snapshots
na pgina
Create
multi-selection
of snapshots
on theSnapshots
Snapshots page
any of the currently selected snapshots are identifiable by
tored
theSnapshot
Plug-Ins
page.
Allos
plug-ins
that
associated
with a
their
menu.
2 2VGo
pgina
Plug-Ins.
Todos
plug-ins
queare
esto
associados
any
of
the
currently
selected
snapshots
are
identifiable
by
qualquer dos snapshots selecionados so identificados por seus
3 Click the Snapshots menu for the plug-in to be updated and
their red
Snapshot
menu.
menus
Snapshot
em vermelho.
choose Update This Plug-In In Selected Snapshots.
Click the Snapshots menu for the plug-in to be updated and
3 3Clique
no menu Snapshots do plug-ins a ser atualizado e escolha
The selected
plug-in
is updated
within
the currently targeted
choose
Update
This
In Snapshots.
Selected
Snapshots.
Update This
Plug-In
In Plug-In
Selected
snapshot, as well as all other snapshots within the multi-selecThe
selected
plug-in
is updated
within the currently
targeted
tion.
Snapshots
within
the multi-selection
that doselecionado,
not
already
O plug-in
selecionado
atualizado
dentro do snapshot
snapshot,
as
well
as
all
other
snapshots
within
the
multi-seleccontain
the
plug-in
being
added
are
unaffected.
assim como em todos os outros snapshots da multiseleo.
tion. Snapshots
within
the multi-selection
that do not
already
Snapshots
dentro da
multiseleo
que no contenham
o plug-in
no
contain
the plug-in being added are unaffected.
so
afetados.
Snapshots page
Editing Plug-Ins
Editando
Plug-Ins page provides two ways to quickly navigate to a
The Snapshot
Editing Plug-Ins
plug-in in order to edit its routing assignment or parameters.
A The
pgina
Snapshot
dois
dequickly
rapidamente
navegar
Snapshot
pageoferece
provides
twomodos
ways to
navigate
to a
para um plug-in para editar seu roteamento ou parmetros.
plug-in
toassociated
edit its routing
To editinaorder
plug-in
with aassignment
snapshot: or parameters.
Paraeditar
um plug-in
associado
comSnapshot
um snapshot:
Double-click
the
item in the
Plug-Ins list. Or,
To edit a plug-in associated with a snapshot:

right-click a plug-in in the Snapshots Plug-Ins list and choose
Clique
duas vezes
iteminnathe
Plug-Ins
List. Plug-Ins
Ou, cliquelist.
com
o boto
Double-click
theno
item
Snapshot
Or,
Edit Plug-In.
direito
no plug-in na Plug-Ins List e escolha Edit Plug-In.
right-click a plug-in in the Snapshots Plug-Ins list and choose
Edit Plug-In.
198 VENUE
Guia VENUE
Profile
198
Profile Guide
Snapshot
preferences
in na
thetela
Options
Snapshot
General
Preference
Options>>Snapshots
Snapshots screen
Default Time Defines a Crossfade time to apply to all new

snapshots.
os
novos snapshots.
Default Time Defines a Crossfade time to apply to all new
Pan, Balance & Width Enables pan, balance and width on
snapshots.
Pan, Balance & Width Habilita pan, balance e width nos canais do
scoped do
channels
to crossfade.
alcance
crossfade.
Pan, Balance & Width Enables pan, balance and width on
Faders can be crossfaded
on all channel types. Pan, balance,
scoped
to crossfade.
Faderschannels
podem realizar
a transio em todos os tipos de canais. Pan,
and width can crossfade on input channels, FX Returns,
balance, e width podem realizer a transio em Input Channels, FX
Faders
can and
be crossfaded
on In
channel
types. Pan,
balance,
Groups,
PQeoutputs.
order
to crossfade,
the
desireddevem
Returns,
Groups,
PQ. Para
oall
crossfade,
os
canais desejados
and
width
can
crossfade
on input
channels,
FX
Returns,
channels
must
be scoped,
and
both
Faderde
and
PanFader
data types
estar
na abrangncia,
assim
como
os tipos
dados
e Pan.
Groups,
and be
PQscoped.
outputs. In order to crossfade, the desired
must also
channels
must be
scoped, and
both Fader and Pan data types
Para configurar
o crossfade
de snapshots:
must
also be scoped.
To configure
snapshot crossfade:
Default preferences
Time Defineinum
crossfadescreen
a ser aplicado a todos
Snapshot
the tempo
Optionsde
> Snapshots
1 V pgina Options e clique na aba Snapshots.
1 Go to the Options page and click the Snapshots tab.

To configure snapshot crossfade:
22NaInseo
SnapshotGeneral
GeneralPreferences
Preferences,
digite um
valor
the Snapshot
section,
enter
a diferente
1 de
Go0 to
theDefault
OptionsCrossfade
page andTime.
click O
the
Snapshots
tab.
para
tempo
mximo
de crossfade
non-zero value for Default Crossfade Time. Maximum crossde 99.9 segundos.
2 In
the
Snapshot
Preferences section, enter a
fade
time
is 99.9General
seconds.
non-zero
value
for
Default
Crossfade
Time.
Maximum
cross33Para
ter os
parmetros
seguindo
o tempo
de crossfade
To have
pan
parameterspan
follow
the snapshot
crossfade
time, do
fade
time
is
99.9
seconds.
snapshot,
clique
para
habilitar
o
ajuste
Pan,
Balance
&
Width.
(Veja
click to enable the Pan, Balance & Width setting. (See Pan, BalPan,
Balance
e
Width
Crossfade
Reference
na
pgina
200.)
3 To
have
pan
parameters
follow
the snapshot
crossfade
ance
and
Width
Crossfade
Reference
on page
200.) time,
click to enable the Pan, Balance & Width setting. (See Pan, Bal44V
Snapshots
certifique-se
abranger
os canais
Gotopgina
the Snapshots
pagee and
make surede
to scope
the desired
ance
and Width
Crossfade
Reference no
on fader
page display.
200.)
desejados
clicando
e
selecionando-os
channels by clicking to select them in the fader display.
4 Go to the Snapshots page and make sure to scope the desired
Click topara
scopeabranger
Fader and/or
Pane/ou
as needed
in the appropriate
55 Clique
Fader
Pan conforme
necessrio
channels by clicking to select them in the fader display.
nos
snapshots
(Para a lista
parmetros
por tipo
snapshots.
(Forapropriados
a listing of .parameters
byde
data
type, see Pan,
dado,
veja Width
Pan,
and
Crossfade
Reference
na
5 de
Click
to scope
Fader Balance
and/or
Pan
asWidth
needed
in
appropriate
Balance
and
Crossfade
Reference
onthe
page
200.)
pgina 200.)
snapshots.
(For a listing of parameters by data type, see Pan,
Balance and Width Crossfade Reference on page 200.)
Casos Especiais para Bypass de Crossfade

Recebimento de Comandos MIDI
O crossfade do snapshot no ignorado se uma mensagem MIDI
Program Change que carrega o mesmo snapshot recebida durante
o crossfade.
MTC
O crossfade do snapshot no ignorado se um trigger MTC
carregando
o mesmo
snapshot ocorre durante o crossfade.
Stage Rack
Features
Stage Racks
are used
with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage
Multiplos
Crossfades
Simultneos

O crossfade
pode
ser ignoradosupporting
para o mais
recente
can be used
simultaneously,
up to
96 totalsnapshot
inputs.
carregado apenas.
Audio I/O
Modo Preview

individually
selectable
phantom
power.
Se voc entrar
no modo
Preview entre
comandos
Recall, o crossfade
offline (modo
Preview)
ser
ignorado;expandable
o crossfadeup
online
8 analog
output
channels;
to 48no.
analog or

System Components
Included Components

DVI supported.

Optional Components
(for Talkback)
VENUE Mouse Pad

VENUE Profile Guide

Rack(s) (see next)


System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options



outputs
199
Pan,Pan,
Balance
and Width
Crossfade
Reference
Balance
and Width
Crossfade
Reference
Pan,
Balanceand
andWidth
Width
Crossfade
Reference
Pan, Balance
Crossfade
Parameter
Reference
Pan, Balance and Width Crossfade Reference
Pan
Pan, Balance and Width Crossfade Parameter Reference
Pan, Balance and Width Crossfade Parameter Reference
Inputs
Input
Mono
Pan
Pan
Channel
Stereo
Inputs
Input
Mono
X
Inputs
Input
Mono
Channel
Channel
FX Return
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
FX Return
Stereo
FX Return
Stereo
Output
Aux
Mono/Stereo-linked
MasPQ
ters
Output
Aux
Mono/Stereo-linked
Output
Aux
Mono/Stereo-linked
MasMasMatrix
Mono/Stereo-linked
PQ
ters
PQ
ters
Groups
Mono
Matrix
Mono/Stereo-linked
Matrix
Mono/Stereo-linked
Stereo
Groups
Mono
X
Groups
Mono
Variable Groups
Mono/Stereo-linked
Stereo
Stereo
Variable Groups
Mono/Stereo-linked
CrossfadeVariable
does notGroups
apply to Pan for channel
Aux sends.
X
Mono/Stereo-linked
Balance
X
X
Balance
Balance
X
X
X
Width
Width
Width
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Crossfade
does
apply
to Pan
for input
sources
Crossfade
does
notnot
apply
to Pan
for channel
Aux
sends. within the Matrix or PQ mixer.
Crossfade does not apply to Pan for channel Aux sends.
Crossfade does not apply to Pan for input sources within the Matrix or PQ mixer.
Pre
Crossfade
does not apply to Pan for input sources within the Matrix orClassifying
PQ mixer.
Settings
Aux Sends
Ajustes
PreSettings
Snapshots
can be used to recall the preamplifier settings on inPre
Classificando
Aux Sends
You
can classify
Aux Sends
as monitor sends (Mon) or as efClassifying
Aux
Sends
Pre
Settings
Classifying
Aux Sends
puts for all scoped Input Channels. You can set any of the folfects sends (FX), which lets you scope each type separately
Snapshots
podem
serused
usadors
para
carregar
os ajustes
Preonem
Voc
pode
classificar
Aux
Sends
como mandadas
Monitor
(Mon)
Snapshots
can
be
to
the
preamplifier
settings
inYou
can
classify
Auxpage.
Sends
as monitor
sends (Mon)
or as
eflowing Pre
parameters
to recall
bethe
recalled
by the Pre
data type
from
the
Snapshots
Snapshots
can
be used
to recall
preamplifier
settings
on
in-but- You
can
classify
Aux Sends
as monitor
sends
(Mon) abranger
or as ef- cada
entradas
para
todos
os
Input
Channels
abrangidos.
Voc
pode
ajustar
ou
como
mandadas
de
efeito
(FX),
que
permitem
puts
for
all
scoped
Input
Channels.
You
can
set
any
of
the
folfects
sends
(FX),
which
lets
you
scope
each
type
separately
ton:
Pad and
Phase/polarity,
+48V
Power),
puts
for Gain,
all scoped
Input
Channels.
You
can (Phantom
set any
of the
folfects
sends
(FX), which
lets
you scope
each type separately
qualquer
um
dos
seguintes
parmetros
para
carregados
tipo
separadamente
pela
pgina
Snapshots.
lowing
Pre
parameters
to be
recalled
byserem
the Pre
data typepelo
butfrom
the Snapshots
page.
This
option is only
a means of organizing Aux Sends for
HPF
corner
frequency
in/out
state.
lowing
parameters
to and
be
recalled
by the Pre data
butfrom the Snapshots page.
boto
PrePre
Data
Type: Gain,
Pad
e Phase/polarity,
+48Vtype
(Phantom
ton: Gain, Pad and Phase/polarity, +48V (Phantom Power),
snapshot control, and does not directly affect Aux bus
ton: Gain,
Pad and
+48V (Phantom
Power),
Power),
frequncia
dePhase/polarity,
corte do HPF e dentro/fora
do circuito.
Essaoption
opois only
apenas
umofmtodo
de organizar
This
a means
organizing
Aux SendsAux
for Sends
HPF corner frequency and in/out state.
operation.
This
option
is only apelo
means
of organizing
Aux
Sendsdiretamente
for
set thefrequency
Pre parameters
recalled
by the Pre Data Type button:
para
controle
snapshot,
e
no
afeta
a
HPFTocorner
and in/out
state.
snapshot control, and does not directly affect Aux bus
snapshot
control,
and Aux.
does not directly affect Aux bus
Para ajustar os parmetros Pre carregados pelo boto Pre Data
operao
do bus
1
pagerecalled
and click
tab. button:
operation.
To classify
Aux Sends for snapshot scope:
To Go
setto
thethe
PreOptions
parameters
by the
the Snapshot
Pre Data Type
Type:
operation.
To set the Pre parameters recalled by the Pre Data Type button:
Para
classificar
Aux Sends
na abrangncia
snapshot:tab.
1
to the
Options
and click
thedo
Snapshots
2
Pre,Options
select the
options
you want
to include.
1 Under
Go to the
page
and click
the Snapshot
tab.Selected
To Go
classify
Aux
Sends page
for snapshot
scope:
to the
and
click
the
Snapshot
tab.
11VGo
pgina
Options
epage
clique
nathe
aba
Snapshot.
items
willOptions
be affected
when
Pre
data
type is included
in the To classify Aux Sends for snapshot scope:
For
each
Sendepage
bus
or
bus
pair,Snapshots.
click
the Aux Mon
to
theAux
Options
and
the
Snapshots
tab. or
112VGo
pgina
Options
clique
naclick
aba
2 Under Pre, select the options you want to include. Selected
scope
of a select
snapshot.
2 Under
Pre,
the options you want to include. Selected
Aux FX buttons to classify it as a monitor send or effects send,
2 Em
Pre,willselecione
aswhen
opes
quedata
deseja
incluir.
Os in
itens
items
be affected
the Pre
type is
included
the
2 For each Aux Send bus or bus pair, click the Aux Mon or
items will be sero
affected
when the
Pre data
included
selecionados
afetados
quando
umtype
tipois de
dado in
Prethe
est 2 2For
Para
cada
bus
ou par
Aux
Send,
nosorbotes Aux
respectively.
each
Aux
Send
bus de
or busses
bus pair,
click
theclique
Aux Mon
scope of a snapshot.
Aux FX
to classify
it as a monitor
send or effects
send,
scope of
snapshot. de snapshot.
includo
naa abrangncia
Mon
ou buttons
Aux FX
para
classific-los
comosend
mandada
Monitor
Aux FX buttons
to classify
it as a monitor
or effects
send, ou de
respectively.
efeitos,
respectivamente.
respectively.
Classifying Aux Sends

Setting Pre parameters
Aux Pre/Post
State
Classifying
Aux Sends
Classificando
Sends
Classifying
AuxAux
Sends
Setting Pre parameters
Select
this option
to include the pickoff point pre-fader or
Aux Pre/Post
State
Aux
Pre/Post
State
Aux
Pre/Poststate
State
post-fader
of each Aux Send in snapshots.
Setting Pre
parameters
Ajustando
Parmetros
Pre
Select this option to include the pickoff point pre-fader or

Select this option to include the pickoff point pre-fader or
Selecione
esta
opo
paraAux
incluir
o estado
do ponto de alimentao
post-fader
state
of each
Send
in snapshots.
post-fader state of each Aux Send in snapshots.
pr-fader ou ps-fader de cada Aux Send em snapshots.
200
Guia VENUE Profile

Tipos
de Dados
e Parmetros
de Snapshot
Snapshot
Data
Types and
Parameters
Table 22. Snapshot data types and parameters included in each data type
Snapshot Data Type
Included Parameters (for Each Scoped Channel Strip)
Fader
Main volume level
Mute
Mute state
EQ
EQ type selection (analog/digital); EQ in-circuit state;
Stage Rack Features

Additional
Required
Components
4 bands (2 bands on FX Returns) of gain, freq, Q,
bell/shelf selection
(digital only),
band on/off
Stage Racks are used with

an FOH Rack, and
provide
all threshold,
stage
Dyn
Compressor/Limiter
in-circuit
state;
ratio,
release,
knee, makeup
The attack,
following
components
mustgain
Expander/Gate
state;
threshold,
audio I/O for VENUE Profile
systems. in-circuit
Up to two
Stage
Racks ratio, attack, release, hold time, range, side-chain input
Audio I/O
Bus
In
Channel pan or balance/width

(For details, see Pan, Balance and Width Crossfade
Reference
on page 200.)
DVI
supported.
Pan
Group bus assignments, group bus mono/stereo-linked

state (if mono
or dual-mono/true
stereocompatible)
state (if
USB keyboard
andgroups)
trackball/mouse
(Windows
48 inputs with remotely
micassignment
preamps and
stereo controllable
groups), LR bus
and C/M bus assignments for input strips and groups
Input routing for Input Channels and FX Returns

Stageout
Rack.
Out digital outputs per Main
assignments; direct out assignments, level, in-circuit state, & tap-off point (excluding VCAs)
from
H/W
Hardware insert routing and in-circuit state (excluding
VCAs)
VCA Snake connectors to

VCA
membership
enable
Pre
Optional Components
Gain, pad, phase, phantom power, HPF corner frequency & in-circuit state
Name
Name for each strip

Mixer Input Sources, User Input Assignments, and pickoffs;

Mixerdisk
Input(or
level,
Mixer
Input on/off
and Mixer
Input for
USB flash
other
portable
USB storage
device
System Components
MTX
Link state
PQ
Included
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for mix
position
monitoring
Mixer Input Sources, User Input Assignment, and pickoffs;
Mixer Input
level, pan,
and on/off
state,
Mixer input
Link
Components
state, LImiter threshold and LImiter in/out
Aux Mon
microphone
and XLR mic cable
On/off, pre/post selection, level, and pan/balanceforDynamic
each Aux or
buscondenser
classified as
a Monitor Aux
(for Talkback)
Aux FX Two (2) IEC power On/off,

cables pre/post selection, level, and pan/balance for each Aux bus classified as an FX Aux
VGA screen
(screen
not included)
Dly Monitor mount forChannel
delay time
& in-circuit
MIDI
BNC
(for snapshot.
All MIDI messages that were added to the associated
MIDI cables
list for that
Plug-Ins
Rack slot settings, in-circuit state, and I/O routing for each plug-in added to plug-ins list for that snapshot
VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE Profile Guide

Rack(s) (see next)


System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options



outputs
201
202
Guia VENUE Profile
Chapter 22: Events

Captulo 22: Events
Este
introduz a the
janela
Events,
e explica
como utilizar
This captulo
chapter introduces
Events
window,
and explains
how a
Event
to useList.
the Event List.
Introduction
Introduo
Stage Rack Features
An event consists of one or more triggers, which are configured
Terminologia
Terminology
Event
A user-defined
combination
of one
or more
triggers
andtriggers
Event
Uma combinao
definida pelo
usurio
de um
ou mais
e uma
ou mais
aes.
Cada
evento
funciona
como
uma espcie de
one
or more
actions.
Each
event
serves
as a type
of software
macro
software,
em que voc
pode estabelecer
uma relao
macro
indo
which
you establish
a cause-and-effect
relationde
causa
e
efeito
entre
uma
ou
mais
funes
da
console
(triggers) e
ship between one or more console functions (triggers) and
Additional
Required
Components
seus
resultados
(actions).
their results (actions).
Um Stage
evento
consiste
em with
um ou
gatilhos
questage
so
Racks
are used
an mais
FOH Rack,
and(triggers),
provide all
to cause one or more actions to occur.
Trigger
A verificaocheck
condicional
usada
para
disparar um evento.
Trigger
A conditional
used to
fire an
event.
configurados
para
realizar
uma
ou
mais
aes.

can be
simultaneously,
up toinput
96 total
inputs. Action
Events
canused
be very
simple, suchsupporting
as a Footswitch
triggerAction
funo,
modomode
ou minimum
outra
resposta
da console
A Uma
console
function,
or other
response
resulting
recommended;
1024x768
resolution).
VGAresultado
and
Eventos podem ser muito simples, como um Footswitch disparando
ing a Recall Next Snapshot command. This is an example of a
de DVI
um
evento
sendotriggered.
disparado.
an event
being
supported.
um comando Recall Next Snapshot. Este um exemplo de um from
Audio
I/O footswitch input) causing a single action (Recall
single
trigger
gatilho
nico (a(uma
entrada de footswitch) realizando uma ao
General
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
General
Purpose
Interface,
tambm
conhecido
como
GPIGPI
Purpose
Interface,
also
commonly
known
asaainterface
Next
Snapshot).
nica (Recall
Next Snapshot).
48 inputs
lgica.
logic
interface.
Events can
alsotambm
be quiteser
complex
and involve
multiple
triggers
Eventos
podem
bem complexos
e envolver
vrios
triggers
8 analog
output channels;
expandable
up
to 48so
analog
or Open
Open
GPI
ou
sada GPI
Rack
flutuante,
ou
suarequires
tenso de
GPIEntrada
input or
GPI
output
is floating,
or at
its em
reference
and
actions.
For
example,
a
single
event
can
be
defined
that
e aes. Por exemplo, um nico evento pode ser definido para mover
The
connection
between
FOH
and
Stage
Rack
digital
outputs
per Stage
Rack.below a certain level
referncia.
moving
specific
fader
and/or
um
fader aespecfico
para above
cima para
baixo de um determinado nvel, voltage.
sends uma
a General
a specific
snapshot
and
enviar
sadaPurpose
General output,
Purpose,recalls
carregar
um snapshot
especfico
Closed
inputGPI
or GPI
output
closed.
ClosedGPI
Entrada
ou sada
GPIisest
fechada.
Synchronization
andouControl
I/O Vrios
emutes
colocar
em
maisMultiple
canais.
one
orMute
moreum
channels.
triggersgatilhos
can be podem
consid-ser
considerados
iusando
osoperators
operadores
lgicos
Snake condicionalmente
connectors
to enable
primary
and
redundant
(if
ered conditionally
using the
available
logic
AND,
Footswitch
Footswitch
are functionally
identical to GPI
Footswitch
Portas ports
footswitch
so funcionalmente
idnticas
AND,
OR,applicable)
e XOR.
Optional
Components
OR, and
XOR.
inputs and share all of the same properties and behaviors.
a entradas GPI e compartilham as mesmas propriedades e

comportamentos.
AThe
Event
List List
fcil
configuraqr,
e muitos
eventos
pr-configurados
Event
is de
easy
to configure,
and many
preconfigured
purchasedInformation
separately: about Snapshots and Events
so
fornecidos
para Tap
modo snapshot
Preview dePreview
snapshot
e outras Important
events
are provided
forTempo,
Tap Tempo,
mode
Informaes Importantes sobre Snapshots e Events
funes.
USB
flash
System
Components
and other functions.
Because Events can trigger snapshot recalls, and because snaptransfer of Show data; 512 MB or larger recommended)
Pelo
fatocan
detrigger
que Events
podemit is
disparar
de
recalls
other events,
possiblecarregamentos
to create
Para
mais
informaes
osevents
eventos
e outros shot
For
more
information
on thesobre
default
andpadro
other exam Near-field
monitor speakers fordemix
positionpodem
monitoring
snapshots,
e porque
snapshots
Included
feedback
loops.carregamentos
see Avoid disparar
exemplos,Components
veja Ajustes Padro, Templates e Exemplos na logic
ples, see Default Settings, Templates and Examples on
outros
eventos, possvel
criar feedback
loops lgicos. Para mais
Headphones
with 211.
1/4-inch
jack
pgina 212.
Feedback
Loops on page
212.Profile systems include the following:
Allpage
VENUE
informaes, veja Evite Feedback Loops na pgina 211.

(for Talkback)
VENUE Mouse Pad

VENUE Profile Guide

Rack(s) (see next)


System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options


Chapter 22: Events 203

outputs
Captulo 22: Events
203
The Events Window

The Events window is the working area of the Event List system, and is available in the Options page (Options > Events).
The Events Window
A janela Events
The Events window is the working area of theEvent

Event
List
system, and is available in the Options page (Options > Events).
List
Commands
A janela Events a area de trabalho do sistema de Event List, e est disponvel na pgina Options (Options > Events).
Event List Commands
Triggers
Triggers
Event List
Event List
Actions
Actions
Footswitch Status
Display
GPI Status Display
Footswitch Status
Display
GPI Status Display
Figure 18. Events window (Options > Events)

Figura 18.are
Janela
Eventsand
(Options
> Events)from the upper Event List area of the Events window. This area includes the scrollable Event List
Events
defined
managed
Figure 18. Events window (Options > Events)
at the left, plus the Triggers and Actions sections to its right. The lists and commands available in these sections create a powerful,
Eventos so definidos
e gerenciados pela rea superior da Event List na janela Events. Essa rea inclui a Event List rolvel esquerda,
user-programmable
environment.
Events are defined
and managed from the upper Event List area of the Events window. This area includes the scrollable Event List
mais as sees Triggers e Actions direita. As listas e comandos disponveis nessas sees criam um potente ambiente programvel pelo
at the left, plus the Triggers and Actions sections to its right. The lists and commands available in these sections create a powerful,
usurio.
user-programmable environment.
Events
Event List Each event is shown in its own row within the
Event
List
Cada
apresentado
em when
sua prpria
linha dentro
Event
List.
The
list evento
can be scrolled
vertically
necessary.
Eventos
An event consists of one or more triggers, which in turn cause

da
Event
List.Each
A lista
podeis ser
rolada
se necessrio.
Event
List
event
shown
in verticalmente
its own row within
the
Events
Um evento
emoccur.
um ouUp
mais
gatilhos
(triggers),
que podem Event Number Each event has an associated three digit seone
or moreconsiste
actions to
to 999
events
can be created.
Event List. The list can be scrolled vertically when necessary.
causar
uma
ou
maisbetween
aes.
At
9998 triggers,
eventoswhich
podem
criados.
Eventnumber,
Number001
Cada
evento 999.
possui
um nmero
sequencial de trs
through
Events
are automatically
Each
event
can
have
0 and
triggers,
and
each
event
An
event
consists
of one or
more
inser
turn
cause quence
Cada
evento
pode
ter
entre
0
e
8
triggers,
e
cada
evento
pode
ter
dgitos
associado
a
ele,
de
001
a
999.
Eventos
so
automaticamente
if items
areevent
moved,
or removed.
can have
between
0 andto
8 occur.
actions.
Event Number
Each
hasadded
an associated
three
digit seone or
more actions
Up to 999 events can be created. re-numbered
entre 0 e 8 aes.
renumerados se itens forem movidos, adicionados ou removidos.
quence number, 001 through 999. Events are automatically
Each event can have between 0 and 8 triggers, and each event
Event Name Events can be given custom names, up to a maxiEvent number
Event List
re-numbered if items are moved, added or removed.
can have between
0 and 8 actions. Enable
Event
Name
podem receber nomes, at o tamanho mximo
mum
length
ofEventos
31 characters.
Event name
Status commands
Event number
Event name
Events
in the list
Events
in the list
Enable
Status
Event List
commands
de 31 caracteres.
Event Name Events can be given custom names, up to a maxiEvent Enable Icon Events can be enabled or disabled individumum length of 31 characters.
Enablethe
Icongreen
Eventos
podem
ser habilitados
ou status.
desabilitados
allyEvent
by clicking
Enable
indicator
to toggle its
individualmente
clicando
no
indicador
Enable
verde
para
alterar seu
All events
be disabled
(suspended)
and enabled
usingindividuthe
Event can
Enable
Icon Events
can be enabled
or disabled
status.
Todos
os
eventos
podem
ser
desabilitados
(suspensos)
e
global
Disable
button.
ally
by clicking
the green Enable indicator to toggle its status.
habilitados utilizando o boto global Disable.
All events can be disabled (suspended) and enabled using the

Event Status The Event Status column shows Active (currently
globalStatus
Disable button.
Event
coluna orEvent
StatusFormostra
os estados Active
in effect),
Ready, ADisabled
Test state.
more information
(atualmente em efeito), Ready, Disabled ou Test. Para mais
on the
Status
column,
see Resetting
Events
on Active
page 210.
Event
Status
The Event
Status column
shows
(currently
informaes sobre a coluna Status, veja Resetando Eventos na

in effect),
or Test state. For more information
pgina
210.Ready, Disabled
Event
List Commands
You can test, reset, create, duplicate,
Event List items, commands and displays

Itens, comandos e display Event List
Event List items, commands and displays
on the Status column, see Resetting Events on page 210.

clear or delete events in the list. These commands can be perEvent List Commands Voc pode testar, resetar, criar, duplicar,
formed
using
the
on-screenYou
buttons
or byreset,
right-clicking
on list
Event
List
Commands
canlista.
test,
duplicate,
limpar
ou apagar
eventos na
Esses create,
comandos
podem ser
items.
Multiple
events
can
be
selected
to
test,
reset,
duplicate,
clear
or
delete
events
in
the
list.
These
commands
can
realizados utilizando os botes na tela ou clicando combeo perboto
clear
or delete
them,
but
onlyVrios
one
new
event
can
be created
at
formed
using
theda
on-screen
buttons
or bypodem
right-clicking
on list
direito
nos
itens
lista.
eventos
ser selecionados
onepara
time.
items.
Multiple
events
can be
selected
to test, reset,
testar,
resetar,
duplicar
limpar
ou delet-los,
masduplicate,
apenas um
evento
pode
serthem,
criadobut
poronly
vez. one new event can be created at
clear or
delete
one time.

204
Guia VENUE Profile
Triggers
Triggers
Triggers
Triggers
The Triggers list shows the name and properties of each trigger
Triggers
The Triggers list shows the name and properties of each trigger
Actions
Actions
Actions
Actions
The Actions list shows the actions defined in the currently seActions
The Actions list shows the actions defined in the currently se-
Thedefined
Triggersfor
listthe
shows
the name
and event,
properties
of each
trigger
Thelected
Actions
list shows
actions defined
in the
currently
currently
selected
as well
as commands
event,
as wellthe
as commands
to create
and
manageseaclected
event,
as well
as the
commands
to
createinand
manage
ac-seA lista
Actions
mostra
asactions
aes defined
definidas
no
atualmente
The
Actions
list
shows
theevento
currently
lected
event,
as well
as commands
to
create and
manage
actions.
selecionado, assim como comandos para criar e gerenciar aes.
tions.
lected
tions. event, as well as commands to create and manage actions.
Behavior
Action Type
Add
for the
currently
selected
event,
as well of
asde
commands
Adefined
listaTriggers
Triggers
nome
e and
as
propriedade
cada
trigger
The
listmostra
showsothe
name
properties
each
trigger
defined
for the
to create
andcurrently
manage selected
triggers. event, as well as commands
definido
para
o
evento
atualmente
selecionado,
assim
como os
to
create
and
manage
triggers.
defined
for
the
currently
selected
event,
as
well
as
commands
to create and manage triggers.
comandos
para criar e gerenciar triggers.
to create and manage triggers.
Trigger Type
Trigger Type
Trigger Type
Trigger Type
Triggers
Triggers
List
Triggers
List
List
Triggers
List
Stage Rack
Logical Operators
Logical
Operators
Trigger Properties
pop-up
menu
Operators
Trigger Properties Logical
pop-up menu
Trigger Properties pop-up menu
Add
Logical Operators
Add
Trigger Properties pop-up menu
Add
Add
Features
Triggers list items,
commands and displays
Triggers list items, commands and displays
Triggers list items, commands and displays
Itens,Stage
comandos
eList
display
da lista
Triggers
Racks
arecommands
used
with
andisplays
FOH Rack, and provide all stage
Triggers
Triggers
list
items,
and
Triggers
List
Action Type
Action Type
Action Type
Actions
Actions
List
Actions
List
List
Actions
List
Actions list
Behavior
State
Behavior
State
State Behavior
State
Add
Delay
Delay Add
Delay Add
Delay
items, commands and displays

Itens, comandos
display da listaand
Actions
Actions
list items,e commands
displays
Additional
Required
Components
Actions
list items, commands
and displays
Actions
List commands and displays
Actions
list
items,
Actions List
Lista
The Actions
following
Actions
List
Each List
event can have up to eight actions in the Actions list. All
Actions
Triggers
List for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
audio I/O
Each
event
can
have
up to eight
actionsflat-panel
in the Actions
list.
All
Video
Display
(15-inch
oraes
greater
VGA
display
event
canpode
have
upat
to oito
eight
actions
inRight-click
the
Actions
list.
All
Each
can have up to eight
triggers up
in the
list.
Triggers
are Each
Lista
Triggers
Cada
evento
ter
na lista
Actions.
Todas
as aes
Triggers
List
actions
occur
when
the
event
is fired.
commands
can
beevent
used
to 96
total
inputs.
Each
event
cansimultaneously,
have up to eightsupporting
triggers in the
list.
Triggers
are
actions
occur
when
the
event
is
fired.
Right-click
commands
recommended;
1024x768
VGA
and
event
canwhen
have
upevento
to
eight
actions
inresolution).
the
list. do
All
Each
eventin
can
have
eight triggers
in the list.commands
Triggers arelet Each
actions
occur
the
event
is
fired.
Right-click
commands
ocorrem
quando
um
minimum
disparado.
OsActions
comandos
boto
shown
rows
inup
thetoTriggers
list. Right-click
let
you
select,
edit,
duplicate
and
delete
actions.
shown
in rows
in theup
Triggers
list.
Right-click
commands
let
you
select,
edit, duplicate
and
delete
actions.
Each evento
event
can
have
to eight
triggers
in the
list.
Triggers
areso let
DVI
supported.
actions
occur
when
the
event
is
fired.
Right-click
commands
shown
in
rows
in
the
Triggers
list.
Right-click
commands
let
Cada
pode
ter
at
oito
triggers
na
lista.
Os
triggers
direito
do
mouse
permitem
selecionar,
editar
duplicar
e
apagar
let
you
select,
edit,
duplicate
and
delete
actions.
you
select,
edit,
duplicate
and
delete
triggers.
Audio
I/O
you
select,
edit,
duplicate
and
delete
triggers.
shown
in em
rows
in
thenaTriggers
list.
Right-click
commands
let
mostrados
linhas
lista
Triggers.
Comandos
do boto direito
letaes.
you
select,
edit, and
duplicate
and delete actions.
you
select,
edit,
duplicate
and
delete
triggers.
Add
USB
keyboard
trackball/mouse
Add
48
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic
preamps
and
you
select,
edit,
duplicate
and
delete
triggers.
do
mouse
permitem
selecionar,
editar,
duplicar
e
apagar
triggers.
Add
Add
Add
Add
The Add pop-up menu lets you create new actions. Actions are
Add
Add
Digital
Snake menu
Cable lets
(VENUE
Profilenew
Systems
Only)
The
Add pop-up
you create
actions.
Actions are
Theorganized
Add pop-up
menu
lets according
you createto
new
Add
The
Add
pop-up
menu
lets youexpandable
create newup
triggers.
Triggers
Add
in the
menu
theactions.
type of Actions
functionare
they
8
analog
output
channels;
to
48
analog
or
The Add pop-up menu lets you create new triggers. Triggers
organized
in
the
menu
according
to
the
type
of
function
they
The
Add
menu
lets
you
create
new
actions.
Actions
are
The pop-up
connection
between
FOH
Rack
and
Stage
Rack
requires
Theare
Add
pop-up menu
lets
youaccording
create new
triggers.
Triggers
Oaffect,
menu
pop-up
Add
permite
criar
novas
aes.
Aes
so
organizadas
organized
in
the
menu
according
to
the
type
of
function
they
organized
in
the
menu
to
the
type
of
console
such
as
channel
functions,
snapshots,
GPI
Output
and
digital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
organized
in Add
the
menu
to
thetriggers.
type of Triggers
console
suchin
asthe
channel
functions,
snapshots,
GPI
Output
and
The
Addpop-up
pop-up
menu
lets according
you
create
new
triggers.
Triggers so affect,
Oare
menu
permite
criar
novos
no
de
acordo
com
oThis
tipo de
funo
que
afetam,
como
funes
organized
menu
according
to
the
of
function
they
amenu
Digital
cable.
cable
cantype
be purchased
directly
are
organized
the
menu
according
to
the
of console
such
asSnake
channel
functions,
snapshots,
GPI
Output
and
function
orininput
signal
that
initiates
(or type
triggers)
the event. affect,
Tap
Tempo.
function
orno
input
signal
that
initiates
(orthe
triggers)
event. ou Tap
are
organized
in
the
menu
according
to
type ofthe
console
organizados
menu
de
acordo
com o tipo
funo
da
console
deTempo.
canal,
snapshots,
sadas
GPIyour
esnapshots,
Tappreferred
Tempo.GPI
affect,
such
as channel
functions,
Output and
from
Avid
or assembled
by
vendor.
function
signal
that
initiates
(orda
triggers)
the
event.
Tap
Tempo.
Types or
of input
triggers
include
channel
functions,
footswitch/GPI
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O
Types
ofentrada
triggers
include
channel
functions,
footswitch/GPI
sinal
de
que
inicia
(ou
dispara)
o
evento.
Tipos
de
triggers
function
or
input
signal
that
initiates
(or
triggers)
the
event.
Tempo.
Types
of triggers
include
channel
functions,
inputs,
snapshot
recall,
and other
consolefootswitch/GPI
functions such as TapType
and Properties
inputs,
snapshot
recall,
and
other functions,
console
such as(if
incluem
funes
deinclude
canais,
entradas
footswitch
/GPI,
carregamento
Tipos
deProperties
Propriedades
Type
and
of
Snake
connectors
to
enable
primaryfunctions
and
redundant
Types
triggers
channel
footswitch/GPI
inputs,
snapshot
recall, and
other console
functions
such as
Type and Properties
talkback.
Optional
de
snapshots,
e
outras
funes
da
console
como
talkback.
talkback.
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
Each
row
in Components
the Actions list shows the selected action Type.
inputs,
snapshot
recall,
and
other
console
functions
such
as
Type and
Properties
talkback.
Each
row
in the
list shows
theoselected
Type.
Cada
linha
na Actions
lista editable
Actions
mostra
tipo daaction
ao
selecionada.
Each
rowactions
in the
Actions
list shows
the
action
Type.
Some
have
State
andselected
Behavior
settings:
all actalkback.
The
following
components
are
optional,
and
must
be
Type
and
Properties
Some
actions
have
editable
State
and
Behavior
settings:
all ac-todas
Tipos
Propriedades
Algumas
aes
possuem
ajustes
editveis
State
e
Behavior:
Each
row
in
the
Actions
list
shows
the
selected
action
Type.
Typeeand
Properties
Some
actions
have
editable
State
and
Behavior
settings:
all
actions
have
a
Wait
(Delay)
setting.
Type and Properties
purchased
separately:
tions
have
apossuem
Wait
setting.
as
aes
um ajuste
Wait
(Delay).
actions
have(Delay)
editable
State
and
Behavior settings: all actions have
a Wait
(Delay)
setting.
Each
row in the Triggers list shows the selected trigger Type. Some
Type
and
Each
row Properties
in
the
Triggers
listmostra
showsothe
selected
trigger
Type.
Cada
linha
na
lista
Triggers
tipo
do
trigger
selecionado.
USB
flash
disk
(or
other
System
Components
tions
have
a
Wait
(Delay)
setting.
Each
row
in
the
Triggers
list
shows
the
selected
trigger
Type.
Some types of triggers have editable properties such as a dB
Footswitch
GPI
Status
Alguns
tipos
de
triggers
possuem
propriedades
o Footswitch
Status
Footswitch
e GPI
Some
types
triggers
have
properties
such
as Type.
a como
dB
transfer
ofand
Show
data;
512 MB or larger recommended)
Each row
inof
the
Triggers
listeditable
shows
the
selectededitveis
trigger
and
GPI
Status
Some
types
triggers
have
editable
properties
such
asaafootdB
level
ondeaofum
specific
channel,
or open/closed
state
of
nvel
de
dB
canal
especfico,
ou o estado
aberto/fechado
de Footswitch and GPI Status
level
on
a
specific
channel,
or
open/closed
state
of
a
footSome
types
of triggers
have or
editable
properties
such
a dB
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for mix position
monitoring
level
on
a input.
specific
channel,
open/closed
state
of a as
footStatus
display
includes
theFootswitch
Footswitch
GPI
sections
Included
Components
and
GPI
Status
switch
Choices
vary
depending
on
the trigger
type,
uma
entrada
deChoices
footswitch.
Asdepending
opes
variam
dependendo
do
tipoand
do Footswitch
OThe
display
Status
inclui
sees
e and
GPI,
mostram o
The
Status display
includes
the Footswitch
and
GPIque
sections
switch
vary
on the
trigger
level oninput.
a specific
channel,
or open/closed
state
of atype,
foot-and
The
Status
display
includes
the
Footswitch
and
GPI
sections
switch
input.
Choices
vary
depending
on
the
trigger
type,
and
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
(see
Figure
19),
which
show
the
present
open
or
closed
status
noteall
triggers
have
editable
properties.
trigger,
nem
todos
os
triggers
possuem
propriedades
editveis.
status
aberto
ou
fechado
atual
de
cada
porta
lgica.
Cada
(see Figure
19), which
showthe
the Footswitch
present open
orGPI
closed
status porta
not
allVENUE
triggersChoices
have editable
properties.
All
Profile
systems
include the
following:
The
Status display
includes
and
sections
switch
vary depending
on the
trigger type, and
(see
Figure
19),
which
show
the
present
open
or
closed
status
not
all input.
triggers have editable
properties.
of
each
logic
port.
Each
footswitch
or
GPI
port
can
be
named.
ou
GPI
pode
ser nomeada.
Dynamic
orEach
condenser
microphone
and
XLR
cable
offootswitch
each
logic
port.
footswitch
or GPI
port
can
be mic
named.
(see
Figure
19),
which
the present
open
closed
status
triggers
VENUE
Profile
console
notLogical
all
have
editable
properties.
of each
logic
port.
Eachshow
footswitch
or GPI
portor
can
be named.
Operadores
Lgicos
Operators
(for
Talkback)
Logical Operators
ofExemplos
each
logicdo
port.ofEach
footswitch
or
GPIGPI
port
can be
named.
Example
uses
Switch
and GPI
inputs
include
remote
snapde
entradas
incluem
carregamento
Logical
Operators
Two
Example
uses ofuso
Switch
GPISwitch
inputseinclude
remote
snap Footswitches
(upand
to 2)
Example
uses
of
Switch
and
GPI
inputs
include
remote
snapMultiple
triggers
can
be
considered
conditionally
by
applying
shot
recall
from
an
external
control
system
or
custom
control
Logical
Operators
Vrios
podem
condicionalmente
aplicando shot
remoto
defrom
snapshot
desde um
sistema
de console
externo
ou painel
Multiple
triggers
canser
be considerados
considered
conditionally
byincluded)
applying
recalluses
external
control
system
or custom
control
triggers
Monitor
mount
for
VGA screen
(screen not
Example
of an
Switch
and
GPI inputs
include
remote
snapMultiple
triggers
can
be
considered
conditionally
by applying
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
shot
recall
an
external
control
system
orPreview
custom
control
a logical
operator
(AND,
OR, XOR)
topropriedades.
their properties.
panel,
orfrom
access
to
a console
mode
such
as
mode,
from
operadores
lgicos
(AND,
OR,
XOR)
a
suas
de
controle
personalizado,
ou
acessar
um
modo
da
console
como o
a logical
operator
(AND,
OR, XOR)not
to their
properties.
panel,
or access
to
a external
console mode
such
as Preview
mode,
from
Multiple
triggers can
be considered
by applying
Trackball
mount
(trackball
included)
shot
recall
from
an
control
system
or
custom
control
a logical
operator
(AND,
OR, XOR) conditionally
to their
properties.
panel,
access
to
a (for
console
mode
such
asou
Preview
mode,
from
modo
Preview,
por
uma
tecla
de funo
entrada
footswitch.
or
BNC
cables
Word
clock
between
the
any
Function
key
or connecting
footswitch
input.
Function
key
orconsole
footswitch
input.
a logical
operator
(AND,
OR,which
XOR)are
topor
their
properties.
panel,
or
access
to a
mode
such
as Preview
mode, from
Triggers
and
actions
unavailable
to unavailany
Triggers
VENUE
Pad
eMouse
aes
conta
dedue
configuraes
any Function
key
or footswitch
input.
VENUE
system
and external
digital
devices)
Triggers and
actionsindisponveis
which are unavailable
due
to
unavailTriggers
and
actions
which
are
unavailable
due
to
unavailany
Function
key
or
footswitch
input.
Example
uses
of
GPI
output
include
the
following:
able hardware
console configuration
are shown
as italiindisponveis
de or
hardware
ou console so
mostrados
em Example
Exemplos
utilizando
sadas include
GPI incluem
os seguintes:
able
VENUE
Profile
Guide
uses of
GPI output
the following:
25-pin
D-Sub
cables (for
connecting
to GPI devices)
hardware
or console
configuration
are shown
as italiTriggers
and
actions
which
are
unavailable
due to unavailExample
uses um
of GPI
output
include
the following:
able
hardware
or
console
configuration
are
shown
as italiitlico
nos
menus
Trigger
(e
Action)
Add.

Enviar
pulso
para
disparar
dispositivos
de devices
sample e
cized
in the
Trigger
(and
Action)
Add
menus.
Sending
a
pulse
to
trigger
samplers
and playback
cized
Two
(2)
console
lights
in
the
Trigger
(and
Action)
Add
menus.
Sending
a
pulse
to
trigger
samplers
and
playback devices
Example
uses
of
GPI
output
include
the
following:
able hardware
or console
configuration
are shown as italireproduo
cized
in the Trigger
(and Action)
Add menus.
Sending
a
pulse
to
trigger
samplers
and
playback
devices
Indicating when a microphone or channel is live by
cized
Protective
Dust Cover
in the Trigger
(and Action) Add menus.
whento
a trigger
microphone
orcanal
channel
livedevices
byacendendo
Indicating
Indicar aquando
um
microfone
ou
estisaberto
Sending
pulse
samplers
and playback
Indicating
when
microphone
channel is live by
lighting
an Ona Air
or tally or
light
uma
luzan
On
lighting
OnAir
Air
orExpansion
tally light
Rack(s) (see next)
Profile
Options
VENUE
Indicating
when
a
microphone
or
channel
is
live
by
an On
Air or tally
lightwhen the console
Piscar
Flashing
or turning
on
light
in modo
a
lighting
ou
acender
uma
luzaquando
a console est emisum
Flashing an
or On
turning
ontally
a lightlight
when the console is in a
lighting
Air or
The
Flashing
or (como
turning
on In
abe
light
when
the console
is systems.
in a
particular
Solo
Place)
particular
mode
(such
asadded
Solo
In VENUE
Place)
following
options
can
to
Profile
(such
Solo In
Place)
Flashing
ormode
turning
onas
a light
when
the console
is in a
particular
(such
as
Solo
Place)
Forparticular
Integrar
sequenciadores
deIn
energia
paravisit
automarizar
onmode
all VENUE
systems
and
options,
the
Avid o
details
Integrating
with
power
sequencing
devices
for
auto particular
Integrating
with
powerassequencing
devices for automode
(such
Solo In Place)
ligamento
do
sistema
website
Integrating
with power sequencing devices for autoEach Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes:
(www.avid.com).
System Restore CD
Footswitch
GPI
GPI
Footswitch
GPI
Switch
1
iLok
USB
Switch
1 Smart Key (for storing plug-in authorizations)
GPI Rack Options

Mix
Footswitch
Footswitch
mated system turn-on

system
turn-on
mated
Integrating
with
power sequencing devices for automated
system
turn-on
mated system turn-on
Switch 1
Plug-in
installer discs (if any)
Switch
Switch
1 2
Switch 2
Switch
2 IEC power cables
Two
(2)
Switch 2
One
Link cable
forStatus
connection
tothe
a VENUE
console
Figure
19. FOH
Footswitch
and GPI
Display in
Events window
Figure 19. Footswitch and GPI Status Display in the Events window
Figure 19. Footswitch and GPI Status Display in the Events window
Each
Rack includes:
Figure
19.Stage
Footswitch
and GPI Status Display in the Events window
Figura 19. Display Status Footswitch e GPI na janela Events
I/O Options
AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that
GPI Inputs 18
GPI Inputs 18
GPI Inputs 18
GPI Outputs
18
GPI Inputs
18 analog
provides
GPI Outputs16
18
GPI Outputs 18
GPI Outputs 18

outputs

Chapter
22: Events
205
XO16 Analog and Digital Output Card that provides
8 analog
Captulo 22: Events
205
Creating
Events
Creating
Events
Creating
Events
Criando
Eventos
The basic steps to create an event include the following:
The basic steps to create an event include the following:
The
to
create
anum
event
include
the
following:
basic
Add
asteps
new
event
in
the
Event
ListList
(see(see
Adding
an an
Event
Os
passos
bsicos
para
criar
evento
incluem
Add
a new
event
in
the
Event
Adding
Event
on
page
206).
Add
a new
event
the Event
ListList
(see(Veja
Adding
an Eventum
Adicionar
um
novo in
evento
na Event
Adicionando
on
page
206).
na206).
pgina 206).
on
page
Evento
Add
and
configure
triggers
forfor
thethe
event
(see(see
Adding
Add
and
configure
triggers
event
Adding
Adicionar
eto
configurar
triggers
para
oevent
evento
(Veja
Adicionar
Triggers
an
Event
on
page
207).
Add
and
configure
triggers
for
the
(see
Adding
Triggers to an Event on page 207).
Triggers para um Evento na pgina 207).
Triggers
to an
Event
on
page
207).
Add
andand
actions
forfor
thethe
(see(see
Adding
Ac-Ac Add
configure
actions
event
Adding
Adicionar
econfigure
configurar
aes
para
oevent
evento
(Veja
Adicionar
tions
to an
Event
on
page
209).
Aes
Add
and
configure
actions
for
the
event (see Adding Actions
to
an
Event
on
page
209).
para
um
Evento
na
pgina
209).
tions to an Event on page 209).
Several
pre-defined
(default)
events
areare
available
Several
pre-defined
(default)
events
available
immediMuitos
eventos
pr-definidos
(padro)
esto immedidisponveis
ately;
others
are
available
among
the
Demo
Shows
installed
Several
pre-defined
(default)
events
are
available
immediimediatamente;
outros
esto
disponveis
nos
arquivos
ately; others are available among the Demo Shows
installed
with
the
system
software.
For
more
information,
see
Deately;
others
are
available
among
the
Demo
Shows
installed
Demo
Shows
instalados
so
software
do
sistema.
Para
mais
with the system software. For more information, see Default
Events
on
page
212.
informaes,
veja
Eventos
Padro
na
pgina
212.
with
the
system
software.
For
more
information,
see
Default Events on page 212.
fault Events on page 212.
Adicionar um Evento
Adding
anan
Event
Adding
Event
Adding
an
Event
Para adicionar um novo evento na Event List:
To To
addadd
a new
Event
to the
Event
List:
a new
Event
to the
Event
List:
add
newOptions
Event to
Event
List:
1 To
pgina
>
Events.
1VGo
toa the
Options
> the
Events
page.
1 Go
to the
Options
> Events
page.
1 Go to the Options > Events page.
Do
anyany
of the
following:
2 2Siga
um
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
2 Do
of the
following:
any
of
the
following:
2 Do
criar
um
evento
vazio
e semnew
nome,
clique
no
boto
New
Para
To
create
an
empty,
untitled
event,
click
thethe
New
To create an empty,
untitled
new
event,
click
Newna
seo
Event
Commands.
button
in
the
Event
Commands
section.
To button
create an
untitled
new event,
click the New
in empty,
the Event
Commands
section.
ou button in the Event Commands section.
or
orcriar
uma cpia de um evento pr-existente, selecione um
Para
or
ou
To
create
a copy
aofpre-existing
event,
select
oneone
or or
mais
eventos
naoflista
clique no boto
Duplicate.
To create
a copy
ae pre-existing
event,
select
more
events
in the
andand
click
the
Duplicate
To
create
a copy
alist
pre-existing
event,
select button.
one
or
more
events
inofthe
list
click
the
Duplicate
button.
Selecionando
Eventos
more events
in the list and click the Duplicate button.
To To
deselect
or ore
more
events:
deselect
or ore
more
events:
Para
desselecionar
um ou
mais eventos:
To
deselect
or ore more
events:
Right-click anywhere in the Event List and choose Deselect
Right-click anywhere in the Event List and choose Deselect
All.

Right-click
anywhere
the Event
List and choose
Clique com
o botoindireito
em qualquer
lugar daDeselect
Event List e
All.
All.
escolha Deselect All.
Moving
Events
Moving
Events
Movendo
Eventos
Moving
Events
Selected
events
cancan
be be
dragged
andand
dropped
to new
locations
Selected
events
dragged
dropped
to new
locations
in
the
list.
You
can
also
manually
edit
the
Event
number
to reSelected
can
bealso
dragged
and
new
locations
Eventos
selecionados
podem
ser dropped
arrastados
e posicionados
in theevents
list.
You
can
manually
edit the to
Event
number
to re-em
sequence
items.
innovos
the
list.
You
canlista.
also manually
the Event
number to editar
relocais
na
Voc podeedit
tambm
manualmente
o
sequence
items.
nmero do
Event para reordenar itens.
sequence
items.
To To
move
oneone
or more
events:
move
or more
events:
Para
mover
ummore
ou mais
eventos:
To
move
one
or
events:
1 Select
oneone
or more
events
in the
Event
List.
1 Select
or more
events
in the
Event
List.
1 1Select
one or
more
events
in the
Event
List.
Selecione
um
ou
mais
events
na
Event
List.
2 Click
in the
rowrow
of any
selected
event
andand
drag
to atonew
lo- lo2 Click
in the
of any
selected
event
drag
a new
cation
in
the
list.
As
you
move
events,
a
white
line
appears
in2 Click
in
the
row
of
any
selected
event
and
drag
to
a
new
lo-inlist.de
Asqualquer
you moveevento
events,
a white line
2cation
Cliquein
nathe
linha
selecionado
e appears
arrste para
a
dicating
the
destination.
cation
in
the
list.
As
you
move
events,
a
white
line
appears
indicating
the destination.
nova
localidade
na lista. Enquanto voc move eventos, uma linha
dicating
the
destination.
aparece
indicando
oto
destino.
3 branca
Release
thethe
mouse
button
drop
thethe
events
at the
desired
3 Release
mouse
button
to drop
events
at the
desired
location
inthe
the
Event
List.
When
moving
multiple
events,
3 Release
mouse
button
to
drop
the events
at the
desired
location
in
the
Event
List.
When
moving
multiple
events,
3 Solte o boto do mouse para deixar os eventos no local desejado
moved
events
be be
adjacent
regardless
their
original
localocation
in thewill
Event
List.
When
movingofmultiple
events,
moved
will
adjacent
regardless
of their
original
locana
Eventevents
List. Quando
movendo
vrios
eventos,
os eventos
movidos
tions
relative
to
each
other
(whether
adjacent
ororiginal
non-adjamoved
events
will
be
adjacent
regardless
of
their
locations
relative
to
each
other
(whether
adjacent
or
non-adjasero adjacentes independentemente de suas localizaes em
cent).
Events
be (adjacentes
renumbered
asno).
necessary
according
to the
tions
relative
to will
each
(whether
orsero
non-adjacent).
Events
beother
renumbered
asadjacent
necessary
according
to the
relao
aos will
outros
ou
Eventos
renumerados
new
sequence
ofdeevents.
cent).
Events
will
be
renumbered
as necessary
according
to the
se
necessrio
com a nova
sequncia
de eventos.
new
sequence
ofacordo
events.
new sequence of events.
manualmente
editar
umnumber:
nmero de evento:
ToPara
manually
editedit
an an
Event
number:
To
manually
Event
To
manually edit an Event number:
Double-click the Event Number and enter a new three digit
Double-click
the no
Event
Number
andeenter
new
three
digit de
Clique
duas vezes
Event
Number
digiteaum
novo
nmero
number
to resequence
theNumber
listlist
accordingly.
Double-click
theresequenciar
Event
and
enter a new three digit
number
topara
resequence
the
accordingly.
trs
dgitos
a lista.
number to resequence the list accordingly.
Gerenciando
Eventos
nain
Event
List
Managing
Events
in
the
Event
List
Managing
Events
the
Event
List
Selecting
Os
itens
da listaEvents
deEvents
eventos podem ser selecionados, renomeados, Managing Events in the Event List
Selecting
Once
created,
events
in the
list
can
be be
managed
using
Uma
vezcreated,
criados,
eventos
lista
podem
ser
gerenciados
Once
events
in na
the
list
can
managed
usingusando os
duplicados,
apagados,
limpos, habilitados ou desabilitados, testados
Selecting
Events
Event list items can be selected, renamed, duplicated, deleted,
on-screen
and
right-click
commands
to renomear,
rename,
dubotes
nabuttons
tela
e comandos
do
direito
para
duplicar,
created,
events
in
the
listboto
can
be
managed
using
Event list items can be selected, renamed, duplicated, deleted, Once
on-screen
buttons
and
right-click
commands
to
rename,
due resetados
apagar,
limpar,
habilitar
ou
desabilit-los.
cleared,
enabled
or
disabled,
tested
and
reset.
plicate,
delete,
clear,
enable
or
disable
them.
Event
list
items
can
be
selected,
renamed,
duplicated,
deleted,
on-screen
buttons
and
right-click
commands
to
rename,
ducleared, enabled or disabled, tested and reset.
plicate, delete, clear, enable or disable them.
cleared,
enabledou
or disabled,
tested andsiga
reset.
Para
selecionar
mover eventos,
um dos seguintes
To To
select
one
or
more
events,
do
any
of
the
following:
procedimentos:
select one or more events, do any of the
following:
To select
Para
selecionar
umevents,
evento click
nico,
na
linha
deleList.
na Event
one or
more
do
any
ofrow
thein
following:
To
select
a single
event,
itsclique
the
Event
To
select
a single
event, click
its row
in the
Event List.
List.
a single
event,
click its
inand
the
Event
List.
To
select
all
events,
right-click
anrow
event
choose
Select
To
select
all
events,
an
event
and
Select
Para
selecionar
todos
osright-click
eventos,
clique
com
o choose
boto
direito
All.
sobre
To All.
select
all events,
right-click
event and choose Select
um evento
e escolha
SelectanAll.
All.
To
select
multiple
contiguous
events,
click
thethe
first
de-de Para
selecionar
vrios
eventos contguos,
clique
nofirst
primeiro
To
select
multiple
contiguous
events,
click
desejado
ethen
Shift-click
(ouevents,
Multi-Select-click)
nodeltimo
sired
event
andand
Shift-click
(or
Multi-Select-click)
thethe
evento
To sired
select
multiple
contiguous
click the first
event
then
Shift-click
(or
Multi-Select-click)
evento
desejado.
Todos
os
eventos
entre
os
dois
sero
last
desired
event.
AllShift-click
events
in(or
between
areare
selected.
sired
event
and
then
the
last
desired
event.
All
events
in Multi-Select-click)
between
selected.
selecionados.
last
desired
event.discontiguous
Alldiscontiguous
events in between
To
select
multiple
events,
orare
to
de-select
an an
To
select
multiple
events,
orselected.
to de-select
Para
selecionar
vrios
eventos no
contguos,
ou para
individual
event,
Ctrl-click
(or
Fine-click)
its
row
in
the
desselecionar
To individual
select multiple
discontiguous
events,
or
to
de-select
event,
Ctrl-click
(or Fine-click)
its row inan
the
um
evento
individual,
Ctrl-click (Fine-click)
na
Event
List.
individual
event,
Ctrl-click
(or
Fine-click)
its
row in the
linhaEvent
dele na
Event List.
List.
Event List.
Selected
events
Selected
events
(blue)
(blue) events
Selected
(blue)
plicate, delete, clear, enable or disable them.

Voc
pode
tambm
usar
os
comandos
Test
Reset para
YouYou
cancan
also
useuse
thethe
Test
and
Reset
commands
to manually
also
Test
and
Reset
commands
to emanually
eventos
de
desenvolvimento
e
diagnstico.
Para mais
audition
events
for
development
and
diagnostics.
For
more
Youaudition
can alsoevents
use thefor
Test
and Reset commands
to manually
development
and diagnostics.
For more
informaes,
veja
Testando
Eventos
na
pgina
210
information,
see
Testing
Events
on
page
210
audition
events for
and diagnostics.
information,
seedevelopment
Testing Events
on page 210For more
information, see Testing Events on page 210
Renomeando
um Evento
Renaming
an an
Event
Renaming
Event
Renaming an Event
renomear
um evento:
ToPara
rename
an event:
To rename an event:
To
rename an event:
1 1Double-click
Event
Name
in evento
the
list.list.
Orlista.
right-click
thethe
duas the
vezes
no
nome
do
na
Ou clique
com o
1Clique
Double-click
the
Event
Name
in the
Or
right-click
Event
Name
and
choose
direito
no
nome
doRename.
evento
escolha
Rename.
1 boto
Double-click
the
Event
Name
ine the
list. Or
right-click the
Event
Name
and
choose
Rename.
Event Name and choose Rename.
2 Enter
a um
new
name.
Enter
a new
name.
22Digite
novo
nome.
2 Enter a new name.
3 Click
Enter
to confirm
thethe
new
name.
Click
Enter
to confirm
33Clique
Enter
para
confirmar
o new
novo name.
nome.
3 Click Enter to confirm the new name.
Duplicating
an an
Event
Duplicating
Event
Duplicando
um Evento
Duplicating an Event
Duplicating
an an
event
cancan
simplify
Event
ListList
configuration
Duplicating
event
simplify
Event
configuration
Duplicar
um
evento
pode
simplificar
abeconfigurao
dawith
Event List
when
multiple,
similar
events
need
to
created,
each
Duplicating
an
event
can
simplify
Event
List
configuration
when multiple, similar events need to be created,
each
with
quando
vrios
eventos
similares
precisam
ser
criados,
cada
um com
slightly
different
properties.
when
multiple,
similar
events need to be created, each with
slightly
different
properties.
propriedades levemente diferentes.
Events
selected
in the
Event
ListList
Events
selected
the
Event
Eventos
selecionados
nainEvent
List
Events selected in the Event List
206206VENUE
Profile
Guide
VENUE
Profile
Guide
206
Guia VENUE Profile
slightly different properties.

ToPara
duplicate
anum
event:
To
duplicate
an
event:
duplicar
evento:
To
duplicate
an
1 Select
oneone
or event:
more
events
in the
Event
List.
1 Select
or more
events
in the
Event
List.
1
Selecione
um
ou
mais
eventos
na
Event
List.
1 Select one or more events in the Event List.
2 Click
thethe
Duplicate
button
on-screen.
Or,Or,
right-click
a se2 Click
Duplicate
button
on-screen.
right-click
a selected
event
and
choose
Duplicate.
Clique
no
boto
Duplicate
na
tela.
Ou,
clique
com
o
boto
2 2Click
the
Duplicate
button
on-screen.
Or,
right-click
a se- direito
lected event and choose Duplicate.
sobreevent
o evento
e escolha Duplicate.
lected
andselecionado
choose Duplicate.
Desabilitar
evento
ativo
no
desativa
automaticamente
qualquer
Disabling
Disabling
anum
an
active
active
event
event
does
does
not
not
automatically
automatically
de-activate
de-activate
ao associada configurada no comportamento While Active. Em vez
anyany
associated
associated
actions
actions
configured
configured
forfor
While
While
Active
Active
behavior.
behavior.
Apagar
uman
evento
oremoves
remove
permanentemente
da
Event
List.
Limpar
disso, use o comando Reset (Veja Resetando Eventos na pgina
Deleting
Deleting
an
event
event
removes
it permanently
it permanently
from
from
thethe
Event
Event
List.
List.
UseUse
thethe
Reset
Reset
command
command
instead
instead
(see(see
Resetting
Resetting
Events
Events
on on
um
eventos
oleaves
evento
nomeado
nainEvent
List
mas
limpa
210).
Clearing
Clearing
an mantm
an
event
event
leaves
thethe
named
named
Event
Event
the
in the
Event
Event
ListList
but
but
page
page
210).
210).
todos
osalltriggers
e aes
associadas.
clears
clears
all
associated
associated
triggers
triggers
andand
actions.
actions.
Apagando
e Limpando
um
Deleting
Deleting
and
and
Clearing
Clearing
anEvento
an
Event
Event
Para apagar um evento:
To delete
To delete
an an
event:
event:
11Selecione
um
eventos
List.
Select
1 Select
one
one
oroumore
ormais
more
events
events
inna
the
inEvent
the
Event
Event
List.
List.
Do
2 Do
oneone
of the
of the
following:
following:
22Siga
um
dos
seguintes
procedimentos:
Stage
no
Delete
na tela.
Clique
Click
Click
theboto
the
Delete
Delete
button
button
on-screen.
on-screen.
Rack
Features
Clique
com
o
boto
direito
sobre
um
evento
selecionado e
Right-click
Right-click
a selected
a selected
event
event
andand
choose
choose
Delete.
Delete.
Stage
Racks
are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage
escolha
Delete.
audio
I/ODelete
forinVENUE
Profile
systems.
Up todialog
two
Stage
3 Click
3 Click
Delete
the
in the
Confirm
Confirm
Event
Event
Operation
Operation
dialog
to delete
toRacks
delete
3the
Clique
Delete
naclick
caixa
deto
dilogo
Confirm
Event
Operation
para
can
be
used
simultaneously,
up
to 96
total inputs.
the
event.
event.
Or Or
click
Cancel
Cancel
cancel
tosupporting
cancel
thethe
operation.
operation.
apagar o evento. Ou clique Cancel para cancelar a operao.
I/O
To Audio
clear
To clear
an
an
event:
event:
Para limpar um evento:
48
inputs
remotely
controllable
mic preamps and
1 Select
1 Select
one
one
or more
orwith
more
events
events
in the
in
the
Event
Event
List.
List.
individually
selectable
power.
1 Selecione
um ou mais
eventos phantom
na Event List.
2 Do
2 Do
oneone
of the
of the
following:
following:

Click
digital
Click
theseguintes
the
Clear
Clear
button
button
on-screen.
on-screen.
2 Siga
um
dos
procedimentos:
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
Clique
no
boto
Clear
na
tela.
Right-click
Right-click
a selected
a selected
event
event
andand
choose
choose
Clear.
Clear.
Clique com o boto

direito I/O
sobre um evento selecionado e
Synchronization
and Control
3 Click
3escolha
Click
Clear
Clear
in the
in the
Confirm
Confirm
Event
Event
Operation
Operation
dialog
dialog
to clear
to clear
thethe
Clear.
Or
Snake
connectors
to cancel
enable
primary
and redundant (if
event.
event.
Or
click
click
Cancel
Cancel
to cancel
to
thethe
operation.
operation.
connection
to aConfirm
VENUEEvent
FOH Rack.
3 Clique applicable)
Clear na caixa
de dilogo
Operation para
limpar o evento. Ou clique Cancel para cancelar a operao.
Enabling
Enabling
and
and
Disabling
Disabling
Events
Events
Habilitando e Desabilitando Eventos
Events
Events
cancan
be be
disabled
disabled
to suspend
to suspend
their
their
operation.
operation.
AnAn
event
event
System
Components
cancan
be be
selected
selected
andand
edited
edited
while
while
it isitdisabled.
is disabled.
Eventos podem ser desabilitados para suspender suas operaes.

Um evento pode ser selecionado e editado enquanto desabilitado.
You
You
cancan
toggle
toggle
thethe
enabled
enabled
state
state
of one
of one
or more
or more
events
events
in the
in the
Included
Components
listlist
by by
clicking
clicking
thethe
on-screen
on-screen
Enable
Enable
icons
icons
in the
in the
Event
Event
List,
List,
or or
VocAllpode
alterar
o estado
de include
habilitado
um ou mais eventos
VENUE
Profile
systems
thede
following:
you
you
can
can
disable
disable
the
the
Event
Event
List
List
globally
globally
by
by
clicking
clicking
the
the
master
master
na lista clicando nos cones Enable na Event List, ou voc pode
Disable
VENUE
Profile
console
events
events
Disable
button.
button.
desabilitar a Event List globalmente clicando no boto master

Disable.
(all)(all)
Monitor mount for VGA screen (screen Disable
notDisable
included)

VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE
Profile Guide
Enabled
Enabled
events
events

Disabled
Disabled
events
events
Rack(s) (see next)
OneOne
selected
selected
event
event
andand
twotwo
disabled
disabled
events
events
Um evento selecionado e dois desabilitados
Toggling
Toggling
Enable
Enable
Status
Status
for
Selected
Selected
Events
Events
Racks,
Software
CDs,for
iLoks,
and Cables
Alterando Status de Habilitado para Eventos Selecionados

To toggle
Toalterar
toggle
theothe
enable/disable
enable/disable
status
status
of an
of an
event
event
the
in the
list:
list: na
Para
status
habilitado/desabilitado
dein um
evento
System Restore CD
lista:
1 Select
1 Select
oneone
or more
or more
events
events
in the
in the
Event
Event
List.
List.
Click
2 Click
theum
the
Enable
Enable
icon
icon
forfor
the
the
selected
selected
event
event
to toggle
to toggle
its its
12Selecione
ou
mais
events
na
Event
List.
Standalone
Software
Installer
CD
state.
state.
Or,Or,
right-click
right-click
an an
item
item
andand
choose
choose
Enable
Enable
or Disable
or Disable
as as
2appropriate.
Clique
no cone
Enable
doEnable
evento
selecionado
para
alterar
appropriate.
When
When
thethe
Enable
icon
icon
is lit
is (green)
lit (green)
thethe
event
event
is seu
is
Ou,
Plug-in
installer
discs direito
(if any)em
with
pre-authorized
iLok
estado.
clique
com
o
boto
um
item
e
escolha
Enable
enabled;
enabled;
when
when
thethe
icon
icon
is unlit
is unlit
thethe
event
event
is disabled.
is disabled.
ou Disable
conforme
Quando o cone Enable est aceso
Two
(2) IECapropriado.
power cables
(verde) oOne
evento
est
habilitado;
o cone
apagado,
o
FOH
Link
cable for quando
connection
to a est
VENUE
console
evento est desabilitado.
Desabilitar um evento cessa qualquer delay (propriedade Wait)
Disabling
Disabling
an an
event
event
stops
stops
all all
delay
delay
timers
timers
(Wait
(Wait
properties)
properties)
as- asassociado ao evento, prevenindo qualquer ao pendente de
sociated
sociated
with
with
that
that
event,
event,
preventing
preventing
any
any
pending
pending
(delayed)
(delayed)
ocorrer.
actions
actions
from
from
occurring.
occurring.
Desabilitar um evento pode ser uma ferramenta muito til

Disabling
Disabling
an
event
event
cancan
be problemas,
abeuseful
a useful
troubleshooting
troubleshooting
tool,
tool,evento
para aanresoluo
de
como quando
um
such
such
as
when
as
when
an
an
event
event
has
has
caused
caused
an
an
action/trigger
action/trigger
feedfeed- ser
causa um
feedback loop
de trigger/ao e precisa
Additional
Required
Components
back
back
loop
loop
and
and
must
must
be
edited
be
edited
before
before
being
being
re-enabled.
re-enabled.
editado antes de ser re-habilitado.
Disable
Disable
AllAll
Events
Events
Desabilitando
Todos
os Eventos
OThe
boto
Disable
nathe
seo
Events section
Commands
permite
The
Disable
Disable
button
button
in the
in
Events
Events
Commands
Commands
section
letslets
you
you
DVI supported.desabilitar todos os eventos na Event List.
temporariamente
temporarily
temporarily
disable
disable
all all
events
events
in the
in the
event
event
list.list.
desabilitar
todos os eventos:
ToPara
disable
To disable
all all
Events:
Events:

Click
Clique
Click
thethe
on-screen
on-screen
Disable
Disable
button
in
the
Events
Events
Commands
Commands
no
boto Disable
na button
tela in
nathe
rea
Events
Commands. O
The
connection
between
FOH
Rack
and
Stage
Rack
requires
area.
area.
The
The
Disable
Disable
button
button
lights,
lights,
and
and
all
all
items
items
in
the
in
the
Event
Event
List
List
boto Disable se acende, e todos os itens na Event List
mostram
a Disabled
Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable
Disabled
na
coluna
show
show
Disabled
in the
in Status.
the
Status
Status
column.
column.
re-habilitar
eventos:
ToPara
re-enable
To re-enable
Events:
Events:
Optional
Components
Click
Clique
Click
theno
the
Disable
Disable
button
button
again.
again.
boto
Disable
novamente.
The
following
components
are
optional,
and
must
be Disable
AllTodos
All
Events
Events
are
prevented
prevented
from
firing
firing
when
when
the
the
global
global
Disable
osare
eventos
so from
impedidos
de
disparar
quando
a funo
purchased
separately:
function
function
is in
is effect.
in est
effect.
However,
However,
active
active
events
events
areare
notnot
de-actide-actiglobal
Disable
efetiva.
Apesar
disso,
eventos
ativos
no so
Use
USB
flash
(orAll
other
portable
USB
storage
device
for
vated.
vated.
Use
Reset
Reset
ordisk
Reset
or
Reset
All
forReset
for
this
this
(see
Resetting
Resetting
Events
Events
on
on
desativados.
Use
Reset
ou
All(see
para
isso
(veja
Resetando
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
Eventos
na pgina 210).
page
page
210).
210).
Individual
Individual
Event
Event
enable/disable
enable/disable
status
status
is preserved
is preserved
(events
(events
re- reStatus
individuais
de habilitado/desabilitado
so
preservados
tain
tain
thethe
current
current
state
state
of their
of their
Enable
Enable
icons)
andand
can
can
be be
modi(eventos
mantm
o estado
atual
de icons)
seus
cones
Enable)
emodipodem
modificados
Dynamic
ordisabling
condenser
microphone
and
XLR
micthe
cable
ser
quando
habilitando
e events
desabilitando
eventos
fied
fied
when
when
globally
globally
disabling
and
and
enabling
enabling
events
using
using
the
(for
Talkback)
globalmente
utilizando
o boto Disable.
master
master
Disable
Disable
button.
button.
Desabilitar
evento
cessa
todos
os temporizadores
(propriedades
Disabling
Disabling
an um
an
event
event
stops
stops
all all
timers
timers
(Wait/delay
(Wait/delay
properties)
properties)
asas MIDI cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
Wait)
associados
ao
evento,
prevenindo
que
qualquer
ao
pendente
sociated
sociated
with
with
that
that
event,
event,
preventing
preventing
anyany
pending
pending
(delayed)
(delayed)
BNC cables
connecting Word
clock
between
the
configurada
para o(for
comportamento
While
Active
ocorra.
actions
actions
configured
configured
for
for
While
While
Active
Active
behavior
behavior
from
from
occurring.
occurring.
Creating
Creating
Triggers
Triggers
Criando
Triggers
Each
Each
event
event
can
can
have
have
up up
eight
to eight
triggers.
You
You
create
create
new
new
trigtrigVENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
Cada
evento
pode
ter to
at
oito triggers.
triggers.
Voc
cria
novos
triggers
gers
gers
by
by
selecting
selecting
them
them
from
from
the
the
Add
Add
pop-up
pop-up
menu.
menu.
Once
Once
selecionando-os no menu pop-up Add. Uma vez adicionados, voc
The
following
options
canand
beand
added
to VENUE
Profile
systems.
added,
added,
you
you
can
can
edit
edit
triggers
triggers
their
their
properties
properties
customize
to customize
pode
editar
os
triggers
e suas
propriedades
parato
personaliz-los.
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit
the
Avid
them.
them.
website
(www.avid.com).
Adicionando Triggers a um Evento
Adding
Adding
Triggers
Triggers
toto
anan
Event
Event
Para
adicionar
um trigger:
Mix Rack Options
To1add
ToSelecione
add
a trigger:
a trigger:
um evento na
Event List, ou crie um novo. (Para

I/O Options
detalhes,
veja Selecionando Eventos na pgina 206, e Criando
Eventos na pgina 206.)
1 Select
1 Select
an an
event
event
in the
in the
Event
Event
List,
List,
or create
or create
a new
a new
one.
one.
(For
(For
details,
details,
seesee
Selecting
Selecting
Events
Events
on
page
page
206,
206,
andand
Creating
Creating
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Inputon
Card
that
provides
16
analog
Events
Events
on
on
page
page
206.)
206.)

outputs
Chapter
Chapter
22:22:
Events
Events
207207
Captulo 22: Events
207
22Clique
no
pop-up
ADD
na in
lista
e selecione
um
tipo
Apenas
um
operador
lgico
ispermitido
por
evento,
eand
esse
operador
Only
oneone
logical
logical
operator
operator
is permitted
permitted
per
per
event,
event,
and
thisthis
opopClick
2 Click
themenu
the
ADDADD
pop-up
pop-up
menu
menu
the
inTrigger
the
Trigger
Trigger
list list
andand
select
select
an de
an Only
ao.
O
tipo
de
trigger
selecionado
adicionado
lista
Trigger
para
aplicado
a
todos
os
triggers
do
evento.
No
possvel
usar
uma
erator
applies
applies
to all
to triggers
all triggers
within
within
thethe
event.
event.
It isItnot
is not
possible
possible
action
action
type.
type.
TheThe
selected
selected
trigger
trigger
type
type
is added
is added
to the
to the
Trigger
Trigger erator
o evento selecionado atualmente, com suas propriedades padro.
mistura de operadores lgicos dentro de um evento.
to use
a mix
a mix
of logical
of logical
operators
operators
within
within
an event.
an event.
list list
for for
thethe
currently
currently
selected
selected
event,
event,
with
with
its default
its default
properties.
properties. to use
Exemplos de Operadores Lgicos

Examples
Examples
of Logical
of Logical
Operators
Operators
Operadores Lgicos determinam o estado preciso requerido para
Logical
Logical
operators
operators
determine
determine
thethe
precise
precise
state
state
required
required
in order
in order
que um evento ocorra conforme mostrado nas tabelas seguintes:
for for
an event
an event
to occur
to occur
as shown
as shown
in the
in the
following
following
tables:
tables:
menos
dos
triggers
precisa
ser
verdadeiro.
Ata-tabela
OROR
OR
AtPelo
least
At least
oneone
of um
the
of the
triggers
triggers
must
must
be true.
be true.
The
The
following
following
taseguinte mostra o efeito de OR em eventos com vrios triggers. Na
ble ble
shows
shows
thethe
effect
effect
of OR
of OR
on events
on events
with
with
multiple
multiple
triggers.
triggers.
In In
tabela, 0 indica uma condio falsa (no ocorrendo) e 1 indica uma
thethe
table,
table,
0 indicates
0 indicates
a false
a false
condition
condition
(not(not
occurring)
occurring)
andand
1 1
condio
verdadeira
(ocorrendo).
indicates
indicates
a true
a true
condition
condition
(occurring).
(occurring).
Example
Example
truth
truth
table
table
for OR,
for OR,
showing
showing
twotwo
triggers
triggers
Trigger
Trigger
Types
Types
Adicionando
triggers
AddAdd
Triggers
Triggers
Para a lista de trigger disponveis, veja Tipos de Trigger na

For For
a list
a list
of available
of available
trigger
trigger
types,
types,
see see
Trigger
Trigger
Types
Types
on on
pgina 215.
pagepage
215.
215.
Editando Tipos de Trigger e Propriedades
Editing
Editing
Trigger
Trigger
Type
Type
and
and
Properties
Properties
Para editar o trigger e suas propriedades:
To edit
To edit
the the
trigger
trigger
andand
its properties:
its properties:
Trigger
Trigger
A A
Operator
Operator
Trigger
Trigger
B B
Result
Result
0 0
OR OR
0 0
0 0
0 0
OR OR
1 1
1 1
1 1
OR OR
0 0
1 1
1 1
OR OR
1 1
1 1
When
When
using
using
OR,OR,
if OR,
one
if one
or um
more
or more
(but
not
not
all) all)
of
oftodos)
the
triggers
triggers
go goso
Quando
usando
se
ou(but
mais
(mas
nothe
triggers
false,
false,
thethe
event
logic
is only
is only
acted
on acionada
on
again
again
when
when
all triggers
all triggers
falsos,
aevent
lgica
dologic
evento
acted
apenas
novamente
se todos
evaluate
evaluate
to false
to
false
(result
(result
= 0).
= 0). = 0).
os
triggers
so
falsos
(resultado
1 Clique duas vezes na linha do trigger na lista. Ou clique com o

1 Double-click
1 direito
Double-click
thethe
trigger
row
in the
in the
list.
list.
Or right-click
Or right-click
thethe
ac- ac- ANDAND
AllTodos
All
triggers
triggers
must
be precisam
true.
be true.
TheThe
following
following
table
table
shows
shows
thethe
boto
no item
da trigger
ao
e row
escolha
Edit.
AND
os must
triggers
ser
verdadeiros.
A
seguinte
tabela
tiontion
item
item
andand
choose
choose
Edit.Edit.
effect
effect
of AND
of
AND
on de
events
onAND
events
with
multiple
multiple
triggers.
triggers.
In the
In the
table,
0 0 0
mostra
o efeito
emwith
eventos
com
vrios
triggers.
Natable,
tabela,
2 Escolha um novo Trigger Type, ou edite qualquer das propriedades indicates
indicates
a false
acondio
false
condition
condition
(not
occurring)
occurring)
and
1
indicates
1 indicates
a a
indica
uma
falsa(not
(no
ocorrendo)
e 1and
indica
uma condio
2 Choose
2 Choose
a new
a new
Trigger
Trigger
Type,
Type,
or edit
or edit
anyany
of the
of the
available
available
proppropdisponveis na linha para aquele trigger. Propriedades variam true
verdadeira
(occorendo).
true
condition
condition
(occurring).
(occurring).
erties
erties
in the
in the
rowtipo
row
for de
for
that
that
trigger.
trigger.
Properties
Properties
varyvary
depending
depending
on de
on
dependendo
do
trigger
selecionado
(nem
todos
os tipos
thethe
type
type
of trigger
of trigger
selected
selected
(not
(not
all trigger
all trigger
types
types
have
have
editable
editable Example
Example
Truth
Truth
table
table
for AND
for AND
showing
showing
twotwo
triggers
triggers
triggers
possuem
propriedades
editveis).
properties).
properties).
Operadores Lgicos para Triggers
Logical
Logical
Operators
Operators
forfor
Triggers
Triggers
Um trigger individual considerado como verdadeiro quando

aAn
funo
descrita
paraisseu
tipo e propriedades
tem
efeito,
como
An
individual
individual
trigger
trigger
considered
is considered
to be
totrue
be true
when
when
thethe
funcfuncquando
um
footswitch
pressionado,
ou um
fader
place,
elevado
acima
tiontion
described
described
by its
by type
its
type
andand
properties
properties
takes
takes
place,
such
such
as
as
do
threshold
do trigger.
while
while
a footswitch
a footswitch
is actually
is actually
pressed,
pressed,
or aor
fader
a fader
is raised
is raised
above
above
its trigger
its trigger
threshold.
threshold.
Trigger
Trigger
A A
Operator
Operator
Trigger
Trigger
B B
Result
Result
0 0
ANDAND
0 0
0 0
0 0
ANDAND
1 1
0 0
1 1
ANDAND
0 0
0 0
1 1
ANDAND
1 1
1 1
Um trigger considerado falso (ou, no ocorrente) se sua funo

eApropriedades
so to
encontradas,
como
um footswitch
XOR
trigger
A trigger
is considered
is no
considered
be
to false
be false
(or,
(or,
notquando
not
occurring)
occurring)
whenwhen- XOR
XOR
no
pressionado,
ou
enquanto
um
fader
permanece
abaixo
dea seu
everever
its function
its function
andand
properties
properties
are are
notnot
met,
met,
such
such
as
when
as when
a
threshold de trigger atribudo.
AtPelo
least
At least
oneone
trigger,
trigger,
but
but
notnot
all,mas
all,
must
must
betodos,
true.
be true.
The
The
following
following
ta- tamenos
um
dos
triggers,
no
precisa
ser verdadeiro.
footswitch
footswitch
is not
is not
being
being
pressed,
pressed,
or while
or while
a fader
a fader
remains
remains
below
below
bleAble
shows
shows
thetabela
the
effect
effect
of XOR
of XOR
on
events
on events
with
with
multiple
multiple
triggers.
triggers.
seguinte
mostra
o
efeito
de
XOR
em
eventos
com
vrios
its assigned
its assigned
trigger
trigger
threshold.
threshold.
Quando um evento inclui vrios triggers, um operador lgico (OR, In triggers.
Na0tabela,
0 indica
condio
falsa (no
ocorrendo)
the
In the
table,
table,
indicates
0 indicates
a false
a uma
false
trigger
trigger
condition
condition
(not(not
occuroccur- e 1
AND, XOR) deve ser escolhido no menu pop-up Operators. (O ring)
indica
(occorendo).
ring)
anduma
and
1 indicates
1condio
indicates
a verdadeira
true
a true
condition
condition
(occurring).
(occurring).
When
When
an event
an event
includes
includes
multiple
multiple
triggers,
triggers,
a logical
a logical
operator
operator
operador padro OR.)
(OR,
(OR,
AND,
AND,
XOR)
XOR)
must
must
be chosen
be chosen
from
from
thethe
Operators
Operators
pop-up
pop-up
Example
Truth
table
for XOR
showing
twotwo
triggers
Example
Truth
table
for XOR
showing
triggers
menu.
menu.
(The
(The
default
default
Operator
Operator
is
OR.)
is
OR.)
O operador lgico no tem efeito quando a Triggers List inclui apenas
Trigger
Trigger
A A
Operator
Operator
Trigger
Trigger
B B
Result
Result
um item.
TheThe
logical
logical
operator
operator
hashas
no no
effect
effect
when
when
thethe
Triggers
Triggers
list list
in- in0 0
XORXOR
0 0
0 0
cludes
cludes
only
only
one
item.
item. lgico para o evento atual:
Para
escolher
umone
operador
choose
To choose
aological
a logical
operator
operator
for
the
for mostrar
the
current
current
event:
event: atribudos.
1To
Selecione
evento
desejado
para
os
triggers
1 Select
1 Select
thethe
desired
desired
event
event
to display
to display
its assigned
its assigned
triggers.
triggers.
2 Clique no menu pop-up Operators (por padro, esse menu pop-up

mostra
OR)
e escolha
AND,
OR,
oumenu
XOR.
2 Click
2 Click
thethe
Operators
Operators
pop-up
pop-up
menu
(by (by
default,
default,
thisthis
pop-up
pop-up
menu
menu
displays
displays
OR)
OR)
andand
choose
choose
AND,
AND,
OR,OR,
or XOR.
or XOR.
208208
VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
208
Guia VENUE Profile
0 0
XORXOR
1 1
1 1
1 1
XORXOR
0 0
1 1
1 1
XORXOR
1 1
0 0
Managing
Triggers
in the
Gerenciando
Triggers
na Triggers
List
Triggers List
Managing Triggers in the Triggers List
Triggersnainlista
the list canser
be editados,
edited, duplicated
and
deleted.
Triggers
duplicados
e apagados.
Triggers inpodem
the list can
be edited,
duplicated
and deleted.
Creating Actions
Criando
Actions
Creating
Actions
Para
editar
um trigger:
To edit
a trigger:
Each event can have up to eight actions. You create new acEachevento
event can
have
up
eightaes.
actions.
Youcria
create
new aes
acCada
pode
terfrom
atto
oito
Voc
novas
tions
by selecting
them
the
Add pop-up
menu. Once
tions by selecting
them
from
the Add
pop-up
menu.
Once
selecionando-as
no
menu
pop-up
Add.
Uma
vez
adicionadas,
added, you can customize actions by editing their properties,
added,
can customize
actions
by editing
properties,se
voc
podeyou
personalizar
as aes
editando
suastheir
propriedades,
as available.
disponvel.
as available.
Double-click
the trigger
in the
11Clique
duas vezes
no trigger
na Triggers
Triggers List.
List.Or,
Ou,right-click
clique com o
1 Double-click the trigger in the Triggers List. Or, right-click
the item
in no
theitem
list and
choose
Edit. Edit.
boto
direito
na lista
e escolha
Adicionando
Aes a to
um an
Evento
Adding
Actions
Event
Adding Actions to an Event
Editando
EditingTriggers
Triggers
Editing Triggers
To edit a trigger:
the item in the list and choose Edit.
Stage Rack Features

Audio I/O
um
inputs
Editing
a48
trigger
Editando
trigger

2 Siga2um
procedimentos:
Do
anyseguintes
ofoutput
the following:
8 dos
analog
To change
type,clique
clickno
themenu
Type pop-up
pop-upType
menu
Para
alterar othe
tipotrigger
do trigger,
e faa
outputs
Stagetype,
Rack.click the Type pop-up menu
digital
To change
theper
trigger
and
make
a
new
selection
from
the
Type
menu.
uma nova seleo.
and make a new selection from the Type menu.
Para
Fader
ou Fader
Below,
clique
no valor em
For triggers
Fader Above
or Above
Fader
Below
triggers,
click
the currently
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O
Forpara
Fader
Above
or Fader
Below
triggers,
click the currently
dBdisplayed
atual
destac-lo,
e
digite
um
novo
valor.
dB value to highlight it, then type in a new
displayed
dB value
to highlight
it,
type
in aclique
new
Para
switches,
botes
etooutras
funes
dethen
doisredundant
estados,
Snake
connectors
enable
primary
and
(if
value.
no menu
pop-upconnection
State e faa
seleo.FOH
Opes
value.
applicable)
to aaVENUE
Rack.para State
variam
For switches,
buttons
and other
click
conforme
apropriado
para two-state
o tipo defunctions,
trigger, e incluem
For switches, buttons and other two-state functions, click
the
State
pop-up
menu
and
make
a
selection.
Choices
for
Closed ou Open, On ou Off, e Pressed ou Released.
the State pop-up menu and make a selection. Choices for
State vary as appropriate for the trigger type, and will inState vary
as appropriate
for the trigger
and will
3 Para
confirmar
suas
alteraes,
pressione
Entertype,
ouReleased.
clique
eminSystem
Components
clude
Closed
or Open,
On or Off,
and Pressed
or
clude
Closed
or
Open,
On
or
Off,
and
Pressed
or
Released.
qualquer lugar na janela Events.
3 To confirm your changes, press Enter or click anywhere else
3 To confirm your changes, press Enter or click anywhere else
Components
in Included
the EventsTriggers
window.
Selecionando
in the Events window.
Editing a trigger
Triggers
podem
ser selecionados usando os mesmo mtodos
Selecting
Triggers
VENUE
Profile
console
Selecting
Triggers
utilizados
para selecionar
itens na Event List. Para mais informaes,
veja
Selecionando
Eventos
na the
pgina
206.
Triggers
can (2)
be selected
using
same
methods as used when
Two
IEC
power
cables
ToPara
add adicionar
an action:uma ao:
Additional
Required Components
To add an action:
1 1Select
an event,
or create
a new
Selecione
um evento,
ou crie
umone.
novo.
1 Select
an event,
or create
a new
The
following
components
must
be one.
2 Click the ADD pop-up menu in the Action list and select an
2 Clique
menu
pop-up
nainAction
List e VGA
selecione
um an
tipo
Display
or
greater
flat-panel
display
2Video
Clickno
the
ADD(15-inch
pop-upADD
menu
the
Action
list
and
select
action
type.OThe
type, with
itsseus
default
settings,
deaction
ao.
tiposelected
de 1024x768
aoaction
selecionado,
com
padro,
recommended;
minimum
resolution).
VGA
and
type.
The
selected
action
type,
with
its valores
default
settings,
is adicionado
added to the
actionList.
list area.
Action
DVI
supported.
is
added
to the action list area.

Optional Components
(for Talkback)
Triggers can be selected using the same methods as used when
selecting
items in
the Event
List.screen
For more
information,
see
Add Actions
Monitor
mount
for VGA
(screen
not included)
MIDI
cables (for connecting external MIDI devices)
selecting items in the Event List. For more information, see
Add
Actions
Duplicando
Selecting Triggers
Events on page 206.
Adicionado Aes
Trackball
mounton
(trackball
not included)
Selecting
Events
page 206.
For a list of available actions, see Action Types on
VENUE
Mouse Pad
Para duplicar
um trigger:
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
Para
lista
aes
disponveis,
veja
Tipos
de on
Aes na
For aalist
of de
available
actions,
see Action
Types
Duplicating Triggers
page 216.
VENUE Profile
Guide
Duplicating
Triggers
pgina
216. cables (for connecting to GPI devices)
25-pin
D-Sub
page 216.
1 Selecione um ou mais itens na Triggers List.
Two (2)
console lights
To duplicate
a trigger:
Editing
Action
Type
Properties
Editando an
um tipo
de Ao
e Suasand
Propriedades
To
duplicate
aDust
trigger:
Protective
Cover
Editing an Action Type and Properties
21Clique
com
boto
direito
eminqualquer
item List.
selecionado e escolha
Select
oneo or
more
items
the Triggers
Duplicate.
1 Select
one
ornext)
more items in the Triggers List.
Rack(s)
(see
uma
ao:
VENUE
Profile
Expansion Options
ToPara
editeditar
an action:
2 Right-click on any selected item and choose Duplicate.
To edit an action:
2 Right-click
1 Double-click
action
row
theao
list.
Or, lista.
right-click
the
acApagando
Triggers on any selected item and choose Duplicate.
following
options
can
beinadded
to VENUE
Profile
systems.
1The
Clique
duasthe
vezes
linha
da
Ou, clique
com
1 Double-click
thena
action
row
in the na
list. Or, right-click
the
ac-o
tion
item
and
choose
Edit.
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit
the
Avid
boto
direito
no
item
de
ao
e
escolha
Edit.
Deleting Triggers
tion item and choose Edit.
ParaEach
apagar
um
trigger:
Deleting
Triggers
Mix
Rack
2 Click the displayed action Type and make a new selection.
2 Clique
nathe
tipodisplayed
de ao apresentado
e faa
umaanova
2 Click
action Type and
make
new seleo.
selection.
System
Restore CD
delete
aum
trigger:
1To
Selecione
mais itens na Triggers List.
To delete
aoutrigger:
ECx
Installer
Mix Rack Options
1 Select
oneEthernet
or more Control
items in Software
the Triggers
List. CD
1 Select
one
ordireito
more em
items
in theitem
Triggers
List.
2 Clique
com
o
boto
qualquer
Standalone Software Installer CD selecionado e escolha
2 Right-click on any selected item and choose Delete.
Delete.
I/O Options
2 Right-click
on any
selected
item and
choose
Delete.
iLok USB Smart
Key
(for storing
plug-in
authorizations)

Editing an action
Editando
uma
outputs
Editing
anao
action

provides
8 analog
Chapter
22: Events
209
Captulo 22: Events
209
Estado da Ao
Gerenciando Aes na Lista
Para editar uma estado da ao para switches, botes e outras

To edit
an action
State for switches, buttons and other two-state
funes
de dois
estados:
Aes
podem
sermoved,
movidas,
renomeadas,
duplicadas
e apagadas
Actions
can be
renamed,
duplicated,
and deleted
by
clicando
com o boto direito sobre elas e escolhendo a operao
right-clicking them and choosing the desired operation, just
desejada, assim como se pode fazer com os triggers. Para instrues
as you can with triggers. For instructions on managing items
sobre gerenciamenteo de itens na Actions List, siga as instrues
in the
Actions
follow theTriggers
instructions
for triggers
in pgina
para
triggers
emList,
Gerenciando
na Triggers
List na
Managing
Triggers
in
the
Triggers
List
on
page
209.
209.
Action State
functions:
Clique
no menu
pop-up
Statemenu
e faaand
a seleo.
Opes para
State
Click
the State
pop-up
make a selection.
Choices
variam
apropriado
para cada
trigger,
e podem
incluir
for como
State vary
as appropriate
fortipo
thede
trigger
type,
and will
inClosed
ou Open, On ou Off, e Toggle.
clude Closed or Open, On or Off, and Toggle.
Managing Actions in the List
Comportamento da ao
Action Behavior
Para editar um comportamento da ao:

To edit action behavior:
Clique no menu pop-up Behavior e escolha Latch ou While Active,

Click the Behavior pop-up menu and choose Latch or While
conforme apropriado:
Active, as appropriate:
Latch Fixa o comportamento em seu estado definido (como aberto

Latch Fixes the behavior in its defined state (such as open or
ou fechado) at que destravado por um outro evento ou operao.
closed) until unlatched by another event or operation.
While Active Trava o comportamento em seu estado definido

While Active Latches the behavior in its defined state as long
enquanto o trigger associado est em efeito (ativo, ou verdadeiro),
the associated trigger is in effect (active, or true), such as uncomo quando tirando do Mute um canal apenas enquanto um
muting
channel only
while a footswitch is pressed and held.
footswitch
apressionado
e seguro.
Pulse and Duration (GPI Output only) Produces a single-shot
Pulse and Duration (apenas GPI Output) Produz um pulso de

pulse
output.
Duration
range
0.10.1
second
(100(100
ms) ms)
to 1.0
secsada
nico.
A gama
de durao
vaiisde
segundo
a 1.0
ond, in
second increments.
The default
duration
is 0.3
secsegundo,
em0.1
incrementos
de 0.1 segundo.
A durao
padro
0.3
onds(300
(300 ms).
ms).
segundo
ParaToconfigurar
pulso
e pulse
a durao
do GPI for
Output
para uma
configure o
GPI
output
and duration
an action:
ao:
Testando
TestingEventos
Events
Um
eventocanpode
ser manualmente
para of
test-lo,
An event
be manually
triggered to disparado
test it, regardless
its
independentemente
de
seus
Event
Status
ou
estado
habilitado/
current Event Status or enabled/disabled state. Use this feature
desabilitado
atual.
Use esseand
recuros
paraproper
verificar
as propriedades
to verify action
properties
confirm
operation
of dede
aes
e
confirmar
operaes
apropriadas
de dispositivos
vices connected to GPI output ports.
conectados a portas GPI Output.
When an event is in Test mode, it is effectively considered true
Qando
um evento
est
no modoreset.
Test,An
ele Event
efetivamente
considerado
until the
event is
manually
in test can
be
verdadeiro at que seja manualmente resetado. Um evento em teste
re-tested at any time by again pressing the Test button. You do
pode ser re-testado a qualquer tempo novamente pressionando o
not have to reset in-Test events to re-test them.
boto
Test. Voc no precisa resetar eventos em teste para test-los
novamente.
Incoming triggers are ignored when events are in Test mode.

For example, if a footswitch event is being tested and you acTriggers recebidos so ignorados quando eventos esto no modo
cidentally
hit the se
footswitch
at some
point during
test,testado
the
Test.
Por exemplo,
um evento
de footswitch
est the
sendo
does not revertaperta
to Active
the moment
Test isponto
cancelled.
eevent
voc acidentalmente
o footswitch
em algum
durante
o teste, o evento reverte para Active no momento em que Test

Events always return to their ready state following a Reset.
cancelado.
Events wont re-fire until the trigger logic re-asserts itself as
1 Clique
duasthe
vezes
na ao
para edit-la
2 Click
Behavior
selector
and choose Pulse.
true. sempre retornam a seus estados em seguida a um Reset.

Eventos
Eventos no re-disparam at que a lgica do trigger se reafirme
como
verdadeira.
To test
events:
3 Enter
a valueBehavior
for Pulse
Duration.Pulse.
2 Clique
no seletor
e escolha
1 Select
or more events in the Event List.
Para
testarone
eventos:
4 To confirm you changes, press Enter or click anywhere else

3 Digite
um valor para Pulse Duration.
1 Selecione um ou mais eventos na Event List.
1 Double-click the action to edit it
in the Events window.
2 Click the Test button. Or, right-click an event and choose
Test from the pop-up menu.
4 Para confirmar as mudanas, pressione Enter ou clique em

qualquer
lugar
na janela Events.
Action
Wait
23Clique
noyou're
boto satisfied
Test. Ou, the
clique
comisobehaving
boto direito
em umclick
evento
When
event
correctly,
ethe
escolha
no menu
pop-up.
ResetTest
button.
Or, Right-click
an event and choose Reset.
AllWait
actions let you specify a Wait time of up to 100 seconds for
Action
3 Quando estiver satisfeito com o comportamtneo do evento, clique

no boto Reset. Ou, clique com o boto direito em um evento e
escolha
Reset. Events
Resetting
the action to wait before firing. This can be useful for synchroTodas
as aes
permitem
especificar
um tempo
Wait
at 100
nizing
the timing
of multiple
external
devices,
or de
to build
segundos
para
que
a
ao
aguarde
para
ser
disparada.
Isso
pode
timed sequences of actions.
ser til para sincronizar o tempo de vrios dispositivos externos, ou

para construir sequencias de aes programadas.
To configure action Wait (Delay):
Para1configurar
o Wait
(Delay)
datoao:
Double-click
the
action
edit it.
2 Toduas
confirm
your
the Wait value to highlight it,
1 Clique
vezes
na changes,
ao paraclick
edit-la
then type in a new value.
2 Para confirmar suas alteroes, clique no valor Wait para

destac-lo e digite um novo valor.
Selecting Actions
Selecionando
Actions
Actions can
be selected using the same methods as used when
selecting items in the Event List. For more information, see
Aes podem ser selecionadas utilizando os mesmos mtodos

Selecting Events on page 206.
usados para selecionar itens na Event List. Para mais informaes,
veja Selecionando Events na pgina 206.
You can use the Reset features to quickly reset Active or in-Test
events to ready.
You can also use the Reset All command (in
Resetando
Eventos
the Events Commands buttons) to immediately reset all
events
in usar
the list.
Voc
pode
o recurso Reset para rapidamente resetar eventos
Active ou em Test para pronto. Voc pode tambm usar o comando

The current
status
of each
eventCommands)
is shown in the
column
Reset
All (nos
botes
Events
paraStatus
imediatamente
in
the
Event
List:
resetar todos os eventos da lista.
Event List Status indicators
Status
Description
Active
Event is currently true (triggered)
Ready
Event is currently false (not triggered)
Disabled
Event is disabled and can not be triggered
Test
Event has been manually triggered
O status atual de cada evento mostrado na coluna Status na Event List:
210
Guia VENUE Profile
To reset an event:
ParaTo
resetar
um evento:
reset an event:
1 Select one or more events in the Event List. (See Selecting

Events
206.)
1 Select on
onepage
or mais
more
eventsna
in Event
the Event
Selecting
1 Selecione
um
ou
events
List. List.
(Veja(See
Selecionando
Eventos
na
pgina
206.)
Events
on
page
206.)
2 Click the Reset button. Or, right-click an event and choose
Reset to reset an Active or in-Test event back to a Ready state.
2 Click
Reset
button.
Or, right-click
an event
and
choose
2 Clique
no the
boto
Reset.
Ou, clique
com o boto
direito
sobre
um
Reset
to resetReset
an Active
in-Test
back
to aou
Ready
state.
evento
e escolha
para or
resetar
umevent
evento
Active
em Test
de
reset
allestado
events:Ready.
voltaTopara
seu
To
reset the
all events:
Click
Reset All button.
Para resetar todos os eventos:
Snapshot Modes and Event Status

Snapshot
Modes
and
Event
Status snapshot reWhile in Propagate
or Edit
modes,
events-driven
Modos Snapshot e Status de Eventos
Nos
PropagateorouEdit
Edit,modes,
carregamento
de snapshots
dirigidos
call modos
is suspended.
While
in Propagate
events-driven
snapshot
repor
eventos est suspenso.
call is suspended.
While in Preview mode, triggers that occur in the online state
of modo
the console
aretriggers
executed,
including
recall
of
No
ocasionados
noMTC-driven
estado
online
da state
console
While
inPreview,
Preview
mode,
triggers
that occur
in the
online
so
executados,
de offline
snapshots
dirigidos
snapshots.
Triggers
caused carregamento
byincluding
changes to
the
(Preview)
of
the
console
areincluindo
executed,
MTC-driven
recall
of
por
MTC. are
Triggers
ocasionados
porcause
alteraes
em
controles offline
controls
ignored
and dobynot
events
to occur.
snapshots.
Triggers
caused
changes
to
the offline
(Preview)
(Preview) so ignorados e no resultam em eventos.
controls are ignored and do not cause events to occur.
Click the Reset All button.

When events are reset, the following rules are applied:
Avoidcom
Feedback
Loops
Cautela
Feedback Loops
Latching
pulsed
actions
which have
occurred
When
eventsorare
reset,
the following
rules already
are applied:
Because
caneventos
both affect
and be
affected
by snapshots,
Pelo
fatoevents
de que
podem
afetar
e serem
afetadositpor
is
possible
for
events
to
cause
feedback
loops.
The
following
components
must
be
purchased
separately:
snapshots,
possvel
que
causem
feedback
loops.
Because events can both affect and be affected by snapshots, it
Clique
no Rack
boto Reset
All.
Stage
Features
are
Stage
Racks
are
used
with
an
FOH
Rack,
and
provide
all
stage
unaffected.
For
example,
reset
doesnt
unlatch
a
previously
Quando
eventos
so
resetados,
as
seguintes
regras
so
Latching or pulsed actions which have already occurred are
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
to twoa Stage
Racks
aplicadas:
latched
function.
unaffected.
For
example,
reset
doesntUp
unlatch
previously
Aes
travadas
ou de pulsosupporting
que tenham
ocorrido
no
so
can
be
used
simultaneously,
up
to
96
total
inputs.
latched
function.
All action
delay timers (Wait) are immediately cancelled.
afetadas. Por exemplo, resetar no destrava uma funo previamente

All
action
delay timers
(Wait) Active
are immediately
cancelled.
travada.
Actions
for While
behavior are
immediAudio
I/O configured

Todos
os
temporizadores
de
delay
de
aes
(Wait)
so
ately
cancelled.
Actions
configured
for While
Active behavior
are immedi 48 inputs
with remotely
controllable
mic preamps
and
imediatamente
cancelados.
ately
cancelled.
Events
will not selectable
occur
until
the trigger
logic
againActive
evaluates
individually
phantom
power.

Aes
configuradas
para
comportamento
While
so
as
true.
imediatamente
canceladas.
Events
will
not
occur
until the
trigger logic
evaluates
8 analog
output
channels;
expandable
upagain
to 48 analog
or
Eventos
no outputs
ocorremper
atStage
que Rack.
o trigger lgico novamente seja
as true.
digital
For example, lets say you have an event configured to close a
validado como verdadeiro.
GPI Output whenever Channel 3 is muted (its behavior prop-
For example, lets say you have an event configured to close a

Synchronization
and Control I/O
is While
Active).
the
event
opens
the GPI propOutPor erty
exemplo,
imagine
queResetting
voc
tenha
um
evento
configurado
para
GPI
Output
whenever
Channel
3 is
muted
(its
behavior
Snake
connectors
to
enable
primary
and
redundant
(if
put,
even
though
the
Channel
3
might
still
be
muted.
The
fechar
uma
sada
GPI
Output
se
o
canal
3
est
em
Mute
(sua
erty is While Active). Resetting the event opens the GPI Outapplicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
propriedade
de
comportamento
While
Active).
Resetar
o
evento
event
will
re-trigger
the
next
time
the
channel
goes
from
put, even though the Channel 3 might still be muted. Thean
abreunmuted
a sada GPI
Output,
mesmo
se o canal 3 ainda puder ser
to a muted
state.
event willstate
re-trigger
the next
time the channel goes from an
colocado em Mute. O evento sera redisparado na prxima vez em
unmuted state to a muted state.
que o canal for alterado para o estado Mute.
System Components
Snapshots and Events
Snapshots
and
Events
Included
Components
Events can include
snapshot
functions among their triggers
Snapshots e Events
and
actions.
Events
can include
snapshot
functions
among their triggers
All
VENUE
Profile systems
include
the following:
and
actions.
Eventos
podem
incluir
funes
snapshot
entre seus triggers e
Snapshots as Triggers
aes.
Snapshots
Triggers by the following snapshot functions:
Events
can as
be mount
triggered
Monitor
Snapshots
como Triggers
Recall
of specific
snapshots
Events
can be
triggered
by the following
snapshot functions:
Trackball
mount (trackball
not included)
Eventos
podem
ser
disparados
pelas
seguintes
funes:
Enabling
of
Snapshot
modes
(Preview,
Propagate and
Recall
of
specific
snapshots
VENUE Mouse Pad
Carregamento
de snapshots especficos
Edit)
EnablingProfile
of Snapshot
modes (Preview, Propagate and
VENUE
Guide
Habilitao
de modos
Snapshot (Preview, Propagate e Edit)
Edit)
Two (2)
Snapshots
asconsole
Actionslights
Snapshots
como Aes
Protective
Dust Cover
Snapshots
as can
Actions
Event
actions
include the following snapshot functions:
Rack(s) (see next)
Aes deRecall
eventos
incluir
as seguintes funes snapshot:
of podem
acan
specific
snapshot
actions
include
the following snapshot functions:
Event
Carregar um snapshot especfico
Recall
the
next
selected
snapshot.
a previous,
specific
snapshot
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and ou
Cables
Racks,
Carregar
o of
snapshot
anterior,
oorprximo
o selecionado.
Initiate
Store
to Selected
Snapshot
commands
(overwrit Iniciar
comandos
Store
tonext
Selected
Snapshot
(sobrescrevendo
Recall
the
previous,
or selected
snapshot.
Each
Mixand
Rack
or FOH snapshots)
Rack includes:
e atualizando
snapshots)
ing
updating
Initiate Store to Selected Snapshot commands (overwrit Habilitar
diferentes
modos Snapshot
(Preview, Propagate
Propagate e
System
Restore CD
Enable
modes (Preview,
ing
anddifferent
updatingSnapshot
snapshots)
Edit)
Additional
Required
Components
Avoid Feedback
Loops
possible
for events
to cause
feedback
loops.
is Video
Display
(15-inch
or greater
flat-panel
VGA display
Be especially
when
Recalltriggers
Previous
or NextRecall
snapshot
Tenha
especialcareful
cuidado
quando
e aes
Previous
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA
and
triggers
and
actions
are
combined
with
events
that
recall
a
Snapshot
ou
Recall
Next
Snapshot
so
combinados
com eventos
Be especially careful when Recall Previous or Next snapshot
DVI
supported.
specific
snapshot,
as
shown
in
the
following
diagram.
que
carregam
um
snapshot
especfico,
conforme
apresentado
no
triggers and actions are combined with events that recall a
prximo
diagrama.
specific
USB keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
snapshot, as shown in the following diagram.
Snapshot 003 is recalled (manually, MTC, other)
Digital
Snake003
Cable
(VENUE
Profile Systems
Only)
Snapshot
is recalled
(manually,
MTC, other)
Trigger:
Event 011
a Digital Snake cable. Recall
This cable
can be003
purchased directly
of Snapshot
Trigger:
from Event
Avid 011
Optional
Recall
Action:of Snapshot 003
Recall Next Snapshot
Action:
Components
Result: Snapshot 004 is recalled

Result: Snapshot 004 is recalled
Event 414
Trigger:
USB flash disk (or other portable

storage
device for
Recall ofUSB
Snapshot
004
414data; 512Trigger:
transfer Event
of Show
MB
or
larger
recommended)
Action:
Recall of Snapshot 004
Recall Previous Snapshot
Near-field monitor speakers

Action:
Recall
Headphones with 1/4-inch
jack Previous Snapshot
Result:
Snapshot 003
recalled
Dynamic or condenser
microphone
andisXLR
mic cable
(forillustrating
Talkback)potential
Diagram
logic feedback
events and
Result:
Snapshotloop
003between
is recalled
snapshots
Diagrama
ilustrando o potencial
Footswitches
(up tode2)feedback loop lgico entre eventos e snapshots
Diagram illustrating potential logic feedback loop between events and
snapshots
Os global
botesEvent
Event
Disable
ResetAllAllbuttons
globais
podem
servir
The
Disable
andeReset
can
serve as
BNC
cables
(forde
connecting
Word
clock between the
como
botes
pnico para
temporariamente
suspender
panic
buttons
to
temporarily
suspend
and/orcan
reset all as
The
Event
Disable
and Reset
Alldevices)
buttons
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
ou global
resetar
todos
os
eventos,
dando
a voc a serve
chance de
events,
giving
you
a
chance
to
diagnose
the
source
of all
the
panic
buttonsa to
temporarily
suspend
and/or
reset
diagnosticar
fonte
do connecting
problema.
Para
mais
informaes,
25-pin
D-Sub cables
(for
to GPI
devices)
problem.
For
more
information,
see
Resetting
Events
events,
giving you aEventos
chance to
the source of theon
veja Resetando
nadiagnose
pgina 210.
page
210.
problem. For more information, see Resetting Events on
page 210.

Edit)
and
Enable
different Snapshot modes (Preview, Propagate
Standalone
and Edit) Software Installer CD
Mix Rack Options


I/O Options

outputs

Captulo 22: Events
211
Default Settings, Templates and Examples
Ajustes Padro, Templates e Exemplos
Default Settings, Templates and Examples
Default
Events
Os seguintes
eventos
pr-definidos esto includos para servirem como exemplo e como ponto de partida para seus prprios eventos.
The
following
pre-defined events are included for you to use as examples and as the starting point for your own events.
Default
Events
Default
events pre-defined events are included for you to use as examples and as the starting point for your own events.
The following
Event Number
Default
events
Type and Name
Triggers
Actions
001
Event Number
Footswitch
1
Type
and Name
Switch 1 (Footswitch 1) Closed

Triggers
undefined (choose an action)

Actions
002
001
Footswitch 1
2
Footswitch
Switch 1
2 (Footswitch
(Footswitch 1)
2) Closed
Closed
Switch
undefined
undefined (choose
(choose an
an action)
action)
003
002
Preview Mode
Footswitch
2 (F1)
Function
1, Pressed
Switch
2 Switch
(Footswitch
2) Closed
Preview mode,
Toggle,
undefined
(choose
an Latch
action)
004
003
(Flash
PreviewF1)
Mode (F1)
Preview
FunctionMode,
SwitchOn
1, Pressed
004
006
(Flash F1)
(Flash F2)
Preview Mode, On
Variable Groups Mode, On
006
007
(Flash F2)
Copy Channel (F3)
Variable Groups Mode, On

Function Switch 3, Pressed
007
Copy Channel (F3)
008
Paste to Selected Strip (F4)
008
Paste to Selected Strip (F4)
009
Tap Tempo
009
Tap Tempo
Flash
Function
On, While
Preview
mode, Switch
Toggle, 1,
Latch
Active
Flash Function Switch 1, On, While
Active
Active
Copy
ActiveSelected Channel
Light Function Switch 3, On, While
ActiveSelected Channel
Copy
Paste to Selected Channel(s)
Active
Active
Tap to define system tempo for delay
Active
plug-ins that support Tempo Sync
Tap to define system tempo for delay
plug-ins that support Tempo Sync
Templates
Templates
The
following table provides a listing of common event definitions. Use the techniques explained throughout this chapter to add
Templates
A tabela
oferece
uma lista events
de definies
comuns
de own
eventos.
Use
as tcnicas
explanadas
ao longo deste captulo para adicionar um
one seguinte
or more of
the following
to establish
your
set of
events,
triggers
and actions.
The dos
following
table
provides
a listing
of common
eventconjunto
definitions.
Use the triggers
techniques
explained throughout this chapter to add
ou mais
seguintes
eventos
para
estabelecer
seu prprio
de eventos,
e aes.
Suggested
event
definitions
for common
functions
one or more
of the
following
events to
establish your own set of events, triggers and actions.
Trigger
Action
Event Name
Triggerfunctions
Type
Action Type
Suggested
event definitions for common
Properties
Properties
Trigger
Action
Event
Name
Trigger
Type1
Action
Type
Talkback
(Toggle)
Footswitch
Closed
Talkback
Toggle
Properties
Properties
Talkback
(Momentary)
Talkback (Toggle)
Footswitch 1
1
Footswitch
Fader Start
Talkback
(Momentary)
Fader
Above1
Footswitch
Fader Start
Stop
Fader
Behavior
Latch
Closed
Closed
Talkback
Talkback
On
Toggle
While
Latch Active
Ch 1
-60
dB
Closed
GPI Output 1
Talkback
Closed
On
Pulse Active
(0.3 s)
While
Fader
Fader Below
Above
Ch 1
1
Ch
-inf dB
-60
dB
GPI Output
Output 1
1
GPI
Closed
Closed
Pulse
(0.3 s)
s)
Pulse (0.3
Fader
Fader Start/Stop
Stop
Fader Below
Above
Fader
Ch 1
1
Ch
-60 dB
dB
-inf
GPI Output
Output 1
1
GPI
Closed
Closed
While
Pulse Active
(0.3 s)
Mute
(Toggle)
Fader Channel
Start/Stop
Footswitch
Fader Above1
1
Ch 1
Closed
-60 dB
Mute
GPI Output 1
Ch 1
Toggle
Closed
While Active
Mute Channel
Channel (Toggle)
(Momentary)
Mute
Footswitch
Footswitch 1
1
1
1
Closed
Closed
Mute
Mute
Ch 1
1
Ch
On
Toggle
While Active
ToggleChannel
Input Safe
Switch mode
Mute
(Momentary)
Function
Switch
1
Footswitch
1
Pressed
Closed
Ch 1
On
While Active
Toggle Input Safe Switch mode

Tap Tempo
Function Switch 1
Function Switch 1
Pressed
Pressed
Input Safe
Mute
Switch Mode
Input Safe
Tap
Tempo
Switch
Mode
Cue
on Mains
Tap Tempo
Function
Function Switch
Switch 1
1
Pressed
Pressed
Cue
on Mains
Tap Tempo
Cue on Mains
Function Switch 1
Pressed
Cue on Mains
212
Behavior
Guia VENUE Profile
UsingTemplates
the Templates
Usando
Using the Templates
Using the Templates
4 4ToPara
quickly
test the switch
click
the Test
button,
or Test,
rapidamente
testar
otrigger,
trigger
do click
switch,
no boto
4 To quickly
test the
switch
trigger,
theclique
Test button,
or
4
To
quickly
test
the
switch
trigger,
click
the
Test
button,
or seu
press
the
Footswitch.
Adjust
the
trigger
State
for
your
footou pressione o Footswitch. Ajuste o estado do trigger para
press the Footswitch. Adjust the trigger State for your footTo add any of the Events listed in the table, do the following
press
thequickly
Footswitch.
Adjust
thetrigger,
trigger click
State
for
your(For
footnecessary,
for
its
open/closed
orientation.
in- or
ParaTo
adicionar
dos listed
eventos
listados
faa o switch,
footswitch,
se necessrio,
para
orientao
dethe
aberto/fechado.
(Para
4 Toas
test the
switch
Test
button,
add the
any qualquer
of
the Events
in the
table,na
dotabela,
the following
Using
Templates
switch,
as necessary,
for
its open/closed
orientation.
(For inTo
addthe
anyfirst
of the
Events Talkback
listed in the
table,as
doan
the
following
(using
template,
(Toggle)
example):
switch,
as
necessary,
for
its
open/closed
orientation.
(For
inseguinte
(usando
o
primeiro
template,
Talkback
(Toggle),
como
instrues,
veja
Editando
Tipo
de
Trigger
e
Propriedades
na pgina
structions,
see
Editing
Trigger
Type
and
Properties
on
press
the
Footswitch.
Adjust
the
trigger
State
for
your
foot(using the first template, Talkback (Toggle) as an example):
structions, see Editing Trigger Type and Properties on
(using
the any
first of
template,
Talkback
(Toggle)
as an
exemplo):
208.)
To add
the Events
listed in
the table,
doexample):
the following structions,
seenecessary,
Editing Trigger
Type and Properties
on (For inpage
208.) as
switch,
for its open/closed
orientation.
page 208.)
To use
thethe
templates:
(using
first template, Talkback (Toggle) as an example):
To use the templates:
1 Create a new event.
1
a templates:
new event.
To Create
useathe
1 Create
new
event.
12Crie
um
novo
evento.
Edit
the
event
name (for example, Talkback (Toggle) as
2
thea event
name (for example, Talkback (Toggle) as
1 Edit
Create
new
event.
2 Edit
the
event
name
example,
Talkback (Toggle)
as
shown
in the
table).
For(for
renaming
instructions,
see Renamshown
in the
table).
For
renaming
instructions,
see Renam2ing
Edite
o
nome
do
evento
(por
exemplo,
Talkbacksee
(Toggle)
como
shown
in
the
table).
For
renaming
instructions,
Renaman
Event
on
page
206.
2 Edit the event name (for example, Talkback (Toggle) as
ing
anna
Event
on page
206.
mostrado
tabela).
Para
instrues
de
como
renomear,
veja
Stage
Rack
Features
ingshown
an Eventthe
ontable).
page 206.
instructions,
see RenamRenomeando
um Evento
na renaming
pgina
206.
3 Click thein(Trigger)
AddFor
pop-up
menu
and choose Footswitch
3 Click
the are
(Trigger)
Add
pop-up
menu
and
choose
Footswitch
ing
an
on
page
206.
Stage
Racks
used
with
anSwitch
FOH
Rack,
and
provide
all stage
3
Click
the
(Trigger)
Add
pop-up
menu
choose
Footswitch
> Switch
1 Event
(Footswitch
1).
The
1and
trigger
type
is added,
>
Switch
1
(Footswitch
1).
The
Switch
1
trigger
type
is Racks
added,
audio
I/O
for
VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up
to
two
Stage
3>
Clique
no
menu
pop-up
(Trigger)
Add
e
escolha
Footswitch
>
Switch
1
(Footswitch
1).
The
Switch
1
trigger
type
is
added,
with
default
setting
Closed.
3 a
Click
the State
(Trigger)
Add of
pop-up
menu and choose Footswitch
with
a
default
State
setting
of
Closed.
Switch
1
(Footswitch
1). O tipo
de trigger Switch
1 total
adicionado,
cana be
used State
simultaneously,
supporting
up to 96
inputs.
with
default
setting
of
Closed.
> Switch
(Footswitch
1). Themenu
Switch
1 trigger
is added,
4 Click
the 1
(Action)
Add pop-up
and
choosetype
Talkback.
com
o estado
padro
Closed.
4
Click
the (Action)
Add pop-up
menu and choose Talkback.
with
a
default
State
setting
of
Closed.
4 Click
the
Add
pop-up
and
choose
The
Talkback
action is
added.
By menu
default,
the
actionTalkback.
State is
Audio
I/O(Action)
The Talkback
action
is(Action)
added.Add
By default,
theTalkback.
action State
is
4The
Clique
no
menu
pop-up
e
escolha
Aisbeao
Talkback
action
is
added.
By
default,
the
action
State
Toggle,
and
the
behavior
is
Latched.
There
is
no
Wait
(delay
4 Click
the the
(Action)
Add is
pop-up
menu
and
choose
Talkback.
48
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic
and
Toggle,
and
behavior
Latched.
There
is
nopreamps
Wait
(delay
beTalkback
adicionada.
Por
padro,
o
estado
da
ao
Toggle,
e
Toggle,
and
the behavior
Latched.
is no
(delay
be-iso
foreThe
firing)
needed
for this
action.ByThere
Talkback
action
isisthis
added.
default,
theWait
action
State
selectable
phantom
power.
fore individually
firing) needed
for
action.
comportamento
Latched.
No
h
Wait
(atraso
antes
do
disparo)
foreToggle,
firing)and
neededbehavior
for this action.
is Latched. There is no Wait (delay benecessrio
para the
esta
ao.
Switch
(Footswitch
1) channels;
is now configured
to toggle
Talkback
1
8 analog
output
expandable
up to 48
analog or
Switch
1 (Footswitch
is now
configured to toggle Talkback
fore firing)
needed for1)this
action.
Switch
1
(Footswitch
1)per
isfootswitch
now
to toggle Talkback
On or Off
eachoutputs
time the
is pressed.
digital
Stageconfigured
Rack.
On or1Off
each time1)the
footswitch
is pressed.para alternar o
OOn
Switch
(Footswitch
est
agoraisconfigurado
or Off each
time the 1)
footswitch
pressed.to toggle
Switch
1 (Footswitch
is now configured
Talkback
To use
Para
usarthe
os templates:
templates:
page 208.)
structions,
see Editing
Trigger
Type return
and Properties
on
5 5
After
testing
trigger,clique
click
Reset
the event
to its a seu
Aps
testarthe
o trigger,
Resettopara
retornar
o evento
5
After
testing the trigger, click Reset to return the event to its
page
208.)
5 estado
Afterstate.
testing
Ready
Ready.the trigger, click Reset to return the event to its
Ready state.
Ready
state.
5 After testing the trigger, click Reset to return the event to its
Ready state.
Tap
Tempo
for
Plug-ins
Additional
Required
Components
Tap
Tempo
para
Plug-ins
Tap
Tempo
Plug-ins
Tap
Tempo
forfor
Plug-ins
Tap
Tempo
lets you
quickly establish
a system
tempo
to use as
The
following
components
be
purchased
separately:
Tap
Tempo
lets
you
quicklymust
establish
a system
tempo
to use as
Tap
Tempo
for
Tap
Tempo
permite
estabelecer
rapidamente
System
Tempo
Tap
Tempo
lets
you
quickly
establish
a system
tempo
to
use
as para
a beat
clock
for
delay
and Plug-ins
echo
plug-ins
that um
support
Tempo
beatcomo
clock
forbeat
delay
andor
echo
plug-ins
that
support
Tempo
us-lo
para
plug-ins
deflat-panel
delay
e echo
suportem
a Video
Display
(15-inch
greater
VGAque
display
a
beat
clock
forum
delay
and
echo
plug-ins
support
Tempo
Sync.
Tap
Tempo
quickly
establish
athat
system
tempo
to use as
Tempo
Sync. lets you
Sync.
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA
and
Sync.
a beat clock for delay and echo plug-ins that support Tempo
DVI supported.
The system
tempo defaults to 120 BPM (beats per minute).
Sync.
system
defaults
120 BPM
BPM (beats
(beats per minute).
OThe
padro
do tempo
System
Tempo
to120
minute). Voc
The
system
defaults
to
BPM (beats
perincluding
minute).
You
can
set
atempo
custom
tempo
in120
a number
of ways
by
You
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
compatible)
pode
ajustar
tempo
personalizado
de(Windows
vrias
formas
que incluem
can
set um
a custom
tempo
in a number
of ways
including
by
You
can
set
a
custom
tempo
in
a
number
of
ways
including
by
tapping
a
Function
switch,
Footswitch
or
other
control
as
exThe
system
tempo Function,
defaults
120 BPMor
(beats
per
minute).
acionar
um
switch
Footswitcs
ouother
outro
controle
como
tapping
a Function
switch, to
Footswitch
control
as extapping
a Snake
Function
switch,
Footswitch
or other
control
as ex- by
plained
below.
system
tempo
is
stored
asof
a console
setting
You
can
set
aThe
custom
tempo
in
a number
including
Digital
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
explicado
abaixo.
O System
Tempo
isarmazenado
como
um
ajuste
plained
below.
The
system
tempo
stored
asways
aOnly)
console
setting
plained
below.
The
system
tempo
is
stored
as
a
console
setting
within
the
Show
file.
da
console
no
arquivo
Show.
tapping
a
Function
switch,
Footswitch
or
other
control
as
exwithin
The connection
the Show file.
within
the below.
Show file.
plained
The
system
tempo
is
stored
as
a
console
setting
a Digital
cable.
This
cable
Snapshots
canSnake
also store
and
recall
tempo.
Snapshots
tambm
armazenar
e carregar Tempo.
Snapshots
can
store and
recallpreferred
tempo.
within
thepodem
Show
file.
from Avid
or also
assembled
your
vendor.
Snapshots
can also
store and by
recall
tempo.
Talkback
entre
ligado
e
desligado
cada
vez
que
o
footswitch
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O
If you
prefer
momentary
talkback,
edit
the
event
by
doing
the
On or Off each time the footswitch is pressed.
A preconfigured Event for tap tempo is installed in the
pressionado.
If
you
prefer
momentary
talkback,
edit
the
event
by
doing
the
evento
pr-configurado
para
tapistempo
estininstalado
na
Snapshots
can also
store
and recall
tempo.
following.
If
youprefer
momentary
talkback,
edit
the event
doing the (if
AUm
preconfigured
Event
tempo
installed
Snake
connectors
to enable
primary
andby
redundant
A
preconfigured
Event
for for
tap tap
tempo
isVENUE
installed
in the the
Demo
Shows
folder
when
you
install
software.
ToVENUE.
following.
pasta
Demo
Shows
quando
voc
instala
o software
following.
Demo
Shows
folder
when
you
install
VENUE
software.
To
Optional
Components
applicable)
to ain
VENUE
Rack.
If you
prefertalkback
momentary
talkback,
edit
event
bytodoing
the
1 voc
Double-click
the connection
Talkback
action
the the
Actions
list
access
Se
preferir
momentneo,
edite
o FOH
evento:.
Demo
Shows
when
you
install
VENUE
software.
Toe clique
use Athe
example
Event,
gofor
to the
Filing
page
and
click
the
Para
usarfolder
um
evento
de
exemplo,
v
pgina
Filing
preconfigured
Event
tap
tempo
is installed
in
the
1 Double-click the Talkback action in the Actions list to access
use
the
example
Event,
gothe
to the
Filing
page
and
click
the
following.
1
the Talkback
action in the action
Actionsand
list to
access
itsDouble-click
editable
properties.
Or, right-click
choose
use
the
example
Event,
go
to
Filing
page
and
click
the
Load
tab,
then
select
the
file
Tap
Tempo
Examples
and
na aba
Load,
selecione
ooptional,
arquivo
Tap Tempo
The following
components
areyou
and
must
beExamples
Demo
Shows
folder
when
install
VENUE
software.
To e
its editable
properties.
Or,
right-click
the action
and
choose
Load
tab,
then
select
the
file
Tap
Tempo
Examples
and
1its
Clique
duas
vezes
na
ao
Talkback
na
Actions
List
para
acessar
editable
properties. Or, right-click the action and choose
Edit.
Load
tab,
then
selectEvent,
the file
Tap
Tempo
Examples
and
clique
no
boto
Load.
click
the
Load
button.
1 Double-click the Talkback action in the Actions list to access
purchased
separately:
use
the
example
go
to
the
Filing
page
and
click
the
Edit.
click
Load
button.
suas
propriedades editveis. Ou, clique com o boto direito na ao
Edit.its
click
the the
Load
button.
editable properties.
Or, right-click the action and choose
Load
tab, disk
then
select
the portable
file Tap Tempo
Examples
andfor
USB
flash
(or
other
USB storage
device
System
e escolha
Edit. Components
Usando Tap Tempo
State
Behavior
Edit.Action Type
Using
Tap
Tempo
click
the
Load
button.
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
Action Type
State
Behavior
Using
Tap
Tempo
Action Type
State
Behavior
Using
Tap
Tempo
os
Near-field
monitor
speakers
mix
position
monitoring
seguintes
trssteps
procedimentos
para
iniciar
o uso de Tap
Included
Components
DoSiga
the
following
three
to startfor
using
Tap
Tempo:
Action Type
State
Behavior
Do
following
three1/4-inch
steps to start
using Tap Tempo:
Using
Tap Tempo
the
Headphones
with
jack
DoTempo:
the
following
three
steps to start
using Tap Tempo:
Enable the System Tempo
the
Dynamic
or condenser
and
XLR
mic cable
Enable
System
Tempo
Do
following
three
stepsmicrophone
to start using
Tap
Tempo:
Habilite
System
Tempo
Enable
theothe
System
1 Go to(for
the Talkback)
Options > Misc page, locate the Tap Tempo section
1
Go tothe
theSystem
OptionsTempo
> Misc page, locate the Tap Tempo section
Enable
1
Go
thefollowing:
Options >(up
Misc page,
locate the Tap Tempo section
and
do
the
toFootswitches
2) localize
1and
V
pgina
Options >toMisc,
a seo Tap Tempo e faa o
do
the following:
and
do
the
following:
1 Turn
the
global
sync locate
by
clicking
theTempo
On switch
seguinte:
toon
the
Options
>tempo
Misc page,
theMIDI
Tap
section
Go
MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
devices)
Turn on the global tempo sync by clicking
the
On switch
Turn
on
the
global
tempo
sync
bytempo
clicking
the Onno
switch
and
Ligue
obelow
sincronismo
global
clicando
switch On
directly
the encoder
sode
that
it is lit
(on).
do
the
following:
BNC
cables
(forthe
connecting
Word
between
the
directly
below
encoder
so
thatclock
it ispara
lit
(on).
diretamente
abaixo
dos
codificadores
que
se
acenda
directly
below
the
encoder
so
that
it
is
lit
(on).
If desired,
the
encoder
to set
a system
tempo
value,
or
VENUE
Mouse Pad
Turn onuse
the
global
tempo
sync
by clicking
the
On switch
An action
and its properties
ready to be edited.
VENUE
system
and
external
devices)
(on).
If desired,
use the
encoder
todigital
set a system
tempo value, or
An
action
and
its
properties
ready
to
be
edited.
If
desired,
use
the
encoder
to
set
a
system
tempo
value,
or
Uma
ao
suas
prontas
serem
editadas
a valuebelow
directly
the Tempo
directly
theinto
encoder
so thatfield.
itto
is GPI
lit (on).
An action
and propriedades,
its properties
readypara
to be
edited.
eVENUE
Profile Guide
Se
25-pin
cables
(for
type
desejado,
o codificador
ajustar
umdevices)
valor de System
type
a D-Sub
valueuse
directly
intoconnecting
thepara
Tempo
field.
2 Click the action State pop-up menu (it displays Toggle by detype
adesired,
value
directly
intoselector
the to
Tempo
field.
If
desired,
click
the
Units
to
choose
Beats
Per
Min- or
2
Click
the
action
State
pop-up
menu
(it
displays
Toggle
by
de
If
use
the
encoder
set
a
system
tempo
value,
Two
(2)
console
lights
Tempo,
ou
digite
diretamente
um
valor
no
campo
Tempo.
An
action
and
its
properties
ready
to
be
edited.
2
Click
the
action
State
pop-up
menu
(it
displays
Toggle
by
decurrent
State
setting)
and select
On.por padro, ou o
If desired, click the Units selector to choose Beats
Per Min2fault,
Cliqueornothe
menu
pop-up
State
(que mostra
Toggle
If
desired,
click
the
Units
selector
to
choose
Beats
Per
Min- Per
ute
(BPM)
or
Milliseconds
as
the
units
for
displayed
values.
fault,
or
the
current
State
setting)
and
select
On.
type
a
value
directly
into
the
Tempo
field.
Seutedesejado,
clique no seletor Units para escolher Beats
atual
Dust
Cover
fault,
orProtective
thedecurrent
setting)
On.
ajuste
State)
eState
selecione
On.and select
(BPM) or Milliseconds as the units for displayed values.
2 Click
action
State
pop-up
displays
by deute
(BPM)
or
Milliseconds
as
the
units
for
displayed
values.
3 Click
thethe
action
Behavior
pop-upmenu
menu(it
and
select Toggle
While AcMinute
(BPM)
ou
Millissegundos
como
unidades
para
os
If desired, click the Units selector to choose Beats Pervalores
Min3
action
Behavior
pop-upand
menu andOn.
select While AcClick
Rack(s)
(see
next)
fault,
or the
the
current
Statepop-up
setting)
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
Options
3
Click
the
action
Behavior
menu
and
Acapresentados.
tive.
Together
with
the State
setting
(On), select
Whileselect
ActiveWhile
estabute
(BPM)
or
Milliseconds
as
the
units
for
displayed
values.
3 Clique
no
menu
pop-up
Behavior
e
selecione
While
Active.
tive. Together with the State setting (On), While Active estabtive.3 Together
with
the
State
(On),
Active establishes
momentary
control
of setting
the
action;
inWhile
this
example,
Click
action
Behavior
menu
and
While
AcJunto
com
othe
ajuste
State
(On),
While
Active
estabelece
controle
lishes
momentary
control
ofpop-up
the action;
in
thisselect
example,
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
Cables
lishes
momentary
control
of
the
action;
in
this
example,
Footswitch
1
is
now
assigned
to
provide
momentary
momentneo
da ao;
neste
exemplo,
o (On),
Footswitch
1Talkback
estestabagora
tive.
Together
with
the
State
setting
While
Active
Footswitch 1 is now assigned to provide momentary Talkback
Footswitch
1 oferecer
is now assigned
to
provide
momentary
Talkback
control.
atribudo
para
controle
momentneo
do
Talkback.
lishes
momentary
control
of
the
action;
in
this
example,
Each
Mix
Rack
or
FOH
Rack
includes:
websiteUnits
(www.avid.com).
control.
On/Off
control.
Units
On/Off
Footswitch
1
is
now
assigned
to
provide
momentary
Talkback
System Restore CD
Units
On/Off
Tap Tempo settings
control.
Tap
Tempo
settings
TapMix
TempoRack
settings
UnitsOptions
On/Off
Talkback
Statedoand
Behavior
editing
State
e Behavior
Talkback
aps aafter
edio
Each
Stage
Rack
Talkback
State
andincludes:
Behavior after editing
Talkback State and Behavior after editing
Talkback State and Behavior after editing
Tap Tempo
settings
Ajustes
Tap Tempo
I/O Options

outputs
Chapter
22: Events
213
provides
8 analog
Captulo 22: Events
213
Create a Tap Tempo Event

Crie um Evento Tap Tempo
2 Go to the Options > Events page and do the following in the

order
presented:
2 V pgina
Options > Events e siga os seguintes procedimentos
Create
a new Event and call it Tap Tempo.
na ordem
apresentada:
Crie
um novo
evento
e nomeie-o
Tap Tempo.
Click
the Add
button
in the Trigger
area, and select an
Clique
no
boto
Add
na
area
Trigger,
e selecione
um Function
available Function switch (F switch)
or Footswitch.
Switch disponvel (F switch) ou Footswitch.
Click
AddAdd
button
in theAction,
Action
section, Tap
andTempo.
choose
Clique
nothe
boto
na seo
e escolha
Tap Tempo.
Habilitando o Tempo Sync e Start Tapping do Plug-in

Enable the Plug-ins Tempo Sync and Start Tapping
EmNext,
seguida,
navegue
um
plug-inand
de delay
e habilite
seuSync
switch
navigate
to apara
delay
plug-in
enable
its Tempo
Tempo
Sync.
Repita
para
os
outros
plug-ins
de
delay
que
deseja
switch. Repeat for other delay plug-ins you want to sync.
sincronizar.
Tips
Using
TapTap
Tempo
Dicasfor
para
Utilizar
Tempo
The plug-in Tempo Sync switch enables/disables that individO swtich Tempo Sync do plug-in hailita/desabilita o valor do delay
ual
plug-ins
delay
valuepara
from
following
the Tempo.
system tempo.
individual
desse
plug-in
seguir
o System
Use
individual
plug-in
Tempo
Sync switches
sync one,
Usethe
os switches
Tempo
Sync
para sincronizar
um to
, alguns
ou mais
some
or all
delay plug-ins.
plug-ins
de delay.
Tempos
20 BPM
BPM (3,000
(3,000 ms)
ms) a
to300
300 BPM
BPM (200
(200 ms).
Tempos can
poderange
variarfrom
de 20
ms).
Some
delay
plug-ins
offer
different
time
divisions
(such
Alguns plug-ins de delay oferecem diferentes divises de tempo
(como
1/8th,
ou pontuados)
que select
voc pode
selecionar para
as
1/8th,
16th,16th,
or dotted)
that you can
for variations
variaes
baseadas
no System
Tempo.
seus plug-ins
based
on the
system tempo.
Check
yourVerifique
delay plug-ins
to see de
ver se
suportam
Sync e ajustes
de subdivises
(a
ifdelay
theypara
support
Tempo
SyncTempo
and subdivision
settings
(most,
maioria,
mas
no todos, aceita).
but
not all,
do).
Snapshots e Tempo Sync

Snapshots and Tempo Sync
voc
precisa
de delay
um tempo
de delay
a cada vez
IfSeyou
need
a specific
time every
time aespecfico
certain snapshot
que
determinado
snapshot
carregado,
armazene
Tempo
is recalled, store Tempo with snapshots. For details, see Add-com
snapshots. Para detalhes, veja Adicionando Dados de Tempo a
ing Tempo Data to Snapshots on page 196.
Snapshots na pgina 196.
Tempo Sync
Tempo Sync in ModDelay and Line6 Echo Farm

Tempo Sync em ModDelay e Line6 Echo Farm
3 Tap the assigned Tap Tempo trigger (Function switch or Foot-
time with
the music.
At least
two(Function
taps are needed
3 switch)
Acione oin trigger
atribudo
a Tap
Tempo
Switch to
ou
set the tempo;
additional
taps canPelo
result
in adois
more
accurate
Footswitch)
no andamento
da msica.
menos
acionamentos
setting. para ajustar o tempo; acionamentos adicionais
sotempo
necessrios
podem resultar em ajustes de tempo mais precisos.
The delay time of all Tempo Sync-enabled plug-ins change to
matchde
thedelay
system
tempo.
tapping,
the calculated
O tempo
de todos
os While
plug-ins
habilitados
para sincronismo
tempo
is also
shown
in the
Status
area of theao
screen.
com
o Tempo
so
alterados
para
corresponder
System Tempo.
No momento do acionamento, o tempo calculado tambm
apresentado na rea Status da tela. Se voc precisa especificar o
tempo de delay a cada vez que determinado snapshot carregado,
armazene o tempo com snapshots. Para detalhes, veja Adicionando
Dados de Tempo a Snapshots na pgina 196.
214
Guia VENUE Profile
Tipos de Triggers
Trigger
Types
A seguinte
tabela
lista os os tipos de triggers disponveis e suas propriedades.
The following table lists the available trigger types and properties, along with a description of each.
Table 23. Trigger List, with default settings
Trigger Type
Property 1
Property 2
Fader Above
Channel name/number
Fader level inf to +12 dB

Fader moved above threshold level
Additional
Required Components
(Default:
60 dB)
Stage Rack Features
Description
Fader Below
Channel name/number
Fader level inf to +12 dB
Fader moved below threshold level
audio I/O for VENUE Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks (Default: inf)
Mute
Channel name/number
On (default)
Mute active/inactive
DVI supported.
Audio I/O
Off

48 inputs with remotelyAny
controllable
mic preamps and On (default)
input, output, VCA,
Solo/AFL active/inactive
individually selectable phantom
power.
Solo In Place
Off
Solo/AFL

The connection between On
FOH
Rackpress
and (down)
Stage Rack requires
Function
Switch
Press(default)
button
digital
outputs per StageFunction
Rack. Switch 18
be purchased
directly
Releasea Digital Snake cable. This
Oncable
buttoncan
release
(up)

Footswitch
Footswitch 1, 2
Open
Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if Closed (default)

Optional
GPI Input
GPI input 12
Preview Mode
AllPropagate
VENUE Mode
Edit Mode

Talkback
VENUE Mouse Pad
Event
triggered
by storage
snapshotdevice for
USB flash disk (or other
portable
USB
On (default)
Preview Mode active/inactive
Off
On (default)
Propagate Mode active/inactive
Off
(for Talkback)
Footswitches (up to 2)Edit Mode active/inactive

On (default)
Off
BNC cables (for connecting
Word
clock between the
On (default)
Talkback
active/inactive
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
Off
VENUE Profile Guide

Flip
to Faders
Two
(2) console lights
Components
Open
GPI Input high
The
following componentsGPI
areInput
optional,
Closed
(default)
low and must be
Recall Snapshot
Snapshot number and name
System
Components
Included Components
Footswitch input high

Footswitch input low
On (default)
Off
Flip to Faders active/inactive
Show
Mode (see next)
Rack(s)
Console Show Mode

is active
VENUE Profile Expansion
Options
Config Mode
Console
ModeProfile
is activesystems.
The following options can be
addedConfig
to VENUE
website (www.avid.com). System software initialized

System
Each
MixStart
System
Plug-In
RackRestore
Ready CD
Mirrors plug-ins rack Ready state
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options



outputs
Captulo 22: Events
215
AT16 A-Net Output Card that provides 16 Chapter

channels
A-Net 215
22:ofEvents
Tipos de Actions
Action Types
A seguinte tabela lista os os tipos de aes disponveis e suas propriedades.
The following table lists the available Action types and properties, along with a description of each.
Table 24. Action types
Action Type
Property
State
Behavior
Target Next Channel
Selected Channel advances by one
Target Previous Channel
Selected Channel reverses by one
Copy Selected Channel
Channel copy operation
Channel paste operation
Mute Channel
Channel
name/number
On
Off
Toggle (default)
Latch (default)
While Active
Mute selected channel
Mute Group
Mute Group 18
On
Off
Toggle (default)
Latch (default)
While Active
Toggle Mute group status
On
Off
Toggle (default)
Latch (default)
While Active
Mute all stage outputs
Mute All Stage Outputs
Clear Solos
216
Description
Mirrors console Solo Clear
Light Function Switch
18
On (default)
Off
Toggle
Latch
While Active
(default)
Lights Function switch
Flash Function Switch
18
On (default)
Off
Toggle
Latch
While Active
(default)
Flashes Function switch
Recall Snapshot
Snapshot number and name
Recall specified snapshot
Mirrors Snapshot Next switch
Recall Previous Snapshot
Mirrors Snapshot Previous switch
Recall Selected Snapshots
Mirrors Snapshot Recall switch
Store to Selected Snapshot
Mirrors Snapshot Store switch
Preview Mode
On
Off
Toggle (default)
Activate/deactivate Preview Mode
Propagate Mode
On
Off
Toggle
Propagate mode active while trigger

is true
Absolute Edit Mode
On
Off
Toggle (default)
Enters Edit mode when trigger is

true; exits via Absolute when trigger
goes false
Relative Edit Mode
On
Off
Toggle (default)
Enters Edit mode when trigger is

true; exits via Relative when trigger
goes false
Guia VENUE Profile
Table 24. Action types

Action Type
Property
State
Behavior
Description
GPI Output
12
Open
Closed (default)
Toggle
Pulse, 0.3s (default)

Latch
While Active
Pulses or latches selected GPI Output
Flash Console Lights

Top Row Flip to Faders
(D-ShowRack
Main only)
Stage
Features
Flashes console lights

On
Off
Toggle (default
Bottom
to Faders
audio
I/ORow
forFlip
VENUE
Profile systems. Up to two StageOnRacks
Off
Audio
I/O and Sidecar(s)
Link Main
Latch (default)
Mirrors top encoder row Flip to Fad-
While Active
Additional
RequiredersComponents

Latch (default)
Mirrors bottom encoder row Flip to
Video
greater
flat-panel
VGA display
WhileDisplay
Active (15-inch or
Faders
(D-Show
Main only)
Toggle (default) recommended; 1024x768 minimum resolution). VGA and
DVI supported.
Faders
On
Latch (default)
Mirrors console function
USB
keyboard
(D-Show
Main
only)
Encoders
Off
While
Active
Both
Toggle (default)
8 analog
output
or
Variable
Groups
Modechannels; expandable up to 48 analog
On
Latch (default)
Toggles Variable Groups Mode on/off
(VENUE
Profile
and D-Show
only)Rack.
Off
While Active
(only if console config is 24-bus
digital
outputs
per Stage
cable can be purchased directly
Toggle (default) a Digital Snake cable. This
mode)
Input Safe Switch Mode

Tap Tempo
System Components
Cue on Mains
Included Components
All
VENUE
Cancel
Operation
Cycles through Input Safe Switch

modes
Optional Components
Sets the system tempo to synchro-

nize delay plug-ins that support
Tempo Sync
Cue or
level
(Solo/Monitor
bus)
transfer of Show data;Maps
512 MB
larger
recommended)
level to the Mains fader; maps Mains
Near-field monitor speakers

forencoders
mix position
to Output
13 monitoring
console Cancel
switch
Dynamic or condenserMirrors
microphone
and XLR
mic(and
cable
Esc key on keyboard)
(for Talkback)
VENUE Mouse Pad

VENUE Profile Guide

Rack(s) (see next)


System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options



outputs
Captulo 22: Events
217
218
Guia VENUE Profile
Chapter
23:
Synchronization
Chapter
23:
Synchronization
Chapter
23:
Synchronization
Captulo
23:
Sincronizao
Chapter 23: Synchronization
VENUE systems provide a set of MIDI-based synchronization
O sistema
VENUE
oferece
um conjunto
recursos desynchronization
sincronizao
VENUE
systems
provide
ofde
MIDI-based
VENUE
systems
a setaofsetMIDI-based
synchronization
features
thatprovide
allow
automation
and
remote
control of snapbaseados
em MIDI
que
permitem
automao
e controle
remoto
de
features
that
allow
automation
and
remote
control
of snapfeatures
that
allow
automation
and remote
of snapshots,
triggering
of
external
devicescontrol
when
are
snapshots,
e and
o disparo
de dispositivos
externos
quandosnapshots
snapshots
VENUE
systems
provide
a
set
of
MIDI-based
synchronization
shots,
and
triggering
of external
devices
when
snapshots
are
shots,
and
triggering
of
external
devices
when
snapshots
are
recalled.
so
recarregados.
features
that allow automation and remote control of snap-
5 Control MTC playback from the MTC generator controls by

5 Controle
o playback
do MTCfrom
pelos
do gerador
de MTC
5 Control
thecontroles
MTC
generator
controls
5 Control
playback
from the MTC
generator
controls
by by
doing MTC
any MTC
of
theplayback
following:
seguindo
seguintes
procedimentos:
doing um
anydos
of the
following:
doing
any of the following:
Start
MTC
playback
by
clicking
the
Play
button.
MTC
playback
clicking
thenoPlay
button.
Start
Pause
playback
doby
MTC
clicando
boto
Pause.
doing
any
ofo the
following:
Pause
MTC
playback
by
clicking
the
Pause
button.
recalled.
recalled.
Pause
MTC
playback
by
clicking
the
Pause
button.

Pare
o
playback
do
MTC
e
volte
ao
incio
pressionando
o boto
Pause
MTC
playback
by
clicking
the
Pause
button.
shots, and triggering of external devices when snapshots are
Start
MTCMTC
playback
by clicking
thetoPlay
Stop
playback
and reset
thebutton.
Start Time by pressStop.
ing
Stop
MTC
playback
and
reset
to the Start
Time
by pressrecalled.
MTC
playback
and
reset
to the
by pressthe
Stop
button.
Stage Rack Features
Stop
Pause
MTC
playback
by clicking
the Start
PauseTime
button.
Additional
Required
Components
ing
the
Stop
button.
ing
the
Stop
button.
Automating Recall of Snapshots with
Stop MTC playback and reset to the Start Time by pressAutomatizando
Carregamento
deprovide
Snapshots
Automating
Recall
of
Snapshots
Stage
Racks are used
with
an of
FOHSnapshots
Rack,
and
allwith
stage
Automating
with
MIDI
TimeRecall
Code
ing the Stop button.
audio
I/OTime
for
VENUE
com
MIDI
Code
MIDI
Time
Code
MIDI
Time
Code
Automating
Recall
of
Snapshots
with
canYou
be used
simultaneously,
supporting
up towith
96 total
inputs.
can automate
the recall
of snapshots
MIDI
Time
You
can
automate
the
recall
of snapshots
with
MIDI
MIDI
Code
Voc
automatizar
carregamento
de trigger
snapshots
com Time
MIDI
Youpode
canTime
automate
theoVENUE
recall
ofsystem
snapshots
with
MIDI
Time
Code
(MTC).
The
can
snapshots
with
DVI supported.
Code
(MTC).
VENUE
system
can
trigger
snapshots
with Controles
Time
Code
(MTC).
O The
sistema
VENUE
pode
disparar
snapshots
com
Code
MIDI MIDI
TimeTime
Code
controls
Audio
I/O
Code
(MTC).
The
VENUE
system
can
trigger
with
internally
generated
MIDI
Time
Code,
orsnapshots
itMIDI
can
read
MIDI
You
can
automate
the
recall
of
snapshots
with
Time
MIDI
Time
Code
controls
MIDI
Time
Code
gerado
internamente,
ou
pode
ler
MIDI
Time
Code
internally
generated
MIDI
Time
Code,
or
it
can
read
MIDI
USB
keyboard
and
MIDI
Time
Code
controls
internally
generated
MIDI
Timecontrollable
Code,
or it can
read
MIDIand
Time
Code
from
an
external
source.
48
inputs
with
remotely
mic
preamps
Code
(MTC).
The
VENUE
system
can
trigger
snapshots
with
de fontes
externas.
Lendo
MIDI
Time
Code
ExternoMIDI Time Code
Time
Code
from
an
external
source.
External
Time Code
from an external source.
MIDI Reading
Time Code controls
individually
phantom
power.
internally
generatedselectable
MIDI Time
Code, or
it can read MIDI
Reading
External
MIDI
Time
Code
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
For instructions on MIDI and other connections required for Reading
External
MIDI
Time
Code
Para
instrues
sobre
MIDI
eother
outras
conexes
necessrias
Time
Code
from
an on
external
source.
For
8 analog
output
channels;
expandable
up torequired
48
analog
The VENUE
canescravo
slave todeexternal
MTC eand
automateo
VENUEsystem
pode ser
MTC externo
automatizar
For
instructions
onsee
MIDI
and
other
connections
required
instructions
MIDI
and
connections
for orfor O sistema
synchronization,
Chapter
2,
Configuring
and
ConThe
connection
between
FOH
Rack
and
Stage
Rack requires
The
VENUE
system
can
slave
to
external
MTC
automate
External
MIDI
Code
para
sincronizao,
vejaChapter
o Captulo
2, Configurando
e Reading
carregamento
de
snapshots
baseado
no
MTC
The
VENUE
system
can slave
to Time
external
MTCrecebido.
and and
automate
digital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
the
recall
of
snapshots
based
on
the
incoming
MTC.
synchronization,
see
2,
Configuring
and
Consynchronization,
see Chapter 2, Configuring and Connecting Profile.
athe
Digital
Snake
cable. This
cable
can
be
purchased
directly
recall
of
snapshots
based
on
the
incoming
MTC.
For
instructions
on
MIDI
and
other
connections
required
for
Conectando
a
Profile.
the recall of snapshots based on the incoming MTC.
necting
Profile.
necting
Profile.
Thefrom
VENUE
system
can slavebytoyour
external
MTCvendor.
and automate
Avid
or assembled
preferred
synchronization,
Chapter
ParaTo
lerread
MIDI
Time
Code
externo:
Synchronization
andsee
Control
I/O2, Configuring and Conexternal
MIDI
Time
Code:
the
recall
of
snapshots
based
on
the
incoming
MTC.
Gerando
MIDI Time
Code
Generating
MIDI Time Code
necting
Profile.
To read
external
Code:
To read
external
MIDIMIDI
TimeTime
Code:
Snake
connectors
to
enable
primary
and
redundant
(if
Generating
MIDI
Time
Code
1
Go
to
the
Options
page
and
click
the
Snapshots
tab.
Generating MIDI Time Code
1 V pgina Options e clique na aba Snapshots.
Components
1 to
Go
to Options
the
Options
and
the Snapshots
You
can
set the
VENUEVENUE
system
to generate
MIDI
Time
Code
applicable)
to a para
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
Voc pode
ajustar
o connection
sistema
gerar
MIDI
Time
Code
e 1ToOptional
Go
the
page
and
clickclick
the Snapshots
tab. tab.
read
external
MIDI
Timepage
Code:
canthe
set VENUE
the
VENUE
system
to generate
MIDI
Time
Code
Generating
MIDI
Time
Code
2 Under MTC Mode, click Read. A MIDI Time Code display apYou You
can automate
set
system
to generate
MIDI
Time
Code
and
the
recall
snapshots
based
on
MTC
playback.
automatizar
o carregamento
deofsnapshots
baseado
na
reproduo
2The
Emfollowing
MTC Mode,
clique
Read.
Umoptional,
display
MIDI
Time
Code
aparece
components
are
and
must
be display
Under
MTC
Mode,
click
A MIDI
Time
Code
1
Go2
to
the
page
and
click
the
Snapshots
tab.
and
automate
the
recall
of
snapshots
based
on
MTC
playback.
2
Under
MTC
Mode,
click
Read.
A MIDI
Time
Code
display
ap- appears
at Options
the
bottom
of
theRead.
screen.
and
automate
the
recall
of
snapshots
based
on
MTC
playback.
deYou
MTC.
na
parte
de
baixo
da
tela.
can set the VENUE system to generate MIDI Time Code
purchased
separately:
pears
at
the
bottom
of
the
screen.
pears at the bottom of the screen.
To generate
MIDI
Time
Code frombased
the VENUE
system:
2 Under MTC Mode, click Read. A MIDI Time Code display apand
automate
the
recall
of snapshots
on MTC
playback.
Components
To generate
MIDI
Time
the VENUE
system:
Para
gerar
MIDIMIDI
Time
Code
peloCode
sistema
ToSystem
generate
Time
Code
fromfrom
theVENUE:
VENUE
system:
pears at the bottom of the screen.
1 to
Gothe
toMIDI
the Options
page
and
click
the system:
Snapshots
1
Options
page
and
click
the
Snapshots
tab. tab.
To Go
Time
Code
from
the
VENUE
1 V
generate
pgina
Options
e
clique
na
aba
Snapshots.
2 Under MTC
Mode, click Generate. MIDI Time Code generator
Included
Components
2 to
Under
MTC
Mode,
click
Generate.
Time
generator
1 Under
Gocontrols
the
page
and
clickof
the
Snapshots
tab.
2
MTCOptions
Mode,
click
Generate.
MIDI
Time
CodeCode
generator
appear
at
the
bottom
theMIDI
screen.
MIDI Time Code display
2 Em
Mode,
clique
Generate.
O of
gerador
de MIDI Time Code
controls
appear
at bottom
the bottom
thefollowing:
screen.
AllMTC
VENUE
Profile
systems
include
the
controls
appear
at the
of the
screen.
Time
MIDI
Dynamic
or display
Display
MIDI
TimeCode
Code
MIDI
Time
Code
display
2 Under
click
MIDI Time Code generator
aparece
na MTC
parteMode,
de baixo
daGenerate.
tela.
VENUE
automatically detects the frame rate of the incoming
(for
Talkback)
controls appear at the bottom of the screen.
VENUE
automatically
detects
thedrop,
frame
of incoming
the
incoming
MIDI
Timeautomatically
Code
display
VENUE
the
frame
rate
of
the
time
code
(24 fps, detects
25 fps,
30 fps
orrate
30do
fps
non-drop).
VENUE
automaticamente
detecta
o frame
rate
MIDI
Time Code
time
Footswitches
(up25
tofps,
2) 30 fps
code
(24
fps,
drop,
or
30
fps
non-drop).
time
code(24
(24fps,
fps,25
25 fps,
fps,30
30 fps
fps drop,
drop,ou
or30
30 fps
fps non-drop).
non-drop).
recebido
VENUE
automatically
detects
the frame
ratethe
of the
incoming
MIDI
Time(for
Code
display
indicates
following:
The
MIDI
cables
connecting
external
MIDI
devices)
time
code
(24
fps,
25
fps,
30
fps
drop,
or
30
fps
non-drop).
The
MIDI
Time
Code
display
indicates
the
following:
The
Time
Code
display
indicates
following:
When
MIDI
Time
Code
not the
present,
the display
MIDI
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
the shows
O display
MIDI
Time
Code
indica
oisseguinte:
a
When
MIDI
Time
Code
is est
not
present,
the
display
shows
VENUE Mouse Pad
When
MIDI
Time
Code
is
not
present,
the
display
shows

Quando
MIDI
Time
Code
no
presente,
o
display
mostra
series
of
dashes.
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
The MIDI Time Code display indicates the following:
a
series
of
dashes.
srie
de
traos.
auma
series
ofD-Sub
dashes.
VENUE Profile Guide
When
MIDI
Time
Code
is present,
present,to
the
current
time code
25-pin
cables
(for
connecting
GPI
devices)
When
MIDI
Time
Code
is not
the
display
shows

Quando
MIDI
Time
Code
presente,
o valor
atual
docode
time
When
MIDI
Time
Code
is present,
the
current
time
When
MIDI
Time
Code
isest
present,
the current
time
code
value
is
shown
in green.
acode
series
of
dashes.
apresentado
emgreen.
verde.
value
is
shown
in
value is shown in green.
Setting
Protective
Dust
the MIDI
TimeCover
Code Mode
When MIDI Time Code is present, the current time code
Setting
the MIDI
Time
Code
Mode
Setting
the
MIDI
Time
Code
Mode
Rack(s) (see next)
value is shown
in green.
VENUE
Profile
Expansion Options
3 Choose the MTC Frame Rate from the Frame Rate pop-up
3
Choose
the
MTC
Frame
Rate
from
the
Frame
Rate
pop-up
Setting
the MIDI
Time25
Code
3
Choose
the
Frame
Rate
pop-up
menu
(24 MTC
fps,
fps,Mode
30
fpsfrom
drop,the
or Frame
30 fps Rate
non-drop).
Ajustando o Modo MIDI Time Code
menu
(24 25
fps,fps,
25 30
fps,
30drop,
fps drop,
30
fps non-drop).
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
Cables
menu
(24 fps,
fps
or and
30orfps
non-drop).
3 Choose
thewant
MTCMTC
Frame
Rate from
the Frame
Rate pop-up
4 If you
playback
to start
at a different
time than For details on all VENUE systems and options, visit the Avid
3 Escolha
oyou
Frame
Rate
doplayback
MTC
nostart
menu
Frame Rate
(24
4
If
want
MTC
to
at non-drop).
a different
time
than website (www.avid.com).
menu
(24
fps,
25or
fps,
30
fps
drop,
or start
30
fps
Mix
Rack
FOH
Rack
includes:
4 Each
If the
you
want
MTC
playback
to
at apop-up
different
than
currently
displayed
time,
enter
start
timetime
in the
Start
fps, 25the
fps,currently
30 fps drop,
ou 30 fps
non-drop).
displayed
time,
enter
a
start
time
in
the
Start
the currently
time,
enter a start time in the Start
Time
field,displayed
and press
Enter.
System
Restore
CD
4 If you
want
MTC
playback
to start at a different time than
field,
and
press
Enter.
TimeTime
field,
and
press
Enter.
ECx
Ethernet
Installer
CD
4 Se
deseja
que aControl
reproduo
do aMTC
setime
inicie
tempo
thevoc
currently
displayed
time,Software
enter
start
inem
theum
Start
Mix Rack Options
diferente
que
o
tempo
mostrado
atualmente,
entre
o
valor
no
campo
Time field,
and
press
Enter.
Start Time, e pressione Enter.
Start
MTC
playback
clicking
the
Play
button.
Inicie
o playback
do MTC
clicando
boto
Play.
5 Control
MTC
playback
fromby
the
MTCnogenerator
controls by
I/O Options

Chapter 23: Synchronization 219

Chapter
23: Synchronization
Chapter
23: Synchronization
219 219

Chapter 23: Synchronization 219
outputs
Captulo 23: Sincronizao
219
Snapshot MIDI Time Code Display

Snapshot
MIDI
Time
Code
Snapshot
MIDI
Time
CodeorDisplay
Display
Display
Snapshot
MIDI
Time
Code
When
the system
is set
to generate
read MIDI Time Code,
When
the
set
generate
read
MIDI
Time
the
Snapshots
Listis
code or
values
a green
Recall
When
the system
system
isshows
set to
totime
generate
or
read and
MIDI
Time Code,
Code,
Quando
o
sistema
est
ajustado
para
gerar
ou
ler
MIDI
Time
Code,
a
the
Snapshots
List
shows
time
code
values
and
a
green
Recall
Enable
indicator
for
each time
snapshot
entry.
the
Snapshots
List
shows
code
values
and
a
green
Snapshots
List
mostrafor
os valores
de time entry.
code e um indicador Recall
verde
Enable
indicator
each
snapshot
Enable indicator for each snapshot entry.
Recall Enable para cada item de snapshot.
Capturing Time Code Values in Snapshots

Capturing
Time
Values
in
Code
CapturingValores
TimeTime
Code
Values
in Snapshots
Snapshots
Capturando
Code
em Snapshots
To capture the current MTC value in a new snapshot:

To
capture
the current
MTC
value
in
a
new
snapshot:
To
capture
current
MTC
value
in Generate
anovo
new snapshot:
snapshot:
Para
capturar
o valor
MTC
atual
em um
1 With
thethe
system
in MTC
Read
or
mode, start time
1 With
the
system
in
MTC
Read
or
Generate
mode, start time
code
playback.
1 With the system in MTC Read or Generate mode, start time
1code
Com playback.
o sistema no modo MTC Read ou Generate, inicie o playback
code
2 time
Doplayback.
one
of the following:
do
code.
2 Do
one
the
During
click the New button.
2 Do
one of
of playback,
the following:
following:
2 Siga
um dos playback,
seguintes procedimentos:
During
During
playback, click
click the
the New
New button.
button.
or
Durante
o playback, clique no boto New.
Pause
playback
at
the
time
code
value you want to cap ou or
or
Pause
playback
at
the
time
code
you
want
to
Pause
o
playback
no
valor
de
time
code
ture,
and
click
the
New
button.
Pause playback at the time code value
valueque
youdeseja
want capturar,
to capcap- e
clique
boto
ture, no
and
clickNew.
the New button.
Snapshots List showing time code values and indicators
Snapshots List showing time code values and indicators
Snapshots
List showing
and indicators
Snapshots
List mostrando
valorestime
time code
code evalues
indicadores
Assigning Time Code Values to Snapshots
Assigning
Time
Code
Values to
Snapshots
Atribuindo
Valores
Time
Code
aset
Snapshots
Assigning
Time
Code
Snapshots
With
the
VENUE
system
toValues
generate to
or read
MIDI Time
system
setcode
to generate
read MIDIbyTime
Code,the
youVENUE
can assign
time
values toorsnapshots
enterWith
the VENUE
setpara
to generate
ComWith
o sistema
VENUEsystem
ajusado
gerar ouorlerread
MIDIMIDI
TimeTime
Code,
Code,
you
can
assign
time
values
to
snapshots
entering
values
manually,
or
by code
capturing
MTC
playback by
values.
Code,
you
can
assign
time
code
values
to
snapshots
by
entervoc pode atribuir valores de time code para snapshots atribuindo
ing
values
manually,
or
by
capturing
MTC
playback
values.
ing manualmente,
values manually,
or by capturing
MTC
playback MTC.
values.
valores
ou capturando
valores
de playback
Manually Assigning Time Code Values to
Atribuindo
Manualmente
Valores
Time
Codeto
Manually
Assigning
Code
Values
Snapshots
Manually
Assigning Time
Time
Code
Values
to Values
Snapshots
Snapshots
Snapshots
To manually assign an MTC value to a snapshot:
ParaTo
atribuir
manualmente
MTC
snapshot:
manually
assign an um
MTCvalor
value
to aa um
snapshot:
To
manually
assign an
MTC
value to a the
snapshot:
1 In
the Snapshots
List,
double-click
MTC value you want
In
the
Snapshots
List,
double-click
the
MTC value
you
want
change.
1
Nato
Snapshots
List,
clique
duas
vezes
no
valor
que
1 In the Snapshots List, double-click the MTCMTC
value
youdeseja
want
1
to
alterar.
to change.
change.
Snapshot showing selected MTC value
Snapshot
mostrando
valor MTC
selecionado
Snapshot
showing
selected
MTC value
Snapshot
MTC value
2 Do oneshowing
of the selected
following:
Do
one
of
the
following:
2
2 Siga
um
dos seguintes
procedimentos:
From
the
keyboard,
type a new MTC value.
2 Do
one
of
the
following:
ture, and click the New button.

A new snapshot appears with the time code value at the time
A
snapshot
time
code
value
at
the
time
of
creation.
Um
novo
snapshotappears
aparecewith
com othe
valor
time
code
value
momento
A new
new
snapshot
appears
with
the
time
code
value
atdo
the
time
da
criao.
of
creation.
of creation.
To capture the current MTC value in an existing snapshot:
Para
capturar o valor
MTCMTC
atualvalue
em um
snapshot existente:
To
capture
current
in an
snapshot:
To
capture the
thethe
current
MTC in
value
an existing
existing
Right-click
snapshot
thein
Snapshots
listsnapshot:
and choose
Right-click
the
snapshot
in
Snapshots
list
and
Timecode
Set
Clique
com To.
o boto
direito
no snapshot
List e
Right-click
the
snapshot
in the
the
Snapshotsna
listSnapshots
and choose
choose
Set
Timecode
To.
escolha
Set
Timecode
To.
Set Timecode To.
The time code value is updated to the currently displayed
time
is
currently
displayed
value.
OThe
valor
timecode
codevalue
atualizado
parato
valor
apresentado
no display.
The
time
code
value
is updated
updated
toothe
the
currently
displayed
value.
value.
Ordenando Snapshots pelo Valor Time Code
Sorting Snapshots by Time Code Value

Sorting
Snapshots
by
Time
Code
Value
Voc
ordenar
snapshots
Snapshots
pelo valor
Sorting
Snapshots
byna
Time
Code
You pode
can sort
snapshots
in the
Snapshots
listList
byValue
Time
Code Time
Code,
de modo
que apaream
em
ordem cronolgica.
You can
sort snapshots
in the
Snapshots
list by Time Code
value,
sosort
thatsnapshots
they appear
in chronological
You can
can
sort
snapshots
in the
the
Snapshots list
listorder.
by Time
Time Code
Code
You
in
Snapshots
by
value,
so
appear
in
chronological
order.
value, Quando
so that
that they
they
appear
in
chronological
order.
atrelados ao MTC, snapshots sempre sero
When chasing to MTC, snapshots will always recall in
chamados na ordem cronolgica, independentemente da
When
chasingorder,
to MTC,
snapshots
willorder
always
recall
in
chronological
regardless
of their
in the
SnapWhen
MTC,
snapshots
ordemchasing
deles natoSnapshots
List. will always recall in
chronological
order,
regardless
of
their
order
in
the
Snapshots
list.
chronological order, regardless of their order in the Snapshots
Para ordenar
shots list.
list.snapshots por seus valores atribudos MIDI Time
To sort snapshots by their assigned MIDI Time Code value:
Code:
To
sort
by
MIDI
Code
value:
ToRight-click
sort snapshots
snapshots
by their
their assigned
assigned
MIDI Time
Timelist
Code
value:
any snapshot
in the Snapshots
and
choose
Re-Sort
Clique
com
oTime
boto
direito in
emthe
qualquer
snapshot
na choose
Snapshots
Right-click
any
snapshot
Snapshots
list
and
All
By
Code.
Right-click any snapshot in the Snapshots list and choose
List
e escolha
Re-Sort
All By Time Code.
Re-Sort
All
By
Time
Code.
Re-Sort All By Time Code.
No teclado,
digite um novotype
valor MTC.
From
From the
the keyboard,
keyboard, type a
a new
new MTC
MTC value.
value.
ou or
or
Press
the
Left
and
Right
Arrow
keys
to
theentre
cursor
or as setas Left e Right para mover move
Pressione
o cursor
os
Press
the
Left
and
Right
Arrow
keys
to
move
the
between
number
fields,
and
the
Up
and
Down
Arrow
campos
de
nmeros
e
as
setas
Up
e
Down
para
aumentar
ou
Press the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the cursor
cursor
diminuir
oto
valor
selecionado.
between
number
fields,
and
and
keys
increase
and
decrease
theUp
selected
value.Arrow
between
number
fields,
and the
the
Up
and Down
Down
Arrow
keys
keys to
to increase
increase and
and decrease
decrease the
the selected
selected value.
value.
3 Press Enter
another
snapshot
MTC
to accept
3 Pressione
Enter or
ou click
clique
em outro
valor MTC
devalue
snapshot
para
3 Press
Enter
or
click
another
snapshot
MTC
value
to
accept
the
entry.
aceitar
a
entrada.
3 Press Enter or click another snapshot MTC value to accept
the
the entry.
entry.
Right-click menu for items in the Snapshots list

Right-click
items
the Snapshots
list
Clicando
com omenu
botofor
direito
parainitems
de menu na Snapshots
List
Right-click menu for items in the Snapshots list

220
Guia VENUE Profile
Habilitando Snapshots Para Carregamento Automatizado
Enabling
Snapshots
Automated
Recall
Enabling
Snapshots
forfor
Automated
Recall
Enabling
Snapshots
for
Automated
Recall
Controle
Remoto
de
Carregamento
Remote
Control
Snapshot
Recall de
Enabling
Enabling
Snapshots
Snapshots
for
for
Automated
Automated
Recall
Recall
Control
ofof
Snapshot
Recall
Enabling
Snapshots
for
Automated
Recall
Remote
Control
of
Snapshot
Recall
Quando
valores
time values
code so
atribudos
a snapshots,
vocthen
pode Remote
Remote
Remote
Control
Control
of
of
Snapshot
Snapshot
Recall
Recall
With
time
code
assigned
to snapshots,
you
can
Remote
Control
of
Snapshot
Recall
With
time
code
values
assigned
to
snapshots,
you
can
then
Snapshot
Withsnapshots
time code para
values
assigned to snapshots,
you can
habilitar
carregamento
com o playback
dothen
time
The VENUE system can be set to recall snapshots in response
With
With
time
time
code
code
values
values
assigned
to
to
snapshots,
you
can
then
then
enable
snapshots
forassigned
recall
with
time
code playback.
With
time
code
values
assigned
to snapshots,
snapshots,
youyou
cancan
then
enable snapshots for recall with time code playback.
Tohabilitar
enable
snapshots
automated
recall
MTC:
To enable
snapshots
for for
automated
recall
withwith
MTC:
Para
snapshots
para
carregamento
automatizado
com
To
snapshots
for
automated
recall
with
MTC:
To
To enable
enable
snapshots
snapshots
for
for
automated
automated
recall
recall
with
with
MTC:
MTC:
To enable
enable
snapshots
for
automated
recall
with
MTC:
MTC:
Click the Time Code Recall Enable indicator on the right side
Click
the
the
Time
Time
Code
Code
Recall
Recall
Enable
Enable
indicator
indicator
on
the
right
right
side
side
of Click
the
Snapshots
The
indicator
turns
bright
green
to indi
the
Time
Code
Recall
Enable
indicator
on on
thethe
right
side
of Click
the
Snapshots
list.list.
The
indicator
turns
bright
to indiof
the
list.
The
indicator
turns
bright
green
to
indiofClique
noSnapshots
indicador
Time
Code
Recall
Enable
nogreen
lado
direito
da
the
of
the
Snapshots
Snapshots
list.
list.
The
The
indicator
indicator
turns
turns
bright
bright
green
green
to
indito
indicate
that
the
snapshot
is enabled
for
recall.
of
the
Snapshots
list. The
indicator
bright green to indicate
that
the
snapshot
is enabled
forturns
recall.
Snapshots
List.
O
indicador
torna-se
verde
brilhante
para
indicar
cate
that
the
snapshot
is
enabled
for
recall.
cate
that
the
snapshot
snapshot
is
is enabled
for
recall.
recall.
catecate
thatthat
thethe
snapshot
is enabled
enabled
for for
recall.
enable
snapshots
for for
recall
with
time
code
playback.
code.
enable
snapshots
recall
with
time
code
playback.
enable
enable
snapshots
snapshots
for for
recall
recall
with
with
time
time
code
code
playback.
playback.
queStage
o snapshot
est
habilitado para carregamento.
Rack
Features
TheThe
VENUE
system
cancan
be set
to recall
snapshots
in response
VENUE
system
be
set
to
snapshots
in
The
The
VENUE
system
system
can
can
be
set
besent
set
to
recall
to recall
recall
snapshots
snapshots
in
response
in response
response
toVENUE
MIDI
control
messages
from
an
external
device
such
The
VENUE
system
can
be
set
to
recall
snapshots
in
response
toOMIDI
control
messages
sent
from
an
external
device
such
as as
sistema
VENUEmessages
pode sersent
ajustado
para
carregar
snapshots
em
to
MIDI
control
from
an
external
device
such
as
to
MIDI
to
MIDI
control
control
messages
messages
sent
sent
from
from
an
external
an
external
device
device
such
such
as
as
an AV
controller
system.
You
can
set
the
system
toum
respond
to
MIDI
control
messages
sent
from
an
external
device
such
as to
anresposta
AV
controller
system.
You
can
set
the
system
to
respond
to
a
mensagens
de
controle
MIDI
enviadas
por
dispositivo
an
AV
controller
system.
You
can
set
the
system
to
respond
to
an
AV
an
AV
controller
controller
system.
system.
You
You
can
can
set
set
the
system
system
to
respond
toMIDI
respond
to
control
messages
on
of the
16
available
chanan
AV
controller
system.
can
set
system
toMIDI
respond
to to o
externo
como
um
sistema
controlador
AV.
Voc
pode
ajustar
control
messages
sentsent
onYou
anyany
oneone
of the
16
available
chancontrol
messages
sent
on
any
one
of
16
available
MIDI
chancontrol
control
messages
messages
sent
sent
on
on
any
any
one
one
of
16
of
available
16
available
MIDI
MIDI
chanchannels. messages
control
sent on any
one of 16 available
MIDIenviadas
chan- por
sistema
para responder
a mensagens
de controle
nels.
nels.
nels.
nels. um dos 16 canais MIDI disponveis.
qualquer
nels.
Snapshots
recalled
when
their
snapshot
number
(1999)
Snapshots
are are
recalled
when
their
snapshot
number
(1999)
is is
Snapshots
are
recalled
when
their
snapshot
number
(1999)
is
Snapshots
Snapshots
are
are
recalled
recalled
when
their
their
snapshot
snapshot
number
number
(1999)
(1999)
is
received
in
the
form
ofwhen
MIDI
Bank
Select
and
Program
Change
Snapshots
are
recalled
when
their
snapshot
number
(1999)
is is
Snapshots
so
carregados
quando
seu
nmero
(1999)
recebido
received
in
the
form
of
MIDI
Bank
Select
and
Program
Change
received
in
the
form
of
MIDI
Bank
Select
and
Program
Change
Additional
Required
Components
received
received
in
the
in(See
the
form
form
of
MIDI
of
MIDI
Bank
Bank
Select
Select
and
Program
Program
Change
Change
messages.
Table
24MIDI
on
page
221.)
na
forma
de
mensagens
Bank
Select
Program
Change.
(Veja
received
in(See
the
form
of
Bank
Select
andeand
Program
Change
messages.
Table
24MIDI
on
page
221.)
messages.
(See
Table
24
on
page
221.)
messages.
messages.
(See
(See
Table
Table
24
on
24
on
page
page
221.)
221.)
tabela
24
na
pgina
221.)
messages.
(See Table
24 on page
221.)
The following
components
must
To enable
recall
of snapshots
from
an external
device:
To enable
recall
of snapshots
from
an external
device:
Video
Display
(15-inch or
greater
flat-panel
VGA
To
recall
of
from
an
device:
Para
habilitar
o snapshots
carregamento
de
snapshots
por
umdisplay
dispositivo
To
To enable
enable
recall
recall
of
of snapshots
snapshots
from
from
an
external
an external
external
device:
device:
To enable
enable
recall
of
snapshots
from
an
external
device:
1
Go
to
the
Options
page
and
click
the
Snapshots
tab. and
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
externo:
1 Go to the Options page and click the Snapshots tab.VGA
1 Go
Go
to the
the
Options
page
and
click
the
Snapshots
tab.
1
1
to
to
Options
Options
page
page
and
click
click
the
Snapshots
Snapshots
tab.
Snapshot
enabled
for automated
recall
DVI
supported.
1 Go
Go
to the
the
Options
page
andand
click
thethe
Snapshots
tab.tab.
Snapshot
enabled
for automated
recall
withwith
MTCMTC
2 Under
MIDI,
select
the
Snapshots
Respond
to Channel
Snapshot
enabled
for automated
automated
recall
with
MTC
Audio
I/Oenabled
2 1Under
MIDI,
select
the
Snapshots
Respond
to
Channel
op-opSnapshot
Snapshot
enabled
for
automated
for
recall
recall
with
with
MTC
MTC
VUnder
pgina
Options
e the
clique
na aba
Snapshots.
2
MIDI,
select
Snapshots
Respond
to
Channel
opSnapshot
habilitado
para
com MTC
Snapshot
enabled
forcarregamento
automated automatizado
recall with MTC
2
Under
2
Under
MIDI,
MIDI,
select
select
the
the
Snapshots
Snapshots
Respond
Respond
to
Channel
to
Channel
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
tion,
and
choose
the
MIDI
channel
from
the
corresponding
2
Under
MIDI,
select
the Snapshots
Respond
to
Channel opop-option,
andand
choose
thethe
MIDI
channel
from
thethe
corresponding
48 inputs
with Time
remotely
Chasing
MIDI
Code
tion,
choose
MIDI
channel
from
corresponding
Chasing
MIDI
Time
Code
tion,
tion,
and
and
choose
choose
the
MIDI
MIDI
channel
channel
from
from
the
the
corresponding
corresponding
menu.
tion,
and
choose
thethe
MIDI
channel
from
theRespond
corresponding
Chasing
MIDI
Time
Code
pop-up
menu.
2 pop-up
Em
MIDI,
selecione
a opo
Snapshots
to Channel, e
Chasing
Chasing
MIDI
MIDI
Time
Time
Code
Code
Atrelando
MIDI
Time
Code
individually
selectable
phantom power.
pop-up
menu.
Chasing
MIDI
Time
Code
pop-up
pop-up
menu.
menu.
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
menu.
With
snapshots
enabled
for
automated
recall,
the
Chase
MTC pop-up
escolha
o canal MIDI no menu pop-up correspondente.
With
snapshots
enabled
for
automated
recall,
the
Chase
MTC
snapshots
8 snapshots
analog enabled
output
channels;
expandable
up
to
48
analog
or
With
enabled
for
automated
recall,
the
Chase
MTC
With
With
snapshots
enabled
for
for
automated
automated
recall,
recall,
the
the
Chase
Chase
MTC
MTC
function
needs
to
be engaged
to allow
automated
recall
to
oc The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires
With
snapshots
enabled
forpara
automated
recall,
the
Chase
MTC
Com
snapshots
habilitados
carregamento
automatizado,
a
function
needs
to
be
engaged
to Rack.
allow
automated
recall
to
ocdigital
outputs
per
Stage
function
needs
to
be
engaged
to
allow
automated
recall
to
function
function
needs
needs
to
be
to engaged
be ser
engaged
to
to allow
automated
automated
recall
to
to ococcur.
funo
Chase
MTC
acionada
para
permitr
orecall
carregamento
function
needs
toprecisa
be
engaged
to allow
allow
automated
recall
to ococcur.
cur.
cur.
automatizado.
cur.cur.
To
initiate
automated
recall
of
snapshots:
To initiate
automated
recall
of snapshots:
To
initiate
automated
recall
of snapshots:
snapshots:
Para
iniciar
oautomated
carregamento
automatizado
de snapshots:
initiate
Snake
connectors
toofenable
primary
and redundant (if
To
To
automated
recall
recall
of
To initiate
initiate
automated
recall
of snapshots:
snapshots:
1
Click
the
Chase
MTC
button
soVENUE
that
ithighlighted.
is highlighted.
Optional Components
1 Clickapplicable)
the
Chase
MTC
button
so
that
it
is
connection
to
a
FOH
Rack.
1 Click
Click
the
Chase
MTC
button
so that
that
ithighlighted.
is highlighted.
highlighted.
Click
1
the
the
Chase
Chase
MTC
button
button
that
so
it
is
Click
the
Chase
MTCMTC
button
soque
that
it is
isitdestacado.
highlighted.
111Clique
no
boto
Chase
MTC
paraso
fique
2 Begin
MTC
playback
by starting
internal
generator
(if set
2 Begin
MTC
playback
by starting
thethe
internal
generator
(if set
2
Begin
MTC
playback
by
starting
the
internal
generator
(if
2
Begin
2
Begin
MTC
MTC
playback
playback
by
starting
by
starting
the
the
internal
internal
generator
generator
(if
set
(if set
set
to
MTC
Generate)
or
the
external
device
(if
set
to
MTC
Read).
2
Begin
MTC
playback
by
starting
the
internal
generator
(if
set
to
MTC
Generate)
or
the
external
device
(if
set
to
MTC
Read).
2 Dispare
o playback
MTC
iniciando
o gerador
interno
(se ajustado
Snapshot
respond
option
to
Generate)
or
external
device
(if
to
Read).
MIDIMIDI
respond
option
to
MTC
to MTC
MTC
Generate)
Generate)
or
the
or the
the
external
external
device
device
(if
set
(if set
set
to
to MTC
MTC
Read).
Read). Snapshot
Opo
Respond
tooption
Channel
to System
MTC
Generate)
or
the
external
device
(if(se
set
to MTC
MTC
Read).
Snapshot
MIDI
respond
para
MTC
Generate)
ou
o
dispositivo
externo
ajustado
para
MTC
Snapshots
USB
flash
diskoption
(or
other portable USB storage device for
Components
Snapshot
Snapshot
MIDI
MIDI
respond
respond
option
Snapshot
MIDI
respond
option
When
a
recall-enabled
snapshots
time
code
value
is
reached,
When
a
recall-enabled
snapshots
time
code
value
is
reached,
The
system
listens
on
the
specified
channel
for
Bank
Select
Read).
Quando
o
valor
time
code
de
um
snapshot
habilitado
para
The
system
listens
on
the
specified
channel
for recommended)
Bank
Select
When
a
recall-enabled
snapshots
time
code
value
is
reached,
transfer
of
Show
data;
512 MB
or
larger
When
When
a
recall-enabled
a recall-enabled
snapshots
snapshots
time
time
code
code
value
value
is
reached,
is reached, The
The
system
listens
on
the
specified
channel
for
Bank
Select
the
snapshot
is recalled.
When
a
recall-enabled
snapshots
time
code
value
is
reached,
O
sistema
obedece
a
mensagens
Bank
Select
e
Program
Change
The
system
system
listens
listens
on
on
the
the
specified
specified
channel
channel
for
for
Bank
Bank
Select
Select
the
snapshot
is
recalled.
and
Program
Change
messages.
The
system
listens
on messages.
the specified channel for Bank Select
carregamento
atingido,
o snapshot carregado.
andand
Program
Change
the
snapshot
is
recalled.
the
the
snapshot
snapshot
is
recalled.
is
recalled.
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
Program
Change
messages.
recebidas
no
canal
especificado.
theIncluded
snapshot isComponents
recalled.
and
and
Program
Program
Change
Change
messages.
messages.
Change messages.
Snapshot
modes
can
affect
MTC
recall.
more
informa- and Program
The
Headphones
withOutput
1/4-inch
jack
Snapshot
modes
canpodem
affect
MTC
recall.
For For
more
informaThe
MIDI
Snapshot
Output
option
affect
Modos
Snapshot
afetar
o carregamento
MTC.
Para
Snapshot
modes
can
affect
MTC
recall.
For
more
informaMIDI
Snapshot
SafeSafe
option
doesdoes
notnot
affect
thisthis
Snapshot
modes
modes
can
can
affect
affect
MTC
MTC
recall.
recall.
For
For
more
more
informainformaAllSnapshot
VENUE
Profile
systems
include
the
following:
The
MIDI
Snapshot
Output
Safe
option
does
not
affect
this
tion,
see
MTC
and
Other
Online
Event
Triggers
on
A
opo
MIDI
Snapshot
Output
Safe
no
afeta
esta
opo.
Snapshot
modes
can
affect
MTC
recall.
For
more
informaThe
The
MIDI
MIDI
Snapshot
Snapshot
Output
Output
Safe
Safe
option
option
does
does
not
not
affect
affect
this
this
tion,
see
MTC
and
Other
Online
Event
Triggers
on
option.
You
only
turn
off this
feature
by
deselecting
the
mais
informaes,
veja
Triggers
MTC
eTriggers
Outros on
Eventos
The
Dynamic
or can
condenser
microphone
and
XLR
mic
cable
MIDI
Snapshot
Output
Safe
option
does
not
affect
this
tion,
see
MTC
and
Other
Online
Event
option.
You
can
only
turn
off
this
feature
by
deselecting
the
tion,
tion,
see
see
MTC
MTC
and
and
Other
Other
Online
Online
Event
Event
Triggers
Triggers
on
on
option.
You
can
only
turn
off
this
feature
by
deselecting
the
Voc
pode
apenas
desligar
esse
recurso
desselecionando
a
page
tion,
VENUE
Profile
console
see 194.
MTC
and
Other Online Event Triggers on
option.
option.
You
You
can
can
only
only
turn
turn
off
this
off
this
feature
feature
by
deselecting
by
deselecting
the
the
page
194.
Online
na
pgina
194.
Snapshots
tooff
Channel
option.
(for
Talkback)
option.
You canRespond
only to
turn
this feature
by deselecting the
page
194.
Snapshots
Channel
option.
page
page
194.
194.
a opoRespond
Snapshots
Respond
to Channel.
Snapshots
Respond
to
Channel
option.
194.
Snapshots
Snapshots
Respond
Respond
to
Channel
to
Channel
option.
option.
page
Two
Respond
to Channel
option.
Snapshots
Footswitches
(up to
2)
The
Chase
MTC
button
can
be used
to quickly
VENUE
Chase
MTC
button
can
beusado
used
topara
quickly
taketake
VENUE
OThe
boto
Chase
MTC
pode
ser
rapidamente
colocar
The
Chase
MTC
button
can
be
used
to quickly
quickly
take
VENUE
Monitor
mount
for
VGA
screen
(screen
not
included)
Table
24.
MIDI
Bank
and
Program
Numbers
for Snapshots
The
The
Chase
Chase
MTC
MTC
button
button
can
can
be
used
be
used
to
quickly
to
take
take
VENUE
VENUE
MIDI Bank
and
Program
Numbers
for Snapshots
system
offline
from
MTC-triggered
in performance
24.MIDI
cables
(for
connecting
external
MIDI devices)
Chase
MTC
button
can
be usedrecall
torecall
quickly
take por
VENUE
system
offline
from
MTC-triggered
in performance
in in
oThe
sistema
VENUE
fora
do
carregamento
disparado
MTC
na Table
Table
24.
MIDI
Bank
and
Program
Numbers
for Snapshots
Snapshots
Table
Table
24.
24.
MIDI
MIDI
Bank
Bank
and
and
Program
Program
Numbers
Numbers
for
Snapshots
for
system
offline
from
MTC-triggered
recall
in performance
performance
in
Table
24.
MIDI
Bank
and
Program
Numbers
for
Snapshots
system
system
offline
offline
from
from
MTC-triggered
MTC-triggered
recall
recall
in
performance
in
in
in
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
the
event
of
a
change
in
timing,
such
as
a
missed
cue
or
Bank
Program
Snapshot
Numberthe
system
offline
from
MTC-triggered
recall
in
performance
in
performance
na
eventualidade
de
uma
alterao
no
tempo.
Voc
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
thethe
event
of aofchange
in timing,
such
as aasmissed
cuecue
or or
Bank
Program
Snapshot Number
event
a change
change
in timing,
timing,
such
a missed
missed
Bank
Program
Snapshot
Number
the
the
event
event
of
a
ofchange
a
in
timing,
in
such
such
as
a
as
missed
a
cue
cue
or
or
Bank
Bank
Program
Program
Snapshot
Snapshot
Number
Number
dropped
verse.
You
can
then
advance
manually
to
an
appro
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
pode
ento
avanar
manualmente
para
um
snapshot
apropriado,
e
the
event
of
a
change
in
timing,
such
as
a
missed
cue
or
Bank
Program
Snapshot
Number
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
dropped
verse.
YouYou
cancan
then
advance
manually
to an
0
0127
001128
dropped
verse.
then
advance
manually
to approan approappro0
0127
001128
dropped
dropped
verse.
verse.
You
You
can
can
then
then
advance
advance
manually
manually
to
an
to
approan
re-habilitar
ChaseYou
MTC.
priate
snapshot,
re-enable
Chase
MTC. to an approdropped
verse.
can
then
advance
manually
0
0127
001128
snapshot,
VENUE
Profile
Guide
priate
andand
re-enable
Chase
MTC.
to GPI devices)
0
0127
0127
001128
001128
priate
snapshot,
and
re-enable
Chase
MTC.
0 0 25-pin D-Sub
0127
001128
priate
priate
snapshot,
snapshot,
and
and
re-enable
re-enable
Chase
Chase
MTC.
MTC.
1
0127
129256
priate
snapshot,
and
re-enable
Chase
MTC.
1
0127
129256
1
0127
129256
O VENUE
sistema
VENUE
nonot
atrela
atual
de timecode
time code.
systems
do
chase
upvalor
to the
current
1
0127
0127
129256
129256
VENUE
systems
do not
chase
upao
to
the
current
timecode
1 1
0127
129256
VENUE
systems
do
not
chase
up
to
the
current
timecode
VENUE
Protective
Dust
Cover
2
0127
257384
VENUE
systems
systems
do
not
do
not
chase
chase
up
to
up
the
tomiddle
the
current
current
timecode
timecode
Se
voc
iniciar
o
playback
no
meio
de
uma
sequncia
value.
If
you
start
playback
in
the
of
a
snapshot
se2
0127
257384
VENUE
systems
do
not
chase
up
to
the
current
timecode
value.
If you
start
playback
in the
middle
of aofsnapshot
se- se2
0127
257384
value.
If
you
start
playback
in
the
middle
a
snapshot
2
2
0127
0127
257384
257384
snapshot,
todos
os
snapshots
anteriores
precisaro
ser
value.
If
you
If(see
you
start
start
playback
playback
in
the
in
the
middle
middle
of
a
a snapshot
se2VENUE Profile
0127 Expansion
257384
value.
Rack(s)
next)
quence,
any
prior
snapshots
will
need
to
be
recalled
manuvalue.
Ifany
you
start
playback
in
the
middle
ofrecalled
aofsnapshot
snapshot
se- seOptions
quence,
prior
snapshots
will
need
to
be
manu3
0127
385512
3
0127
385512
quence,
any
prior
snapshots
will
need
to
be
recalled
manucarregados
manualmente
para
atualizar
a
console
antes
de
quence,
quence,
any
any
prior
prior
snapshots
snapshots
will
will
need
need
to
be
to recalled
be time
recalled
manumanu3
0127
385512
ally
to
update
the
console
before
beginning
code
playquence,
any
prior
snapshots
will
need
to
be
recalled
manu3
3
0127
0127
385512
385512
ally
to update
the the
console
beginning
codecode
play3The following options
0127 can be added to
385512
ally
update
before
beginning
time
playiniciar
oto
playback
deconsole
timebefore
code.
Para
maistime
informaes,
veja
VENUE
Profile systems.
0127
513640
ally
ally
to
update
toFor
update
the
the
console
console
before
before
beginning
beginning
time
time
code
code
playplayback.
more
information,
see
Selecting
and
Recalling
4 4
0127
513640
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
Cables
ally
toFor
update
the
console
before
beginning
time
code
playback.
more
information,
see
Selecting
and
Recalling
4
0127
513640
Selecionando
e
Carregando
Vrios
Snapshots
na
pgina
back.
For
more
information,
see
Selecting
and
Recalling
4
4
0127
0127
513640
513640
For
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
back.
back.
For
For
more
more
information,
information,
see
see
Selecting
Selecting
and
Recalling
Recalling
4
0127
513640 visit the Avid
Multiple
Snapshots
on page
184.
back.
ForSnapshots
more
information,
see
Selecting
andand
Recalling
Multiple
on page
184.
5
0127
641768
184.
5
0127
641768
Multiple
Snapshots
on
page
184.
Each
Mix
Rack
or
FOH
Rack
includes:
website
(www.avid.com).
Multiple
Multiple
Snapshots
Snapshots
on
on page
184.
184.
5
0127
641768
Multiple
Snapshots
on page
page
184.
5
0127
0127
641768
641768
5 5
0127
641768
0127
769896
System Restore CD
6 6
0127
769896
6
6
6
6Mix
7 7
7
7
7 7
0127
0127
0127
0127
Rack Options
0103
0103
0103
0103
0103
0103
769896
769896
769896
769896
897999
897999
897999
897999
897999
897999
I/O Options
O software VENUE armazena mensagens Bank Select, ento
VENUE
software
stores
Bank
Select
messages,
itnot
is not
VENUE
stores
Bank
Select
messages,
so
itso
no software
necessrio
enviar
uma
mensagem
Bank
Select
VENUE
software
stores
Bank
Select
messages,
sois
it
is not
notantes
VENUE
VENUE
software
software
stores
stores
Bank
Bank
Select
Select
messages,
messages,
so
it
so
is
it
not
is
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
that
provides
16
analog
necessary
to
send
a
Bank
Select
message
prior
to
every
ProVENUE
software
stores
Bank
Select
messages,
so
it
is
not
necessary
to
send
a
Bank
Select
message
prior
to
every
Prode
cada
mensagem
Program
Change.
Voc
necessita
apenas
necessary
to send
send
a Bank
Bank
Select
message
prior
to every
every
Pronecessary
necessary
to
send
to
a
a
Select
Select
message
message
prior
to
every
to
ProPromic/line
level
gram
Change
message.
You
only
need
toprior
send
a Bank
Se- um
necessary
toa inputs
send
a Bank
Bank
Select
message
prior
to
every
Program
Change
message.
You
only
need
to
send
a
Bank
Seenviar
mensagem
Bank
Select
quando
deseja
carregar
gram
Change
message.
You
only
need
to send
send
a Bank
Bank
Segram
gram
Change
Change
message.
message.
You
You
only
only
need
to
to
a
a
SeSemessage
when
you
toneed
recall
asend
snapshot
a difgram
Change
message.
Youwant
only
need
tosnapshot
send
a Bank
Bank
Sesnapshot
de
um
banco
diferente
do
snapshot
lectlect
message
when
you
want
toprovides
recall
a
inanterior.
ain
AO16
Analog
Output
Card
that
16
analog
line
lect
message
when
you
want
to recall
recall
a snapshot
snapshot
indifalevel
diflect
lect
message
message
when
when
you
you
want
want
to
recall
to
a
snapshot
a
in
a
in
difa
different
bank
from
the
previous
snapshot.
lect
message
when
you
want
tosnapshot.
recall
a snapshot in a different
bank
from
the
previous
outputs
ferent
bank
from
the
previous
snapshot.
ferent
ferent
bank
bank
from
from
the
previous
previous
snapshot.
snapshot.
ferent
bank
from
the the
previous
snapshot.

Chapter
Synchronization
Chapter
23: 23:
Synchronization
221221
line level outputs, and 8 AES digital
outputs.
Chapter
23: Synchronization 221
Captulo
23:
Sincronizao
221
Chapter
Chapter
23:
Synchronization
Synchronization
221
Chapter
23: 23:
Synchronization
221221
Triggering of External Devices on
Triggering
ofDispositivos
External Devices
on
Disparando
Externos
Com
Snapshot
Recall
Triggering
of External Devices
on
Snapshot
Recall
Carregamento
de
Snapshot
Snapshot
Recall
The VENUE system
can be set to send MIDI Bank and Program
The VENUE system can be set to send MIDI Bank and Program
messages
whenever
ato
snapshot
isenviar
recalled,
toProgram
triggerMIDI
OChange
sistema
VENUE
pode
ajustado
para
The
VENUE
system
canser
be set
send
MIDI
Bankmensagens
and
Change
messages
whenever
a snapshot
is snapshots.
recalled,
toYou
trigger
external
devices
whose
cues
are
related
to
can
Bank
e
Program
Change
sempre
que
um
snapshot
carregado,
para
Change
messages
whenever
a snapshot
is snapshots.
recalled, toYou
trigger
external
devices
whose
cues
are
related
to
can
set
the
system
to
send
on
any
one
of
16
available
MIDI
chandisparar
dispositivos
externos
cuja
interpretao
est
relacionada
external
devices
cues
areone
related
snapshots.
You
can
set
the system
towhose
send on
any
of 16toavailable
MIDI
channels.
aos
snapshots.
Voc
podeon
ajustar
o sistema
para enviar
em qualquer
set
the
system
to
send
any
one
of
16
available
MIDI
channels.
um
dos 16 canais MIDI disponveis.
nels.
MIDI output is automatically suspended while in Preview
MIDI
output
is automatically
suspended
while
Preview
A sada
automaticamente
suspensa
no in
modo
mode.
ForMIDI
more
information, see
Preview
Mode
on Preview.
MIDI
output
is automatically
suspended
while
in Preview
mode.
For
more
information,
see
Preview
Mode
Para191.
mais informaes, veja Modo Previewon
na pgina
page
mode.
For more information, see Preview Mode on
page
191.191.
page 191.
While it is possible to add Bank Select and Program Change
While
itseja
is possible
to
add
Bank
Select
Program
Change
Embora
possvel
adicionar
mensagens
Bank
Select
etoggle
Program
messages
individual
snapshots,
this and
option
lets
you
While
it isto
possible
to add
Bank Select
and
Program
Change
messages
to
individual
snapshots,
this
option
lets
you
toggle
Change
a
snapshots
individualmente,
essa
opo
permite
alternar
messages
on
and
off
for
all
snapshots
in
one
step.
Using
this
messages
toonindividual
snapshots,
thisinoption
lets
you
toggle
mensagens
e
off
para
todos
os
snapshots
em
um
passo.
messages
on
and
off
for
all
snapshots
one
step.
Using
thisUsar
option
also
ensures
that
the
Bank
Select
and
Program
Change
messages
on
and offthat
for all
snapshots
inand
oneProgram
step. Bank
Using
this e
esta
opo
tambm
assegura
que Select
as mensagens
Select
option
also
ensures
the
Bank
Change
messages
correspond
to the
snapshot
number,
even after
option
also
ensures
that
the
Bank
Select
and
Program
Change
Program
Change
correspondam
ao nmero
do snapshot,
messages
correspond
to the
number,
aftermesmo
snapshots
are rearranged
in snapshot
the Snapshots
list. even
messages
correspond
to the
snapshot
number,
even afterList.
depois
de snapshots
terem
sido
rearranjados
na Snapshots
snapshots
are rearranged
in
the
Snapshots
list.
snapshots
are rearranged
in the
Snapshots
list. reflect the
The Bank Select
and Program
Changes
messages
As
mensagens
Bank
Select
e Program Changes
correpondem
The
Bank(1999)
Select
and
Program
messages
reflect
the ao
number
of the
recalledChanges
snapshot.
(See Table
24 on
The
Bank
Select and
Program
Changes
messages
the
nmero
(1999)
do the
snapshot
carregado.
(Veja
areflect
Tabela
24 na
number
(1999)
of
recalled
snapshot.
(See
Table
24
on
page
221.)
pgina
221.)
number
(1999) of the recalled snapshot. (See Table 24 on
page 221.)
page 221.)
VENUE
systems
always
send
a Bank
message
before
O sistema
VENUE
sempre
envia
umaSelect
mensagem
Bank
Select
VENUE
systems
always
send
a Bank
Select
message
before
every
Program
Change
message,
even
if
the
bank
number
antes de
toda mensagem
Program
Change,
mesmo
que o
VENUE
systems
always
send
a
Bank
Select
message
before
every
Program
Change
message,
even
if the bank number
has
not
changed
fromno
the
previous
snapshot.
nmero
do banco
tenha even
sido
alterado
do
snapshot
every
Program
Change
message,
if
the
bank
number
has
not changed from the previous snapshot.
anterior.
has
not changed from the previous snapshot.
To enable triggering of external devices when snapshots are
To
enable triggering of external devices when snapshots are
recalled:
Para
habilitar
o disparo
dispositivos
externos
quando snapshots
To enable
triggering
of de
external
devices
when snapshots
are
recalled:
so
carregados:
recalled:
to the
Options
and
the
Snapshots
tab.
Under
MIDI,
selectepage
the
Snapshots
Send
on Channel
option,
112VGo
pgina
Options
clique
naclick
aba Snapshots.
2 Under MIDI, select the Snapshots Send on Channel option,
and
choose
the
MIDI
channel
from
the
corresponding
pop-up
2 Under MIDI, select the Snapshots Send on Channel option,
choose
the MIDI
channel
from theSend
corresponding
2and
Em MIDI,
selecione
a opo
Snapshots
on Channel,pop-up
e escolha
menu.
and choose the MIDI channel from the corresponding pop-up
omenu.
nmero do canal MIDI no menu pop-up correspondente.
menu.
Opo
Snapshots
Channel
Snapshot
MIDISend
sendonoption
Snapshot MIDI send option
Snapshot
MIDIsystem
send option
VENUE
sends
a Bank
Select and
Program
OThe
sistema
VENUE
envia
uma
mensagem
Bank
Select Change
e Program
The
VENUE
system
sendschannel
a Bank Select
and Program
Change
message
on
the
specified
whenever
a
snapshot
is re-
Change
pelo system
canal sends
especificado
sempre
que
um snapshot
The
VENUE
a
Bank
Select
and
Program
Change
message
on the specified channel whenever a snapshot is recalled.
carregado.
message on the specified channel whenever a snapshot is re-
called.
called.
The
MIDI Snapshot
Output Safe
command
does
notaaffect
O comando
MIDI Snapshot
Output
Safe no
afeta
opo de
The
MIDI
Snapshot
Output
Safe
command
does
not
affect
enviar
por
um
canal
especfico.
Voc
pode
apenas
desligar
the
option
to
send
on
specific
MIDI
channels.
You
can
only
The
MIDI Snapshot
Output
Safe
command
does
not
affect
the
option
to
send
on
specific
MIDI
channels.
You
can
only
esse
recurso
desselecionando
a
opo
Snapshots
Send
turn
off this
deselecting
Snapshots
Sendonly
on on
the
option
to feature
send onby
specific
MIDIthe
channels.
You can
turn
off
this
feature
by
deselecting
the
Snapshots
Send
on
Channel.
Channel
option.
turn
off this
feature by deselecting the Snapshots Send on
Channel
option.
Channel option.

222
Guia VENUE Profile
Sending MIDI Messages on Snapshot

Sending
MIDI Messages on Snapshot
Recall
Enviando Mensagens MIDI no Carregamento
Sending
Recall MIDI Messages on Snapshot
decan
Snapshot
Recall
You
add up to 20 specific MIDI messages to each snap-
You
can
addmessages
up to 20 are
specific
MIDI messages
to each snapshot.
These
sent whenever
the snapshot
is reYou
can
addmessages
up to 20 are
specific
MIDI messages
to
each snapVoc
pode
adicionar
at
20 mensagens
MIDIsnapshot
especficas
para cada
shot.
These
sent
whenever
the
is recalled.
Sending
of
the
messages
is
enabled
with
the
MIDI
shot.
These
messages
are
sent
whenever
the
snapshot
is
resnapshot.
Essas
mensagens
so
enviadas
semrrpe
que
o
called.
Sending
ofthe
theSnapshots
messages window.
is enabled
with
theinformaMIDI snapshot
scope
control
in
For
more
carregado.
O
envio
dessas
mensagens
habilitado
com o controle
called.
Sending
of
the
messages
is
enabled
with
the
MIDI
scope
control
in the
window. For more information,
see
Chapter
21,Snapshots
Snapshots.
de abrangncia
MIDI
na janelawindow.
Snapshots.
Para
mais
informaes,
scope
control
in
the
Snapshots
For
more
information, see Chapter 21, Snapshots.
Veja
o
Captulo
21,
Snapshots.
tion, see Chapter 21, Snapshots.
Synchronizing with Word Clock and

Synchronizing
with Word Clock and
Digital
Audio Input
Synchronizing
withWord
WordClock
Clock
and Audio
Sincronizando
com
e Digital
Digital Audio Input
Digital
Audio
Input
Inputsystems
VENUE
receive
and output Word Clock (at a sample
VENUE
systems
Word Clock
(ataamaster
sample
rate
of 48
kHz receive
10ppm)and
for output
synchronization
with
VENUE
systems
receive
and
output
Word Clock
(ataamaster
sample
rate
of
48
kHz
10ppm)
for
synchronization
with
O
sistema
VENUE
recebe
e
envia
Word
Clock
(com
sample
clock
generator
(house
sync)
or other device that
uses
clock rate de
rate
of
48
kHz
10ppm)
for
synchronization
with
a
master
48
kHz
10ppm)
para
sincronizao
com
um
gerenciador
de clock
clock
generator
(house
sync)
or
other
device
that
uses
clock
reference.
VENUE
systems
can
operate
as a Word
Clock
masclock
generator
(house
sync)
or
other
device
that
uses
clock
master
(house
sync)
ou
outro
dispositivo
que
utilize
referncia
de
reference.
VENUE
operate
a Word Clock master,
or it can
slave systems
to Work can
Clock
input.as
reference.
VENUE
systems
can
operate
as
a
Word
Clock
masclock.
O
sistema
VENUE
pode
operar
como
Word
Clock
master,
ou
ter, or it can slave to Work Clock input.
ter,
or
itser
can
slaveInto
Work
Clock
input.
pode
escravo
da
entrada
Work
Clock.
The
Word
Clock
and
Word
Clock
Out ports are located on
The
Word
Clock
In
and
Word
Clock
Out ports are located on
the
Mix
Rack
and
FOH
Rack.
The
Word
Clock
andIn
Word
Clock
Out
ports
arelocalizadas
located onno Mix
AsMix
portas
Word
Clock
e Word
Clock
Out
esto
the
Rack
andIn
FOH
Rack.
the
MixeRack
andRack.
FOH Rack.
Rack
no FOH
Synchronizing with Digital Audio Input

Synchronizing
Audio Input
Sincronizando com with
Digital Digital
Audio Input
Synchronizing
with Digital
Audio
InputClock In.
VENUE systems automatically
synchronize
to Word
VENUE
systems
automatically
synchronize
to Word
In.
Odigital
sistema
VENUE
sincroniza
comClock
Word
Clock In.
All
inputs
areautomaticamente
sample rate
converted
and
clocked
to 48k
VENUE
systems
automatically
synchronize
to Word
Clock
In.
All
digital
inputs
are
sample
rate
converted
and
clocked
to
48k
Todas
as
entradas
digitais
tem
sample
rate
convertidas
e
ajustadas
and
synchronized
tosample
the VENUE
system clock.
All
digital
inputs are
rate converted
and clocked to 48k
and
synchronized
to the VENUE
para
48k e sincronizadas
com o system
clock doclock.
sistema.
and
synchronized
to
the
VENUE
system
clock.
This lets you connect a variety of digital sources (such as a
This
you connect
a variety
ofdigital
digitaloutputs),
sources
(such
as ato (como
Issolets
permite
uma
variedade
de fontes
digitais
DAT
machine
orconecar
CD player
with
directly
This
lets
you connect
a variety
ofdigital
digitaloutputs),
sources (such
as ato
DAT
machine
or
CD
player
with
directly
mquinas
DAT
ou
CD
players
com
sadas
digitais),
diretamente
s
VENUE
digitalor
inputs.
DAT
machine
CD
player
with
digital
outputs),
directly
to
entradas
digitais
da VENUE.
VENUE
digital
inputs.
VENUE
digital inputs.
For instructions
on Word Clock and digital audio connections
For
instructions
on
Word
Clock
and
audio
Para
instrues
sobre
Clock
conexes
deconnections
udioCondigital para
for
synchronization,
seeWord
Chapter
2,edigital
Configuring
and
For
instructions on Word
Clock and
digital
audio connections
for
synchronization,
see
Chapter
2,
Configuring
and
Consincronizao,
veja
o
Captulo
2,
Configurando
e
Conectando
a
necting
Profile.
for
synchronization,
see Chapter 2, Configuring and ConProfile.
necting
Profile.
necting Profile.
Chapter 24: Using the Standalone Software
Captulo 24: Usando o Software Standalone

VENUE Standalone software lets you do all of the following to
VENUE Standalone
software wherever
lets you do
all can
of the
System Requirements
preconfigure
performances,
you
usefollowing
your lap-to
System Requirements
preconfigure performances, wherever you can use your laptop:
The following are the minimum system requirements for ustop:
O
software
VENUE
permitesoftware
fazer as seguintes
aes
para
LearnStandalone
the basics of
the VENUE
interface in
prepThe
following
the minimum
system requirements for using the
VENUEare
Standalone
software:
pr-configurar
perfomances,
em que voc
podeinterface
usar seuin
laptop:
do Sistema
aration
Learn the
of the
software
prepforbasics
working
at aVENUE
full VENUE
system.
ingRequisitos
the
VENUE
Standalone
software:
Computer running Windows XP Pro or XP Home
Aprender
os working
fundamentos
da interface
do software VENUE em
aration
for
a full
VENUE
system.
preparao
Assign hardware
I/Oatand
routing,
and
name
channels.
OsEdition
Computer
running
Windows
XP Pro or
Homepara utilizar o
para trabalhar
com
um sistema
VENUE
completo.
O/S,
Service
Pack 1 mnimos
seguintes
so
os requisitos
doXP
sistema
Assign
hardware
I/O
and
routing,
and
channels.
Edition
O/S,
Service
Pack
1
Atribuir
I/O
deinput,
hardware,
e rotear
e nomear
canais.
Set channel
EQ,
dynamics,
pan,name
and
other
setsoftware
Standalone
VENUE:
Minimum 1024 x 768 screen resolution
Set channel
input,deEQ,
dynamics,
pan, and other
Ajustar
entradas
canais,
EQ, Dynamics,
pan,sete outras
tings.
Minimum 16-bit
1024 xcolor
768 screen
resolution
Stage
Rack
Features
Additional
Minimum
graphics,
32-bit recommended
Required
Components
configuraes.

Computador
rodando
Windows
XP Pro
ou XP Home Edition,
tings.
Create and maintain a library of setups, with access to
Minimum
16-bit
color
graphics,
recommended
Minimum
256 MB
MB32-bit
recommended
Stage
Criar
e manter
uma with
biblioteca
de
configuraes,
comall
acesso
Pack
1 RAM, 512
Racks
are
used
an FOH
and
provide
stage
Create
andparameters
maintain
aavailable
library
of
setups,
with
access
to
The Service
following
components
nearly
all
onRack,
the control
surface.
Minimum
256 MB
MB of
RAM,
512
recommended
a quase todos os parmetros disponveis na superfcie de
Tela de resoluo
mnima
deMB
1024
xdisk
768space, 512 MB
Minimum
200
available
hard
audio
I/O
VENUE Profile
systems.
Upcontrol
to twosurface.
Stage Racks
nearly
allfor
parameters
available
the
controle.
Store
and
recall Snapshots,
andon
configure
Events.
Video
Display
(15-inch
or
greater
flat-panel
VGA
display
Minimum
200 MB
of available
hard
diskrecomendado)
space,
512
MB
Placa
grfica
colorida
de
16-bit,
(32-bit
recommended
be used
simultaneously,
supporting
up to
96 total inputs.
Store
and
recall
Snapshots,
and configure
Events.
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA
and
can
Armazenar
e carregar
Snapshots,
e Shows,
configurar
Events.
Use
the
Filing
features
to transfer
Shows
Folders,

256 MB RAM (512 MB recomendado)
recommended
CD-ROM drive for installation (unless installing from
Usar
os recursos
Filing
para
transferir
Shows,
Shows
Folders,
Use
Filing
features
to transfer
Shows,
Shows
Folders,
DVI
supported.

200
MB
de
espao
em
disco
disponvel
(512
MB
and the
plug-in
presets
to/from
a compatible
USB
storage
de- e
CD-ROM
drive for installation (unless installing from
Audio
I/O
web-download)
presets
de plug-ins
de/para
um
dispositivo
de
armazenamento
recomendado)
and plug-in
presets
to/from
athe
compatible
USB
storageand
device
to transfer
data
between
standalone
software
USB
com
o objetivo
de transferir
dadosmic
entre
o software
web-download)
Available
1.1 orpara
2.0 port
and compatible
Drive deUSB
CD-ROM
instalao
(a menos USB
que storage
seja instalado
48
inputs
with
controllable
preamps
and
vice
to
transfer
dataremotely
between
the standalone
software
and
VENUE.
Available
USB
1.1
or
2.0
port
and
compatible
USB
storage
Standalone
e
VENUE.
device
(such
as
a
flash
disk,
key
disk
or
other
external
por
download)
VENUE.
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Systems
Only)
device
(such
as file
aouflash
disk, Profile
key disk
or otherde
external
Digital
Porta
USBfor
1.1
2.0
disponvel
e dispositivo
armazenamento
hard
drive)
transfer
Transferring
data must
be doneexpandable
to/from a compatible
USB or
8 analog output
channels;
up to 48 analog
Transferir
dados
deve
ser
realizado
de/para
dispositivos
de
USB
(como
pen
drive,
ou
outro
hard
disk
externo)
para
hard
drive)
for
file
transfer
The
connection
between
FOH
Rack
and
Stage
Rack
requires
Transferring
data
must
be
done
to/from
a
compatible
USB
storage
device
such as
USB key
disk or other external USB
digital
outputs
pera Stage
Rack.
armazenamento
USB
compatveis,
como pen drives USB ou Installation
requires
Windows
Administrator
permissions.
transferncia
de
arquivos
a
Digital
Snake
cable.
This
cable
can
be
purchased
directly
storage
device
such
as
a
USB
key
disk
or
other
external
USB
hard
drive.
outros
hard disks externos USB.
Installation
requires
Windows
Administrator
Once
installed,
the
software
can
be
runpreferred
underpermissions.
Admin
or User
from
Avid
or assembled
by
your
vendor.
hard drive.
Synchronization
and Control I/O
Once
installed,requer
the software
can be
under Admin
or User Uma
A instalao
permisses
derun
Administrador
do Windows.
accounts.
Diferenas
entre
o Software
Standalone
e redundant
um Sistema
Differences
Between
Standalone
Software
vez instalado, o software pode rodar em contas Admin ou User.
accounts.
Snake
connectors
to enable
primary and
(if
VENUE
Differences
Software
Optional Components
and
a applicable)
VENUEBetween
System
connectionStandalone
to a VENUE FOH
Rack.
and a VENUE System
The
Standalone
software
is nearly identical
on a full
O
software
Standalone
praticamente
idnticotoa that
um sistema
VENUE
The Standalone
software
is diferenas:
nearly identical
to that on a full
completo,
com aswith
seguintes
VENUE
system,
the following
differences:
VENUE
system, Components
with the following differences:
System
The following
components
are optional,
and must be
Installing
the
Standalone
Software
Installing
the
Standalone
Software
Instalando o Software Standalone
USB
disk
(or othersoftware:
To install
the flash
VENUE
Standalone
Fluxo
udio
Audiode
Throughput
To Para
install
the VENUE
Standalone
software:
transfer
of Show
data; 512
MB
instalar
o software
Standalone
VENUE:
Audio Throughput
one
Near-field
of the following:
YouIncluded
cannot
play
audio through
thesoftware
Standalone
software.
Components
Voc
no pode
reproduzir
udio pelo
Standalone.
udio em 1 Do
1 Siga
Download
VENUEprocedimentos:
Standalone Software Installer
um dosthe
seguintes
You
cannot
play
audio
through
the
Standalone
software.
tempo
real
requer
o
hardware
VENUE.
Headphones
with 1/4-inch
jackSoftware Installer
Real-time audio requires the VENUE hardware.
from
Download
the
VENUE
Standalone
the
Avid
website
(www.avid.com).
Baixe o VENUE Software
Standalone
Installer do website Avid
All VENUE
systems
includehardware.
the following:
Real-time
audioProfile
requires
the VENUE
from
the Avidorwebsite
(www.avid.com).
(www.avid.com).
Dynamic
condenser
microphone and XLR mic cable
or
Edio
Plug-InProfile console
de
VENUE
Plug-In
Editing
ou(for Talkback)
or
Insert
your
VENUESoftware
SoftwareInstaller
Installerno
into
the CD-ROM
CD-ROMem seu
Plug-In
Editing
o VENUE
drive
Insira
Footswitches
(upSoftware
to 2)
When a um
Show
is transferred
from
a complete
VENUE
Quando
Show
transferido
para
um sistema
VENUEsystem,
completo,
drive
Insert
your
VENUE
Installer into
the CD-ROM
on
your
Windows
XP-compatible
computer.
computador compatvel com Windows XP.
a Monitor
mount for VGA
screen
(screen
not included)
When
is transferred
from
a complete
VENUE
todos
os Show
plug-ins
instalados
no sistema
D-Show
estosystem,
visveis
MIDI
cablesWindows
(for connecting
externalcomputer.
MIDI devices)
all
plug-ins
installed
on the D-Show
system
are
visible
in the no
drive
on your
XP-compatible
2
Launch
the installer and follow the instructions on-screen.
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
software
Standalone
plug-ins
offline
(indisponveis).
Voc
all plug-ins
installed
onoffline
the
D-Show
system
are visible
in can
thepode
Standalone
softwarecomo
as
(unavailable)
plug-ins.
You
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
Word
clock
between
2 Dispare
oinstaller
instalador
efollow
siga as
na
tela. Othe
Software
2
Launch
the
and
theinstrues
instructions
on-screen.
The
VENUE
Standalone
software
requires
no authorization.
atribuir
plug-ins
offline
racks,
eand
atribuir
o plug-in
roteamente
no
software
Standalone
software
asa
plug-ins.
can
offline
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
assign
plug-ins
tooffline
racks,(unavailable)
assign
rackYou
routing
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
Standalone VENUE no requer autorizao.
The VENUE Standalone software requires no authorization.
Standalone,
e plug-ins
salvar o to
roteamento
snapshots.
assign offline
racks, andem
assign
plug-in rack routing
in theStandalone
software,
and save the routing in snapshots.
VENUE Profile
Guide
in the Standalone software, and save the routing in snapshots.
Removendo the
o Software
Standalone Software
Standalone
Voc
Twono
(2) console
lights plug-ins ou ajustar parmetros de Removing
pode
instalar
You cannot install plug-ins or adjust plug-in parameters
Removing
the
Standalone
Software
ainstall
menos
que esteja
trabalhando
em um sistema
plug-ins
Protective
Dustplug-ins
Cover
You
cannot
or complete
adjust
plug-in
parameters
unless
you are
working on the
VENUE
system.
Para
remover
o
Software
Standalone
VENUE:
To remove the VENUE Standalone software:
completo.
VENUE
Rack(s)
(seeworking
next) on the complete VENUE system.
unless
you are
VENUE
Profile
Expansion
To remove the VENUE Standalone software: Options
Hardware Configuration
1 Launch
Add/Remove
Programs
Controldo
Panel.
1 Rode othe
aplicativo
Add/Remove
Programs
Control Panel.
Configurao
de Hardware
Hardware Configuration
1 Launch
the Add/Remove
Programs
Control
Panel.
The following
options can
be added
to VENUE
Profile systems.
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
and
Cables
2 Choose VENUE, then follow the instructions on-screen.
In the Standalone software, you can simulate the hardware
detailsVENUE,
on all eVENUE
andnaoptions,
2For
Escolha
siga assystems
instrues
tela. visit the Avid
No
software
Standalone,
voc
simiular
aDevices
configurao
VENUE, then follow the instructions on-screen.
In the
Standalone
software,
youpode
can simulate
hardware
configuration
of a destination
from thethe
tab of de 2 Choose
Each Mix Rack
or FOH Racksystem
includes:
hardware
do sistema
de destinosystem
na abafrom
Devices
pginatab
Options.
configuration
of a destination
theda
Devices
of
the
Options
page.
System Restore CD
the Options page.
Mix Rack Options
I/O Options
Chapter 24: Using the Standalone Software 223

Chapter
24: Using
the Standalone
Software
AI16 Analog Mic/Line
Input
Card that
provides 16
analog223

outputs
223
Simulating a VENUE Configuration

Transfer and Filing Quick Start
Simulating
a VENUE
Configuration
Transfer
Filing
Quick Start
You can use the Standalone
software
to simulate a VENUE sysThe
basic stepsand
for using
the Standalone
software and data
Guia
Rpido
Filing
Simulando
umaaConfigurao
VENUE
Simulating
VENUE
Transfer
and
Filing Quick Start
tem with any number
of input Configuration
and outputs. The correspondtransfer are as
follows:
You can use the Standalone software to simulate a VENUE sysing inputs and outputs become available in the Patchbay, al-
Voc
pode
usar
onumber
softwareofStandalone
para
simular
um sistema
You
can
use
the
Standalone
software
simulate
a VENUE
system
with
any
input
and to
outputs.
The
correspondlowing
to prepare
a show
that
can transfer
directly
to the
VENUE
comyou
qualquer
nmero
de and
entradas
e in
sadas.
As entradas
tem
any
number
of become
input
outputs.
The
ingwith
inputs
and
outputs
available
the correspondPatchbay,
aldestination
system.
e ing
sadas
correspondentes
se tornaro
disponveis
no Patchbay,
inputs
and
available
in the Patchbay,
lowing
you
tooutputs
prepare become
a show that
can transfer
directly toalthe
permitindo
a to
voc
preparar
umthat
show
podedirectly
ser transferido
lowing
you
prepare
a show
canque
transfer
to the
destination
system.
diretamente
para
o sistema
de destino.
To simulate
a VENUE
system:
destination system.
Launch
the
Standalone
software.
simulate
asistema
VENUE
system:
Para1To
simular
um
VENUE:
To simulate a VENUE system:
2
to the
Options
page software.
and click the Devices tab.
1 Go
Launch
the
Standalone
1 Rode
o Software
Standalonesoftware.
.
1 Launch
the Standalone
3
the console
and
choose
thetab.
type of con2 Right-click
Go to the Options
pagegraphic
and click
the
Devices
2 sole
Go
to
the
Options
clickDevices.
the Devices tab.
2 V
pgina
Options
e page
cliqueand
na aba
you
will
be working
with.
3 Right-click the console graphic and choose the type of con3 sole
the
graphic
type
of con4Right-click
Right-click
anconsole
I/O
graphic
andand
choose
thethe
type
of I/O
you
be
working
with.
3 Clique
comwill
o boto
direito
no
grfico
dachoose
console
e escolha
o(as
tipo
sole
you
will
be
working
with.
available)
and
specify
the
number
of
Input
and
Output
cards
da console em que deseja trabalhar.
4 Right-click an I/O graphic and choose the type of I/O (as
on the destination system.
4 available)
Right-click
anspecify
I/O graphic
and choose
the type
of I/O (as
and
the number
of Input
and Output
cards
4 Clique com o boto direito no grfico I/O e escolha o tipo de I/O
available)
and specifysystem.
the number of Input and Output cards
on
the
destination
(disponvel) e especifique o nmero de placas de entradas e sadas
the destination
doon
sistema
de destino.system.
The basic steps for using the Standalone software and data
Os
passos
bsicos
para
o Software
Standalone
estorage
transferir
Save
tofor
disk,
thenutilizar
transfer
it to ansoftware
external
USBdata
The
basicdata
steps
using
the
Standalone
and
transfer
are
as
follows:
dados
so
os
seguintes:
device.
transfer
are as follows:
data
to disk,
then
transfer
it to an external
storage de
Save
Salve
dados
para
o disco,
e transfira
para umUSB
dispositivo
Transfer
data
from
the
USB device,
then
load the
Save
data to
disk,
then
transfer
it to an
external
USBdata.
storage
armazenamento
USB.
device.
device.
Transfira os dados do dispositivo USB, e carregue os dados.
Transfer
data from
the USB on
device,
then load
the
For complete
instructions
transferring
data,
seedata.
Transfer
data
from
the
USB
device,
then
load
the
data.
Chapter
20, Shows
and Filesobre
Management.
Para instrues
completas
como transferir dados, veja
For complete instructions on transferring data, see
ocomplete
Captuloinstructions
20, Gerenciamento
de Arquivos
e Shows.
For
transferring
data, see
Chapter
20, Shows andon
File
Management.
Save
and
Transfer
Data
from
a
Chapter 20, Shows and File Management.
Salvando e Transferindo dados de um sistema VENUE
VENUE System
Save and Transfer Data from a
Save
andeSystem
Transfer
Data
fromcompleto:
a
Para
salvar
transferir
dados
do sistema
VENUE
To save and
transfer data from the complete system:
VENUE System
11ToConecte
um
dispositivo
armazenamento
USB
porta USB da
Connect
atransfer
USB
storage
device
a VENUEsystem:
USB port.
save and
data de
from
thetocomplete
VENUE.
To save and transfer data from the complete system:
2
the Save
tabstorage
of the device
Filing page
to save USB
VENUE
data to
1 Use
Connect
a USB
to a VENUE
port.
12disk.
Connect
a USB
device
to a para
VENUE
USBdados
port. VENUE
Use a aba
Savestorage
na pgina
Filing
salvar
2 Use the Save tab of the Filing page to save VENUE data to
disco.
2 disk.
SaveFiling
tab of
the and
Filing
page
save VENUE
3Use
Gothe
to the
page
click
thetoTransfer
tab. data to
no
disk.
343V
pgina
Filing
epage
clique
naclick
aba the
Transfer.
Do
of the
following
to
select
theTransfer
type of tab.
data to transfer:
Go one
to
the
Filing
and
3 Go
Filingall
page
and
click
the
Transfer
tab.
to
Tothe
transfer
data,
click
the
Console
icon.
Do one
the
following
to select the type
data to transfer:
44 Siga
um of
dos
seguintes
procedimentos
paraofselecionar
o tipo de
To
transfer
Console to
Settings
(thetype
currentdata
state of the con4dados
Do
of the transferidos:
following
select
a serem
one
To
transfer
all data, click
thethe
Console of
icon. to transfer:
sole,
equivalent
to click
an
Show
file), click
the Set To
Para
transferir
todos
os auto-saved
dados,
clique
no
cone
da Console.
data,
the Console
icon.
Totransfer
transferall
Console
Settings
(the current
state of the con To
Para
Console Settings (o estado atual da console,
tingstransferir
icon.
transfer
Console
Settings
(the current
state click
of thethe
console,
equivalent
an auto-saved
Show file),
Setequivalente
aShow
um to
arquivo
Show
salvo),
clique
sole,
To transfer
Folders,
clickatuomaticament
the
Show
Folders
icon.
equivalent
to
an
auto-saved
Show
file),
click
the
Settings
icon.
no
cone
Settings.
To transfer
individual Shows, click the Shows icon.
icon.
tings
Para
transferir
Show
Folders,click
clique
cone
Show icon.
Folders.
To transfer
Show
Folders,
theno
Show
Folders
To
transfer
Preset
Folders,
click
the
Preset
Folders
icon.
transfer
Show
Folders,
click
the
Show
Folders
icon.
To
Para
transferir
Shows
individuais,
clique
no
cone
Shows.
To transfer individual Shows, click the Shows icon.
Adding Stage Rack inputs and outputs
Adding Stage Rack inputs and outputs
Adding Stage
Rack
inputsdoand
outputs
Adicionando
entradas
e sadas
Stage
Rack
To
Para
transferir
Presetfor
Folders,
cliqueitems,
no Shows
cone
Folders.
To transfer
Presets
individual
clickPreset
the Built-In
individual
Shows,
click
the
icon.
Totransfer
transfer
Preset
Folders,
click
the
Preset Folders
icon.
Para
transferir
Presets
para
itens
individuais,
clique
no or
cone
icon or the Plug-In icon and choose a processor, plug-in
ToTotransfer
Preset
Folders,
click theitems,
Preset Folders
transfer
Presets
for individual
theicon.
Built-In
Built-In
ou Plug-In
e escolha
um preset de click
processador,
plug-in
Input Channel Presets item from the pop-up menu, or
To
transfer
Presets
for
individual
items,
click
the
Built-In
ou
Input
Channel
menu
ouprocessor,
clique noplug-in
cone Scope
icon
or the
Plug-Indo
icon
andpop-up,
choose a
or
click the Scope Sets icon.
icon
or the
Plug-InPresets
icon and
choose
processor,
or
Sets.
Input
Channel
item
fromathe
pop-up plug-in
menu, or
Input
Channel
item
menu,
or
5 In
the left
select
the from
itemsthe
youpop-up
want to
transfer
click
thecolumn,
ScopePresets
Sets
icon.
5from
Naclick
coluna
esquerda,
selecione
os itens
que deseja transferir da
theScope
icon.
VENUE
to theSets
portable
storage
device.
5 In the
lefto column,
select
the items you want
to transfer
VENUE
para
dispositivo
de armazenamento
externo.
5 from
In the
left column,
select thestorage
items you
want to transfer
VENUE
to the portable
device.
from VENUE to the portable storage device.
Tranferindo
arquivo
Shows
VENUE
Transferring
Show
filesda
from
VENUE
6 Click theShow
Transfer
button.
files
from VENUE
6Transferring
Clique no boto
Transfer
Transferring Show files from VENUE
6 Click the Transfer button.
6 Click the Transfer button.

224
Profile Guide
224 VENUE
Guia VENUE
Profile
Tranferindo
e
Carregando
dados
para
Standalone
Transfer and Load Data to the
Software
Standalone Software
1 Conecte o dfispositivo de armazenamento USB a seu laptop.
1 Connect
the and
USB storage
your
laptop. Make sure
Transfer
Loaddevice
Datatoto
the
drive
is mounted
before VENUE.
proceeding.
2the
Rode
o software
standalone
Standalone
Software
the
VENUE
standalone
software.
1 pgina
Connect
the eUSB
storage
device
to your laptop. Make sure
32VLaunch
Filing
clique
na aba
Transfer.
the drive is mounted before proceeding.
4 Certifique-se de que seu dispositivo USB est disponvel na lista

2 Launch the VENUE standalone software.
Make sure your USB disk is available in the list at right.
4direita.
Stage
Features
3 Go toRack
the Filing
Criando e Editando Shows e Presets
Creating and Editing Shows and Presets
Use as tcnicas explanadas ao longo deste guia para atribuir,
Use
the techniques
explained
throughout
this
guide to assign
rotear,
renomear canais
e configurar
outros
paremtros.
Ento faa
routing,
rename
channels,
toShows
configure
otherPresets
parameters.
o Creating
seguinte
para
salvar
e and
transferir
seu trabalho
para um sistema
and
Editing
and
completo:
Then
do the following to save and transfer your work to a
Use the techniques explained throughout this guide to assign
complete system.
routing,
channels,
and VENUE
to configure
other parameters.
Para
salvarrename
e transferir
dados
do Software
Standalone
Then
the following
to save and transfer your work to a
para
umdo
sistema
completo:
To save and transfer VENUE data from the standalone software to
thecomplete
complete system.
system:
1 Conecte o dispositivo de armazenamento USB a uma porta USB
1 disponvel
Connect
aem
USB
storage
to an available USB port on
seu
laptop.deviceComponents
Additional
Required
To save and transfer VENUE data from the standalone software to

your
thelaptop.
complete system:
following
must
be purchased
separately:
2The
Usando
a aba components
Save da pgina
Filing,
salve os dados
no disco.
2 Using
the Save
tab storage
of the Filing
data to
disk.
1 Connect
a USB
devicepage,
to ansave
available
USB
port on
5 Click the Console, Settings, Show Folders, Shows, Preset Foldyour
laptop.
Vtothe
pgina
Filing
e
clique
na
aba
Transfer,
e
transfira
os dados
can be used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total inputs. 3 3Go
Filing page
and click
the Transfer
tab, and transfer
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA and
ers, Built-In, Plug-In or Scope Set selectors to select the type of
salvos para um dispositivo de armazenamento USB compatvel.
saved
data
to
a compatible
storage
device.
2 DVI
Using
the
Save tab of USB
the Filing
page,
save data to disk.
supported.
data you want to transfer.
Click no
theseletor
Console,
Settings,
Show Folders,
Shows,Shows,
Preset Fold55Clique
Console,
Settings,
Show Folders,
Preset
ers,
Plug-In
or USB
Scope
Set
selectors
toin
select
theattype
of de
4Built-In,
Make
sure
your
available
the
list
Stage
Racks
are
used
with
anisFOH
and
provide
all
stage
Folders,
Built-In,
Plug-In
ou disk
Scope
SetRack,
para
selecionar
oright.
tipo
data
you
want
transfer.
audio
fortoVENUE
dados
queI/O
deseja
transferir
Audio I/O


o dispositivo
de
armazenamento
USBtab,
a compatible)
uma
porta
3Conecte
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
4 4Connect
the
USB
storage
device
tothe
an Transfer
available
USB
port
on USB
Go to
Filing
page
and
click
and
transfer
disponvel
no
sistema.
the
complete
system.
saved data to a compatible USB storage device.
55
Use
the
Transfer
tab na
of
the
Filing
page
transfer
the
VENUE
a aba
Transfer
pgina
Filing
para
osUSB
dados
4Use
Connect
the USB
storage
device
toto
antransferir
available
portVENUE
on
The
connection
between
FOH USB.
Rack and Stage Rack requires
do
dispositivo
desystem.
armazenamento
data
from
the USB
storage
device.
the
complete
6 6Use
thethe
Load
tab
oftab
the
page
to load
the
transferred
5 Use
Use
Transfer
the
page
to transfer
the VENUE
from
or
assembled
byFiling
your
preferred
vendor.
aAvid
aba
Load
daofFiling
pgina
Filing
para
carregar
os dados
data.
data from the USB storage device.
transferidos.
6 Use the Load
tab of the Filing page to load the transferred
Optional
Components
Transferncia
CD
Transfer por CD
data.

O sistema
VENUE provides
oferece um
drive de CD-ROM
The
VENUE system
a CD-ROM
drive thatque
canpode
also tambm
be
ser
usado
como
dispositivo
fonte
para
transferncia
de dados
CD
used
as Transfer
a source device for VENUE data transfer. (You cannot
USB
flash disk
(or other
portable
storage
device do
forFOH
System Components
VENUE.
pode
gravar
dadosdrive;
noUSB
drive
CD-ROM
write
data(Voc
to theno
FOH
Rack
CD-ROM
it is de
read-only.)
The
VENUE
system
provides
a
CD-ROM
drive
that
can
also
be
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
Rack; read-only.)
used
as
a
source
device
for
VENUE
data
transfer.
(You
cannot
aNear-field
To use
CD for transfer:
Included Components Click
Para
usar
umto
CDthe
para
transferncia:
write
data
FOH
Rack CD-ROM drive; it is read-only.)
Headphones
with 1/4-inch jack
Tranferindo
um Scope
Set Set
parafor
o Software
Standalone
Transferring
a Scope
the standalone
software
1 Using the Standalone software on a laptop or other comAll VENUE
Profile
systems
include the
following:
create
Dynamic
or condenser
and XLR mic
cable
1 To
Usando
oand
Software
em um computador,
crie
e salve
puter,
aStandalone
show. microphone
Click
use a CD
forsave
transfer:
Click
the
Transfer
button.
The data
transferreddo
from
the
no
VENUE
Profile
console
66Clique
boto
Transfer.
Os dados
so is
transferidos
dispositivo
(for Talkback)
um show.
USBTransferring
device
to
appropriate
data
folders on the lapScope
Set forcables
theVENUE
standalone
software
USB
para
as pastas
apropriadas
VENUE
no
laptop.
2 Locate
thethe
VENUE
data folder
on the
Two
(2)athe
IEC
power
1 Using
Standalone
software
on asystem
laptopdrive.
or other comFootswitches
(up to 2)
top.
2
Localize
a
pasta
de
dados
VENUE
no
drive
do computador.
puter, create and save a show.
Monitor
mount for
VGAThe
screen
(screen
not included)
6 Click
the Transfer
button.
data
is transferred
from the 3 Copy
that folder
contents external
to a CD-ROM.
Make sure
MIDI
cables and
(for its
connecting
MIDI devices)
7 Se voc escolher Console, os dados so automaticamente
7 IfUSB
you
chose
Console,
data
is automatically
and
ap- lap Trackball
mount
(trackball
not included)
device
to
the appropriate
VENUE
data loaded
folders
on tipo
the
folder
is the
at
the
root
level
of
the Word
CD-ROM.
2
Locate
VENUE
data
folder
on
the
system
drive.
carregados
e aplicados.
Se
voc
escolher
qualquer
outro
de the
BNC
cables
(for
connecting
clock
between
3 Copie aquela pasta e seu contedo para um CD-ROM. the
Certifiqueplied.
IfVENUE
you
chose
anyPad
data
go toethe
Filingos
page
top.
v
Mouse
dados,
pgina
Filing
eother
clique
na type,
aba Load,
carregue
novos
VENUE
system
and
external
digital devices)CD-ROM.
de
que
a
pasta
esteja
na
raiz
do
CD-ROM.
4 se
Burn
or
write
the
disc
as
a
Windows-compatible
3 Copy that folder and its contents to a CD-ROM. Make sure
and click
the Loadpara
tab,oand
load the
newly transferred
data
dados
transferidos
Software
standalone
.
Profile
Guide
folder
25-pinisD-Sub
(for connecting
to GPI devices)
7 If VENUE
you chose
Console,
data is automatically loaded and apthe
at thecables
root level
of the CD-ROM.
into the Standalone software.
5 4Insert
theoCD-ROM
into
VENUE CD-ROM
Queime
disco como
uma CD-ROM
compatveldrive.
com Windows.
Two
(2) console
lights
plied.
If you
chose any
other data type, go to the Filing page
4 Burn or write the disc as a Windows-compatible CD-ROM.
and
click the Load
and load the newly transferred data
6 In the Filing screen, select the CD-ROM drive as the source
Protective
Dusttab,
Cover
5 Insira o CD-ROM no drive de CD-ROM da VENUE.
into
the
Standalone
software.
for
transfer.
5file
Insert
the CD-ROM into a VENUE CD-ROM drive.
Rack(s) (see next)

System Restore CD
6 Na tela
Filing,
selecione
o drive
dethe
CD-ROM
como fonte para
7 When
theFiling
transfer
is complete,
eject
CD-ROM.
6 In the
screen,
select the
CD-ROM
drive as the source
The following
transferir
arquivos.
for file transfer.
ForLeaving
details aondisc
all in
VENUE
systemsdrive
and of
options,
visit
the Avid
the CD-ROM
a VENUE
system
7website
Quando
a
transferncia
estiver
completa,
ejete
o
CD-ROM.
(www.avid.com).
7 can
When
the
transfer
is complete,
eject
the CD-ROM.
slow
down
the response
of some
software
screens, so it
is recommended that you not leave any disc in the drive durDeixar um
disco
no drive
de CD-ROM
um sistema
VENUE
Leaving
a disc
in the
CD-ROM
drive ofde
a VENUE
system
ing Rack
apode
performance.
This
only de
applies
to a VENUE
CD-ROM
Mix
Options
atrasar
a
resposta
algumas
telas
do
software,
can slow down the response of some software screens, soento
it
drive (not
the laptop on
which
running
stand-disco no
recomendvel
que
vocyoure
nunca
deixe the
nenhum
is recommended that you not leave any disc in the drive duralone
software).
drive
durante uma performance. Isso somente se aplica ao
I/O
Options
ing a performance. This only applies to a VENUE CD-ROM
drive CD-ROM da VENUE (no ao laptop em que voc est
drive
(not
laptop
on
which
youre
running16the
standAI16 Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card that
provides
analog
rodando
othe
software
standalone).
alone
software).
outputs
line level outputs, Chapter
and 8 AES
outputs.
24: digital
Using the
Standalone Software 225
225
Exportando
Information
e and
Patchbay
ExportingSystem
System
Information
Information
Patchbay Information
ComWith
o software
Standalone,
umaadescrio
do sistema e/
Standalone
software,
completecompleta
system description
ou do
contedo
de cada pgina
para
and/or
the contents
of eachPatchbay
Patchbaypode
page ser
canexportado
be exported
to
um arquivo
de
texto.
Isso
pode
ser
til
para
gerar
uma
input
list
(line
a text file. These can be useful for generating an input list (line
list) list)
diretamente
do sistema.
Por exemplo,
construa
e customize
o
directly from
the system.
For example,
build
and customPatchbay para um show futuro, ento exporte e imprima a lista de
ize the Patchbay for an upcoming show, then export and print
nomes de canais para usar durante o sound check.
the channel names list for use during sound check.
Para imprimir uma descrio do sistema:

To print a system description:
1 V1 Go
abato
Options
> System.
the Options
> System tab.
2 Clique
no the
boto
Info
e siga
asfollow
instrues
na tela para
imprimir
2 Click
Info
button
and
the on-screen
instructions
umato
descrio
completa
dos
sistema.
print a complete system description.
more
information,
VENUE
System
Information
ExParaFor
mais
informaes,
veja see
VENUE
System
Information
Export
na
pgina
113.
port
on page 113.
ParaTo
exportar
do Patchbay:
exportnomes
Patchbay
names:
to the
Patchbay
youexportar.
want to export.
1 V1 Go
pgina
Patchbay
quepage
deseja
2 Click the Export Patch List icon in the upper right corner of
2 Clique no cone Export Patch List no canto superior direito da

tela.the screen.
Click to export
as HTML
PatchList
List button
BotoExport
Export Patch
The Patchbay names appear in an open HTML file that you
Os nomes do Patchbay aparecem em um arquivo HTML aberto

can save and print, or open in an HTML-compatible applicaque voc pode salvar e imprimir, ou usar um aplicativo compatvel
forpara
formatting
other
For morePara
informacomtion
HTML
formatarorou
fazermodification.
outras modificaes.
mais
tion,
see
Patch
List
Export
on
page
114.
informaes, veja Patch List Export na pgina 114.
226
Guia VENUE Profile
Parte VI: Especificaes
227
228
Guia VENUE Profile
Captulo
25:25:
Especificaes
Mecnicas
Chapter
Mechanical
Specifications
VENUE Profile Console Mechanical Specifications

Maximum Height (front)
Maximum Height (rear)
3.2 inches (81 mm)

6.8 inches (169 mm)
Maximum Width
45.21 inches (1150 mm) with endcaps

44 inches without endcaps
Stage Rack Features
Additional
31.11 inches (790
mm)
Maximum Depth
Required Components
Stage Racks are used with an FOH Rack, and provide 90

all lbs
stage
Weight
(40.8 Kg)The following components must be purchased separately:

DVI supported.
Power
can beRequirements
used simultaneously, supporting up to 96 total100240
inputs. V, 5060 Hz, 160 W
Audio I/O

USB 1.0/USB 2.0
GPI Inindividually
Port
DB-25 D-Sub, female
USB Ports (5)

DB-25 D-Sub, male
Footswitch Connectors (2)
1/4-inch TRS
GPI Out Port
5-pin DIN female
MIDI (In/Out)

Word Clock (In/Out)
applicable) connection to a VENUE FOH Rack. BNC female
Optional Components
VGA Port
DB-15 mini-female
x 768 components
resolution)
The(1024
following
purchased
separately:
RJ-45 (for ECx remote
control)
Console Light Connectors (2)
XLR3F
FOH
LInk Connector
(to Mix Rack, FOH Rack)
Included
Components
MIL connector
Max
FOH LinkProfile
cable length
All VENUE
systems include the following:
11 ft (3.35 m)
System Components

45.21

VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE Profile Guide

(for Talkback)
31.11
6.8

Rack(s) (see next)

VENUE
dimensions
Each Profile
Mix Rack

Dimenses da VENUE Profile
System Restore CD
See the
MixEthernet
Rack Guide,
FOH Rack
Guide,
and Stage
those units.
ECx
Control
Software
Installer
CD Rack Guide for specifications
Mix RackonOptions
Veja os guias Mix Rack, FOH Rack e Stage Rack para as especificaes dessas unidades.
I/O Options
AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input

Card
provides
16 analog 229
Chapter
25:that
Mechanical
Specifications


Captulo 25: Especificaes Mecnicas 229
outputs
230
Guia VENUE Profile
Captulo
26:26:
Especificaes
de udio
Chapter
Audio Specifications
VENUE Profile Console Audio Specifications

Internal Sample Frequency
48 kHz
External Sample Frequency
48 kHz +/ 10 ppm (word clock input)
Processing
DelayFeatures
Stage Rack
less than 2.8 ms (96 channels, stage input through LR bus to stage output)
Internal
Processing
up toprovide
48-bit, fixed
point
Stage Racks
are used with an FOH Rack, and
all stage
288 dB internal dynamic range
can be used
simultaneously, supporting up
96 dB
total
Frequency
Response
+/to0.5
(22inputs.
Hz 20 kHz BW,
relative to 1 kHz)
recommended;
DVI
supported.
THD + N
less than 0.01% Stage input to LR bus, input gain @ min, 1 dBFS output,
Audio I/O
20 Hz 20 kHz BW
Dynamic
Range
108 dB typ
individually
8 analog
output
48 analog
orLR bus, channel & LR faders @ max)
Maximum
Voltage
Gain channels; expandable
84 up
dB to
(stage
input to
a Digital
Snake
Crosstalk
100 dB typ (Adjacent stage inputs
to LR
bus,cable.
@ 1 kHz)
Synchronization
and Control I/O
Residual
Output Noise
90 dBu typ (22 Hz 20 kHz BW)
Optional Components
VENUE Profile Headphone Output

Connector
System
Components
Output Impedance
1/4-inch TRS unbalanced

50 ohms

Included Components
Max RMS Power Output
(with 32-ohm phones) 20 mW
(at
dBu:Profile systems include the following:
All+21
VENUE
(with 600-ohm phones) 130 mW
(for Talkback)
VENUE Profile Talkback Mic Input
Connector
XLR3-F
VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Phantom Power
+15V @ 6mA (always on)
Sensitivity (fixed)
Input
Impedance
Rack(s)
(see next)
20 dBu
20K ohms
All
specifications
subjectCDs,
to change.
Racks,
Software
iLoks, and Cables
Todas
especificaes
esto sujeitas
a alteraes.
MixasRack,
FOH Rack,
and Stage
Rack For
Each Mix Rack or FOH Rack includes: audio specifications

on Mix
Rack, FOH
Rack,
or Stage Rack, see the guide that came
System
Restore
CD
Para especificaes
de udio
do Mix Rack, do FOH Rack e do Stage
with that rack. If your racks include any VENUE expansion opRack, verifique
os guias
fornecidos
com Installer
os racks.CD
Se seus racks
ECx Ethernet
Control
Software
tions, see the guide that came with each option.
incluem
qualquer
expanso
VENUE,
verifique
tambm
o guia que
acompanha esse opcional.

Mix Rack Options
I/O Options
AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card

that
16 analog 231
Chapter
26:provides
Audio Specifications


Captulo 26: Especificaes de udio 231
outputs
232
Guia VENUE Profile
Captulo
27:27:
Diagrama
FluxoDiagrams
de Sinal
Chapter
Signalde
Flow
Sistema VENUE Profile: fluxo de sinais de entrada
VENUE Profile Systems: Input Signal Flow
Stage Rack Features
Audio I/O

System Components
Included Components

DVI supported.

Optional Components
(for Talkback)
VENUE Mouse Pad

VENUE Profile Guide

Rack(s) (see next)


System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options
AI16 Analog Mic/Line InputChapter

Card that
provides
analog 233
27: Signal
Flow16
Diagrams


Captulo 27: Diagrama de Fluxo de Sinal 233
outputs
Sistema VENUE Profile: fluxo de sinais de sada
VENUE Profile Systems: Output Signal Flow
234
Guia VENUE Profile
Captulo 28: Resoluo de Problemas

Este captulo oferece informaes para a resoluo de problemas|. Inclui uma tabela de problemas e solues que oferece respostas para
as perguntas mais comuns, explicando as mensagens de texto apresentadas na tela e encaminha voc a sees especficas deste captulo
ou deste guia para detalhes e instrues.
Resoluo de problemas
A seguinte tabela oferece descries de situaes que podem ocorrer enquanto operando o sistema VENUE e inclui perguntas comuns,
Stage Rack Features
sintomas e mensagens de erro, alm de possveis solues.
Sintoma ou Mensagem
Causa provvel
Soluo
Faders,
Switches,
Canais
e
DVI supported.
Dispositivos
Audio I/O
Fader emperrado
USB
keyboard
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
O caminho do fader foi Resete
a unidade
emand
que
o fader emperrado
est clicando
com o
bloqueado
durante
a boto direito na unidade na pgina Options > Devices e escolhendo
calibrao de inicializao
Reset.
Se possvel,
espere(VENUE
por uma
parteSystems
silenciosaOnly)
da performance
Digital
Snake Cable
Profile
8 analog output channels; expandable up to 48 analog or para evitar alteraes de canho inesperadas. (Para detalhes, veja
Hardware Monitoring Window na pgina 240).
Apenas faders e mutes esto fun- Backup personalizado est Esperefrom
o sistema
sigayour
as instrues
tela para retomar
Avid se
or recuperar
assemblede by
preferred na
vendor.
Synchronization and Control I/O efetivo

cionando
as operaes (Veja Retomando a Operao Normal na pgina 238).
Snake
enable
anddiferena
redundant
O LED
Stereoconnectors
do canal to
est
pis- primary
Indica uma
de(if
12 Equilibre os nveis da fonte ou os ganhos de entrada para
Optional Components
cando applicable) connection to a VENUE
dB ou FOH
mais Rack.
entre os dois contrabalanar.
lados do sinal estreo.
No consegue ajustar o pan do Aux O pan do Aux est Na purchased

pgina Options
> Busses, selecione a opo Follows Channel
separately:
Send pelo ACS
configurado para seguir o Pan. Desselecione para cada Aux Send que deseja controlar o pan
USB flash disk
(or other
System Components pan do canal
independentemente
do pan
do canal.
Inicializao e reinicializao
Included
O sistema
falha Components
e reinicia, em segui- O software VENUE foi for- Continue mixando usando os recursos disponveis enquanto o backup
Headphones
withde
1/4-inch
jack
daAll
a caixa
de Profile
dilogosystems
Resumeinclude
Op- ado
a reiniciar e o backup est efetivo
(Veja No Caso
Falha no
Sistema na pgina 237). Siga
VENUE
the following:
Dynamic
orpara
condenser
XLR
mic cable
erations aparece
personalizado est efetivo. as instrues
na tela
retomarmicrophone
as operaesand
aps
a reinicializao
(Veja Retomando
a Operao Normal na pgina 238).
(for Talkback)

VENUE Mouse Pad

VENUE Profile Guide

Rack(s) (see next)


System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options



Captulo 28: Resoluo de Problemas 235
outputs
Sintoma ou Mensagem
Causa provvel
Soluo
Falhas recorrentes
Um plug-in incompatvel, arquivos

de dados ou do aplicativos
corrompidos, ou um erro de
hardware.
Certifique-se de que est usando as mais atuais verses de todos

os seus plug-ins (verifique com os fabricantes). Se falhas ocorrem
apenas quando voc tenta usar um certo plug-in, desabilite esse plugin e veja se o problema se resolve. Tente reinstalar plug-ins que esto
causando problemas.
Defina se um determinado arquivo Show provoca a falha do sistema
consistentemente. Se for o caso, apague o arquivo e veja se o problema
persiste. Para opes adicionais, veja Realizando um Reset Simples
na pgina 239.
Limpe a console pela pgina Options > System Config e veja se
o problema persiste. Se necessrio, voc pode reinstalar o software
VENUE (Veja Atualizando ou Reinstalando na pgina 241).
Se voc suspeita de problemas com o hard drive do sistema, ou com
o software do sistema, voc pode realizar uma restaurao completa
(Veja Restaurao Completa do Sistema na pgina 241).
Desligue todos os equipamentos e verifique todas as placas, conexes
e fontes de alimentao.
Plug-ins
O rack de plug-in precisa ser Os racks ficaram offline. Os Siga as instrues na tela para reinicializar os racks (veja
inicializado
racks ficam offline se o backup Reinicializando os Racks de Plug-Ins na pgina 238).
personalizado est em efeito, e
aps algumas condies em que
um plug-in ou uma falha do DSP
provocam problemas significantes.
Um ou mais plug-ins esto Um Show foi carregado cujas Instale os plug-ins, se disponveis (veja Instalando e Autorizando
indisponveis
referncias de plug-ins esto Plug-Ins na pgina 151).
indisponveis no sistema atual.
Remova ou substitua o plug-in no Show, ou carregue um arquivo Show
diferente.
Um plug-in no completamente Verifique todos os plug-ins para certificar-se se voc est usando as
compatvel e pode provocar falhas verses mais recentes.
V pgina Options > Plug-Ins e clique no plug-in para visualizar o
nmero da verso.
Tente desabilitar plug-ins um a um para verificar se isso elimina
problemas (veja Habilitando e Desabilitando Plug-Ins Instalados na
pgina 154).
Um dilogo de atualizao Um plug-in instalado precisa de Clique Quit para ignorar o dilogo de autorizao e continuar a iniciar
suge todas as vezes em que autorizao para uso demo ou (o plug-in ficar indisponvel).
o sistema inicia ou reinicia
completo.
Clique Try para utilizar o plug-in por um tempo limitado no modo
Demo.
Clique Authorize se voc est pronto para autorizar um plug-in usando
um iLok. (Veja Instalando e Autorizando Plug-Ins na pgina 151.)
Uma demo de plug-in expirou
Desintale o plug-in listado no dilogo de autorizao (veja Instalando

Plug-Ins Manualmente na pgina 152).
Mensagens de Erro
One or More Units have Conexo ruim ou perdida
Failed
Uma unidade precisa ser resetada

Plug-In Racks Need Reset
236
Guia VENUE Profile
Verifique todos os cabos e conexes

Certifique-se se cabos digitais XLR esto sendo usados para conectar
a unidade principal D-Show e as unidades Sidecar (sistema VENUE
D-Show apenas).
Certifique-se de que o ltimo Sidecar na cadeia est devidamente
delimitado (sistema VENUE D-Show apenas).
Resete o componente em Options > Devices.
Se necessrio, reinicie o sistema VENUE.
Os racks ficaram offline por causa Siga as instrues na tela para resetar os racks (Veja Reinicializando
do backup personalizado em efeito, os Racks de Plug-In na pgina 238).
um plug-in falhou, ou algumas
circunstncias
provocaram
a
necessidade de reinicializao do
DSP.
Sintoma ou Mensagem
Causa provvel
Power Supply Alert
Uma fonte de energia est falhando Clique Review para visualizar a pgina Options > Devices. Resete
ou no est plugada.
as unidades conforme necessrio (veja Janela de Monitorao de
Um jumper est incorretamente Hardware na pgina 240).
ajustado.
Control Surface
(Sistema VENUE
apenas)
Change A ID de um bus foi alterada, uma Clique para apagar a mensagem. Verifique os IDs das unidades para
D-Show nova console foi detectada, ou um certificar-se de que as rguas de canais de entrada esto arranjadas
novo sidecar foi detectado.
como desejado.
Date & Time Check
Soluo
As configuraes do relgio do
sistema para horrio do dia pode
ter sido verificada em vez do tempo
atual.
Verifique e resete o relgio do sistema na pgina Options > Misc.

Relgio do sistema ajustado incorretamente pode afetar a transferncia
de dados e as autorizaes de plug-ins.
Se o problema do relgio persiste, a bateria precisa ser substituda
no rack do sistema ou console (contate a assistncia VENUE se voc
suspeita que isso est acontecendo).
Sample Rate Conversion Uma disparidade de sample rate

Stage Racks are used with anouFOH
Rack, and provide
all stage
Alert
sincronizao
do relgio
foi
VENUE SRC
Profiledetectada
systems. na
Upentrada
to two Stage
Osaudio
LEDsI/O
deforcontrole
digital.Racks
OFF
com supporting up to 96 total inputs.
canpiscam
be used(Sistemas
simultaneously,
opcionais DSI)
Audio I/O
Alerta 48
de inputs
Monitorao
de O sistema
detectou
componente
with remotely
controllable
micum
preamps
and
Hardware
de hardware atuando acima ou
abaixo de suas especificaes de
hardware.
Nenhuma ao imediata requerida; a converso automtica de

The following
components
must be
purchasedchecar
separately:
sample
rate mantm
o fluxo digital,
permitindo
ajustes e
conexes
entre
D-Show
e
dispositivos
digitais
externos
posteriormente.
Para mais informaes sobre conexes digitais e sincronizao, veja
Entradas Digitais e Converso de Taxa de Amostragem na pgina
24. DVI supported.
Stage Rack Features

Em Caso de Falha do Sistema

O sistema
VENUEComponents
inclui vrias rotinas de redundncia e segurana
System
que ajudam a proteger contra problemas que podem interromper o
udio. Isso inclui a habilidade de manter o controle da mix mesmo
Components
queIncluded
uma falha ocorra,
para resetar os components de hardware e
o software, alm de resetar e reinstalar completamente o software
do sistema.
Para mxima
proteo,
fontes
de alimentao redundantes esto
Two (2)
IEC power
cables
disponveis.
Para
sistemas
que
um ounot
mais
racks de
Monitor mount for VGAutilizam
screen (screen
included)
hardware VENUE, snakes opcionais redundantes esto disponveis
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not included)do sistema para
para oferecer
backup
adicional
de comunicao
VENUE
Mouse Pad
operao
ininterrupta.
VENUE Profile Guide
Manuteno do Controle De Mixagem

Protective
Dust Cover
Se a qualquer
momento
o sistema falha, ou o sistema resetado
ou inicializado,
modo
de backup do software automaticamente
Rack(s)o(see
next)
habilitado para manter o fluxo de udio e os controles essenciais
de mixagem.
Quando
backup
est habilitado, um dilogo surge
EachoMix
Rackpersonalizado
na tela no banner. O sistema ento inicia sua prpria reinicializao
System Restore CD
em background, enquanto voc pode continuar a usar os faders e os
ECx
Control
Software
Installer
CD continuam a
switches
MuteEthernet
para realizar
a mixagem
bsica.
Plug-Ins
processar
o
udio
mas
seus
controles
no
podem
ser
alterados at
que o processo esteja completo.
USB
and trackball/mouse
compatible)
Clique
HWkeyboard
Monitor para
acessar a janela (Windows
Hardware Monitor
para o
dispositivo. Veja Janela Hardware Monitoring na pgina 240.
Optional Components
Recursos
permanecem
ativos
USBque
flash
disk (or other
Os seguintes recursos essenciais de mixagem permanecem ativos

enquanto o backup personalizado est habilitado:
Headphones
with 1/4-inch
Bank
Input Channels
(Banks jack
AD); ajuste de nveis e mutes.
(FX
Returns
so
agrupados
independentemente
de Input
Dynamic or condenser microphone
and XLR mic cable
Channels.)
(for Talkback)
Bank to FX Returns; ajuste de faders e mutes
Faders Bank Output; ajuste de faders e mutes
MIDI cables
(for VCA,
connecting
external
Controles
master
incluindo
mutes MIDI
VCA, edevices)
tendo todos os
do grupo
VCA refletindo
aoclock
ajustes
de VCA the
membros
BNC cables
(for connecting
Word
between
Apresentao
dosand
nomes
corretos
paradevices)
qualquer fader em seus
VENUE system
external
digital
displays LCD, mesmo quando agrupados
Medio
do sinal de entrada nos medidores de canal de entrada,
e medio das sadas de output nos medidiores atribudos. Os
botes de seleo de modo de medio permanecem ativos
no meterbridge (entretanto, o modo de medio no segue
VENUE
automaticamente a seleo de sada, se est configurado para
The isso).
following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.
For details
Medidores
deVENUE
compressor
e and
gate options,
permanecem
ativos
on all
systems
visit the
Avidpara
todos os Input Channels (entretando, os switches Comp In e
Gate In no esto disponveis)
Desligamento dos LEDs System Status do meterbridge (VENUE
apenas)
MixD-Show
Racke Profile
Options
I/O Options



Captulo 28: Resoluo de Problemas 237
outputs
Switch the Mute Group Masters, and see the effect on the
Switch the Mute Group Masters, and see the effect on the
channels with member-mutes (flashing mute switches)
channels with member-mutes (flashing mute switches)
All LCD displays illuminate (orange)
All
Seleo
de canais
est desabilitada
LCD displays
illuminate
(orange) para todas as entradas e
Adjust
sadasnear-field monitor and headphone levels
near-field
monitor
and
levels
Channel
select Group
is disabled
forheadphone
alleinputs
outputs
Adjust
Acione
o Mute
Masters,
veja oand
efeito
nos canais
para
mutes
(switches
Mute
atribudos
Switch the
Mute
Group
Masters,
andpiscantes)
see the effect on the
Unavailable
Features
Features
Unavailable
Iluminao
de
todos os displays
LCD (laranja)
channels
with
member-mutes
(flashing
mute switches)
TheAjuste
dos nveis
de monitor
near-fieldwhile
e headphone
following
features
are unavailable
the backup perThe
following
features
are unavailable
while the backup per All
LCD displays
illuminate
(orange)
sonality is in effect:
sonalityindisponveis
is in effect:
Recursos
Adjust near-field monitor and headphone levels
Use the ACS

Use the ACS
Modify any
otheresto
mixing
parameters enquanato
apart from faders
Os seguintes
recursos
indisponveis
o backup
Modify any Features
other mixing parameters apart from faders
Unavailable
and mutes
example auxes)
personalizado
est(for
efetivo.
and mutes (for example auxes)
The
osolos
ACS orfeatures
Usar
Use
Solo In are
Place
following
unavailable while the backup per
Use solosqualquer
or Solo In
Placeparmetro de mixagem alm dos
sonality
Modificar
outro
Change
the
input or output routing, or order of inputs
is in
effect:
e mutes
(auxiliares,
por exemplo)
faders
Change
the input
or output
routing, or order of inputs
stereo,
or unlink
stereo to discrete mono channels
Make
Use
theou
ACS
Usar
Solos
Solo
In
Place
Make stereo, or unlink stereo to discrete mono channels
Alterar
o roteamento
deFlex
entradas
e sadas
ordenar
Control
and
Channel
Channel
Modify
any other
mixing
parameters
apartoufrom
fadersas
entradas
Channel Control and Flex Channel
and mutes
(for
example
auxes) or Group spill
Change
bus or
group
assignments,
Change
bus or
assignments,
Group spill
Make
stereo,
ougroup
desassociar
canaisor estreo
para monos
Change
Use solos
ormembership,
Solo In PlaceVCA spill, or show VCA memindependentes
VCA
Change VCA membership, VCA spill, or show VCA members
Change
the input
output routing, or order of inputs
Channel
Control
e Flex or
Channel
bers
Alterar
as stereo,
atribuies
de busany
ou Filing
group,
ou distribuir
Group
names or
or unlink
access
functions
Change
Make
stereo
to discrete
monoum
channels
Change
names or
access
any Filing functions
Alterar
a
filiao
VCA,
a
distribuio
VCA
ou
apresentar
os
any system
parameters
in the Options
Reconfigure
Channel Control
and Flex
Channel
membros
Reconfigure
any system parameters in the Options
do VCA
screens
Change
bus
group qualquer
assignments,
or Filing
Group spill
Alterar
nomes
ouor
acessar
funo
screens
Access
GEQs
on
the
faders
(GEQs
continue
to process
au Reconfigurar
qualquer
parmetro
nasspill,
telasor
Options
Change VCA
membership,
VCA
show
VCA memAccess GEQs on the faders (GEQs continue to process audio
in
backup
mode)
Accessar
bers GEQs nos faders (GEQs continuam a processor udio
dio in backup mode)
modo
backup)
no
the
parameters
of any
Plug-In
Adjust
Change
names
or access
anyexisting
Filing functions
Adjustparmetros
the parameters
of any plug-in
existing Plug-In
Ajustar
de qualquer
All
LED
indicators
(except
meters)
and
output
fader CAL
Reconfigure
any LED
system
parameters
in
the
Options
Todos
os indicadores
(exceto
medidores)
e luzes
dosCAL
faders
All LED
indicators (except
meters)
and output
fader
lights
go
dark
and
are
inactive
screens
delights
sada
ficam
inativos
go
darkescuros
and aree inactive
Access GEQs on the faders (GEQs continue to process audio in backup
mode)
Resuming
Normal
Operation
Resuming
Normal
Operation
Retomando
a Operao
Normal
Adjust
the parameters
of any existing Plug-In
(Exiting
Backup
Personality)
(Saindo
dothe
Backup
Personalizado)
(Exiting
the
Backup
Personality)
All LED indicators (except meters) and output fader CAL

When the system has recovered and is prepared to return to
lights
go dark
are inactive
Quando
o sistema
est
recuperado
e ispreparado
retomar
When the
system
hasand
recovered
and
prepared para
to return
to a
normal operation,
thecaixa
Ready
Resume
dialog
appears surge na
operao
normal,
uma
de to
dilogo
Ready
to Resume
normal operation, the Ready
to
Resume
dialog
appears
on-screen.
tela.
on-screen.
Resuming Normal Operation
(Exiting the Backup Personality)

When the system has recovered and is prepared to return to
normal operation, the Ready to Resume dialog appears
on-screen.
Ready
to Resume
Caixa
de dilogo
Readydialog
to Resume
Ready to Resume dialog
in the Ready to Resume dialog give you options for

AsChoices
escolhas
na caixa
opes
para como
Choices
in the
Readyde
to dilogo
Resume oferecem
dialog give
you options
for e
how
and
whencrticas
critical functions
are brought
online.
quando
funes
recolocadas
online. back
Funes
teis so
how and
when criticalso
functions
are brought
back
online.
Utility functions
are also provided
for resetconforme
and diagnostics,
oferecidas
para reinicializao
e diagnstico,
descritoas
nas
Utility functions are also provided for reset and diagnostics, as
describedsees.
in the following sections.
seguintes
described in the following sections.
Ready to Resume dialog
Because
this process
audio
wait
Pelo motivo
de que can
esseinterrupt
processo
podethroughput,
interromper
o fluxo
Because this process can interrupt audio throughput, wait
Choices
in theespere
Readyum
tothe
Resume
dialog
give
for
for
silent
portion
of
performance
beforeyou
confirming
de audio,
momento
de silncio
na options
performance
for
a silent
portion of the
performance
before
confirming
antes
de
confirmar
(como
uma
pausa
entre
msicas
how
andas
when
critical
functions
are
brought
back
online. ou
(such
a break
between
songs,
intermission,
or similar).
(such
as a break between songs, intermission, or similar).
similar).
Utility
functions are also provided for reset and diagnostics, as
described in the following sections.
Because
238 VENUE
Profile this
Guideprocess can interrupt audio throughput, wait
for a silent portion of the performance before confirming

(such as a break between songs, intermission, or similar).
break in a performance to complete the resumption of normal

operations.
operations.
Reset Mix Engines Use this option to do a full system reset in
Resume
opo
seavoc
precisareset
esperar
Reset
Mix Operations
Engines UseUse
thisessa
option
to do
full system
in por
one step. All operations and controls including the plug-in
umstep.
break
performance
completer
a retomada
da operao
one
Allnaoperations
andpara
controls
including
the plug-in
racks
return
to full operation.
is the
fastest
way
resume
Resume
Operations
Use this This
option
if you
need
toto
wait
for a
normal.
racks
return to full operation. This is the fastest way to resume
operations,
it may interrupt
audio.
break in a but
performance
to complete
the resumption of normal
operations, but it may interrupt audio.
operations.
Reset
Mix Engines Use essa opo para realizar um reset completo
More Options Use this option to clear the console (reset, or
do sistema
passo.
Todas
as operaes
e controles
More
Optionsem
Useum
this
option
to clear
the console
(reset, orincluindo
zero
the
orUse
to perform
hardware
Reset
Mixboard),
Engines
this
option
to completa.
do adiagnostics.
full system
in
os
racks
a operao
Esse reset
o caminho
zero
the plug-in
board),retomam
or to perform
hardware
diagnostics.
one step.
Allpara
operations
including
the interromper
plug-in
mais
rpido
retomarand
as controls
operaes,
mas pode
o
racks return
to full operation. This is the fastest way to resume
udio.
Resume
Operations
Resume
Operations
operations,
but it may interrupt audio.
This
option
begins
process
of para
resuming
operations
lets ou
More
Options
Usethe
essa
opo
limpar
a consoleand
(resetar,
This option begins the process of resuming operations and lets
More
Options
Use
option
toum
clear
the console
or
you
control
precisely
when
the plug-in
racks
are re-initialized.
zerar
a mesa),
outhis
para
realizar
diagnstico
de (reset,
hardware.
you control precisely when the plug-in racks are re-initialized.
zero the board), or to perform hardware diagnostics.
Operaes
ToRetomando
begin the Resume
Operations process:
To begin the Resume Operations process:
Resume
Operations
1 Essa
Click opo
Resumeinicia
Operations.
The console
resets all de
parameters
o processo
de retomada
operaes e
1 Click Resume Operations. The console resets all parameters
and
configuration
settings.
When
completed,
the
Plug-In
permite
controlar
precisamente
quando
os
racks
de plug-ins
This
option
begins
the
process
of
resuming
operations
and letsso
and configuration settings. When completed, the Plug-In
Racks
Reset
dialog
appears
to
let
you
initiate
the
process
of
reinicializados.
you Reset
control
precisely
when
plug-in
racksthe
areprocess
re-initialized.
Racks
dialog
appears
to the
let you
initiate
of
re-initializing the plug-in racks.
re-initializing
plug-in
racks.Operations:
Para iniciar o the
processo
Resume
begin
Resume
Operations
process:
2 To
Reset
thethe
plug-in
racks
(see next).
2 Reset the plug-in racks (see next).
11 Clique
ResumeOperations.
Operations.The
A console
todos
ajustes de
Click Resume
console reseta
resets all
parameters
Re-Initializing
Plug-In
Racks
parmetros
ethe
configuraes.
Quando
completo, the
a caixa
de dilogo
and
configuration
settings.
When
completed,
Plug-In
Re-Initializing the Plug-In Racks
Plug-In
Racksdialog
Resetappears
surge para
permitir
a inicializao
do processo
Racks
Reset
to
let
you
initiate
the
process
of
The
racks are
taken
offline
during a Resume Operation
de plug-in
reinicializao
dos
racks
de plug-ins.
The
plug-in
racksthe
are
taken
offline
during a Resume Operation
re-initializing
plug-in
racks.
process. Whenever the plug-in racks go offline they will need
process. Whenever the plug-in racks go offline they will need
to22be
reinitialized
to
normal
operation.
Resete
os racks
deresume
plug-in
(veja
a seguir).
Reset
the
plug-in
racks
(see
next).
to be reinitialized to resume normal operation.
Do not resetos
theRacks
racksde
until
there is a long enough break in
Reinicializando
Plug-Ins
Re-Initializing
Racks
Do not resetthe
the Plug-In
racks until
there is a long enough break in
the performance that the rack can be fully rebuilt with no
the performance that the rack can be fully rebuilt with no
Os
racks
deracks
plug-ins
so This
colocados
offline
durante
o processo
Thesignal
plug-in
are taken
offline
during
a important
Resume
Operation
passing
through.
is especially
when
signalOperation.
passing through.
This
isos
especiallydeimportant
when offline
Resume
Sempre
plug-ins
ficam
process.
the plug-in
racksracks
go offline
they will
need
using Whenever
crossover plug-ins
orque
gain-attenuating
plug-ins.
using crossover
plug-ins or gain-attenuating
eles
ser reinicializados
para retomar
aplug-ins.
operao normal.
to beprecisam
reinitialized
to resume normal
operation.
The following conditions apply when resuming operations

The following
conditions
applyat
when
resuming
operations
resete
osracks
racks
que
longo
break
DoNo
not
reset the
until
there
is ahaja
longum
enough
in na
When
offline,
plug-ins
on Input
Channels
and
FXbreak
Reperformance
para
que
o
rack
possa
ser
completamente
When
offline,
plug-ins
on
Input
Channels
and
FX
Rethe performance
can be
fullyusing
rebuilttheir
withsetno
turns
continue to that
pass the
andrack
process
audio
reconstrudo
sinais
passando
por their
ele. setEsse
turns
continue
to sem
pass and
process
audio using
signal
passing
This
is especially
tings
at the
timethrough.
the racks
went
offline. important when
especialmente
importante
quando
plug-ins de
tings
at crossover
the time plug-ins
the
racksorwent
offline. utilizando
using
gain-attenuating
plug-ins.
Offline
plug-ins
output
channels
and busses
are
crossover
ou on
de atenuao
de ganho.
Offline plug-ins on output channels and busses are
muted.
Themuted.
following conditions apply when resuming operations
As
seguintes
so plug-ins
aplicadassettings
quando
You
will not condies
be able to adjust
untilretomando
the
When
offline,
plug-ins
on Input
Channels
and
FX the
Re You
will not
be able
to adjust
plug-ins
settings
until
operaes.
racks fully re-initialize.
turns
continue
to
pass
and
process
audio
using
their
set racks
Quando
plug-ins em Input Channels e FX Returns
fullyoffline,
re-initialize.
Once
begin
reinitialize,
plug-ins
are unavailtingsthe
at racks
the
time
thetoracks
went
offline.
continuam
a
processor
udio
utilizando
os
ajustes
do
momentos
Once the racks begin to reinitialize, plug-ins are unavailable
and
dorack
notfoi
process
audio.
em
que o
colocado
offline.
able
Offline
plug-ins
on
output
channels and busses are
and do
not process
audio.
During
Plug-ins
offline
em
canais
de
sada
busses
sorack
silenciados.
reinitialization,
plug-ins
are eloaded
into
slots
muted.
reinitialization,
plug-ins
are loaded dos
intoplug-ins
rack slots
During
Voc no
poder
ajustar
as configuraes
at que
according
to
the last
loaded
Show file; plug-in
racks are
according
You
will
notthe
belast
ableloaded
to adjust
plug-ins
settings
until
to
Show
file; plug-in
racks
arethe
o
rack
esteja
completamente
reinicializado.
turned off (all assigned plug-ins are made inactive).
racksvez
fully
re-initialize.
off
(all
assigned
made
inactive). plug-ins
turned
Uma
que
os racksplug-ins
tenhamare
sido
reinicializados,
When
all
plug-ins have
loaded
and the
racks initialized,
esto
indisponveis
e no
processam
udio.
Onceall
the
racks begin
to
reinitialize,
plug-ins
are unavail When
plug-ins
have
loaded
and the
racks initialized,
systemadisplays
a dialogplug-ins
alerting so
you that the racks
the
Durante
reinicializao,
em slots
able
and do
not process
audio.
the
system
displays
a dialog
alerting you carregados
that the racks
are
brought
back
online (reactivated).
This is
deready
rackstodebeacordo
com
o arquivo
Show mais recentemente
areDuring
plug-ins
are(reactivated).
loaded into rack
ready reinitialization,
to be brought back
online
Thisslots
is
provided
as aracks
finalde
precaution
against
sudden(todos
changes
to
carregado;
plug-ins so
desligados
os plug-ins
according
tofinal
the precaution
last loaded against
Show file;
plug-in
racks to
are
provided
as
a
sudden
changes
associados
so feitosresume
inativos).
audio
when plug-ins
processing.
turned
off
(all assigned
plug-ins
are carregados
made inactive).
when
plug-ins
resume
processing.
audio
Quando
todos
os plug-ins
forem
e os racks
Shortly
after you
confirm
that
you
want
the
racks
brought
inicializados,
When
all plug-ins
have
loaded
and
the
racks
initialized,
o sistema
mostra
uma
caixa
de dilogo
alertando
Shortly after you confirm that you want the racks brought
que
os
racks
esto
prontos
para
serem
reativados
(online).
back online,
plug-ins
resume
processing
audio
and
paramthe system displays a dialog alerting you thatallthe
racks
back online,
plug-ins resume
processing
audio
and
all paramIsso
oferecido
como
uma
precauo
final
contra
alteraes
eters become
available
for
editing.
are ready to be brought back online (reactivated). This is
eters become
available
for editing.
sbitas
no as
udio
quando
o plug-ins
retoma
o processamento.
provided
a final
precaution
against
sudden
changes to
audio when plug-ins resume processing.
Aps confirmar que deseja trazer os racks de volta, plug-ins retomam

oShortly
processamento
de udio
e you
todos
os the
parmetros
se tornam
after you confirm
that
want
racks brought
disponveis
para
edio.
back online, plug-ins resume processing audio and all parameters become available for editing.
238
Guia VENUE Profile
To re-initialize (reset) the racks:
To re-initialize
the
Para
reinicializar(reset)
(resetar)
osracks:
racks:
1 In the Plug-In
Reset dialog, click Reset to begin the
To re-initialize
(reset)Racks
the racks:
1 In
the
Plug-In Racks
Reset
dialog, click Reset to begin the
To
re-initialize
(reset)
the
racks:
plug-in
rack
re-initialization.
1 Na caixa de dilogo Plug-In Racks
Reset, clique Reset para iniciar
plug-in
re-initialization.
1 In therack
Plug-In
Racks Reset dialog, click Reset to begin the
a reinicializao
do rack
de plug-in.
1 In the Plug-In
Racks
Reset
dialog,
click Reset to begin the
plug-in rack re-initialization.
plug-in rack re-initialization.
Performing a Soft Reset

Performing
a Soft
SoftReset
Reset
Realizando
um
Performing
a Soft
If your VENUE system
everReset
needs to be reset, do the following:
If your
VENUE systema
ever
needsReset
to be reset, do the following:
Performing
Soft
sistema
VENUE
resetado,
siga
os seguintes
If Se
yourseu
VENUE
system
ever precisa
needs toser
be reset,
do the
following:
To
restart
the system:
procedimentos:
If your
VENUE
system ever needs to be reset, do the following:
To restart the system:
1 Go to
the
Options > System page.
To restart
the
system:
1 Para
Go
the Options
> System page.
reinicializar
o sistema:
To to
restart
the system:
2 Hold
and click
the Shut Down button.
1 Go
to theDefault
Options(Alt)
> System
page.
2 Hold
(Alt) and
click
thepage.
Shut Down button.
to the Options
Options
> System.
System
11VGo
Default
pgina
>
2 Hold Default (Alt) and click the Shut Down button.
2 Hold Default (Alt) and click the Shut Down button.
2 Segure Default (Alt) e clique no boto Shut Down.
Stage
Features
ResettingRack
the plug-in
racks
Resettingosthe
plug-in
racks
Resetando
racks
de plug-in
Stage
are used
with an FOH
Rack, and
provide
all stage
WhenRacks
this
step
is completed,
the Plug-In
Racks
are Ready
diaResetting
the
plug-in
racks
When
this
step
is
completed,
the Plug-InUp
are Stage
ReadyRacks
diaResetting
the
plug-in
racks
audio
foralerting
VENUE
Profile
to
two
Quando
o I/O
processo
completado,
a caixa
deRacks
dilogo
Plug-In
log
appears
you
thatsystems.
the
plug-in
racks
are
readyRacks
to be
log
appears
alerting
you
that
the
plug-in
racks
are
ready
to
be
When
this
step
is
completed,
the
Plug-In
Racks
are
Ready
diaare can
Ready
surgesimultaneously,
alertando que os
racks de up
plug-in
prontos
be used
supporting
to 96esto
total inputs.
re-activated.
this
step isyou
completed,
Plug-In
Racks
are Ready
re-activated.
logWhen
appears
alerting
that the the
plug-in
racks
are ready
to bediapara
serem reativados.
log
appears
alerting
you
that
the
plug-in
racks
are
ready
2 Click
Use Racks to confirm that you want the racks toto
bebe
re-activated.
Audio
I/O
2 Click
Use
Racks to confirm that you want the racks to be
re-activated.
re-initialized.
Status
is shown
on-screen.
After the
is
2 Clique
Use Racks
para
confirmar
que deseja
queprocess
os racks
re-initialized.
Status
shown
on-screen.
After
the
process
2 Click
Use
Racks
toisconfirm
that
you want
the
racks
to beis
reinicializados.
48
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic
preamps
and
sejam
O
Status
apresentado
na
tela.
Depois
que
complete,
the
console
and
all
plug-ins
are
operational
again.
2 Click Use Racks to confirm that you want the racks to be
the
console
and aallconsole
plug-ins
operational
again.
re-initialized.
Status
is shown
on-screen.
After
the
process
is
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
ocomplete,
processo
completado,
e are
todos
os plug-ins
esto
re-initialized.
Status is shown
on-screen.
After the process
complete,
the
console
all plug-ins
are operational
again. is
operacionais
novamente.
8 analog
outputand
channels;
expandable
up to 48 analog
or
Reset Mix
complete,
theEngines
console and all plug-ins are operational again.
Reset digital
Mix Engines
Resetando
Mix
Engines
Reset
Mixoption
Engines
Use this
to do a full system reset in one step. Reset Mix
UseReset
this option to
do a full system reset in one step. Reset Mix
Engines
Synchronization
and
Control I/Oautomatically, including the
EnginesMix
resumes
all operations
Engines
resumes
automatically,
including
the
Use essa
this option
dooperations
a full
system
in one
step.
Reset
Mix
Use
opotoall
para
realizar
umreset
reset
completo
do sistema
console,
settings,
and
racks.
Use
this
option
tooperations
do
aplug-in
full
system
reset intodas
one
step.
Reset
Mix
passo.
Snake
connectors
to
enable
primary
and
redundant
em
um
Resetar
Mix
Engines
retoma
as operaes
console,
settings,
and
plug-in
racks.
Engines
resumes
all
automatically,
including
the(if
Engines
resumes
all
operations
automatically,
including
the
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
automaticamente,
incluindo
a
console,
ajustes
e
racks
de
plug-ins.
console,Audio
settings,
plug-in racks.
mayand
be interrupted
or may change levels during
console,
settings,
and plug-in
racks.
Audio may
be interrupted
or may
change levels during
this reset procedure.
O udio
pode
ser interrompido
variar
os nveis
this
reset
procedure.
Audio
may
be interrupted
or may ou
change
levels
duringdurante o
Audio
may be
or may change levels during
procedimento
deinterrupted
reset.
this
reset
procedure.
To reset the Components
Mix Engines and all operations immediately:
resetEngines
procedure.
To System
reset this
the Mix
and all operations immediately:
Click
MixMix
Engines
in operations
the Ready
to
Resume
Para
resetar
Engines
e todas
as dialog.
operaes
To reset
theReset
MixosEngines
and
all
immediately:
Click Reset Mix Engines in the Ready to Resume dialog.
To reset the Mix Engines and all operations immediately:
imediatamente:
Included
Components
Click
Reset Mix
Engines
the online;
Ready tono
Resume
Operations
are
broughtinback
furtherdialog.
interaction is
Operations
are brought
back in
online;
no further
interaction
Click Reset
Mix Engines
the Ready
to Resume
dialog.is
required
(no
warning
or
dialogs
appear).
Clique
Reset
Mix
Engines
naconfirmation
caixa
de dilogo
Ready
to Resume.
All
VENUE
Profile
systems
include
the following:
required
(noare
warning
orback
confirmation
Operations
brought
online; nodialogs
furtherappear).
interaction is
Operations
are
brought
back online;dialogs
no further
interaction is
VENUE
Profile
console
required
(no
warning
appear).
Operaes
so
trazidas or
deconfirmation
volta online; nenhum
outra interao
More
Options
required
(no
warning
or
confirmation
dialogs
appear).
Two
(2) IEC power
necessria
(nenhuma
caixa cables
de dilogo de alerta ou confirmao
More Options

If restarting the system does not correct a problem, you may
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
VGA
and
If restarting
the system
does not
correct a resolution).
problem, you
may
have to reset hardware components, identify and remove any
DVI
supported.
reinicializar
o sistema
no
corrige
o problema,
voc
have
to reset
hardware
components,
identify
and remove
anyter que
If Se
restarting
the
system
does
not
correct
a problem,
youpode
may
incompatible
plug-ins,
or
reinstall
VENUE
software using
the
If
restarting
the
system
does
notVENUE
correct
a and
problem,
you
may
resetar
os componentes
de
hardware,
identificar
eremove
remover
qualquer
incompatible
plug-ins,
or
reinstall
software
using
the
have
to reset
hardware
identify
any
System
USB
keyboard
andcomponents,
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
Restore
CD.
have
to
reset
hardware
components,
identify
and
remove
any
plug-in
incompatvel,
ou
reinstalar
o
software
VENUE
utilizando
System
Restoreplug-ins,
CD.
incompatible
or reinstall VENUE software using the o CD
System
Restore.plug-ins, or reinstall VENUE software using the
incompatible
System
Restore
Digital
SnakeCD.
System
Restore Reset
CD.
Additional
Options
Opes
Adicionais
de
Reset
The connection
between
Additional
Reset
Options
Additional
shortcuts
are
provided
thedirectly
system,
a Digital Snake
cable.
This
cable while
can berestarting
purchased
Additional
Reset
Options
Additional
shortcuts
are provided
while restarting
the reinicializado,
system,
Additional
Reset
Options
Atalhos
so
enquanto
o sistema
which
let
you
theoferecidos
following:
fromadicionais
Avid
ordo
assembled
by your
preferred
vendor.
which
let you
dofazer
theare
Additional
shortcuts
provided while restarting the system,
que permitem
ofollowing:
seguinte:
Additional
shortcuts
are
provided
while
the system,
Back
up the
current
show
settings
and restarting
clear the console.
Use
which
let
you
do
the
following:
Back
up let
theyou
current
show
settings and clear the console. Use
which
do
the
following:
this
option
you suspect
auto-saved
setting
has ebecome

Realizar
o ifback
up dos an
ajustes
do Show
atual
limpar a
Optional
Components
you suspect
an auto-saved
setting
has become
this
Backoption
up the ifcurrent
show settings
and clear
the console.
Use
This
letsopo
you save
yoursuspeita
most
recent
settings
console.
Use
esta
se
voc
que
um
ajusteand
salvo
corrupted.
Back
up This
the
current
show
settings
and
clear
the
console.
Use
corrupted.
lets
you
save
your
most
recent
settings
and
this
option
if
you
suspect
an
auto-saved
setting
has
become
Theclear
following
components
are
optional,
be restore.
automaticamente
pode estar
corrompido.
Isso
permite
salvar
the console
without
having
to do and
a setting
fullmust
system
this
option
if
you
suspect
an
auto-saved
has
become
clear
the console
without
having
do a recent
full
system
restore.
corrupted.
This
lets
yourecentes
save
your
most
settings
and
purchased
separately:
seus
ajustes
mais
etolimpar
a console
sem
que seja
corrupted.
This
lets you
save your
most
recent
settings
and
or
console
clear
the
without
having
to
do
a
full
system
restore.
realizar
completa
sistema.
necessrio
USB flash disk
(or uma
otherrestaurao
portable USB
storagedo
device
for
or
clear the console without having to do a full system restore.

ou
into
to 512
be able
manage softof Explorer,
Show data;
MB to
or manually
larger recommended)
orLaunch
transfer

Launch
to
be able
toapto
manually
manage
softnoExplorer,
Explorer,Use
para
estar
gerenciar
manualmente
Iniciar
or into
ware
components.
this
option
toa troubleshoot
the sys Near-field
monitor
speakers
for
mix
position
monitoring
components.
Use
this
option
to
troubleshoot
the
sys ware
Launch
into
Explorer,
to
be
able
to
manually
manage
softos components
do software.
Use
essa
opo
paraand
resoluo
de
tem
if problems
arise
early
inable
the to
startup
process
persist
Launch
into
Explorer,
to
be
manually
manage
soft problemas
with
1/4-inch
jack
tem
ifHeadphones
problemsque
arise
early
in
the
startup
process
and
persist
ware
components.
Use
this
option
to
troubleshoot
the
syssurgem
no
processo
de
inicializao
e
persistem
through
repeated restarts.
ware
components.
Use
this
option
to process
troubleshoot
the sysreinicializaes
repetidas
through
repeated
restarts.
tem
ifDynamic
problems
early
in microphone
the
startup
andmic
persist
por
orarise
condenser
and XLR
cable
tem
if
problems
arise
early
in
the
startup
process
and
persist
through
(forrepeated
Talkback)restarts.
Backup
and
Clear
Console
through
repeated
restarts.
Backup e Clear Console
Backup
and Clear(up
Console
Footswitches
to 2)
surge).
Options
Monitor
mountare
forprovided
VGA screen
(screen
not included)
More
and
Clear
Console
Additional
options
to clear
the console,
or to run Backup
backup
MIDI
cables
connecting
external
MIDI devices)
To
and clear
the
restart:
Para
fazer
backup
e(for
zerar
aconsole
console at
na
inicializao:
Additional
options are provided to clear the console, or to run
More Options
Backup
and
Clear
Console
DigiTest
(hardware
diagnostics).
Trackball
mount
DigiTest
(hardware
diagnostics).
Additional
options are
provided to clear the console, or to run
More
Options
Additional
options
are
VENUE
Mouse
Padprovided to clear the console, or to run
DigiTest
(hardware
diagnostics).
To
access(hardware
additional
options: para limpar a console, ou para
DigiTest
diagnostics).
Opes
sooptions:
fornecidas
adicionais
VENUE
Profile
Guide
To access
additional
rodar um
DigiTest
(diagnstico
de hardware).
Click More Options.
Two
(2) console
lights
To access
additional
options:
Click More Options.
To access additional options:
Protective
Dust Options,
Cover a dialog is displayed that proPara
acessar
opes:
Click
More
Options.
After
clicking
More
After
More
Options, a dialog is displayed that pro Click
More
Options.
clicking
Rack(s)
(see
next)
vides the following options.

vides
Clique
More
Options.
the
following
After
clicking
More options.
Options, a dialog is displayed that pro-
After clicking More Options, a dialog is displayed that pro-
vides the following options.

Clear
Console
Racks,
Software
CDs,
iLoks,
Cables
Aps
clicarthe
More
Options,options.
uma caixa
de and
dilogo
apresentada que
vides
following
Clear
ofereceConsole
as seguintes opes
Click
resetincludes:
all parameters on all channels to
Clear
Console
Each
MixClear
RackConsole
or FOHtoRack
Click Clear Console to reset all parameters on all channels to
Clear
Console
their
factory
default
settings.
Clear Console
System Restore CD
their
factory
Click
Clear default
Consolesettings.
to reset all parameters on all channels to
Click Clear Console to reset all parameters on all channels to
their
factory
default
settings.
ECx
Ethernet
Software
CD
Clique
Clear ConsoleControl
para resetar
todosInstaller
os parmetros
de todos
Run
DigiTest
their
factory default settings.
Run
DigiTest
os
canais
para
suas
configuraes-padro
de
fbrica.
RunDigiTest
DigiTestis hardware diagnostics software for VENUE systems.
iLok
USB Smart
Key (for storing
authorizations)
DigiTest
is hardware
diagnostics
softwareplug-in
for VENUE
systems.
Run
Rodando
DigiTest
OnlyDigiTest
use DigiTest at the request of a VENUE technician to diOnly
use
DigiTest
at
the
request
of
a
VENUE
technician
toiLok
diDigiTest
is
hardware
diagnostics
software
for
VENUE
systems.
Plug-in installer discs (if any) with pre-authorized
agnose specific
hardware
problems.
DigiTest
is hardware
diagnostics
software
for
VENUE systems.
DigiTest
um
software
de
diagnstico
para
sistemas
VENUE.
agnose
specific
hardware
problems.
Only
use
DigiTest
at
the
request
of
a
VENUE
technician
to
di Two (2) IEC power cables
Only
useo DigiTest
at the
request
of a VENUE
to diApenas
use
DigiTest
perante
a solicitao
de umtechnician
tcnico VENUE
agnose
specific
hardware
problems.
One
FOH
Link
cable
for
connection
to
a
VENUE
console
agnose
specific
hardware
problems.
para diagnosticar problemas especficos de hardware.

To backup and clear the console at restart:

BNC
(for
1 Start
orcables
restart
theconnecting
system. at restart:
To1backup
and
clear othe
console
Inicie
ou
reinicie
sistema.
1 Start
or
restart
the
system.
VENUE
system
and
external
devices)
To backup and clear the console atdigital
restart:
2 Watch
the screen
closely during the startup process. As soon
1 Start
or
restart
the
system.
25-pin
D-Sub
cablesduring
(for connecting
devices)
2 2
Watch
the
closely
the
startupto
process.
As soonAssim
Preste
ateno
na
tela
durante
o processo
deGPI
inicializao.
1
Start
orscreen
restart
the
system.
as
the cursor
becomes
visible
(and
before the
VENUE
software
asque
the ocursor
becomes
visible
(and
before
the
VENUE
software
2
Watch
the
screen
closely
during
the
startup
process.
As
soon
cursor
se
tornar press
visveland
(e antes
do logo
VENUE
surgir
na tela)
logo
screen
appears)
holdthe
thestartup
C key on
the computer
2
Watch
the
screen
closely
during
process.
As soon a
ebecomes
segurepress
avisible
tecla
C(and
no teclado
Continue
logo
and
hold
the C do
key
on
the computer
aspressione
thescreen
cursorappears)
before
thecomputador.
VENUE
software
keyboard.
Continue tovisible
hold the
C before
key (do
not
press it
repeatas
the cursor
(and
the
VENUE
software
segurar
aContinue
teclabecomes
C (no
a pressione
repetidamente).
keyboard.
to hold
the
C key
(do
not
it repeatlogo
screen
appears)
press
and
hold
the
C
key
onpress
the
computer
VENUE
Expansion
Options
edly).screenProfile
logo
appears)
press
and
hold
the
C
key
on
the
computer
edly).
keyboard. Continue to hold the C key (do not press it repeat3The
Uma
caixaContinue
deoptions
dilogo
surge
queC
permite
voc
escolher
entre
keyboard.
tocan
hold
the
key
(do
press
it repeatbe you
added
to VENUE
Profile
systems.
3
Afollowing
dialog
appears
that
lets
choose
toanot
backup
your
edly).
3 fazer
Aedly).
dialog
appears
that
lets
you choose
to
backup your e zerar a
o
backup
de
seus
ajustes
salvos
atuomaticamente
For
details on
all VENUE
systems
options,
the Avid
auto-saved
settings
and clear
the and
console,
or tovisit
continue
and
continuar
carregar
os
ajustes
normalmente.
auto-saved
settings
ande lets
clear
thechoose
console,
to continue
3 console
A dialogou
appears
that
you
toor
backup
your and
website
(www.avid.com).
load
settings
normally.
3 A dialog appears that lets you choose to backup your
load
settings
normally.
auto-saved
settings
and clear the console, or to continue and
auto-saved
settings
and clear
the console,
to continue
and de
Se voc
pressionar
a tecla
C muito or
cedo
no processo
load settings
normally.
If you press the C key too early in the startup process, the
incializao,
o
teclado
USB
keyboard
resetado
em
vez de
load
settings
normally.
If
you
press
the
C
key
too
early
in
the
startup
process,
the
Mix USB
Rack
Options
keyboard
is reset instead of calling the Backup and
chamar
a caixa
deinstead
dilogo
and
Seand
voc
USB
keyboard
isCreset
the Clear.
Backup
If you
press the
key
too
earlyofBackup
incalling
the startup
process,
the no vir
Clear
dialog.
If you
do
notearly
seeand
the
and process,
clear
dialog,
If
you
press
Cdokey
too
in backup
thethe
startup
the de
akeyboard
caixa
de
dilogo
Backup
Clear,
repita
processo
Clear
dialog.
Ifisthe
you
not
see of
thecalling
backup
and
clearodialog,
USB
reset
instead
Backup
and
I/O
Options
repeat
the restart
process
and try
again. the Backup and
inicializao
eistente
novamente.
USB
keyboard
reset
instead
of
calling
repeat
the restart
process
Clear dialog.
If you
do notand
see try
theagain.
backup and clear dialog,
Clear
Ifprocess
you
doand
not
see again.
the
and16
clear
dialog,
AI16
Analog
Mic/Line
Input
Card
thatbackup
provides
analog
repeat
thedialog.
restart
try
repeat
the
restart
process
and
try
again.
Chapter 28: Troubleshooting 239


28: Troubleshooting
Captulo Chapter
28: Resoluo
de Problemas239239
outputs
Startup in Explorer
Inicalizao do Explorer
The following is an example of the Hardware Monitoring
Segue
Alert: um exemplo de Hardware Monitoring Alert:
To startin
upExplorer
the system in Explorer (bypassing VENUE software): The
Startup
The following
following is
is an
an example
example of
of the
the Hardware
Hardware Monitoring
Monitoring
Startup
Explorer
Para
iniciar in
o sistema
no Explorer (ignorando o software VENUE):
1 Start or restart the system, as necessary.

start
the
in
(bypassing
To
startouup
upreinicie
the system
system
in Explorer
Explorer
(bypassing VENUE
VENUE software):
software):
1To
Inicie
o sistema
se necessrio.
2 Watch the screen closely during the startup process. As soon
1
Start
or
restart
the
system,
as
necessary.
1 Start
restartbecomes
the system,
as necessary.
as theor
cursor
visible
beforedethe
VENUE software
2 Preste
ateno
tela durante
o(and
processo
inicializao.
Assim
logo
screen
appears)
press
and hold
the EVENUE
key
on surgir
theAs
computer
2 Watch
Watch
the screen
screen
closely
during
the
startup
process.
As
soon
que
o cursor
ficar
visvel
(eduring
antes
do logo
na tela)
2
the
closely
the
startup
process.
soon
keyboard.
Continue
toEhold
thebefore
E key
(do VENUE
not press
it repeat-a
as the
the
cursor
becomes
visible
(and
before
the
VENUE
software
pressione
e segure
a tecla
no(and
teclado
do the
computador.
Continue
as
cursor
becomes
visible
software
segurar
auntil
tecla
E (no
a the
pressione
repetidamente)
voc veja
edly)
you
seepress
Explorer
desktop.
logo
screen
appears)
press
and hold
hold
the E
E key
key on
on at
the que
computer
logo
screen
appears)
and
the
the
computer
okeyboard.
desktop do
Explorer.
Continue to
to hold the
the E
E key
key (do
(do not
not press
press it
it repeatkeyboard.
3 From Continue
Explorer, youhold
can manually
find and
deleterepeatsuspect
edly) until
until you
you see
see the
the Explorer
Explorer desktop.
desktop.
edly)
data
files,
plug-ins,
or
perform
other
file
management
tasks.
3 No Explorer, voc pode manualmente encontrar e apagar arquivos
3
From
Explorer,
you
can
manually
find
and
delete
suspect
de
dados
suspeitos
e
plug-ins,
ou
realizar
outras
tarefas
3 From Explorer, you can manually find and delete suspect de
If you
unsure
about how to troubleshoot
a computer and
manuteno
deare
arquivos.
data
or
data files,
files, plug-ins,
plug-ins,
or perform
perform other
other file
file management
management tasks.
tasks.
its files, it is recommended that you contact VENUE customer
voc
no tem
certeza
como resolver
os problemas
If
you
are
unsure
about
how
to
a
and
IfSe
you
are service.
unsure
about
howsobre
to troubleshoot
troubleshoot
a computer
computer
and
do
computador
e
seus
arquivos,
recomendado
que
its
files,
it
is
recommended
that
you
contact
VENUE
cusits files, it is recommended that you contact VENUE cus- voc
contate o servio de atendimento ao consumidor VENUE.
tomer
tomer service.
service.
Hardware Monitoring Window
VENUE
systems provide
the Hardware Monitoring window in
Janela
Hardware
Monitoring
Hardware
Monitoring
Window
Hardware
Monitoring
Window
which performance of hardware components can be viewed

and monitored.
systems
Hardware
Monitoring
window
OVENUE
sistema
VENUEprovide
oferecethe
a janela
Hardware
Monitoring
emin
VENUE
systems
provide
the
Hardware
Monitoring
window
inque
awhich
performance
dos
componentes
de
hardware
pode
ser
vista
performance
of
hardware
components
can
be
viewed
which performance of hardware components can be viewed e
The Hardware Monitoring window is not available in the
monitorada.
and
and monitored.
monitored.
Standalone version of VENUE software.
A
Hardware
Monitoring
nois
verso
The
Hardware
Monitoring
window
not
available
Thejanela
Hardware
Monitoring
window
isest
not disponvel
available in
innathe
the
Standalone
do
software
VENUE.
Standalone
version
of
VENUE
software.
Accessing
Hardware
Monitoring
Standalone version
of VENUE
software.
Acessando Hardware Monitoring
To access theHardware
Hardware Monitoring
window, do any of the
Accessing
Monitoring
Accessing
Hardware
Monitoring
following:
Para acessar a janela Hardware Monitoring:
To
the
Hardware
window,
do
Press
at any time
to open
theof
To access
access
theCtrl+Shift+M
Hardware Monitoring
Monitoring
window,
do any
any
of the
the
following:
Hardware
Monitoring
window.
following:
Pressione
Ctrl+Shift+M
em qualquer
momento para abrir a janela
Hardware
. >at
Press
Ctrl+Shift+M
at
any time
time
to open
open
the on a unit and
InMonitoring
the
Options
Devices
page,
right-click
Press
Ctrl+Shift+M
any
to
the
Na Hardware
pgina
Options
> Devices,
cliquein
com
boto direito
Monitoring
window.
choose Hardware
Monitoring
theopop-up
menu. sobre
This
Hardware
Monitoring
window.
uma unidade e escolha Hardware Monitoring no menu pop-up. Isso
opens
the
Hardware
Monitoring
window
for
the
selected
In
the
Options
>
Devices
page,
right-click
on
a
unit
and
the Options
> Devices
page,
right-click
on aselecionado.
unit and
abre aInjanela
Hardware
Monitoring
para
o dispositivo
device.
Hardware
Monitoring
in
pop-up
This
choose
Hardware
Monitoring
in the
the
pop-up menu.
menu.
This na
Se choose
uma
caixa
de dilogo
Hardware
Monitoring
Alert surge
opens
the
Hardware
Monitoring
window
for
the
selected
If the
Monitoring
Alert
dialog
tela, clique
para
selecionar
Show Hardware
Monitor.
A caixa de
opens
theHardware
Hardware
Monitoring
window
forappears
the selected
device.
dilogo
Hardware
Alert
do dispositivo
com problema
on-screen,Monitoring
click to select
Show
Hardware Monitor.
The
device.
surge
e identifica
a leitura
queproblem
est fora
das
Hardware
Monitoring
Alert
dialog
for the
device
Ifautomaticamente
the
Hardware
Monitoring
Alert
dialog
appears
If
the
Hardware
Monitoring
Alert
dialog
appears
especificaes.
appears automatically
and identifies
the
readingThe
that is
on-screen,
click to select Show
Hardware
Monitor.
on-screen, click to select Show Hardware Monitor. The
out of specification.
Hardware
Monitoring Alert
Alert dialog for
for the
the problem
problem device
device
Hardware
Monitoring
A janela
Hardware
Monitoring Alertdialog
apresentada
apenas uma vez
appears automatically
automatically and
and identifies
identifies the
the reading
reading that
that is
is
appears
por The
dispositivo
(um
problema Alert
deve window
estar sendo
detectado
nesse
Hardware
Monitoring
is only
displayed
out of
of specification.
specification.
out
dispositivo).
once per device (should a problem ever be detected with that
device).
The
Hardware Monitoring
Monitoring Alert
Alert window
window is
is only
only displayed
displayed
The
Hardware
once per
per device
device (should
(should a
a problem
problem ever
ever be
be detected
detected with
with that
that
once
device).
device).
Alert:
Alert:
Hardware
Monitoring
Alert
Hardware
Monitoring
Alert
Should a problem occur with any of the components in your
Hardware
Se um Monitoring
problemaAlert
ocorrer com qualquer dos componentes de seu
Hardware
Monitoring
Alert
system,
the Hardware
Monitoring window will provide infor-
sistema, a janela Hardware Monitoring proporcionar informaes
mation
that willoccur
be useful
troubleshooting
while in contact
Should
a problem
problem
occur
withinany
any
of the
the components
components
your
Should
a
with
of
your
que sero
teis na resoluo
de problemas
quando emincontato
com
VENUE
customer
service.
system,
thede
Hardware
Monitoring
window
will provide
provide inforinforsystem,
the
Hardware
Monitoring
window
owith
servio
atendimento
ao cliente
VENUE.will
mation that
that will
will be
be useful
useful in
in troubleshooting
troubleshooting while
while in
in contact
contact
mation
with VENUE
VENUE customer
customer service.
service.
with
Resetando Componentes de Hardware
(Apenas
sistemas VENUE
Profile e D-Show)
Resetting
Hardware
Components
(VENUE Profile and D-Show Systems Only)
Alguns hardwares VENUE podem ser resetados pela tela Options

Resetting
Hardware
Components
Resetting
> Devices, ouHardware
interrompendoComponents
o fornecimento de energia do
Some VENUEhardware
can beque
resetse
from
the Options
> Decomponente.
realize
um reset
se, por
(VENUE
Profile and
andrecomendado
D-Show Systems
Systems Only)
Only)
(VENUE
Profile
D-Show
vices
screen,
or
by
power-cycling
the
component.
It
is
recomexemplo, a caixa de dilogo Hardware Monitor Alert surge, ou se
mended
that
you
perform
a reset
fora example,
the Hardware
Some
VENUE
hardware
can
be
reset
the
>
Deum
dispositivo
conectado
comunicao
Some
VENUE
hardware
can interrompe
be
resetif,from
from
the Options
Options
>com
De- o resto
Monitor
Alert
dialog
appears,
or
if
a
connected
device
stops
do
sistema.
vices
screen,
or
by
power-cycling
the
component.
It
is
recomvices screen, or by power-cycling the component. It is recomcommunicating
with the
rest if,
of for
theexample,
system. the
mended
that
a
mended
that you
you perform
perform
a reset
reset
if,
for
example,
the Hardware
Hardware
Indicao
Monitor
Alert
dialog
appears,
or
if
a
connected
device
Monitor Alert dialog appears, or if a connected device stops
stops
communicating
communicating with
with the
the rest
rest of
of the
the system.
system.
OIndication
software do sistema mostra uma mensagem de erro alertando se
um dispositivo falha ou no est mais disponvel.
The system software will display error messages alerting you if
Indication
Indication
a device fails or is no longer available.
O sistema lembra o ltima configurao de hardware utilizada. Se
The
system
softwaretodas
will display
display
error messages
messages
alerting
you if
if ele
elesystem
no encontra
as unidades
na prxima
inicializao,
The
software
will
error
alerting
you
The system remembers the last hardware configuration used.
a device
device
fails
or unidades
is no
no longer
longer
available.
mostrafails
essas
emavailable.
cinza na pgina Options > Devices. As
a
or
is
If it doesn't
all units
at the
startup,
it displays
those
unidades
se find
mantm
offline
(e next
o sistema
apresenta
mensagens
units
as
grayed
out
in
the
Options
>
Devices
page.
Units
reThe
system
remembers
thealast
last
hardware
configuration
used.
desystem
erro alertando
sobre
ausncia
deles)
at que todas
estejam
The
remembers
the
hardware
configuration
used.
main
offline
(and
the
system
displays
error
messages
alerting
If it
it
doesn't
find
all ou
units
at voc
the next
next
startup,
it displays
displays
those
ligadas
e find
online,
que
digastartup,
ao sistema
para esquecer
as
If
doesn't
all
units
at
the
it
those
unidades
offline
com
o boto
direito
sobre
os dispositivos
youas
their
absence)
until
either
units
are
powered
up and
units
astograyed
grayed
outclicando
in the
the
Options
>the
Devices
page.
Units
reunits
out
in
Options
>
Devices
page.
Units
reperdidos
e escolhendo
Forget.
come
online,
orthe
yousystem
tell
thedisplays
system error
to forget
the offline
units
main
offline
(and
the
system
displays
error
messages
alerting
main
offline
(and
messages
alerting
by
right-clicking
the
missing
devices
and
choosing
Forget.
you to
to their
their absence)
absence) until
until either
either the
the units
units are
are powered
powered up
up and
and
you
Paraonline,
resetar or
o hardware
do sistema:
come
you tell
tell the
the
system to
to forget
forget the
the offline
offline units
units
come
online, or
you
system
by To
right-clicking
the
missing devices
devices and
and choosing
choosing Forget.
Forget.
reset systemthe
hardware:
by
right-clicking
missing

To2reset
reset
system
hardware:
V system
pgina Options
e clique na aba Devices.
To
hardware:
2 Go to the Options page and click the Devices tab.
1
1 Put
Put the
the system
system in
in Config
Config mode.
mode.
33 Clique
com oany
boto
direito em
qualquer
componente de hardware
Right-click
displayed
hardware
components:
2
Go
to
the
Options
page
and
apresentado:
2 Go to the Options page and click
click the
the Devices
Devices tab.
tab.
Console
Console
3
displayed
3 Right-click
Right-click
any
displayed hardware
hardware components:
components:
Inputsany
section
Inputs section

Console
Console
ACS
ACSsections
sections

Outputs
section
Inputs
section
Inputs
section
Outputs
section
240 GuiaProfile
VENUE Profile
240
240 VENUE
VENUE Profile Guide
Guide
ACS
ACS sections
sections
Outputs
Outputs section
section
4 4Escolha
Reset.
Choose
Reset.
4 Choose Reset.
4 Choose Reset.
Resetting
a unit
in the
Options
> Devices
page
Resetando
uma
unidade
na pgina
Options
> Devices
Resetting a unit in the Options > Devices page
Resetting a unit in the Options > Devices page
Utilizando
CD System
RestoreCD
para
Using theo System
Restore
to Atualizar
Using
the
System
Restore
CD
Update
or
Restore
the
System
ou
Restaurar
o
Sistema
Using the System Restore CD to
to
Update
or
Restore
Update
orFeatures
Restore the
the System
System
Stage Rack
Onecpia
copydo
of CD
theSystem
SystemRestore
RestoreCD
is included
with
each sysUma
includa
em cada
sistema.
O CD
One
copy
of
the
System
Restore
CD
is
included
with
each
system.
The
System
Restore
CD
provides
software
installers
to stage
upSystem
oferece
instaladores
doRack,
software
para
atualizar
ou
One
copy
ofare
theused
System
Restore
CD
is included
with
each
sysStageRestore
Racks
with
an FOH
and provide
all
tem.
The
System
Restore
CD
provides
software
installers
to
date
or
restore
a
system.
restaurar
o
sistema.
tem.
Restore
CD provides
installers
to upupaudioThe
I/OSystem
for VENUE
Profile
systems.software
Up to two
Stage Racks
date
or
restore
a
date
or used
restore
a system.
system.
can be
simultaneously,
Updating ou
or Re-Installing
soft-do
Updating
Re-Installing Updating
Atualizar or
oure-installing
reinstalar osystem
software
Updating
or
Re-Installing
Updating
or
re-installing
system
software
lets
you
replace
VENUE
(including
new
installsistema
permite
substituir
o
software
VENUE
(incluindo
Updating
Re-Installing Updating or re-installing systemnovos
softAudiolets
I/Oor
you
replace
VENUE
software
(including
new
installinstaladores
para
plug-ins
instalados
de
fbrica)
mas
preservando
ersware
for
factory-installed
plug-ins)
but
preserve
any
saved
ware lets you replace VENUE software (including new install and
48Shows
inputs
controllable
mic
preamps
and o
quaisquer
e with
Presets
salvos.
Use
essa
opo
para
atualizar
ers
plug-ins)
but
preserve
any
saved
Shows
Presets.
Useremotely
this
option
to
update
system
software
ers for
for factory-installed
factory-installed
plug-ins)
but
preserve
any
saved
software
ou
firmware
doUse
sistema,
ousoftware
para
reinstalar
o software
do
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
and
Presets.
this
option
to
update
system
software
orShows
firmware,
or
to
re-install
system
or
the
installer
for
Shows and Presets. Use this option to update system software
sistema
ou
o
instalador
para
um
plug-in
instalado
de
fbrica.
or firmware,
toplug-in.
re-install
system
software or
installer
8 analogoroutput
channels;
expandable
upthe
to 48
analogfor
or
a factory-installed
or firmware, or to re-install system software or the installer for
a
plug-in.
digital outputs
per Stage Rack.
a factory-installed
factory-installed
plug-in.
Plug-ins
VENUE instalados
deplug-ins
fbrica esto
imediatamente
disponveis
Factory-installed
VENUE
are immediately
available
to
para
serem reinstalados
na
pgina
Options
>page.
Plug-Ins.
Plug-ins
que
VENUE
plug-ins
are
immediately
available
beFactory-installed
reinstalled
from
the
Options
>
Plug-Ins
Plug-ins
that
Factory-installed
VENUE
plug-ins
immediately available to
to
Synchronization
and
Control
I/O are
nobe
podem
ser
reinstalados
pela
pgina
Options
>
Plug-Ins
devem
ser
reinstalled
from
the
Options
>
Plug-Ins
page.
Plug-ins
that
cannot
be re-installed
from
the Options
> Plug-Ins
page must
be
reinstalled
from
the
Options
>
Plug-Ins
page.
Plug-ins
that
resintalados
a partir
de seustodiscos
instaladores.
Snake
connectors
enable
primary and
redundantmust
(if
be
the
becannot
reinstalled
from theirfrom
installer
discs. >
cannot
be re-installed
re-installed
from
the Options
Options
> Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins page
page must
applicable)
connection
to
a
VENUE
FOH
Rack.
be reinstalled
from their
installer
discs.
reinstalled
theiruma
installer
discs. completa do sistema
Fullbe
System
Restorefrom
Realizar
restaurao
Full System Restore Performing a full system restore comdesinstala
o
software
do
sistema
antes
de
substitu-lo
pelo
novo.
Full
System
Restore
Performing
a
system
restore
completely
uninstalls
system
software before
replacing
it with
new
Fullas
System
Performing
a full
full
restore
comTodas
pastasRestore
de dados
e arquivos
so system
removidas.
Certifique-se
pletely
uninstalls
system
software
before
replacing
it
Alle data
folders
and
files are
removed.
Be sure
to new
pletely
uninstalls
system
software
before
replacing
it with
with
new
desoftware.
transferir
arquivar
dados
necessrios
antes
de
realizar
uma
System
Components
software.
All
data
folders
and
files
are
removed.
Be
sure
to
transfer
and
archive
needed
data
before
performing
a
system
software.de
Allsistema.
data folders
and filesdeare
removed.
Be sureestaro
to
restaurao
Instaladores
plug-ins
de fbrica
transfer
and
archive
data
before
performing
a
restore.
Factory
plug-inneeded
installers
will
be available
automatidisponveis
automaticamente,
como
parte
da restaurao
do
transfer
and
archive
needed
data
before
performing
a system
system
Included
Components
restore.
Factory
plug-in
installers
will
be
available
automatically,
as
part
of
the
system
restore.
All
other
plug-ins
must
sistema.
Todos
os
outros
plug-ins
devem
ser
reinstalados
de be
seus
restore. Factory plug-in installers will be available automatically,
as
of
the
system
restore.
plug-ins
discos
instaladores.
re-installed
from
installer
discs. All other
cally,
as part
part
of their
thesystems
system
restore.
plug-ins must
must be
be
All VENUE
Profile
include All
theother
following:
re-installed
from
their
installer
discs.
re-installed
from
their
installer
discs.
AUm
VENUE
Profile
console
CD System
Restore
CDCDs
e CDs
de todos
os installers
instaladores de
System
Restore
CD
and
of any
plug-in
plug-ins
devem
estar
com
o
sistema
durante
o tempo.
A
System
Restore
CD
and
CDs
of
any
plug-in
installers
should
Two
(2)
IEC
power
cables
be
kept
with
the
system
at
all
times.
A System Restore CD and CDs of any plug-intodo
installers
should
be
kept
with
the
system
at
all
times.
Monitor
forthe
VGA
screen
not included)
should bemount
kept with
system
at (screen
all times.
VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE Profile Guide
Rack(s) (see next)

System Restore CD
atualizar
oua system
restaurarusing
um the
sistema
ToPara
start,iniciar,
update,
or restore
Systemusando o CD
System
Restore:
To
Restore
CD:update,
To start,
start,
update, or
or restore
restore a
a system
system using
using the
the System
System
Restore
CD:
Restore
CD:
1 1Make
sure outputs,
speakers,
power amps
muted.
Certifique-se
de que
sadas,and
alto-falantes
e are
amplificadores
de
1 Make sure
outputs,
speakers,
and
power
amps
are
muted.
potncia
estejam
desligados.
1
Make
sure
outputs,
speakers,
and
power
amps
are
muted.
2 Insert the System Restore CD into the VENUE system
2 Insertdrive.
the
System
Restore
CD
into
the
system
CD-ROM
Insert o
theCD
System
Restore
CDno
into
the VENUE
VENUE
system
22 Insira
System
Restore
drive
de CD-ROM
do sistema
CD-ROM
drive.
CD-ROM
drive.
VENUE.
Go to the
> System
page.
4 33Alt-click
theOptions
Shut
Down
button.
V pgina
Options
> System.
4 Alt-click the Shut Down button.
Alt-click
the Shut
Down button.
5 4Click
to restart
the system,
then press and hold F10 on the
4 Alt-click no boto Shut Down.
5
Click
to
restart
the
then
and
hold
keyboard
either
ofsystem,
the following
occur,
depending
on the
5 Click until
to restart
the
system,
then press
press
and
hold F10
F10 on
on
the
keyboard
until
either
of
the
following
occur,
depending
your
hardware:
5keyboard
Clique
para
reiniciar
ento pressione
e segureon
F10 no
until
either oofsistema,
the following
occur, depending
on
your
hardware:
teclado
at
que uma
dastoseguintes
situaes
dependendo
If the
system
begins
boot off the
Restoreocorra,
CD, proceed
your
hardware:
Additional
Required
Components
de
seu
hardware:
the
system
toIf
Ifstep
the4.
system begins
begins to
to boot
boot off
off the
the Restore
Restore CD,
CD, proceed
proceed
IfSe
o
sistema
inicia
o
boot
pelo CD Restore, pule para o
to
step
4.
the
Restore
CD text screen
appears,
release F10
and use
to step
4. components
The passo
following
must
be
purchased
separately:
4.
If
the
Restore
CD
text screen
release
F10
and
use
and
keys toappears,
select
the
CD
drive,
then
the
If Up
the
Restore
CDArrow
screen
appears,
release
F10
and
Video
Se
a Display
tela
deDown
texto
dotext
CDor
Restore
surgir,
solte
F10
edisplay
use
asuse
setas
(15-inch
greater
flat-panel
VGA
the
Up
and
Down
Arrow
keys
to
select
the
CD
drive,
then
press
This
launches
using
software
on
the in- Enter.
theeEnter.
Up
and
Down
Arrowminimum
keys
tothe
select
the
CD
drive,
Up
Down
para
selecionar
o drive
de
CD,
ento
pressione
recommended;
1024x768
resolution).
VGA then
and
press
Enter.
This
launches
using
the
software
on
inserted
System
Restore
CD. Continue
step 4.Restore
Isso
inicia
o uso
do
software
no CD
System
press
Enter.
This
launches
using
theto
software
on the
theinserido.
inDVI
supported.
serted
System
Restore
CD.
Continue
to
step
4.
Continue
para oRestore
passo 4.
serted System
CD. Continue to step 4.
Somekeyboard
models ofand
USBtrackball/mouse
keyboards require
repeated pressing
of
USB
(Windows
compatible)
Some
models
of
USB
keyboards
require
repeated
pressing
F10
(holding
it
down
in
between
pressings)
to
register.
Alguns
modelos
de
teclado
USB
requerem
pressionamentos
Some models of USB keyboards require repeated pressing of
of
F10
(holding
it
down
in
to
register.
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile pressings)
Systems
repetidos
do
(segurando-o
entre osOnly)
pressionamentos)
F10
(holding
it F10
down
in between
between
pressings)
to
register.
6 Do onepara
of the
following to update or restore system softfixao.
6 Do one of the following to update or restore system software:

6 Do one of the following to update or restore system softa Digital Snake cable. This cable can be purchased directly
6ware:
um dos system
seguintes
procedimentos
para atualizar
oufiles
restaurar
Siga
To update
software
while keeping
any Show
ware:
from Avid
or
assembled by your preferred vendor.
o software
do
sistema:
To
update
system
software
while
keeping
any
Show
files
on the
system,
presskeeping
u (lower-case).
and
ToPreset
updatefiles
system
software
while
any Show In
files
and
Preset
files
on
the
system,
press
u
(lower-case).
In
the
Update
confirmation
screen, press
press u
Shift+U
(upand
Preset
files
on
the
system,
(lower-case).
In
Optional
Parathe
atualizar
o software
do sistema
mantendo
quaisquer
arquivos
Update
confirmation
screen,
press
Shift+U
(upComponents
per-case)
to proceed.
Follow screen,
the on-screen
instructions
to
the
Update
confirmation
press
Shift+U
(upShows e Presets no sistema, pressione u (minsculo). Na tela de
per-case)
to proceed.
the
instructions
to
begin
installation.
per-case)
proceed. Follow
Follow
the on-screen
on-screen
instructions
to as
confirmao
deto
atualizao,
pressione
Shift+U
Siga
The following
components
are optional,
and(maisculo).
must
be
begin
installation.
begin
installation.
instrues
na
tela
para
iniciar
a
instalao.
or
purchased
separately:
ou

or

fully
restore
(completely
all files
To
or
flash
USB
diskthe
(orsystem
other portable
USBremoving
storage device
for
Para
restaurar
completamente
o sistema
(removendo
To
fully
restore
the
system
(completely
removing
all
files
on
the
system),
press
r
(lower-case).
(Or
press
P
to
retransfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
To fully restore
(completely
all files (Ou
completamente
todosthe
os system
arquivos),
pressioneremoving
r (minsculo).
on
the
system),
press
r
(Or
P
to
to
previous
screen.)
When
the
Restore
confirmaon
the
system),
press
r (lower-case).
(lower-case).
(Or press
press
P de
to rereturn
Near-field
monitor
speakers
for mix
position
monitoring
pressione
Pthe
para
retornar
tela
anterior.)
Quando
a caixa
dilogo
turn
to
the
previous
screen.)
When
the
Restore
confirmation
dialog
appears,
press
Shift+R
to
proceed.
Follow
turn
to the previous
screen.)jack
When the
RestoreShift+R.
confirmade confirmao
dewith
restaurao
surgir,
pressione
Siga
Headphones
1/4-inch
tion
Shift+R
to
proceed.
Follow
on-screen
instructions
tooperao
complete
system restore
op- do
as instrues
na appears,
tela parapress
dethe
completa
tion dialog
dialog
appears,
press
Shift+R
torestaurao
proceed.
Follow
on-screen
Dynamic or condenserto
microphonethe
and XLR mic
cable
eration.
sistema.
on-screen instructions
instructions to complete
complete the system
system restore
restore opop(for
Talkback)
eration.
eration.
7 7IfSe
prompted,
select
an option
in opo
the Ready
to Resume
questionado,
Footswitches
(up
to 2)uma
selecione
no dilogo
Readydialog
to Resume
7appropriate
If prompted,
select
an
option
in
the
Ready
to
Resume
dialog
asconforme
(see
Resuming
Normal
Operation
on Normal
7 If prompted,
select
an
option
in
the
Ready
to
Resume
dialog na
apropriado
(veja
Retomando
a
Operao
as
appropriate
(see
Resuming
Normal
Operation
on
page
238).
Follow
any
additional
instructions
on-screen
pgina
238).
Siga
quaisquer
instrues
adicionais
na tela
para plugas appropriate
(see
Resuming
Normal
Operation
on for
BNC
cables
(for connecting
Word clock between
the
page
Follow
plug-ins
or authorizations.
ins
ou238).
autorizaes.
page
238).
Follow any
any additional
additional instructions
instructions on-screen
on-screen for
for
VENUE
plug-ins
or
authorizations.
plug-ins
or
authorizations.
8 8Remove
the
System
Restore
CD-ROM
drive.
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(forCD
connecting
to GPI devices)
Remova
o CD
System
Restore
dofrom
drivethe
de CD-ROM.
8 Remove the System Restore CD from the CD-ROM drive.
Removeany
the plug-ins
System Restore
CD installer
from thediscs,
CD-ROM
drive.
9 8Re-install
from their
as neces-
99 Reinstale
plug-ins
partirinstaller
de seus discs,
discosasinstaladores,
Re-installquaisquer
any plug-ins
froma their
necessary.
9 Re-install any plug-ins from their installer discs, as necesse
necessrio.
sary.
sary.
VENUE
Before re-installing plug-ins after updating system softAntesre-installing
de reinstalar
plug-ins
depois desystem
uma atualizao
Before
plug-ins
after
check
if there iscan
a more
current
version available.
If
Theware,
following
options
be added
VENUE
Profile softsystems.
Before
re-installing
plug-ins
aftertoupdating
updating
softdo software
do sistema,
verifique
se hsystem
uma verso
mais
ware,
check
if
there
is
a
more
current
version
available.
If
updated
versions
of
a
plug-in
is
available,
install
it
from
Foran
details
on
all
VENUE
systems
and
options,
visit
the
Avid
ware,
check
if
there
is
a
more
current
version
available.
If
atualizada disponvel. Se uma verso atualizada do
plug-in
updated
versions
plug-in
is available,
install
it
itsan
installer
website
(www.avid.com).
an
updated
versions of
of a
ainstale
plug-in
available,
installinstalador.
it from
from
no
estCD-ROM.
disponvel,
a is
partir
do CD-ROM
its
installer
CD-ROM.
its installer CD-ROM.
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options


Chapter 28:
241
AO16 Analog Output Card that provides
16Troubleshooting
analog line level
Captulo
28:
Resoluo
de
Problemas
241
Chapter
28:
Troubleshooting
241
outputs
To cancel without changing any installed software:
Para cancelar sem alterao alguma no software instalado:
E to
exit from
the Welcome
to VENUE
System Restore
ToPress
cancel
without
changing
any installed
software:
screen.
The
system
resumes
starting
up
using
the
currently
in Pressione
para
sair
partir da to
tela
de boas-vindas
VENUE
Press E to E
exit
from
thea Welcome
VENUE
System Restore
stalledRestore
version.. O sistema retoma a inicializao usando a verso
System
screen. The system resumes starting up using the currently inatualmente
instalada.
stalled
version.
If you
cancel a full system restore or an update, you may ex-
perience
installation
errors
about unavailable space.
If this
voc
cancelar
uma
restaurao
do sistema
IfSe
you
cancel
a full system
restore or ancompleta
update, you
may ex- ou
occurs,
repeat the system
restore
process,
making sure
to
uma atualizao,
voc pode
ter erros
de instalao
a respeito
perience installation errors about unavailable space. If this
de espao
indisponvel.
complete
it in
one pass. Se isso ocorrer, repita o processo de
occurs, repeat the system restore process, making sure to
restaurao do sistema, certificando-se de complet-lo.
complete it in one pass.
Updating Firmware
Atualizando o Firmware
Updating
Firmware
During an update
or system restore, the system checks for new
firmware.
If newer
firmware
is found on the
System Restore
Durante
uma
atualizao
ou restaurao
do sistema,
o sistema
During an update or system restore, the system checks for new
verifica
porinstalled
um novo
firmware.
Se um
firmware
mais recente
CD, it is
while
the system
starts
up.
firmware. Ifnonewer
firmware
is found
System enquanto
Restore o
encontrado
CD System
Restore,
eleonthe
instalado
CD, it is
installed while the system starts up.
sistema
iniciado.
Reinstalling Plug-Ins After Restoring the
Reinstalando
System Plug-Ins Depois de Restaurar o Sistema
Reinstalling Plug-Ins After Restoring the

System
System reinstala
Restore CD
reinstalls
all do
system
software
and facOThe
CD Restore
todo
o software
sistema
e os instaladores
tory-installed
plug-in installers
only.apenas.
DigiRackPlug-ins
Plug-ins DigiRack
and
dos
plug-ins instalados
de fbrica
The System Restore CD reinstalls all system software and facany
additional
plug-ins
from
Avid
or
its
Development
Partners
e quaisquer plug-ins adicionais da Avid ou de seus parceiros
tory-installed plug-in installers only. DigiRack Plug-ins and
desenvolvedores
devem
ser reinstalados
separadamente.
(Plug-ins
must be re-installed
separately.
(Factory-installed
plug-ins
will
any additional
plug-ins
from
Avid or itsno
Development
Partners
instalados
de fbrica
estaro
disponveis
seletor
be available
from the
Previous
Installs selector
toPrevious
re-installInstalls
immust
be re-installed
separately. aps
(Factory-installed
plug-ins
will
para
reinstalao
uma
restaurao
mediately
after aimediatamente
system restore;
other
plug-ins
mustde
besistema;
combe available
the Previous
Installs selector
to re-install imoutros
plug-insfrom
precisam
ser completamente
reinstalados.)
pletely re-installed.)
mediately after a system restore; other plug-ins must be comPara
instrues
reinstalao
veja o
pletely
re-installed.)
For
instructions
on sobre
re-installing
plug-ins,de
see plug-ins,
Chapter 18,
Captulo 18, Plug-Ins.

Plug-Ins.
For instructions on re-installing plug-ins, see Chapter 18,
Plug-Ins.

242
Guia VENUE Profile
Parte VII: Referncia

Parte VII: Referncias
243
244
Guia VENUE Profile
Chapter 29: Control Surface Reference

Captulo
29:29:
Referncia
SuperfcieReference
de Controle
Chapter
ControldaSurface
This chapter describes the ports and connectors on the VENUE Profile console.
Este captulo descreve os conectores e as portas da console VENUE Profile.
This chapter describes the ports and connectors on the VENUE Profile console.
VENUE Profile Console
Console VENUE Profile
VENUE Profile Console

USB port
Back Panel Connectors
USB port
Back Panel Connectors
Talkback
Stage Rack Features
Talkback
Audio I/O

System Components
Included Components
Figura
VENUE
Profile
Figure20.
20.Conectores
VENUE Profile
connectors
20.
Monitor
mount
Porta
USB
doVENUE
Painel
Superior
Figure
Profile
connectors
Top Panel USB Port

Uma
porta
USB
1.1isprovided
fornecidaon
nothe
painel
canto
superior
A
USB
1.1
port
topsuperior,
panel, inno
the
upper
left
VENUE
MousePort
Pad
Top Panel
USB
esquerdo
da console.
Use essa porta USB para iLok Smart Keys ou
corner of the console. Use this USB port for iLok Smart Keys or
VENUE
Profile Guide
qualquer
outro
dispositivo
USB como
pen panel,
drives. in the upper left
A
USB
1.1
port
is provided
any
other
USB
device
such on
as athe
keytop
disks.
Two
(2)
console
lights
corner of the console. Use this USB port for iLok Smart Keys or
Para transferncia de dados mais rpida de e para
Protective
Dust
Cover
For
faster
transfer
to
from
USB storage devices, use
any other
USBdata
device
such
asand
a key
disks.
dispositivos
de armazenamento
USB, use as portas USB 2.0
the
USB
2.0
ports
on
the
Mix
Rack
and FOH Rack.
no
Rack(s)
(seeenext)
Mix Rack
no FOH Rack.
For faster data transfer to and from USB storage devices, use
the USB 2.0 ports on the Mix Rack and FOH Rack.

System Restore CD


DVI supported.

Optional Components
Headphones
1/4-inch jack
USB (2) with
and Headphones
USB (2) and Headphones
(for Talkback)
Portas Frontais USB
MIDI
Front
USB cables
Ports(for connecting external MIDI devices)
BNC
cables
connecting
Word na
clock
between
the
Duas
portas
USB (for
1.1
disponveis
frente
da console.
Two
USB
1.1Ports
ports
are esto
provided
on the front
of console.
Use Use
Front
USB
VENUE
system
and
external
digital
devices)
essas portas para conectar um teclado USB e um Trackball (ou
these ports to connect a USB keyboard and a Trackball (or
mouse).
Essas
portas
tambm
dothe
suporte
aGPI
iLoks
e pen
USB
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for connecting
toof
devices)
Two
1.1
ports
provided
front
Usedrives
mouse).
These
portsare
also
supporton
iLoks and
USBconsole.
key disks.
USB.
these ports to connect a USB keyboard and a Trackball (or
mouse).
These Connector
ports also support iLoks and USB key disks.
Headphone
Conector de Headphone
The
headphone
connector na
onfrente
the front
of the console
is a padro
Headphone
O conector
deConnector
headphone
da console
um jaque
The
following
options
can
be
added
to
VENUE
Profile
systems.
standard
1/4-inch
stereo
(TRS)
headphone
jack.
The
connec1/4 estreo (TRS). O conector alimentado pelo bus Monitor.
The
connector
on the front
of the console
is aAvid
For
details
VENUEbus.
systems
and options,
visit the
tor
isheadphone
fed by on
theall
Monitor
standard
stereo (TRS) headphone jack. The connecwebsite 1/4-inch
(www.avid.com).
tor is fed by the Monitor Chapter
bus. 29: Control Surface Reference 245
Mix Rack OptionsChapter 29: Control Surface Reference
I/O Options
AI16 AnalogCaptulo
Mic/Line
Card that
providesde
16Controle
analog
29:Input
Referncia
da Superfcie
245
245
Painel
Traseiro
Back
Panel
AC (2)
Console Light
FOH Link
Power Switches (2)
VGA
USB
Footswitch 1 and 2
CAN
Console Light
GPI
Figure 21. D-Show Profile back panel
Power Switches
Interruptores de Energia
The Power switches apply power to the console using their

Os interruptores de energia levam a energia console utilizando os
corresponding AC connectors.
correpondentes conectores AC.
Powerde
Connectors
Conectores
Energia
male, 3-pin IEC power sockets with cable retaining clips
DoisTwo
soquetes
(3-pin IEC) com clipes retentores de cabo esto
are
provided,
one for
each
of the
power
supplies.
Two
disponveis, uma para
cada
uma
dasinternal
fontes de
energia
internas.
North
American
standard
IEC
power
cables
are
provided
with
Dois cabos padro norteamericano so fornecidos com cada
eachProfile.
Profile console.
console
FOHFOH
Link Link
O FOH
Link
conecta
a Profile
ao Mix
Rack
ouRack
ao FOH
Rack.Rack.
Um cabo
FOH
Link
connects
Profile
to the
Mix
or FOH
One
FOHFOH
Link Link
includo
cada FOH
Rack.
cablecom
is included
with
each FOH Rack.
VGA
VGA
Um conector
fmea
fornecido
conexo for
de um
monitor
de
A single,VGA
female
VGA
connectorpara
is provided
driving
a comvdeo (no includo).
patible video display (not included).
CAN Bus
CAN Bus
Este conector XLR3-M n o funcional.
This XLR3-M connector is not functional.
Footswitches
Footswitches
Dois jaques fmea 1/4 TS so fornecidos para entrada de switches.

Two female
1/4-inch
footswitch jacks
are ou
provided
for
Footswitches
podem
ser TS
normalmente
abertos
normalmente
switchtravados
input. Footswitches
can beFunes
normally
open
or normally
fechados,
ou momentneos.
so
atribudas
para
closed,
or momentary.
Functions are assigned to
esses
jaqueslatching
na pgina
Options > Events.
these jacks on-screen in the Options > Events page.
USB Port
USB Port
Uma porta USB 1.1 fornecida no painel traseiro para interface com
iLoks,
teclados,
dispositivos
pen
drives.
A single
USB
1.1 port isapontadores
provided onou
the
back
panel for interfacing with iLoks, keyboards, pointing devices or key disks.
Console Lights
Lights
EsseConsole
dois jaques
XLR3-F conectam as luzes de console includas.
These two XLR3-F jacks connect to the included console
lights.
246
Guia VENUE Profile
GPI (General Purpose Interface)
GPI (General Purpose Interface)

GPI Input Specifications
Especificaes de Entrada GPI
A 25-pin, male D-Sub connector provides a total of 8 General
Um
conector
D-Sub(GPI)
macho
de 25 pinos oferece um total de 8
Purpose
Interface
Inputs.
entradas General Purpose Interface (GPI).
are logic
withlgicas
pull-ups.
may Elas
be driven
byser
Inputs
As entradas
soinputs
entradas
comThey
pull-ups.
podem
logic
outputs or
to ground.
comandadas
porcontact
sadas closure
lgicas ou
contato com o terra.
Input
A amplitude do sinal de entrada vai de 0 a 5.5V. As entradas
signal range is 0 to 5.5V. The inputs are ESD protected.
so protegidas em relao ao ESD.
signaling
uses standard
TTL logic
0.8V or0.8V
less ou
Input
Entradas
de sinalizao
utilizam
nveislevels:
TTL padro:
menos
para
a logic
2.0V oufor
maior
para
a logic high.
for
a logic
low.
2.0V low.
or greater
a logic
high.
Inputs
Entradas so compatveis com 5V TTL (e.g. 74LS series), 5V
are compatible with 5V TTL (e.g. 74LS series), 5V
CMOS (e.g. 74HC series), 3.3V CMOS (e.g. 74LVC series)
CMOS
(e.g.oferecem
74HC series),
CMOS
(e.g.
74LVC
series)
Entradas
pull-up3.3V
interno
de 5K
ohm
a +5V.
Inputs
Todas provide
as entradas
so referenciadas
pelo mesmo
terra interno,
an internal
5K ohm pull-up
to +5V.
que conectado ao terra do AC.
All Inputs are referenced to the same internal ground,
which is connected to AC safety ground.
GPI Input Connector Pin Assignments

The D-Show Profile GPI Input is a male DB-25 connector.
Pinagem
do Conector
dePin
Entrada
GPI
GPI Input
Connector
Assignments
Pin Number
Comments
AThe
entrada
GPI da
D-Show
umFunction
conector
DB-25.
D-Show
Profile
GPIInput
is a male
DB-25 connector.
1
Input 1
Logic level (TTL, CMOS)
input with pullup
Pin Number
Function
Comments
2
Input 2
input
with
pullup
1
Input 1
Logic
level
(TTL,
CMOS)
input with pullup
3
Input 3
input
with
pullup
2
Input 2
Logic
level
(TTL,
CMOS)
input with pullup
4
Input 4
input
with
pullup
3
Input 3
Logic
level
(TTL,
CMOS)
input with pullup
5
Input 5
input
with
pullup
4
Input 4
Logic
level
(TTL,
CMOS)
input with pullup
6
Input 6
input
with
pullup
5
Input 5
Logic
level
(TTL,
CMOS)
Stage Rack Features
input with pullup
7
Input 7
an6FOH Rack,
and
provide
all stage
input
with
pullup
6Stage Racks are used with
Input
Logic
level
(TTL,
CMOS)
input
pullup
audio I/O for VENUE Profile systems.
Upwith
to two
Stage Racks
8
Input 8
input
with
pullup
7
Input 7
Logic
level
(TTL,
CMOS)
input with pullup
Audio
I/O16, 17, 18,
14, 15,
Ground
All ground pins are con20, 21
nected
together
inter8 19,
Input
8
Logic
level
CMOS)
48 inputs with remotely controllable
mic(TTL,
preamps
and
nally
input
with pullup
10,
11,17,
12,output
13, 22,
Reserved
Do notupuse
14,9,
18,
Ground
All ground
pins
areanalog
con- or
15,
8 16,
analog
channels;
expandable
to 48
24,
19,23,
20,digital
21 25outputs per Stage Rack. nected together internally
Pinout for GPI Input Connector
and Control
I/O Do not use
9,Synchronization
10, 11, 12, 13, 22,
Reserved
23, 24,Snake
25 connectors to enable primary and redundant (if
1 2 3 connection
4 5 6 to
7 a8VENUE
9 10FOH
11 12
13
applicable)
Rack.
Pinagem para Conector de Entrada GPI
Pinout for GPI Input Connector
1 2 3Components
4 5 6 7 8 9
System
10 11 12 13
Included Components
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

VENUE
Profile
console
Pinout
for Profile
DB25M
GPI Input port (looking at back of console)
Two
(2) 16
IEC17
power
cables
14 15
18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
Pinout for Profile DB25M GPI Input port (looking at back of console)
Trackball
mountGPI(trackball
not
included)
Pinagempara
porta de entrada
DB25M (veja
a traseira
da console)
GPI Output Specifications

A 25-pin, female D-Sub connector provides a total of 8 General Purpose Interface
(GPI) Outputs.
Especificaes
de sada GPI
GPI Output Specifications
Outputs are isolated, floating relay contacts (contact cloconector

D-Sub
fmea
de 25 pinos
oferece
um of
total
de 8 sadas
A Um
25-pin,
female
D-Sub
connector
provides
a total
8 Gensure).
General Purpose
Interface
(GPI).
eral Purpose
Interface
(GPI)
Outputs.
Switched voltage is 200V max; 0.5A max.
Sadas so isoladas, com contatos de rel flutuantes

Outputs
are isolated,
floating
relay
(contact
clo- is
Voltagem
de 200V
max;
0.5A
max.
Switched
voltage
with
respect
tocontacts
safety/chassis
ground

Voltagem
em
relao
ao
terra
do
chassi
300V
max.
sure).
300V max.
Switched voltage is 200V max; 0.5A max.

As sadas
GPI Outputs
podem alterar
um mximo
500 mA. Isso
The
Profile GPI
can switch
500 mA de
maximum.
Switched
with
respectdetocurto
safety/chassis
ground
se voltage
aplica at
a surtos
termo. Esse
limiteispode ser
This applies even to short term current surges. This limit
excedido quando comandando uma lmpada capacitiva
300V max.
can be exceeded when driving a capacitive or incandescent
ou incandescente. Uma lmpada incandescente pode usar
load.
An
incandescent
lampestvel
maymA
draw
as much
as pela
at
dezGPI
vezes
sua can
corrente
quando
ligada
Thelamp
Profile
Outputs
switch
500
maximum.
ten
times
its
steady
state
current
when
first
turned
on.
primeira
vez.
Portanto,
essas
lmpadas
no
so
tipicamente
This applies even to short term current surges. This limit
suchwhen
lamps
are typically
not appropriate
loads fore vez
apropriadas
para
sadas
GPI,
e podem
controladas
canTherefore
be
exceeded
driving
a capacitive
orser
incandescent
the
GPI
Outputs,
and
should
instead
be
controlled
disso
po
um
rel
secundrio.
lamp load. An incandescent lamp may draw as muchby
asa secondary
relay.
ten times its steady state current when first turned on.
Especificaes de Energia de Sadas GPI

Therefore such lamps are typically not appropriate loads for
GPI Output Power Specification
Required
Components
the GPI Outputs,
and
instead
be controlled
a secOAdditional
conector
de sada
GPIshould
tambm
oferece
+12VDC aby200
mA para
The
GPI Output
alsocomo
provides
+12VDC
at O
upretorno
to 200 do
ondary
relay. connector
alimentar
dispositivos
externos,
rels
ou
LEDs.
mA for
powering
as do
relays
or LEDs.
Theque
terra
fornecido
o external
terra do devices,
sistema such
interno
D-Show
Profile,
GPI
Output
Powerao
Specification
ground
Video
Display
(15-inch
VGA display
return
that
is provided
is theflat-panel
D-Show Profile
internal
est
conectado
terra
do or
AC.greater
recommended;
1024x768
minimum
resolution).
VGA and
ground,
which
isalso
connected
AC
safety
ground.
Thesystem
GPI Output
connector
providesto+12VDC
at up
to 200
Conexes
Terra da Sada GPI
DVI supported.
mA for powering external devices, such as relays or LEDs. The
Output
Ground
Connections
GPI
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
ground
return
is provided
is the D-Show
Profile
As sadas
GPI that
fornecidas
so isoladas.
Cada sada
GPI internal
apresentada
system
ground,
which(Veja
is connected
to de
ACPinagem
safety ground.
em
um
par
de
pinso
Atribuies
do
Conector
The GPI
Outputs
provided
are
isolated
contact-closure
style.GPI
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Only)
na
pgina
Esses
dposi pinos
os
doisGPI
lados de um
Each
GPI248).
output
is presented
onrepresentam
a pair of pins
(see
GPI
Output
Ground
Connections
interruptor
que pode
ser Assignments
aberto
ouRack
fechado.
Se for
desejado
enviar
Output
The connection
between
FOH
andpage
Stage
Rack
requires
Connector
Pin
on
248).
These
two
um
sinal
ao
terra,
um
dos
pinos
deve
ser
conectado
ao
terra,
pins
represent
thecable.
two sides
a switch
can be opened
a Digital
Snake
This of
cable
can bethat
purchased
directly e o
The
GPI
Outputs
provided
are
isolated
contact-closure
style.
outro
ao
sinal
a
ser
controlado.
and
closed.
If
it
is
desired
to
drive
a
signal
to
ground,
then
one
Each
output
is presented
onground,
a pair ofand
pins
(see
GPI
of GPI
the pins
must
be wired to
the
other
to the
Output
Pin Assignments on page 248). These two
signalConnector
to be controlled.
pins
represent the
two sides of a switch that can be opened
Optional
Components
and closed. If it is desired to drive a signal to ground, then one
following
components
are optional,
and
must
of The
the pins
must be
wired to ground,
and the
other
tobe
the
signal
to be controlled.
purchased
separately:
(for Talkback)
VENUE Mouse Pad

VENUE Profile Guide

Rack(s) (see next)


System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options Chapter 29: Control Surface Reference
247

I/O Options
AI16 AnalogCaptulo
Mic/Line
Card that
providesde
16Controle
analog
29:Input
Referncia
da Superfcie
Chapter 29: Control Surface Reference 247
247
Atribuies do Conector de Sada GPI
GPI
GPI
Output
Output
Connector
Connector
Pin
Pin
Assignments
Assignments
GPI Output Connector Pin Assignments
O The
conector
de sada
GPI
da
D-Show
fmea
DB-25.
The
D-Show
D-Show
Profile
Profile
GPI
GPI
Output
Output
isProfile
aisfemale
a female
DB-25
DB-25
connector.
connector.
The D-Show Profile GPI Output is a female DB-25 connector.
GPIGPI
Output
Output
Connector
Connector
PinPin
Assignments
Assignments
GPI Output Connector Pin Assignments
PinPin
Number
NumberFunction
Function
Comments
Comments
Pin Number Function
Comments
1, 1,
1414
Output
Output
1 1
Floating
Floating
contact
contact
closure
closure
out-out1, 14
Output 1
contact closure outputFloating
put
put
2, 2,
1515
Output
Output
2 2
Floating
Floating
contact
contact
closure
closure
out-out2, 15
Output 2
put
put
3, 3,
1616
Output
Output
3 3
Floating
Floating
contact
contact
closure
closure
out-out3, 16
Output 3
put
put
4, 4,
1717
Output
Output
4 4
Floating
Floating
contact
contact
closure
closure
out-out4, 17
Output 4
put
put
5, 5,
1818
Output
Output
5 5
Floating
Floating
contact
contact
closure
closure
out-out5, 18
Output 5
put
put
6, 6,
1919
Output
Output
6 6
Floating
Floating
contact
contact
closure
closure
out-out6, 19
Output 6
put
put
7, 7,
2020
Output
Output
7 7
Floating
Floating
contact
contact
closure
closure
out-out7, 20
Output 7
put
put
8, 8,
2121
Output
Output
8 8
Floating
Floating
contact
contact
closure
closure
out-out8, 21
Output 8
put
put
12,12,
13,13,
24,24, +12V
+12V
auxiliary
auxiliary
Maximum
Maximum
total
total
load
load
200
200
mAmA
+12V
total
load
200 mA
All Maximum
All
+12V
+12V
pins
pins
areare
connected
connected
2512,
25 13, 24, power
power auxiliary
All
+12V
pins are connected
25
power
together
together
internally
internally
together internally
9, 9,
10,10,
22,22, Ground
Ground
for for
auxilauxil- All All
ground
ground
pins
pins
areare
conconfor auxil- nected
All
ground
pinsinternally
are
con239,
2310, 22, iaryGround
iary
power
power
nected
together
together
internally
23
iary power
nected together internally
1111
Reserved
Reserved
DoDo
notnot
useuse
11
Reserved
Do not use
:
:
:
GPI
GPIWiring
Wiring
Diagrams GPI
Diagramas
deDiagrams
Cabeamento
GPI Wiring
Diagrams
The
The
following
following
diagrams
diagrams
provide
provide
examples
examples
of of
GPI
GPI
pinout
pinout
and
and e
Os
oferecem
exemplos
pinagem
Theseguintes
following diagramas
diagrams provide
examples
of GPIde
pinout
and
wiring
wiring
for
for
the
the
common
common
uses.
uses.
All
All
diagrams
diagrams
are
are
shown
shown
from
from
the
cabeamentoGPI para usos comuns. Todos os diagamastheso
wiring for the common uses. All diagrams are shown from the
rear
rear
(solder
(solder
side)
of of
the
the
DB25
DB25
connector.
connector.
mostrados
daside)
parte
traseira
(parte
da solda) do conector DB25.
rear (solder side) of the DB25 connector.
Exemplos de Entradas GPI
GPI
GPI
Input
Input
Examples
Examples
GPI Input Examples
Os seguintes diagramas oferecem exemplos simplificados de
The
The
following
following
diagrams
diagrams
provide
provide
simplified
simplified
wiring
wiring
examples
examples
cabeamento
para
um conector
DB25,
paraexamples
conexo do
The following
diagrams
providefmea
simplified
wiring
forfor
a customer-provided
a customer-provided
DB25
DB25
female
female
connector,
connector,
to to
attach
attach
to to
conector
macho GPI In na D-Show
Profile.connector, to attach to
for a customer-provided
DB25 female
thethe
male
male
GPI
GPI
In In
connector
connector
onon
D-Show
D-Show
Profile.
Profile.
the male GPI In connector on D-Show Profile.
Wiring
Wiring
a Switch
a Switch
toto
Drive
Drive
GPI
GPI
Wiring a Switch to Drive GPI
DB25F
DB25F
DB25F
1 1
1
14 14
14
No No
ground
ground
reference
reference
needed
needed
No
ground
reference needed
between
between
systems.
systems.
between systems.
DB25F
DB25F
Pinout
Pinout
Pinagem
DB25F
DB25F Pinout
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 109 98 87 76 65 54 43 32 21 1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Wiring
a Relay
Drive
GPI
Wiring
a Relay
toto
Drive
GPI
Wiring a Relay to Drive GPI
X.X
X.X
X.X
DB25F
DB25F
DB25F
1 1
1
14 14
14
25 25
24 24
23 23
22 22
21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Pinout
Pinout
for for
Profile
Profile
DB25F
DB25F
GPIGPI
Output
Output
port
port
(looking
(looking
at back
at back
of console)
of console)
Pinout for Profile DB25F GPI Output port (looking at back of console)
Pinagem da porta de sada GPI DB25F (veja a traseira da console)
248
248VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
248 Guia
VENUE
ProfileProfile
Guide
248
VENUE
No No
ground
ground
reference
reference
needed
needed
No
ground
reference needed
between
between
systems.
systems.
between systems.
Wiring
Wiring
a Logic
a Logic
Signal
Signal
toto
Drive
Drive
GPI
GPI
DB25F
DB25F
GPI
GPI
Output
Output
Driving
Driving
and
and
Powering
Powering
anan
LED
LED
DB25M
DB25M
1 1
1 1
14 14
14 14
Ground
Ground
reference
reference
needed
needed
between
between
systems.
systems.
Connect
Connect
oneone
sideside
of the
of the
relay
relay
to Ground.
to Ground.
9 9
24 24
Stage Rack Features
Audio I/O
GPI
GPI
Output
Output
Examples
Examples
Exemplos
de sadas
GPI

The
The
following
following
diagrams
diagrams
depict
depict
wiring
wiring
examples
examples
forfor
a cusa cusindividually
selectable
phantom
power.
Os seguintes
diagramas
mostram
exemplos
de cabeamento para
tomer-provided
tomer-provided
DB25
DB25
male
male
connector,
connector,
to
to
connect
connect
to
to
the
the
fe-fe-na
conectores
machooutput
DB25,channels;
para conectar
sada
fmea
GPI
8 analog
expandable
up to
48 analog
or
male
male
GPI
GPI
Output
Output
connector
connector
on
on
D-Show
D-Show
Profile.
Profile.
D-Show Profile.
GPI
GPI
Output
Output
Driving
Driving
Relay
a Relay
toto
Illuminate
Illuminate
a Light
a Light
Synchronization
and a
Control
I/O
DB25M
DB25M
1 1
14 14
System Components
External
External
Power
Power
Supply
Supply

DVI supported.
Output
Driving
an
Externally
Powered
LED
GPI
Output
Driving
Externally
Powered
LED
GPI
USB
keyboard
and an
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
1 1
14 14
DB25M
DB25M
Optional Components

+ +
transfer of Show data; 512 MB or
larger
External
External recommended)
Power
Power
Near-field monitor speakers for Supply

mix
position monitoring
Supply
Included Components
NoNo
ground
ground
reference
reference
needed
needed
All VENUE Profile systems include

the systems.
following:
between
between
systems.
9 9


(for Talkback)
24 Pad
24
VENUE Mouse

VENUE Profile Guide

Rack(s) (see next)


System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options
AI16 AnalogCaptulo
Mic/Line
Card that
providesde
16Controle
analog
29:Input
Referncia
da Superfcie
Chapter
Chapter
29:29:
Control
Control
Surface
Surface
Reference
Reference249
249
249
GPI Output Driving a Logic Input

GPI Output Driving a Logic Input
V+
V+
1
1
DB25M
DB25M
14
14
Ground reference needed

Ground
betweenreference
systems.needed
between systems.
GPI Output Driving a Relay Using an External Power

GPI Output Driving a Relay Using an External Power
Supply
Supply
DB25M
DB25M
1
1
14
14
External
Power
External
Supply
Power
Supply

250
Guia VENUE Profile
Chapter 30: ECx
Captulo 30: ECx

VENUE Profile systems include ECx Ethernet Control. ECx lets
you control a VENUE system remotely over an Ethernet network, using compatible wired or wireless network equipment
O sistema VENUE Profile inclui o ECx Ethernet Control. ECx permite
(purchased
separately).
controlar
um sistema
VENUE remotamente sobre uma rede Ethernet,
utilizando equipamento compatvel com ou sem fio (vendido

separadamente).
ECx Capabilities and Features

ECx provides
Recursos
ECx the following:
Remote control of a VENUE system from a client computer,

including a laptop or Tablet PC
ECx oferece
o seguinte:
Exact remoto
duplication
software
remote
Controle
de of
umVENUE
sistema
VENUEonathe
partir
de clium
computador,
incluindo laptop ou Tablet PC
ent computer
Duplicata exata do software VENUE no computador remoto
Stage Rack Features
ECx
Components
Componentes
ECx Profile systems. Up to two Stage Racks
audio I/O for VENUE
can be
used
simultaneously,
up toinclude
96 totalthe
inputs.
The
ECx
components
of yoursupporting
VENUE system
folos componentes ECx se seu sistema VENUE incluem os seguintes
lowing items:
itens:
Audio I/O
ECx
Control
(pre-installed)
ECx
Control
(pr-instalado)
48
inputs
with
remotely
controllable
mic
preamps
and
Cabo
Ethernet
para
conexo
da
placa
Ethernet cable for
connecting
theECx
ECxcard
cardao
tocomputador
your client
individually
selectable
phantom
power.
remoto,
ao
roteador
wireless,
ou
ao
dispositivo
de
ponto
de
computer, wireless router, or wireless access point device
acesso
wireless
8
analog
output
channels;
expandable
up
to
48
analog
ECx Ethernet Control Software installer CD-ROM (con-or
CD-ROM
instalador
do
software
ECx Ethernet Control CD-ROM
digital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
taining
ECx host
and
client
software)
(contendo
software
ECx
host
e client)
Requerimentos
do Sistema
System Requirements
The following
are required
usecom
ECxseu
with
your VENUE
O seguinte
requerido
para usartoECx
sistema
VENUE:sys tem:
Um dispositivo de ponto de acesso wireless (WAP) ou roteador
Um computador rodando o sofwtare Windows ou Mac OS X com
System
A -qualified router or wireless access point (WAP) device
capacidade Components
Ethernet.
Para
comunicao
com ECx,
dispositivos
A client
computer running
-qualified
Windows802.11g
or Mac OSso
X
recomendados.
software
with
wired
or
wireless
Ethernet
capability.
Included Components
For
wireless
communication
withe
ECx,
802.11g
capable
deAvidAll
pode
assegurar
compatibilidades
oferecer
suporte
apenas
VENUE
Profile
systems include
the
following:
vices
are
recommended.
para hardware
e software
que foram testados e aprovados.
VENUE
Profile console
Two
(2) IEC
power
cables
Avid
can only
assure
compatibility
and provide support for
Para
requerimentos
completos
do sistema
e lista de computadores,
hardware
and
software
it
has
tested
and
approved.
Monitor
mount
for VGA screen
(screen
not
included)
sistemas
operacionais
e dispositivos
qualificados,
verifique
as mais
recentes
informaes
em nosso
website:
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
For complete system requirements and a list of -qualified comwww.avid.com/compatibility
VENUE
Mouse
Pad and wireless devices, refer to the latputers,
operating
systems,
VENUE Profile
Guide
estcompatibility
information
on our website:
Rack(s) (see next)

Installing ECx Host Software

The ECx host software enables your VENUE system to communicate withocomputers
the remote client software.
Instalando
Softwarerunning
ECx Host
Tosoftware
use ECxECx
Ethernet
Control,
do the
following:
O
host permite
aoyou
seumust
sistema
VENUE
se comunicar
com
computadores
rodando
o software
client.
Install
the ECx host
software
on your
VENUE system.
Install the ECx client software on your remote computer.
Para usar o ECx Ethernet Control, voc deve fazer o seguinte:

Instalar o software ECx host no seu sistema VENUE.
If you need to uninstall the ECx host software from your
Instalar o software ECx client em seu computador remoto
VENUE system, see Uninstalling ECx Host Software on

page
252.precisa desinstalar o software ECx host de seu sistema
Se
voc
VENUE, veja Desinstalando o Software ECx Host na pgina 252.
If you need to re-install the ECx host software, (after a System

Additional
Required
Components
Restore
an Update),
see Reinstalling
ECx
Host(depois
Software
Se
voc or
precisa
reinstalar
o software ECx
host,
de uma
on
page
252.
restaurao
oucomponents
atualizao must
do sistema),
veja separately:
Reinstalando o
The following
be purchased
Software ECx Host na pgina 252.
Video
(15-inch
or greater
flat-panel
VGA
display of
After
youDisplay
install the
host and
client software,
see
Overview
recommended;
1024x768 minimum
resolution).
VGA and
ECx
Setup
and
Configuration
on
page
253
for
information
Depois de instalar os software host e client, veja Viso Geral de
supported.
onDVI
setting
up your VENUE
system
and client
computer
for rede
Ajustes
e COnfiguraes
ECx
na pgina
253 para
informaes
mote
operation
using
ECx.
ajuste
de
seu
sistema
VENUE
e
do
computador
client
para
operao
remota utilizando ECx.
Digital SnakeECx
Cable (VENUE
Profile Systems Only)
Installing
Software
Instalando
o SoftwareHost
ECx Host

The ECx Ethernet Control Software installer disc contains the
a Digital
cable.ECx
ThisEthernet
cable can
be purchased
O disco
de Snake
instalao
Control
Softwaredirectly
contm o
ECx host software. This software enables your VENUE system
software
ECx host.
Esse software
habilita
seu vendor.
sistema VENUE a se
from Avid
or assembled
by your
preferred
to communicate
with computers
running
the remote
comunicar
com computadores
rodando
o software
clientclient
.
software.
Optional
Para
instalar oComponents
software ECx host em seu sistema VENUE:
To install ECx host software on your VENUE system:
1purchased
Insert theseparately:
ECx installer disc in the system CD-ROM drive.
1 Insira o disco de instalao ECx no drive de CD-ROM do sistema.

USB
disk
(or other
storage
for
22 Siga
um flash
dosthe
seguintes
procedimentos
para
colocar
seu sistema
Do
one
of
following
to portable
put yourUSB
system
into device
Config
no
modo
Config:
transfer
of
Show
data;
512
MB
or
larger
recommended)
Mode:
Pressione
o monitor
switch Config
na console.
Near-field
speakers
for mix
position
monitoring
Press
the Console
Config
switch
on the
console.
ou
Headphones
with
1/4-inch
jack
or
Clique
duas vezes na caixa Mode no canto inferior direito da
tela.
Double-click the Mode box in the bottom-right corner of
(for Talkback)
the screen.
3 V
pgina Options
System
e clique Update.
Footswitches
(up> to
2)
3 Go to Options > System page and click Update.
MIDI
(fordo
connecting
external
MIDI adevices)
4 Clique
Yescables
para sair
software VENUE
e iniciar
instalao.
4 Click
Yescables
to exit(for
VENUE
software
and clock
begin between
the installation.
BNC
connecting
Word
the
5 Depois
de completar
a instalao,
o sistema
reinicia.
VENUE
system and
external digital
devices)
5 After the installation is complete, the system restarts.

Quando voc realizar uma atualizao ou restaurao do
When your perform an Update or a System Restore of your
sistema VENUE, voc deve reinstalar o software ECx host.
VENUE system, you must reinstall the ECx host software.
Veja Reinstalando o Software ECx Host na pgina 252.
See Reinstalling ECx Host Software on page 252.

For details on all VENUE systems and options,
visit the
Chapter
30: Avid
ECx 251
System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options
AI16 Analog Mic/Line Input Card that provides

16 analog
Captulo
30: ECx
251
Instalando o software ECx Client
Reinstalling ECx Host Software
O The
disco
instalao
ECx Software
Ethernetinstaller
Control CD-ROM
Softwareconcontm
ECxde
Ethernet
Control
aplicativos
de controle remoto para Windows and Mac.
tains remote control applications for both Windows and Mac.
ECx
instalado
no seu
sistema
VENUE,
voc
que
IfSe
ECx
is est
installed
on your
VENUE
system,
you
willter
have
toreintalrelo depois de realizar uma atualizao ou restaurao do sistema.
install the ECx host software after performing a System Restore or an Update.
Installing the ECx Client Software
Instalando o ECx Client em Windows
Installing the ECx Client in Windows
Para instalar o aplicativo ECx Control client (UltraVNC) no

To install the ECx Control client application (UltraVNC) in
Windows:
Windows:
1 Insira o disco de instalao ECx no drive de CD ou DVD do

1 Insert the ECx installer disc in the computer CD or DVD
computador.
drive.
2 2Abra
a pasta
Windows Client.
Open
the Windows
Client folder.
Double-click
theno
UltraVNC-Viewer.exe
file. .
3 3Clique
duas vezes
arquivo UltraVNC-Viewer.exe
Follow
on-screen
to completar
complete a
4 4Siga
as the
instrues
deinstallation
instalao instructions
na tela para
the
installation.
instalao.
Instalando
o ECx
Client
Mac on Mac
Installing
the
ECxem
Client
Para
instalarthe
o aplicativo
ECxclient
Control
client (Chicken
of the
To install
ECx Control
application
(Chicken
of the
VNC)
noon
Mac:
VNC)
Mac:
Inserto the
ECxdeinstaller
disc in
1 1Insira
disco
instalao
ECxthe
nocomputer
drive de CD
CD or
ouDVD
DVD do
drive.
computador.
2 Open the Mac OS X Client folder.
2 Abra a pasta Mac OS X Client.
3 Double-click the cotvnc-20b4.dmg file.
3 Clique duas vezes no arquivo cotvnc-20b4.dmg .
4 In the window that opens, drag the Chicken of the VNC
4 icon
Na janela
queitse
arrasteono your
conehard
Chicken
to copy
toabre,
a location
drive.of the VNC para
copi-lo para um novo local em seu hard drive.
Uninstalling
ECx ECx
Host
Desisntalando
o Software
HostSoftware
If you need to uninstall ECx software from your VENUE sys-
Se voc precisa desinstalar o software ECx de seu sistema VENUE,

tem,pode
youfazer
can do
from
the system
desktop.
voc
issosodo
desktop
do sistema.
To uninstall
ECx
host software
VENUE
system:
Para
desinstalar
o software
ECx defrom
seu your
sistema
VENUE:
1 Do one of the following to put your system into Config
1 Siga um dos seguintes procedimentos para colocar seu sistema

Mode:
no modo Config:
Press theoConsole
Config
on the console
Pressione
switch Config
na switch
console.
ouor
Clique duas vezes na caixa Mode no canto inferior direito da
tela.
Double-click the Mode box in the bottom-right corner of
the screen.
2 2VGo
pgina
Options
> System.
to Options
> System.
3 3Segure
a tecla
Control
clique
Shut
Down
para
Hold the
Control
keye and
click
Shut
Down
to ir
goao
todesktop
the sys- do
sistema.
tem desktop.
Locate and
double-click
the ECx
software
pro4 4Localize
e clique
duas vezes
no host
programa
ECxuninstall
host software
gram (C:\Program
EthernetControl
Control
Software\
uninstall
(C:\ProgramFiles\D-Show
Files\D-Show Ethernet
Software\
Uninstall.bat).
Uninstall.bat).
ECx host
software
is uninstalled,
and the software
autoO The
software
ECx host
desinstalado
e o software
automaticamente
reinicia.
matically restarts.
The
ECx folder
will remain onnoyour
VENUE
A pasta
ECx permanecer
hard
drive system
de seuhard
sistema
VENUE
aps
a desintalao.
drive
after
uninstalling,
252
Guia VENUE Profile
Reinstalando o Software ECx Host
System Restore Se voc realizou uma restaurao completa do
sistema,
o sofwtare
ECx hostadeve
ser reinstalado
de seu
System
Restore
If you perform
complete
System Restore,
thedisco
de instalao original. Veja Instalando o Softare ECx Host na
ECx host software must be reinstalled from its original inpgina 251.
staller disc. See Installing ECx Host Software on page 251.
UpdateSe voc realizou uma atualizao, voc deve reinstalar
Update If you perform an Update, you must still reinstall the

o software ECx host. Voc pode reinstalar sem utilizar o disco de
ECx host software. You can reinstall without using the ECx ininstalao ECx porque uma atualizao deixa o instaladore do ECx
staller
discno
because
an Update
theVENUE.
ECx installer
on your
installer
hard drive
de seuleaves
sistema
Voc pode
tambm
VENUE
systems
hard
drive.
You
can
also
reinstall
using
the
reinstalar utilizando o disco de instalao original.
original installer disc.
Para reinstalar aps uma atualizao sem utilizar o disco de

ECx: an Update without using the ECx installer disc:
Toinstalao
reinstall after
1 1Remove
USB key
disks
fromUSB
all USB
ports, as
andportas
make USB, e
Removaany
qualquer
pen
drive
de todas
sure
no installer
are in
CD-ROM
drive. no drive de CDcertifique-se
de discs
que no
hthe
discos
de instalao
ROM.
2 Do one of the following to put your system into Config
Mode:
2 Siga um dos seguintes procedimentos para colocar seu sistema

modo
Press the
Console Config switch on the console.
no
Config:
orPressione
o switch Config na console.
ou
Mode
the bottom-right
corner
of da
Double-click
Clique duas the
vezes
na box
caixainMode
no canto inferior
direito
the
screen.
tela.
3 Go to the Options > Systems page.
3 V pgina Options > Systems.
Click the Update button.
4 Clique no boto Update.
Viso Geral de Ajustes e Configuraes ECx

Voc pode controlar seu sistema VENUE (o host) com um
computador remoto (o client) utilizando o protocolo padro VNC
(Virtual Network Computing) sobre TCP/IP, permitindo acesso
remoto ao seu sistema via rede Ethernet com ou sem fio. Este
captulo explica os passos para configurar e utilizar ECx.
Para uma rede cabeada, os passos incluem:
Conectar o computador remoto diretamente ao sistema VENUE
utilizando um cabo Ethernet.
Ajustar os endereos IP de seu sistema VENUE e seu computador
cliente manualmente.
Habilitar a operao remota no sistema VENUE.
Para uma rede sem fio, os passos incluem:
Stage Rack Features
Conectar um roteador sem fio ou um dispositivo de ponto de

Stage
Racks are
used
an FOH
Rack, and provide all stage
acesso
wireless
(WAP)
aowith
sistema
VENUE.
audio os
I/Oendereos
for VENUE
Profile
systems.
Up toetwo
Stage Racks
ajustar
IP de
seu sistema
VENUE
seu computadore
canmanual
be usedou
simultaneously,
cliente
automaticamente.
Estabelecer uma conexo entre seu roteador wireless e o
computador
cliente.
Audio I/O
Habilitar a operao remota no sistema VENUE.
Conectando
um Computador Diretamente ao
sistema VENUE
Se voc est estabelecendo uma estao de controle remoto fixa e
Snake
to enable
and redundant
(if
no precisa
de connectors
conexo mvel,
voc primary
pode conectar
o computador
connection
VENUEutilizando
FOH Rack.um cabo
remoto applicable)
diretamenteao
sistemato aVENUE
Ethernet.
Para conectar um computador diretamente ao sistema VENUE:
System Components
1 Conecte uma ponta do cabo Ethernet apropriado (com conectores

RJ-45)
porta ECx
em seu sistema VENUE, e a outra ponta porta
Included
Components
Ethernet no computador. O tipo de cabo depende do sistema
operacional
do computador
remoto:
All VENUE
Profile systems
Windows Para conectar um computador Windows diretamente

Two (2)
IEC power
cables
a seu sistema
VENUE,
um cabo
Ethernet crossover necessrio.
Alternativamente,
pode
hub Ethernet
e conectar
cabos
Monitor voc
mount
forusar
VGAum
screen
(screen not
included)
Ethernet
padro entre
seu(trackball
sistema VENUE,
o hub e o computador
Trackball
mount
not included)
remoto.
VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE
Profile
Guide
Mac Para
conectar
um computador
Mac diretamente a seu sistema
VENUE,
voc
pode
usar
tanto
um cabo Ethernet padro quanto um
crossover.
Conectando um Roteador Wireless ou WAP

VENUE
O sistema VENUE trablaha com roteadores wireless padro ou
dispositivos WAP.
Antes de conectar um roteador wireless ou dispositivo WAP, voc
precisa configurar o SSID do dispositivo para que sua rede sem fio
possa ser identificada facilmente no computador cliente. Voc pode
especificar qualquer nome nico para esse dispositivo, como Rede
VENUE.
Para configurar o SSID e qualquer recursos de segurana de rede de
seu roteador wireless ou WAP, veja as instrues do fabricante.
Para conectar um roteador wireless router ou dispositivo WAP a
seu sistema VENUE :
1 Conecte uma ponta do cabo Ethernet apropriado (com conectores

The following
components
must be
purchased
separately:
RJ-45)
porta ECx
em seu sistema
VENUE,
e a outra
ponta porta
Ethernet
roteador
ou WAP.
um flat-panel
dos seguintes
Video do
Display
(15-inch
orSiga
greater
VGAprocedimentos
display
dependendo
do tipo1024x768
de dispositivo
que esteja
usando:VGA and
recommended;
minimum
resolution).
DVI
Se supported.
voc est usando um roteador wireless, use um cabo
Ethernet padro para seu sistema VENUE.
USB
ou
keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
Se voc est usando WAP, use um cabo Ethernet crossover
Digital
Snake
(VENUE
cable
para Cable
conectar
a seu Profile
sistemaSystems
VENUE. Only)

a Digital
Se voc est usando um roteador wireless ou dispositivo WAP
from
Avid
or assembled
by your
preferred
vendor.
que no inclui
uma funo
DHCP
server (como
o Cisco Aironet
1230AG), voc deve configurar os endereos IP de seu sistema
VENUE e do computador cliente manualmente. Veja Ajustando
Optional
Components
Endereos IP da Venue e Cliente Manualmente na pgina
The 254.
following components are optional, and must be
purchased
ou
separately:
Se voc est usando um roteador wireless que inclui uma
funo DHCP server (como o Belkin Pr-N), voc pode configurar
transfer
of Show
data;
MB or larger
recommended)
seu
sistema
VENUE
e o512
computador
cliente
para ajustar os
endereos
Near-fieldde
monitor
speakers for mix
position
monitoring
IP automaticamente.
Veja
Ajustando
Endereos
da Venue e Cliente
Automaticamente
na pgina 255.
IPHeadphones
with 1/4-inch
jack
(for Talkback)
Rack(s)
(see next)de seu sistema VENUE e do computador
2 Configure
os endereos
cliente manualmente. Veja Ajustando Endereos VENUE e Client
Manualmente
na pginaCDs,
254. iLoks, and Cables
Racks, Software

System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options

16 analog
Captulo
30: ECx
253
Setting VENUE and Client IP Addresses

Setting
VENUE
Client
IP
Addresses
Setting
VENUE
and
Addresses
Ajustando
Endereos
IPand
deClient
VENUE
eIP
do
Cliente
You can set the IP addresses of your VENUE system and client
Setting
VENUE
Client
IPsistema
Addresses
You
set
the
IP addresses
ofIPyour
VENUE
system
and
client
You
cancan
set
the
IP os
addresses
of your
VENUE
system
and
client
computer
manually
orand
automatically.
Do
one
of the
following
Voc
pode
ajustar
endereos
de
seu
VENUE
e do
computer
manually
or automatically.
Do
one
of the
following
computer
manually
orconfiguration
automatically.
one
of the
following
depending
on the
ofDo
your
network:
computador
manual
ou
automaticamente.
um dos
You can set cliente
the IP addresses
of your
VENUE systemSiga
and client
depending
on
the
configuration
of
your
network:
depending
on
the
configuration
of
your
network:
seguintes
procedimentos,
dependendo
da
configurao
de sua
If youmanually
are connecting
a computerDo
directly
your
VENUE
computer
or automatically.
one ofto
the
following
rede:
If
you
are
connecting
a
computer
directly
to
your
VENUE
If
you
are
connecting
a
computer
directly
to
your
VENUE
system,
or
you
are
using
a
wireless
router
or
WAP
device
that
depending on the configuration of your network:
system,
you
using
aserver
wireless
router
or
WAP
device
that
system,
or or
you
areare
using
a wireless
router
or see
WAP
device
that
does not
include
a DHCP
function,
Setting
VENUE
If you
connecting
directly
to your VENUE
Se
vocare
est
conectandoa ocomputer
computadore
diretamente
ao sistema
does
not
include
a DHCP
server
function,
see
Setting
VENUE
does
not
include
a
DHCP
server
function,
see
Setting
VENUE
and
Client
IP
Addresses
Manually
on
page
254.
VENUE,
est
um roteador
ou dispositivo
system,ouorse
you
areutilizando
using a wireless
router wireless
or WAP device
that
and
Client
IP Addresses
Manually
page
254. Endereos
and
Client
IP
Addresses
Manually
onon
page
254.
WAP
que
no
inclui
funes
DHCP
server,
veja
Ajustando
or
does not include a DHCP server function, see Setting VENUE

IPand
da VENUE
e do
Client Manualmente
napage
pgina
254.
or
or
IP
Client
Addresses
Manually on
254.
If you are using a wireless router that includes a DHCP
3 Select Use the Following Address and enter the following:
Use
the
Following
Address
e digite
seguinte
dados:
3Selecione
Select
Use
the
Following
Address
and
enter
the
following:
3 3Select
the
Following
Address
and
enter
theos
following:
IPUse
address:
10.0.0.1
IP
address:
10.0.0.1
IPIP
address:
10.0.0.1
address:
Subnet
Mask:
255.255.255.0
3 Select
Use
the10.0.0.1
Following
Address and enter the following:
Subnet
Mask:
255.255.255.0
Subnet
Mask:
255.255.255.0
Subnet
Mask:
255.255.255.0
address:
Default
Gateway:
10.0.0.1
IP
10.0.0.1
Default
Gateway:
10.0.0.1
Default
Gateway:
10.0.0.1
Default Gateway: 10.0.0.1
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway: 10.0.0.1
ou
If
are
using
a Setting
wireless
router
that
includes
DHCP
If
you
are
using
asee
wireless
router
that
includes
DHCP
server
function,
VENUE
and
Client
IPa Addresses
or
you
Se
voc
est
usando
um roteador
wireless
queainclui
funes
server
function,
see
Setting
VENUE
and
Client
IP
Addresses
server
function,
see
Setting
VENUE
and
Client
IP
Addresses
Automatically
on
page
255.
DHCP
server,
veja
Ajustando
Endereos
IP
da
VENUE
e
do
If you are using a wireless router that includes a DHCP Client
Automatically
page
255.
Automatically
on
page
255.
Automaticamente
naon
pgina
255.
server function, see
Setting
VENUE and Client IP Addresses
IP configuration changes on your VENUE system and client
Automatically
on
page
255.
IP
configuration
changes
your
VENUE
system
and
client
IP
configuration
changes
your
VENUE
system
and
client
computer
canconfigurao
take
up on
to 2on
minutes
toseu
become
effective.
Af-e
Alteraes
na
de
IP
em
sistema
VENUE
take
2 minutes
tosufficient
become
effective.
Afcomputer
cancan
take
up up
tobe
2tosure
minutes
to at
become
effective.
Af-the
nocomputer
computador
client
podem
levar
2 minutos
para
se
ter
making
changes,
to
allow
time
for
IP configuration changes on your VENUE system and client
tornarem
efetivas.
Aps
realizar
as
mudanas,
certifiqueter
making
changes,
be sure
toand
allow
sufficient
time
for
ter
making
changes,
be
sure
to allow
sufficient
time
for
thethe
system
to
assign
IP
addresses
establish
communication
computer can take up to 2 minutes to become effective. Afsesystem
de to
oferecer
tempo
usficiente
para
o sistema
atribuir os
toall
assign
IP addresses
establish
communication
system
assign
IP
addresses
andand
establish
communication
between
the
components.
ter
making changes,
be sure to aallow
sufficient time
for
the os
endereos
IP
e
estabelecer
comunicao
entre
todos
between
components.
between
all all
thethe
components.
system
to
assign
IP
addresses
and
establish
communication
componentes.
If network communication is not established after allowing
between
allcommunication
the
components.
If
network
communication
is not
established
after
allowing
If network
is not
established
allowing
sufficient
time
for IP addressing,
then youafter
can
verify
that
Se
a
comunicao
dere
decable
nothen
then
estabelecida
dethat
pois
sufficient
time
for
IP addressing,
you
verify
thatde
sufficient
time
forthe
IPcorrect
addressing,
you
cancan
verify
you
are
using
types,
have
correctly
conIfoferecer
networktempo
communication
ispara
not established
after allowing
suficiente
o
endereamento
IP,
ento
using
correct
cable
types,
have
correctly
conyouyou
areare
using
thethe
correct
types,
have
correctly
connected
the
system,
andcable
have
working
cables.
sufficient
for IPque
addressing,
then you
can
verifyde
that
voc podetime
verificar
sest usando
o tipo
correto
cabos,
nected
system,
have
working
cables.
nected
thethe
system,
andand
have
working
cables.
you
are using the
correct cable types,
have correctly
haveconectou
corretamenteo
o sistema
e possui concabos de
Setting
VENUE
and
Client
IP
Addresses
trablaho.
nected
the system, and have working cables.
host.
host.
5 5Select
Enable
Remote
Control
to activate
the
VENUE
ECx
Enable
Remote
Control
para ativar
o VENUE
ECx host.
6Selecione
Go to
Setting
the
Client
Computer
IP
Address
Manually
host.
6
to 254.
Setting
Client
Computer
IP Address
Manually
6 Go
to
Setting
thethe
Client
Computer
IP Address
Manually
onGo
page
Vpage
254.
Ajustando o Endereo IP do Computador Cliente
on6on
page
254.
6 Manualmente
Go to Settingna
thepgina
Client254.
Computer IP Address Manually
onSetting
page 254.the Client Computer IP Address Manually
Interaction
tab.
Interaction.
2 Under
Ethernet
Control,
click
Network
Settings.
2 Under
Ethernet
Control,
click
Network
Settings.
3 In the Connection Properties window, double-click Internet
Setting an IP address manually

Ajustando
umaddress
endereo
IP manualmente
Setting
IP
address
manually
Setting
an an
IP
manually
4 Click Apply.
Setting
anApply.
IPApply.
address manually
4 Click
4
Click
5 Select Enable Remote Control to activate the VENUE ECx
4
Clique
Apply.
4
Apply.
5 Select
Enable
Remote
Control
to activate
VENUE
ECx
5 Click
Select
Enable
Remote
Control
to activate
thethe
VENUE
ECx
host.
Setting
Client
Computer
Address
Manually
Setting
the
Client
Computer
IP IP
Address
Manually
Ajustando
othe
Endereo
IP
do
Computador
Cliente
Manualmente
After manually setting your VENUE systems IP address, you

Setting
the
Client
Computer
IPsystems
Address
Manually
After
manually
setting
your
VENUE
systems
IP
address,
you
After
manually
setting
your
VENUE
IP address,
you
need
to
set your
client
computers
IP
address.
Depois de ajustar manualmente o endereo IP de seu sistema
need
to set
your
client
computers
IP address.
need
to set
your
client
computers
IP address.
VENUE,
voc precisa
o endereo
IP doIP
computador
cliente.
After
manually
settingajustar
your VENUE
systems
address, you
To
manually
set
the
IP
address
in
Windows:
need to set your client computers IP address.
To
manually
set
IP address
in Windows:
ToPara
manually
set
thethe
IP address
in Windows:
ajustar
manualmente
endereo
IP no Windows:
1 Go
to Control
Panels >o Network
Connections.
Setting
VENUE
and
Client
IP
Addresses
Setting
VENUE
and
Client
IP
Addresses
Manually
1
Go
to
Control
Panels
>
Network
Connections.
1
to Control
Panels
> Network
Connections.
To Go
manually
set the
IP address
in Windows:
Ajustando
Endereos IP da VENUE e do Cliente Manualmente
Manually
Manually
Network
Connections
window, do one of the follow12VInthe
Control
Panels
> Network Connections.
Setting
VENUE
and
ClientIPIPaddresses
Addresses
Set VENUE
and client
computer
manually if you
1 In
Go
tothe
Control
Panels
> Network
Connections.
2 In
Network
Connections
window,
of the
follow2
the
Network
Connections
window,
do do
oneone
of the
following:
Manually
Set
VENUE
and
computer
IP
addresses
manually
ifvoc
you
Set
VENUE
and
client
computer
manually
ifse
you
are
connecting
aclient
computer
directly
to your
VENUE
system,
or
Ajustes
os
endereos
IP
da
VENUE
e IP
doaddresses
Cliente
manualmente
2ing:
Na
janela
Network
Connections,
siga
um
dos
seguintes
ing:
IfNetwork
you are connecting
the
computer
directly
to followyour
connecting
a computer
directly
to your
VENUE
system,
or 2 In the
areare
connecting
directly
your
VENUE
orou
est
conectando
computador
diretamente
ao
sistema
VENUE,
you
are usingaoacomputer
wireless
router
or to
WAP
device
thatsystem,
does
not
inConnections
window,
do one
of the
Set VENUE and client computer IP addresses manually if you
procedimentos:
you
If you
connecting
computer
directly
to your
If
areare
connecting
thethe
computer
directly
your
VENUE
system,
right-click
the Local
Area to
Connection
seyou
voc
usando
um roteador
ou
dispositivo
WAP
que
you
are
using
aserver
wireless
router
or WAP
device
that
does
not
in- ing:
areest
using
a wireless
router
orwireless
WAP
device
that
does
not
include
a DHCP
function.
VENUE
Se voc est conectando o computadore diretamente ao seu
are connecting a computer directly to your VENUE system, or
VENUE
system,
right-click
Local
Area
Connection
system,
right-click
thethe
Local
Area
Connection
no
inclui
uma
funo
DHCP
server.
icon and
choose
Properties.
clude
a DHCP
server
function.
clude
a DHCP
server
function.
clique
com
o boto direito
notocone
Ifsistema
you areVENUE,
connecting
the
computer
directly
yourLocal Area
you are using a wireless router or WAP device that does not inicon
and
choose
Properties.
icon
and choose
Properties.
e escolha
Propriedades.
Setting
a server
VENUE
System IP Address Manually
Connection
or system,
VENUE
right-click
the Local Area Connection
clude
a
DHCP
function.
Ajustando um endereo IP para o sistema VENUE
ou
Setting
a VENUE
System
Address
Manually
Setting
a VENUE
System
IP IP
Address
Manually
or
If you
icon
and are
choose
Properties.
or
connecting
using a wireless router or WAP,
Manualmente

Se
voc
estconnecting
usando umusing
roteador
wireless
ou WAP,
clique com
To manually set the IP address for your VENUE system:
If
you
are
a wireless
router
WAP,
If
you
are
connecting
using
a wireless
router
or or
WAP,
right-click
the
Wireless
Network
Connection
icon
and
Setting a VENUE System IP Address Manually
oroboto direito no cone Wireless
Network Connection e escolha
To
manually
set
the
IP
address
for
your
VENUE
system:
To
manually
set
the
IP
address
for
your
VENUE
system:
right-click
the
Wireless
Network
Connection
icon
and
right-click
the
Wireless
Network
Connection
icon
and
Para1 ajustar
manualmente
um
endereo
IP
para
seu
sistema
choose
Properties.
In the VENUE software, go to the Options page and click the
IfPropriedades.
you are connecting using a wireless router or WAP,
VENUE:
choose
Properties.
choose
Properties.
1
In
the
VENUE
software,
go
to
the
Options
page
and
click
the
1
In
the
VENUE
software,
go
to
the
Options
page
and
click
the
To Interaction
manually settab.
the IP address for your VENUE system:
right-click
the Wireless
Network
Connection
icon and
3 In
the Connection
Properties
window,
double-click
Internet
Interaction
Interaction
tab.tab.
3
Na
janela
Connection
Properties,
clique
duas
vezes
em
Internet
choose
Properties.
3
In
the
Connection
Properties
window,
double-click
Internet
the Connection
Protocol
(TCP/IP). Properties window, double-click Internet
the
VENUE
software,
go to
the
Options
page
and
clickna
the
1 1NoIn
VENUE
software,
v
pgina
Options
e clique
aba 3 In
2software
Under
Ethernet
Control,
click
Network
Settings.
Under
Ethernet
Control,
click Network
Settings.
2 2Em
Ethernet
Control,
clique Network
Settings.
Protocol (TCP/IP).
Protocol
(TCP/IP).
Protocol
(TCP/IP).
Protocol (TCP/IP).
Ethernet Control section of the Interaction page

Ethernet
Control
section
of the
Interaction
page
Ethernet
Control
section
of the
Interaction
page
Ethernet Control section of the Interaction page
Seo Ethernet Control na pgina Interaction
LocaldeArea
Connection
window
Janela
Propriedades
LocalProperties
Area Connection
Local
Area
Connection
Properties
window
Local
Area
Connection
Properties
window
VENUE
Profile
Guide
254254VENUE
Profile
Guide
254
Guia VENUE Profile
Local Area Connection Properties window
44Na
Internet
Protocol
Properties,
selecione
Useselect
the
following
Injanela
Protocol
Properties
window,
select
Use
the the
4the
In Internet
the
Internet
Protocol
Properties
window,
Use
IPfollowing
AddressIP
e digite
o
seguinte:
Address and enter the following:
following IP Address and enter the following:
IPaddress:
10.0.0.2
IP address:
10.0.0.2
IPaddress:
10.0.0.2
Subnet
Mask:
255.255.255.0
Subnet
255.255.255.0
Mask:
Subnet
Mask:
255.255.255.0
Default
Gateway:
(none
required)
Default
Gateway:
(none
required)
Default Gateway:
(none
required)
Network
Preferences
window
Network
Preferences
window
5 Janela
Click
Apply.
Network
Preferences
5 Click
Apply.
Stage Rack Features

can
Janela
de Propriedades
Internet Protocol supporting up to 96 total inputs.
Internet
Protocol
Properties
window
Internet
Protocol
Properties
window
Click
OK
to
theaInternet
Protocol
properties
window.
5 Click
OKclose
to
close
the
Internet
Protocol
properties
window.
Audio
I/O
55Clique
OK
para
fechar
janela
Internet
Protocol
Properties.
48
controllable
mic
preamps
and
6 Click
OKinputs
to
theremotely
Network
Connection
Properties
win6 Click
OKclose
towith
close
the Network
Connection
Properties
winindividually selectable phantom power.
dow.dow.
6 Clique OK para fechar a janela Network Connection Properties.
8dos
analog
output
up to 48
analog or
77Siga
seguintes
procedimentos
dependendo
configurao
Do7um
one
the
depending
on the
of of
Do of
one
offollowing
the following
depending
on configuration
the da
configuration
digital
outputs
per
Stage
Rack.
de
sua
rede:
your
network:
your
network:
If you
are using
a wireless
network,
go togo
Establishing
a
If you
using
a wireless
network,
toEstabelecendo
Establishing
a
Synchronization
Se voc
estare
usando
redeI/O
sem
fio, v para
and uma
Control
Wireless
Connection
on
page
257.
Wireless
Connection
on
page
257.
uma Conexo Wireless na pgina 257.
ou
or applicable)
or
SeIf you
voc est usando uma rede com fio, v Habilitando
a wired
network,
go togo
Enabling
Remote
If are
youusing
are using
a wired
network,
to Enabling
Remote
Operao Remota na pgina 258.
Operation
on page
258.258.
Operation
on page
Para ajustar manualmente o endereo IP no Mac:

To System
manually
set Components
the
on a on
Mac:
To manually
set IP
theaddress
IP address
a Mac:
11Inicie
System
Preferences
> Network.
Launch
System
Preferences
> Network.
1 Launch
System
Preferences
> Network.
Included Components
22Siga
seguintes
procedimentos:
Do2 um
one
of the
Dodos
one
of following:
the following:

If you
are connecting
the computer
directly
to your
If you
are connecting
the computer
directly
to your
Se voc
estProfile
conectadno
o computador diretamente ao sistema
VENUE
console
VENUE
system,
choose
Ethernet
fromfrom
the network
con-conVENUE
system,
choose
Ethernet
the network
VENUE, escolha Ethernet na lista de servios de conexo de
Two
(2)services
IECservices
power
cables
nections
list. list.
nections
rede.
Monitor
ou
or
or
estconnecting
conectando
usando
um
roteador
wireless
WAP,
voc
Trackball
mount
(trackball
Se
If
are
using
a not
wireless
router
or WAP,
you
If you
are
connecting
using
a included)
wireless
router
or ou
WAP,
escolha
Airport
na
lista
de
servios
de
conexo
de
rede.
VENUE
Mouse
Pad
choose
Airport
from
the network
connections
services
choose
Airport
from
the network
connections
services
list.
list. Profile Guide
VENUE
3 Escolha Manually no menu Configure.
Two
(2)Manually
console
lights
3 Choose
Manually
fromfrom
the Configure
menu.
3 Choose
the Configure
menu.
4 Digite
seguinte: Dust Cover
oProtective
4 Enter
the following:
4 Enter
the following:
Rack(s) (see next)
IPaddress:
10.0.0.2
IPaddress:
10.0.0.2
IP address:
10.0.0.2
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

Subnet
Mask:
255.255.255.0
Subnet
Mask:
255.255.255.0
Racks,
Software
Router:
(none
required)CDs, iLoks, and Cables
Router:
(none
required)
Router:
(none
required)
6 5
Do
the
depending
on the
of of
6 one
Do of
one
of following
the following
depending
onconfiguration
the configuration
Clique
Apply.
Additional
your
network:
your
network:Required
Components
6The
Siga
um
dos using
seguintes
procedimentos
dependendo
da configurao
If you
are
a wireless
network,
go togo
Establishing
a
If you
are
using
a wireless
network,
toseparately:
Establishing
a
following
components
must
be purchased
de Wireless
sua rede:
Connection
on page
257.257.
Wireless
Connection
on page
Display
(15-inch
or greater
flat-panel
VGA
display
Video
Se voc
est usando
uma
rede sem
fio, v para
Estabelecendo
or
or Conexo Wireless
recommended;
1024x768na
minimum
uma
pgina 257.
If you
are
a wired
network,
go togo
Enabling
Remote
youusing
are using
a wired
network,
to Enabling
Remote
ou
If
DVI
supported.
USB
Se Operation
voc est
uma258.
conexo com fio, v para Habilitando
Operation
onusando
page
258.
on page
keyboard and trackball/mouse (Windows compatible)
Operao Remota na pgina 258.
Digital
Snake
Cable
(VENUE
Profile
Systems
Setting
VENUE
and
IP
Addresses
Setting
VENUE
and
Client
IP Addresses
Ajustando
Endereo
IPClient
da
VENUE
e Only)
do Cliente
Automaticamente
Automatically
Automatically
IP

You
canpode
configure
youryour
VENUE
System
and client
computer
to
You
can configure
System
and
client
computer
to e
Voc
configurar
seu VENUE
sistema
e o vendor.
computador
client
from Avid
or assembled
by yourVENUE
preferred
setpara
their
IP addresses
automatically
using
DHCP.
Set
the
IP
auset ajustar
their
IPsues
addresses
automatically
using
DHCP.
Set
the
IP
auendereos IP automaticamente utilizando DHCP.
tomatically
you
are using
a wireless
that
includes
tomatically
if you
are using
a wireless
router
that
includes
a
Ajuste
o IPif automaticamente
se
vocrouter
estiver
usando
um aroteador
wireless
que
inclui
funes DHCP server.
DHCP
server
function.
DHCP
server
function.
Optional
Components
Ajustando Endereo IP da VENUE Automaticamente

Setting
the the
VENUE
IP Address
Automatically
Setting
VENUE
IP Address
Automatically
Para ajustar
o endereo
do sistema
VENUE
USB flash
disk (orIPother
portable
USBautomaticamente:
storage device for
To set
of your
VENUE
system
automatically:
Tothe
set IP
theaddress
IP address
of your
VENUE
system
automatically:
1
No
software
VENUE,
v
pgina
Options
e clique
na the
aba
1 In 1the
software,
go togo
the
pagepage
and
click
the
InVENUE
the VENUE
software,
toOptions
the Options
and click
Interaction.
Interaction
tab. tab.
Interaction
2 2
Under
Ethernet
click
Network
Settings.
2 Under
Ethernet
Control,
click
Network
Settings.
Em
Ethernet
Control,
clique
Network
Settings.
Dynamic
orControl,
condenser
microphone
and
XLR mic cable
(for Talkback)
Ethernet
Control
section
theofInteraction
page page
Ethernet
Control
section
the Interaction
Seo
Ethernet
Control
naof
pgina
Interaction

System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options

16 analog
Captulo
30: ECx
Chapter
30: ECx
255 255
Chapter
30: ECx
255
3 Select Obtain Address Automatically.
33Selecione
Obtain
Address
Automatically.
Select Obtain
Address
Automatically.
3 Select Obtain Address Automatically.
3 In the Connection Properties window, double-click Internet

Na
Connection Properties, clique duas vezes em Internet
3 3
In
thejanela
Connection
Protocol
3 Protocol
In the Connection
Protocol (TCP/IP).
Protocol (TCP/IP).
Configuring Ethernet Control in VENUE
Configuring
Ethernet
Control
in VENUE
Configuring
Ethernet
Control
in VENUE
Configuring
4 ClickEthernet
Apply. Control in VENUE
ClickApply.
Apply.
444Clique
Click Apply.
5 Wait until the VENUE System is assigned an IP address. This

5 Wait
the
is assigned
anDHCP
IP address.
This
mayuntil
take
timeVENUE
to System
two
minutes).
server
is
55Espere
at que
o (up
sistema
VENUE
tenhaIfono
endereo
IP atribudo.
Wait until
the VENUE
System
is assigned
an IP address.
This
may
takelevar
time
(up to (at
two
minutes).
If no
server
is
found,
the VENUE
system
will
self-assign
anDHCP
IP
address.
Isso
minutos).
SeDHCP
um
no
maypode
take time tempo
(up to two dois
minutes).
If no
DHCP
serverserver
is
found,
the
VENUE
system
will
self-assign
an
IP
address.
found,
encontrado,
o
sistema
VENUE
vai
se
auto-atribuir
um
endereo
IP.
the
VENUE
will
self-assign
an IP
address.
Make
a notesystem
of the IP
address
assigned
to your
VENUE sysMake
ao
note
of the
address
assigned
your
VENUE
sys-pois
tem,
asendereo
you
willIP
need
to enter
it
the
client
software
.
Anote
atribudo
a into
seuto
VENUE,
Make
a note
of the IPIPaddress
assigned
tosistema
your VENUE
system,
as
you
will
need
to
enter
it
into
the
client
software
.
vocasprecisar
software
client.
tem,
you will dele
need no
to enter
it into
the client software.
6 Select Enable Remote Control to activate the VENUE System
Select
Enable
Remote
Control
topara
activate
the
VENUE
System
ECx host.
Your
systems
status
willativar
be displayed
as no
Waiting
666Selecione
Enable
Remote
Control
o ECx
host
sistema
Select Enable
Remote
Control
to activate
the
VENUE
System
ECx
host.
Your
systems
status
will
be
displayed
as
Waiting
for connection.
VENUE.
O
status
de
seu
sistema
ser
apresentado
como
Waiting
ECx host. Your systems status will be displayed as Waiting fo
for connection.
connection.
for 7connection.
Go to Setting a Client Computer IP Address Automatically
Connection
Properties
window
Janela
Connection
Properties
7 Go
topage
Setting
Address Automatically
on
256. a Client
Properties window
77V
Ajustando
um Computer
Endereo IPIP
o Computador
Cliente Connection
Gopara
to Setting
a Client
Computer
IPPara
Address
Automatically
Connection
Properties
4 In the
Internetwindow
Protocol Properties window, select Obtain
on page 256.
4 Na
janela
Internet
Protocol
Properties,
Obtain an
Automaticamente
na pgina 256.
on page 256.
4 In
Internet
Protocol
Properties
window,selecione
select Obtain
anthe
Address
Automatically.
4 Address
In the Internet
Protocol Properties window, select Obtain
Automatically.
Setting a Client Computer IP Address
an Address Automatically.
Ajustando
Endereo
IP Para
o Computador Cliente an Address Automatically.
Setting
a um
Client
Computer
IP Address
Automatically
Setting a Client Computer IP Address

Automaticamente
Automatically
Automatically
After setting the IP address for your VENUE system using
After
setting
the
IP
address
forIPsame
your
VENUE
using
Depois
de ajustar
o endereo
parafor
o sistema
VENUE
utilizando
DHCP,
you
need
to do the
your system
client
computer.
After setting the IP address for your VENUE system using
DHCP,
voc
fazer
o mesmo
parayour
o computador
cliente.
DHCP,
youprecisa
need to
do the
same for
client computer.
DHCP, you need to do the same for your client computer.
To automatically set the IP address in Windows:
Para
automaticamente
ajustar
o endereo
IP no Windows:
To automatically
set the
IP address
in Windows:
1 Go to Control
Network
Connections.
To automatically
set Panel
the IP >address
in Windows:
to Control
Panel
> Network
Connections.
11VGo
Control
Panel
> Network
Connections.
1 Go
to Control the
Panel
> Network
Connections.
2 Right-click
Wireless
Network
Connection icon and
2 Right-click
the Wireless Network Connection icon and
choose
Properties.
22Clique
com o the
boto
direito Network
no cone Connection
Wireless Network
Right-click
Wireless
icon Connection
and
echoose
escolhaProperties.
Properties.
choose
Properties.
Internet
Protocol
(TCP/IP)
Properties
window
Internet
Protocol
(TCP/IP)
Propriedades
window
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window
Internet
Protocol
(TCP/IP)
Properties
window
5 Click
OK to
close the
Internet
Protocol properties window.
5 Clique OK para fechar a janela Internet Protocol Properties.
5 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol properties window.

5 Click
OK OK
to close
thethe
Internet
Protocol
properties
window.
6 Click
to close
Network
Connection
Properties
win-
Clique
a janelaConnection
Network Connection
Properties.
6 6Click
OKOK
to para
closefechar
the Network
Properties
window.
6 Click OK to close the Network Connection Properties win-
dow.
dow.
to Enabling
Remote
Operation
258.
77VGo
para
Habilitando
Operao
Remotaon
na page
pgina
258.
7 Go to Enabling Remote Operation on page 258.
7 Go to Enabling Remote Operation on page 258.

256
256VENUE
GuiaProfile
VENUEGuide
Profile
To automatically set the IP address on a Mac:
ParaTo
automaticamente
ajustar
endereo
no Mac:
automatically set
the IPum
address
on aIPMac:
Launch System
Preferences
> Network.
To 1automatically
set the
IP address
on a Mac:
1 Launch
Preferences
> Network.
1 Inicie
SystemSystem
Preferences
> Network.
2 Choose
Airport
from the >
network
connections services list.
1 Launch
System
Preferences
Network.
2 Choose Airport from the network connections services list.
2 2Escolha
Airport
na from
lista de
servios
deconnections
conexo
rede.
3 Click
the Advanced
button,
then
click thedeTCP/IP
tab.
Choose
Airport
the
network
services
list.
3 Click the Advanced button, then click the TCP/IP tab.
4 Choose
Using
DHCP
from
the
Configure
IPv4 menu.
Click
the
Advanced
button,
then
click
tab.
3 3Clique
no
boto
Advanced,
ento
clique
nathe
abaTCP/IP
TCP/IP.
4 Choose Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4 menu.
Choose
Using
DHCP
from the
Configure
4 4Escolha
Using
DHCP
no menu
Configure
IPv4.IPv4 menu.
3 In the Connection Properties window, click the Wireless
33 In
Nathe
janela
Connection
Properties,
clique
aba Wireless
Connection
Properties
window,
click na
the Wireless
Networks
tab.
3 Networks.
In
the
Connection
Properties
window,
click
the
Wireless
Networks tab.
Networks tab.
Stage Rack Features
Airport I/O
Network Advanced window
Audio
Airport Network Advanced window
Janela
Network
Advanced window
5 Airport
Click
OK. Advanced
Airport
Network
5 Click OK.
individually
selectable
phantom power.
6 GoOK.
to Enabling
Remote Operation
on page 258.
Click
OK.
5 5Clique
analog
output
channels;
expandable
up to258.
48 analog or
6
Go8to
Enabling
Remote
Operation
on page
6 Go todigital
Enabling
Remote
Operation
outputs
per Stage
Rack. on page 258.
6 V para Habilitando Operao Remota na pgina 258.
Establishing
Wireless
Synchronization
and a
Control
I/O
Connection
Establishing a Wireless Connection
Establishing
a
Connection
Snake
connectors
to you
enable
and
redundantfrom
(if
Once
IP addresses
areWireless
set,
canprimary
establish
a connection
Estabelecendo
uma
Conexo
Wireless
Once
IP addresses
aretoset,
you
establish
a connection
from
applicable)
connection
tocan
a VENUE
FOH
Rack.
the client
computer
the
wireless
network.
Once
IP
addresses
are set,
you
can establish
a connection from
the
client
computer
to
the
wireless
network.
Uma vez que o endereo IP est ajustado, voc pode estabelecer
the conexo
client computer
to the wireless
network.
uma
entre
o computador
cliente
a rede wireless.
To establish
a wireless
connection
in eWindows:
To establish a wireless connection in Windows:
1establish
Go to Control
Panel
> Network
Connections.
Components
ToSystem
a wireless
connection
in no
Windows:
Para
estabelecer
uma
conexo
wireless
Windows:
1 Go to Control Panel > Network Connections.
2 Right-click
Wireless
Network
Connection icon and
1 Go
to Controlthe
Panel
> Network
Connections.
1 V2 Right-click
Control Panel
Network Network
Connections.
the>Wireless
Connection icon and
Included
Components
choose Properties.
2 Right-click
the Wireless Network Connection icon and
choose Properties.
2 choose
Clique
com
o boto
no include
cone Wireless
Network Connection
All VENUE
Profiledireito
systems
the following:
Properties.
e escolha Properties.

VENUE Mouse Pad
VENUE Profile Guide
Rack(s) (see next)

a wireless
connection
in Windows
Configuring
Video Display
(15-inch
or greater
VGA and
4 Undera Preferred
Networks,
Add, and type the SSID of
Configuring
wireless connection
in click
Windows
DVI
supported.
4 Under
Preferred
Networks,
clickconnected
Add, and type
the VENUE
SSID of
the
router
or WAPclique
device
to
your
Emwireless
Preferred
Networks,
Add,
eand
digite
o the
SSID
do roteador
4 4Under
Preferred
Networks,
click
Add,
type
SSID
of
the
wireless
router
or
WAP
device
connected
to
your
VENUE
USB
keyboard
and
trackball/mouse
(Windows
compatible)
system.
wireless
ou dispositivo WAP conextado ao sistema VENUE .
thesystem.
wireless router or WAP device connected to your VENUE
5 Choose the Network Authentication and Data Encryption
system.
Snake
(VENUE Profile
Systems
Only)
5Digital
Escolha
asCable
configuraes
Network
Authentication
e Data
5 Choose
Network
Authentication
and
Data
Encryption
settings
to the
match
the corresponding
router
or
WAP
configurapara
equiparar
com
os
ajustes
de
configurao
5 Encryption
Choose
the
Network
Authentication
and
Data
Encryption
settings
Thesettings.
connection
between
FOH Rackrouter
and Stage
Rackconfigurarequires do
to match the
corresponding
or WAP
tion
roteador
ou
WAP.the corresponding router or WAP configurasettings
to
match
a Digital
tion
settings.
tion from
settings.
Configuring
a wireless
connection
in Windows
Configurando
uma
conexo
wireless nominimum
Windows
recommended;
1024x768
resolution).
Optional Components
(for Talkback)
Entering
an SSID
SSID
choosing
settings
in Windows
Digitando
um
e and
escolhando
ajustes
no Windows
25-pin
D-Sub
cables
(for
connecting
to GPI
devices)
Entering an SSID and choosing settings in Windows

6 Click
should
appear in the list of availEntering
an OK.
SSIDThe
and VENUE
choosingSSID
settings
in Windows
6 Clique OK. O SSID da VENUE deve aparecer na lista de redes
6
Click
OK. The
VENUE SSID should appear in the list of available
wireless
networks.
wireless
6 Click
OK.disponveis.
Thenetworks.
VENUE SSID should appear in the list of available wireless
7 wireless
Go to Enabling
Remote Operation on page 258.
able
networks.
77 V
Habilitando
Operao
Remotaon
napage
pgina
258.
Gopara
to Enabling
Remote
Operation
258.
following
options
canOperation
be added toon
VENUE
Profile systems.
7 The
Go to
Enabling
Remote
page 258.
System Restore CD
Mix Rack Options

I/O Options
Chapter 30: ECx 257

Chapter 30: ECx 257
Chapter
1630:
analog
Captulo
30:ECx
ECx 257
257
Para
estabelecer
uma
conexo
wireless
Mac:
To To
establish
establish
a wireless
a wireless
connection
connection
onno
on
Mac:
Mac:
1 Go
to System
to System
Preferences
Preferences
> Network.
> Network.
1 1VGo
System
Preferences
> Network.
2 Choose
2 Choose
Airport
Airport
from
from
thethe
network
network
connections
connections
services
services
list.list.
2 Escolha Airport na lista de servios de conexo de rede. Voc

precisa
terthe
obtido
um endereo
IPpop-up
vlido
para
seuchoose
sistema
VENUE.
3 From
3 From
the
Network
Network
Name
Name
pop-up
menu,
menu,
choose
your
your
netnetwork.
work.
3 No menu pop-up Network Name, escolha sua rede.
Enabling
Enabling
Remote
Remote
Operation
Operation
Habilitando
Operao
Remota
In order
In order
to enable
to enable
remote
remote
operation
operation
of your
of your
VENUE
VENUE
system,
system,
cA fim de possibilitar a operao remota de seu sistema VENUE,
youyou
need
need
to have
to have
obtained
obtained
valid
valid
IP addresses
IP addresses
forfor
your
your
VENUE
VENUE
voc deve obter endereos IP vlidos do seu sistema VENUE e do
system
system
and
and
your
your
client
client
computer.
computer.
If
you
If
you
are
are
using
using
a
wireless
a
wireless
computador cliente. Se voc est usando uma rede sem fio, voc
network,
network,
you
you
also
also
need
need
to have
to have
established
established
a network
a network
between
between
tambm
precisa
estabelecer
uma
rede entre
o
roteador
wireless ou
the
wireless
wireless
router
router
or
WAP
orest
WAP
device
device
that
that
is
issistema
connected
to your
to your
othe
dispositivo
WAP
que
conectado
aoconnected
VENUE
e ao seu
computador
cliente.
VENUE
VENUE
system
system
andand
your
your
client
client
computer.
computer.
habilitar
operao
remota
um
Computador
Cliente
ToPara
To
enable
enable
remote
remote
operation
operation
with
with
a Windows
acom
Windows
client
client
computer:
computer:
Windows:
1 Double-click
1 Double-click
thethe
ECx
ECx
Ethernet
Ethernet
Control
Control
(UltraVNC
(UltraVNC
Viewer)
icon
on on
your
your
desktop
(orECx
(or
go go
toEthernet
Start
to Start
Menu
Menu
> Pro> Pro1Viewer)
Cliqueicon
duas
vezes
nodesktop
cone
Control
(UltraVNC
Viewer)
desktop
(ou
v
Start Menu
> Programs
>the
UltraVNC
grams
grams
> UltraVNC
>no
UltraVNC
> Run
> Run
UltraVNC
UltraVNC
Viewer)
Viewer)
to launch
to launch
the
Ul-Ul- >
Run
UltraVNC
Viewer)
para iniciar o aplicativo UltraVNC Viewer.
traVNC
traVNC
Viewer
Viewer
application.
application.
2 2Enter
2Digite
Enter
the
IP address
IP address
of
the
ECx
ECx
host
host
(your
(your
VENUE
VENUE
system).
system).
o the
endereo
IPof
dothe
ECx
host
(seu
sistema
VENUE).
3 Click
3 Click
Connect.
Connect.
3 Clique Connect.
4 Enter
4 Enter
thethe
password
password
when
when
prompted
prompted
(the
(the
default
default
VENUE
VENUE
4password
Digite a
quandoand
questionado
(a senha padro do sistema
password
is senha
password)
is password)
and
click
click
Connect.
Connect.
VENUE password) e clique Connect.
Configuring
Configuring
a wireless
a wireless
connection
connection
on the
on the
MacMac
Configurando
uma
conxeo
wireless
no Mac
Se sua rede no aparece no menu pop-up Network Name,

If your
If your
network
network
does
does
notnot
appear
appear
in the
in the
Network
Network
Name
Name
escolha Join Other Network, digite o nome de sua rede e
pop-up
pop-up
menu,
menu,
choose
choose
Join
Join
Other
Other
Network,
Network,
typetype
in the
in the
clique Join. Para atribuir a seu roteador wireless ou dispositivo
name
name
of
your
of
your
network,
network,
and
and
click
click
Join.
Join.
To
To
assign
assign
your
your
wirewireWAP um nome, veja a documentao do dispositivo.
lessless
router
router
or WAP
or WAP
device
device
a network
a network
name,
name,
seesee
your
your
devices
devices
documentation.
documentation.
4 V para
Habilitando Operao Remota na pgina 258.
4 Go
4 Go
to Enabling
to Enabling
Remote
Remote
Operation
Operation
on on
page
page
258.
258.
UltraVNC
UltraVNC
Viewer
Viewer
window
window
Janela UltraVNC Viewer
TheThe
client
client
launches
launches
andand
displays
displays
thethe
VENUE
VENUE
system
system
screen.
screen.
OYou
cliente
inicia
e and
apresenta
aall
tela
do
sistema
VENUE.
Voc
pode
You
cancan
then
then
view
view
and
operate
operate
all
on-screen
on-screen
controls
controls
from
from
thethe
ento
visualizar
e
operar
todos
os
controles
na
tela
a
partir
do
client
client
computer.
computer.
computador cliente.
258258VENUE
VENUE
Profile
Profile
Guide
Guide
258
Guia VENUE Profile
Para
habilitar
operao
remota
To enable
remote
operation
with acom
Mac um
clientComputador
computer: Cliente
Mac:
To enable remote operation with a Mac client computer:
1 Double-click the Chicken of the VNC icon to launch the
1Clique
Double-click
the no
Chicken
of the VNC
icon
to launch
the o
1 application.
duas vezes
cone Chicken
of the
VNC
para iniciar
application.
aplicativo.
2 Enter the IP address of the ECx host (your VENUE system).
Enter
IP address
of
the
ECx
host
(your VENUE
system).
2 23Digite
o the
endereo
IP do(VENUEs
ECx
host
(seu
sistema
VENUE).
Enter
the
password
default
password
is pass3 Enterand
the click
password
(VENUEs default password is password)
Connect.
3 word)
Digite aand
senha
quando
questionado (a senha padro do sistema
click
Connect.
VENUE password) e clique Connect.
Stage Rack Features

Chicken of the VNC window
Stage of
RacksVNC
are used with an FOH Rack, and provide all stage
Chicken
Janela
Chickenthe
of the VNCwindow
The
client
launches
andProfile
displays
the VENUE
screen.
audio
I/O
for VENUE
systems.
Up tosystem
two Stage
Racks
The
client
launches
and
displays
the
VENUE
system
screen.
You
can
then
view
and
operate
all
on-screen
controls
from
the
can
be
used
simultaneously,
supporting
up
to
96
total
inputs.
O cliente inicia e apresenta a tela do sistema VENUE. Voc pode
You can
then view and operate all on-screen controls from the
client
computer.
ento visualizar e operar todos os controles na tela a partir do
client
computer.
Audio
I/O
computador
cliente.
individually selectable
Disconnecting
ECx phantom power.
Desconectando
ECxECx expandable up to 48 analog or
Disconnecting
To disconnect
digital ECx:
Para
desconectar ECx:
To disconnect ECx:
1 Close the ECx client application by doing one of the follow-
Synchronization
andseguindo
Control I/O
1Feche
Close
ECx client
application
doing
one of the follow1 ing:
o the
aplicativo
ECx
umby
dos
procedimentos:
ing:
connectors
to enable
andofredundant
In Snake
Windows,
move the
pointerprimary
to the top
the screen(if
mova
o the
ponteiro
topo
da
tela
at que a
applicable)
connection
to apara
VENUE
FOH
Nountil
InWindows,
Windows,
move
pointer
to othe
top
ofRack.
the
the control
strip
appears,
and
click
the
closescreen
box.
rgua de controle aparea e clique na caixa close.
until the control strip appears, and click the close box.
ouor
or
Mac,
No
Mac,
pressione
Command+Qto
para
sair.
On
press Command+Q
quit.
System
Components
On Mac, press
Command+Q to quit.
the VENUE
system,
deselect
Enable
the Ethernet
2 2NoOn
sistema
VENUE,
desmarque
Enable
na in
seo
Ethernet ConControl
On
theOptions
VENUE
deselect
Enable page.
in the Ethernet Consection
of the
Options
> Interaction
da2trol
pgina
>system,
Interaction.
Included
Components
trol
section of the
Options > Interaction page.

DVI supported.

Optional Components
Alterando
a Senha
Ethernet Control
VENUE
Profile
console
Changing
the Ethernet
Control

(for Talkback)
Voc pode alterar a senha que o usurio precisa pra entrar com
Password
Monitor
mountofor
VGA screen
(screen
notdeincluded)
o You
objetivo
de controlar
sistema
a partir
um
cliente
can change
the password
thatVENUE
users need
to enter
in order
remoto.
Trackball
mount
(trackball
not
included)
You
can change
the password
users
need toclient.
enter in order
to
control
your VENUE
systemthat
from
a remote
Changing
thepower
Ethernet
Control
Two (2) IEC
cables
Password
VENUE
to control
yourMouse
VENUEPad
system from a remote client.
Pordefault,
padro,the
a senha
doEthernet
VENUE Ethernet
password
VENUE
Control Control
password
is
By
VENUE
Profile
Guide
(todas
minsculas).
By
default,
the
VENUE
Ethernet
Control
password
is
password (all lowercase).
password (all lowercase).
Para
alterar
athe
senha
Ethernet
Control:
Protective
Dust Cover
To change
Ethernet
Control password:
To change
the Ethernet
Control password:
Rack(s)
(see next)
Inseo
the Ethernet
of the
Options
> Interaction
1 1Na
EthernetControl
Control section
da pgina
Options
> Interaction,
clique
1
Invezes
the
Ethernet
Control
sectionfield.
of the Options > Interaction
duas
no campo
Password.
page,
double-click
the
Password
Racks,
Software
CDs, iLoks,
page,
double-click
the Password
field.and Cables
Enter
a new
password
press Enter.
2 2Digite
uma
nova
senha e and
pressione
Enter.
Rack
or FOHand
Rack
includes:
2 Each
EnterMix
a new
password
press
Enter.
aanote
of senha
theCD
newe password
andIPyour
systems
IP adMake
System
Restore
Anote
nova
o endereo
de seu
sistema,
para
Make
aasnote
theneed
newto
password
and
yourclient
systems
IP address,
you of
will
enter it no
into
the
software
.
quando
voc
precisar
digit-los
software
client.
dress, as you will need to enter it into the client software.


Mix Rack Options
I/O Options

1630:
analog
Captulo
30:ECx
ECx 259
259
Chapter
Chapter 30: ECx 259

Manual Venue Profile Completo Portugues PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Manual Venue Profile Completo Portugues PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

VENUE Profile

e software VENUE verso 2.9

VENUE Profile Guide

9322-62809-00 REV A 08/10

Na Avid, sempre estamos buscando o aperfeioamento da documentao de nossos

Parte I: Viso Geral e Instalao

Stage Rack Features

Additional Required Components

Video Display (15-inch or greater flat-panel VGA display

Recursos e Sistema VENUE Profile

The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires

Snake connectors to enable primary and redundant (if

The following components are optional, and must be

VENUE Mouse Pad

BNC cables (for connecting Word clock between the

VENUE Profile Guide

25-pin D-Sub cables (for connecting to GPI devices)

Two (2) console lights

Protective Dust Cover

Rack(s) (see next)

de Solo, Mute e seleo.

GPI ports (DB-25) providing 8 GPI inputs and 8 GPI out-

Captulo 1: Introduo VENUE Profile 3

48 inputs with mic preamps. Each fully recallable input

entrada oferece phantom power e controle de ganho.

entradas e sadas da posio de mixagem para o sistema VENUE

and output of line-level material from the mix position.

8 pares de entradas e sadas analgicas para inserts ou

Analog and digital (AES or S/PDIF) 2-Track inputs and

S/PDIF). mic input

Entrada para microfone de comunicao com controle de

Entradas e sadas de sincronizao e controle

Porta USB 2.0 para dispositivos de armazenamento, iLoks e

MIDI In and Out ports, providing 16 channels of MIDI

Entrada para microfone de comunicao com controle de

Word clock I/O for digital clock synchronization.

4 VENUE Profile Guide

4 Guia VENUE Profile

Word clock I/O for digital clock synchronization.

Conectores multicabo para permitir conexo principal e

duas placas Mix Engine opcionais perfazendo o total de cinco.

indicao por LED.

Stage Rack Features

Recursos Stage Rack

Dois Stage Racks podem ser usados simultaneamente, suportando

applicable) connection to a VENUE FOH Rack.

Conectores de cabo para conexo principal e redundante (se

VENUE Profile console

Racks, Software CDs, iLoks, and Cables

Cada Mix Rack ou FOH Rack inclui:

One FOH Link cable for connection to a VENUE console

Cada Stage Rack inclui:

Two (2) IEC power cables

Additional Required Components

The following components must be purchased separately:

plasma ou LED de 15 polegadas ou maiores com resoluo

Teclado e mouse/trackball USB compatveis com Windows.

The connection between FOH Rack and Stage Rack requires

armazenamento de dados Show. recomendvel o uso de

Microfone dinmico ou condensador e cabo de microfone XLR

VENUE Profile Expansion Options

Opcionais de Expanso VENUE Profile

The following options can be added to VENUE Profile systems.